6X-, ¡,. HÚ¡ ¡ Í¿1'~> m^evus Vol. 26 (1) REVISTA DE LA SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MALACOLOGÍA Oviedo, junio 2008 Iberas Revista de la Sociedad Española de Malacología Comité de Redacción (Board of Editors) Editor di Publicaciones (Editor-in-Chief) Serge Gofas Universidad de Málaga, España Director de Redacción (Exkutive Editor ) Gonzalo Rodríguez Casero Apdo. 1 56, Mieres del Camino, Asturias, España Editora Ejecutiva (Managimg Editor) Eugenia Mg Martínez Cueto-Felgueroso Apdo. 1 56, Mieres del Camino, Asturias, España Editores Adjuntos (Associate editors) Francisco Javier Conde de Saro Embajada de España, Japón Benjamín Gómez Moliner Universidad del País Vasco, Vitoria, España Ángel Antonio Luque del Villar Universidad Autónoma de Madrid, Madrid, España Emilio Rolán Mosquera Universidad de Vigo, Vigo, España José Templado González Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, CSIC, Madrid, España Jesús S. Troncoso Universidad de Vigo, Vigo, España Comité Editorial (Board of Reviewers) Kepa Altonaga Sustacha Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España Eduardo Angulo Pinedo Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España Rafael Araujo Armero Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid, España Thierry Backeljau Instituí Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Bruselas, Bélgica Rüdiger Bieler The Field Museum, Chicago, Estados Unidos Sigurd v. Boletzky Laboratoire Arago, Banyuls-sur-Mer, Francia José Castillejo Murillo Universidad de Santiago de Compostela, Santiago de Compostela, España Karl Edlinger Naturhistorisches Museum Wien, Viena, Austria Antonio M. de Frías Martins Universidade dos Acores, Acores, Portugal José Carlos García Gómez Universidad de Sevilla, Sevilla, España Gonzalo Giribet de Sebastián Harvard University, EE.UU. Edmund Gittenberger National Natuurhistorisch Museum, Leiden, Holanda Ángel Guerra Sierra Instituto de Investigaciones Marinas, CSIC, Vigo, España Gerhard Haszprunar Zoologische Staatssammlung München, München, Alemania Yuri 1. Kantor A.N. Severtzov Institute of Ecology and Evolution, Moscú, Rusia María Yolanda Manga González Estación Agrícola Experimental, CSIC, León, España Jordi Martinell Callico Universidad de Barcelona, Barcelona, España Ron K. O'Dor Dalhousie University, Halifax, Cañada Takashi Okutani Nihon University, Fujisawa City, Japón Marco Oliverio Universitá di Roma "La Sapienza", Roma, Italia Pablo E. Penchaszadeh Museo Argentino de Ciencias Naturales "Bernardino Rivadavia", Buenos Aires, Argentina Winston F. Ponder Australian Museum, Sydney, Australia Carlos Enrique Prieto Sierra Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España M^ de los Ángeles Ramos Sánchez Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, CSIC, Madrid, España Francisco Javier Rocha Valdés Instituto de Investigaciones Marinas, CSIC, Vigo, España Paul G. Rodhouse British Antarctic Survey, Cambridge, Reino Unido Joandoménec Ros i Aragonés Universidad de Barcelona, Barcelona, España María Carmen Salas Casanovas Universidad de Málaga, Málaga, España Gerhard Steiner Instituí für Zoologie der Universitát Wien, Viena, Austria Victoriano Urgorri Carrasco Universidad de Santiago de Compostela, Santiago de Compostela, España Anders Warén Swedish Museum of Natural History, Estocolmo, Suecia Portada de Iberus Iberus gualtieranus (Linnaeus, 1758), una especie emblemática de la península Ibérica, que da nombre a la revista. Dibujo realizado por José Luis González Rebollar “Toza”. Iberus REVISTA DE LA SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MALACOLOGÍA Vol. 26 (1) Oviedo, junio 2008 Iberus Revista de la Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberus publica trabajos que traten sobre cualquier aspecto relacionado con la Malacología. Se admiten también notas breves. Iberus edita un volumen anual que se compone de dos o más números. Instrucciones para los autores Los manuscritos deben remitirse a: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publicaciones, Departamento de Bio- logía Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, España. Los trabajos se entregarán por triplicado (original y dos copias). Se recomienda a los autores leer cuidadosamente las normas de publicación que se incluyen en cada número de la revista. SUBCRIPCIONES Iberus puede recibirse siendo socio de la Sociedad Española de Malacología, en cualquiera de sus formas, o mediante intercambio. Aquellos socios que deseen adquirir números atrasados deberán diri- girse al bibliotecario. Los no socios deberán ponerse en contacto con BACKHUYS PUBLISHERS, P.O. Box 321, 2300 AH Leiden, The Netherlands. Tel.: +31-71-31 70 208, Fax: +31-71-31 71 856, Correo Elec- trónico: backhuys@euronet.nl Los resúmenes de los artículos editados en esta revista se publican en Aquatic Science and Fisheries Abstracts (ASFA) y en el Zoological Records, BIOSIS. Contents list published in Aquatic Science and Fisheries Abstracts and Zoological Records , BIOSIS. Dep. Leg. B-43072-81 ISSN 0212-3010 Diseño y maquetación: Gonzalo Rodríguez Impresión: LOREDO, S. L. - Gijón © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberas, 26 (1); 1-4, 2008 "(w Re-discovery of living specimens of Heliacus ( Gyriscus ) jef- freysianus (Tiberi, 1867) (Gastropoda: Architectonicidae) Redescubrimiento de ejemplares vivos de Heliacus ( Gyriscus ) jef- Jreysian i/s (Ti be ri , 1867) (Gastropoda: Architectonicidae) Constantine MIFSUD* and Panayotis OVALIS** Recibido el 17-VII-2007. Aceptado 9-X-2007 ABSTRACT Heliacus (Gyriscus) ¡effreysianus (Tiberi, 1 867), a rare architectonicid species associated with Corallium rubrum (L., 1758), has been rediscovered alive off Crete, eastern Mediter- ranean. RESUMEN Heliacus ( Gyriscus ) ¡effreysianus (Tiberi, 1 867), una especia rara de architectonicido aso- ciado a Corallium rubrum (Linnaeus, 1 758), ha sido redescubierta con ejemplares vivos, frente a la isla de Creta en el Mediterráneo oriental. KEY WORDS: Mollusca, Gastropoda, Architectonicidae, Heliacus j effreysianus, Crete. PALABRAS CLAVE: Mollusca, Gastropoda, Architectonicidae, Heliacus jeffreysianus, Creta. INTRODUCTION Heliacus ( Gyriscus ) jeffreysianus was described by Tiberi (1867) from three specimens collected from a red coral substratum off Sardinia. He described the species a year after its discovery, as stated by Coen (1932). SYSTEMATICS Original description: Cochlea turbinata, elato-conica, turrita, modice umbilicata, inteo- fulvescens; apex obtusiusculus, laevigatus, vértice intorto, subperf orato, spiraliter invo- luto; anfr. 7 convexi, sutura profunda divisim transverse cingulati, cingulis confortis, alter- natim majoribus (num.fere 15 totidemque minaribus in ultima anfractu; num. 6 in penúltimo), eleganter granulosis, submonili- formibus; anfr. Ultimus rotundatus, subin- flatus, basi paululum depressus; umbilicus mediocris, pervius, superne circolariter crenu- latus; apert. Subcircularis, effusa, intus haud margaritacea, marginibus acutis, callo pari- etali junctis; margine columellari sinuato, reflexo, umbilici partem occultante. - Diam. Maj. 9, min. 8, alt 10? mili. - Operculum corneum, superne núcleo centrali depresso lamellaque erecto-crenulata multispiratum, inferné processu centrali styliformi paucispi- rato praeditum, limbo peripherico incrassa- tum- Animal hucusque incognitum. Hab. Infundís coralligenis maris Sar- diniam meridionalem ambientis. * 5, Triq ir-Rghajja, Rabat RBT 2486, Malta ** Agisilaou 37-39, Tzitzifies/Kallithea, 17674 Athens, Greece 1 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Figure 1. Heliacus (Gyriscus) jeffreysianus (Tiberi, 1867), off Crete Island on Corallium rubrum (Linnaeus, 1758) in 120m. Size: 9x8 mm. Photo P. Ovalis. Figura 1. Heliacus (Gyriscus) jeffreysianus (Tiberi, 1867), frente a la isla de Creta sobre Corallium rubrum (Linnaeus, 1758) en 120m. Size: 9x8 mm. Foto P. Ovalis. Tiberi dedicated his species to the illustrious malacologist John Gwyn Jef- freys (1809-1885). Two of the specimens are presently in the Coen collection at The Hebrew University, (Department of Zoology) Jerusalem, Israel and the other specimen is in the Jeffreys collection at the Smithsonian Institution, Washington (USA) (Melone and Taviani 1984). New material: Two live specimens of Heliacus ( Gyriscus ) jeffreysianus were recently recovered from a living colony of Corallium rubrum (Linnaeus, 1758) from off the island of Crete at a depth of 120 m. Figure 1 shows one of the two similar specimens, measuring h= 9 mm x w= 8 mm which is about the same size as those found by Tiberi. The specimens were hand picked from a coral colony by a professional scuba diver from Crete using specialized diving equipment. It is not known whether the molluscs were actually feeding on the coral polyps. However, the species seems to have a cióse connection with C. rubrum. Several species from the family Architectonici- dae are known to be parasitic on coráis (Bieler 1993). Judging from the two presently known records, the species has always been found with these red coráis, and as it is well known, it was never found in any other Mediterranean habitat notwithstanding the large amount of research carried out in the last hundred years. Since its original description, the species had never been found again until recently, when living specimens of Heliacus jeffreysianus were collected in the Adriatic Sea (Stanic and Schiapar- elli, 2007). It is very curious, but not surprising, that both this and our dis- coveries were recorded at the same time and at distantly separated places. This is certainly due to the more recent interest being undertaken both by amateur and professional researchers in the depths of the red and white coral substratum of the Mediterranean Sea. The authors are also aware of other unrecorded species living in this part of the Mediterranean, and originally described from deep water in the Atlantic. Otherwise, Heliacus jeffreysianus has only been cited in the literature in a few species lists and catalogues pertaining to the Mediterranean malacofauna and it was even thought to be extinct. More- over, no fossil specimens of the species have ever come to light (Melone and Taviani 1984). Monteros ato (1880) had com- mented about the species of Tiberi "II G. jeffreysianus, é una delle nostre piú rare gemme, la cui scoperta, come di tante altre raritá coralligene, si deve al Dr. Tiberi. Soltanto tre esemplari ne sono conosciuti sinora. Beati possidentes! lo voglio ammettere che nella mente di un naturalista il Gyriscus abbia piú valore 2 Mifsud AND OvaliS: Re-discovery of living specimens of Heliacus (Gyriscus) jeffreysianus Figure 2. Map of the Mediterranean showing the three locadons cited for H. jeffreysianus. 1: Sardi- nia Island; 2: Adriatic Sea; 3: Crete Island. Figura 2. Mapa del Mediterráneo mostrando las tres localidades citadas para H. jeffreysianus. 1: isla de Cerdeña; 2: mar Adriático; 3: isla de Creta. del piú grosso diamente della corona d'Inghilterra, ma francamente il prezzo al quale lo vende il Dr. Tiberi, per una conchiglia cosí piccola, sará riguardato tanto dai naturalisti quanto dai mercanti come assai esagerato" In transía tion: "The G. jeffreysianus is one of our most rare gems, its discovery, like many other coralligeneous rarities, is owed to Dr. Tiberi. Only thee speci- mens are known up to now. Blessed are the possessors\ I must admit that in the minds of the naturalist the Gyriscus has more valué than the largest diamond from the British crown, but frankly the price which Dr. Tiberi has asked, for such a small shell is regarded by natu- ralists and also by merchants as being exaggerated." H. jeffreysianus is one of the most beautiful species from the family Archi- tectonicidae. Its sculpture of small- beaded spiral chords and its trochoid shape make it outstanding and very dis- tinguished among the other species of the family in the Mediterranean. In fact, Tiberi (1867) created a genus for it, Gyriscus, which is nowadays a subgenus of Heliacus. A very similar Pacific species is H. ( Gyriscus ) asteleformis (Powell, 1965) from New Zealand. Coen (1932) figured the operculum from one of the two specimens in his collection (also figured in Melone and Taviani, 1984). Melone and Taviani (1984) described and figured a syntype from the Coen collection. They also figured the radula (as redrawn after Merril, 1970). Other descriptions and diagnoses of the genus and the species can also be found in Coen (1932), Melone and Taviani (1984) and in Bieler (1993). CONCLUSIONS This very long elapsed period of o ver 140 years for the re-discovery for H. jeffreysianus is in all probability due to its rarity and the very particularly restricted and difficult to sample habitat. Red coral was traditionally har- vested by fishermen utilizing a particu- lar gear called the Cross, which consists of two large beams tied together in the form of a cross and armed with dan- gling ropes and pieces of netting to enable the coral to entangle during dredging. This heavy equipment, although it seemed adequate for the purpose, besides being very destructive to the substratum, constantly shakes the entangled coráis and the molluscs seem to always fall off before the gear is brought aboard the vessel. The modern method of manual harvesting through SCUBA is more selective, and therefore much less destructive. However, it is much more risky and dangerous. Curiously, this species had not been discovered on red coral before, although 3 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 the method of manual harvesting of coral by specialized deep diving equipment (using a mixture of gases) has now been in practice for many years, especially by Spanish, Italian and Greek coral divers. More probably, it may take the keen eyes of a biologist, a naturalist or a shell col- lector to notice and pick out the small mollusc shells in situ. Therefore any spec- imens brought up by chance by the fish- ermen or the divers are probably either thrown back into the sea with the other rubbish as in the case of the fishermen or in the case of the diver, they fall off the coral unnoticed during the long decom- pression process. Moreover, the diver would be even more concerned for his "treasure" rather than a few "worthless" shells. Although Mediterranean Corallium rubrum is also found at great depths in the Mediterranean, the two existing records of H. jeffreysianus are both from shallow BIBLIOGRAPHY Bieler, R., 1993. Architectonicidae ofthe Indo-Pa- cific. Gustav Fischer Verlag, pp. 377. Stuttgart. Coen, G. S., 1932. Sul genere Gyriscus, Tiberi, 1867. Bollettino della Societd Veneziana di Scienze Naturali, 1 (1): 9-13. Melone, G. and Taviani, M., 1984. Revisione delle Architectonicidae del Mediterráneo. Atti del Simposio: Sistemática dei Prosobranchi del Mediterráneo, Bologna 24-26 Setiembre 1992, (B. Sabelli, ed.) Lavori S.I.M., 21: 149-192. Merrill, A. S., 1970. The family Architectonici- dae (Gastropoda: Mollusca) in the western and eastern Atlantic. Unpubl. Ph.D. Thesis, Univ. Delaware (Univ. Microfilms Int. Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan, U.S.A., Nr. 7144444). water living colonies. Stanic and Schia- parelli (2007) did not mention the species on which they found their specimens. Finally, this record extends the species dis- tribution to quite a larger area of the Mediterranean (Fig. 2) and it is expected that more specimens which could con- tribute to the study of the biology of the species are likely to turn up. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We would like to thank Agios Nico- laos, a specialized deep sea coral diver for donating one of the two specimens which he collected to one of the authors (P. O.) for this study. Thanks are also due to Sophie Valtat (Belgium) for pro- viding important literature and to S. Gofas (Spain) for revising and enhanc- ing the manuscript. Monterosato, T. A., 1880, Nota sopra alcune conchiglie coralligene del Mediterráneo. Bol- lettino della Societd Malacologica Italiana, 6: 243-259. Stanic, R. and Schiaparelli, S., 2007. New finding of living specimens of the rare ar- chitectonicid Heliacus (Gyriscus) jeffreysianus (Tiberi, 1867). Bollettino Malacologico, 43 (9-12): 143-146. Tiberi, N., 1867. Diagnose du nouveau genre méditerranéen Gyriscus. Journal de Conchy- liology, 15: 303. Paris. 4 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Notes on West African Perrona (Gastropoda: Clavatulidae), with the description of a new species Notas sobre Perrona (Gastropoda: Clavatulidae) en Africa Occidental, con la descripción de una nueva especie Emilio ROLÁN*, Peter RYALL** and Juan HORRO*** Recibido el 31 -VI 1-2007. Aceptado el 19-X-2007 ABSTRACT The type species of the genus Perrona is poorly known and given an erroneous type local- ity. One of the purposes of this paper is to clarify its status and correct spelling as well as illustrating the species and defining its distribution area. A new species from Angola belonging to this genus is described. The shell, protoconch, operculum and radula are illustrated, and the reasons for assigning this new species to this genus are discussed. All known species of Perrona are figured. RESUMEN La especie tipo del género Perrona es poco conocida y la localidad tipo dada es errónea. El objetivo de este trabajo es clarificar su situación, su correcto nombre, además de repre- sentar la especie y clarificar su área de distribución. Se describe una nueva especie de este género de Angola. Se muestran concha, protoconcha, opérculo y rádula de la nueva especie y se discuten las razones para asignarla a este género y no a otros con similar morfología. Se ilustran todas las especies conocidas de este género. KEY WORDS: Clavatulidae, Perrona, West Africa, Angola, new species. PALABRAS CLAVE: Clavatulidae, Perrona, África occidental, Angola, nueva especie. INTRODUCTION Classical malacological works like Bruguiére (1792), Lamarck (1801, 1816 and 1822), Kiener (1840) and Reeve (1843, 1845) and publications dealing with Turridae (s.l.) such as Récluz (1851), Petit de la Saussaye (1851), von Maltzan (1883, 1884), Sykes (1905), Dautzenberg (1912), Strebel (1912, 1914) have described numerous West African species assigned to the family Clavatulidae Gray, 1853. Their generic placements and syn- onymies are still not clear. Some modem works like Knudsen (1952, 1956), Ardovini (2004), Boyer and Hernán- dez (2004), Nolf (2006), Nolf and Ver- straeten (2006) and Boyer and Ryall (2006) have described new species or revised others, placing most of them in the genus Clavatula. Among our material from Angola, dredged over many years by Xico Fer- * Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur, E 15782 Santiago de Compostela, Spain ** St. Ulrich 16, A-9161 Maria Rain, Austria *** Montero Ríos, 30-3° 36201 Vigo, Spain 5 Iberas, 26 (1), 2008 nandes, a new small unidentified species was found. Its description is one of the subjects of this work. The generic attribution to the genus Perrona (Schu- macher, 1817) requires a review of the type species because it is a rather poorly known species. This paper therefore also comments on the type species. The identity of Perrona perron Martini and Chemnitz (1788: 278, pl. 164, figs. 1573, 1574) illustrated a shell they named "Der Perron ". Later Gmelin (1791), referring to Chemnitz's figures, described it as Murex perron and indicated "in Océano australi" as its geographic origin. This type locality is obviously wrong. These figures, or the shell they represent, can be considered to be the lectotype. Its present where- abouts, as noted below, are unknown. When Lamarck (1816) described Pleurotoma spirata he also made refer- ence to the same illustrations, but sepa- rated his species from them by stating "La figure citée de Chemnitz offre sur la base du dernier tour ; des sillons dont notre coquille est absolutement dépourvue". Schumacher (1817) also referred to the same illustrations of Chemnitz when he described the genus Perrona and nomi- nated Perrona tritonium as the type of this genus. P. tritonium is therefore a júnior objective synonym of Perrona perron (Gmelin). Again no locality was given. The species was subsequently described for a third time by Reeve (1843) who referred once more to Chemnitz's illustrations. He gave it the ñame Pleuro- toma perronii, drawing his own figure from his own shell. He likewise did not State a locality or habitat. Reeve cited Lamarck 's spirata as a different species, writing "1 have a shell before me ofvery dif- ferent character (Pleurotoma Perronii, nobis), answering exactly to the figure in question". Reeve (1843) did not cite Gmelin and therefore appeared to con- sider his ñame as a valid new species. However it is clearly a júnior synonym of Gmelin's species and it is concluded that this was an omission in Reeve's work. Marrat (1877) was the first to give an indication of the true range of the species when he included it in a list of North-west African shells which he stated carne "from Madeira to the Gulf of Guinea". Tryon (1884), although stating his Opinión that this species was an inter- medíate form between lineata and spirata , mentioned it as Clavatula (sub- genus Perrona ) perron Chemnitz and provided a detailed description. Strebel (1912), in his revisión of genus Perrona, treated as clearly differ- ent species both spirata and perron. He was able to examine Chemnitz's speci- men from which the famous drawings were made and reillustrated it. He referred immature specimens of the species to Reeve's description, calling them perron var. reevei. He also correctly indicated part of the correct habitat range of the species, citing specimens he had examined from Pointe Noire, Congo to Ambriz, northem Angola. Knudsen (1952) employed the ñame "Clavatula perronii (Reeve)" noting that the "Atlantide expedition" could not obtain any additional material and that Chemnitz's type could no longer be traced at the ZMUC. Powell (1966), who referred cor- rectly to the type species of Perrona, did not figure Perrona perron but illustrated Perrona spirata (Lamarck, 1816). More recently, Cernohorsky (1974) figured a syntype from Chemnitz (in ZMUC), commenting that "the species most probably Uves in West Africa but this locality has been not substantiated by either literature records or authentic specimens. Another possibility is that Murex perron is conspecific with Pleurotoma spirata Lamarck, 1816, as suggested by Nordsieck (1968: 154) although the two species appear quite distinct". Finally, Bernard (1984, fig. 182) figured under the erroneous ñame "Clavatula kraepelini" three specimens of this species. He unknowingly extended Strebel's habitat range northwards, quoting the localities of both Cape Este- rias and Mayumba in Gabon, and indi- cating a depth of -20 to -50 meters. After examining Reeve's type speci- men, the available literature and some ó RoláN ET AL.: Notes on West African Perrona with the description of a new species shells in the collection of one of the authors (PR), it was decided to record some additional information about this poorly known group. Abbreviations: AMNH American Museum of Natural History, New York ANSP Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia BMNH The Natural History Museum, London MCZ Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard university MHNS Museo de Historia Natural "Luis Iglesias" Universidad, Santiago de Compostela MNCN Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid MNHN Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, París ZMUC Zoologisk Museum, Copenhagen USNM National Museum of Natural History, Washington ZSM Zoological Staatmuenchen Museum, Muenchen CJH collection of Juan Horro, Vigo CPR collection of Peter Ryall, Maria Rain SYSTEM ATIC PART Family Clavatulidae Gray, 1853 Genus Perrona Schumacher, 1817 Type species: Perrona tritonium Schumacher, 1817 = Murex perron Gmelin, 1791 = Pleurotoma perronii Reeve, 1843. Perrona perron (Gmelin, 1791) (Figs. 1-13) Der Perron Martini and Chemnitz, 1788: 278, pl. 164. figs. 1573, 1574 (Fig. 1). Murex perron Gmelin, 1971: 3559. Perrona tritonium Schumacher, 1817: 218. Pleurotoma perronii Reeve, 1843: pl. 11, sp. 94 (Fig. 2). Type material: Figured syntype of Der Perron, whereabouts presently unknown; this specimen is reported as examined by Strebel (1912) but could not be traced by Knudsen (1952) who never- theless mentions another shell labelled in the handwriting of Chemnitz. Pleurotoma perronii: holo- type BMNH 1900.2.8.26. Other material examined: 8 shells (Figs. 4-10), Pointe Noire, Congo (CPR). Type locality: Erroneous for Der Perron (in Océano australi). Not mentioned in the original descrip- tion of any of the other taxa. Here designated at Pointe Noire, Congo. Description: Shell (Figs. 3-12) see the original descriptions as well as Tryon (1884) and Strebel (1912). The follow- ing data can be added: the protoconch (Fig. 13) consists of about 2 1 ¡i shiny, smooth whorls, honey brown in colour; the first whorl slightly darker and of 750 pm diameter. From the protoconch whorls a series of opisthocline axial ribs start to form, first as thin riblets extend- ing from the top to the bottom of the whorl, becoming stronger and shaped as an inverted C in the second teleo- conch whorl where their bases become more globose. Between them small striae can be seen. In the subsequent whorl they detach themselves entirely from the upper subsutural cord which also increases in prominence. In the fourth teleoconch whorl these vestiges of the axial ribs become closer and closer to the lower suture, declining in prominence until they entirely disap- pear. The following whorls are smooth with an irregular, raised subsutural collar and the whorls are traversed by s- shaped striae. At the same time as the axial riblets form in the third whorl. 7 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 about 9 radial striae also start to emerge becoming slightly stronger in the fol- lowing whorls but then decreasing in intensity in the fourth or fifth whorls and thereafter are hardly noticeable. The shell is a light honey-brown throughout. On the fourth whorl the subsutural colar starts to become lighter, being entirely white in the fifth whorl. In subsequent whorls it can be interrup- ted by patches of light brown; in the final whorl the two major cords are white interspaced with small brown patches the same colour as the whorl itself and the cords on the columnella are also white. Size : the shell can reach up to 37.2 mm (Bernard, 1984). Remarks : The comparison of juvenile specimens of P. perron with species of the genus Clavatula (type species: Clavat- ula coronata Lamarck, 1801) show much similarity in the aspect of the opistho- cline axial ribs, which tend to disappear with maturity in the subsequent whorls. For this reason it is concluded that there is a stronger relationship between these two genera, than with other genera within this family. Whilst some authors synonymized P. perron with P spirata Lamarck, 1816 it must be noted that not only are they morphologically different, but the latter inhabits an area further to the south, being restricted to the Luanda area where it has been found at -5/50 meters. Distribution : This species inhabits the West African infralittoral coast from Cap Esterias (Gabon) to Ambriz (northern Angola). Special remarks: The type locality is always related with a holotype or a lec- totype. In the present case, the original figures are sufficient to determine the identity of the species and it is not nec- essary to designate a neotype; Pleuro- toma perronii was described lacking type locality as confirmed by the label of this holotype in BMNH. If the type locality of the first description is erroneous, and no other is mentioned in the description of the synonymized taxa, it is necessary to give more detailed information. Pointe Noire (Congo) is designated as the type locality being in the center of the known distribution area, as well as a locality mentioned by Strebel (1912) and the source of our specimens. Our material agrees very well with the figures and the known holotype. Concerning the correct spelling for the ñame of this species, it must be perron, which is the first ñame employed by Gmelin (1791) and which is appa- rently a ñame not dedicated to a person. Tryon (1884) stated that Chemnitz employed the common Dutch ñame "perron" (= flight of stairs, in reference to the profile) and that Reeve (1843), misinterpriting Chemnitz's ñame to be a personal ñame, Latinized it to read "perronii”. Perrona micro spec. nov. (Figs. 14-19, 21, 23, 24-28) Material examined: Holotype (Figs. 14, 15), in MNCN (15.05/47050). Paratypes in the following collections: MNHN (1, Fig. 16); BMNH (1, Fig. 17); AMNH (1); USNM (1); ZSM (1); ANSP (1); MCZ (1); CPR (11); CJH (6); MHNS (16, Fig. 18). Type locality: Palmeirinhas, south of Luanda, Angola, between 3 and 20 meters depth. Etymology: The specific ñame refers to the small size of the species. Description: Shell (Figs. 14-18) small for the genus, very solid, lanceolate. Protoconch (Figs. 21, 23, 24-26) with a little more than one whorl, of 530 pm in diameter and white in colour. The teleo- conch begins with three grooves that sepárate 4 cords, later increasing to four and then five spiral grooves; there are six in the subsequent whorl; the two cords immediately below the suture as well as the lowest cord are more promi- nent. This gives the middle part of the whorl a concave appearance whilst the upper and lower parts protrude before their separation at the suture. There is no axial sculpture except for growth 8 RoláN ET AL.: Notes on West African Perrona with the description of a new species Figures 1-13. Perrona perron. 1: figure from MARTINI AND CHEMNITZ (1788); 2: figure of the holotype of Pleurotoma perronii from Reeve (1843); 3: holotype (see below Figs. 11, 12) of Pleuro- toma perronii (BMNH) at the same comparative size; 4-6: shell (27.6 mm), Pointe Noire, Congo (CPR); 7: shell, 28.6 mm, Pointe Noire (CPR); 8, 9: juveniles, 18.6 and 14.2 mm, Pointe Noire (CPR); 10: shell, 27.2 mm, Pointe Noire (CPR); 11, 12: holotype of P. perronii , 25 mm (BMNH); 13: spire and protoconch, Pointe Noire (CPR). Figuras 1-13. Perrona perron. 1: figura de MARTINI Y CHEMNITZ ( 1 788); 2: figura del holotipo de Pleurotoma perronii, de Reeve ( 1 843); 3: holotype ( véase abajo Figs. 1 1, 12) de Pleurotoma perronii (BMNH) con el mismo tamaño relativo; 4-6: concha, 27,6 mm, Pointe Noire, Congo (CPR); 7: concha, 28,6 mm, Pointe Noire (CPR); 8, 9: juveniles, 18,6 y 14,2 mm, Pointe Noire (CPR); 10: concha, 27,2 mm, Pointe Noire (CPR); 11, 12: holotipo de P. perronii, 25 mm (BMNH); 13: spire and protoconch, Pointe Noire (CPR). 9 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Figures 14-19. Perrona micro spec. nov. 14, 15: holotype, 10.3 mm (MNCN); 16: paratype, 10.6 mm (MNHN); 17: paratype, 8.5 mm (BMNH); 18: paratype, 7.6 mm (scanning electrón micro- scope) (MHNS); 19: operculum (SEM). Figures 20-23. Comparison of the spire and protoconch of Clavatula quinteni (Figs. 20, 22) and Perrona micro (Figs. 21, 23). Figuras 14-19. Perrona micro spec. nov. 14, 15: holotipo, 10,3 mm (MNCN); 16: paratipo, 10,6 mm (MNHN); 17: paratipo, 8,5 mm (BMNH); 18: paratipo, 7,6 mm (microscopio electrónico de barrido) (MHNS); 19: opérenlo ( MEB). Figuras 20-23. Comparación de la espira y protoconcha de Clavatula quinteni (Figs. 20, 22) y Perrona micro (Figs. 21, 23). 10 ROLÁN ETAL.: Notes on West African Perrona with the description of a new species Figures 24-27. Perrona micro. 24: detail of the spire; 25, 26: detail of the protoconch; 27: radular tooth; 28: radula. Figures 29-33. Perrona obesa. 29: holotype, 34.0 mm (BMNH); 30: shell, 31.2 mm, 10 m, Namibe, Angola (CER); 31: shell, 35.7 mm, Namibe, Angola (CPR); 32, 33: shells, 40.2, 41.6 mm, Sacomar, Namibe, Angola (CPR). Figuras 24-27. Perrona micro. 24: detalle de la espira; 25, 26: detalle de la protoconcha; 27: dientes de la rádula; 28: rádula. Figuras 29-33. Perrona obesa. 29: holotipo, 34. 0 mm (BMNH); 30: concha, 31,2 mm, 10 m, Namibe, Angola (CER); 31: concha, 35,7 mm, Namibe, Angola (CPR); 32, 33: conchas, 40.2, 41.6 mm, Sacomar, Namibe, Angola (CPR). Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 lines which form an U-shape in the concave central portion; this is reversed on both the upper and lower protruding parts forming an overall S-shape on the whorl. There are about 6 whorls on the teleoconch, increasing gradually in width and height. The last whorl becomes elongated towards the base, the siphonal canal is widely open and almost similar in length to the lowest part of outer lip. The aperture is ovoid, with an U-shape sinus in the upper part, a sharp external lip, and a small callus on the columella. There are 20 spiral grooves from the periphery to the base. The colour is typically light brown or orangish, with white and dark blotches alternating on the subsutural cords, but in a few specimens the colour is darker and the white pattern is absent. Soft parts: Study of a retracted speci- men preserved in alcohol reveáis a light coloured animal; the operculum (Fig. 19) is ovoid with the nucleus centrally placed on the interior. The radula (Fig. 28) is formed by two rows of about 70 elongate and sharply pointed marginal teeth (Fig. 27) at the center of which is a very small central tooth reduced to a cusp. Dimensions : Flolotype is 10.3 mm. The largest paratype is 12 mm. Distribution: Only known from the type locality, where it is probably endemic. Discussion: There is no known species from West Africa with which it can be confused. Only juvenile forms of Clavatula quinteni Nolf and Verstraeten, 2006, which are much larger when adult, are similar in profile and coloura- tion; they both lack axial sculpture (see comparison in Figs. 20 and 21, 22 and 23) but C. quinteni has a much more elongated siphonal canal, a larger proto- conch (more than double the diameter) and lacks spiral grooves. There was some hesitation about the generic assignment of this new species. Comparison with morphologically similar species in some genera was made, in particular Microdrillia Casey, 1903; Suavodrillia Dalí, 1918; Parecuneus Laseron, 1954, and Maoritomella Powell, 1942, Tomopleura Casey, 1904, and Viridi- turris Powell, 1964. In all cases opercu- lum and radula do not agree. Perrona micro spec. nov., in spite of its small size, belongs to Clavatulidae. This is confirmed by the operculum with a medium-lateral nucleus and the wishbone-like marginal teeth with a vestigial rachidian one in the middle. Powell (1966) reviewed the Turri- dae (s. 1.) and defined the subfamily Clavatulinae H. and A. Adams, 1858 with four recent and two fossil genera; the recent genera being Clionella, Clavat- ula, Perrona (with subgenus Tomellana) and Pusionella. Kilburn (1985), who dealt only with South African species, noted 4 genera; Toxiclionella, Bentho- clionella , Clavatula and Clionella. Tucker (2004) considers 492 fossil and 97 recent species in this group. Later Bouchet and Rocroi (2005) elevated Clavatuli- dae to family status. The genus Clavatula Lamarck, 1801 is relatively abundant along the West Africa coast. Powell (1966) mentions 11 species. Most of them, including the type species ( Clavatula coronata Lamarck, 1801) are of large size. Other species recently illustrated and/or described, as detailed in our introduction, are also rel- atively large. Although Boyer and Ryall (2006) noted that Knudsen (1952, 1956) classified other genera of Clavatul- idae under the genus Clavatula, subse- quent authors seem to ignore these genera and their paramaters as estab- lished by Kilburn (1985). A revisión could conclude that some of them belong to other genera. The genus Clavatula is described by Powell (1966): "shell modera tely large to large sized, 15 - 55 mm, very solid, buccinoid, coarsely axially and spirally sculptured; with a tall, often coronated spire, and a trúncate body-whorl, termi- nated in a relatively short reflected and deeply notched anterior canal.... Oper- culum ovate-lunate with a medio-lateral nucleus. Radula consisting of a pair of stout narrowly pointed marginal teeth of modified wishbone type, the proxi- mal extremity sepárate and superim- posed upon the larger element. A small 12 RoláN ET AL. : Notes on West African Perrona with the description of a new species Figures 34-37. Perrona spirata. 34-36: shell covered by organic material, 31.5 mm, Luanda, Angola (CPR); 37: operculum. Figures 38-41. Perrona subspirata. 38: shell, 31.5 mm; 39-41: shell, 32.0 mm, Namibe, Angola (CPR); 42: operculum. Figuras 34-37. Perrona spirata. 34-36: concha recubierta por material orgánico, 31,5 mm, Luanda, Angola (CPR); 37: opérculo. Figuras 38-41. Perrona subspirata. 38: concha, 31,5 mm; 39-41: concha, 32,0 mm, Namibe, Angola (CPR); 42: opérculo. 13 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 but we 11 formed unicuspid central tooth is present also." According to Kilburn (1985) the main features of Clavatula are: deep anal sinus, realtively long siphonal canal, distict parietal tubercle and proto- conch that is bluntly domed with about 2 1/2 whorls. The species P. micro spec. nov. has some shell characters of Clavatula but has no axial sculpture and is smaller than all of them. Clavatula cossignanii Ardovini, 2004, the smallest Clavatuli- dae known in West Africa, is different in most features including the fewer number of protoconch whorls and is endemic to Senegal. The holotype is 13.2 mm but it can reach a size of 15.9 mm (CPR). According to Powell (1966) the genus Clionella Gray, 1847 differs from Pusionella Lamarck, 1801 by its clavi- form shape with tall, flat-sided spire whorls; simple long flexuous axials ribs without either subsutural or peripheral processes and a truncated body-whorl. Kilburn (1985) defines Clionella with an anal sinus; a slight notch; siphonal canal short with no distinct parietal tubercle; protoconch somewhat conical, of about 2 whorls, the first one rounded and tilted. The genus is usually restricted to South Africa. P. micro spec. nov. lacks axial sculpture, its sinus is deep and does not have a truncated body-whorl: therefore it does not agree with Clionella. The new species was also ruled out of the genus Pusionella Gray 1847 because many specific characters are absent in P. micro ; the flat-sided whorls; the outer lip bordered by a broad, sub- sutural, very slight sinus and the smooth and polished surface. Finally, the genus Perrona Schu- macher, 1817 is described by Powell (1966) as: "shell moderately large, 25 - 40 mm, rather narrowly fusiform, with a tall spire of rapidly increasing whorls ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors wish to thank the Euro- pean Synthesys Program which allowed one of the authors (ER) to examine the and a narrow body-whorl... surface smooth, or nearly so... with a conspicu- ous narrowly carinate subsutural collar.... operculum as in Clavatula... radula with a pair of elongate margináis and a narrow-based unicusp central tooth." The known West African species of Perrona, all figured in the plates in the present work, are the following: P. perron (Gmelin, 1791) (Figs. 1-13), P. spirata (Lamarck, 1816) (Figs. 34-37), both already mentioned, P. obesa (Reeve, 1843) (Figs. 29-33) and P subspi- rata (von Martens, 1903) (Figs. 38-41), both endemic to South Angola. Other authors have placed other species in this genus, for example Perrona nifat (Bruguiére, 1789) by Abbott and Dance (1986), but this generic place- ment is erroneous in our opinión. Powell (1966) also mentions another West African species belonging to this genus but placed in the subgenus Tomellana Wenz, 1843: Perrona ( Tomel - lana) lineata Lamarck, 1816; but this shell has a short, concave-outlined spire and a deep slit-like anal sinus and does not resemble our species. Strebel (1912) referred other species to Tomel- lana; they also do not correspond with the species currently reviewed. Perrona micro spec. nov. is more similar to Perrona perron than to any other type species and the new species is placed in this genus as being the closest. Also noticed is a similarity in the colouration of the subsutural cord as well as the S-shaped axial striae. We find this at present the better solution rather than to create a new genus. Whilst the similarity noted with Clavatula quinteni should not create con- fusión, a result of this paper must also be to assign this species to the genus Perrona although this has not been the reason for this work. type material of Pleurotoma perronii and other types; Jesús Méndez of the Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnológico a la 14 ROLÁN ET AL. : Notes on West African Perrona with the description of a new species Investigación (CACTI) of the University of Vigo for the SEM photographs; Jesús S. Troncoso for allowing us to use the Photographic apparatus of the Departa- BIBLIOGRAPHY Abbott, R. T. and Dance, S. P., 1982. Com- pendium ofSea Shells. E. P. Dutton, New York, ix + 411 pp. Ardovini, R., 2004. Clavatula cossignanii sp. n. (Gastropoda; Turridae) dal Senegal, West Africa. Malacologia, Mostra Mundiale, 43: 5-6. Bernard, P. A., 1984. Seashells ofGabon. Pierre A. Bernard, Libreville, 140 pp. Bouchet, P. and Rocroi, J.-P., 2005. Classifi- cation and Nomenclátor of Gastropod Fam- ilies. Malacologia, 47(1-2): 1-397. Boyer, F. and Ryall, P., 2006. Two new Cla- vatulinae species (Caenogastropoda: Turri- dae) from Ghana. Iberus, 24 (2): 33-38 Bruguiere, J.-G., 1792. Encyclopédie Méthodique ou par Ordre de Mtiéres. Histoire Naturelle des Vers. Vol. 1. Part 2. Panckouke, París, pp 345-757. Cernohorsky, W. O., 1974. Type specimens of Mollusca in the University Zoological Mu- seum, Copenhagen. Records ofthe Auckland In- stitute and Museum, 11: 143-192, figs. 1-67. Dautzenberg, P., 1912. Mission Gruvel sur la cote occidentale d'Afrique (1909-1910). Mol- lusques marins. Anuales de l'lnstitut Océano- graphique de Monaco, 5: 13-111, 3 pls. Gmelin, J. F., 1791. Caroli a Linné Systema natu- rae per regna tria naturae, Editio decima tertia, aucta reformata. Leipzig: G. E. Deer. Tome 1, pars 6 (Vermes): 3021-3910. Kiener, L. C., 1840. Genre Pleurotome. ( Pleu - rotoma, Lam.) Spécies général Muséum d'His- toire naturelle de París, collection Lamarck, celle du Prince Masséna et les découverts récente des voyageurs. París: Rousseau. 84 pp, 27 pls. Kilburn, R. N., 1985. Turridae (Mollusca: Gas- tropoda) of Southern Africa and Mozam- bique. Part 2. Subfamily Clavatulinae. Annals ofthe Natal Museum, 26 (2): 417-470. Knudsen, R. N., 1952. Marine Prosobranches of Tropical West Africa collected by the "Atlantidae" Expedition 1945-46. Part 1. Videnskabele Meddeleser fra Dansk naturhis- torisk Forening I Kjobenhavn, Bd. 114: 129- 185, pl. 13. Knudsen, R. N., 1956. Marine Prosobranchs of Tropical West Africa (Stenoglossa). Atlantide Report n° 4. Danish Science Press, Ltd. Co- penhaguen, 1956 pp. 93-105 Lamarck, J. B. P. A. de, 1801. Systéme des Animaux sans Vertebres, ou tableau Général des Classes, des Orders et des Genres de ces Animaux Lamarck and Deterville, París viii + 432 pp. ment of Ecology of the University of Vigo and Paul-Henri Hattenberger, St. Jean de Blaignac, France for collecting the Congolese specimens. Lamarck, J. B. P. A. de, 1816. Liste des objets repré- sentés dans les planees de cette livaraison. Tableau encyclopédique et Méthodique des Trois Régnes de la Nature. Mollusques et Polypes Divers. Veuve Agasse, París. 16 pp, pls. 391-488. Lamarck, J. B. P. A. de, 1822. Histoire Naturelle des Animaux sans Vertébres...Précédée d'une In- troduction Offrant la Détermination des Cha- ractéres Essentiels de Y Animal, sa Distinction du Végétal et des Autres Corps Naturels, Enfin Y - Exposition des Principes Fondamentaux de la Zoologie. Vol. 7. Guiraudet, París. 711 pp. Maltzan, H. F. von, 1883. Beitráge zurKenntnis der senegambischen Pleurotomiden. Jahr- bücher der Deuschen Malakozoologischen Ges- sellschaf, 10: 115-135, pl. 3. Maltzan, H. F. von, 1884. Diagnosen neuer se- negambischen Gastropoden. Nachrichtsblatt der Deuschen Malakozoologischen Gessellschaf 16: 65-73. Marrat, F. P., 1877. A list of West Africa shells, including new Pleurotoma and Columbella. Quarterly Journal of Conchology, 1: 237-244. Martini, F. H. W. and Chemnitz, J. H., 1788. Neues systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet, vol. 10, 1-376, pls. 137-173. Nolf, F., 2006. Clavatula nathaliae (Mollusca: Gastrododa: Conoidea: Turridae) a new spe- cies from Gabon: an oíd mystery finally elu- cidated. Neptúnea, 5 (3): 1-14. Nolf, F. and Verstraeten, J., 2006. Recogni- tion of two new Clavatula species (Mollusca: Gastropoda: Conoidea: Turridae) in a com- plex group from Gabon and North Angola. Neptúnea, 5 (3): 15-29. Nordsieck, F., 1968. Die europaischen Meeres Gehauseschnecken (Prosobranchia) vom Eismeer bis Kapverden und Mittelmeer. Gustav Fischer, Stuttgart 273 pp. Petit de la Saussaye, S., 1851. Notice sur un groupe de coquilles classées parmi les Fuse- aux ( Fusus Lam.) avec la description de plusieurs espéces. Journal de Conchyliologie, 2: 73-79, 2 pls. Powell, A. W. B., 1966. The molluscan families Speightiidae and Turridae an evaluation of the valid taxa, both Recent and fossil, with lists of characteristic species. Bulletin of the Auckland Institute and Museum, 5: 1-184. Recluz, C., 1851. Description de quelques co- quilles nouvelles. Journal de Conchyliologie, 2 (2):194-216, pls. 5-6. 15 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Reeve, L. A., 1843-1946. Monograph of the Genus Pleurotoma. Conchologia Iconica, or II- lustrations of the shells of molluscous animáis. Reeve Brothers, London Vol. 1: pls. 1-40, species 1-155, + índex and errata. Schumacher, C. F., 1817. Essai d'un Nouveau Sy- steme des habitations des vers testacés. Copen- hagen: Schultz. iv + 287 pp, 22 pls. Strebel, H., 1912. Bemerkungen zu den Clava- tula-G ruppen Perrona und Tomella. Jahrbuch der Hamburgischen Wissenschaftlichen Anstal- ten, 29: 1-24, pl. 1. Strebel, H., 1914. Mollusca I, Gen. Pusionella. In Michaelsen, W. (Ed.): Beitrage zur Kennt- nis der Meeresfauna Westafrikas, vol. 1, Ham- burg, pp. 87-125, pl. 3. Sykes, E. R., 1905. Descriptions of new forms of Marginellidae and Pleurotomidae. Proceedings of the Malacological Society, 6: 315-318, lpl. Tryon, G. W., 1984. Manual of Conchology . Vol. 4 Conidae , Pleurotomidae. Philadelphia, Tr- yon. 151-413, 34 pls. Tucker, J: K., 2004. Catalog of Recent and fos- sil turrids (Mollusca: Gastropoda). Zootaxa, 682: 1-1295. ló Iberus, 26 (1): 17-28, 2008 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Pattern of reserve storage of the two mussel species Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis living on Moroccan coasts: annual variation and effect of pollution Patrones de almacenamiento de reservas en dos especies de mejillón Perna perna y Mytilus galloprovincialis de las costas de Marruecos: variación anual y efecto de la contaminación Abdellatif MOUKRIM*1, Mohamed ID HALLA*, Abderazak KAAYA*, Abdellah BOUHAIMI*, Soumaya BENOMAR* et Michel MATHIEU** Recibido el 23-XI-2005. Aceptado el 30-X-2007 ABSTRACT The pattern of reserve storage and ¡ts ¡mportance ¡n the reproductive cycle of the two mus- sel species living in Moroccan coasts, Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis, were studied comparatively, during two annual cycles. Study was conducted at a polluted and an unpolluted site in Agadir bay. Stereological analysis shows that P. perna presents only one type of storage cells (vesicular cells) storing glycogen. In M. galloprovincialis, two types of storage cells are present: vesicular cells and adipogranular cells (containing glycogen, lipids and proteins). In both species, seasonal variations of reserve tissue vol- ume are conversely proportional to those of the germinal tissues. Reserve tissue appeared in spring (May) and increased in summer. It decreased quickly from August onwards, and disappeared between January and April. In M. galloprovincialis, adipogranular cells dis- appeared before vesicular cells and reappeared first. In the polluted site, seasonal varia- tion of reserve and germinal tissues is comparable to that in unpolluted site but the máxi- mum valué of reserve tissue percentage is less ¡mportant. Moreover, during the year, this tissue did not disappear. Biochemical analysis shows that mean valúes of glycogen and proteins quantities are significantly higher in P. perna than in M. galloprovincialis. How- ever, total lipids quantity mean is higher in M. galloprovincialis. Seasonal variations of the three biochemical parameters present a similar profile in the two species. Compared to unpolluted site animáis, in polluted one, molluscs possess low glycogen and high lipids lev- éis. Seasonal variations of these parameters show a perturbed profile. RESUMEN Se ha estudiado y comparado el patrón de almacenamiento de reservas y su importancia en el ciclo reproductor en dos especies de mejillón de las costas de Marruecos, Perna perna y Mytilus galloprovincialis, durante dos ciclos anuales. Este estudio se llevó a cabo en un sitio contaminado y otro no contaminado de la bahía de Agadir. El análisis estere- ológico demostró que P. perna presenta un solo tipo de células de reserva (células vesicu- lares) almacenando glucógeno. En M. galloprovincialis, hay dos tipos de células de * Laboratory Aquatic Ecosystems: Marine and Continental Field, Biology Department, Sciences Faculty, Ibn Zohr University, BP 8106, 80000, Agadir, Morocco. ** Laboratory Marine Biology and Biotechnology, I. B. B. A., Caen University, France. 1 Corresponding author. 17 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 reserva: células vesiculares y células adipogranulares (conteniendo glucógeno, lípidos y proteínas). En ambas especies, las variaciones estacionales del volumen de tejido de reserva son inversamente proporcionales a las del tejido germinal. El tejido de reservas apareció en la primavera (mayo) y se incrementó en verano. A partir de agosto, dismin- uyó rápidamente y desapareció entre enero y abril. En M. galloprovincialis, las células adipogranulares desaparecieron antes que las células vesiculares y son las primeras en aparecer en el siguiente ciclo. En el sitio contaminado, la variación estacional de tejidos de reserva y germinales es similar a la del sitio no contaminado, salvo que el porcentaje máximo de tejido de reserva es menor. Además, este tejido no desapareció a lo largo del año. Los análisis bioquímicos muestran que las cantidades promedias de glucógeno y de proteínas son significativamente más altas en P. perno que en M. galloprovincialis. Sin embargo, el promedio de lipidos totales fue mayor en M. galloprovincialis. Las varia- ciones estacionales de los tres parámetros presentan un perfil similar en las dos especies. Comparados con los del sitio no contaminado, los animales del sitio contaminado poseen niveles bajos en glucógeno y altos en lípidos. Las variaciones estacionales de estos parámetros muestran un perfil perturbado. KEY WORDS: Agadir, Morocco, mussels, Mytilus galloprovincialis, Perna perna, pollution effects, reproductive cycle, reserves strategy. PALABRAS CLAVE: Agadir, Marruecos, mejillones, Mytilus galloprovincialis, Perna perna , efectos de la conta- minación, ciclo reproductor, estrategias de reserva. INTRODUCTION Two sympatric mussel species are found along the Moroccan coast: the African mussel Perna perna and the Mediterranean mussel Mytilus gallo- provincialis. The first species is located in the north of its geographical distribu- tion; the second one in its Southern limit. In Agadir bay, these local popula- tions of mussels have important com- mercial valúes (Id Halla, 1997) and environmental interest (Najimi, Bouhaimi, Daubéze, Zekhnini, Pel- LERIN, NARBONNE, AND MOUKRIM, 1997; Kaaya, Najimi, Ribera, Narbonne, and Moukrim, 1999; Moukrim, Kaaya, Najimi, Roméo, Gnassia-Barelli, and Narbonne, 2000) as sentinel species. The few studies carried out on mussel biology in this area, concern only some aspects of the reproduction cycle (Shafee, 1989; Id Halla, Bouhaimi, Zekhnini, Narbonne, Mathieu, and Moukrim, 1997). They showed that P. perna and M. galloprovin- cialis present synchronous reproductive cycles, and breed throughout the year with a principal spawning period in spring. The only differences observed by Id Halla et al. (1997), regard the duration of the principal spawning period (more important for P. perna ) and the genital activity rhythm in summer (reduced in this species). In view of the importance of reserves in the reproductive cycle (Bayne, Bubel, Gabbott, Livingstone, Lowe and Moore, 1982; Lowe, Moore and Bayne, 1982; Pipe, 1987) and of the particularities of reserve strategy in Mytilidae (strategy essentially based on the glycogen, presence of specific storage cells and existence of a direct relationship between reserve metabo- lism and reproductive cycle), it was interesting to conduct a comparative study of P. perna and M. galloprovincialis in order to describe the reserves strat- egy for these two species living in the same environmental conditions. The two molluscs present an important dif- ference regarding the cells involved in the reserve storage. As indicated by Lunetta (1969) P. perna presents only one type of storage cells (vesicular cells or glycogen cells), storing especially the glycogen ; however, in M. galloprovin- 18 Moukrim ET AL.: Reserves strategy of mussels in Moroccan coasts cialis (Herlin-Houtteville, 1974; Dan- ton, Kiymoto, Komaru, Wada, Awaji and Mathieu, 1996), two types of storage cells are present, vesicular cells (storing glycogen) and adipogranular cells (containing glycogen, lipids and proteins). Furthermore, beyond the determina- tion of pattern of reserve storage and its importance in the reproductive cycle of the two mussels living in Moroccan coasts, this work studies the impact of pollution on this pattern. Therefore, a comparative study of two sites (unpol- luted and polluted) was conducted. MATERIAL AND METHODS Sampling This study was conducted during two annual reproductive cycles (October 1994 to August 1996). Two types of sites, representative of the Agadir marine bay were considered: i) a reference site (unpolluted). Cap Ghir, located 50 km north of Agadir City and far from any human activity, and ii) a polluted site (Anza) located 5 km north of Agadir and receiving the industrial and domestic untreated waste waters of Anza zone. Many studies, conducted during the same period of the present study, showed that this site is contami- nated by heavy metáis and PAHs either accumulated by mussels or in sediment (Id Halla, 1997; Najimi, 1997; Moukrim, Kaaya, Najimi, Roméo, Gnassia-Barelli and Narbonne 2000; Kaaya, 2002), with some perturbations in the physical and Chemical parameters of seawater (Id Halla, 1997). During this study, for each month, ninety individuáis of 35 mm for each species are collected at random in each of the two sites. 30 individuáis/ species/sites were subject to stereologi- cal analysis and 60 individuáis/ species/sites were dedicated to the bio- chemical analysis. Stereological analysis In order to follow the seasonal vari- ation of the glycogen according the reproduction cycle in Mytilus gallo- provincialis and Perna perna, an histo- chemical study (stereological analysis) was conducted in the mantle. Thirty adult mussels were collected and directly fixed in Gendre liquid for 3 days. Animáis were then removed from shells and a central portion of mantle tissue was correctly excised and embed- ded in paraffin. Sections of 6 pm were cut and stained by the periodic acid of Schiff (PAS). Stereological analysis was applied according the method of Weibel, Kistler, and Scherle (1966) which quantified the volume occupied by the reserve and germinal tissues. The cell types were determined accord- ing the definition of Lubet (1959): i) adipogranular cells (20-25 pm for length, 4.5-5 pm for length of nucleus, green coloration, contain lipids, pro- teins and glycogen), and ii) vesicular cells (50-80 pm for length, 3-5 pm for length of nucleus, pink coloration, contain only glycogen) Biochemical analysis Biochemical analysis (glycogen, lipids and proteins) was carried out on mussel mantle which in Mytilidae, con- stitutes an important organ in storage of reserves. Monthly, sixty adults were ran- domly sampled, quickly transferred to the laboratory in isotherm conditions and frozen at -30°C. Glycogen, total lipids and proteins were respectively measured according the methods of Duchateau and Florkin (1959), Folch, Lees and Sloane-Stanley (1957) and Lowry (1951). Rates of these compounds were expressed as mg/g fresh weight (mg/ g FW). Statistical analysis Stereological analysis was expressed as a percentage of the total volume of mantle tissue ; biochemical results as means ± standard deviations. The statis- tical significance of difference between samples was evaluated by the "t" test using the Statistica software (Release 4.5 A StatSoft Inc. Ed. 1993). A "P" valué of less than 0.05 was considered as sta- tistically significant. 19 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Figure 1. Cells implicated in the reserve storage in Perna perna (A) (only one type of cells: ve: vesicular cells) and Mytilus galloprovincialis (B) (two types of cells, ve: vesicular cells; adge: adi- pogranular cells). Scale bars 10 pm. Figura 1. Células implicadas en la acumulación de reservas en Perna perna (A) (solo un tipo de células: ve: células vesiculares) y Mytilus galloprovincialis (B) (dos tipos de células, ve: células vesiculares; adge: células adipogranulares). Escalas 10 pm. RESULTS Stereological analysis Figure 1A shows that the mantle of Perna perna presents only one type of storage cells: vesicular cells (VC). In Mytilus galloprovincialis (Fig. IB), two types of storage cells are presentí adi- pogranular cells (ADGC) and vesicular cells (VC). For P. perna, the respective volumes of germinal and reserve tissues are con- versely proportional (Fig. 2A). The sea- sonal profile is similar during the two studied annual eyeles. The volume of germinal tissue increases from October to February, when the máximum is reached (respectively 72% and 77% in the first and second year). From March onwards, the germinal tissue volume decreases to reach the minimum in August (respectively 8% and 6% in the first and second year). The reserve tissues appeared in spring (May) and increased until reaching maximal valúes in summer (August). They decreased quickly and disappeared between January and April. In the polluted site (Fig. 3A), the seasonal variation of reserve and germinal tissues is similar to that in the reference site but the máximum valué of reserve tissues per- centage is lower (57% and 62% respec- tively in the first and second year). Moreover, during the year, this tissue did not disappear. The minimum valué recorded was 7-10% in February. For Mytilus galloprovincialis (Fig. 2B), the volume of germinal tissue increases in autumn and in the beginning of winter to reach a máximum in February (75%). Thereafter, we observe a reduc- tion of the surface occupied by this tissue until October where the minimum (12%) is reached. During the second eyele a similar evolution is recorded. Otherwise, as with P. perna, the volume of germinal tissue is inversely proportional to reserve tissue. Nevertheless, in this case, the máximum is reached in October (64%), whereas the disappearance takes place from January to March for the two studied yearly eyeles. In the polluted site (Fig. 3B), the reserve tissue presents a seasonal evolu- tion similar to the reference site. Besides, this tissue never disappears as in P. perna. The occupied minimal volume is 5% reached in February. Moreover, for M. galloprovincialis, in the reference site, the adipogranular cells disappeared before the vesicular cells and then reappeared first. In the polluted site the two cellular categories persist 20 Moukrim ET AL. : Reserves strategy of mussels in Moroccan coasts A Reserve tissue ^ Germinal tissue O Others B 100% 90% OND JFMAM J JASOND JFMAM J JA ADGC VC Germinal tissue I | Others Figure 2. Seasonal variation of germinal and reserve tissues in Perna perna (A) and Mytilus gallo- provincialis (B) in the unpolluted site. (VC: vesicular cells storing glycogen; ADGC: adipogranular cells, containing glycogen, lipids and proteins). Figura 2. Variación estacional de los tejidos germinal y de reservas en Perna perna (A) y Mytilus gallo- provincialis (B) en el sitio no contaminado. (VC: células vesiculares almacenando glucógeno; ADGC: células adipogranulares, conteniendo glucógeno, lípidos y proteínas ). during all the year. However, an oscilla- tion can be observed in the volumes occupied by the two categories of cells. Biochemical analysis Glycogen: The mean amount of glycogen is significantly (F= 11.19 and P= 0.027) higher in Perna perna than in Mytilus galloprovincialis (respectively 59.6 ± 7.36 and 48.7 ± 4.78 mg/g FW). For the two species, the seasonal varia- tions are significant (F= 4.95 ; P= 10"6 for Perna perna and F= 2.65 ; P= 4.7xl0'6 for Mytilus galloprovincialis) and exhibit a similar profile (Fig. 4A). The glycogen increases in spring (from April), reaches a maximal valué in August (219.4 and 191.9 mg/g FW in Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis respectively), then decreases during autumn and winter. The minimal valúes are noted in February (0.39 and 0.34 mg/g FW in Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis respectively). 21 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 ioo%- 90% - 80% - 70% ' 60% - 50% - 40% ' 30% ' 20% ' 10%' o%- i ¡i i I li I l i i ¡ I p II lli Wm i i 11. li ,1 H 1* " L i i ■I i» 1 OND JFMAM J JA SOND JFMAM J JA Reserve tissue ^ Germinal tissue Q Others 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0% B Figure 3. Seasonal variation of germinal and reserve tissues in Perna perna (A) and Mytilus gallo- provincialis (B) in the polluted site. (VC: vesicular cells storing glycogen; ADGC: adipogranular cells, containing glycogen, lipids and proteins). Figura 3. Variación estacional de los tejidos germinal y de reservas en Perna perna (A) y Mytilus gallo- provincialis (B) en el sitio contaminado. (VC: células vesiculares almacenando glucógeno; ADG: células adip ogranulares, conteniendo glucógeno, lípidos y proteínas). ONDJFMAMJ JASONDJFMAMJ JA ¡H ADGC H VC ^ Germinal tissue Q Others In the polluted site (Fig. 4B), the dif- ference between the mean amount of glycogen in the two species (39.75 and 23.44 mg/g FW in P. perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis respectively) is not sig- nificant (F= 6.257 and P= 0.130). Other- wise, their seasonal variation are signifi- cantly different (F= 4.03 and P= 10'6 in P. perna and F= 9.78 and P= 10~7 in M. galloprovincialis). The seasonal profile is completely different for the two mol- luscs: For P. perna , it presents three peaks, the first in June (96.05 mg/ g FW), the second in November (118.87 mg/g FW) and the third in May of second year (159.02 mg/g FW). For M. galloprovin- cialis, only two peaks are recovered 65.03 and 153.64 mg/g FW respectively in May and November of the first year. The comparison of valúes for refer- ence and polluted site animáis shows a significant difference. The valúes in the polluted site are less important (39.8 ± 13.36 instead of 59.6 ± 7.36 mg/g FW in 22 Moukrim ET AL Reserves strategy of mussels in Moroccan coasts P perna ▲ M. galloprovincialis Month Figure 4. Seasonal variation of glycogen in the mantle of Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis in the reference site (A) and the polluted site (B) Figura 4. Variación estacional del glucógeno el el manto de Perna perna y Mytilus galloprovincialis en el sitio de referencia (A) y en el sitio contaminado (B) the reference site, for Perna perna). More- over, the seasonal profile of glycogen contení (Fig. 4B) presents some pertur- bations compared to the reference site. Lipids : A significant difference was noted between the mean amounts of total lipids in the two mussels species (92.86 and 125.04 mg/g FW in P. perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis respectively). However, the difference of their seasonal variation are significant with F= 4.42 and P= 10'6 in P. perna and F= 3.6 and P= 4.5xl0'5 in M. galloprovincialis. In the first year, the seasonal profile (Fig. 5A) is similar for the two molluscs. The lipid contení increased in autumn, with a maximal valué in December (respectively 354.3 and 316.9 mg/ g FW in Perna perna and Mytilus gal- loprovincialis), and decreased in winter and spring. However, in the second year, a slight increase was noted in summer (June - July) only in P. perna. In the polluted site, the two species present a significant difference between total lipids mean valúes (respectively 231.4 ± 21.47 and 135.5 ± 16.93 mg/g FW in Perna perna and Mytilus gallo- provincialis). Besides, the difference in their seasonal variation (Fig. 5B) is sig- nificant with F= 2.59 and P= 0.002 in P. perna and F= 3.60 and P= 4.5xl0"4 in M. galloprovincialis. Ótherwise, the valúes are generally higher for the polluted site than the ref- erence site for the two species. More- over, compared to the unpolluted site, the seasonal variation (Fig. 5B) shows a perturbed profile with several peaks during the annual cycle and a máximum valúes is reached rather in August (777.03 mg/ g FW in P. perna and 659.95 mg/g FW in M. galloprovincialis). Proteins : The mean contení of protein is significantly higher in Perna perna (28.9 23 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 P. perna a M. galloprovincialis Month Figure 5. Seasonal variation of lipids in the mantle of Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis in the reference site (A) and the polluted site (B). Figura 5. Variación estacional de los lípidos en el manto de Perna perna y Mytilus galloprovincialis en el sitio de referencia (A) y en el sitio contaminado (B). ± 3.51 mg/g FW) compared to Mytilus galloprovincialis (20.2 ± 3.17 mg/g FW). However, the seasonal profile (Fig. 6A) is similar for the two species. The maximal valúes were generally recorded in summer and autumn in the first year and in winter and beginning spring in the second year, whereas the minimal valúes were reached at the end of autumn and the beginning of winter. In the polluted site (Fig. 6B), the mean amount of protein is higher in P. perna (30.11 ± 7.742 mg/g FW) than in M. galloprovincialis (19.74 mg/g FW). However, the mean valúes and the sea- sonal profile do not show any signifi- cant difference compared with those observed from the reference site (F= 1.08 and P= 0.30 for Perna perna ; F= 0.31 and P= 0.57 for Mytilus galloprovincialis ). For the two species, the máximum valúes were recorded in summer and autumn. DISCUSSION The comparative study of the reserve pattern of the two mussels species living in the Moroccan coasts, Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis, sampled in the same site (Cap Ghir, Agadir bay), shows that, in spite of the difference in their reserve tissues (only one cell type, vesicular cells, in Perna perna ; two cell types, adipogranular cells and vesicular cells, in Mytilus gallo- provincialis), the two molluscs have a similar fluctuation. This strategy presents cycles (of re- serve compounds and cells involved in the storage) which, compared to the cy- cle of reproduction (determined in these same animáis by Id Halla et al., 1997) are inversely proportional to it. The ac- cumulation of reserves in these cells is related to the period of reduced sexual 24 Moukrim ET AL. : Reserves strategy of mussels in Moroccan coasts P. perna a M. galloprovincialis Figure 6. Seasonal variation of proteins in the mantle of Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis in the reference site (A) and the polluted site (B). Figura 6. Variación estacional de las proteínas el manto de Perna perna y Mytilus galloprovincialis en el sitio de referencia (A) y en el sitio contaminado (B). activity (in summer). The low levels of reserve are obtained in autumn and par- ticularly in winter (gametogenesis and spawning periods). Similar results have been reported in Perna perna from Brazilian coasts (Lunetta, 1969) and in Mytilus galloprovincialis from the French coasts (Herlin-Houtteville, 1974; Danton, Kiymoto, Komaru, Wada, Awaji and Mathieu, 1996). Also, in the Ria de Vigo (Spain), the profile of the variations of the gonadic Índex and so- matic Índex in cultured mussels show clearly their inverse and gradual fluctu- ations (Cáceres-Martínez and Figueras, 1998). This association be- tween gonad and storage tissue cycles in mussels is well known. Decline of the ADG cells occurs during gametogenesis by a lysosomal autophagic mechanism (Bayne et al., 1982; Lowe, Moore and Bayne; 1982; Pipe, 1987). The energy used in gonad restoration following spawning during spring and summer probably derived directly from feeding since ADG cells disappeared from the mantle in early spring (Villalba, 1995). Furthermore, the reserve accumula- tion in the two mollusc species is related to the proliferation of the phytoplanc- tonic biomass linked to upwelling cur- rents which take place, between Febru- ary and August, in the Agadir bay and more precisely in Cap Ghir (Belveze, 1984 ; Agoumi and Orbi, 1992). Cáceres-Martínez and Figueras (1998) reported that this increase in food availability for mussels in the area favours the accumulation of reserves during this period. These results also confirm the cióse dependence, described by Mathieu (1987), between the reserve storage and environmental conditions in marine ecosystems. As suggested by 25 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 this author, the disappearance of reserve tissue in mussels seems to be under endocrine control via cerebroid ganglia which provoke disappearance of adi- pogranular cells and vesicular cells in the mantle after liberation of their reserves which are indispensable for gametogenesis and spawning process. The synchronic character of this disap- pearance, in Perna yerna and Mytilus gal- loyrovincialis, could be explained by the existence of the same mechanism for the control of reserves in both species. The comparison of the reserve com- pounds in the two molluscs shows that the glycogen, total lipids and proteins contents are higher in Perna yerna (in spite of the presence of only one type of reserve storage cells, vesicular cells) compared to Mytilus galloyrovincialis. These results could explain the differ- ences observed by Id Halla et al. (1997) between the reproductive cycles of these bivalves. According to these authors, in Perna yerna, compared to Mytilus galloyrovincialis, the main- spawning period in spring is longer and the sexual activity in summer is reduced. Otherwise, the important reserve levels in this species could be attributed to the spatial distribution of each species: Perna yerna lives essen- tially at the infra-littoral level and is more immersed than Mytilus galloyrovin- cialis (Id Halla et al., 1997) and, conse- quently, has access to more nutrients, thus allowing the synthesis and storage of more reserves. Seed (1976) showed that the gonadal development was faster in mussels from the low intertidal zone, than in those from the upper zone and related these results to food avail- ability. Other studies associated local variations in gonadal cycle with envi- ronmental conditions (Ferrán, 1991; Villalba, 1995). According to Cáceres- Martínez and Figueras (1998), there is no influence of locality and depth in the gonadal development of cultured mussels. The seasonal profile of the biochemi- cal reserves studied shows that the first peak of glycogen and lipids, recorded in summer, is related to the occurrence of upwelling currents which provide food availability, ensuring an abundant planktonic food supply for mussels. According to Cáceres-Martínez and Figueras (1998), massive spawns occur in spring coinciding with an increase in temperature and chlorophyll-a concen- traron in the area providing favorable conditions for larval growth. In winter, the second peak of lipids coincides with the maturity period of gametes. This peak takes place just after the disap- pearance of the glycogen peak. It is probably a result of the glycogen trans- formaron. The metabolic conversión of glycogen to lipids has been reported by Zaba and Davies (1980), using 14C- glucose. According to Gosling (1992), the mantle is considered as the organ of many and extensive metabolic transfor- mations during the sexual cycle. The reserves, particularly the glycogen, accumulated during summer, are used in autumn and winter for the gametoge- nesis. Similar results were reported by Shafee (1989) in Perna yicta of Temara (North of Morocco). In the polluted site (Anza), many perturbations in the metabolism of reserves were noted comparatively to the reference site (Cap Ghir). The reserve tissues, which disappeared in winter and at the beginning of spring, in mussels of Cap Ghir, persist throughout the sexual cycle in Anza mussels. This could probably be a result of the pollu- tion effect on the cerebroid ganglions neurosecretions which are, according to Lubet, Herlin, Mathieu, and Collin (1976) and Mathieu (1987) involved in the control of reserve cells. The analysis of the seasonal profile of the reserve levels in mussels sampled in the polluted site shows some pertur- bations as compared to the reference site. For example, the glycogen content is low in summer (August), in spite of the availability of phytoplanctonic biomass in this period. This is probably linked to the stress caused by pollution of industrial and domestic waste waters discharged directly in this site, without any treatment. This fact was indicated by Deslous-Paoli, Wolowicz, and 26 Moukrim ET AL.: Reserves strategy of mussels in Moroccan coasts Boromthanarat (1991) who reported that, in Mytilus edulis, reserves could be used both in reproductive process and to overeóme the hard environmental conditions. According to Thompson (1972) the reserves are used in order to reach the basal level of energy necessary for stressed animáis. Contrary to the glycogen, the total lipids are more important in Perna yerna and Mytilus galloprovincialis living in Anza (polluted site). This could be explained by an eventual direct assimi- lation of lipids from the organic matter of waste waters and/or a change of the reserve storage process. According to Gosling (1992) the lipid storage process in molluscs is considerably linked to the environmental conditions, particularly to the presence of pollutants. As a general conclusión, in the two species of mussel P. yerna (with only vesicular cells) and M. galloprovincialis (with adipogranular cells and vesicular cells), the respective germinal and reserve tissues clearly show their inverse and gradual profile. Their sea- sonal fluctuations are similar in the two molluscs. In the polluted site, many per- turbations of the reserve metabolism were noted comparatively to the refer- ence site. Then, contrary to animáis of this latter site, which presented a glyco- BIBLIOGRAPHY Agoumi, A. and Orbi, A., 1992. Evolution météorologique et upwelling le long de la cote atlantique marocaine. Hydroécologie Appliquée, 2 (4): 149-158. Bayne, B. L., Bubel, A., Gabbott, P. A., Liv- INGSTONE, D. R., LOWE, D. M. AND MOORE, M. N., 1982. Glycogen utilisation and game- togenesis in Mytilus edulis L. Marine Biology Letters, 3: 89-105. Belveze, H., 1984. Biologie et dynamique des pop- ulations de la sardine (Sardina pilchardus Wal- baum) peuplant les cotes atlantiques du Maroc. Thése de Doctorat d'Etat, Université de Bre- tagne Occidentale, Brest: 229 pp. Cáceres-Martínez, J. and Figueras, A., 1998. Long-term survey on wild and cultured mus- sels ( Mytilus galloprovincialis Lmk.) repro- ductive eyeles in the Ria de Vigo (NW. Spain). Aquaculture, 162: 141-156. genic strategy, a lipidie strategy takes place in molluscs of the polluted site. The results obtained in this work constitute a contribution to the knowl- edge of the reserve strategy in the two species living along Moroccan coasts, the African mussel Perna yerna and the Mediterranean mussel Mytilus gallo- yrovincialis. So, several faets are reported: i) the type, the seasonal variation and the eyele of the reserve strategy in the two molluscs, ii) cells involved in the storage, iii) the relationship between the reserve strategy and the reproduction eyele, and iv) the response of this strategy to the environmental conditions. Nevertheless, it would be interesting to identify the mechanism and the control process of the reserve strategy in these molluscs. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We are grateful to Miss Joanne Preston (Southampton University, UK) and Mrs Barbara Picot (Angers Univer- sity, France) for their Language correc- tions. We thank the IFS (Sweden), AUPELF (Cañada), Ministére des Affaires Etrangéres (France) and Min- istére de l'Enseignement Supérieur et de la Recherche Scientifique (Morocco), for their financial assistance. Danton, E., Kiymoto, M., Komaru, A., Wada, K. T., Awaji M. and Mathieu, M., 1996. Comparative analysis of storage tissue and insulin-like neurosecretion in diploid an triploid mussels Mytilus galloprovincialis Lmk. in relation to their gametogenesis eyele. In- vertébrate Reprodution and Development, 29: 37-46. Deslous-Paoli, J. M., Wolowicz, M. and Boromthanarat, S., 1991. Les réserves én- ergétiques de Mytilus edulis: Comparaison des stratégies développées dans le baie de Gdansk (Pologne) et le bassin de Marennes- Oleron (France). Haliotis, 21: 19-28. Duchateau, G. H. and Florkin, M., 1959. Sur la tréhalosémie des insectes et sa signification. Archives Internationales de Physiologie , de Biochimie et de Biophysique, 67: 306-314. 27 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Ferrán, A. E., 1991. Ciclo gonadal y del tejido de reserva del mejillón de las Rías de Galicia Mytilus galloprovincialis Lmk. Tesis Doctoral, Uni- versidad de Santiago de Compostela, Es- paña, 229 pp. Folch, ]., Lees, M. and Sloane-Stanley, G. H., 1957. A single method for the isolation and purification of total lipids from animal tissues. Journal of Biológica! Chemistry, 226: 497-509. Gosling, E., 1992. The mussel Mytilus: Ecology, Physiology, Genetics and Culture. Develop- ments in Aquaculture and Fisheries Science, 25. Amsterdam, Netherlands: 565 pp. EIerlin-Houtteville, P., 1974. Contribution a l'é- tude cytologique et expérimentale du cycle du tissu de reserve diez la moule Mytilus edulis L. Thése de 3éme cycle. Université de Caen: 99 pp. Id Halla, M., 1997. Etude de la biologie des moules Perna perna Einné (1758) et Mytilus gallo- provincialis Eamarck (1819) dans la baie d'A- gadir. Thése de 3éme cycle. Faculté des Sci- ences, Agadir: 157 pp. Id Halla, M., Bouhaimi, A., Zekhnini, A., Narbonne, J. F., Mathieu, M. and Moukrim, A., 1997. Etude du cycle de reproduction de deux espéces de moules Perna perna (Linné, 1758) et Mytilus galloprovincialis (Lamarck, 1819) dans la baie d'Agadir (Sud du Maroc). Haliotis, 26: 51-62. Kaaya, A., Najimi, S., Ribera, D., Narbonne, J. F. and Moukrim, A.,1999. Characterization of glutathione S-transferases (GST) activities in Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis - used as biomarker of pollution in the Agadir marine bay (South of Morocco). Bulletin ofEn- vironmental Contamination and Toxicology, 62: 623-929. Lowe, D. M., Moore, M. N. and Bayne, B. L., 1982. Aspects of gametogenesis in the marine mussel Mytilus edulis L. Journal ofthe Marine Biological Association ofthe United Kingdom, 62: 133-145. Lowry, O. H., Rosenbrough, N. ]., Farr, A. and Randall, R. ]., 1951. Protein measure- ment with the Folin phenol reagent. Journal of Biological Chemistry, 193: 265-275. Lubet, P., 1959. Recherches sur le cycle sexuel et l'émission des gamétes chez les Mytilidés et les Pectinidés. Thése de 3éme cycle, Université de Paris: 159 pp. Lubet, P., Herlin, P., Mathieu, M. and Collin, F., 1976. Tissu de réserve et cycle sexuel chez les lamellibranches. Haliotis, 7: 59-62. Lunetta, J. E., 1969. Fisiología da reproducáo dos mexilhóes ( Mytilus perna L.) Mollusca Lamellibranchia). Boletins da Faculdade de Filosofía, Ciencias e Tetras, Universidade de Sao Paulo, Zoología e Biología Marinha, N.S. 26: 33- 111. Mathieu, M., 1987. Etude expérimentale des con- troles exercés par les ganglions nerveux sur la gamétogénése et les processus métaboliques as- sociés chez la moule Mytilus edulis L. (Mol- lusque lamellibranche) . Thése de Doctorat d'É- tat, Université de Caen, France: 219 pp. Moukrim, A., Kaaya, A., Najimi S., Roméo, M., Gnassia-Barelli, M. and Narbonne, J. F., 2000. Assessment of the trace metáis level in two species of mussels from the Agadir ma- rine bay (South of Morocco). Bulletin ofEn- vironmental Contamination and Toxicology, 65: 478-485. Kaaya, A., 2002. Contribution d Vévaluation de l'é- tat de santé de la baie d'Agadir: Etude de la physico-chimie du milieu et de certains biomar- queurs chez Mytilus galloprovincialis et Perna perna (stratégie de réserve, bioaccumulation mé- tallique et enzymes de biotransformation). Thése de Doctorat d'État, Université Ibn Zohr, Agadir, Maroc: 187 pp. Najimi, S., Bouhaimi, A., Daubéze, M., Zekhnini, A., Pellerin, ]., Narbonne, J. F. and Moukrim, A., 1997. Use of acetyl- cholinesterase in Perna perna and Mytilus gal- loprovincialis as a biomarker of pollution in Agadir marine bay (South of Morocco). Bul- letin ofEnvironmental Contamination and Tox- icology, 58: 901-908. Pipe, R. K., 1987. Ultrastructural and cyto- chemical study on interactions between nu- trient storage cells and gametogenesis in the mussel Mytilus edulis. Marine Biology, 96: 519- 528. Seed, R., 1976. Ecology. In Bayne, B. L. (Ed.): Ma- rine Mussels. Their Ecology and Physiology. Cambridge University Press. Cambridge, 13- 65 pp. Shafee, M. S., 1989. Reproduction of Perna perna (Mollusca: Bivalvia) from the atlantic coast of Morocco. Marine Ecology Progress Se- ries, 53: 235-245. Thomspon, R. ]., 1972. Feeding and metabolism in the mussel Mytilus edulis L. Ph.D Thesis, University of Leicester: 186 pp. Villalba, A., 1995. Gametogenic cycle of cul- tured mussel, Mytilus galloprovincialis, in the bays of Galicia (NW Spain). Aquaculture, 130: 269-277. Weibel, E. R., Kistler, G. S. and Scherle, W. F., 1966. Practical stereological methods for morphometric cytology. Journal ofCell Biol- ogy, 30: 23-38. Zaba, B. N. and Davies, J. ]., 1980. Glucose metabolism in an in-vitro preparation of the mantle tissue from Mytilus edulis L. Marine Biology Eetters, 1: 235-243. 28 Iberus, 26 (1): 29-42, 2008 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Reproduction of the cockle Cerastoderma edule (Linné, 1758) in the estuary of Oued Souss (southwestern Morocco) Reproducción del berberecho Cerastoderma edule (Linné, 1758) en el estuario del Oued Souss (suroeste de Marruecos) Hafida BERGAYOU**, Abdellatif MOUKRIM*1, Michel MATHIEU** and Jean-Pierre GIMAZANE** Recibido el 14-11-2006. Aceptado el 3 l-X-2007 ABSTRACT Field and laboratory investigations were carried out from 2001 to 2003 on a population of Cerastoderma edule living ¡n the estuary of Oued Souss, ¡n order to determine the impact of domestic wastewater discharges on the biology of this species. During waste- water discharges, several episodes of partial spawning occurred from November to March, followed by another in April-May. The main spawning occurred nevertheless in August. The gonadic Índex was always higher than 1, so that the period of sexual rest was short. The period of recruitment (from June to October) was mainly correlated with spawning peaks. The renewal of the population was ensured by the recruitment of June- July, whereas young cockles recruited from August to October only represented 9.2% of the population at the end of autumn. Most 1-year-old cockles disappeared during the sum- mer of the second year following their recruitment. After wastewater pollution stopped, an important recruitment of young cockles occurred. The spatial distribution of this species progressed upstream and the biomass of cockles had strongly increased. Because of its reproduction which takes place throughout the year, C. edule , as an opportunistic species, succeeded in colonizing this site. RESUMEN Se realizaron, entre 2001 y 2003, estudios de campo y de laboratorio sobre una pobla- ción de Cerastoderma edule del estuario del Oued Souss, con el objetivo de determinar el impacto de los vertidos de aguas residuales sobre la biología de esta especie. Coinci- diendo con los vertidos, se produjeron varios episodios de puesta parcial entre Noviem- bre y Marzo, seguidos de otro en Abril-Mayo. La puesta principal, sin embargo, se pro- dujo en Agosto. El índice gonádico fue siempre superior a 1 , indicando que el periodo de reposo sexual fue corto. El periodo de reclutamiento (de Junio a Octubre) estuvo esencial- mente relacionado con picos de puesta. La reposición de la población fue asegurada por el reclutamiento de Junio-Julio, mientras berberechos jóvenes reclutados entre Agosto y Noviembre representaban tan solo el 9,2% de la población a finales de otoño. La mayor parte de los berberechos con un año de edad desaparecieron durante el verano del segundo año después de su reclutamiento. Al finalizar los vertidos se produjo un impor- tante reclutamiento de berberechos jóvenes. La especie se extendió río arriba y la bio- * Laboratory Aquatic Ecosystems : Marine and Continental Field, Biology Department, Sciences Faculty, Ibn Zohr University, BP 8106, 80000, Agadir, Morocco. ** Laboratory of Marine Biology and Biotechnology, University of Caen, F- 14000, Caen, France. 1 Corresponding author 29 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 masa de berberechos aumento fuertemente. Por su reproducción que se extiende sobre todo el año, C. edule, como especie oportunista, fue exitosa en la colonización de este lugar. KEY WORDS: Cerastoderma edule, estuary, Oued Souss river, pollütion, recruitment, reproductive cycle, waste- water discharges. PALABRAS CLAVE: Cerastoderma edule, estuario, Oued Souss, contaminación, reclutamiento, ciclo reproductor, INTRODUCTION In marine environment, many biotic and abiotic factors may influence the life cycle of bivalves. If temperature, salin- ity, food supply, and tidal exposure are the most important causes known to modulate development in mytilids (Seed, 1975), other elements, such as intraspecific competition or environ- mental contaminants, can result in great variations in growth rate of bivalves (Seed and Suchanek, 1992). These factors also have an effect on the repro- duction, settlement, recruitment, and production of these molluscs so that their variations directly affect the devel- opment of beds for each species of bivalve (Widdows and Donkin, 1992). Contrary to numerous ecological reports on the effects of contaminants on different marine bivalves, the recovery of mollusc populations after the disap- pearance of pollütion has been less investigated. The implantation of a wastewater pu- rification plant since November 2002 along the estuary of Oued Souss, at 4 km from the mouth of the estuary, had re- sulted in the fact that the fresh water still running in the river and the decanted wastewater were no longer discharged in the estuary but diverted to another Coastal site: M'Zar, located at 3 km south. For this reason, the estuary, upstream to the purification plant, was only swept by sea tide at the present time. As there existed a population of Cerastoderma edule living in the estuary of the Oued Souss river, it was interest- ing to determine the physiological State of these cockles during the pollütion period by wastewater and the changes which have occurred after this contami- nation stopped. In view of these objec- tives, the following two questions aróse: Had the discharge of wastewater before November 2002 caused repercussions on the reproductive cycle of C. edule and on the dynamics of this population? What consequences did the presence of sea water in the estuary after November 2002 have on the spatial distribution and biomass of C. edule? To answer the first question, monthly investigations from January 2001 to December 2002 were carried out in the habitat of C. edule i) to follow the different stages of sexual maturity in males and females, and ii) to specify the development of the different generations and cohorts of cockles. To tackle the second question, two surveys in 2002 and 2003 during summer months were performed in the estuary of Oued Souss river. This study complements other reports made by our research team in the same ecosystem (Mouneyrac, Pel- LERIN, MOUKRIM, AlT ALLA, DUROU AND Viault, 2005; Ait Allá, Mouneyrac, Durou, Moukrim and Pellerin, 2005; Ait Allá, Gillet, Deutsch, Moukrim and Bergayou, 2005; Bergayou and Moukrim, 2003 and Gillet, Gorman, Tallec, Moukrim, Mouloud, Anajjar, Ait Allá, Bergayou and Kaaya, 2003). MATERIALS AND METHODS The estuary of Oued Souss is located on the Atlantic coast, in southwestern Morocco and is subjected to an arid climate. The mouth is swept by an intense marine hydrodynamism, responsible of the presence of great 30 Bergayou ET AL.: Reproduction of Cerastoderma edule in Southwestern Morocco Figure 1 . Location of sampling sites along the estuary of Oued Souss in the Bay of Agadir, south- western Morocco. Figura 1. Situación de las localidades de maestreo a lo largo del estuario del Oued Souss, en la bahía de Agadir, suroeste de Marruecos. sandbanks in the estuary, with currents linked to high or low tides, and with high salinity (from 31.2 to 34.2 %o). Reproductive cycle The study of reproductive cycle and population dynamics for C. edule were carried out at station 2 (30° 21.97'N north, 9o 35.98'W west), (Fig. 1). Selected because of its high biomass of the cockle population, this station was character- ized by fine silty sand 2-5% of organic matter in the substratum and 340-440 mg/1 of suspended matter in the water. Two methods for studying the repro- ductive cycle of C. edule were used. The first was a classical histological study of gonads and was performed from January 2001 to March 2002. The second was a complementary study of condi- tion Índex and microscopic examination of gonad smears (Guillou, Bachelet, and Glémarec, 1991) and was per- formed from August 2001 to August 2002. For the first and second study. respectively, 30 and 100 cockles (length, 20 to 30 mm) were collected by hand at low tide, at monthly intervals (respec- tively, a total of about 450 and 1300 accumulated cockles was examined). For the first study (histological study of gonads), the shells of C. edule were opened and soft masses were prefixed in the Gendre's fixative for 24 h. In the laboratory, the shell of each bivalve was removed and small pieces of soft masses were post-fixed in a new solution of Gendre's fixative for 48 h before being dehydrated through a graded series of ethanol and butanol, and finally embed- ded in cytoparaffin (56°-58°C). Serial sections (thickness, 5 pm) were made before being stained with Gabe's trichrome, hemalun-eosin, or Mann- Dominici's method (Gabe, 1968). The maturity of gonads was determined using the scale proposed by Lubet (1959) for Mytilus edulis (Table I). The gonadic Índex (Seed, 1975) indi- cates the State of gonad maturity for 31 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Table I. Terminology used by LUBET (1959) and LUCAS (1965) to study morphologically and his- tologically the gonadic developmental stages in bivalves. Tabla I. Terminología empleada por Lubet (1959) y Lucas (1965) para el estudio morfológico y his- tológico de estadios de desarrollo gonadal en bivalvos. Lubft's scale (1959) Lucas's scale (1965) Staqe 0: sexual rest. Staae 1: earlv qametoaenesis with numerous qoniae. Staqe III D: spent, completelv emptv lumina. Staqe A: sex undetectable. Ihis stage can correspond to sexual rest, previtellogenesis, or gamete resorption. Staqe II: activelv developinq qonads but mature qametes were not observed. Staqe B: sex detectable with difficully to the naked eye. Staqe IIIA: near ripe follides with mature qametes. Staqe IIIB: spawninq, follicles distended. Staqe C: identifiable gonad. Ihe foot is salmon-stained in males and pearly white in females. Gonad maturation and spawning occurred during this stage. Staqe IIIC: partial spawninq, partiallv emptv lumina. Staqe D: gonadic reconstitution with co-existence of empty follicles and of tubules showing numerous goniae. each population and is evaluated from histological slides. It was determined by giving a number to each of Lubet's gametogenic stages: stage 0 (number 1), stages I and II (2), stage IIIA (3), stages IIIB and IIIC (2), and stage IIID (1). For each sample of cockles, the number of gonads showing a gametogenic stage is multiplied by the corresponding number; the figures obtained were then added and the sum was then divided by the total number of cockles studied. This gonad Índex varied from 1 (all gonads were spent, with completely empty lumina) to 3 (all gonads were ripe). The stereological analysis was made on the whole bivalves used for the histo- logical examinations of gonads. For each C. edule, three histological slides were randomly chosen through the antero- posterior axis. The different cell cate- gories present in gonadic follicles were counted on five ocular fields (magnifica- tion: x 100 for females, and x 400 for males) randomly selected in the visceral mass. In females, four categories: oogo- niae, vitellogenic oocytes, ripe oocytes, and atresic oocytes, were considered. In males, the cells were classified into the following three categories: protogoniae and spermatogoniae, primary and sec- ondary spermatocytes, and, lastly, sper- matids and spermatozoa. The mean per- centage of each cell category was calcu- lated in relation to the total number of cells counted. Mean valúes and corre- sponding S.D. were established for each cell category. For the second study, gonad smears and the determination of sex ratios were made by removing each bivalve from its shell and by rubbing soft masses against a histological slide. The microscopic examination was made using the scale of Lucas (1965) adapted for C. edule by Fernandez-Castro, Guillou, Le Pennec, and CARDENAS López (1989) (see table I). The sex ratio (number of females in relation with the total number of bivalvs with a recognizable sex) was performed when this identifi- cation was easy. A x2 test was used to determine levels of statistical signifi- cance. The condition Índex represents the variations of dry weight for a standard bivalve and aims to elimínate the effect of mollusc growth while revealing an accumulation or a loss of organic matter, associated with reproduction. A single 32 Bergayou ET AL.: Reproduction of Cerastoderma edule in Southwestern Morocco size class (20-30 mm) was considered and 30 bivalves were randomly chosen to determine this condition Índex. The índex selected was that proposed by Lucas and Beninger (1985): IC = [(dry weight of soft masses) / (dry weight of valves) x 1000]. The dry weight was obtained using a dehydration of soft masses (or shell) in a desiccator (60°C, 24 h). Population dynamics To study the dynamics of the popu- lation and to specify the period of juve- nile recruitment, samplings of C. edule were performed from January to December 2002. This study was also carried out in the station 2. Monthly, sixteen sediment samples (surface, 0.0625 m2, height, 20 cm) were collected at low tide according to the method of quadrats used by Elliott and Decamps (1973, in Bayed, 1982). These samples were sieved (square meshes, 1 mm) to recover and count cockles. The antero- posterior length of each cockle was mea- sured using a calliper rule (precisión, 0.1 mm). For mollusc sizes less than 5 mm, a stereomicroscope equipped with a micrometric ocular was used. The indi- vidual valúes recorded for the length of bivalves and sampling dates were com- pared using the FISAT software (Gayanilo, Sparke and Pauly, 1996) to draw size histograms in relation to the frequency of animáis and to make a modal analysis based on the algorithm according to the method by Battacharya (1967). This comparison, with the use of the x2 test (at P<0.05) allows to distin- guish the different size classes in each monthly sample, to determine mollusc densities, and to specify recruitment periods. Spatial distribution, density and biomass To determine the spatial distribu- tion, density, and biomass (ash-free dry weight, AFDW) of cockles, two surveys were carried out in 2002 and 2003 (during summer period). The replication of this study during these two periods (in 2002, when the estuary received the wastewater, and in 2003, when the dis- charge stopped) gives insights on the wastewater pollution impact and the reestablishment of the ecosystem when this pollution stopped. These investiga- tions were made in a total of 8 stations (27 sampling sites) located at 400-500 m intervals from the estuary mouth up to the wastewater outlet (Fig. 1). In each site, four to six sediment samples (surface, 0.0625 m2, height, 20 cm) were collected at low tide according to the method of quadrats used by Elliott and Decamps (1973, in Bayed, 1982). These samples were sieved (square meshes, 1 mm) to recupérate and count cockles, as above. Ash-free dry weight (AFDW) was determined by dipping molluscs in a solution of 10% HC1 until the shell was completely dissolved. Then, the soft parts were dried for 48 h at 80°C, weighed, placed at 600°C for 2 h and weighed again. The weight loss at 600°C was considered to represent the AFDW of individuáis and was expressed in g/m2 (Bachelet, Bouchet and Lissalde, 1980-1981). RESULTS Effects of pollution on the biology of the species Reproductive cycle: The study of gonad smears from August 2001 to August 2002 had allowed to recognize sex in 1138 bivalves (87.5%). Within this group, the sex ratio of C. edule was 51.1% ± 2.6%, and was well-balanced at 1:1 (x2 = 2.5, P < 0.05). No hermaphro- dite individuáis were found in this pop- ulation. In September, the A stage (undetectable sex) was observed in 75% of cockles and might correspond to a previtellogenic phase rather than a sexual rest, as the percentage of C. edule showing the C stage (gonad maturation) increased in October to reach about 50% in November. The frequency of C stage was above 50% between November and April (Fig. 2A), and subsequently decreased in May (from 75 to 20%), thus corresponding to a slight decrease of the 33 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Figure 2. Distribution of sexual-development stages (A) according to the scale of LUCAS (1965) and annual cycle of condition indexes (B) in the populations of C. edule studied from August 2001 to August 2002. The cumulated frequencies of the different sexual-development stages corresponded to the total of bivalves studied (100%). For details of each stage, see Materials and Methods (Table I). Figura 2. Distribución de los estadios de desarrollo sexual (A) según la escala de LUCAS (1965) y ciclo anual de índices de condición (B) en las poblaciones de C. edule estudiadas entre agosto 2001 y agosto 2002. Las frecuencias acumuladas de distintos estadios de desarrollo sexual corresponden al total de bivalvos estudiados ( 1 00%). Véase Material y Métodos (Tabla L) para los detalles de cada estadio. condition Índex (Fig. 2B). An episode of pardal spawning had thus occurred during this last period. In May, the fre- quency of the D stage (80%) proved that gametogenesis had resumed. In June and July, the C stage was the most fre- quent (65 to 75%) and was followed in August by a more marked decrease of the condition Índex (from 80 to 50 %o) thus indicating an important release of gametes. It may be concluded that two periods of gamete maturation (C stage), the first ranging from November to April and the other occurring in June- July, were differentiated. The histological study was carried out over a longer period of time (January 2001- March 2002) than the analysis of gonad smears. Mature gonads (IIIA stage) were often observed on more than 50% of cockles studied from January to April (Fig. 3). Episodes of pardal spawn- ing occurred from January to March; fol- lowed by another spawning in April and May (in May, the IIIB stage was noted in 60% of males, Fig. 3A). The reconstitu- tion of the gonad (IIIC stage) is more marked in females (Fig. 3B) in May (80%) and seems more precocious in males. In both sexes, this stage devel- oped in parallel from May to July so that pardal spawning occurred during these months. In August, the IIIB stage was preponderant in both sexes (80% of 34 Bergayou ET AL.: Reproduction of Cerastoderma edule in Southwestern Morocco A B 2001 Months 2002 2001 Months 2002 ■ Sta IIID m Sta MIC El Sta IIIB m Sta IIIA Sta II E Sta 1 □ Sta 0 ■ Sta IIID m Sta MIC E Sta IIIB m Sta IIIA a Sta II □ Sta □ Sta 0 Figure 3. Distribution of gonadic-development stages over 2001-2002 in the males (A) and females (B) of C. edule. The cumulated frequencies of the different developmental stages corresponded to the whole bivalves studied (100%). For details of each stage, see Materials and Methods (Table I). Figura 3. Distribución de los estadios de desarrollo gonadal sobre el periodo 2001-2001 en machos (A) y hembras (B) de C. edule. Las frecuencias acumuladas de distintos estadios de desarrollo sexual corre- sponden al total de bivalvos estudiados (100%). Véase Material y Métodos (Tabla I) para los detalles de cada estadio. males, 60% of females), proving that the main spawning episode had happened. The resorption of gonads (IIID stage) was observed in a few individuáis after the spawning of May and was less than 25% from June to August. Several females in IIID stage were noted during the other months, but they never exceeded 5%. In September, gametogen- esis started in both sexes (I and II stages were found in 95% of cockles). The mat- uration of the gonad (IIIA stage) was observed in the first bivalves from October to December and partial spawn- ing occurred from November to March. The highest valúes (2.7) of the gonadic Índex (Fig. 4) were noted between January and April, thus con- firming the presence of ripe gonads during this period. The lowest valúes (1.7) were found from June to August. In both sexes, the gonadic Índex was always higher than 1 so that the period of sexual rest was short. Gametogenesis in the population of C. edule: Figure 5 gives the results of stere- ological analysis. From January to March, the percentages of mature gametes increased to peak in April. Another episode of gametogenesis began in May, as demonstrated by the high frequencies of young germinal cells during this month in both sexes. In males, the effect of this developing sper- 35 Iberas, 26 (1), 2008 —°"“a — b Figure 4. Annual cycle of the gonadic Índex in the males (A) and females (B) of C. edule over 2001-2002. Figura 4. Ciclo anual del índice gonádico en machos (a) y hembras (b) de C. edule en el periodo 2001- 2002. matogenesis was high rates of sper- matids and spermatozoa in June or August (grouped frequencies, 75% and 85%, respectively). In females, an impor- tant vitellogenesis was observed in May and June so that the highest frequency of mature oocytes (55%) was noted in July and that of degenerated oocytes (60%) in August. In September, the highest percentages of spermatogoniae (29%) in males and of oogoniae (37%) in females were noted, thus indicating the starting of another gametogenetic wave. From September to December, the gonadic tissue of males was important, as the grouped frequencies of spermato- goniae and of spermatocytes were more than 47%. The same finding was noted in females during this period (grouped rates of oogoniae and of vitellogenic oocytes, >70%). Low percentages of atresic oocytes (5-25%) were always observed in females throughout the year. From the above study, it can be con- cluded that three successive gametoge- netic waves were differentiated: the first one from January to April, the second one from May to July, and the third one from September to March. Ripe cockles for both sexes were predominant from January to April, in July, and from January to March. Population dynamics: The lengths of C. edule , measured from January to December 2002, are given in Figure 6. The period of recruitment spanned from the end of spring to the onset of autumn. The first settlement of juvenile cockles occurred in June. A second cohort appeared in July, a third cohort in August, and a fourth one in October. At the end of autumn, the individuáis recruited in June-July had a length of 18.3 ±1.8 mm and constituted 71.6% of the population. By contrast, those origi- nating from the grouped cohorts of August and October only had a length of 11.1 ± 1.1 mm and represented 9.2% of the population. In addition to these recruitments; a few young cockles (2- 3%) were found for each date of sam- pling. In summer, there was a strong decrease in the number of cockles mea- suring 24.6 ±1.9 mm in length. This diminution is followed by the almost complete disappearance of adult cockles just after the period of recruitment (August 2002) so that the population of C. edule in 2002 was mainly composed of young individuáis which are being renewed each year. 36 BERGAYOU ET AL. : Reproduction of Cerastoderma edule in Sourhwestern Morocco ■ Spz Hfl Spc EH3 Spg B JFMAMJ JASONDJFM 2001 Months 2002 Figure 5. Frequencies of different cell categories in the male (A) and female (B) gonads of C. edule collected between January 2001 and March 2002. Male line: Spc (primary and secondary sperma- tocytes), Spg (protogoniae and spermatogoniae), Spz (spermatids and spermatozoa) . Female line: D (degenerated oocytes), Og (oogoniae), R (mature oocytes), V (vitellogenic oocytes). The cumu- lated frequencies of the different cell categories corresponded to the whole bivalves studied (100%). Figura 5. Frecuencia de distintas categorías de células en gónadas de machos (A) y hembras (B) de C. edule recolectados entre enero 2001 y marzo 2002. En machos: Spc (Espermatocitos primarios y secun- darios), Spg (protogonias y espermatogonias), Spz (espermatidios y espermatozoos); en hembras: D (ovoc- itos degenerados), Og ( oogonias ), R (ovocitos maduros), V (ovocitos vitelogénicos). Las frecuencias acu- muladas de distintos estadios de desarrollo sexual corresponden al total de bivalvos estudiados (1 00%). Spatial distribution, biomass, and structure of population of C. edule before and after wastewater discharges The spatial distribution of C. edule along the estuary, its density and its biomass are given in Table II for the summer surveys (2002 and 2003). During the period of wastewater dis- charge, the species was confined down- stream (stations 1 and 2). By contrast, in 2003, its distribution had extended with an upstream penetration of cockles up to the station 5. The density of C. edule did not exceed 320 individuals/m2 in 2002, and strongly increased in 2003 to reach valúes higher than 4,900 cockles/m2 in several places (these valúes were found during the periods of recruitment). The mean biomass (AFDW) calculated on the cockle samples collected during summer surveys, increased from 2.54 g/m2 in 2002 to 14.87 g/m2 in 2003. Table III shows the different groups of cockles constituting the population in summer surveys (2002 and 2003). 37 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Length (mm) 0 10 20 30 N=171 N=182 N=207 N=242 N=300 N=244 N=1 14 N=119 N=256 N=92 N=119 Figure 6. Size distribution of C. edule in the estuary of Oued Souss from January to December 2002 and the principal normal components. Month and numbers of individuáis measured (N) are given for each sampling. Figura 6. Distribución de tallas de C. edule en el estuario del Oued Souss entre enero y diciembre 2002 y componentes normales principales. Meses y número de ejemplares medidos (N) están indicados para cada muestra. During the wastewater discharges in the estuary (July 2002), individuáis are dis- tributed among four groups: two classes with lowest lengths (6.81 ± 1.53 mm and 9.97 ± 0.83 mm), deriving from a recruit- ment in May and June; and two classes of oíd cockles (24,72 ±2.17 mm and 27.5 ± 0,76 mm). In July 2003, the most fre- quent group (89.2%) was composed of young individuáis (length, 6.55 ± 1.17 mm; 11.76 ± 1.63 mm) originating from a recruitment in May and June. Another group of médium size (36.25 ± 1.73 mm) appeared for the first time and probably comprised cockles more than one year oíd, as the absence of growth lines on cockle valves did not allow to easily identify the different age subgroups constituting this last size group. DISCUSSION The results reported in the present study on the gonochorism of C. edule agree with the reports of several authors (Gimazane, 1971; Kingston, 1974). Several cases of accidental hermaphro- dism (4%0) were also noted by Fernan- dez Castro, Guillou, Le Pennec and Cárdenas López (1989). In the estuary of Oued Souss, the sex ratio of cockles was well-balanced so that pollution did not have an influence on the distribu- tion of males and females. This finding agrees with studies that some authors have performed in other populations of C. edule at different latitudes, such as the report by Kingston (1974) along the coasts of Kent (UK), that of Ivell (1981) 38 BERGAYOU ET AL.: Reproduction of Cerastoderma edule in Southwestern Morocco Table II. Spatial distribution of C. edule along the estuary, its density and its Biomass (AFDWg / m2) during wastewater contamination (summer 2002) and after stopping of pollution (summer 2003). Tabla II. Distribución espacial de C. edule a lo largodel estuario , su densidad y su biomasa (AFDW/m2) durante vertidos de agua contaminada ( verano 2002) y después de poner fin a la contaminación ( vera- no 2003). Sfátions Sampling sites 2002 2003 Density (ind/m2) 2002 2003 Biomass AFDW (g/m2) 0 OB 4 0.0012 ObisA 8/2 32.368 ObisB 24 0.08 1 1A 4 0.6492 IB 4 0.85 Ibis A 20 1.22 IbisB 4 24 0.582 3.12 TA 36 0.446 TB 16 0.48 2 2A 108 0.28 2B 6760 102.892 2bisA 320 5.539 2bisB 112 3.648 2'A 4972 83.768 3 3A 8 0.1384 3'A 432 3.7176 3'B 636 6.8256 3B 8 0.0416 4 4'A 16 0.074 4'B 124 2.0676 5 5B 68 0.5248 in the Limfjord (Denmark), that of Mejuto (1984) in Ria de Pasaxe (Spain), or still that of Fernandez Castro, Guillou, Le Pennec and Cárdenas López (1989) at Brouennou (France). Through methods used for repro- ductive cycle analysis, complementary and concordant results were noted. In the year, two successive gametogenetic waves, the first occurring from Septem- ber to April and the second in May-July, were differentiated in this population and spawning periods staggered over time. These phenomena can be explained by an effect of latitude (Sola, 1997; Rodriguez-Rua, Prado, Romeo and Bruzon, 2003) and, in particular, by water temperature (Hugues, 1971). When temperature was less than 10°C, it induced early spawning, followed by gonad reconstitution and a second period of spawning. The presence of atresic oocytes observed throughout the year during vitellogenesis, as mentioned by Lubet (1991) is apparently a frequent phenom- enon in bivalves noted in the start of gametogenesis (first mature oocytes degenerate), after partial spawnings and in the end of a reproductive cycle. The long period of cockle recruit- ment (from June to October) in 2002 can 39 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Table III. Distribution of shell lengths for C. edule during summer surveys (2002 and 2003): prin- cipal normal components. Tabla III. Distribución de longitudes de conchas de C. edule durante muéstreos de verano (2002 y 2003): principales componentes normales. Group N° Percentage (%) July 2002 Mean of shell length (mm) Structure of population S.D Percentage (%) July 2003 Mean of shell length (mm) S.D 1 19.5 6.81 1.53 11.4 6.55 1.17 2 16.4 9.9 7 0.83 77.8 11.76 1.63 3 55.5 24.72 2.17 10.68 36.25 1.73 4 8.4 27.5 0.76 be easily explained by spawning which occurred from April to August and this time was perfectly consistent with the gonadic-development stages deter- mined by the histological study of gonads and the examination of gonad smears. Contrary to juveniles recruited in June-July which had a better develop- ment, those settled from August to October showed a great mortality. This last result would not be related to wastewater pollution, in agreement with the reports by Madani (1989), Sauriau (1992), Bachelet, Guillou and Labourg (1992a), or with that by Bachelet, Desprez, Ducrotoy, Guillou, Labourg, Rybarczyk, Sauriau, Elkaim and Glémarec (1992b). According to these authors, high mortalities of cockles were noted in the recruitments which occurred at the end of summer, in autumn, and in winter. This mortality affected small- sized (<10 mm) cockles and may be explained by the almost complete absence of energetic reserves (Sauriau, 1992) whereas the metabolism of young cockles was changing (Gabbott, 1976). By contrast, the disappearance of medium-sized molluscs in 2002 coin- cided with the period of summer recruitment. This finding might be explained, either by a great predation of cockles by Haematopus ostralegus (this bird only tackled on médium sizes as reported by Atkinson, Clark, Bell, Daré, Clark and Ireland, 2003; John- stone and Norris, 2000), or by a high rate of mortality for these bivalves, as their vulnerability became more marked with increasing age and was also dependent on the quality of waters and/or an eventual eutrophication in the estuary, as demonstrated by Ducro- toy and Ibanez (2002). Indeed, as sea waters in winter and spring had high loads of mineral seston in the absence of pollution, the filter-feeders produced numerous pseudo-faeces and had a marked energetic expense for selective sorting of particles, mucus secretion, and cleaning of gills for Mytilus edulis (Widdows, Fieth and Worrall, 1979) or for Crassostrea gigas (Héral, 1986). According to Foster-Smith (1975a, b) and Newell (1977), the behaviour of adult cockles was different, as they adapted their pumping activity in the presence of high concentrations of mineral seston, with a passage by a rel- ative State of dormancy (Savari, Lock- wood and Sheader, 1991). However, such a behaviour did not seem to exist during wastewater discharges in summer, as cockles were in reproduc- tion and had to live in waters double loaded with matters in suspensión (pol- lution) and the phyto-planktonic bloom (with the increase of temperature), therefore placing these bivalves under stress conditions and inducing a high mortality. Since November 2002, the discharge of decanted wastewater in another site 40 Bergayou ET AL. : Reproduction of Cerastoderma edule in Southwestern Morocco beyond the estuary and the conversión of this ecosystem into a marine environ- ment had resulted, for C. edule, in a wider spatial distribution, a strong increase of density, and the appearance of médium sizes in this site. To comment on these changes, it is neces- sary to take into account the reproduc- tion of cockles living in this estuary, as it is stretched over all the year. Indeed, according to Gordo (1982), the repro- ductive cycle of Spanish and Portuguese populations of C. edule showed a period of sexual rest during summer months and the author explained it by the mean temperature of sea water which were more than 28°C and would inhibit the BIBLIOGRAPHY Ansell, A. D., Barnett, P. R. O., Bodoy, A. and Masse, H., 1981. Upper temperature toler- ances of some European molluscs. III. Cardium glaucum, C. tuberculatum and C. ed- ule. Marine Biology, 65: 177-183. Atkinson, P. W., Clark, N. A., Bell, M. C., Daré, P. J., Clark, J. A. and Ireland, P. L., 2003. Changes in commercially fished shell- fish stocks and shorebird populations in the Wash, England. Biological Conservation, 114: 127-141. Bachelet, G., Bouchet, J. M. and Lissalde, J. P., 1981. Les peuplements benthiques de la Gironde: biomasse, productivité et évolu- tion structurale. Oceanis, 6: 593-620. Bachelet, G., Guillou, J., Labourg, P. J., 1992a. Adult, larval and juvenile interactions in the suspension-feedingbivalve, Cerastoderma ed- ule: field observations and experiments. In Colombo, G., Ferrari, I., Ceecherelli, V.U., and Rossi, R., (Eds.): Marine eutrophisation and population dynamics. Fredensborg, 175- 182. Bachelet, G., Desprez, M., Ducrotoy, J. P., Guillou, J., Labourg, P. J., Rybarczyk, H., Sauriau, P. G., Elkaim, B. and Glé- marec, M., 1992b. Role de la compétition intraspécifique dans la régulation du re- crutement chez la coque, Cerastoderma edule (L). Anuales de l'Institut Océanographique, 68:75-87. Battacharya, C. G., 1967. A simple method of resolution of a distribution into Gaussian components. Biometrics, 23: 115-135. Bayed, A., 1982. Ecologie descriptive et dynamique des plages de la región de Rabat, Maroc. Doctoral Thesis, Brest, 122 pp. reproduction of this species, as they were cióse from the lethal temperature recorded for C. edule (Ansell, Barnett, Bodoy and Masse, 1981). As the cockles from the estuary of the Oued Souss river practically did not have sexual rest and showed a gametogenesis starting towards autumn, the results noted in this site might be interpreted as an adaptation of this cockle population to high temperatures of sea waters which exist in the South of Morocco. Under these conditions, it is logical to consider C. edule an opportunistic species which might quickly overtake new areas in presence of favourable environmental conditions. Ducrotoy, J. P. and Ibanez, F., 2002. Ecolog- ical groups of estuarine macrobenthic in- vertebrates in the Baie de Somme (France): changes in time and space. Journal ofthe Ma- rine Biological Association of the United King- dom, 5: 749-769. Fernández-Castro, N., Guillou, J., Le Pen- nec, M. and Cárdenas López, J. J., 1989. Le cycle sexuel de Cerastoderma edule L. (Bivalve: Cardiidae) á Brouennou (Finistére). Haliotis, 19: 325-334. Foster-Smith, R. L., 1975a. The effect of con- centration of suspensión on the filtration rates and pseudofaecal production for Mytilus edulis (L.), Cerastoderma edule (L.) and Venerupis pul- lastra (Montagu). Journal of Experimental Marine Biology and Ecology, 17: 1-22. Foster-Smith, R. L., 1975b. The role of mucus in the mechanism of feeding in three filter- feeding bivalves. Proceedings of the Malaco- logical Society ofLondon, 41: 571-588. Gabbott, P. A., 1976. Energy metabolism. In Bayne, P. A. (Ed.): Marine mussels: ecology and physiology. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 213-355. Gabe, M., 1968. Techniques histologiques. Masson et Cié, Paris, 1113 pp. Gayanilo, F. C. Jr., Sparke, P. and Pauly, P., 1996. FISAT Software. FAO-ICLARM-Stock- Assessment-Tools, Makati City, Metro Manila, The Philippines. Gimazane, J. P., 1971. Introduction a Vétude ex- périmentále du cycle sexuel d’un mollusque Bi- valve Cardium edule L. Analyse des populations, évolution de la gonade et action de quelquesfac- teurs: nutrition, température, photopériode. Doc- toral thesis, University of Caen, 112 pp. 41 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Gordo, L. S., 1982. Aspects of the growth and density of Cerastoderma edule in the Alvor Salt Marsh, South Portugal. Arquivos do Museu Bocage (Series A), 19: 435-452. Guillou, J., Bachelet, G. and Glémarec, M., 1992. Influence des fluctuations de tem- pérature sur la reproduction et le recrute- ment de la coque Cerastoderma edule (L). An- uales de l'Institut Océanographique , 68: 65-74 Héral, M., 1986. L'ostréiculture frangaise tra- ditionnelle. In Barnabe, G., (Ed): Aquacul- ture, 2nd ed. Lavoisier, París. 345-390. Hugues, R. N., 1971. Reproduction of Scrobic- ularia plana Da Costa (Pelecypoda: Semelidae) in North Wales. The Veliger, 14: 77-81. Ivell, R., 1981. A quantitative study of a Ceras- toderma-Nephthys community in the Lim- fjord, Denmark, with special reference to production of Cerastoderma edule. Journal of Molluscan Studies, 47: 147-170. Johnstone, I. and Norris, K., 2000. The influ- ence of sediment type on the aggregative re- sponse of oystercachers, Haematopus ostrale- gus, searching for cockles, Cerastoderma edule. Oikos, 89: 146-154. Kingston, P. F., 1974. Studies on the repro- ductive cycles of Cardium edule and C. glau- cum. Marine Biology, 28: 317-323. Lubet, P., 1991. Reproduction des mollusques In Barnabé, G., (Ed.): Bases biologiques et écologiques de l'aquaculture. Lavoisier, Tec and Doc, París, 167-210. Lubet, P., 1959. Recherches sur le cycle sexuel et l'émission des gamétes chez les Mytilidés et les Pectinidés. Doctoral Thesis, University of París, 159 pp. Lucas, A., 1965. Recherches sur la sexualité des Mollusques Bivalves. Bulletin Biologique de Trance et de Belgique, 99: 115-247. Lucas, A. and Beninger, P. G., 1985. The use of physiological condition indices in marine bivalve aquaculture. Aquaculture, 44: 187- 200. Madani, I., 1989. Dynamique des populations et processus de recrutement chez quatre espéces de bivalves appartenant aux genres Abra et Ceras- toderma, dans le bassin d'Ar cachón. Doctoral Thesis, University of Bordeaux 1, 152 pp. Mejuto, J., 1984. Primeros datos sobre la di- námica de la poblation de Cerastoderma edule L.) de la Ria do Pasaxe ( NW de Galicia), es- trategias de explotation. Actas IVo Simposio Ibérico de Estudos do Benthos Marinho, 2: 83-102. Newell, R. I. E., 1977. The ecophysiology of Cardium edule (Linné). Ph. D. Thesis. Uni- versity of London, 250 pp. Rodríguez-Rua, A., Prado, M. A., Romeo, Z. andBruzon, M., 2003. The gametogenic cy- cle of Scrobicularia plana (Da Costa, 1778) (Mollusca: Bivalvia) in Guadalquivir estu- ary (Cádiz, SW Spain). Aquaculture, 217: 157- 166. Sauriau, P. G., 1992. Les mollusques benthiques du bassin de Marennes-Oléron: estimation et cartographie des stocks non cultives, compétition spatiale et trophique, dynamique de population de Cerastoderma edule (L.). Doctoral Thesis, University of Nantes, 262 pp. Savari, A., Lockwood, A. P. M. and Sheader, M., 1991. Variations in the physiological State of the common cockle ( Cerastoderma edule (L.)) in the laboratory and in Southampton Water. Journal of Molluscan Studies, 57: 33-44. Seed, R., 1975. Reproduction in Mytilus edulis L. (Mollusca: Bivalvia) in European waters. Pubblicazioni delta Stazione Zoológica di Napoli, 39: 317-334. Seed, R. and Suchanek, T. H., 1992. Popula- tion and community ecology of Mytilus. Chapter 4. In Gosling, E., (Ed.): The mussel Mytilus: ecology, physiology, genetics and cul- ture. Developments in Aquaculture and Fish- eries Science, n° 25. Elsevier, Amster- dam/New York, 87-168. Sola, J. C., 1997. Reproduction, population dy- namics growth, and production of Scrobicu- laria plana Da Costa (Pelecypoda) in the Bida- soa estuary, Spain. Netherlands Journal of Aquatic Ecology, 30: 283-296. Widdows, J., Donkin, P., 1992. Mussels and environmental contaminants: bioaccumula- tion and physiological aspects. In Gosling, E., (Ed.): The mussel Mytilus: ecology, physiology, genetics and culture. Developments in Aqua- culture and Fisheries Science, n° 25. Elsevier, Amsterdam/New York, 383-424. Widdows, J., Fieth, P. and Worrall, C. M., 1979. Relationship between seston, available food and feeding activity in the common mussel Mytilus edulis. Marine Biology, 50: 195- 207. 42 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberus , 26 (1): 43-46, 2008 Xylodiscula wareni n. sp., una nuova specie per le coste orientali della Sicilia Xylodiscula wareni n. sp., una nueva specie para las costas orientales de Sicilia Cesare BOGI* e Stefano BARTOLINI** Recibido el 27-X-2007. Aceptado el 15-XII-2007 RIASSUNTO Si descrive un piccolo gasteropode planispirale, che non corrisponde a nessuna delle spe- cie attualmente viventi nel Mar Mediterráneo, trovato in campioni di sedimento raccolti a profonditá cómprese tra i 35 e i 52 m lungo le coste siciliane. La forma generóle della conchiglia ci ha indotto ad ascrivere questa specie, solo prowisoriamente, al genere Xylo- discula Marshall, 1988 anche se alcune caratteristiche della protoconca, non iperstrofica, lo escluderebbero. Questa specie si descrive come nuova, con il nome di Xylodiscula wareni anche se proba- bilmente non appartiene a questo genere, evitando di descrivere al momento un nuovo genere scarsamente definito. ABSTRACT A small planispiral gastropod, which could not be ascribed to any known species from the Mediterranean or adjacent seas, was found in sediment samples collected in depths between 35 and 52 m in the seas around Sicily. The general shape resmbles the genus Xylodiscula Marshall, 1 988, but the protoconch ¡s not heterostrophic and has a distinct sculpture not described from any gastropod. There- fore we describe this new species as Xylodiscula wareni, although it probably does not belong to the genus, instead of creating a new, poorly defined genus. RESUMEN Se describe un pequeño gasterópodo planiespiral recolectado entre 35 y 52 m de profun- didad en las costas Sicilianas, que no pudo ser asignado a ninguna especie conocida del Mediterráneo ni de mares adyacentes. La forma general se asemeja al género Xylodiscula Marshall, 1 988, aunque la protoconcha no sea heterostrófica y tenga una escultura dis- tinta que no se conoce en ningún otro gasterópodo. Se propone como nueva especie Xylodiscula wareni. Aunque probablemente no pertenezca a este género, se descarta de momento la descripción de un género nuevo escasamente definido. PAROLE CHIAVE: Gastropoda, Xylodisculidae, Xylodiscula wareni, nuova specie, Mar Mediterráneo, recente. KEY WORDS: Gastropoda, Xylodisculidae, Xylodiscula wareni , new species, Mediterranean Sea, recent. PALABRAS CLAVE: Gastropoda, Xylodisculidae, Xylodiscula wareni , nueva especie, mar Mediterráneo, reciente. * Via delle Viole 7 1-57124, Livorno. e-mail bogicesare@tiscali.it ** Via E. Zacconi,l6 1-50137, Firenze. e-mail stefmaria.bartolini@libero.it 43 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 INTRODUZIONE Le nostre continué ricerche malaco- logiche e Pesame di numerosi campioni di sedimento raccolti lungo le coste della Sicilia Nord-Orientale e le isole antistanti, ci ha portato, questa volta, a studiare alcuni micromolluschi, in tutto quattro esemplari, isolati da piccole quantitá di detrito raccolto a profonditá variabili tra i 35 mt. e i 52 mt. II piccolo gasteropode di forma pla- norbide viene, per l'aspetto generale della conchiglia, solo provvisoriamente attribuito al genere Xylodiscula Marshall, 1988, in quanto le caratteristiche della sua protoconca, non iperstrofica, lo escluderebbero . SISTEMATICA Ordine Heterostropha Fischer P. , 1885 Famiglia Xylodisculidae Waren A., 1992 Genere Xylodiscula Marshall,1988 Xylodiscula wareni n. sp. (Fig. 1) Materiale esaminato: 1 esemplare (olotipo, fig.l a-e) proveniente da detriti raccolti nel Luglio 2005 alia base della "Secca dei 6 metri" presso l'isola di Filicudi a -50 m. , 1 esemplare (paratipo A) rac- colto nel Giugno 2006 a Cannizzaro, loe. Bellatrix, -35 m.di profonditá lungo una párete rocciosa, 2 esemplari (paratipi B e C) provenienti da campioni di detriti coralligeni raccolti a Scilla a -52 m. Materiale tipo: L'olotipo (Diam.= 1.1 mm), (Fig. 1A-E ) é stato depositato nella collezione malaco- logia del Museo di Storia Naturale del Mediterráneo di Livorno, Italia, con il numero: Malacologia Vol. V, n. 734. 1 paratipi sono conservad nelle seguenti collezioni: il paratipo A (Diam.= 1.0 mm), nella collezione di S. Bartolini (Firenze), il paratipo B (Diam.= 1,3 mm) , e il paratipo C (Diam.= 1,2 mm), nella collezione E. Perna (Napoli). Locus typicus: Detriti raccolti alia base della "Secca dei 6 metri" presso Pisóla di Filicudi a -50 m. di profonditá. Etimología: La specie é stata dedicata al Dottor Anders Warén, malacologo di fama mondiale e specialista, tra l'altro, nei piccoli "Skeneimorpha". Diagnosi (olotipo): Conchiglia piccola, fragüe, trasparente, di forma planor- bide.La protoconca (fig.l e) é costituita da 0.7 giri di spira di cui la parte iniziale é scolpita da piccole e irregolari depres- sioni.La teleoconca é costituita da circa 2 giri di spira attraversati da deboli linee di accrescimento. I giri si toccano solo per un breve tratto piú o meno alia peri- feria del giro precedente e quindi la sutura risulta profonda e leggermente canaliculata. Spira arrotondata con la protoconca di poco sporgente nella parte superiore della stessa. Alia base della conchiglia é ben visibile per tutta la lunghezza della teleoconca, una evi- dente carena posizionata internamente all'ombelico. La bocea é di forma roton- deggiante con la parte inferiore legger- mente espansa in prossimitá della carena. La larghezza dell'ombelico é circa il 30% del diámetro delPintera con- chiglia. Dimensioni : Diámetro^ 1.1 mm. Opercolo e partí molli ancora scono- sciute. Distribuzzione: La specie sembra avere una distribuzione ristretta a poche localitá delle coste siciliane, ed il suo habitat non sembra essere mai superfi- ciale. Discussione : L'attribuzione di questi esemplari al genere Xylodiscula é da rite- nersi provvisoria in quanto solo lo studio delle partí molli potranno dame un'inquadramento tassonomico piú congeniale. La forma generale della con- chiglia in realtá corrisponde alie caratte- ristiche tipiche di questo genere, ma la protoconca differisce in quanto non ha uno sviluppo iperstrofico típico della famiglia Xylodisculidae Warén, 1992. 44 Bogi E BartolinI: Xylodiscula wareni n.sp., una nuova specie per le coste della Sicilia Figura 1. Xylodiscula wareni n. sp., Filicudi -50 m, olotipo (Museo di Storia Naturale del Mediter- ráneo di Livorno, Coll. Malac. N° Malacologia Vol. V n. 734). A: vista dall’alto; B: vista basale; C: vista frontale; D: dettaglio dell’ombelico; E: dettaglio della protoconca. Figura 1. Xylodiscula wareni n.sp., Filicudi -50 m, holotype (Museo di Storia Naturale del Mediterrá- neo di Livorno, Coll. Malac. N° Malacologia Vol. V n. 734). A: apical view; B: basal view; C: frontal view; D: detail ofthe umbilicus; E: detall ofthe protoconch. II genere Xylodiscula é attualmente rappresentato nel Mar Mediterráneo da due specie: X. boucheti Warén, Carrozza e Rocchini, 1992, e X. leus Warén, 1992. Warén stesso nel suo articolo (Warén, 1992) evidenzia la difficoltá nel distin- guere le due specie che differiscono quasi esclusivamente per il diámetro 45 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 dell'ombelico che é il 30-33 % del diáme- tro deH'intera conchiglia in X. boucheti mentre in X. lens é il 40%. La caratteri- stica principale che distingue X. wareni da queste due specie, come dalle altre non mediterranee appartenenti a questo genere, oltre alia diversa protoconca, é la presenza di una carena ben visibile alia base della conchiglia (Fig. IB). Abbiamo dubitato che gli esemplari potessero appartenere ad una specie dulciacquicola o terrestre, ma le nostre ricerche e l'opinioni di alcuni specialisti hanno escluso questa possibilitá. RINGRAZIAMENTI Un particolare ringraziamento al Dottor Ánders Warén del Museo Svedese di Storia Naturale di Stoccolma, per aver eseguito le foto al SEM e per i consigli dati nella rilettura critica dell' articolo, e all'a- BIBLIOGRAFIA Marshall, B.A., 1988. Skeneidae, Vitrinelli- dae and Orbitestellidae (Mollusca: Gastro- poda) associated with biogenic substraía from bathyal depths off New Zealand and New South Wales. Journal of Natural History, 22: 949-1004. La specie tipo del genere, Xylodi- scula vitrea Marshall, 1988, come puré X. eximia Marshall, 1988, originarle rispetti- vamente dell'Australia e della Nuova Zelanda, sono state tróvate su pezzi di legno affondati ed anche le specie descritte da Warén per il Mar Mediterrá- neo sono state raccolte viventi in un biotopo caratterizzato da fibre di Posido- nia e frammenti di legno affondati. Nei campioni di sedimento dove noi abbiamo trovato i pochi esemplari di X. wareni, non erano presenti frammenti di Posidonia. mico Edoardo Perna per aver messo a disposizione i suoi esemplari nonché le foto degli stessi. All'amico Ivano Niero per aver studiato gli esemplari come even- tuali appartenenti alia fauna continentale. Warén A., 1992. New and little known "Ske- neimorph" gastropods from the Mediterra- nean Sea and the adiacent Atlantic Ocean. Bol- lettino Malacologico, 27 (10-12):149-248. 46 © Sociedad Española de Malaca logia Iberus , 26 (1): 47-51, 2008 The colour white diminishes weight loss during aestivation in the arid-dwelling land snail Sphincterochila (Albea) can - didissima El color blanco disminuye la pérdida de peso durante la estivación en el caracol de medios áridos Sphincterochila (Albea) candidissima Gregorio MORENO-RUEDA* Recibido el 14-V-2007. Aceptado el 2-1-2008 ABSTRACT It has been suggested that white colour is beneficial for snails living ¡n arid environments. In this work, shell coloration in the arid-dwelling land snail Sphincterochila (Albea) can- didissima was manipulated during aestivation. Snails painted black lost more body weight than did control ones, presumably as a consequence of higher heat absorption. This sug- gests that light colour is advantageous for this land snail. RESUMEN Se ha sugerido que el color blanco es beneficioso para los caracoles en ambientes ári- dos. En el presente trabajo se manipula la coloración de la concha en el caracol de medios áridos Sphincterochila (Albea) candidissima durante la estivación. Los caracoles pintados de negro perdieron más peso que los caracoles que sirvieron como control, pre- sumiblemente como una consecuencia de una mayor absorción de calor. Esto sugiere que los colores claros son ventajosos para este caracol. KEY WORDS: Sphincterochila candidissima , arid environments, colouration. PALABRAS CLAVE: Sphincterochila candidissima , medios áridos, coloración. INTRODUCTION It is well established that tegument colour has important functions in camou- flage, as well as in communication (e.g., Badayev and Hill, 2000; Théry, Debut, Gómez and Casas, 2005; Exnerova, SVADORA, BARCALOVA, LANDOVA, Prokopova, Fuchs and Socha, 2006). The colour of teguments depends on the wavelengths that are reflected. Therefore, colouration affects the energy that is absorbed by the tegument, the amount being higher as the colour darkens. In this sense, animal colouration may also have a role in thermoregulation, espe- cially important for arid-dwelling animáis (Cloudsley-Thompson, 1978). Terrestrial molluscs are very susceptible to dehydration (Prior, 1985; Luchtel and Deyrup-Olsen, 2001), and therefore need adaptations to survive in arid envi- * Konrad Lorenz Institut für Vergleichende Verhaltensforschung, Ósterreischische Academie der Wissenschaften, SavoyenstraEe la, A- 1160, Wien (Austria) and Departamento de Biología Animal, Facultad de Ciencias, Universidad de Granada, E- 18071, Granada (Spain). 47 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 ronments. White colour may favour the success of land-snails in warm environ- ments: White shells have a higher reflectance of sunlight (Schmidt- Nielsen, Taylor and Shkolnik, 1971), and, as a consequence, land snails with light-coloured shells register lower body temperatures (Heath, 1975), thereby improving survival under high tempera- tures (Richardson, 1974). This translates as a selective pressure for whiter shells in arid environments and, in fact, some studies have correlated shell colour with environment temperature (Jones, 1973; but there are exceptions: Heller, 1984). The snails of the genus Sphincterochila have white shells. In Sierra Elvira (SE Spain), Sphincterochila (Albea) candidísi- ma (Draparnaud, 1801) is the most abun- dant gastropod (Moreno-Rueda, 2002). Sierra Elvira has an arid environment, and sheltering in protective microhabi- tats may be a vital strategy against dehy- dration (Steinberger, Grossman, Du- binsky and Shachak, 1983; Arad, Goldenberg and Heller, 1989; Cook, 2001). However, S. candidísima does not use refuges during drought periods (spring and summer) (Moreno-Rueda, 2007; Moreno-Rueda and Collantes- Martín, 2007). Because the shell of S. candidísima is puré white, I hypothe- sized that shell colour might contribute to the survival of S. candidísima in Sierra Elvira, explaining why this snail does not need refuges against dehydration. I investigated this hypothesis by manipu- lating the shell colour of S. candidísima during aestivation (painting some snails), and by examining the effect of this manipulation on the amount of body mass lost. About 80-90% of fresh body weight (shell not included) of Sphincterochila land snails is water, and, therefore, a decrease in body weight sug- gests a loss of water (Schmidt-Nielsen et al., 1971; Yom-Tov, 1971; Steinberg- er, Grossman and Dubinsky, 1981). METHODS This study was performed in Sierra Elvira (SE Spain, 37° 15' N, 3o 40' W), a small mountain range with a dry mesomediterranean climate (UNESCO, 1963). The study area undergoes five months of drought each year, with an averáge annual precipitation of 600-1000 mm (Alonso, López- Alcántara, Rivas and IbáÑez, 1985). It is, therefore, a dry zone for land snails. Table I presents cli- matic data during the study period, measured from the meteorological station of Pinos Puente, about three kilo- metres from the study area, and approx- imately at the same altitude (630 m. a.s.l.). Sphincterochila candidísima is the only species of the genus Sphincterochila in Sierra Elvira (Ruiz Ruiz, Cárcaba Pozo, Porras Crevillén and Arrébola Burgos, 2006). In the study area, this species begins aestivation in April-May (Moreno-Rueda, 2007; Moreno-Rueda and Collantes- Martín, 2007). This snail adheres to rock or vegetation during aestivation. For manipulation, snails were not sepa- rated from the substrate, because this could provoke dehydration in the snails (Luchtel and Deyrup-Olsen, 2001). For this reason, I could not measure body mass before treatment, but I col- lected 75 additional individuáis in order to analyse the relationship between shell morphology and body mass. The experiment started on 26 June 2005. Each individual found was sequentially assigned to the control group (C), to the control of manipula- tion group (CM), or to the experimental group (E). Manipulation in control group was only a mark for recognition. Snails in the CM group were painted in yellow with a marker. Paint covered approximately 50% of shell surface. In the experimental group, the shell was painted black with a marker in the same way as in CM group. In total, 52 snails were used in each group (n = 156). The study area was prospected two months later (26 August 2005). Snails found were collected and mea- sured (shell height and width) with a calliper (accuracy 0.01 mm.) and weighed with a digital balance (accu- racy 0.1 g.). 48 MORENO Rueda: Colour white and aestivation weight loss in Sphincterochila candidissima Table I. Climatic data of the meteorological station of Pinos Puente, located near of the study area, for the study period (06/26/2005 to 08/26/2005). Tabla I. Datos climáticos de la estación meteorológica de Pinos Puente, próxima a la zona de estudio, para el período de estudio (2610612005 a 26/08/2005). Mean S.E. Mínimum Máximum Daily maximal íemperature (9C) 36.8 0.36 30.7 42.9 Daily minimal temperature (9C) 17.6 0.30 12.7 22.8 Average daily temperature (9C) 27.0 0.27 23.4 31.3 Daily radiation (MJ/m2) 27.6 0.51 13.9 32.5 Daily precipitation (mm.) 0.03 0.02 0.00 0.80 Table II. Average weight on the day 08/26/2005, and shell height and width for the snails in the experimental (E), control (C) and control of manipulation (CM) groups. The last row shows the average weight after statistically controlling for shell height and width. The last column shows the results of ANOVA and ANCOVA. In brackets is the standard error. Tabla II. Peso promedio el día 26/08/2005, y altura y anchura de la concha para los caracoles en el grupo experimental (E), control (C) y control de la manipulación ( CM). La última fila muestra el peso promedio después de controlar estadísticamente por la altura y anchura de la concha. La última columna muestra los resultados de los tests de ANOVA y ANCOVA. Entre paréntesis el error estándar. E group n= 29 C group n= 34 CM group /7 = 30 F ANOVA d.f. P Weight (g.) 2.70 (0.09) 3.02 (0.09) 2.87 (0.09) 3.15 2, 90 <0.05 Width (mm.) 21.49 (0.22) 21.31 (0.21) 21.33 (0.22) 0.21 2, 90 0.81 Height (mm.) 16.54 (0.18) 16.77 (0.17) 16.37 (0.18) 1.33 2, 90 0.27 Weight (controlled for shell size) 2.69 (0.07) 3.00 (0.06) 2.91 (0.07) 6.28 2, 88 <0.003 The variables had a distribution similar to normal (Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, p > 0.05), and parametric statistics were used. An ANOVA was used to test the effect of the treatment on body weight, and an ANCOVA was used con- trolling by snail body size (height and width). For post hoc comparisons the Fisher LSD test was used. The Chi- square was used to test the probability of survival according to treatment. RESULTS In August, I recaptured 34 snails alive in the control group, 30 for the CM group, and 29 of the experimental group. The frequency of recaptures did not differ significantly between the three groups (x22= 1.12; p= 0.57). When indi- viduáis were collected in August, there were significant differences for body mass between the treatments (Table II). Individuáis of the experimental group weighed less than those in the control one (post hoc Fisher LSD, p = 0.01), while the average weight in the CM group was intermediate between the other two groups (post hoc, CM vs. C, p = 0.22; CM vs. E, p = 0.22). In the addi- tional sample of 75 individuáis, body mass was strongly predicted by shell morphology (Múltiple Regression Model; R2 = 0.81; F 2,72 = 149.0; p < 0.001; equation: Body mass = -5.16 (SE = 0.46; t72 = 11.2) + 0.28 (SE = 0.03; t72 = 10.2) x Width + 0.14 (SE = 0.03; t72 = 5.1) x Height). There were no significant dif- ferences for body size (height and 49 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 width) between the three groups (MANOVA, Wilks = 0.94; F4, ízs = 1.46; p = 0.22; Table II), suggesting that initial body mass did not differ among groups. When the analyses were repeated with shell height and width as a covariate, differences in weight between groups were accentuated (ANCOVA, Vi, 88 = 6.28; p < 0.003; Height effect: Fi, 88 = 10.90; p = 0.001; Width: Fi,88 = 21.98; p < 0.001; Table II). Differences between the control group and the experimental group increased in this analysis (post hoc, p < 0.001), while body weight in the CM group remained intermediate between the other two groups (CM vs. C, p = 0.08; CM vs. E, p = 0.08). DISCUSSION The findings of this experimental study show that shell colour alteration in Sphincterochila candidissima during aestivation had effects on weight loss, snails with shells painted black suffer- ing a quicker loss of weight than control snails. The most probable mechanism behind this result is that light reflection was lower in shells painted in black, and for this reason they trapped more heat, as shown in other studies with other species of snails (e.g., Heath, 1975). The higher the body temperature, the higher the water loss, decreasing body weight (Yom-Tov, 1971). Body size may affect the interaction between shell colour and heat absorption (Slotow, Goodfriend and Ward, 1993), but there were no differences in body size between the groups, and dif- ferences in weight remained significant after controlling statistically for shell morphology. This weight loss presum- ably harms fitness, increasing the risk of mortality, especially for the smallest individuáis (with less reserves), or in very dry years (Richardson, 1974). Moreover, the treatment lasted only two months (although the warmest), but S. candidissima aestivates for 5-7 months in the study area (Moreno-Rueda and Collantes-Martín, 2007), and there- fore, the effect should be more accentu- ated if the entire aestivation period is considered. The control of manipulation (CM) group, with shells painted in yellow, had weight valúes intermediate to the other two groups. In fact, this group is not a true control of manipulation, as colour was altered with respect to unmanipulated snails. Because their shells were darker than shells in the control group, but lighter than shells in the experimental group, the results support that weight loss is due to shell colour. As weight for the CM group was intermediate, if there was an effect of paint on weight, this cannot completely explain the differences between the control and the experimental group. Therefore, results presented here and in the literature strongly suggest that the white colour is advantageous for survival in arid-dwelling snails. The question arises as to why white colour is not more widespread in arid environ- ments (see, for example, Heller, 1984). Other selective mechanisms besides thermal selection act on shell colour, such as predation (Jones, Leith and Rawlings, 1977). Lighter shells, espe- cially those with a puré white colour as in Sphincterochila candidissima , are usually easier to detect by predators (Reed and Janzen, 1999). However, predation on Sphincterochila candidissima is rare due to its thick shell (Yanes, Suárez and Manrique, 1991), and thus the absence of a strong selection by predators in this species would favour the maintenance of puré white shells. In conclusión, this study, applying an experimental approach, supports the hypothesis that shell colour affects weight loss in arid-dwelling land-snails, and, as a consequence, fitness, by a mechanism mediated by thermoregula- tion. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Carlos Marfil Daza and José Luís Ros Santaella collaborated in the field work. David Nesbitt improved the English. 50 MORENO Rueda: Colour white and aestivation weight loss in Sphincterochila candidissima BIBLIOGRAPHY Alonso, M. R., López- Alcántara, A., Rivas, P. and IbáÑEZ, M., 1985. A biogeographic study of Iberus gualtierianus (L.) (Pulmonata: Helicidae). Soosiana, 13: 1-10. Arad, Z., Goldenberg, S. and Heller, ]., 1989. Resistance to desiccation and distribution pattems in the land snail Sphincterochila. Jour- nal ofZoology, 218: 353-364. Badyaev, A. V. and Hill, G. E., 2000. Evolu- tion of sexual dichromatism: contribution of carotenoid- versus melanin-based coloration. Biological Journal of the Linnean Society, 69: 153-172. Cloudsley-Thompson, J. L., 1978. Adaptive function of the colour s of desert animáis. Comparative Physiological Ecology, 1: 109-120. Cook, A., 2001. Behavioural ecology: On doing the right thing, in the right place at the right time. In Barker, G. M. (Ed.): The Biology ofTer- restrial Molluscs. CAB International. Walling- ford. Pp. 447-487. Exnerova, A., Svadora, K., Barcalova, S., Landova, E., Prokopova, M., Fuchs, R. and Socha, R., 2006. Importance of colour in the reaction of passerine predators to aposematic prey: experiments with mutants of Pyrrhocoris apterus (Heteroptera). Biological Journal ofthe Linnean Society, 88: 143-153. Heath, D. J., 1975. Colour, sunlight and inter- nal temperatures in the land-snail Cepaea nemoralis (L.). Oecologia, 19: 29-38. Heller, J., 1984. Shell colours of desert land- snails. Malacologia, 25: 355-359. Jones, J. S., 1973. Ecological genetics and natural selection in molluscs. Science, 182: 546-552. Jones, J. S., Leith, B. H. and Rawlings, P., 1977. Polymorphism in Cepaea: a problem with too many Solutions? Annual Review in Ecology and Systematics, 8: 109-143. Luchtel, D. L., Deyrup-Olsen, I., 2001. Body wall: form and function. In Barker, G. M. (Ed.): The Biology ofTerrestrial Molluscs. CAB International. Wallingford. Pp. 147-178. Moreno-Rueda, G., 2002. Selección de hábitat por Iberus gualtierianus, Rumina decollata y Sphincterochila candidissima (Gastropoda: Pul- monata) en una sierra del sureste español. Iberus, 20: 55-62. Moreno-Rueda, G., 2007. Refuge selection by two sympatric species of arid-dwelling land snails: Different adaptive strategies to achieve the same objective. Journal of Arid Enviro- ments, 68: 588-598. Moreno-Rueda, G. and Collantes-Martín, E., 2007. Ciclo anual de actividad del caracol Sphincterochila (Albea) candidissima (Dra- pamaud, 1801) en un medio semiárido. Iberus, 25: 49-56. Prior, D. ]., 1985. Water-regulatory behaviour in terrestrial gastropods. Biological Reviews, 60: 403-424. Reed, W. L. and Janzen, F. J., 1999. Natural selection by avian predators on size and colour of a freshwater snail ( Pomacea flage- llata ). Biological Journal of the Linnean Society, 67: 331-342. Richardson, A. M. M., 1974. Differential cli- ma tic selection in natural population of land snail Cepaea nemoralis. Nature, 247: 572-573. Ruiz Ruiz, A., Cárcaba Pozo, A., Porras Cre- villen, A. I. and Arrebola, J. R., 2006. Guía de los caracoles terrestres de Andalucía. Fun- dación Gypaetus, Seville. Schmidt-Nielsen, K., Taylor, C. R. and Shkolnik, A., 1971. Desert snails: problems of heat, water and food. Journal of Experi- mental Biology, 55: 385-398. Slotow, R., Goodfriend, W. and Ward, D., 1993. Shell colour polymorphism of the Negev desert landsnail, Trochoidea seetzeni: the importance of temperature and predation. Journal of Arid Environments, 24: 47-61. Steinberger, Y., Grossman, S. and Dubinsky, Z., 1981. Some aspects of the ecology of the desert snail Sphincterochila prophetarum in re- lation to energy and water flow. Oecologia, 50: 103-108. Steinberger, Y., Grossman, S., Dubinsky, Z. and Shachak, M., 1983. Stone microhabitats and the movement and activity of desert snails, Sphincterochila prophetarum. Malaco- logical Review, 16: 63-70. Théry, M., Debut, M., Gómez, D. and Casas, J., 2005. Specific color sensitivities of prey and predator explain camouflage in differ- ent visual Systems. Behavioral Ecology, 16 : 25- 29. UNESCO, 1963. Recherches sur la zone aride. Etude écologique de la zone méditerraéenne. Cañe bioclimatique de la zone méditerranéenne. Notice explicative. UNESCO. Paris. Yanes, M., Suárez, F. and Manrique, J., 1991. La cogujada montesina, Galerida theklae, como depredador del caracol Otala lactea: com- portamiento alimenticio y selección de presa. Ardeola, 38: 297-303. Yom-Tov, Y., 1971. Annual fluctuations in the water contení of desert snails. Malacological Review, 4: 121-126. 51 1 Iberus, 26 (1): 53-63, 2008 © Sociedad Española de Malacologta Notes on the genus Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854 (Gastropoda: Colloniidae) Notas sobre el género Anadema H. y A. Adams, 1854 (Gastropoda: Colloniidae) James H. MCLEAN* and Serge GOFAS** Recibido el 15-1-2008. Aceptado el 23-IV-2008 ABSTRACT Shell morphology and characters of the living animal of the poorly known, Atlantic Moroc- can species Anadema mocandrewii (Mórch, 1 864) are described and illustrated, based on beach collected specimens and a single live-collected specimen. The genus ¡s mono- typic and is assigned to the Colloniidae rather than Turbinidae because of the dome- shaped profile of the shell, open umbilicus, symmetrical tooth rows of the radula, lack of cephalic lappets, and the non-bicarinate ¡uvenile shell. Within the Colloniidae, it unusual for its relatively large mature shell, ¡uvenile shell with a keeled profile, and the lack of the secondary flap above the rachidian tooth. The species is regarded as sexually dimorphic, with the female shell having a raised periumbilical rim comparable to that of other tro- choideans modified for brooding by means of an enlarged umbilical cavity. RESUMEN Se describe e ilustra la morfología de la concha y del animal vivo de Anadema macan- drewii (Mórch, 1864), una especie poco conocida de la costa atlántica de Marruecos. El género es monotípico y se asigna a la familia Colloniidae, en lugar de a los Turbinidae por la forma abombada de la concha, el ombligo abierto, las filas de dientes radulares simétricas, la ausencia de lóbulos cefálicos y por su concha juvenil no bicarenada. Entre los Colloniidae, la especie es insólita por el tamaño relativamente grande de la concha adulta, el perfil de la concha juvenil con una quilla y la ausencia de un repliegue secun- dario sobre el diente raquídeo. Se considera que existe dimorfismo sexual en esta especie, pues la concha de la hembra tiene un reborde periumbilical elevado comparable con el de otros trocoideos modificados para incubar en una cavidad umbilical ampliada. KEY WORDS: Trochoidea, Morocco, brooding, endemism. PALABRAS CLAVE: Trochoidea, Marruecos, incubación, endemismo. INTRODUCTION The poorly known genus Anadema been regarded as a trochid, a liotiid, a H. and A. Adams, 1854 has at times colloniid, and a turbinid. Here we * Natural History Museum of Los Angeles County, California 90007, USA. ** Departamento de Biología Animal, Facultad de Ciencias, Universidad de Málaga, E-29071 Málaga, Spain. 53 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 review the taxonomy and update what is now known about the type and only known species of this genus. Anadema was proposed for the com- bination Omphalius (Anadema) caelata A. Adams, 1854, an Atlantic Moroccan species then thought to be a trochid in the absence of data on a calcified oper- culum. The species was not to be illus- trated until 19 years later but it was described in sufficient detail that its identity has never been in question. In his remarks that followed the Latin description of the species, Adams (1855: 39) wrote: "The character of this shell is so peculiar, on account of the internal spiral callus of the umbilicus, and the absence of characters which constitute allied forms, that I propose to consider it a subgenus of Omphalius , under the ñame of Anadema." The generic ñame Omphalius Philippi, 1847 now pertains to the Tegulinae, as defined by Hickman and McLean (1990). Ten years after the introduction of Anadema , Mórch (1864: 46) reported that a living specimen had been col- lected at the type locality. Morch stated that: "Omphalius (Anadema) caelata is provided with a calcareous operculum, which proves that this species may be removed to Turbo. As there is already a T. caelata, L., I propose for this species Turbo macandrewii." Morch's placement of the species in Turbo predated most work on the genera of turbiniform gas- tropods, and was based on the assump- tion that any turbiniform species with a calcareous operculum could only be a Turbo. This was unfair to Arthur Adams, but the ICZN rules about secondary homonymy forcé us to abandon the original ñame and to use the replace- ment ñame. This ñame honors the re- discoverer Robert McAndrew, who dredged a living specimen at Mogador (now Essaouira), the type locality of the species. The first shell figure known to us was provided still later by P. Fischer (1873), who used the replacement ñame Turbo macandrewii; this is a drawing that has been copied by many subsequent authors. The operculum has never been figured and the repository of the oper- culate specimen examined by Morch is unknown. Pilsbry (1888) ignored the replace- ment ñame and called it Leptothyra caelata, a not unreasonable choice, as it hardly resembles a species of Turbo. Lep- tothyra is now assigned to Colloniidae. Wenz (1938: 340) recognized the genus Anadema and placed it in the turbinid subfamily Liotiinae, under a broad definition in which he also included genera with calcareous oper- cula related to Homalopoma. Keen (1960: 270) placed Anadema in the more restricted Homalopomatinae, a group with fully calcified operculum, now subsumed under the turbinid sub- family Colloniinae in the classification of Hickman and McLean (1990). Nordseick (1968: 33) overlooked Mórch (1864) and placed it in Liotiinae: "Deckel spiralig und mit Kalkbesatz, nicht verdickt", apparently having assumed that it must have the opercular definition of the now understood Lioti- idae, in which the operculum is multi- spiral with calcareous beads on the outer surface. Resolution of the uncertainty is here provided by a preserved immature specimen with operculum, which was collected by the second author in 1991 at Essaouira (formerly Mogador), the type locality. We therefore take this opportu- nity to illustrate the species and confirm its placement. MATERIALS This report is based on material col- lected by the second author, which is now in the malacology collection of the Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris (MNHN). The external features of the single live-collected specimen were drawn with the animal fully extended. Subsequent preservation of the speci- men resulted in retraction within the shell. It was later critical-point dried for SEM examination, after which it was rehydrated for extraction of the radula for SEM analysis. 54 McLean AND GOFAS: Notes on the genus Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854 SYSTEM ATICS Superfamily Trochoidea Rafinesque, 1815 Hickman and McLean (1990) divided the family Turbinidae into a number of subfamilies, including Lioti- inae, Colloniinae, and Turbininae. However, Williams and Ozawa (2007) have reported that their data toward a molecular phylogeny of the family Turbinidae indicates that there are two well-supported groups within the previ- ously defined Turbinidae, which there- fore preeludes the placement of all of the subfamilies in the same family. In view of the ongoing reconsideration of the relationships among these groups. we here treat the Liotiidae, Colloniidae, and Turbinidae at the family level within the superfamily Trochoidea, which simply raises the ranking in the existing classification. This has already been adopted by McLean and Kiel (2007). Additionally, and without dis- cussion, Warén and Bouchet in Bouchet and Rocroi (2005: 245) have separated Turbinoidea and Trochoidea at the superfamily level, which also indicates that the higher classification for trochi- form vetigastropods is currently unset- tled. Family Colloniidae Cossmann, 1916 Subfamily Colloniinae Cossmann, 1916 Hickman and McLean (1990) pro- vided an extensive treatment of the Col- loniidae (then as Colloniinae), distin- guishing them from Turbinidae (then as Turbininae) on their smaller size, non-bi- carinate juvenile shell, lack of cephalic lappets, symmetrical tooth rows and inner lateral teeth that are not greatly enlarged. This is in contrast with the Turbinidae, characterized by larger size, bicarinate ju- venile shell, asymmetrical tooth rows and enlarged inner lateral teeth of the radula. McLean and Kiel (2007) distin- guished two subfamilies within the Col- loniidae, based on opercular morphol- ogy: the basal and mostly extinct Petropomatinae Cox in Knight et al., 1960, having a calcified operculum that is conical on the inner surface, with a fully multispiral pattern, and the Col- loniinae, in which the operculum is fíat on the inner surface with a multispiral pattern that changes to broadly pau- cispiral on the final volution. There is one living genus ( Liotipoma McLean and Kiel, 2007) of Petropomatinae, whereas there are numerous living and fossil genera of Colloniinae. Genus Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854 Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854: 430 [as subgenus of Omphalius Philippi, 1847]. Type species (monotypy): Omphalius ( Anadema ) caelata A. Adams in H. and A. Adams, 1854 [= Turbo macan- drewii Morch, 1864; not Turbo caelata Linnaeus, 1758]. Anadema macandrewii (Morch, 1864) (Figs. 1-23) Omphalius (Anadema) caelata A. Adams, in H and A. Adams, 1854: 430 [as type of new subgenus]. A. Adams, 1855: 39 [more detailed description]. Turbo macandrewii Morch, 1864: 46 [new ñame for secondary homonym Omphalius (Anadema) caelata, not Turbo caelata Linnaeus, 1758]. Turbo macandrewi. Fischer, 1873: 98, pl. 29, fig. 3 [first illustration]. Pasteur-Humbert, 1962: 132 [listed]. Leptothyra coelata [sic]. Pilsbry, 1888: 255, pl. 48, fig. 38 [figure after Fischer], 55 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Turbo (Anadema) macandrewi. Pallary, 1920: 63. Anadema coelata [sic]. Wenz, 1938: 340, fig. 795 [figure after Fischer]. Nordesick, 1968: 33, fig. 17.00 Anadema caelata. Keen, 1960: 270 [no figure]. Trew, 1992: 19 [listing of species described by H.& A. Adams]. Material examined: BMNH, 2 syntypes, BMNH 1968183, Mogador (now Essaouira), Atlantic Morocco (height 12.3 mm, diameter 16.6 mm; height 12.1 mm, diameter 17.3 mm). MNHN, Essaouira (formerly Mogador), Atlantic Morocco (31° 31' N, 9o 47' W), 1 live-collected male specimen and several beach-worn shells, leg. Gofas, 23 September 1991. MNHN, El Jadida, Atlantic Morocco (33° 16' N, 8o 29' W), beach worn shells, leg. Gofas, 26 September, 1991. MNHN, Mohammedia (for- merly Fedala), Atlantic Morocco (33° 43' N, 7o 21' W), 10 beach-worn shells, leg. Gofas, 1970-71. Description : Because the genus is monotypic, the description that follows applies both to the genus and species. Shell composed of 5 whorls with a low spire; profile dome-shaped, broader than high, suture not impressed; whorls weakly rounded, periphery of immature shell strongly projecting, forming a keel; periph- ery spinose in early stages, but losing spination at maturity; mature shell with a subangulate base; axial sculpture of fine, raised lamellae; spiral sculpture of low, strongly beaded cords; cords between suture and beaded basal cord increasing from three in juvenile to 6 at maturity; base slightly convex, basal cords of com- parable strength and beading to those of body whorl, increasing from three in juve- nile to 8 at maturity; spiral sculpture of both body whorl and base separated by narro w interspaces; axial lamellae well developed in interspaces but not expressed on surface of nodular beads; umbilicus open in juvenile shell, closed in male shell at basal diameter of 9 mm; remaining open in female shell; umbilicus of mature female shell bordered by raised, unbeaded peripheral cord that partially obstructs final quarter whorl and connects directly at base of aperture; aperture oblique, thickened within, descending slightly on final whorl; interior nacreous, inner wall of aperture of female shell smooth, edge with U-shaped sinus; shell colour brick-red. Shell dimensions. Mature female shell (Figs. 1-3): height 13.0, diameter 17.1 mm; immature male shell (Figs. 4- 6): height 4.9, diameter 9.1 mm; máximum dimensions possible for male shell unknown; immature female shell (Figs. 7-9), height 5.9, diameter 9.1 mm. (Right page) Figures 1-15. Anadema macandrewii (Morch, 1864). 1-3: Mature, beach-worn female shell, from Essaouira, Morocco (MNHN), 3 views, height 13.0 mm, diameter 17.1 mm; 4-6: live- collected, immature male specimen with operculum in place, same locality (MNHN), 3 views, height 4.9 mm, diameter 9.1 mm; 7-9: immature, beach-worn female shell, from Mohammedia, Morocco (MNHN), 3 views, height 5.9 mm, diameter 9.1 mm; 10, 11: juvenile beach-worn shell, from Essaouira, Morocco (MNHN), 2 views, height 2.1 mm, diameter 5.0 mm; 12,13: juvenile shell with protoconch showing in umbilical view, from Essaouira, Morocco (MNHN), 2 views, diameter 2.7 mm; 14, 15: operculum of specimen shown in Figures 4-6 and 16, exterior and inte- rior views, máximum diameter 2.1 mm. (Página derecha) Figuras 1-15. Anadema macandrewii (Morch, 1864). 1-3: Concha adulta, explayada, de una hembra, de Essaouira, Marruecos (MNHN), 3 vistas, altura 13,0 mm, diámetro 17,1 mm; 4-6: ejemplar macho inmaduro, recolectado vivo, con el opérculo cerrando la concha; misma localidad (MNHN), 3 vistas, altura 4,9 mm, diámetro 9,1 mm; 7-9: concha inmadura, explayada, de una hembra, de Mohammedia, Marruecos (MNHN), 3 vistas, altura 5,9 mm, diámetro 9,1 mm; 10, 11: concha juvenil explayada, de Essaouira, Marruecos (MNHN), 2 vistas, altura 2,1 mm, diámetro 5,0 mm; 12, 13: concha juvenil con la protoconcha visible desde el ombligo, de Essaouira, Marruecos (MNHN), 2 vistas, diámetro 2,7 mm; 14, 15: opérculo del ejemplar representado en las Figuras 4-6 y 16, vistas exterior e interior, diámetro máximo 2,1 mm. 56 McLean AND GOFAS: Notes on the genus Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854 57 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Figure 16. Anadema macandrewii (Morch, 1864). Drawing of living specimen shown in Figures 4-6. Figura 16. Anadema macandrewii (Morch , 1864). Dibujo del animal vivo, del mismo ejemplar de las Figuras 4-6. Juvenile shell (Figs. 10-13) not with raised axial lamellae, of low profile, exposing protoconch and early whorls in basal view; profile not equally bicari- nate, the upper carination spinose and more strongly projecting than lower, non-spinose carination; protoconch and first teleoconch whorl positioned slightly below level of second whorl. Operculum (Figs. 14-15) calcareous, thick, with a concavity at the base where the white outer surface is coloured light reddish-brown. There is a strong ridge and groove of similar width leading to the upper part, which bears strong pus- tules in the región adj acent to the col- umella; outer edge with a narrow groove; inner surface becoming broadly paucispiral in final volution. This oper- culum is chipped or somehow reduced at its inner edge, to the extent that the outline is not oval; the chitinous layer of the inner surface that shows at the lower left of Figure 15 is missing at the upper left. Flead-foot (Figs. 16-19). Head pro- portionally large, provided anteriorly with a snout terminating in a broad. (Right page) Figures 17-23. Anadema macandrewii (Morch, 1864). 17-19. Scanning electrón micrographs of critical-point dried specimen, same as shown in Figure 16. 17: general view of head-foot; 18: close-up of snout; note the absence of cephalic lappets; 19: close-up of right ante- rior bundle of epipodial tentacle. 20-23. Scanning electrón micrographs of the radula, same speci- men as Figure 16. 20: complete radula; 21: close-up of several complete rows; 22: detail of central and lateral teeth; 23: detail of marginal teeth. Abbreviations, ct: cephalic tentacle; et: epipodial tentacles; f: foot (pointing to propodium); sn: snout. (Página derecha) Figuras 17-23. Anadema macandrewii (Morch, 1864). 17-19. Micrografías elec- trónicas de barrido del ejemplar de la Figura 16 deshidratado por punto crítico. 17: vista general de la cabeza y del pie; 18: vista aumentada del hocico; nótese la ausencia de lóbulos cefálicos; 19: vista aumentada de un haz anterior derecho de tentáculos epipodiales. 20-23. Micrografías electrónicas de barrido de la rádula, ejemplar de la Figura 16. 20: radula completa; 21: vista aumentada de algunas filas completas; 22: detalle de los dientes centrales y laterales; 23: detalle de los dientes marginales. Abre- viaturas, ct: tentáculo cefálico; et: tentáculos epipodiales; f: pie (señalado el propodio); sn: hocico. 58 McLean AND GOFAS: Notes on the genus Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854 59 Iberusy 26 (1), 2008 flattened area surrounding the mouth, laterally with two prominent, smooth bulges containing rather large, black eyes and, next to these on the anterior side, two slender, villose cephalic tenta- cles; cephalic lappets lacking. Neck tobes present, rather symmetrical, undi- vided. Foot rather small, less than half the diametre of the shell when extended; each side of the epipodium provided in its anterior part with a cluster of three tentacles, the foremost on hardly more than a rounded bulge, the next two tapering and villose, hardly one-tenth of the cephalic tenta- cles in size; in the posterior part with two more tentacles similar in size and shape to the latter. Radula (Figs. 20-23) strikingly sym- metrical, with broad rachidian having lateral extensions, and moderately long, tapered overhanging cusps; with four pairs of similar lateral teeth, which are elbowed like the rachidian and extend above the shaft of the next tooth; shaft of fifth lateral tooth not in cióse contact with shaft of fourth lateral tooth; this tooth broad on both sides, with a less prominent cusp than those of the inner lateral teeth or any of the marginal teeth; innermost pair of marginal teeth with short overhanging cusps, followed by four pairs of marginal teeth with longer cusps; outer marginal teeth with longer shafts, overhanging cusps shorter and deeply serrate on sides of the cusps. The live-collected specimen (Figs. 4- 6, 16) reported here (diameter 9.1 mm) has a nearly closed umbilicus and a gen- erally unmodified base, with no indica- tion of the incipient formation of the DISCUSSION Knowledge of the genus Anadema has been slow to develop because the species A. macandrewii lives in the sublit- toral zone on rocky bottoms exposed to strong surf, where there have appar- ently been few efforts at collecting by diving due to the exposure, low visibil- ity, and extensive muddy bottoms off- shore in relatively shallow water. The projecting rim of mature female shells; it is therefore identified as a male speci- men. There are immature beach-worn shells of about 10 mm in diameter (Figs. 7-9), which are considered to be female shells, having the beginning of a project- ing rim that will form the strong peri- umbilical angulation of the large female shell (Fig. 2). It is evident that male shells are much less frequent among the beach-worn shells. Because the male shell with an operculum is larger than any of the comparable beach-worn shells considered to be male shells, and because the lip is immature, there is no indication from the material at hand as to the possible size reached by male shells. It may be that male shells can reach a size similar to that of female shells. If so, they would differ from female shells in having a rounded umbilical wall, rather than the project- ing umbilical rim of female shells. Both male and female shells seal the umbilicus upon attaining a half-grown diameter of about 10 mm. The female shell then proceeds to form a secondary umbilicus for the brooding cavity. The initial sealing of the umbilicus may help to protect the shell from exposure due to erosión of the apical whorls, which is also avoided in most marine gastropods by shell deposition of a plug from within. There is variation in the peripheral spination of immature stages. The spination of the live-collected male specimen (Figs. 4-6) is stronger than that of any of the beach-worn shells of similar size, whether identified as male or female. single live-collected specimen reported here from the intertidal zone is an unusual record for the species. Systematic position: There is now no doubt that Anadema should be assigned to the family Colloniidae, on the basis of shell and opercular characters, charac- ters of the external anatomy, and the radula. The fine lamellar sculpture had 60 McLean AND GOFAS: Notes on the genus Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854 brought to mind a comparison with Liotiidae, but that is ruled out by the calcareous operculum. There are many possibilities for opercular morphology in the Colloni- idae, just as there are in the Turbinidae (see Vermeij and Williams, 2007). There is no comparative work on the colloniid operculum, but the operculum of Anadema is within the range of possi- ble expression for the family. Immature shells of the Mediterranean turbinid species Bolma rugosa (Linnaeus, 1767) have a resemblance to Anadema macan- drewii in having a somewhat similar operculum and a spinose peripheral car- ination, but mature specimens of Bolma are much larger, have a higher profile and an impressed suture, a closed umbilicus and an expansive columellar callus that forms a columellar shield nearly as broad as the aperture. For a review of Bolma , see Beu and Ponder (1979). Anadema macandrewii differs from all illustrated species of Bolma in its low, dome-shaped profile and open umbili- cus at maturity. The keeled early juvenile shells indi- cate that early sculpture is not evenly bicarinate, which is a defining feature for Turbinidae, according to the restricted definition provided by Hickman and McLean (1990: 55) at the previously recognized subfamily level. Most colloniids have the juvenile shell with even spiral cords, but there are exceptions to that generalization. The keeled early stage brings to mind the recently described Liotipoma McLean and Kiel, 2007, in the basal subfamily Petropomatinae, which also has an early keel. The lack of cephalic lappets is consis- tent with the assignment to Colloniidae, in which lappets are lacking (Hickman and McLean, 1990). This is in contrast to the Turbinidae, in which the lappets are well-developed (Hickman and McLean, 1990), albeit they are small in the Mediterranean Bolma rugosa. The radular morphology of Anadema provides convincing evidence that it is colloniid rather than turbinid because the tooth rows are perfectly symmetri- cal, and the inner margináis are not greatly enlarged. In turbinids, the asym- metrical tooth row causes the tooth alignment to be skewed, because the large inner laterals must altérnate in zipper fashion when the radula is longi- tudinally folded (as detailed by Hickman and McLean, 1990). Anadema is highly unusual within Colloniidae for its large size and its keeled early stage. With its máximum shell diameter of 17 mm, it may well be the largest known colloniid. All of the colloniid radulae illustrated by Hickman and McLean (1990) have a secondary flap that projects above the rachidian tooth; the radula of Anadema is unusual in not having the secondary flap. In addition, the morphology of the fifth lateral of Anadema seems also to be unusual for the family. Larval brooding: Brooding of larvae within the umbilical cavity has been broadly reported among the Trochoidea (Hickman, 1992: 254). In the Trochidae it is known in Margantes vorticiferus, as shown by Lindberg and Doberteen (1981). In Liotiidae, it has been reported for Arene socorroensis by Shasky (1968) and again by Hertz (1998), and for "Munditia" subquadrata it has been reported by Burn (1976). In the Colloni- idae, it is known in the recently described genus Liotipoma, as reported by McLean and Kiel (2007). Its occur- rence in Anadema is therefore the second known example. In each of these cases, the umbilical rim of the female shell is raised to increase the volume of the umbilical cavity. Such a modification can be the only explanation for the strongly raised umbilical rim of what we interpret as the female shells of Anadema macandrewii. The size reached by the shells of males remains to be discovered; it is possible that mature male shells are smaller than female shells. In support of that possibility, the operculum illus- trated here shows the expansión of the final volution that is characteristic of a mature operculum. However, this shell is somewhat immature because the final lip is not thickened. All beach-worn 61 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 male shells in the material on hand seem to be immature. The immature male shells are represented by fewer specimens than the larger shells attrib- uted to, for reasons unknown. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We thank Philippe Bouchet and Vir- ginie Heros of the MNHN for arranging the loan of the Anadema specimens. Illustrations of shells (from photos by BIBLIOGRAPHY Adams, H., and Adams, A., 1854. Genera of Re- cent Mollusca, vol. 1. London, John Van Voorst, 484 pp. Adams, A., 1855. Further contributions towards the natural history of the Trochi- dae; with a description of a new genus, and of several new species, from the Cumingian Collection. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, for 1854: 37-41, pl. 27. Bellon-Humbert, C., 1974 ("1973")- Les Mol- lusques marins testacés du Maroc. Catalogue non critique. Premier supplément. Travaux de l'Institut Scientifique Chérifien, serie Zoologique, 37, 1-144, 23. pls. Beu, A. G., and Ponder, W. F., 1979. A revisión of the species of Bolma Risso, 1826 (Gas- tropoda: Turbinidae). Records ofthe Australian Museum, 32 (1): 1-68. Bouchet, P., and Rocroi, J. P., 2005. Classifi- cation and Nomenclátor of gastropod fami- lies. Malacologia, 47 (1-2): 1-397. Burn, R., 1976. Shell with a built-in nest. Aus- tralian Shell News, 16: 3. Fischer, P., 1873. Genre Turbo. Species General et Iconographie des Coquilles Vivantes [L. C. Kiener, continué par P. Fischer]. 128 pp., pls. 1-42. Hertz, C. M., 1998. Arene socorroensis (Strong, 1934) with nestling nepionic larvae. The Fes- tivus, 30 (5): 65. Hickman, C. S., 1992. Reproduction and de- velopment of trochacean gastropods. The Veliger, 35 (4): 245-272. Hickman, C. S. and McLean, J. H., 1990. Sys- tematic revisión and suprageneric classifi- cation of trochacean gastropods. Natural His- tory Museum ofLos Angeles County, Science Se- ries, 35: 1-169. the first author) were prepared in Photo- shop by Michelle Schwengel (formerly LACM) and píate preparation for the shells was completed by Ángel Valdés (formerly LACM). Critical-point dried preparation of the live-collected speci- men and the SEM views of the head- foot, as well as the SEM illustrations of the radula, were provided by Daniel L. Geiger of the Santa Barbara Museum of Natural FFistory. We thank the reviewers for their suggestions, which led to improvements in the paper. Keen, A. M., 1960. [Recent Archaeogastropoda]. In Knight, J. B., L. R. Cox, A. M. Keen, R. L. Batten, E. L. Yochelson, and R. Robertson. 1960. Systematic descriptions (Archaeogas- tropoda). In Moore, R. C. (Ed.): Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology, Part I, Mollusca 1, pp. 169-310, Geological Society of America and University of Kansas Press. Lindberg, D. R. and Doberteen, R. A., 1981. Umbilical brood protection and sexual di- morphism in the boreal Pacific trochid gas- tropod, Margantes vorticiferus Dalí. Interna- tional Journal of Invertebrate Reproduction, 3: 347-355. Mórch, O. A. L., 1864. Notes on shells. Amer- ican Journal of Conchology , 4: 46. McLean, J. H. and Kiel, S., 2007. Cretaceous and living Colloniidae of the redefined sub- family Petropomatinae, with two new gen- era and one new species, with notes on op- ercular evolution in turbinoideans, and the fossil record of Liotiidae (Vetigastropoda: Turbinoidea). Palaontologische Zeitschrift, 81 (3): 254-266. Nordsieck, F., 1968. Die europaischen Meeres- Gehduseschnecken (Prosobranchia) von Eismeer bis Kapverden und Mittelmeer. Gustav Fischer Verlag, Stuttgart, 273 pp. Pallary, P., 1920. Exploration scientifique du Maroc organisée par la Société de Géographie de París et continuée par la Société des Sciences Na- turelles du Maroc. Deuxiéme fascicule. Mala- cologie (1912). Larose, Rabat and París, 108 p., 1 pl., 1 map. Pasteur-Humbert, C., 1962. Les mollusques marine testacés du Maroc. Catalogue non critique. I. Les Gasteropodes. Travaux de ITn- stitut Scientifique Chérifien, serie Zoologie, 23: 1-245. 62 McLean AND GOFAS: Notes on the genus Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854 Pilsbry, H. A., 1888. Phasianellinae, Turbinidae, Delphinulinae. Manual of Conchology, vol. 10, 323 pp., 69 pls. [Neritidae, Adeorbiidae, Cy- clostrematidae, Liotiidae in this vol. by George W. Tryon, Jr.] Shasky, D., 1969. Observations on Rósenla nido- rum (Pilsbry) and Arene socorroensis (Strong). The American Malacological Union, Annual Report for 1967: 74. Trew, A., 1992. Henry and Arthur Adams's new molluscan ñames. National Museum of Wales, Cardiff, 63 pp. Vermeij, G. J., and Williams, S. T., 2007. Pre- dation and the geography of opercular thick- ness in turbinid gastropods. Journal of Mol- luscan Studies, 73: 67-73. Wenz, W., 1938. Gastropoda. Handbuch der Palao- zoologie, vol. 6. Teil 1: Allgemeiner Teil und Prosobranchia, Berlin, 1639 pp. Williams, S. T. and Ozawa, T., 2006. Molecu- lar phylogeny suggests polyphyly of both the turban shells (family Turbinidae) and the superfamily Trochoidea (Mollusca: Veti- gastropoda). Molecular Phylogenetics and Evo- lution, 39: 33-51. 63 Iberus, 26 (1): 65-68, 2008 © Sociedad Española de Malacología A new species of Mangelia (Turridae: Mangeliinae) from the Mediterranean Sea Una nueva especie de Mangelia (Turridae: Mangeliinae) del Mediterráneo Charles CACHIA* and Constantine MIFSUD** Recibido el 17-VII-2007. Aceptado el 12-III-2008 ABSTRACT A new species Mangelia melitensis nov. sp., from Malta, is introduced and compared with other similar congeneric species. RESUMEN Se describe una nueva especie Mangelia melitensis, de Malta, y se compara con especies congenéricas de aspecto similar. KEY WORDS: Mollusca, Conoidea, Turridae, Mangeliinae, Mangelia nov. sp., Mediterranean. PALABRAS CLAVE: Mollusca, Conoidea, Turridae, Mangeliinae, Mangelia nov. sp., Mediterráneo. INTRODUCTION The genus Mangelia is represented in the Mediterranean Sea by about 28 species (CLEMAM 2007). The shells are slender, fusiform in shape, with a sculp- ture consisting of axial, and often spiral sculpture. The siphonal canal is short and open and the columella is smooth without any processes. The mollusc has a wide foot, long tentacles with eyes sit- uated on the sides of the stalks and at about 2/ 3 their height, a long siphon and the body is mostly of a transparent white colouration, but sometimes with opaque coloured streaks or blotches, especially on the siphon. The radula consists of hollow marginal teeth, rarely barbed, with an irregular basal swelling (McLean, 1971). The animal lacks an operculum. The diet consists mainly of * 1, Alley 1, St. Catherine Street, Qormi QRM, Malta ** 5, Triq ir-Rghajja, Rabat RBT 2486, Malta polychaete worms, sometimes larger than the mollusc itself. (C. M. pers. obs.) Certain authors (Bouquoy, Dautzenberg and Dollfus, 1883; Powell, 1966; van Aartsen and Fehr de Wal, 1978) have proposed that the Mediterranean species classification should be separated into two genera, Mangelia (Risso, 1826) type species Man- gelia attenuata (Montagu, 1803) and Mangiliella (B.D.D., 1826) type species Mangiliella multilineolata (Deshayes, 1836). The proposition is based on the type of development of the protoconch. Mangelia has a multi-spiral or plank- totrophic type of protoconch, usually consisting of 2 l/i or more whorls while Mangiliella has a paucispiral or direct type of protoconch consisting of 1 1 /lio 65 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 2 whorls. Although this arrangement is very convenient for separating the species, Bouchet (1990) advised against such methods for creating genera and subgenera in this already problematic family. The Mediterranean species have been dealt with by several authors (Nordsieck, 1977; van Aartsen and Fehr de Wal, 1978; Sabelli, Giannuzzi- -Savelli and Bedulli, 1990; Cachia, Mifsud and Sammut, 2001; Gruppo Malacologico Livornese and Gruppo Malacologica Romagnolo, 2005). During our ongoing research on the marine mollusca which inhabit the coasts of the Maltese Islands, we have come across many specimens of a dis- tinct Mangelia species which is new to Science. It will be introduced herein. SYSTEMATICS Superfamily Conoidea Vaught, 1989 Family Turridae Swainson, 1840 Subfamily Mangeliinae Vaught, 1989 Genus Mangelia Risso, 1826 Mangelia melitensis nov. sp. (Figs. 1, 2) Material studied: All studied material is from the Maltese Islands. Holotvpe. collection number BMNH 20070312 (H= 6mm, W= 2.5mm), and two paratypes, collection number BMNH 20070313, off Gnejna Bay, in sand and algae from 40 m., x-2006, The Natural History Museum, London. Three paratypes, off Ras il-Wahx, 35 m., ix-1992, collection number MNHN 9988, Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, París. Three paratypes, off Rdum id-Delli, 50 m., ix-2006, collection number. TAU MO 57001, National Collections of Natural History, Department of Zoology, Tel Aviv University. Four paratypes, off Ras il-Wahx, 25-30 m., ix-1992, and three paratypes, St Thomas Bay, 3-4 m., viii-1987, National Museum of Natural History (Mdina, Malta). Other Paratypes: Salina Bay, 4 m viii-2000, 21 shells; off Rdum id-Delli, 60 m, viii-2006, 5 shells; off Cirkewwa Point, 34 m, viii-1996, 14 shells, in prívate collection of Charles Cachia. [Coll. No 1185]. Off St. Paul's Bay, 40-50 m., ix-1986, 3 shells; Qammieh, Cumnija, 50 m., viii-1986, 4 shells; St. Thomas Bay, 3-4 m., viii-1987, 11 shells; Bahar ic-Caghaq, beached, i-1991, 5 shells; Gozo Island, Dwejra, Coral cave, in sand, 25 m., 1 shell, 9-vi-2001 (leg. Anthony Sammut); off Golden Bay, 40 m, iii-1991, 9 shells; off Ras il-Wahx, 25-30 m., ix-1992, 31 shells off Rdum id- Delli, 50 m., ix-2006, 9 shells, in prívate collection of Constantine Mifsud [coll. No. M1601]. Off Ras il-Wahx, 25-30 m., ix-1992, 2 shells, in prívate collection of Charles Sammut. Salina Bay, 4 m., viii-1998, 2 shells (C. Cachia leg.), in prívate collection of Gert Lindner. Type locality: Gnejna Bay, Maltese Islands. Etymology: Named after the type locality. Description : Shell small, rather fragüe, fusiform, typical of the genus. Proto- conch consists of 2 1 ¡i, rounded, trans- parent white, glassy whorls, the last with a few small, close-set axial riblets crossed by spiral micro-striae. Teleoconch con- sists of up to four whorls which are sub- angulated at their adapical third and curving regularly towards the suture. Sculpture of 8-9 narrow, flexuous, slight- ly opisthocline, axial ribs which continué to the base. Their interspaces are about twice as wide. The whole surface of the shell is covered with dense micro-spiral striae of about the same thickness and close-set axial growth lines, producing an iridescent pattern. There are about 45- 50 of these micro-spiral striae at the penultimate whorl. There are also 5-6 well spaced, thicker spiral chords at the base of the shell, near the siphonal canal. Aperture about half height of shell. Out- er lip sharp, thin and fragüe, thickened internally, with its topmost part clearly curved. Lip varix present in some speci- mens. Sinus shallow. Columella smooth. 66 Cachia AND MlFSUD: A new species of Mangelia from the Mediterranean Sea Figure 1. Mangelia melitensis nov. sp., shells. A: holotype from off Gnejna Bay, in sand and algae, 40 m (height 6 mm); B: paratype from the type locality (height 6 mm); C, D: paratype from off Ras il-Wahx, 25-30 m (height 6.1 mm). Figura 1. Mangelia melitensis nov. sp., conchas. A: holotipo, frente a Gnejna Bay, en arena y algas, 40 m (altura 6 mm); B: paratipo de la localidad tipo (altura 6 mm); C, D: paratipo, frente a Ras il—Wahx, 25-30 m (altura 6,1 mm). Siphonal canal short and wide. The shell colour is white or beige. Rarely, some specimens are decorated with four, faint, brownish spiral bands or with tiny, brown sub-sutural blotches on the penultimate whorl, while others have a dark blotch at the middle of the exterior of the outer lip. A single specimen is completely brown. DISCUSSION M. melitensis nov. sp. had already been introduced as Mangelia sp. A. in Cachia et al. (2001). It differs from all the other Mediterranean forms of the M. unifasciata (Deshayes, 1835) complex, to which it is very similar, by the lack of bold spiral cords on its whorls. It is similar in this respect to M. costulata Risso, 1826 [= M. smithii (Forbes, 1840)], but in that species the spiral striae are fewer, flatter, much bolder, and continuous, not crossed by growth lines, while their interspaces are deeply incised. Mangelia costulata never forms a thickened rib on the The animal is transparent white with large black eyes at about two-thirds of the height of the tentacle stems. The foot has opaque white spots, while the siphon has small opaque yellowish spots. There is no operculum. The species is found near or in Posi- donia oceánica (Linnaeus) Delile, substra- tum at depths of 3 to 50 metres. aperture, unlike the present species: Moreover, in M. costulata the last proto- conch whorl has a bold reticulate type of sculpture, whilst in M. melitensis nov. sp. this whorl has only close-set flex- uous axials with spiral micro-striae. M. costulata usually has a continuous wide brown band on the ultimate whorl and the animal has a bright orange spotted siphon. Mangelia melitensis nov. sp., also offers similarities to Mangelia costata (Donovan, 1804). In that species however the whorls are very evenly convex not somewhat subangulated as 67 ikrus, 26 (1), 2008 Figure 2. Mangelia melitensis nov. sp., scanning electrón micrographs, same paratype as Figures 1C-D. A: protoconch; B: detail of the sculpture on a spire whorl. Figure 2. Mangelia melitensis nov. sp., vistas en microscopía electrónica, mismo paratipo que las Figura 1 C-D. A: protoconcha; B: detalle de la escultura en una vuelta de la espira. in Mangelia melitensis nov. sp. The shell is also smaller, rather glossy, differently coloured, of a more fusiform aspect and with a slightly different protoconch. The animal is completely white. Distribution: The Maltese Islands. The authors have not come across any specimens of M. melitensis nov. sp. from any other Mediterranean locality. BIBLIOGRAPHY Buquoy, E., Dautzenberg, P. and Dollfus, G., 1882-1886. Les Mollusques marins du Rous- sillon. I: Gastropodes. París, Bailliére, 570 pp. Bouchet, P., 1990. Turrid genera and mode of development: The use and abuse of proto- conch morphology. Malacologia, 32 (1): 69-77. Cachia, C., Mifsud, C. and Sammut, P., 2001. The Marine Mollusca of the Maltese Islands, Part 3 Neogastropoda, Backhuys Publishers, 266 pp.. Leiden. CLEMAM, Unitas Malacologica; Checklist of European Marine Mollusca: Web Page: http: / / www.somali.asso.fr /clemam/bio- taxis.php [accessed 5-vi-2007] Gruppo Malacologico Livornese and Gruppo Malacologico Romagnolo, 2005. Nota sulle Mangelia Mediterranee. Notiziario S.I.M., 23 (9-12): 22-33. MacLean, J. H., 1971. A revised classification of the Family Turridae, with the proposal of new Subfamilies, genera and subgenera from the eastem Pacific. The Veliger, 14 (1): 114-130. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We would like to thank our colleague P. Sammut (Rabat, Malta) for revising the manuscript and G. Lindner (Germany) for his kind disposition. The scanning elec- trón micrographs for this paper were pro- duced at the University of Málaga with the help of Gregorio Martín Caballero. Mifsud, C., 1998. The molluscan species living in Maltese Posidonia meadows. La Conchiglia, 30 (287): 37-48, 61. Nordsieck, F., 1977. Turridae of the European Seas. "La Pirámide" for La Conchiglia, 131 pp. Rome. Nordsieck, F., 1982. Die europaischen Meeres- Gehauseschnecken. 2nd edition. 539 pp. Gus- tav Fischer, Stuttgart Powell, A. W. B. 1966. The Molluscan families Speightiidae and Turridae. Bulletin of the Auckland Institute and Museum, 5, 184 pp. + 23 plates. New Zealand. Sabelli, B., Gianuzzi-Savelli, R. and Bedulli, D., 1990. Catalogo annotato dei molluschi marini del Mediterráneo, S. I. M. Librería Nat- uralística Bolognese, Vol. 1. xiv, 1-348. Bologna. van Aarsten, J. J. and Fehr de Wahl, M.C., 1978. The sub family Mangeliinae Fischer, 1887 in the Mediterranean. Conchiglie, 14 (3- 6): 97-110. 68 © Sociedad Española de Malacologí Iberas , 26 (1): 69-80, 2008 Catálogo de los bivalvos marinos del sector central del Golfo de Valencia (España) Checklist of the marine bivalves in the central sector of the Gulf of Valencia (Spain) Jorge C. TAMAYO GOYA* Recibido el 12-11-2007. Aceptado el 31-III-2008 RESUMEN Se presenta una lista con 1 84 especies de Bivalvos marinos citados en la literatura y rea> lectados por el autor entre 1998 y 2008, en la costa del Golfo de Valencia, sector cen- tral: 39° 42' N, 0o 12' W (Playa de Canet de Berenguer, Sagunto) - 38° 55' N, 0o 03# W (Playa de Oliva), Mediterráneo occidental. Cari fervensis se cita por primera vez en ¡a zona y se confirma la existencia de poblaciones establecidas de Eastonia rugosa, Fulvia fragilis y Lentidium mediterraneum. ABSTRACT A list is presented with 1 84 species of marine Bivalves cited in the literature or collected by the author between 1 998 and 2007, along the coast of Gulf of Valencia, central sec- tor: 39° 42' N, 0o 12' W (Playa de Canet de Berenguer, Sagunto) - 38° 55' N, 0o 03' W (Playa de Oliva), Western Mediterranean. Gari fervensis is cited for the first time in the area and the occurrence of established populations is confirmed for Eastonia rugosa, Ful- via fragilis and Lentidium mediterraneum. PALABRAS CLAVE: Catálogo, moluscos, bivalvos, Golfo de Valencia, Mar Mediterráneo. KEY WORDS: Checklist, molluscs, bivalves, Gulf of Valencia, Mediterranean Sea. INTRODUCCIÓN En este trabajo se presenta una actua- lización de la lista faunística de moluscos bivalvos de la Bahía de Valencia. Estos complementan un catálogo reciente- mente publicado (Oliver Baldoví, 2007) donde se aporta una actualización de Gasterópodos marinos testáceos de la zona sur del Golfo de Valencia. La gran mayoría de las conchas reco- lectadas son explayadas, por lo que no se puede indicar su hábitat originario. En mucha menor medida, se han obtenido buceando a pulmón-con tubo (entre -2 y -3 m) o recogidas por una embarcación "marisquera" faenando a escasos metros de la costa (zona infralitoral). Las recogi- das de muestras se han ido realizando a lo largo de todas las estaciones entre los años 1998 y 2008 y no se ha seguido una metodología concreta. Los sustratos sedimentarios que constituyen el hábitat de las comunida- des presentes en el piso infralitoral son, las correspondientes a: arenas finas * C/Polo y Peyrolón, 37, izda 16, 46201, Valencia. 69 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Figura 1 . Localidades de muestreo en el Golfo de Valencia. Figure 1. Sampling sites in Gulf of Valencia. superficiales, arenas finas bien calibra- das (entre -2/ -3 m. y -20/ -25 m.), arenas finas fangosas (entre -20/-25 m. y -35/- 40 m.), arenas con proporciones peque- ñas de finos (<15%) (consideradas como transición entre ambos sustratos) y los fondos detríticos. El sustrato rocoso está presente en mucha menor medida, lo mismo que las praderas de Posidonia oceánica (en mucha mayor proporción de mata muerta que degradada, y que suele extenderse en una distribución batimé- trica entre -5 m y -20 m), así como la Cymodocea nodosa y la Caulerpa prolifera. Las arenas gruesas y gravillas, ocupan franjas a profundidades variables y sujetas a corrientes marinas. A continuación en profundidad, en la plataforma continental, está el piso circalitoral (entre -40 m. y -100 m.), de escasa pendiente, en el que están pre- sentes los fondos detríticos costeros. Los fondos fangosos terrígenos (a partir de - 100/-150 m.) se extienden por zonas muy amplias del fondo marino. El litoral en estudio, eminentemente sedimentario, se caracteriza por la suce- sión casi continuada de playas de arena fina, sólo interrumpidas por las instala- ciones portuarias, las desembocaduras fluviales (áreas de fondos fangosos) y el Cabo de Cullera (acantilado mediano) Las poblaciones en cuyas playas se han efectuado la recogida de ejemplares son colindantes entre sí y han sido agru- padas, de norte a sur, en las siguientes subzonas (Fig. 1), siendo la B y la D en donde mayor número de muéstreos se han realizado: A: (Canet d'En Berenguer), Sagunto, Puzol y El Puig. Predominan las arenas finas bien calibradas, en mucha menor medida las de arenas finas fangosas y las extensiones de mata muerta de Posi- donia. El puerto de Sagunto y el puerto deportivo de Canet de Berenguer, la planta siderúrgica de Sagunto, el emisa- rio de Canet de Berenguer, y la desem- bocadura del río Palancia, son agentes determinantes en la configuración sedi- mentaria de esta zona del litoral. 70 Tamayo GOYA: Catálogo de los bivalvos marinos del sector central del Golfo de Valencia B: Puebla de Farnals, Massamagrell, Meliana, Alboraya y las playas al norte de Valencia. Las arenas finas fangosas predominan sobre las arenas finas bien calibradas. Es de mencionar el sustrato rocoso frente al Puerto de Valencia y las extensiones de mata muerta de Posidonia, en mayor superficie que las de la subzona A. Él puerto deportivo de Port sa Playa, el Barranco de Carraixet y el emisario de Vera (al norte del Puerto de Valencia), son los agentes de esta subzona. C: Playas al sur de Valencia. Hay mucho mayor predominio de las arenas finas bien calibradas sobre las arenas finas fangosas. El Puerto de Valencia, la desembocadura del río Turia, el emisa- rio del sur del Puerto y las Golas del Pujol y de El Perellonet (provenientes de La Albufera), son los agentes a destacar. D: Sueca y Cullera . Es la subzona con mayor proporción de arenas finas bien calibradas y con menor de finas fangosas en el área de estudio. A reseñar también, la presencia de mata muerta de Posidonia en el afloramiento rocoso frente a Cullera. Cabe mencionar en esta subzona, la desembocadura del Jucar y las Golas de El Perelló y la del Estany. E: Tavernes de la Valldigna, Xeraco, Xeresa, Gandía, Daimuz, Guardamar, Miramar, Piles y Oliva. Las arenas finas fangosas predominan sobre las finas bien calibradas. Frente a Gandía existe otro enclave rocoso con presencia de Posidonia. Los puertos de Gandía y Oliva, constituyen lo más destacable como agentes determinantes. SISTEMÁTICA En la Tabla I se presenta el listado de especies encontradas en el área de estudio, junto con el número de especí- menes encontrados, sus sectores de dis- tribución y citas bibliográficas. Esta lista ha sido ordenada de acuerdo con la cla- sificación propuesta por CLEMAM. Check List of European Marine Mollusca: chttp:// www.somali- asso.fr/ demarro . DISCUSIÓN Glycymeris violacescens (Lamarck, 1819) Es una especie muy presente en gran parte del litoral de Valencia que con fre- cuencia se muestra con un polimorfismo y policromía muy característicos (Fig. 2), predominando el contorno de la concha menos subcuadrangular, muchas veces más oblicua; el color gris negruzco- azulado, principalmente en la mitad superior y umbo, combinado con los colores tierra (beige y marrón) y con mucha mayor superficie de mancha en el interior de la valva; generalmente, los umbos más separados y con mayor área cardinal; cohabitando en proporciones similares con los ejemplares más comunes-tipo, más frecuentemente divulgados (Fig. 3). Fulviafragilis (Forsskal in Niehbur, 1775) Se confirma (Fig. 4) la presencia en la zona de esta especie, previamente citada en Cullera por Zenetos et al. (2004) a partir de ejemplares recolectados en 1991. Ello indica que esta especie está formando poblaciones perennes en la zona, al igual que sucede en otras partes del Mediterráneo (Crocetta, 2005; Vardala-Theodorou , 1999). Eastonia rugosa (Helbling, 1779) Especie presente ocasionalmente en este sector del Golfo de Valencia, salvo en la subzona B en la que si es habitual hallarla. En la playa de Meliana (subzona B) es donde se concentra la gran mayoría de los individuos de esta especie encon- trados en esta zona del litoral (Fig. 5). Decenas y decenas de conchas de indivi- duos jóvenes y adultos son depositadas todos los años en esta playa. En esta subzona B, también se localiza una impor- tante concentración de ejemplares, aunque en menor medida, de Lutraria magna (da Costa, 1778) y Venericardia antiquata (Linné, 1758). Es de notar que esta especie mani- fiesta una tendencia a ampliar su exten- sión en el Mediterráneo, siendo reciente- mente observada en abundancia en las costas italianas en localidades donde no se conocía anteriormente (La Valle, Vani, Liboni y Smriglio, 2007). 71 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Tabla I. Listado de especies encontradas en el área de estudio. Ej: concha recolectada explayada; Ej*: entre 1 y 3 ejemplares recolectados; Ej*: entre 1 y 3 ejemplares recolectados, deteriorados; L: especie presente en la colección de referencia del laboratorio de Biología Marina de la Universidad de Valencia (1982-1989, García Carrascosa, no publicado) o citada en la bibliografía reseñada, sin ejemplar recolectado por el autor. Las letras (ABCDE) corresponden a los sectores de la Figura 1 en los que se han recolectado ejemplares. Las referencias a las citas se indican como sigue: (1) Colección de referencia del laboratorio de la Universidad de Valencia; (2) ApáRICI SEGUER, Rowland, Taylor y García Carrascosa, 1996; (3) Bonnin y Rodríguez Babio, 1990; (4) Costa, García Carrascosa, Monzó, Peris, Stubing y Valero, 1984; (3) Generalitat Valenciana, Conselleria de Agricultura y Medio Ambiente, 1994-1997; (6) Giner Ponce, 1989; (7) Hidalgo, 1917; (8) Montero Agüera, 1971; (9) Ramón Herrero, 1993; (10) ROSELLÓ, 1910; (11) SÁNCHEZ Diana, 1980. Los nombres subrayados corresponden a las especies que están comentadas en este trabajo. Tal? le I. List of the species found in the studied urea. Ej: shell collected on the beach; Ej*: 1 to 3 speci- mens found; Ej*: 1 to 3 specimens found, damaged; L: species found in the reference collection deposited in the Marine Biology laboratory ofthe University of Valencia (1982-1989, García Carrascosa, unpu- blished data) or cited in literature, no specimens collected by the author. Letters (ABCDE) refer to Figure 1 sectors. Literature cited as follows: (1) reference collection deposited in the laboratory ofthe University of Valencia; (2) APARICI SEGUER, R.OWLAND, TAYLOR AND GARCIA CARRASCOSA, 1996; (3) Bonnin y Rodríguez Babio, 1990; (4) Costa, García Carrascosa, Monzó, Peris, Stubing and Valero, 1984; (5) Generalitat Valenciana, Conselleria de Agricultura y Medio Ambiente, 1994-1997; (6) Giner Ponce, 1989; (7) Hidalgo, 1917; (8) Montero Agüera, 1971; (9) Ramón Herrero, 1993; (10) Roselló, 1910; (11) Sánchez Diana, 1980. Underlined ñames are discussed in this paper. Especie Especímenes Localización Referencias Familia SOLEMYIDAE Solemya fogata (Poli, 1791) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Familia NUCULIDAE Nucula nitidosa Winckworth, 1 930 E¡ BCD 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Nucula nucleus (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABD 1,3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Nucula sulcata Bronn, 1831 L 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,11 Familia NUCULANIDAE Nuculana pella (Linné, 1767) E¡* ABCDE 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Saccella commutata (Phiíippi, 1 844) L 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Familia ARCIDAE Arca noae Linné, 1758 E¡ ABCDE 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Arca Terragona Poli, 1795 L U, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Barbada barbota (Linné, 1 7 58) E¡ ABCDE 3, 8,10,11 Barbada clatbrata (Defrance, 1816) L 3, Anadara corbuloides (Monterosato, 1 880) E¡* B 3, 7, 8,10,11 Anadara polil (Mayer, 1 868) E¡* B 3, 7, 8,10,11 Bathyarca pectunculoides (Scacchi, 1 835) L 3, 7, 8,11 Bathyarca phillppiana (Nyst, 1 848) L 3,8 Familia NOETIIDAE Striarca ladea (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Familia GLYCYMERIDAE Glycymeris blmaculata (Poli, 1 795) L 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Glycymeris glycymeris (Linné, 1758) E¡* D U, 3, 4, 6, 7,10,11 Glycymeris violascescens (Lamarck, 1819) E¡ ABCDE 1,3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Familia MYTILIDAE Mytilus edulis Linné, 1758 E¡ ABCDE 3, 7, 8,10,11 72 Tamayo Goya: Catálogo de los bivalvos marinos del sector central del Golfo de Valencia Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Especie Especímenes Localización Referencias Mytilus galloprovincialis Lamarck, 1819 E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 4,5 Mytilaster minimus (Poli, 1795) E¡* D 1,3, 7, 8,10,11 Gregariella petagnae (Scacchi, 1 832) E¡ DE 1,2, 3, 8,10,11 Musculus costalatus (Risso, 1 826) E¡ B 1,3, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Musculus subpictus (Cantraire, 1 835) Ej* B 1,2, 3, 8,10,11 Lithophaga lithophago (Linné, 1758) Ei ABCDE 1,3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Myoforceps aristatus (Dillwyn, 1 81 7) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Modiolus adriaticus (Lamarck, 1819) E¡ BD 3,5, 7, 8,10,11 Modiolus mortorelli (Hidalgo, 1 878) L 3, 4, 7, 8,10,11 Modiolus barbatus (Linné, 1 7 58) E¡ ABCDE U, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Amygdalum agglutinans (Cantraine, 1 835) El D 5 Modiolula phaseolino (Phillipi, 1 844) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Familia PINNIDAE Pinna nobilis Linné, 1758 L 3, 4, 7, 8,10,11 Pinna rudis Linné, 1758 L 3, 8,11 Atrina pectinata (Linné, 1 767) E¡ CDE 3, 7,10,11 Familia PTERIIDAE Pieria hirundo (Linné, 1758) Ei C 3, 4, 5, 7, 8,10, 11 Familia PECTINIDAE Pecten ¡acobeus (Linné, 1 7 58) Ei ABDE 3, 4, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Pecten maximus (Linné, 1758) L 3, 7, 8,11 Aequipecten opercularis (Linné, 1758) Ei DE 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 íissopecten byalinus (Poli, 1 795) Ei ACD 3, 7, 8,10,11 Palliolum incomparable (Risso, 1 826) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Pseudamussium clavatum (Poli, 1795) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Hyalopecten similis (Laskey, 1811) L 3, 7, 8,10 Propeamussium fenestratum (Forbes, 1 844) L 3, Chlamys flexuosa (Poli, 1 795) Ei BCD 3, 4, 7, 8,10,11 Cblamys glabra Linné, 1758) Ei BDE 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Chlamys pesfelis (Linné, 1 758) Ei BD 3, 7, 8,10,11 Cblamys multistrata (Poli, 1795) Ei BCDE 3, 5, 8,11 Cblamys varia (Linné, 1758) Ei ABCDE 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Familia Spondylidae Spondylus gaederopus Linné, 1 7 58 Ei ABCD 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Familia ANOMIIDAE Anomia ephippium Linné, 1 7 58 Ei ABCDE 2, 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Pododesmus patelliformis (Linné, 1761) L 3 Familia LIMIDAE tima lima (Linné, 1758) Ei ABCD 1,3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 timaria bians (Gmelin, 1791) Ei ABCDE 1,3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 limaría tuberculata Olivi, 1792 Ei BCDE 1,3, 4, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Limea loscombii (Sowerby G.B., 1 824) L 3, 4,5 [¡matulo subauriculata (Montagu, 1808) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Notolimea crassa (Forbes, 1 844) L 3, Familia OSTREIDAE Ostrea edulis Linné, 1758 Ei ABDE 3, 5, 7, 8,11 Crassostrea gigas (Thunberg, 1793) L 3, 8,11 73 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Especie Especímenes Localización Referencias Ostreola stentina (Payraudeau, 1826) E¡ ABCDE 1,3,8 Familia LUCINIDAE Ctena decussata (Costa O.G., 1 829) E¡ BCD U, 6, 7,10,11 toripes lacteus [ Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Lucinella dimicata (Linné, 1758) E¡ BD 1,2, 3, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Anodontia fragtts (Philippi, 1 836) L U, 7, 8,10,11 Myrtea spinifera (Montagu, 1 803) L U, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Lucinoma borealis (Linné, 1 767) E¡ DE 3 Familia THYASIRIDAE Thyasira flexuosa (Montagu, 1 803) L 3,11 Familia UNGULINIDAE Diplodonto rotundata (Montagu, 1 803) E¡ DE U, 7, 8,10,11 Familia CHAMIDAE Chama gryphoides Linné, 1 7 58 E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Pseudochama gryphina (Lamarck, 1819) E¡ ABCD 3, 4, 7, 8,10,11 Familia GALEOMMATIDAE Galeomma Mw/Sowerby GB in Turton, 1 825 L 1,2, 3, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Familia KELLIIDAE Kellia suborbicularis (Montagu, 1 803) L 3, Bornia geoffroyi (Payraudeau, 1 826) L 3, 8,10,11 Bornia sebetia (Costa O.G., 1829) L 3, 7,10 Familia LASAEIDAE Lasaea rubra (Montagu, 1 803) L 3 Semierycina nítida (Turton, 1 822) L 3 Familia M0NTACUTIDAE Montacuta substríata (Montagu, 1 808) L 3 Tellímya ferruginosa (Montagu, 1 808) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Mysella bidentata (Montagu, 1 803) L 1,3, 7, 8,10,11 Familia CARDITIDAE Cordita calyculata (Linné, 1758) L 3, 8,10,11 Glans acuieata (Poli, 1795) L 3, 8,10,11 Glans trapezia (Linné, 1 767) E¡ ABCD U, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Venericardia antiguata (Linné, 1758) E¡ BD 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Familia ASTARTIDAE Astarte fusca (Poli, 1795) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 715» sulcata (da Costa, 1778) L 3, Digitada digitada (Linné, 1758) L 3, 8,10,11 Goodallia triangulaos (Montagu, 1 803) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Familia CARDIIDAE Acanthocardia acuieata (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Acanthocardia deshayesii (Payraudeau, 1 826) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Acanthocardia echinata (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Acanthocardia paucicostata (Sowerby G.B. II, 1841) E¡ ABDE 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Acanthocardia spinosa (Solander, 1 786) L 3, 5, 7,10,11 Acanthocardia tuberculata (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9,10,11 Parvicardium exiguum (Gmelin, 1791) E¡ DE 1,3, 7, 8,10,11 Parvicardium mínimum (Philippi, 1836) L 1,3, 7, 8,10,11 74 TAMAYO GOYA: Catálogo de los bivalvos marinos del sector central del Golfo de Valencia Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Especie Especímenes Localización Referencias Parvicardium scabrum (Philippi, 1844) L 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Popillicardium papillosum (Poli, 1791) E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 taevicardium crassum (Gmelin, 1791) E¡* BD 3, 5,11 Laevicardium oblongum (Gmelin, 1791) E¡ ABDE 3, 4, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Cerastoderma edule (Linné, 1758) El ABCDE 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,11 Cerastoderma glaucum (Poiret, 1 789) E¡ ABCDE 1,3, 5,10 Fulvia froQilis { ForskaL 1775) E¡ DE Familia MACTRIDAE Moctra glauca Born, 1778 Ei* D 3, 7, 8,10,11 Mactra stultorum (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Spisula subtruncata (da Costa, 1778) E¡ ABCDE 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9,10,11 Lutraria angustior Philippi, 1 844 E¡ BD Lutraria lutraria (Linné, 1 7 58) E¡ BCD 3, 8,10,11 Lutraria magna (da Costa, 1 778) E¡ BCD 3, 7, 8,10,11 Eastonia ruaosa (Helblina. 1 779) E¡ BCD 3, 8,11 Familia MESODESMATIDAE Donacilla cornea (Poli, 1791) L 3 Familia SOEENIDAE Solen marginatus Pulteney, 1799 E¡ ABD 3, 4, 7, 8,10,11 Familia PHARIDAE Pharus legumen (Linné, 1 758) E¡ ABCDE 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Ensis arcuatus (Jeffreys, 1 865) L 3 Ensis ensis (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Ensis minor (Chenu, 1 843) L 3 Ensis siliqua (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 4, 7, 8,10,11 Phaxas pellucidus (Pennant, 1 777) E 2,5 Familia TELLINIDAE Teliina distorta Poli, 1791 E 1,3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Tellina donacina Linné, 1 7 58 E¡* B 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,11 Jellina tabula Gmelin, 1791 Ei* BD 1,2, 3, 4, 6, 9,10 Tellina incarnata Linné, 1758 Ei ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Tellina nítida Poli, 1791 Ei ABCDE 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Tellina planata Linné, 1758 Ei ABCDE 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Tellina pulchella Lamarck, 1818 Ei ABCDE 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Tellina serrata Brocchi, 1814 L 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Tellina tenuis da Costa, 1778 Ei ABCDE 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Arcopagia balaustina (Linné, 1 758) L 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Macoma rumana (Costa O.G., 1 829) Ei ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Gastrana fragilis (Linné, 1 7 58) Ei BDE 1,3, 7, 8,10,11 Familia DONACIDAE Donax semistriatus Poli, 1 7 9 5 Ei ABCDE 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Donax trunculus Linné, 1758 Ei ABCDE 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Capsella variegatus (Gmelin, 1791) E 1,3,6 Capsella venustus Poli, 1795 Ei* D 1,3, 5,6 Familia PSAMMOBIIDAE Gari costulata (Turton, 1 822) L U,4 Garidepressa (Pennant, 1 777) Ei BD 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 75 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Especie Especímenes Localización Referencias Gari fervensis (Gmelin, 1791) E¡ BD - Familia SEMELIDAE Scrobicularia cottardi (Payraudeau, 1 826) L 3, 7, 8,10,11 Scrobicularia plana (da Costa, 1 77 8) L 3, 5, 8,10,11 Familia SEMELIDAE Abra alba (W. Wood, 1 802) E¡ BD 2, 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Abra prismática (Montagu, 1 808) E¡* D 1,3, 4, 7, 8,10,11 Abra segmentum (Récluz, 1 843) E¡ BD 3, 7, 8,10,11 Abra tenuis (Montagu, i 803) E¡ B 2, 3, 7, 8,10,11 Familia SOLECURTIDAE Solecurtus scopula (Turton, 1822) E¡* D 3, 7, 8,10,11 Solecurtus strigilatus (Linné, 1758) E¡ BCD 3, 7, 8,10,11 Azorinus cbamasolen (da Costa, 1 778) E¡ CDE 3, 5,10,11 Familia KELLIELLIDAE Kelliella abyssicola (Forbes, 1 844) L 3 Familia TRAPEZIIDAE Coralliophaga lithophagella (Lamarck, 1819) L 3 Familia GLOSSIDAE Glossus humanus { Linné, 1758) E¡* D 3, 7, 8,10,11 Familia VENERIDAE Venus casino Linné, 1758 E¡ BCD 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Venus nux Gmelin, 1791 E¡ BCD 3, 7, 8,10,11 Venus verrucosa Linné, 1758 E¡ ABCDE 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,10,11 Cbamelea gallina (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Clausinella fasciata (da Costa, 1778) L 2, 3, 5,11 Timoclea ovata (Pennant, 1 777) L 1,3, 5, 8,10,11 Gouldia mínima (Montagu, 1 803) E¡ BD 13, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Dosinia exoleta (Linné, 1758) E¡ BD 1,3, 4, 5, 6,11 Dosinia lupinus (Linné, 1/58) E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Pitar ruáis (Poli, 1795) E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 8,10 Callista cbione (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABDE 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Ruditapes decussatus (Linné, 1758) E¡ BCDE 1,3, 7, 8,10,11 Tapes rhomboides (Pennant, 1 777) E¡ BD 3, 7, 8,10,11 Irus ¡rus (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCD 1,3, 7, 8,10,11 Venerupis aurea E¡ ABCDE 1,3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Venerupis corrugata (Gmelin, 1791) E¡ AD 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Familia PETRIC0LIDAE Petricola litbopbaga (Philippson, 1 788) E¡ BCD 1,2, 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Lalonkairia lajonkairii (Payraudeau, 1 826) E¡ BCD 3, 5,10 Petricola substriata (Montagu, 1808) L 3,10 Mysia undata (Pennant, 1 777) E¡ DE 2, 3, 8,10,11 Familia C0RBULIDAE Corbula gibba (Olivi, 1/92) E¡* BCD 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Lentidium mediterraneum (Costa O.G., 1 829) E¡ BCD 1,2, 3, 4, 6, 8,10,11 Familia GASTROCHAENIDAE Gastrocbaena dubia (Pennant, 1 777) L 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 76 Tamayo Goya: Catálogo de los bivalvos marinos del sector central del Golfo de Valencia Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Especie Especímenes Localización Referencias Familia HIATElllDAE Hiatella árctico (Linné, 1 767) L 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,10,11 Hiatella rugosa (Linné, 1 767) L 3,5 Familia PHOLADIDAE Pholas dactylus Linné, 1758 E¡ BCDE 3,10 Bornea candida (Linné, 1758) E¡ BCD 3 Familia THRACIIDAE Thracia papyracea (Poli, 1791) El BCDE 1,2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Thracia pubescens (Pulteney, 1 799) E¡ BCD 3, 5, 7, 8,10,11 Familia PANDORIDAE Pandora inaequivalvis (Linné, 1758) E¡ ABCDE 1,2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10,11 Pandora pinna (Montagu, 1 803) L 3, 5,11 Familia LYONSIIDAE Lyonsia norwegica (Gmelin, 1791) E¡* D 3,5 Familia POROAAYIDAE Poromya granúlala (Nyst & Westendorp, 1 839) L 3, 8,10,11 Familia CUSPIDARIIDAE Cuspidaria cuspidata (Olivi, 1 792) L 3, 8,10,11 Cuspidaria rostrata (Spengler, 1 793) L 3, 8,10,11 Cardiomya costellata (Deshayes, 1 835) L 3, 8,10,11 Gari fervensis (Gmelin, 1791) Esta epecie tampoco está citada en los trabajos anteriormente relacionados, pero también habita de forma perenne en la Bahía de Valencia (Fig. 6). No es frecuente su presencia en el litoral exa- minado, aunque tampoco lo es de forma ocasional. Se pueden localizar, año tras año, individuos jóvenes y adultos en las mismos emplazamientos y con similar frecuencia y abundancia que su congé- nere, Gari depressa (Pennant, 1777). Lentidium mediterraneum (Costa O.G., 1829) Diversos trabajos escalonados en el tiempo, (recientes: Aparici et al., 1989; García Carrascosa, 1988; y menos reciente. Montero Agüera, 1971) además de los ejemplares localizados por el autor en Puebla de Farnals, Valen- cia, Sueca y Cullera, entre 2004 y 2007 (Fig. 7), evidencian la presencia no de forma esporádica, de esta especie a lo largo de todo el litoral en estudio. AGRADECIMIENTOS Mi más sincera gratitud y reconoci- miento por su generosa y desinteresada colaboración, a Celso Rodríguez Babío y Manuel García Carrascosa, ambos de la Facultad de Ciencias, Universidad de Valencia, por su permanente ánimo, apoyo y por la mucha bibliografía pro- porcionada. Mención especial merece el artículo escrito por Bonin y Rodríguez (1991) que ha sido punto de referencia obligado para la elaboración de este trabajo. A Carmen Salas Casanova y Serge Gofas, ambos de la Facultad de Ciencias, Universidad de Málaga, por su decisiva colaboración, ayuda y correc- ciones, sin las cuales no hubiera sido posible este artículo. A Javier Segarra Julve y colaboradores, Francisco Ruiz Sánchez y Emilio Valero Alfaro, todos ellos de la Generalitat Valenciana, Con- sellería de Agricultura Pesca y Alimen- tación, por su colaboración en propor- cionar los documentos relacionados en 77 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Figura 2. Glycymeris violacescens (Lamarck, 1819), ejemplares hallados en Mareny Blau (Sueca). Longitud de la mayor concha encontrada: 67 mm. Figura 3. Glycymeris violacescens (Lamarck, 1819), ejemplares hallados en Cullera. Longitud de la mayor concha encontrada: 64 mm. Figure 2. Glycymeris violacescens ( Lamarck , 1819), specimens collected in Mareny Blau (Sueca). Length ofthe biggest shell found: 67 mm. Figure 3. Glycymeris violacescens (Lamarck, 1819), speci- mens collected in Cullera. Length ofthe biggest shell found : 64 mm. 78 Tamayo GOYA: Catálogo de los bivalvos marinos del sector central del Golfo de Valencia Figura 4. Fulvia fragilis (Forsskal in Niehbur, 1775), ejemplares hallados en Cullera (izquierda) y Oliva (derecha). Longitud de la mayor concha encontrada: 42 mm. Figura 5. Conchas de Eastonia rugosa recolectadas en Meliana. Longitud de la mayor concha encontrada: 80 mm. Figura 6. Gari fervensis , ejemplar hallado en Cullera. Longitud de la mayor concha encontrada: 35 mm. Figura 7. Conchas de Lentidium mediterraneum recolectadas en Mareny Blau (Sueca). Longitud de la mayor concha encontrada por el autor de esta especie: 8 mm. Figure 4. Fulvia fragilis (Forsskal in Niehbur, 1775), specimens collected in Cullera (left) and Oliva ( ñght). Length ofthe biggest shell found: 42 mm. Figure 5. Eastonia rugosa shells collected in Meliana. Length ofthe biggest shell found: 80 mm. Figure 6. Gari fervensis, specimen collected in Cullera. Length ofthe biggest shell found: 35 mm. Figura 7. Lentidium mediterraneum shells collected in Mareny Blau (Sueca). Length ofthe biggest shell found: 8 mm. 79 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 la bibliografía. A Rafael Araujo Armero, del Museo de Ciencias Naturales de Madrid, Alberto Martínez-Ortí, del Museo de Historia Natural de Valencia; Margarita Belinchón García, del Museo de Ciencias Naturales de Valencia y Francesc Uribe Porta, del Museo de Ciencias Naturales de la Ciutadella (Barcelona), por su colaboración en faci- litar la consulta de ejemplares de las res- pectivas colecciones y, en algún caso, bibliografía. A Isabel Morón Marchante y Mercedes González de Quevedo, de la BIBLIOGRAFÍA Aparici Seguer, V., Rowland, R. A., Taylor, S. y García Carrascosa, M., 1996. Molus- cos infralitorales de la playa del Pinedo-El Sa- ler (Valencia, Mediterráneo occidental). Lbe- rus, 14 (2): 93-100. Bonnin J., Rodríguez Babio C., 1991. Catá- logo provisional de los moluscos bivalvos marinos de la plataforma continental de las costas mediterráneas de la Península Ibérica y de las islas Baleares. Iberus, 9 (1-2): 97-110. Bosca Seytre, A., 1916. Fauna valenciana. Moluscos. Casa Editorial de Alberto Martín, 132 p. Cejalvo Lapeña, M. D., 1998. Peces, crustáceos y moluscos de la Comunidad Valenciana. Con- selleria d'Agricultura, Pesca i Alimentació, 239 p. Costa, M., García Carrascosa, A. M., Monzó F., Peris, J. B., Stubing, G. y Valero, E., 1984. Estado actual de la flora y fauna marinas en el li- toral de la Comunidad Valenciana. Ayunta- miento de Castellón. 239 p. Crocetta, F., 2005. Prime segnalazioni di Ful- via fragilis (Forskal in Niebuhr, 1775) (Mo- llusca: Bivalvia: Cardiidae) per i mari ita- liani. Bollettino Malacologico, 41 (5-8): 23-24. García Carrascosa, M., Silvestre Martínez, R. Y Pérez Yuste, C., 1989. Los Fondos ma- rinos. En Sanchis Molí, E. J. (Ed.): Guía de la Naturaleza de la Comunidad Valenciana. Le- vante - El Mercantil Valenciano, 611-652. Generalitat Valenciana, Conselleria de Agricultura y Medio Ambiente, Direc- ción General de Producción Agraria y Pesca, Servicio de Pesca. 1994-1997. Carac- terísticas bionómicas y cartografiado del bentos en el litoral de Valencia, Castellón y Alicante. Giner Ponce, I. M., 1989. Moluscos y comunidades bentónicas de la costa de Alboraya-Albuixech (Golfo de Valencia, Mediterráneo occidental). Te- sis de Licenciatura. Universitat de Valencia, 225 pp Biblioteca del Museo Nacional de Cien- cias Naturales de Madrid, Sandra Valen- tín Monte y Montserrat Navarro Codina, de la Biblioteca del Museo de Ciencias Naturales de la Ciutadella (Barcelona), por su colaboración en faci- litarme, a pesar de la distancia, la biblio- grafía solicitada. A Francisco Figueres López y a Alfredo His Rocher, ambos de la Cofradía de Pescadores de Cullera por haber permitido el acompañamiento durante el marisqueo en la embarcación MAYEL propiedad de F Figueres. Hidalgo, J. G., 1917. Fauna malacológica de Es- paña, Portugal y las Baleares. Trabajos del Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, serie Zoología, 30: 752 pp. La Valle, P., Vani, D., Liboni, A., y Smriglio, C., 2007. Eastonia rugosa (Helbling, 1799) (Bi- valvia, Mactridae) occurring along the Latium coasts. Basteria, 71(1-3): 93-95. Montero Agüera, I., 1971. Moluscos bivalvos españoles. Anales de la Universidad Hispalense, serie Veterinaria, 5: 1-358 + 95 láminas no nu- meradas. Pla, E., 2006. Guía submarina de La Marina Alta e Ibiza. Publicado por el autor, 350 pp. Ramón Herrero, M., 1993. Estudio de las po- blaciones de Chamelea gallina (Linnaeus, 1758) y Donax trunculus (Linnaeus, 1758) (Mollusco: Bivalvia) en el Golfo de Valencia (Mediterráneo Occidental). Tesis doctoral, Univ. Barcelona: 395pp. Roselló, E., 1910. Los moluscos de Valencia. Asociación Española para el Progreso de las Cien- cias. Congreso de Valencia, Sección 4 (Ciencias Naturales ): 1-7. Sánchez Diana, A., 1980. Los moluscos marinos del Reino de Valencia. Instituto de Estudios Alicantnos. Diputación Provincial de Ali- cante. 154 p. Vardala-Theodorou, G. E., 1999. The occur- rence of the Indo-Pacific molluscan species Fulvia fragilis (Forsskal, 1775) and Bulla am- pulla L., 1758 in Elefsis Bay. Newslletter ofthe Hellenic Zoological Society, 31: 10-11. Zenetos, A., Gofas, S., Russo, G. y Templado, ]., 2004. CIESM Atlas ofexotic species in the Me- diten anean. Vol. 3: Molluscs (F. Briand, ed.). Monaco: CIESM, 376 pp.. 80 Iberus, 26 (1): 81-170, 2008 © Sociedad Española de Malacología New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae (Caenogastropoda, Triphoroidea) with the description of 26 new species Nuevos datos sobre los Triphoridae ( Caenogastropoda , Triphoroidea) del Caribe , con la descripción de 26 nuevas especies Emilio ROLÁN* and Raúl FERNÁNDEZ-GARCÉS** Recibido el 24-IX-2007. Aceptado el 31-III-2008 ABSTRACT In the present work 68 taxa of the family Triphoridae from the Caribbean and adjacent areas are studied. Comments are also provided on one invalid taxon and on another that has been erroneously reported from this area. Among these, 30 were previously known species and 26 are described as new ( Metaxia propinqua , M. propria, M. prompto, Isot- riphora guanahacabibes, Eutriphoro ouffenbergi , Marshallora ostenta , Marshallora apex- diversus, Inella pseudolongissima , I. noduloides, I. apexbilirata , I. harryleei, I. undeber- muda, I. pseudotorticula, I. differens, I. slapcinskyi , I. faberi , Sagenotriphora candidula, "T." inaudita, "T." pseudonovem, " T. " yociusi, " T. " guadaloupensis, "T." amicorum, "T." turtlebayensis, "T." grenadensis, "T." abacoensis a nd "T." portoricensis). Twelve species remain unnamed or are tentatively identified, due to scarcity or ¡nadequacy of available material, or doubtful specific assignment. New information is reported for Monophorus oli- vaceus (Dalí, 1889) and Sagenotriphora osclausum (Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1995) already treated in previous works. Lectotypes are designated and figured for the following species Inella bigemma (Watson, 1880) , Inella ¡nflata (Watson, 1880), Inella longissima (Dalí, 1881), Inella trlserialis (Dalí, 1881) , Inella intermedia (Dalí, 1881), Inella ibex (Dalí, 1881), Inella torticula (Dalí, 1881), Inella colon (Dalí, 1881), Inella compsa (Dalí, 1927), Inella enopla (Dalí, 1927), Inella meteoro (Dalí, 1927), Inella pompona (Dalí, 1927), Inella dinea (Dalí, 1927), Inella sentoma (Dalí, 1927), Inella gaesona (Dalí, 1927), "Triphora" cylindrella (Dalí, 1927), "Triphora" abrupta (Dalí, 1881), "Triphora" caracca Dalí, 1927, "Triphora" georgiana Dalí, 1927, "Triphora" indígena Dalí, 1927, "Triphora" lilacina (Dalí, 1889), "Triphora" pyrrha Henderson and Bartsch, 1914, Triphora" atlántica (E. A. Smith, 1890) and for the western Atlantic species Triphora aspera Jeffreys, 1 885. A list of the ñames employed for Caribbean species of Triphoridae is given, mentioning mistakes and synonymies. RESUMEN En el presente trabajo se estudian 68 taxones de la familia Triphoridae del Caribe y aguas próximas. También se aporta información sobre un taxon que carece de validez y otro erró- neamente mencionado para el área. Entre ellos, 30 corresponden a especies previamente conocidas, 26 se describen como nuevas para la ciencia [Metaxia propinqua, M. propria, M. prompta, Isotriphora guanahacabibes, Eutriphora auffenbergi, Marshallora ostenta , Mars- hallora apexdiversus, Inella pseudolongissima, I. noduloides, I. apexbilirata, I. harryleei, I. * Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur, 15782, Santiago de Compostela, Spain ** Centro de Estudios Ambientales de Cienfuegos (CEAC), Grupo de Gestión Ambiental (GGA), calle 17, esquina Ave. 46, Cienfuegos, Cuba. 81 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 undebermuda , I. pseudotorticula, I. differens, I. slapcinskyi , I. faberi, Sagenotriphora candi- dula, "T." inaudita, "T." pseudonovem, “T." yociusi, "T." guadaloupensis, "T." amicorum, "T." turtlebayensis, "T." grenadensis, "T" abacoensis y "T." portoricensis) y o 1 2 de ellas no se les asigna un nombre definitivo debido a la escasez del material, o al mal estado del mismo, y también a la existencia de dudas sobre su determinación. Además, se aporta nueva infor- mación sobre Monophorus olivaceus (Dalí, 1 889) y Sagenotriphora osclausum (Rolán y Fer- nández-Garcés, 1 995), especies ya citadas en trabajos previos. Se designan y figuran lectotipos de las siguientes especies: Inella bigemma (Watson, 1 880), Inella inflata (Watson, 1 880), Inella longissima (Dalí, 1881), Inella triserialis (Dalí, 1881), Inella intermedia (Dalí, 1881), Inella ibex (Dalí, 1881), Inella torticula (Dalí, 1881), Inella colon (Dalí, 1881), Inella compsa (Dalí, 1927), Inella enopla (Dalí, 1927), Inella meteoro (Dalí, 1927), Inella pompona (Dalí, 1927), Inella dinea (Dalí, 1927), Inella sentoma (Dalí, 1927), Inella gaesona (Dalí, 1927), "Triphora" cylindrella (Dalí, 1927), "Triphora" abrupta (Dalí, 1881), "Triphora" caracca Dalí, 1927, "Triphora" georgiana Dalí, 1927, "Triphora" indígena Dalí, 1927, "Triphora" ¡Hacina (Dalí, 1889), "Triphora" pyrrha Henderson y Bartsch, 1914 y también de la especie atlántica Triphora aspera Jef- freys, 1885. Al final se aporta una lista de los nombres empleados para las especies de Triphoridae del Caribe, señalando los errores habidos y las sinonimias. KEY WORDS: Triphoridae, Caribbean, new species. PALABRAS CLAVE: Triphoridae, Caribbean, new species. INTRODUCTION Triphoridae J. E. Gray, 1847 is a very diverse family of marine gastropods that occurs world-wide, with about 600 ñames proposed for the Recent species (Marshall, 1983). Triphorids live on rocky substrates from the intertidal fringe to a depth of more than 1000 m. A complete general information on the family Triphoridae is given by Mar- shall (1983) and Wells (1998), who noted that it is a highly species-rich group, most species being sinistral, with a high spire, numerous whorls, a short to long anterior canal and a posterior apertural notch or canal. The teleoconch sculpture of triphorids is notably vari- able, and can be beaded, spinose or reticulate, and the shells are small (usually less than 10 mm, although some can be up to 40 mm or more). Marshall (1983), in his revisión of the Indo-Pacific species, emphasized the importance of the shape and sculpture of the protoconch for taxonomy, and pointed out that "under absolutely no circumstances should further new species be proposed unless a complete, unworn protoconch can be illustrated". The family has its máximum diver- sity in the tropical Indo-Pacific where, according to Marshall (1983), there are more than 1000 species. An impression of the wealth of species in this area is afforded by the 174 species found during an extensive sampling in the coral reef lagoon of Koumac, New Cale- donia (Bouchet et al., 2002), Triphori- dae being the second richest family of molluscs, after Turridae. Although notably less diverse than in the Indo-Pacific, this family contains many species in the Atlantic Ocean, poorly known in most areas. Bouchet and Guillemot (1978) and Bouchet (1985, 1997) revised the species of this family occurring in the Mediterranean and neighbouring Atlantic, where CLEMAM data base recognised 19 species in 10 genera. Some additional species were described by Fernándes and Rolán (1988, 1993) and Van der Linden (1998) in the Cape Verde Islands, 82 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae and Rolán and Peñas (2001) from the Canary Is. and the Mediterranean. Information on triphorids from many Caribbean areas is contained in a number of works, such as those for Jamaica (C. B. Adams, 1850a, 1850b, most species represented in Clench and Turner, 1950), Virgin Islands (Nowell-Usticke, 1959 and 1971), Yucatán Península, México (Vokes and Vokes, 1983), Puerto Rico and nearby Caribbean areas (Warmke and Abbott, 1961), Curasao, Aruba and Bonaire (De Jong and Coomans, 1988), Oceanic Islands off Brazil (Leal, 1991), Colom- bian Caribbean (Díaz Merlano and Puyana Hegedus, 1994), the Atlantic and Gulf coasts and West Indies (Morris, 1973), and Brazil (Ríos, 1994). Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (1993a, 1993b, 1994 and 1995) and Rolán and Espinosa (1994) showed the known species from Cuba and described some new species. Besides, other authors described new species from other Caribbean areas, such as De Jong and Coomans (1988), Moolenbeek and Faber (1989), Faber and Moolenbeek (1991), Rolán and Crúz-Ábrego (1996) and Rolán and Luque (1999). More recently a large new species has been described from Brazil (Simone, 2006). Many other species were recorded from deep water, and described by Watson (1880, 1886), Dall (1881, 1889, 1927) and other authors. Fossil species were mentioned in Olsson and Harbison (1953). Colour photographs of 33 species, including most of the known shallow- water species and those described during the last 20 years in previously mentioned papers, are provided in a recent paper (Rolán and Fernández- Garcés, 2007) together with a list of ñames assigned to the Caribbean Triphoridae. Henee, the present work has the fol- lowing objectives: 1- To give available information on the deeper water species, showing the type material whenever possible; 2- To provide addi- tional colour photographs of the Caribbean species which were not figured in our previous work (Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 2007); 3- To supply additional information that has recently been obtained on other species already known from shallow water; 4- To describe some new species which have been collected from shallow water; 5- To present an updated list of all the taxa mentioned for the Caribbean and nearby areas, making corrections to our previous list. MATERIAL AND METHODS Some of the species presented here are only known from the type material, loaned by several museums (mentioned in Abbreviations and Acknowledge- ments), or viewed on photographs, pro- vided by their Curators or other person- nel. In the collected material, the collec- tor ñame and the data of collection were referred when both were known. Besides, material loaned by Harry G. Lee from his collection, mainly from deep water, is included in this study. Finally, a few species were collected by the authors and persons who have cooperated with them. Most of the early described species, some of which had never been figured previously or had only been represented by drawings, are photographed here in colour, and when- ever possible these figures inelude the types and also illustrate intraspecific variability. Some photos taken by Sally Diana Kaicher (found in ANSP) were included. The order of presentation is basically a grouping based on similarity. It was also the authors' intention to inelude most of the available information on protoconchs, radulae and opercula, but unfortunately this was only possible with a few species. Most of the type material excluded this possibility, and much of the studied material consisted of shells without soft parts. An attempt has been made also to solve taxonomic problems relevant to some of the studied taxa. None of Dall's descriptions included a designated holotype, although some 83 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 seem to have been based on a single shell. Under these circumstances, Dall's material placed in some museums must be considered as syntypes. After exami- nation of available material from these museums, it was therefore decided to designate as lectotypes the shells that were closest to the original description or the original figure (shown in Dall, 1889). In the description of shells, the spiral beaded cords are frequently referred to as "spiral 1, 2, 3 etc.", spiral 1 being the subsutural cord on the adapical part of the whorl, with subsequent cords on the teleoconch whorls referred to as spirals 2 and 3, folio wing Marshall (1983). Other important characters in the description are, those of the protoconch, such as the diameter, the shape and size of the nucleus (elevated, depressed, large, small, ...), the number of spiral cords (none, 1 or 2), and the presence or absence of axial ribs. We have followed the method of Verduin (1976) for count- ing the number of whorls of the proto- conch. On the teleoconch, the number and size of the spiral cords is noted on the first and last whorls, where they are frequently different. Also noteworthy is the position of spiral 2 (closer to spiral 1, equidistant between spirals 1 and 3) and its size (nodules smaller, elongate, etc.). It is important to point out that the nodules, which are formed by the inter- section of spirals and axial ribs, are sometimes simply spherical, while other times they are concave above and convex below; in this case they are crossed by a line that represents the spiral cord and appears to cut the nodule: these are referred to as cut nodules or nodules that are cut in the middle. Due to the fact that the radula of most species was unavailable, and as this character is very important for generic assignment, it was necessary in many cases to employ generic ñames very much in a sensu lato as "Triphora" or "Inella". For generic arrangement we mainly follow the works of Laseron (1958), Marshall (1983) and Bouchet (1985). Abbreviations: AMNH: American Museum of Natural History, New York ANSP: Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia BMSM: Bailey-Matthews Shell Museum, Sanibel Is., Florida FLMNH: Florida Museum of Natural History, Gainesville, Florida IES: Instituto de Ecología y Sistemática, La Habana MCZ: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge MHNS: Museo de Historia Natural, Santiago de Compostela MNCN: Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid USNM: United States National Museum, Washington CCR: collection of Colin Redfern CHL: collection of Harry G. Lee CFG: collection of Raúl Fernández- Garcés CMK: collection of Mario Krisberg sp: specimen with soft parts s: shell j: juvenile f: fragment RESULTS I. Taxonomic part Family Triphoridae Gray, 1847 Subfamily Metaxiinae Marshall, 1977 Genus Metaxia Monterosato, 1884 Type species: Cerithium rugulosum C. B. Adams, 1850. According to Marshall (1983), this sub- family is formed by dextral triphorids. 84 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Metaxia propinqua spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 1C-H) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 1C, ID) in FLMNH (154988). Paratypes: 4 s, Louisiana, 27.98568° N 92.6472° W, 65-91 m (FLMNH UF 291348); 5 s, Hillsborough Co., SW Egmont Key, Florida 73-91 m (collector Steger) (FLMNH 238632); 2 s (Figs. 1E, 1F), Palm Beach Co., Florida, off Boynton Inlet, 84-106 m (M. Glockstein, 1980) (FLMNH 47382). Other material examined: 2 s (with broken protoconch), Louisiana, 27.98568° N, 92.6472° W, 65- 91 m (FLMNH UF 291348); 4 s (protoconch lost or eroded), Hillsborough Co., SW Egmont Key, Florida 73-91 m (Steger) (FLMNH 238632); 1 s (protoconch eroded), 2 miles off Virginia Key, Florida, 9 m (FLMNH UF 365086); 1 s (protoconch eroded) (FLMNH). Type locality: Florida, Monroe Co, WNW Dry Tortugas, 76 m. Etymology: The specific ñame derives from the Latín word propinquus -a -um which means “cióse, similar", alluding to the similarity with other species of this genus. Description: Shell conical, very elon- gate, relatively solid. Protoconch (Figs. 1G, 1H) white, paucispiral, with a little more than two whorls and about 300 pm in diameter; several spiral threads begin at the apex. These are well defined, a little irregular, four on the first whorl decreasing to two on the second, where numerous axial ribs run from the suture to the upper thread. The teleoconch can be white or light brown. Four spiral cords are present from the beginning, with the subsutural upper one less prominent than the other three. Axial ribs are present on the entire shell, about 10-11 on the first whorls and eighteen on the final one. Suture depressed with a very small spiral thread above. On the base, the profile is slightly concave and one additional cord is present. Aperture almost round with an open and short siphonal canal. Dimensions : The holotype measures 6.3 mm. Distribution : Known from Florida and Louisiana, USA. Remarks: In order to facilítate com- parison of the protoconchs of the Metaxia species mentioned here, they have all been presented together in Figure 3. M. rugulosa has a protoconch (Figs. 3A- 3D) with 2 1/i whorls (see Rolán and Redfern, 1996), sometimes reaching three whorls, with a spiral sculpture on the first whorl formed by undulating or zigzag- ging lines; the second protoconch whorl has axial ribs which termínate at a single spiral thread (only exceptionally double); the teleoconch is white. M. excelsa and M. taeniolata have multispiral protoconchs. Metaxia propria spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 2A-C) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 2A, 2B) in FLMNH (UF 393603). Type locality: Florida, Key Largo, 228 m. Etymology: The specific ñame derives from the Latín word proprius -a -um which means “special, characteristic", alluding to the differential characters of the protoconch that distinguish it from other species of this genus. Description : Shell conical, very elon- gate, relatively solid. Protoconch white (Fig. 2C) with a little more than 2 3A whorls and about 400 pm in diameter; two well defined spiral cords are crossed by 13-15 axial ribs per whorl which are continuous with those of the subsequent whorl. Teleoconch white. Four spiral cords are present from the beginning, the subsutural upper one being less promi- nent than the other three. Axial ribs present on the entire shell, with about 10- 11 on the first whorls and 13 on the final one. Suture depressed with a very small spiral thread above. On the base, the profile is slightly concave and one addi- tional cord is present. Aperture almost round, with an open siphonal canal. Dimensions : The holotype measures 5.9 mm. 85 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Distribution : Only known from Florida. Remarks : Characters of the proto- conch provide the main differences between this species and those previ- ously known: M. rugulosa has a protoconch (Figs. 3A-3D) with 2 l/i whorls, sometimes reaching 3, with a spiral sculpture on the first whorl formed by undulating or zigzagging lines; the second protoconch whorl has axial ribs which terminate at a single spiral thread (only exception- ally double). M. propincua spec. nov. lacks axial ribs on the first whorl, and they reach only to the upper spiral cord on the second whorl. Metaxia prompta spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 2D-J) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 2D, 2E) and 2 paratypes (Figs. 2G, 21) (FLMNH UF 359136). Type locality: Bermuda, Hamilton Parish, Shelly Bay. Etymology: The specific ñame derives from the Latin word promptus -a -um which means "evident, available", alluding to the characters of the protoconch that are different from other species of this genus. Description : Shell conical, very elon- gate, relatively solid. Protoconch (Figs. 2F, 2H, 2J) white, paucispiral with about 2 V2 whorls and between 300 and 400 pm in diameter; a single spiral cord is poorly defined on the first whorl and a little stronger on the second. The axial ribs are numerous but not continuous; they descend from the upper suture and almost disappear just before reaching the spiral cord, reappearing and strengthen- ing on the cord before fading again towards the lower suture. Teleoconch white or light brown. Four spiral cords are present from the beginning, the sub- sutural upper one being less prominent than the other three. Axial ribs are present on the entire shell, varying in number on the early whorls and increas- ing to about 18 on the final one. Suture depressed with a very small spiral thread above. On the base, the profile is slightly concave. Aperture almost round with an open siphonal canal. Dimensions : The holotype measures 4.1 mm. Distribution : Only known from Bermuda Archipelago. Remarks : Characters of the proto- conch easily differentiate this species from related ones: M. rugulosa has more rounded whorls with zigzagging spiral lines on the first whorl and numerous axial ribs on the second, which only reach the middle of the whorl. M. espinosai has more angulate, wider whorls, with prominent elongate nodules and is always milky white. M. propincua has rounded whorls, with straight spiral cords beginning at the apex and two cords on the second whorl, with axial ribs absent from the lower half of the whorl. M. propria has almost three whorls, rounded with two spiral cords and with a few widely separated and prominent axial ribs on the first whorls. Metaxia sp. 1 (Figs. 1A-B) Material examined: 1 s. Barbados, 183 m (USNM, labeled "Cerithiopsis abrupta Watson, 1880"). Remarks : The shell from Barbados in USNM (without any type label) has a paucispiral protoconch of 450 pm in diameter, differing from M. abrupta (Watson, 1880), which has a proto- conch that is more depressed and also has axial ribs (figured in Bouchet, 1985). Dimensions : The shell studied mea- sures 5.0 mm. 86 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Bouchet (1985) was unable to confirm the existence of M. abrupta in the western Atlantic. Probably this species is endemic to the Azores Archipelago. The species studied here could be the one referred to by Dall (1889) as Cerithiopsis abruptus (Fig. 36L), but we are not sure. This species is different from the other two Caribbean species with pau- cispiral protoconch: M. espinosai (described by Rolán and Fernández- Garcés, 1993a) has a paucispiral proto- conch (Fig. 3E) with a prominent nodu- lous keeled border; and M. rugulosa (C. B. Adams, 1850), which has a narrower protoconch (Figs. 3A-3D) with a differ- ent sculpture (Rolán and Redfern, 1996). However, it must be pointed out here that the protoconch of the taxon M. rugulosa is not known, as the apex is missing from the holotype of this species, represented in Clench and Turner (1950). Another fragment in BMNH with the label "figured speci- men" had no protoconch. In several works it has been assumed that the protoconchs from Cuba and the Bahamas figured in Rolán and Redfern (1996) represent the protoconchs of M. rugulosa , probably due to the proximity of Cuba to Jamaica, which is the type locality. Similar proto- conchs were figured in Redfern (2001). The other two known species of Caribbean Metaxia ( M . excelsa and M. taeniolata) have multispiral protoconchs. The present species is probably unknown and unnamed, but as only one shell has been examined, and its proto- conch is not in very good condition, it is kept unnamed pending the availability of more material in the future. Subfamily Triphorinae Gray, 1847 Genus Monophorus Granata-Grillo, 1877 Type species (by monotypy): Trochus perversus Linnaeus, 1758. Recent, Mediterranean. Remarks: The main characters (shown in Marshall, 1983, Bouchet, 1985 and Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1994) are the following: multispiral protoconch, teleoconch whorls flat-sided or shallowly convex, well defined spiral cords and axial ribs, nodular intersections and a typical radula with central tooth with 3-5 cusps, lateral with 5-6 and numerous margináis with only 2-3 short cusps. Monophorus olivaceus (Dall, 1889) (Figs. 4B-F, 4F4-K) Triforis decorata var. olivácea Dall, 1889. Bull. M. C. Z., 18: 243. [Type locality: Gulf of México, west of Florida, 91 m, Key West, Hemphill]. Triphora ornata auct. non Deshayes (1832). Type material: One syntype, fragment of 10 mm, here designated as lectotype (Figs. 4C, 4D) (MCZ 7379). Other material examined: México: 1 s, Cancun, Quintana Roo (Heilman, March, 1963) (ANSP 285517). Florida: 3 s, WSW of John's Pass, 50 m (Steger, 1956) (ANSP 306254); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., Bath and Tennis (McGinty coll/ Apr. 1951), 36-55 m (FLMNH 176649); 4 s, Collier Co., SW of Naples, 26 20' N (Powlus/Aug., 1960), 55 m (FLMNH 158202); 9 s, Palm Beach Co., off Palm Beach, 100 m (FLMNH 154886); 3 s, Palm Beach, WOE Radio Towers to Bath and Tennis (McGinty, May/1951) 36-55 m (FLMNH 250132); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., (R/V Tritón, Apr. 1950) 40-50 m (FLMNH 204877); 1 s, off Marathón (M. and S. Snyder, Jul. 1966) (ANSP 309744). Bahamas: 1 s, reef NE of North Point, Elbow (Little Guana) Cay, Abaco (Robertson, Aug. 1955) (ANSP 298409); 4 s, Grand Bahama Island, 26° 31' 00" N, 78° 46' 30" W (J.N. Worsfold) (ANSP 373939); 1 s, Grand Bahama Island, 26° 29' 45" N, 78° 37' 15" W (G. Taylor and D. Nilsen) (ANSP 273605); 2 s, Tamarind, Grand Bahama Island 26° 30' 45" N, 78° 36' 00" W (J. Worsfold) (ANSP 368896); 1 s, Bootle Bay, Grand Bahama Island 26° 87 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Figure 1. A, B. Metaxia sp. 1. A: shell, 5 mm, Barbados, 183 m (USNM); B: protoconch. C-H. Metaxia propinqua spec. nov. C, D: holotype, 6.3 mm (FLMNH); E, F: paratype, 3.4 mm (FLMNH); G: protoconch of the paratype; H: detail of the protoconch of the holotype. Figura 1. A, B. Metaxia sp. 1. A: concha , 5 mm, Barbados, 183 m (USNM); B: protoconcha. C-H. Metaxia propinqua spec. nov. C, D: holotipo, 6,3 mm (FLMNH); E, F: paratipo, 3,4 mm (FLMNH); G: protoconcha del paratipo; H: detalle de la protoconcha del holotipo. 88 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 2. A-C. Metaxia propria spec. nov. A, B: holotype, 5.9 mm (FLMNH); C: protoconch of the holotype. D-J. Metaxia prompta spec. nov. D, E: holotype, 4.1 mm (FLMNH); F, G: proto- conch and shell of paratype, 3.3 mm (FLMNH); H, I: protoconch and shell of paratype, 4.0 mm (FLMNH); J: protoconch of holotype. Figura 2. A-C. Metaxia propria spec. nov. A, B: holotipo, 5,9 mm (FLMNH); C: protoconcha del holotipo. D-J. Metaxia prompta spec. nov. D, E: holotipo, 4,1 mm (FLMNH); F, G: protoconcha y concha de un paratipo, 3,3 mm (FLMNH); H, I: protoconcha y concha de un paratipo, 4,0 mm (FLMNH); J: protoconcha del holotipo. 89 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 39' 30" N, 78° 57' 00" W (J. Worsfold) 80 m (ANSP 371846); 1 s, Schooner Cays, NW of Powell Point, Eleuthera 24° 56' 45" N 76° 25' 00" (R. Robertson) (ANSP 363405); 3 s (G. Buchanan) (BMNH 90.11.24.428-34). Venezuela: 4 s, distrito Federal (Berthier, 1935) (ANSP 264204). Grenada: 1 s, mouth of St. George Harbour (Ostheimer, Jan. 1964) 44-66 m (ANSP 297306). Virgin Islands: 3 s, St. Croix (R.E. Griffith) (ANSP 18201). Dutch Antilles: 5 s, (Gray coll.) Saint Vincent (BMNH). No exact local- ity: 3 s (McAndrew coll.) (BMNH Acc n° 1563); 2 s (R. Sykes coll.) (BMNH acc. n° 1825). Description : See Dall (1889). It is important to point out some characters: the large size of the beads, spiral 2 being absent from the early whorls and smaller on most of the shell, the colour forming blotches, predominantly on spirals 1 and 2. Spiral 3 is white, but the cord between the beads is usually dark. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 10 mm. Distribution: Known throughout the Caribbean. Remarks: There is considerable con- fusión regarding this taxon: the species was referred to as Triphora ornata by many authors (Warmke and Abbott, 1961; Morris, 1973; Ríos, 1994) until Moolenbeek and Faber (1991) showed the correct ñame to be M. olivaceus (Dall, 1889). The type material of Triphora ornata was examined by Faber (pers. comm.) in 1983 from MNHN (Ecole des Mines collection where the Deshayes types should have been). This lot con- sists of several poor shells, none of which matches the Caribbean species, and one of them in better condition cor- responds to a Red Sea species. The only known type specimen of Triforis decor ata var. olivácea is an atypical and faded shell. It can be confused with some species with axial colour blotches: Latitriphora albida (Fig. 4A) has very characteristic smaller nodules, and no confusión is possible; Nototriphora deco- rata may be more similar and requires careful comparison. We have compared a typical shell of Nototriphora decorata (Fig. 4G) with representative shells of M. olivaceus (Figs. 4D-F) and with the lectotype of the latter species (Figs. 4B, C). It can be seen that the early whorls of N. decorata are narrower than those of the type of M. olivaceus and have smaller nodules, whereas the early whorls of representative M. olivaceus are very similar to those of the type specimen. As it is necessary for nomenclatural stabil- ity to designate a lectotype, we propose as such the only known syntype. The species M. olivaceus is very vari- able, with large, wide shells sometimes found in the same population as small, narro w ones. Also, the dark colour may vary from almost black to light brown and can be variably distributed, but it is always present on spiral 1 and on a few nodules of spiral 2. Examination of a shell from Florida (Figs. 4H-4J) revealed a dark subsutural spiral and a dark base. It appeared slightly different from average examples of M. olivaceus (like Fig. 4K), as the colour is not only darker but is also slightly differently distributed; spiral 1 has only isolated white beads and the brown color does not form blotches, spiral 2 is mostly white and spiral 3 is totally white, without any brown colour between the beads. Also the beads on spiral 2 become comparatively larger several whorls before the final whorl. However, it is considered to be only a variety. Genus Isotriphora Cotton and Godfrey, 1931 Type species (by original description) Triforis tasmanica T. Wood, 1875. Recent, South Australia, Tasmania. Description : The most important cióse to that of the genus Eutriphora character of this genus is the paucispiral Cotton and Godfrey, 1931, but the latter protoconch with nodular spiral cords, has axial riblets. Operculum multispiral. 90 RoláN AND FERNÁNDEZ-GARCÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 3. Protoconchs of Metaxia species. A-D. M. rugulosa (C. B. Adams, 1830) from Cuba (A) and Bahamas (B-D). E. M. espinosai Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1993, Cuba. Figura 3. Protoconchas de especies de Metaxia. A-D. M. rugulosa (C. B. Adams, 1850) de Cuba (A) y Bahamas (B-D). E. M. espinosai Rolán y Fernández-Garcés, 1993, Cuba. Isotriphora guanahacabibes spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 5A-H) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 5A) in MNCN (15.05/15.05/47054) and paratypes in the following collections: MHNS, 2 s (Fig. 5B); IES, 1 s (Fig. 5C); CFG (3 s, 8 f), all from the type locality; 1 f and 1 j, from Cienfuegos, Cuba (MHNS); 1 s, outer slope of beach, W of Georgetown, Cayman Is. 100- 115 fms (Tyler, Oct. 1964) (ANSP 300623). Other material examined: 2 f, Cienfuegos Bay, Cuba 40 m; 1 j, S shore of island, 3 miles E of South- west Point, Cayman Brac Island (ANSP 397055). Type locality: From sediment at Cueva de Pipo, Maria la Gorda, Guanahacabibes, Pinar del Río, Cuba, at 35 m. Etymology: The specific ñame comes from the type locality. Description : Shell (Figs. 5A-5C) whitish, cortical elongate, solid. Proto- conch (Figs. 5D-5F) paucispiral with about 300 pm in diameter, the number of whorls not appreciable due to indetermi- nate separation from the teleoconch. The protoconch begins with a very narrow nucleus and the following two whorls have two prominent nodular spirals, with another very small one below the suture. Teleoconch with about 10 whorls and with a straight profile; each 91 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 whorl with two widely separated nodu- lous spiral cords (spirals 1 and 3), the lower one more prominent; about the 6- 7^ whorls, a small cord (spiral 2) appears closer to spiral 1 (Fig. 5G). Spiral 2 con- tinúes onto the subsequent whorls, becom- ing narrow, undulating and slightly nodu- lous towards the end. Spiral 2 is always smaller than spiral 1 and 3 and is closer to the one above. On the last two whorls an additional very small, smooth spiral 4 appears at the suture. The aperture is ovoid, the outer lip fine and prominent. Near the end of the final whorl there is a small hole, located cióse to the apertural border on the upper part of the whorl. Siphonal canal closed, curving towards the rear. The colour is totally white, but some specimens can have small areas of light brown (Fig. 5C). Under high magni- fication spiral striae (Fig. 5H) can be seen between the spirals. Dimensions : The holotype measures 5.5 x 1.6 mm. Distribution: Known from the type locality and from the Cayman Islands, down to 183-210 m. Remarles: This species must be com- pared with the other congeneric species with a similar protoconch: Isotriphora peetersae (Moolenbeek and Faber, 1989) is dark brown, except for the protoconch and first whorls of the teleoconch, and the shell is more obese and with fewer whorls. Furthermore, the anal sinus is at the end of the spire and is not closed. Isotriphora taenialba Rolán and Espinosa, 1994, is similar to I. peetersae but a little larger, and always has dark and lighter bands of colour; also the anal sinus is open at the end of the spire. At first sight it might be confused with species of the genus Iniforis Jousseaume, 1884 such as I. immaculata, which is totally white, but that species has a protoconch with only one smooth fine cord. Genus Eutriphora Cotton and Godfrey, 1931 Type species (o. d.): Triphora cana Verco, 1909, Recent, Australia. Description: After Marshall (1983), similar to the genus Isotriphora but with multispiral protoconch with axial riblets. Radula with the rachidian tooth having three cusps, lateral teeth with 4-5 and numerous marginal teeth with an elongate central cusp. Operculum pau- cispiral. Eutriphora auffenbergi spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 6A-I) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 6A-6B) in FLMNH. Paratypes: 1 s (Fig. 6C) (BMSM); 1 s (USNM); 1 s (CHL), all from type locality and ex CHL. Other paratypes: 3 s, 1 j, off Egmont Key, Hillsbor- ough Co., Florida, 76 m (Jim Moore /Cavalier, 1962) (CHL); 1 j, 65 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida (T. Yocius, Jun. 1972), 54 m (CHL); 1 j, 32 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida (T. Yocius, Jun. 1981), 30 m (CHL); 4 s (Fig. 6D), Florida, (MCZ 356088); 1 s (Fig. 6E), Florida, 5 m (MCZ 356096); 1 s, Hillsborough Co., W of Egmont Key, Florida, 274 m (FLMNH 169703); 1 sp, Palm Beach Co., E of Palm Beach, Florida, 183-578 m (FLMNH 257207). Other material examined (in bad condition): 1 s, 10 f, Pinellas Co., WSW John's Pass, Florida, (D. Steger) 68 m (FLMNH 238662). Type locality: West of Dry Tortugas, Monroe Co., Florida, USA (Jim Moore/ Cavalier, 1972), 90 m. Etymology: The species is named after Kurt Auffenberg, former Collections Manager in Malacol- ogy. Florida Museum of Natural History, USA. Description : Shell (Figs. 6A-6E) spiral, with about 4 whorls, the surface sharp-pointed, elongate, solid, brown or of the apex with small tubercles and the light brown. Protoconch (Fig. 6G) multi- subsequent whorls with two small 92 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae spiral cords crossed by numerous fine axial ribs that have a slight S-shaped curve. Teleoconch with about 17-18 whorls in large specimens, beginning with spirals 1 and 3, crossed by proso- cline axial ribs which form small nodules at the intersection points. On whorls 4-5, spiral 2 appears cióse to spiral 1; on the subsequent whorls, the three spirals are similar in size but spiral 3 is a little more prominent. An addi- tional spiral cord, appearing on about whorls 10-12, is slightly nodulous, always smaller, and is located just below the suture (Fig. 6F). This cord is more evident on the final whorl, where it occurs near the periphery. Below it there are two more smooth spiral cords, the lower one on the base of the siphonal canal (Fig. 6C). Aperture rounded, cól- umella curved, siphonal canal elongate and recurved, closed at its base by an extensión of the aperture. Dimensions: The holotype measures 21.8 mm, with 20 whorls. Other shells are smaller. Operculum (Fig. 6H): paucispiral, subcircular, yellowish, rather transpar- ent, with the nucleus subcentral. Radula (Fig. 61): relatively large, with a formula 16-1-1-1-16, the rachid- ian tooth having three prominent cusps; the lateral has 5 cusps of which cusps 2 and 4 are smaller. The marginal teeth have a filiform central elongate cusp, with the other two short and similar in size. Distribution : The species has been found only in Florida. Remarks: The generic assignment is based on the similarity of the radula, operculum and protoconch to the type species of the genus Eutriphora : E. armil- lata (Verco, 1909) from Australia (see Marshall, 1983). The holotype of E. auffenbergi spec. nov. resembles the figure of T. triserialis in Dall (1889: pl. 20, fig. 6a) (Fig. 36E), but the following characters of the present species are not coincident: the shell is brown and the protoconch also is darker, typically with 4 whorls and with tubercles on the apex; the siphonal canal is elongate. All these characters are dis- similar from DalTs species (see below). Comparison and differentiation must be made with the following Caribbean species described here: "Triphora" abrupta has a shorter shell, with the nodules less spherical, spiral 1 is very small and cióse to the suture, almost similar to spiral 4, while in T. auf- fenbergi spiral 1 is similar to the other main two. "T. " georgiana has a very small spiral 1 which remains reduced on the final whorls, and the protoconch probably has fewer whorls. "T. " caracca has two main spirals and between them a very narrow spiral 2; the axial ribs are very prosocline. "T. " indígena has a more convex profile to the whorls; the spiral cords are wider and the nodules at the intersec- tion points are very small, resulting in rectangular pits in the interspaces between cords and ribs. E. auffenbergi is somewhat similar to Sagenotriphora osclausum (Rolán and Fer- nández-Garcés, 1995) (see below), but the latter species is shorter (usually with no more than 9 teleoconch whorls), and the siphonal canal is also very short and curved. Other brown species are Marshallora nigrocincta (C. B. Adams, 1839) and M. modesta (C. B. Adams, 1850), but these species have a shorter spire (not more than 10 whorls), a more convex profile and a very short siphonal canal. Genus Marshallora Bouchet, 1985 Type species: Murex adversus Montagu, 1803 (o.d.). Diagnosis: After Bouchet (1985), protoconch of 4-5 whorls with two spiral threads, granules on its apical part, teleoconch with the second cord appearing later, operculum paucispiral and radula with central and lateral teeth 93 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 with two groups of cusps. Caribbean Garcés (1995) and Rolán and Crúz- species in Rolán and Fernández- Ábrego (1996). Marshallora ostenta spec. nov. Rolán and Femández-Garcés (Figs. 7A-N, 8E, 8F) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 7A, 7B) in MNCN (15.05/47055) and a paratype (Fig. 7C) in IES, both from type locality. Other paratypes in the following institutions: 1 s (Fig. 7E), off Mayport, Duval Co., Florida (Yergin, Jan. 99), 30 m (FLMNH, ex CHL); 2 s (Figs. 7F, 7G), off Big Pine Key, Monroe Co., Florida, 30-50 m, (K. Sunderland, Aug/91) (BMSC ex CHL); 1 s, off Big Pine Key, Monroe Co., Florida, 30-50 m (K. Sunderland, 1991) (CHL, Fig. 71); 3 s, off Egmont Key, Hillsbor- ough Co., Florida (J. Moore/ Cavalier , 1962), 72 m (CHL); 1 s (Fig. 7H), 32 miles E. St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida (T. Yocius, 1972) 30 m (USNM ex CHL); 8 s, Palm Beach Co., Florida, off Boynton Inlet (D. and H. Akers, Dec. 1969) 33 m (FLMNH 177040); 1 s (Fig. 7J) Miami, Florida, 73 m (FLMNH UF363887); 1 s (Fig. 7K), Palm Beach Co., Florida, off Dodge Estate (R/V Tritón, Dec. 1951) (McGinty coll.) (FLMNH 178201). Other material examined: Cuba: 2 sp (Fig. 7D)(destroyed for radular study), Cienfuegos (MHNS). USA: Florida: 1 sp (destroyed for radular study) and 2 s. Anclote Key, near Tarpon Springs, Pasco Co. (CHL); 1 s, off Dry Tortugas, Monroe Co., Riley Black (ex J. Dawley, 1/4/1983), 55 m (CHL) (the last two lots not in good condition); 4 s, off Destin, 25 m (ANSP 252157); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., off Yamato Rocks, (F. B. Lyman/ Apr. 1939) 11 m (FLMNH 10242); 3 s, St. Augustine (FLMNH 286017). Type locality: Cienfuegos Bay, Cuba. Etymology: The specific ñame derives from the Latín past participle ostentus -a, -um which means "shown", indicating that the review of material from several collections allowed us to rec- ognize this species. Description : Shell (Figs. 7A-7K) light, solid, conical elongate. Protoconch (Figs. 8E, 8F) dark brown, multispiral, with between 3 l/i and 4 whorls; the apex is covered by small tubercles; fine axial ribs are crossed by two spiral cords on the lower whorls and sometimes by a single cord on the first whorl. Teleo- conch with 7-10 whorls, the first 4-5 with only two beaded cords (spirals 1 and 3); spiral 2 appears between them on about the fifth or sixth whorl, increasing in size until the three spirals are the same size on the final whorl. Another very small, smooth spiral occurs at the suture. The colour is usually white at the beginning of the teleoconch, sometimes including the first 1-2 whorls; subsequently the colour of the shell is more variable: frequently uniform cream or light brown, darker at the suture; the beaded cords may be dif- ferent, whitish, cream or light brown, and either the lower or upper cord can be lighter. Aperture rounded; base brown, sometimes only light brown, the darker colour extending to the col- umella; siphonal canal short and open. Dimensions: The holotype measures 4.2 mm; some paratypes reach 5.5 mm. The soft parts (examined in only two specimens) are whitish, slightly translu- cent, with milk-white spots on the head and a few on the tentacles. Operculum (Fig. 7N) rounded- ovoid, multispiral, with the nucleus somewhat deviated from the centre. Radula (Figs. 7L, 7M) studied in one specimen from Cuba and another from Florida, has a formula n-l-l-l-n. The rachidian tooth has two parts with 5-6 sharp cusps at each side; the lateral ones are very similar to the central one; the marginal ones are sharp pointed, very elongate and narrow. Distribution: Known from Cuba and Florida. Remarks : In spite of the amount of material examined, it was not possible to arrive at a description that represented all the shells, suggesting that this must be a variable species. There are some dif- ferences in the protoconch (number of whorls, one or two spiral threads on the first whorl), but the main differences concern the very variable colour distrib- 94 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 4. A. Latitriphora albida (A. Adams, 1854) (BMNH). B, C. Monophorus olivaceus (Dalí, 1889), lectotype, 10 mm (USNM). D-F. M. olivaceus typical shells from Cuba, all for comparison with the shell of the lectotype. G. Nototriphora decorata (C. B. Adams, 1850), Cuba. H-K. Monophorus olivaceus (Dalí, 1889). H-J: shell, 7.0 mm, Peanut Island, Florida (MHNS); K: shell, 8 mm, Florida (FLMNH). Figura 4. A. Latitriphora albida (A. Adams, 1854) (BMNH). B, C. Monophorus olivaceus (Dalí, 1889), lectotipo, 10 mm (USNM); D-F. M. olivaceus, conchas típicas de Cuba, todas para compara- ción con la concha del lectotipo. G. Nototriphora decorata (C. B. Adams, 1850), Cuba. H-K. Monophorus olivaceus (Dalí, 1889). H-J: concha, 7,0 mm, Peanut Island, Florida (MHNS); K: concha, 8 mm, Florida (FLMNH). 95 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 ution on the teleoconch and the initial appearance of spiral 2 between the 5th and 7th teleoconch whorls. All of this suggested to us that more than one species might be involved in the studied material. Anyway, some shells with clear differences ha ve been separated from the initial lot, and these are described below (the following species). The remainder were considered to represent a single variable species, which future study of live collected material may confirm through observation of the colour of the soft parts and examination of radulae. Similiphora intermedia (C. B. Adams, 1850) always has the spiral cords white and brown, with a rather uniform color pattern of a darker upper cord and a dark or light brown middle one; the soft parts are black. The radula has numer- ous teeth all similar in size. Marshallora modesta (C. B. Adams, 1850) and M. nigrocincta (C. B. Adams, 1839) have similar shells but they are darker brown and never whitish. The protoconchs are somewhat different, being wider and shorter (as can be seen in Figures 8H and 81). Marshallora apexdiversus spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 8A-D, 8G) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 8A) and 3 s (Figs. 8B, 8C), paratypes (FLMNH UF363887) from type locality; 1 s, 1 s (Fig. 8D), Palm Beach Co., Florida, off Dodge Estate (R/V Tritón, Dec. 1951) (McGinty coll.) (FLMNH 178201). Type locality: Miami, Florida, 73 m. Etymology: The specific ñame derives from the Latin words diversus, which means "different", and apex, referring to an important character for separation from other cióse species. Description : Shell (Figs. 8A-8D) light, solid, conical elongate. Protoconch (Fig. 8G) light brown, with 5 whorls; the apex is covered by small tubercles and is very narrow; the whorls with fine axial ribs that are crossed by two spiral cords, the upper cord almost in the middle of the whorl and the lower one closer to the suture be- low. Teleoconch with 8-11 whorls, the first 2-3 with only two beaded cords (spirals 1 and 3); spiral 2 appears between them on about the fourth whorl, increasing in size until the three cords are of equal size on about the fifth or sixth whorls. Another very small, smooth spiral occurs at the su- ture on the final whorls. The colour is usu- ally white on the first 2 whorls of the teleoconch; on subsequent whorls spiral 1 is light brown, and on some shells (but not on the holotype)this colour also reach- es the suture. The nodules are always lighter than the ground colour. Aperture rounded-ovoid; base cream, siphonal canal short and closed at the aperture by an extensión of the outer lip. Dimensions: The holotype measures 6.2 mm. Distribution : Only known from Florida. Remarks : The present species is tenta- tively included in Marshallora due to sim- ilarity with the other Caribbean species in this genus. At the beginning of this study the shells included in this taxon were placed in the variable M. ostenta spec. nov. Finally, both species were considered dif- ferent on the basis of the following char- acters: M. ostenta almost always has a dark brown base, the protoconch has fewer whorls (see Figs. 8E, 8F in comparison with Fig. 8G), the apex is wider, the spiral threads on the protoconch are in the middle of the whorl; on the teleoconch, spiral 2 never begins before the fifth whorl, sometimes even later. Similiphora intermedia (C. B. Adams, 1850) always has very dark colour on spiral 1, while spiral 2 is light or dark brown. Marshallora modesta (C. B. Adams, 1850) and M. nigrocincta (C. B. Adams, 1839), have similar shells but in both cases they are darker brown and never whitish or cream. The protoconchs of both species are rather different, being wider at the apex and shorter (as can be seen in Figures 8H and 81, in compari- son with Fig. 8G). 96 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 5. Isotriphora guanahacabibes spec. nov. A: holotype, 5.5 mm (MNCN); B: paratype, 4.7 mm (MHNS); C: paratype, 4.35 mm (IES). D-F: protoconchs of paratypes (MHNS); G: detail of the end of the last whorl, paratype in figure B; H: detail of the microsculpture. Figura 5. Isotriphora guanahacabibes spec. nov. A: holotipo, 5,5 mm (MNCN); B: paratipo, 4,7 mm (MHNS); C: paratipo, 4,55 mm (IES). D-F: protoconchas de paratipos (MHNS); G: detalle del final de la última vuelta, paratipo de la Figura B; H: detalle de la microescultura. Genus Inella Bayle, 1879 Ino Hinds, 1843, p. 17. Type species (subsequent designation of Jousseaume 1844: 230): Triforis (Ino) gigas Hinds, 1843. Recent, New Guinea. Inella Bayle, 1879, p. 35. New ñame for Ino Hinds (not Ino Samsuelle, 1817). Remarks : The type species (see Marshall, 1983) has a blunt and wide protoconch with between two and three whorls, each with two spiral cords; the shells included in this genus are elongate and usually have two spiral beaded cords at the beginning of the teleoconch (three exceptionally) and three on the subsequent whorls, frequently with a fourth cord appearing at the suture. Marshall (1983) mentioned that the limits of the genus are uncertain, and the radula has numerous small and similar teeth except the rachidian, that has symmet- rical cusps. 97 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Inella bigemma (Watson, 1880) (Figs. 9A-B, 36B) Cerithium (Triforis) bigemma Watson, 1880. Prelim. Report., pt 5. Journ. Linnean Soc. London, 15: 101, sp. 2. [Type locality: 18° 38' 30" N, 65° 5' 30" W, Off Culebra Island, 713 m]. Type material: Syntype (BMNH 1887.2.9.1762) (Fig. 9A) here designated as lectotype. Other material examined: 1 s (Fig. 9B), (BMNH 1915.12.31.199) from Irish Fishery Board. Description : See Watson (1881, 1886). The protoconch is unknown. Two spiral cords are present on the first whorls, subsequently with an additional smaller, less prominent cord appearing above them. About 17 whorls on the lec- totype. Dimensions: The lectotype measures 13.5 mm. Distribution : Only known with cer- tainty from the lectotype. Culebra Island (between Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands). Remarks: The shell mentioned in the original description as having 0.6 inch (=15 mm) and the original figure (Fig. 36B) are coincident in size and number of whorls with the shell studied by us, and probably it is the same. The second shell studied (Fig. 9B) has a different profile and could be a different species (Bouchet and Warén, 1993 are of the opinión that this shell is Strobiligera brychiá). Without protoconchs it is not pos- sible to make a correct comparison. This species is very similar to I. torticula (see below, in Remarks for that species). This taxon is mentioned in Dall (1981, 1989), who suggested that the species Triforis torticula could be a variety of T. bigemma. As the shells are not in perfect condition and lack proto- conchs, not enough information was obtained to decide if they represent dif- ferent species, but the whorls seem to expand more slowly on the type of T. torticula, although not on the other shells studied. Inella inflata (Watson, 1880) (Figs. 9C, 36G) Cerithium (Triforis) inflatum Watson, 1880. Prelim. Report., pt 5. Journ. Linn. Soc., 15: 103. [Type locality: 18° 38' 30" N, 65° 5' 30" W, St. Thomas, N of Culebra Island, Danish West Indies, 713 m; indicating: Habitat.- Yucatán Strait, 1170 m (Dalí).]. Triforis inflatum Watson: Dall, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 9: 6. Triforis (Sychar) inflata Watson: Dall, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 18: 249. Type material: Syntype (BMNH 1887.2.9.1766) (Fig. 9C) here designated as lectotype. Description : See Watson (1881, 1886). The protoconch is pupoid and perhaps with about two whorls, the first one wider than the second. It may be about 500 pm in diameter. The teleoconch is in bad condition, but it is possible to see the two main beaded spirals, and one more near the suture. The nodules are concave above and pointed. Dimensions: The lectotype measures 4.8 mm. Distribution: Only known from the type locality. Remarks: No other syntype of this species was found in other museums and the shell is nearly identical to that represented in the original figure of I. Inflata (Fig. 36G), for which 13 whorls are mentioned (really 12 including the protoconch) and the correct size of 4.8 mm. Therefore, probably it could be the only type specimen but, as no holotype was mentioned in the original descrip- tion, this shell is here designated as lec- totype. Its protoconch is very different from most others from the Caribbean area, and is therefore a differential char- acter. Dall (1889) placed his species T. ibex as a variety of I. inflata Watson. Both 98 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 6. Eutriphora aujfenbergi spec. nov. A, B: holotype, 21.8 mm, off Dry Tortugas, Florida (FLMNH); C: paratype, 8.4 mm, same locality (BMSM); D: paratype, 13.7 mm, Fia., USA (station 4)(MCZ 336088). E: paratype, 12.1 mm, 14 whorls, Fia., USA, 5.5 m (MCZ 356096). F: detail of sculpture of the holotype; G: protoconch of the paratype in fig. C; H: operculum (of a specimen from Palm Beach, Florida, 100-300 fms (FLMNH); I: radula (from the same specimen). Figura 6. Eutriphora auffenbergi spec. nov. A, B: holotipo, 21,8 mm, de fuera de Dry Tortugas, Florida (FLMNH); C: paratipo, 8,4 mm, la misma localidad (BMSM); D: paratipo, 13,7 mm. Fia., USA (estación 4) (MCZ 356088). E: paratipo, 12,1 mm, 14 vueltas, Fia., USA, 5,5 m (MCZ 356096). F: detalle de la escultura del holotipo ; G: protoconcha del paratipo en la fig. C; H: opérculo (de un ejemplar de Palm Beach, Florida, 100-300 brazas (FLMNH); I: rddula (del mismo ejemplar). 99 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 taxa do not appear to be similar: I. ibex lacks a protoconch and the type, with 14 whorls, is 10.4 mm; the description of I. inflata mentions 13 whorls and 4.8 mm, but the shell is less mature than the type specimens of I. ibex. Comparison of the types shows a different sculpture, the suture is deeper on I. ibex and the sutural threads are less prominent. It is more difficult to distinguish it from other species of Inella and this shall be done below. Inella longissima (Dalí, 1881) (Figs. 10A-G, 36D) Triforis (Ino) longissimus Dalí, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 9: 80. [Type locality: Not stated]. Triforis (Inella) longissima Dalí, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 18: 246, pl. 20, fig. 10. [Habitat: Sigsbee knoll, off Havana, in 320-823 m]. Type material: One syntype, here designated as lectotype (Fig. 10A). Off Havana, Cuba 22° 9' N 82° 21' 30W, 175 m. Blake 1877-1878 Exped. Sta. 56 (MCZ 7381). Other material studied: Bahamas: 1 f, Tamarind, Grand Bahama Island 26° 30' 45"N, 78° 36' 00" W (J. Worsfold) (ANSP 368279); Florida: 1 j (Fig. 10F) with protoconch, off Alligator Reef Light, lower Florida Keys (J. Moore, 1965) (ANSP 312592); 1 s (Fig. 10B), 1 j, SW of Egmont Key, (D. Steger, 1966) 366-420 m (ANSP 306391); 1 s, Monroe Co., 205° off Sombrero Light, (McGinty, Jul. 1951), 335-367 m (FLMNH 249518). Description: See Dall (1881). Shell (Fig. 10A) elongate, solid, whitish. The protoconch is not known from the syn- type, but a juvenile (Fig. 10F), which could be this species, shows a paucispi- ral protoconch of about 400 pm, with a pupoid apex and three whorls with two spiral cords. On this juvenile, the begin- ning of the teleoconch has only two spi- rals, but after a few whorls the third very small spiral appears between them. The teleoconch in large shells can reach up to 27 or more whorls (Fig. 10B). The profile of the whorls is straight, with four spirals: spirals 1 and 3 are almost similar in size and between them is spi- ral 2, which is initially slightly smaller but is subsequently of similar size; very cióse to the suture there is one more smooth spiral cord (Fig. 10D). Spiral 3 is a little more prominent than spirals 1-2. The nodules are always rounded. Dimensions: The lectotype measures 26.7 mm. A larger specimen, supposedly of this species, has a more prominent spiral 3 on the final whorls (Fig. 10B) and the nodules are a little larger. Distribution: Known from Bahamas, Florida and Cuba. Remarks: The syntypes with this label from USNM and MCZ were exam- ined. The problem is that the two lots apparently represent two different species. In this situation, after the description of Dall (1881) was carefully revised, it was decided to desígnate as lectotype the syntype in MCZ, due to the fact that the characters of this shell more closely matched the original description. In this description, the author pointed out that: "all the shells were decapitated" (which is not the case in the USNM syntype), and he only mentioned three spiral cords; further- more, the shell designated as lectotype has characters that are more similar to those of the figure of I. longissima repre- sented in Dall (1889: pl. 20, fig. 10)(Fig. 36D), and is cióse to 26 mm in size. The syntype in USNM (with the label T. longissimus ) has a size of 22 mm, differ- ent to the dimensions mentioned by Dall (1881), has a perfect protoconch and has only two spirals on the first 6-7 whorls of the teleoconch; additionally, a third and fourth cord appear, but these differ from the figure in Dall (1889). Also the siphonal canal is larger. For all these differences it was considered to be a sepárate species, and will be described below as new ( I . pseudolongissima). The shell from ANSP (Fig. 10B) may be the same species, but spiral 2 is very small 100 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 7. Marshallora ostenta spec. nov. A, B: holotype, 4.2 mm, MNCN; C: paratype, 3.6 mm (IES); D: shell, 3.9 mm, specimen destroyed for radular studies; all from Cienfuegos, Cuba; E: paratype, 3.9 mm, off Mayport, Florida (FLMNH); F, G: paratypes, 3.3 and 5.4 mm, off Big Pine Key, Florida (BMSM); H: paratype, 3.5 mm, off St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida (USNM); I: paratype, 5.5 mm, off Big Pine Key (CHL); J: paratype, 5.5 mm, Florida (FLMNH); K: paratype, 5.3 mm, Florida (FLMNH); L: radula from a specimen from Cienfuegos; M: radula from a speci- men from Florida; N: operculum, from Cienfuegos. Figura 7. Marshallora ostenta spec. nov. A, B: holotipo, 4,2 mm, MNCN; C: paratipo, 3,6 mm (IES); D: concha, 3,9 mm, ejemplar destruido para estudios radulares; todos de Cienfuegos, Cuba; E: paratipo, 3,9 mm, fuera de Mayport, Florida (FLMNH); F, G: paratipos, 5,5 y 5,4 mm, fuera de Big Pine Key, Florida (BMSM); H: paratipo, 3,5 mm, fuera de St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida (USNM); I: paratipo, 5,5 mm, fuera de Big Pine Key (CHL); J: paratipo, 5,5 mm, Florida (FLMNH); K: paratipo, 5.3 mm. Florida (FLMNH); L: rádula de un ejemplar de Cienfuegos; M: radula de un ejemplar de Florida; N: opérculo, de Cienfuegos. 101 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 from the first teleoconch whorls, and on the final whorls spiral 3 is more promi- nent than on the lectotype. However, as these minor differences probably only indícate some variation in the species, the shell has been kept in this taxon. In spite of there being no information about the protoconch of the lectotype of this species, it has been considered to be- long to the genus Inella on the basis of the protoconch present on a juvenile, which probably represents the same species. Inella pseudolongissima Rolán and Femández-Garcés spec. nov. (Figs. 11 A-H) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 11 A), a paratype (Fig. 11D) and a fragment (USNM 87316: syntypes of Triforis longissimus ) from the type locality; 1 paratype (Fig. HE), 26° 40' N (M.E. Powlus, July 1960) (McGinty coll.) 77 m, (FLMNH 171183); 1 paratype (Fig. 11G), Hillsborough Co., Tampa, Florida, West of Egmont Key (J. Moore, ]un. 1962) (McGinty coll.) 366 m (FLMNH 158180). Type locality: Cuba, off Havana, 823 m. Etymology: The specific ñame alludes to the similarity with 1. longissima, with which this species was confused. Description : Shell (Figs. 11A, 11D, 11E, IIG) very elongate, irregularly white or creamish. Protoconch (Figs. 11B, 11F, IIH) multispiral with nearly 4 whorls, almost 1 mm in height and with a diam- eter of about 500 pm, sculptured with 2 spiral cords that are more evident on the last whorls; these two cords are unap- parent or only insinuated on the first two whorls. Teleoconch with between 18 and 24 whorls, the first whorls with two beaded spiral cords (spirals 1 and 3), the nodules being rounded; below, on whorls 3-4, a small, very narrow cord (spiral 2) appears between them; this new cord is always smaller than the other two and closer to the upper one; spiral 3 subsequently increases in size and is very clearly the largest on the last 4-5 whorls, the other two being smaller; also an additional small, unbeaded cord appears at the suture. Axial ribs are almost not appreciable; the growth lines are prosocline. Aperture rhomboid, siphonal canal short and open. The colour of the holotype is totally white. Paratypes are cream with some areas of light brown. Dimensions : The holotype measures 22.0 mm. Distribution : Known from Florida and Cuba. Remarles: I. pseudolongissima may be distinguished from I. longissima by teleo- conch sculpture, the latter species having three cords of equal size on most of the spire. Also spiral 2 appears on the first whorls of I. pseudolongissima but on about the seventh whorl in I. longissima. The protoconch of I. longissima has three whorls with two well defined cords, while the protoconch of I. pseudolongis- sima has four smooth whorls, and the apex is smaller. For differentiation from other cióse species, see below. Inella noduloides spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 12 A, B) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 12A, 12B) in ANSP (374588). Type locality: Tamarind, Grand Bahama Island, Bahamas 26° 30' 45"N, 78° 36' 00" W, 500 m (J. Worsfold, May, 1985). Etymology: The ñame alludes to the prominent nodules of the whorls. Description: Shell (Figs. 12A, 12B) small, subcylindrical, elongate, whitish and solid. Protoconch with a pupoid apex of about 380 pm diameter and 3 whorls, each with two smooth spiral cords; the lower cord becomes more prominent near the end, where another smooth, less prominent cord appears above the other two, very 102 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 8. A-D. Marshallora apexdiversus spec. nov. A: holotype, 6.2 mm, Florida (FLMNH); B-D: paratypes, 6.9, 6.5, 4,6 mm, Florida (FLMNH). E-I. Protoconchs of Marshallora species. E, F: M. ostenta , Florida; G: M. apexdiversus , Florida; H: M. modesta, Cuba; I: M. nigrocinta, Cuba. Figura 8. A-D. Marshallora apexdiversus spec. nov. A: holotipo, 6,2 mm, Florida (FLMNH); B-D: paratipos, 6,9, 6,5, 4,6 mm, Florida (FLMNH). E-I. Protoconchas de diferentes especies de Marshal- lora. E, F: M. ostenta. Florida; G: M. apexdiversus. Florida; H: M. modesta, Cuba; I: M. nigrocinta, Cuba. 103 IberuSy 26 (1), 2008 cióse to the suture; under high magnifi- cation numerous tubercles can be seen. On the first two whorls of the teleoconch there is one prominent cord in the middle and another smaller one below the suture; both ha ve prominent nodules numbering about 10-11 per whorl. On the subsequent whorls there is a small nodulous cord below the suture with another small, slightly nodu- lous one below it; these are followed by the most prominent cord, with rather sharply pointed nodules, and one more below it, cióse to the lower suture. The aperture is rounded but irregular, as the shell is juvenile. Dimensions : The holotype measures 2.1 mm. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarks: No other species has these characters, with one spiral cord with very prominent nodules and 3 weaker spirals. The closest species may be the new species I. harryleei (see below). Inella apexbilirata spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 12C-E) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 12C) (ANSP 367841); 4 paratypes (ANSP 367840) (Fig. 12D). All from the type locality. Type locality: Lucaya, Grand Bahama Island, Bahamas 26° 29' 45" N, 78° 37' 15" W (J. Wors- fold), 300 m. Etymology: The specific ñame alludes to the beginning of the protoconch, with two spirals com- mencing from the nucleus. Description : Shell (Figs. 12C, 12D) small, subcylindrical, elongate, shiny, whitish and solid. Protoconch (Fig. 12 E), shining white, with a very small nucleus, a diameter of nearly 400 pm and a height of about 660 pm, 3 whorls with two smooth spiral cords which begin just on the nucleus. The teleo- conch has two main beaded cords, the lower one slightly larger; one smooth smaller cord occurs at the suture. The nodules on the main spirals are pointed and cut at the middle. The axial ribs which connect the nodules are scarcely evident and are slightly prosocline. There are about 13 on the first whorls and 17 on the last. Aperture ovoid, siphonal canal very short and open. Dimensions : The holotype measures 3.5 mm. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarks: The species with two main spirals are the following: I. bigemma and I. inflata have whorls that increase quickly in width, and the latter species has a pupoid protoconch. I. harryleei spec. nov. (see below) has spirals 1 and 3 at the beginning, spiral 2 appearing later and being smaller. I. ibex has the same number of nodules in spite of being a more devel- oped shell. Besides the two main spirals there is only one more near the suture. I. torticula has three spirals on the first whorls and 4-5 on the last ones. I. colon has two spirals but equidis- tant from both sutures. I. compsa also has two main spirals, with spiral 1 being smaller; its proto- conch is unknown, but the whorls on this shell increase rapidly in width. I. enopla and I. meteora have a very different wide, pupoid protoconch. Inella pinarena Espinosa, Ortea and Fernández-Garcés, 2007 (Figs. 12F-J) Inella pinarena Espinosa, Ortea and Fernández-Garcés, 2007. Avicennia, 19: 73, fig. 46. [Type local- ity: Yemayá, Maria la Gorda, Guanahacabibes, Pinar del Rio, Cuba], Description: See Espinosa, Ortea and 12F. 12G), are shown in SEM pho- Fernández-Garcés (2007). Shells (Figs. tographs. We add some informations on 104 ROLÁN AND FERNÁNDEZ-GARCÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 9. A. Cerithium bigemma Watson, 1880. lectotype, 13.5 mm (BMNH). B. Inella bigemma , shell, 13.0 mm (BMNH). C. Cerithium inflatum Watson, 1880, lectotype, 4.8 mm (BMNH). Figura 9. A. Cerithium bigemma Watson, 1880. lectotipo, 13,5 mm (BMNH). B. Inella bigemma, concha, 13,0 mm (BMNH). C. Cerithium inflatum Watson, 1880, lectotipo, 4,8 mm (BMNH). the protoconch (Figs. 12H, 121): small tubercles are present on the protoconch surface between the spiral ribs. The microsculpture of the teleoconch (Fig. 12J) is formed by very small spiral striae, more evident on the subsutural part. Distribution : Only known from the type material. Remarks : This species was recently described but, in the original descrip- tion, only one optical photo was pre- sented. More details on the shell, proto- conch and microsculpture are here illus- trated, showing that there is no similar- ity with other species of the group in the Caribbean. Inella harryleei spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 13A-K) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 13A) and 2 (s) paratypes in FLMNH; one more in BMSM (Fig. 13B) all ex CHL; another in CHL (Fig. 13C); all from the type locality. Other paratypes: 9 j and f, 28° 4.57' N, 90° 59.99' W, 87.9 m (E.F. Garcia /Pelican, 9/1-5/01) (CHL); 1 j, from the same locality (USNM); 2 j more 26° 06.866' N, 91° 02.418' W, off Louisiana, 59-65 m (E.F. Garcia /Pelican, 6/30/01)(CHL); 105 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 1 f, off Alligator Reef Light, Lower Florida Keys (J. Moore, 1965) (ANSP 312593); 3 s, SW of Egmont Key, Florida (D. Steger, 1966) 366-420 m (ANSP 306391); 3 j, W of Tampa Bay, Florida (Richardson) 500 m (ANSP 335492); 1 s, Hillsborough Co., 110 miles SW of Egmont Key, Florida (D. Steger, 1953) 165 m (FLMNH 151609); 1 s (Fig. 13D), Hillsborough Co., SW of Egmont Key, Florida (J. Moore, 1967) 46 m (FLMNH 158178). Other material examined: 2 f, Stn. 15, Florida (MCZ 356092) which are not in sufficiently good con- dition to examine all their characters and attribute them with certainty to this species; 1 f (A.M. Norman coll.) (Blake Expedition), West Indies (BMNH acc. n° 2283). Type locality: off Dry Tortugas, Monroe Co., Florida, 90 m (J. Moore/ Cavalier, 1992). Etymology: The species is named after Harry G. Lee, American malacologist who lent us the mate- rial on which this species is based. Description : Shell (Figs. 13A-13D) elongate, very large for the genus, solid, well sculptured. Protoconch (Figs. 13G- 13K) with between 3 and 3 V4 whorls, bulbous, white, with barely discernible separation from the teleoconch, the first whorl smooth and the next with two spiral cords that are sometimes a little irregular; on the last whorl the lower cord is more prominent, and the upper one may divide in two. The teleoconch has many whorls, 22 in the holotype and 17 in a paratype (Fig. 13B). The first whorls have two spiral nodulous cords (spirals 1 and 3), connected by very narrow prosocline ribs; below, around the fourth or fifth whorls, spiral 2 appears between those cords and remains very narrow for several whorls; after the tenth whorl spiral 3 becomes a little larger, and on the subsequent whorls it is more clearly different and prominent (Fig. 13E). Spiral 2 strength- ens but continúes to be the smallest cord until the end. The suture is very deep. The axial ribs are slightly prosocline. Aperture (Fig. 13F) ovoid, siphonal canal narrow and large, dark in colour. Shell colour light brown or white with irregular brown axial flammules. Dimensions : The holotype measures 18.3 mm. The paratypes are smaller. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarks: The present species must be compared to and differentiated from the following: I. longissima is uniformly white and more cylindrical, having three equal spi- ral cords throughout most of the spire, and another smaller one on the suture which is relatively shallower; the shell sculpture is very similar from the begin- ning to the end with only a little more prominence of the lowermost cord. I. pseudolongissima spec. nov. is white with 4 cords, the upper one smooth at the suture, the following two very small, and only the lowermost is clearly prominent; the suture is not deep; the protoconch has more whorls. I. noduloides spec. nov. has one prominent beaded spiral cord with three more smaller ones which are absent from the first whorls of the teleoconch of I. harryleei. Other elongate deep water species are Inella colon Dalí, 1881, and I. ibex Dalí, 1881; both have only two spiral beaded cords per whorl. Inella aff. harryleei (Figs. 14A, B) Material examined: 1 s, Manatee Co., West of Anna María Key, Florida (J. Moore, 1961) (McGinty coll.) 55 m (FLMNH 158177). Remarks : The specimen studied is in perfect condition and appears rather similar to I. harryleei spec. nov., but it differs in the following characters: a more pointed protoconch, with about two whorls and an angulation on the second whorl, without visible cords; on the teleoconch, spiral 1 is not larger than spiral 2, but is less prominent; on the base, below spiral 3, there is only one 106 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 10. Inella longissima (Dalí, 1881). A: lectotype, 26.7 mm, off Havana, 175 m (MCZ 7381); B: shell, 27.9 mm (ANSP); C, D: detail of the spire of lectotype; E: fragment of first whorls, 6.3 mm (ANSP); F: juvenile with protoconch (ANSP 312592); G: detail of last whorls of the shell from Figure B. Figura 10. Inella longissima (Dalí, 1881). A: lectotipo, 26,7 mm, fuera de La Habana, 175 m (MCZ 7381); B: concha, 27,9 mm (ANSP); C, D: detalle de la espira del lectotipo; E: fragmento de las primeras vueltas, 6,3 mm (ANSP); F: juvenil con protoconcha (ANSP 312592); G: detalle de las últimas vueltas de la concha de la Figura B. 107 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 smooth cord and another very small one immediately below. The siphonal canal is shorter. Dimensions : The only shell studied measures 28.8 mm. All these differences indícate that this shell may represent a séparate species, but they are not enough to justify naming it. Additional material is required. Inella triserialis (Dalí, 1881) (Figs. 14C-E, 36E) Triforis (Inella) triserialis Dalí, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 9: 84. [Yucatán Strait, 640 fms (1171 m). Off Cape San Antonio, 640 fms (1171 m). Station 2, 805 fms (1472 m)]. Triforis (Inella) triserialis Dalí, 1881. In Dalí, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 18: 249, pl. 20, figs. 5a, 6a. Triphora aspera auct. non Jeffreys, 1885. Type material: Two syntypes (USNM 87319), one of them (Fig. 14C) measuring 6.4 mm is here des- ignated as lectotype; the other shell (5.6 mm) would be a paralectotype (Fig. 14D). Both from Cape San Antonio, Cuba, 1170 m; probably, 1 syntype (BMNH Acc. n° 2283), off Havana, 823 m (in very bad condition). Other material studied: 1 j, SW of Egmont Key, Florida (Steger, 1966) 366-421 m (ANSP 306391). Description : See Dall (1881). Proto- conch paucispiral (Fig. 14E), wide, with about 3 whorls which have two spiral cords, the apex depressed and smooth. The teleoconch begins with three spiral nodulous cords, spiral 2 being smaller and closer to spiral 1. On the following whorls spiral 1 increases in size, with nodules that are larger than those on the other cords and are cut at the middle. These differences continué up to the end of the shell. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 6.4 mm. Distribution: Known from Yucatán (México) and Cuba. Remarks: As with other taxa, the syntype material found in USNM and MCZ has been examined. The material from USNM is coincident in protoconch and teleoconch sculpture with the description of Dall (1881) and with one of the figures in Dall (1898: píate 20, fig. 5a) (Fig. 36E) but not with the other figure (Dall, 1898: píate 20, fig. 6a), which seems to be a different species with a sharply pointed apex. The size of the lectotype is slightly smaller than that mentioned in the original description (8.25 mm), but it may be that this type could be partially broken. The material from MCZ seems to be what Dall named as var. intermedia (see below). Dall (1989: 246) considered this taxon in relation with Triphora aspera Jef- freys, 1885 (preoccupied, renamed Triphora brychia Bouchet and Guillemot, 1978; assigned to genus Strobiligera Dall, 1924 by Bouchet and Warén, 1985). He therefore referred to Triforis (Inella) trise- rialis var. aspera Jeffreys, 1885, which perhaps can correspond with the figure previously mentioned (Fig. 36E). A syntype of Jeffreys' taxon (Fig. 14F, BMNH 85.11.5.2673) has been examined, and is here designa ted as lectotype. It is a larger and sharply pointed shell with a multispiral protoconch, and there is no indication that this species occurs in the Caribbean. I. triserialis is different from most of the Caribbean species referred to in this work, mainly due to its spiral 1 having larger nodules. Comparison will be made in the Remarks of some species described below (such as I. sarissa). Inella intermedia (Dall, 1881) (Figs. 14G-J, 36F) Triforis intermedius Dall, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 9: 85. [Yucatán Strait, 1170 m; off Cape San Antonio, 1170 m; station 2, 1472 m]. 108 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 11. Inella pseudolongissima spec. nov. A: holotype, 22.0 mm, off Havana, 823 m (USNM); B: protoconch of the holotype; C: detail of the spire; D: paratype, 10.4 mm (USNM); E: paratype, 18.5 mm (FLMNH); F: protoconch of this paratype; G: paratype, 23.4 mm (FLMNH); H: protoconch of this paratype. Figura 11. Inella pseudolongissima spec. nov. A: holotipo, 22,0 mm, fuera de La Habana, 823 (USNM); B: protoconcha del holotipo ; C: detalle de la espira; D: paratipo, 10,4 mm (USNM); paratipo, 18,5 mm (FLMNH); F: protoconcha de este paratipo; G: paratipo, 23,4 mm (FLMNH); protoconcha de este paratipo. 109 Iberas, 26 (1), 2008 Tñforis triserialis var. intermedia Dalí, 1881. In Dall, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoo/., 18: 287, píate 20, fig. 8. [Habitat: 805 fms (1473 m). Barbados, 183 m]. Triphora clenchi Aguayo, 1935. Unnecessary replacement ñame pro Triforis intermedius Dall, 1881. Type material: Syntype (Fig. 14G) here designated as lectotype (MCZ 7384) (off Cuba, Yucatán Strait and Cape San Antonio. Depth: 1171 m. Blake 1877-1878 Exped.); one paralectotype (Fig. 14H)(MCZ 7382) (Havana, off Morro Light. Depth: 1473 m. Blake 1877-1878 Exped.). Both shells were labeled T. triserialis. Description : See Dall (1881). No pro- toconch was known and the author refers to "nucleus missing". Two spirals of similar strength (spirals 1 and 3) are present on the first whorls of the shell; spiral 2 appears below and is clearly smaller up to near the end of the spire, where the three spirals are almost similar in size (Fig. 141). Axial ribs prosocline, and the nodules are spherical. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 7.9 mm. Distribution : From Yucatán, México, Barbados and Cuba. Remarks: The lectotype here selected is very similar to the shell represented in Dall (1989: pl. 20, fig. 8) (Fig. 36F) but it is not coincident with the description, which refers to a size of 11 mm and 23 whorls; also the figure does not agree with the description, because in spite of the fact that a height of 11 mm is men- tioned, there are not more that 15-16 whorls. The shell here selected as lecto- type is only 7.9 mm and has 12 whorls, and it may be the original shell which lost some part of the spire. Anyway, it must be kept as lectotype in order to attain nomenclatural stability. The para- lectotype is 7.2 mm and has about 13 whorls (MCZ 7382). The ñame Triphora triserialis clenchi Aguayo, 1935 is an unnecessary replace- ment ñame for Triforis intermedius Dall, 1881 (which is the same taxon as Triforis triserialis var. intermedia Dall, 1881 (in Dall, 1889)). This is due to the fact that this ñame is not preoccupied by Cerithium intermedium C. B. Adams, 1850; initially both belonged in different genera and finally the first one is placed in Inella and the second was recently placed by Rolán and Fernández- Garcés (1995) in the genus Similiphora Bouchet, 1985. Lack of knowledge of the proto- conch is a problem when comparing this species to others from the Caribbean. Basing this comparison on the teleo- conch, the following species must be taken into account: Inella longissima has a more cylindri- cal, more elongate shell, spiral 2 is of similar size to the other two spirals on most of the spire, while in I. intermedia it is always smaller. Inella pseudolongissima spec. nov. has spiral 3 more prominent and with larger nodules. Inella harryleei spec. nov. has a typi- cally deep suture, spiral 3 being the most prominent, and spiral 1 is also larger than spiral 2, these differences being maintained to the end of the shell. Inella triserialis has spiral 1 more prominent and with larger nodules. Inella ibex (Dall, 1881) (Figs. 14K-M, 36G) Triforis ibex Dall, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 9: 86. [Type locality: off Cape San Antonio, 1171 m; Yucatán Strait, 1171 m; Sigsbee, off Havana, 823 m]. Triforis (Sychar) inflata var. ibex Dall, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool, 18: 249, pl. 20, fig. 12b. Type material: A syntype (f) of 10.4 mm here designated as lectotype (Fig. 14K), off Cuba, Yucatán Strait and Cape San Antonio, 1171 m (MCZ 7391); another syntype, now paralectotype, f of 7.7 mm, off Havana, Cuba 823 m (MCZ 7392). Another paralectotype (Fig. 14L) (USNM 87313), off San Antonio, Cuba, 1189 m. 110 RoláN AND FernÁNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 12 A, B. Inella noduloides spec. nov. holotype, 2.1 mm, Grand Bahama Island (ANSP). C- E. Inella apexbilirata spec. nov. C: holotype, 3.5 mm, Grand Bahama Island (ANSP); D: paratype, 3.2 mm, Grand Bahama Island (ANSP); E: protoconch of the paratype. F-J. Inella pinarena Espinosa, Ortea and Fernández-Garcés, 2007. F: paratype, 6.0 mm (CFG); G: shell, 5.0 mm (MHNS); H: protoconch of the paratype; I: detail of the protoconch; J: microsculpture. Figura 12. A, B. Inella noduloides spec. nov. holotipo, 2, 1 mm, Grand Bahama (ANSP). C-E. Inella apexbilirata spec. nov. C: holotipo, 3,5 mm, Grand Bahama (ANSP); D: paratipo, 3,2 mm, Grand Bahama (ANSP); E: protoconcha del paratipo. F-J. Inella pinarena Espinosa, Ortea and Fernández- Garcés, 2007. F: paratipo, 6,0 mm (CFG); G: concha, 5,0 mm (MHNS); H: protoconcha del paratipo; I: detalle de la protoconcha; J: microescultura. 111 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Type locality: The three localities mentioned in the original description are written on the label of the lectotype, and henee there is no exact information about which locality applies to this type. Description : See Dall (1881). The orig- inal description mentions a nucleus twice as large as that of I. colon , smooth, inflated, rounded on top, larger than the succeed- ing nuclear whorl, which has two incon- spicuous narrow keels which are wavy and almost tuberculate at first, and merge almost imperceptibly into the usual sculp- ture of the shell. The type material studied has no protoconch, which obviously was lost. The most important characters of the teleoconch are: shell (Figs. 14K, 14L) with two rows of nodules throughout the spire and with one more, smaller and not nodu- lous, occurring at the suture at the end the spire (Fig. 14M). The nodules are cut at the middle. The axial ribs are scarcely appreciable and slightly prosocline. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 10.4 mm. Distribution: Known from Yucatán (México) and Cuba. Remarles : Triforis ibex is the type species of the genus Strobiligera Dall, 1924. The problem is that we have no image or a good description of the pro- toconch of this species, and the original description allows us to think that the protoconch is almost smooth, the first whorl wider than the second and with two whorls, which is typical of a proto- conch of an Inella species. In this case; Strobiligera could be a synonym of Inella. The assignment of this species to the genus Inella is tentative, The lectotype here designated is similar to the shell represented in Dall (1889, pl. 20, fig. 12b) (Fig. 36G) and also its dimensions are closer to those referred to in the orig- inal description. Comments on the differences of I. ibex from other species with two spiral beaded cords can be seen below in I. colon, which is the most similar species. Inella torticula (Dall, 1881) (Figs. 15, 36H) Triforis torticulus Dall, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoo/., 18: 82. [Type locality: Yucatán Strait, 1170 m], Triforis (Sychar) torticula Dall, 1881. In Dall, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 18: 249, pl. 20, fig. 11b. Type material: One syntype (Fig. 15A) (f) here designated as lectotype, 6.7 mm, off Cuba, Yucatán Strait, 1171 m, Blake 1877-1878 Exped. (MCZ 7390); the syntypes in USNM have been lost (Ellen Strong, pers. comm.). Other material examined: 1 f (Fig. 15B) (labeled as Triphora bigemma Watson, 1880), 9.7 mm, 9 whorls, Yucatán Strait, 1171 m (MCZ 7388); 1 s (Figs. 15C, 15D), 25.0 mm, Straits of Florida, 1000- 1200 m (CHL). Description: See Dall (1881). The most important characters are: 4 spirals, the lowermost spiral 4 very narrow and very cióse to the suture; spiral 1 smaller than spirals 2 and 3, which are equal in size and prominence. Colour whitish. The study of an almost complete adult shell (without protoconch) with 17.5 whorls (Figs. 15C, 15D) (CHL), allows us to add some information: at the beginning of the shell there are only three spirals, almost similar in size, but the uppermost slightly smaller; later, the differences between spiral 1 and spirals 2-3 are more evident, and at same time spiral 4 appears; on about whorl 13 (on this shell) the uppermost spiral 1 is divided in two, there being 5 spirals at the end of the shell (Fig. 15E). The ribs are orthocline. Dimensions: see below. Distribution: Known from deep water off Florida and Cuba. Remarks: The placement of this species in the genus Inella is tentative, as the protoconch and the aperture are not known. The syntype in MCZ (Fig. 15A), here designated as lectotype, is a shell frag- ment that seems to be the one figured in 112 RolAn and FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 13. Inella harryleei spec. nov. A: holotype, 18.3 mm, off Dry Tortugas, 90 m (CHL); B: paratype 11.7 mm (BMSM); C: paratype, 12.8 mm (CHL); D: paratype, 14.6 mm (FLMNH). E: detail of the spire of the holotype; F: detail of the aperture of the paratype in figure B; G-K: proto- conchs of several paratypes (CHL). Figura 13. Inella harryleei spec. nov. A: holotipo, 18,3 mm, fuera de Dry Tortugas, 90 m (CHL); B: paratipo 11,7 mm (BMSM); C: paratipo, 12,8 mm (CHL); D: paratipo, 14,6 mm (FLMNH). E: detalle de la espira del holotipo; F: detalle de la abertura del paratipo de la figura B; G-K: protoconchas de varios paratipos ( CHL). 113 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Dall (1889, pl. 20, fig. 11b) (Fig. 36H), although a little more cylindrical, having only 4 whorls instead 6 and measuring 6.7 mm instead of 10.5, which could be due to the loss of two whorls of the shell. As it is compatible with the description, it was thought that it should be designated as lectotype in order to maintain nomenclatural stabil- ity. The other shell examined (Fig. 15B) measured 9.7 mm and had 9 whorls, the label without any indication of "type" and with the ñame Triphora bigemma; it is undoubtedly the same species. The differences with I. bigemma Wat- son are very small, bearing in mind that although the latter species was de- scribed as having only two rows of beads, the figure and the type clearly show three on the final whorls. How- ever, this is a juvenile, and to make a de- cisión it would be necessary to examine the protoconchs and to compare several samples of both species. The other shell studied (Figs. 15C, 15D) has a profile slightly different from the lectotype, with the whorls expand- ing more rapidly and with 4-5 spirals on the final whorls. This could represent a different species, but it is rather coinci- dent in some characters with the shell figured by Dall (1889) (Fig. 36H) and for this reason it is considered to be an example of the variability of this taxon, which has differences between the first and the last whorls. Inella colon (Dall, 1881) (Figs. 16, 361) Triforis colon Dall, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 9: 86. [Type locality: off Havana, Cuba 450 fms (823 m); off Cape San Antonio, 1171 and 1834 mi. Triforis (Inella) colon Dall, 1881. In Dall, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 18: 249, pl. 20, fig. 12. Type material: One syntype (Fig. 16A) (f) here designated as lectotype, 12.7 mm, with the label "off Havana, 823 m" (USNM 87315), and another syntype (Fig. 16B) (f) 7.8 mm, now paralectotype, from the same lot. A syntype (Fig. 16C) (f) 8.6 mm, now paralectotype, from Cape San Antonio, 1171- 1834 m (MCZ 7387). Other material examined: 2 f of 16.2 and 5.6 mm, Egmont Key, Florida, Gulf of México, (J. Moor e/Cav- alier, 1968), 180 m (CHL); 1 s (Fig. 16E), Yucatán, 21° 60' N, 86° 80' W, ENW of Contoy Fight, off Cape Catoche (Riley Black, Apr. 1967) (McGinty coll.) 366-412 m (FLMNH 170221); 1 s (Fig. 16F), 24° 15' 28"N, 81° 57' 89"W, Monroe Co., Straits of Florida, 236-255 m (FLMNH 26660). Type locality: With the designation of the lectotype, the type locality is restricted to off Havana, Cuba 823 m. Description: See Dall (1881). In the original description the protoconch is mentioned as follows: nucleus and first nuclear whorls white, polished, smooth, flattened on top. The most important char- acters of the teleoconch are: shell almost cylindrical (Figs. 16A-16C), white, with two main very narrow spiral beaded cords and two smaller, smooth, slightly wavy cords located near the suture; one of them above and the other below the suture, this being almost imperceptible. The nodules are small and slightly prominent; the uppermost a little larger. The axial ribs almost inapparent, a little prosocline; whorls very short and fíat. Dimensions: The lectotype measures 12.7 mm. Distribution: Known from deep water of Florida, Yucatán and Cuba. Remarks: The lectotype (Fig. 16 A) is in accordance with the original description and it seems to be the shell figured in Dall (1889: pl. 20, fig. 12) (herein Fig. 361), having the same number of whorls and almost the same dimensions. A paralec- totype in the same lot as the lectotype (Fig. 16B) seems to be a different species, because this shell has three spirals instead of two. The paralectotype in MCZ (Fig. 16C) is a little different from the lectotype, but it has the typical distribution of the cords (Fig. 16D) and is probably the same species. Some shells from the Gulf of México (Figs. 16E and 16F) have been included in this taxon but they could rep- 1 14 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 14. A, B. Inella aff. harryleei, shell, 28.8 mm and protoconch (FLMNH). C-E. Inella triseri- alis (Dalí, 1881). C: lectotype, 6.4 mm (USNM); D: paralectotype, 5.6 mm (USNM); E: proto- conch of the paralectotype. F. Triphora aspera, lectotype, 13.0 mm (BMNH) ( =Strobiligera brychia). G-J. Inella intermedia (Dalí, 1881). G: lectotype, 7.9 mm, off Cuba, Yucatán Strait and Cape San Antonio, 1171 m (syntype of T. triserialis, MCZ 7384). H: paralectotype, 7.2 mm, (Havana, off Morro Light, 1473 m (syntype of T. triserialis , MZS 7382); I: detail of the sculpture of the paralec- totype. J: shell photographed by Kaicher (ANSP, unknown size and other data). K-M. Inella ibex (Dalí, 1881). K: lectotype, 10.4 mm, off Cuba, Yucatán Strait and Cape San Antonio, 1 171 m (MCZ 7391); L: paralectotype, 9.2 mm (USNM 87313); M: detail of the spire of the lectotype. Figura 14. A, B. Inella aff. harryleei, concha, 28,8 mmy protoconcha (FLMNH). C-E. Inella triserialis (Dalí, 1881). C: lectotipo, 6,4 mm (USNM); D: paralectotipo, 5,6 mm (USNM); E: protoconcha del paralectotipo. F. Triphora aspera, lectotipo, 13, 0 mm (BMNH) ( =Strobiligera brychia). G-J. Inella inter- media (Dalí, 1881). G: lectotipo, 7,9 mm, Juera de Cuba, Estrecho de Yucatán y Cabo de San Antonio, 1171 m (sintipo de Y. triserialis, MCZ 7384). H: paralectotipo, 7,2 mm, (La Habana, Juera de Morro Light, 1473 m (sintipo de T. triserialis, MZS 7382); I: detalle de la escultura del paralectotipo. J: concha fotograjiada por Kaicher (ANSP, tamaño desconocido así como otros datos). K-M. Inella ibex (Dalí, 1881). K: lectotipo, 10,4 mm, fuera de Cuba, Estrecho de Yucatán y Cabo de San Antonio, 1171 m (MCZ 7391); L: paralectotipo, 9,2 mm (USNM 87313); M: detalle de la espira del lectotipo. 115 IberuSy 26 (1), 2008 resent a different species, because the spirals are more prominent and are more widely separated than on the lectotype. However, the lack of protoconch and the differences of the sculpture are not very important, and so provisionally they ha ve been kept in this species awaiting more material in the fu ture. Dall (1881) referred to the differ- ences between I. íbex and I. colon, proba- bly because he considered both species very similar. Unfortunately at present their protoconchs are not known, but Dall was of the opinión that the proto- conch of I. íbex was twice as large as that of I. colon. In the teleoconch characters, I. íbex has more rapidly expanding whorls. the nodules are larger and are cut at the middle, and fewer whorls occupy the same space. The other Caribbean species may have two spirals at the beginning of the teleoconch, but finally have three or more spirals. This ineludes I. pompona and I. meteora, although spiral 1 is very small and sometimes difficult to see. Inella unicornium Simone, 2006, from Brazil, has a larger shell (up to 50 mm, the biggest known species of Triphori- dae), which according to the original description may be differentiated from 1. colon not only by its larger size, but also by its proportionally longer whorls, taller spiral cords and projecting outer lip. Inella undebermuda spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 17A-E) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 17A) in FLMNH; a paratype (Fig. 17B), 12.3 mm, in USNM. Both from type locality (J.R.H. Lightboum and A.T. Guest, 1988; ex J.R.H. Lightbourn 9/8/93; ex CHL). Type locality: S. of Castle Roads, Bermuda, 90 m. Etymology: The specific ñame derives from the Latín word unde "origin" and the ñame of the arch- ipelago where the species was collected. Description : Shell (Figs. 17A, 17B) elon- gate, whitish and solid. Protoconch (Fig. 17C) white, without a clear separation from the teleoconch, with about two whorls, the nucleus smooth, one spiral cord appearing in the middle of the first whorl and becoming two on the second; the diameter of about 380 pm. The first whorls of the teleoconch have two spiral beaded cords (spirals 1 and 3), and a very small smooth and narrow thread very cióse to the suture; between the 6-7* whorls, spiral 2, which is also narrow and smooth, appears between the other two, closer to spiral 1. On the subsequent whorls, spiral 2 increases slowly in size, becoming slightly undulating and with nodules appearing at the end of the spire (Fig. 17D), but always remaining nearer to spiral 1. The nodules of spirals 1 and 3 are larger and cut at the middle. Aperture (Fig. 17E) rhomboid, columella almost straight, siphonal canal very short and curved. Dimensions : The holotype measures 7.8 mm, and the paratype 12.3 mm. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarles : The holotype is the smallest shell, but has a protoconch in good con- dition. The paratype lacks the first proto- conch whorl. The most important differ- ential character is the smaller size of spiral 2 and its location closer to spiral 1. This species must be compared with and separated from the following: Inella longissima is more elongate and cylindrical and has the three spirals similar in size and distribution. In juveniles assumed to belong to this species, the pro- toconch has three whorls, and when spiral 2 appears on the first whorls of the teleo- conch, it is in the middle between spirals 1 and 3 and not closer to the upper one. Inella pseudolongissima spec. nov. has a protoconch with four whorls and the spirals of the teleoconch are different, spiral 3 being larger and more promi- nent than the others. Spiral 2 is only the smaller one at the beginning. Inella harryleei spec. nov. has three whorls in the protoconch, and in the teleoconch spiral 2 becomes nodulous very early (between whorls 5-6) and is not closer to spiral 1, and the suture is 1 16 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 15. Inella torticula (Dalí, 1881). A: lectotype, 6.7 mm (MCZ 7390); B: shell, (labeled as T. bigemma ), 9.7 mm, 9 whorls, Yucatán Strait, 1171 m (MCZ 7388); C, D: shell, 25.0 mm, Straits of Florida, 1000-1200 m (CHL); E: detail of sculpture. F: shell photographed by Kaicher (ANSP, lacking size and data). Figura 15. Inella torticula (Dalí, 1881). A: lectotipo, 6,7 mm (MCZ 7390); B: concha, (etiquetada como T. bigemma,), 9,7 mm, 9 vueltas, Estrecho de Yucatán, 1171 m (MCZ 7388); C, D: concha, 25,0 mm, Estrechos de Florida, 1000-1200 m (CHL); E: detalle de la escultura. F: concha fotografiada por Kaicher (ANSP, careciendo de información sobre su tamaño y otros datos). 1 17 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 more evident. Furthermore, the colour consists of axial brown flammules and brown siphonal canal, more elongate. Inella intermedia has a shorter shell and spiral 2 is strongly nodulous on the early whorls, being almost the same size as the other two and located at a similar distance between them. Inella ibex and I. colon have only two main spirals. Inella torticula can have up to five spirals on the final whorls. Inella sarissa (Dalí, 1889) Triforis (Inella) sarissa Dalí, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoo/., 18: 247. [Type locality: near Barbados, 13° 11.54' N, 59° 38.45' W, 134 m]. Type material: The lot in USNM labeled as "87314 Holotype" of this species is empty (E. Strong, pers. comm.). Description : See Dall (1889).The fol- lowing characters must be pointed out from the original description: three rows of strong tubercles, the uppermost being the largest and spiral 3 the next in size; spi- ral 2 is the smallest and is cióse to spiral 1. It is also mentioned that one specimen had 24 whorls, thus being an elongate shell. Dimensions : 15.5 mm is mentioned in the original description. Distribution: Only know from its type locality. Remarks: Apparently only I. triseri- alis has the uppermost spiral with larger nodules, but the other two spirals have the nodules rather similar in size; none of the other species here described have these characters. Anyway I. triserialis has a shorter shell. Inella compsa (Dall, 1927) (Figs. 17F, G) Triphora ( Strobiligera ) compsa Dall, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 96. [Type locality: Off Georgia]. Type material: Lectotype, here designated (Fig. 17F) 12.0 mm, and one paralectotype (Fig. 17G) 9.4 mm (USNM 333518). Description : See Dall (1927). Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarks : The description of the species seems to have been based on the characters of both lectotype and paralec- totype, in spite of the fact that they may be different species. The lectotype (Fig. 17F) is in accordance with the descrip- tion with the exception that it has not two but three prominent beaded cords with almost orthocline ribs, but the dimensions are those indicated in the original description. Ffowever it is a fragment of a shell with a broken aper- ture and lacking a protoconch, and it is therefore difficult to define exactly. The paralectotype (Fig. 17G) has only two spirals, with a third appearing on the final whorls cióse to the undulating thread near the suture, and it could be a different species. Due to the lack of additional material apart from these mentioned types, it is preferable to wait for more suitable material to study in the future. Inella pseudotorticula spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 17H-L) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 17H) in FLMNH; a paratype (Fig. 171) in USNM (both vyJ.R.H. Light- boum, 9/8/93; ex CHL). 118 ROLÁN AND FERNÁNDEZ-GARCÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 16. Inella colon (Dalí, 1881). A: lectotype, 12.7 mm, off Havana, 823 m (USNM); B: para- lectotype, 7.8 mm, off Havana, 823 m (USNM); C: paralectotype, 8.6 mm, Cape San Antonio, 1171-1834 m (MCZ 7387); D: detail of the sculpture; E: shell, 20.3 mm, Yucatán (FLMNH); F: shell, 29.4 mm, straits of Florida (FLMNH). Figura 16. Inella colon (Dalí, 1881). A: lectotipo, 12,7 mm, fuera de La Habana, 823 m (USNM); B: paralectotipo, 7,8 mm, fuera de La Habana, 823 m (USNM); C: paralectotipo, 8,6 mm, Cabo de San Antonio, 1171-1834 m (MCZ 7387); D: detalle de la escultura; E: concha, 20,3 mm, Yucatán (FLMNH); F: concha, 29,4 mm, estrechos de Florida (FLMNH). 119 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Type locality: South of Castle Roads, SE Bermuda, (J.R.H. Lightboum and A.T. Guest, 1988) 100 m. Etymology: The specific ñame alludes to the similarity with I. torticula. Description : Shell (Figs. 17H, 171) very elongate, pointed, with blunt apex, not straight in profile, solid. Protoconch (Fig. 17J) with about 2 l/i whorls, with a wide nucleus and two spiral cords, of which the upper one is smaller and less prominent; diameter of about 400 pm. The teleoconch has about 23 whorls (on the holotype) with spirals 2 and 3 present from the beginning, very similar in size, and with the nodules cut in the middle. On the early whorls spiral 1 is very small and is located cióse to the upper suture, with spiral 4 appearing like a fine thread near the lower suture; on about the ninth whorl, spiral 1 is more clearly defined on the upper part of the whorl, below the suture, but is smaller and less prominent than the other two, while spiral 2 is the most prominent and slightly larger; on about the seventeenth whorl, spiral 1 contin- úes to be closer to spiral 2 (Fig. 17K). On about the twenty-first whorl, the three spirals are almost similar in size. Aper- ture (Fig. 17L) ovoid with a short siphonal canal. The shell has some white whorls alternating with entirely light brown whorls. The cords are often light brown between the nodules. Dimensions : The holotype measures 16.8 mm. Distribution: Only know from the type locality. Remarks : This species must be com- pared with the following ones that have elongate shells: Inella longissima has spirals 1 and 3 from the beginning, with spiral 2 appearing below; at the end of the spire the spirals are of almost equal strength, but spiral 2 is slightly smaller and spiral 3 a little more prominent on most of the shell. I. pseudolongissima spec. nov. has spirals 1 and 3 from the beginning, with spiral 2 smaller; on the final whorls spiral 3 is noticeably larger than the others; the colour is whitish. The proto- conch has four whorls. I. harryleei spec. nov. has spirals 1 and 3 from the beginning; spiral 2 appears after the first few whorls but remains smaller throughout the shell; at the end, spiral 3 is very large in compar- ison with the others; the colour is white or light brown with brown axial flam- mules. I. triserialis (Dalí, 1881) has a shorter shell with three spirals, spiral 1 being larger with more inflated nodules. The apex is more depressed. I. intermedia (Dalí, 1881) has a shorter shell with spirals 1 and 3 present at the beginning; spiral 2 is smaller and appears later. I. ibex (Dalí, 1881) and I. colon have only two prominent beaded cords. I. torticula (Dalí, 1881) has spiral 1 less prominent on the early whorls; sub- sequently the final whorls are wider and have up to 5 spirals. I. undebermuda spec. nov. has spirals 1 and 3 at the beginning of the teleo- conch, with spiral 2 appearing between the other two, always remaining smaller and closer to spiral 1. I. unicornium, described by Simone, 2006 from Brazil, has some general simi- larity with I. pseudotorticula, but the holotype is a shell with 40 whorls that measures almost 50 mm in height; also it is mentioned in the original descrip- tion that the protoconch has only one whorl and the teleoconch whorls have only two beaded spiral cords, with an additional smooth cord appearing on the final whorl. Inella enopla (Dalí, 1927) (Figs. 18A-E) Triphora enopla Dalí, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 95. [Type locality: Off Fernandina, Florida, 294 fms (538 m)]. 120 RoláN AND FERNÁNDEZ-GARCÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 17. A-E. Inella undebermuda spec. nov. A: holotype, 7.8 mm, S. of Castle Roads, Bermuda, 90 m (FLMNH); B: paratype, 12.3 mm, same locality (USNM); C: protoconch of the holotype; D: detail of the sculpture, holotype; E: detail of the aperture, holotype. F, G. Inella compsa (Dalí, 1927). F: lectotype, 12.0 mm, off Georgia, 803 m; (USNM); G: paralectotype, 9.4 mm, off Georgia, 805 m (USNM). H-L. Inella pseudotorticula spec. nov. H: holotype, 16.8 mm, SE Bermuda (FLMNH); I: paratype, 8.5 mm, S. of Castle Roads, Bermuda (USNM); J: protoconch, holotype; K: detail of the sculpture, holotype; L: detail of the aperture. Figura 17. A-E. Inella undebermuda spec. nov. A: holotipo, 7,8 mm, S. de Castle Roads, Bermuda, 90 m (FLMNH); B: paratipo, 12,3 mm, la misma localidad (USNM); C: protoconcha del holotipo; D: detalle de la escultura, holotipo; E: detalle de la abertura, holotipo. F, G. Inella compsa (Dalí, 1927). F: lectotipo, 12,0 mm, fuera de Georgia, 805 m; (USNM); G: paralectotipo, 9,4 mm, fuera de Georgia, 805 m (USNM). H-L. Inella pseudotorticula spec. nov. H: holotipo, 16,8 mm, SE Bermuda (FLMNH); I: paratipo, 8,5 mm, S. de Castle Roads, Bermuda (USNM); J: protoconcha, holotipo; K: detalle de la escultura, holotipo; L: detalle de la abertura. 121 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Type material: Lectotype (2 f, labeled as "type"), here designated (Figs. 18A, 18B) and 5 paralec- totypes (3 j, 2 f) (USNM 108074). Other material examined: 2 f (with the label " Triforis colon"), off Havana, Cuba 823 m (Blake Expe- dition, Sta. 243) (BMNH acc. n° 2283). Description : Dall (1927). Protoconch (Figs. 18C, 18D) with the apex smooth, pupoid, wide (about 500 pm), followed by about 2 whorls with three very cióse cords, the uppermost smaller and the lowest one the largest and most promi- nent. Teleoconch whorls with two spiral nodulous cords and another two very fine cords that are separated by the suture (Fig. 18E); the subsutural one is very small and has elongate nodules, while the one just above the suture is smooth. The nodules on the main spi- rals are pointed and cut at the middle. Dimensions : The lectotype consists of fragments measuring 7.2 and 6.6 mm. Distribution : Only known from Florida and Cuba. Remarks : The original description men- tions 15 whorls and dimensions of 11.5 x 2 mm. The glass tube labeled "type" con- tained two fragments (7.2 and 6.6 mm respectively), but there were no apparent indication thar they were previously unit- edtherefore it is doubtful, although pos- sible, that they carne from the same shell. However, they give a good representation of the specific characters, and as it is not certain whether or not they are from the same broken shell, it is better to keep both fragments together and consider both as parts of the lectotype. The large pupoid protoconch is the most important differential character. The most similar species are: I. inflata has the protoconch whorls with two scarcely visible spiral cords, the nodules of the teleoconch smaller and sharply pointed, the shell with rapidly enlarging whorls. Inella bigemma has the shell with more rapidly enlarging whorls, spiral 1 more developed and more clearly nodulous. I. ibex is not so cylindrical and has more pointed nodules, with only one small thread near the suture, lacking the small upper spiral on the final whorls. I. harryleei, I. compsa, I. pseudotorticula spec. nov. and I. intermedia have three spiral cords. I. colon has a more cylindrical shell, with spiral cords less prominent, the nodules very small, and the small cords at both sides of the suture almost imper- ceptible. I. undebermuda has three main spirals, spiral 2 being small and cióse to spiral 1; only one small thread near the suture. I. pompona has a much larger space between spiral 2 and spiral 3, the nodules are smaller and the protoconch is wider and more prominent at the apex, and has two spiral cords. Inella meteora (Dalí, 1927) (Figs. 18F-H) "Triphora" meteora Dall, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 95. [Type locality: Off Fernandina, Florida]. Type material: Lectotype (labeled as "type", in three fragments), here designated (Figs. 18F, 18G) (USNM 108081) and 3 paralectotypes. Description : Dall (1927). The proto- conch (Fig. 18G) is pupoid with about 2 whorls and a diameter of about 600 pm; below the nucleus there are two main smooth spiral cords and another smaller subsutural one. The whorls of the teleoconch have three spiral cords from the beginning (Fig. 18H), the lower two more similar in prominence, the nodules slightly larger on spiral 2; the uppermost is smaller from the beginning of the teleo- conch and also is less prominent on the final whorls. The nodules are uniformly rounded on spiral 1 and larger and cut at the middle on the other two. Above 122 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 18. A-E. Inella enopla (Dalí, 1927). A, B: two fragments labeled as “type”, 7.2, 6.6 mm, 538 m (USNM); C, D: protoconch of a paralectotype; E: detail of the sculpture of a paralectotype. F-H. Inella meteora (Dalí, 1927). F, G: two fragments labeled as “type” 4.0 and 5.1 mm, off Fer- nandina, 538 m (USNM); H: detail of the sculpture. Figura 18. A-E. Inella enopla (Dalí, 1927). A, B: dos fragmentos etiquetados como “tipo”, 7,2, 6,6 mm, 538 m (USNM); C, D: protoconcha de un paralectotipo; E: detalle de la escultura de un paralec- totipo. F-H. Inella meteora (Dalí, 1927). F, G: dos fragmentos etiquetados como “tipo” 4,0 y 5,1 mm, fuera de Fernandina, 538 m (USNM); H: detalle de la escultura. 123 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 the suture there is a small undulating thread. Dimensions : See below. Distribution : Only know from its type locality. Remarks : The original description gives dimensions of 9 x 2 mm; the fragments in the tube labeled "type" measure 6.2, 5.1 and 4.0 mm; they are of the same species but probably not from the same shell. The 3 paralectotypes in the other tube appear to be a different species. The differences with the closest species are: 1. bigemma has two spirals at the beginning of the teleoconch. I. pompona and I. inflata have two spirals at the beginning of the teleo- conch and a wider, pupoid protoconch. I. longissima has two spirals at the beginning, subsequently three regular spirals of similar size, with spherical nodules, and the protoconch has three whorls. I. pseudolongissima spec. nov. has a protoconch with 4 whorls, and spirals 2 and 3 are more evident at the beginning of the teleoconch. I. harryleei has a more depressed apex on the protoconch; on the teleo- conch the lower spiral is larger, with spiral 2 smaller. I. ibex and I. enopla have only two spirals on the protoconch. I. torticula can have up to 5 spirals at the end. I. colon is more cylindrical and has only two main spirals on the teleoconch with small nodules. I. undebermuda spec. nov. has two main spirals at the beginning of the teleoconch and one smaller spiral 2 in- between, located closer to spiral 1. I. compsa is more conical, having more rapidly enlarging whorls; the nodules are less prominent and spheri- cal. I. pseudotorticula spec. nov. has a pro- toconch with a smaller diameter and with 2 well defined cords; only spirals 2 and 3 are present at the beginning of the teleoconch, spiral 1 appearing later. Inella pompona (Dalí, 1927) (Figs. 19A-C) Triphora (Strobiligera) pompona Dalí, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 94. [Type locality: Off Georgia]. Type material: In the material under this ñame from USNM (Figs. 19A-19C) there is a label men- tioning "type", but in the three glass tubes there is no other indication. The shell measuring almost 20 mm with 21 whorls is here designated as lectotype (Fig. 19A); it is referred to in the original description as the "larger but imperfect specimen" because the apex is missing. Numerous para- lectotypes (USNM 108339), most of them fragments (6 in one tube and 48 in another); the largest fragment measures 23.5 mm. Description : Dall (1927). The proto- conch (Fig. 19B) is pupoid and wide, the nucleus and the first whorl wider than the subsequent ones, with the diameter of the first whorl between 650 and 750 pm; in the original description it is described as having 1 1/i whorls, but it can have more than 2 whorls, the second one with two spiral cords. Teleo- conch with two main spirals (spirals 2 and 3); spirals 1 and 4 are very cióse to the suture, which separates them (Fig. 19C). Spiral 1 has very small nodules, while spiral 4 is smooth. The nodules on the main spirals are not very prominent and only a little higher than the cords, and they are slightly cut at the middle. Dimensions : The lectotype measures almost 20 mm, and some shells are somewhat larger. Distribution : Only know from the type locality. Remarks : The species with a pupoid and wide protoconch are: I. enopla has a slightly narrower pro- toconch of three whorls, with three scarcely visible spiral cords. I. ibex and I. colon each have informa- tion on the protoconch in the original description, but shells with a complete 124 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 19. A-C. Inella pompona (Dalí, 1927). A: lectotype, 19.5 mm, 804 m (USNM); B: proto- conch of a paralectotype; C: detail of the sculpture of lectotype. D-I. Inella dinea (Dalí, 1927). D: lectotype, 7.9 mm, 804 m (USNM); E-G: paralectotypes, 6.6, 6.0. 4.7 mm, same locality; H, I: protoconchs, lectotype and paralectotype. Figura 19. A-C. Inella pompona (Dalí, 1927). A: lectotipo, 19,5 mm, 804 m (USNM); B: protocon- cha de un paralectotipo; C: detalle de la escultura del lectotipo. D-I. Inella dinea (Dalí, 1927). D: lec- totipo, 7,9 mm, 804 m (USNM); E-G: paralectotipos, 6,6, 6,0, 4,7 mm, la misma localidad; H, I: protoconchas, lectotipo y paralectotipo. 125 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 apex are not known; on the teleoconch there are similarly two spiral beaded cords, but on 1. colon the sutural area is narro wer and the nodules are smaller; I. ibex has smooth spirals at the beginning of the teleoconch. I. inflata has a similar protoconch, but clearly narrower; there is a greater increase in the width of the whorls and the suture is more prominent. I. undebermuda spec. nov. has a nar- rower protoconch; in the teleoconch. between the main spirals 1 and 3, there is a small spiral 2 closer to spiral 1. 1. dinea (see below). The species with unknown proto- conch: I. compsa has rapidly enlarging whorls and three almost similar spirals. I. sarissa has spiral 1 larger, with spiral 2 very small and cióse to spiral 1. I. bigemma has small nodules on spiral 1 and fewer whorls, never elon- gated. Inella dinea (Dalí, 1927) (Figs. 19D-I) " Triphora " pompona dinea Dalí, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 94. [Type locality: Off Georgia, 440 fms (805 m)]. Type material: Lectotype (Fig. 19D), here designated, and 11 paralectotypes (Figs. 19E-19G) (USNM 333517). Description : Dall (1927), comparing shells to typical I. pompona, only men- tioned that the beading is less promi- nent and the shells are more slender and compact, measuring 10 mm for 15 whorls, with a máximum diameter of 1.75 mm. Now it can be added that the protoconch (Figs. 19H, 191) has between 2 !A - 2 1 ¡2 smooth whorls and is a little variable in size, but it can reach up to 700 pm and is pupoid at the apex, with a large nucleus and with two or three depressed smooth cords on the second whorl. On the teleoconch, the suture has a smooth fine cord on each side. The axial sculpture is formed by small ribs on some shells; on others the ribs are almost absent; there are small orthocline growth lines. There are three spirals, equal in size on the lectotype but with spiral 1 less prominent on other shells. Dimensions: The lectotype measures 7.9 mm. Distribution : Rosenberg (2005) gives coordinates of 30.73° N, 79.43° W, with a depth of 805 m. Remarks: In the material studied there was no shell measuring 10 mm, but the designated lectotype has 14 whorls including the protoconch, and is almost 8 mm. This shell was chosen because the number of whorls is closest to the number given in the description. Also because it has three similar cords on each whorl, very different from T. pompona. Not all the paralectotypes seem to be the same species. Although the present taxon was pub- lished as a variety of T. pompona, compar- ison of the types of both species allowed us to confirm that they are different species. T. pompona has two nodulous cords per whorl and a very small cord, lacking nodules, on either side of the suture. T. dinea has a similar pupoid pro- toconch but the shell is variable, with some shells having three cords of similar size; other shells have only two spiral nodulous cords and the third, near the suture, is depressed. These could repre- sent characters of two different species but, as the studied material did not inelude enough complete shells, it is better to keep these two morphs within T. dinea. I. sentoma has a fíat profile, lacks nodules and is also a larger shell. I. gaesona has depressed spirals almost without nodules and the proto- conch is narrower, with a depressed apex. I. inflata has a narrower protoconch, with 2 poorly defined cords. The teleo- conch has more prominent spirals and nodules. 126 Rolan AND FernÁNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 20. A, B. Inella sentoma (Dalí, 1927). A: lectotype, 28 mm, off Fernandina, 538 m (USNM): B: paralectotype, 4.4 mm, same locality (USNM). C. Inella gaesona (Dalí, 1927), lecto- type, 9 mm, off Georgia, 805 m (USNM). D-H. Inella differens spec. nov. D: holotype, 7.6 mm, off Egmont Key, Hillsborough Co., Florida (FLMNH); E: paratype, 6.2 mm; F, G: protoconchs of holotype and paratype; H; detail of the sculpture. Figura 20. A, B. Inella sentoma (Dalí, 1927). A: lectotipo, 28 mm, fuera de Fernandina, 538 m (USNM): B: paralectotipo, 4,4 mm, la misma localidad (USNM). C. Inella gaesona (Dalí, 1927), lectotipo, 9 mm, fuera de Georgia, 805 m (USNM). D-H. Inella differens spec. nov. D: holotipo , 7,6 mm, fuera de Egmont Key, Hillsborough Co., Florida (FLMNH); E: paratipo, 6,2 mm; F, G: protocon- chas del holotipo y paratipo; H; detalle de la escultura. 127 Negro Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Inella sentoma (Dalí, 1927) (Figs. 20A-B) Triphora sentoma Dalí, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 96. [Type locality: Off Fernandina, Florida, 805 m]. Type material: Lectotype, here designated (Fig. 20A), 28 mm and a paralectotype (Fig. 20B), 4.4 mm (USNM 108072). Description : See Dall (1927). The pro- toconch is unknown. Both the lectotype and paralectotype are in very poor con- dition, so the most important characters from the original description are men- tioned here: two low flattened spiral cords, faintly undulated, one at the periphery of the whorl, the other in front of it; the suture linear with a minute threadlet on each side of it, the interspaces shallow. In reality it can be said that there are grooves and orthocline growth lines, but no prominent sculpture. Dimensions: The lectotype measures 28 mm. Distribution : Only know from its type locality. Remarks : This species is very elongate and with depressed sculpture. There is no Information about the protoconch or aper- ture, but in the original description it is mentioned that one of the fragments had a protoconch of a whorl and a half. For this reason and the almost cylindrical shell form it is included in the genus Inella. The paralectotype (Fig. 20B) is more similar to the lectotype of I. gaesona (see below). No other Inella species in the studied area has such depressed sculpture. Inella gaesona (Dall, 1927) (Figs. 20C) Triphora (Strobiligera) gaesona Dall, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 95. [Type locality: Off Georgia, 805 m]. Type material: Lectotype, here designated (Fig. 20C) with 16 whorls, 9 mm (USNM 1088341). Para- lectotypes: 15 s and f (not examined) (USNM). Description: See Dall (1927). Proto- conch paucispiral, pupoid and de- pressed, with the first whorl wider than the following one. The spiral sculpture is formed more by grooves which sepá- rate the whorls into three parts than by prominent spirals. The axial sculpture consists only of orthocline growth lines. Dimensions: The lectotype measures 9 mm. Distribution: Only know from its type locality. Remarks: Species very different from any other due to the pupoid and depressed protoconch and the fíat spiral cords without nodules. It only has some similarity to I. sentoma, but a complete comparison could not be made because of the poor condition of the lectotype of this species and the lack of sufficient material. For this reason they are kept as different valid taxa, awaiting more material for study. Inella differens spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 20D-H) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 20D) in FLMNH. Paratype (Fig. 20E) in BMSM (both ex CHL). Other material examined: Off Louisiana: 3 f without protoconch, 28° 05.61' N, 91° 02.245' W by 28° 05.524' N, 91° 02.036' W, 58 m (E. F. Garda/ Pelican 06/09/00) (CHL). Type locality: Off Egmont Key, Hillsborough Co., Florida, USA, (J. Moor e/Caualier, 1962), 135 m. Etymology: The specific ñame alludes to the shell having different characters from others in the area. Description: Shell subcylindrical toconch (Figs. 20F, 20G) pupoid with 1 (Figs. 20D, 20E) solid, light brown. Pro- 3A -2 whorls and a diameter of about 128 ROLÁN and FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 21. A-D. Inella slapcinskyi spec. nov. A, B: holotype, 2.6 mm (FLMNH); C: protoconch of the holotype; D: detail of the fragment (ANSP). E-I. 1: Inella faberi spec. nov. E: holotype, 3.7 mm; F, G: paratypes, 4.4 and 3.0 mm. Louisiana (FLMNH); H, I: protoconch and detail of teleo- conch sculpture, paratype in figure F. Figura 21. A-D. Inella slapcinskyi spec. nov. A, B: holotipo , 2,6 mm (FLMNH); C: protoconcha del holotipo ; D: detalle del fragmento (ANSP). E-I. 1: Inella faberi spec. nov. E: holotipo, 3.7 mm; F, G: paratipos, 4.4 y 3.0 mm. Louisiana (FLMNH); H, I: protoconcha y detalle de la escultura de la telo- concha, paratipo de la figura F. 129 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 600 pm, the nucleus smooth and the whorls with two smooth spiral cords. The teleoconch begins when the two spiral cords become nodulous; these beaded spirals are equal in size and both are closer to the suture and more widely separated in the middle of the whorl. About the fourth or fifth whorl, spiral 2 appears below and very cióse to spiral 1, beginning as a fine thread undulating beneath the nodules (Fig. 20H). Immediately it becomes nodulous but with a smaller nodular size. About the eleventh whorl the nodules reach almost the size of those on spirals 1 and 3. There are three additional smooth cords on the base. Aperture ovoid elon- gate; siphonal canal short and open. Dimensions : The holotype measures 7.6 mm. Distribution: Only know from its type locality. Remarks : This species is kept in the genus Inella due to the characteristic protoconch. It may be differentiated from most of the other closely similar species by its short protoconch with only 1 3A - 2 whorls and its brown colour: I. dinea has more weakly sculptured whorls and the protoconch has a wider pupoid form. 1. meteora, I. undebermuda spec. nov., I. enopla and I. pompona have a similar number of protoconch whorls but the apex is more inflated and pupoid, and the shells are larger and white; furthermore, I. meteora has three spiral cords on the teleoconch, spiral 1 being smaller; I. undebermuda has spiral 2 beginning on about the tenth whorl (instead of on the fourth in I. differens), and it is very small and closer to spiral 1; I. enopla and I. pompona have two main spiral cords on the teleoconch with an additional cord on each side of the suture, the proto- conch being very much wider. I. triserialis has a rather similar shell but the protoconch has 3 whorls, the apex is more depressed, the nodules of spiral 1 are larger and cut at the middle. I. sarissa is white, spiral 2 is smaller and very cióse to spiral 1. I. compsa has rapidly enlarging whorls, and spiral 2 is not smaller. I. intermedia has a larger shell that is lighter, whitish and more conical, the spirals almost equal in size. See also I.faberi below. Inella slapcinskyi spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 21A-D) Type material: Holotype (juvenile, Figs. 21A, 21B) (FLMNH UF350382). Other material studied: 1 f (ANSP). Type locality: Cayman Islands, Little Cayman, Jackson's Bight (P. Watson, Dec/1992), 35 m. Etymology: The species is named after John Slapcinsky, Curator of Molluscs of the FLMNH, for his help in the examination of the material housed in this museum. Description: Shell (Figs. 21A, 21B) small, almost cylindrical, whitish. Proto- conch paucispiral (Fig. 21C) with a diameter of about 400 pm and almost three whorls, with two narrow spiral cords on the first whorl, three on the fol- lowing, well defined, the lower one more prominent; each spiral cord bears a row of small tubercles on its upper surface. The nucleus of the protoconch is very small. The teleoconch has four spirals; spiral 1 has more prominent nodules; spiral 4 is the next in size and spirals 2 and 3 have smaller, elongated nodules (Fig. 21D). The axial ribs are wide and strongly prosocline. On the base there are two more smooth spirals. Aperture rounded with a strong col- umellar callus; siphonal canal short and open. Dimensions: The holotype measures 2.6 mm. Distribution : Only known from its type locality. Remarks : This species has been named in spite of the scarcity of avail- able material because the shell and the protoconch have characters that are absolutely different from any other species of this group in the study 130 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 22. Sagenotriphora osclausum (Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1995). A-C: shells, 4.9, 4.9 and 4.8 mm, E Palm Beach, Florida (CHL); D-F: protoconchs; G-H: radula, specimen from off Palm Beach, Florida (CHL); I: operculum. Figura 22. Sagenotriphora osclausum (Rolán y Fernández-Garcés, 1995). A-C: conchas, 4,9, 4,9 y 4.8 mm, E Palm Beach, Florida (CHL); D-F: protoconchas; G-H: rádula, de un ejemplar de fuera de Palm Beach, Florida ( CHL); L: opérculo. 131 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 area. Only I. torticula has 4 beaded area has a row of tubercles on the pro- spirals, and no species in the study toconch. Inella faberi spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 21E-I) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 21E) and 2 paratypes (Figs. 21F, 21G) in FLMNH (UF 291343). Type locality: Louisiana, 28.05731° N, 92.44963° W, 71-74 m. Etymology: The species is named after the Dutch malacologist Marien Faber, who studied many of the species of Caribbean Triphoridae and helped us in some aspects of this work. Description: Shell (Figs. 21E-21G) subcylindrical, solid, brownish in colour. Protoconch (Fig. 21FF) with almost three whorls which have two narrow well defined spirals, the lower of which is a little more prominent; its diameter is about 450 pm. The teleo- conch begins with two nodulous spirals 1 and 3, quite cióse together; spiral 1 is slightly smaller and less prominent than spiral 3. Subsequently spiral 2 appears between them and remains smaller (Fig. 211). The axial ribs which connect the nodules are strongly proso- cline. The nodules are different on the three spirals: on spiral 1 they are spheri- cal and a little ovoid, on spiral 2 they are very elongate and narrow, and on spiral 3 the nodules are larger and cut by the spiral which crosses them. Aper- ture rounded but in poor condition on all the type material. Dimensions: The holotype measures 3.7 mm. One paratype reaches 4.4 mm. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarks: The most similar species are: I. differens spec. nov. has a wider pro- toconch, apically more depressed and with only 2 whorls, the nodules of the teleoconch are all spherical and the axial ribs almost orthocline. I. undebermuda spec. nov. has a proto- conch with only 2 whorls, the nucleus more elevated; spiral 2 on the teleo- conch is closer to spiral 1 and the axial ribs are slightly prosocline. I. apexbilirata spec. nov. has cords of sim- ilar size on the protoconch, the shell is whitish, and on the teleoconch spiral 1 has very small nodules, spirals 2 and 3 have larger nodules which are cut at the middle, and the axial ribs are almost orthocline. I. harryleei spec. nov. has a very elon- gate shell, a protoconch with cords of similar size, and the teleoconch has spiral 3 with much larger and more prominent nodules. Genus Sagenotriphora Marshall, 1983 Type species (by original designa tion): Triphora and northern New Zealand. Description : Protoconch multispiral with reticulate sculpture on the first whorl; radula with a rachidian tooth impulla Hedley, 1903. Recent, Southern Australia which is separated into two parts, and only one lateral and one marginal. Sagenotriphora osclausum (Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1995) (Figs. 22A-I) " Triphora " osclausum Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1995. Apex, 10(1): 21. Type material: Holotype and paratypes (see Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1995) Other material examined: Florida: 3 s, beach drift, Little Torch Key, Monroe Co., (M. Teskey, 5/76) (CHL); 2 sp, 32 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co. (T. Yocius 6/81; ex J. Dawley 12/2/90), 30 m 132 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 23. A-F. Sagenotriphora candidula spec. nov. A, B: holotype, 5.0 mm (FLMNH); C: paratype 3.9 mm, from type locality (BMSM); D: protoconch of the holotype; E: operculum; F: drawing of the radula. G, H. “Triphora” abrupta (Dalí, 1881); G: lectotype, 7.9 mm (MCZ 7389); H: Detail of the spire. I-K. “Triphora caracca Dalí, 1927. I: lectotype, 7.1 mm, off Georgia, 805 m (USNM): J, K: paralectotypes, 6.9, 6.7 mm, same locality (USNM). Figura 23. A-F. Sagenotriphora candidula spec. nov. A, B: holotipo, 5, 0 mm (FLMNH); C: paratipo 3,9 mm, de la localidad tipo (BMSM); D: protoconcha del holotipo; E: opérculo; F: dibujo de la rádula. G, H. “Triphora” abrupta (Dalí, 1881); G: lectotipo, 7,9 mm (MCZ 7389); H: Detalle de la espira. I-K. “Triphora” caracca Dalí, 1927. I: lectotipo, 7,1 mm, fuera de Georgia, 805 m (USNM): J, K: paralectotipos, 6,9, 6,7 mm, la misma localidad (USNM). 133 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 (CHL); 5 sp (Figs. 22A-22C)(one destroyed by radular study), E Palm Beach (J. Root; ex K. Sunder- land 1991) 30 m (CHL); 5 s, SW Egmont Key, 73-92 m (Steger, 1966) (ANSP 306356); 2 s, Monroe Co. Dry Tortugas area, 25 30' N, 59 m (FLMNH 154901); 3 s, Palm Beach Co., off Singer Id. (McGinty/Jun 1940) 183-274 m (FLMNH 257141); 2 s, Palm Beach Co., off Palm Beach (McGinty/Jan 1950) 92 m (FLMNH 205145); 8 s, Palm Beach Co., reefs (D. Akers/ 1970-1 971) 30 m (FLMNH 127829); 15 sp, Palm Beach Co., off Delray Beach, Manalapan Wreck (McGinty), 10 m (FLMNH 249896); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., off Yamato Rocks (F. B. Lyman/ Apr 1939) 11 m (FLMNH 10242). Bahamas: 2 s. Iridian Cay, Grand Bahama Island 26° 42' 45"N, 78° 39' 15"W (Worsfold) (ANSP 366953). Description : Rolán and Fernández- Garcés (1995). Shell (Figs. 22A-22C) light brown with the protoconch darker. Radula (Figs. 22G, 22H): With the formula 4-1-1-1-4. Central tooth divided in two parts by a deep separation. Each of these two prominences finishes in four short sharp pointed cusps. Lateral teeth elongate and with the form of a half tube, the end curved with 6-7 pointed and short cusps. Four marginal teeth in each side, fíat, elongate, and at their ends are about 15-17 very fine and elongate cusps, which are shorter on one side and more elongate on the other. Dimensions: The holotype measures 4.5 mm. Some shells can reach up to 5.0 mm. Distribution : Known from Florida, Bahamas and Cuba. Remarks : This species was described without a generic assignment, as no soft parts were studied. With the present material it was possible to study the radula from dried animáis retracted into the shell. This radula proved to be very different from all those previously known, and for this reason the creation of a new genus was considered, but it seemed preferable to place the species provisionally in a known genus that had the most similar radula. In this case we found that the genus Sagenotriphora is almost the only one in which the rachid- ian tooth is divided into two parts, although it has only one wide lateral and one marginal, contrary to the four that are found in the present species. Sagenotriphora osclausum had been considered by some malacologists (the label of most of the studied material) to be Triphora dupliniana Olsson, 1916. This taxon is a fossil species and it may be differentiated by the shorter shell and the open siphonal canal. Sagenotriphora candidula spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 23A-F) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 23A, 23B) in FLMNH. Paratypes: 1 s (Fig. 23C) in BMSM; 1 s, in USNM; all from the type locality and ex CHL. Other paratypes: 3 s, off Anna Maria Island, Manatee Co., Florida (J. Moore /Cavalier, 1962), 15-30 m (CHL); 4 s, SW of Egmont Key, Florida (Steger, 1996) 40-50 m (ANSP 306346); 10 s, East Tampa Bay, Florida (C. L. Richardson) (ANSP 335494); 5 s, Palm Beach Co., Florida (McGinty, Jul/1941) 55-73 m (FLMNH 249739); 2 s, Hillsborough Co., W of Egmont Key, Florida (J. Moore, 1962) 183 m (FLMNH 249838); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., reefs. Florida (D. Akers, 1970-1971) 30 m (FLMNH 127829); 13 sp, Palm Beach Co., off Delray Beach, Manalapan Wreck, Florida (McGinty), 10 m (FLMNH 249896); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., off Singer Island, Florida (McGinty, Jun/1940) 30 m (FLMNH 178388); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., Breakers Hotel, (McGinty, Jun/1940) 30 m (FLMNH 154860). Other material studied: Florida: 7 s and f, SW of Egmont Key (Steger, 1996) 40-50 m (ANSP); 2 sp (destroyed for radular studies), type locality (CHL); 11 s, in poor condition, East Tampa Bay (C. L. Richardson) (ANSP 335494); 2 s, in poor condition, St. Augustine (FLMNH 286017). Type locality: beach drift. Captiva Island, Florida. Etymology: The specific ñame is the Latín word candidula which means "shining white" (diminu- tive) and alludes to the colour of the shell. Description : Shell (Figs. 23A-23C) elon- the whorls with two spiral threads crossed gate, solid. Protoconch (Fig. 23D) of almost by small undulating axial ribs. The begin- 4 whorls, apex with rounded tubercles and ning of the teleoconch has two spirals, spi- 134 ROLÁN and FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 24. A-E. “ Triphora” georgiana Dalí, 1927. A: lectotype, 7.5 mm, off Georgia, 805 m (USNM); B-E: paralectotypes, 6.0, 4.9, 5.0, 4.1 mm, same locality (USNM). F, G. “Triphora” indígena Dalí, 1927. F: lectotype, 6.6 mm, off Georgia, 805 m (USNM): G: paralectotype, 3.3 mm, same locality (USNM). H. “ Triphora” lilacina, lectotype, 8.5 mm, Turtle Harbor, Florida, 11 m (USNM 83087). I-O. “Triphora” cf. lilacina (Dalí, 1889). I: shell, 7.5 mm, Pinellas Co., Florida (FLMNH); J: shell, 9.0 mm, Monroe Co., Florida (FLMNH); K: shell, 8.0 mm, Palm Beach Co., Florida (FLMNH); L: shell, SEM photo, 4.1 mm, Pickles Reef, off Key Largo, 5 m (CHL); M: apical part with protoconch, shell in figure J; N: protoconch of shell in Figure L; O: detail of the last whorl from shell in Figure I. Figura 24. A-E. “Triphora” georgiana Dalí, 1927. A: lectotipo, 7,5 mm, fuera de Georgia, 805 m (USNM); B-E: paralectotipos, 6,0, 4,9, 5,0, 4,1 mm, de la misma localidad (USNM). F, G. “Triphora” indigena Dalí, 1927. F: lectotipo, 6,6 mm, fuera de Georgia, 805 m (USNM): G: paralec- totipo, 3.3 mm, la misma localidad (USNM). H. “Triphora” lilacina, lectotipo, 8,5 mm, Turtle Harbor, Florida, 11 m (USNM 83087). I-O. “Triphora” cf. lilacina (Dalí, 1889). F. concha, 7,5 mm, Pinellas Co., Florida (FLMNH); J: concha, 9,0 mm, Monroe Co., Florida (FLMNH); K: concha, 8,0 mm, Palm Beach Co., Florida (FLMNH); L: concha, SEM photo, 4,1 mm, Pickles Reef, fuera de Cayo Largo, 5 m ( CHL); M: parte apical con protoconcha, concha de la Figura J; N: protoconcha de la concha de la Figura L; O: detalle de la última vuelta de la concha de la Figura L. 135 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 ral 1 very cióse to the suture and spiral 3 in the middle of the whorl. About the fourth- fifth whorl spiral 2 appears in the middle of the space between the other two, enlarg- ing quickly and becoming equal to spirals 1 and 3 on the subsequent two whorls. A very fine spiral thread appears at the suture. Aperture oval elongate. Siphonal canal very short, closed by the continua- tion of the outer lip. Colour: protoconch brown and the teleoconch uniformly creamy-white; small areas of cream or light brown may be visible on the base and inside the aperture. Operculum multispiral (Fig. 23E) ovoid, yellowish, translucent. Dimensions : The holoype measures 5.0 mm. Distribution : Known from Florida coasts. Due to the scarcity of available mater- ial, our radular study was limited to only two specimens. Unfortunatly, only a little information could be obtained and the radula could not be photographed (see Fig. 23F). The radula (formula 3-1-1-1-3) has a central tooth with two upward cusps and two more externally and in the opposite direction. The lateral teeth have a sharp border wíth many small cusps. The marginal has only a few cusps. Remarks: This species had been con- siderad by collectors to be conspecific with the previous one (S. osclausum), which is similar but light brown in colour. However, the difference in the radula indi- cated that they were different species. S. candidula spec. nov. must be differ- entiated from the white Cosmotriphora mela- nura (C. B. Adams, 1850) which is larger, with more whorls. Spiral 2 appears earlier(3-4 whorls), the colour of the teleo- conch is milk white and not creamy-white, and the base is white; the apex of the pro- toconch is narro wer; also the protoconch is consistently dark brown and not light brown, has only one spiral on the first and second whorls and is also a little larger. Marshallora ostenta spec. nov. is not totally cream, and some spiral cords (at least the suture) may be brown or light brown; the siphonal canal is short and open and the protoconch is somewhat larger, and has one spiral cord on the first protoconch whorl. Genus Triphora Blainville, 1828 Type species (by monotypy): Triphora gemmatum Blainville, 1828; Recent, Mauritius. Remarks: This genus ñame has is commontly used when generic assig- formerly been employed as the ment is not possible, as " Triphora " sensu nominal for the family. Consequently, it lato. "Triphora" hircus (Dalí, 1881) (Fig. 36J) Triforis hircus Dalí, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 9: 83. [Type locality: Yucatán Strait, 640 fms (1171 m)]. Triforis (bigemma var.?) hircus Dalí, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 18: 249, pl. 20, fig. 11. Type material: No type in USNM (E. Strong, pers. corran.); neither in other American museums. Figured in Dall (1889: pl. 20, fig. 11) (Fig. 36f) measuring 12.5 mm. Description: See Dall (1881). With 14 or more inflated whitish whorls. The most important characters in the origi- nal description and in the figure are the two prominent spirals, the upper one more widely separated from the suture. Dimensions: The original description gives a dimensión of 12.5 mm. Distribution: Only known from the type material. Remarks: Dall (1881) described this species as new; later (Dall, 1889) he revised his taxonomic opinión and he considerad it to be probably a variety of T. bigemma Watson, 1880; but that species has only two spirals on the upper part of 1 36 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 25. A. Triforis atlántica E. A. Smith, 1890, lectotype, 6 mm, St. Helena. B-I. “ Triphora atlántica. B: shell, 6.3 mm, W Egmont Key, Hillsborough Co., Florida (CHL); C, D: shells, 7.1, 4.9 mm off Guarapari, Espiritu Santo State, Brazil, 15-20 m (CHL); E, G, H: shells, 6.7, 5.3, 4.2 mm, 42 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida, 85 m (CHL); F: shell, 4.8 mm, SEM photo, Florida (FLMNH); I: protoconch of the shell in previous figure). J. “Triphora” pyrrha Henderson and Bartsch, 1914, syntype, 2.7 mm, Chincoteague (USNM). Figura 25. A. Triforis atlántica E. A. Smith, 1890, lectotipo, 6 mm, St. Helena. B-I. “Triphora” atlántica. B: concha, 6,3 mm, O Cayo Egmont, Hillsborough Co., Florida (CHL); C, D: conchas, 7,1, 4.9 mm fuera de Guarapari, Estado de Espiritu Santo, Brasil, 15-20 m (CHL); E, G, H: conchas, 6,7, 5,3, 4,2 mm, 42 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida, 85 m (CHL); F: concha, 4,8 mm, SEM photo, Florida (FLMNH); I: protoconcha de la concha de la figura anterior). J. “Triphora” pyrrha Henderson y Bartsch, 1914, syntype, 2,7 mm, Chincoteague (USNM). 137 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 the teleoconch, subsequently with three spirals of which spiral 1 is smaller (Watson, 1886, pl. 43, fig. 6). For these reasons both taxa have been considered here to be valid and different species. This species has been kept here in "Triphora" instead of in Inella due to several characters found in the original description: acutely tapered apex proba- bly rather pointed, crowded transverse sculpture (twenty-one slightly oblique ribs, etc.), and also due to the figured shape of the species. Comparison must be made with the species having 2 main spirals, basing the differences on the teleoconch characters: I. etiopia and I. pompona are more cylindrical and have two small spirals besides the two main ones. I. colon and I. ibex have more cylin- drical shells, and the two spirals are located equidistan! between the sutures. "Triphora" cylindrella (Dalí, 1881) (Fig. 36K) Triforis cylindrella Dalí, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool, 9: 83. [Type locality: Cape San Antonio, 640 fms (1171 m)]. Triforis (Sychar) cylindrella Dalí, 1881. In Dall, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool, 18: 250, pl. 20, fig. 6. Type material: No type in USNM (E. Strong, pers. corran.), AMNH (M. Sidall, pers. corran.), or ANSP. The lectotype, here designated, (Fig. 36K) is the specimen figured by Dall (1889, píate 20, fig. 6). Description : See Dall (1881). Shell with 12-14 white whorls. The most important characters are the presence of three similar spirals and convex whorls, the lo west with more elongate nodules. Dimensions: The original description gives a dimensión of 6.5 mm. Distribution : Only known from Cape San Antonio. Remarks : The placement of this species in the genus "Triphora" s. I is tentative and based on the original description and fig- ure. As the type was not found, the com- parison was made from the characters in the original description with the species which had three equal spirals, as follows: I. intermedia has whorls with a fíat profile, only 2 spirals at the beginning, and spiral 2 is smaller on most of the Shell. I. torticula has convex whorls, but the nodules are larger on spirals 2 and 3, and the shell is more elongate and cylindrical. I. compsa has an unknown protoconch, so comparison is difficult; however, spiral 1 is smaller and the nodules are more prominent. Cosmotriphora melanura is more elon- gate and the profile of the whorls is fíat. Sagenotriphora candidula has only two spirals at the beginning of the teleo- conch and the whorls are rather fíat. "Triphora" rushii (Dall, 1889) Triforis rushii Dall, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 18: 246. [Type locality: west of North Bimini Island, Bahamas, 200 fms (366 m)]. Type material: Holotype (USNM 61227) missing (Ellen Strong pers. comm.). Description : See Dall (1889: 246). Shell with 12-14 whorls. Four spirals, of which only the lowermost is prominent, with a row of large pointed nodules. Above this are three much finer, lower and undulating threads of equal size. No ribs exist. Shell milky-white in colour. Dimensions : 2.6 mm according to the original description. Remarks : No other species in the studied area shows this kind of sculp- ture with four spirals, the lowermost the most prominent and with the largest nodules. 138 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 26. A-D. “ Triphora ” inaudita spec. nov. A: holotype, 5.4 mm, SW of Dry Tortugas (FLMNH). B: paratype, 4.4 mm (BMSM). C: details of protoconch of the holotype; D: detail of the sculpture. E-I. “Triphora” pseudonovem spec. nov. E: holotype, 7.3 mm (FLMNH); F: detail of the aperture of a paratype (FLMNH); G: protoconch; H: detail of the protoconch; I: detail of the spire of the holotype. Figura 26. A-D. “Triphora” inaudita spec. nov. A: holotipo, 5,4 mm, SO de Dry Tortugas (FLMNH). B: paratipo, 4,4 mm (BMSM). C: detalle de la protoconcha del holotipo; D: detalle de la escultura. E-I. “Triphora” pseudonovem spec. nov. E: holotipo, 7,3 mm (FLMNH); F: detalle de la abertura de un paratipo (FLMNH); G: protoconcha; H: detalle de la protoconcha; I: detalle de la espira del holotipo. 139 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 "Triphora" abrupta (Dalí, 1881) (Figs. 23G-H, 36M) Triforis (bigemma Watson varj abruptus Dalí, 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoo/., 18: 84. [Type locality: Yucatán Strait, 640 fms (1171 m)]. Triforis (Sychar) abrupta Dalí, 1881. In Dall, 1889. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 18: 249, pl. 20, fig. 12b. lectotype (Figs. 23G, 23H) (MCZ 7389). The types in Type material: A syntype, here designated as USNM are lost (E. Strong, pers. comm.). Description : See Dall (1881). The lec- totype is a shell without protoconch and aperture. The most important characters are that spiral 1 is formed by small, less prominent nodules; spirals 2 and 3 are more prominent and almost equal, with larger nodules. Below there is a small, smooth spiral 4. Dimensions : according to Dall (1881) the shell measures 7.5 mm. The lecto- type measures 7.9 mm. Distribution : Only known from the type material. Remarks : The lectotype is probably the same shell studied by Dall with the loss of the external lip, with the same size and sculpture. For this reason it is considered as lectotype. No information on protoconch and aperture are avail- able, which makes any kind of compari- son difficult. The placement in "Triphora'' and not in Inella is tentative, based on the rapidly enlarging whorls. There are only a few species with spiral 1 smaller, spirals 2 and 3 larger and similar, and spiral 4 smooth: Inella pompona and I. enopla have shells lighter in colour, more elongated, lacking spiral 1 on the first teleoconch whorls, and with the space between the main spirals more depressed. Inella apexbilirata spec. nov. has a smaller shell, narrower and almost cylindrical in profile. "Triphora" caracca Dall, 1927 (Figs. 23I-K) Triphora caracca Dall, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 93. [Type locality: Off Georgia, 440 fms (805 m)]. Type material: Lectotype, here designated (Fig. 231) and paralectotypes (Fig. 23J, 23K) (USNM 108343). Description : See Dall (1927). Dark brown paucispiral protoconch with at least three whorls with two spiral cords. No more details can be known because of erosión. The most important differen- tial character is that the axial ribs are very fine and strongly prosocline. Spirals 1 and 3 larger and prominent from the beginning of the teleoconch, with spiral 2 appearing about the tenth whorl and remaining very small on the final whorls. Dimensions : The original description gives a dimensión of 7.1 mm. Distribution: Only known from the type material. Remarks: The shell mentioned by Dall (1927) measured 8 mm, but the lectotype examined from USNM only reached 7.1 mm, which could be due to the loss of one whorl. No other triphorid in the Caribbean has spiral 2 beginning on the tenth whorl and remaining small and cióse to spiral 1 down to the end of the spire. "Triphora" georgiana Dall, 1927 (Figs. 24A-E) Triphora (Biforina) georgiana, Dall, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M.r 70: 93 [Type locality: Off Georgia]. Type material: Lectotype, here designated (Fig. 24A) with 15 whorls and 5 paralectotypes (Figs. 24B-24E) (USNM 333516). 140 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 27. A-F. “Triphora” calva (Faber and Moolenbeek, 1991). A: shell, 3.7 mm, Key Largo, Florida (CMK); B: protoconch of the previous shell; C: shell, 3.7 mm, Key Matias, Cuba (MHNS); D: protoconch, Cienfuegos, Cuba (CFG); E: protoconch, Santa Lucia, Pinar del Río, Cuba (CFG); F: protoconch, Abaco, Bahamas (CCR); G: “ Triphora ” cf. calva, shell, 6.8 mm, Grand Bahama Island (ANSP). H, I. “Triphora” yociusi spec. nov. H: holotype, 3.9 mm, off St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida (FMNH); I: protoconch of the paratype. Figura 27. A-F. “Triphora” calva (Faber and Moolenbeek, 1991). A: concha, 3,7 mm, Cayo Largo, Florida (CMK); B: protoconcha de la concha anterior; C; concha, 3,7 mm. Cayo Matías, Cuba (MHNS); D: protoconcha, Cienfuegos, Cuba ( CFG); E: protoconcha, Santa Lucia, Pinar del Río, Cuba (CFG); F: protoconcha, Abaco, Bahamas (CCR); G: “Triphora” cf. calva, concha, 6,8 mm, Grand Bahama (ANSP). H, L. “Triphora” yociusi spec. nov. H: holotipo, 3,9 mm, fuera de St. Augus- tine, St. Johns Co., Florida (FMNH); L: protoconcha del paratipo. 141 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Description: See Dall (1927). It is rele- vant that the protoconch was described as having a smooth nucleus and 2 more whorls sculptured with two spiral threads and numerous "flexuous axial threadlets". Probably all the protoconchs are eroded, so the exact form and sculpture could only be known after the examination of fresh shells. The teleoconch has spirals 2 and 3 from the beginning; later a very weak spiral 1 appears below the suture, and remains the smallest one up to the end. Spiral 2 is the largest and most prominent. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 7.5 mm. Distribution: Only known from the type material. Remarks : Marshall (1983) consid- ered the genus Bif orina to be a synonym of Monophorus Granata-Grillo, 1877. As there is no information on the radula, it seems better to keep it in "Triphora" in sensu lato. The shell designated as lectotype had been separated from the rest of the lot in a different capsule with the indica- tion "type". This shell has the dimen- sions and number of whorls given by the author. Because no holotype was mentioned in the original description, this shell must be designated as lecto- type. This species shows some resem- blance to Strobiligera brychia (Bouchet and Guillemot, 1978) (Fig. 14F) in its teleoconch whorls, but apparently the protoconch of the latter species is more pointed and has more whorls. "Triphora" indígena Dall, 1927 (Figs. 24F-G) Triphora indígena Dall, 1927. Proc. U. S. N. M., 70: 93. [Type locality: Off Georgia, 805 m]. Type material: Lectotype, here designated (Fig. 24F) with 13 whorls, and a paralectotype (Fig. 24G) (USNM 108079). Description : See Dall (1927). Proto- conch multispiral, a little eroded on the paralectotype but apparently brown with two spiral cords. The teleoconch begins with three almost similar spirals, with spiral 1 becoming smaller on subsequent whorls, appearing as a small thread very cióse to the suture. The cords and ribs are rather elevated, and cross to form rectangular inter- spaces. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 6.6 mm. Distribution: Georgia and Fernandina (mentioned in the original description). Remarks : Its most important charac- ter is the formation of rectangular spaces between cords and ribs. Spiral 1 is smaller throughout the spire, the other two being similar to each other. There are no similar species in the study area. "Triphora" lilacina (Dall, 1889) (Fig. 24H) Triforis lilacina Dall, 1889. Bull. M. C. Z., 18: 243. [Type locality: Turtle Harbor, Florida, USA]. Type material: One syntype (Fig. 24H) here designated as lectotype (USNM 83087). Description : See Dall (1889). The pro- toconch is unknown. The most important character is the uniform lilac colour; also, the two spirals, with an additional very narrow spiral only appearing between them on the eleventh whorl. The nodules are spherical and relatively small. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 8.5 mm. Remarks: The lectotype does not have exactly the characters mentioned in the original description (it measures 8.5 mm instead of 9.0 and has 15 whorls instead of 18), but these differences may be the 142 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 28. A-D. “ Triphora ” guadaloupensis spec. nov. A-C: holotype, 2.3 mm, Guadaloupe (ANSP); D: drawing of the protoconch. E-H. “Triphora” amicorum spec. nov. E, F: holotype, 4.4 mm, Florida (FLMNH); G: paratype, 3.8 mm. Florida (FLMNH); H: protoconch of the holotype. Figura 28. A-D. “Triphora” guadaloupensis spec. nov. A-C: holotipo, 2,3 mm, Guadalupe (ANSP); D: dibujo de la protoconcha. E-H. “Triphora” amicorum spec. nov. E, F: holotipo, 4,4 mm, Florida (FLMNH); G: paratipo , 3,8 mm. Florida (FLMNH); H: protoconcha del holotipo. 143 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 result of a quick examination or due the loss of a small part of the shell (the loss of the first whorls of the protoconch was already mentioned in the original description). In spite of this, the colour is very characteristic and there is no doubt that it is the type mentioned in the original description. Besides, it is necessary to point out that the shell has a defect on the penultimate whorl, which may cause a slight deformation. The shells illustrated by some authors under this ñame (Vokes and Vokes, 1983) seem to be very different. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Mesophora novem (Nowell-Usticke, 1969) seems to be the closest species, but has a different colour, larger and lighter nodules, and a darker suture; spiral 2 does not appear until the final whorls and is always smaller than the other two, but it has larger nodules than those on spiral 2 of "T." lilacina. No shells resembling the type of this taxon have been collected by any other author in spite of the fact that it comes from shallow water (11 m). Henee, some malacologists (pers. comm.) have con- sidered that this type could be an abnor- mal individual from a population which is usually differently coloured (which we will mention below as "Triphora" atlántica). Another possibility is the one sug- gested by several persons (pers. comm.): if the lectotype is an abnormal shell with an uncommon colour for the species, it may be conspecific with shells from other populations having different morpholog- ical form and colour. One candidate for this is presented below as "T." cf. lilacina. "Triphora" cf. lilacina (Figs. 241-0) Material examined: Florida: 1 s (Fig. 24J), 24° 50' N, Monroe Co., West Coast of Florida (Jun 1961) (McGinty coll.) 61 m (FLMNH 259042); 6 s (Fig. 241) Pinellas Co., SSW John's Pass (Dan Steger) 55 m (FLMNH 238675); 1 s (Fig. 24L), Pickles Reef, off Key Largo, Monroe Co. (L. Hill, May/76), 7-10 m (CHL); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., Breakers Hotel to Biltmore Hotel (R/V Tritón, Apr 1951) (McGinty coll.) 36-55 m (FLMNH 177402); 1 s, Monroe Co., off Dry Tortugas (R. Black, dec. 1990) 960 m (FLMNH 279375); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., Boynton Beach, off Briny Breezes (R/V Tritón, Feb 1951) (McGinty coll.) 50-60 fms (FLMNH 219907); 2 s, Collier Co., SW of John's Pass (Powlus and Steger, May 1958) (McGinty coll.) 55 m (FLMNH 154900); 2 s, Collier Co., 150 miles W (J. Moore, Jun. 1962) (M. Hunter coll.) Cape Romano, 450 m (FLMNH 129846); 1 s (Fig. 24K), Palm Beach Co., Bath and Tennis Club to Palm Beach Pier (R/V Tritón, Apr. 1951) (McGinty coll.) 36-55 m (FLMNH 176649); 1 s, Palm Beach Co.(R/V Tritón, Apr. 1950) 40-50 m (FLMNH 204877). Description: Shell (Figs. 24I-24L) solid, elongated, light brown. Proto- conch (Fig. 24N) multispiral, with about 4 whorls, the apex surface with small tubercles and the subsequent whorls with two spiral cordlets crossed by numerous fine axial ribs that are slightly S-shaped, especially on the last whorl. Teleoconch with about 11-12 whorls, beginning with spirals 1 and 3, crossed by prosocline small axial ribs which form nodules at the intersection points. These two spirals continué on the subse- quent whorls, the upper one with slightly larger nodules; on about the sixth-eighth whorl, a very small spiral 2 appears cióse to spiral 1; on the subse- quent whorls, this spiral 2 enlarges slightly until it is almost similar in size to spiral 3, spiral 1 is always slightly larger with larger nodules. On about the tenth whorl an additional spiral cord appears; this cord is smooth, always smaller, and located just below the lower suture, but on the final whorl it is more obvious and beaded. Below it there are two more spiral cords, the upper one slightly nodulous and the lower one smooth, located on the base of the siphonal canal. Aperture rounded-ovoid, columella curved, siphonal canal elongate and recurved, closed at its base by an extensión of the aperture. 144 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-G ARCES: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 29. “ Triphora ” turtleb ay ensis spec. nov. A, B: holotype, 4.1 mm, Bermuda (FLMNH); C, D: paratype, 4.2 mm (BMSM); E: protoconch of the holotype; F: detail of the protoconch of the paratype; G: detail of the aperture and base. Figura 29. “Triphora” turtlebayensis spec. nov. A, B: holotipo, 4, 1 mm, Bermudas (FLMNH); C, D: paratipo, 4,2 mm (BMSM); E: protoconcha del holotipo; F: detalle de la protoconcha del paratipo; G: detalle de la abertura y de la base. 145 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 The colour is brown on the proto- conch; light brown on the shell, spiral 1 having lighter nodules, more evident on the last whorls. Dimensions : The shells studied measure between 4.0 and 9.0 mm. Distribution: Only known from Florida. Remarles : The shells figured by Abbott (1974) as T. lilacina may belong to this taxon. If the present well defined species is “T." lilacina , the only explana- tion would be that the lectotype of that taxon is an abnormally coloured shell, in which case the synonymy would only be acceptable if intergrades were found. On the other hand, if additional exam- ples of the typical lilac shells of "Triphora" lilacina were collected in the future, showing consistent differences with the shells described here, then the shells referred here as "Triphora" cf. lilacina could be named as a different species. "Triphora" atlántica (E. A. Smith, 1890) (Figs. 25A-I) Triforis atlántica E. A. Smith, 1890. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 18: 292, pl. 21, fig. 16. Triphora lilacina Dalí, 1889. In Abbott, 1974: 112. Type material: Lectotype, here designated, of Triforis atlántica (Fig. 25A) and several paralectotypes (BMNH 89.10.1.1874-93). Other material examined: USA: Florida: 1 s (Fig. 25B), W Egmont Key, Hillsborough Co. (Gulf of México) Qim Moore /Cavalier, 1962), 76 m (CHL); 2 s, off Palm Beach (M. Glickstein, 1980) 82-105 m (CHL); 3 s (Figs. 25E-25G), 42 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co. (T. Yocius, 1979), 85 m (CHL); 2 s (Fig. 25E, G), 42 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co. (T. Yocius, Jul/1980), 36 m (CHL); 1 s, 50 miles S Carrabelle, Franklin Co. (J. Keeler, Feb/1986), 60 m (CHL); 2 s, W Marco, Collier Co. (J. Moore / Cavalier, 1972) 55 m (CHL); 1 s, Monroe Co., West coast, 24° 50' N, 33 fms (FLMNH 259042); 3 s, Palm Beach Co. (D. Akers, 1970-1971) 30 m (FLMNH 127891); 1 s, Palm Beach Co., off Boynton Inlet (D. and H. Akers, Sep. 1970) 36 m (FLMNH 228682). Louisiana: 2 s, off Louisiana, 26° 06.8' 66N 91° 02.418W (E.F. Garcia /Pelican, Jun/2001 57-65 m (CHL); 1 s, off extreme W Louisiana, 29° 45.9' N 13° 02.8' W, (E.F. Garcia /Pelican, Sept/98) 55-65 m (CHL); 1 s, off Louisiana, 28° 05.61N 91° 02.206' W (E.F. Garcia/ Pelican, Jun/2000), 58 m (CHL); Puerto Rico: 2 s. Rincón (L. Germaine, Apr/1961) 30 m (FLMNH 163833). Brazil: 3 sp. (Figs. 25C, 25D) off Guarapari, Espiritu Santo State (R. Bodart, 1994) 15-20 m (CHL). Description: Shell (Figs. 25A-25H) sharp-pointed, elongate, solid, with bands of brown and white. Protoconch multispiral (Fig. 251) with the apex retic- ulated and 4 whorls with narrow axial ribs that cross a single thread on the first whorl and 2 elsewhere, except at the end where there is only one. Teleoconch with about 12-13 whorls, sometimes more on large shells, beginning with spirals 1 and 3, crossed by prosocline axial ribs which form nodules at the intersection points. These two spirals continué on the subsequent whorls, the upper one white and with slightly larger nodules; on about the eighth-ninth whorl, a very small spiral 2 appears cióse to spiral 1; on the subsequent whorls, this spiral 2 enlarges slightly until it is almost similar in size to spiral 3, spiral 1 continuing to have larger, more prominent white nodules. On about the tenth-twelfth whorl an addi- tional spiral cord appears; this cord is only slightly nodulous, always smaller, and located just below the lower suture, but on the final whorl it is more obvious, is located near the periphery and has larger nodules. Below it there are two more spiral cords, the upper one slightly nodulous and the lower one smooth, located on the base of the siphonal canal. Aperture rounded- ovoid, columella curved, siphonal canal elongate and recurved, closed at its base by an extensión of the aperture. The colour is dark brown on the pro- toconch; white on the first two teleo- conch whorls, subsequently with white nodules on spiral 1 and light brown in 146 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 30. A-F. “Triphora” grenadensis spec. nov. A-D: holotype, 3.2 mm, Grenada (ANSP); E, F: protoconch of the holotype. G-I. “ Triphora ’ sp. 1, 3.3 mm, British Honduras (Belize) (ANSP). Figura 30. A-F. “Triphora” grenadensis spec. nov. A-D: holotipo, 3,2 mm, Granada (ANSP); E, F: protoconcha del holotipo. G-I. “Triphora” sp. 1, 3,5 mm, British Honduras (Belize) (ANSP). 147 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 the interspaces; the background colour of spiral 2 is brownish, with the nodules somewhat lighter. On some shells the colour is similar but lighter throughout. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 6.0 mm. Some shells from the Caribbean can reach up to 9.0 mm. Distribution: It is known from Florida to Brazil (not collected in Cuba). Other- wise, St. Helena, in the middle of the Atlantic is the type locality of T. atlántica. Remarks: This taxon is very confused, and for many years it was considered by some authors and collectors to be T. lilacina. Yet the lectotype of T. lilacina is uniform pink-lilac, spirals 1 and 3 are well developed and spiral 2 never reaches the size of the other two. The nodules are the same colour as the shell and are not lighter, and there are no dif- ferences between the colour of spiral 1 and spiral 3. No intergrades between these two morphs were found. Further- more, the nodules are smaller and the protoconch more sharply pointed with tubercles on the apex. However, a defin- itive conclusión can not be reached until enough material of true "T." lilacina becomes available for examination, allowing a proper comparison and a study of the animal and radula. On the other hand, the taxon “T." atlántica described by Smith from St. Helena is a shell with constant brown and white colouration and distribution of the bands, and with nodules of similar size. The location of the type locality in the middle of the Atlantic is not a problem for a species which has a multispiral protoconch. The only problem is that the protoconch of the holotype is not known, but the eroded protoconch of a paralectotype showed 2 spiral threads, which is compatible with that of the present population. Therefore we suggest that the shells studied from the Caribbean belong to this taxon, the only doubts being due to the lack of a good protoconch from the St. Helena material. Provisionally this species must therefore be kept under this ñame, awaiting the information that new mate- rial will provide in the future. It may be confused with Monophorus ateralbus Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1994, but the latter species is smaller and has a totally different colour pattern, with the lower band white in contrast to that of "T." atlántica, on which the white spiral is always the upper one. Triphora ellyae De Jong and Coomans, 1988 is smaller and does not reach 4 mm. "Triphora" pyrrha Henderson and Bartsch, 1914 (Fig. 25J) Triphoris pyrrha Henderson and Bartsch, 1914. Proc. U.S.N.M. 47: 413, pl. 2, f. 4 [Type locality: Chincoteague, Virginia, USA], Type material: A syntype (Fig. 25J) here designated as lectotype (USNM 252571). Description : Henderson and Bartsch (1914). The lectotype is a shell in poor condition, white or cream in colour, or possibly faded brown. The protoconch is multispiral and has about 4 whorls but is very eroded, and further details are impossible to discern. The next 3 whorls have 2 spirals cióse together; on the following whorls, these cords 1-3 are more sepárate; subse- quently a narrow spiral 2 appears in the middle of the whorls; on the final whorl spiral 2 is similar in size to the other two. The siphonal canal is short and open. Dimensions : The lectotype measures 2.7 mm. Distribution: Only known from its type locality. Remarks: Due to the lack of informa- tion on the protoconch, the validity of this species must be confirmed by the examination of more material from the type locality. It is somewhat similar to Marshallora modesta or M. nigrocincta, but is probably a valid species. 148 RoláN AND FERNÁNDEZ-GARCÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 31. “Triphora” abacoensis spec. nov. A, B: holotype, 2.3 mm, Abaco, Bahamas (BMSM); C: paratype, 2.25 mm, Abaco, Bahamas (CCR); D: protoconch of paratype, Abaco, Bahamas (MHNS); E: protoconch of paratype, Abaco, Bahamas (CCR); F: protoconch, Cienfuegos, Cuba (MHNS); G: detail of the microsculpture of Figure E. Figura 31. “Triphora” abacoensis spec. nov. A, B: holotipo, 2,5 mm, Abaco, Bahamas (BMSM); C: paratipo, 2.25 mm, Abaco, Bahamas (CCR); D: protoconcha de un paratipo. Abaco, Bahamas (MHNS); E: protoconcha de un paratipo, Abaco, Bahamas ( CCR); F: protoconcha, Cienfuegos, Cuba (MHNS); G: detalle de la microescultura de la Figura E. 149 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 "Triphora" inaudita spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 26A-D) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 26A) in FLMNH; paratype (Fig. 26B) in BMSM from 28° 05.61' N, 91° 02.205' W to 29° 05.524' N, 91° 02.086' W (E.F. García /Pelican 5/27/00) 58 m (both ex CHL). Type locality: SW Dry Tortugas, Florida, USA 26° 42.9' N, 83° 43.20' W, 73.3-78.5 m. Etymology: The specific ñame derives from the Latín word inauditus, which means "uncommon, unheard-of", referring to some curious characters of the shell. Description : Shell (Figs. 26A, 26B)) very distinctive, solid, elongate. Proto- conch (Fig. 26C) with 3 and 1 /i whorls with two spiral cords crossed by axial ribs. Teleoconch (Fig. 26D) with three spirals from the beginning, crossed by slightly prosocline axial ribs and forming nodules at the intersections. Spiral 1 is very small on the first whorls and is located very near to spiral 2; spirals 2 and 3 are similar in size. On the subsequent whorls, spiral 1 increases in size until it reaches a size similar to spiral 2 on about the tenth whorl, but is still less prominent. Throughout the shell spirals 1 and 2 are closer than spirals 2 and 3. On the last whorl three additional spirals appear towards the base. Aperture ovoid, almost rhomboid, with a short and open siphonal canal. The colour is very characteristic: spiral 1 is mainly brown, with 1-2 white nodules alternating with 1-3 brown ones; spiral 2 is mainly white, with only a small area of brown on the lower part of some nodules; on spiral 3 the brown colour predominates, but white nodules appear between two or more brown ones. Dimensions : The holotype measures 5.4 mm and the paratype 4.4 mm. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarks : Some of the characters of "T. " inaudita are totally different from any other species from the study area and therefore it has been named in spite of the scarcity of available material. The colour pattern, the smaller spiral 1 and the proximity of spirals 1 and 2 are the most important differential characters. The most similar species are: "Triphora" cf. atlántica has two spirals on the first whorls, the nodules of the upper spiral are white and larger, while the rest are brown. Cosmotriphora arnoldoi Faber and Moolenbeek, 1991 has uniform blotches of brown on a white background, spiral 2 does not exist on the first whorls and is smaller on the final ones. Monophorus olivaceus has the lower- most spiral totally white; this spiral is larger on the first whorls, while spiral 2 is the smallest when it appear s. Spirals 1 and 2 ha ve only a few white nodules. Nototriphora decorata (C. B. Adams, 1850) has three spirals similar and equidistant throughout the shell, the brown blotches are isolated on the whorls against a white background. "Triphora" pseudonovem spec. nov. Rolán and Femández-Garcés (Figs. 26E-I) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 26E) and 2 paratypes in FLMNH (193355). Type locality: Barnegat Bay, Massachusetts, USA. Etymology: The specific ñame alludes to the similarity with Mesophora novem. Description : Shell (Fig. 26E) subconi- cal elongate, solid. Protoconch (Figs. 26G, 16H) with 3 l/i whorls and a diam- eter of about 300 pm. The nucleus is tuberculated and is followed by one spiral thread crossed by numerous slightly opisthocline axial ribs. Teleo- conch with about 14 whorls, spirals 1 and 3 appearing beaded at the begin- ning, with the ribs clearly prosocline; on the subsequent whorls the spirals slowly become more widely separated. The nodules are large and spherical, of similar size on both spirals, the upper nodules connected to the lower ones by well defined and slightly curved proso- 150 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 32. “ Triphora portoricensis spec. nov. A, B: holotype, 4.4 mm, Puerto Rico (FLMNH); C: protoconch of the holotype; D: paratype, 1.8 mm, Abaco, Bahamas (CCR); E: protoconch of the paratype. Figura 32. “Triphora” portoricensis spec. nov. A, B: holotipo, 4,4 mm, Puerto Rico (FLMNH); C: protoconcha del holotipo; D: paratipo, 1,8 mm, Abaco, Bahamas (CCR); E: protoconcha del paratipo. cline axial ribs (Fig. 261). Spiral 2 appears between the other two spirals on the final two or three whorls; it is very fine and is located very cióse to spiral 1, not increasing immediately in size and remaining clearly smaller than the other two on the final whorl. Towards the base there are three more nodulous spirals. Aperture rounded, small, opened to the siphonal canal, which is curved and a little smaller in size than the height of the aperture (Fig. 26F). The entire shell is brown, with the nodules a little lighter. Dimensions : The holotype measures 7.3 mm. Distribution: Only known from the type locality. Remarks : This species has some of the characters of Mesophora novem, such as spirals 1 and 3 separated throughout most of the shell, but this new species is brownish, whereas M. novem is tinged with violet and has the first teleoconch whorls white; another difference is the slowly increasing size of spiral 2. The protoconch has only one spiral thread and it is shorter than that of M. novem. 151 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 "Triphora" calva Faber and Moolenbeek, 1991 (Figs. 27A-G) Triphora calva Faber and Moolenbeek, 1991. Apex, 6(3/4): 82, figs. 3, 4. [Type locality: Key Bis- cayne. Florida, USA]. Type material: Holotype not examined (ZMA 391003). Represented in the original description. Material examined: Bahamas: 1 j (Fig. 27F), Treasure Cay, Abaco 26 40.12N 77 18.19W (CCR); 5 j, North Sound, Bimini, mangrove (R. Robertson, 1957) (ANSP 329747); 3 s, Grand Bahama Island, 26° 31' 00"N, 78° 46' 30"W (J. Worsfold) (ANSP 373944); 1 s (Fig. 27G) Bootle Bay, Grand Bahama Island, 26° 39' 30"N, 078° 57' 00" (J. Worsfold) (ANSP 371845); 6 sp, North Hawksbill Creek, Grand Bahama Island 26° 32' 00"N, 78° 45' 00"W (J. Worsfold) (ANSP 370520); 1 sp, 7 s. Hotel, West End, Grand Bahama Island 26° 42' 15"N, 78° 59' 50"W (J. Worsfold, Dec. 1981) (ANSP 368674); 1 s, McLeans Town, Grand Bahama Island, 26° 38' 45"N, 77° 57' 30"W (J. Worsfold) (ANSP 368484); 1 s, Hope Town Harbour, Abaco (R. Robertson, Jun. 1953) (ANSP 299409). Grand Cavman Island: 1 s, W of Prospect, SW Sound (A. J. Ostheiner) (ANSP 198925). Florida: 1 s, 1 f (Fig. 27A), Key Largo (CMK); 1 sp, 1 s, Bonefish Key (Aug. 1957) (FLMNH UF368198). Cuba: 3 s, Caibarién, (FLMNH UF365100); 1 f (Fig. 27D), Cienfuegos (CFG); 1 f, Jibacoa (MHNS); 1 f (Fig. 27E) Santa Lucia, Pinar del Rio (CFG); 3 s, Batabanó (CFG); 1 s, Cabo Mafias, Canarreos (MHNS). Description: Faber and Moolen- beek (1991). The most important diag- nostic characters are the following: the shell is dark brown; the brown colour may be uniform, sometimes with the nodules lighter (Fig. 27C) and even with spiral 1 on the last whorl with white nodules (Fig. 27A). The proto- conch (Figs. 27B, 27D, 27E, 27F) is described as having only one smooth whorl, but if the protoconch whorls are counted by the Verduin (1977) method, and the end of the protoconch is at the point where the teleoconch begins with two spirals, it actually has 2 whorls (sometimes a little less); the first whorl is smooth and there is a spiral cord at the middle of the second one. In the original description there is no Infor- mation on the diameter of the proto- conch. Based on the photograph of the holotype it could be deduced that the protoconch is about 275 pm in width; in the material examined the diameter is variable between 250 and 380 pm. This and the brown colour are impor- tant characters for differentiation from other species. Teleoconch sculpture begins with spiral 3; spiral 1 and axial ribs appear on the third whorl (the second whorl of the teleoconch). Spiral 2 emerges on the sixth whorl (the fifth of the teleoconch). Also another smooth sutural spiral com- mences on the 3th-4th whorl. Dimensions : The holotype measures 5.0 mm. Some shells atributed to this species can reach 9 mm. Distribution : Known from several areas of the Caribbean: Florida, Bahamas, Cuba. Remarks : In some works (e.g. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 2007) this species is assigned to the genus Marshal- lora. In fact there is no information on the radula and it is therefore better to keep it in "Triphora" s. /. Shells from Quintana Roo were referred to in the original description under "Other material studied" to be this species; these shells were later described as Marshallora nichupte by Rolán and Crúz-Ábrego (1996). This species can be differentiated from "T. " calva by its more variable colour, ranging from dark brown to white, larger shell and wider protoconch, with only 1 to 1 l/z whorls. Below, several species are shown to be different from "T." calva although having a short protoconch as a common feature. The protoconch of this species has been studied in shells from the Bahamas, Florida and Cuba (Figs. 27B, 27D, 27E, 27F), all of which have a first whorl with a similar diameter: 250, 270 pm and 260 pm respectively. Other similar characters inelude a smooth apex and one spiral cord on the second whorl. 152 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae One shell from the Bahamas (Fig. 27G) resembles "T." calva but is larger (6.8 mm) and elongated (11 whorls), and the protoconch has only one spiral whorl instead of two. It may be a differ- ent species or an abnormal individual. "Triphora" yociusi spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 27F1, 1) Type material: Holotype (Fig. 27H) deposited in FLMNH {ex CHL). Paratype (Fig. 271) in BMSM from 67 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida (T. Yocius 1979) 54 m; both ex CHL. Other material studied: 1 s (eroded), Bermuda (C. Abbott Davis) (ANSP 88722). Type locality: 32 miles E St. Augustine, St. Johns Co., Florida (J. Dawley / Scallop 1982), 30 m. Etymology: The species is named after Ted Yocius, the St. Augustine fisherman who dredged so many of the triphorids from off northeast Florida, including the present species. Description : Shell (Fig. 27H) subconi- cal elongate, solid. Protoconch (Fig. 271) paucispiral with 1 3 A whorls and a dia- meter of about 370 pm. The nucleus and most of the first whorl are smooth; near the end of this whorl two spiral cords appear. Teleoconch with about 8 whorls, with spirals 1 and 3 nodulous at the beginning. The nodules are large and rounded, of similar size on both spirals, the upper ones connected to the lower by fine prosocline axial ribs. On about the fifth whorl of the teleoconch spiral 2 appears between the other two, but closer to spiral 1; it is very narro w, sub- sequently increasing in size until the three spirals are similar on the final whorl. Aperture rounded, small and open to the siphonal canal, which is half the size of the aperture. The entire shell is brown, but a darker band covers spiral 1 and reaches to the suture, the nodules on this spiral being lighter than the background colour; the nodules and the background colour of spiral 3 are cream coloured, as is spiral 2 on the last whorl. Dimensions : The holotype measures 3.9 mm. Distribution : Only known from type locality and area cióse by. Remarks : ''Triphora'' yociusi spec. nov. has a wider protoconch than "T". calva, with 1 3/ 4 whorls, and at the end of the first protoconch whorl there are two spirals, while in "T" . calva there is only one. The teleoconch colour is lighter and spiral 3 is cream colored, the shell is nar- rower, the aperture relatively smaller and the siphonal canal larger. "Triphora" guadaloup ensis spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 28A-D) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 28A-28D) ANSP (313817). Two paratypes in the same lot (ANSP). All from the type locality. Type locality: Guadaloupe, NW of Pointe de Chateaux (Maes, Feb. 1962) 6-11 m. Etymology: The species is named after the island where it was collected. Description: Shell (Figs. 28A-D) very small, ovoid, short, solid. Protoconch (Fig. 28D) paucispiral, white, with 2 whorls and a diameter of about 280 pm. The nucleus is smooth and almost vertical, followed by a whorl with two spiral cords; on the second whorl an additional smaller spiral cord appears between the other two. The white colour extends no further than the protoconch, the beginning of the teleo- conch being brown with two beaded cords. Teleoconch with about 4 l/i whorls, with spirals 1 and 3 nodulous at the be- ginning. The nodules are large and rounded, of similar size on both spirals, the upper ones connected to the lower ones by wide orthocline ribs. On the 3rd- 4th whorls, spiral 2 appears between the other two and subsequently increases in size, with the three spirals only becoming 153 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 similar on the final whorl at the end of the spire. The base has three more spiral cords, only the upper one being nodulous. Aper- ture ovoid, closing the siphonal canal by an extensión of the outer lip; an anal notch is visible at the top of the lip. The shell colour is brown, but the nodules on spiral 3 are always whitish- cream; the background of the spiral as well as the nodules are of this color on the final whorl, but the nodules are lighter. Dimensions : The holotype measures 2.3 mm. Paratypes of similar size. Distribution : Only known from Guadaloupe, and probably endemic to that island. Remarles : This species, with two pro- toconch whorls bearing 2 and 3 spiral cords respectively, a very short shell with lighter beads on spiral 1 and a cream-colored spiral 3, is different from any other in the study area. " Triphora " amicorum spec. nov. Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (Figs. 28E-H) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 28E, 28F) and one paratype (Fig. 28G) in FLMNH (249812). Type locality: Palm Beach Co., Lake Worth, North Inlet, Peanut Id., Florida, USA. Etymology: The species is named after the several friends who contributed to this work with mate- rial, information and advice, and those who also helped in other ways. Description : Shell (Figs. 28E-28F) elongate, solid. Protoconch (Fig. 28H) with 2 3/ 4 whorls, the apex (nucleus and first whorl) with numerous microscopic tubercles, followed by crowded axial ribs which begin below the suture; on the next whorl, the tubercles are aligned to form two threads, the upper one in the middle of the whorl and the second, a little larger and more prominent, between the first one and the suture. The axial ribs number about 40 per whorl, narrow and very cióse, undulat- ing in the shape of an open S. The teleo- conch begins with spirals 1 and 3, with spherical nodules that are larger on spiral 1, and with slightly orthocline axial ribs. Spiral 2 appears on the seventh whorl and is narrower, equidis- tant between the other two; it increases in size on the following whorls. Three more spirals on the base, the lowest one cióse to the siphonal canal. The colour of the shell is brown, with white nodules on spiral 1. Aperture ovoid, opened to a short siphonal canal. Dimensions : The holotype measures 4.4 mm. The paratype is smaller. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarles: This species is different from other Caribbean species of Triphoridae because of its planktotrophic but short protoconch. The shell may ha ve some similarity with the following: Marshallora modesta and M. nigrocincta have larger shells, and both protoconchs are different (see Figs. 8G, 8H), with more whorls and with the upper spiral thread located above the middle of the whorl. Marshallora nichupte and "Triphora" calva both have protoconchs that lack axial sculpture. Cheirodonta apexcrassum (Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1994) has a proto- conch with spiral cords but no axial ribs (Fig. 34J). " Triphora " turtleb ay ensis spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 29A-G) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 29A, 29B) in FLMNH ex CHL. Paratypes: in BMSM (1 s, Figs. 29C, 29D), USNM (1 s) and CHL (3 s). All from the type locality. Other paratypes: 4 s, Bermuda (A. Haycock) (ANSP 105606). Other material examined: 4 s eroded, Shelly Bay, Bermuda (ANSP 145963); 1 s eroded (labeled as T. modesta), (A. J. Peñe) Bermuda (BMNH 1911.17.21.641-50). Type locality: Off Turtle Bay, Bermuda. Etymology: The specific ñame alludes to the ñame of the type locality. 154 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 33. A-D. “ Triphora ” sp. 2. A, B: shell, 4.6 mm, La Herradura, N of Cuba (MHNS); C: detail of the spire; D: protoconch. E-H. “ Triphora ” sp. 3. E, F: shell, 3.8 mm, Miami, Florida (FLMNH); G: protoconch; H: detail of the aperture. Figura 33. A-D. “Triphora” sp. 2. A, B: concha, 4,6 mm, La Herradura, N de Cuba (MHNS); C: detalle de la espira; D: protoconcha. E-H. “Triphora” sp. 3. E, F: concha, 5,8 mm, Miami, Florida (FLMNH); G: protoconcha; H: detalle de la abertura. 155 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Description: Shell (Figs. 29A-29D) ovoid elongate, solid. Protoconch (Figs. 29E, 29F) paucispiral, with two whorls and a diameter of 300 pm on the first whorl and 380 on the second. The nucleus is smooth, the first whorl with prominent opisthocline axial ribs crossed at its end by 2 transient spiral cords; on the second whorl these two cords are well defined and the axial ribs change, becoming prosocline and more dense at the end. Spirals 1 and 3 are present at the beginning of the teleo- conch, with the lower spiral more prominent. On the subsequent whorls they become more widely separated, and on about the fifth whorl spiral 2 appears between them. This smaller spiral increases in size on the two final whorls, bul spiral 1 continúes to have slightly larger nodules. Suture deep. Towards the base of the final whorl there are three additional spirals that are separated by numerous axial threads. Aperture ovoid (Fig. 29G), columella thickened at the base and outer lip extended, closing off the opening of the short, curved siphonal canal. The colour is uniformly light brown. Dimensions : The holotype measures 4.1 mm. Paratypes of similar or smaller size. Distribution : Only known from the type locality. Remarks : The differences of this species with “T. " calva are the following: "T. " turtlebayensis has a wider shell, the protoconch is wider and has 2 whorls with prominent axial and spiral sculp- ture beginning on the first whorl, the siphonal canal is closed and there are numerous axial threads between the basal cords. There are other Caribbean species with a similar shell but all of them have different protoconchs: Cheirodonta apex- crassum (Fig. 34J), Sagenotriphora osclausum (Fig. 22D-22F) and Marshallora modesta (Fig. 8G). "Triphora" grenadensis spec. nov. Rolán and Lee (Figs. 30A-F) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 30A-30D) in ANSP (313668). Type locality: Levera Beach, N end of Grenada (R.A. and V.O. Maes, 1966), on Caulerpa, 1-3 m. Description : Shell (Figs. 30A-30D) dark brown, somewhat darker on the suture, relatively solid, pointed. Proto- conch (Figs. 30E, 30F) paucispiral, with a little more that 2 whorls and a diame- ter of about 300 pm, the apex smooth, the first protoconch whorl with a poorly defined wide spiral cord just below the periphery, crossed by rather well sepa- rated axial ribs, opisthocline above the spiral and prosocline below, forming an angle in the middle. On the subsequent whorl the spiral cord is well defined and above it the axial ribs are almost ortho- cline. Teleoconch with seven whorls with two spiral beaded cords (spiral 1 and 3) on the first four whorls; on the fifth, spiral 2 appears between the other two but is smaller, the three spirals being similar in size on the final whorls. The aperture is rectangular, the siphonal canal short and open; the border of the outer lip is white. Dimensions : The holotype measures 3.2 mm. Distribution: Only known from the type locality. Renarks: This species is described and named in spite of the scarcity of the study material, due to the fact that it has very distinct differences with all other Caribbean species, probably being endemic to Grenada. Comparison must be made with the species that have a similar shell and pro- toconch: “T. " calva has a similar shell, but the protoconch is always smooth, lacking any axial sculpture except for a spiral elevation on the second whorl. "T." turtlebayensis has a similar protoconch but it is light brown in colour, with two spiral cords located on the upper middle of the whorl. Furthermore the shell is a little more slender, of a uniform light brown 156 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 34. A-D. “ Triphora ” sp. 4. Batabano, Cuba (MHNS); A: fragment; B: protoconch; C: pro- toconch, SEM photograph; D: detail of the sculpture of the protoconch. E, F. “ Triphora ” sp. 5. Protoconchs, Cienfuegos, Cuba (MHNS). G. “ Triphora” sp. 6. Protoconch, Cienfuegos, Cuba (MHNS). H. “ Triphora ” sp. 7. Protoconch, Miskito Archipelago, Nicaragua (MHNS). I. “Triphora” sp. 8. Witties Cape, Nicaragua (MHNS). J. Cheirodonta apexcrassum, Cuba (MHNS). Figura 34. A-D. “Triphora” sp. 4. Batabanó, Cuba (MHNS); A: fragmento; B: protoconcha; C: proto- concha, fotografía al MEB; D: detalle de la escultura de la protoconcha. E, F. “Triphora” sp. 5. Proto- conchas, Cienfuegos, Cuba (MHNS). G. “Triphora” sp. 6. Protoconcha, Cienfuegos, Cuba (MHNS). H. “Triphora” sp. 7. Protoconcha, Archipiélago Miskito, Nicaragua (MHNS). I. “Triphora” sp. 8. Cabo Witties, Nicaragua (MHNS). J. Cheirodonta apexcrassum, Cuba (MHNS). 157 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 colour, the aperture is rounded with an occlusion of the base of the siphonal canal and lacks white colour on the outer lip. Other species with a similar shell but different protoconch are mentioned in the Remarles for "T." turtlebay ensis. The comparison is valid for this species. "Triphora" abaco ensis spec. nov. Rolán and Redfern (Figs. 31A-G) " Triphora " sp. A. Redfern, 2001. Bahamian Seashells, p. 69, figs. 289 A, 289B. Type material: Holotype (Figs. 31A, 31B) in BMSM (15499); paratypes; 1 j (Fig. 31C) beach drift, Treasure Cove 26° 42' 00"N, 77° 18' 30"W, (CCR); 1 j (Figs 31E, 31G) Chub Rocks 26° 43' 55"N, 77° 13' 05"W 10 m (CCR), 1 j (Fig. 31D) from the type locality (MHNS); 1 s, 3 j from the type locality (CCR); all of the above from Abaco, Bahamas. 1 paratype, Lucayan Waterway, off South End, Grand Bahama Island, Bahamas 26° 31' 45"N, 78° 32' 45"W (J. Worsfold) (ANSP 369222). Other material studied: 2 j, Cienfuegos, Cuba 30 m (CFG and MHNS). Type locality: East of Chub Rocks, Abaco, Bahamas in 52 m, 26° 44' 00"N 77° 09' 00"W. Etymology: The specific ñame refers to Abaco, the island in the Bahamas from which the holotype was collected. Description : See Redfern (2001). Shell (Figs. 31A-31C) ovoid elongate, brownish, solid. Protoconch (Figs. 31D- 31F) very distinctive, brown with a darker suture, the nucleus almost verti- cal and about 125 pm high, with a diam- eter of 250 pm; in total, the protoconch has a little more than 2 whorls; the surface of the tip is irregularly rough- ened but without tubercles; very strong prosocline axial ribs appear immedi- ately below the nucleus and extend between the sutures to cover the entire whorl; minute, irregular spiral lines are visible under high magnification (Fig. 31G). Spirals 1 and 3 are present at the beginning of the teleoconch, their nodules connected by axial ribs; spiral 2 appears on the third whorl, with all spirals being of similar size. The colour is brown, with spiral 1 darker. The aper- ture is not known, as the shells studied are juveniles. Siphonal canal short. Dimensions : The holotype, which is juvenile, measures 2.5 mm. Distribution : Known from the Bahama Islands. One of the protoconchs collected in Cuba (Fig. 31F), in spite of being narrower, is probably of the same species. Remarles : The type material consists of immature shells, but the protoconch is so characteristic that it was finally decided to describe the species and to give it a ñame, as there is none similar in the studied area. There are no species in the Caribbean having this kind of proto- conch with strongly prosocline axial ribs. "Triphora" portoricensis spec. nov. Rolán and Redfern (Figs. 32A-E) Iniforis sp. Redfern, 2001. Bahamian Seashells, p. 66, figs. 278A, 278B. Type material: Holotype (Figs. 32A, 32B) (FLMNH UF363895). One paratype (Fig. 32D), f, east of Chub Rocks, Abaco, Bahamas, 26° 44' 00"N, 77° 09' 00"W 52 m (CCR). Type locality: Puerto Rico. Etymology: The ñame derives from Puerto Rico, the island on which the holotype was found. Description : Shell (Figs. 32A, 32B) has about 2 3A whorls and has a promi- conical elongate, light brown, with the nent keel a little below the middle of the apex white. The protoconch (Fig. 32C) whorl. Above and below this keel there 158 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 35. “ Triphora ” sp. 9. Key Matías, Los Canarreos Archipelago. S Cuba (MHNS). Figura 35. “Triphora” sp. 9. Cayo Matías, Archipiélago de Los Canarreos. S Cuba (MHNS). are narrow axial ribs, orthocline at the beginning and slightly prosocline below. The teleoconch has about 8 whorls, with spirals 1 and 3 present at the beginning and spiral 2 appearing on the third whorl, smaller initially but immediately enlarging until it is the same size as the other two. On the last whorls, the three spirals are similar but the lowermost is more prominent, and a very small, smooth spiral appears just on the suture. On the base this spiral 4 is wider, and three more smooth spiral cords appear below. The aperture is ovoid, the outer lip sharp, the columella curved, the siphonal canal short and open. Dimensions : The holotype measures 4.4 mm. The paratype is a juvenile. Distribution : Only known from Puerto Rico and the Bahamas. Remarks : The paratype from the Bahamas (Figs. 32D, 32E) differs slightly from the holotype; for example the spiral cord on the protoconch is more prominent and, on the teleoconch, spiral 2 appears a little earlier, but these are small differences, while the others char- acters are similar. For this reason both are considered to be the same species. The protoconch of this species is somewhat similar to those of some species in the genus Iniforis, such as Ini- foris immaculata Rolán and Fernández- Garcés, 1993 and I. carmelae Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1993, but those two species are white and always have only two spirals throughout the teleoconch, with large nodules; that is very different from the three spirals and small nodules on most of the teleoconch of "T. " portori- censis. No other Caribbean species has this kind of protoconch. The most similar are those with a short protoconch that has one spiral: "T. " turtlebay ensis spec. nov. and “T. " grenadensis spec. nov., but they have differences on the teleoconch and also on the protoconch, where the axial sculpture is present from the beginning and crosses the spiral cord. 159 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 "Triphora" sp. 1 (Figs. 30G-I) Material studied: British Honduras (now Belize): 2 s (Figs. 30G, 30H), Cangrejo Bay, 17° 51' 35"N, 88° 02' 55"W (R. Robertson, fuly 1961) (ANSP 282402). Description: Shell (Figs. 30G, 30H) elongate, narrow, solid and brown in colour. Protoconch (Fig. 301) paucispiral, with only two whorls, the upper one apparently smooth, followed by another whorl on which there are two very fine spiral threads. The teleoconch begins with spirals 1 and 3, which both have nodules connected by orthocline axial ribs. About the fifth whorl, spiral 2 appears between spirals 1 and 3, start- ing very narrow but increasing in size on the following whorls; on the body whorl the size of the three spirals is similar. On the lower part of the whorls, very cióse to the suture, a very small, smooth spiral can be seen. On the base, this spiral is wider and below it there are two more, the lowermost cióse to the siphonal canal. Dimensions : The studied shells measure 3.5 mm. Remarks : "T." calva has a wider shell, the protoconch with only one cord on the second whorl. "T." turtlebayensis spec. nov. and "T." grenadensis spec. nov. have axial ribs on the protoconch. "T." yociusi spec. nov. has a shell with bands of colour; the protoconch is wider and has only 1 3A whorls. This species is undoubtedly a valid endemic from Belize, but only two shells have been studied, one of them with the protoconch somewhat eroded, the other decollated and in not very good condition. It is therefore prefer- able to keep this species without a ñame, waiting for more material in the future. "Triphora" sp. 2 (Figs. 33A-D) Material examined: 1 s and 1 protoconch. La Herradura, N of Cuba (MHNS). Description : Shell (Figs. 33A, 33B) cream, solid, ovoid elongate. The apex of the protoconch is broken, with the remaining three whorls showing only one spiral cord. The protoconch (Fig. 33D) of a juvenile presumed to be the same species has 4 whorls, the apex with microscopic tubercles and the following whorls with one thread crossed by slightly opisthocline axial ribs; on the subse- quent whorls there are two spiral threads. However, the protoconch of the complete shell, although slightly eroded, differs by having only one spiral cord. Teleoconch with nine whorls begin- ning with two nodulous cords, the nodules being large and spherical; on about the seventh whorl a narrow spiral thread appears between the other two, located very cióse to spiral 1 and there- fore very undulating (Fig. 33C); it enlarges very slowly and only becomes nodulous on the final whorl, the nodules being smaller that those on spiral 1; the nodules on spiral 3 decrease in size on the final whorl; on the base there are 4 more smooth cords. Aperture rounded. Siphonal canal short and open. The colour is very characteristic: uniform cream with only a small brown spot between each nodule. Dimensions : The shell studied mea- sures 4.6 mm. Remarks : The characters are very typical and different from any other species in the Caribbean. But only one shell was found, and there is not even any certainty that the protoconch is from the same species, so the species will not be named until more material has been obtained. 160 ROLÁN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Figure 36. Original drawings of some triphorids. A: Triforis hebes (from WATSON, 1886); B: Tri- foris bigemma (from WATSON, 1886); C: Triforis infinta (from WATSON, 1886); D: Triforis longis- sima (from DALL, 1889); E: Triforis triserialis (from Dall, 1889); F: Triforis intermedia (from Dall, 1889); G: Triforis inflata Watson var. ib ex (from Dall, 1889); H: Triforis torticula (from Dall, 1889); I: Triforis colon (from DALL, 1889); J: Triforis bigemma var. hircus (from DALL, 1889); K: Triforis cylindrella (from Dall, 1889); L: Cerithiopsis abrupta (in DALL, 1889 not Watson); M: Triforis abrupta (from DALL, 1889). Figura 36. Dibujos original de algunos trifóridos. A: Triforis hebes (en WATSON, 1886); B: Triforis bigemma (en WATSON, 1886); C: Triforis inflata (en WATSON, 1886); D: Triforis longissima (en Dall, 1889); E: Triforis triserialis (en DALL, 1889); F: Triforis intermedia (en DALL, 1889); G: Tri- foris inflata Watson var ibex (en Dall, 1889); H: Triforis torticula (en Dall, 1889); F. Triforis colon (en Dall, 1889); J: Triforis bigemma var hircus (en Dall, 1889); K: Triforis cylindrella (en Dall, 1889); L: Cerithiopsis abrupta (en Dall, 1889 non Watson); M: Triforis abrupta (en DALL, 1889). lól Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 "Triphora" sp. 3 (Figs. 33E-H) Material examined: 1 s, 5.8 mm Miami, Florida (FLMNH UF363887). Description : Shell (Figs. 33E, 33F) large, cream coloured, darker at the suture and on the base. Protoconch (Fig. 33G) with three whorls, apex tuberculated, subse- quently with 2 spiral threads crossed by numerous axial ribs. Teleoconch with spi- rals 1 and 3 at the beginning, spiral 2 ap- pearing on about the fourth whorl; the spi- ral cords and the axial ribs are relatively narrow, forming prominent nodules at the points of intersection. Two beaded cords appear on the base, with another smooth one below on the dorsum of the siphonal canal. Aperture (Fig. 33H) rounded, the outer lip a little everted and sharp; an ex- tensión of the lip crosses the columella, closing the beginning of the siphonal canal. The siphon is relatively larger than in most of the Caribbean species and is initially wider. Remarks: The present shell is very dif- ferent from any other studied from the Caribbean. With three protoconch whorls it is assumed to have planktotrophic development, and therefore it is strange that no other example of this species has appeared in the large quantity of mater- ial studied. This suggests that the shell may have incorrect collection data, and henee it has not received a ñame and awaits more informa tion in the fu ture. Some similarity may be observed with "T. " auffenbergi, but the shell of that species is larger, has more whorls and a more uniform color, the protoconch is narrower at the apex and the siphonal canal is larger. "Triphora" sp. 4 (Figs. 34A-D) Material studied: Cuba: 10 f (Figs 34A-34D), Cienfuegos, Jibacoa and Batabanó (CFG). Description : Shell whitish, elongate, pupoid. Protoconch (Fig. 34C) with two whorls, light brown in colour, with a diameter of 235 pm and with a microsculpture of small irregular tuber- cles (Fig. 34D) on the first whorl, while on the second there are two spiral threads crossed by poorly defined axial ribs. The teleoconch begins immediately with two spiral cords crossed by orthocline axial ribs; on the subsequent whorls spiral 2 appears, on the last whorl becoming of similar size to the other spirals. Distribution: The material studied con- sists only of fragments from several local- ities from the south of Cuba, and as the material is not fresh, it is possible that it could be from Quaternary deposits. Remarks: No material good enough for a correct description of this species was collected. Several characters differentiate this species from most of the Caribbean triphorids, such as having a short proto- conch with small tubercles, and only fine sculpture on the rest of the protoconch. "T." calva has a protoconch wider than the present species, lacking any mi- crosculpture of tubercles or axial threads. "T." grenadensis spec. nov. and "T." turtlebay ensis spec. nov. have proto- conchs with stronger axial sculpture that begins at the apex. "T. " amicorum spec. nov. has a proto- conch with more than 2 whorls and stronger spiral sculpture. Triphora sp. 5 (Figs. 34E, F) Material studied: 2 j, Cienfuegos, Cuba. Description: The protoconchs (Figs. have between 2 and 2 l/i whorls, the 34E, 34F) of the two shells of this species first one with a diameter of about 222 162 ROLÁN AND FERNÁNDEZ- G ARCES: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae pm and the second about 250 pm; the nucleus is smooth (if not eroded), and there are numerous opisthocline axial ribs on the first whorl, crossed by two weak spiral cords that combine into one on the second whorl. Remarles : This kind of protoconch suggests a planktotrophic development, but with a shorter period of planktotro- phy than the other species. It can be dif- ferentiated from the previous species (Triphora sp. 4) which has no thread on the first whorl and two small ones on the second protoconch whorl. The most similar protoconchs are: "T. " calva has a protoconch that lacks any axial sculpture. “T.” grenadensis spec. nov. and "T. " tur- tlebayensis spec. nov. have protoconchs with stronger but less crowded axial sculpture. "T. " amicorum spec. nov. has a proto- conch with more than 2 whorls, less crowded axial sculpture and only one spiral cord. "Triphora" sp. 6 (Fig. 34G) Material examined: 1 f, Cienfuegos, Cuba. Remarles: This protoconch (Fig. 34G) Garcés, 1994, but the latter has a proto- is slightly similar to that of Cheirodonta conch with beaded cords (Fig. 36J), apexcrassum Rolán and Fernández- unlike those on this fragment. "Triphora" sp. 7 (Fig. 34H) Material studied: 1 fragment, Miskito Archipelago, Nicaragua (MHNS). Remarles: This protoconch with only two one, but in this shell the whorls appear whorls has two cords as on the previous scratched, and the apex is more depressed. "Triphora" sp. 8 (Fig. 341) Material studied: 1 f, Cabo Witties, Nicaragua (MHNS). Remarles: This protoconch with only have two very different spirals cords, two whorls has two cords as on the pre- the upper one being very weak and the vious one, but in this case the whorls lower one stronger. "Triphora" sp. 9 (Figs. 35A-C) Material studied: 1 s. Canarreos, Cuba (MHNS). Remarles: This shell is dark brown, between whorls 4 and 5. Protoconch has spirals 1 and 3 at the beginning of short with only 1 1/i whorls, apparently the teleoconch; spiral 2 appears smooth. II. ERRONEOUS RECORDS, INVALID SPECIES OR SPECIES NOT INCLUDED IN THE STUDY "Triphora" hebes Watson, 1880 (Fig. 36 A) Triphora hebes Watson, 1880. Molí, of the Challenger expedition, 1886, p. 103; 1886, pl. 43, figs. 7a-d. [Type locality: Tristan de Cunha, 230 m]. 163 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Description : Watson (1880). Remarles : This species was recorded in the Caribbean by Pilsbry and Aguayo (1933), but the original descrip- tion and figure of Watson (1886) show a shell with an unusual, short protoconch of only one whorl and a pointed apex. which is different from any other species known in the area. Furthermore, the type locality is an island in the south Atlantic Ocean. This record must there- fore be considered an error, confused with another species with paucispiral protoconch. "Triphora" f ilata Dalí, 1889 Triforis (Sychar) inflata var .filata Dalí, 1889. Bull. M. C. Z., 18: 249. [Type locality: Station 136, near Santa Cruz, 929 m], Type material: No types in USNM (E. Strong, pers. comm.); it was not present in the material exam- ined from other museums (ANSP, MCZ, etc.). Remarles : This must be considered a was only mentioned as a variety, nomen nudum because there is no without any explanation of the differ- description (Dall, 1889: 249) and it enees. Triforis barbadensis Coomans and Faber, 1984 Triforis barbadensis Coomans and Faber, 1984. Bulletin Zoologisch Museum. Studies on West Indian Marine Molluscs, 2. Remarles : The genus Triforis Deshayes, 1834, in spite of having been used for many of the shells described and discussed above, does not belong to the family CONCLUSIONS Species in this work From the 68 taxa studied in the present work, 30 were previously known, 26 are described as new and 12 were not named or received a tentative ñame due to the scarcity of study mater- ial or the existence of doubts about their determination. More than 3000 speci- mens and shells ha ve been examined for the present work, of which more than 600 are included in the material exam- ined for the species here included. New species in the Caribbean Faber and Moolenbeek (1991), in their Remarks in the original description of Triphora calva , pointed out that "It is quite a surprise to find an undescribed species with such a characteristic shell Triphoridae, but to Cerithiopsidae. For this reason this species, although being valid and present in the study area, is not included in the family studied here. in Florida". In the following years more than 10 species were described as new from the Caribbean, sometimes proving to be abundant in areas such as the Nichupté Lagoon in Quintana Roo, Yucatán; also to be considered are the numerous species described in the present work, as well as those awaiting more material before they can be fully described and named. Total number of Caribbean species The previous work (Rolán and Fer- nández-Garcés, 2007) constituted a summary of several papers written in recent years concerning the species known from Cuba, with 33 species of Triphoridae figured in colour. The present work, complementary to that 164 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae paper, ineludes the study of 68 species, as well as 3 which are invalid taxa for the area or are not included in Triphori- dae. Of those 68 species, only 2 (Monophorus olivaceus and Sagenotriphora osclausum) had been mentioned in previ- ous works by these authors, and are now referred to with the addition of new information. Therefore the total number of species of this family in the study area (Caribbean and adjacent regions) exceeds one hundred, some of them unnamed due to the scarcity of available material and/or doubts about their determination. State of the art of the study of this group in the Caribbean In the last 30 years (1977 to the present work) 21 new species of triphorids have been described as new; 26 more are described and named in this work, and 12 more species await description in the future; a total of 59 species, which represents more than half of the estimated one hundred species in the area. All of which supports the observation already made in Rolán and Fernández-Garcés (2007) that this group has not yet been completely studied, in spite of the fact that more than half of the valid species listed here were only described in the last 30 years. Distribution range An important number of the studied species are from deep water, and this makes it difficult to know exactly their dis- tribution range, due to the limited number of samplings made and the shortage of available information in other studies. Undoubtedly some species do not have an extended range and are probably endemic to individual islands, due to their non-planktotrophic development. Endemic species Out of approximately a hundred species of Triphoridae known from the Caribbean and adjacent areas, about half have a protoconch of 3 whorls or less, which represents for many of these a short planktotrophic or non-plank- totrophic larval development, and prob- ably most of these are endemic to a small area. This suggests that more new species can probably be found in the fu- ture after some of the islands have been sampled in detail for the first time, thus increasing the total number of species. Generic assignment A significant part of the studied material consisted of dry shells collected by oíd expeditions, therefore no infor- mation on soft parts was available. Only in a few cases could the radula be studied from this dry material. For this reason many of the studied species were placed in Inella or in " Triphora " sensu lato , because the radula is very impor- tant for generic assignment. Future col- lecting expeditions will probably result in a complete revisión of these species, at which time their correct generic assignment will be made. Apart of " Triphora sensu lato", at least 15 genera are considered to be present in the Caribbean area: Inella (25 species, some of them whithout a defini- tive assignation), Metaxia (7), Marshallora (6), Iniforis (5), Cheirodonta (4), Isotriphora (3), Cosmotriphora (2), Monophorus (2), Sagenotriphora (2), Aclophora (1), Eut- riphora (1), Latitriphora (1), Mesophora (1), Nototriphora (1), and Similiphora (1). List of ñames for species of Triphoridae recorded from the Caribbean and adjacent areas A list of taxa referred to the study area was presented in Rolán and Fer- nández-Garcés (2007). Some changes were made in the present work and for this reason it is necessary to revise it. Henee, a new list is provided in Table I, including information on distribution, habitat, protoconch whorls and shell colour. The list includesl28 specific ñames, some of which are not currently consid- ered to be triphorids; 94 are considered here as valid species (which with the addition of the 11 mentioned without ñame in the present work, raises the number of specific taxa mentioned to 105); 27 are probably synonyms or errors, and 8 are only known as fossils. 165 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Table I. List of taxa employed for the Caribbean and adjacent areas, with taxonomic status, synonymy, and other information on the protoconch, range of distribution, depth and colour. Abbreviations, B: shell more or less uniformly brown; BB: shell with brown bands of different intensity; BW: shell brown with isolated white dots; BWB: shell brown and white, but without bands; V: shell of variable colour; W: shell white; WBB: shell white with brown bands; DW: deep water (more than 100 m); SW: shallow water; M: protoconch multispiral (3 whorls or more); P: protoconch paucispiral (less than 3 whorls); R: reduced distribution (few records from small area); U: poorly known because it is a deep water species; WI: wide distribution (several records). Tabla I. Listado de taxones empleados para el Caribe in áreas adyacente, con su status taxonómico, sino- minias e información sobre su protoconcha, distribución, profundidad y color. Abreviaturas, B: concha casi toda marrón; BB: concha con bandas marrones de distinta intensidad; BW: concha marrón con puntos blancos aislados; BWB: concha marrón y blanca, pero sin bandas; V: concha de color variable; W: concha blanca; WBB: concha blanca con bandas marrones; DW: aguas pofundas (más de 100 m); SW: aguas someras; M: protoconcha multiespiral (3 ó más vueltas); P: protoconcha pauciespiral ( menos de 3 vueltas); R: distribución restringida (pocas citas en un área pequeña); U: escasamente conocida por ser especie de aguas profundas; WI: amplia distribución ( varias citas). Nameoftaxon colour depth protoconch range abocoensis Rolan and Redfern spec. nov. " Triphord ' B SW P R? abrupta (Watson, 1880), Metaxia (error, not Caribbean) abrupta (Dalí, 1881), " Triphora " W DW ? U affinisi Hinds, 1843), " Triphord ' (nomen dubium) albida (A. Adams, 1 854), Latitripbora BWB SW M WI amicorum Rolan and Fernóndez-Garcés spec. nov. "Triphora" BW SW P ? angasi (Crosse and Fischer, 1865) "Triphord' (error) apexbilirata Rolan and Fernóndez-Garcés spec. nov. Inella W DW M R? apexdiversus Rolan and Lee spec. nov. Marshallora BWB SW M ? apexcrassum Rolan and Fernóndez-Garcés, 1994, Cheirodonta B SW P R? arnoidoi Faber and Moolenbeek, 1991, Cosmotriphora BWB SW M WI áspero Jeffreys, 1885, Strobiligera [=brychia) ateralbusMm and Fernóndez-Garcés, 1994, Monophorus BW SW M R auffenbergiMm and Lee spec. nov. " Triphord ' B SW M ? barbadensis Coomans and Faber, 1984 Triforis (not Triphoridae) B DW P R bartschi Olsson, 1916, "Triphora" fossil fossil P fossil bermudensis (Bartsch, 1911), Eutriphora WBB SW M WI bermudensis (Verril and Bush, 1900) Metaxia [ =rugulosa ?) bigemma (Watson, 1880), Inella W DW ? U bolax Olsson and Harbison, 1953, "Triphora" fossil fossil ? fossil brychia (Bouchet and Guillemot), 1 978, Strobiligera W DW M WI calva Faber and Moolenbeek, 1991, "Triphora" B SW P WI? candidula Rolan and Lee spec. nov. Sagenotriphora W SW M ? caracca Dalí, 1927, "Triphora" W DW ? U caribbeana Treece, 1980, "Triphora" (nomen nudum) carmelae Rolán and Fernóndez-Garcés, 1993, Iniforis BWB SW P s casta (Hinds, 1 843), Iniforis WBB SW P WI clenchi Aguayo, 1935, "Triphora" (unnecessary new ñame) colon (Dalí, 1881), "Inella" W DW ? u compsaM, 1927, * Inella " W DW ? u cylindrella (Dalí, 1881), " Triphora" W DW ? u dealbata (C. B. Adams, 1850), "Triphord' ( =melanura ?) decollata Rolán and Fernóndez-Garcés, 1994, Cheirodonta BW SW M s decorata (C. B. Adams, 1850), Nototriphora BWB SW M WI 166 RoláN AND FernáNDEZ-GarcÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae Table I. Continuatión. Tabla I. Continuación. Nameoftaxon colour depth protoconch range differens Rolan and Lee spec. nov. Inella B DW P U dinea Dalí, 1927, "Inella" W DW P U distincta (Meyer, 1886), "Triphora" fossil fossil ? fossil dupliniana (Olsson, 1916), " Triphora " fossil fossil ? fossil ellyae De Jong and Coomans, 1 988, "Triphora" WBB SW M Wl elvirae De Jong and Coomans, 1 988, "Triphora" WBB SW M Wl enopla Dalí, 1927, " Inella " W DW P U espinosai Rolan and Fernández-Garcés, 1993, Metaxia W SW P S excelsa Faber and Moolenbeek, 1991, Metaxia exiguum (C. B. Adams, 1 850), Triphora ? (nomen dubium) exile C. B. Adams, 1850 non Eichholtz, 1829 [=excelsa ) B SW M Wl faberi Rolan and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. Inella filata (Dalí, 1 889), Strobiligera (= infloto ) nom. nudum B SW P ? gaesonaM\, 1927, "Inella" W DW P u georgiana Dalí, 1 927, " Triphora" W DW P u grenadensis Rolan and Lee spec. nov. "Triphora" B SW P R guadalupensis Rolan and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. "Triphord' BB SW P R guanahacabibes Rolán and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. Isotriphora W DW P R guttata (Guppy, 1874), "Triphora" fossil fossil ? fossil harryleei Rolán and Fernández-Garcés n. sp. Inella bebes Watson, 1881 ¡n Pilsbry and Aguayo, 1933 Triphora ? (error, not Caribbean) hemphilli Bartsch, 1907, "Triphord' (error, not Caribbean) BWB DW P U hircus (Dalí, 1881), "Triphora" W DW ? U Ibex (Dalí, 1881), " Inella " W DW ? U immaculata Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1 993, Iniforis W SW P S inaudita Rolán and Lee spec. nov. " Triphora " WBB DW? M ? indígena Dalí, 1927, "Triphora" W DW M u inflata (Watson, 1880), Inella W DW P u intermedia (C. B. Adams, 1850), Similiphora WBB SW M Wl intermedia (Dalí, 1 881 ), "Inella" intermedias Tryon, 1887 non Adams Triforis{= turristhomae) W DW ? u /Hacina Dalí, 1889, "Triphora" lilac SW ? ? cf. ¡Hacina, "Triphora" WBB DW M u longissima (Dalí, 1881), Inella marmorata (Hinds, 1843), "Triphord' nomen dubium W DW ? u martii Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1995, "Triphora" medinae Parodiz, 1955 "Triphora" (error) WBB SW M s melanura (C. B. Adams, 1850), Cosmotriphora metaxa (delle Chiaje, 1 828), Metaxia (error; not Caribbean) W SW M Wl meteoro Dalí, 1927, "Inella" mirabile (C. B. Adams, 1 850), Iniforis (= turristhomae) W DW P u mitella Dalí, 1892, "Triphora" fossil fossil ? fossil miskitorum Rolán and Luque, 1999, Cheirodonta W SW P S modesta (C. B. Adams, 1850), Marshallora Nana (C. B. Adams, 1850) "Triphord' nomem dubium B SW M Wl nicaraguensis Rolán and Luque, 1999, Marshallora B SW P s nichupte Rolán and Cruz-Ábrego, 1 996, Marshallora V SW P s nigrocincta (C. B. Adams, 1839), Marshallora B SW M Wl 167 Iberus, 26 (1), 2008 Table I. Continuatión. Tabla I. Continuación. Nameoffáxon colour depth protoconch range noduloides Rolan and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. Inella W DW P R novem (Nowell-Usticke, 1969), Mesophora BB SW M Wl olivaceus (Dalí, 1 889), Monopfiorus BWB SW M Wl oreodoxa Olsson and Harbison, 1953, "Triphora" fossil fossil ? fossil OA/7Z7/Z7 (Deshayes, 1832), "Triphora" (error; notCaribbean) ornatos m\. non Deshayes, 1832, Monophorus {=olivaceus ) orteai Espinosa, 2001 " Triphora" (= ellyae ) osclausum (Rolan and Fernández-Garcés, 1995) Sagenotriphora B SW M Wl ostenta Rolan and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. Marshallora WBB SW M Wl peetersae (Moolenbeek and Faber, 1989), Isotriphora BB SW P Wl perversa Linné ¡n Dalí, 1 889 (error, not Caribbean) pfeifferi (Crosse and Fischer, 1865) "Triphord' (error) pinarena Espinosa, Ortea and Fernández-Garcés, 2007, Inella BWB SW M R? portoricensis Rolán and Redfern spec. nov. "Triphora" B SW P R pompona Dalí, 1 927, " Inella " W DW P U prompta Rolán and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. Metaxia V ? P ? proprla Rolán and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. Metaxia W DW P U propinqua Rolán and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. Metaxia V SW P u pseudolongissima Rolán and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov., Inella W DW M u pseudonovem Rolan and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. "Triphora" B ? M ? pseudothomae Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1 993, Iniforis WBB SW M Wl pseudotorticulo Rolán and Lee spec. nov. Inella BWB DW P u pulchellumí. B. Adams, 1850 " Triphord ' (= intermedia) pasillo (Pfeiffer, 1840), " Triphord " nomen dubium pyrrha (Henderson and Bartsch, 1914), "Triphora" B? ? M ? rugulosa (C. B. Adams, 1 850), Metaxia W SW M Wl rushii Dalí, 1881, "Triphora" w DW ? u sagei Rolán and Fernández-Garcés, 1995, Aclophora BB SW M Wl samanae (Dalí, 1 889), Latitriphora [= albida) sarissa Dalí, 1889, "Inella" W DW ? u sentoma Dalí, 1 927, "Inella" W DW ? u slapcinskyi Rolán and Fernández-Garcés spec. nov. Inella W SW P ? somersi?ek, 1926 "Triphord' nomem dubium somersi ?\\sb\y and Aguayo, 1933 " Triphord ' nomen nudum toenialba Rolán and Espinosa, 1994, Isotriphora BB SW P R taeniolata (Dalí, 1889), Metaxia WBB SW M Wl terebrata (Heilprin, 1889) "Triphora" fossil fossil ? fossil Torticula (Dalí, 1881), "Inella" W DW ? U triserialis (Dalí, 1881), “Inella" W DW P U torrissimilis (Nowell-Usticke, 1 969), Iniforis {= bermudensis) turristbomae (Holten, 1802), Iniforis WBB SW M Wl turtlebayensis Rolán and Lee spec. nov. "Triphord' B ? P R undebermuda Rolán and Lee spec. nov. Inella W DW P U variegata (A. Adams, 1854), "Triphord' (= decorata) vestalis (A. Adams, 1 854) 1 851 ? Triphoris (error: it is a Cerithiopsis) verbernei (Moolenbeek and Faber, 1989), Cheirodonta BW SW M Wl i ricino (C. B. Adams, 1 850), Metaxia (= rugulosa) yociusiMm and Lee spec. nov. "Triphora" B DW P R 168 ROLÁN AND FERNÁNDEZ-GARCÉS: New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors thank those persons who facilitated the loan of material, pho- tographs and information from Museums: Gonzalo Giribet and Adam Baldinger, Kenneth J. Boss from MCZ; Jerry Harasewych and Ellen Strong, from the USNM; Kathie Way and Roberto Pórtela Miguez, for their help during our time with the SYNTHESYS PROJECT in BMNH; Paula Mikkelsen, James R. "Jay" Cordeiro from AMNH; Gary Rosenberg and Daniel L. Graf from ANSP; John Slapcinsky, Kurt Auffenberg, Chelsey Campbell, Gustav Paulay from FLMNH; Marien Faber for his information on BIBLIOGRAPHY Adams, C. B., 1850a. Description of supposed new species of marine shells which inhabit Jamaica. Contributions to Conchology, 1 (4): 56-68. Adams, C. B., 1850b. Description of supposed new species of marine shells which inhabit Jamaica. Contributions to Conchology, 1 (7): 109-123. Bouchet, P., 1985. Les Triphoridae de Méditer- ranée et du proche Atlantique (Mollusca, Gastropoda). Lavori S.I.M., 21: 5-58. Bouchet, P., 1997. Nouvelles observations sur la systématique des Triphoridae de Méditer- ranée et du proche Atlantique. Bollettino Mala- cologico, 31 (9-12): 205-220. Bouchet, P. and Guillemot, H., 1978. The Triphora perversa- complex in Western Europe. Journal of Molluscan Studies, 44: 344-356. Bouchet, P. and Warén, A., 1993. Revisión of the Northeast Atlantic bathyal and abyssal Mesogastropoda. Bollettino Malacologico, sup- plemento 3: 579-840. Clench, W. J. and Turner, R. D., 1950. The Western Atlantic marine mollusks described by C. B. Adams. Occasional Papers on Mollusks, 1 (15): 233-403. Dall, W. H., 1881. Reports on the results of dredging, under the supervisión of Alexan- der Agassiz, in the Gulf of México, and in the Caribbean Sea, 1877-79, by the United States Coast Survey steamer "Blake", Lieutenant- Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N., com- manding. XV. Preliminary report on the Mol- lusca. Bulletin oftheMuseum ofComparative Zo- ology, 9 (2): 33-144. some material studied by him. We also thank Angel Valdés of The Natural History Museum of Los Angeles County. Jesús S. Troncoso from the Universi- dad de Vigo, Department of Ecology, for his authorization to use the photo- graphic equipment; Jesús Méndez and Inés Pazos for the SEM photographs made in the Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnológico a la Investigación (CACTI) of the University of Vigo. Harry G. Lee and Colin Redfern shared with us some very valuable material from their collections, and also helped by reading the manuscript and making many interesting observations and comments. Dall, W. H., 1889. Reports on the results of dredging, under the supervisión of Alexan- der Agassiz, in the Gulf of México (1877-78), and in the Caribbean Sea, (1879-80), by the United States Coast Survey steamer "Blake", Lieutenant-Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N., commanding. XXIX. Report on the Mollusca. Part 2. Gastropoda and Scaphopoda. Bulletin ofthe Museum ofComparative Zoology, 18: 1- 492, pls. 10-40. Dall, W. H., 1927. Small shells from dredgings off the southeast coast of the United States by the United States Fisheries Steamer "Al- batross" in 1885 and 1886. Proceedings ofthe United States National Museum, 70: 1-134. De Jong, K. M. and Coomans, H. E., 1988. Ma- rine gastropods from Curagao, Aruba and Bonaire. E. J. Brill, Leiden, 261 pp. Díaz Merlano, J. M, and Puyana Hegedus, M., 1994. Moluscos del Caribe Colombiano, un catálogo ilustrado. Fundación Natura/ Co- ciencias/ Invernar, Bogotá. 291 pp, 74 pls. Espinosa, J., Ortea, J. A., Fernández-Garcés, R. and Moro, L. 2007. Adiciones a la fauna de moluscos marinos de la península de Gua- nahacabibes (I), con la descripción de nuevas especies. Avicennia, 19: 63-88. Faber, M. J. and Moolenbeek, R. G., 1991. Two new shallow water triphorids and a new ñame in Metaxia from Florida and the West Indies. Apex, 6 (3-4): 81-85. Fernandes, F. and Rolán, E., 1988. A familia Triphoridae (Mollusca: Gastropoda) no ar- quipélago de Cabo Verde. Publicagoes Oca- sionáis da Sociedade Portuguesa de Malacologia, 11: 17-32. 1 69 Iberus , 26 (1), 2008 Henderson, J. B. and Bartsch. P., 1914. Lit- toral marine mollusks of Chincoteague Island, Virginia. Proceedings ofthe United States Na- tional Museum, 47: 411-421, pls. 13-14. Laseron, C. F., 1958. The family Triphoridae (Mollusca) from Northern Australia; also Triphoridae from Christmas Islands (indian Ocean). Australia Journal of Marine and Fres- chwater Research, 9 (4): 569-658. Leal, J. H., 1991. Marine Prosobranch Gastropods from Oceanic Islands ojfBrazil. Universal Book Services, Oegstgeest, 418 pp. Linden, J. van der, 1998. The Metaxiinae dredged by the CANCAP Expeditions, with the new species Metaxia carinaplex and M. haplax from the Cape Verde Islands (Gas- tropoda, Heteropoda, Triphoridae). Basteria, 61 (4-6): 115-122. Marshall, B. A., 1983. A revisión of the Recent Triphoridae of Southern Australia (Mollusca: Gastropoda). Records of the Australian Mu- seum, Supplement 2: 1-119 pp. Moolenbeek, R G. and Faber, M. ]., 1989. Two new Triphora species from the West Indies (Gas- tropoda; Triphoridae). Basteria, 53 (4-6): 77-80. Morris, P. A., 1973. A field guide to shells ofthe Atlantic and Gulf coasts and the West Indies. Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston. 330, 76 pls. Nowell-Usticke, G. W., 1959. A check list ofthe marine shells ofS. Croix U.S. Virgin Islands zvith random annotations. Lañe Press. Burlington. 90 pp. Nowell-Usticke, G. W., 1971. A supplementary listing of new shells (illustrated). Nowell- Usticke. U.S.A. 31 pp. Olsson, A. A. and Harbison, A., 1953. Pliocene Mollusca of Southern Florida, with special ref- erence to those from North Saint Petersburg. Monographs ofthe Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 8: 1-457, 65 pls. Redfern, C, 2001 Bahamian seashells, a thousand species from Abaco, Bahamas. Bahamiansea- shells.com, Inc., Boca Ratón, 280 pp, 124 pls. Ríos, E., 1994. Seashells ofBrazil. Editora de Furg, Rio Grande. 368 pp, 113 pls. Rolán, E. and Crúz-Ábrego, F. M., 1996 "1995". A new triphorid species (Gastropoda, Triphoridae) from Nichupté lagoon, Yucatán peninsula, México. Iberus, 13 (2): 87-92. Rolán, E. and Espinosa, J., 1994. The family Triphoridae (Mollusca, Gastropoda, Proso- branchia) in Cuba 3. The genus Isotriphora, with description of a new species. Basteria, 58 (1-2): 63-68. Rolán, E. and Fernández-Garcés, R., 1993a "1992". La familia Triphoridae (Mollusca: Gastropoda) en la isla de Cuba, 1. El género Metaxia Monterosato, 1884. Bollettino Mala- cologico, 28 (5-12): 169-176. Rolán, E. and Fernández-Garcés, R., 1993b. The family Triphoridae (Mollusca, Gas- tropoda) in Cuba. 2. The genus Iniforis Jousseaume, 1884. Apex, 8 (3): 95-106. Rolán, E. and Fernández-Garcés, R., 1994. The family Triphoridae (Mollusca, Gas- tropoda) in Cuba. 4. The genera Monophorus, Nototriphora, Cosmotriphora and Cheirodonta, with the description of three new species. Apex, 9 (1): 17-27. Rolán, E. and Fernández-Garcés, R., 1995. The family Triphoridae (Mollusca, Gas- tropoda) in Cuba. 5. The genera Marshallora, Mesophora, Similiphora, Eutriphora, Latitriphora, Aclophora and other species without generic affiliation. Apex, 10 (1): 9-24. Rolán, E. and Fernández-Garcés, R., 2007. Caribbean Triphoridae (Gastropoda, Triphoroidea): list and colour illustrations. Neptúnea, 6 (3): 13-24. Rolán, E. and Luque, A. A. 1999. Two new species of triphorids (Gastropoda, Triphori- dae) from the Miskitos Archipelago, Nicaragua. Iberus, 17 (1): 107-113. Rolán, E. and Peñas, A., 2001. Two new species of the genus Monophorus (Gastropoda, Triphoridae) in the east Atlantic and Mediter- ranean Sea. Iberus, 19 (2): 31-40. Rolán, E. and Redfern, C., 1996. Variabili- dad de la protoconcha de Metaxia rugulosa (C. B. Adams, 1850) (Gastropoda; Triphoridae). Noticiario SEM, 26: 27-29. Rosenberg, G., 2005. Malacolog 4.1: A data- base of Western Atlantic marine Mollusca. [WWW database (versión 4.1.0)] URL http: / / www.malacolog.org. Simone, L. R. L., 2006. A new Triphoridae from Canopus Bank, N. E. Brazil (Caenogas- tropoda). Strombus, 13 (1): 6-8. Verduin, A., 1976. On the systematics of recent Rissoa of the subgenus Turboella Gray, 1847, from the Mediterranean and European At- lantic coasts. Basteria, 40: 21-73. Vokes, H. E. AND Vokes, E. H., 1983. Distribu- tion of shallow-water marine Mollusca, Yu- catán Peninsula, México. Mesoamerican Ecol- ogy Institute, Monograph 1. Middle American Re- search Institute, publ. 54. 183 pp. Warmke, G. L. and Abbott, R. T., 1961. Caribbean seashells. Livingston Publishing Co. Wynnewood, Pennsylvania. 348 pp., 43 pls. Watson, R. B„ 1980. Mollusca of H. M. S. Chal- lenger Expedition. Journal ofthe Linnean So- ciety ofEondon, 15: 87-126. Watson R. B., 1886. Report on the Scaphopoda and Gasteropoda collected by HMS Chal- lenger during the years 1873-1876. Reports of the scientific results of the voyage of H.M.S. "Challenger" ,Zoology, 15 (part 42): 1-756. Wells, 1998. Superfamily Triphoroidea. Pp. 808-811 In Beesley, P.L., Ross, G.J.B. and Wells, A. (eds). Mollusca: The Southern Syn- thesis. Fauna of Australia vol. 5. CSIRO Pub- lications: Melbourne, Part B viii 565-1234 pp. 170 NORMAS DE PUBLICACIÓN • La revista Iberus publica artículos de fondo, notas y monografías que versen sobre cualquiera de los aspectos relacio- nados con la Malacología. Se entiende por artículo un trabajo de investigación de más de 5 páginas de texto, meca- nografiadas, incluidas láminas, gráficos y tablas. Las notas son trabajos de menor extensión. Las monografías son tra- bajos sobre un tema único, de extensión superior a las 50 páginas de la revista y que serán publicadas como un suple- mento de Iberus. Los autores interesados en publicar monografías deberán ponerse previamente en contacto con el Editor de Publicaciones. Se entiende que el contenido de los manuscritos no ha sido publicado, ni se publicará en otra parte ni en su totalidad ni resumido. • Los manuscritos, así como toda la correspondencia relacionada con los mismos, deberán ser remitidos a: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publicaciones, Departamento de Biología Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, España. • El texto del trabajo podrá estar redactado en cualquier lengua culta moderna. • En los trabajos que superen las 20 páginas, cada página de exceso será abonada por el(los) autor(es) a precio de coste. • Los artículos, notas y monografías deberán presentarse mecanografiados sobre DIN A-4, por una sola cara a doble espacio (incluyendo referencias, pies de figura y tablas), con al menos 3 centímetros de margen por cada lado. Los tra- bajos se entregarán por triplicado (original y dos copias), y se incluirá una versión en disco flexible (diskette), utili- zando procesadores de texto en sus versiones de DOS o Macintosh. En caso de autoría compartida, uno de los auto- res deberá hacerse responsable de toda la correspondencia. • Junto con el trabajo debe incluirse una lista de al menos 4 posibles revisores del mismo, sin perjuicio de los que el propio Editor considere oportunos. • Los manuscritos se presentarán de acuerdo al siguiente esquema: Primera página. Deberá incluir un título conciso, pero sugerente del contenido del trabajo, así como una traducción al inglés del mismo (si el artículo no está escrito en inglés). Cuando sea preciso, deberá incluir referencia a familia o táxones superiores. A continuación figurarán, por este orden, el nombre y apellidos completos del autor o autores, las direcciones completas de los mismos, y un resumen del trabajo y su traducción al inglés. Dicho resumen deberá sintetizar, en conjunción con el título, tanto los resultados como las conclusiones del artículo; se sugiere una exten- sión de 100 a 200 palabras. El resumen deberá estar seguido de una lista de palabras clave, también con su versión inglesa para su inclusión en los bancos de datos internacionales. Páginas siguientes. Incluirán el resto del artículo, que debe dividirse en secciones precedidas por breves encabeza- mientos. Siempre que sea posible, se recomienda seguir el siguiente esquema: Introducción, Material y métodos, Resultados, Discusión, Conclusiones, Agradecimientos y Bibliografía. Si se emplean abreviaturas no habituales en el texto, deberán indicarse tras el apartado de Material y Métodos. • Las notas breves deberán presentarse de la misma forma, pero sin resumen. • Deberán evitarse notas a pie de página y referencias cruzadas. Deberán respetarse estrictamente los Códigos Internacionales de Nomenclatura Zoológica y Botánica (últimas ediciones). Cuando un táxon aparezca por primera vez deberá citarse su autor y fecha de su descripción. En el caso de artículos sistemáticos, cuando se den las sinonimias de los táxones, éstas deberán citarse COMPLETAS, incluyendo en forma abreviada la publicación donde fueron des- critas, y la localidad tipo si es conocida entre corchetes, según el siguiente esquema (préstese especial cuidado a la pun- tuación): Dendrodoris limbata (Cuvier, 1804) Sinonimias Doris limbata Cuvier, 1804, Ann. Mus. H. N. París, 4 (24): 468-469 [Localidad tipo: Marsella]. Doris nigricans Otto, 1823, Nov. Act. Ac. Caes. Leop. Car., 10: 275. Dichas referencias no deberán incluirse en la lista de Bibliografía si es la única vez que se nombran en el texto. Si se incluyen una lista completa de referencias de un taxon inmediatamente tras éste, deberá seguirse el mismo esque- ma (sin incluir en Bibliografía las referencias que no se mencionen en otro lugar del texto). • Sólo los nombres en latín y los de táxones genéricos y específicos deberán llevar subrayado sencillo o preferentemente ir en cursiva. En ningún caso deberá escribirse una palabra totalmente en letras mayúsculas, ni siquiera el Título. Las unidades a utilizar deberán pertenecer al Sistema Métrico Decimal, junto con sus correctas abreviaturas. En artículos escritos en castellano, en los números decimales sepárese la parte entera de la decimal por una coma inferior (,), NUNCA por un punto (.) o coma superior (’). • Las referencias bibliográficas irán en el texto con minúsculas o versalitas: Fretter y Graham (1962) o Fretter Y GRAHAM (1962). Si son más de dos autores se deberán citar todos la primera vez que aparecen en el texto [Smith, Jones y Brown (1970)] empleándose et al. las siguientes veces [Smith et al. (1970)]. Si un autor ha publicado más de un trabajo en un año se citarán con letras: (Davis, 1989a; Davis, 1989b). No deberá emplearse op. cit. La lista de refe- rencias deberá incluir todas las citas del texto y sólo éstas, ordenadas alfabéticamente. Se citarán los nombres de todos los autores de cada referencia, sea cual sea su número. Los nombres de los autores deberán escribirse, en letras minús- culas o VERSALITAS. No deberán incluirse referencias a autores cuando éstos aparezcan en el texto exclusivamente como autoridades de un taxon. Los nombres de las publicaciones periódicas deberán aparecer COMPLETOS, no abreviados. Cuando se citen libros, dése el título, editor, lugar de publicación, na de edición si no es la primera y número total de páginas. Deberán evitarse referencias a Tesis Doctorales u otros documentos inéditos de difícil con- sulta. Síganse los siguientes ejemplos (préstese atención a la puntuación): Fretter, V. y Graham, A., 1962. British Prosobranch Molluscs. Ray Society, London, 765 pp. Ponder, W. F., 1988. The Truncatelloidean (= Rissoacean) radiation - a preliminary phylogeny. En Ponder, W. F. (Ed.): Prosobranch Phylogeny, Malacological Review, suppl. 4: 129-166. Ros, J., 1976. Catálogo provisional de los Opistobranquios (Gastropoda: Euthyneura) de las costas ibéricas. Miscelánea Zoolgica, 3 (5): 21-51. • Las gráficas e ilustraciones deberán ser originales y presentarse sobre papel vegetal o similar, con tinta china negra y ajustadas al formato de caja de la revista o proporcional a éste. Este formato es de 57 mm (una columna) o 121 mm (dos) de anchura y hasta 196 mm de altura, si bien se recomienda utilizar el formato a dos columnas. En caso de pre- parar figuras para que ocupen el total de una página, se ruega ajustar su tamaño para que puedan caber los pies de figura bajo ella. Si han de incluirse gráficas de ordenador, deberán imprimirse con impresora láser sobre papel de buena calidad. Las fotografías, bien contrastadas y sin retocar, deberán ajustarse siempre a los tamaños mencionados. Al componer fotografías sobre una hoja, procúrese que los espacios entre ellas sean regulares y que estén debidamente alineadas. Téngase en cuenta que incluir fotografías de distinto contraste en una misma página conlleva una pobre reproducción final. Las escalas de dibujos y fotografías deberán ser gráficas, y las unidades que se utilicen del sistema métrico decimal. Considérese la reducción que será necesaria a la hora de decidir el tamaño de las escalas o letras en las figuras, que no deberán bajar de los 2 mm. En figuras compuestas, cada parte deberá etiquetarse con letras mayús- culas, el resto de las letras deberán ser minúsculas. No deberán hacerse referencias a los aumentos de una determi- nada ilustración, ya que éstos cambian con la reducción, por lo que debe emplearse una escala gráfica. En su caso, se recomienda la utilización de mapas con proyección UTM. Cada figura, gráfica o ilustración deberá presentarse en hojas separadas y con numeración arábiga (1, 2, 3,...), sin separar “Figuras” y “Láminas”. Los pies de figura, en una hoja aparte, deberán acompañarse de su traducción al inglés (o español si el inglés es la lengua del trabajo). Utilícese el esquema siguiente: Figura 1. Neodoris carvi. A: animal desplazándose; B: detalle de un rinóforo; C: branquia. Las abreviaturas empleadas en las ilustraciones deberán incluirse en la hoja de pies de figura. Los autores interesados en incluir láminas en color deberán abonarlas a precio de coste (200 € por página). Por lo demás, deberán ajustarse a los mismos requisitos que los indicados para las figuras. Si se pretende enviar gráficas o ilustraciones en formato digital es IMPRESCINDIBLE contactar previamente con el Editor • Las Tablas se presentarán en hojas separadas, siempre con numeración romana (I, II, III,...). Las leyendas se inclui- rán en una hoja aparte acompañándose de una traducción al inglés. Deberán evitarse las tablas particularmente com- plejas. Se recomienda reducir el número y extensión de ilustraciones, láminas o tablas al mínimo necesario. • Los artículos que no se ajusten a las normas de publicación serán devueltos al autor con las indicaciones de los cam- bios necesarios. • El Comité Editorial comunicará al autor responsable del trabajo la fecha de recepción del trabajo y la fecha de envío a revisión. Cada original recibido será sometido a revisión por al menos dos investigadores. El Comité Editorial, a la vista de los informes de los revisores decidirá sobre la aceptación o no de cada manuscrito. El autor recibirá en cada caso copia de los comentarios de los revisores sobre su artículo. En caso de aceptación, el mismo Comité Editorial, si lo considera conveniente, podrá solicitar a los autores otras modificaciones que considere oportunas. Si el trabajo es aceptado, el autor deberá enviar una copia impresa del mismo corregida, acompañada por una versión en disco flexi- ble (diskette), utilizando procesadores de texto en sus versiones de DOS o Macintosh. La fecha de aceptación figura- rá en el artículo publicado. • Las pruebas de imprenta serán enviadas al autor responsable, EXCLUSIVAMENTE para la corrección de erratas, y deberán ser devueltas en un plazo máximo de 1 5 días. Se recomienda prestar especial atención en la corrección de las pruebas. • De cada trabajo se entregarán gratuitamente 50 separatas. Aquellos autores que deseen un número mayor, deberán hacerlo constar al devolver las pruebas de imprenta, y NUNCA POSTERIORMENTE. El coste de las separatas adi- cionales será cargado al autor. INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS • Iberus publishes research papers, notes and monographs devoted to the various aspects of Malacology. Papers are manuscripts of more than 5 typed pages, including figures and tables. Notes are shorter papers. Monographs should exceed 50 pages of the final periodical, and will be published as Supplements. Authors wishing to publish monographs should contact the Editor. Manuscripts are considered on the understanding that their contents have not appeared or will not appeared, elsewhere in substantially the same or any abbreviated form. • Manuscripts and correspondence regarding editorial matters must be sent to: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publicaciones, Departamento de Biología Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, Spain. • Manuscripts may be written in any modern language. • When a paper exceeds 20 pages, extra pages will be charged to the author(s) at full cost. • Manuscripts must be typed double spaced (including the references, figure captions and tables) on one side on A-4 (297x210 mm) with margins of at least 3 cm. An original and two copies must be submitted, together with a floppy disk containing the árdele written with a DOS or Macintosh word processor. When a paper has joint authorship, one author must accept responsability for all correspondence. • The authors must inelude a list of at least 4 possible referees; the Editor can choose any others if appropriate. • Papers should conform the following layout: First page. This must inelude a concise but informative title, with mention of family of higher taxon when appropri- atte, and its Spanish translation. It will be followed by all authors’ ñames and surnames, their full adress(es), an abstract (and its Spanish translation) not exceeding 200 words which summarizes not only contents but results and conclusions, and a list of Key Words (and their Spanish translation) under which the árdele should be indexed. Following pages. These should contení the rest of the paper, divided into sections under short headings. Whenever possible the text should be arranged as follows: Introduction, Material and methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, Acknowledgements and References. Unusual abbreviations used in the text must be grouped in one alphabetic sequence after the Material and methods section. • Notes should follow the same layout, without the abstract. • Footnotes and cross-references must be avoided. The International Codes of Zoological and Botanical Nomenclature must be strictly followed. The first mention in the text of any taxon must be followed by its authori- ty including the year. In systematic papers, when synonyms of a taxon are given, they must be cited IN FULL, includ- ing the periodical, in an abbreviate form, where they were described, and the type localities in square brackets when known. Follow this example (please note the punctuation): Dendrodoris limbata (Cuvier, 1 804) Synonyms Doris limbata Cuvier, 1804, Ann. Mus. H. N. París, 4 (24): 468-469 [Type locality: Marseille]. Doris nigricans Otto, 1823, Nov. Act. Ac. Caes. Leop. Car., 10: 275. These references must not be included in the Bibliography list, except if referred to elsewhere in the text. If a full list of references of the taxon is to be given immediately below it, the same layout should be followed (also excluding those nowhere else cited from the Bibliography list). Only Latín words and ñames of genera and species should be underlined once or be given in italics. No word must be written in UPPER CASE LETTERS. SI units are to be used, together with their appropriate symbols. In Spanish manuscripts, decimal numbers must be separated with a comma (,), NEVER with a point (.) or upper comma (‘). • References in the text should be written in small letters or SMALL CAPITALS: Fretter and Graham (1962) or FRETTER AND GRAHAM (1962). The first mention in the text of a paper with more than two authors must inelude all of them [Smith, Jones & Brown (1970)], thereafter use et al. [Smith et al. (1970)]. If an author has published more than one paper per year, refer to them with letters: (Davis, 1989a; Davis, 1989b). Avoid op. cit. The references in the reference list should be in alphabetical order and inelude all the publications cited in the text but only these. ALL the authors of a paper must be included. These should be written in small letters or SMALL CAP- ITALS. The references need not be cited when the author and date are given only as authority for a taxonomic ñame. Tifies of periodicals must be given IN FULL, not abbreviated. For books, give the title, ñame of publisher, place of publication, indication of edition if not the first and total number of pages. Keep references to doctoral theses or any other unpublished documents to an absolute mínimum. See the following examples (please note the punctuation): Fretter, V. and Graham, A., 1962. British Prosobranch Molluscs. Ray Society, London, 765 pp. Ponder, W. F., 1988. The Truncatelloidean (= Rissoacean) radiation - a preliminary phylogeny. In Ponder, W. F. (Ed.): Prosobranch Phylogeny, Malacological Review, suppl. 4: 129-166. Ros, J., 1976. Catálogo provisional de los Opistobranquios (Gastropoda: Euthyneura) de las costas ibéricas. Miscelánea Zoológica, 3 (5): 21-51. • Figures must be original, in Indian ink on draughtsman’s tracing paper. Keep in mind page format and column size when designing figures. These should be one column (57 mm) or two columns (121 mm) wide and up 196 mm high, or be proportional to these sizes. Two columns format is recomended. It is desirable to print figures with their legend below, so authors are asked to take this into account when preparing full page figures. If Computer generated graph- ics are to be included, they must be printed on high quality white paper with a láser printer. Photographs must be of good contrast, and should be submitted in the final size. When mounting photographs in a block, ensure spacers are of uniform width. Remember that grouping photographs of varied contrast results in poor reproduction. Take account of necessary reduction in lettering drawings; final lettering must be at least 2 mm high. In composite draw- ings, each figure should be given a capital letter; additional lettering should be in lower-case letters. A scale line is recomended to indícate size, magnification ratio must be avoided as it may be changed during printing. UTM maps are to be used if necessary. Figures must be submitted on sepárate sheets, and numbered with consecutive Arabic num- bers (1, 2, 3,...), without separating ‘Plates’ and ‘Figures’. Legends for Figures must be typed in numerical order on a sepárate sheet, and an Spanish translation must be included. Follow this example (please note the punctuation): Figure 1 . Neodoris carvi. A: animal crawling; B: rinophore; C: gills. If abbreviations are to be used in illustrations, group them alphabetically after the Legends for Figures section. Authors wishing to publish illustrations in colour will be charged with additional costs (200 € per page). They should be submitted in the same way that black and white prints. If the authors want to send Figures in digital format, CONTACT the Editor first. • Tables must be numbered with Román numbers (I, II, III,...) and each typed on a sepárate sheet. Headings should be typed on a sepárate sheet, together with their English translation. Complex tables should be avoided. As a general rule, keep the number and extensión of illustrations and tables as reduced as possible. • Manuscripts that do not conform to these instructions will be returned for correction before reviewing. • Authors submitting manuscripts will receive an acknowledgement of receipt, including receipt date, and the date the manuscript was sent for reviewing. Each manuscript will be critically evaluated by at least two referees. Based of these evaluations, the Editorial Board will decide on acceptance or rejection. Anyway, authors will receive a copy of the referees’ comments. If a manuscript is accepted, the Editorial Board may indícate additional changes if desirable. Acceptable manuscripts will be returned to the author for consideration of comments and criticism; a finalized man- uscript must then be returned to the Editor, together with a floppy disk containing the article written with a DOS or Macintosh word processor. Dates of reception and acceptance of the manuscript will appear in all published articles. • Proofs will be sent to the author for correcting errors. At this stage no stylistic changes will be accepted. Pay special attention to references and their dates in the text and the Bibliography section, and also to numbers of Figures and Tables appearing in the text. • Fifty reprints per article will be supplied free of charge. Additional reprints must be ordered when the page proofs are returned, and will be charged at cost. NO LATER orders will be accepted. La Sociedad Española de Malacología Junta Directiva desde el 11 de octubre de 2005 Presidente José Templado González Vicepresidente Emilio Rolán Mosquera Secretaria María Carmen Salas Casanovas Tesorero Luis Murillo Guillén Editor de Publicaciones Serge Gofas Bibliotecario Rafael Araujo Armero Vocales Ramón M. Alvarez Halcón Benjamín Gómez Moliner Alberto Martínez Ortí Diego Moreno Lampreave José Ramón Arrébola Burgos La Sociedad Española de Malacología se fundó el 21 de agosto de 1980. La sociedad se registró como una aso- ciación sin ánimo de lucro en Madrid (Registro N° 4053) con unos estatutos que fueron aprobados el 12 de diciembre de 1980. Esta sociedad se constituye con el fin de fomentar y difundir los estudios malacológicos mediante reuniones y publicaciones. A esta sociedad puede pertenecer cualquier .persona o institución interesada en el estudio de los moluscos. SEDE SOCIAL: Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, d José Gutiérrez Abascal 2, 28006 Madrid, España. Cuotas para 2008: Socio numerario (en España): 40 euros (en Europa) 40 euros (fuera de Europa): 48 euros Socio estudiante (en España): 23 euros (en el extranjero): 29 euros Socio Familiar: (sin recepción de revista) 4 euros Socio Protector: (mínimo) 48 euros Socio Corporativo (en Europa): 48 euros (fuera de Europa): 54 euros INSCRIPCIÓN: 6 euros, además de la cuota correspondiente. A los socios residentes en España se les aconseja domiciliar su cuota. Todos los abonos deberán enviarse al Tesorero (dirección reseñada anteriormente) el 1 de enero de cada año. Los abonos se harán sin recargos para la sociedad y en favor de la Sociedad Española de Malacología y no de ninguna persona de la junta directiva. Aque- llos socios que no abonen su cuota anual dejarán de recibir las publicaciones de la Sociedad. Los bonos de ins- cripción se enviarán junto con el abono de una cuota anual al Tesorero. A los residentes en el extranjero se les ruega que abonen su cuota mediante giro postal en euros (internatio- nal postal money orders in euros sent to the Treasurer). Members living in foreing countries can deduce 6 euros if paid before 1 5 April. Cada socio tiene derecho a recibir anualmente los números de Iberus, Reseñas Malacológicas y Noticiarios que se publiquen. Indice Iberus 26 (1) 2008 Mifsud, C. AND Ovalis, P. Re-discovery of living specimens of Heliacus ( Gyriscus) jeffreysianus (Tiberi, 1 867) (Gastropoda: Architectonicidae) Re descubrimiento de ejemplares vivos de Heliacus (Gyriscus) jeffreysianus (Tiberi, 1867) (Gastropoda: Architectonicidae) 1-4 ROLÁN, E., RYALL, P. AND Horro, J. Notes on West African Perrona (Gastropoda: Clavatulidae), with the description of a new species Notas sobre Perrona ( Gastropoda: Clavatulidae) en Africa Occidental, con la descripción de una nueva especie 5-16 Moukrim, A., Id Halla, M., Kaaya, A., Bouhaimi, A., Benomar, S. et Mathieu, M. Pattern of reserve storage of the two mussel species Perna perna and Mytilus galloprovincialis living on Moroccan coasts: annual variation and effect of pollution Patrones de almacenamiento de reservas en dos especies de mejillón Perna perna y Mytilus gallo- provincialis de las costas de Marruecos: variación anual y efecto de la contaminación . . 17-28 Bergayou, H., Moukrim, A., Mathieu, M. and Gimazane, J.-P. Reproducdon of the cockle Cerastoderma edule (Linné, 1758) in the estuary of Oued Souss (southwestern Morocco) Reproducción del berberecho Cerastoderma edule (Linné, 1758) en el estuario del Oued Souss (suroeste de Marruecos) 29-42 Bogi, C. E Bartolini, S. Xylodiscula wareni n. sp., una nuova specie per le coste orientali della Sicilia Xylodiscula wareni n. sp., una- nueva specie para las costas orientales de Sicilia 43-46 MORENO-RUEDA, G. The colour white diminishes weight loss during aestivation in the arid- dwelling land snail Sphincterochila (Albea) candidísima El color blanco disminuye la pérdida de peso durante la estivación en el caracol de medios áridos Sphincterochila (Albea) candidissima 47-51 McLEAN, J. H. AND GOFAS, S. Notes on the genus Anadema H. and A. Adams, 1854 (Gastropoda: Colloniidae) Notas sobre el género Anadema H. y A. Adams, 1854 (Gastropoda: Colloniidae) — 53-63 Cachia, C. AND MlFSUD, C. A new species of Mangelia (Turridae: Mangeliinae) from the Medite- rranean Sea Una nueva especie de Mangelia (Turridae: Mangeliinae) del Mediterráneo 65-68 Tamayo Goya, J. C. Catálogo de los bivalvos marinos del sector central del Golfo de Valencia (España) Checklist of the marine bivalves in the central sector ofthe Gulf of Valencia (Spain) — 69-80 ROLÁN, E. AND FernáNDEZ-GarcéS, R. New data on the Caribbean Triphoridae (Caenogas- tropoda, Triphoroidea) with the description of 26 new species Nuevos datos sobre los Triphoridae ( Caenogastropoda, Triphoroidea) del Caribe, con la descrip- ción de 26 nuevas especies 81-170 ISSN 0212-3010 3. Ultrathin sections were collected on copper grids and were stained for 20 min with uranyl acétate, followed by lead citrate for 5 min. Sec- tions were examined using a Siemens 102 electrón microscope. The length and the width of each cell stage were also measured (10 cells at least per stage). Individual valúes recorded for each measurement and each cell stage were averaged. RESULTS Each gonad was constituted by many acini, surrounded by connective tissue and an external ciliated epithe- lium (Fig. 1A). From the internal wall of each acinus to the lumen, all develop- mental stages were present (Fig. IB). Groups of spermatogonia are positioned nearest the wall of each acinus, groups of spermatocytes and spermatids were located closer to the acinus lumen, whereas the flagella of mature sperm were confined to the central lumen (Fig. IB). All acini emptyed into spermatic ducts, each being lined by an internal ciliated, columnar epithelium. Vesicular cells, containing two types of granules, were distributed within the interacinar connective tissue (Fig. 1A). Spermatogonia : Two types of sper- matogonia (Fig. 2 A,B) were observed in the gonad of P. perna. The A spermato- gonia (primordial cells) were large cells (16.6 x 5.9 jum in size). Their nucleus was often ovoid (6.3 x 4.0 jum), each with a single 1.6-jum nucleolus, and their translucent cytoplasm contained an extensive rough endoplasmic reticu- lum (RER), numerous mitochondria, and a Golgi apparatus. B spermatogonia are smaller cells (7.2 x 3.0 jum) and their nuclei (4.2 x 2.3 jum) had a well-devel- oped euchromatin and sometimes a 3 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 visible nucleolus. Their dark cytoplasm contained numerous mitochondria, RER cisternae, and proacrosomal vesicles derived from the Golgi complex. These B spermatogonia had an irregularly- shaped membrane and intercellular bridges were frequently observed. In some B cells, a short flagellum elabo- rated by the distal centriole, at the base of the nucleus, could be seen. When the nuclei of B cells underwent metaphase (Fig. 3A), these spermatogonia became smaller (4.6 x 4.1 jum). Numerous Sertoli-like cells were distributed among spermatogonia, nearest the wall of each acinus. Each of these elongated (10.5 x 3.0 ¡um) and regularly-shaped cells con- tained an ovoid nucleus with chromatin condensed along the nuclear envelope. Numerous cytoplasmic processes in contact with cióse spermatogonia could be observed. The cytoplasm of these Sertoli-like cells contained numerous electrón-dense inclusions, mitochondria, several lipid inclusions, and myelin-like figures (Fig. 2 A,B, and Fig. 3A). Spermatocytes : The primary sperma- tocytes (Fig. 3B, C) were arranged in groups of 2-4 cells each, with intercellu- lar bridges. When these cells were in prophase (pachytene stage), their nuclei were similar in shape to those of B sper- matogonia. However, their nuclear envelope was thicker, with a clearly wider perinuclear cisterna. The small size (6.7 x 3.8 pm) of their cytoplasm increased the nucleo-cytoplasmic ratio. These cells contained the same organelles as described for B spermato- gonia. A short flagellum was often observed (Fig. 3B, C). The secondary spermatocytes were scarcely visible, due to the rapidity of the second meiotic división. These cells were irregular in shape (5.7 x 4.3 ¿/m) and their rounded nuclei (a mean of 3.3- 3.4 p in diameter) contained chro- matin forming a dense network at metaphase stage. Mitochondria and proacrosomal vesicles were mainly present in their reduced cytoplasm (Fig. 3D). Spermatids: Their development within the gonad can be arbitrarily divided into four stages, from A the youngest, to D the oldest. A spermatids (Fig. 4A) were irregular in shape (7.4 x 6.6 |Um) and their round nuclei (4 pm) contained scattered heterochromatin. Grouped mitochondria and proacroso- mal vesicles cióse to the Golgi apparatus could be seen in their cytoplasm. B sper- matids (Fig. 4B) were smaller (4.1 x 3.2 ium) than A cells and their nuclei were more reduced (2.5 x 1.9 jum), eccentri- cally positioned, and contained a more condensed heterochromatin. A proacro- somal granule, resulting from the fusión of the corresponding vesicles, was present in their cytoplasm. In C sper- matids (Fig. 4C), the nuclei became rounded (2.2 x 1.9 ¡um) and the nuclear chromatin was continuously condens- ing, thus showing a patchwork pattern. The proacrosomal granule migrated from the basal part of the nucleus to the cell apex and progressively modified its shape. Its basal part, towards the nucleus, became flattened, whereas an invagination in the granule formed the subacrosomal zone, containing a mater- ial less electrón-dense than that observed in the granule. Spherical mito- chondria set up at the base of the nucleus and surrounded the centrioles. The nuclei of the oldest spermatids (Fig. 4D) became elongated, were completely condensed, and showed two invagina- tions, the first at the apex of the nucleus and the second at its base near the distal centriole. The proacrosomal granule progressively became funnel-like and turned into an acrosome containing a dense material. In several spermatids, a premembranoid sleeve was sometimes observed in the apical part of the acro- some. The flagellum showed gradual structural changes during the differenti- ation of spermatids. It is elaborated by the distal centriole and was surrounded by a ring of five mitochondria at the base of the nucleus. The distal and prox- imal centrioles were situated in perpen- dicular position (Fig. 4D). Spermatozoa: In the 5.3 pm long head, the nucleus (1.35 ji/m in size) was barrel- like and was completely condensed. The very long acrosome was funnel-like 4 BENOMAR ET AL.: Spermatogenesis of Perna perna Figure 1 . The male acini of Perna perna. A: semi-thin section showing vesicular cells in the interacinar connective tissue. These cells had two types of granules and lipid inclusions. B: semi- thin section of an acinus limited by a basal lamina. Sertoli-like cells and spermatogonia are located along its inner side. Abbreviations, ac: acinus; bl: basal lamina; h: hemocytes; ict: interacinar con- nective tissue; Li: lipid inclusions; se: Sertoli-like cells; Spc: spermatocytes; Spd: spermatids; Spg: spermatogonia; Spz: spermatozoa; ve: vesicular cells. Scale bars, 10 pm. Figura 1. Los ácinos macho de Perna perna. A: sección semifina mostrando células vesiculares en el tejido conectivo entre ácinos. Estas células tenían dos tipos de gránalos y inclusiones de lípidos. B: sección semifina de un ácino limitado por una lámina basal. Células tipo Sertoli y espermatogonias están situa- dos en su lado interno. Abreviaturas, ac: ácino; bl: lamina basal; h: hemocitos; ict: tejido conectivo inte- racinar; Li: inclusiones de lípidos; se: células tipo Sertoli; Spc: espermatocitos; Spd: espermatidias; Spg: espermatogonia; Spz: espermatozoos; ve: células vesiculares. Escalas, 10 jcm. 5 Iberas, 26 (2), 2008 Figure 2. Ultrathin sections of early (A Spg) and late (B Spg) spermatogonia in Perna perna , sepa- rated from each other by cytoplasmic processes of Sertoli-like cells. Intercellular bridges between spermatogonia are frequent. Abbreviations: bl: basal lamina; cp: cytoplasmic processes of Sertoli-like cells; cy: cytoplasm; da: dense aggregates; de: distal centrioles; fl: flagellum; m: mitochondria; mf: muscular fibers around the acinus; N: nucleus; nu: nucleolus; pb: intercellular bridges between sper- matogonia; pv: proacrosomal vesicle; se: Sertoli-like cells; Spg: spermatogonia. Scale bars, 5 pm. Figura 2. Secciones ultrafmas de espermatogonias tempranas (A Spg) y tardías (B Spg) en Perna perna, separadas unas de otras por extensiones citoplásmicas de células tipo Sertoli. Son frecuentes los puentes intercelulares entre espermatogonias. Abreviaturas: bl: lamina basal ; cp: extensiones citoplásmicas de células tipo Sertoli; cy: citoplasma; da: agregados densos; de: centriolos distales; fl: flagelo; m: mitocon- dria; mf: fibras musculares rodeando el ácino; N: núcleo; nu: nucléolo; pb: puentes intercelulares entre espermatogonias; pv: vesícula proacrosomal; se: células tipo Sertoli; Spg: espermatogonia. Escalas, 5 pm. (Right page) Figure 3. Ultrathin sections of spermatogonia and spermatocytes in Perna perna . A: B spermatogonia in metaphase. B, C: primary spermatocytes (Spcl) in prophase (pachytene stage), each showing a wide perinuclear cisterna. D: secondary spermatocytes (Spc2). Abbreviations, bl: basal lamina; cy: cytoplasm; fl: flagellum; m: mitochondria; N: nucleus; nu: nucleolus; pb: inter- cellular bridges between spermatogonia; pv: proacrosomal vesicle; se: Sertoli-like cells; Spg: sper- matogonia; wpc: wide perinuclear cisterna. Scale bar, 3 pm. (Página derecha) Figura 3. Secciones ultrafinas de espermatogonias y espermatocitos de Perna perna. A: espermatogonias B en metafase. B, C: espermatocitos primarios (Spcl) en profase (estadio paquiteno), cada uno mostrando una amplia cisterna perinuclear. D: espermatocitos secundarios (Spc2). Abreviatu- ras, bl: lámina basal ; cy: citoplasma; fl: flagelo; m: mitocondria; N: núcleo ; nu: nucléolo; pb: puentes intercelulares entre espermatogonias; pv: vesícula proacrosomal; se: células tipo Sertoli; Spg: espermatogo- nia; wpc: cisterna perinuclear ancha. Escalas, 5 pm. ó BENOMAR ET AL.: Spermatogenesis of Perna perna 7 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 shaped, could reach up to 3.4 pm in length, and contained an axial rod from the apex to its basal part. Three types of material could be observed. An electron- lucent zone in the subacrosomal invagi- nation and the center of the premembra- noid sleeve could be observed, whereas two types of electrón-dense materials were respectively present at the periph- ery of the apical part and in the base of the acrosome, the former material being denser than the latter. The axial rod passed outside the nucleus, from the apical to the posterior invaginations (Fig. 5A). At the base of the nucleus, five spherical mitochondria, of variable size (0.5-0. 7 jum), surrounded the diplosome and constituted the middle piece (Fig. 5B). The two centrioles were situated in a perpendicular position and showed the classic nine triplets of microtubules (Fig. 5B). Some fibers, originating from the distal centriole and situated in a radiating position around it, formed a basal píate with the plasma membrane. Transversal sections of the axonemal complex of the flagellum (0.3 pin in diameter) showed the typical presence of 9 doublets along the periphery and a single central doublet. In this last zone, the cytoplasm was strongly reduced, thus increasing the nucleo-cytoplasmic ratio. Abnormal spermatogenesis : Giant sper- matogonia, each containing 2 to 5 nuclei (Fig. 6A), and binucleated spermato- cytes were often found in December and March, respectively. In spermatids, lysis could affect the cytoplasm or the nucleus to finally yield to an extremely condensed nucleus or a thick nuclear envelope, respectively. At the end of spermatogenesis, the acrosome might lose its shape, curve, and even empty its material, thus giving an electron-lucent zone (Fig. 6B). Cióse to these abnormal cells, cytoplasmic inclusions with lipid inclusions and lysosomal membranes might be seen in the lumina of acini. DISCUSSION Most results on the spermatogenesis of P. perna are similar to those noted on the differentiation of male cells in other (Right page) Figure 4. Ultrathin sections of spermiogenesis in Perna perna. A: a young spermatid (A Spd), with fusión of mitochondria and a Golgi complex showing synthetic activity. B: a proacroso- mal granule and proacrosomal vesicles near the Golgi complex in an older spermatid (B Spd). C: a C spermatid (C Spd) with its nucleus showing a patchwork aspect. The proacrosomal granule is migrating to the anterior apex of the spermatid. D: an oldest spermatid (D Spd) showing the total condensation of the nucleus. The acrosome is at the cell apex. Abbreviations, A: acrosome; cc: cen- triolar complex; de: distal centriole attached to the flagellum; fl: flagellum; G: Golgi complex; gpa: proacrosomal granule; ln: nuclear lacuna composed of heterochromatin; m: mitochondria; N: nucleus; pb: intercellular bridges; pe: proximal centriole; pi (white arrow): posterior invagination of the nucleus; pv: proacrosomal vesicles; rf: radiating fibers; sai (white arrow head): subacrosomal invagination of the nucleus; vg: Golgian vesicle. Scale bars, A-C: 2 pm; D: 1 pm. (Página derecha) Figura 4. Secciones ultrafmas de espermiogénesis en Perna perna. A: una espermatidia joven (A Spd), con fusión de mitocondrias y un complejo de Golgi mostrando actividad sintética. B: un granulo proacrosomal y vesículas proacrosomales cerca del complejo de Golgi en una espermatidia más avanzada (B Spd). C: una espermatidia C (C Spd) cuyo núcleo muestra un aspecto en mosaico. El gránulo proacrosomal esta migrando hacia el ápice anterior de la espermatidia. D: una espermatidia de mayor edad (D Spd) mostrando la condensación total del núcleo. El acrosoma se sitúa en el ápice de la célula. Abreviaciones, A: acrosoma; cc: complejo del centriolo; de: centriolo distal sujeto al flagelo; fl: flagelo; G: complejo de Golgi; gpa: gránulo proacrosomal ; ln: laguna nuclear compuesta por heterocro- matina; m: mitocondria; N: núcleo; pb: puentes intercelulares; pe: centriolo proximal; pi (flecha blanca): invaginación posterior del núcleo; pv: vesículas proacrosomales; rf: fibras radiales; sai (cabeza de flecha blanca): invaginación subacrosomal del núcleo; vg: vesícula de Golgi. Escalas, A-C: 2 pm; D: 1 pm. 8 BENOMAR ET AL.: Spermatogenesis of Perna perna 9 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Figure 5. Mature spermatozoa (Spz) of Perna perna. A: longitudinal section, showing the barrel-like shaped nucleus and a greatly reduced cytoplasm (double white arrow). B: sagittal section of middle piece, showing five spherical mitochondria around the diplosome. C: transversal sections of flagella with nine peripheral doublets and a single central doublet of microtubules. Abbreviations, A: acro- some; apa: apical part of the acrosome; ar (white arrow): axial rod; bpa: basal part of the acrosome; cc: centriolar complex; m: mitochondria; ms: pre-membranoid sleeve; N: nucleus; pe: proximal centriole; pm: plasma membrane; tsa: transversal section of the acrosome. Scale bars, A, B: 2 pm; C: 0.5 pm. Figura 5. Espermatozoos maduros (Spz) de Perna perna. A: sección longitudinal, mostrando el núcleo en forma de barril y un citoplasma considerablemente reducido (doble flecha blanca). B: sección sagital de la parte mediana, mostrando cinco mitocondrias esféricas alrededor del diplosoma. C: secciones transversales de flagelos con nueve dobletes periféricos y un solo doblete cetral de microtúbulos. Abreviaturas, A: acrosOma; apa: parte apical del acrosoma; ar (flecha blanca): varilla axial; bpa: parte basal del acrosoma; cc: com- plejo del centriolo; m: mitocondria; ms: manga pre-membranóide; N: núcleo ; pe: centriolo proximal; pm: membrana plasmática; tsa: sección transversal del acrosome. Escalas, A, B: 2 pm; C: 0,5 pm. 10 BENOMAR ET AL. : Spermatogenesis of Perna perna Figure 6. Abnormal spermatogenesis in Perna perna. A: a giant multinucleated spermatogonium. (B): acrosomal distortion, with emptying (black arrow) of the material (*). Abbreviations, A: acro- some; N: nucleus. Scale bars. 3 pm. Figura 6. Espermatogénesis anómala en Perna perna. A: una espermatogonia gigante multinucleada. B: distorsión acrosomal con escurrimiento (flecha negra) del material (*). Abreviaciones, A: acrosoma, N: núcleos. Escalas, 3 }im. bivalvia (Longo and Dornfeld, 1967; Bernard and Hodgson, 1985; Hodgson and Bernard, 1986a; Reunov and Hodgson, 1994; Healy, 1996). All these reports demonstrated the existence of primitive spermatozoa (Franzen, 1955) in bivalvia. These primitive sper- matozoa, also called aquasperm (Rouse and Jamieson, 1987), are typical of invertebrate species which release their sperm in water. However, several points warrant special comments. Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 The barrel-like shape of the nucleus in the P. perna spermatozoon agreed with the report by Boucart et al. (1965) on Brazilian P. perna, that of Gar- rido and Gallardo (1996) on Pe- rumytilus purpuratus, or those of Hodg- son and Bernard (1986a, b) and Longo and Dornfeld (1967) on Mytilus edulis. However, this shape was not the same for spermatozoa of other mytilid species (Hodgson and Bernard, 1986a, b; Garrido and Gal- lardo, 1996) and this discordance could be easily explained by the observations by Popham (1979). According to this au- thor, in bivalvia, the shape of the sperm nuclei shows great variation in relation to species. The length of the nucleus (1.35 pm for the Moroccan P. perna ) was cióse to the figures given by Bourcart et al. (1965) or by Bernard and Hodg- son (1985) for two other populations of P. perna (1.40 and 1.50 jum, respectively). As the nuclei of spermatozoa in other species of Mytilidae was often longer (e.g., 1.76 ¡um for M. galloprovincialis: Hodgson and Bernard, 1986b), this parameter might be used to identify the spermatozoa of P perna from those orig- inating from other mytilid species. The presence of an axial rod, in the nucleus of the spermatozoon, has al- ready been reported for most Mytilidae (Bourcart et al., 1965; Longo and Dornfeld, 1967; Bernard and Hodg- son, 1985: Hodgson and Bernard 1986a, b; Garrido and Gallardo, 1996; Le Pennec and Beninger, 1997; Kafanov and Drozdov, 1998; Reúno v, Au and W o, 1999). The axial rod is of great importance, as it takes part in the formation of the acrosomal filament (Kafanov and Drozdov, 1998) and is projected ahead in the oocyte during the acrosomal reaction (Reunov et al., 1999). However, in our study, the rod did not have any transversal striation and longitudinal fibrils, as the cross-striation noted by Bourcart et al. (1965) in the spermatozoa of Brazilian P. perna, or that described by Reunov et al. (1999) in Perna viridis, and this difference might be due to intraspecific variations between the different populations of this mussel. Proacrosomal vesicles in early devel- opmental stages of spermatogenesis were already described in all Mytilidae studied (Thielley, Weppe and Herbaut, 1993; Reunov and Hodgson 1994; Gaulejac, Henry and Vicente, 1995) and this point cannot be used to discriminate the species of Mytilidae via the study of their spermatozoa. More in- teresting were the shape of the acrosome for P. perna, the existence of a premem- branoid sleeve, and the presence of three types of materials therein. The funnel-like shape of this acrosome was greatly similar to that of M. galloprovin- cialis (Bernard and Hodgson, 1986b) and was considered by Franzen (1956) an adaptation allowing the penetration of the spermatozoon through the ter- tiary envelope surrounding the ovum. The presence of a premembranoid sleeve in the acrosome of P. perna has al- ready been observed in the spermato- zoon of M. edulis (Longo and Dorn- feld, 1965). However, this sleeve was seen by Bernard and Hodgson (1985) only in spermatids of South African P. perna, whereas the corresponding sper- matozoa did not have such structure. Another discordance can also be noted for the three types of material (2 elec- trón-dense zones and a third more lu- cent) in the acrosome. If these three types were also observed in the acro- somes of Pinctada margaritifera (Thielley et al., 1993) and of Choromytilus chorus (Garrido and Gallardo, 1996), two types of material (an electrón-dense zone and a more lucent) were only de- scribed in the acrosomes of South African P perna (Bernard and Hodg- son, 1985) as well as in those of other mytilids (Popham, 1979; Hodgson and Bernard, 1986a, b; Gaulejac et al., 1995). Moreover, a reticular structure in the dense zone of the acrosome apex was described in the Brazilian P. perna, whereas it was not found in the Moroc- can mussels. To explain these three dif- ferences, the more likely hypothesis is to consider them intraspecific variations, probably linked to the presence of local subspecies of P. perna in Brazil, Morocco, and South Africa. 12 BENOMAR ET AL. : Spermatogenesis of Perno, perno The structure of the P. perna flagel- lum, with 9 peripheral doublets and a single central doublet, was similar to that noted for the tails of spermatozoa which fertilized ova in sea water. The presence of short flagella in some B spermatogonia and primary spermato- cytes was already reported by Reunov and Hodgson (1994) in other mytilids. The radiating fibers around the distal centriole were also described in the spermatozoa of several Mytilidae (Reunov and Hodgson, 1994) and of Haliotis tuberculata (Belhsen, 2000). According to Gracia Bozzo, Ribes, Sagrista, Poquet and Durfort (1993), such radiating fibers would allow control of the motility, direction, and speed of gametes. Abnormal cells noted in the sper- matogenesis of P. perno were also ob- served in other bivalvia by Dorange and Le Pennec (1989), Gaulejac et al. (1995), or Thielley et al. (1993). Indeed, the formation of giant cells, a nuclear or cytoplasmic lysis, and changes in the shape of the acrosome might be the re- sult of accidental deviations during BIBLIOGRAPHY Belhsen, O. K., 2000. Etude cytologique de la ga- métogénése, du systéme nerveux central et du cycle de reproduction de l'ormeau européen Ha- liotis tuberculata (L.). Tesis doctoral. Caen, France. 245 p. Berraho, A., 1998. Ressources halieutiques etpo- tentialités aquacoles au Maroc. Expo'98, Maroc, 1998. 82 p. Bernard, R.T. F. and Hodgson, A. N., 1985. The fine structure of the sperm and sper- matid differentiation in the brown mussel Perna perna. South African Journal ofZoology, 20: 5-9. Bourcart, C., Lavallard, R. and Lubet, P., 1965. Ultrastucture du spermatozoide de la moule ( Mytilus perna von Ihering). Comptes Rendus Hebdomadaires des Séances de l'Acadé- mie des Sciences, Série D, Sciences naturelles, 260: 5096-5099. Dorange, G. and Le Pennec, M., 1989. Ultra- structure of spermatogenesis in Peden max- imus (Mollusca: Bivalvia). Invertebrate Repro- duction and Development, 15: 108-117. spermatogenesis. However, as many ab- normal cells were seen in the lumina of acini, it can be assumed that these cells would be rapidly eliminated via their being carried to the male genital orifice. In conclusión, the spermatogenesis of P perna was similar to differentiations of male cells described in other bivalvia. However, several differences could be noted. The length of the nucleus, the pre- membranoid sleeve, and the presence of three types of material in the acrosome may be, in our opinión, efficient criteria i) to sepárate the Moroccan populations of P. perna from similar populations living in another countries, and ii) to identify the communities of this species from other Mytilidae and, in particular, from those of M. galloprovincialis which also lives along Moroccan coasts. ACNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors are grateful to Ms. A.M. Renou for the realization of ultrathin sections and Mr. D. Goux for photo- graphic Services. Franzen, A., 1955. Comparative morphologi- cal investigations into spermiogenesis among Mollusca. Zoologiska Bidrag, Uppsala, 30: 399- 456. Franzen, A., 1956. On spermiogenesis, mor- phology of the spermatozoon, and biology of the fertilization among invertebrates. Zoolo- giska Bidrag, Uppsala, 31: 356-482. Garrido, O. and Gallardo, C. S., 1996. Ul- trastructure of sperms in bivalve molluscs of the Mytilidae family. Invertebrate Reproduction and Development, 292: 95-102. Gaulejac, B. de, Henry, M. and Vicente, N., 1995. An ultrastructural study of gametoge- nesis of the marine bivalve Pinna nobilis (Lin- naeus 1758). II. Spermatogenesis. Journal of Molluscan Studies, 61: 393-403. Gracia Bozzo, M., Ribes, E., Sagrista, E., Po- quet, M. and Durfort, M., 1993. Fine struc- ture of the spermatozoa of Crassostrea gigas (Mollusca, Bivalvia). Molecular Reproduction and Development, 34: 206-211. 13 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Healy, J. M., 1996. Molluscan sperm ultra- structure: correlation with taxonomic units within the Gastropoda, Cephalopoda and Bivalvia. In Taylor, J. D. (Ed.): Origin and evo- lutionary radiation ofthe Mollusca. Oxford Uni- versity Press, pp. 99-113. Healy, J. M., Keys, J. L. and Daddow, L. Y. M., 2000. Comparative sperm ultrastructure in pteriomorphian bivalves with special refer- ence to phylogenetic and taxonomic impli- cations. In Harper, E. M., Taylor, J. D., Crame, J. A. (Eds): The evolutionary biology ofthe Bi- valvia. Geological Society, London, Special publications, 177: 169-190. Hicks, D. W., McMahon, R. F. and Ingrao, D. A., 2001. Two invasive mussels in the genus Terna in the Gulf of México. Virtual Pro- ceedingsfor the State ofthe Bay Symposium V, 31 January-2 February 2001. Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission, Austin, Texas, p 159-170. Hodgson, A. N. and Bernard, R. T. F., 1986a. Ultrastructure of the sperm and spermato- genesis of three species of Mytilidae (Mol- lusca, Bivalvia). Gamete Research, 15: 123-135. Hodgson, A. N. and Bernard, R. T. F., 1986b. Observations on the ultrastructure of the spermatozoon of two mytilids from the south-west coast of England. Journal ofthe Ma- rine Biological Association of the United King- dom, 66: 385-390. Id Halla, M., Bouhaimi, A., Zekhnini, A., Narbonne, J. F., Mathieu, M. and Mou- krim. A., 1997. Etude du cycle de reproduc- tion de deux espéces de moules Perna yerna (Linné, 1758) et Mytilus galloprovincialis La- marck, 1819 dans la baie d' Agadir (Sud du Maroc). Haliotis, 26: 51-62. Kaaya, A., Najimi, S., Ribera, D., Narbonne, J. F. AND Moukrim, A., 1999. Characteriza- tion of glutathione S-transferase (GST) Ac- tivities in Perna perna and Mytilus gallo- provincialis used as biomarker of pollution in the Agadir marine Bay (South of Morocco). Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, 62: 623-629. Kafanov, A. I. and Drozdov, A. L., 1998. Comparative sperm morphology and phy- logenetic classification of recent Mytiloidea (Bivalvia). Malacologia, 39: 129-139; Le Pennec, M. and Beninger, P. G., 1997. Ul- trastructural characteristics of spermatoge- nesis in three species of deep-sea hy- drothermal vent mytilids. Canadian Journal of Zoology, 75: 308-316. Longo, F. J. and Dornfeld, E. J., 1967. The fine structure of spermatid differentiation in the mussel Mytilus edulis. Journal of Ultrastructure Research, 20: 462-480. Moukrim, A., Kaaya, A., Najimi, S., Romeo, M. and Gnassia-Barelli, M., 2000. Assessment of the trace metáis level in two species of the Agadir marine Bay (South of Morocco). Bul- letin of Environmental Contamination and Tox- icology, 65: 478-485. Najimi, S., Bouhaimi, A., Daubeze, M., Zekhnini, A., Pellerin, ]., Narbonne, J. F and Moukrim, A., 1997. Use of acetyl- cholinesterase in Perna perna and Mytilus gal- loprovincialis as a biomarker of pollution in Agadir Marine Bay (South of Morocco). En- vironmental Contamination and Toxicology, 58: 901-908. Popham, J. D., 1979. Comparative spermato- zoon morphology and bivalve phylogeny. Malacological Review, 12: 1-20. Reunov, A. A. and Hodgson, A. N., 1994. Ul- trastructure of the spermatozoa of five species of South African bivalves (Mollusca), and an examination of early spermatogenesis. Journal of Morphology , 219: 275-283. Reunov, A. A, Au, D. W. T. and Wo, R. S. S., 1999. Spermatogenesis of the green-lipped mussel Perna viridis with dual patterns of acrosome and tail development in sper- matids. Helgoland Marine Research, 53: 62-69. Rouse, G. W. and Jamieson, B. G. M., 1987. An ultrastructural study of the spermatozoa of the polychaetes Eurythoe complanata (Am- phinomidae), Clymenella sp. and Micromaldane sp. (Maldanidae), with definition of sperm types in relation to reproductive biology. Journal of Submicroscopic Cytology, 19: 573- 584. Thielley, M., Weppe, M. and Herbaut, C, 1993. Ultrastructural study of gametogene- sis in the French Polynesian black pearl oys- ter Pinctada margaritifera (Mollusca, Bivalvia). I. Spermatogenesis. Journal of Shellfish Re- search, 12: 41-47. 14 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberas , 26 (2): 15-42, 2008 Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf (NE de la Península Ibérica) Second addition to the malacological fauna of the littoral of Garraf (NE of the Iberian Península) Anselmo PEÑAS*, Emilio ROLÁN** y Manuel BALLESTEROS*** Recibido el 13-III-2008. Aceptado el 30-VIII-2Q08 RESUMEN Se presenta una tercera lista de 68 especies de moluscos marinos (4 Caudofoveata, 1 Solenogastre, 32 Gastropoda, 15 Bivalvia y 16 Cephalopoda) que no habían sido cita- das anteriormente en aguas del litoral del Garraf (Barcelona, NE de la Península Ibérica). De estas, 8 son citadas por primera vez en el Mediterráneo español. Además se descri- ben tres especies nuevas para la ciencia, una del género Alvania, otra del género Bela y una tercera del género Chrysallida. Se incluyen comentarios sobre algunos de los taxones y se ¡lustran al microscopio electrónico de barrido (MEB) las conchas de varios de ellos. ABSTRACT A third list with 68 marine molluscs (4 Caudofoveata, 1 Solenogastre, 32 Gastropoda, 15 Bivalvia y 1 6 Cephalopoda) not previously recorded from the Garraf litoral (Barcelona, NE Iberian Peninsule) are presented. From these species, 8 are recorded by first time from the Spanish Mediterranean. Furthermore, three new species are described, one of the genus Alvania, other of the genus Bela and a third of the genus Chrysallida. Further more, some comments on some taxa are commented and the photographs (SEM) of the shells from some of them are ¡llustrated. PALABRAS CLAVE: Lista, Garraf, Cataluña, Alvania, Bela, Chrysallida, nuevas especies. KEYWORDS: List, Garraf, Catalonia, Alvania, Bela, Chrysallida, new species. INTRODUCCIÓN El presente trabajo es una continua- ción de dos anteriores que se iniciarion en Giribet y Peñas (1997). En aquella ocasión se constataba la gran riqueza malacológica de los fondos marinos de una comarca tan pequeña como el Garraf, citándose 622 especies de molus- cos marinos (7 poliplacóforos, 417 gaste- rópodos, 190 bivalvos y 8 escafópodos). De ellos, 53 se citaban por primera vez para el Mediterráneo español. En dicho trabajo se delimitaba la zona de estudio, se incluía un mapa, se describía la varie- dad y particularidades de los fondos, y se añadían comentarios y fotografías al MEB sobre varios taxones. Posteriormente Giribet y Peñas (1998) describen en aguas del Garraf una nueva * Carrer Olérdona, 39-5°, 08800 Vilanova i la Geltrú (Barcelona). ** Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur, 15782 Santiago de Compostela. *** Departament de Biología Animal, Facultat de Biología, Universitat de Barcelona, Avda. Diagonal, 645, 08028 Barcelona. 15 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 especie para la ciencia: Epilepton parruse- tensis-, Peñas y Rolán (2000) citan para la zona Turbonilla postacuticostata Sacco, 1892; y Peñas y Giribet (2003) presentan una segunda lista de 54 especies de moluscos marinos no citados previamente (47 gas- terópodos y 7 bivalvos), de los que 18 especies se citan por primera vez para el Mediterráneo español y también se cita por primera vez en el Mediterráneo el género Bathycrinicola, describiendo una nueva especie: Bathycrinicola nacraensis. La obtención y estudio de nuevo material recolectado entre mayo de 2003 y septiembre de 2006, así como con la publicación de los resultados de la megafauna de invertebrados no crustá- ceos de la campaña oceanográfica RETRO (Ramírez-Llodra, Balleste- ros, Company, Dantart y Sardá, 2008) en el cañón submarino de "La Meren- guera", situado frente a Vallcarca, nos ha permitido ampliar la lista de especies de moluscos marinos encontradas en aguas de esta comarca, con: 4 Caudofo- veata, 1 Solenogastres, 32 Gastropoda, 15 Bivalvia y 16 Cephalopoda. Las espe- cies del grupo Cocculiniformia, obteni- das en el cañón de "La Merenguera" fueron estudiadas anteriormente por Dantart y Luque (1994). En total se conocen hasta la fecha en aguas de la comarca del Garraf 746 especies de moluscos marinos. MATERIAL Y MÉTODOS El material objeto de este trabajo fue obtenido en parte mediante dos draga- dos de arrastre por la embarcación "Teresa" de la Cofradía de Pescadores de Vilanova i la Geltrú en Mayo de 2003. El 19.5.2003 se obtuvieron unos 15 litros de sedimentos entre los caladeros "Fons de Cunit" y "Cubelles" (Zona 3), frente a la desembocadura del río Foix, en el límite sur de la comarca del Garraf, a una pro- fundidad de 90 metros. El detrito fue lavado y pasado por una serie de tamices, siendo el más fino de 0,4 mm de luz de malla. Se estudiaron unos 5 litros del sedimento resultante. En la fracción fina predominaban las arenas. El segundo dragado se realizó el 22.5.2003 en el lugar denominado "El Turó" (Zona 2), frente a Vallcarca, pedanía de Sitges, a una profundidad de 76 metros. Se obtuvieron unos 10 litros de detrito, del cual, después de lavado y pasado por los mismos tamices, se estu- diaron unos 3 litros de sedimentos. Pre- dominaban restos de conchas, especial- mente microbivalvos. Posteriormente, se separaron los moluscos obtenidos por algunas embar- caciones pesqueras del puerto de Vila- nova i la Geltrú durante varios arrastres y se estudió el contenido estomacal de cientos de asteroideos de las especies Astropecten aurantiacus (Linnaeus, 1758) y A. irregularis (Pennant, 1777) obteni- dos en los mismos. Los arrastres se reali- zaron en dos periodos en una misma área (Zona 1), frente a la pedanía de Vallcarca: el primero, entre los meses de marzo y mayo de 2005, entre 45 y 60 metros de profundidad, y el segundo entre mayo y septiembre de 2006, entre 35 y 50 metros de profundidad. En ambos casos se trataba de fondos detrí- tico-fangosos costeros, con abundancia de moluscos, en el que cerca del 80% de los ejemplares se encontraron vivos o con restos de partes blandas. Los moluscos del cañón submarino de La Merenguera (Zona 4) fueron recolec- tados durante 1991 y 1992 en el transcurso de las campañas del proyecto RETRO, dedicado al estudio de las variaciones espacio temporales en la megafauna ben- tónica del talud continental. Los mués- treos, realizados con una red de arrastre tipo OTMS, se efectuaron en tres puntos concretos del talud, talud superior (450 m), talud medio (600 m) y talud inferior (1.200 m). Sardá, Cartes y Company (1994) describieron las características gene- rales de estas campañas, los puntos con- cretos de muestreo y la metodología uti- lizada, mientras que Ramírez-Llodra, Ballesteros, Company, Dantart y Sardá (2008) proporcionan los resultados de biomasa y abundancias de la megafauna de invertebrados no crustáceos en las dife- rentes profundidades y estaciones del año. Las especies de Caudofoveata fueron identificadas por Lluis Dantart y por L. ló PEÑAS ET AL.: Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Salvini Plawen. El listado de especies ha sido confeccionado de acuerdo con la sistemática y nomenclatura de la CLEMAM (Check list of European Marine Mollusca). Se han fotografiado al microscopio electrónico de barrido (MEB) las tres especies nuevas para la ciencia y también algunas de las especies nuevas para la zona de estudio, sobre las que se aporta información adicional. Las fotografías fueron realizadas por Jesús Méndez en el CACTI (Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnológico a la Investiga- ción), de la Universidad de Vigo. Abreviaturas utilizadas: BMNH: Natural History Museum, London MHNS: Museo de Historia Natural "Luis Iglesias", Santiago de Com- postela MNCN: Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid. MNHN: Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, París. CRBA: Centre de Recursos de Biodiver- sitat Animal, Barcelona MZUN: Museo di Zoología dell'Univer- sitá degli Studi di Napoli, Federico II, Nápoles USNM: National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington CAP: colección Anselmo Peñas, Vila- nova i la Geltrú CJA: colección José Almera, Vilassar de Mar CMM: colección Manuel Muñoz, Vila- nova y la Geltrú CPM: colección Pasquale Micali, Fano, Italia CRB: colección Ramón Beneito, Tarra- gona v: especie encontrada viva o con restos de partes blandas c: concha vacía sf: subfósil H: altura total de la concha en gasteró- podos, longitud, en bivalvos h: altura de la última vuelta D: diámetro en gasterópodos, altura en bivalvos =: aproximadamente igual RESULTADOS En el nuevo material estudiado se han identificado las siguientes especies según las zonas: - Zona 1, Vallcarca (35-60 m profun- didad): 88 especies (63 gasterópodos, 23 bivalvos y 2 escafópodos), de ellas 69 vivas (45 gasterópodos, 22 bivalvos y 2 escafópodos). Una nueva cita para el Mediterráneo español y dos nuevas especies para la ciencia. - Zona 2, "El Turó" (76 m profundi- dad): 188 especies (114 gasterópodos, 70 bivalvos y 4 escafópodos), de ellas 44 vivas (18 gasterópodos y 26 bivalvos). ). Una nueva cita para el Mediterráneo español y una nueva especie para la ciencia, compartida con la zona 1 . - Zona 3, "Mar de Cubelles" (90 m profundidad): 120 especies (78 gasteró- podos, 48 bivalvos y 4 escafópodos), de ellas 43 vivas (9 gasterópodos y 34 bival- vos). Tres nuevas citas para el Medite- rráneo español y una nueva especie para la ciencia. - Zona 4, cañón "La Merenguera" (450-1200 m profundidad): 69 especies (4 caudofoveados, 1 solenogastro, 19 gasterópodos, 26 bivalvos, 3 escafópo- dos y 16 cefalópodos). Tres nuevas citas para el Mediterráneo español. La mayoría de especies encontradas ya fueron citadas anteriormente por Giribet y Peñas (1997) y por Peñas y Giribet (2003). En el presente trabajo sólo se relacionan las especies no citadas pre- viamente. En total son 68 especies perte- necientes a los siguientes grupos: 4 Cau- dofoveata, 1 Solenogastres, 32 Gastropoda, 15 Bivalvia y 16 Cephalopoda, cuyo listado, su presencia según la zona y su abundancia relativa puede verse en la Tabla I. De estas especies, las siguientes no habían sido registradas con anteriori- dad en el Mediterráneo ibérico, Haliella stenostoma, Melanella compactilis, Pterotra- chea scutata, Chrysallida monterosatii, Ch. rinaldi, Cylichnina crebvisculpta, Ennucula corbuloides y Limatula cf. bisecta. Tres espe- cies se citan a nivel genérico y otras tres se describen como nuevas para la ciencia, Alvania garrafensis spec. nov., Bela clarae spec. nov. y Chrysallida dantarti spec. nov. 17 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Tabla I. Relación de especies encontradas y no citadas previamente. Las especies en negrita se comentan brevemente en el texto; se indica la zona o zonas en la que han sido halladas y su abun- dancia relativa. En la última columna se indican con su número las especies fotografiadas. Códigos: *: primera cita para el Mediterráneo español; **: especie nueva para la ciencia; +: 1-2 ejemplares; ++: 3-10 ejemplares; +++: 11-100 ejemplares; ++++: más de 100 ejemplares; sf: subfó- sil; v: encontrado vivo o con restos de partes blandas. Table I. Relation of species found and not previously recorded from the area. The species in bold are com- mented shortly in the text; the area and the relative abundance are mentioned. On the last column the number of the figures ofthe photographed species is referred. Code: *: first record fior the Spanish Mediterranean; **: new species fior Science; +: 1-2 specimens; + +: 3- 10 specimens; + + +: 11-100 specimens; + + + +: more than 100 specimens; sf: subfossil; v: alive collected or wih rest of sofi parts. Zonal zona 2 zona 3 zona 4 Figuras Clase CAUDOFOVEATA Familia CHAETODFRMATIDAE Falcidens aequabilis Salvini-Plawen, 1972 Falcidens gutturosus (Kowalewsky, 1901) Familia LIMIFOSSORIDAE Scutopus ventfolineatus Salvini-Plawen, 1968 Familia PROCHAETODERMATIDAE Prochaetoderma raduliferum (Kowalewsky, 1901) Clase SOLENOGASTRES Familia NEOMENIIDAE Neomenia carinata Tullberg, 1875 Familia COCCULINIDAE Coccopigya spinigera (Jeffreys, 1 883) Coccopigya viminensis (Rocchini, 1990) Familia PSEUDOCOCCULINIDAE Copulabyssia corrugata (Jeffreys, 1883) Familia TROCHIDAE Clelandella miliaris (Brocchi, 1814) Familia CERITHIOPSIDAE Ceritbiopsis hórrida Monterosato, 1874 Familia ACLIDIDAE Aclis ascaris (Turton, 1819) Familia EULIMIDAF * Haliella stenostoma (Jefffreys, 1858) * Melanello compactilis (Monterosato, 1 884) Familia RISSOIDAF ** Aívania garrafensis Peñas y Rolan spec. nov Familia LAMELLARIIDAE Lamellaria perspicua (Linnaeus, 1758) Familia NATICIDAF Natica prietoi Hidalgo, 1873 Jectonatica rizzae (Philippi, 1 844) Familia FIROLIDAE * Pterotrachea scutata Gegenbaur, 1855 Familia MURICIDAE Dermomurex scalaroides (de Blainville, 1829b) + v + v + v ++ v 1 + v +++ v +++ v ++++ v 3 + ++ ++ ++++ 4 ++ v 5-7 ++ 8-13 ++ v ++v ++V ++V + 18 PEÑAS ET AL.: Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Zona 1 zona 2 zona 3 zona 4 Figuras Familia CONIDAE ** Beto clame Peñas y Rolan spec. nov. +++V 14-17 Mangelia tenuicostatn Brugnone, 1868 Familia ARCHITECTONICIDAE +++V 33, 34 Heliaais subvariegalus (d'Orbigny, 1852) Familia PYRAMIDELLIDAE + Chrysallida ctothrata (Jeffreys, 1 848) * Chrysallida monterosatíi (Clessin, 1900) ++++V + sf 39-41 ** Chrysallida dantarti Peños y Rolán spec. nov. * Chrysallida rinaldii Micali y Nofroni, 2004 ++V ++ + 35-38 Familia RETUSIDAE Retasa minutissima (Monterosato, 1878) ++ 42 * Cylichnina crebrisculpta (Monterosato, 1884) +++V 43-45 Cylichnina nitiduto (Lovén, 1846) ++++V ++V +++V 46-48 Pyrunculus hoernesii (Weinkauff, 1 866) ++ ínona sp. Familia PHILINIDAE Philine intricota Moaterosato, 1 875 Familia GASTROPTERIDAE + ++ 49, 50 Gastropteron rubrum (Rafinesque, 1814) Familia CAVOLINIIDAE + v 70 Creseis virgula Rang, 1 828 Familia CYMBULIIDAE ++ + Cymbulia peronii Lamarck, 1819 Familia TYLODINIDAE Anidolyta duebeni (Lovén, 1 846) Familia PLATYDORIDIDAE + ++++V Baptodoris cinnabarina Bergh, 1 884 ++V 71 Clase BIVALVIA Familia NUCULIDAE * Ennucuto corbuloides (G. Seguenza, 1 877) Familia ARCIDAE ++ Anadara corbuloides (Monterosato, 1878) Familia MYTILIDAE ++V Crenelto arenaria Monterosato, 1 875 Amygdalum aglutinans (Cantraine, 1 835) ++V + + Familia LIMIDAE timea loscombii G. B. 1 Sowerby, 1 824) + * Umatutod. bisecta Alien, 2004 Familia THYASIRIDAE ++ 51,52 Thyasira succisa ( Jeffreys, 1876) Familia UNGULINIDAE ++ Diplodonta trígona (Scacchi, 1835) Familia M0NTACUTIDAE ++V Montacuta sp. Familia SP0RTELLIDAE ++ Sportelto sp. + v 53-59 19 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Zonal zona 2 zona 3 zona 4 Figuras Familia TELUNIDAE Tetona distorta Poli, 1791 + V Familia PSAMMOBIIDAE Gari depressa (Pennant, 1 777) ++V Familia SEMFLIDAE Abra alba (W. Wood, 1 802) +++ v 63-65 Abra prismática (Montagu, 1 808) ++ v +++ v + 66-69 Familia CUSPIDARIIDAE Cardiomya costellata (Deshayes, 1 835) ++v ++ Clase CEPHALOPODA Familia SEPIOLIDAE Neorossia caroli (Joubin, 1 902) ++ V Heteroteutbis dispar (Rüppell, 1 844) +++ V Rondeletiola minor (Naef, 1912) + V Sepietta oweniana (d'Orbigny, 1 839) + V Familia ENOPLOTEUTHIDAE Abralia veranyi (Rüppell, 1844) + v Familia ONYCHOTEUTHIDAE Ancistroteutbis licbtensteini (de Férussac y d'Orbigny, 1 839) ++ v 73 Familia HISTIOTEUTHIDAE Histioteutbis reversa (Verrill, 1 880) +++v 74 Familia BRACHIOTEUTHIDAE Bracbioteutbis riisei (Steenstrup, 1 882) + v Familia OMMASTREPHIDAE Todarodes sagittatus, (Lamarck, 1798) +++ V Ommastrephes bartramii (Lesueur, 1821) + v Familia CHIROTEUTHIDAE Cbiroteuthis veranyi (de Férussac, 1835) ++V Familia OPISTHOTEUTHIDAE Opistboteutbis calypso Verrill, 1 883 ++V Opistboteuthis sp. + 75 Familia OCTOPIDAE Octopussalutii\lé rany, 1836 ++V Pteroctopus tetracirrhus (Delle Chiaje, 1 830) + V E ledone cirrhosa (Lamarck, 1 798) + v Batbypolypus sponsalis (Fischer y Fischer, 1 892) +++v 76 DISCUSIÓN También se revisan algunas citas o comentarios hechos en anteriores traba- De la mayoría de especies citadas en jos sobre alguna especie del Garraf. este trabajo existen fotografías y des- Además incluimos la descripción de tres cripciones actualizadas. Por tanto, nos nuevas especies para la ciencia, una per- hemos limitado a comentar o fotografiar teneciente a la familia Rissoidae, una aquellos taxones que nos han parecido perteneciente a la familia Conidae y otra de mayor interés, ya sea por su rareza o perteneciente a la familia Pyramidelli- porque se aporta nueva información. dae. 20 PEÑAS ETAL.\ Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Melanella compactilis (Sykes, 1903) (Figs. 5-7) Eulima compactilis Sykes, 1903. Journ. Molí. Stud., 5: 350 ex Monterosato, 1875: 35, nomen nudum. Material examinado: 2 v, 2 c, Vallcarca, 45/60 m (CAP). Especie redescrita por Fretter y Graham (1982), quienes la citan para el oeste de las Islas Británicas, hasta una profundidad de 120 m. Esta rara especie ha sido encontrada viva también en fon- dos fangosos detrítico-costeros de Vilas- sar de Mar (ver Peñas, Rolán y Alme- ra, en prensa) y del Adriático (M. Tisse- lli, com. pers.)", sin embargo, Giannuzzi- Savelli, Pusateri, Palmeri y ebreo (1999) no la citan. Aquí se cita por prime- ra vez para el Mediterráneo español. Alvania garrafensis Peñas y Rolán, spec. nov. (Figs. 8-13) Material tipo: Holotipo, con unas dimensiones de 2.8 x 1.65 mm y tres vueltas de teleoconcha (Figs. 8-10) y 4 paratipos, depositados en el MNCN (15.05/47516). Localidad tipo: "Mar de Cubelles", comarca del Garraf (Barcelona), a 90 m de profundidad. Etimología: El nombre específico se refiere a la comarca del Garraf donde se ha encontrado esta especie. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 8-10) pequeña, sólida, cónica, tendente a cirto- conoidea, ancha. Color castaño claro, uniforme. Protoconcha (Fig. 11) paucis- piral, de una vuelta y media (medida por el método de Verduin), con un diámetro de 410 jum; la escultura (Fig. 12) está formada por unas 12 líneas de fragmen- tos de cordoncillos, relativamente gruesos, irregulares, interrumpidos. Teleoconcha de espira poco elevada (h= 70% H), con 3 vueltas, la última redon- deada en la periferia. Sutura profunda, no canaliculada. Escultura axial formada por unas 16 costillas, de perfil redonde- ado, poco robustas, ortoclinas, aproxi- madamente igual de anchas que sus interespacios, que desaparecen atenua- das en la periferia de la última vuelta. Escultura espiral débil, formada por cor- doncillos poco marcados, cuatro entre suturas de la última vuelta, que montan ligeramente sobre las costillas, más cons- picuo el situado sobre la sutura, y otros tres cordones en la base. Hay una micro- escultura espiral de líneas muy finas y apenas apreciables excepto a grandes aumentos (Fig. 13), además de las líneas de crecimiento. Abertura oval, ancha, peristoma continuo. Labro engrosado, en cuyo interior solo se aprecian los 2-3 dientes inferiores. Distribución : Solo conocida en el área de estudio. Discusión : Alvania lanciae (Calcara, 1845), especie infralitoral, tiene una pro- toconcha con un diámetro menor (360 jum) y 0.2 vueltas menos; la concha tiene un perfil más cónico regular, las vueltas son menos convexas, la sutura es canali- culada, la escultura es muy marcada, robusta, con menos costillas y más cor- dones espirales, y tiene microescultura reticular entre las costillas bien marcada Alvania lineata Risso, 1926, especie infralitoral, asociada a praderas de Posi- donia oceánica y algas fotófilas, tiene una protoconcha con un diámetro menor (350 jUm), la concha es mucho mayor, proporcionalmente más estrecha, las vueltas son casi planas, la última ovalada en la periferia, la sutura es canaliculada, la escultura es muy marcada formando gránulos en el cruce de costillas y cordones espirales, y la abertura es pequeña. Alvania electa (Monterosato, 1874) tiene una concha más pequeña y ven- truda, las costillas son más prominentes, con un perfil casi anguloso, tiene más cordoncillos espirales entre suturas y en la base, que son conspicuos y la proto- concha tiene 0,25 vueltas menos, un diá- metro menor y una microescultura dife- 21 Iberusy 26 (2), 2008 Figura 1 . Prochaetoderma raduliferum. Figura 2. Neomenia carinata. Figura 3. Copulabyssia corru- gata. Figura 4. Haliella stenostoma. Figure 1. Prochaetoderma raduliferum. Figure 2. Neomenia carinata. Figura 3. Copulabyssia corru- gata. Figure 4. Haliella stenostoma. rente, formada por estrías espirales del- gadas y espaciadas. Alvania subsoluta (Aradas, 1847) tiene un color blanco, con las vueltas muy convexas, la última redondeada, tiene más costillas, al menos 30, más estrechas, tiene más cordoncillos espira- les, la abertura es sublunar y la proto- concha tiene un diámetro mayor y su microescultura es diferente formada por 8-10 cordoncillos espirales muy del- gados. Bela menkhorsti van Aartsen, 1988 (Figs. 18-21, 23, 24-26) Pleurotoma nana Scacchi, 1836 (non Deshayes, 1835). Cat. Regni Napolitana : pag. 13, n° 20, fig. 20 [Localidad tipo: Nápoles, Italia]. Bela nana Spada, Sabelli y Morandi, 1973. Conchiglie, 9 (3-4): 65, lám. 4, fig. 3. Bela (íshnula) túrgida Nordsieck, 1977. The Turridae ofthe European Seas, 45, fig. A.91. Bela túrgida Ghisotti, 1978. Conchiglie, 14 (9-10): 163, fig. 7. Bela menkhorsti Mifsud, 1998. La Conchiglia, 30 (287): 41, fig. 20. 22 PEÑAS ETAL.\ Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figuras 5-7. Melanella compactilis. 5, 6: conchas, 4,5 y 3,3 mm; 7: protoconcha. Figuras 8-13. Alvania garrafensis spec. nov. 8-10: holotipo, 2,8 mm (MNCN); 11: protoconcha; 12: microescul- tura de la protoconcha; 13: detalle de la teleoconcha. Figures 5-7. Melanella compactilis. 5, 6: shells, 4.5 and 5.3 mm; 7: protoconch. Figures 8-13. Alvania garrafensis spec. nov. 8-10: holotype, 2.8 mm (MNCN); 1 1: protoconch; 12: microsculpture ofthe pro- toconch; 13: detail ofthe teleoconch. 23 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Figuras 14-17. Bela clarae. 14, 15: holotipo, 7,6 mm (MNCN); 16, 17: paratipos, 6,2 y 7,0 mm (MHNS). Figuras 18-21. Bela menkhorsti. 18, 19: lectotipo, aquí designado, de Pleurotoma nana, 11 mm (MNHN); 20, 21: conchas, 5,4 y 7,6 mm (CAP). Figura 22. Protoconcha de Bela clarae (MHNS). Figura 23. Protoconcha de Bela menkhorsti (CAP). Figures 14-17. Bela clarae. 14, 15: holotype, 7,6 mm (MNCN); 16, 17: paratypes, 6.2 and 7.0 mm (MHNS). Figures 18-21. Bela menkhorsti. 18, 19: lectotype, here designated, o/Tleurotoma nana, 11 mm (MNHN); 20, 21: shells, 5.4 and 7.6 mm (CAP). Figure 22. Protoconch c la menkhorsti ( CAP). 24 PEÑAS ET AL.: Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figuras 24-26. Bela menhorski. 24: protoconcha; 25: microescultura; 26: la misma con mayor aumento. Figuras 27-29. Bela clarae. 27: protoconcha; 28: microescultura; 29: la misma con mayor aumento. Figures 24-26. Bela menhorski. 24: protoconch; 25: microesculpture; 26: same at higher magnifica- tion. Figures 27-29. Bela clarae. 27: protoconch; 28: microesculpture; 29: same at higher magnifica- tion. 25 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Figuras 30-32. Dientes radulares de Bela. 30: Bela clarae, de un ejemplar de 9,2 mm; 31: Bela menkhorsti , de un ejemplar de 7 mm; 32: Bela laevigata, de un ejemplar de 9,6 mm. Figures 30-32. Radular teeth of Bela. 30: Bela clarae, from a specimen 9.2 mm; 31: Bela menkhorsti, from a specimen 7 mm; 32: Bela laevigata, from a specimen 9. 6 mm. Bela menkhorsti van Aartsen, 1988. La Conchiglia, 20 (232-233): 30. Nomen novum pro Pleurotoma nana Scacchi, 1836 non Deshayes, 1835. Material tipo: 3 sintipos de Pleurotoma nana, MNHN n° Molí 3149, procedentes de Pausilipo, Nápoles, Italia. El ejemplar ilustrado (Figs. 18, 19) mide 11 x 4,7 mm. Material examinado: 30 v, 5 c, Vallcarca, Sitges, 35/60 m (CAP); 34 c, Vallcarca, Sitges, 35/60 m (CMM); 5 c, 2 j, "Mar de Nacra", Sitges, 90 m (CAP). 50 v, 54 c, Vilassar de Mar, -45 m (CAP); 20 v, 57 c, Vilassar de Mar, 45 m (CJA); 1 c, Vilassar de Mar, -45 m (CPM); 2 c, Almería, -30 m (CAP); 2 c. Porto Cesáreo, Italia, 35 m (CAP). Comentarios: Scacchi (1836) la des- cribe así: "Testa parva ovato-ventrosa, rufo- fusca, linea pallidiore per médium ultimi anfractus decurrente; striis transversis exi- lissimis; costique in longum digestís; labro acuto". Queda claro, pues, que la concha de la especie de Scacchi es de color castaño oscuro con una estrecha banda de color claro en el centro de la última vuelta. Mifsud (1998) describe el animal diciendo "el color del animal es transpa- rente blanquecino con manchas esparci- das y opacas, blanco lácteo. Hay una gran cantidad de puntos rosa-anaran- jado por todas partes". Según Aartsen (1988a) Pleurotoma fortis Reeve, 1844 y P. túrgida Reeve, 1844 deben considerarse nomina dubia ya que son inidentificables, desconocién- dose las localidades tipo de ambas. Por el contrario, Aartsen (1988b) considera válida la especie Pleurotoma nana Scacchi, 1836 y al estar preocupado el nombre por P. nana Deshayes, 1835, (lo que ya había sido mencionado por Ghi- sotti, 1978), le da el nuevo nombre de B. menkhorsti. Ambos autores, así como Cretella, Crovato, Crovato, Fasulo y Toscano (2005) creen que el material tipo ha desaparecido del MZUN. Sin embargo existen 3 sintipos de P. nana en el MNHN (n° Mol 3149), uno de los cuales se ilustra aquí. (Figs. 18, 19) Se acepta la validez de B. menkhorsti como nomen novum para B. nana, si bien creemos que la ilustración de Aartsen (1988b: fig. 1) no se corresponde con la verdadera B. nana sino con la especie que será descrita más abajo como B. clarae. El 26 PEÑAS ET AL.: Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figuras 33, 34. Mangelia tenuicostata. 33: concha, 6,6 mm (CAP); 34: microescultura. Figuras 35- 38. Chrysallida dantarti spec. nov. 35: holotipo, 1,7 mm (MNCN); 36, 37: paratipos, 1,3 y 1,46 mm (MNCN); 38: protoconcha. Figuras 39-41. Chrysallida monterosatii. 39, 40: conchas, 2,2 y 2,3 mm (CAP); 41: protoconcha. Figures 33, 34. Mangelia tenuicostata. 33: shell, 6. 6 mm ( CAP; 34: microsculpture. Figures 35-38. Chrysallida dantarti spec. nov. 35: holotype, 1.7 mm (MNCN); 36, 37: paratypes, 1.3 and 1.46 mm (MNCN); 38: protoconch. Figures 39-41. Chrysallida monterosatii. 39, 40: shells, 2.2 and 2.3 mm (CAP); 41: protoconch. 27 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 problema proviene de que erróneamente se han identificado como una misma especie dos taxones parecidos, que com- parten un mismo hábitat. B. menkhorsti y B. clarae, son especies diferentes aunque, en conchas rodadas, las diferencias apenas se aprecian, con la excepción de una banda estrecha de color claro en el centro de la última vuelta, que es típica de B. mekhorsti. Más adelante se detallan las diferencias entre ambas especies. Se aporta fotografía al SEM de la protocon- cha (Fig. 24), microescultura (Fig. 25) y esta misma con gran aumento (Fig. 26). Bela clarae Peñas y Rolán spec. nov. (Figs. 14-17, 22, 27-29) Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 14, 15) con unas dimensiones de 7,6 x 3,4 mm y 5 vueltas de teleo- concha, y 3 paratipos, depositados en el MNCN (15.05/47517). Otros paratipos en las siguientes colecciones: MNHN (1 s), MHNS (2 s, Figs. 16, 17), BMNH (1 s), USNM (1 s), AMNH (1 s), CRBA (2 s), CAP (10 v, 25 c) y CMM (3 c, 5 j): todos procedentes de la localidad tipo. Otros paratipos: 6 c, "El Turó", Vallcarca, Barcelona, 76 m (CAP); 3 c, "Mar de Nacra", Sitges, 105 m (CAP); 15 v, 12 c, Vilassar de Mar, Barcelona, 45 m (CAP); 30 v, 55 c, Vilassar de Mar, Barcelona, 45 m (CJA); 1 c, Vilas- sar de Mar, Barcelona, 45 m (CPM); 2 c, San Carlos de la Rápita, Tarragona, dragado 30 m (CJA). Otro material examinado: Dos ejemplares de la localiad tipo fueron destruidos para el estudio radular; 2 c. Málaga, 60 m (CRB). 3 c, Nerja, Málaga, 40 m (CAP); 1 c. Islas Gorgona, Arch. Toscano, Italia, 130 m (CPM); 2 c, Pesaro, Italia, 60 m (CPM); 3 c, Malta, 60/80 m (CPM). Localidad tipo: Vallcarca, Sitges, Barcelona, 45/60 m de profundidad, en fondo detrítico fangoso. Etimología: El nombre específico se dedica a Clara Peñas Magro, nieta del primero de los autores. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 14-17) pe- queña, sólida, fusiforme, casi romboide. Monocroma, color crema uniforme, ten- dente al castaño claro, no brillante; en al- gunos ejemplares las costillas son ligera- mente más claras; sin banda alguna de color. Protoconcha (Figs. 22, 27) brillante, con un núcleo liso de 84 jum, y unas dos vueltas y cuarto, de color ligeramente más claro que la teleoconcha, y con un diámetro de 476 jum. La protoconcha es lisa al principio y en la última vuelta, hay costillas axiales que apenas se insi- núan bajo la sutura y, en la última media vuelta, son unas 22 cada vez menos mar- cadas, con algunos cordones espirales poco evidentes. Teleoconcha de unas 4 a 5 vueltas, angulosas, con 7-8 costillas axiales por vuelta, más prominentes en su parte media, que se desvanecen hacia la base. Abertura casi romboidal que se continúa hacia la base con un corto y an- cho canal sifonal. Columela formando ángulo en su centro; labio externo fino, y cortante, con una escotadura sifonal pro- nunciada en su parte superior. La micro- escultura (Figs. 28) está formada por no- dulos pequeños, irregulares, elevados y unidos espiralmente por un microcor- dón. Con grandes aumentos (Fig. 29) es- tos nodulos muestran una microescul- tura muy irregular como el trenzado de un tejido de lana. Dimensiones: el holotipo mide 7,6 x 3,4 mm; algunos ejemplares alcanzan los 10 x 4 mm. El animal no pudo ser observado vivo, pero en material conservado en alcohol parecía tener una coloración crema-amarillenta. Carece de opérculo. Rádula muy pequeña, con unos 7-8 pares de dientes (Fig. 31) marginales, alar- gados, con forma de cuchillo, con una parte basal alargada y más estrecha y otra apical, afilada y algo más ancha. Entre ambas existe una prominencia algo curvada hacia arriba. La longitud del diente radular es de unas 90 jum. Por su forma, tiene una cierta semejanza con los dientes radulares de algunas especies del género Mangelia Risso, 1826 (Powell, 1966, fig. 129) así como de otras de este género en Angola representadas en Rolán y Otero-Schmitt (1999, figs. 83-85). La ilustración de Oliver Baldoví (2007) al MEB, como B. menkhorsti , per- tenece a esta especie. Distribución: Mediterráneo español, circalitoral, especialmente en fondos fangoso-detríticos. Creemos que esta 28 PEÑAS ET AL.: Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figura 42. Retusa minutissima , concha, 1,4 mm (CAP). Figuras 43-45. Cylichnina crebrisculpta. 43: concha, 6,3 mm (CAP); 44, 45: escultura y microescultura. Figuras 46-48. Cylichnina nitidula. 46: concha, 1,7 mm (CAP); 47: detalle de la escultura; 48: visión apical. Figure 42. Retusa minutissima, shell, 1.4 mm (CAP). Figures 43-45. Cylichnina crebrisculpta. 43: shell, 6.3 mm ( CAP); 44, 45: sculpture and microsculpture. Figures 46-48. Cylichnina nitidula. 46: shell, 1. 7 mm ( CAP); 47: detail of the sculpture; 48: apical view. 29 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 especie vive, aunque no es común, en todo el Mediterráneo. Discusión : La especie más cercana es B. menkhorsti, con la que existen claras diferencias: - Color: B. menkhorsti tiene un color castaño, oscuro en conchas frescas, con un banda estrecha de color claro, visible en el centro de la última vuelta. B. clarae es monocroma, de color crema. - Forma: B. menkorsti es más esbelta, con una relación H/D= 2.5 de media, aunque el sintipo ilustrado tiene una relación de 2.75. B. clarae es más ancha, de perfil romboide, angulosa en la peri- feria de la última vuelta, con una rela- ción H/D= 2.3 de media; el holotipo tiene una relación de 2.2. - Protoconcha: la de B. menkhorsti es más ancha, pudiendo alcanzar un diá- metro de hasta 650 jum. El núcleo parece algo menor, pero no se midieron sufi- cientes ejemplares como para darle un valor estadístico. - Microescultura: la de B. menkhorsti (Fig. 25) tiene una alternancia de cordo- nes nodulosos con otros con nodulos alargados en sentido axial que parecen dos fusionados. Con grandes aumentos (Fig. 26), la microescultura que se aprecia sobre los nodulos está formada por tubérculos muy finos y apretados, diferente de la que aparece en B. clarae. - Rádula: El diente radular (Fig. 30) de B. clarae es algo parecido al de Bela menhorsti (Fig. 31), siendo en cambio bas- tante diferente del de Bela laevigata (Fig. 32). Todo ello parece mostrar una rela- ción de proximidad del género Bela con el género Mangelia, al tiempo que una gran variabilidad en la morfología del diente radular dentro de ambos géneros. También tiene bastante semejanza en su tamaño y forma con Brachycythara atlantidea (Knudsen, 1952). Esta especie aparece representada en Rolán & Otero-Schmitt (1999) incluyendo el ho- lotipo, y presenta algunas diferencias con la especie aquí descrita: su color es blanco sucio, su protoconcha tiene un diámetro mayor (más de 700 ium) y unas 3 vueltas de espira o algo menos; la pri- mera vuelta de la protoconcha es lisa y la segunda tiene muchas costillitas axia- les juntas, pero en la última media vuelta, estas se separan y se hacen más prominentes, siendo apenas unas 12, mientras los cordones espirales son mar- cados. B. decussata (Locard, 1892) tiene una concha mayor, mucho más esbelta, con una relación H/D= 3, las vueltas son convexas, no angulosas en su zona central, las costillas son oblicuas en la zona adapical, el color es grisáceo, sin banda de color claro. Mangelia tenuicostata (Brugnone, 1868) (Figs. 33, 34) Pleurotoma attenuata var. tenuicostata, Brugnone, 1868. Mem. Pleurot. Palermo: 25, fig. 17. Nuevo material examinado: 20 v, 55 c, Vallcarca, 35/60 m (CAP); 35 c, "El Turó", 76 m (CAP); 3 c, "Cubelles", 90 m (CAP). Tanto Sabelli, Giannuzzi-Savelli y Bedulli (1992), como Giribet y Peñas (1997) dudaban de la validez de esta espe- cie, y la consideraban sinónimo de M. atte- nuata (Montagu, 1803), forma propia de aguas profundas. Solustri y Micali (2002) redescriben M. tenuicostata , considerándola válida y diferente de M. attenuata, tesis que actualmente compartimos. La superficie de su concha está formada por microscó- picos tubérculos, más atenuados en los interespacios que sobre las costillas. Chrysallida dantarti Peñas y Rolán spec. nov. (Figs. 35-38) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 35), con unas dimensiones de 1.5 x 0.6 mm y 3 paratipos (Figs. 27, 28), depositados en el MNCN (15.05/47518) 30 PEÑAS ET AL.: Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figuras 49, 50. Laona sp. 49: concha, 1,6 mm (CAP); 50: visión apical. Figuras 51, 52. Limatula cf. bisecta. 51: valva, 14,6 mm (CAP); 52: detalle del umbo. Figures 49, 50. Laona sp. 49: shell, 1.6 mm (CAP); 50: apical view. Figures 51, 52. Limatula cf. bisecta. 51: valve, 14.6 mm (CAP); 52: detail ofthe umbo. Otro material examinado: 4 conchas, procedentes de “El Turó", Sitges, 76 m de profundidad. Localidad tipo: Vallcarca, Sitges (Barcelona), en fondo fangoso detrítico, a 45/60 m de profundi- dad. Etimología: El nombre específico se dedica a Lluis Dantart, malacólogo de Barcelona, reciente- mente fallecido. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 35-37) diminuta, sólida, subcilíndrica. Color blanquecino, brillante, opaca. Protocon- cha (Fig. 38) obtusa, del tipo C, propor- cionalmente ancha, con un diámetro de unas 290 pm. Teleoconcha de espira poco elevada (h= 50% H), con 4 vueltas plano- convexas, la convexidad situada en el tercio inferior de las vueltas, última vuelta casi redondeada en la periferia. Sutura poco profunda. Escultura axial formada por unas 24 costillas bien marca- das pero no robustas, de perfil redonde- ado, ligeramente opistoclinas, flexuosas, más anchas que sus interespacios, que desaparecen atenuadas en la periferia de 31 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 la última vuelta, mientras que los interes- pacios se interrumpen bruscamente. Base lisa, salvo las líneas de crecimiento. Escultura espiral tenue, solo en los inte- respacios, formada por 1-2 cordoncillos espirales en las vueltas anteriores, situa- dos sobre la sutura, y 3 cordoncillos en la última vuelta, el inferior situado en la periferia. Abertura piriforme, columela arqueada, con un diente columelar en posición algo interna en la abertura, pero evidente. Labro no engrosado. Distribución : Solo conocida en el área de estudio, entre 45 y 76 m de profundi- dad. Discusión : Chrysallida suturalis (Phi- lippi, 1844) tiene una concha más bien cirtoconoidea, mayor, más estrecha (H/D= 2.9 frente a 2.6 de media en C. dantarti), con la espira más elevada, la última vuelta es ovalada en la periferia, la sutura es profunda, las costillas se prolongan en la base, en la última vuelta solo tiene 2 cordones espirales y la pro- toconcha tiene un diámetro menor. C. rinaldii Micali y Nofroni, 2004 tiene una protoconcha más prominente. del tipo B, la concha es cirtoconoidea, con la espira más corta, tiene más costi- llas, en la última vuelta solo tiene 2 cor- doncillos espirales y el diente columelar apenas es apreciable. C. indistincta (Montagu, 1808) tiene una concha mayor, tiene menos costillas, robustas, prolongadas en la base, tiene al menos un cordón espiral más, situado por debajo de la periferia de la última vuelta, y carece de diente columelar. Peñas, Templado y Martínez (1996, fig. 47) ilustran una concha procedente de Isla Palomas, Murcia, considerándola una forma del variable taxon C. Ínter s- tincta (J. Adams, 1797). Esa forma ha sido encontrada también en varias loca- lidades del mar de Alborán y probable- mente se trate de una especie diferente de C. interstincta, pendiente de discu- sión. Esa forma, de aguas someras, tiene una concha mayor, cónica, más ancha (H/D= 2 frente a 2.6 en C. dantarti), las vueltas son casi planas, la escultura espiral es más conspicua, y tiene una protoconcha más aguda, con un diáme- tro menor. Chrysallida monterosatii (Clessin, 1900) (Figs. 39-41) Pyrgulina brevicula Monterosato, 1884. Nomen. gen. e spec .: 88. Not Odostomia brevicula Jeffreys, 1883. Parthenia monterosatii Clessin, 1900. Die familia der Eulimidae, vol 1, n° 28, part 457: 188. Parthenia alleryi Kobelt, 1903. lconog. Schal. Europ Meeresconch .: 134, lám. 73, figs. 9, 10. Material examinado: Más de 200 conchas, Vallcarca, 45/60 m, la mayoría con restos de partes blandas (CAP). Especie redescrita por Micali, Nofroni y Aartsen (1993), quienes la citan para el Mar Tirreno entre 50 y 200 m. Se ha encontrado abundante en el estómago de Astropecten irregularis, frente a Vallcarca, entre 35 y 60 m de profundidad, siendo ésta la primera cita para el Mediterráneo español. Esta especie se caracteriza por su forma tronco-cónica regular, las vueltas planas, la sutura somera, las primeras 1- 2 vueltas de la teleoconcha lisas o con las costillas obsoletas, las costillas son casi rectas, opistoclinas, el cordoncillo espiral es muy delgado y el diente colu- melar es conspicuo. Chrysallida rinaldii Micali y Nofroni, 2004 Chrysallida rinaldii Micali y Nofroni, 2004. Bollettino Malacologico, 39 (9-12): 177-180. [Localidad tipo: Isla Marettimo, Islas Eagadi, Sicilia, Italia, 80-100 m]. Material examinado: 2 c, “El Turó", 76 m (CAP). 32 PEÑAS ET AL. \ Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figuras 53-59. Sportella sp. 53-55: Valvas de un ejemplar de 10,2 mm (CAP); 56: prodisoconcha; 57, 58: detalle de la articulación; 59: detalle de la escultura. Figures 53-59. Sportella sp. 53-55: Valves ofa specimen 10.2 mm (CAP); 56: prodissoconch; 57, 58: detail ofthe hinge; 59: detail ofthe sculpture. 33 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Figures 60-62. Montacuta sp., valvas de un ejemplar, 1,27 mm (CAP). Figuras 60-62. Montacuta sp., valves ofa specimen, 1.27 mm (CAP). Las dos conchas encontradas son la primera cita para el Mediterráneo español. Esta diminuta especie, cercana a C. penchynati (B. D. D., 1883), tiene una protoconcha relativamente grande, del tipo B, la concha es cirtoconoidea, la sutura es profunda, tiene unas 25 costi- llas y el diente columelar está atrasado, apenas visible. Ver ilustración en Micali y Nofroni (2004). Retusa minutissima (Monterosato, 1878) (Fig. 42) Utriculus minutissimus Monterosato, 1878 ex H. Martin ms. Journ. De Conchyl., 26 : 159. Material examinado: 7 c, "El Turó", 76 m (CAP); 60 c, puerto de Los Alfaques, San Carlos de la Rápita, Tarragona (CAP). Oliverio y Tringali (2001) ilustran varios sintipos, consideran que esta especie ha sido erróneamente ubicada en el género Pyrunculus , cuando en realidad es una Retusa y también fundamentan las dife- rencias con Retusa obtusa (Montagu, 1803). Los mismos autores citan e ilustran un ejemplar procedente de Valencia. Previa- mente Martínez Rueda y Peñas (1993) habían citado esta especie para La Herra- dura, Granada, primera cita que se hacía para el Mediterráneo español. 34 PEÑAS ET AL.: Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figuras 63-65. Abra alba. 63: concha, 6 mm (CAP); 64, 65: articulaciones. Figuras 66-69. Abra prismática. 66, 67: valvas de 4,5 y 5,2 mm (CAP); 68, 69: detalles de la articulación. Figures 63-65. Abra alba. 63: shell, 6 mm (CAP). 64, 65: hinge. Figures 66-69. Abra prismática. 66, 67: valves of 4.5 and 5.2 mm (CAP); 68, 69: details of the hinges. 35 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Cylichnina crebrisculpta Monterosato, 1884 (Figs. 43-45) Cylichnina crebrisculpta Monterosato, 1884. Nom. Gen. e Spec .: 143. Material examinado: 6 v, 28 c, Vallcarca, 35/45 m (CAP). Oliverio y Tringali (2991) ilustran dos tipos de esta especie, cuya concha se caracteriza por su perfil oval, su escul- tura espiral conspicua y microescultura axial formada, además de las líneas de crecimiento, por numerosas costillas mi- núsculas, rectas y muy apretadas. Se di- ferencia de C. laevisculpta (Granata-Gri- 11o, 1877), redescrita e ilustrada por Ga- glini (1991), en que esta última tiene la concha más pequeña, con un perfil casi cilindrico, estrecha en su parte central. Citada por Hidalgo (1917) para aguas profundas de Asturias, se cita aquí por primera vez para el Mediterrá- neo español y también es común en fondo fangoso-detrítico costero en Vilas- sar de Mar. Cylichnina nitidula (Lovén, 1846) (Figs. 46-48) Cylichna nitidula Lovén, 1846. Index Molí. : 10. Material examinado: 40 v, 75 c, Vallcarca, 45/60 m (CAP); 8 c, "El Turó", 76 m (CAP); 15 v, 35 c, "Cubelles", 90 m (CAP). Gaglini (1991) redescribe e ilustra esta especie, diferenciándola de C. umbi- licata (Montagu, 1803), de la cual se había considerado sinónimo. Se diferen- cia de ella básicamente en su menor tamaño, en su perfil oval, no cilindrico. en su espira apenas visible, debido a la estrechez del ombligo, y en la escultura espiral ausente. Hidalgo (1917) la cita para aguas pro- fundas de Valencia. La nuestra es la segunda cita para el Mediterráneo español. Ringicula ciommeii Mariottini, Smriglio y Oliverio, 2000 Ringicula ciommeii Mariottini, Smriglio y Oliverio, 2000. Boíl. Malac., 36 (5-8): 71-82. [Localidad tipo: Mar Tirreno central, 360-600 m) En Giribet y Peñas (1997) se citaba e ilustraba un juvenil procedente de "El Parruset, 200-450 m, identificado como R. cf. leptocheila. Según Mariottini, Smriglio y Oliverio (2000), en su revi- sión del género Ringicula , esa concha pertenece a la nueva especie R. ciom- meii. Laona sp. (Figs. 49, 50) Material examinado: 1 c, Vallcarca, 45/60 m (CAP). Esta frágil concha tiene un parecido con la de Laona finmarchica (W. Clark, 1827) pero la de esta última especie tiene microescultura espiral y la proto- concha emerge del perfil de la última vuelta. Baptopdoris cinnabarina Bergh, 1884 (Fig. 71) 36 PEÑAS ET AL. : Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figura 70. Gastropteron rubrum. Figure 71. Baptodoris cinnabarina. Figura 72. Neorossia caroli. Figura 73. Ancistroteuthis lichtensteini. Figure 70. Gastropteron rubrum. Figure 71. Baptodoris cinnabarina. Figure 72. Neorossia caroli. Figure 73. Ancistroteuthis lichtensteini. 37 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Baptopdoris cinnabarina Bergh, 1884. Malacologische Untersuchungen, 2, 3, (15): 671-677, lám. 69, figs 35-36, lám. 70, figs 1-19. [Localidad tipo Trieste, Italia]. Material examinado: 1 ejemplar de 40 mm de longitud recolectado el 24/04/91 en la zona supe- rior (450 m de profundidad) del cañón submarino La Merenguera, frente a la pedanía de Vallcarca. Este ejemplar, recolectado en la cam- paña RETRO de la primavera de 1991, fue identificado en aquel momento como Platydoris maculata Bouchet, 1977, una especie de nudibranquio doridáceo de profundidad recientemente descrita (Bouchet, 1977). Posteriormente, el es- tudio de Ballesteros y Valdés (1999) de una serie de ejemplares de doridá- ceos de similar morfología, procedentes de varios puntos de la plataforma conti- nental ibérica permitió identificarlos con B. cinnabarina, una especie muy poco co- nocida; estos autores redescriben la es- pecie aportando nuevos datos anatómi- cos e imágenes al microscopio de ba- rrido electrónico (MEB) y registran su presencia por vez primera para la plata- forma continental ibérica. Nuestro ejem- plar del cañón La Merenguera también fue asignado a B. cinnabarina. Desde en- tonces, este doridáceo ha sido recolec- tado en más localidades de la plata- forma continental catalana (Doménech, Ávila y Ballesteros, 2006). La especie europea de profundidad del género Platydoris, P. maculata Bouchet, 1977 ha sido propuesta recientemente (Dorgan, Valdés y Gosliner, 2002) como sinó- nimo de Baptodoris cinnabarina. Limatula cf. bisecta Alien, 2004 (Figs. 51, 52) Limatula cf. bisecta Alien, 2004. Tour. Nat. Hist., 38: 2591-2653. [Localidad tipo: SW Irlanda (52° 21,1' N, 12° 07,4' W), 479 m]. Nuevo material examinado: 2 valvas completas y 2 fragmentos, "Cubelles", 90 m (CAP). En Giribet y Peñas (1977) se citaba el hallazgo de una valva casi lisa, muy frágil, procedente del caladero "El Parruset", entre 200 y 450 m de profun- didad, identificada como Limatula cf. gwyni (Sykes, 1903). Peñas y Giribet (2003) citan 3 valvas de la misma especie en el caladero "Mar de Nacra", a 105 m, como Limatula sp. Ese material y el nuevamente examinado parece coin- cidir con la nueva especie descrita por Allen (2004) para aguas profundas del suroeste de Irlanda: concha semitrans- parente, de extrema fragilidad, igual relación H/D y escultura apenas marcada. Montacuta sp. (Figs. 60-62) Material examinado: 3 valvas, "Cubelles", 90 m (CAP). Esta especie parece un juvenil de Montacuta ferruginosa (Montagu, 1808) ya que tiene una zona angulosa en el borde dorsal posterior y muy parecida la posición de los dientes cardinales; sin embargo, es más sólida, tiene una forma menos elíptica, con una relación H/D= 1.5, frente a 1.7 en M. ferrugi- nosa, y el margen interior es crenu- lado. 1 Sportella sp. (Figs. 53-59) Material examinado: 1 ejemplar vivo, Vallcarca, 45/60 m, fondo detrítico fangoso (CAP). 38 PEÑAS ETAL.\ Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Figura 74. Histioteuthis reversa. Figura 75. Opisthoteuthis sp. Figura 76. Bathypolypus sponsalis. Figure 74. Hisdoteuthis reversa. Figure 75. Opisthoteuthis sp. Figure 76. Bathypolypus sponsalis. 39 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 El ejemplar encontrado es adulto y mide 10.6 x 7 mm. Tiene un periostraco ferruginoso, relativamente grueso, bri- llante, muy rojizo en su zona umbonal. Las valvas son sólidas de color blanco, opacas, apenas brillantes. Las líneas de crecimiento son conspicuas. Esta especie tiene en la forma un gran parecido con Montacuta voeringi Friele 1877, cuyo tipo ilustra Aartsen (1996), también citada e ilustrada por Gaglini (1992) como M. cuneata, pero las escasas valvas conoci- das de esta especie son frágiles y mucho más pequeñas, tienen el umbo más des- CONCLUSIONES Este nuevo trabajo reafirma lo cons- tatado en los anteriores referidos al Garraf: la gran riqueza malacológica de las aguas de esta pequeña comarca, en buena medida debido a la variedad de sus fondos. Hasta la fecha se han citado para esta pequeña comarca 746 especies de moluscos marinos (4 caudofaveata, 1 solenogastre, 7 poliplacóforos, 497 gas- terópodos, 213 bivalvos, 8 escafópodos y 16 cefalópodos). De ellas, 61 han sido primera cita para el Mediterráneo español; y se han descrito cinco nuevas especies para la ciencia: Epilepton parru- setensis, Bathycrinicola nacraensis, Alvania garrafensis, Bela clarae y Chysallida dan- tarti. También se puede afirmar, que ésta es la zona del Mediterráneo español más exhaustivamente estudiada hasta la fecha, y quizá la más rica en moluscos marinos junto con la isla de Alborán y su plataforma continental, tras el trabajo de Peñas, Rolán, Luque, Templado, Moreno, Rubio, Salas, Sierra y Gofas (2006). La nueva lista faunística de los moluscos marinos del Garraf enriquece aún más los conocimientos que se poseen sobre la malacofauna catalana. En el módulo de moluscos (Molluscat) del Bañe de Dades de Biodiversitat de Catalunya (BIOCAT) (Ballesteros, 2007a) aparecen un total de 1909 espe- cies válidas de moluscos marinos, conti- nentales y dulceacuícolas registrados en plazado hacia el lado posterior y la char- nela es diferente, con un solo diente car- dinal. Provisionalmente se ubica en el género Sportella por el parecido de su charnela con S. recóndita (Fischer, 1872), sin embargo la forma de las valvas es diferente: S. recóndita las tiene equiláte- ras, casi rectangulares. El ejemplar ilus- trado en Aartsen (1996: figs. 24L y 24R) mide 9x5 mm, con una relación H/D= 1.8, frente a 1.5 en Sportella sp. También la microescultura externa difiere: es cla- ramente granulosa en S. recóndita. Cataluña, de los cuales 1 es un mono- placóforo, 18 son poliplacóforos, 8 son escafópodos, 303 son bivalvos, 1549 son gasterópodos y 30 son cefalópodos. Las especies de caudofoveados y solenogas- tros, que aparecen en la Tabla I, y que fueron recolectados en la campaña RETRO en el cañón La Merenguera, resultaron ser la primera cita de aplacó- foros para las costas catalanas. Reciente- mente (Ballesteros, 2007b) se ha publi- cado una lista actualizada de los opisto- branquios citados en las costas catala- nas, registrándose un total de 205 espe- cies de este grupo de gasterópodos. Todo ello contribuye a que la malaco- fauna de Cataluña se halle entre las mejor conocidas de las áreas geográficas de la Península Ibérica y de Europa. AGRADECIMIENTOS Nuestro agradecimiento a los pesca- dores Rafael Montoya y Sergi Perelló, de Vilanova i la Geltrú, quienes nos facilitaron los sedimentos obtenidos por la embarcación "Teresa"; a Manuel Muñoz, malacólogo de Vilanova i la Geltrú, quien obtuvo la mayoría, del material procedente de asteroides; a la tripulación del B.O. García del Cid y a los Drs. Francesc Sarda, Joan E. Cartes y J. B. Company, por su apoyo en los muéstreos de la campaña RETRO; a nuestro malogrado compañero Lluis 40 PEÑAS ET AL.: Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf Dantart (fallecido en febrero de 2005) por su inestimable ayuda en la identifi- cación de numerosas especies de los moluscos del cañón La Merenguera; a Carmen Salas, del Dpto. de Biología Animal de la Universidad de Málaga, por sus comentarios y ayuda en la determinación de algunos bivalvos; a Anders Warén (Swedish Museum of Natural History, Stockholm), quien nos confirmó la determinación de Melanella compactilis; a Virginie Herós, del BIBLIOGRAFÍA Aarsen, J. J. van, 1988a. Nomenclatural notes. Forbes' Aegean Turridae. Bollettino Malaco- logico, 24 (5-8): 141-144. Aartsen, J. J. van, 1988b. Molluschi d'Europa: note su specie poco conosciute. XII. Bela menk- horsti nom. nov.= Pleurotoma nana Scacchi, 1836 non Deshayes, 1835 e Fehria (nov. gen.) zenetouae n. sp. La Conchiglia, 20 (232-233): 30- 31. Aartsen, J. J. van, 1996. Galeommatacea & Cyamiacea. Part II. La Conchiglia, 28 (281): 27-53. Allen, J. A., 2004. The Recent species of the gen- era Limatula and Limea (Bivalvia, Limacea) present in the Atlantic, with particular ref- erence to those in deep water. Journal of Nat- ural History, 38: 2591-2653. Ballesteros, M. (Coord.), 2007a. Módul de mol.lucs (MollusCat). In: Bañe de Dades de Biodiversitat de Catalunya (BIOCAT). Ge- neralitat de Catalunya & Universitat de Bar- celona. http:/ / bio. diver. bio.ub.es/bio- cat/ homepage.html. Ballesteros, M., 2007b. Lista actualizada de los opistobranquios (Mollusca: Gastropoda: Opisthobranchia) de las costas catalanas. Spira, 2 (3): 163-188. Ballesteros, M. y Valdés, A., 1999. Redes- cripción de Baptodoris cinnabarina Bergh, 1884 (Opisthobranch, Doridina, Platydorididae) y discusión taxonómica de otras especies del gé- nero Baptodoris Bergh, 1884. Iberus, 17: 27-35. Bouchet P., 1977. Opisthobranches de pro- fondeur de l'Ocean Atlantique. II Notaspidea et Nudibranchiata. Journal of Molluscan Studies, 43 (l):28-60 CLEMAM: http:/ / www.somali.asso.fr /ele- mam /biotaxis.php. Cretella, M., Crovato, C., Crovato, P., Fa- sulo, G. y Toscano, F., 2005. The malacolo- gical work of Arcanuelo Scacchi (1810-1893). Part II: a critical revie of Scacchian taxa. Bo- llettino Malacologico, 40 (9-12): 114-131. MNF1N, París, quien nos facilitó el estudio de material tipo del género Bela; a Pasquale Micali, malacólogo de Fano, Italia, por sus comentarios sobre la familia Pyramidellidae; a Jesús Méndez, del CACTI (Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnológico a la Investiga- ción), de la Universidad de Vigo por la realización de las fotografías al MEB; y a Manuel Antonio Malaquias, por su ayuda en la determinación de algunas especies. dantart, L. Y Luque, A., 1994. Cocculiniformia and Lepetidae (Gastropoda: Archaeogas- tropoda) from Iberian waters. Journal of Mol- luscan Studies, 60: 277-313. Doménech, A., Ávila, C. y Ballesteros, M., 2006. Opisthobranch molluscs from the sub- tidal trawling grounds off Blanes (Girona, north-east Spain). Journal of the marine bio- logical Association of the United Kingdom, 66: 383-389. Dorgan, K. M., Valdés, A. y Gosliner, T. M., 2002. Phylogenetic systematics of the genus Platydoris (Mollusca, Nudibranchia, Dori- doidea) with description of six new species. Zoológica Scripta, 31 (3): 271-319. Fretter, V. y Graham, A., 1982. The Proso- branch molluscs of Britain and Denmark. Part 7. "Heterogastropoda" (Cerithiopsacea, Triphoracea, Epitoniacea, Eulimacea). Jour- nal of Molluscan Studies, suppl. 11: 363-434. Gaglini, A., 1991. Seconde spigolature... mon- terosatiane. Notiziario CISMA (1990) 13: 1- 22. Gaglini, A., 1992. Terze spigolature ... mon- terosatiane. Argonauta, 7 (1-6): 125-180. Ghisotti, F., 1978. Ritrovamenti malacologici nel Mediterráneo. Conchiglie, 14 (9-10): 151- 166. Giannuzzi-Savelli, R., Pas aterí, F., Palmeri, A. Y Ebreo, C., 1999. Atlante delle Conchiglie marine del Mediterráneo. Evolver, Srl, Roma, 127 pp. Giribet, G. y Peñas, A., 1997. Fauna malacoló- gica del litoral del Garraf (NE de la Península Ibérica). Iberus, 15 (1): 41-93. Giribet, G. y Peñas, A., 1998. A new Epilepton species (Bivalvia, Montacutidae) from the Western Mediterranean. Iberus, 16 (2): 117-121. Guerra, A., 1992. Mollusca, Cephalopoda. En Ra- mos, M.A et al. (Eds.): Vol. 1. Fauna Ibérica. Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales. Con- sejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas. Madrid: 327 pp. 41 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Hidalgo, J. G., 1917. Fauna malacológica de Es- paña, Portugal y las Baleares. Trabajos del Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, serie zo- ológica, 30: 752 pp. Mariottini, P., Smriglio, C y Oliverio, M., 2000. The Ringicula leptocheila complex with the description of a new species (Opistho- branchia; Ringiculidae). Bollettino Malacolo- gico, 36 (5-8): 71-82. Martínez Rueda, J. L. y Peñas, A., 1993. Fauna malacológica de La Herradura, Granada. Ma- lakos, 3: 3-31. Micali, P. y Nofroni, I., 2004. On the specific validity of Chrysallida penchynati (B.D.D., 1883) and description of Chrysallida rinaldii n. sp. Bollettino Malacologico, 39 (9-12): 177- 180. Micali, P., Nofroni, I. y Aartsen, J. J. van, 1993. Addition to the knowledge of the Eu- ropean Chrysallida species, with notes on a re- cent work by Van der Linden & Eikenboom (Gastropoda, Opisthobranchia). Basteria, 57 (4-6): 147-154. Mifsud, C., 1998. The molluscan species living in Maltese Posidonia meadows. La Conchiglia, 30 (287): 37-48. Nordsieck, F., 1977. The Turridae ofthe Eur opean seas. Ed. La Conchiglia, Roma, 131 pp. Oliver Baldoví, J. D., 2007. Catálogo de los Gas- terópodos testáceos marinos de la parte sur del Golfo de Valencia (España). Iberus, 25 (2): 29-61. Oliverio, M. y Tringali, L. P., 2001. The types of marine molluscan species described by Monterosato, in the Museo Civico di Zoolo- gía, Roma. General scope of the work, and part 1: the opisthobranchs gastropods. Bo- llettino Malacologico, 37 (5-8): 121-142. Peñas, A. y Giribet, G., 2003. Adiciones a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf (NE de la Península Ibérica). Iberus, 21 (1): 177-189. Peñas, A. y Rolán, E., 2000. The family Pyra- midellidae Gray, 1840 (Mollusca, Gastro- poda, Heterostropha) in West Africa. 7. Ad- denda to the genera Eulimella and Turbonilla, with a list of the east Atlantic species and sy- nonyms. Argonauta, 13 (2): 59-80. Peñas, A., Rolán, E. y Almera, J. Fauna ma- lacológica de un fondo fangoso-detrítico cos- tero en el Maresme, Barcelona (Nordeste de la Península Ibérica). Iberus, en prensa Peñas, A., Rolán, E., Luque, A. A., Templado, J., Moreno, D., Rubio, F., Salas, C., Sierra, A. y Gofas, S., 2006. Moluscos marinos de la isla de Alborán. Iberus, 24 (1): 23-151. Peñas, A., Templado, J. y Martínez, J. L., 1996. Contribución al conocimiento de los Pyra- midelloidea (Gastropoda: Heterostropha) del Mediterráneo español. Iberus, 14 (1): 1-82. Powell, A. W. B., 1966. Molluscan families Speightiidae and Turridae. Bulletin ofthe Auc- kland Institute and Museum, 5: 1-157. Ramírez-LLodra, E., Ballesteros, M., Com- pany, J. B., Dantart, L. y Sardá, F., 2008. Spatio-temporal variations of biomass and abundance in bathyal non-crustacean me- gafauna in the Catalan Sea (North-western Mediterranean). Marine. Biology., 153: 297- 309. Rolán, E. y Otero-Schmitt, ]., 1999. The family Turridae s. L. (Mollusca, Neogastropoda) in Angola, 2. Subfamily Mangeliinae Fischer, 1883. Argonauta, 13 (1): 5-26. Sabelli, B., Giannuzzi-Savelli, R. y Bedulli, D., 1992. Catalogo annotato dei Molluschi ma- rini del Mediterráneo. Vol. 2. Ed. Librería Na- turalística Bolognese, 498 pp. Sardá, F., Cartes, J. E. y Company, J. B., 1994. Spatio-temporal variations in megabenthos abundante in three different habitats of the Catalan deep-sea (Western Mediterranean). Marine. Biology., 120: 211-219. Scacchi, A., 1836. Catalogus Conchyliorum Regni Napolitani. Typis Filiatre-Sebetil, Napoli, 20 pp. Solustri, C. y Micali, P., 2002. Nuovi ritrova- menti malacologici e segnalazione di Thya- sira granulosa (Monterosato, 1874) al largo delle Romagnole (Medio Adriático). Cua- derno di Studio e Notizie di Storia Naturale de- lta Romagna, 17: 21-30. Spada, G., Sabelli, B. y Morandi, V., 1973. Contributo alia conoscenza della malaco- fauna dell'isola di Lampedusa. Conchiglie, 9 (3-4): 29-67. 42 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberas, 26 (2): 43-117, 2008 Systematics and distribution of shelled molluscs (Gastropoda, Bivalvia and Scaphopoda) from the South Shetland Islands to the Bellingshausen Sea, West Antárctica Sistemática y distribución de los moluscos con concha (Gastropoda, Bivalvia y Scaphopoda) desde las Islas Shetland del Sur al Mar de Bellingshausen, Antártica Oeste Cristian ALDEA*’** and Jesús S. TRONCOSO* Recibido el 2-XI-2007. Aceptado el 15-IV-2008 ABSTRACT The knowledge of the systematics and distribution of molluscs from the area of West Antárctica, mainly of the Bellingshausen Sea, remains relatively poor. Only 3 families and 1 1 species of molluscs were recorded in the Bellingshausen Sea, while 2 families and 3 species were recorded from Peter I Island. This apparently low number of species is the result of poor sampling in this area. An integral study of the benthic ecosystem was carried out in this area by the Spanish Antarctic Program: BENTART research cruises during the austral summer season in 2003 and 2006 on the continental shelf and lower slope from 53 to 3304 metres. A total of 3133 individuáis belonging to 1 1 8 species of shelled mol- luscs were identified, of which 571 individuáis corresponding to 71 species of gas- tropods, 2200 individuáis to 42 species of bivalves and 362 individuáis to 5 species of scaphopods. Neobuccinum eatoni with 89 individuáis, Genaxinus debilis with 674 indi- viduáis and Dentalium mojorinum with 159 individuáis were the most abundant species of gastropods, bivalves and scaphopods, respectively. Of the total cited species, six new records are added for the South Shetland Islands, 30 for the Western Antarctic Península, 34 for the Bellingshausen Sea and 30 for Peter I Island. On the other hand, new bathymet- ric records are given for 44 species in Antarctic waters. RESUMEN El conocimiento de la sistemática y distribución de moluscos en la Antártica Oeste, mayor- mente en el área del Mar de Bellingshausen es aun pobre. Sólo 3 familias y 1 1 especies de moluscos han sido registradas en el Mar de Bellingshausen, así como 2 familias y 3 especies en el área de la Isla Pedro I. Este aparentemente bajo número de especies es el resultado de una baja cantidad de muéstreos. Un estudio integral de los ecosistemas ben- tónicos fue llevado a cabo en esta área por el Programa Antártico Español: los Cruceros de Investigación BENTART, durante los veranos australes del 2003 y 2006 sobre la plataforma continental y talud entre 53 y 3304 m. Fueron identificados un total de 3133 individuos pertenecientes a 1 18 especies de moluscos con concha, de los cuales 571 individuos corresponden a 71 especies de gasterópodos, 2200 individuos a 42 especies de bivalvos y 362 individuos a 5 especies de escafópodos. Neobuccinum eatoni con 89 * Departamento de Ecología y Biología Animal, Facultad de Ciencias del Mar, Campus Lagoas Marcosende, 36310, Universidad de Vigo (España). ** Fundación Centro de Estudios del Cuaternario de Fuego-Patagonia y Antártica (CEQUA), Av. Bulnes 01890, Punta Arenas (Chile). 43 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 individuos, Cenaxinus debilis con 674 individuos y Dentalium majorinum con 159 individ- uos son las especies más abundantes de gasterópodos, bivalvos y escafópodos, respecti- vamente. Del total de especies registradas se aportan 6 nuevos registros para las Islas Shetland del Sur, 30 para el Oeste de la Península Antártica, 34 para el Mar de Belling- shausen y 30 para la Isla Pedro I. En tanto se amplían los registros batimétricos conocidos en la Antártica para 44 especies. Key Words: Molluscs, Gastropods, Bivalves, Scaphopods, systematics, distribution, West Antárctica, Bellingshausen Sea. Palabras Clave: Moluscos, Gastrópodos, Bivalvos, Escafópodos, sistemática, distribución, Antártica Oeste, Mar de Bellingshausen. INTRODUCTION Knowledge of molluscs in the South- ern Ocean started to build up towards the end of the XIX century with the H.M.S. Challenger expedition (1873- 1876) which visited several Sub-Antarc- tic islands. The expedition results were published in the works of Smith (1885) for bivalves and that of Watson (1886) for gastropods and scaphopods. The "Venus" Expedition carried out in 1874- 1875 gave the first report on molluscs from the Kerguelen Islands (Smith 1879). Years later, the "Belgian Antarctic Expedition (1897-1899)" was focused on the Antarctic continent, particularly on the South Shetland Islands and towards the West of the Antarctic Peninsula and culminated with the publication of the works of Pelseneer (1903) and Plate (1908a). The British Expedition "South- ern Cross" (1898-1900) simultaneously explored the Ross Sea and Macquarie Is- land and reported new species in Smith (1902), while the Germán "Deutsche Tiefsee-Expedition (1898-1899)" to the Kerguelen and Bouvet Islands gener- ated new reports that were published by Thiele and Jaeckel (1931). One year later, the Germán "Deutsche Südpolar- Expedition" in 1901-1903 focused on the Davis Sea, from which many species were reported by Plate (1908b) for Scaphopoda and by Thiele (1912) for Gastropoda and Bivalvia. Other expeditions from the time were the "Schwedische Südpolar-Expe- dition" to several Sub-Antarctic Islands in 1901-1903, the British National Antarctic Expedition "Discovery" to the Ross Sea and Macquarie Island in 1901- 1904 and the "Scottish National Antarc- tic Expedition" to Scotia Are Islands in 1902-1904, resulting in the contributions of Strebel (1908), Smith (1907) and Melvill and Standen (1907, 1912), respectively. Other parallel expeditions were the "Expédition Antarctique Frangaise" in 1903-1905 and the "Deux- iéme Expédition Antarctique Frangaise" in 1908-1910, which obtained new samples on numerous sites cióse to the Antarctic Peninsula, their results being reported in several works (e.g. Lamy, 1906b, 1911a). Subsequently, the British Antarctic Expedition "Terra Nova" in 1910-1913, researched the Ross Sea and adjacent zones/ areas and resulted in the publication of the works of Smith (1915) and Eales (1923). The "Australian Antarctic Expedition (1911-1914)" was focused on the Eastern Antarctic and new species were cited by Hedley (1916). Research carne to a standstill from this date until 1926-1937, when the "Dis- covery Expeditions" generated impor- tant reports and inventories on molluscs from several Sub-Antarctic Islands, the Antarctic Peninsula coast and the Ross Sea (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1964). Me^n- while, other surveys like the "Norwe- gian Antarctic Expedition (1927-1930)" explored the Western Peninsula and other sites and resulted in a work on Bivalvia by Soot-Ryen (1951). The British, Australian and New Zealand 44 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Antarctic Expedition (B.A.N.Z.: 1929- 1931) provided a detailed knowledge of the Ross Sea, Enderby Land and the Sub-Antarctic Islands of East Antárctica through the works of Powell (1957, 1958). Alt records and earlier reports were summarized by Powell (1960). Later, the works of Egorova (1972, 1982) communicated the results of many Soviet expeditions held from 1955 onwards mainly to the Davis Sea. The new French expeditions to Terre Adélie (e.g. Arnaud, 1972, 1973) and the Japan- ese expeditions to East Antárctica pub- lished their records in several works (e.g. Okutani, 1986: Numanami and Okutani, 1991; Numanami 1996; Numanami, Okutani, Iwami, Takeuchi, Igarashi, Tsuchiya and Fukuchi, 1996). The last known extensive works are those of Dell (1990) and Hain (1990). Dell focused mainly on the Ross Sea and reported species collected from several surveys, principally from the US "Eltanin" cruises but he also examined samples from some previous expeditions that were deposited in zoological museums. Hain reported many species from the Weddell Sea that were collected in some Germán //Antarktis,,expeditions. Apart from the abovementioned expeditions held towards the end of the XX and the beginning of the XXI Cen- turies, detailed information is now avail- able by means of reports with biogeo- graphical analyses on enclosed areas (see Zelaya, 2005; Linse 2006), review of par- ticular taxa (e.g. Cernohorsky, 1977; Ponder, 1983; Oliver and Picken, 1984; Harasewych and Kantor, 1999) and descriptions of new species (e.g. Engl, 2004b; Días Passos and Domaneschi, 2006). From a biogeographic point of view, the earlier studies of the Southern marine fauna resulted in the definition of the dif- ferent subregions. There is a latitudinal división into an Antarctic /high Antarctic zone and Sub-Antarctic /low Antarctic zone, and a longitudinal división into East and West Antárctica (Powell, 1951). The West Antárctica represents one of the most interesting Antarctic areas from both ecological/biogeographical and tax- onomical points of view because sample coverage is still extremely patchy. Areas such as the South Shetland Islands and the Western Antarctic Peninsula have been extensively sampled whereas areas such as the Bellingshausen Sea still re- mains poorly sampled (Clarke, Grif- fiths, Linse, Barnes and Crame, 2007). There are approximately 895 species of gastropods and 379 species of bi- valves that are currently known in the Southern Ocean and adjacent regions (Linse, Griffiths, Barnes and Clarke, 2006), and some are exclusive to the Southern Ocean. Clarke, Aronson, Crame Gilí and Blake (2004) men- tioned approximately 530 gastropod and 110 bivalve species. Only 3 families and 11 species of molluscs were recorded in the Bellingshausen Sea, while 2 families and 3 species were recorded in Peter I Island. This appar- ently low number of species is the result of poor sampling in this area: two sam- ples were taken on the continental shelf (1-1000 m), zero on the continental slope (1000-3000 m) and six deeper (>3000 m) ones were obtained in the Belling- shausen and Amundsen seas. A total of 1624 samples were taken from the Southern Ocean (Clarke et al., 2004), of which 1490 were from the continental shelf, 98 were taken from the continental slope and 36 were from deeper waters. Therefore, knowledge of the biodi- versity of the area of West Antárctica, mainly of the Bellingshausen Sea, and in particular of subtidal marine habitats, remains relatively poor, except for the South Shetland Islands (e.g. Arnaud, Troncoso and Ramos, 2001). Also, there is an important dispersión of literature available for the identification of mol- luscs from this area. An integral study of the benthic ecosystem: BENTART pro- gram was carried out in this area by means of two research cruises during the austral summer season in 2003 and 2006, which were organized and sup- ported by the Spanish Antarctic Pro- gram of the Ministry of Education and Science (MEC). This report describes the results of the survey of subtidal marine molluscs and this paper briefly de- 45 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 scribes and illustrates the species ob- tained during the BENTART 2003 and 2006 research cruises to facilítate future marine research in this part of the Southern Ocean. MATERIAL AND METHODS The study area was located in West Antárctica from the South Shetland Islands (63° 03' S, 60° 38' W) to the Bellingshausen Sea off Thurston Island (70° 53' S, 98° 26' W) on the border of the Amundsen Sea (Fig. 1), and included the continental shelf and lower slope from 53 to 3304 metres. Additional samples were taken in shallow waters (5-8 m) by means of SCUBA diving (Table I). Samples were obtained in the austral summer during the BENTART 2003 / 2006 cruises aboard the vessel BIO Hespérides belonging to the Spanish Navy. The molluscs were collected from 47 sampling sites using six sampling gears: a box-corer with a máximum breakthrough of 60-cm and an effective sampling area of 30 x 20 cm, an Agassiz trawl (width-2.01m, height-1.12m and a mesh size of lO.Omm), an epibenthic sledge that consists of a rectangular Steel frame with three levels (width- 0.8m, heighth-0.4m and an attached mesh net), a rock dredge with 0.8 m wide, 0.3 m height, and a mesh size of 10.0 mm, a Nassa trap designed to catch scavenger organisms, and SCUBA diving in shallow water. Samples were sorted on deck and fixed in borax- buffered 4% formaldehyde in seawater. Later, in the laboratory, they were sorted by species and transferred to plástic vials with 70% alcohol for preservation. All specimens were identified to species level, considering shell features and morphometric ratios compared with similar species. Taxonomic classification follows PONDER AND LlNDBERG (1997) and Rosenberg (2005) for Gastropoda, Giribet and Wheeler (2002) and Rosenberg (2005) for Bivalvia and Steiner and Kabat (2001, 2004) for Scaphopoda. The specimens were deposited in the scientific collection of the Animal Ecology and Biology of Uni- versidad de Vigo, Spain. For each species, the systematic description and synonymies are given. This ineludes the reference to the origi- nal description and subsequent system- atic works that were used for identifica- tion. The studied material was detailed by stations as number of live collected specimen/s (spm.) and fresh empty shell /s (sh.) and the measurements of the larger and smaller specimens were included. Measurements for gastropods refer to máximum height from apex to basis and diameter (width, perpendicu- lar to height); for bivalves, máximum height from umbo to ventral margin and width from anterior to posterior margins, and for scaphopods, longitude and diameter of anterior and posterior apertures. The stations were named MB for Bellingshausen Sea, PI for Peter I Island, PA for Antarctic Península, LOW for Low Island, DEC for Deception Island, and MAR for Margarita Bay. All figured specimens are from this survey and were obtained using digital photography or Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) at the University of Vigo. The geographic and bathymetric distributions are given taking account of all taxonomical and biogeographical works revised, and also including the records of this study, and marking as "new record /s" the species occurring for the first time in the study area. The geographic locations are shown in Figure 1. (Right page) Figure 1. Study area, stations of benthic samples from BENTART and locations around Antárctica mentioned in text. MB: stations of Bellingshausen Sea, PI: Peter I Island, PA: Antarctic Península, LOW: Low Island, DEC: Deception Island, and MAR: Margarita Bay. (Página derecha) Figura 1. Area de estudio, estaciones de muéstreos bentónicos de BENTART y lugares alrededor de la Antartica mencionados en el texto. MB: estaciones del Mar de Bellingshausen, PI: Isla Pedro I, PA: Península Antártica, LOW: Isla Low, DEC: Isla Decepción, y MAR: Bahía Margarita. 46 ALDEA and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica 47 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Table I. Location, depth and sample device of survey stations, named MB for Bellingshausen Sea, PI for Peter I Island, PA for Antarctic Península, LOW for Low Island, DEC for Deception Island, and MAR for Margarita Bay. AT: Agassiz trawl, BC: Box-corer, RD: Rock dredge, ES: Epibenthic sledge, NT: Nassa trap, SD: Scuba diving. Tabla I. Ubicación, profundidad y arte de muestreo de las estaciones, nombradas como MB para el Mar de Bellingshausen, PI para la Isla Pedro I, PA para la Península Antártica, LOW para la Isla Low, DEC para la Lsla Decepción, y MAR para Bahía Margarita. AT: Red Agassiz, BC: Box-corer, RD: Draga de roca, ES: Trineo suprabentónico, NT: Nassas, SD: Buceo Scuba. Station Latitude S Longitude W Depth (m) Sample device MB1 70° 38.22' 95° 15.36' 534 AT, BC MB2 70° 29.25' 95° 14.83' 780 AT, BC MB3 70° 17.58' 95° 11.86' 1431 AT, BC MB4 70° 52.86' 98° 26.12' 425 AT, BC PI5 68° 56.70' 90° 35.70' 126 AT, BC, RD, ES PIÓ 68° 49.61' 90° 48.78' 210 AT, BC, NT PI7 68° 42.20' 90° 40.80' 410 AT, BC PI8 68° 50.18' 90° 5 1.08' 90 AT, BC, NT MB9 70° 14.40' 81° 47.03' 532 AT, BC MB10 70° 44.31' 81° 27.85' 497 BC MB 1 J 69° 27.07' 82° 06.76' 1289 AT, BC MB12 69° 24.27' 82° 11.88' 2032 BC MB13 69° 49.56' 77° 43.68' 605 AT, BC, NT, ES MB14 69° 21.12' 78° 04.91' 498 BC, ES MB17 68° 54.88' 78° 14.16' 2044 AT, BC PA18 67° 57.31' 71° 04.70' 354 AT PAN 68° 04. 13' 70° 52.38' 513 AT PA20 65° 01.03' 63° 25.25' 53 AT, NT PA21 64° 54.01' 63° 01.1 1' 107 AT, BC PA22 64° 50.58' 62° 57.91' 294 AT, BC PA23 64° 55.95' 63° 38.40' 655 AT, BC PA24 64° 20.11' 61° 58.82' 1056 AT, BC PA25 63° 52.85' 61° 48.52' no AT, BC MB26 70° 14.62' 95° 02.20' 1920 AT, BC PI27 68° 59.20' 90° 26.60' 1873 ES PI28 68° 52.31' 90° 18.80' 1191 ES, AT MB29 69° 26.08' 88° 26.17' 3304 AT MB30 69° 58.98' 87° 31.08' 1814 AT, BC MB31 69° 56.98' 86° 19.27' 1426 .-AT, BC, ES MB32 69° 47.60' 86° 27.33' 1847 AT MB33 70° 15.90' 84° 11.45' 438 BC, ES MB34 70° 08.20' 84° 51.68' 603 AT, BC, ES MB35 69° 56.03' 85° 11.30' 1117 AT, BC, ES MB36 69° 56.28' 80° 24.55' 560 AT, BC, ES . MB37 69° 26.38' 80° 51.62' 495 AT, BC MB38 69° 14.08' 80° 61.20' 1324 AT, BC, ES PA39 68° 07.62' 69° 36.20' 157 AT, ES PA40 66° 57.55' 72° 34.97' 402 AT PA41 65° 28.29' 69° 01.71' 350 ES PA42 65° 09.99' 68° 56. 18' 1272 ES PA43 63° 21.71' 64° 17.68' 254 ES LOW44 63° 25.81' 62° T2.23' 82 AT LOW45 63° 25.90' 62° 12.69' 86 AT LOW46 63° 26.22' 62° 14.70' 97 AT LOW47 63° 28.01' 62° 12.91' 115 AT DEC 63° 03.00' 60° 36.60' 60-80 AT MAR 68° 04.20' 67° 34.80' 5-8 SD 48 ALDEA AND TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica RESULTS Class Gastropoda Cuvier, 1797 Subclass Eogastropoda Ponder and Lindberg, 1996 Order Fatellogastropoda Lindberg, 1986 Family Nacellidae Thiele, 1891 Genus Nacella Schumacher, 1817 Nacella polaris concinna (Strebel, 1908) (Fig. 2) Nacella polaris var. concinna Strebel, 1908: 82, pl. 5, figs. 76a-e, 78a-b. Patinigera polaris concinna : Powell, 1951: 83; Castellanos and Landoni, 1988: 26, pl. 4, fig. 5. Nacella cf. concinna: Hain, 1990: 36, fig. 4.1. Lepeta depressa Hedley, 1916: 42, pl. 6, fig. 64; Arnaud, 1972: 114; Dell, 1972: 32, figs. 19, 24-25; Egorova, 1982: 14, fig. 75. Material studied: 16 spm. (9.0 x 6.1 - 29.6 x 20.5 mm), PA20; 1 spm. (10.4 x 7.1 mm), PA21. Remarks : Although morphologic vari- ation is present, only two morphotypes have been cited that sepárate this sub- species of Nacella polaris polaris (Hombron and Jaquinot, 1841). Powell (1951) described N. polaris concinna as an endemic species from deep water around South Georgia, but Beaumont and Wei (1991) studied the morphologic variation between specimens from South Georgia and the South Orkney Islands and con- cluded that it was a single species and not a sepárate subspecies. However, these specimens can be differentiated from the subspecies N. polaris polaris because they are paler, thinner and have a more central umbo and stronger radial ribs. There is also a bathymetric pattern between both subspecies since N. polaris concinna can be found at greater depths. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Georgia (Powell, 1951; Strebel, 1908), South Orkney and South Shetland Islands (Castellanos and Landoni, 1988), Western Antarctic Península (Car- celles, 1953; this study), Ross Sea (Dell, 1972), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), Shack- leton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916) and Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982); from 10 m (Strebel, 1908) to 695 m (Dell, 1972). Nacella polaris polaris (Hombron and Jaquinot, 1841) (Fig. 3) Patella polaris Hombron and Jaquinot, 1841: 191. Nacella aenea var. polaris: Pelseneer, 1903: 14. Nacella polaris: Lamy, 1906b: 10; 1911a: 15; 1911b: 26; Zelaya, 2005: 111, fig. 2. Patella polaris: Martens and Pfeffer, 1886: 101, pl. 2, figs. 11-13; Melvill and Standen, 1907: 127. Patinella polaris: Strebel, 1908: 81, pl. 5, figs. 77a-b, 79-82. Patinigera polaris polaris: Powell, 1951: 82; Castellanos and Landoni, 1988: 25, pl. 4, fig. 8. Material studied: 12 spm. (7.8 x 5.1 - 55.8 x 41.8 mm), MAR. Remarks : Smallest specimens look similar to N. polaris concinna (Strebel, 1908), but they can be differentiated by their darker, thicker and smoother shell, with more anterior umbo. Powell (1951) reported N. polaris polaris as a shallow water species, occurring in Antárctica and Scotia Are Islands. Distribution : South Sandwich (Lamy, 1911b) and South Georgia Islands (Martens and Pfeffer, 1886; Strebel, 1908, Lamy, 1911b; Powell, 1951; Zelaya, 2005), reaching 38°S in the Atlantic Ocean (Castellanos and Landoni, 1988), cited in the Weddell Sea as well (Zelaya, 2005), East of the Antarctic Peninsula (Strebel, 49 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 1908), South Orkney (Pelseneer, 1903; Melvill and Standen, 1907; Powell, 1951) and the South Shetland Islands (Powell, 1951), West of the Antarctic Península (Lamy, 1906b, 1911a; Powell, 1951; this study), also in Bouvet Island (Powell, 1951); from 0 m (Powell, 1951) to 195 m (Strebel, 1908). Family Lepetidae Dalí, 1869 Genus lothia Gray, 1857 lothia coppingeri (Smith, 1881) (Fig. 4) lectura coppingeri Smith, 1881: 35, pl. 4, figs. 12, 12a. Pilidium coppingeri : Strebel, 1908: 83. Tectura coppingeri: Rochebrune and Mabille, 1889: 90. Lepeta coppingeri: Thiele, 1912: 183, 233; Smith, 1915: 62; Hedley 1916: 41; Eales, 1923: 6; Powell, 1951: 84; Powell, 1957: 128; 1958: 184; Arnaud, 1972: 114, fig. 1 (radula); Castellanos and Landoni, 1988: 32, pl. 1, fig. 6, pl. 3, fig. 9; Linse, 1997: 27. lothia coppingeri: Egorova, 1982: 12, figs. 25 (radula), 73-74; Dell, 1990: 105, figs. 185-186; Hain, 1990: 37, pl. 1, figs. 4a-c, pl. 17, fig. 4; Numanami et al, 1996: 212 (table, text), pl.l, figs. 3-4; Reid and Osorio, 2000: 119, fig. 7A; Troncoso, Van Goethem and Troncoso, 2001: 90, fig. 8. (conferred); Zelaya, 2005: 112, fig. 3. Patella (?) emarginuloides Philippi, 1868: 224. Lepeta antárctica Smith, 1907a: 12, pl. 2, figs. 11-lla; Hedley, 1911: 4. Pilidium fulvifor mes Egorova, 1972: 384, figs. 3a-b. Material studied: 1 spm. (6.1 x 4.5 mm), PA19; 1 spm. (5.7 x 4.1 mm), PA22. Remarks : Its synonymies are vali- dated in previous works (Dell, 1990). Linse (2002, p. 56) described lothia cop- pingeri magellanica in Magellanic waters; but her figures 9.1.1 1-4 from píate I are confused in their captions and repeated in píate X.Therefore the comparison with Linse's subspecies is not possible. Distribution: Circumantarctic and Sub-Antarctic. South Georgia (Zelaya, 2005), South Orkney (Dell, 1990) and the Falkland /Malvinas Islands (Strebel, 1908; Powell, 1951), Cape Horn (Rochebrune and Mabille, 1889), Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997) and Punta Arenas (Powell, 1951), also in Staten Island, Magellan Strait, reaching Valdivia (38° S) in the South Pacific (Dell, 1990). In Antárctica in the Weddell Sea (Dell, 1990; Hain, 1990), South Shetland Islands, Western Antarc- tic Península (Dell, 1990; this study), the Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Hedley, 1911; Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990), Com- monwealth (Hedley, 1916; Powell, 1958), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972) and Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), the Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982; Dell, 1990), Kerguelen Islands (Powell, 1957; Troncoso et al., 2001), Crozet Islands (Powell, 1957), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958) and Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996); from 5 m (Egorova, 1982) to 1108 m (Hain, 1990). Subclass Orthogastropoda Ponder and Lindberg, 1996 Superorder Vetigastropoda Salvini-Plawen, 1980 Family Anatomidae McLean, 1989 Genus Anatoma Woodward, 1859 Anatoma euglypta (Pelseneer, 1903) (Fig. 5) Scissurella euglypta Pelseneer, 1903: 17, 38, pl. 4, figs. 43-45; Thiele, 1912: 187; Melvill and Standen, 1912: 345. 50 ALDEA AND TroncOSO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Schizotrochus euglyptus: Powell, 1951: 79; Powell, 1958: 179; Arnaud, 1972: 113; Egorova, 1982: 11, fig. 72; Castellanos and Landoni, 1988: 9, pl. 1, fig. 7. Anatoma euglypta: Dell, 1990: 75, fig. 129; Hain, 1990: 33, pl. 1, fig. 1, pl. 17, fig. 1 (radula); Numanami and Okutani, 1990a: 94, figs. 2-5; Branch, Arnaud, Cantera and Gianakouras, 1991: 58 (key); Numanami, 1996: 13, figs. 6A-C, D (radula); Zelaya, 2005: 12, fig. 5; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007: 399, figs, 16-40, 41-47, 50 (anatomy), 48-49 (radula). Material studied: 2 spm. (broken), MB2; 2 spm. (2.4 x 3.0 - 2.9 x 3.6 mm), MB31; 2 spm. (2.1 x 2.8 - 2.1 x 2.9 mm), MB33; 1 spm. (4.8 x 5.6 mm), MB34; 2 spm. (2.6 x 3.3 - 4.1 x 4.8 mm), MB35; 3 spm. (2.5 x 3.5 - 4.8 x 6.1 mm), MB38; 1 spm. (1.1 x 1.7 mm), PA39; 1 spm. (0.8 x 1.2 mm), PA41; 2 spm. (1.9 x 2.5 - 2.9 x 3.8 mm), PA42. Remarks : Other similar species are A. cónica (d'Orbigny, 1841), which is pro- portionally higher and has only a Mag- ellanic distribution (Dell, 1990), and A. shiraseae Numanami and Okutani, 1990 which differs in having a keel on the shoulder, a distinctive constriction below the selenizone, and a coarser sculpture. Thieleella amoena (Thiele, 1912) is more globose with a stronger seleni- zone; T. weddelliana Zelaya and Geiger, 2007 has a globular instead of a biconi- cal last whorl, and stronger axial sculp- ture. Also, this species has affinity in contour and sculpture with the northern hemisphere species, A. crispata (Fleming, 1828), cited by Watson (1886) from Prince Edward Island, but it is a higher and larger species with shorter seleni- zone.In this sense, Zelaya and Geiger (2007) in the revisión of the group, found some of Watson's specimens named A. crispata, which actually corre- spond to A. euglypta. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Dell, 1990; Hain 1990; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), South Sandwich (Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), South Georgia (Powell, 1951; Zelaya, 2005), South Orkney Islands (Dell, 1990) and Discovery Bank (60° 08' S, 34° 56' W) (Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), reaching Burdwood Bank (Melvill and Standen, 1912; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), Staten Island (Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), Cape Horn (Dell, 1990), Drake Passage (56° 19' S, 67° 09' W) (Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), and South Atlantic (46° S, 60° W) (Castellanos and Landoni, 1988); South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007) and Western Antarctic Península (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007; this study), Bellingshausen Sea (70-71° S, 83-88° W) (Pelseneer, 1903) to off Thurston Island (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), Terre Adélie (Powell, 1958; Arnaud, 1972) and Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982; Dell, 1990; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), Kerguelen and Crozet Islands (Cantera and Arnaud, 1985; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958; Zelaya and Geiger, 2007), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Branch et al., 1991), ca. 40° E (Griffiths, Linse and Crame, 2003), in 24° E (Numanami and Okutani, 1990a; Numanami, 1996) and in 3° E-ll° E (Zelaya and Geiger, 2007); from 18 m (Dell, 1990) to 4420 m (Zelaya and Geiger ,2007). Family Fissurellidae Fleming, 1822 Genus Cornisepta McLean and Geiger, 1998 Cornisepta antárctica (Egorova, 1972) (Fig. 6) Fissurisepta antárctica Egorova, 1972: 383, figs. la-b; Egorova, 1982: 10, figs. 66-67; Hain, 1990: 34, pl. 10, fig. 6, pl. 28, fig. 8 (radula). Cornisepta antárctica: McLean and Geiger, 1998: 20, figs. lOa-g. Material studied: 2 spm. (2.8 x 2.0 - 3.4 x 3.1 mm), MB14. 51 Iberas, 26 (2), 2008 Remarks : Although it has a Fis- surisepta shell form, McLean and Geiger (1998), described the new genus Cornisepta from this species, mainly by its radular characteristics. There are no similar species in Antárctica. Distribution : Only known from the Weddell (Hain ' 1990; McLean and Geiger 1998), Bellingshausen (new record) and Davis Seas (Egorova, 1972, 1982); from 280 m to 700 m (Egorova, 1972). Genus Puncturella Lowe, 1827 Puncturella spirigera Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 7) Puncturella spirigera Thiele, 1912: 186, pl. 11, figs. 4-10; Powell, 1958: 180; Egorova, 1982: 10, figs. 24 (radula), 68-70; Dell, 1990: 76, figs. 125, 127; Numanami et al. , 1996: 211 (table), pl. 1, figs 1-2; Zelaya, 2005: 112, fig. 4. Material studied: 5 spm. (3.9 x 2.8 - 6.2 x 4.1 mm), PA39. Remarks : This species was frequently considered as a júnior synonym of the Sub-Antarctic, widely distributed species P. cónica (d'Orbigny, 1841) (see Arnaud, 1972; Hain, 1990; Reíd and Osorio, 2000), although Dell (1990) commented that P. spirigera probably formed part of a complex with wide dis- tribution. These specimens are consid- ered ,therefore, as P. spirigera until a sys- tematic revisión of the genus in the Southern Ocean and neighboring areas is attempted. Individuáis from the Weddell Sea at 16-820 m depth of Hain (1990, p. 34), that were assigned to P. cónica, resemble these specimens. Distribution: South Georgia Island (Dell, 1990; Zelaya, 2005), also cited for the Weddell Sea and the South Shetland Islands (Zelaya, 2005); Western Antarc- tic Peninsula (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie (Powell, 1958), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), from 71° E to Enderby (Powell, 1958) and Syowa (Numanami et AL., 1996); from 60 m (Egorova, 1982) to 2804 m (Dell, 1990). The references of Griffiths et al. (2003) for several sites in the South Pacific from ca. 42° S and Marión, Prince Edward, Crozet and Ker- guelen Islands, may be related to P. cónica. Family Trochidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Antimargarita Powell, 1951 Antimargarita smithiana (Hedley, 1916) (Fig. 8) Submargarita smithiana Hedley, 1916: 38, pl. 5, fig. 58. Antimargarita smithiana: Powell, 1951: 100; 1958: 183; Egorova, 1982: 19, fig. 95. Material studied: 1 spm. (7.4 x 8.0 mm), MB35. Remarks: It differs from A. dulcís (Smith, 1907) mainly by its more spiral cords, which are similar in solidity. Distribution: Known from East Antárctica, ca. 160° E (Griffiths et ae., 2003), Commonwealth (Powell, 1958), Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley ,1916) and Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982), in West Antárctica only in the Belling- shausen Sea (new record); from 30 m (Powell, 1958) to 1117 m (new record). 52 ALDEA and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Genus Calliotropis Seguenza, 1903 Calliotropis antárctica Dell, 1990 (Fig. 9) Calliotropis antárctica Dell, 1990: 86, figs. 136-137, 143. Material studied: 1 spm. (7.8 x 9.8 mm), MB2; 2 spm. (8.0 x 11.0 - 10.5 x 13.6 mm), MB34; 1 spm. (8.1 x 10.2 mm), MB37. Remarks : Among the species within this genus, described from around Antárctica , the most closely related species is C. lateumbilicata Dell, 1990, which possesses a wider umbilicus and a lower spire with smoother sculpture. Calliotropis eltanini Dell, 1990 has less convex whorls with a more conic and angulose shape and C. pelseneeri ( sensu lato) differs by its occluded or semi- occluded umbilicus and higher spire. Distribution : Only reported from the Western Antarctic Península (64° S, 68° W) (Dell, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea to off Thurston Island (new records), and the Bouvet Island (Linse, 2006); from 247 m (Linse, 2006) to 2818 m (Dell, 1990). Calliotropis pelseneeri Cernohorsky, 1977 (Fig. 10) Calliotropis pelseneeri Cernohorsky, 1977: 106; Hain, 1990: 37, pl. 1, fig. 5, pl. 17, fig. 5 (radula). Calliotropis pelseneeri pelseneeri Dell, 1990: 82, fig. 131. Margarita lamellosa Pelseneer, 1903: 18, pl. 5, fig. 47. Solariellopis? lamellosa: Thiele, 1912: 187, pl. 11, fig. 12. Calliotropis lamellosa: Powell, 1958: 182; Egorova, 1982: 14, fig. 76. Material studied: 1 sh. (broken), MB4; 4 spm. (5.1 x 5.3 - 10.5 x 12.0 mm), MB30; 3 spm. (7.0 x 8.3 - 9.9 x 11.0 mm), MB31; 1 spm. (4.2 x 4.5 mm), MB35. Remarks: Dell (1990) reported C. pelseneeri Cernohorsky, 1977 as C. pelse- neeri pelseneeri in order to describe the new subspecies C. pelseneeri rossiana Dell, 1990, that differs by its more angu- lose whorls "with the major spiral sculpture much more prominent" (Dell, 1990). Individuáis collected in BENTART cruises, were reported as C. pelseneeri ( s.l ) because of their more angulose whorls with a major spiral cord, but these specimens possess several grades in rising and thickness without being possible to observe a clearcut difference between these. The last whorl has a second principal spiral cord and the occluded or semi-occluded umbilicus is the main character that sep- arates it from C. eltanini Dell, 1990, with an open umbilicus. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Dell, 1990; Hain, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903; this study), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 371 m (Hain, 1990) to 1814 m (new record). Genus Margarella Thiele, 1893 Margarella antárctica (Lamy, 1905) (Fig. 11) Margarita antárctica Lamy, 1905: 481, fig. 5; 1906b: 9, pl. 1, figs. 2-4. Valvatella antárctica: Melvill and Standen, 1907: 129; Lamy, 1911a: 13. Margarella antárctica: Powell, 1951: 98, fig. G9 (radula); Linse, 2002: 69, pl. 2, fig. 9.1.1- 13, 14-16 (radula); Zelaya, 2004: 113 (table), fig. 8 (radula). 53 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Margantes antárctica: Dell, 1990: 79 (text), fig. 178. Material studied: 8 spm. (3.7 x 4.8 - 8.0 x 10.8 mm), MAR. Remarks : The low spire and open umbilicus sepárate it from the other two species of this genus reported from West Antárctica: the deeper water species Margarella refulgens (Smith, 1907), and M. whiteana Linse, 2002, which also differs by having spiral ribs. However, there are others species confined to South Georgia Island (see Zelaya, 2005), such as M. achilles (Strebel, 1908), M. jason Powell, 1951, M. obsoleta Powell, 1951, M. steineni (Strebel, 1905), M. sub- antarctica (Strebel, 1908) and M. tropi- dophoroides (Strebel, 1908). Distribution : West Antarctica,only from the South Orkney (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Powell, 1951; Linse, 2002) and South Shetland Islands (Powell, 1951), Western Antarctic Península (Lamy, 1906b, 1911a; Thiele, 1912; Powell, 1951; Linse, 2002; this study) and the Bellingshausen Sea (70° S, 81° W) (Lamy, 1911a); from 0 m (Powell, 1951) to 460 m (Lamy, 1911a). Margarella refulgens (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 12) Valvatella refulgens Smith, 1907a: 11, pl. 2, fig. 7; Hedley, 1911: 4. Margarella refulgens: Thiele, 1912: 188; Smith, 1915: 64; Hedley, 1916: 37; Eales, 1923: 9; Powell, 1958: 182; Egorova, 1982: 16, figs. 28 (radula), 82; Hain, 1990: 38, pl. 1, fig. 7, pl. 17, figs. 7-8 (radula). Margantes refulgens: Arnaud, 1972: 115, figs. 2 (anatomy), 5 (radula); Dell, 1990: 78, figs. 175-177; Numanami, 1996: 25, figs. 12A-E, F (radula). Material studied: 3 spm. (3.7 x 4.1 - 4.6 x 6.0 mm), PI8; 6 spm. (2.2 x 2.6 - 5.7 x 6.2 mm), PA20; 2 spm. (3.5 x 4.3 - 5.6 x 6.1 mm), PA22; 1 spm. (4.0 x 4.7 mm), PA39; 1 spm. (4.3 x 5.0 mm), LOW. Remarks : It differs from Margarella antárctica by its narrow or semi- occluded umbilicus and higher spire. Although this species has been cited as Margantes or Margarella, Zelaya (2004) indicates that the constancy of five lateral teeth of the radula and the mor- phology of the first marginal tooth with a base that is greatly enlarged laterally, but with a well-developed shaft and cutting edge, place the species in genus Margarella. Those characteristics were observed on radulae detailed by Arnaud (1972), Egorova (1982) and Hain (1990). Conversely, in Margantes the number of lateral teeth varíes and the first marginal tooth is represented by an expanded píate, without cutting edge. Numanami (1996) described Mar- gantes gunnerusensis and Margarites biconicus from East Antárctica, with characteristics that clearly sepárate them from M. refulgens, such as periostracum and angulose whorls, respectively. (Right page) Figure 2. Nacella polaris concinna, 29.6 x 20.5 mm, PA20. Figure 3. Nacella polaris polaris , 29.8 x 20.5 mm, MAR. Figure 4. Iothia coppingeri, 5.7 x 4.1 mm, PA22. Figure 5. Anatoma euglypta, 4.8 x 6.1 mm, MB38. Figure 6. Cornisepta antárctica , 2.8 x 2.0, MB14. Figure 7. Puncturella spirigera, 5.6 x 3.6 mm, PA39. Figure 8. Antimargarita smithiana , 7.4 x 8.0 mm, MB35. Figure 9. Calliotropis antárctica, 7.8 x 9.8 mm, MB2. Figure 10. Calliotropis pelseneeri, í 0.5 x 12.0 mm, MB30. Figure 11. Margarella antárctica, 9.1 x 6.8 mm, MAR. Figure 12. Margarella refulgens, 3.7 x 4.1 mm, PI8. Figure 13. Solariella antárctica, 3.9 x 4.1 mm, MB11. Figure 14. Tropidomarga biangulata, 6.9 x 8.0 mm, LOW. Figure 15. Cirsonella extrema, 2.5 x 2.7 mm, PA39. Figure 16. Liotella endeavourensis, 0.9 x 1.7 mm, MB38. (Página derecha) Figuras 2-16. Ver los nombres científicos en el rótulo en inglés. 54 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica 55 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Distribution : Presumably Circum- antarctic. South Sandwich Islands (Dell 1990), Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), Magel- lan (Thiele, 1912), South Shetland Islands, Western Antarctic Península and Peter I Island (new records), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), ca. 163° E (Smith, 1915), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Powell, 1958; Arnaud, 1972), Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Hedley, 1916; Powell, 1958; Egorova, 1982; Dell, 1990), Ker- guelen Islands (Thiele,1912), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), ca. 40°E, Prince Edward Island (Griffiths et al., 2003) and 24°E (Numanami, 1996); from 0 m (Arnaud, 1972) to 1108 m (Hain, 1990). Dell (1990) doubts the distribution boundaries, due to records of some specimens reported as M. antárctica from some localities cióse to the South Sand- wich Islands; but they could correspond to M. refulgens. Genus Solariella Wood, 1842 Solariella antárctica Powell, 1958 (Fig. 13) Solariella antárctica Powell, 1958: 183, pl. 2, fig. 4; Dell, 1990: 98, fig. 147. Material studied: 1 spm. (3.9 x 4.1 mm), MB11. Remarles: The individual reported by Hain (1990 p. 40) as Solariella sp. resem- bles BENTART specimen. Other described species are Solariella kempi Powell, 1951, S. charopus charopus (Watson, 1879), S. charopus caeruleus (Watson, 1879) and S. bathy antárctica Numanami, 1996, all of them with more or finer and denser spiral cords. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003), Bellingshausen Sea (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990) and Kemp Land (Powell, 1958); from 455 m (Dell, 1990) to 1289 m (new record). Genus Tropidomarga Powell, 1951 Tropidomarga biangulata Powell, 1951 (Fig. 14) Tropidomarga biangulata Powell, 1951: 101, pl. 5, figs. 5, G6 (radula); Castellanos and Landoni, 1989: 26, pl. 2, fig. 6; Zelaya, 2005: 115. Material studied: 1 spm. (6.9 x 8.0 mm), LOW. Distribution: Only in the South Georgia Islands (Powell, 1951; this study); from 97 (Powell, 1951) and the South Shetland m (new record) to 342 m (Powell, 1951). Family Skeneidae Clark, 1851 Genus Cirsonella Angas, 1877 Cirsonella extrema Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 15) Cirsonella extrema Thiele, 1912: 191, pl. 11, fig. 23; Powell, 1951: 103; 1958: 184; Egorova, 1982: 21, fig. 99; Dell, 1990: 99, fig. 160; Numanami, 1996: 43, figs. 22A-D, F (radula). Material studied: 4 spm. (2.0 x 2.2 - 2.4 x 3.0 mm), PA39. 56 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Remarks : Together with this species, only Cirsonella kerguelenensis Thiele, 1912 was cited from the Southern Ocean and neighboring areas, but C. extrema differs by having a lower spire. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Penín- sula (new record), Ross Sea (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990), Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982; Dell, 1990), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958) and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from 15 to 870 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Liotella Iredale, 1915 Liotella endeavourensis Dell, 1990 (Fig. 16) Liotella endeavourensis Dell, 1990: 103, figs. 172-173. Material studied: 1 spm. (0.9 x 1.7 mm), MB38. Remarks: The only Antarctic repre- sentativo known. According to Dell (1990) it presents a certain likeness to species from Southern New Zealand, and differs from them in the sunken spire and by having a pair of raised spiral cords in the last whorl. Distribution : Only known from the Ross Sea at 362 m (Dell, 1990) and Belling- shausen Sea at 1324 m (new record). Family Turbinidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Leptocollonia Powell, 1951 Leptocollonia innocens (Thiele, 1912) (Fig. 17) Leptothyra innocens Thiele, 1912: 192, pl. 11, figs. 24, 24a. Leptocollonia innocens: Powell, 1951: 105; 1958; 183; Egorova, 1982: 20, figs. 32 (radula), 90; Dell, 1990: 98, figs. 161-162; Hain, 1990: 41, pl. 2, fig. 1, pl. 18, figs. 7-8 (radula); Numanami, 1996: 57, figs. 31A-D, E (operculum), F (radula). Material studied: 6 spm. (2.8 x 3.9 - 6.0 x 6.3 mm), MB37. Remarks: L. thielei Powell, 1951, from South Georgia Island, is the only other species known from the area, but L. innocens differs mainly by having fewer spiral cords on the spire and last whorl. Distribution: Weddell (Dell, 1990; Hain, 1990), Bellingshausen (new record), Ross (Dell, 1990) and Davis Seas (Thiele 1912; Powell, 1958; Egorova, 1982), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), 34° E and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from 193 m (Powell, 1958) to 673 m (Hain, 1990). Superorder Caenogastropoda Cox, 1960 Family Zerotulidae Warén and Hain, 1996 Genus Dickdellia Warén and Hain, 1996 Dickdellia labioflecta (Dell, 1990) (Fig. 18) Laevilitorina labioflecta Dell, 1990: 110, figs. 187-188. Dickdellia labioflecta: Warén and Hain, 1996: 321, figs. 27-29, 30a-b, 31-32, 34e. Mesogastropoda sp. 2: Hain, 1990: 54, pl. 5, figs. la-d, pl. 22, fig. 6 (radula). 57 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Material studied: 10 spm. (2.8 x 3.1 - 2.9 x 3.4 mm), PA22; 3 spm. (3.1 x 3.6 - 3.2 x 3.7 mm), MAR. Remarte: It differs from littorinid species by having a less calcified shell and more glo- bose aperture. Juveniles live as ectoparasites on the cuticle of the pycnogonid Colossendeis megalonyx megalonyx (Lehmann, Gailer, Melzer and Schwabe, 2007). Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990; Warén and Hain, 1996), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Península (new record) and Ross Sea (Dell, 1990); from 220 to 891 m (Dell, 1990). Family Eatoniellidae Ponder, 1965 Genus Eatoniella Dalí, 1876 Eatoniella glacialis (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 19) Rissoia glacialis Smith, 1907a: 9, pl. 2, fig. 4; Smith, 1915: 65. Rissoa glacialis : Hedley, 1911: 5. Subonoba glacialis : Hedley, 1916: 48. Eatoniella glacialis: Arnaud, 1972: 118, figs. 8 (radula), 11 (operculum); Ponder, 1983: 11, figs. 2c, 5e; Dell, 1990: 111, fig. 191; Numanami, 1996: 62, figs. 34A-B, C (operculum), D (radula); Zelaya, 2005: 115, fig. 14. Eatoniella kerguelensis f. major Strebel, 1908: 57, pl. 4, figs. 56a-c. Material studied: 1 spm. (2.8 x 1.9 mm), PA21; 2 spm. (2.0 x 1.1 - 2.8 x 1.6 mm), PA39. Remarks: Its resemblance to E. kergue- lenensis ( s.l .) was discussed by Ponder (1983), who found that the species Eatoniella kerguelensis f. major Strebel, 1908, from the Western Antarctic Penín- sula is a júnior synonym of E. glacialis. Distribution: Circumantarctic. Weddell Sea (Dell, 1990), South Georgia Island (Zelaya, 2005), South Shetland Islands (Strebel, 1908; Dell, 1990) and Western Antarctic Península (Strebel, 1908; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Hedley 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Cape Adare (Smith, 1915), Balleny Islands (Griffiths et al., 2003), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972) and Enderby Land (Dell, 1990), 24° E (Numanami, 1996) and ca. 40° E (Grif- fiths et al., 2003); from 6 m (Arnaud, 1972) to 870 m (Dell, 1990). Eatoniella kerguelenensis regularis (Smith, 1915) (Fig. 20) Rissoia regularis Smith, 1915: 65, pl. 1, fig. 5. Eatoniella kerguelenensis regularis: Ponder, 1983: 7, figs. 2b, 3a-c; Dell, 1990: 113, fig. 190; Branch et al., 1991: 57 (key); Numanami, 1996: 65, figs. 36A-B, C (operculum), D (radula). Eatoniella regularis: Castellanos, 1989: 26, pl. 2, fig. 26. Eatoniella kerguelenensis (Smith): Lamy, 1906b: 7; Melvill and Standen, 1907: 134; Lamy, 1911a: 11; Hedley, 1916: 46; Arnaud, 1972: 118, figs. 9 (radula), 11 (operculum) (no Smith, 1875). Eatoniella kerguelensis f. major Strebel: Melvill and Standen, 1912: 351; Powell, 1951: 110 (no Strebel, 1908). Material studied: 2 spm. (3.5 x 2.0 - 4.0 x 2.2 mm), PA20. Remarks: It differs from the similar subspecies E. kerguelenensis kerguele- nensis (Smith, 1875) by having a shell that is usually larger, thicker, with flatter whorls and a higher spire of 1 / 2 or 1 whorl more. There are the same differences, though more evident, with other species,such as E. glacialis (Smith, 1907) and E. demissa (Smith, 1915). 58 ALDEA and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Distribution : Weddell Sea and South Georgia Island (Griffiths et al., 2003), South Orkney Islands (Melvill and Standen, 1907, 1912; Powell, 1951), South Atlantic Ocean (Castellanos, 1989) and Falkland /Malvinas Islands (Carcelles, 1953), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Península (Lamy ,1906b; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990) to Cape Adare (Smith, 1915), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), Wilkes Land and ca. 63° E (Dell, 1990), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Branch et al., 1991) , ca. 40° E (Griffiths et al., 2003) and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from 0 m (Dell, 1990) to 457 m (Smith, 1915). Eatoniella cf. kerguelenensis kerguelenensis (Smith, 1875) (Fig. 21) Eatonia kerguelenensis Smith, 1875: 70. Eatoniella kerguelenensis kerguelenensis: Smith, 1879: 174, pl. 9, fig. 10; Powell, 1957: 129; 1958: 185; Arnaud, 1972: 118 (in part); Ponder, 1983: 11, figs. 2a, 7e-f; Troncoso et al. 2001: 92, figs. 10, 43 (radula). Eatoniella kerguelensis (sic): Thiele, 1912: 235, pl. 14, fig. 26, pl. 16, fig. 1 (radula); Castellanos, 1989: 23, pl. 2, fig. 22, pl. 4, fig. 45. Material studied: 14 spm. (1.4 x 1.0 - 3.0 x 1.8 mm), PA39; 1 spm. (1.6 x 1.1 mm), PA41. Remarks : Although Ponder (1983) restricted E. kerguelenensis kerguelenensis to East Antárctica, Castellanos (1989) presented a specimen from the Antarctic Peninsula, which was clearly different from E. kerguelenensis regularis. Likewise, our specimens differ by having a usually smaller shell, thinner, with more convex whorls and with a shorter spire of 1 ¡i or 1 whorl less. Distribution: Mainly in East Antárc- tica. Known from Commonwealth (Pow- ell, 1958), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972) and Kerguelen Islands (Smith, 1879; Thiele, 1912; Powell, 1957; Troncoso et al., 2001). Also from the Western Antarctic Peninsula (this study). Castel- lanos (1989) assigned a widespread Antarctic and Sub- Antarctic distribution in South Georgia, South Orkney Islands and Antarctic Peninsula, and Griffiths et al. (2003) added the Weddell Sea. The bathymetric range is from 0 m (Powell, 1957) to 100 m (Powell, 1960). Family Rissoidae Gray, 1847 Genus Onoba H. and A. Adams, 1852 Onoba gélida (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 22) Rissoia gélida Smith, 1907a: 9, pl. 2, fig. 5; Smith, 1915: 65. Rissoa gélida: Hedley, 1911: 5; Thiele, 1912: 195, pl. 11, figs. 37-38. Subonoba gélida: Hedley, 1916: 48; Powell, 1958: 185; Arnaud, 1972: 121; Egorova, 1982: 24, figs. 37 (radula), 108-109. Onoba gélida: Ponder, 1983: 20, figs. 13a-b, 16a-d; Dell, 1990: 114, fig. 194; Ponder and Worsfold, 1994: 54; Numanami, 1996: 66, figs. 38A-B; Zelaya, 2005: 116, fig. 16. Subonoba contigua Powell, 1958: 184, pl. 1, fig. 8. Material studied: 6 spm. (1.8 x 1.1 - 2.4 x 1.8 mm), PI5; 4 spm. (2.1 x 1.4 - 2.7 x 1.7 mm), PI8; 1 spm. (2.6 x 1.4 mm), MB14; 1 spm. (2.2 x 1.6 mm), PA21; 1 spm. (2.0 x 1.1 mm), MB34; 9 spm. (1.1 x 0.8 - 3.0 x 1.9 mm), PA39; 3 spm. (1.3 x 1.0 - 1.7 x 1.1 mm), PA41; 3 spm. (1.2 x 1.0 - 1.4 x 1.1 mm), PA42; 1 spm. (2.1 x 1.5 mm), LOW. 59 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Remarks : Several Antarctic and Sub- Antarctic species, sharing wide shape and spiral sculpture ha ve been cited. In this respect, O. scythei (Philippi, 1868) from Tierra del Fuego Island has a great affin- ity in macrosculpture, though more elon- gate. O. filostria (Melvill and Standen, 1912), O. suavis (Thiele, 1925), O. transenna (Watson, 1886), O. subantarctica subantarc- tica (Thiele, 1912) and O. subantarctica wilkesiana (Hedley, 1916), differ by having more spirals; on the other hand, O. delecta Ponder, 1983 and O. paucicarinata Ponder, 1983, have less spirals. O. inflatella (Thiele, 1912) differs in having a widely open umbilicus and more spaced spirals and O. grísea (Martens, 1885) by flatter cords. Ponder (1983) synonymized the species Subonoba contigua Powell, 1958. Distribution : South Georgia Island (Ponder and Worsfold, 1994; Zelaya, 2005) and cited for the Weddell Sea (Zelaya, 2005); South Shetland Islands (Ponder, 1983; Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Península, Belling- shausen Sea and Peter I Island (new records), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990) to Cape Adare (Smith, 1915), Common- wealth (Hedley, 1916; Powell, 1958), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982; Dell, 1990), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), ca. 40° E (Griffiths et al ., 2003), 24° E (Numanami, 1996) and Bouvet Island (Linse, 2006); from 4 m (Dell, 1990) to 1272 m (new record). Onoba kergueleni (Smith, 1875) (Fig. 23) Rissoa kergueleni Smith, 1875: 69; 1879: 176, pl. 9, fig. 12; Thiele, 1912: 238, pl. 14, fig. 30. Onoba kergueleni: Ponder, 1983: 17, figs. 12f-h, 18 e-g; Dell, 1990: 115, fig. 196. Rissoa adarensis Smith, 1902: 205, pl. 24, fig. 17; Melvill and Standen, 1907: 132; Hedley, 1911: 5; Lamy, 1911a: 10. Rissoia adarensis: Smith, 1907a: 8, pl. 2, fig. 2; Smith, 1915: 65. Ovirissoa adarensis: Hedley, 1916: 47; Arnaud, 1972: 120. ? Rissoa columna Pelseneer, 1903: 21, pl. 5, fig. 55. Rissoa observationis Thiele, 1912: 239, pl. 15, fig. 4. Material studied: 1 spm. (3.0 x 1.4 mm), PI8. Remarks : The extremely thin and transparent periostracum marks the dif- ference with all species with smooth surface known for the area, such as O. anderssoni (Strebel, 1908), O. georgiana (Pfeffer, 1886) and O. melvilli (Hedley, 1916), these last two also with weak spirals. Rissoa adarensis Smith, 1902, R. columna Pelseneer, 1903 and R. observa- tionis Thiele, 1912 were synonymized by Ponder (1983); the last two species were described from immature specimens. Distribution: Circumantarctic. South Orkney (Melvill and Standen, 1907) and Signy Islands (Ponder, 1983), South Shetland Islands (Ponder, 1983; Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Península (Lamy, 1911a) and Bellingshausen Sea (70° S, 83° W) (Pelseneer, 1903), Peter I Island (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Cape Adare (Smith, 1902), Com- monwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972) and Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Kerguelen Islands (Smith, 1879), Crozet Island and Mac Robertson Land (Dell, 1990); from 0 m (Arnaud, 1972) to 870 m (Dell, 1990). Onoba turqueti (Lamy, 1905) (Fig. 24) Rissoia turqueti Lamy, 1905: 479, fig. 3; 1906b: 6, pl. 1, fig. 8. Rissoa turqueti: Melvill and Standen, 1912: 350. Subonoba turqueti: Powell, 1951: 55; Arnaud, 1972: 121. 60 ALDEA AND TroncoSO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Onoba turqueti : Ponder, 1983: 16, figs. llf-g, 12a-e, 14c-e; Dell, 1990: 114, fig. 195; Ponder and Worsfold, 1994: 54. Rissoia fraudulenta Smith, 1907a: 9, pl. 2, fig. 3. Rissoa fraudulenta: Melvill and Standen, 1907: 133; Thiele, 1912: 194, pl. 11, fig. 35. Subonoba fraudulenta: Powell, 1951: 110; Egorova, Subonoba bickertoni Hedley, 1916: 47, pl. 7, fig. 76. Material studied: 2 spm. (1.8 x 1.0 - 2.1 x 1.1 mm Remarks : The spiral sculpture is one of the main characters that differentiate Antarctic and Sub-Antarctic species with a common elongate shape. In this sense, O. sulcula Ponder and Worsfold, 1994 differs in having threads inter- rupted by dot-like marks, O. schraderi (Strebel, 1908) by its triple threads, O. sactipauli (Vélain, 1877) and O. egorovae Numanami, 1996 by their weaker threads, O. steineni (Strebel, 1908) and O. protofimbriata Ponder and Worsfold, 1994 by their thicker ridges and O. lantzi (Vélain, 1877), although having a similar sculpture, differs in having shouldered whorls. Rissoia fraudulenta Smith, 1907 and Subonoba bickertoni Hedley, !: 23, figs. 36 (radula), 111. 1916 were synonymized by Ponder (1983). Distribution: Cited ca. 10° W (Griffiths et al ., 2003); Burdwood Bank (Melvill and Standen, 1912), South Georgia (Ponder and Worsfold, 1994), South Orkney (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Powell, 1951), Signy (Ponder 1983) and South Shetland Islands (Ponder, 1983; Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1905, 1906b; Dell, 1990), Peter I Island (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Dell, 1990), Macquarie Island (Powell, 1951), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972) and Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912, Egorova, 1982); from 2 to 385 m (Egorova, 1982). Genus Powellisetia Ponder, 1965 Powellisetia deserta (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 25) Rissoia deserta Smith, 1907a: 9, pl. 2, fig. 1. Rissoa deserta: Thiele, 1912: 194, pl. 11, fig. 33; Melvill and Standen, 1912: 349. Subonoba deserta: Hedley, 1916: 48; Powell, 1951: 62; Powell, 1958: 185; Arnaud, 1972: 120; Egorova, 1982: 23, figs. 35 (radula), 110. Powellisetia deserta: Ponder, 1983: 24, figs. 19a-c, 21c; Dell, 1990: 116, fig. 197; Numanami, 1996: 71, figs. 43A-C, D (radula). Material studied: 2 spm. (2.2 x 1.2 - 2.8 x 1.8 mm Remarks : The size and shape are the main characters that allow the differenti- ation of several species without any spi- ral sculpture. P. principis (Watson, 1886) is a tiny species that does not reach more than 2.1 mm, P. australis (Watson, 1886) and P. inornata (Strebel, 1908) differ in having a more elongated shape. P. pelse- neeri (Thiele, 1912), that was described as a new ñame for Rissoa subtruncata Pelse- neer, 1903, from the Bellingshausen Sea, differs by having finer spiral striae. Distribution : Cited ca. 10° W (Grif- fiths et al., 2003); South Orkney (Melvill and Standen, 1912) and Signy Islands (Ponder, 1983), Western Antarctic Peninsula (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Ponder, 1983; Dell, 1990), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916; Powell, 1958), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972); Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), ca. 60°E (Griffiths et al., 2003), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), ca. 50° E and 40° E (Griffiths et al., 2003) and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from 4 m (Ponder, 1983) to 870 m (Dell, 1990). 61 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Family C apulid ae Fleming, 1822 Genus Torellia Lovén in Jeffreys, 1867 Torellia insignis (Smith, 1915) (Fig. 26) Neoconcha insignis Smith, 1915: 68, pl. 1, fig. 9; Eales, 1923: 13, fig. 11; Arnaud, 1972: 123; Numanami and Okutani, 1990b: 87, figs. 2C-D, 3A (radula), 5A; Numanami, 1996: 89, figs. 58A-B, D, C (radula). Torellia insignis : Warén, Arnaud and Cantera, 1986: 163 (text), fig. 6; Dell, 1990: 135, fig. 229-230; Hain, 1990: 48, pl. 3, fig. 1, pl. 20, fig. 6 (radula). Material studied: 1 spm. (16.9 x 21.0 mm), LOW. Remarles: The higher spire, and very thick periostracum, rather lamellose along the growth lines and raised into long, divergent hairy processes on the shoulder and on the spiral carinae, sepa- rates T. insignis from the other Antarctic and Sub-Antarctic species: T. mirabilis (Smith, 1907), T. planispira (Smith, 1915), T. exilis (Powell, 1958), T. smithi Warén, Cantera and Arnaud, 1986, T. angulifera Warén, Cantera and Arnaud, 1986 and T. cornea Powell, 1951. Numanami and Okutani (1990b) have studied and com- pared this species with the most similar species T. lanata Warén, Arnaud and Can- tera, 1986, from the Kerguelen Islands, that differs in having a more angulose aperture. T. antárctica (Thiele, 1912) dif- fers in having a more dense sculpture and less developed periostracum. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Shetland Islands (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), ca. 40°E (Grilliths et al ., 2003) and 24° E (Numanami and Okutani, 1990b; Numanami, 1996); from 91 m (Dell, 1990) to 695 m (Hain, 1990). Torellia mirabilis (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 27) Trichoconcha mirabilis Smith, 1907a: 6, pl. 1, figs. 7-7b; Hedley, 1916: 50; Eales, 1923: 14; Powell, 1951: 124; Castellanos and Landoni, 1990: 7, pl. 3, fig. 35; Hain, 1990: 46, pl. 2, figs. 12a-e, pl. 20, figs. 1-2 (radula). Torellia mirabilis: Thiele, 1912: 197; Smith, 1915: 68; Warén et al., 1986: 163 (text); Dell, 1990: 131, figs. 222-225; Numanami and Okutani, 1990b: figs. 2E-F; Numanami, 1996: 92 (table), figs. 60A-B, C (radula); Numanami et al, 1996: 211 (table), pl. 1, figs. 10-11; Zelaya, 2005: 119, fig. 25. Material studied: 1 spm. (22.0 x 30.0 mm), PA39. Remarles : Together with T. planispira (Smith, 1915) and T. cornea Powell, 1951, there are the three species with low spire, but T. planispira has strong spiral carinae instead of the rounded shape of T. mirabilis, and T. cornea has a broader and depressed aperture, not rounded as in T. mirabilis. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Georgia (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; Zelaya, 2005) and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Commonwealth to Terre Adélie (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Hedley, 1916); also is indicated from Kerguelen and Crozet Islands (Zelaya, 2005); Enderby Land (Numanami et^al., 1996); from 70 to 1120 m (Dell, 1990). Torellia planispira (Smith, 1915) (Fig. 28) Trichotropis planispira Smith, 1915: 67, pl. 1, fig. 7. 62 ALDEA and TRONCOSO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Trichoconcha planispira: Powell, 1958: 188; Hain, 1990: 47, pl. 2, fig. 13, pl. 20, fig. 3 (radula). Torellia planispira: Warén et al., 1986: 163 (text); Dell, 1990: 134; Numanami and Okutani, 1990b: 82, figs. 2A-B, 3B (radula), 5B; Numanami, 1996: 86, figs. 56A-B, D, C (radula). Material studied: 3 spm. (2.6 x 3.9 - 3.7 x 5.3 mm), PA21; 1 spm. (4.0 x 5.8 mm), PA24. Remarks: Numanami and Okutani (1990b) observed that its semi-detached whorls of the teleoconch allow differen- tiation from other related species. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), cited for the South Shetland Islands (Griffiths et al., 2003); Western Antarctic Península (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Mac Robertson Land (Powell, 1958), ca. 40° E (Griffiths et al., 2003) and 24° E (Numanami and Okutani, 1990b, Numanami, 1996); from 107 to 1056 m (new records). Family Velutinidae Gray, 1840 Genus Marseniopsis Bergh, 1886 Marseniopsis cónica (Smith, 1902) Lamellaria cónica Smith, 1902: 206, pl. 24, fig. 4; Strebel, 1908: 60. Marseniopsis cónica: Smith, 1915: 66, Eales, 1923: 23; Egorova, 1982: 27, figs. 132-135; Dell, 1990: 164; Hain, 1990: 52, pl. 4, figs. 2a-c, pl. 21, figs. 7-8 (radula); Numanami and Okutani, 1991: 53, figs. 4A-E, 9A (radula); Numanami, 1996: 93, figs. 61A-E, 66A (radula). Lamellariosis turqueti Vayssiére, 1906: 40, pl. 4, figs. 42-53. Material studied: 1 spm. (14.7 x 8.9 mm), PA21. Remarks: It can be differentiated from the other two representatives of the genus in the area by its heterogeneous and rough mantle with numerous mam- millate processes, giving a polygonal contour; it does not have an elliptic shape like M. mollis (Smith, 1902) and M. syowaensis Numanami and Okutani, 1991. According to Numanami and Okutani (1991) Lamellariosis turqueti Vayssiére, 1906 is a júnior synonym. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990) and Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Strebel, 1908), Western Antarctic Peninsula (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Cape Adare (Smith, 1902), probably in the Mac- quarie Island (Tomlin 1948 in Powell, 1960), Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982), Mac Robertson Land and 24° E (Numanami and Okutani, 1991); from 41 m (Egorova, 1982) to 860 m (Dell, 1990). Marseniopsis mollis (Smith, 1902) Lamellaria mollis Smith, 1902: 205, pl. 24, figs. 19-21; Hedley, 1911: 7. Marseniopsis mollis: Thiele, 1912: 200; Smith, 1915: 66; Hedley, 1916: 53; Eales, 1923: 25; Arnaud, 1972: 126, fig. 17 (radula); Egorova, 1982: 28, figs. 40 (radula), 128-131; Dell, 1990: 164; Hain, 1990: 53, pl. 4, figs. 3a-c, pl. 22, figs. 1-2; Numanami and Okutani, 1991: 56, figs. 6A-D, 9B (radula), pl. 1, figs. 3-5; Numanami, 1996: 96, figs. 63A-D, 66B (radula); Numanami et al., 1996: 212 (table, text), pl. 2, figs. 9-11. Material studied: 4 spm. (44.5 x 33.0 - 47.7 x 38.9 mm), PI5; 5 spm. (41.2 x 33.4 - 59.9 x 48.4 mm), PI8. Remarks: This species differs from M. 1991, in having a more regular elliptic syowaensis Numanami and Okutani, shape and homogeneous mantle. 63 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Griffiths et al., 2003) and Western Antarctic Península (Dell, 1990), Peter I Island (new record), Ross Sea (Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Cape Adare (Smith, 1902), 163° E (Smith, 1915), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982), Syowa (Numanami and Okutani, 1991; Numanami 1996; Numanami et al., 1996) and 24° E (Numanami and Okutani, 1991; Numanami, 1996); from 1 m (Hain, 1990) to 800 m (Powell, 1960). Marseniopsis syozvaensis Numanami and Okutani, 1991 Marseniopsis syowaensis Numanami and Okutani, 1991: 58, figs. 7A-F, 9C (radula), pl. 1, figs. 1-2; Numanami, 1996: 99, figs. 65A-F, 66C (radula). Material studied: 3 spm. (50.1 x 45.1 - 50.1 x 45.1 mm), PI5. Remarks: The same differences as the similar species M. mollis (Smith, 1902) are indicated above and were estab- lished by Numanami and Okutani (1991). Distribution: Only known from Syowa (Numanami and Okutani, 1991; Numanami, 1996) and Peter I Island (new record); from 5 m (Numanami, 1996) to 126 m (new record). Family Naticidae Forbes, 1838 Genus Falsilunatia Powell, 1951 Falsilunatia delicatula (Smith, 1902) (Fig. 29) Natica delicatula Smith, 1902: 206, pl. 24, fig. 6; 1907a: 5; Thiele, 1912: 199, pl. 12, figs. 16-17. Falsilunatia delicatula: Dell, 1990: 148, figs. 237, 256-257, 269 (radula); Troncoso et al. 2001: 95, figs. 15, 46 (radula). Material studied: 1 spm. (5.5 x 6.0 mm), MB4; 1 spm. (10.0 x 11.0 mm), PI5; 4 spm. (4.0 x 4.2 - 5.2 x 5.5 mm), PI8. Remarks: The diameter (D) of the shell is greater than its height (H), the holotype having a D/H ratio of 1.03. On the other hand, similar species such as F. soluta (Gould, 1848), F.fartilis (Watson, 1881), F. notocardensis Dell, 1990, F. eltanini Dell, 1990 and F. xantha (Watson, 1881), differ in other features, such as thicker and / or higher shells. This species was consid- ered a júnior synonym of Amauropsis grísea (Martens, 1878) by Cernohorsky (1977), but Dell (1990) concluded that F. delicatula is a distinct species based on examination of several samples. Distribution: Cited for the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003); South Shet- land Islands (Dell, 1990), Peter I Island and off Thurston Island (new records), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Dell, 1990), Cape Adare (Smith, 1902), Balleny Islands (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912) and Kerguelen Islands (Troncoso et al., 2001); from 40 m (Troncoso et al., 2001) to 1890 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Pseudamauropsis Egorova, 2007 Pseudamauropsis anderssoni (Strebel, 1906) (Fig. 30) Natica anderssoni Strebel, 1906: 142, pl. 11, figs. 67a-b; 1908: 61, pl. 5, figs. 64a-b. 64 ALDEA and TroncOSO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Amauropsis anderssoni : Powell, 1951: 116, pl. 10, figs. 58-59, J44 (radula); Castellanos and Landoni, 1990: 19, pl. 3, fig. 34; Dell, 1990: 140, figs. 245, 265 (radula); Branch et al., , 1991: 57 (key); Pas- torino, 2005: 252, figs. 102-113; Zelaya, 2005: 120, fig. 26. Pseudamauropsis anderssoni: Egorova, 2007: figs. 2d, 6v (radula), 7-1 (map), table 1. Amauropsis powelli Dell, 1990: 144, figs. 246, 268 (radula); Zelaya, 2005: 120. Pseudamauropsis powelli : Egorova, 2007: figs. 2e, 7-6 (map), table 1. Material studied: 2 sh. (8.6 x 8.6 - 8.8 x 8.5 mm), PI6; 1 spm. (9.0 x 8.2 mm), PI7; 2 sh. and 1 spm. (8.0 x 8.0 - 8.2 x 8.0 mm), PA25. Remarks: The deep and narrow open umbilicus, partially occluded by the parietal callus, marks the difference with the other species of the genus. Dell (1990) described A. powelli based on the open umbilicus, but Pastorino (2005) presented a pattern of variation in samples from the same geographic locations as DelTs specimens, conclud- ing that A. powelli is a júnior synonym of P. anderssoni. Egorova (2007) described the genus Pseudamauropsis based on morphometric analyses and compar- isons of the morphospecies Natica prasina Watson, 1881, N. suturalis Watson, 1881, N. anderssoni Strebel, 1908, N. aureolutea Strebel, 1908, N. georgiana Strebel, 1908, N. subpallescens Strebel, 1908, N. godfroyi Lamy, 1910, Lunatia? bransfieldensis Preston, 1916, Amauropsis? rossiana Smith, 1907 and A. powelli Dell, 1990 with the northern hemisphere species Amauropsis islándica (Gmelin, 1791), situating the species under this new genus and removing it from the genus Amauropsis Morch, 1857. However, her study did not consider the previous revisión of the group (Pas- torino, 2005). Distribution : South Georgia Island (Strebel, 1908; Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; Zelaya, 2005), Falkland /Malvinas Islands (Strebel, 1906; Strebel, 1908; Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Penín- sula and Peter I Island (new records), and Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Branch et al., 1991); from 12 m (Strebel, 1908) to 578 m (Dell, 1990). Pseudamauropsis aureolutea (Strebel, 1908) (Fig. 31) Natica aureolutea Strebel, 1908: 63, pl. 5, figs. 63a-b. Amauropsis aureolutea: Powell, 1951: 116, fig. J42 (radula); Dell, 1990: 142, figs. 251, 266 (radula); Pastorino, 2005: 253, figs. 114-123; Zelaya, 2005: 120, fig. 27. Pseudamauropsis aureolutea: Egorova, 2007: figs. 2v, 3a-v, 5g (operculum), 6a (radula), 7-2 (map), table 1. Natica subpallescens Strebel, 1908: 62, pl. 5, fig. 67. Pseudamauropsis subpallescens: Egorova, 2007: fig. 7-10 (map), table 1. Natica georgiana Strebel, 1908: 62, pl. 5, fig. 65a-b. Amauropsis georgianus: Powell, 1951: 117; Castellanos and Landoni, 1990: 20, pl. 3, fig. 29g; Numanami, 1996: 109, figs. 70A-B, C (radula); Zelaya, 2005: 120. Pseudamauropsis georgianus: Egorova, 2007: figs. 5e (operculum), 7-4 (map), table 1. Natica godfroyi Lamy, 1910a: 322; 1911a: 12, pl. 1, figs. 10-11. Pseudamauropsis godfroyi: Egorova, 2007: fig. 7-5 (map), table 1. Lunatia bransfieldensis Preston, 1916: 270, fig. 2. Pseudamauropsis bransfieldensis: Egorova, 2007: fig. 7-3 (map), table 1. ? Natica xantha Watson: Lamy, 1911b: 23, fig. 1 (no Watson, 1881). Amauropsis rossiana Smith: Hain, 1990: 49, pl. 3, figs. 3a-b, pl. 20, fig. 8 (radula), pl. 21, fig. 1 (radula) (no Smith, 1907). Material studied: 3 spm. (15.0 x 14.6 - 18.0 x 16.9 mm), PI8; 1 sh. (13.1 x 12.1 mm), MB11; 1 spm. (11.1 x 10.1 mm), PA20; 1 spm. (8.5 x 8.0 mm), MB37; 1 spm. (13.5 x 13.0 mm), MB38; 1 spm. (13.0 x 11.4 mm), PA39; 11 spm. (8.2 x 8.0 - 24.1 x 22.1 mm), LOW. 65 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Remarks: The similar A. rossiana Smith, 1907 differs in having a higher spire and a spiral rib on the penultimate whorl. Pas- torino (2005) considered Strebel' s (1908) species Natica subpallescens and N. geor- giana as júnior synonyms, because all species, including N. aureolutea, were described from juvenile specimens with few significant differences; also he sus- pected that the little-known N. godfroyi Lamy, 1910 and Lunatia? bransfieldensis Preston, 1916 might be júnior synonyms as well, and reported the misidentifica- tion of some specimens as Falsilunatia xantha (Watson, 1881) and as A. rossiana Smith, 1907 (see Pastorino, 2005). Distribution : Widespread West dis- tribution in the South Sandwich (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990), South Georgia (Strebel, 1908; Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; Pastorino, 2005; Zelaya, 2005) and South Orkney Islands (Dell, 1990), Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990) and Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Strebel, 1908), South Shetland Islands (Lamy, 1911a; Preston, 1916; Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Peninsula, Bellingshausen Sea and Peter I Island (new records), and 34° E and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from 6 m (Strebel, 1908) to 1324 m (new record). Family Epitoniidae Berry, 1910 Genus Acirsa Mórch, 1857 Acirsa antárctica (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 32) Scala antárctica Smith, 1907a: 8, pl. 1, figs. 10-10b. Epitonium antarcticum: Smith, 1915: 64. Acirsa antárctica: Powell, 1951: 115; 1957: 131; 1958: 187; Dell, 1990: 123, fig. 203. Material studied: 1 spm. (8.6 x 3.3 mm), MB32. Remarks : Its generic placement is un- certain, because it has been cited as Acirsa, but Neville (1997) located it in the genus Opalia H. and A. Adams, 1853. Comparisons with other epitoniids reveal that it differs from the similar species A. annectens Powell, 1951 in having a strong sculpture but a weaker basal rib. Distribution : Bellingshausen Sea (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Smith, 1915; Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990), Kerguelen Islands (Powell, 1957), Crozet Islands (Griffiths et al., 2003) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 8 m (Dell, 1990) to 1847 m (new record). Family Eulimidae Troschel, 1853 Genus Hemiaclis Sars, 1878 Hemiaclis incolorata (Thiele, 1912) (Fig. 33) Alaba incolorata Thiele, 1912: 201; pl. 12, fig. 19; Egorova, 1982: 31, fig. 145. Hemiaclis incolorata: Dell, 1990: 128, figs. 213-216; Numanami, 1996: 129, fig. 80F; Engl, 2004a: 11, fig. 1. Material studied: 1 spm. (4.1 x 1.9 mm), PA39. Remarks : Comparisons revealed that this species has no related ones in the Southern Ocean, as shown in the well developed discussion by Engl (2004a). Distribution : Weddell Sea and South Sandwich Islands (Engl, 2004a), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (new record), Ross Sea óó ALDEA and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; 2003) and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from Egorova, 1982), ca. 40° E (Griffiths et al., 157 m (new record) to 1437 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Melanella Bowdich, 1822 Melanella antárctica (Strebel, 1908) (Fig. 34) Eulima antárctica Strebel, 1908: 65, pl. 6, figs. 91a-c; Melvill and Standen, 1912: 353; Thiele, 1912: pl. 12, fig. 30. Balcis antárctica: Powell, 1951: 113; Castellanos, 1990: 27, pl. 3, fig. 27; Hain, 1990: 45, pl. 2, figs. 9a-b. Melanella antárctica: Engl, 2004a: 12, fig. 3. Material studied: 4 spm. (3.9 x 1.3 - 4.1 x 1.6 mm), PI8; 1 spm. (broken), MB13; 1 spm. (3.5 x 1.7 mm), PA22; 7 spm. (1.6 x 0.7 - 3.6 x 1.1 mm), MB38. Remarks : Engl (2004a) studied Antarctic Melanella species, not conclud- ing on the affinity between this species and the similar species M. subantarctica (Strebel, 1908) from South Georgia Island, that possesses a higher spire similar to M. convexa (Smith, 1907). Other Antarctic species such as M. soli- taria (Smith, 1915) and M. exulata (Smith, 1915) differ in having the columellar axis arched; M. boscheineni Engl, 2004, M. sankurieae Engl, 2004 and M. tumidula (Thiele, 1912) differ in having a higher and narrow spire with more whorls; and M. guenteri Engl, 2004 is a conic and shiny species with fíat whorls. Distribution : South Sandwich Islands (Powell, 1951), Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Strebel, 1908), South Shetland Islands (Engl, 2004a), Burdwood Bank (Melvill and Standen, 1912), Western Antarctic Peninsula, Bellingshausen Sea and Peter I Island (new records); from 90 m (new record) to 5194 m (Engl, 2004a). Family Cerithiopsidae H. and A. Adams, 1854 Genus Cerithiopsilla Thiele, 1912 Cerithiopsilla antárctica (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 35) Lovenella antárctica Smith, 1907a: 10, pl. 2, fig. 6-6a; Hedley, 1911: 5. Cerithiopsilla antárctica: Thiele, 1912: 205, pl. 12, fig. 28; Smith, 1915: 70; Hedley, 1916: 49; Powell, 1958: 186; Egorova, 1982: 33, figs. 151-152. Material studied: 1 spm. (6.0 x 2.1 mm), PA22. Remarks: Several species of this genus and of some related ones (e.g.. Cerithiella Verrill, 1882) described from the Southern Ocean, reveal the limita- tions of any taxonomic revisión. Cerithiopsilla bisculpta (Strebel, 1908), C. charcoti (Lamy, 1906) and C. cincta Thiele, 1912 are the most similar species to C. antárctica, and they share a common pattern of sculpture with 3-4 spiral cords crossed by axial striae, therefore an examination and compari- son of type specimens will reveal the taxonomic status of these species. Cerithiopsilla gaussiana Egorova, 1972 lacks axial sculpture; C. austrina (Hedley, 1911), C. liouvillei (Lamy, 1910) and C. georgiana (Pfeffer, 1886) differ in having only two spiral cords; and C. burdwoodiana (Melvill and Standen, 1912) is distinguished by its granulóse surface. Strebel (1908) and Thiele (1912) have situated a considerable number of species in the genus Cerithiella, which 67 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 differs in having a smooth, stout and bulging protoconch of about two whorls. Distribution: Western Antarctic Península (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 45 to 500 m (Egorova, 1982). Cerithiopsilla austrina (Hedley, 1911) (Fig. 36) Lovenella austrina Hedley, 1911: 5, pl. 1, fig. 7. Cerithiopsilla austrina: Thiele, 1912: 205, pl. 12, fig. 29; Powell, 1958: 186; Arnaud, 1972: 122; Egorova, 1982: 34, fig. 153. Material studied: 2 spm. (6.1 x 2.2 - 6.6 x 2.1 mm), MAR. Remarks : It is very similar to Cerithiella erecta Thiele, 1912, but the species of that genus have a smooth and bulbose protoconch. Distribution : Weddell Sea ca. 10° W (Griffiths et al., 2003), Western Antarc- tic Península (new record), Ross Sea (Hedley, 1911; Arnaud, 1972) to Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 0 m (Arnaud, 1972) to 385 m (Egorova, 1982). Family Muricidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Trophon Montfort, 1810 Trophon coulmanensis coulmanensis Smith, 1907 (Fig. 37) Trophon coulmanensis Smith, 1907a: 3, pl. 1, figs. 4-4b; Thiele, 1912: 212; Smith, 1915: 73, pl. 1, fig. 14; Hedley, 1916: 61, pl. 9, fig. 99; Cernohorsky, 1977: 115, fig. 14; Egorova, 1982: 38, fig. 168; Dell, 1990: 201, figs. 356-359. Material studied: 1 spm. (17.8 x 12.0 mm), PA22. Remarks: The higher spire and a little expanded external lip, giving a pyri- form aperture and less globose form, mark the difference with T. shackletoni paucilamellatus Powell, 1951. Numanami (1996) described the subspecies T. coul- manensis multilamellatus from East Antárctica, based on the different (Right page) Figure 17. Leptocollonia innocens , 6.0 x 6.3 mm, MB37. Figure 18. Dickdellia labioflecta, 2.9 x 3.4 mm, PA22. Figure 19. Eatoniella glacialis, 2.8 x 1.9 mm, PA21. Figure 20. Eatoniella kerguelenensis regularis , 3.3 x 2.0 mm, PA20. Figure 21. Eatoniella cf. kerguele- nensis kerguelenensis , 2.8 x 1.5 mm, PA39. Figure 22. Onoba gélida, 2.2 x 1.6 mm, PI8. Figure 23. Onoba kergueleni , 3.0 x 1.4 mm, PI8. Figure 24. Onoba turqueti , 2.1 x 1.1 mm, Pl 5 . Figure 25. Powellisetia deserta , 2.5 x 1.5 mm, PA41. Figure 26. Torellia insignis , 16.9 x 21.0 mm, LOW. Figure 27. Torellia mirabilis , 22.0 x 30.0 mm, PA39. Figure 28. Torellia planispira , 4.0 x 5.8 mm, PA24. Figure 29. Falsilunatia delicatula , 4.6 x 4.7 mm, PI8. Figure 30. Pseudamauropsis anderssoni , 8.6 x 8.6 mm, PI6. Figure 31. Pseudamauropsis aureolutea , 15.9rx 14.0 mm, PI8. Figure 32. Acirsa antárctica , 8.6 x 3.3 mm, MB32. Figure 33. Hemiaclis incol- orata , 4.1 x 1.9 mm, PA39. Figure 34. Melanella antárctica , 3.9 x 1.3 mm, PI8. Figure 35. Cerithiopsilla antárctica , 6.0 x 2.1 mm, PA22. Figure 36. Cerithiopsilla austrina , 6.1 x 2.2 mm, MAR. (Página derecha) Figuras 17-36. Ver los nombres científicos en el rótulo en inglés. 68 ALDEA AND TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica 69 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 number of lamellae, and he commented that the species T. coulmanensis ( s.s .) "having no expansión in basal varices"; therefore the BENTART samples, that do not have expansión, correspond to subspecies T. coulmanensis coulmanensis. Although our individual is not as elon- gate as the holotype, which has a D / H ratio of 0.54, Hedley (1916) reported a specimen with a ratio of 0.67, the same as our specimen, indicating variability in D/H ratio. Distribution : South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Penin- sula (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a; Dell, 1990), 163° E (Smith, 1915), Terre Adélie (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Dell, 1990) and Kergue- len Islands (Dell, 1990); from 183 m (Smith, 1907a) to 1674 m (Dell, 1990). Trophon cuspidarioides Powell, 1951 (Fig. 38) Trophon cuspidarioides Powell, 1951: 155, pl. 9, figs. 50, M89; Castellanos and Landoni, 1993a: 7, pl. 2, fig. 25; Pastorino, 2002: 359 (text), figs. 35-37, 43b, tab. 1; Zelaya, 2005: 122. Material studied: 3 spm. (15.0 x 6.5 - 18.3 x 7.4 mm), PI7. Remarks : Its resemblance to some Antarctic species with a long siphon was discussed by Pastorino (2002), in this sense T. scolopax Watson, 1882 presents a longer and straighter siphon, T. septus Watson, 1882 presents more conspicuous lamellae and T. arnaudi Pastorino, 2002, though similar by its curved siphon, dif- fers in having a reticulated surface with spiral and axial lamellae. Moreover, some specimens of T. drygalskii Thiele, 1912 (see below) with a long siphon, may resemble it, but the sculpture and a more angulose shape make that species different. Sub-Antarctic species with similar shape were compared by Houart and Sellanes (2006), where T. veronicae Pastorino, 1999 and T. condei Houart, 2003, described from larger specimens, have a higher spire, and T. vangoethemi Houart, 2003 can have abapical lamellae on shoulders. Distribution: Only reported from South Georgia Island between 120 and 204 m (Powell, 1951) and Peter I Island at 410 m (new records). a- Trophon drygalskii Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 39) Trophon drygalskii Thiele, 1912: 213, pl. 13, fig. 25; Smith, 1915: 73; Powell, 1958: 197; Egorova, 1982: 38, fig. 165; Dell, 1990: 203, figs. 354-355; Hain, 1990: 62, pl. 6, fig. 8, pl. 25, fig. 1; Numanami, 1996: 131, figs. 85A-C, D (radula). Material studied: 3 spm. (3.2 x 1.6 - 11.9 x 5.2 mm), MB30; 2 spm. (7.0 x 3.1 - 12.1 x 5.0 mm), MB31. Remarks: Spiral ridges give the whorls a shape which is not globose, but with an angular shoulder, separating this species from others with a long siphon. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Shetland Island and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), ca. 40° E (Griffiths et al., 2003) and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from 193 m (Powell, 1958) to 1814 m (new record). Trophon echinolamellatus Powell, 1951 (Fig. 40) Trophon echinolamellatus Powell, 1951: 152, pl. 9, figs. 44-45, L83 (radula). 70 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Material studied: 1 spm. (65.1 x 37.2 mm), LOW. Remarks: The fusiform shape with the anterior aperture expanded and a sculpture with flat-spiral cords crossed by dense axial lamellae, sinuate exactly above the Crossing with the spiral cord "produced into hollow recurved spines" (Powell, 1951), give a partic- ular surface and shape which are distinct from other species with fine lamellae such as T. geversianus (Pallas, 1774), from the Southern end of South America. Distribution: Only reported in the South Shetland Islands (Powell, 1951; this study); from 115 m (new record) to 342 m (Powell, 1951). Trophon longstaffi Smith, 1907 (Fig. 41) Trophon longstaffi Smith, 1907a: 3, pl. 1, figs. 3-3d; Hedley, 1911: 8; Smith, 1915: 73; Hedley 1916: 61; Eales, 1923: 31, figs. 31-33; Arnaud, 1972: 131; Cernohorsky, 1977: 116, fig. 16; Dell, 1990: 205, figs. 351-352; Numanami, 1996: 134, figs. 87A-C, D (radula). Material studied: 2 spm. (9.0 x 6.4 - 13.3 x 9.0 mm), PI5; 2 spm. (18.1 x 11.0 - 21.0 x 13.0 mm), PI8. Remarks : Axial lamellae are shorter, thinner and more fragüe than in T. shackletoni shackletoni Hedley, 1911, which is similar in shape, but with more conspicuous lamellae, prolonged on shoulders. Distribution: Cited for the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003), Eastern Antarctic Península (Smith, 1907a), Peter I Island (new record), Ross Sea (Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Hedley, 1916; Arnaud, 1972) and 40° E (Numanami, 1996); from 5 m (Arnaud, 1972; Numanami, 1996) to 1080 m (Dell, 1990). Trophon minutus Strebel, MS. Melvill and Standen, 1907 (Fig. 42) Trophon minutus Strebel, MS. Melvill and Standen, 1907: 137, figs. 7-7a; Strebel, 1908: 44, pl. 4, figs. 47a-b; Melvill and Standen, 1912: 354; Powell, 1951: 155; Oliver and Picken, 1984: 113, figs. 33a- b; Dell, 1990: 203, fig. 353; Castellanos and Landoni, 1993a: 13, pl. 4, fig. 48; Zelaya, 2005: 122. Trophon condensatus Hedley, 1916: 60, pl. 9, fig. 98; Arnaud, 1972: 131, fig. 21. Material studied: 1 sh. (4.5 x 3.0 mm), PA20. Remarks: Assuming the synonymy of T. condensatus Hedley, 1916 proposed by Dell (1990), the number of axial lamel- lae is widely variable, as same as other species of the genus. Distribution: Cited for the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003), South Sandwich (Dell, 1990), South Georgia (Strebel, 1908), South Orkney (Melvill and Standen, 1907), Signy (Oliver and Picken, 1984) and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Península (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972) and Kerguelen Islands (Cantera and Arnaud, 1985); from 2 m (Oliver and Picken, 1984) to 265 m (Dell, 1990). Family Buccinidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Antarctodomus Dell, 1972 Antarctodomus thielei (Powell, 1958) (Fig. 43) 71 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Bathydomus thielei Powell, 1958: 194, pl. 3, fig 8; Arnaud, 1972: 129, fig. 20. Antarctodomus thielei : Dell, 1990: 168; Hain, 1990: 1996: 147, figs. 96A-C, D (radula). Material studied: 2 spm. (29.2 x 18.5 - 36.1 x 22.0 Remarles : This species is variable in shape (Dell, 1990), and specimens collected over several expeditions presented a wide variation in diam- eter/height ratio (D/H): 0.56 in holo- type, 0.60 in a specimen from Dell (1990), 0.59 in Hain's (1990) specimen and 0.64 in Numanami's (1996) spec- imen. Antarctodomus okutanii Numa- nami, 1996, variable in D/H ratio as 57, pl. 5, fig. 7, pl. 23, fig. 4 (radula); Numanami, mm), LOW. well, was described based on radular characteristics. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Shetland Islands (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), Mac Robertson Land (Dell, 1990), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), cited ca. 40° E (Griffiths et al., 2003) and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from 100 m (Dell, 1990) to 695 m (Hain, 1990). Genus Chlanidota Martens, 1878 Chlanidota signeyana Powell, 1951 (Fig. 44) Chlanidota signeyana Powell, 1951: 141, pl. 8, figs. 34-35, L74 (radula), N129 (operculum); Dell, 1990: 177, fig. 307; Harasewych and Kantor, 1999: 267, figs. 9-11, table 5. Cominella vestita var. elongata Lamy, 1910a: 318; 1911a: 6, pl. 1, fig. 6. Chlanidota elongata: Powell, 1951: 140, fig. L76 (radula); Cernohorsky, 1977: 110; Hain, 1990: 55, pl. 5, fig. 4, pl. 23, fig. 1 (radula); Numanami, 1996: 160, figs. 106A- F, G-H (radula); Numanami et al. , 1996: 211-212 (tables), 213 (text), pl. 2, figs. 3-4. Chlanidota lamyi Dell, 1990: 182, fig. 310 ( nom . nov. for Cominella vestita var. elongata Lamy, 1910, not Cominella elongata Dunker, 1857). Chlanidota cf. lamyi : Dell, 1990 182, fig. 315. Chlanidota pyriformis Dell, 1990: 182, fig. 309. Material studied: 8 spm. (8.4 x 5.6 - 34.2 x 21.2 mm), PI5; 5 spm. (23.1 x 16.0 - 28.2 x 18.0 mm), PI6; 2 spm. (12.0 x 9.0 - 26.2 x 16.1 mm), PI7; 1 spm. (19.4 x 11.3 mm), MB13; 4 spm. (22.3 x 12.9 - 32.9 x 20.2 mm), PA24; 2 spm. (27.5 x 17.1 - 29.0 x 17.8 mm), PA25; 24 spm. (14.4 x 9.6 - 25.0 x 15.3 mm), MB34; 1 spm. (20.7 x 11.8 mm), PA39; 1 spm. (19.0 x 13.2 mm), PA40; 5 spm. (12.5 x 9.0 - 22.0 x 14.2 mm), LOW. Remarles: Harasewych and Kantor (1999) ha ve revised the genus and syn- onymized many species; also they comment that in examination of individ- uáis, some are strongly sculptured with pilóse projections on the spiral cords, but these specimens differ from C. pilosa Powell, 1951 in not having a densely pilóse periostracum. This is a variable species in shape, there are some very thin individuáis with a thin columellar callus, and others which are very thick with a well developed columellar callus, resembling therefore C. invenusta Harasewych and Kantor, 1999, which differs in having a larger operculum. Distribution: Cited ca. the South Sandwich Islands (Griffiths et al., 2003); South Georgia Island (Dell, 1990), Weddell Sea (Dell, 1990; Hain, 1990), South Orkney (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990), Signy (Dell, 1990) and South Shetland Islands (Lamy, 1911a; Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea and Peter I Island (new records), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Enderby Land and Syowá (Nu- MANAMI ET AL., 1996), 24° E (NUMANAMI, 1996) and Queen Maud (Harasewych and Kantor, 1999); from 10 m (Hain, 1990) to 1116 m (Dell, 1990). 72 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Genus Lusitromina Harasewych and Kantor, 2004 Lusitromina abyssorum (Lus, 1993) (Fig. 45) Tromina abyssorum Lus, 1993: 178. Lusitromina abyssorum: Harasewych and Kantor, 2004: 26, figs. 99-137, table 5. Material studied: 1 spm. (9.0 x 6.1 mm), MB26. Remarks : Harasewych and Kantor (2004) have revised the genus and they also placed L. abyssicola (Clarke, 1961) (described as T. bella abyssicola ) from the South Atlantic Ocean in this genus. L. abyssicola differs in having a more rounded shape with more convex whorls without the characteristic shoul- der of L. abyssorum. Distribution : Known only from the South Sandwich and South Georgia Islands (Harasewych and Kantor, 2004), South Orkney (Lus, 1993), South- east of Tierra del Fuego Island (56° S, 62° W) (Harasewych and Kantor, 2004) and Bellingshausen Sea (new record); from 1920 m (new record) to 5480 m (Harasewych and Kantor, 2004). Genus Neobuccinum Smith, 1879 Neobuccinum eatoni (Smith, 1875) (Fig. 46) Buccinopsis eatoni Smith, 1875: 68. Neobuccinum eatoni: Smith, 1879: 169, pl. 9, fig. 1; Watson, 1886: 216; Smith, 1902: 202; Lamy, 1906b: 2; Smith, 1907a: 1; Melvill and Standen, 1907: 139; Hedley, 1911: 6, pl. 1, figs. 11, 12 (eggs); Lamy, 1911a: 5; Thiele, 1912: 248; Smith, 1915: 72; Hedley, 1916: 59, pl. 9, fig. 97; Eales, 1923: 28; Powell, 1951: 143; Powell, 1957: 132; 1958: 193; Arnaud, 1972: 128; Egorova, 1982: 41, figs. 51 (radula), 172-176; Dell, 1990: 165, figs. 280-282; Hain 1990: 56, pl. 5, figs. 6a-e, pl. 23, fig. 3 (radula); Numanami, 1996: 143, figs. 94A-B, D-G, C (radula); Numanami et al., 1996: 211-212 (tables), 214 (text), pl. 2, fig. 2; Troncoso et al., 2001: 97, fig. 19. Neobuccinum eytoni (sic): Thiele, 1912: 211. Neobuccinum praeclarum Strebel, 1908: 31, pl. 3, figs. 38a-g. Chlanidota smithi Powell, 1958: 192, pl. 3, fig. 3; Harasewych and Kantor, 1999: 291: fig. 27. Material studied: 2 spm. (28.0 x 15.0 - 40.0 x 25.0 mm), MB1; 6 spm. (35.0 x 20.0 - 53.0 x 30.0 mm), PI5; 2 spm. (48.0 x 29.1 - 51.5 x 32.5 mm), PIÓ; 51 spm. (31.3 x 20.0 - 55,9 x 33.9 mm), PI8; 1 spm. (31.8 x 22.1 mm), MB13; 20 spm. (36.0 x 21.5 - 54.2 x 27.7 mm), PA22; 7 spm. (34.8 x 22.0 - 49.1 x 29.8 mm), PA23. Remarks: Although it is variable in shape, this is a well known species. Hedley (1916) maintained that N. preclarum Strebel, 1908 is a júnior synonym, because it was described based on the variability of some speci- mens that may have spiral Unes. Fur- thermore, Harasewych and Kantor (1999) considered Chlanidota smithi Powell, 1958 as another júnior synonym. Distribution: Widespread Antarctic and Sub-Antarctic distribution, but not cited for the South Georgia Island ñor the Magellanic zone. Reported in the South Sandwich (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990), South Orkney (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Dell, 1990) and Signy Islands (Dell, 1990), Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990) and Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Strebel, 1908), South Shetland Islands (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990) and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1906b, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea (Lamy, 1911a; this study) and Peter I Island (Dell, 1990; this study), off Thurston Island (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1915; Eales, 1923; Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990), Cape Adare (Smith, 1902), 73 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Balleny Islands (Dell, 1990), Common- wealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Heard (Watson, 1886) and Kerguelen Islands (Smith, 1879; Watson, 1886; Powell, 1957; Troncoso et al., 2001), Kemp Land (Powell, 1958), Enderby Land (Numanami et al., 1996) and Syowa (Numanami, 1996; Numanami et al., 1996); from 4 to 2350 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Notoficula Thiele, 1917 Notoficula bouveti (Thiele, 1912) (Fig. 47) Cominella bouveti Thiele, 1912: 270, pl. 19, fig. 13. Notoficula bouveti: Powell, 1958: 193; Oliver, 1983: Material studied: 1 spm. (11.2 x 8.7 mm), LOW. Remarks: Oliver (1983) discussed the systematic position of this genus in Antárctica, the affinities between species and its relationship with Lamellariacea. The species N. signyensis Oliver, 1983, differs in having a more globose last whorl, with a broader aperture and a shorter spire. (in part), figs. ld-e; Dell, 1990: 168, fig. 287. Distribution: Cited ca. 10° W (Grif- FITHS et al., 2003); South Shetland Islands (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), from the Amery Ice Shelf to the Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), and Bouvet Island (Thiele, 1912; Linse, 2006); from 86 m (new record) to 540 m (Powell, 1958). Genus Pareuthria Strebel, 1905 Pareuthria regulus (Watson, 1882) (Fig. 48) Fusus regulus Watson, 1882: 378; 1886: 204, pl. 12, fig. 7. Pareuthria regulus: Powell, 1957: 132; Branch et al, 1991: 59 (key); Troncoso et al, 2001: 98, fig. 21. Material studied: 1 spm. and 1 sh. (6.9 x 3.0 - 8.1 x 3.5 mm), PI5; 1 spm. (6.5 x 3.0 mm), PA39. Remarks: P. turriformis Egorova, 1982, differs in having axial ribs crossed by spiral striae. P. innocens (Smith, 1907), differing in having a shorter siphon, being smoother and having a sculpture which is stronger spirally than axially. P. plicatula Thiele, 1912 has stronger and denser spiral ribs and no spiral sculp- ture. P. hoshiaii Numanami, 1996 is a species with a poorly developed shell sculpture. Dell (1990) remarked that the little known P. valdiviae Thiele, 1925, has an affinity with this species. Distribution: East Antárctica in the Kerguelen (Watson, 1886; Powell, 1957; Troncoso et al., 2001), Crozet (Griffiths et al., 2003), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Branch et al., 1991); West Antárctica in Western Antarctic Peninsula and Peter I Island (new records); from 0 to 527 m (Branch ET AL., 1991). Genus Probuccinum Thiele, 1912 Probuccinum tenerum (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 49) Neobuccinum tenerum Smith, 1907a: 2, pl. 1, figs. 2-2a; Smith, 1915: 72. 74 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Probuccinum tenerum : Thiele, 1912: 211, pl. 13, figs. 21-21a, pl. 16, fig. 21 (radula); Dell, 1990: 171, figs. 279, 283-284; Hain, 1990: 58, pl. 5, fig. 9, pl. 23, fig. 6 (radula). Probuccinum tenuistriatum Hedley, 1916: 58, pl. 8, figs. 95-96; Powell, 1958: 194; Egorova, 1982: 42, figs. 52 (radula), 178-179; Hain, 1990: 58, pl. 5, fig. 10, pl. 23, fig. 7 (radula); Numanami, 1996: 157, figs. 104A- G, H (radula); Numanami et al.r 1996: 212 (table, text) pl. 2, fig. 10. Material studied: 1 spm. (17.0 x 8.2 mm), PA25. Remarks : Probuccinum delicatulum Powell, 1951 and P. angulatum Powell, 1951 differ in having a straighter spire with slightly convex whorls. The syn- onymy of P. tenuistriatum Hedley, 1916 was proposed by Dell (1990), maintain- ing that the double labial varix and details of sculpture, the main character- istics of P. tenuistriatum, correspond to the characteristic variability and changes through development of the species. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain 1990), South Orkney and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study) and Peter I Island (Dell, 1990), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907a, 1915; Dell, 1990), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982; Dell, 1990), from Amery Ice Shelf to Enderby (Powell, 1958), Syowa (Nu- MANAMI ET AL., 1996) and 24° E (Nu- manami, 1996); from 30 m (Numanami et al., 1996) to 673 m (Hain, 1990). Genus Prosipho Thiele, 1912 Prosipho chordatus (Strebel, 1908) (Fig. 50) Sipho? chordatus Strebel, 1908: 30, pl. 2, figs. 29a-c. Prosipho chordatus: Powell, 1951: 146; Dell, 1990: 197 (text), fig. 335; Castellanos, 1992b: 18, pl. 2, fig. 20; Zelaya, 2005: 126, fig. 43. Material studied: 1 spm. (8.0 x 3.9 mm), PI8. Remarks : The species P. spiralis Thiele, 1912 is very cióse in shape and sculpture, but it has one whorl less, being slightly shorter and with slightly stronger spiral chords over the entire shell. Dell (1990) discussed the affinity between P. spiralis and P. chordatus, con- tending that the two species would require critical comparison when more material is available from closer locali- ties. Also, it has a resemblance with P. antarctidis (Pelseneer, 1903) cited for the Bellingshausen Sea, but that species pre- sents wider first whorls. Distribution: Known only from South Georgia Island (Strebel, 1908; Powell, 1951; Zelaya, 2005) and Peter I Island (new record), although it was cited for the South Atlantic Ocean (Castellanos, 1992b) and Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003). The bathymetric distribution is from 90 m (new record) to 600 m (Castellanos, 1992b). Zelaya (2005) doubts the presence of this species in the South Atlantic Ocean after comparison of the original descrip- tion with the specimens figured by Castellanos (1992b) and the lack of these samples in museums. Prosipho hedleyi Powell, 1958 (Fig. 51) Prosipho hedleyi Powell, 1958: 195, pl. 2, fig. 7; Dell, 1990: 194, fig. 327. Material studied: 2 spm. (6.9 x 2.8 - 7.3 x 2.9 mm), PI8. 75 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Remarks: The closest species is P. tur- ritus Oliver and Picken, 1984, that differs mainly in having a smaller number of spiral cords at the base (4-5 vs. 6-9 in P. hedleyi ) and being wider in D/H ratio which varíes: 0.42-0.53 vs. 0.36-0.40 in P. hedleyi , according to Dell (1990). Distribution: Cited ca. 10° W in the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003); Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990), Peter I Island (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 64 to 472 m (Dell, 1990). Prosipho hunteri Hedley, 1916 (Fig. 52) Prosipho hunteri Hedley, 1916: 56, pl. 8, fig. 92; Powell, 1951: 147; Powell, 1958: 196; Arnaud, 1972: 130; Dell, 1990: 194, fig. 322; Hain, 1990: 60, pl. 6, fig. 2, pl. 24, fig. 3 (radula); Numanami, 1996: 165, figs. 110A-B, C (radula); Engl, 2004b: 1 (text), fig. 1; Zelaya, 2005: 126. Material studied: 2 spm. (5.3 x 2.8 - 5.8 x 3.0 mm), PA39. Remarks : Engl (2004b) established that P. hunteri may correspond to a varia- tion of P. nodosus Thiele, 1912, because both species share the characteristic of two nodulose spiral cords on each whorl and four in the last whorl; He also described P. enricoi Engl, 2004, a similar species from the South Shetland Islands, without indicating differences with P. hunteri, though he figured its holotype, that is distinguished in having slightly weaker spiral cords than P. enricoi. Sum- marizing, we agree with Engl (2004b) that a study comparing the material pub- lished from several expeditions (Thiele, 1912; Hedley, 1916; Powell, 1951, 1958; Arnaud, 1972; Dell, 1990; Hain, 1990; Engl, 2004b; this study) is necessary to clarify the relationship between P hunteri, P. nodosus and P. enricoi. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich (Dell, 1990) and South Georgia Islands (Powell, 1951), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study) and Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Terre Adélie (Arnaud, 1972), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), ca. 40° E (Grif- fiths et al., 2003) and 24° E (Numanami, 1996); from 45 m (Hain, 1990) to 464 m (Dell, 1990). Prosipho pellitus Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 53) Prosipho pellitus Thiele, 1912: 245, pl. 13, fig. 9; Powell, 1957: 133; Dell, 1990: 195, fig. 329; Zelaya, 2005: 126, fig. 45. Material studied: 1 spm. (4.1 x 2.0 mm), PI8. (Right page) Figure 37. Trophon coulmanensis coulmanensis , 17.8 x 12.0 mm, PA22. Figure 38. Trophon cuspidarioides , 15.0 x 6.5 mm, PI7. Figure 39. Trophon drygalskii, 12.1 x 5.0 mm, MB31. Figure 40. Trophon echinolamellatus , 65.1 x 37.2 mm, LOW. Figure 41. Trophon longstaffi, 21.0 x 13.0 mm, PI8. Figure 42. Trophon minutus, 4.5 x 3.0 mm, PA20. Figure 43. Antarctodomus thielei , 29.2 x 18.5 mm, LOW. Figure 44. Chlanidota signeyana , 34.2 x 21.2 mm, PI5. Figure 45. Lusitro- mina abyssorum , 9.0 x 6.1 mm, MB26. Figure 46. Neobuccinum eatoni , 48.0 x 29.1 mm, PI6. Figure 47. Notoficula bouveti , 11.2 x 8.7 mm, LOW. Figure 48. Pareuthria regulas, 8.1 x 3.5 mm, PI5. Figure 49. Probuccinum tenerum, 17.0 x 8.2 mm, PA25. Figure 50. Prosipho chordatus , 8.0 x 3.9 mm, PI8. Figure 51. Prosipho hedleyi, 7.3 x 2.9 mm, PI8. Figure 52. Prosipho hunteri, 5.3 x 2.8 mm, PA39. (Página derecha) Figuras 37-52. Ver los nombres científicos en el rótulo en inglés. 76 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica 77 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Remarles: Its main characteristic is the periostracum developed in conspic- uous axial lamellae, which distinguish it from other species similar in shape and sculpture, but not having lamellae - such as P. hedleyi Powell, 1958, P. turri- tus Oliver and Picken, 1984, P. gracilis Thiele, 1912 and P. glacialis Thiele, 1912. Distribution: Cited ca. 10° W from the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003); South Georgia (Dell, 1990; Zelaya, 2005), Peter I (new record) and Kerguelen Islands (Thiele, 1912; Powell, 1957); from 90 m (new record) to 150 m (Powell, 1957). Prosipho pusillus Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 54) Prosipho pusillus Thiele, 1912: 208, pl. 12, fig. 35; Egorova, 1982: 46, figs. 58 (radula), 193; Dell, 1990: 196, fig. 316. Material studied: 1 spm. (5.0 x 2.5 mm), PI8. Remarles: P. crassicostatus (Melvill and Standen, 1907) and P. aurora Hedley, 1916 are similar in shape, but have one whorl more and one spiral cord more per whorl, this being the last spiral cord on the suture. Distribution: Cited ca. 10° W in the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003); Peter I Island (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990) and Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982); from 90 m (new record) to 563 m (Dell, 1990). Prosipho rever sus Powell, 1958 (Fig. 55) Prosipho reversa Powell, 1958: 197, pl. 2, fig. 6; Dell, 1990: 196, fig. 341. Material studied: 1 spm. (broken), PA39. Remarles: Although we only found a fragment of a fresh shell with remains of soft parts, the spiral sculpture of two spiral cords on the penultimate whorl, being the adapical above the base, clearly differen- ciates this species from P. perversas Powell,1951 and P. contrarius Thiele, 1912. Distribution: Known only from the South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Penín- sula (new record) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 157 m (new record) to 220 m (Powell, 1958). Prosipho turritus Oliver and Picken, 1984 (Fig. 56) Prosipho turrita Oliver and Picken, 1984: 99, figs. 2a-b, 6a-d; Dell, 1990: 194 (text), fig. 328; Hain, 1990: 61, pl. 6, fig. 4, pl. 24, fig. 5 (radula). Cerithium georgianum Martens and Pfeffer: Melvill and Standen, 1907: 134 (no Martens and Pfeffer, 1886). Material studied: 1 spm. (5.6 x 2.4 mm), PA39. Remarles: Oliver and Picken (1984) examined individuáis assigned to Cerithium georgianum Martens and Pfeffer, 1886 by Melvill and Standen (1907 p. 134), and concluded that those specimens are co-specific with ' P. turritus. The species P. harrietae Engl and Schwabe, 2003 has a weaker sculpture and is narrower; also when considering the description of its radular characteris- 78 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica tics. P. hedleyi Powell is narrower as well (see above for remarks on P. hedleyi). Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Orkney (Melvill and Standen, 1907) and Signy Islands (Oliver and Picken, 1984), Western Antarctic Penín- sula (new record); from 2 m (Oliver and Picken, 1984) to 300 m (Hain, 1990). Family Volutidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Harpovoluta Thiele, 1912 Harpovoluta charcoti (Lamy, 1910) (Fig. 57) Buccinum charcoti Lamy, 1910a: 318; 1911a: 4, pl. 1, figs. 1-2. Harpovoluta charcoti: Thiele, 1912: 271; Powell, 1951: 164; Powell, 1958: 199; Dell, 1990: 218, figs. 365-366, 374-375, 383 (radula); Hain, 1990: 64, pl. 6, figs. lOa-d, pl. 25, fig. 3 (radula); Numanami, 1996: 195, figs. 134A- D, F (radula); Numanami et al., 1996: 211-212 (tables), 214 (text), pl. 2, figs. 6-7. Volutharpa charcoti: Smith, 1915: 72; Eales, 1923: 33 Harpovoluta vanhoeffeni Thiele, 1912: 213, pl. 14, fig. 1; Hedley, 1916: 53; Egorova, 1982: 36, fig. 163. Harpovoluta vanhoeffeni var. striatula Thiele, 1912: 214, pl. 14, fig. 2; Egorova, 1982: 37, figs. 48 (radula), 164. Material studied: 3 spm. (broken), PA19; 1 spm. (54.8 x 32.0 mm), PA22; 3 spm. (14.0 x 9.0 - 14.3 x 9.2 mm), PA23; 6 spm. (26.3 x 16.1 - 44.1 x 22.1 mm), PA39; 1 spm. (20.0 x 13.1 mm), LOW. Remarks: Based on the examination of many specimens, Dell (1990) con- cluded that the variability in shell pro- portions is definitive to place H. vanhoef- feni and H. vanhoeffeni var. striatula as júnior synonyms of H. charcoti. Distribution: South Sandwich Islands (Dell, 1990), Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), Scotia Sea and South Orkney Islands (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Lamy, 1911a; Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), 163° E (Smith, 1915), from Terre Adélie to Wilkes Land and Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Amery Ice-Shelf (Numanami et al., 1996), Mac Robertson Land (Powell, 1958), Enderby Land, Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996) and 34° E (Numanami, 1996); from 0 m (Numanami et al., 1996) to 1469 m (Dell, 1990). Family Conidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Belaturricula Powell, 1951 Belaturricula ergata (Hedley, 1916) (Fig. 58) Pontiothauma ergata Hedley, 1916: 55, pl. 8, figs. 85-87; Powell, 1958: 204, pl. 3, figs. 7, Cl-4; Egorova, 1982: 50, figs. 63a-b (radula), 204-205; Okutani, 1986: 279 (table), pl. 1, figs. 4-5; Dell, 1990: 245 (text), figs. 397, 418-419; Hain, 1990: 72, pl. 8, figs. 6a-d, pl. 27, fig. 2 (radula); Numanami, 1996: 224, figs. 159 A-C, D-E (radula). Belaturricula ergata: Kantor and Harasewych, 1999: 434 (text). Pontiothauma elgata (sic): Numanami et al., 1996: 211 (table), 213 (text), pl.3, fig. 3. Material studied: 1 spm. (18.0 x 7.9 mm), MB1. Remarks: Hedley (1916) described this species from two individuáis, one eroded and the other broken, but his description agrees with our specimen. Kantor and Harasewych (1999) studied the similar species B. gaini (Lamy, 1910) and assigned B. ergata to the genus Belaturricula because of its 79 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 affinity to B. gaini, which differs in having convex whorls, different from the concave-convex whorls of B. ergata. On the other hand, the shape and proportions of this species seem vari- able, because the holotype has a D/H ratio of 0.38 while the three specimens figured by Hain (1990) vary in 0.37-0.51 and those by Numanami (1996) in 0.33- 0.40. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), off Thurston Island (new record), Terre Adélie (Hedley, 1916), Wilkes Land (Powell, 1958), Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982), Mac Robertson Land to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996) and 24° E (Okutani, 1986; Numanami, 1996); from 100 to 695 m (Hain, 1990). Belaturricula gaini (Lamy, 1910) (Fig. 59) Sipho gaini Lamy, 1910a: 319; 1911a: 7, pl. 1, figs. 7-8. Prosipho? gaini: Thiele, 1912: 262. ?Chlanidota gaini: Powell, 1951: 142. Chlanidota gaini: Dell, 1990: 177 (text); Harasewych and Kantor, 1999: 293. Belaturricula gaini: Kantor and Harasewych, 1999: 430, figs. 1-4. Belaturricula antárctica Dell, 1990: 228, figs. 401, 431 (radula). Material studied: 1 spm. (20.0 x 8.1 mm), PA23; 2 spm. (15.3 x 6.9 - 53.9 x 19.5 mm), LOW. Remarks : Kantor and Harasewych (1999) redescribed this little known species and examined its alimentary System and radula, concluding that B. antárctica Dell, 1990 is a júnior synonym. Other species of this genus, B. turrita turrita (Strebel, 1908) and B. turrita mul- tispiralis Dell, 1990, are differentiated in having a sharper spiral sculpture. The relationship with B. ergata (Hedley, 1916) is discussed above (see B. ergata). Distribution : South Sandwich Islands (Dell, 1990), Eastern Antarctic Península (Kantor and Harasewych, 1999), South Orkney Islands (Dell, 1990; Kantor and Harasewych, 1999), South Shetland Islands (Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; Kantor and Harasewych, 1999; this study). Western Antarctic Península (new record) and Ross Sea (Dell, 1990; Kantor and Harasewych, 1999); from 97 m (new record) to 759 m (Dell, 1990). Family Turridae Swainson, 1840 Genus Aforia Dalí, 1889 Aforia magnifica (Strebel, 1908) (Fig. 60) ?Surcula magnifica Strebel, 1908: 19, pl. 2, figs. 23a-d. Aforia magnifica: Powell, 1951: 167, fig. M91 (radula); Powell, 1958: 201; Dell, 1990: 231, figs. 411- 412, 436 (radula); Hain, 1990: 69, pl. 7, figs. 8a-c, pl. 26, figs. 1-2 (radula); Numanami et al., 1996: 211 (table), 213 (text), pl. 3, figs. 1, 4. Material studied: 1 spm. (69.0 x 26.0 mm), PA18; 1 spm. (47.9 x 17.5 mm), PA21; 2 spm. (41.8 x 17.5 - 47.0 x 16.1 mm), LOW. Remarks: The main difference with the similar species A. multispiralis Dell, 1990, is in the number of spiral keels per whorl: two sharp keels on the spire whorls in A. multispiralis instead of the single rounded carina in A. mag- nifica. Dell (1990) noted the variability of the strength of sculpture between individuáis collected at different depths. 80 ALDEA AND TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Distribution : South Sandwich Islands (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990), Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990) and Eastern Antarctic Península (Strebel, 1908), South Orkney Islands (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands and Western Antarctic Península (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Amery Ice Shelf to Mac Robertson Land (Powell, 1958), Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996) and ca. 10° E (Griffiths et al., 2003); from 73 to 1890 m (Dell, 1990). Aforia multispiralis Dell, 1990 (Fig. 61) Aforia multispiralis Dell, 1990: 231, figs. 413-414, 416, 433, 435 (radula); Numanami et al., 1996: 211 (table), 213 (text), pl. 3, figs. 2, 5. Material studied: 1 spm. (65.1 x 25.3 mm), PA24; Remarles: Dell (1990) noted the vari- ability of the strength of sculpture,simi- larly to A. magnifica (see above), con- cluding that individuáis from greater depths may have finer secondary spirals. 1 spm. (87.2 x 28.5 mm), PA25. Distribution: South Orkney and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study) and Amery Ice-Shelf (Numanami et al., 1996); from 110 m (new record) to 1455 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Conorbela Powell, 1951 Conorbela antárctica (Strebel, 1908) (Fig. 62) Bela antárctica Strebel, 1908: 16, pl. 3, figs. 30a-b. Conorbela antárctica: Powell, 1951: 170; Dell, 199 pl. 7, figs. 9a-b, pl. 26, figs. 3-4 (radula). Material studied: 2 spm. (15.7 x 8.3 - 23.0 x 10.8 Distribution: South Sandwich Islands (Powell, 1951), Weddell Sea (Strebel, 1908; Hain, 1990), South Georgia Island (Carcelles, 1953), South Shetland Islands (Powell, 1951; I: 239, figs. 395, 415, 434 (radula); Hain, 1990: 70, a), MB34; 1 spm. (17.2 x 9.1 mm), PA39. Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Penin- sula, Bellingshausen Sea (new records) and Ross Sea (Dell, 1990); from 18 m (Carcelles, 1953) to 1437 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Leucosyrinx Dalí, 1889 Leucosyrinx paratenoceras Powell, 1951 (Fig. 63) Leucosyrinx paratenoceras Powell, 1951: 168, pl. 9, fig. 21. Material studied: 1 spm. (31.5 x 10.3 mm), MB4; - 42.9 x 12.8 mm), MB37. Remarles: Two similar species were described together for Falkland /Malv- inas Islands in the same work (Powell 1951): L. paragenota and L. falklandica; the first can be differentiated from L. fig. 54; Castellanos and Landoni, 1993b: 6, pl. 3, L spm. (38.6 x 11.9 mm), MB36; 2 spm. (37.9 x 11.1 paratenoceras mainly by its D/H ratio (0.35 in holotype of L. paragenota vs. 0.30 of L. paratenoceras ) and having axial cords; the second is distinguished mainly by having stronger axial sculpture. 81 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Distribution : Cited for the South Orkney Islands (Castellanos and Landoni, 1993b), South Shetland Islands and Western Antarctic Penín- sula (Powell, 1951), Bellingshausen Sea and off Thurston Island (new records); from 200 to 810 m (Powell, 1951). Genus Typhlodaphne Powell, 1951 Typhlodaphne innocentia Dell, 1990 (Fig. 64) Typhlodaphne innocentia Dell, 1990: 240, figs. 394, 406. Material studied: 1 spm. (6.0 x 3.1 mm), PI5; 11 spm. (4.2 x 2.2 - 10.4 x 5.1 mm), PI8. Remarles: Dell (1990) described this species based upon individuáis of about 4 mm, but the characteristics of our specimens agree with Dell's description. T. nipri Numanami, 1996, from East Antárctica is similar because its author defined it as an allied species, but without axial sculpture. T. corpulenta (Watson, 1881), from Kerguelen Island, differs in having a thicker shell. Distribution : Cited for the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003); Peter I Island (new record) and Ross Sea (Dell, 1990); from 90 m (new record) to 549 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Typhlomangelia Sars, 1878 Typhlomangelia principalis Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 65) Typhlomangelia? principalis Thiele, 1912: 215, pl. 14, figs. 6-7; Egorova, 1982: 50, figs. 64 (radula), 209-210. Material studied: 3 spm. and 1 sh. (9.2 x 4.1 - 17.5 x 7.9 mm), MB35; 1 spm. (19.2 x 7.0 mm), MB37; 1 sh. (16.8 x 7.9 mm), MB38. Remarles : Although some specimens are a little eroded, the shell characteris- tics, such as flattened spiral cords Cross- ing the axial ridges and marked growth striae, allowed us to assign it to Thiele's species, which has been little cited. Distribution: Cited for the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003); Belling- shausen Sea (new record) and Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982) from 310 m (Egorova, 1982) to 1117 m (new record). (Right page) Figure 53. Prosipho pellitus , 4.1 x 2.0 mm, PI8. Figure 54. Prosipho pusillus , 5.0 x 2.5 mm, PI8. Figure 55. Prosipho reversus, scale bar = 2.0 mm, PA39. Figure 56. Prosipho turritus , 5.6 x 2.4 mm, PA39. Figure 57. Harpovoluta charcoti , 54.8 x 32.0 mm, PA22. Figure 58. Belaturricula ergata , 18.0 x 7.9 mm, MB1. Figure 59. Belaturricula gaini, 20.0 x 8.1 mm, PA23. Figure 60. Aforia magnifica , 47.9 x 17.5 mm, PA21. Figure 61. Aforia multispiralis , 87.2 x 28.5 mm, PA25. Figure 62. Conorbela antárctica , 23.0 x 10.8 mm, MB34. Figure 63. Leucosyrinx parateno ceras, 31.5 x 10.3 mm, MB4. Figure 64. Typhlodaphne innocentia , 6.0 x 3.1 mm, PI5. Figure 65. Typhlonyzn- gelia principalis , 17.5 x 7.9 mm, MB35. Figure 66. Acteon antarcticus , 6.1 x 3.7 mm, MB3. Figure 67. Neactaeonina edentula, 6.7 x 3.5 mm, PI5. Figure 68. Neumesia antárctica , 18.0 x 15.0 mm, PA39. Figure 69. Philine alata, 9.2 x 7.3 mm, DEC. (Página derecha) Figuras 53-69. Ver los nombres científicos en el rótulo en inglés. 82 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica 83 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Superorder Heterobranchia Gray, 1840 Order Opisthobranchia Milne-Edwards, 1848 Family Acteonidae d'Orbigny, 1842 Genus Acteon Montfort, 1810 Acteon antarcticus Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 66) Actaeon antarcticus Thiele, 1912: 219, pl. 14, fig. 17. Acteon antarcticus: Powell, 1951: 175; 1958: 205; Dell, 1990: 247, fig. 444. Material studied: 1 spm. (6.1 x 3.7 mm), MB3. Remarks: Several species of the former genus Acteon were described from Sub-Antarctic waters, although a lot of them have been situated in other genera in later works (e.g. Toledonia vagabunda (Mabille, 1885)). Among valid recent species, the Magellanic A. biplica- tus (Strebel, 1908) and A. elongatus Castellanos, Rolán and Bartolotta, 1987 are separated by being more elongate forms. Distribution : South Sandwich (Dell, 1990) and South Shetland Islands (Powell, 1951), off Thurston Island (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 101 m (Dell, 1990) to 1431 m (new record). Genus Neactaeonina Thiele, 1912 Neactaeonina edentula (Watson, 1883) (Fig. 67) Actaeon edentulus Watson, 1883: 284; 1886: 632, pl. 47, fig. 6. Neactaeonina edentula: Thiele, 1912: 219; Powell, 1951: 176; Powell, 1957: 136; Dell, 1990: 248, figs. 439-440; Castellanos, Landoni and Dadon, 1993: 9, pl. 1, fig. 10. Material studied: 6 spm. (6.3 x 3.3 - 9.0 x 5.0 mm), PI5; 1 spm. (18.0 x 9.5 mm), MB34; 1 spm. (5.3 x 3.1 mm), LOW. Remarks : The individuáis can be dis- tinguished from N. cingulata (Strebel, 1908) by having spiral furrows which are shallower, irregular and and less numer- ous. However, Dell (1990) remarked on the uncertain relationship with N. fragilis (Thiele, 1912), because the original description of N. fragilis was made from a single damaged small specimen, and does not inelude a good description and figure of this. The record in Powell (1951) from South Shetland and South Georgia Islands may correspond to N. cingulata, according to Powell (1960). Distribution : South Georgia (Powell, 1951), South Orkney (Carcelles, 1953) and South Shetland Islands (Powell, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea and Peter I Island (new records), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990) and Kerguelen Islands (Watson, 1886; Powell, 1957; Dell, 1990); from 5 to 1116 m (Dell, 1990). Family Diaphanidae Odhner, 1914 Genus Newnesia Smith, 1902 Newnesia antárctica Smith, 1902 (Fig. 68) Newnesia antárctica Smith, 1902: 208, pl. 25, figs. 1-6; Thiele, 1912: 218; Hedley, 1916: 64; Odhner, 1926: 7, figs. 4-8; Dell, 1990: 254, fig. 482; Hain, 1990: 75, pl. 9, figs. la-i, pl. 28, fig. 1 (radula); Zelaya, 2005: 130, fig. 64. 84 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Anderssonia sphinx Strebel, 1908: 12, pl. 2, figs. 21a-g. Material studied: 4 spm. (7.3 x 5.8 - 18.0 x 15.0 mm), PA39. Remarks : Odhner (1926) synonymized this with Strebel's species N. sphinx. Distribution : South Georgia (Zelaya, 2005) and South Orkney Islands (Car- celles, 1953), Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990) and Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Strebel, 1908), Western Antarctic Penin- sula (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Cape Adare (Smith, 1902) Terre Adélie and Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), and Davis Sea (Dell, 1990); from 16 m (Carcelles, 1953) to 655 m (Dell, 1990). Family Philinidae Gray, 1850 Genus Philine Ascanius, 1772 Philine alata Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 69) Philine alata Thiele, 1912: 220, pl. 14, figs. 19-20; Powell, 1951: 177; Powell, 1958: 207; Vicente and Arnaud, 1974: 534, figs. la-d; Hain, 1990: 76, pl. 9, figs. 2a-l, pl. 28, fig. 2 (radula); Castellanos et al. , 1993: 16, pl. 2, fig. 15. Material studied: 9 spm. (15.7 x 8.4 - 35.5 x 17.8 mm), PI5; 7 spm. (19.0 x 7.9 - 24.9 x 12.6 mm), PI6; 2 spm. (13.0 x 8.0 mm - broken), PA39; 70 spm. (4.0 x 3.0 - 12.5 x 8.6 mm), DEC. Remarks : Some morphological differ- ences in shell were observed between BENTART individuáis and other Antarctic species. The outer lip is much higher than the spire, contrary to P. antárctica Smith, 1902; the shape is rhomboidal contrary to P. apertissima Smith, 1902 which is rounded, the spiral sculpture is lacking whereas it is present in P. falklandica Powell, 1951 and the hump present in P. gibba Strebel, 1908. Dell (1990) believes that a detailed revisión of the genus is needed. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), Scotia Sea, South Sandwich and South Orkney Islands (Powell, 1951), South Shetland Islands and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Powell, 1951; this study), Peter I Island (new record), Terre Adélie (Vicente and Arnaud, 1974), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 4 m (Vicente and Arnaud, 1974) to 640 m (Hain, 1990). Class Bivalvia Linnaeus, 1758 Subclass Protobranchia Pelseneer, 1889 Order Nuculida Dalí, 1889 Family Nuculidae Gray, 1824 Genus Nucula Lamarck, 1799 Nucula austrobenthalis Dell, 1990 (Fig. 70) Nucula austrobenthalis Dell, 1990: 6, figs. 1, 3. Material studied: 4 spm. (7.4 x 5.9 - 13.6 x 10.0 mm), MB29. Remarks : In spite of there being few records of this species it is clearly separable as an elongate species from deeper-water, without similar species in Antarctic waters. The other deeper-water species of this genus, N. notobenthalis Thiele, 1912 from the Davis Sea at 2725 m depth, is more rounded and has a shorter anterior end. 85 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Distribution : Drake Passage (57-62° S, 68-75° W) (Dell, 1990), Belling- shausen (Dell, 1990; this study). Amundsen and Ross Seas (Dell, 1990); from 3304 m (new record) to 4209 m (Dell, 1990). Family Nuculanidae H. and A. Adams, 1858 Genus Propeleda Iredale, 1924 Propeleda longicaudata (Thiele, 1912) (Fig. 71) Leda longicaudata Thiele, 1912: 229, pl. 17, fig. 22. Poroleda longicaudata: Hedley, 1916: 18; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 5. Propeleda longicaudata: Powell, 1951: 77; Powell, 1958: 171; Dell, 1964: 146; Egorova, 1982: 56: figs. 238-241; Dell, 1990: 15, figs. 51-52; Hain, 1990: 80, pl. 11, figs. 4a-b; Linse, 1997: 46. Material studied: 1 spm. (16.3 x 6.1 mm), MB13; 1 spm. (15.0 x 6.0 mm), PA21; 1 spm. (9.0 x 3.5 mm), MB33; 3 spm. (2.0 x 1.1 - 3.0 x 1.8 mm), PA41. Distribution : Circumantarctic. Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), cited for the South Sand- wich Islands (Linse, 1997), South Georgia, South Orkney and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Península (Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea off Adelaide Island (Powell, 1951; this study), Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997), Antipodes Islands (50° S, 179° E) and Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie (Hedley, 1916), Wilkes Land (Powell, 1958), Shack- leton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982) and from Amery Ice Shelf to Mac Robertson Land (Powell, 1958); from 43 to 2100 m (Dell, 1990). Family Yoldiidae Habe, 1977 Genus Yoldia Móller, 1842 Yoldia eightsi (Couthouy in Jay, 1839) (Fig. 72) Nucula eightsi Couthouy in Jay, 1839: 113, pl. 1, figs. 12-13. Yoldia eightsi: Melvill and Standen, 1907: 143; Hedley, 1911: 3; Dell, 1964: 147, pl. 2, fig. 11; Nicol, 1966: 11, pl. 1, figs. 6-8; Rabarts and Whybrow, 1979: 177, figs. 3-5, 8-10, 14a-b, 15a-b; Dell, 1990: 10, figs. 2, 5; Troncoso et al. , 2001: 106, fig. 33. Yoldia subaequilateralis Smith, 1875: 73; 1879: 187, pl. 9, fig. 18; 1885: 243; 1902: 211. Soot-Ryen, 1951: 6; Powell, 1957: 114. Yoldia kerguelensis Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 207, pl. 3 (8), fig. 65. Yoldia woodwardi Hanley: Pelseneer, 1903: 10; Lamy, 1906b; 19; 1911a: 29; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 7, figs. 1-6 (no Hanley, 1860). Material studied: 65 spm. (18.0 x 11.9 - 47.8 x 27.1 mm), PA22; 20 spm. (26.8 x 16.9 - 44.1 x 26.8 mm), PA23; 67 spm. (5.1 x 3.4 - 18.5 x 11.3 mm), DEC. Remarks : Soot-Ryen (1951) consid- ered the Magellanic species Y. wood- wardi Hanley, 1860 as a júnior synonym and, since his work, several authors have followed him. But Rabarts and Whybrow (1979) revised this genus synonymizing Y. subaequilateralis Smith, 1875 and Y. kerguelensis Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931 and reporting the misiden- tification of some specimens named Y. woodwardi, by Pelseneer (1903), Lamy (1906b, 1911a) and Soot-Ryen (1951),concluding that two species are valid for the Southern Ocean and neighboring areas: Y. eightsi and Y. woodwardi, the latter restricted to the Falkland /Malvinas Islands and South Atlantic Ocean. 86 ALDEA AND TroncOSO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Distribution : Cited for the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003), South Sand- wich, South Georgia (Dell, 1990) and South Orkney Islands (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Dell, 1990), Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Jay, 1839; Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarc- tic Peninsula (Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study) and Peter I Island (Soot- Ryen, 1951), also in Falkland /Malvinas, Staten Island, Tierra del Fuego Island (Dell, 1990) and Beagle Channel (Pelse- NEER, 1903), Ross Sea (Smith, 1902; Hed- ley, 1911; Dell, 1990), Kerguelen Islands (Smith, 1879; Smith, 1885; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931; Powell, 1957, Troncoso et al., 2001) and ca. 10° E (Griffiths et al., 2003); from 1 m (Melvill and Standen, 1907) to 824 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Yoldiella Verrill and Bush, 1897 Yoldiella antárctica (Thiele, 1912) (Figs. 73-74) Leda antárctica Thiele, 1912: 229, pl. 17, figs. 21-21a. Yoldiella antárctica: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 5; Powell, 1958: 171; Dell, 1964: 145; Arnaud, 1973: 555; Egorova, 1982: 55, figs. 230-231; Dell, 1990: 12, figs.17-18. Material studied: 1 spm. (2.6 x 1.7 mm), PI7; 1 spm. (broken), MB14; 2 spm. (2.1 x 1.4 - 2.3 x 1.7 mm), PI27; 1 spm. (2.2 x 1.6 mm), MB30. Remarks: The main characteristics that mark the difference from other Antarctic species are its very thin shell, a very small hinge with six anterior and seven poste- rior teeth, small and obliquely oriented, and a more elongated form. In this sense, Dell (1990) provides height/length ratios for related Antarctic species that allow the arranging of the species from more elongated to more rounded shape: Yoldiella antárctica (0.66 ± 0.01, n=6), Y. profundorum (Melvill and Standen, 1912) (0.69 ± 0.04, n=6), Y. ecaudata (Pelseneer, 1903) (0.74 ± 0.05, n=6) and Y. valettei (Lamy, 1906) (0.75 ± 0.05, n=10). Distribution: South Sandwich and South Orkney Islands, Eastern Antarctic Peninsula and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea and Peter I Island (new records), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie (Griffiths et al., 2003), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958) and Bouvet Island (Linse, 2006); from 193 m (Powell, 1958) to 1873 m (new record). Yoldiella ecaudata (Pelseneer, 1903) (Figs. 75-76) Leda ecaudata Pelseneer, 1903: 22, pl. 6, figs. 77-78; Thiele, 1912: 229, pl. 17, figs. 20-20a. Yoldiella ecaudata: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 5; Dell, 1964: 145; Egorova, 1982: 55, figs. 234-237; Dell, 1990: 12: 15-16. Material studied: 1 spm. (2.8 x 1.9 mm), MB3; 14 spm. (1.2 x 1.0 - 2.3 x 1.8 mm), MB36; 7 spm. (1.1 x 0.8 - 2.3 x 1.8 mm), PA41. Remarks: A hinge with large teeth , a marked postero-ventral rostrum and rounded shape (see remarck of Y. antartica ) differentiate this species from the others. Distribution: Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study). Bellingshausen Sea to off Thurston Island (Pelseneer, 1903; this study), Ross Sea, Balleny Islands (Dell, 1990) and Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egoro- va, 1982); from 265 to 2525 m (Dell, 1990). 87 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Yoldiella oblonga (Pelseneer, 1903) (Figs. 77-78) Leda oblonga Pelseneer, 1903: 23, pl. 6, figs. 79-80; Hedley, 1916: 17; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 6. Yoldiella oblonga : Egorova, 1982: 56, figs. 232-233; Hain, 1990: 79, pl. 11, figs. la-b. Material studied: 1 sh. (broken), MB9; 1 spm. Remarles: Carcelles (1953) was the first author to inelude this species as Yoldiella. Due to its Tindaria- like form there are no similar species in Antarctic waters. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea (Pelse- Yoldiella profundorum (Melvill 3 x 3.9 mm), MB14; 1 spm. (2.8 x 1.9 mm), MB36. NEER, 1903; this study), cited for the Ross Sea (Griffiths et al., 2003), Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916) and Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982); from 459 to 2800 m (Pelseneer, 1903). Standen, 1912) (Figs. 79-80) Yoldia profundorum Melvill and Standen, 1912: 359, figs. 18-18b. Yoldiella profundorum: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 6; Dell, 1990: 14, figs. 21-22; Branch et al., 1991: 53 (key). Material studied: 3 spm. (2.9 x 2.1 - 3.8 x 2.8 mm), PA22; 1 spm. (2.0 x 1.4 mm), MB26; 86 spm. (1.7 x 1.0 - 3.2 x 2.2 mm), PI28; 1 spm. (3.3 x 2.2 mm) spm. (1.5 x 0.9 - 1.5 x 0.9 mm), MB34; 1 spm. (2.1 PA41; 14 spm. (1.1 x 0.8 - 2.5 x 1.8 mm), PA42; 4 Remarles: A somewhat elongated hinge with seven anterior and six posterior, médium to large and weakly oblique teeth, mark the difference from the similar species Y. ecaudata (with nine anterior and seven posterior strong teeth) and Y. antárctica (six anterior and seven posterior small teeth). Distribution: Weddell Sea (Melvill and Standen, 1912), Drake Passage ; MB30; 33 spm. (1.0 x 0.6 - 2.1 x 1.3 mm), MB33; 2 x 1.6 mm), PA39; 16 spm. (1.0 x 0.6 - 2.1 x 1.4 mm), spm. (1.2 x 0.9 - 1.9 x 1.1 mm), PA43. {ca. 55-62° S, 61° W) (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula, Belling- shausen Sea to off Thurston Island, and Peter I Island (new records), Amundsen Sea {ca. 70° S, 99° W) (Dell, 1990), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Branch et al., 1991); from 157 m (new record) to 4758 m (Dell, 1990). Yoldiella sabrina (Hedley, 1916) (Figs. 81-82) Malletia sabrina Hedley, 1916: 18, pl. 1, figs. 3-4; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 9; Powell, 1958: 172; Dell, 1964: 149; Nicol, 1966: 17, pl. 1, figs. 3, 5; Egorova, 1982: 54, figs. 226-228. Yoldiella sabrina: Dell, 1972: 24, figs. 8-9; 1990: 14, fig. 14; Hain, 1990: 79, pl. 11, figs. 2a-b. Material studied: 3 spm. (5.8 x 3.9 - 5.9 x 3.9 mm), MB30; 5 spm. (4.2 x 2.7 - 6.9 x 4.2 mm), MB31; 1 spm. (6.0 x 3.9 mm), MB32; 1 spm. (6.1 x 4.1 mm), MB35; 2 spm. (1.9 x 1.2 - 4.2 x 2.8 mm), MB36. Remarles: Similar in external mor- phology to species of the genus Malletia Desmoulins, 1832. Dell (1972) situated this species as Yoldiella based on its internal ligament, and he compared it with the Southern Chile species Y. chilenica (Dalí, 1908), very similar in shell proportions and secondarily in the hinge. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie and Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982) and Mac Robertson Land (Powell, 1958); from 12 m (Hain, 1990) to 1847 m (new record). 88 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Subclass Pteriomorphia Beurlen, 1944 Order Arcida Stoliczka, 1871 Family Arcidae Lamarck, 1809 Genus Bathyarca Kobelt, 1891 Bathyarca sinuata Pelseneer, 1903 (Fig. 83) Bathyarca sinuata Pelseneer, 1903: 23, pl. 6, figs. 81-82; Lamy, 1911a: 27; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 9; Dell, 1990: 17, figs. 4, 10-11 Material studied: 6 spm. (6.2 x 5.0 - 8.6 x 6.9 mm), MB3; 4 spm. (6.1 x 4.3 - 9.0 x 6.2 mm), MB11; 1 spm. (6.9 x 4.7 mm), MB13; 11 spm. (4.8 x 3.6 - 8.8 x 7.0 mm), MB17; 6 spm. (6.0 x 4.5 - 8.0 x 6.0 mm), MB30; 5 spm. (6.0 x 4.7 - 8.8 x 6.8 mm), MB31; 4 spm. (4.8 x 3.2 - 8.1 x 6.7 mm), MB35; 4 spm. (7.1 x 5.1 - 8.1 x 6.2 mm), MB38. Remarks : The other species of the genus cited for Antárctica is B. strebeli (Melvill and Standen, 1907) from the Weddell Sea, which is very different in shell shape, presenting an oval form. Distribution : Cape Horn (Dell, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903; Lamy, 1911a; this study) to off Thurston Island (new record) and Ross Sea (Dell, 1990); from 400 m (Pelse- neer, 1903) to 2044 m (new record). Family Limopsidae Dalí, 1895 Genus Limopsis Sassi, 1827 Limopsis knudseni Dell, 1990 (Fig. 84) Limopsis knudseni Dell, 1990: 23, figs. 30-31. Material studied: 1 spm. (7.4 x 7.6 mm), MB29. Remarks : Dell (1990) described this species after examination of many indi- viduáis series of several Antarctic species, concluding that the postero- ventral elongated form of some individ- uáis, together with the development of a byssus in most of them, are definitive and particular characteristics of the new species. Our specimen have the umbos larger than the figure of the holotype, which may be eroded. Distribution : South Atlantic Ocean off South Georgia Island ( ca . 50° S, 43° W), Cape Horn, Drake Passage (ca. 60° S, 69° W) (Dell, 1990) and Bellingshausen Sea (Dell, 1990; this study); from 1043 to 3693 m (Dell, 1990). Limopsis lilliei Smith, 1915 (Fig. 85) Limopsis lilliei Smith, 1915: 76, pl. 1, fig. 18; Powell, 1958: 172; Dell, 1964: 158, pl. 3, figs. 1-2; Nicol, 1966: 18, pl. 2, figs. 3, 6; Arnaud, 1973: 555; Egorova, 1982: 57, figs. 248-249; Dell, 1990: 20, figs. 32-33; Hain, 1990: 82, pl. 11, figs. 7a-b; Branch et al., 1991: 54. Material studied: 1 spm. (4.4 x 4.1 mm), PA21; 1 spm. (6.3 x 4.9 mm), PA25; 2 spm. (17.2 x 15.2 - 21.5 x 17.0 mm), LOW. Remarks: According to Dell (1990) it hirtella Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889, presents an affinity in shape with L. but that species apparently is confined 89 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 to the Magellanic Región (Dell, 1990). Also, L. scotiana Dell, 1964 is cióse as well, but its distribütion is in the Scotia Are Islands (Dell, 1990). Distribütion : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich, South Georgia and South Orkney .Islands (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study). Antipodes Islands ( ca . 179° E) (Dell, 1990), Ross Sea (Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie (Grilliths et al., 2003), Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Branch et al., 1991) and Bouvet Island (Linse, 2006); from 20 m (Dell, 1990; Hain, 1990) to 2100 m (Dell, 1990). Limopsis longipilosa Pelseneer, 1903 (Fig. 86) Limopsis longipilosa Pelseneer, 1903: 25, pl. 7, figs. 89-90; Melvill and Standen, 1912: 360: Soot- Ryen, 1951: 9, figs. 7-8; Dell, 1964: 155; Egorova, 1982: 58, figs. 250-251. Material studied: 1 spm. (2.2 x 2.5 mm), MB4; 1 spm. (3.3 x 3.5 mm), MB14; 1 spm. (2.3 x 2.7 mm), MB33; 7 spm. (1.2 x 1.3 - 3.8 x 3.9 mm), MB36; 11 spm. (2.3 x 2.3 - 3.3 x 3.3 mm), MB37. Remarks: L. mabilliana Dalí, 1908 is similar in shape and periostracum, though it differs in having the dorsal border straighter with angulose anterior and pos- terior ends. Dell (1990 pp. 20, 25-26) men- tioned that L. longipilosa may correspond to juvenile specimens of L. marionensis Smith, 1885 or of L. tendía tenella Jeffreys, 1879, but L. tenella tenella inhabits deeper waters (> 2400 m depth). Due to the con- fusión that exists in this group of related especies, we maintained L. longipilosa as a valid species, though it is necessary to make a comparative study of the hinge and juvenile stages of several related species (e.g. Malchus and Warén, 2005). Distribütion: Weddell Sea (Melvill and Standen, 1912), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Soot-Ryen, 1951), Belling- shausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903; this study) to off Thurston Island (new record) and Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982), but cited for the South Shetland Islands as well (Carcelles, 1953). The bathyme- try is from 90 m (Egorova, 1982) to 2579 m (Melvill and Standen, 1912). Limopsis marionensis Smith, 1885 (Fig. 87) Limopsis marionensis Smith, 1885: 254, pl.18, figs. 2-2b; 1915: 75; Dell, 1964: 152, pl. 3, figs. 6-14, pl. 4, figs. 1-2; Nicol, 1966: 22, pl. 2, figs. 1, 5; Egorova, 1982: 59, figs. 252-253; Okutani, 1986: 279 (table), pl. 2, fig. 12; Dell, 1990: 19, figs. 25-26; Hain, 1990: 82, pl. 12, figs. la-b; Branch et al., 1991: 53 (key); Numanami et al., 1996: 211 (table), 213 (text), pl. 4, fig. 10; Osorio and Reid, 2004: 80, fig. 3b. Felicia jousseaumi Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889: 116, pl. 7, figs. 9a-b. (Right page) Figure 70. Nucula austrobenthalis , 12.0 x 8.9 mm, MB29. Figure 71. Propeleda longi- caudata , 16.3 x 6.1 mm, MB13. Figure 72. Yoldia eightsi, 24.0 x 13.1 mm, PA22. Figures 73, 74. Yoldiella antárctica , 2.6 x 1.7 mm, PI7. Figures 75-76. Yoldiella ecaudata, 2.8 x 1.9 mm, MB3. Figures 77, 78. Yoldiella oblonga, 5.3 x 3.9 mm, MB14. Figure 79. Yoldiella profundorum, 2.9 x 2.1 mm, PA22. Figure 80. Yoldiella profundorum, 3.8 x 2.8 mm, PA22. Figure 81. Yoldiella sabrina, 412 x 2.7 mm, MB31. Figure 82. Yoldiella sabrina, 4.3 x 2.8 mm, MB31. Figure 83. Bathyarca sinuata, 6.9 x 4.7 mm, MB13. Figure 84. Limopsis knudseni, 7.4 x 7.6 mm, MB29. Figure 85. Limopsis lilliei, 4.4 x 4.1 mm, PA21. Figure 86. Limopsis longipilosa, 2.2 x 2.5 mm, MB4. Figure 87. Limopsis marionensis, 25.5 x 24.6 mm, MB37. Figure 88. Limopsis enderbyensis, 15.0 x 12.0 mm, LOW. ( Página derecha) Figuras 70-88. Ver los nombres científicos en el rótulo en inglés. 90 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica 91 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Limopsis jousseaumei: Lamy, 1911a: 26; Thiele, 1912: 228 (text), pl. 17, fig. 14b; Powell, 1951: 78; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 9; Stuardo, 1962: 7,.; figs. 1-6. Limopsis laeviuscula Pelseneer, 1903: 24, pl. 7, figs. 91-92. Limopsis granáis Smith, 1907b: 5, pl. 3, figs. 7-7b; Thiele, 1912: 228, pl. 17, figs. 14a, 15; Smith, 1915: 76; Hedley, 1916: 19. Limopsis jousseaumi granáis: Powell, 1958: 173; Egorova, 1982: 57, figs. 245-247. Material studied: 7 spm. (25.5 x 24.3 - 39.5 x 42.2 mm), MB37. Remarks: The Magellanic species L. hirtella Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889 has an affinity with this species, though it is more oval and equilateral. The numerous species that have been synonymized have been acceptedas such, because some authors have examined many individu- áis from several localities. According to Dell (1990) L. hardingi Melvill and Standen, 1914 from Falkland /Malvinas Islands is a júnior synonym. Distribution: Widespread Antarctic and Sub-Antarctic distribution. Has been cited from the Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich Islands, South Orkney Islands, Falkland /Malvinas Islands and Burdwood Bank (Dell, 1990), Beagle Channel (Rochebrune and Mabille, 1889), Magellan Strait and Tierra del Fuego Island (Dell, 1990) and from several sites northward to South Pacific coast: South of Chiloé Islands (44° S) (Osorio and Reíd, 2004), Seno de Reloncaví and Chiloé Islands (41-42° S) (Cárdenas, Aldea and Val- do vinos, in press), 39° S off Valdivia (Dell, 1990), reaching off Algarrobo (33° S) in central Chile (Stuardo, 1962); also in South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990) and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990), off Adelaide Island (Powell, 1951) and Bellingshausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903; Dell, 1990; this study); Southwest Pacific Ocean (59° S, 160° W) (Dell, 1990), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907b; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), cited for the Scott and Balleny Islands (Grif- fiths et al., 2003), Terre Adélie and Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Powell, 1958; Egorova, 1982), Amery Ice-Shelf (Powell, 1958; Numanami et al., 1996), cited for the Heard and Kerguelen Islands (Dell, 1990), Mac Robertson Land to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Smith, 1885; Branch et al., 1991) and 24° E (Okutani 1986); from 27 to 2804 m (Dell, 1990). Has not been cited for South Georgia Island, which is an anomaly in the Biogeography of the Southern Ocean (Dell, 1990). Limopsis enderbyensis Powell, 1958 (Fig. 88) Limopsis enáerbyensis Powell, 1958: 172, pl. 1, fig. 4; Dell, 1964: 159; Hain, 1990: 82, pl. 11, figs. 6a-b. Material studied: 1 spm. (15.0 x 12.0 mm), LOW. Remarks: This species looks similar to the deeper-water species L. tenella da- lli Lamy, 1912 from cióse to the Amund- sen Sea (Dell, 1990), but that species is characterized by a more inequilateral shell. Distribution: Only known in the Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Shetland Islands (new record) and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 115 m (new record) to 673 m (Hain, 1990). Family Philobryidae Bernard, 1897 Genus Adamar ca Pelseneer, 1903 92 ALDEA AND TroNCOSO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Adacnarca nitens Pelseneer, 1903 (Fig. 89) Adacnarca nitens Pelseneer, 1903: 24, 41, pl. 7, figs. 83-88; Lamy, 1906b: 19; Smith, 1907b: 5, pl. 3, fig. 6-6c; Hedley, 1911: 3; Lamy, 1911a: 27; Thiele, 1912: 228; Smith, 1915: 76; Hedley, 1916: 22; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 13; Powell, 1958: 175; Dell, 1964: 172; Nicol, 1966: 31, pl. 4, figs. 9-10; Arnaud, 1973: 556; Egorova, 1982: 61, figs. 262-265; Dell, 1990: 31, figs. 38-39, 40, 43; Hain, 1990: 86, pl. 12, figs. 6a-b. Material studied: 200 spm. (2.2 x 2.1 - 5.4 x 5.1 mm), PI5; 17 spm. (3.1 x 2.9 - 5.4 x 5.1 mm), PI8; 3 spm. (3.8 x 3.7 - 5.1 x 5.0 mm), PA20; 1 spm. (4.2 x 3.8 mm), PA21; 1 spm. (3.1 x 3.0 mm), PA22; 1 spm. (3.1 x 3.2 mm), MB36; 1 spm. (3.8 x 3.9 mm), MB38; 3 spm. (4.0 x 4.0 - 4.2 x 4.3 mm), PA39; 1 spm. (4.8 x 4.7 mm), LOW; 3 spm. (2,8 x 2,5 - 4.9 x 3.6 mm), DEC. Remarks: A. polarsterni Egorova, 2003 seems to be an allied species, but it differs in being more elongated and not having a subcircular shape. A. limopsoides (Thiele, 1912) differs in having radial ribs and larger hinge teeth. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich, South Georgia, South Orkney Islands and Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903; this study) and Peter I Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; this study). Cape Hom (Dell, 1990), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907b; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990) to 163° E (Smith, 1915), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916) to Terre Adélie (Powell, 1958), Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Shackle- ton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Amery Ice- Shelf (Griffiths et al., 2003), Mac Robert- son to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), and Bouvet Island (Linse, 2006); from 8 to 2350 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Lissarca Smith, 1879 Lissarca notorcadensis Melvill and Standen, 1907 (Fig. 90) Lissarca notorcadensis Melvill and Standen, 1907: 44, figs. 14-14a; Smith, 1915: 75, pl. 1, figs. 16-17; Hedley, 1916: 19; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 15; Powell, 1951: 78; Powell, 1958: 175; Dell, 1964: 173; Nicol, 1966: 36, pl. 4, figs. 2, 4, 6; Arnaud, 1973: 555; Egorova, 1982: 62, figs. 266-268; Okutani, 1986: 279 (table), pl. 2, figs. 13-14; Dell, 1990: 32, figs. 46, 58; Hain, 1990: 87, pl. 13, figs. 2a-b. Arca gourdoni Lamy, 1910b: 393; 1911a: 28, pl. 1, figs. 21-22. Lissarca gourdoni: Thiele, 1912: 228, pl. 18, figs. 3-3a. Material studied: 1 spm. (7.0 x 6.6 mm), PA21; 36 spm. (2.9 x 2.8 - 6.1 x 6.2 mm), PA39; 49 spm. (1.6 x 1.5 - 4.3 x 4.4 mm), LOW; 2 spm. (4.5 x 3.2 - 4.5 x 3.2 mm), MAR. Remarks: It is a variable species since Cope and Linse (2006) found consider- able morphological differences between samples from the Scotia Are, the Ross Sea and the Weddell Sea. The synonymy of L. gourdoni (Lamy, 1911) was pro- posed by Smith (1915). Two other species of the genus, L. miliaris (Philippi, 1845) and L. rubrofusca (Smith, 1879) differ in having more inequilateral shells which are very similar, because Dell (1990) remarks that the distinction between both species has been difficult. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich, South Georgia (Dell, 1990), South Orkney (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Dell, 1990), Falk- land/Malvinas (Powell, 1951) and South Shetland Islands (Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study), Western Antarctic Penin- sula (Lamy, 1911a; Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990) to 163° E (Smith, 1915), Com- monwealth (Hedley, 1916) to Terre Adélie (Hedley, 1916; Powell, 1958), Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Shackleton Ice Shelf 93 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Amery Ice-Shelf, Mac Robertson Land and Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), probably in Kerguelen Islands (Dell, 1990), and 24° E (Okutani, 1986); from 0 to 1890 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Philobrya Carpenter, 1872 Philobrya sublaevis Pelseneer, 1903 (Fig. 91) Philobrya sublaevis Pelseneer, 1903: 25, pl. 7, figs. 93-94; Lamy, 1906b: 18, pl. 1, figs. 17-18; Lamy, 1911a: 25; Thiele, 1912: 227, pl. 17, fig. 11; Melvill and Standen, 1912: 361; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 192; Dell, 1964: 163, pl. 4, fig. 7, fig. 2 (N° 3, 15-16); Nicol, 1966: 28, pl. 4, figs. 3, 5, 7; Arnaud, 1973: 555; Dell, 1990: 27, figs. 41, 50; Hain, 1990: 84, pl. 12, figs. 4a-d; Numanami et al, 1996: 211 (table), pl. 4, fig. 1. Philippiella sublaevis: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 12. Hochstetteria sublaevis: Egorova, 1982: 60, figs. 257-259. Philobrya limoides Smith, 1907b: 4, pl. 3, figs. 2-2b; Hedley, 1911: 3; Thiele, 1912: 268; Smith, 1915: 77; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931 : 191 . Philippiella limoides: Hedley, 1916: 20; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 10. Hochstetteria limoides: Powell, 1958: 173. Philippiella bagei Hedley, 1916: 20, pl. 1, figs. 5-7; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 10. Hochstetteria bagei: Powell, 1958: 174. Philippiella orbiculata Hedley, 1916: 21, pl. 1, figs. 12-13. Philobrya antárctica Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 190 ( nom . nov. for P. limoides Smith, 1907). Material studied: 14 spm. (4.9 x 4.1 - 12.8 x 12.1 mm), PI5; 5 spm. (5.7 x 5.2 - 10.5 x 11.0 mm), PI8; 5 spm. (5.8 x 5.4 - 9.2 x 8.5 mm), PA20; 1 spm. (6.4 x 6.6 mm), PA21; 1 spm. (11.0 x 11.0 mm), PA22; 11 spm. (2.9 x 3.0 - 12.0 x 12.0 mm), PA39; 3 spm. (6.0 x 6.0 - 8.3 x 8.2 mm), LOW; 9 spm. (2.2 x 3.0 - 6.9 x 7.0 mm), DEC; 2 spm. (6.0 x 6.0 - 8.7 x 8.0 mm) MAR. Remarks : It is a well known and reported species, whose synonymies are accepted (see Dell, 1990). The central position of the straight umbo marks the difference between this species and others cited from neighboring areas, all of them showing a certain degree of inequilater- ality, e.g. P. c¡uadrata (Pfeffer, 1886) and P. ungulata (Pfeffer, 1886). D-shape larvae were identified following Egorova (1982). Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich (Dell, 1990), South Georgia (Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990) and South Orkney Islands (Dell, 1990), Burdwood Bank (Melvill and Standen, 1912), Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1911a; Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903) and Peter I Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; this study), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907b; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990) to 163° E (Smith, 1915), Commonwealth to Terre Adélie (Hedley, 1916), Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Hedley, 1916; Egorova, 1982; Dell, 1990), Amery Ice-Shelf (Griffiths et al ., 2003), Mac Robertson to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996), South of Africa in South Atlantic Ocean (34-35° S, 19-26° E) (Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931), Bouvet Island (Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931; Linse, 2006) and ca. 10° E (Griffiths et al., 2003); from 1 m (Dell, 1990; Hain, 1990) to 923 m (Dell, 1990). Philobrya wandelensis Lamy, 1906 (Fig. 92) Philobrya wandelensis Lamy, 1906a: 50; 1906b: 17, pl. 1, figs. 15-16; Melvill and Standen, 1907: 146; Lamy, 1911a: 24; Melvill and Standen, 1912: 361; Hedley, 1916: 19; Thiele, 1912: 268; Dell, 1964: 167; Arnaud, 1973: 556; Dell, 1990: 29, figs. 42, 47-49. 94 ALDEA AND TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Hochstetteria wandelensis: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 11; Powell, 1958: 174. Adacnarca wandelensis : Nicol, 1966: 33, pl. 3, figs. 4-5; Hain, 1990: 87, pl. 13, figs. la-b. Material studied: 1 spm. (3.2 x 2.5 mm), PA20; 5 spm. (2.1 x 3.1 - 3.1 x 4.1 mm), DEC; 2 spm. (5.0 x 3.2 - 5.0 x 3.2 mm), MAR. Remarks : Its strong inequilaterality marks the difference between this species and the other related species with a lesser degree of inequilaterality (P. quadrata (Pfeffer, 1886) and P. ungu- lata (Pfeffer, 1886)), though P. crispa Linse, 2002 from Tierra del Fuego Island, is a strongly inequilateral species, but differs in having periostra- cal spines, that P. wandelensis does not ha ve. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich, South Georgia (Dell, 1990) and South Orkney Islands (Melvill and Standen, 1907, 1912; Dell, 1990), Burdwood Bank and Falk- land/Malvinas Islands (Melvill and Standen, 1912), Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990; this study), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Amery Ice-Shelf (Griffiths et al., 2003), Mac Robertson to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958) and Bouvet Island (Linse, 2006); from 5 m (Hedley, 1916) to 870 m (Dell, 1990). Order Mytilida Férussac, 1822 Family Mytilidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Dacrydium Torell, 1859 Dacrydium albidum Pelseneer, 1903 (Fig. 93) Dacrydium albidum Pelseneer, 1903: 26, pl. 8, fig. 100; Thiele, 1912: 226, pl. 17, fig. 10; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 20; Nicol, 1966: 25, pl. 3, figs. 2, 8; Egorova, 1982: 63, figs. 269-270; Dell, 1990: 33, figs. 55- 57; Hain, 1990: 88, pl. 13, figs. 3a-b; Numanami et al., 1996: 211 (table), pl. 4, fig. 2. Dacrydium modioliforme Thiele, 1912: 226, pl. 17, fig. 9; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 170; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 20; Powell, 1958: 175; Egorova, 1982: 64, figs. 271-272. Material studied: 9 spm. (2.1 x 2.5 - 2.8 x 3.4 mm), MB30; 4 spm. (1.8 x 2.1 - 3.6 x 4.1 mm), MB34; 4 spm. (2.1 x 2.4 - 3.6 x 4.0 mm), MB38; 1 spm. (2.1 x 2.3 mm), PA41. Remarks : Nicol (1966) and Dell (1990) considered that D. molioliforme Thiele, 1912, from the Davis Sea, may be a synonym. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (new record), Bellingshausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Amery Ice-Shelf (Pow- ell, 1958), Enderby Land (Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931) and Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996); from 122 m (Dell, 1990) to 4636 m (Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931). Also, Griffiths et al. (2003) indicated this species in several sites off Africa in the South Atlantic Ocean. Order Limida Waller, 1978 Family Limidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Limatula S. V. Wood, 1839 Limatula hodgsoni (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 94) 95 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Lima hodgsoni Smith, 1907b: 6, pl. 3, figs. 8-8b; Hedley, 1911: 3; Thiele, 1912: 226; Smith, 1915: 77; Hedley, 1916: 24; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 167. Limatula hodgsoni: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 20; Powell, 1958: 177; Dell, 1964: 184; Nicol, 1966: 43, pl. 5, figs. 6-7; Arnaud, 1973: 556; Egorova, 1982: 66, figs. 285-287; Okutani, 1986: 279 (table), pl. 2, figs. 18-19; Dell, 1990: 53, fig. 95; Hain, 1990: 91, pl. 13, figs. 7a-f; Numanami et al., 1996: 211 (table), 213 (text), pl. 4, fig. 3; Page and Linse, 2002: 819 (table, text); Linse and Page, 2003: 290, figs. le, 3 (prodissoconch); Alien, 2004: 2645. Lima closei Hedley, 1916: 23, pl. 2, fig. 16. Limatula closei: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 20; Dell, 1964: 184; Egorova, 1982: 65, fig. 288. Material studied: 2 spm. (11.5 x 9.3 - 29.3 x 22.7 mm), PA20; 1 spm. (9.0 x 7.6 mm), MB30; 9 spm. (2.1 x 1.9 - 12.1 x 10.0 mm), MB31; 6 spm. (1.4 x 1.1 - 36.2 x 27.9 mm), PA39; 2 spm. (10.9 x 14.0 - 24.0 x 18.0 mm), LOW. Remarks : Page and Linse (2002) situ- ated it as sister species of L. ovalis (Thiele, 1912) and L. pygmaea (Philippi, 1845), uti- lizing molecular techniques; they also established that they have indirect devel- opment with lecitotrophic larvae (Linse and Page, 2003). This species differs from L. ovalis and L. pygmaea in having a more developed concentric sculpture with lamel- lae. Dell (1964) commented that L. closei (Hedley, 1916) is an allied species and Dell (1990) situated it as a júnior synonym. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich, South Georgia, South Orkney Islands, Eastern Antarctic Penín- sula and Cape Horn (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands and Western Antarctic Península (Dell, 1990; this study), Belling- shausen Sea (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907b; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990) to 163° E (Smith, 1915), Macquarie Island (Tomlin 1948 in Powell, 1960), Commonwealth to Terre Adélie, and Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982; Dell, 1990), Amery Ice-Shelf (Numanami et al., 1996), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), 24° E (Okutani, 1986), cited ca. 10° E (Grif- fiths et AL., 2003) and Bouvet Island (Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931; Soot-Ryen, 1951); from 6 m (Dell, 1990) to 1814 m (new record). Limatula pygmaea (Philippi, 1845) (Fig. 95) Lima pygmaea Philippi, 1845: 56; Smith, 1885: 292; Melvill and Standen, 1907: 148; Thiele, 1912: 251, pl. 17, figs. 6-8. Radula pygmaea: Smith, 1879: 191, pl. 10, fig. 16; Lamy, 1906b: 15; 1911a: 22. Limatula pygmaea: Powell, 1957: 116; Dell, 1964: 182, pl. 2, fig. 13; Arnaud, 1973: 557; Dell, 1990: 55; Branch et al., 1991: 50 (key); Linse, 1997: 52; Troncoso et al., 2001: 109, fig. 37; Page and Linse, 2002: 819 (table, text); Linse and Page, 2003: 290, figs. la-c (prodissoconch); Alien, 2004: 2647. Limea martiali Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889: 124. Lima falklandica Adams, 1864: 509; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 167. Limatula falklandica: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 21; Dell, 1964: 183. Material studied: 5 spm. (6.2 x 4.6 - 8.1 x 6.3 mm), PA20; 1 spm. (7.5 x 6.0 mm), LOW. Remarks: This species resembles L. ovalis (Thiele, 1912), which is smaller and narrower. In this sense, Page and Linse (2002) considered them sister species, not synonyms, utilizing molecular techniques; but Allen (2004) referred to L. ovalis as a júnior synonym of L. pygmaea without mentioning the matter. Linse and Page (2003) also evidenced the development of species by means of observation to prodis- soconchs, concluding that both L. ovalis and L. pygmaea having direct brooding development. The synonymies of Limea martiali Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889 and L. falklandica (Adams, 1864) are accepted (see Dell, 1990). 96 ALDEA AND TroncOSO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Distribution : South Sandwich (Soot- Ryen, 1951), South Georgia (Dell, 1990) and South Orkney Islands (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Dell, 1990), Burdwood Bank, South Atlantic Ocean (Dell, 1990) and Falkland /Malvinas Islands, Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997) and Cape Horn (Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889; Dell, 1990), Staten Island, Magellan Strait and Tierra del Fuego Island (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Península (Lamy, 1906b, 1911a; Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study) and Bellingshausen Sea (Dell, 1990), Macquarie Island (Tomlin 1948 in Powell, 1960), Terre Adélie (Griffiths et al., 2003), Kerguelen Islands (Smith, 1879; Smith, 1885; Thiele, 1912; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931; Powell, 1957; Tron- coso et al., 2001), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Smith, 1885; Branch et al., 1991); from 3 m (Melvill and Standen, 1907) to 3714 m (Dell, 1990). Limatula simillima Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 96) Limatula simillima Thiele, 1912: 226, pl. 17, fig. 4; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 20; Powell, 1958: 177; Dell, 1964: 185, pl. 2, fig. 12; Nicol, 1966: 46, pl. 4, fig. 8; Dell, 1990: 53, fig. 97; Branch et al, 1991: 50 (key); Page and Linse, 2002: 819 (table, text); Linse and Page, 2003: 290, fig. lf (prodissoconch); Alien, 2004: 2648. Limatula similliana (sic): Flain, 1990: 92, pl. 14, figs. 2a-c. Material studied: 2 spm. (6.8 x 4.8 - 8.3 x 6.0 mm), MB31; 1 spm. (broken), MB37. Remarks: Linse and Page (2003) established an indirect mode of devel- opment with lecitotrophic larvae. Mole- cular techniques allowed the establish- ing of its phylogenetic distance from other species (Page and Linse, 2002), which is reflected externally by having a more elongated shell. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912), Mac Robertson to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958) and Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Branch et al., 1991); from 64 m (Dell, 1990) to 1426 m (new record). Order Ostreida Férussac, 1822 Family Pectinidae Rafinesque, 1815 Genus Adamussium Thiele, 1934 Adamussium colbecki (Smith, 1902) Peden colbecki Smith, 1902: 212, pl. 25, fig. 11; 1907b: 6, pl. 3, figs. 9-9a; Melvill and Standen, 1907: 146; Hedley, 1911: 3; Lamy, 1911a: 23; Thiele, 1912: 225, pl. 17, figs. 1-la. Chlamys colbecki: Smith, 1915: 77; Hedley, 1916: 22. Adamussium colbecki: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 16; Powell, 1958: 176; Nicol, 1966: 40, pl. 2, fig. 7, pl. 3, figs. 1, 7; Arnaud, 1973: 556; Egorova, 1982: 64, figs. 275-280; Dell, 1990: 35, figs. 59-60; Hain, 1990: 89, fig. 4.2; Numanami et al., 1996: 212 (table, text), pl. 4, fig. 6. Peden racovitzai Pelseneer, 1903: 27, pl. 8, figs. 101-102; Lamy, 1906b: 16, pl. 1, fig. 19-21. Material studied: 1 sh. (broken), MB2; 2 sh. (broken), MB3; 1 sh. (broken), PI5; 1 sh. (broken), PI7; 4 sh. (broken), MB26; 13 sh. (broken), MB30; 10 sh. (broken), MB31; 1 sh. (broken), MB34; 2 sh. (broken), MB35; 1 sh. (broken), MB36. Remarks: All specimens of BENTART this is a well-known species illustrated cruises correspond to fragmented shells, in several works. The synonymy of and these were not photographed since Pecten racovitzai Pelseneer, 1903 was 97 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 suggested by Lamy (1911a) and accepted in subsequent works. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Dell, 1990; Hain, 1990), South Sandwich, South Orkney and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Península (Lamy, 1906b, 1911a; Dell, 1990), Bellingshausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903; this study) and Peter I Island (Soot- Ryen, 1951; this study), Scott and Balleny Islands (Griffiths et al., 2003), Ross Sea (Smith, 1902; Smith, 1907b; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Commonwealth to Terre Adélie and Shackleton Ice Shell (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Mac Robertson to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996) and ca. 10° E (Grifftiths et al., 2003); from 2 m (Egorova, 1982) to 4545 m (Melvill and Standen, 1907). Genus Hyalopecten Verril, 1897 Hyalopecten pudicus (Smith, 1885) (Fig. 97) Peden pudicus Smith, 1885: 302, pl. 21, figs. 8-8b; Pelseneer, 1903: 26. Peden undatus Verrill and Smith, in Verrill, 1885: 444, pl. 44, fig. 8. Hyalopecten undatus: Dell, 1990: 37. Hyalopecten diledus Verrill and Bush, in Verrill, 1897: 80. Material studied: 1 spm. (16.5 x 17.0 mm), MB38. Remarks: This species was assigned to Hyalopecten after Carcelles (1953). Dell (1990) considered Hyalopecten dilectus Verrill and Bush, 1897 as a júnior synonym and cited it for several Antarctic points, though it seems to have a greater distribution. Hyalopecten arntzi Egorova, 1999, from the Weddell Sea, is very similar, but according to its author, the main difference is in the concavity of the shell, greater than in H. pudicus and in the distinct size of the ears. Distribution: South Sandwich Islands (Dell, 1990), cited for the Burd- wood Bank and the South Shetland Islands (Carcelles, 1953), Belling- shausen Sea (Pelseneer, 1903; this study), South Tasmania (48° S, 148° E) (Dell, 1990) and Marión Island (Smith, 1885); from 400 m (Pelseneer, 1903) to 5453 m (Dell, 1990). Family Prope amussiidae Abbott, 1954 Genus Cyclochlamys Finlay, 1926 Cydochlamys gaussianus (Thiele, 1912) (Fig. 98) Camptonedes gaussianus Thiele, 1912: 226, pl. 17, fig. 2; Dijkstra and Kohler, 2008: 37, fig. le. Cyclopeden gaussianus: Egorova, 1982: 65, figs. 281-282; Hain, 1990: 89, pl. 13, figs. 4a-c; Numanami et al., 1996: 212 (table, text), pl. 4, figs. 4, 7. Material studied: 2 spm. (1.2 x 1.1 - 2.8 x 2.7 mm), PA39. Remarks: Several species have been described from the Southern Ocean, being necessary a revisión of the group since the unknowns status of some species. The individuáis found agree with Thiele's description (1912), with Egorova's figures (1982) and with the specimens figured by Hain (1990) and Numanami et al. (1996). The taxonomie position of this species is Cyclochlamys gaussianus (Thiele, 1912) (Dijkstra and Kohler, 2008). Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), Western Antarctic Península (new 98 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica record), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; et al., 1996); from 157 m (new record) to Egorova, 1982) and Syowa (Numanami 481 m (Hain, 1990). Genus Cyclopecten Verrill, 1897 Cyclopecten notalis (Thiele, 1912) (Fig. 99) Camptonectes notalis Thiele, 1912: 251, pl. 17, figs. 3-3a; Dijkstra and Kóhler, 2008: 39, fig. lf. Palliolum notalis: Egorova, 1982: 64, figs. 283-284. Material studied: 1 spm. (4.1 x 4.0 mm), PI27; 4 spm. (3.0 x 3.0 - 7.0 x 6.9 mm), MB38. Remarles: Although it has been reported only by Thiele (1912) and redrawn by Egorova (1982), the description agrees with BENTART indi- viduáis. According to Dijkstra and Kóhler (2008) it belongs to Propeamus- siidae as Cyclopecten notalis (Thiele, 1912). Distribution: Bellingshausen Sea, Peter I Island (new records) and Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912); from 1324 m (new record) to 3423 m (Thiele, 1912). Cyclopecten pteriola (Melvill and Standen, 1907) (Fig. 100) Pecten pteriola Melvill and Standen, 1907: 147, figs. 16-16a. Cyclopecten pteriola: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 16; Dell, 1964: 141, fig. 1 (N°l); Hain, 1990: 90, pl. 13, figs. 5a-c. Material studied: 1 spm. (4.6 x 4.2 mm), MB36. Remarles: The inequilateral shell and marked concentric ridges of Cyclopec- ten pteriola are conclusive to attribute the species, which has been seldom recorded. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Orkney Islands (Melvill and Standen, 1907) and Bellingshausen Sea (new record); from 16 m (Melvill and Standen, 1907) to 560 m (new record). Subclass PlETERODONTA Neumayr, 1884 Order Venerida Adams and Adams, 1856 Family Thyasiridae Dalí, 1901 Genus Genaxinus Iredale, 1930 Genaxinus debilis (Thiele, 1912) (Fig. 101) Axinopsis debilis Thiele, 1912: 232, pl. 18, figs. 25-25a; Hedley, 1916: 27; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 30. Genaxinus debilis: Dell, 1964: 208; Arnaud, 1973: 557; Egorova, 1982: 70, figs. 314-315; Dell, 1990: 57, figs. 93-94. Genaxinus bongraini (Lamy): Nicol, 1966: 63, pl. 6, figs. 1-2 (no Lamy, 1910). Material studied: 107 spm. (1.8 x 1.6 - 3.3 x 3.3 mm), PI5; 141 spm. (2.0 x 1.9 - 3.1 x 3.0 mm), PI6; 40 spm. (1.7 x 1.6 - 2.8 x 2.6 mm), PI7; 49 spm. (2.0 x 1.8 - 3.3 x 3.0 mm), PI8; 5 spm. (2.0 x 1.9 - 3.0 x 2.9 mm), PA21; 4 spm. (2.1 x 2.1 - 2.9 x 2.7 mm), PA22; 1 spm. (broken), PA25; 58 spm. (1.0 x 0.9 - 2.1 x 2.0 mm), PI27; 1 spm. (1.1 x 1.1 mm), PI28; 1 spm. (2.1 x 2.1 mm), MB34; 1 spm. (2.0 x 2.0 mm), MB36; 7 spm. (1.6 x 1.5 - 1.9 x 1.8 mm), MB38; 8 spm. (1.1 x 1.0 - 2.1 x 2.1 mm), PA39; 6 spm. (1.1 x 0.9 - 1.8 x 1.7 mm), PA41; 1 spm. (1.5 x 1.4 mm), PA42; 244 spm. (1.9 x 1.8 - 3.8 x 3.9 mm), DEC. 99 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Remarks: This species resembles T. dearborni Nicol, 1965, which differs in having a more developed posterior sinus, being larger, with weaker concentric striae and having the ante- rior border shorter and straighter. Dell (1990) commented that Nicol's (1966) specimens, reported as Genaxinus bongraini, corresponded to G. debilis. Hain (1990) cited this species as a júnior synonym of T. bongraini (Lamy, 1910). Distribution: South Sandwich, South Georgia, South Orkney, Falkland /Malv- inas and Tierra del Fuego Islands, and Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands, Western Antarc- tic Peninsula and Bellingshausen Sea (Dell, 1990; this study), Peter I Island (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982) and Mac Robertson Land (Dell, 1990); from 9 m (Dell, 1990) to 1873 m (new record). Genus Thyasira Leach in Lamarck, 1818 Thyasira bongraini (Lamy, 1910) (Fig. 102) Axinus bongraini Lamy, 1910b: 389; 1911a: 17, pl. 1, fig. 17; Thyasira bongraini: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 30; Egorova, 1982: 70, figs. 311-313. Thyasira cf. bongraini (Lamy): Dell, 1964: 207, fig. 4 (N°10-ll). Genaxinus bongraini: Hain, 1990: 96, pl. 14, figs. 8a-b. Material studied: 2 spm. (2.0 x 1.9 - 3.1 x 3.0 mm), PI6; 7 spm. (3.0 x 2.9 - 7.0 x 7.0 mm), PA22; 1 spm. (5.2 x 5.4 mm), DEC. Remarks : T. dearborni Nicol, 1965 may be a júnior synonym of T. bongraini , be- cause Dell's (1964) specimens, cited as T. cf. bongraini, have all the characteris- tics of the species, and Dell (1990, p. 56, figs. 91-92) detailed and figured individ- uáis from Ross Sea assigned to T. dear- borni, that agree with the original de- scription of T. bongraini. Hain (1990) re- ported specimens collected in the Wed- dell Sea and he named Genaxinus bon- graini as well, but as a sénior synonym of G. debilis (Thiele, 1912). Summarizing, a revisión of the genus in the Southern Ocean is necessary. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Fíain, 1990), South Shetland Island (new record). Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1911a; Soot-Ryen, 1951; this study), Peter I Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; this study), Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982) and Bouvet Island (Linse, 2006); from 9 to 850 m (Hain, 1990). T. dear- borni has been cited in the South Orkney and the South Shetland Islands, Western Antarctic Peninsula and the Ross Sea (Dell, 1990); from 39 to 1180 m (Dell, 1990). Family Carditidae Fleming, 1828 Genus Cy clocar dia Conrad, 1867 Cyclocardia astartoides (Martens, 1878) (Fig. 103) Cardita astartoides Martens, 1878: 25; Smith, 1885: 212, pl. 15, figs, 2-2c; Smith, 1902: 211; Lamy, 1906b: 14; Smith, 1907b: 2; Hedley, 1911: 3; Lamy, 1911a: 21; Thiele, 1912: 230, pl. 18, fig. 10; Smith, 1915: 77. Venericardia astartoides: Hedley, 1916: 30, pl.3, figs. 33-34; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 216. Cyclocardia astartoides: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 25; Powell, 1957: 121; 1958: 177; Dell, 1964: 189; Nicol, 1966: 49, pl. 4, fig. 1, pl. 5, figs. 1-2; Arnaud, 1973: 558; Egorova, 1982: 72, figs. 331-333; Okutani, 1986: 279 (table), pl. 2, figs. 16, 22; Dell, 1990: 59, figs. 98-99; Hain, 1990: 94, pl. 14, figs. 4a-b; Numanami et al., 1996: 211 (table), 213 (text), pl. 4, fig. 5; Troncoso et al., 2001: 109, fig. 38. 100 Aldea AND TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Cardita antárctica Smith, 1907b: 2, pl. 2, figs. 15-15a. Cyclocardia antárctica: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 24. Material studied: 3 spm. (6.1 x 5.8 - 8.9 x 10.1 mm), MB4; 6 spm. (8.3 x 6.8 - 20.5 x 16.3 mm), PA20; 2 spm. (6.7 x 5.2 - 8.2 x 6.4 mm), PA21; 2 spm. (8.0 x 6.7 - 14.0 x 10.9 mm), PA25; 1 spm. (3.5 x 3.5 mm), MB37; 5 spm. (0.9 x 0.9 - 9.0 x 7.0 mm), PA39; 4 spm. (1.1 x 1.1 - 24.0 x 19.1 mm), LOW. Remarks : Dell (1964) remarked that C. astar toides has variations according to geographic distribution, being possibly the sénior synonym of the species C. intermedia (Thiele, 1912) and C. antárctica (Smith, 1907). The same author (Dell, 1990) validated the synonymy of C. antárctica, but left in doubt the syn- onymy of C. intermedia ; Hain (1990) included C. intermedia as a júnior synonym of C. astartoides, though Egorova (1982) reported it as a valid species. In this study we only consid- ered C. antárctica in the synonymy of C. astartoides, following Dell (1990) who examined many specimens from several localities. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Soot- Ryen, 1951; Hain, 1990), South Sand- wich (Dell, 1990), South Georgia (Soot- Ryen, 1951; Carcelles, 1953; Dell, 1990), South Orkney (Dell, 1990) and South Shetland Islands (Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Península (Lamy, 1906b; Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study), Belling- shausen Sea to off Thurston ísland (new records), Beagle Channel and Magellanic Area (Griffiths et al., 2003), Ross Sea (Smith, 1902; Smith, 1907b; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990) to 163° E (Smith, 1915), Balleny and Macquarie Islands (Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie (Powell, 1958), Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990), Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916) to Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Heard Island (Smith, 1885) to Kerguelen Islands (Smith, 1885; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931; Powell, 1957; Dell, 1990; Troncoso et al., 2001), Amery Ice Shelf (Numanami et al., 1996), Mac Robertson to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996), 24° E (Okutani, 1986) and cited ca. 10° E (Grif- fiths et al., 2003), and Bouvet Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; Linse, 2006); from 2 m (Hain, 1990) to 3248 m (Dell, 1990). Family Galeommatidae Gray, 1840 Genus My sella Angas, 1877 Mysella antárctica (Smith, 1907) (Figs. 104-105) Tellimya antárctica Smith, 1907b: 3, pl. 2, figs. 16-16b; 1915: 78. Mysella antárctica: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 33; Dell, 1964: 216, fig. 3 (N°12, 19); Dell, 1990: 42, figs. 78-79; Linse, 1997: 56. Material studied: 2 spm. (1.1 x 1.0 - 2.2 x 1.8 mm), PA41; 1 spm. (1.9 x 1.4 mm), PA42; 3 spm. (2.1 x 1.7 - 2.8 x 2.1 mm), DEC. Remarks: The specimens agree with the original description of Smith (1907b), with strong and short teeth, globose form and well defined umbo due to the con- cavity of the dorsal-posterior margin; however, they do not agree with the spec- imens figured by Dell (1990, figs. 78-79), whose teeth are long and narrow and the dorsal-posterior and anterior margins straighter. Several species have been described from the neighboring areas; in this sense, M. ovalis (Thiele, 1912) is very similar, though according to the original figures it is less elongated and it has a less concave dorsal-posterior margin. M. gibbosa (Thiele, 1912) has the hinge with small and subequal teeth and the dorsal- posterior margin almost straight. M. 101 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 narchii Dias-Passos and Domaneschi, 2006 differs in having a very long ante- rior tooth and a shorter posterior. Distribution : South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990; this study) and Western Antarctic Peninsula (new record), Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907b; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990) and Wilkes Land (Dell, 1990); from 29 m (Dell, 1990) to 1272 m (new record). Mysella gibbosa (Thiele, 1912) (Figs. 106-107) Tellimya gibbosa Thiele, 1912: 230, pl. 18, figs. 12-12a. Mysella gibbosa: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 33; Egorova, 1982: 71, figs. 307-308; Dell, 1990: 45, figs. 74-75. Material studied: 3 spm. (1.6 x 1.1 - 3.9 x 3.1 mm), MB36. Remarks : Hinge of the right valve with two, short subequal teeth. The teeth of the hinge and the shape of the shell differ from similar species (see above the remarks on M. antárctica). Distribution : Bellingshausen Sea (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982) and Mac Robertson Land (Dell, 1990); from 64 to 752 m (Dell, 1990). Genus Pseudokellya Pelseneer, 1903 Pseudokellya cardiformis (Smith, 1885) (Fig. 108) Kelly a cardiformis Smith, 1885: 202, pl. 11, figs. 6-6b. Pseudokellya cardiformis : Pelseneer, 1903: 48; Lamy, 1911a: 20; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 223; Soot- Ryen, 1951: 28; Powell, 1957: 122; Dell, 1964: 199, pl. 6, figs. 3-4; 1990: 40, figs. 66-67; Hain, 1990: 98, pl. 15, figs. 3a-b; Troncoso et al., 2001: 107, fig. 34. Pseudokellya stilhvelli Hedley, 1916: 31, pl. 3, figs. 38-39; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 28; Dell, 1964: 200; Nicol, 1966: 56, pl. 6, fig. 3, pl. 7, fig. 4; Egorova, 1982: 72, figs. 326-327. Material studied: 1 spm. (4.1 x 4.1 mm), PA21. Remarks: Nicol (1966) and Dell (1990) suggested that P. stillwelli Hedley, 1916 is part of the variability of this species regarding the strength of sculp- ture, and is,therefore, a synonym. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich and South Georgia Islands, Burdwood Bank, Falk- land/Malvinas and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Macquarie Island (Carcelles, 1953), Terre Adélie (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Hedley, (Right page) Figure 89. Adacnarca nitens, 4.2 x 3.8 mm, PA21. Figure 90. Lissarca notorcadensis , 7.0 x 6.6 mm, PA21. Figure 91. Philobrya sublaevis, 10.5 x 11.0 mm, PI8. Figure 92. Philobrya wandelensis , 3.2 x 2.5 mm, PA20. Figure 93. Dacrydium albidum, 2.6 x 3.2 mm, MB30. Figure 94. Limatula hodgsoni, 1 1.5 x 9.3 mm, PA20. Figure 95. Limatula pygmaea, 6.2 x 4.6 mm, PA20. Figure 96. Limatula simillima , 6.8 x 4.8 mm, MB31. Figure 97. Hyalopecten pudicus, 16.5 x 17.0 mm, MB38. Figure 98. Cyclochlamys gaussianus, 2.5 x 2.3 mm, PA39. Figure 99. Cyclopecten notalis , 6.7 x 6.4 mm, MB38. Figure 100. Cyclopecten pteriola , 4.6 x 4.2 mm, MB36. Figure 101. Genaxinus debilis , 2.3 x 2.3 mm, PI7. Figure 102. Thyasira bongraini , 3.6 x 3.8 mm, PA22. Figure 103. Cyclocardia astartoides, 20.5 x 16.3 mm, PA20. Figures 104, 105. Mysella antárctica , 2.7 x 2.1 mm, DEC. Figures 106, 107. Mysella gibbosa, 3.0 x 2.4 mm, MB36. (Página derecha) Figuras 89-107. Ver los nombres científicos en el rótulo en inglés. 102 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica 103 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 1916; Egorova, 1982), Kerguelen Islands (Smith, 1885; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931; Powell, 1957; Troncoso et al ., 2001) and cited for Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Carcelles, 1953); from 20 m (Powell, 1957) to 710 m (Dell, 1990). Family Cyamiidae Philippi, 1845 Genus Cyamiocardium Soot-Ryen, 1951 Cyamiocardium denticulatum (Smith, 1907) (Fig. 109) Cyamium denticulatum Smith, 1907b: 3, pl. 3, figs. 4, 4b; Lamy, 1911a: 19; Melvill and Standen, 1912: 363. Cyamiocardium denticulatum: Powell, 1951: 116; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 26; Powell, 1957: 116; 1958: 175; Dell, 1964: 203; Arnaud, 1973: 558; Dell, 1990: 50, figs. 80-83; Hain, 1990: 95, pl. 14, figs. 6a-b; Linse, 1997: 56. Material studied: 1 spm. (broken), MB4; 292 spm. (2.0 x 1.9 - 5.7 x 5.5 mm), PI5; 2 spm. (3.0 x 2.9 - 3.1 x 3.0 mm), PI7; 153 spm. (2.1 x 1.9 - 5.0 x 4.9 mm), PI8; 1 spm. (broken), PA21; 6 spm. (1.5 x 1.4 - 2.0 x 2.0 mm), PA41; 4 spm. (1.1 x 1.1 - 1.8 x 1.7 mm), PA42; 1 spm. (2.1 x 2.0 mm), PA43. Remarks : Other similar spedes in Antarc- tic and Sub-Antartic waters are Perrierina crassilabrum Dell, 1964, C. dahli Soot-Ryen, 1957 and C. rotundatum (Thiele, 1912), which differ by having more prominent radial sculpture (P. crassilabrum and C. rotunda- tum), or by its equilateral shape with central umbo (C. dahli). C. denticulatum exhibits more prominent growth lines, a fainter radial sculpture and a subcentral umbo. Distribution : Weddell Sea in 23-573 m (Hain, 1990), South Orkney (Dell, 1990) and Falkland /Malvinas Islands (Melvill and Standen, 1912), Burdwood Bank (Melvill and Standen, 1912; Dell, 1990) and South Atlantic Ocean (54° S, 64° W) (Dell, 1990), Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997), Tierra del Fuego Island, South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990) and Western Antarc- tic Peninsula (Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study), Peter I Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; this study), off Thurston Island (new record), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907b; Dell, 1990), ca. Terre Adélie (Griffiths et al., 2003), Davis Sea (Dell, 1990), Kerguelen Islands (Powell, 1957), Mac Robertson to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958) and Bouvet Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; Linse, 2006); from 5 m (Dell, 1990) to 1272 m (new record). Despite its widespread distribution, it has not been cited in the South Georgia and South Sandwich Islands (Dell, 1990). Genus Cyamiomactra Bernard, 1897 Cyamiomactra laminifera (Lamy, 1906) (Fig. 110) Mactra laminifera Lamy, 1906a: 45. Cyamiomactra laminifera: Lamy, 1906b: 11, pl. 1, figs. 10-12; 1911a: 18; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 28; Dell, 1964: 202, pl. 6, fig. 9-10; Nicol, 1966: 51, pl. 7, figs. 1, 7-8; Dell, 1990: 50, fig. 100. Cyamium laminifera: Thiele, 1912: 270. Diplodonta incerta Smith, 1907b: 4, pl. 3, figs. 5-5a. Cyamiomactra robusta Nicol, 1964: 60, pl. 6, figs. 1-3; 1966: 53, pl. 8, figs. 1, 6-7; Hain, 1990: 95, pl. 14, figs. 5a-b. Material studied: 1 spm. (5.6 x 4.1 mm), PI8; 1 spm. (6.3 x 5.0 mm), PA20; 1 spm. (10.0 x 7.1 mm), MAR. Remarks : The synonymy of variability of the postero-ventral rib, the Cyamiomactra robusta Nicol, 1964 was same as Diplodonta incerta Smith, 1907, suggested by Dell (1990) based on the whose synonymy was accepted before. 104 ALDEA and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich (Soot-Ryen, 1951), South Georgia (Dell, 1990) and South Orkney Islands (Carcelles, 1953), South Atlantic Ocean (51° S, 44° W) and Falkland /Malvinas Islands (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Lamy, 1911a; Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990) and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1906b; Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea (Dell, 1990), Peter I Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; this study) and Ross Sea (Smith, 1907b; Dell, 1990); from 15 to 1281 m (Dell, 1990). Subclass Anomalodesmata Dalí, 1889 Order Pholadomyida Newell, 1965 Family Lyonsiidae Fischer, 1887 Genus Lyonsia Turton, 1822 Lyonsia arcaeformis Martens, 1885 (Fig. 111) Lyonsia arcaeformis Martens, 1885: 94; Martens and Pfeffer, 1886: 113, pl. 4, fig. 1; Dell, 1964: 226; Nicol, 1966: 69, pl. 9, figs. 1, 3, 9; Dell, 1972: 27, fig. 28; 1990: 63, figs. 116-117; Hain, 1990: 100, pl. 15, figs. 6a-b. Entodesma arcaeformis : Soot-Ryen, 1951: 21. Lyonsiella planulata Thiele, 1912: 232, pl. 18, figs. 27-27a; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 22; Powell, 1958: 178; Egorova, 1982: 68, figs. 300-301. Lyonsia planulata: Nicol, 1966: 69, pl. 9, figs. 1, 3, 9. Pholadomya mazvsoni Hedley, 1916: 28, pl. 3, figs. 29-30; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 21; Nicol, 1966: 71. Material studied: 1 spm. (11.1 x 7.0 mm), PA39; 3 spm. (5.2 x 3.6 - 10.9 x 6.0 mm), DEC. Remarks : Dell (1964) included Pho- ladomya mawsoni Hedley, 1916 as a júnior synonym, and Dell (1972) Lyonsia planulata (Thiele, 1912). Accord- ing to Powell (1960) the specimen of Entodesma cuneata (Gray, 1828) from Falkland /Malvinas Islands reported by Melvill and Standen (1907, p. 151) corresponds to L. arcaeformis. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Sandwich (Dell, 1990), South Georgia (Martens and Pfeffer, 1886; Dell, 1990), South Orkney (Dell, 1990) and probably in the Falkland /Malvinas Islands (Powell, 1960) and Burdwood Bank (Carcelles, 1953), South Shetland Islands and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study), Amundsen Sea (70° S, 106° W) (Dell, 1990), Ross Sea (Dell, 1972, 1990), Terre Adélie, Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916) and Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Enderby Land (Powell, 1958) and Bouvet Island (Linse, 2006); from 12 to 1812 m (Dell, 1990). Family Poromyidae Dalí, 1886 Genus Poromya Forbes, 1844 Poromya adelaidis (Hedley, 1916) (Fig. 112) Pholadomya adelaidis Hedley, 1916: 28, pl. 3, figs. 31-32; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 21; Powell, 1958: 178; Dell, 1964: 227; Egorova, 1982: 67, figs. 294-296. Poromya adelaidis: Dell, 1990: 61, figs. 107-108. Poromya cf. adelaides (sic): Hain, 1990: 102, pl. 16, fig. 1. Material studied: 2 spm. (18.9 x 13.4 - 21.0 x 14.3 mm), PA43; 3 spm. (23.1 x 17.0 - 28.1 x 19.8 mm), LOW; 1 spm. (22.1 x 17.4 mm), DEC. 105 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Remarles : Dell (1990, p. 61) com- ments that the relationship between P. adelaidis, P. spinosula (Thiele, 1912) and P. antárctica (Hedley, 1916) is still not clear. Distribution : Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), South Georgia and Falkland/ Malvinas Islands, Cape Horn, South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Peninsula (new record), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie, Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982) and En- derby Land (Powell, 1958); from 110 m (Hain, 1990) to 2154 m (Dell, 1990). Family Laternulidae Fledley, 1918 Genus Laternula Roding 1798 Laternula elliptica (King and Broderip, 1832) (Fig. 113) Anatina elliptica King and Broderip, 1832: 335; Smith, 1885: 76; Smith, 1902; 210, pl. 25, figs. 9-10; Lamy, 1906b: 14; Melvill and Standen, 1907: 151; Smith, 1907b: 1, pl. 3, fig. 3; Hedley, 1911: 3; Lamy, 1911a: 21; Thiele, 1912: 256; Smith, 1915: 78; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 244. Laternula elliptica: Hedley, 1916: 27; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 22; Powell, 1957: 120; Dell, 1964: 229; Nicol, 1966: 74, pl. 10, figs. 1, 4, 7; Arnaud, 1973: 559; Egorova, 1982: 68, figs. 297-299; Okutani, 1986: 279, pl. 2, figs. 20-21; Dell, 1990: 62, fig. 106; Branch et al, 1991: 51 (key); Numanami et al, 1996: 212 (table, text), pl. 4, fig. 9; Troncoso et al, 2001: 110, fig. 41. Material studied: 1 spm. (33.0 x 18.0 mm), PI5; 1 spm. (12.0 x 7.3 mm), LOW; 3 spm. (20.5 x 11.5 - 46.0 x 29.1 mm), DEC. Distribution : Cited for the Weddell Sea (Griffiths et al ., 2003), South Sand- wich (Soot-Ryen 1951, Dell 1990), South Georgia (Carcelles, 1953; Dell, 1990) and South Orkney Islands (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Dell, 1990), Eastern Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990), South Shetland Islands (Lamy, 1911a; Soot-Ryen 1951; Dell, 1990; this study). Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1906b, 1911a; Dell, 1990) and Peter I Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; this study), Ross Sea (Smith, 1902, 1907b; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Commonwealth (Hedley, 1916), Wilkes Land (Griffiths et al., 2003), Davis Sea (Egorova, 1982), Kerguelen Islands (Smith, 1885; Thiele, 1912; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931; Powell, 1957; Troncoso et AL., 2001), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Branch et al., 1991), Syowa (Numanami et al., 1996) and ca. 10° E (Griffiths et al., 2003); from 1 m (Tron- coso et AL., 2001) to 508 m (Dell, 1990). Family Thraciidae Stoliczka, 1870 Genus Thracia Leach in Blainville, 1824 Thracia meridionalis Smith, 1885 (Fig. 114) Thracia meridionalis Smith, 1885: 68, pl. 6, figs. 4-4b; Lamy, 1906b: 15; Smith, 1907b: 1; Hedley, 1911: 3; Lamy, 1911a: 22; Smith, 1915: 78; Hedley, 1916: 29; Soot-Ryen, 1951: 21; Powell, 1958: 178; Nicol, 1966: 71, pl. 10, figs. 2, 5; Arnaud, 1973: 559; Egorova, 1982: 69, figs. 304-306; Okutani, 1986: 279 (table), pl. 2, fig. 15; Dell, 1990: 63, figs. 109-111; Hain, 1990: 101, pl. 15, figs. 7a-b; Branch et al., 1991: 51 (key); Linse, 1997: 61; Troncoso et al., 2001: 112, fig. 42. Mysella? truncata Thiele, 1912: 230, pl. 18, fig. 18. Mysella? frígida Thiele, 1912: 231, pl. 18, fig. 19. Material studied: 3 spm. (5.7 x 4.6 - 8.1 x 6.0 mm), PA21; 2 spm. (22.0 x 16.3 - 23.8 x 18.2 mm), LOW; 20 spm. (2.9 x 2.4 - 23.0 x 19.1 mm), DEC. 106 ALDEA AND TroNCOSO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Remarles: The synonymy of Thiele's (1912) Mysella? truncata and Mysella? frígida were accepted in many previous works (see Dell, 1990). Distribution: Weddell Sea (Soot- Ryen, 1951; Hain, 1990), South Sand- wich (Dell, 1990), South Georgia (Car- celles, 1953; Dell, 1990) and cited for the South Orkney Islands (Linse, 1997), Falkland /Malvinas Islands, South Atlantic Ocean (54° S, 64° W), Cape Horn (Dell, 1990) and Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997), South Shetland Islands (Lamy, 1911a; Soot-Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study) and Western Antarctic Peninsula (Lamy, 1906b, 1911a; Soot- Ryen, 1951; Dell, 1990; this study), Ross Sea (Smith, 1907b; Hedley, 1911; Smith, 1915; Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie, Shackle- ton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916) to Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982), Ker- guelen Islands (Smith, 1885; Troncoso et al., 2001), Mac Robertson to Enderby Land (Powell, 1958), Marión and Prince Edward Islands (Smith, 1885; Branch et al., 1991), 24° E (Okutani, 1986) and ca. 10° E (Griffiths et al., 2003); from 4 to 836 m (Dell, 1990). Family Cuspidariidae Dalí, 1886 Genus Cuspidaria Nardo, 1840 Cuspidaria infelix Thiele, 1912 (Fig. 115) Cuspidaria infelix Thiele, 1912: 233, pl. 18, fig. 28; Hedley, 1916: 29; Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931: 255; Soot- Ryen, 1951: 23; Dell, 1964: 230; Nicol, 1966: 78, pl. 9, fig. 6; Egorova, 1982: 74, figs. 334-336; Dell, 1990: 68, figs. 112-114; Hain, 1990: 103, pl. 16, figs. 3a-f; Egorova, 1993: 153, pl. 1, figs. 2-6; Linse, 1997: 62. Material studied: 1 spm. (broken), MB2; 24 spm. (4.3 x 2.9 - 10.0 x 6.9 mm), PI5; 3 spm. (6.0 x 3.7 - 27.1 x 17.0 mm), PI7; 13 spm. (4.4 x 3.0 - 9.2 x 6.1 mm), PI8; 1 spm. (16.3 x 8.1 mm), MB9; 2 spm. (4.0 x 2.6 - 12.7 x 7.8 mm), PA21; 1 spm. (7.1 x 4.1 mm), PA24; 2 spm. (13.9 x 8.5 - 16.5 x 10.1 mm), MB31; 3 spm. (6.0 x 3.7 - 17.9 x 10.9), MB34; 9 spm. (2.0 x 1.3 - 7.3 x 4.6 mm), MB36. Remarles: Egorova (1993) studied the Antarctic species of cuspidariids; in this sense, C. tenella Smith, 1907, differs in being a larger, more globose species, having a posterior rostrum which is nar- rower and shorter. Cuspidaria smirnovi Egorova, 1998 differs in having more marked growth lines and a shorter and less marked rostrum. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Hain, 1990), cited for the South Georgia and South Orkney Islands (Linse, 1997), South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Dell, 1990; this study), Peter I Island (Soot-Ryen, 1951; this study) and Bellingshausen Sea to off Thurston Island (new records), Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997), Ross Sea (Dell, 1990), Terre Adélie (Griffiths et al., 2003), Shackleton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916), Davis Sea (Thiele, 1912; Egorova, 1982) and Bouvet Island (Thiele and Jaeckel, 1931; Linse, 2006); from 60 m (Hain, 1990) to 1426 m (new record). Cuspidaria mínima (Egorova, 1993) (Fig. 116) Subcuspidaria mínima Egorova, 1993: 164, pl. 3, figs. 2-3. Cuspidaria mínima : Zelaya and Ituarte, 2005: 173, figs, 16-27. Material studied: 1 spm. (3.0 x 2.1 mm), PI5; 4 spm. (1.5 x 1.1 - 1.9 x 1.3 mm), PA42; 2 spm. (1.5 x 1.0 - 2.3 x 1.8 mm), PA43; 1 spm. (3.0 x 2.1 mm), LOW. Remarles: Zelaya and Ituarte (2006) the characteristic of marked lamellae. In established the differences between the this sense, the similar species C. kerguele- Antarctic species of Cuspidaria that share nensis (Smith, 1885) and C. concéntrica 10 7 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Thiele, 1912 differ in having less spaced lamellae, the dorsal margin of the rostrum almost concave and a postero- ventral margin which is more concave than in C. mínima. Cuspidaria plicata Thiele, 1912 differs in having no lamel- lose concentric sculpture. Distribution : South Orkney (Egorova, 1993) and South Shetland Islands (Zelaya and Ituarte, 2005; this study). Western Antarctic Peninsula, Peter I Island (new records) and Wilkes Land (Egorova, 1993); from 115 to 1272 m (new records). Genus Myonera Dalí and Smith, 1886 Myonera fragilissima (Smith, 1885) (Fig. 117) Naerafragilissima Smith, 1885: 53, pl. 9, figs. 1-lb. Cuspidaria fragilissima: Pelseneer, 1903: 28. Myonera fragilissima: Soot-Ryen, 1951: 23; Branch et al.r 1991: 51 (key). Material studied: 1 spm. (broken), MB14; 2 spm. (1.4 x 0.8 - 2.9 x 1.8 mm), PI27. Distribution : Bellingshausen Sea (Pel- seneer, 1903; this study) to Peter I Island (new record). Marión (Branch et al., 1991) and Prince Edward Islands (Smith, 1885), also in Kerguelen Islands (Carcelles, 1953); from 498 to 1873 m (new records). Class Scaphopoda Bronn, 1862 Order Dentaluda da Costa, 1776 Family Dentaliidae Gray, 1834 Genus Dentalium Linné, 1758 Dentalium majorinum Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889 (Fig. 118) Dentalium majorinum Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889: 100, pl. 4, fig. 10; Píate, 1908b: 1; Smith, 1915: 74; Hedley, 1916: 67, pl. 9, figs. 104-105; Dell, 1964: 123; Arnaud, 1973: 554; Linse, 1997: 42; Steiner and Linse, 2000: 17, figs. 3, 8, 10 (radula); Steiner and Kabat, 2004: 593, 596, 612, 613. Fissidentalium majorinum: Dell, 1990: 72; Osorio and Reid, 2004: 84, fig. 2f. Dentalium majorinum var. magellanicum Pilsbry and Sharp, 1897: 27, pl. 12, figs. 95-97. Dentalium magellanicum: Powell, 1958: 207. Dentalium majorinum var. gaussianum Píate, 1908b: 5, figs. 1-4. Dentalium shoplandi Jousseaume: Melvill and Standen, 1907: 143; Lamy, 1910a: 324; 1911a: 16 (no Jousseaume, 1894). Material studied: 1 spm. (27.9 x 2.8 x 0.8 mm), MB1; 2 spm. (5.0 x 1.1 x 0.8 - 10.7 x 1.9 x 0.8 mm), MB2; 21 spm. (12.5 x 2.0 x 0.7 - 35.5 x 3.9 x 1.0 mm), PI7; 2 spm. (15.0 x 2.9 x 2.3 - 16.9 x 2.2 x 0.8 mm), PI8; 51 spm. (8.9 x 1.8 x 0.7 - 31.8 x 2.6 x 0.7 mm), MB9; 1 spm. (26.1 x 3.0 x 0.8 mm), MB10; 2 spm. (10.0 x 1.4 x 0.8 - 19.8 x 2.0 x 0.8); MB11; 18 spm. (11.4 x 1.4 x 0.5 - 36.5 x 3.8 x 1.0 mm), MB13; 5 spm. (13.6 x 1.6 x 0.5 - 24.0 x 2.7 x 1.0 mm), MB14; 2 spm. (12.0 x 1.7 x 0.8 - 12.1 x 1.8 x 0.8 mm), PA19; 1 spm. (16.1 x 3.0 x 1.7 mm), MB26; 1 spm. (16.0 x 3.0 x 1.5 mm), MB30; 2 spm. (7.2 x 1.0 x 0.4 - 12.8 x 1.8 x 0.8 mm), MB31; 1 spm. (23.7 x 3.7 x 1.4 mm), MB32; 1 spm. (20.6 x 2.5 x 0.7 mm), MB33; 2 spm. (5.8 x 1.7 x 1.1 - 7.0 x 1.8 x 1.2 mm), MB34; 4 spm. (8.2 x 3.0 x 2.6 - 12.1 x 1.8 x 0.8 mm), MB35; 27 spm. (13.5 x 1.8 x 0,8 - 25.5 x 2.2 x 0.6 mm), MB36; 4 spm. (9.2 x 1.5 x 0.7 - 15.6 x 3.0 x 1.8 mrp), MB37; 9 spm. (6.3 x 1.3 x 0.8 - 20.3 x 2.0 x 0,7 mm), MB38; 2 spm. (26.1 x 3.6 x 0.7 - 27.1 x 3.2 x 0.7 mm), PA39. Remarks: Steiner and Linse (2000) Región and validated the synonyms, revised the group in the Magellanic including Dentalium majorinum gra- 108 Aldea AND TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Figure 108. Pseudokellya cardiformis , 4.1 x 4.1 mm, PA21. Figure 109. Cyamiocardium denticula- tum , 4.3 x 4.2 mm, PI8. Figure 110. Cyamiomactra luminífera, 6.3 x 3.0 mm, PA20. Figure 111. Lyonsia arcaeformis, 7.1 x 4.2 mm, DEC. Figure 112. Poromya adelaidis, 28.1 x 19.8 mm, LOW. Figure 113. Laternula elliptica, 33.0 x 18.0 mm, PI5. Figure 114. Thracia meridionalis, 8.1 x 6.0 mm, PA21. Figure 115. Cuspidaria infelix, 12.7 x 7.8 mm, PA21. Figure 116. Cuspidaria mínima, 3.0 x 2.1 mm, PI5. Figure 117. Myonera fragilísima, 2.9 x 1.8 mm, PI27. Figure 118. Dentalium majorinum, 23.2 x 2.0 x 0.6 mm, MB9. Figure 119. Rhabdus cf. perceptus, 26.0 x 3.9 x 1.3 mm, MB17. Figure 120. Striopulsellum mínimum, 3.4 x 0.6 x 0.3 mm, PI28. Figure 121. Cadulus thielei, 4.0 x 0.7 x 0.4 mm, MB33. Figure 122. Siphonodentalium dalli, 14.2 x 2.6 x 1.3 mm, PI7. Figuras 108-122. Ver los nombres científicos en el rótulo en inglés. 109 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 hamense Odhner, 1931. Steiner and Kabat (2004) gave a complete list of synonyms of this species. Distribution: Weddell Sea (Melvill and Standen, 1907; Dell, 1990), Falk- land/Malvinas Islands (Dell, 1990), Cape Horn (Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889), Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997), Magellan Strait and Tierra del Fuego Island (Dell, 1990), reaching the South Pacific coast (44° S - 45° S, South Chile) (Osorio and Reíd, 2004), South Shet- land Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Península (Lamy, 1911a; Odhner 1931 in Powell, 1960; Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea (Lamy, 1911a; Dell, 1990; this study) to off Thurston Island and Peter I Island (new records), Ross Sea and Balleny Islands (Dell, 1990), 163° E (Smith, 1915), Terre Adélie to Wilkes Land (Hedley, 1916; Powell, 1958), Shackle- ton Ice Shelf (Hedley, 1916; Dell, 1990), Davis Sea (Plate, 1908b; Powell, 1958) and from Amery Ice Shelf to Enderby (Powell, 1958); from 24 m (Dell, 1990) to 2579 m (Melvill and Standen, 1907). Family Rhabdidae Chistikov, 1975 Genus Rhabdus Pilsbry and Sharp, 1897 Rhabdus cf. perceptus (Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889) (Fig. 119) Dentalium perceptum Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889: 99; Dell, 1964: 124; Linse, 1997: 42. Rhabdus perceptum: Steiner and Linse, 2000: 18, fig. 4, 11, 13 (radula); Osorio and Reid, 2004: 84, %• 2g- Rhabdus perceptus: Steiner and Kabat, 2004: 628. Material studied: 1 sh. (30.1 x 3.7 x 2.1 mm), PI7; 2 spm. (42.5 x 4.5 x 1.0 - 43.2 x 4.7 x 1.1 mm), MB12; 1 spm. and 1 sh. (18.7 x 5.0 x 3.9 - 26.0 x 3.9 x 1.3 mm), MB17; 7 spm. (6.8 x 1.3 x 0.8 - 45.8 x 5.8 x 1.2 mm), MB26; 9 spm. (18.5 x 3.0 x 1.3 - 41.4 x 4.5 x 1 x 1.1 mm), MB32. Remarks: The individuáis studied in BENTART expeditions were conferred to this species, because they are thicker than that used for the original description and than those from Steiner and Linse (2000), also they are out of the distributional range. .3 mm), MB30; 22 spm. (26.1 x 3.0 x 1.0 - 49.8 x 5.8 Distribution : Cape Horn (Mabille and Rochebrune, 1889), Beagle Channel (Linse, 1997), reaching 41° S in the South Pacific coast (Cárdenas et al., in press); from 80 to 993 m (Cárdenas et al., in press). Order Gadilida Starobogatov, 1974 Family Pulsellidae Scar abino in Boss, 1982 Genus Striopulsellum Scarabino, 1995 Striopulsellum mínimum (Plate, 1908) (Fig. 120) Siphonodentalium mínimum Plate, 1908b: 4, fig. 5; Dell, 1990: 74. Striopulsellum mínimum: Steiner and Kabat, 2004: 617. Material studied: 37 spm. (2.1 x 0.4 x 0.1 - 4.7 x 0.9 x 0.4 mm), PI27; 3 spm. (3.3 x 0.8 x 0.2 - 4.0 x 0.9 x 0.3 mm), PI28; 11 spm. (1.8 x 0.4 x 0,2 - 4.9 x 0.8 x 0.3 mm), MB33; 4 spm. (2.8 x 0.6 x 0.1 - 4.0 x 0.7 x 0.2 mm), MB34; 6 spm. (2.0 x 0.2 x 0.1 - 3.5 x 0.5 x 0.1 mm), MB35; 23 spm. (3.0 x 0.6 x 0.1 - 5.0 x 0.7 x 0.2 mm), MB36; 3 spm. (4.0 x 0.7 x 0.3 - 4.1 x 0.7 x 0.3 mm), MB38. Distribution: Bellingshausen Sea Sea (Dell, 1990) and Davis Sea (Plate, and Peter I Island (new records), Ross 1908b), also in New Caledonia (Scara- 110 Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica bino 1995 in Steiner and Kabat, m (Scarabino 1995 in Steiner and 2004); from 238 m (Dell, 1990) to 6179 Kabat, 2004). Family Gadilidae Stoliczka, 1868 Genus Cadulus Philippi, 1844 Cadulus thielei Píate, 1908 (Fig. 121) Cadulus thielei Píate, 1908b: 3, figs. 6-11; Dell, 1990: 73, figs. 120-121; Steiner and Kabat, 2004: 656. Material studied: 1 spm. (4.0 x 0.7 x 0.4 mm), MB33; 1 spm. (3.9 x 0.5 x 0.3 mm), PA39. Distribution : Western Antarctic Penin- Ross Sea (Dell, 1990) and Davis Sea (Plate, sula and Bellingshausen Sea (new records), 1908b); from 157 to 438 m (new records). Genus Siphonodentalium Sars, 1859 Siphonodentalium dalli (Pilsbry and Sharp, 1898) (Fig. 122) Cadulus dalli Pilsbry and Sharp, 1898: 155, pl. 30, figs. 19-23; Plate, 1908b: 4, fig. 12; Powell, 1958: 207. Siphonodentalium dalli: Steiner and Linse, 2000: 21; Steiner and Kabat, 2004: 581. Siphonodentalium dalli f. dalli: Steiner and Linse, 2000: 21, figs. 6, 15 (radula). Cadulus dalli var. antarcticus Odhner, 1931: 5, pl. 1, figs. 5-7, 9, 11, 13-14, pl. 2, figs. 18-21, 24-25. Cadulus dalli antarcticus: Dell, 1964: 130; Dell, 1990: 73, figs. 118-119. Siphonodentalium dalli f. antarcticus: Steiner and Linse, 2000: 23, figs. 7, 14, 16 (radula); Steiner and Kabat, 2004: 563 (synonymy). Material studied: 12 spm. (7.8 x 1.9 x 0.7 - 20.1 x 3.1 x 1.7 mm), PI5; 52 spm. (4.9 x 1.1 x 0.4 - 16.1 x 2.6 x 1.3 mm), PI6; 1 spm. (14.2 x 2.6 x 1.3 mm), PI7; 5 spm. (11.0 x 2.4 x 1.7 - 18.3 x 3.2 x 2.0 mm), PA24; 1 spm. (10.0 x 1 .3 x 0.8 mm), MB36. Remarks : Steiner and Linse (2000) studied the differences between the sam- ples from the Beagle Channel (named Siphonodentalium dalli í. dalli (Pisbry and Sharp, 1898)) and from Antárctica (named Siphonodentalium dalli f. antarcti- cus Odhner, 1931) and they concluded that in spite of significative differences of morphometric characters found in statis- tical tests, more data are necessary in or- der to consider them as two subspecies. Distribution: South Pacific Ocean (51° S, 74° W) (Pilsbry and Sharp, CONCLUSIONS A total of 3133 individuáis belonging to 118 species of molluscs were identi- fied. Seventy-one of these species are gastropods with a total of 571 individu- áis, forty-two species are bivalves with a 1898), Magellan Strait (Plate, 1908b) and Beagle Channel (Steiner and Linse, 2000), South Orkney and South Shetland Islands (Dell, 1990), Western Antarctic Peninsula (Odhner, 1931; Dell, 1990; this study), Bellingshausen Sea (Dell, 1990; this study) and Peter I Island (new record), Ross Sea, Shack- leton Ice Shelf and Davis Sea (Dell, 1990), and from the Amery Ice Shelf to the Enderby Land (Powell, 1958); from 93 m (Dell, 1990) to 1056 m (new record). total of 2200 individuáis and five species are scaphopods, with a total of 362 indi- viduáis. Among the gastropods, the most abundant species were Neobuc- cinum eatoni with 89 individuáis, fol- 111 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 lowed by Philine alata with 88 individu- áis. Among bivalves, Genaxinus debilis with 674 individuáis, followed by Cyamiocardium denticulatum with 460 individuáis, were the most abundant species. Among the scaphopods Dental- ium majorinum accounted for most indi- viduáis with 159. Of the total cited species, six new records are added for the South Shet- land Islands ( Margarella refulgens, Torellia insignis, Antarctodomus thielei, Notoficula bouveti , Limopsis enderbyensis and Thyasira bongraini), 30 for the Western Antarctic Peninsula ( Puncturella spirigera, Margarella refulgens, Cirsonella extrema, Dickdellia labioflecta, Onoba gélida, Powellisetia deserta, Torellia mirabilis, Torellia planispira, Marseniopsis cónica, Pseudamauropsis anderssoni, Pseudamauropsis aureolutea, Acirsa antárc- tica, Hemiaclis incolorata, Melanella antárc- tica, Cerithiop silla antárctica, Cerithiopsilla austrina, Trophon coulmanensis coulmanen- sis, Pareuthria regulus, Prosipho reversus, Prosipho turritus, Belaturricula gaini, Conorbela antárctica, Newnesia antárctica, Yoldiella profundorum, Dacrydium albidum, Cyclochlamys gaussianus, Mysella antárctica, Poromya adelaidis, Cuspidaria mínima and Cadulus thielei), 34 for the Bellingshausen Sea ( Anatoma euglypta, Cornisepta antárctica, Antimargarita smithiana, Calliotropis antárctica, Solariella antárctica, Liotella endeavourensis, Lepto- collonia innocens, Onoba gélida, Pseudamauropsis aureolutea, Palsilunatia delicatula, Acirsa antárctica, Melanella antárctica, Trophon drygalskii, Chlanidota signeyana, Lusitromina abyssorum, Belaturricula ergata, Conorbela antárctica, Leucosyrinx parateno ceras, Typhlomangelia principalis, Acteon antarcticus, Neactaeon- ina edentula, Yoldiella antárctica, Yoldiella profundorum, Yoldiella sabrina, Limatula hodgsoni, Limatula simillima, Cyclopecten notalis, Cyclopecten pteriola, Cyclocardia astartoides, Mysella gibbosa, Cyamio- cardium denticulatum, Cuspidaria infelix, Striopulsellum mínimum and Cadulus thielei) and 30 for Peter I Island ( Mar- garella refulgens, Onoba gélida, Onoba ker- gueleni, Onoba turqueti, Marseniopsis mollis, Marseniopsis syowaensis, Pseudamauropsis anderssoni, Pseudamau- ropsis aureolutea, Falsilunatia delicatula, Melanella antárctica, Trophon cuspidari- oides, Trophon longstaffi, Chlanidota signeyana, Pareuthria regulus, Prosipho chordatus, Prosipho hedleyi, Prosipho pelli- tus, Prosipho pusillus, Typhlodaphne inno- centia, Neactaeonina edentula, Philine alata, Yoldiella antárctica, Yoldiella profundorum, Cyclopecten notalis, Genaxinus debilis, Cuspidaria mínima, Myonera fragilissima, Dentalium majorinum, Striopulsellum mínimum and Siphonodentalium dalli). On the other hand, new bathymetric records are given for 44 species ( Anti- margarita smithiana, Calliotropis pelseneeri, Solariella antárctica, Tropidomarga biangu- lata, Liotella endeavourensis, Onoba gélida, Torellia planispira, Marseniopsis syo- waensis, Pseudamauropsis aureolutea, Acirsa antárctica, Hemiaclis incolorata, Melanella antárctica, Trophon drygalskii, Trophon echinolamellatus, Lusitromina abyssorum, Notoficula bouveti, Prosipho chordatus, Prosipho pellitus, Prosipho pusil- lus, Prosipho reversus, Belaturricula gaini, Aforia multispiralis, Typhlodaphne innocen- tia, Typhlomangelia principalis, Acteon antarcticus, Nucula austrobenthalis, Yol- diella antárctica, Yoldiella profundorum, Yoldiella sabrina, Bathyarca sinuata, Limop- sis enderbey ensis, Limatula hodgsoni, Li- matula simillima, Cyclochlamys gaussianus, Cyclopecten notalis, Cyclopecten pteriola, Genaxinus debilis, Mysella antárctica, Cyamiocardium denticulatum, Cuspidaria infelix, Cuspidaria mínima, Myonera frag- ilissima, Cadulus thielei and Siphonoden- talium dalli). ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This research has been supported by the Spanish Government through the Ministry of Education and Science. The 'BENTART' cruises were funded by the Antarctic Programmes REN2001- 1074/ ANT and GLC2004-01856/ANT,of the Spanish Government. The officers and crew of the RV Hespérides and our colleagues from the BENTART cruises in 2003 and 2006 played a prominent part in the success of this project.We express 112 Aldea AND TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica our gratitude to all of them and we thank Dr. Diego G. Zelaya for his taxo- nomic orientations in some taxa and revising the text. We are also grateful to BIBLIOGRAPHY Adams, A., 1864. Description of a new genus and of twelve new species of Mollusca. Proceedings ofthe Zoological Society ofLondon, 31: 507-509. Allen, J. A., 2004. The Recent spedes of the gen- era Limatula and Limea (Bivalvia, Limacea) present in the Atlantic, with particular ref- erence to those in deep water. Journal of Nat- ural History, 38: 2591-2653. Arnaud, P. M., 1972. Invertébrés marins des XI- Iéme et XVéme Expéditions Antarctiques Frangaises en Terre Adélie. 8. Gastéropodes prosobranches. Tethys, suppl. 4: 105-134. Arnaud, P. M., 1973. Invertébrés marins des XI- Iéme et XVéme Expéditions Antarctiques Frangaises en Terre Adélie. 13. Polypla- cophores, Scaphopodes et Pélécypodes. Tethys , 5: 549-560. Arnaud, P. M., Troncoso, J. S. and Ramos, A., 2001. Species diversity and assemblages of macrobenthic Mollusca from the South Shet- land Islands and Bransfield Strait (Antárctica). Polar Biology, 24: 105-112. Beaumont, A. R. and Wei, J. H. C., 1991. Mor- phological and genetic variation in the Antarctic limpet Nacella concinna (Strebel, 1908). Journal ofMolluscan Studies, 57: 443-450. Branch, M. L., Arnaud, P. M.; Cantera, J. and Gianakouras, D., 1991. The benthic Mollusca and Brachiopoda of subantarctic Marión and Prince Edward Islands: 1) Illustrated keys to the species. 2) Records of the 1982-1989 Uni- versity of Cape Town Surveys. South African Journal of Antarctic Research, 21 (1): 45-64. Cantera, J. R. and Arnaud, P. M., 1985. Les gastéropodes prosobranches des íles Ker- guelen et Crozet (sud de l'Océan Indien): comparaison écologique et particularités bi- ologiques. Comité National Frangais des Recherches Antarctiques, 56: 1-169. Carcelles, A., 1953. Catálogo de la Malaco- fauna Antárctica Argentina. Anales del Museo del Nahuel Huapi, 3: 155-250. Cárdenas, J., Aldea, C. and Valdovinos, C., in press. Chilean marine Mollusca of the northern Patagonia collected during the Cimar-10 Fjords cruise. Gay ana. Castellanos, Z. A., 1988-1992. Catálogo de- scriptivo de la malacofauna marina magal- lánica. Comisión de Investigaciones Científicas, Buenos Aires. 1988, Los Placóforos 1: 41 pp.; 1989, Mesogastropoda 4: 44 pp.; 1990, Meso- gastropoda 5: 38 pp.; 1992a, Neogastropoda 7: 41 pp.; 1992b, Neogastropoda 8: 27 pp. Leslie Fernández, Cristina Ver tan and to one anonymous referee for their helpful comments that improved the manu- script. Castellanos, Z. A. and Landoni, N. A., 1988- 1993. Catálogo descriptivo de la malacofauna marina magallánica. Comisión de Investiga- ciones Científicas, Buenos Aires. 1988, Archi- gastropoda 2: 40 pp.; 1989, Archigastropoda 3: 40 pp.; 1990, Mesogastropoda 6: 38 pp.; 1993a, Neogastropoda 9: 26 pp.; 1993b, Neogastropoda 11: 31 pp. Castellanos, Z. A., Landoni, N. A. and Dadon, J. R., 1993. Catálogo descriptivo de la malacofauna marina magallánica. Comisión de Investigaciones Científicas, Buenos Aires. 12, Opistobranchia: 29 + 9 pp. Cernohorsky, W. O., 1977. The taxonomy of some Southern Ocean Mollusca (Gas- tropoda) mainly Antarctic and subantarc- tic. Records ofthe Auckland Institute and Mu- seum, 14: 105-119. Clarke, A., Aronson, R. B., Crame J. A., Gilí, J. M. and Blake, D. B., 2004. Evolution and diversity of the benthic fauna of the South- ern Ocean continental shelf. Antarctic Sci- ence, 16 (4): 559-568. Clarke, A., Griffiths, H. J., Linse, K., Barnes, D. K. A. and Crame, J. A., 2007. How well do we know the Antarctic ma- rine fauna? A preliminary study of macro- ecological and biogeographic patterns in Southern Ocean gastropod and bivalve molluscs. Diversity and Distributions, 13: 620-632. Cope, T. and Linse, K., 2006. Morphological differences in Lissarca notorcadensis Melvill and Standen, 1907 from the Scotia, Wed- dell and Ross Seas. Deep-Sea Research II, 53: 903-911. Dell, R. K., 1964. Antarctic and sub- Antarctic Mollusca: Amphineura, Scaphopoda and Bi- valvia. Discovery Reports, 33: 99-250. Dell, R. K., 1972. Notes on nomenclature of some Mollusca from Antárctica and South- ern South America. Records ofthe Dominium Museum, 8 (3): 21-42. Dell, R. K., 1990. Antarctic Mollusca with spe- cial reference to the fauna of the Ross Sea. Bul- letin ofthe Royal Society ofNew Zealand, 27: 1- 311. Días Passos, F. and Domaneschi, O., 2006. A new species of My sella Angas, 1877 (Bivalvia: Galeommatoidea) from Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands, Antárctica, with data on its biology and functional anatomy. Polar Biology, 29: 389-398. 113 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Dijkstra, H. H. and Kóhler, F., 2008. An an- notated catalogue of Recent Pectinoidea (Mol- lusca, Pectinidae and Propeamussiidae) type material in the Museum of Natural History, Humboldt University, Berlín. Z oosystematics and Evolution, 84 (1): 31-44. Eales, N. B., 1923. Mollusca: Part 5. Anatomy of Gastropoda (Except the Nudibranchiata). British Antarctic "Terra Nova" Expedition, 1910. Natural History Report. Zoology, 7: 1-46. Egorova, E. N., 1972. New species of Gas- tropoda (Prosobranchia) from Davis Sea. Issledovaniya Fauny Morei, 11 (19): 383-394. (In Russian). Egorova, E. N., 1982. Biological results of the Soviet Antarctic expeditions, 7, Mollusca of the Davis Sea. Explorations of the Faunas of the Seas, 26 (34): 1-142. (In Russian). Egorova, E. N., 1993. Antarctic Cuspidaria (Cus- pidariidae, Cuspidariida, Bivalvia). Antark- tika, 32: 151-166. (In Russian). Egorova E. N., 2007. New data against the bipolar status of the genus Amauropsis (Nati- cidae, Mollusca) with a description of the new genus Pseudamauropsis from Antarctic Región. Zoologicheskii zhurnal (Russian Jour- nal of Zoology), 86 (1): 16-29. (In Russian). Engl, W., 2004a. Antarctic mollusks Part 5. Re- visión of the Antarctic Eulimidae with the de- scription of three new species. La Conchiglia, 310:11-18,61. Engl, W., 2004b. Antarctic mollusks Part 6. Prosipho enricoi n. sp. La Conchiglia, 311: 11-14. Giribet, G. and Wheeler, W. C., 2002. On bi- valve phylogeny: a high-level analysis of the Bivalvia (Mollusca) based on combined mor- phology and DNA sequence data. Inverte- brate Biology, 121 (4): 271-324. Griffiths, H. J., Linse, K. and Crame, J. A., 2003. SOMBASE - Southern Ocean Mollusc Data- base: A tool for biogeographic analysis in diversity and ecology. British Antarctic Sur- vey, Cambridge, UK. http:/ /www. antárc- tica. ac.uk/BAS_Science / programmes2000- 2005 /ABPPF/ SOMBASE/ (accessed 3 Feb- ruary 2007) Hain, S., 1990. Die beschalten benthischen Mol- lusken (Gastropoda und Bivalvia) des Wed- dellmeeres, Antarktis. Berichte zur Polar- forschung, 70: 1-181. Harasewych, M. G. and Kantor, Y. I., 1999. A revisión of the Antarctic genus Chlanidota (Gastropoda: Neogastropoda: Buccinulidae). Proceedings of the Biological Society of Wash- ington, 112 (2): 253-302. Harasewych, M. G. and Kantor, Y. I., 2004. The deep-sea Buccinoidea (Gastropoda: Neogastropoda) of the Scotia Sea and adja- cent abyssal plains and trenches. The Nautilus, 118 (1): 1-42. Hedley, C., 1911. Mollusca. Reports on the Sci- entific Investigations ofthe British Antarctic Ex- pedition 1907-1909, 2, Biology, (1): 1-8. Hedley, C., 1916. Mollusca. Australian Antarc- tic Expedition, Ser. C, Zoology and Botany, 4 (1): 1-80. Hombron, J. B. and Jacquinot, C. R, 1841. De- scription de quelques Mollusques provenant de la campagne de 1' Astrolabe et de la Zélée. Annales des Sciences Naturelles, París, 2 (16): 62- 65, 190-192. Houart, R. and Sellanes, }., 2006. New data on recently described Chilean trophonines (Gastropoda: Muricidae), description of a new species and notes of their occurrence at a coid seep site. Zootaxa, 1222: 53-68. Jay, J. C. 1839. A Catalogue of the Shells, arranged according to the Lamarckian Sys- tem: together with descriptions of new or rare species, contained in the collection of John C. Jay, M.D. New York, Wiley and Put- nam, 3rd edition, 126 pp. Kantor, Y. I. and Harasewych, M. G., 1999. Rediscovery of the Antarctic species Sipho gaini Lamy, 1910 (Gastropoda: Neogas- tropoda) with remarks on its taxonomic po- sition. Antarctic Science, 11 (4): 430-435. King, P. P. and Broderip, W. J., 1832. De- scription of the Cirripedia, Conchífera and Mollusca, in a collection formed by the offi- cers of H.M.S. Adventure and Beagle em- ployed between the years 1826 and 1830 in surveying the Southern coasts of South Amer- ica. Zoological Journal, 5: 332-349. Lamy, E., 1905. Gastropodes prosobranches re- cueillis par l'Expédition Antarctique Frangaise du Dr. Charcot. Bulletin du Mu- seum d'Histoire N atur elle, 11: 475-483. Lamy, E., 1906a. Lamellibranches recueillis par l'Expédition Antarctique Frangaise du Dr. Charcot. Bulletin du Museum d'Histoire Na- turelle, 12: 44-52. Lamy, E., 1906b. Gastropodes Prosobranches et Pélécypodes. Expédition Antarctique Frangaise (1903-05), Sciences naturelles, París, 20 pp. Lamy, E., 1910a. Mission dans 1' Antarctique dirigée par M. le Dr. Charcot (1908-1910). Collections recueillies par M. le Dr. J. Liou- ville. Gastropodes Prosobranches et Scaphopodes. Bulletin du Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, 16: 318-324. Lamy, E., 1910b. Mission dans 1' Antarctique dirigée par M. le Dr. Charcot (1908-1910). Collections recueillies par M. le Dr. J. Liou- ville. Pélécypodes. Bulletin du Muséum Na- tional d'Histoire Naturelle, 16: 388-394. ( Lamy, E., 1911a. Gastropodes Prosobranches, Scaphopode et Pélécypodes. Deuxiéme Ex- pédition Antarctique Frangaise (1908-1910), Sci- ences naturelles, París, 32 pp. ALDEA AND TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Lamy, E., 1911b. Sur quelques Mollusques de la Géorgie du Sud et des íles Sandwich du Sud. Bulletin du Museum d'Histoire Naturelle, 17: 22-27. Lehmann, T., Gailer, J. P., Melzer, R. R. and Schwabe, E., 2007. A scanning-electron mi- croscopic study of Dickdellia labioflecta (Dell, 1990) (Gastropoda, Littorinoidea) on Colossendeis megalonyx megalonyx Fry and Hedgpeth, 1969 (Pycnogonida, Colossendei- dae): a test for ectoparasitism. Polar Biology , 30: 243-248. Linse, K., 1997. Die Verbreitung epibenthis- cher Mollusken im chilenischen Beagle-Kanal. Berichte zur Polarforschung, 228: 1-131. Linse, K., 2002. The shelled magellanic Mol- lusca: with special reference to biogeographic relations in the Southern Ocean. Theses Zoo- logicae, 34: 1-252. Linse, K., 2006. New records of shelled marine molluscs at Bouvet Island and preliminary as- sessment of their biogeographic affinities. Polar Biology , 29: 120-127. Linse, K. and Page, T. J., 2003. Evidence of brooding in Southern Ocean limid bivalves. Journal ofMolluscan Studies, 69: 290-293. Linse, K., Griffiths, H. J., Barnes, D. K. A. and Clarke, A., 2006. Biodiversity and bio- geography of Antarctic and sub-Antarctic mollusca. Deep-Sea Research II, 53: 985-1008. Lus, V. Ya., 1993. New species of Tromina (Neogastropoda, Buccinulidae, Tromina ) from low abyssal of Antarctic trenches. Lorie and Orkney. Proceedings ofthe P.P. Shirshov Insti- tuteofOceanology, 127: 176-197. (InRussian). Mabille, J. and Rochebrune, A. T., 1889. (see Rochebrune, A. T. and Mabille, J., 1889). Malchus, N. and Warén, A., 2005. Shell and hinge morphology of juvenile Limopsis (Bi- valvia: Arcoida) implications for limopsid evolution. Marine Biology Research, 1: 350- 364. Martens, E. von, 1878. Einige Conchylien aus den kalteren Meeresgegenden der südlichen Eidhalfte. Sitzungsberichte der Gesellschaft natur- forschender Freunde zu Berlín, 1878: 20-26. Martens, E. von, 1885. Vorlaufige Mitteilungen über die Mollusken-Fauna von Süd-Georgien. Sitzungsberichte der Gesellschaft naturforschender Freunde zu Berlín, 1885: 89-94. Martens, E. von and Pfeffer, G., 1886. Die Mollusken von Süd-Georgien nach der Aus- beute der Deutschen Station 1882-83. Jahrbuch der Hamburgischen Wissenschaftlichen Anstal- ten, 3: 65-135, 4 pls. McLean, J. H. and Geiger, D. L., 1998. New genera and species having the Fissurisepta shell form, with a generic-level phylogenetic analysis (Gastropoda: Fissurellidae). Natural History Museum ofLos Angeles County, Con- tributions in Science, 475: 1-32. Melvill, J. C. and Standen, R., 1907. The ma- rine Mollusca of the Scottish National Antarc- tic Expedition. Transactions ofthe Roy al Soci- ety of Edinburgh, 46: 119-157. Melvill, J. C. and Standen, R., 1912. The ma- rine Mollusca of the Scottish National Antarc- tic Expedition. Part II. Being a supplementary catalogue. Transactions ofthe Royal Society of Edinburgh, 48: 333-366. Neville, B., 1997. A Master Index to Species Ñames in the Family Epitoniidae. Albu- querque, USA: privately published, 59 pp. Nicol, D., 1964. A new species of Cyamiomac- tra (Pelecypoda) from the Ross Sea, Antárc- tica. The Nautilus, 78 (2): 60-62. Nicol, D., 1966. Descriptions, ecology and ge- ographic distribution of some Antarctic pele- cypods. Bulletin of American Paleontology, 51: 1-102. Numanami, H., 1996. Taxonomic study on Antarctic gastropods collected by Japanese Antarctic research expeditions. Memoirs of National Institute of Polar Research (E), 39: 1- 244. Numanami, El. and Okutani, T., 1990a. A new and two known species of the genus Anatoma collected by the Icebreaker Shirase from Breid Bay and Günnerus Bank, Antárctica (Gas- tropoda: Scissurellidae). Venus, 49 (2): 93- 106. Numanami, H. and Okutani, T., 1990b. Two trichotropid gastropods collected by the Ice- breaker Shirase from Breid Bay, Antárctica, with proposal of a new subgenus. Proceedings ofthe NIPR Symposium on Polar Biology, 3: 80- 90. Numanami, H. and Okutani, T., 1991. Lamel- lariid gastropods collected by Japanese Antarctic Research Expedition from near Syowa Station and Breid Bay, Antárctica. Proceedings ofthe NIPR Symposium on Polar Bi- ology, 4: 50-67. Numanami, EL, Okutani, T., Iwami, T., Takeuchi, I., Igarashi, A., Tsuchiya, Y. and Fukuchi, M., 1996. A record of gastropods and bivalves collected from East Antárctica by the Japanese Antarctic Research Expedi- tions in 1992-94. Proceedings ofthe NIPR Sym- posium on Polar Biology, 9: 207-223. Odhner, N. EL, 1926. Die Opisthobranchien. Further Zoological Results ofthe Swedish Antarc- tic Expedition 1901-1903, 2 (1): 1-100. Odhner, N. H., 1931. Die Scaphopoden. Further Zoological Results ofthe Swedish Antarctic Ex- pedition 1901-1903, 2 (5): 1-8. Okutani, T., 1986. A note on Antarctic benthic mollusks collected with a beam-trawl from Breid Bay by the 25th Japanese Antarctic re- search expedition. Memoirs ofthe National ln- stitutefor Polar Research, Tokyo, Special Issue, 40: 277-287. Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Oliver, P. G., 1983. Notoficula Thiele, a neote- nous genus of eratoid gastropod from Antárc- tica. British Antarctic Survey Bulletin, 61: 1-6. Oliver, P. G. and Picken, G. B., 1984. Proso- branch gastropods from Signy Island, Antárc- tica: Buccinacea and Muricacea. Bristish Antarctic Survey Bulletin, 62: 95-115. Osorio, C. and Reíd, D. G., 2004. Moluscos marinos intermareales y submareales entre la Boca del Guafo y el estero Elefantes, sur de Chile. Investigaciones Marinas, 32 (2): 71-89. Page, T. J. and Linse, K., 2002. More evidence of speciation and dispersal across the Antarc- tic Polar Front through molecular systemat- ics of Southern Ocean Limatula (Bivalvia: Limidae). Polar Biology, 25: 818-826. Pastorino, G., 2002. Two new Trophoninae (Gastropoda: Muricidae) from Antarctic wa- ters. Malacologia, 44 (2): 353-361. Pastorino, G., 2005. Recent Naticidae (Mol- lusca: Gastropoda) from the Patagonian Coast. The Veliger, 47 (4): 225-258. Pelseneer, P., 1903. Mollusques (Amphineures, Gastropodes et Lamellibranches). Résultats du voy age du S.Y. Bélgica en 1897-1898-1899 sous le commandement de A. de Gerlache de Gomery. Rapports scientifiques, Zoologie, R14: 85 pp., 9 pl. Philippi, R. A., 1845. Diagnosen einiger neuen Conchylien. Archiv für Naturgeschichte, 11: 50-71. Philippi, R. A., 1868. Conchylia nova potissi- mum magellanica. Malakozoologische Blatter, 15: 222-226. PlLSBRY, H. A. AND Sharp, B., 1897-1898. Scaphopoda. In Tryon, G. W. (Ed.): Manual of Conchology, Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, 17, 280pp. 1897: 1-144; 1898: 145- 280. Plate, L., 1908a. Scaphopoden. Résultats du vo- yage du S.Y. Bélgica en 1897-1898-1899 sous le commandement de A. de Gerlache de Gomery. Rapports scientifiques, Zoologie, R55: 4 pp. Plate, L., 1908b. Die Scaphopoden. In Drygal- ski, E. von (Ed.): Deutsche Südpolar-Expedition (1901-1903), 10: 1-6. Ponder, W. F., 1983. Rissoaform gastropods from the Antarctic and Sub-Antarctic: the Eatoniellidae, Rissoidae, Barleeidae, Cingu- lopsidae, Orbitestellidae and Rissoellidae (Mollusca: Gastropoda) of Signy Island, South Orkney Islands, with a review of the Antarc- tic and sub-Antarctic (excluding Southern South America and the New Zealand sub- Antarctic islands) species. British Antarctic Survey Scientific Reports, 108: 1-96. Ponder W. F. and Worsfold, T. M., 1994. A review of the rissoiform gastropods of South- western South America (Mollusca, Gas- tropoda). Contributions in Science (Natural History Museum ofLos Angeles County), 445: 1-63. Ponder, W. F. and Lindberg, D. R., 1997. To- wards a phylogeny of gastropod molluscs; an analysis using morphological characters. Zo- ological Journal ofthe Linnean Society, 119: 83- 265. Powell, A. W. B., 1951. Antarctic and Sub- antarctic Mollusca: Pelecypoda and Gas- tropoda. Discovery Reports, 26: 47-196. Powell, A. W. B., 1957. Mollusca of Kerguelen and Macquarie Islands. B. A. N. Z. Antarctic Research Expedition, 1929-1931. Reports B, 6: 107-149. Powell, A. W. B., 1958. Mollusca from the Vic- toria-Ross Quadrants of Antartica. B. A. N. Z. Antarctic Research Expedition, 1929-1931. Reports B, 6: 165-215. Powell, A. W. B., 1960. Antartic and subantartic mollusca. Records of the Auckland Institute Museum, 5 (3-4): 117-193. Preston, H. B., 1916, Descriptions of eight new species of marine Mollusca from the South Shetland Islands. Annals and Magazine of Nat- ural History, (8) 18: 269-272. Rabarts, I. W. and Whybrow, S., 1979. A re- visión of the Antarctic and Subantarctic mem- bers of the genus Yoldia Moller, 1842 (Bi- valvia: Nuculanidae). Journal of Natural His- tory, 13: 161-183. Reíd, D. G. and Osorio, C., 2000. The shallow- water marine Mollusca of the Estero Ele- fantes and Laguna San Rafael, Southern Chile. Bulletin ofthe Natural History Museum Zool- ogy, Eondon, 66 (2): 109-146. Rochebrune, A. T. and Mabille, ]., 1889. Mol- lusques. Misión Scientifique du Cap Horn. VI, Zoologie, París, 129 pp. Rosenberg, G., 2005. Malacolog 4.1: A Database of Western Atlantic Marine Mollusca. [WWW database (versión 4.1.0)I. http:/ /www.mala- colog.org/ (accessed 2 February 2007). Smith, E. A., 1875. Description of some new shells from Kerguelen' s Island. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, (4) 16: 67-73. Smith, E. A., 1879. Mollusca. An account of the petrological, botanical and zoological col- lections made in Kerguelen' s Land and Ro- dríguez during the transit of the Venus Ex- peditions carried out by order of her Majesty's Government in the years 1874-75. Philosoph- ical Transactions ofthe Roy al Society of Eondon, 168:167-192. Smith, E. A., 1881. Account of the Zoological col- lections made during the survey of the H.M.S. "Alert" in the Straits of Magellan and on the coast of Patagonia. IV. Mollusca and Mol- luscoidea. Proceedings ofthe Zoological Society of Eondon, 1881: 22-44, pls. 3-5. Smith, E. A., 1885. Report on the Lamelli- branchiata collected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-1876. Reports ofthe Sci- entific Results ofthe Exploratory Voyage of H.M.S. Challenger, Zoology, 13 (35): 1-341, 25 pls. lió Aldea and TroncosO: Shelled molluscs from West Antárctica Smith, E. A., 1902. Mollusca. In Lankester, E. R. and Bell, J. (Eds.): Report on the Collections of Natural History made in Antarctic Regions during the voyage ofthe Southern Cross, British Museum (Natural History), London: 201-213. Smith, E. A., 1907a. Mollusca. II.-Gastropoda. In Bell, J. (Ed.): National Antarctic Expedition 1901-1904. Natural History British Museum (Natural History), London, 2, 12 pp. Smith, E. A., 1907b. Mollusca. V.-Lamelli- branchiata. In Bell, J. (Ed.): National Antarc- tic Expedition 1901-1904. Natural History British Museum (Natural History), London, 2, 7 pp. Smith, E. A., 1915. Mollusca. Part I. Gastropoda Prosobranchia, Scaphopoda, and Pelecypoda. British Antarctic ("Terra Nova") Expedition, 1910. Natural History Report, Zoology. British Museum (Natural History), London, 2: 61-112. Soot-Ryen, T., 1951. Antarctic Pelecypoda. Sci- entific Results of the Norwegian Antarctic Ex- pedition (1927-29), 32: 1-46. Steiner, G. and Linse, K., 2000. Systematics and distribution of the Scaphopoda (Mollusca) in the Beagle Channel (Chile). Mitteilungen aus dem Hamburgischen Zoologischen Museum und Institut, 79: 13-30. Steiner G. and Kabat, A. R., 2001. Catalogue of supraspecific taxa of Scaphopoda (Mol- lusca). Zoosystema, 23 (3): 433-460. Steiner G. and Kabat, A. R., 2004. Catalog of species-group ñames of Recent and fossil Scaphopoda (Mollusca). Zoosystema, 26 (4): 549-726. Strebel, H., 1906. Beitráge zur Kenntnis der Molluskenfauna der Magalhaen-Provinz. IV. Zoologische jahrhücher, Abteilung für System- atík, Geographie und Biologie der Tiere, 24: 91- 174, pls. 7-13. Strebel, H., 1908. Die Gastropoden (mit Aus- nahme de nackten Opisthobranchier). Wzs- senschaftliche Ergebnisse der Schwedischen Süd- polar-Expedition 1901-1903, 6 (1):1-1 11, 6 pls. Stuardo, J., 1962. Sobre el género Limposis y la distribución de L. jousseaumei (Mabille y Rochebrune, 1889) (Mollusca: Bivalvia). Gay ana, zoología, 6: 5-11. Thiele, J., 1912. Die antarktischen Schnecken und Muscheln. In Drygalski, E. von (Ed.): Deutsche Südpolar-Expedition (1901-1903), 13: 183-286. Thiele, J. and Jaeckel, S., 1931. Muscheln der deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition. Dt. Tiefsee-Ex- pedition 1898-1899, 21: 158-268. Troncoso, N., Van Goethem, J. L. and Tron- coso, J. S., 2001. Contribution to the marine molluscan fauna of Kerguelen Islands, South Indian Ocean. Iberus, 19 (1): 83-114. Vayssiére, A., 1906. Mollusques. Nudibranches et Marséniadés. Expédition Antarctique Frangaise (1903-05), Sciences naturelles, Taris, 51 pp. Verrill, A. E., 1885. Third catalogue of mollusca recently added to the fauna of the New Eng- land. Transactions ofthe Connecticut Academy ofArts and Sciences, 6: 395-452. Verrill, A. E., 1897. A study of the family Pec- tinidae, with a revisión of the genera and subgenera. Transactions of the Connecticut Academy ofArts and Sciences, 10: 42-95. Vicente, N. and Arnaud, P. M., 1974. In- vertébrés marins des Xlléme et XVéme Ex- péditions Antarctiques Fran^aises en Terre Adélie. 12. Gastéropodes Opisthobranches. Tethys, 5 (4): 531-547. Warén, A., Arnaud, P. M. and Cantera, J. R., 1986. Descriptions of two new gastropods of the Trichotropidae from Kerguelen and Crozet Islands (South Indian Ocean). The Veliger, 29 (2): 157-165. Warén, A. and Hain, S., 1996. Description of Zerotulidae fam. nov. (Littorinoidea), with comments on an Antarctic littorinid gastro- pod. The Veliger, 39: 277-334. Watson, R. B„ 1882. Mollusca of H.M.S. "Chal- lenger" Expedition - Part XIV. Journal of the Linnean Society - Zoology, 16: 372-392. Watson, R. B„ 1883. Mollusca of H.M.S. "Chal- lenger" Expedition - Part XVIII. Journal ofthe Linnean Society - Zoology, 17: 284-293. Watson, R. B., 1886. Report on the Scaphopoda and Gasteropoda collected by H.M.S. Chal- lenger during the years 1873-76. Report on the scientific results of the voyage of H.M.S. Challenger, 1873-1876, Zoology, 15: 1-756, 50 pls. Zelaya, D. G., 2004. The genus Margarella Thiele, 1893 (Gastropoda: Trochidae) in the southwestern Atlantic Ocean. The Nautilus, 118 (3): 112-120. Zelaya, D. G., 2005. Systematics and biogeog- raphy of marine gastropods molluscs from South Georgia. Spixiana, 28 (2): 109-139. Zelaya , D. G. and Ituarte, C., 2006. Re- description of two Antarctic Species of Cus- pidaria: C. concéntrica Thiele, 1912 and C. mín- ima (Egorova, 1993) (Bivalvia: Cuspidari- idae). The Veliger, 48 (3): 170-177. Zelaya, D. G. and Geiger, D. L., 2007. Species of Scissurellidae and Anatomidae from Sub-Antarctic and Antarctic waters (Gastropoda: Vetigastropoda). Malacologia, 49 (2): 393-443. 117 Iberus, 26 (2): 119-126, 2008 © Sociedad Española de Malacología A new raphitomine neogastropod from the Mediterranean Sea (Conoidea) Una nueva especie de Raphitoma (Conoidea) del mar Mediterráneo Francesco PUS ATERI* and Riccardo GIANNUZZI-SAVELLI** Recibido el 14-X-2007. Aceptado el 30-V-2008 ABSTRACT Raphitoma villoría n. sp. is described from Taormina (Sicily) and ¡s compared with the closely related R. leufroyi (Michaud, 1828). Differential characters are given for the proto- conch, the adult shell, and the colour pattern of the living animal. Raphitoma villaria n. sp. lacks a radula which is present in R. leufroyi. The new species has been confused with R. errónea (Monterosato, 1 884), which is a different species. RESUMEN Se describe Raphitoma villaria n. sp. de Taormina (Sicilia) y se compara con la especie estrechamente emparentada R. leufroyi (Michaud, 1828). Se indican caracteres diferen- ciales relativos a la protoconcha y al patrón de color del animal vivo. Raphitoma villana n. sp. carece de radula, la cual está presente en R. leufroyi. La especie nueva se ha con- fundido con R. errónea (Monterosato, 1 884), que es una especie distinta. KEY WORDS: Gastropoda, Mediterrenean Sea, new species, Raphitoma. PALABRAS CLAVE: Gastropoda, mar Mediterráneo, nueva especie, Raphitoma. INTRODU CTION The Mediterranean species of the subfamily Raphitominae are currently being revised by Pusateri, Giannuzzi- Savelli, Spada and Oliverio. Prior to the main revisión, we present here the description of a new species that can be confused (and actually has been) with Pleurotoma volutella Kiener, 1846. Kiener (1846: 67) described P. vo- lutella as recent from Sicily, yet it is known that sometimes he reported fos- sil species as living [S. Palazzi, pers. comm.]. In fact, Pleurotoma volutella is relatively well known from the Plio- Pleistocene (Seguenza, 1880; de * Via Castellana, 64 - 90135 Palermo, Italy. ** Via Mater Dolorosa, 54 - 90146 Palermo, Italy. e Lamothe and Dautzenberg 1908; Cerulli-Irelli, 1910; Harmer, 1915; Al- BERICI AND TAMINI, 1935; COMPAGNONI, Conato, Follieri and Mal atesta, 1969). No recent specimens have been found by the authors during the present revisión, despite the examination of over 200 lots of raphitomines of the R. leufroyi (Michaud, 1828) group. All re- cent records in the literature are either secondary references derived from Kiener' s original error (Carus, 1893; Pl- ani, 1980; Sabelli, Giannuzzi-Savelli, and Bedulli, 1990) or erroneous identi- fications of particular morphotypes of -mail: malakos@tin.it 119 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Raphitoma leufroyi (e.g.: Philippi, 1844; Aradas and Benoit, 1876; Mon- terosato, 1878; Priolo 1967). Unfortu- nately, the types of P. volutella have not been found, despite search in the De- lessert collection (Y. Finet, Geneve, pers. com.), in the MNHN collections, and in other European museums. In the Monterosato collection (ZMR) there are two specimens labelled "Defrauda volutella, Palermo" and "Leufroya volutella, fossile di Ficarazzi", respectively (Figs. 19, 20). In the Melvill-Tomlin collection (NMW, 12930) there is a specimen (Fig. RESULTS 21) labelled by Monterosato "Leufroya volutella Kiener, fossile di Ficarazzi, non vivente". A second handwritten label reads: "Kiener a cru vivant un specimen ramassé par la mer". All these speci- mens fit perfectly the original figure by Kiener, and are congruent with the usual interpretation of Pleurotoma volutella, as a fossil. A recent species, included in the genus Raphitoma, has possibly been con- fused in collections under the ñame Leufroya volutella. It is a different unnamed species that is herein described as new. Raphitoma villana n. sp. Pleurotoma (Defrauda) volutella sensu Tiberi in schedis non Kiener, 1846 (Swedish Mus. Nat. Hist. n. 70490) Leufroya volutella sensu AA. non Kiener, 1846 Raphitoma (Leufroya) errónea sensu Mifsud, 2003 non Monterosato, 1884 ? Raphitoma leufroyi sensu Rolán et al., 1998 non Michaud, 1832 Type material: Holotype (MNHN, Paris: Figs. 1-3), height 17.3 mm, width 6.8 mm, from Taormina, -15 m, bioclastic sediment (A. Villari leg.). Paratype A (Figs 4, 6, 8; MNHN, Paris, C. Mifsud, leg., ex Gubbioli collection; height 11.5 mm, width 4.6 mm), from Malta, off Ras il-Wahx, -80/100 m, muddy sand with Posidonia debris. Paratype B (C. Mifsud coll., Malta; height 14.4 mm, width 5.6 mm), from Malta, off Ras il-Wahx. Paratype C (Fig. 10; Gori coll., Livorno; height 16.9 mm, width 6.5 mm), from Capraia Is., -150 m. Paratype D (Figs 11, 12; F. Pusateri coll., Palermo; height 12 mm, width 4.8 mm, juvenile), from Bay of Carini (Palermo), coralligenous bottoms. Paratype E (Bini coll., Cittá di Castello; height 8.6 mm, width 3.9 mm, juvenile), from Antiparos Is. (Cyclades), - 180/250 m. Paratype F (SMNH, Stockholm, n. 70490; ex N. Tiberi, labelled Pleurotoma (Defrauda) volutella; height 9.3 mm, width 4.7 mm, juvenile), from Sardinia, coralligenous bottom. Other material examined: 18 shells from Gnejna Bay (Malta), 80/100 m; 5 shells from Qammich reef (Malta), -80 m; 1 shell from Misurata (Lybia), -60/80 m. (all in the C. Mifsud collection). Type locality: Taormina, eastern Sicily, -15 m, bioclastic sediment. Derivatio nominis: After our dear friend Alberto Villari (Villari+A(lberto) = villana) used as a noun in apposition. Description: Shell slender, fusiform, 15-18 mm high and 6-7 mm wide. Protoconch multispiral, of 3.25 whorls. Protoconch I of 1.2, dome shaped whorls, with a sculpture of 8-9 spiral threads, covered by minute tubercles; tubercles tending to become oblong and anastomosing, giving rise to a somewhat clathrate pattern. Proto- conch II of slightly more than 2 convex whorls, with a sculpture of only subsu- tural axial threads on the adapical third, tending to curve adaperturally. On the lower two thirds sculpture of diago- nally Crossing threads. Sinusigera outer lip at the protoconch-teleoconch bound- ary. Teleoconch of 6-7 whorls, with stepped spire. Subsutural ramp narrow, suborizontal, tending to oblitérate aáer the sixth whorl. Adsutural marks of the anal sinus visible on the ramp. Axial sculpture of 15-18 ribs, narrower than the interspaces, reaching the base. 120 PUSATERI AND Giannuzzi-SavellI: A new raphitomine from the Mediterranean Sea Figures 1-3. Raphitoma villaria n. sp. Holotype (MNHN, París, h. 17.3 mm, w. 6.8 mm), Taormina -13 m. Figuras 1-3. Raphitoma villaria n. sp. Holotipo (MNHN, París, h. 17,3 mm, d. 6,8 mm), Taormina - 15 m. Spiral sculpture of numerous contin- uous cordlets, 13-16 above the aperture, regularly spaced, on the body whorl; 10- 12 strong cords on the siphonal canal. Aperture suboval, tapering anteri- orly. Outer lip simple, internally smooth. Anal sinus as deep as the inter- space between two axial ribs. Inner lip smooth, arcuate posteriorly, straigth medially. Siphonal canal short, open. Background colour yellowish with a lighter narrow band on the lower third of the spire. The spiral cordlets within this band may be sligthly stronger that the others. Animal with a short head and two short tentacles. Eyes placed on the exter- nal, thickened basal part of the tentacles, at about one third of their total height. Foot narrow and long with two anterior lateral triangular lobes and a pointed posterior end. Colour light yellow with a lighter coloured foot, darker tentacles and black eyes. Siphon much darker (nearly orange) in colour. Operculum absent. Distribution : Known from the type locality (Taormina, eastern Sicily) and from Malta, Bay of Carini (northwestern Sicily), Capraia Is. (Northern Tyrrhenian Sea). Rolán, Otero-Schmitt and Fer- NANDES (1998: 108, figs 26-28) reported a shell from Angola extremely similar to the new species. Considering the lack of additional data on the extra-Mediterra- nean occurrence of R. villaria n. sp. we cannot confirm the identity of the Angolan material. It could represent a sibling species, or the extreme Southern range of the new species. Remarks: The foregut anatomy of a specimen of this species (under the ñame "Caenodagreutes errónea") was examined and described by Don 121 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Figures 4-9. Protoconchs of Raphitoma. 4, 6, 8: villaria n. sp. (paratype A); 5, 7, 9: i?, leufroyi, specimen from Palermo (coll. Pusateri). Figurs 4-9. Protoconchas de Raphitoma. 4, 6, 8: R. villaria n. sp. (paratipo A); 5, 7, 9: R. leufroyi, ejemplar de Palermo (coll. Pusateri). 122 PUSATERI AND Giannuzzi-Savelli: A new raphitomine from the Mediterranean Sea Figures 10-15. Shellsof Raphitoma. 10: R. villarian. sp. (paratypeC), Capraials., -150 m (coll. Gori, Livorno, h. 16.9 mm, w. 6.5 mm); 11, 12: R. villaria n. sp. (paratype D), Bay of Carini, Palermo, (subadult, coll. Pusateri, Palermo, h. 12 mm, w. 4.8 mm); 13: R. concinna, Termini Imerese (Palermo), muddy sand (coll. Pusateri, Palermo, h. 13.8 mm); 14: R. leufroyi (“var. albescens ”), Palermo, coll. Monterosato (MZR, Rome); 15: Defrauda errónea Monterosato, 1884. mm 22 x 16, holotype, handwritten label by Monterosato: “D. volutella Sardegna tipo di errónea ’ (MZR lot n. 16704). Figuras 10-15. Conchas de Raphitoma. 10: R. villaria n. sp. (paratipo C), Isla de Capraia, -150 m (coll. Gori, Livorno, h. 16,9 mm, d. 6,5 mm); 11, 12: R. villaria n. sp. (paratipo D), Bahía de Carini, Palermo, (subadulto, coll. Pusateri, Palermo, h. 12 mm, d. 4,8 mm); 13: R. concinna, Termini Imerese (Palermo), arena fangosa (coll. Pusateri, Palermo, h. 13,8 mm); 14: R. leufroyi (“var. albescens”), Palermo, coll. Mon- terosato (MZR, Roma); 15: Defrancia errónea Monterosato, 1884. mm 22 x 16, holotipo, etiqueta man- uscrita de Monterosato: “D. volutella Sardegna tipo di errónea” (MZR lot n. 16704). 123 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Tippett (in litteris, 2001). The specimen (15.5 mm long and 6.1 mm wide, proto- conch tip missing, 1.5 protoconch whorls remaining, diagonally cancel- late) originated from Malta, Qummick, 80 m depth (vi. 1988, C. Mifsud leg.). The specimen lacked a proboscis, poison apparatus, radula and salivary glands. The rhynchodaeum was very retracted and folded, with the posterior end bearing a tiny circular opening into the oesophagus. Pending a phylogenetic assessment of the Raphitominae, we ascribe the new species to the genus Raphitoma Bellardi 1848 (type species, by subsequent desig- nation [Monterosato, 1875]: Pleurotoma hystrix Cristofori and Jan, 1832). A group of species with the aperture internally smooth, without either teeth or lyrae is commonly included in the subgenus Leufroya Monterosato, 1884 (type species by tautonymy Pleurotoma leufroyi Michaud, 1828): Raphitoma leufroyi (Michaud, 1828), R. concinna (Scacchi, 1836), R. errónea (Monterosato, 1884), R. linearis (Montagu, 1803), R. aequalis (Jeffreys, 1867). The new species belongs clearly in this group, being very similar to R. leufroyi. Comparing two mature specimens of each species, the protoconch is smaller in leufroyi (450 jum vs 600 jum) and generally brown in colour (vs. yellowish in villaria). The subsutural ramp is absent in leufroyi ; the h/d ratio is higher in villaria (h/d > 2.5 vs < 2.2 in leufroyi ). The spiral cordlets ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We wish to thank our friends Gian- luigi Bini, Sandro Gori, Constantin Mifsud, Alberto Villari who allowed us to study their collections, and particularly Franco Gubbioli who generously donated one paratype. Gianni Sartore and Nando Ghisotti helped with bibliographic support. Don Tippett kindly provided his notes on the anatomy of the new species. Alberto Palmeri constantly helps us in our studies. Marco Oliverio, Gianni Spada and Bruno Sabelli provided useful hints on previous versions of this ms. (16 in villaria vs 12 in leufroyi ) are all of the same size in villaria vs. of altérnate size in leufroyi. The outer lip is thickened in leufroyi vs. simple in villaria. The background colour is lighter with brownish spots in leufroyi and uni- formly yellowish in villaria. The animal of leufroyi is puré white, with light blue blurs on the end of the foot. The eyes are larger in leufroyi and are placed halfway up the tentacles. The foot is wider in leufroyi. The radula is present in leufroyi and absent in villaria. Even in some occasional ligthly coloured specimens of leufroyi the remaining differences hold diagnostic. This species has been confused in several collections with R. errónea (Mon- terosato, 1884), which is completely dif- ferent, having more numerous spiral cordlets, a shorter siphonal canal, a more rounded aperture, and a h/d ratio of 1.25 (vs. 2.5 in villaria). R. volutella (see figs 18-21) has a more stepped outline, and a longer siphonal canal, axial and spiral sculp- ture are stronger. R. concinna is smaller (<15 mm), and the axial ribs are always < 14 (vs. 15 in villaria). The axial interspaces and ribs are of equal size (interspaces wider in villaria). R. villaria has more numerous and weaker spiral cordlets , and lacks the typical brown cordlets of concinna. Finally, the protoconch of R. concinna is violet while it is always yellowish in vil- laria. Philippe Bouchet, Virginie Heros and Pierre Lozouet (MNF1N, Paris) kindly assisted during our visits to the "Labo". Claudio Manicastri (ZMR, Rome) allowed examination of the material in the Monterosato Collection. Anders Warén (SMNH, Stockholm) and Harriet Wood (National Museum of Wales) provided useful material for study, and Yves Finet (MHNG, Geneve) for information on Kiener types. C. Mifsud provided the data on the living animáis of R. villaria n. sp. and R. 124 Pus ATERI AND Giannuzzi-SavellI: A new raphitomine from the Mediterranean Sea / Z j. Picar : volulclle. / Pleur: voliUetta , l'a/wu.) Figures 16-21. Shells of Raphitoma villaria n.sp. and Pleurotoma volutella. 16, 17: Original figure of Pleurotoma volutella (after Kiener, 1846, photo courtesy Virginie Heros, MNHN Paris); 18: Raphitoma villaria n. sp., paratype A, off Ras il-Wahx, Malta, (ex Gubbioli collection), h 1 1.5 mm, d 4.6 mm; 19, 20: P. volutella , Palermo (Coll. Monterosato, MZR, Rome, lote n. 16704, “ Defrau- da volutella ’); 21: P. volutella, Ficarazzi, coll. Melvill-Tomlin (NMW, 12930) with Monterosato’s handwritten label [“ Leufroyia volutella Kiener”, fossile di Ficarazzi, non vivente]. A second hand- written label (also by Monts.) reads: “Kiener a cru vivant un specimen ramassé par la mer”. Figuras 16-21. Conchas de Raphitoma villaria n.sp. y Raphitoma volutella. 16, 17: Figura original de Pleurotoma volutella (reproducido de Kiener, 1846, fotografía de Virginie Heros, MNHN Paris); 18: Raphitoma villaria n. sp., paratipo A, frente a Ras il-Wahx, Malta, (colección Gubbioli), h 1 1,5 mm, d 4,6 mm; 19, 20: P. volutella, Palermo (Coll. Monterosato, MZR, Roma, lote n° 16704, “ Defrau- da volutella ”); 21: P. volutella, Ficarazzi, coll. Melvill-Tomlin (NMW, 12930) con etiqueta manus- crita de Monterosato [“ Leufroyia volutella Kiener”, fossile di Ficarazzi, non vivente]. Una segunda eti- queta manuscrita (también de Monts.) reza: “Kiener a cru vivant un specimen ramassé par la mer”. 125 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 leufroyi, while Javier López sent a picture of the animal of L. leufroyi. SEM photographs were taken by Anna Maria Mannino and Francesco Furnari (Dipar- BIBLIOGRAPHY Alberici, E. and Tamin, Ev 1935. Contributo alio studio dei molluschi del Quaternario marino di Rodi (Egeo). Rendiconti Reale Isti- tuto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettere, serie 2, 68: 213-228, pl. 3. Aradas, A. and Benoit, L., 1872-1876. Conchigliologia vivente marina della Sicilia e delle isole che la circondano. Atti dell'Ac- cademia Gioenia di Scienze Naturali, (3) 6: 1-113 + pl. 1-2 [1872]; 113-226 + pl. 3-4 [1874]; 227- 324 + pl. 5 [1876] Carus, J. V., 1893. Prodromus faunae Mediter- raneae sive descriptio animalium Maris Mediter- ranei incolarum quam comparata silva rerum quatenus innotuit adiectis locis et nominibus vulgaribus. Stuttgart, E. Schweizerbart'sche. Vol. II. Brachiostomata. Mollusca. Tunicata. Vertebrata. ix + 854 pp. Cerulli-Irelli, S., 1910. Fauna Malacologica Mariana Parte Quarta. Scaphopoda:-Dental- idae. Gastropoda:-Stenogyridae, Gadiuiidae, Acteonidae, Tortnatinidae, Scaphandridae, Bullidae, Ringiculidae, Philinidae, Umbrel- lidae, Conidae, Pleurotomidae. Palaeon- tographia Itálica 16:23-70, pls. 3(34)-6(37). Compagnoni, B., Conato, V., Follieri, M., Malatesta, A., 1969. II Quaternario di Scalea. Quaternaria 10, 95-123, Roma de Lamothe and Dautzenberg, P., 1908. Cat- alogue des Mollusques qu'ils renferment. Pp. 488-501 in de Lamothe. Les Gites fossil- iféres des mames plaisanciennes du Sahel d'Alger. Bulletin de la Société Géologique de France, série 4, 7:481-505. [In this paper de Lamothe is listed as "Le Général de Lamothe".] FIarmer, F. W., 1915. The Pliocene Mollusca of Great Britain being supplementary to S. V. Wood's Monograph of the Crag Mollusca. Part II. Monograph of the Palaeontological So- ciety ofLondon 68:201-302, pls. 25-32. [Pyrah, 1978, listed Harmer's specimens preserved in the Yorkshire Museum.] Kiener, L. C., 1846. Genre Pleurotome. ( Pleu - rotoma, Lam.) Spécies général et iconographie des coquilles vivantes comprenant la collection du Muséum d'Histoire naturelle de París, collection Lamarck, celle du Prince Masséna et les décou- verts récente des voyageurs. París, Rousseau. 84 pp., 27 pls. timento di Scienze Botaniche, Univer- sity of Palermo). Digitalization of images was by Floriana Giannuzzi- Savelli. Michaud, A. L. G., 1829. Description de plusieurs espéces nouvelles de coquilles vi- vantes. Bulletin d'Histoire Naturelle de la Société Linnéenne de Bordeaux 3: 260-275, 24 figs. Mifsud, C., 2003. Note su alcuni molluschi viventi da Malta. La Conchiglia 307: 39-46. Monterosato, M. di, 1878. Enumerazione e sinonimia delle conchiglie mediterranee. Giornale Scienze Naturali ed Economiche, Palermo 13:61-115. Monterosato, M. di, 1884. Nomenclatura genér- ica e specifica di alcune conchiglie mediterranee. Palermo: Virzi. 152 pp. Philippi, R. A., 1844. Enumeratio Molluscorum Si- ciliae cum viventium tum in tellure tertiaria fos- silium quae in itinere suo observavit auctor. Vol- umen secundum continens addenda et emen- danda, nec non comparationem faunae recentis siciliae cum faunis aliarum terrarum et cum fauna periodi tertiariae. Halis Saxonum, E. An- tón. iv + 303 pp., pls. 13-28. Plañí, P., 1980. Catalogo dei molluschi conchiferi viventi nel Mediterráneo. Bollettino della Mala- cologico 16 (5/6):113-224. Priolo, O., 1967. Nuova revisione delle Conchiglie marine di Sicilia. Memoria XVIII. Atti dell' Accademia Gioenia di Scienze Naturali di Catania , (6)19: 667-714, pls. 1-3. Rolán, E., Otero-Schmitt, J. and Fernandes, F., 1998. The family Turridae s.l. (Mollusca, Gastropoda) in Angola (West Africa), 1. Sub- family Daphnellinae. Iberus, 16 (1): 95-118. Sabelli, B., Giannuzzi-Savelli, R. and Bedulli, D., 1990. Catalogo annotato dei Mol- luschi marini del Mediterráneo. Bologna, Edi- zioni Librería Naturalistica Bolognese. Vol. 1: xiv + 348 pp. [Title also given in English " Annotated check-list of Mediterranean marine mollusks".] Scacchi, A., 1836. Catalogus conchyliorum regni Neapolitani quae usque adhuc reperit. Napoli, Fi- liatre Sebetii. 18 pp., 1 pl. Seguenza, G., 1880. Le formazioni terziarie nella provincia di Reggio (Calabria). Memo- ríe della Classe di Scienze Fisiche Matematiche e Naturali della Regia Accademia del Lincei, serie 3, 6: 1-445, 17 pls. 126 © Sociedad Española de Malacologta Iberus, 26 (2): 127-131, 2008 New data on the morphology and distribution of Euglandina obtusa (Pfeiffer, 1844) Gastropoda: Spiraxidae) a Nicaraguan endemism Nuevos datos sobre la morfología y la distribución de Euglandina obtusa (Pfeiffer, 1844) (Gastropoda: Spiraxidae) un endemismo de Nicaragua Mijail A. PÉREZ*, Kepa ALTONAGA** and Adolfo LÓPEZ*** Recibido el 24-IV-2008. Aceptado el 25-VI-2008 ABSTRACT Aspects related to the morphology and distribution of Euglandina obtusa (Pfeiffer, 1 844) a Nicaraguan endemism are presented. Regarding morphology, a complete redescription of the shell and the first description of the genital system are included. The number of records has been increased, from one, the type locality, to 16. Current data have allowed us to draw a distribution map of the species in Nicaragua. RESUMEN Se presentan aspectos relacionados con la morfología y la distribución de Euglandina obtusa (Pfeiffer, 1844) un endemismo de Nicaragua. En relación con la morfología, se presenta una redescripción de la concha y la primera descripción del aparato genital. El número de registros de la especie en el país ha sido incrementada de una a ló localida- des. Las cifras anteriores nos han permitido elaborar un mapa preliminar de distribución para la especie en Nicaragua. KEY WORDS: New data, Euglandina obtusa , Gastropoda, Spiraxidae, Nicaragua, Endemism. PALABRAS CLAVE: Nuevos datos, Euglandina obtusa, Gastropoda, Spiraxidae, Nicaragua, Endemismo. INTRODUCTION According to Pilsbry (1908), Pilsbry and Vanatta (1936), Baker (1945) and Thompson (1995), the genus Euglandina Fischer and Crosse, 1870 contains 92 species along its distribution range. According to Zilch (1959-60), the distri- bution of this genus ranges from South- ern North America to northern South America, including Central America. In the Nicaraguan Pacific Slope the genus Euglandina is represented by two species: Euglandina cumingii (Beck, 1837) and Euglandina obtusa (Pfeiffer, 1844). E. obtusa is a species endemic to Nicaragua, only known to date from the type locality. Realejo, in the department of Chinadega (UTM 16PDU8286); the only information existing about this * Asociación Gaia, Colonia 10 de Junio, B-501, Managua, Nicaragua. ** Departamento de Zoología y Dinámica Celular Animal, Universidad del País Vasco/ Euskal Herriko Unbertsitatea, Bilbo, España. *** Centro de Malacología y Diversidad Animal, Universidad Centroamericana, Managua, Nicaragua. 127 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Figure 1. Euglandina obtusa. Shell morphology. Cayanlipe, Chínandega, 97:84 (D 11,26 mm, Alt. 27.15 mm). Figure 2. Genital system. Cayanlipe, Chinandega, 97:84 (e= 1 mm). Figure 1. Euglandina obtusa. Morfología de la concha. Cayanlipe, Chinandega, 97:84 (D 11.26 mm, Alt. 27.15 mm). Figura 2. Aparato reproductor. Cayanlipe, Chinandega, 97:84 (e- 1 mm). taxon so far was a brief description of the shell (Pérez, 1999). The citations for this species in the XIX century literature can be summa- rized as follows: Glandina obtusa Pfeiffer, 1844, in Philippi (1842-1845), p. 132, pl. 1 fig. 3. Achatina obtusa: Reeve (1849 in 1848- 1850), Monograph of the genus Achatina pl. 15, species 62. Achatina obtusa: Deshayes (1850) in Férussac and Deshayes (1819-1851), p. 173, pl. 134 figs. 3, 4. Oleacina obtusa: Tryon (1885), p. 24, pl. 4 fig. 55 Glandina obtusa: Martens (1891 in 1890-1901), pp. 76-77. Euglandina obtusa: Pilsbry (1908 in 1907-1908), p. 204. In this paper we present new data on distribution and morphology for E. obtusa. Fifteen new localities are added to the one previously known. Data on shell biometry and the first description of the genital system is also given. MATERIAL AND METHODS Source of data: Data presented in this paper have been taken from Pérez (1999); this work has been based on gathering, comparison and synthesis of information from two main sources: In the first place, data obtained from revi- sión of bibliography regarding land and freshwater snail species present in Nicaragua and Central America and, secondly, field data obtained from four major sampling campaigns. Samplings: Sampling campaigns were carried out as follows: 1) Decém- ber 1994 to March, 1995, 2) August-Sep- tember, 1996, 3) September-December, 1997 and, 4) July-October, 1998. Field- work was done as one-day trips, collect- 128 PÉREZ ET AL.: Morphology and distribution of Euglandina obtusa Table I. Euglandina obtusa. Dimensions. X: Average, DS: Standard Deviation. Tabla I. Euglandina obtusa. Dimensiones. X: Promedio, DS: Desviación estándar. Variable X Mínimum Máximum Range DS Height 24.81 22.2 27.15 4.95 2.19 Diameter 10.5 10.1 11.3 1.2 0.49 Table II. Examined material (52 specimens, 19 live, 33 shells). Dp: department, Coord: coordina- tes in UTM notation, Ev: animáis, C: shells. Tabla II. Material examinado (52 ejemplares, 19 vivos, 33 conchas). Dp: Departamento, Coord: coor- denadas en notación UTM, Ev: ejemplares vivos, C: conchas. Dp Lot Locality Coordinates Ev C LE 96:40 El Bosque 16PEJ2496 — 1 LE 96:50 3 km al NE de El Empalme 16PEK6504 3 — LE 96:54 Buenos Aires 1 6PEJ01 69 — 2 LE 96:67 Carretera El Sauce-Estelí 16PEK5432 — 2 CH 97:56 1 9 de Julio (Paso Caballo) 16PDJ7986 — 1 CH 97:75 El Rincón 16PEK2328 — 1 CH 97:76 Mayocundo 16PEK2515 — 2 CH 97:78 km 1 94 Chinandega-Somotillo 16PEK1237 — 1 CH 97:81 km 1 66 Chinandega-Jiquilillo 16PDK5706 — 6 CH 97:82 Tomvalle 16PDK6704 2 — CH 97:84 Cayanlipe 16PEK0927 — 4 CH 97:85 La Concepción 1 6PEK31 22 — 1 CH 97:86 Las Garzas 16PEK3325 — 3 CH 97:92 Hilocán 16PDK3721 7 2 CH 97:93 Laberinto de San Juan 16PDK3422 7 7 ing at various points each day. A mínimum of one point per 10 x 10 km quadrant was sampled, and a máximum of three points. The quantity of points was determined by the punctual species richness; if it was low (below three species) we sampled another point within the same quadrant. There were four persons collecting for an hour at each sampling point. Collection and conservation of material: Material was hand-collected, kept in plástic boxes and labeled for taking to the lab. Living specimens were relaxed in water with menthol crystals for 24 hours and then stored in 70° alcohol. Once fixed, material was separated, identified and definitively stored in glass vials within glass jars with 70° alcohol, in the case of live-taken speci- mens, or in glass vials within cardboard boxes, in the case of empty shells. Abbreviatures : The following abbrevi- ations have been used: B.C.A.: Biología Centrali Americana, Carr.: Road, e: scale, p./ pp.: page/ s, s.l.p.c.: without an exact locality consigned, RAAN: Región Autónoma del Atlántico Norte, RAAS: Región Autónoma del Atlántico Sur, UCA: Universidad Centroameri- cana. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Description: Shell cylindrical-fusiform, opaque, solid, glossy (Fig. 1). Spire repre- sents a little less than 1/3 of total shell 129 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Figure 3. Euglandina obtusa. Distribution in Nicaragua, in UTM notation of 30 x 50 km and with mention of the type locality (El Realejo). Figura 3. Euglandina obtusa. Distribución en Nicaragua, en notación UTM de 50 x 50 km de lado con mención de la localidad tipo (El Realejo). length. Colour brown. Sculpture of fine radial folds. Suture slightly marked. Apex obtuse. Whorls 6, moderately convex. Base imperf orate. Aperture long and ovate, placed laterally regarding the shell axis; it represents approximately 1 / 3 of the body whorl height. Peristome simple and not reflexed. Columella curved and truncated, somewhat thick- ened. Protoconch of a white to corneous colour, smooth, whorls 1.5. Dimensions : Alt. 27.15 mm, D. 11. 26 mm (see Table I). Genital apparatus with a long brawny penis (Fig. 2); retractor muscle wide and short; vas deferens attached to the penis and to the vagina by conjun- tive stripes. Vagina short in relation to the penis and as wide as its proximal part. Bursa copulatrix rather small and club-shaped, duct long and thin. Remarks: Martens (1891 in 1890- 1901) pointed out that though descrip- tions and pictures all cite Realejo (also written as Real Llejos) as the locality in which the species was collected, they referred to two different forms, showing differences in size and shape. The smallest one measures between 16 and 19 mm in height and more or less half the width; it was first described by Pfeiffer (1844) in Phillippi (1842-1851), and is the one represented in Pfeiffer 's collection; according to Martens (1891), this is the form which he studied. The larger form, measuring 26 to 28 mm and being half as wide as high, is the one depicted by Reeve (1849) and Deshayes (1850) in Férussac and Deshayes (1819-1851); this form resembles very much in its dimensions Euglandina largillierti Pilsbry, 1891, from Guatemala and Yucatán, but seems to be smoother and brighter. Tryon (1885) recognized only the dimensions of the larger form (26-28 mm), as relevant to E. obtusa. Later, Pilsbry (1908 in 1907-1908), referred to Tryon 's (1885) description and added that this species seems to link the group of the smooth Central American forms to usual Euglandina. Our material agrees which what would be the larger "form" mentioned by Martens (1891), although with slightly smaller dimensions. Its smooth and lustrous shell sculpture makes the Identification of this species very clear. 130 PÉREZ ET AL.: Morphology and distribution of Euglandina obtusa The genital system of this species is described for the first time in this paper, and as this taxon was known previously only from the type locality, all distribu- tion data given in this paper are new and expand considerably its distribution range. Distribution: This species was previ- ously cited only from the type locality, but we have added 15 new localities to the one cited in the literature (Fig. 3, Table II). New localities are distributed in two departments (= provinces) (Dpt. of Chinandega and Dept. of León) of northwestern Nicaragua, both within the Nicaraguan Pacific Slope, which sug- BIBLIOGRAPHY Baker, H. B., 1943. The mainland genera of american Oleacininae. Proceedings ofthe Aca- demy of Natural Sciences ofPhilaladelphia, 95:1- 14, L. 1-3. Férussac, A. E. J. d'A. and Deshayes, G. P., 1819-1951. Histoire naturelle générale et parti- culiére des mollusques terrestres et fluviátiles. París (3 vols.). Férussac, A. E. J. d'Audebard de, 1819-1832 [continued by Deshayes, G.P. 1839-1851], Histoire naturelle générale et particuliére des Mollusques terrestres et fluviátiles. Tome 1: viii + 184 pp.; Tome 2 (1): 402 pp.; 2 (2): 260 + 22 + 16 pp.; Atlas 1: 70 pl.; Atlas 2: 166 + 5 pl. París, J.-B. Bailliere. Martens, E. v., 1890-1901. Biología Centrali- Americana. Mollusca. 1-706. British Museum (Natural History).[pp. 41-96 issued 189] (on- line edition available from Smithsonian Ins- titution atchttp:/ / www.sil.si.edu / Digital- Collections / bca / navigation / bca_06_00_00 / bca_06_00_00select.cfm>) Pérez, A. M., 1999. Estudio taxonómico and bio- geográfico preliminar de la malacofauna conti- nental (Mollusca: Gastropoda) del Pacífico de Nicaragua. Tesis Doctoral inédita. Universi- dad del País Vasco, España. 524 p. Phillippi, R. A., 1842-1845. Abbildungen und Beschreibungen neuer oder wenig gekannter Conchylien unter mithufte meherer deutscher Conchyliologen. Vol. 1 Cassel, T. Fischer, vol. 1: 1-20 [1842] 21-76 [1843] 77-186 [1844] 187- 204 [1845], gests a very restricted distribution range. This may be confirmed also by the fact that it has not been collected so far else- where in the country over the years. Along its distribution range E. obtusa was collected on road edges, in dry forests ranging from savannah forests with abundant shrubs to low- medium semideciduous secondary forests. Soil was covered by abundant leaf litter, with or without sand and wet, and illumination was of filtered sun and shade. It should also be pointed out that E. obtusa is a rare species, since lots col- lected consist only of 1 to 14 specimens. Pilsbry, H. A., 1907-1908. Manual of Conchology . 2nd Series, vol. 19, 366 p, 52 pl [pp. 1-192, pl. 1-30 issued 1907; 193-366, pl. 31-52 issued 1908]. Published by the Department of Con- chology, Academy of Natural Science, Philadelphia. Pilsbry, H. A., and Vanatta, E. G., 1936. Three Mexican Euglandinas. The Nautilus, 49 (3):97- 98. Reeve, L. A., 1848-1850. Conchologia Iconica: or, illustrations of the shells of molluscous animáis. Volume V. Containing the monographs of the genera Bulimus. Achatina. Dolium. Cassis. Turritella. Mesalia. Eglisia. Cassidaria. Onis- cia. Ebumia. Reeve, Benham and Reeve, Lon- don. Thompson, F. G., 1995. New and little known land snails of the family Spiraxidae from Central America and México (Gastropoda: Pulmonata). Bulletin ofthe Florida Museum of Natural History, 39 (2):45-89. Tryon, G., 1885. Manual of Conchology. 2nd Se- ries, vol. 1. 364 p, 60 pl. Philadelphia, pub- lished by the author. Zilch, A., 1959-60. Gastropoda: Euthyneura. In Schindewolf, O.H. (Ed): Handbuch der Palae- ozoologie. Berlín, VI (2), 834 p. 131 ' © Sociedad Española de Malacología 2008 Las especies del género Chauvetia (Gastropoda, Neogastropoda) del área de Dakar, Senegal, Africa occiden- tal, con la descripción de diez especies nuevas The species of the genus Chauvetia (Gastropoda, Neogastropoda) from the Dakar area, Senegal, West Africa, with the description of ten new species Joan Daniel OLIVER* y Emilio ROLÁN** Recibido el 6-V-2008. Aceptado el 24-IX-2008 RESUMEN Se revisa el género Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 en el área de Dakar, Senegal. En total se encontraron 1 4 especies de las que 4 se asignaron a taxones previamente conocidos. Las 10 restantes son especies nuevas para la ciencia que se describen en el presente tra- bajo. Se muestran fotografías de la concha y detalles de la protoconcha y escultura al Microscopio Electrónico de Barrido. ABSTRACT The genus Chauvetia Monterosato, 1 884 ¡n the area of Dakar, Senegal, is revised. In total 14 species were collected, 4 of which were assigned to previously known taxa. The other ten are new species for Science which are described in the present work. Photographs of the shells are presented and details of the protoconchs and sculpture are shown with Scan- ning Electron Microscope PALABRAS CLAVE: Buccinidae, Chauvetia , protoconcha, microscultura, especies nuevas, Dakar, Senegal. KEY WORDS: Buccinidae, Chauvetia, protoconch, microsculpture, new species, Dakar, Senegal. INTRODUCCIÓN El género Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 está formado por un grupo bas- tante numeroso de especies que se encuentran distribuidas por el Medite- rráneo y el Atlántico sureuropeo y nor- teafricano hasta Senegal, estando también presentes en una parte de los archipiélagos de la Macaronesia. Existen muchos taxones, aunque un cierto número de ellos han sido descritos a nivel de simple variedad. La mayor parte de las especies que hoy se incluyen en Chauvetia han sido descritas en trabajos referidos a una determinada zona o área y están bas- tante dispersos en la literatura malacoló- gica. Nordsieck (1976) realizó una primera revisión del género, que fue de nuevo repetida más recientemente por Micali (1999), aunque refiriéndose fun- damentalmente a las especies del Medi- terráneo. * Alcorisa, 83-12C, E-28043 Madrid. ** Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur, E-15782, Santiago de Compostela. 133 Iberas, 26 (2), 2008 Hay muy poca información sobre algunas particularidades de este género, como sobre su rádula, que sólo ha sido representada por Bandel (1977, lám. 3, fig. 4), Thiele (1929, fig. 357) y Her- GUETA, LUQUE Y TEMPLADO (2002, figS. 9, 10). Luque (1984) comenta que los datos sobre las rádulas que se conocen de especies de este género indican que, por su similitud, puede no tener importan- cia en la separación de especies. Hay también muy pocos datos sobre su opér- culo. Pocos trabajos existen sobre las especies africanas de este género. Bru- guiére (1789) describe la primera especie de la costa africana, dando un nombre disponible a una de las dos especies citadas por Ad anson (1757) en Dakar; Monterosato (1889) describe una nueva especie para Marruecos y el Mediterráneo. Dautzenberg (1891) lo hace con otra especie para Senegal, que presenta como variedad de un taxon ya conocido y, posteriormente (Dautzen- berg, 1910, 1912), menciona varias especies para la costa africana. Fischer- Piette (1942) y Fischer-Piette y Nicklés (1946) comentan algunos taxones de Dakar y Chauvetia mínima var. affinis Monterosato, que también citan en Dakar, y Nicklés (1947) también cita 3 especies de esta misma área. Nicklés (1950) muestra dibujos de dos de estas especies y Knudsen (1956) describe otra especie más para la costa occidental de África. El presente trabajo pretende revisar el género en el área de Dakar, Senegal, aunque material de otras zonas, como Mauritania o el Mediterráneo, ha sido estudiado como comparación. Otros trabajos centrados sobre este grupo en algunos archipiélagos de la Macaronesia están actualmente en curso. MATERIAL Y MÉTODOS El material ha sido recolectado por el segundo autor en varios viajes a Senegal y se ha visto complementado de forma muy importante por el recogido por otros malacólogos, como Jacques Pelorce, José María Hernández y Franck Boyer, y también por el existente en el MNHN, principalmente colectado por Igor Marche-Marchad en la década de 1950. La recolección se ha efectuado directamente sobre los sedimentos en la arena del intermareal, con snorkel hasta los primeros 10 metros de profundidad y con tanques de aire comprimido, mediante cepillado de piedras, entre 15 y 40 m. También se hicieron algunos dragados entre 20 y 30 m. Después de la recolección, el mate- rial fue examinado con lupa para la observación, en los animales vivientes, de la coloración de las partes blandas. Posteriormente, una parte del mismo se conservó en alcohol. La protoconcha de las especies de Chauvetia tiene una gran importancia en su diferenciación, ya que siendo paucis- piral, sus caracteres no están influencia- dos por el medio; además, se ha com- probado la constancia de los mismos en el examen de numerosos ejemplares de las distintas poblaciones y especies. Por este motivo, hemos tomado determina- das mediciones que se muestran en la Figura 1: diámetro de la protoconcha; diámetro del núcleo; diámetro de la primera media vuelta; altura de la pro- toconcha. Independientemente, se han estudiado el número de cordoncillos espirales, su microescultura, la relación con sus interespacios, la existencia de costillas axiales, su número, su forma, y su posición. Abreviaturas AMNH American Museum of Natural History, New York BMNH Natural History Museum, London MNHN Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris MNCN Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid USNM United States Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington MHNS Museo de Historia Natural de Santiago de Compostela (col. Emilio Rolán) 134 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figura 1. Técnica udlizada en la medición de las protoconchas. N: núcleo. Apc: diámetro de la protoconcha. LN: altura del núcleo. 1/2V: diámetro de la primera media vuelta. Figure 1. Technique used for measuring protoconchs. N: nucleus. Apc: diameter ofthe protoconch. LN: height ofthe nucleus. 1/2V: diameter of thefirst half-whorl. ZMUC Zoologisk Museum University, Copenhaguen, Dinamarca CAP colección de Anselmo Peñas, Vila- nova i la Geltrú, Barcelona CJH colección de José María Hernández, Gáldar, Gran Canaria CJP colección de Jacques Pelorce, Le Grau du Roi, France COD colección de Daniel Oliver, Ma- drid CPR colección de Peter Ryall, María Rain, Austria ej ejemplar con partes blandas c concha sin partes blandas j juvenil f fragmento RESULTADOS Familia Buccinidae Género Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 Lachesis Risso, 1826 (non Daudin, 1803). Nesaea Risso, 1826 (non Lamarck, 18123). Donovania Bucquoy, Dautzenberg y Dollfus, 1882 (non Leach, 1814). Folinaea Monterosato, 1884. Chauvetiella F. Nordsieck, 1988. Donovaniella F. Nordsieck, 1988 Chauvetia soni (Bruguiére, 1789) (Figs. 2-6, 66, 80-85) Buccinum 6. Le Soni. Adanson, 1757. Hist. Nat. Sénégal, Coquillages, p. 151; pl. 10, G 3, fig. 6. [Localidad tipo: Senegal] Buccinum soni Bruguiére, 1789, ex Adanson. Encycl. Meth., Vers, 1, p. 283. Donovania fasciata Sowerby, 1910. Proc. Mal. Soc. Lon., 9: 65. Material tipo: No examinado, figurado por Fischer-Piette (1942: lám. VIII, figs. 9-14). 135 Iberas, 26 (2), 2008 Otro material estudiado: Senegal. Dakar: Madeleines: 12 c, 30 m (MHNS); lían Gorée: 3 c (MNHN); Gorée: 6 c, 10 m (MHNS); 2 c, 3 m (MNHN); 6 c (MNHN); 44 c, 5-15 m (MNHN); Gorée, dragado: 5 c, 30 m (MHNS); Thiarouye: 1 c (MNHN); Pecio del "Tacoma": 6 c, 15 m (MHNS); Cap Vert: 3 c (MNHN); 13 c, 20 m (MHNS); sin referencia exacta: 2 c (MHNS); Cap Vert Pecio del "Tacoma": 6 ej, 20 c, 30 m (CJP); La Madeleine: 6 c, 10 m (CJP); Petite Comiche (Cap Vert): 15 c (CJP); Pecio del "Tacoma": 9 ej, 10 m (CJP); Cap Vert: 18 c, 20 m (CJP); Les Blockaus: 10 ej, 13 c (CJP); Cap Vert: 2 ej, 2 c, 1 j, 15 m (CJP); 3 ej. Hotel Oceanium (5D2-15) (6D2-1): 19 ej, 6 m (MHNS); Gorée, costa sur (13D2-8): 5 ej, 8 m (MHNS); 2 c, 5 f, 51 j, en sedimentos entre 20-40 m (MHNS); 1 c (MNHN); Dakar: 21 c (MNHN); 1 c (MNHN, coll. Jouseaume); 10 s, (CPR). Descripción : Concha (Figs. 2-6, 80, 81) fusiforme poco alargada, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira y unas dimensones de hasta 6 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 83, 84) con 1,1 vueltas, alcanza una anchura de 570 jum (núcleo: 240 jum, primera media vuelta: 415 jum) y una altura similar. Está orna- mentada por cordoncillos (unos veinti- cinco en el núcleo y una quincena en su parte final) separados por interespacios de anchura similar. En estos interespa- cios se observan cordoncillos axiales muy irregulares (Fig. 85) lo que confiere a la protoconcha un ligero aspecto reti- culado. Los cordones tienen una anchura similar, aunque no son exacta- mente iguales. Además, la protoconcha presenta, después de la primera media vuelta, una escultura axial formada por una docena de costillitas un poco sig- moideas y levemente opistoclinas. En un principio son equidistantes aunque al final de la misma se van aproximando entre sí. Se considera el punto de la tran- sición con la teleoconcha, cuando estas costillas después de aproximarse se vuelven a distanciar. Un poco antes de ese momento, pueden apreciarse clara- mente los cordones espirales de la pro- toconcha y se incian los primeros cordo- nes de la teleoconcha. Teleoconcha con ornamentación formada por cordones espirales y costi- llas axiales, de una anchura similar a sus interespacios. En la primera vuelta apa- recen dos cordones espirales. Un tercer cordón va apareciendo en la parte más elevada de las vueltas como un reborde inferior a sutura, siendo ya evidente en la tercera vuelta. Este cordón superior es más estrecho que los otros dos y se man- tendrán en esta proporción hasta la última vuelta, donde aparece otro más pequeño por encima, siendo por tanto cuatro los que hay por encima de la inserción labial. En la base de la última vuelta, hay de seis a ocho cordones más claramente separados por interespacios, que son de anchura similar en los supe- riores y más finos y más próximos entre sí los que se encuentran sobre el canal sifonal, donde apenas se distinguen los interespacios. La última vuelta alcanza casi el 60% de la altura total, mientras que la abertura ocupa en torno al 40%. Hay una microescultura espiral solo visible a grandes aumentos. Abertura (Figs. 66, 82) ovoide, canal sifonal muy corto y ancho. En el interior del labio externo se observan cinco dien- tecillos, de los cuales el superior es más pronunciado, y el inferior constituye el borde externo del canal sifonal. El color de la concha es blanco bri- llante con bandas espirales de color marrón rojizo de distinto grosor que dis- curren sobre los cordones espirales. Prác- ticamente todas las conchas estudiadas presentan un patrón típico que consiste en tres bandas coloreadas en la última vuelta por encima de la inserción labial. De éstas, la banda subsutural es más estrecha que las otras dos, que tienen una anchura similar a los cordones. Bajo ellas, a la altura de la inserción labial, se observa otra banda estrecha, que a veces es blanca, y más abajo, tres bandas anchas y otras dos o tres más estrechas. Animal blanquecino con puntos de color blanco leche. Distribución: Conocida sólo de Senegal. La cita para Ghana que hace Micali (1999) no está confirmada. Comentarios: Un ejemplar juvenil de los examinados presentaba cordones rojizos de mayor anchura que la forma típica. 1 36 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 2-6. Chauvetia soni (Bruguiére, 1789), Dakar, 5,8, 5,5, 3,9, 4,3 y 5,0 mm (MHNS). Figuras 7-9. Chauvetia tenebrosa spec. nov., Dakar, 4,0, 4,1 y 3,9 mm (MHNS). Figuras 10, 11: Chauvetia gigantea, paratipo, Dakar, 8,6 mm (MHNS). Figura 12: Chauvatia candidissima (Phi- lippi, 1836). Estrecho de Messina, Italia, 9 mm (CAP). Figuras 13, 14. Chauvetia affinis Montero- sato, 1889. 13: ejemplar de Dakar, 5,7 mm. 14: ejemplar colectado por Mission Gruvel en Cabo Rojo (MNHN), citado en Dautzenberg (1910), 7,0 mm. Figures 2-6. Chauvetia soni (Bruguiere, 1789), Dakar, 5.8, 5.5, 3.9, 4.3 and 5.0 mm (MHNS). Figures 7-9. Chauvetia tenebrosa spec. nov., Dakar, 4.0, 4.1 and 3.9 mm (MHNS). Figuras 10, 11: Chauvetia gigantea, paratype, Dakar, 8. 6 mm (MHNS). Figure 12: Chauvetia candidissima (Phi- lippi, 1836). Strait of Messina, Italy, 9 mm (CAP). Figures 13, 14. Chauvetia affinis Monterosato, 1889. 13: specimen from Dakar, 5.7 mm. 14: specimen collected by Mission Gruvel at Cabo Rojo (MNHN), cited in Dautzenberg (1910), 7.0 mm. 137 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Chauvetia affinis Monterosato, 1889 (Figs. 13, 14, 68, 93-98, 181, 189) Donovania affinis Monterosato, 1889. Journ. de Conchyl., 37: 20. (Localidad tipo: Casablanca]. Material tipo: Sintipo en la colección Monterosato. No examinado. Otro material estudiado: Mauritania: Baie de l'Etoile: 6 j, 0-1 m (MHNS); Port Etienne [now Nouha- dibou]: 4 c (MNHN). Senegal: Dakar: Sur de Gorée: 2 c, 25 m (MNHN); Este de Gorée: 3 c, 35 m (MNHN); Gorée: 1 c, 5-15 m (MNHN); 7 c, 25 m (MNHN); 1 j (MNHN); entre Gorée y Dakar: 1 c, 4 j (MNHN); Petite Cote: 1 c, 14°39'N 17°20'W (MNHN); Madeleines: 1 c, 1 j, 18 m (MHNS); Grand Thiouriba: 2 j, 30 m (MHNS); Cap Vert: 1 c, 1 j, 33 m (MHNS); 1 ej (6D2-4) (MHNS); 3 ej, (8D3-6) (MHNS); Dakar: 2 ej (10D2) (MHNS); Cap Vert, Pecio del "Tiwa": 4 ej, 35 m (CJP); Sur de M'Bao: 6 c, 30 m (MNHN); Grand Thiouriba: 1 c, 1 j, 40 m (CJP); Pecio del "Tacoma": 1 ej, 15 m (CJP); Sur de Pecio del “Tacoma": 1 c, 25 m (MNHN); Grand Thiouriba: 1 f, 1 j, 40 m (CJP); Cap Vert: 9 c, (MNHN); 2 ej, 0-40 m (CJP); Chartine: 1 ej (CJP); Gouye Teni'Mboth: 7 j, 3 m (CJP); Cape Rouge: 1 c (MNHN); Gouye Teni'Mboth: 4 j, 10 m (CJP); Bahía de Dakar: 2 c, 2 j, sedimentos 20-40 m (MHNS). Descripción: Concha (Figs. 13, 14, 93) fusiforme, aunque más cilindrica que otras del género, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira, y una máxima dimen- sión de hasta 6 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 95, 96) paucispi- ral con 0,8 vueltas, una anchura de 430 jum y una altura de 480 jum (núcleo: 270 jum y la primera media vuelta: 425 jum). Su escultura (Fig. 97) está formada, como en otras Chauvetia, por cordones espirales planos entre los que se apre- cian surcos con incisiones axiales y que, al final, son unos 10 a 12 en número, algo variables, y más anchos que los interespacios. Al final de la protoconcha se aprecian unas cinco costillas axiales. Teleoconcha con cuatro cordones espirales en la primera vuelta, el inferior más estrecho, y un quinto por arriba que está menos desarrollado y constituye un reborde inferior de la sutura. Un sexto cordón aparece en la penúltima vuelta a partir del cordón superior. La última vuelta representa el 55% de la altura total y, en ella, se aprecian seis cordones por encima de la inserción labial. De ellos los superiores están más juntos y son menos anchos que los restantes. Los interespacios son de una anchura similar a la de los cordones. En la base de la concha hay una decena de cordo- nes que se van aproximando entre sí a medida que se acercan al final del canal sifonal. Las costillas axiales son casi ortoclinas y poco elevadas, y al cruzarse con los cordones espirales se forman tubérculos redondeados muy evidentes (Fig. 98). En la última vuelta hay una veintena de costillas verticales, de anchura similar a los interespacios. Abertura (Fig. 68, 94) ovoide, repre- sentando el 37% de la altura total de la concha. El color de la misma es castaño, igual que la concha, y en ella se obser- van cinco dientes en el interior del labio externo. El inferior de ellos constituye el inicio del canal sifonal, que es corto y poco aparente. Coloración de la concha castaño- rojiza. La base es algo más oscura y los tubérculos ligeramente más claros; la protoconcha puede tener un color más claro con una banda oscura en su centro. Animal blanco crema con aislados puntos blancos. Sifón más intenso de color. Opérculo (Fig. 181) ovoide con el núcleo subterminal. Rádula (Fig. 189) típica, con más de 150 filas de dientes, central rectangular, laterales con tres cúspides, la interna más pequeña. Distribución : Según Monterosato, Casablanca, en Marruecos, y varias loca- lidades del Mediterráneo, como Taor- mina (Sicilia) y la isla de Pantellaria. Según Dautzenberg (1910) y nuestro material, su área de dispersión se exten- dería a Mauritania y Senegal, recolec- tada entre 0 y 40 m. Comentarios : Monterosato (1889) describe, aunque no ilustra esta especie e indica su parecido con C. mínima de la que se diferenciaría por su escultura ("como una lima"). Dautzenberg (1910) la cita procedente de dragados frente Bel- Air y al oeste de Cap Rouge y 138 OLIVER Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 15-17. Chauvetia tenuisculpta (Dautzenberg, 1891), Dakar, 11,7, 11,7 y 9,8 mm (MHNS). Figuras 18-22. Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956, Dakar, 5,3, 5,3, 5,8, 5,5 y 5,5 mm. Figura 23. Estrella de mar ( Oreaster clavatus Müller y Troschel, 1842 ) parasitada por Chauvetia tenuisculpta. (fotografía de Patrice Petit De Voize). Figures 15-17. Chauvetia tenuisculpta (Dautzenberg, 1891), Dakar, 11.7, 11.7 and 9.8 mm (MHNS). Figures 18-22. Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956, Dakar, 5.3, 5.3, 5.8, 5.5 and 5.5 mm. Figure 23. Sea star (Oreaster clavatus Müller and Troschel, 1842 ) parasitized by Chauvetia tenuis- culpta. (photograph by Patrice Petit De Voize). 139 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Figuras 24-33. Chauvetia joani spec. nov., Dakar, paratipos, 6,9, 6,4, 5,3, 5,0, 4,9, 4,8, 6,1, 6,3, 6,7 y 6,3 mm (MHNS). Figuras 34-38. Chauvetia pelorcei spec. nov., Dakar, paratipos, 4,2, 4,3, 4,2, 4,6 y 4,3 mm (MFINS). Figuras 39-44. Chauvetia pardofasciata spec. nov., Dakar, forma típica: 3,9, 3,7, 3,4 y 3,1 mm (MHNS); forma blanca: 3,3 y 3,0 mm (MHNS). Figuras 24-33. Chauvetia joani spec. nov., Dakar, paratypes, 6.9, 6.4, 5.3, 5.0, 4.9, 4.8, 6.1, 6.3, 6.7 and 6.3 mm (MHNS). Figures 34-38. Chauvetia pelorcei spec. nov., Dakar, paratypes, 4.2, 4.3, 4.2, 4.6 and 4.3 mm (MHNS). Figures 39-44. Chauvetia pardofasciata spec. nov., Dakar, typical morph: 3.9, 3.7, 3.4 and 3.1 mm (MHNS); white morph: 3.3 and 3.0 mm (MHNS). 140 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 45-48. Chauvetia javieri spec. nov. Dakar; 45-47: paratipo, 7,6 mm (MNHN); 48: para- tipo, 7,2 mm (MHNS). Figuras 49-52. Chauvetia robustalba spec. nov., Dakar, 5,4, 5,4, 5,5 y 5,6 mm (MHNS). Figuras 53-55. Chauvetia luciacuestae spec. nov., Dakar, 8.8 mm. Figuras 56, 57. Chauvetia multilirata spec. nov. 5,8 mm, holotipo (MNCN). Figuras 58, 59. Chauvetia pardacuta spec. nov. Dakar, 6,2 mm. Figures 45-48. Chauvetia javieri spec. nov. Dakar; 45-47: paratype, 7.6 mm (MNHN); 48: paratype, 7.2 mm (MHNS). Figuras 49-52. Chauvetia robustalba spec. nov., Dakar, 5.4, 5.4, 5.5 y 5.6 mm (MHNS). Figures 53-55. Chauvetia luciacuestae spec. nov., Dakar, 8.8 mm. Figures 56, 57. Chauve- tia multilirata spec. nov. 5.8 mm, holotype (MNCN). Figures 58, 59. Chauvetia pardacuta spec. nov. Dakar, 6.2 mm. 141 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 muestra un dibujo de la concha aunque no aporta detalles descriptivos. Nord- sieck (1976) describe también la especie y la ilustra a partir de una concha proce- dente de Rhodas. Micali (1999) tras exa- minar los ejemplares etiquetados como Donovania affinis de la colección de Mon- terosato procedentes de Casablanca y de localidades mediterráneas concluye que el taxon Donovania affinis Monterosato, 1889 es una sinonimia de Chauvetia turri- tellata (Deshayes, 1835). Para probarlo aporta una fotografía de una concha procedente de Scilla. Comenta que el ejemplar dibujado por Dautzenberg es similar a ejemplares de Chauvetia brunnea procedentes de Tipaza (Argelia). En nuestra opinión la especie des- crita aquí y presente en Dakar, se corres- ponde con la identificada como C. affinis (Fig. 14) por Dautzenberg (1910). Por lo que respecta a las citas mediterráneas de C. affinis coincidimos con Micali en considerarlas variedades de otras Chau- vetia mediterráneas como C. brunnea o C. turritellata. Chauvetia tenuisculpta (Dautzenberg, 1891) (Figs. 15-17, 69, 99-104, 184, 185) Donovania candidissima var. tenuisculpta Dautzenberg, 1891. Mém. Soc. Zoo/. France, 4: 41, pl. 3 fig. 3a-c. Material tipo: No examinado. Material estudiado: España: Cádiz: 2 ej (MNCN). Italia: 2 ej (CAP). Senegal: Dakar: 6 s (CPR); Gorée: 115 c, en la playa (MNHN); 3 c, 10 m (MHNS); 8 c (MNHN); Puerto de Gorée: 7 c, 4-5 m (MNHN); al este del Castillo de Gorée: 5 c, sobre estrellas (MNHN); Grand Thiouribe: 1 c (MHNS); Cap Vert: 66 c (MNHN); 3 c, 30 m (MHNS); Bahía de Dakar, dragado: 3 ej, 16 c, 3 j, 20-40 m (MHNS); Gouye Teni M'Both: 7 ej, 1 c, 20 m (CJP); Cap Vert: 20 ej, 30 c, 20 j, 15-30 m (CJP); Hotel Oceanium (6D2- 7): 1 ej, 6 m (MHNS); Charbonier, 3 ej (CJP); Gorée, costa sur (13D2-9): 3 ej, 2 c (MHNS); sedimen- tos Bahía de Dakar, 30 j, 20-40 m (MHNS); 79 c, 2 j (MNHN); 4 c (MNHN, coll. Staadt); 2 c, 10° 19' N, 16° 34' W, 60 m (MNHN). Descripción : Concha (Figs. 15-17, 99) oblongo fusiforme, sólida, con unas ocho vueltas y una dimensión máxima de hasta 11,1 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 101, 102) con 0,9 vueltas y una anchura en torno a 850 jum (núcleo: 430 jum; primera media vuelta: 730 |Um) y una altura de 670 jum. Está ornamentada por fuertes costillas (alre- dedor de una quincena) que ya se inician en el mismo núcleo. La transi- ción con la teleoconcha no es tan clara como en otras especies. Se ha conside- rado el final de la protoconcha el punto en el que las costillas se vuelven a dis- tanciar tras la aproximación que habían tenido al final de la protoconcha. Con gran aumento (Fig. 103) se aprecia que entre las costillas existe una microescul- tura de líneas espirales algo irregulares. Teleoconcha con un perfil de las vueltas ligeramente convexo. Sutura levemente ondulada. En la primera vuelta hay tres cordones espirales, el cuarto está presente ya en la tercera y el quinto aparece en la sexta vuelta, por debajo de la sutura y es menos ancho que los cuatro restantes. Estos cordones espirales son un poco más anchos que los interespacios. En la última vuelta hay cinco cordones por encima de la inserción labial y, por debajo, hay cinco cordones más, claramente separados por interespacios y unos siete cordonci- llos más, muy juntos en el canal sifonal. En la última vuelta se observan una veintena de costillas, que son similares a sus interespacios. Abertura (Fig. 69, 100) ligeramente ovoide, canal sifonal corto y ancho. En el interior del labio interno pueden verse seis dientecillos, de los cuales el superior es más pronunciado y el inferior constituye el borde externo del canal sifonal. La última espira ocupa aproximadamente el 50% de la altura total y la boca un 35 % de la altura (las medidas coinciden en lo esencial con Micali, 1999). 142 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 60-64. Chauvetia gigantea spec. nov., Dakar. 60-62: holotipo, 13,9 mm (MNHN); 63: paratipo: 13,5 mm (CJP); 64: ápice, holotipo. Figuras 65-68. Detalle de la abertura. 65: C. gigan- tea; 66: C. soni; 67: C. tenebrosa ; 68: C. affinis. Figures 60-64. Chauvetia gigantea spec. nov., Dakar. 60-62: holotype, 13.9 mm (MNHN); 63: paratype: 13.5 mm (CJP); 64: apex ofthe holotype. Figures 65-68. Detail of the aperture. 65: C. gigantea; 66: C. soni; 67: C. tenebrosa; 68: C. affinis. 143 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Color de la concha blanco leche. A veces se aprecian zonas del periostraco con una tinción marrón rojiza (Fig. 17), con aspecto ferruginoso. Animal blanquecino con puntos muy pequeños de color blanco-leche. Opérculo (Figs. 104, 184) ovoide con el núcleo subterminal. Rádula (Fig. 185) típica del género con diente central rectangular y laterales alargados con tres cúspides curvas y afi- ladas. Distribución : Se ha citado desde las costas italianas y de Argelia y hemos visto material de estas localidades. Sin embargo estas citas, muy aisladas, podrían ser ejemplares transportados por pescadores por lo que, de momento, la consideramos una especie oeste afri- cana del área de Dakar. En la página de CLEMAM (http:/ / www.somali.asso.fr/ clemam/ index.clemam.html), Ch. te- nuisculpta no aparece como una especie con entrada propia debido a que se encuentra fuera del área de estudio. Comentarios: Micali (1999) comenta algunas diferencias en la protoconcha y en la aparición del quinto cordón espiral entre las conchas mediterráneas (de Orán) y las de Senegal. En nuestro mate- rial no se han visto diferencias significa- tivas. Una observación recientemente rea- lizada por el malacólogo Jacques Pelorce (com. pers.) sobre esta especie es que ha sido encontrada parasitando a una estrella de mar ( Oreaster clavatus Müller y Troschel, 1842 ) (Fig. 23), habiéndose visto numerosas estrellas con estos pará- sitos y más de 10 ejemplares, tanto jóvenes como adultos, fuertemente pegados sobre una sola estrella. La especie más parecida es C. candi- dísima, pero se diferencia por la más escasa presencia de costillas axiales en la protoconcha y por su escultura de cor- dones y costillas más separadas. Dadas las diferencias de la protocon- cha, nuestra opinión es la misma que la de Micali (2005), es decir, que son dos especies diferentes y fácilmente diferen- ciadles por su protoconcha: C. candidí- sima en el Mediterráneo y C. tenuisculpta en el área de Dakar. Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956 (Figs. 18-22, 70, 105-113, 186) Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956. Atlantide Report, 4: 43, lám. 3, figs. 17, 18. [Localidad tipo: St. 56] Material tipo: No examinado. Supuestamente en ZMUC. Otro material estudiado: Mauritania: Bahía de FEtoile: 1 c, intermareal (MHNS); Port Etienne [now Nouhadibou]: 1 j (MNHN). Senegal: Dakar: 8 c (CPR); 2 c, 13° 57' N, 17° 15' W, 50 m (MNHN); Gorée: 14 ej, 20-40 m (MHNS); sur de Gorée: 4 c, 32-34 m (MNHN); 1 c, 42 m (MNHN); 2 c, 38-42 m (MNHN); 3 c (MNHN); 7 c, 95 m (MNHN); 2 ej, 4 c, 6 m (MHNS); 1 c, 14° 32 'N, 17° 25' 30" W, 50 m (MNHN); entre Gorée y Dakar: 2 c (MNHN); Cap Vert, Tacoma: 5 ej, 10-15 m (CJP); Cap Vert: 2 ej, 0-40 m (CJP); Petite Cote: 4 c, 14° 36' N, 17° 19' W, 32 m (MNHN); Joal: 2 c, 55 m (MNHN); SW Madeleine: 3 c, 47 m (MNHN); SW Cap Manuel: 1 c, 32 m (MNHN); 1 c, 250 m (MNHN); Charbo- nier: 5 j, 34 m (CJP); Delta del Saloum: 54 c, 13° 47' N, 17° 15' W, 50 m (MNHN); 18 c, 50 m (MNHN). Ghana: Miamia: 3 s, 10-15 m (CPR). Descripción: Concha (Figs. 18-22, 105, 106) fusiforme, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira y una dimensión máxima de hasta 6 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 108-111) con 0,9 vueltas de espira, una anchura de unas 540 jum y una altura similar. Su núcleo es proporcionalmente ancho (núcleo 290 ium; primera media vuelta: 500 jum). La escultura de la protoconcha está formada por unos 18 a 20 cordones desiguales, claramente más anchos que los interes- pacios (la mayoría de los cordones son entre dos y tres veces más anchos). Los interespacios, como en la mayoría de las especies de Chauvetia presentan incisio- nes axiales (Figs. 112, 113). En el final de la protoconcha se aprecian 6 a 9 cordo- nes axiales que discurren sobre las costi- llitas finales de la protoconcha. 144 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 69-79. Detalle de la abertura: 69: C. tenuisculpta-, 70: C. lamyi\ 71: C. joanv, 72: C. pelorcei ; 73: C. pardofasciata ; 74: C .javieri-, 73: C. robusta Iba-, 76: C. luciacuestae; 77: C. multilirata ; 78: C. pardacuta ; 79: C. gigantea. Figures 69-79. Detail ofthe aperture: 69: C. tenuisculpta; 70; C. lamyi; 77; C. joani; 72; C. pelorcei; 73: C. pardofasciata; 74: C. javieri; 75; C. robustalba; 76: C. luciacuestae; 77; C. multili- rata; 78: C. pardacuta; 79; C. gigantea. 145 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Teleoconcha con vueltas de perfil convexo y la sutura profunda y algo ondu- lada. Se considera iniciada cuando comien- zan a distanciarse las costillas axiales y desaparece la escultura espiral de la pro- toconcha. En la primera espira hay cuatro cordones espirales evidentes y un quinto superior poco definido y con aspecto de reborde subsutural. Los cordones son de anchura similar a los interespacios. Las costillas son ortoclinas con una leve incli- nación prosoclina en las espiras superio- res. Estas costillas pueden estar algo cur- vadas y son algo más estrechas que los interespacios. En la última espira hay cinco cordones por encima de la inserción labial claramente separados por interespacios de igual tamaño. Ocasionalmente puede aparecer un sexto cordón subsutural como reborde. Por debajo de la inserción labial hay de diez a doce cordones separados por interespacios claramente más estre- chos. Sobre el canal sifonal están los cor- dones juntos siendo ésta una caracterís- tica de la especie. En la última espira hay de doce a quince costillas más estrechas que los interspacios que no sobrepasan la inserción labial quedando el canal sifonal libre de ellas. Entre las costillas se pueden observar numerosas líneas de crecimiento claras. La última vuelta ocupa un 57 % de la altura total. Abertura (Figs. 70, 107) ovoide con seis dientes en el interior del labio externo. Canal sifonal claro, más evi- dente y más cerrado que en otras espe- cies, estando algo inclinado hacia la izquierda. El color de la mayor parte de las conchas es castaño rojizo con la base algo más oscura. Una concha presentaba una amplia franja blanca en las dos últimas vueltas. Otra concha, más clara de color amarillento, se comentará más abajo. Animal de color crema con multitud de puntos blanco-leche. Opérculo ovoide con núcleo subterminal. Rádula (Fig. 186) con diente central rectangular con una única cúspide y laterales con tres. Distribución : Según el trabajo de des- cripción original, entre Senegal y Costa de Marfil. En nuestro material es cono- cida del área de Dakar, entre 0 y 40 m, y también de Mauritania. Comentarios : Una concha muy clara de color (Figs. 21, 22), es también fusiforme pero algo más cilindrica que la forma normal, y con seis vueltas de espira alcanza 5,5 mm de altura y 2,1 mm de anchura. La protoconcha (Figs. 108, 110) de esta supuesta variedad clara es similar en su tamaño y anchura (555 jum), pero su núcleo es más pequeño (255 ¡um) (primera media vuelta: 435 jUm). La escultura del único ejemplar está algo desgastado pero los cor- dones que se aprecian parecen ser menos anchos y el número de costillas axiales es algo menor. La última vuelta ocupa el 54 % de la altura y la abertura el 37%. La teleo- concha está ornamentada con cordones espirales relevantes de anchura similar a los interespacios y con costillas menos rele- vantes con anchura algo menor que los interespacios con una inclinación algo pro- soclina. Hay unos cuatro cordones en la primera vuelta, en la tercera son ya cinco que se mantienen por encima de la inser- ción bucal en la última vuelta. Un sexto cordón subsutural se insinúa como un reborde. Los dos cordones superiores son algo más estrechos que los inferiores. En la base de la concha hay unos nueve cor- dones espirales más separados por claros interespacios. En la última vuelta presenta una veintena de costillas, de anchura similar a los interespacios, ortoclinas o ligeramente prosoclinas. Abertura bucal oval con un canal sifonal claro más corto que en la variedad oscura y menos incli- nado. Siete dientes en la cara interna del labio externo siendo el inferior el límite externo del canal sifonal. Si esta forma es algo taxonómicamente diferente, sólo podrá deducirse en el futuro del estudio de más material. Chauvetia gigantea spec. nov. Oliver, Rolán y Pelorce (Figs. 10, 11, 60-65, 79, 86-88) Chauvetia candidissima: Micali, 1999. Boíl. Malac., 34: fig. 2. 146 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 80-85. Chauvetia soni (Bruguiére, 1789), Dakar. 80: concha con el patrón habitual de color, 5,8 mm (MHNS); 81: concha con patrón poco habitual, misma que en fig. 6, 5,0 mm (MHNS); 82: detalle de la abertura; 83, 84: protoconcha; 85: detalle de la microescultura. Figures 80-85. Chauvetia soni (Bruguiere, 1789), Dakar. 80: shell with the usual colour pattern, 5.8 mm (MHNS); 81: shell with unusual pattern, same as in fig. 6, 5.0 mm (MHNS); 82: detail ofthe aperture; 83, 84: protoconch; 85: detail ofthe microsculpture. 147 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 60-62) en MNHN; un paratipo (Fig. 63) en CJP; otro (Figs. 10, 11) en MHNS. Otro paratipo (representado en Micali, 1999, fig. 2) en la colección de Giunchi-Tisselli (San Zaccaria). Localidad tipo: Epopal, Dakar, 14° 36' 270" N, 17° 25' 629" W, 32 m (Septiembre/ 2007). Etimología: El nombre específico alude a su tamaño, que es el mayor de las especies conocidas en este género. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 60-63) fusiforme-alargada, sólida, con unas siete vueltas de espira y una altura máxima supuesta de más de 14 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 64, 87) con 0,6 vueltas, y con una anchura de unos 800 ium (núcleo: 550 pm, primera media vuelta: 800 pm) y unas 700 jum de altura; está un poco erosionada, pero se aprecia escultura espiral marcada. Teleoconcha con una escultura de cor- dones espirales algo más estrechos que sus interespacios y costillas bastante más estrechas que sus interespacios. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen tres cordones espirales. En la cuarta vuelta aparece por encima de la sutura un cuarto cordón. En la última vuelta hay cuatro cordones por encima de la inserción labial y, hacia la base, aparecen de diez u once cordonci- llos más. Los superiores están claramente separados por interespacios claros y a medida que se acercan al canal sifonal se van aproximando entre ellos, quedando los más inferiores prácticamente juntos. La escultura axial es similar en grosor y está formada por costillas ortoclinas o muy poco prosoclinas, que son unas dieciocho en la última vuelta. Se prolongan por debajo de la inserción labial acabando cerca del inicio del canal sifonal. Al cruzarse cor- dones y costillas se forman nodulos ovoides o rectangulares. La ultima vuelta ocupa el 46 % de la altura total de la concha. Microescultura muy fina (Fig. 88). Abertura (Figs. 79) oval que alcanza el 26% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se aprecian cinco dientes de los que el superior es más pronunciado y el inferior constituye el borde externo del canal sifonal, que es corto y está algo girado hacia la izquierda. Color de la concha castaño claro o blanquecino, con la protoconcha, la base y la abertura blancas. Los nodulos son todos perfectamente blancos distin- guiéndose sobre el fondo castaño. Periostraco castaño. Dimensiones : Holotipo 13,9 x 4,7 mm; paratipos de unas dimensiones similares. Animal desconocido. Distribución : Sólo conocida de la Bahía de Dakar, viviendo en fondos rocosos basálticos, a una profundidad de alrededor de 32 m. Comentarios : Esta especie por su tamaño (casi el doble de la mayoría de las especies del género) se diferencia de todas las conocidas tanto del Mediterrá- neo como de Senegal. Por otra parte, el patrón de color es totalmente diferente de todas ellas, apareciendo como un nega- tivo de otras especies, que tienen un patrón de color de nodulos castaños sobre un fondo más claro, como C. lucia- cuestae spec. nov., de Senegal, y del Medi- terráneo, C. lefebvrei (Maravigna, 1840), y algunas formas de otras especies. Cuando carece de periostraco, por su tamaño grande, podría confundirse con C. tenuisculpta , pero en esta son diferen- tes la coloración de la concha y la fuerte escultura axial de la protoconcha. Chauvetia candidissima (Philippi, 1836) del Mediterráneo (Fig. 12) es más blanca, más ancha y más sólida y tiene 4 cordones espirales por vuelta. La proto- concha (Fig. 90) tiene un mayor número de cordones en la zona de transición a la teleoconcha y una microescultura muy fina (Fig. 91). Chauvetia tenebrosa spec. nov. (Figs. 7-9, 67, 114-120) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 115) en el MNCN (15.05/47536). Paratipos en las siguientes coleccio- nes: AMNH (1), BMNH 20080487 (1), MNHN (1, Fig. 114), MNHN (20 c, 12 m), MNHN (9 c), MHNS 148 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 86-88. Chauvetia gigantea spec. nov. 86: paratipo, Dakar, 8,6 mm (MHNS); 87: protocon- cha, Dakar; 88; detalle de la microescultura, Dakar. Figuras 89-92: Chauvetia candidissima (Phi- lippi, 1836); 89: protoconcha, de un juvenil de Malta; 90, 91: detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha; 92: detalle de la microescultura de la teleoconcha. Figures 86-88. Chauvetia gigantea spec. nov. 86: paratype, Dakar, 8. 6 mm (MHNS); 87: protoconch, Dakar; 88; detail ofthe microsculpture, Dakar. Figures 89-92: Chauvetia candidissima (Philippi, 1836); 89: protoconch of a juvenile from Malta; 90, 91: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch; 92: detail of the microsculpture ofthe teleoconch. 149 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 (20 c, 13 j), USNM (1), CJH (1), CPR (1), CDO (5), CJP (5 ej, 9 c). Todos ellos de la localidad tipo. Otros paratipos de Dakar, Senegal: Les Madeleines, 3 c, 1 j, 18 m (MHNS); Gorée: 3 c, 3 j, 6 m (MHNS); Cap Vert: 12 c, 13 m (MHNS); Cap Vert: 2 c, 30 m (CJP); Dakar: 2 ej, (8D3-7) (MHNS); 1 ej. Bahía de Gorée (CJP); 35 c. Bahía de Gorée, 5-15 m (MNHN); Cap Vert, Pecio del "Tacoma": 2 c, 13 m (MHNS); Dakar (sin localidad): 6 c (CJP); Bahía de Dakar, 1 ej, (13D2-8), 5 c, 60 j, 20-40 m (MHNS); Gorée: 2 ej, 18 m (13D2-6) (MHNS). Localidad tipo: Pecio del "Tacoma", Dakar, Senegal, entre 20 y 30 m. Etimología: El nombre específico alude al oscuro color de la concha. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 7-9, 114, 115) fusiforme alargada, con unas 4-5 vueltas y unas dimensiones máximas de hasta 4.0 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 117, 118) con una vuelta de espira, y unas dimensiones de 472 pm de diámetro (el núcleo, 212 pm, la primera media vuelta 340 pm, y una altura de 327 pm. Está ornamentada con unos 13 ó 14 cordoncillos irregurales, con los espacios intermedios en los que aparece una microescultura (Fig. 119) muy irregular, en la que las costillitas axiales se distinguen con dificultad. Hacia el final de la protoconcha, hay unas 3-4 costillas axiales antes de iniciarse la escultura típica de la teleoconcha. Teleoconcha con unas cuatro vueltas algo convexas y que presentan 4 cordo- nes en las primeras vueltas y, por encima de la inserción labial, 5 ó 6 en la última, los dos superiores muy peque- ños; además, por debajo, hay unos 10 cordones más que se van juntando hacia la base. Abertura (Figs. 67, 116) algo ovoide, con cinco dientes en el interior del labio externo y un canal sifonal abierto y corto. Coloración de la concha castaña oscura, pero los interespacios entre los cordones espirales son algo más claros, por lo que estos destacan sobre el fondo. Dimensiones : el holotipo tiene unas dimensiones de 3,6 x 1,5 mm; los ejem- plares mayores llegan habitualmente hasta 4.0 mm, aunque algún ejemplar enorme alcanzó los 4,8 mm. Animal : se hicieron observaciones sobre unos pocos ejemplares que fueron recolectados vivos. El animal tiene un color de fondo blanquecino, o ligera- mente crema con puntos blancos, que se observan en el extremo del sifón y en la base, mientras que todo el dorso es de color negro intenso. Distibución : Conocida del área de Dakar, Senegal. Discusión : C. tenebrosa tiene un aspecto general que recuerda el de la concha de C. brunnea (Donovan, 1804). La descripción de esta última especie puede verse en Fretter y Graham (1984), Mifsud (1994), Micali (1999), aunque hay una clara dificultad para determinar con precisión las diferencias del taxón C. brunnea con las especies más próximas, C. mamillata Riso, 1826, y C. turritellata Deshayes, 1835. Este pro- blema se afrontará en una revisión, actualmente en curso, sobre las especies del Mediterráneo y su comparación con las del Atlántico y norteafricanas. Las diferencias de Chauvetia tenebrosa spec. nov. con C. brunnea (de las costas de Galicia y de la Bretaña francesa) son las siguientes: C. brunnea tiene un mayor tamaño, con un color castaño uniforme, los cordones espirales más aplanados, más del doble de anchos que sus interespacios, y la protoconcha es más ancha. El diáme- tro de la protoconcha de C. brunnea es refe- rido por Fretter y Graham (1984) como teniendo entre 650 y 1000 ¡um. Thiriot- Quiévreux y Rodríguez Babio (1975, lám. 6B) muestran una fotografía en la que este diámetro es de unos 450 pm, pero en el material de la Bretaña francesa examinado por nosotros, el diámetro está entre 500 y 750 pm; en todos los casos examinados, mayor que el de C. tenebrosa. Otra dife- rencia es la escultura de los interespacios entre los cordoncillos de la protoconcha que, en C. brunnea, tienen una escultura de muescas axiales bien definida (Thiriot- Quiévreux y Rodríguez Babio, 1975), mientras que, en C. tenebrosa (Fig. 119) la escultura es muy tenue y mal definida. Las diferencias con Chauvetia joani spec. nov. pueden verse en el apartado de comentarios de esta especie. 150 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 93-98. Chauvetia affinis. 93: concha, 3,7 mm; 94: detalle de la abertura; 95, 96: protocon- cha; 97: detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha; 98: detalle de la microescultura de la teleo- concha. Figures 93-98. Chauvetia affinis. 93: shell, 5.7 mm; 94: detail ofthe aperture; 95, 96: protoconch; 97: detail ofthe microsculpture of the protoconch; 98: detail ofthe micros culpture of the teleoconch. 151 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Chauvetia joatti spec. nov. (Figs. 24-33, 71, 121-127, 182, 187) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 121) in MNCN (15.05/47526). Paratypes en las siguientes colecciones: AMNH (5), BMNH (20080490) (5), MNHN (5, Fig. 122), USNM (5), CJH (5), CPR (3), CDO (10), CJP (300 sp). Todos ellos de la localidad tipo. Otros paratipos: Les Madeleines: 7 ej, 7-13 m (CJP); Cap Vert Thiouriba: 6 ej, 33 m (CJP); Les Blockaus: 28 ej, 10-17 m (CJP); Somone: 2 ej, (CJP); Cap Vert: 7 ej (CJP); Takh Mon Khar: 2 ej, 35 m (CJP); Presquel'ile du Cap Vert: 1 ej, 5-40 m (CJP); Sable coqui- lles Cap Vert (09/1995): 7 ej (CJP); Sable coquilles Cap Vert (09/ 1995): 5 ej (CJP); Pecio del "Tacoma": 198 ej, 15 m (CJP); Les Blockaus: 4 ej, 10-17 m (CJP); Grand Thiouriba: 8 ej, 40 m (CJP); PresqueFile du Cap Vert (9/98): 5 ej, 5-40 m (CJP); Grand Thiouriba, 1 ej, 40 m (CJP); 4 ej (CJP); Gouye Teni'M both: 3 c, 7 j, 25 m (CJP); Cap Vert, Pecio del "Tiwa": 6 ej, 35 m (CJP); Les Madeleines: 1 c, 6 j, 7-13 m (CJP); Cap Vert: 12 ej, 0-40 m (CJP); Charbonieres : 11 ej, 34 m (CJP); Senegal (sin precisar): 2 ej (CJP); Seminóle: 3 c, 38 m (MNHN); Madeleines: 2 c, 16 j (C. sp. Ib) 18 m (MHNS); Gorée: 12 ej (sp.b) 20-40 m (MHNS); Gorée: 7 c, 3 j, 1 f, 6 m (MHNS); Pecio del "Tacoma": 50 c, 90 j, 15 m (MHNS); Cap Vert: 34 ej and j, 33 m (MHNS); Cap Vert: 6 ej, 13 m (MHNS); Grand Thouribe: 10 ej, 30 m (MHNS); Grand Thiouriba: 5 c, 2 j, 40 m. Lotes en alcohol: Hotel Oceanium (5D2-15): 5 ej, 6 m (MHNS): frente H. Oceanium, dragado (7D2-25): 4 ej, 20 m (MHNS); 1 ej. Almadies (10D2-8): 1 ej, 1 m (MHNS); Puerto de Gorée: 11 c, 6 m (MNHN); Gorée, costa sur (13D2-9): 18 ej, 10 m (MHNS); Sur de Gorée: 2 c, 25 m (MNHN); Este de Gorée: 1 c, 6 m (MNHN); Hotel Oceanium (7DK03-9): 3 ej, 5 m (MHNS); Gorée (8DK3-7): 2 ej, 6 m (MHNS); Dakar: 7 ej, 20 m (MHNS); Dakar: 2 ej, 30 m (MHNS); Gorée, costa sur (13D2-8): 1 ej, 15 m (MHNS); Bahía de Gorée: 2 c, 15 m (MNHN); 50 c, 5-15 m (MNHN); Dakar: 5 ej, (MHNS); 1 ej, (7D3-9 y 10) (MHNS); 1 c (MNHN); 1 c, 14°27N 17°33W, 170-200 m (MNHN); 2 c, 46-50 m (MNHN); Diago: 1 c, 19° 12' N, 16° 26' W, 6 m (MNHN); Bahía de Saloum: 1 c, 13° 57' N, 17° 15' W, 50 m (MNHN); entre Gorée y Dakar: 50 c (MNHN). Otro material estudiado: Mauritania. Baie de l'Etoile: 1 j (dudoso). Senegal. al Sur de M'Bao: 2 s (en malas condiciones) (MNHN); Dakar: 11 c (mal estado) (MNHN). Localidad tipo: Cap Vert "Tacoma", Bahía de Dakar, Senegal, 13 m. Etimología: El nombre específico se dedica a Joan Daniel Oliver, hijo del primer autor, por su cons- tante colaboración. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 24-33, 121, 122) oblongo-fusiforme con unas seis vueltas de espira, sólida y una dimen- sión máxima de 7,9 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 124-126) con 1 vuelta de espira y 575 ¡um de anchura (núcleo: 215 pin; primera media vuelta: 425 pin) y 470 pm de altura. Escultura formada por una veintena de cordones espirales, planos, que en ocasiones se interrumpen o se inician antes de llegar al final. Los cordones suelen variar algo de anchura y son apenas algo más anchos que los interespacios. En los surcos que separan los cordones se observan micropliegues axiales que le dan un aspecto en forma de casillas. Al final de la protoconcha aparecen unas cinco o seis costillas axiales que se van separando progresivamente a medida que se hacen más relevantes. Teleoconcha con cuatro cordones espirales a su inicio. El superior, tan solo forma el reborde inferior de la sutura, mientras que los tres inferiores suelen tener una anchura similar. Pronto el cordón superior se separa de la sutura y aparece por encima un quinto cordón espiral. La anchura de estos dos cordo- nes subsuturales siempre es menor que la de los tres inferiores. La última vuelta representa en torno al 55% de la altura total de una concha adulta. En ella, hay seis cordones por encima de la inserción labial. Los cuatro inferiores son eviden- tes si bien el superior de estos suele ser más estrecho. Los dos superiores son de una menor anchura y menos evidentes. Los interespacios son de una anchura similar a la de los cordones espirales. Hay entre diez y doce costillas en cada vuelta de espira medianamente eleva- das y cuya anchura, al principio es similar a los interespacios, pero luego se separan más y, por tanto, tienen menor anchura que sus interespacios. Las costi- llas axiales elevan los cordones espirales que pasan sobre ellas, haciéndolos más prominentes y dando la impresión de que son más claros. La base presenta de 152 OLI VER Y ROLÁN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 99-104. Chauvetia tenuisculpta (Dautzenberg, 1891). 99: concha, 10,5 mm; 100: detalle de la abertura; 101, 102: protoconcha; 103: detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha; 104: opérculo. Figures 99-104. Chauvetia tenuisculpta (Dautzenberg, 1891). 99: shell, 10.5 mm; 100: detail ofthe aperture; 101, 102: protoconch; 103: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch; 104: operculum. 153 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 diez a once cordones espirales que van aproximándose y estrechándose en el canal sifonal. Microescultura de líneas espirales (Fig. 127) sólo apreciable con grandes aumentos. Abertura (Fig. 71, 123) oval, repre- sentando algo menos del 40% de la concha adulta (entre el 35 y el 38 %). El labio externo es más abierto que en otras especies de Chauvetia y presenta seis dientes en su cara interna, siendo el inferior el inicio del canal sifonal. Éste es muy corto y está inclinado hacia la derecha, siendo esta una característica típica de la especie. Color castaño oscuro o castaño-ama- rillento en la mayoría de las conchas estudiadas. Algunas son de color uni- forme pero en muchas otras los cordo- nes son más claros que el fondo, lo que le da un aspecto lineado. Algunas conchas son de color amarillento más claro, con una banda rojiza subsutural y otra en la base de la concha. Hay también ejemplares completamente blancos. Dos de los ejemplares examina- dos eran de color marrón oscuro con la base blanca. Dimensiones : el holotipo tiene unas dimensiones de 5,4 x 2,3 mm; los ejem- plares mayores llegan hasta 7,9 milíme- tros de altura y 2,7 de anchura. Animal blanquecino con manchas y puntos blanco-leche. El sifón y los tentá- culos son ligeramente amarillos con puntos blancos y el pie es casi blanco con puntos opacos blanco-leche. Opér- culo (Fig. 182) ovoide, con núcleo sub- central. Rádula (Fig. 187) muy pequeña y alargada, con más de 160 filas de dientes, central rectangular con una cúspide, y lateral con tres, curvadas hacia dentro. Distribución : Desde Mauritania a Dakar, entre 0 y 40 m. Discusión: Es con mucho la especie más abundante en la zona estudiada. Micali (1999, figs. 8 y 9) ilustra dos conchas procedentes de Senegal, que menciona como Chauvetia sp. 1; estas conchas podrían corresponderse con la presente especie. Las fotografías presen- tadas así lo hacen suponer, si bien algunos detalles dados en la descrip- ción, como la altura de 10 mm, la pro- porción de la altura de la última vuelta o el número de cordones en esta vuelta (de 25) serían más cuestionables. La diferenciación se debe hacer con las siguientes especies: Chauvetia brunnea (Donovan, 1804) de Europa, es más pequeña en tamaño pero sus cordones espirales son más anchos que en Chauvetia joani spec. nov. En el caso de los juveniles, se distinguirían por tener un cordón menos en la última vuelta y un canal sifonal más vertical que en C. joani. Chauvetia tenebrosa spec. nov. tiene una concha más pequeña, menos aguzada, la protoconcha es más pequeña y con escul- tura entre los cordoncillos más marcada. Chauvetia procerula Monterosato, 1889 tiene el canal sifonal más claro, las costillas más pronunciadas y menos numerosas; la abertura más pequeña y la protoconcha con menor número de cordones espirales Chauvetia mamillata Risso, 1826 tiene el canal sifonal vertical, no inclinado; La abertura bucal es más cerrada y las cos- tillas axiales son más pronunciadas y menos numerosas; la abertura más pequeña y protoconcha con menor número de cordones. Chauvetia pardacuta spec. nov., ver más adelante, en el apartado de Comen- tarios de esta especie. Chauvetia pelorcei spec. nov. (Figs. 34-38, 72, 128-133) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 128) en MNCN (15.05/47527). Paratipos en las siguientes colecciones: AMNH (1), BMNH (20080491) (1), MNHN (1), MHNS (10), USNM (1), CJH (1), CDO (1), CPR (1), CJP (18), todos de la localidad tipo. Otros paratipos: Senegal: Dakar: Madeleines: 18 c, 4 j, 3 f, 18 m (MHNS); Grand Thouribe: 1 ej, 18-30 m (MHNS); Gorée: 1 c, 1 j, 1 f, 20-40 m (MHNS); Pecio del "Tacoma": 10 ej, 15-18 m (MHNS); Cap Vert: 3 c, 1 j, 18-33 m (MHNS); Cap. Vert: 3 ej, 13-18 m (MHNS); Cap Vert, Petit Thiouriba: 14 ej, 33 m (CJP); Presqu'ile Cap Vert (09/98): 41 ej, 35 m (CJP); 154 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 105-113. Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956. 105: concha con el patrón claro de color, 5,4 mm; 106: concha con patrón oscuro de color, 5,8 mm; 107: detalle de la abertura; 108, 110; pro- toconcha, de concha clara; 109, 111; protoconcha, de concha oscura; 112, 113: detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 105-1 13. Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956. 105: shell with the palé colour pattern, 5.4 mm; 106: shell with a dark colour pattern, 5.8 mm; 107: detail ofthe aperture; 108, 110; protoconch, ofa palé shell; 109, 1 1 1; protoconch, ofa dark shell; 112, 1 13: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 155 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Cap Vert, pecio del "Tacoma" (30 / 08/98): 5 c, 1 j, 13 m (CJP); Cap Vert (arena conchífera) (09 / 1995): 2 c, 3 j (CJP); Pecio del "Tacoma" : 2 c, 10 j, 15 m (CJP); Grand Thiouriba: 45 ej, 40 m (CJP); Les Made- leines: 2 c, 4 j, 7-13 m (CJP); Grand Thiouriba: 4 ej, 40 m (CJP); Gouye Temi' Mboth: 3 c, 3 j (CJP); Cap Vert: 6 ej, 0-40 m (CJP); Charbonier: 1 ej, 34 m (CJP); lej. Bahía de Dakar, dragado (7D2-10): 1 ej (MHNS); Cap Vert: 4 ej (CJP); 4 c, 29 j, sedimentos entre 20-40 m (MHNS); SW Cap Manuel: 1 c, 50 m (MNHN). Otro material estudiado: Varios ejemplares de la localidad tipo fueron disueltos para estudio radular. Localidad tipo: Cap Vert, pecio del "Tiwa", Bahía de Dakar, Senegal, 38 m. Etimología: El nombre específico se dedica al malacólogo Jacques Pelorce, de Paris, por su impor- tante aportación de material a este trabajo. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 34-38, 128) oblongo-fusiforme, sólida, con unas seis-siete vueltas de espira y unas dimensiones máximas de unos 4,7 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 130, 131) con 0,8 vueltas y una anchura de 475 jum de (núcleo: 200 jum y primera media vuelta: 370 jum) y 525 pm de altura, ornamen- tada por cordoncillos espirales (una docena en su tramo final) que tiene, por lo general, una anchura similar a la de sus interespacios. Al final de la proto- concha aparecen dos o tres costillitas axiales rectas. La microescultura de los espacios entre estos cordoncillos (Figs. 132, 133), muestra un cruzado muy irre- gular entre lineas espirales y axiales. Teleoconcha con unas seis vueltas, convexas y por lo general angulosas, la sutura ondulada y profunda. Cordones espirales y costillas axiales, al cruzarse, forman tubérculos nodulosos algo sobresalientes. La teleoconcha se inicia con tres cordones espirales y, por encima, hay un cuarto cordón que aparece como un reborde subsutural. En la penúltima vuelta hay cinco cordones, de los cuales, los dos superiores tienen notablemente menor anchura. De los tres inferiores, el más ancho es el central y, por lo tanto, el más prominente. En muchas conchas ese cordón confiere al perfil de la espira un aspecto anguloso. Los cordones son claramente más anchos que sus interespacios y, al ser de color claro, contrastan con el fondo rojizo de aquellos. La última vuelta representa el 58% de la altura total y, en ella, hay cinco cordones por encima de la inserción labial siendo los dos supe- riores muy estrechos e incluso el supe- rior puede desaparecer. Por debajo de la inserción labial aparecen de diez a once cordones, más anchos que sus interespa- cios y que se van juntando en el canal sifonal. Hay unas diez costillas en cada vuelta casi tan anchas como sus interes- pacios y que al cruzarse con los cordo- nes originan tubérculos más o menos prominentes. Abertura (Figs. 72, 129) redondeada, representa el 40 % de la altura total, con seis dientes en el interior del labio externo. Canal sifonal corto pero evi- dente. Color de la concha rojizo con cordo- nes algo más claros, que al ser más anchos que los interespacios, le dan un aspecto lineado. La base de la concha y el canal sifonal son rojizos. Dimensiones : El holotipo tiene 4,5 x 2,6 mm. Animal de color crema con puntos blanco-leche. Zona oscura en el dorso respetando la parte anterior del pie. Algunas manchas en el dorso del sifón. Distribución : Sólo conocida de Dakar entre 5 y 40 metros. Comentarios: Las conchas de esta especie pueden tener un perfil de espira más o menos uniformemente convexo o angular en función de la prominencia de los cordones espirales. En el área estudiada no hay especies morfológicamente semejantes. La que aparentemente parecería más similar sería C. guinchiorum Micali, 1999, del Mediterráneo, que guarda cierto seme- janza, sobre todo en el aspecto cromático, por el contraste de los anchos cordones claros con el fondo de concha rojizo. Esta especie mediterránea parece ser una especie muy local y su área de distribu- ción se limita a las costas italianas, por lo 1 56 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 114-120. Chauvetia tenebrosa spec. nov. 114: paratipo, 3,7 mm (MNHN); 115: holotipo, 3.6 mm (MNCN); 116: detalle de la abertura; 117, 118; protoconcha; 119; detalle de la microes- cultura de la protoconcha; 120: detalle de la microescultura de la teleoconcha. Figures 114-120. Chauvetia tenebrosa spec. nov. 114: paratype, 3.7 mm (MNHN); 115: holotype, 3.6 mm (MNCN); 116: detail ofthe aperture; 117, 118; protoconch; 119; detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch; 120: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe teleoconch. 157 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 que geográficamente sería poco probable esa dispersión para una especie de proto- concha paucispiral y posiblemente lecito- trófica, con poca capacidad de disper- sión. Según el trabajo de descripción ori- ginal, y un ejemplar que se ha podido comparar (CAP), la protoconcha de C. giunchiorum es más alta y más ancha, con unos 20 cordoncillos espirales, la colora- ción es algo diferente, con color blanco de fondo y cordoncillos castaños muy finos en los interespacios, y con una base de color blanco; además, tendría más costi- llas axiales al final de la protoconcha. Chauvetia pardofasciata spec. nov. (Figs. 39-44, 73, 134-143) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 134) in MNCN (15.05/47528). Paratipos en las siguientes colecciones: AMNH (1), BMNH (20080486) (1), MNHN (1), MHNS (1), USNM (1), CDO (1), CJH (1), CPR (1), todos procedentes de la localidad tipo. Otros paratipos: Senegal: Dakar: Madeleines: 1 c, 1 j, 18 m (MHNS); Gorée: 18 ej, 20-40 m (MHNS); 3 c (MNHN); Gorée: 1 c, 1 j, 1 f, 6 m (MHNS); entre Dakar y Gorée: 4 c, dragado 20-30 m (MHNS); Pecio del "Tacoma": 2 ej, 15 m (MHNS); Cap Vert: 1 ej, 13 m (MHNS); Petit Corniche, Cap Vert: 10 ej, 5 j, 3-7 m (CJP); Cap Vert (09/96): 1 j, N'Both, 6-7 m (CJP); 2 ej, 5-40 m (CJP); Grand Thiouriba: 1 c, 20 m (CJP); Gouye Temi' M'Both: 6 c, 1 j (CJP); 3 ej, (8D3-7) (MHNS); 2 ej, (10D2-9) (MHNS); 15 c, 19 j, sedimentos de la bahía, entre 20-40 m (MHNS). Otro material estudiado: Dos conchas de la localidad tipo fueron destruidas para estudio radular. Localidad tipo: Gorée, Bahía de Dakar, Senegal, 20-40 m. Etimología: El nombre específico hace alusión a las bandas castañas que presenta la concha, en su forma más habitual. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 39-44, 134, 135) pupoide, sólida, con unas cinco vueltas de espira, y llegando a alcanzar hasta 4.0 mm de altura. Protoconcha (Figs. 136-139) paucis- piral, con 0.8 vueltas de espira y que alcanza 515 pm de altura y 475 de anchura (núcleo: 240 jum, y primera media vuelta: 440 jum). Ornamentada por una quincena de cordones al final de la protoconcha más o menos de la misma anchura y equidistantes, separa- dos por surcos con una estriación axial (Figs. 140, 141). La anchura de los cordo- nes es algo mayor que la de los interes- pacios, aunque en el inicio de la proto- concha estos cordones pueden ser menos anchos que sus interespacios, en los que se pueden observar las típicas incisiones axiales de muchas protocon- chas de Chauvetia. Al final de la proto- concha, hay tres o cuatro costillas verti- cales, algo opistoclinas. La parte supe- rior de las costillas se curva formando una estrecha repisa subsutural sólo visible con el microscopio electrónico de barrido. Teleoconcha que se inicia con tres cordones espirales de los que el superior aparece como un mero reborde de la sutura, aunque pronto se separa. En la última vuelta hay cuatro cordones por encima de la inserción labial de los que el superior es claramente más estrecho. En la base de la concha hay nueve cor- dones al principio separados regular- mente pero que se juntan en el canal sifonal. Los cordones prácticamente tienen la misma anchura que los interes- pacios. En estos se observa una microes- cultura espiral (Figs. 142, 143) en forma de microcordoncillos. Hay una docena de costillas de anchura similar a los inte- respacios que, al cruzarse con los cordo- nes espirales, originan tubérculos redon- deados, algo elevados. La última espira ocupa el 66% de la altura total. Abertura (Figs. 73) ligeramente oval, representando el 44% de la altura total de la concha. Canal sifonal corto, no muy abierto y poco marcado. Cinco dientes en el interior del labio externo. Color de la concha, blanco, con los cordones inferiores de color marrón rojizo, mientras el subsutural también es blanco. En la última vuelta, también es blanco un nuevo cordón más pequeño que aparece por encima del subsutural; también son blancos los últimos de la base. Algunas conchas son totalmente 158 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 121-127. Chauvetia joani spec. nov. 121: holotipo, 5,4 mm (MNCN); 122: paradpo, 5,8 mm (MNHN); 123: detalle de la abertura; 124-126: protoconcha; 127: detalle de la microescul- tura de la teleoconcha. Figures 121-127. Chauvetia joani spec. nov. 121: holotype, 5.4 mm (MNCN); 122: paratype, 5.8 mm (MNHN); 123: detail of the aperture; 124-126: protoconch; 127: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe teleoconch. 159 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Figuras 128-133. Chauvetia pelorcei spec. nov. 128: holotipo, 4,7 mm (MNCN); 129: detalle de la abertura; 130, 131: protoconcha; 132, 133: detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 128-133. Chauvetia pelorcei spec. nov. 128: holotype, 4.7 mm (MNCN); 129: detail ofthe aperture; 130, 131: protoconch; 132, 133: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 160 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 134-143. Chauvetia pardofasciata spec. nov. 134: holotipo, 3,8 mm (MNCN); 133: para- tipo, forma blanca, 3,0 mm (MNHN); 136-138: protoconcha, forma con bandas; 139: protocon- cha, forma blanca; 140; detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha, forma blanca; 14 1; detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha, forma con bandas; 142: detalle de la microescultura de la teleoconcha, forma con bandas; 143: detalle de la escultura de la teleoconcha, forma blanca. Figures 134-143. Chauvetia pardofasciata spec. nov. 134: holotype, 3.8 mm (MNCN); 135: paratype, white morph, 3.0 mm (MNHN); 136-138: protoconch, banded morph; 139: protoconch, white morph; 140; detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch, white morph; 141; detail ofthe microsculp- ture of the protoconch, banded morph; 142: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe teleoconch, banded morph; 143: detail of the microsculpture of the teleoconch, white morph. 161 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 blancas, sin ninguna traza de castaño. La protoconcha es blanca, aunque a veces tiene un ligero color violáceo. Dimensiones: el holotipo mide 3,8 x 1,8 mm. Animal de color blanco lechoso, sifón casi transparente y con aislados puntos blanco leche. Distribución: Conocida del área de Dakar, entre 3 y 40 m. Comentarios: La forma con bandas tiene una aparente similitud con C. soni , pero se diferencia porque esta última especie es más grande, la protoconcha más ancha, y en el patrón de color tiene dos bandas castañas marcadas pero, en la última vuelta, por encima y por debajo, hay dos bandas muy finas (a veces sin color), y en la zona basal. también hay bandas castañas muy finas. En la protoconcha, después de la zona sin escultura axial aparecen a lo largo de media vuelta unas 12-13 costillas axiales fuertes. La microescultura de la proto- concha en C. soni, tiene entre los cordo- nes, una serie de filetes dispuestos muy irregularmente, al contrario de lo que ocurre en C. pardofasciata. Las conchas con coloración blanca, se podrían confundir a primera vista con las de C. robustalba spec. nov. pero estas son más grandes, más estrechas y con el ápice de color castaño, y tienen aislados puntos castaños en la teleoconcha. Las dos formas, blanca y con bandas castañas, no son absolutamente defini- das en una u otra variedad, ya que hay ejemplares con formas intermedias. Chauvetia javieri spec. nov. (Figs. 45-48, 74, 144-151) Chauvetia sp. 1. Micali, 1999. Bol. Malac., 34: 66, figs. 8, 9. Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 144) en MNCN (15.05/47529). Paratipos en las siguientes colecciones: Cap Vert: 1 ej, (exCJP) (MNHN); Gorée: 1 c (Fig. 145), 1 ej, 3 j, 1 f, 15 m (MHNS); 3 c, 14°N 17°2'W, 50 m (MNHN); Pecio del "Tacoma": 2 c, 1 ej, 30 m (CJP); Pecio del "Tacoma": 1 c, 15 m (BMNH 20080488); Bahía de Dakar: 1 ej, 20 m (MHNS); sur de Gorée: 2 c, 32-34 m (MNHN); 8 c, 39 m (MNHN); 1 c, 30-40 m (MNHN); 5 c, 42 m (MNHN); Seminóle: 17 c, 38 m (MNHN); Bahía del Saloum: 6 c, 50 m (MNHN). Otro material estudiado: Senegal: Dakar: Gorée: 2 j, dudosos (MHNS); sur de Cap Manuel: 4 c (deterioriadas), 50 m (MNHN). Localidad tipo: Cap Vert, Pecio del "Tacoma", Bahía de Dakar, Senegal, 30 m. Etimología: El nombre de esta especie se dedica a Javier Oliver, hijo del primer autor, por su cons- tante colaboración. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 45-48, 144, 145) fusiforme, sólida, con unas siete vueltas de espira y una dimensión máxima de 7,8 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 147-149) con 1,1 vueltas y 775 jum de anchura (núcleo: 410 jum y primera media vuelta: 570 ¡um) y unas 730 pm de altura. Está ornamentada por cordones planos, de anchura variable pero claramente más anchos que los inte- respacios. En el tramo final de la proto- concha se observan de doce a quince cor- doncillos. En los interespacios se obser- van las típicas incisiones, aunque más continuas que en otras especies de Chau- vetia. Hay una importante escultura axial formada por más de una veintena de cos- tillitas que se inician a partir del núcleo y que van ganando en relevancia a medida que se acercan al final de la protoconcha; son prácticamente ortoclinas y rectas aunque se curvan muy ligeramente en su parte más alta. Teleoconcha con vueltas convexas y sutura profunda y ondulada. Las vueltas están ornamentadas por cordones espi- rales y costillas, ambos más anchos que sus respectivos interespacios. En la cuarta vuelta, ya hay siete cordones que, en la última vuelta, se mantienen por encima de la inserción final de la espira y, en la parte basal, hay una docena más. En la última vuelta, la escultura axial está formada por diez o doce costillas 162 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 144-151. Chauvetia javieri spec. nov. 144: holotipo, 7,6 mm (MNCN); 145: paradpo, 7,3 mm (MHNS); 146: detalle de la abertura; 147-149: protoconcha; 150, 151: detalle de la microes- cultura de la teleoconcha. Figures 144-151. Chauvetia javieri spec. nov. 144: holotype, 7.6 mm (MNCN); 145: paratype, 73 mm (MHNS); 146: detail ofthe aperture; 147-149: protoconch; 150, 151: detail ofthe microsculpture of the teleoconch. 163 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 convexas y algo prosoclinas. Esta última vuelta representa el 56 % de la altura. Abertura (Figs., 74, 146) oval, ocu- pando el 38% de la altura total de la concha. En la parte interna del labio externo se pueden observar unos diez dientecillos algo oblicuos, de los que el inferior es el mayor y forma el margen externo del canal sifonal, que es corto y ancho. Color de la concha amarillento con base y canal sifonal rojizos. También hay tonalidades rojizas en el ápice y en la zona sutural. Dimensiones: el holotipo mide 7,6 x 3,5 mm. Animal con coloración blanca, con puntos blanco leche. Distribución: Conocida de Senegal, se han encontrado conchas en las costas del Sahara y, probablemente, alguna ha sido referida en Canarias. Comentarios: Esta especie tiene unos caracteres diferenciales muy claros, como son: las costillas axiales que se extienden por toda la protoconcha, y el número elevado de dientes en el labio externo. C. tenuisculpta tiene costillas axiales en la protoconcha, pero tiene una concha más grande, de color blanco y con una escultura múy regular. C. retifera Brugnone, 1880 también tiene una protoconcha muy similar a esta especie, aunque más alta, pero la concha tiene vueltas casi planas, sutura poco profunda y una coloración de bandas castañas con costillas axiales poco prominente y más numerosas. C. joani spec. nov. se parece superfi- cialmente, pero se diferencia en que tiene menos cordones espirales, menos dientes en la abertura, y sólo tiene costi- llas axiales en el final de la protoconcha. Chauvetia robustalba spec. nov. (Figs. 49-52, 75, 152-159, 188) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 153) in MNCN (15.05/47530). Paratipos en las siguientes colecciones: Dakar: 1 c, (Fig. 152) (MNHN); 4 ej, 3 c (10D2-10) (MHNS); 2 ej (10D2-26) (MHNS); Cap Vert: 2 c, 15 m (CJP); 2 j, dragados en la bahía, 20-40 m (MHNS); Delta del Saloum: 2 c, 13° 57' N, 17° 15' W, 50 m (MNHN). Localidad tipo: Bahía de Dakar, Senegal. Etimología: El nombre específico proviene de la unión de dos palabras latinas "robusta" y "alba" que hacen alusión a dos de los caracteres de la concha, su robustez y su coloración. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 49-52, 152, 153) fusiforme, gruesa y corta, sólida, con unas cinco vueltas de espira y unas dimensiones de hasta 5,4 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 154-156) con 0,6 vueltas de espira, el núcleo muy ancho (con 345 |Um) y emergente, con unas 425 ium de altura y unas 475 jUm de anchura. La escultura está formada por cordonci- llos espirales, de los que hay unos 15 hacia el final. Los interespacios son irre- gulares aunque más anchos que los cor- doncillos y en su interior existen incisio- nes axiales (Fig. 158). Al final de la pro- toconcha los cordones y los interespa- cios suelen tener una anchura similar (Fig. 157). La escultura axial está formada por unas cinco o seis costillas axiales, presentes hacia el final de la protoconcha. Teleoconcha con unas 4 vueltas de espira escasas y escultura formada por cordones longitudinales y costillas axiales, algo prosoclinas y que, al cru- zarse, forman nodulos evidentes (Fig. 159). La escultura espiral se inicia con dos cordones prácticamente de la misma anchura y un tercer cordón, en posición superior, que va apareciendo primero como un reborde subsutural y luego ya se puede observar a cierta distancia de la sutura, pero siendo siempre un poco más estrecho que los otros dos. En la última vuelta hay tres cordones por encima del punto de inserción del labio externo y que son algo más estrechos que sus interespacios. Un cuarto cordón se esboza en posición subsutural. En la base, hay ocho cordoncillos más que se van aproximando entre ellos a medida 164 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 152-159. Chauvetia rohustalba spec. nov. 152: paradpo, 5,2 mm (MNHN); 153: holotipo, 4.3 mm (MNCN); 154-156: protoconcha; 157, 158: detalle de la microescultura de la protocon- cha; 159: detalle de la microescultura de la teleoconcha. Figures 152-159. Chauvetia robustalba spec. nov. 152: paratype, 5.2 mm (MNHN); 153: holotype, 4.3 mm (MNCN); 154-156: protoconch; 157, 158: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch; 159: detail of the microsculpture ofthe teleoconch. 165 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 que se acercan al canal sifonal, que es corto y ancho. La última vuelta repre- senta el 64% de la altura de la concha y tiene unas quince costillas axiales, algo más estrechas que sus interespacios. Abertura (Figs. 75) ligeramente ova- lada con un canal sifonal corto y algo inclinado hacia la izquierda. Representa el 45% de la altura total de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se aprecian cinco dientes. Color de la concha blanco-amari- llento, pero la protoconcha y el inicio de la primera vuelta de teleoconcha son de color rojizo o castaño. También se pueden observar puntos rojizos irregu- larmente dispuestos en la superficie de la concha, preferentemente en la zona basal y en la última espira. Dimensiones : el holotipo mide 4,3 x 2,1 mm. Animal blanquecino, con un tono crema muy ligero por el dorso. Rádula (Fig. 188) con numerosas filas de dientes, el central rectangular con una cúspide, y los laterales con tres cúspi- des, curvadas hacia dentro. Distribución : Sólo conocida de la Bahía de Dakar. Comentarios : Por su forma corta, color claro con puntos rojizos, y proto- concha elevada con media vuelta de espira, esta especie no tiene ningún parecido con otras conocidas. La más parecida sería C. pardofasciata en sus formas sin color, pero, precisamente en estas formas, tiene una protoconcha blanca o ligeramente violácea, con el núcleo más pequeño y con menos vueltas que la de C. robustalba; además tiene una microescultura en los interes- pacios entre los cordones espirales. Chauvetia luciacuestae spec. nov. (Figs. 53-55, 76, 160-168, 183) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 53-55) en MNCN (15.05/47531). Paratipos en las siguientes coleccio- nes: AMNH (1), BMNH (20080484) (1), MNHN (1), MHNS (4, Fig. 160, y 1 j), CJP (1, 2 j), CJH (1), CDO (1), CPR (1). Todos estos ejemplares procedentes de la localidad tipo. Otros paratipos: Bañe Seminóle: 1 ej, 30 m (CJP); Cap Vert: 1 ej, intermareal (CJP); Bahía de Dakar: 8 ej, 30-40 m (MHNS); 11 c (MNHN); 1 c (MNHN, coll. Letellier); dragado en la bahía: 5 ej, 30 m (10D2-26; 10/10/2002) (MHNS); 4 ej, (10D2-5) (MHNS); 4 j, 20-40 m (MHNS); Bahía de Gorée: 1 c (MNHN). Otro material estudiado: Senegal, Dakar: 1 c, 1 m (MHNS) (destruida para estudio radular); 1 c (deterioriada) (MNHN, coll. Denis). Localidad tipo: Gouye Teni M'Both, Bahía de Dakar, Senegal, 10-30 m. Etimología: Las especie recibe el nombre de Lucia Cuesta, esposa del primer autor, por su cons- tante colaboración y apoyo. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 53-55, 160) fusiforme-alargada, sólida, con unas siete vueltas de espira y una altura máxima de 9.0 mm. Protoconcha (Figs. 162-164) con 0,8 vueltas, y con una anchura de unas 675 pm (núcleo: 237 pm, primera media vuelta: 595 pm) y unas 650 pm de altura; en ella aparecen unos cincuenta cordo- nes espirales muy finos, separados por interespacios de anchura similar (Fig. 165). En los interespacios se observan las típicas incisiones (Fig. 166) de las Chauvetia. Hacia el final, hay siete u ocho costillitas axiales rectas, algo opis- toclinas. La parte superior de las costi- llas está curvada sobre una estrecha repisa subsutural. Teleoconcha con una escultura de cordones espirales algo más anchos que sus interespacios y costillas de anchura similar a sus interespacios. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen tres cordones espirales. En la cuarta vuelta aparece en la parte superior, bajo la sutura, un cuarto cordón. En la última vuelta, hay cuatro cordones por encima de la inser- ción labial y, hacia la base, aparecen de doce a catorce cordoncillos más. Los superiores están claramente separados por interespacios claros y a medida que se acercan al canal sifonal se van aproxi- mando entre ellos, quedando los ocho o diez más inferiores prácticamente juntos. La escultura axial es menos rele- vante y está formada por costillas verti- lóó Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 160-168. Chauvetia luciacuestae spec. nov. 160: paraupo, 7,9 mm (MHNS); 161: detalle de la abertura; 162-164: protoconcha; 165, 166; detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha; 167: detalle de la microescultura de la teleoconcha; 168: opérculo. Figures 160-168. Chauvetia luciacuestae spec. nov. 160: paratype, 7.9 mm (MHNS); 161: detail of the aperture ; 162-164: protoconch; 165, 166: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch; 167: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe teleoconch; 168: operculum. 1 67 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 cales o un poco inclinadas, de forma irregular, siendo unas dieciocho en la última vuelta. Se prolongan por debajo de la inserción labial acabando cerca del inicio del canal sifonal. Al cruzarse cor- dones y costillas se forman nodulos redondeados. No hay microescultura alguna (Fig. 167). La ultima espira ocupa el 53 % de la altura total de la concha. Abertura (Figs. 76, 161) oval, que alcanza el 38% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se apre- cian cinco dientes, de los que el superior es más pronunciado y el inferior consti- tuye el borde externo del canal sifonal. Color de la concha blanco-leche de fondo, sobre el que aparecen los nodulos del cruce de cordones y costi- llas que son de color castaño rojizo. Dimensiones : el holotipo mide 8,8 x 3,0 mm. Animal totalmente blanco leche con opérculo amarillento. Opérculo (Figs. 168, 183) ovoide, núcleo subterminal; en el interior, inserción ovoide, casi circu- lar. Distribución: Sólo conocida de la Bahía de Dakar, viviendo en fondos are- nosos de alrededor de 30 m. Comentarios: El peculiar patrón de coloración permite distinguirla de otras Chauvetia de similar tamaño que hay en la zona como C. candidissima o C. tenuis- cul-pta. Fuera del área de estudio, se podría confundir con C. lefebvrei (Maravigna, 1840), que existe en las costas atlánticas de Marruecos así como en las costas africanas mediterráneas y en algunas localidades europeas del Mediterráneo occidental (Horro y Rolán, 2004). C. lefebvrei es bastante variable si la consi- deramos en toda su área de distribu- ción, pero no lo es a escala local: los ejemplares estudiados de las costas argelinas son de menor tamaño y más ovales que los de las conchas atlánticas. Estas conchas pueden presentar el típico color a manchones o bien ser de color uniforme, en este caso muy parecidas a C. retifera (Reeve, 1845) y confundibles si no se comparan sus protoconchas. En cualquier caso la forma atlántica de C. lefebvrei es proporcionalmente más ancha y maciza, sus costillas son más anchas y están más juntas, y sus nodulos de cruzamiento más planos y rectangulares que los de la especie de Senegal. Chauvetia multilirata spec. nov. (Figs. 56, 57, 77, 169-172) Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 56, 57, 169) en el MNCN (15.05/47532). Localidad tipo: Cap Vert (09/ 1945) Dakar, Senegal. Etimología: El nombre específico alude al elevado número de cordones espirales de la concha, un carácter diferencial muy peculiar en esta especie. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 56, 57, 169) fusiforme, poco alargada, sólida, ancha, con unas cinco vueltas de espira y 5.8 mm de altura. Protoconcha (Fig. 170, 171) con 0,8 de vuelta, poco elevada, con una anchura de 690 jum (núcleo: 300 p; primera media vuelta: 515 jUm) alcan- zando una altura de 380 jum. En el ejem- plar estudiado está ligeramente desgas- tada pero se puede observar la existen- cia de débiles estrías estrechas, muy numerosas (Fig. 172). Presenta seis o siete costillas curvadas que aumentan progresivamente de anchura. La transi- ción con la teleoconcha no es muy clara y se considera como tal el momento en el que van apareciendo los cordones espirales de la teleoconcha. Teleoconcha con un perfil de las vueltas plano o ligeramente convexo. Sutura no ondulada poco profunda. Está ornamentada con cordones espira- les y costillas, ambos de anchura clara- mente mayor que sus interespacios, y que casi están ocultos al formarse en' su cruce unos nodulos grandes y rectangu- lares. En las dos primeras vueltas hay cuatro cordones, de los que el superior forma el reborde subsutural. En la 168 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 169-172. Chauvetia multilirata spec. nov. 169: holotipo, 5,8 mm (MNCN); 170, 171: protoconcha; 172; detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 169-172. Chauvetia multilirata spec. nov. 169: holotype, 5.8 mm (MNCN); 170, 171: proto- conch; 172; detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 169 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 penúltima vuelta, ya aparecen seis cor- dones, de los que los dos superiores son un poco más estrechos. En la última vuelta, hay seis cordones, apareciendo un séptimo muy fino sobre la sutura: los dos o tres superiores están muy juntos y son más pequeños, distinguiéndose con dificultad. En la base de la concha hay de diez a doce cordones más. Las costi- llas axiales son algo curvadas y prosocli- nas. En la última vuelta, que representa el 60% de la altura total de la concha, hay una veintena de costillas. Abertura (Figs. 77) oval, alcanza el 40% de la altura total. Canal sifonal corto y ancho. Dimensiones : el holotipo mide 5,8 x 2,4 mm. Color de la concha blanco sucio, con zonas ligeramente crema. Distribución: Sólo conocida por el holotipo. Comentarios: La protoconcha parece ser uno de los rasgos distintivos más característicos de esta especie, al ser corta, ancha y con escultura espiral muy fina. Los otros son: el número elevado de cordones espirales y los nodulos rec- tangulares grandes. En el área estudiada, por su color, puede recordar a juveniles de C. tenuis- culpta y con C. candidissima, de los que se diferencia porque su abertura es clara- mente de una concha adulta. Además, C. candidissima se diferencia por menor número de costillas axiales y cordones espirales con interespacios más anchos, protoconcha más elevada y menos ancha. C. tenuisculpta, además, tiene una escultura axial en su protoconcha muy marcada. Fuera del área de estudio podría re- cordar a una pequeña C. lefebvrei albina, pero se distinguiría por el mayor número de los cordones espirales y porque su protoconcha es menos elevada. Otras especies de color blanco, como C. robustalba spec. nov. o ejemplares blancos de C. pardofasciata, tienen menor número de cordones, los nodulos son más pequeños y la protoconcha más elevada y de color castaño. Chauvetia pardacuta spec. nov. (Figs. 58, 59, 78, 173-180) Chauvetia sp. 2. Micali, 1999. Boíl. Malac., 34: 66, fig. 10. Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 173) en MNCN (25.05 / 47533), paratipos en las siguientes colecciones: AMNH (1), BMNH (20080485) (1), MNHN (1, Fig. 174), MHNS (4), USNM (1), CJH (1), CDO (1), CPR (1). Otros paratipos: Charbonier: 2 c, 34 m, (CJP). Localidad tipo: N'Gor, 1-4 m, Dakar, Senegal (01/1984). Etimología: El nombre específico alude a dos caracteres de la especie: su color y la forma puntia- guda de la concha. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 58, 59, 173, 174) fusiforme, con la espira muy alar- gada, sólida, con unas siete vueltas de espira. Protoconcha (Figs. 176, 177) con 0,8 de vuelta tiene 600 jtím de anchura (núcleo: 320 jum; primera media vuelta: 480 jum) y 540 jum de altura. Presenta cordones longitudinales de anchura variable algo más anchos que sus interespacios, los cuales presentan las típicas incisiones axiales características del género (Fig. 178). Al final de la pro- toconcha se pueden observar una vein- tena de cordoncillos que cabalgan sobre las costillas axiales, que son unas ocho, bastante ortoclinas, que van ganando en anchura hacia el final y que se curvan por arriba sobre una estrecha repisa. Teleoconcha con cordones espirales algo más anchos que sus interespacios (Fig. 179). En la primera vuelta hay tres cordones de una anchura similar, por en- cima de ellos, y un cuarto cordón se intu- ye en el reborde subsutural. En la segun- da vuelta, este cordón ya es visible pero más estrecho que los tres inferiores. En la tercera vuelta hay cinco cordones, los dos superiores más estrechos (la mitad aproximadamente) que los tres inferio- 170 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 173-180. Chauvetia pardacuta spec. nov. 173: holodpo, 6,4 mm (MNCN); 174: paratipo, 6.3 mm (MNHN); detalle de la abertura; 176, 177: protoconcha; 178; detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha; 179: escultura de la teleoconcha; 180: detalle de la microescultura de la teleo- concha. Figures 173-180. Chauvetia pardacuta spec. nov. 173: holotype, 6.4 mm (MNCN); 174: paratype, 6.3 mm (MNHN); detail ofthe aperture; 176, 177: protoconch; 178; detail ofthe microsculpture of the protoconch; 179: sculpture ofthe teleoconch; 180: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe teleoconch. 171 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 res. Esta proporción se mantiene hasta la última vuelta, en la que se aprecian estos cinco cordones por encima de la inser- ción labial, pero que pueden llegar a ser seis o siete. En la parte basal, hay unos once cordoncillos que se van aproximan- do entre sí conforme se acercan al canal sifonal. Las costillas axiales son poco ele- vadas y tienen una anchura similar a sus interespacios. Al cruzarse con los cordo- nes forman nodulos redondeados. Con grandes aumentos (Fig. 180) se puede apreciar la existencia de estriación espi- ral en toda la superficie. La última vuelta representa el 50% de la altura total. Abertura (Figs. 78, 175) oval que supone el 34 % de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se obser- van siete pliegues dentarios. Canal sifonal corto y muy abierto, poco evi- dente. Color de la concha castaño oscuro bastante uniforme. COMENTARIOS FINALES Se han estudiado unas 3000 conchas y ejemplares del género Chauvetia de la zona de Senegal, donde, en total, se han encontrado 14 especies. De estas especies, 4 pudieron ser asignadas a nombres que ya eran pre- viamente conocidos: C. soni, C. affinis, C. tenuisculpta y C. lamyi, especies que ya eran conocidas del área de Senegal de donde fueron descritas. El resto de las especies (nada menos que 10) resultaron ser nuevas para la ciencia. Esto supone que, en total, se considera que existen en el área de Dakar al menos 14 especies, lo que resulta un número sorprendentemente elevado. Flay que recordar, que la zona se ha considerado una "casi-isla" debido al aislamiento que presentan sus hábi- tats rocosos rodeados por grandes extensiones de fondos arenosos tanto hacia el norte como hacia el sur. Por este motivo se ha comportado como un área adecuada para la especiación (como una isla) y por ese motivo se han originado multitud de endemismos, lo que ya ha sido mencionado para otros grupos de Dimensiones: el holotipo mide 6,4 x 2,6 mm Animal desconocido. Distribución : Sólo conocida de la zona de N'Gor del área de Dakar, Senegal. Comentarios: Chauvetia joani spec. nov. se diferencia porque tiene la sutura más pronunciada, los cordones espirales son más sobresalientes, excepto los sub- suturales, que son muy atenuados, y las costillas axiales están presentes en menor número. Además, el núcleo de la protoconcha es más pequeño y el número de costillas axiales al final de la misma es algo menor. C. tenebrosa spec. nov. es más pequeña, con menos vueltas de espira, con menos costillas axiales, protoconcha más pequeña, también con menos cor- doncillos espirales y también menos costillas axiales en la proximidad de la teleoconcha. moluscos, como Conidae, Rissoidea, Turridae, etc. El género Chauvetia es conocido de una extensión relativamente reducida: Mediterráneo, Canarias, costa oeste afri- cana (Marruecos, Sahara y Mauritania) y Senegal. Alguna especie se ha exten- dido al Atlántico ibérico y alguna aislada se ha encontrado en las islas Bri- tánicas y norte de Francia. Curiosa- mente, en alguna de estas áreas (Medite- rráneo, Dakar y Canarias) existe un alto índice de endemicidad. Por debajo de la zona mencionada no se conocen especies de este género, con la excepción de un único ejemplar, proba- blemente perteneciente a Chauvetia (dato no publicado), recolectado en la isla de Sao Tomé, que ha sido estudiado por los autores, y que parece ser una verdadera especie de este género. Por supuesto, no tiene que ver con ejemplares del género Pradoxa Rolán y Fernandes, 1990, qüe pertenecen a Muricidae, y que, frecuente- mente se han confundido con especies de Chauvetia, debido a las características morfológicas de su concha. 172 Oliver Y RoláN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Figuras 181-184. Opérculos: 181: Chauvetia affinis, Dakar; 182: Chauvetia jo ani, Dakar; 183: Chauvetia luciacuestae, Dakar; 184: Chauvetia tenuisculpta, Dakar. Figuras 185-189. Rádulas de Chauvetia. 185: Chauvetia tenuisculpta-, 186: Chauvetia lamyi-, 187: Chauvetia joani-, 188: Chauve- tia robustalha-, 189: Chauvetia affinis. Figures 181-184. Opercula: 181: Chauvetia affinis, Dakar; 182: Chauvetia joani, Dakar; 183: Chauvetia luciacuestae, Dakar; 184: Chauvetia tenuisculpta, Dakar. Figuras 185-189. Radulae of Chauvetia. 185: Chauvetia tenuisculpta; 186: Chauvetia lamyi; 187: Chauvetia joani; 188: Chau- vetia robustalha; 189: Chauvetia affinis. 173 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 En el presente trabajo se han estu- diado de forma especial algunos caracte- res del género, como los de la protocon- cha, que es muy característica: siempre paucispiral y generalmente muy ancha. En esta protoconcha, en pocos casos existe una escultura axial extendida a toda ella (como en C. tenuisculpta y en C. javieri ); casi siempre esta escultura está reducida a unas pocas costillas en la zona de transición con la teleoconcha, en número variable, aunque en algunas es- pecies el número de costillas puede ser muy escaso, como ocurre en C. candidis- sima, C. joani, C. pelorcei y C. pardofasciata ; también a veces hay otros caracteres di- ferenciales de la protoconcha, como ser muy globosa (en el caso de C. robustalba ) o algo aplanada (como en C. multilirata). La escultura espiral de la protocon- cha está formada por cordoncillos de forma casi constante, aunque algunas especies apenas los tienen, como ocurre en C. multilirata, C. candidissima. En cuanto a la escultura entre los cordones, esta formada casi siempre por estrías o cordoncillos en sentido axial, aunque en algunas ocasiones, esta escultura es difí- cilmente apreciable, como ocurre en C. tenebrosa o C. pelorcei. La rádula fue estudiada en algunas especies, y observamos que, dentro de un patrón general similar, hay diferen- cias entre unas a otras, aunque la difi- cultad está en poder apreciar la variabi- BIBLIOGRAFÍA Adanson, M., 1757. Histoire Naturelle du Séné- gal, Coquillages. Bauche, Paris. 190 pp, 19 láms. Bandel, K., 1977. Neogastropod radulae from Banyus-sur-Mer. Vie et Milieu, 27 (2), sér. A: 191-232. Bruguiére, J. G., 1789. Encyclopedie méthodique ou par ordre de matiéres. Histoire Naturelle des vers, des mollusques. Vol. 1: 344 pp. CLEMAM (http:/ / www.somali.asso.fr /ele- mam/ index.clemam.html) Dautzenberg, P., 1891. Voyage de la Goélette "Melita" aux Canaries et au Sénégal 1889- 1890. Mollusques Testacés. Mémoires de la So- ciété Zoologique de France, 4: 16-65, lám. 3. lidad intraespecífica, para lo que sería preciso haber realizando un cierto número de estudios radulares para cada una de las especies, lo que representa una notable dificultad dada la pequeñez de la rádula, y la relativa escasez de material recolectado vivo. El opérculo mostró ser ovoide, con un núcleo subcentral o casi terminal. Pero también haría falta el estudio de una cierta cantidad de ejemplares para poder conocer la variabilidad. Al mismo tiempo que el presente trabajo, se ha iniciado una revisión de las especies del Mediterráneo, así como el estudio de las especies de profundi- dad del área de Sahara-Mauritania y de las especies de Canarias. AGRADECIMIENTOS A las personas que cedieron material e información para el presente estudio: Jacques Pelorce, José María Hernández y Franck Boyer. A Jesús Méndez del Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnoló- gico a la Investigación (CACTI) de la Universidad de Vigo por las fotografías al Microscopio Electrónico de Barrido. A Jesús S. Troncoso del Dep. de Zoología, y a Emilio Rolán-Álvarez del Dep. de Genética, por permitir el uso de sus apa- ratos de fotografía óptica para las foto- grafías a color. Dautzenberg, P., 1910. Contribution á la faune malacologique de l'Afrique occidentale. Ac- tes de la Société Linnéenne de Bordeaux, 64: 1- 174. Dautzenberg, P., 1912. Mission Gruvel sur la cote occidentale d' Afrique (1909-1910). Mo- llusque marins. Armales de l'Institut Oceano- graphicque. 5 (3): 1-111. Fischer-Piette, E., 1942. Les Mollusques d'A- danson. Journal de Conchuliolovie, 85: 103-367, láms. 1-75. Fischer-Piette, E. y Nicklés, M., 1946. Mo- llusques nouveaux ou peu connus des cotes de l'Afrique occidentale. Journal de Conchy- liologie, 87, fase. 2: 45-81, lám. 1. 174 Oliver Y ROLAN: El género Chauvetia en Senegal, con la descripción de diez especies Fretter V. y Graham A., 1984. Prosobranch Molluscs of Britain and Denmark. Part 8. Ne- ogastropoda. Journal of Molluscan Studies. London, Supplement 15: 435-556. Knudsen, J., 1956. Marine prosobranchs of Tro- pical West Africa (Stenoglossa). Atlantide Re- port , 4: 8-110, 4 láms. Hergueta, H., Luque, A. y Templado, J., 2002. On the taxonomy and biology of Chauvetia mamillata (Risso, 1826) (Gastropoda: Bucci- nidae) in south East Spain. Bollettino Mala- cologico. Supplemento 4.135-146. Horro, J. y Rolán, E., 2004. Las especies de Chauvetia de Galicia (Mollusca, Muricoidea). Noticiario SEM, 41: 27-30. Luque del Villar, A. A., 1984. Contribución al conocimiento de los moluscos gasterópodos de las costas de Málaga y Granada. Tesis Doc- toral, Universidad Complutense, Madrid. 695 pp. Monterosato, T. di M., 1889. Coquilles mari- nes Marocaines. Journal de Conchyliologie, 37: 20-40, 112-121. Micali, P., 1999 "1998". Note sulle specie di Chauvetia delT Atlántico nord-orientale. Bo- llettino Malacologico, 34 (5-8): 53-68. Mifsud, C., 1994. Alcuni molluschi vivi dalle ac- que di Malta. La Conchiglia, 26 (272): 29-36. Nicklés, M., 1947. La collection de Molluscjues tes- tacés marins de l'I.F.A.N. Institut Franjáis d'A- frique Noire, Catalogues, 1, 23 pp. Nicklés, M., 1950. Molusques testacés marins de la cote occidentale d' Afrique. Paul Lechevalier, Paris. 269 pp. Nordsieck, F., 1976. Familia Buccinidae. II ge- nere Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 nei mari d'Europa. La Conchiglia, 8 (89-90): 3-7. Pasteur-Humbert, C., 1962. Les mollusques marins testacés du Maroc. Travaux de l'Insti- tut Scientifique Chérifien, ser. Zoologie, 23: 1-245. Philippi, R. A., 1836. Enumerado molluscorum Siciliae cum viventium tum in tellure tertia- ria fossilium, quae in itinere suo observavit. Vol. 1. Schropp, Berlin [Berolinil, xiv + 267 pp, láms. 1-12 Thiele,, J., 1929. Handbuch der Systematischen Weichtierkunde. Vol. 1. Jena, Gustav Fischer, 376 pp. Thiriot-Quiévreux, C. y Rodríguez Babío, C., 1975. Etude des protoconques de quelques Prosobranches de la région de Roscoff. Cahiers de Biologie Marine, 16: 136-148. 175 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberas , 26 (2): 177-183, 2008 Fusinus buzzurroi (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae), a new spe- cies from Croatian coasts Fusinus buzzurroi (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae), una nueva especie de las costas croatas Jakov PRKIC* and Paolo RUSSO** Recibido el 1 l-VIII-2008. Aceptado el 13-X-2008 ABSTRACT A new species of Fusinus from Croatian coasts of Dalmatia is described and figured. Type material was collected off Mljet Island, Croatia, at depths of 60 to 100 m in association with Corallium rubrum (Linnaeus, 1758), but the species was also recorded from other localities along Dalmatian coasts at different habitats and bathymetrical ranges. RESUMEN Se describe y figura una nueva especie de Fusinus procedente de la costa dálmata de Croacia. El material tipo se recolectó frente a la isla de Mljet, Croacia, en profundidades de 60 a 100 m asociado con Corallium rubrum (Linnaeus, 1758), pero la especie se encontró también en otras localidades de la costa dálmata, en habitats y profundidades distintos. KEY WORDS: Gastropoda, Fasciolariidae, Fusinus buzzurroi , new species, Mediterranean Sea, recent. PALABRAS CLAVE: Gastropoda, Fasciolariidae, Fusinus buzzurroi , nueva especie, Mediterráneo, reciente. INTRODUCTION The family Fasciolariidae J. E. Gray, 1853 is represented in the Mediter- ranean by two genera, Fasciolaria Lamarck, 1799 and Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815, belonging to the subfamilies Fasci- olariinae J. E. Gray, 1853, and Fusininae Wrigley, 1927, respectively. Some speci- mens ascribable to Fusinus are com- monly found along the Dalmatian coasts; our samplings pointed out the presence of several individuáis of a peculiar Fusinus , collected in association with Corallium rubrum (Linnaeus, 1758) at different depths, depending on the locality: 60 to 100 m off the islands of Mljet, Lastovo and Susac, 35 to 60 m off Molat, Sestrunj, Skarda and Premuda, 80 to 90 m off Zirje. This fasciolarid also occurs in other habitats, being observed off Rivanj Island at a depth of 20 m living on rocky bottoms rich in gorgoni- ans, associated with the bryozoan Reteporella beaniana (King, 1846) (Alen Petani, Zadar, pers. comm.). An accurate investigation of shell morphology of these specimens revealed that we are in the presence of a species new to Science. The methods for the evaluation of pro- toconch whorls follow Aartsen and Verduin (1978). * Getaldiceva 11, 21000 Split, Croatia. ** Giudecca 459, 30133 Venezia, Italy. 177 Iberus, 26 (2), 2008 Abbreviations: CGB Collection Giovanni Buzzurro, Biassono, Milán, Italy CJP Collection Jakov Prkic, Split, Croatia CPR Collection Paolo Russo, Venice, Italy MNHM Museo di Storia Naturale di Milano, Milán, Italy d= diameter h = height SYSTEMATICS Family Fasciolariidae j. E. Cray, 1853 Subfamily Fusininae Wrigley, 1927 Genus Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815 Fusinus buzzurroi n. sp. (Figs. 1-3) Type material: The holotype MNHM Mo 33638 is housed at Collezione Malacologica del Museo Civico di Storia Naturale di Milano (MNHM), Italy. The paratypes are the following: paratype A, 21.8 x 10.4 mm (CPR); paratype B, 21.4 x 10.7 mm (CPR); paratype C, 19.8 x 8.6 mm (CPR); paratype D, 18.4 x 8.9 mm (CPR); paratype E, 17.4 x 8.3 mm (CPR); paratype F, 22.4 x 10.2 mm (CJP); paratype G, 21.0 x 9.8 mm (QP); paratype H, 19.4 x 8.7 mm (QP); paratype I, 20.5 x 9.6 mm (QP); paratype J, 17.5 x 7.8 mm (QP); paratype K, 16.2 x 7.5 mm (CJP); paratype L, 17.4 x 8.2 mm (CGB); paratype M, 17.7 x 7.9 mm (CGB); paratype N, 19.0 x 8.4 mm (CGB); paratype O, 16.8 x 7.9 mm (CGB); all from the type locality. Other material examined: About twenty specimens from the islands of Lastovo, Molat and Zirje (Dalmatia, Croatia). Locus typicus: Mljet Island, Dalmatia (Croatia), in association with Corallium rubrum, at depths of 60 to 100 m. Derivatio nominis: This species is named after our unforgettable and unforgotten friend Giovanni Buzzurro. Description : Shell solid and fusiform, consisting of 1.3-1. 4 protoconch whorls and 6-7 teleoconch whorls, rather small for genus, measuring up to 26.4 x 11.7 mm, usually from 16 to 22 mm in height. Protoconch brownish, mandílate, striated by 6 obvious, equidistant spiral threads, with interspaces completely smooth, about 755 pm in diameter, with an apical nucleus measuring 252 pm across (Fig. 2). Teleoconch whorls convex, slightly carinated by an obvious, but not very raised, keel, separated by well-marked, but not canaliculated sutures. The sculp- ture consists of strong, raised and well- spaced axial ribs, 6-7 on each whorl, rarely 8, and closely spaced primary spiral cords, which are stronger where they pass over the axial ribs. The spiral sculpture also consists of secondary threads, which are more evident on the last two or three whorls. The body whorl represents 60-64 % of the total shell height. Aperture oval, outer lip varicose, internally lirate with 7-10 elongate teeth, columellar callus thin, but obvious. A parietal tooth is well evident in the upper part of aper- ture. Some studied specimens show two or three columellar folds, more or less evident, which are caused by the under- lying primary spiral cords, at the base of the columella. Siphonal canal short, broad and curved, slightly deviating to the left when seen in apertural view. Operculum corneous, brown in colour, with an apical nucleus. The shell colour varies, usually is brownish, rarely whitish or palé beige, with spiral cords only slightly darker than the background colour, sometimos with a whitish keel. In some studied specimens the spiral cords are dark brown or reddish-brown, conspicuously darker than the background colour. 178 PRKlC AND RUSSO: Fusinus buzzurroi , a new species from Croatian coasts Figure 1. Fusinus buzzurroi n. sp., Mljet Island (Croada), 60-100 m. A-C: holotype (MNHM Mo 33638), apertural, lateral and dorsal views, 26.4 x 11.7 mm; D: paratype A, apertural view, 21.8 x 10.4 mm; E: paratype I, apertural view, 20.3 x 9.6 mm; F: paratype D, dorsal view, 18.4 x 8.9 mm; G: paratype F, apertural view, 22.4 x 10.2 mm; H, I: paratype B, apertural and dorsal views, 21.4 x 10.7 mm. Figura 1. Fusinus buzzurroi n. sp., Mljet Island (Croacia), 60-100 m. A-C:, holotipo (MNHM Mo 33638), vista apertural, lateral y dorsal, 26,4 x 11,7 mm; D: paratipo A, vista apertural, 21,8 x 10,4 mm; E: paratipo I, vista apertural, 20,5 x 9,6 mm; F: paratipo D, vista dorsal, 18,4 x 8,9 mm; G: paratipo F, vista apertural, 22,4 x 10,2 mm; H-I: paratipo B, vista apertural y dorsal, 21,4 x 10,7 mm. 179 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Figure 2. Fusinus buzzurroi n. sp., Mljet Island (Croada), 60-100 m, protoconch. Figura 2. Fusinus buzzurroi n. sp., Mljet Island (Croacia), 60-100 m, protoconcha. FFolotype (Figs. 1 A-1C) coloured palé beige, slightly darker between the axial ribs, consisting of 8.3 whorls, 1.3-1. 4 of which belonging to the protoconch. There are 6 axial ribs on the body whorl, and 6- 7 on the preceding whorls. There are 3 primary spiral cords on the first teleoconch whorl, 4 on the second and third whorls, 6 on the fourth to sixth whorls and 16 to 17 on the body whorl, the later ones reach- ing the base of siphonal canal. Secondary spiral cords are evident especially on the last two whorls, as well as along the siphonal canal. The body whorl represents 59.8% of the total shell height. Geographic distribution : This species is presently known from the Croatian DISCUSSION According to the recent revisions of Mediterranean species of the genus (Buzzurro and Russo, 2007, 2008), 15 species of Fusinus are known for the Mediterranean Sea: F. alternatus Buzzurro and Russo, 2007 ex Settepassi F. cretellai Buzzurro and Russo, 2008 (a replacement ñame for Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901) F. dimassai Buzzurro and Russo, 2007 F dimitrii Buzzurro and Ovalis, 2007 coasts, its northern limit being represen- ted by Premuda Island, and Southern limit by Mljet Island. Habitat : All the examined material was collected in association with Corallium rubrum, at depths of 35 to 100 m. F. buz- zurroi is consistently found in the mater- ial collected by Dalmatian coral fishermen; it is more rarely recorded from rocky bottoms lacking red coral. At least one specimeri was observed living in associa- tion with Reteporella beaniana (off Rivanj Island at a depth of 20 m), a bryozoan fre- quently associated with coralligenous assemblages. Our data suggest that this species does not live on either detritic or shallow rocky bottoms (0 to 15 m). F. eviae Buzzurro and Russo, 2007 F. labronicus (Monterosato, 1884) F. margaritae Buzzurro and Russo, 2007 F. parvulus (Monterosato, 1884) F. profetai Nofroni, 1982 F pulchellus (Philippi, 1844) F. rolani Buzzurro and Ovalis, 2004. F. rostratus (Olivi, 1792) F. rusticulus (Monterosato, 1880) F. syracusanus (Linnaeus, 1758) F verrucosus (Gmelin, 1791) 180 PrkiÓ AND RUSSO: Fusinus buzzurroi , a new species from Croatian coasts Figure 3. A. Fusinus buzzurroi n. sp. 21.4 x 10.2 mm. B. Fusinus dimitrii Buzzurro and Ovalis, 2007 17.8 x 7.4 mm. C. Fusinus rostratus (Olivi, 1792) 43.8 x 16.6 mm. D. Fusinus parvulus (Monterosato, 1884) 13,4 x 7,4 mm. Figura 3. A. Fusinus buzzurroi n. sp. 21,4 x 10,2 mm. B. Fusinus dimitrii Buzzurro and Ovalis, 2007 17,8 x 7,4 mm. C. Fusinus rostratus (Olivi, 1792) 43,8 x 16,6 mm. D. Fusinus parvulus (Monterosato, 1884) 13,4 x 7,4 mm. F. rostratus, F. syracusanus and F. buz- zurroi surely occur along the Dalmatian coasts. Recent investigations cali into question the occurrence of two other species recorded from Dalmatia (F. pul- chellus and F. parvulus), and no specimen has been recorded during the many years of research in this area by one of the authors (J. Prkic). The record of F. pulchel- lus in association with "corallo nobile" (C. rubrum) reported by Brusina (1866) is probably to be reinterpreted as a misidentification of the new species here described. The same goes for the record of F parvulus, in that it may be confused with F. buzzurroi at some growth stages. Fusinus buzzurroi can be compared to F. rostratus (Olivi, 1792), F. dimitrii Buz- zurro and Ovalis, 2007, and F. parvulus (Monterosato, 1884) (see Figure 3). Con- chometrical parameters (Table I) are reported for each species (following Buzzurro and Russo, 2007). F. buzzurroi differs from F. rostratus (Fig. 3C) for the much smaller size, the stubbier shape, the smaller protoconch (755 jum against 910 jum of North-Adri- atic populations of F. rostratus). In F. ros- tratus the axial ribs start just after the suture in the adapical part (Buzzurro and Russo, 2007), while in F. buzzurroi they begin intersecting the ribs of the next whorl in the sutural area. F. rostratus shows a much longer siphonal canal. In F. rostratus there are some populations having a slight keel, others a well-devel- oped keel, while others are quite acarí- ñate (Bombace, 1971); F. buzzurroi has always a slight keel. In F. buzzurroi the average of conchometrical parameters h/d has a valué of 2.14 against 2.65 in F. rostratus (Table I). In F. rostratus the habitat is more diversified, ranging from circalittoral (Vio and De Min, 1994) to bathyal mud and white coral biocoenoses (Dieuzeide, 1950; Carpine, 1965; Bombace, 1969), extending to a depth of 823 meters (D'Amico, 1912). Records in association with red coral were never reported from Dalmatian coasts. F. buzzurroi differs from F. dimitrii (Fig. 3B) in the larger size, the less elon- 181 Iberus , 26 (2), 2008 Table I. Conchometrical parameters in Fusinus buzzurroi, F. rostratus , F dimitrii and F parvulus (h and d in mm). Tabla I. Parámetros de la concha en Fusinus buzzurroi, F. rostratus, F. dimitrii y F. parvulus (h y d en mm). Fusinus buzzurroi No. h d h/d Fusinus dimitrii No. h d h/d 1 26.40 11.70 2.26 1 13.30 5.50 2.42 2 21.40 10.70 2.00 2 21.00 8.00 2.63 3 21.80 10.40 2.10 3 16.20 6.00 2.70 4 21.00 9.80 2.14 4 17.00 8.00 2.13 5 22.40 10.20 2.21 5 23.10 9.00 2.57 6 20.50 9.60 2.13 6 17.50 7.00 2.50 7 18.40 8.90 2.08 7 15.50 7.00 2.21 8 19.40 8.70 2.23 8 17.00 6.20 2.74 average 2.14 average 2.49 Fusinus rostratus Fusinus parvulus No. h d h/d No. h d h/d 1 35.90 13.50 2.66 1 12.70 5.70 2.23 2 36.60 13.80 2.65 2 12.20 5.70 2.14 3 38.20 13.80 2.77 3 12.00 5.30 2.26 4 38.80 14.40 2.69 4 12.00 5.20 2.31 5 39.00 14.60 2.67 5 11.80 5.10 2.31 6 39.30 15.50 2.54 6 11.20 5.50 2.04 7 39.40 14.50 2.72 7 10.00 5.00 2.00 8 39.40 15.30 2.58 8 9.80 4.80 2.04 average 2.65 average 2.17 gated profile, the lower number of axial ribs (numbering 8-9 in F. dimitrii against 6-7 in F. buzzurroi on the body whorl), the keel (always absent in F. dimitrii), the axial ribs broader and more prominent with wider interspaces, the presence of an obvious secondary spiral sculpture. F buzzurroi has a shorter and more widely open siphonal canal; the protoconch is marked by 6 spiral threads, while it appears to be smooth in F. dimitrii; the operculum is brown in colour, being yel- lowish in F. dimitrii. With respect to con- chometrical parameters, in F. dimitrii the average of h/d has a valué of 2.49 against 2.14 in F. buzzurroi. Habitat is similar. F. buzzurroi differs from F. parvulus (Fig. 3D) in the stouter and heavier shell, the number of axial ribs, (6-7 in F. buzzurroi and 8-9 in F. parvulus ), the presence of secondary spiral cords and a keel, always absent in F. parvulus, the suture which is more marked in F. parvulus, the spire whorls more flattened in F. parvulus, the colour always uniform in F. parvulus, while in F. buzzurroi only the juveniles can be uniformly coloured, sometimes having spiral cords darker than background colour, the protoconch more raised in F. parvulus, more rounded in F. buzzurroi. Habitats and distributional ranges are different. Con- chometrical parameters are similar. ACKN O WLEDGMENTS We are grateful to Dr. M. Cretella for the critical revisión and the friendly helpfulness in translating the text into English, and Dr. M. Zilioli (MNHM) for taking SEM micrographs. 182 PRKlé AND RUSSO: Fusinus buzzurroi , a new species from Croatian coasts BIBLIOGRAPHY Aartsen, J. J. and Verduin, A., 1978. On the conchological identification of Cingula (Setia) fusca (Philippi, 1841), C. (S.) turricolata (Mon- terosato, 1884) and C. (S.) inflata (Monterosato, 1884), marine gastropods from the Mediter- ranean. Basteria, 42: 27-47. Bombace, G., 1969. Appunti sulla malacofauna e suifondali circalitorali della penisola di Milazzo. Suppl. al Bollettino d'Informazione Sicil- camere. Unione delle Camere di Commercio, Industria, Artigianato e Agricoltura della Re- gione Siciliana, Palermo, 56 pp., 17 pls. Bombace, G., 1971. Notizie preliminari sulla sistemática, sulla ecologia e sulla dis- tribuzione delle forme carénate ed acarenate di Fusinus rostratus (Olivi) in Mediterráneo. Annali del Museo Cívico di Storia Naturale “Gi- acomo Doria", 78: 228-246. Brusina, S., 1866. Contribuzione pella fauna dei molluschi dalmati. Verhandlungen der Kaiser- lich-kóniglichen zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft in Wien, 16: 1-134. Buzzurro, G. and Russo, P., 2007. Fusinus del Mediterraneo/Mediterranean Fusinus. Published by the authors. Milano, 280 pp., 30 pls. Carpine, C., 1965. Quelques observations sur la faune bathyale dans le Canal de Corsé. Rapports et Proces-verbaux des Réunions, Com- mission Internationale pour l'Exploration Sci- entifique de la Mer Méditerranée, 18 (2): 83. Dieuzeide, R., 1950. La faune du fond cha- lutable de la Baie de Castiglione. Station d'Ac- quiculture et de Peche de Castiglione, Nouv. Serie, 2: 9-86. Vio, E. and De Min, R., 1994. I molluschi conchiferi della riserva marina di Miramare (Trieste). Bollettino della Societa Adriatica di Scienze, 75 (2): 465-482. 183 NORMAS DE PUBLICACION • La revista lberus publica artículos de fondo, notas y monografías que versen sobre cualquiera de los aspectos relacionados con la Malacología. Se entiende por artículo un trabajo de investigación de más de 5 páginas de texto, incluidas láminas, gráficos y tablas. Las notas son trabajos de menor extensión. Las monografías son tra- bajos sobre un tema único, de extensión superior a las 50 páginas de la revista y que serán publicadas, si procede, como un suplemento de lberus. Los autores interesados en publicar monografías deberán ponerse previamente en contacto con el Editor de Publicaciones. Se entiende que el contenido de los manuscritos no ha sido publicado, ni enviado simultáneamente a otra revista para su consideración. • Los manuscritos, así como toda la correspondencia relacionada con los mismos, deberán ser remitidos a: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publicaciones, Departamento de Biología Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, España y /o al correo electrónico . • El texto del trabajo podrá estar redactado en español, inglés, italiano, francés o portugués. • Los artículos, notas y monografías deberán presentarse sobre DIN A-4, por una sola cara a doble espacio (incluyendo referencias, pies de figura y tablas), con al menos 3 centímetros de margen por cada lado. Los tra- bajos se entregarán por triplicado (original y dos copias) y se incluirá una versión en un CD, o bien remitida por correo electrónico, utilizando procesadores de texto en sus versiones de corrientes de Windows (pero no en el formato .docx de Word 2007, el habitual de Windows Vista) o Macintosh. En caso de autoría compartida, uno de los autores deberá hacerse responsable de toda la correspondencia. • Junto con el trabajo debe incluirse una lista de al menos 4 posibles revisores del mismo, sin perjuicio de los que el propio Editor considere oportunos. • Los manuscritos se presentarán de acuerdo al siguiente esquema: Primera página. Deberá incluir un título conciso, pero sugerente del contenido del trabajo, así como una traduc- ción al inglés del mismo (si el artículo no está escrito en inglés). Cuando sea preciso, deberá incluir referencia a familia o taxones superiores. A continuación figurarán, por este orden, el nombre y apellidos completos del autor o autores, las direcciones completas de los mismos, y un resumen del trabajo y su traducción al inglés. Dicho resumen deberá sintetizar, en conjunción con el título, tanto los resultados como las conclusiones del artículo; se sugiere una extensión de 100 a 200 palabras. Páginas siguientes. Incluirán el resto del artículo, que debe dividirse en secciones precedidas por breves encabe- zamientos. Siempre que sea posible, se recomienda seguir el siguiente esquema: Introducción, Material y métodos. Resultados, Discusión, Conclusiones, Agradecimientos y Bibliografía. Si se emplean abreviaturas no habituales en el texto, deberán indicarse tras el apartado de Material y Métodos. • Las notas breves deberán presentarse de la misma forma, pero sin resumen. • Deberán evitarse notas a pie de página y referencias cruzadas. Deberán respetarse estrictamente los Códigos Internacionales de Nomenclatura Zoológica y Botánica (últimas ediciones). Cuando un taxón aparezca por primera vez deberá citarse su autor y fecha de su descripción. En el caso de artículos sistemáticos, cuando se den las sinonimias de los taxones, éstas deberán citarse COMPLETAS, incluyendo en forma abreviada la publicación donde fueron descritas, y la localidad tipo si es conocida entre corchetes, según el siguiente esquema (préstese especial cuidado a la puntuación): Dendrodoris limbata (Cuvier, 1804) Sinonimias Doris limbata Cuvier, 1804, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. París, 4 (24): 468-469 [Localidad tipo: Marsella]. Doris nigricans Otto, 1823, Nov. Act. Ac. Caes. Leop.-Car., 10: 275. Dichas referencias no deberán incluirse en la lista de Bibliografía si es la única vez que se nombran en el texto. Si se incluyen una lista completa de referencias de un taxón inmediatamente tras éste, deberá seguirse el mismo esquema (sin incluir en Bibliografía las referencias que no se mencionen en otro lugar del texto). • Sólo los nombres en latín y los de taxones genéricos y específicos deberán llevar subrayado sencillo o prefe- rentemente ir en cursiva. En ningún caso deberá escribirse una palabra totalmente en letras mayúsculas, ni siquiera el Título. Las unidades a utilizar deberán pertenecer al Sistema Métrico Decimal, junto con sus correc- tas abreviaturas. En artículos escritos en castellano, en los números decimales sepárese la parte entera de la decimal por una coma inferior (,), NUNCA por un punto (.) o coma superior (')• • Las referencias bibliográficas irán en el texto con minúsculas o versalitas: Fretter y Graham (1962) o Fretter y Graham (1962). Si son más de dos autores se deberán citar todos la primera vez que aparecen en el texto [Smith, Jones y Brown (1970)] empleándose et al. las siguientes veces [Smith et al. (1970)]. Si un autor ha publi- cado más de un trabajo en un año se citarán con letras: (Davis, 1989a; Davis, 1989b). No deberá emplearse op. cit. La lista de referencias deberá incluir todas las citas del texto y sólo éstas, ordenadas alfabéticamente. Se citarán los nombres de todos los autores de cada referencia, sea cual sea su número. Los nombres de los autores deberán escribirse, en letras minúsculas o Versalitas. No deberán incluirse referencias a autores cuando éstos aparezcan en el texto exclusivamente como autoridades de un taxón. Los nombres de las publica- ciones periódicas deberán aparecer COMPLETOS, no abreviados. Cuando se citen libros, dése el título, editor, lugar de publicación, n° de edición si no es la primera y número total de páginas. Deberán evitarse referencias a Tesis Doctorales u otros documentos inéditos de difícil consulta. Síganse los siguientes ejemplos (préstese atención a la puntuación): Fretter V. y Graham A. 1962. British Prosobranch Molluscs. Ray Society, London, 765 pp. Ponder W.F. 1988. The Trunca telloidean (= Rissoacean) radiation - a preliminary phylogeny. En Ponder, W.F. (Ed.): Prosobranch Phylogeny. Malacological Review, suppl. 4: 129-166. Ros J. 1976. Catálogo provisional de los Opistobranquios (Gastropoda: Euthyneura) de las costas ibéricas. Mis- celánea Zoológica, 3 (5): 21-51. • Las gráficas e ilustraciones deberán ser originales y presentarse preferentemente en formato electrónico al formato de caja de la revista o proporcional a éste. Este formato es de 57 mm (una columna) o 121 mm (dos) de anchura y hasta 196 mm de altura, si bien se recomienda utilizar el formato a dos columnas. Es importante que todas las figuras sean remitidas en su formato original (por ejemplo, las fotografías en .jpg de alta calidad o .tif, las gráficas en hojas de cálculo Excel o documentos de CorelDraw), puesto que las ilustraciones insertadas en el manuscrito WORD son inservibles en la fase de imprenta. Las imágenes digitales deben ser formateadas en su tamaño de impresión con una resolución mínima de 300 ppp para imágenes en color o escala de grises y de 600 ppp para las de blanco y negro. Considérese la reducción que será necesaria a la hora de decidir el tamaño de las escalas o letras en las figuras, que no deberán bajar de los 2 mm. En figuras compuestas, cada parte deberá etiquetarse con letras mayúsculas, el resto de las letras deberán ser minúsculas. Las escalas de dibujos y fotografías deberán ser gráficas, utilizando unidades del sistema métrico decimal; no deberán hacerse referen- cias a los aumentos de una determinada ilustración, ya que éstos cambian con la reducción. En su caso, se recomienda la utilización de mapas con proyección UTM. Cada figura, gráfica o ilustración deberá presentarse en hojas separadas y con numeración arábiga (1, 2, 3,...), sin separar "Figuras" y "Láminas". Los pies de figura, en una hoja aparte, deberán acompañarse de su traducción al inglés (o español si el inglés es la lengua del trabajo). Utilícese el esquema siguiente: Figura 1. Neodoris carvi. A: animal desplazándose; B: detalle de un rinóforo; C: branquia. Las abreviaturas empleadas en las ilustraciones deberán incluirse en los pies de figura. Los autores interesados en incluir láminas en color deberán consultar con el editor y sufragar el sobrecoste con una contribución de 50 por página. Por lo demás, deberán ajustarse a los mismos requisitos indicados para las figuras. Si se pretende enviar gráficas o ilustraciones en impresión de papel es imprescindible presentar originales de buena calidad. Las imágenes en semitonos deben estar bien contrastadas y ajustarse al tamaño definitivo de impresión; al componer fotografías sobre una hoja, procúrese que los espacios entre ellas sean regulares y que estén debidamente alineadas. Téngase en cuenta que incluir fotografías de distinto contraste en una misma página conlleva una pobre reproducción final. Las gráficas de ordenador deberán imprimirse con impresora láser sobre papel de buena calidad. • Las Tablas se presentarán en hojas separadas, siempre con numeración romana (I, II, III,...). Las leyendas se incluirán en una hoja aparte acompañándose de una traducción al inglés. Deberán evitarse las tablas particu- larmente complejas. Se recomienda reducir el número y extensión de ilustraciones, láminas o tablas al mínimo necesario. • Los artículos que no se ajusten a las normas de publicación serán devueltos al autor con las indicaciones de los cambios necesarios. • El Comité Editorial comunicará al autor responsable del trabajo la fecha de recepción del trabajo y la fecha de envío a revisión. Cada original recibido será sometido a revisión por al menos dos investigadores. El Comité Editorial, a la vista de los informes de los revisores decidirá sobre la aceptación o no de cada manus- crito. El autor recibirá en cada caso copia de los comentarios de los revisores sobre su artículo. En caso de aceptación, el mismo Comité Editorial, si lo considera conveniente, podrá solicitar a los autores otras modifica- ciones que considere oportunas. Si el trabajo es aceptado, el autor deberá enviar una copia impresa del mismo corregida, acompañada por una versión en un CD, utilizando procesadores de texto en sus versiones corrien- tes de Windows (pero no el formato .docx generado por Word 2007, el habitual de Windows Vista) o Macin- tosh. La fecha de aceptación figurará en el artículo publicado. • Las pruebas de imprenta serán enviadas por correo electrónico al autor responsable, exclusivamente para la corrección de erratas, y deberán ser devueltas en un plazo máximo de una semana. Se recomienda prestar especial atención en la corrección de las pruebas. • De cada trabajo se entregarán gratuitamente 50 separatas, además de una versión electrónica en formato .pdf. Aquellos autores que deseen un número mayor, deberán hacerlo constar al devolver las pruebas de imprenta, y nunca posteriormente. El coste de las separatas adicionales será cargado al autor. INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS • Iberus publishes research papers, notes and monographs devoted to the various aspects of Malacology. Papers are manuscripts of more than 5 typed pages, including figures and tables. Notes are shorter papers. Monographs should exceed 50 pages of the final periodical, and may be published as Supplements. Authors wishing to publish monographs should contact the Editor. Manuscripts are considered on the understanding that their contents ha ve not been published or simultaneously submitted for publica tion elsewhere. • Manuscripts and correspondence regarding editorial matters must be sent to: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publica- ciones, Departamento de Biología Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, Spain and / or to the e-mail . • Manuscripts may be written in Spanish, English, Italian, French or Portuguese. • Manuscripts must be typed double spaced (including the references, figure captions and tables) on one side on A-4 (297x210 mm) with margins of at least 3 cm. An original and two copies must be submitted, together with a CD or e-mail remittance containing the article written with a current Windows (but not .docx format generated by Word 2007, mainly used with Windows Vista) or Macintosh word processor. When a paper has joint authorship, one author must accept responsibility for all correspondence. • The authors must inelude a list of at least 4 possible referees; the Editor can choose any others if appropriate. • Papers should conform the following layout: First page. This must inelude a concise but informative title, with mention of family of higher taxon when appropriate, and its Spanish translation. It will be followed by all authors' ñames and surnames, their full address(es), an abstract (and its Spanish translation) not exceeding 200 words which summarizes not only con- tents but results and conclusions. Following pages. These should content the rest of the paper, divided into sections under short headings. When- ever possible the text should be arranged as follows: Introduction, Material and methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, Acknowledgements and References. Unusual abbreviations used in the text must be grouped in one alphabetic sequence after the Material and methods section. • Notes should follow the same layout, without the abstract. • Footnotes and cross-references must be avoided. The International Codes of Zoological and Botanical Nomenclature must be strictly followed. The first mention in the text of any taxon must be followed by its authority including the year. In systematic papers, when synonyms of a taxon are given, they must be cited IN FULL, including the periodical, in an abbreviate form, where they were described, and the type localities in square brackets when known. Follow this example (please note the punctuation): Dendrodoris limbata (Cuvier, 1804) Synonyms Doris limbata Cuvier, 1804, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, 4 (24): 468-469 [Type locality: Marseille]. Doris nigricans Otto, 1823, Nov. Act. Ac. Caes. Leop.-Car., 10: 275. These references must not be included in the Bibliography list, except if referred to elsewhere in the text. If a full list of references of the taxon is to be given immediately below it, the same layout should be followed (also excluding from the Bibliography list those which are not cited elsewhere). Only Latin words and ñames of genera and species should be underlined once or be given in italics. No word must be written in UPPER CASE LETTERS. SI units are to be used, together with their appropriate symbols. In Spanish manuscripts, decimal numbers must be separated with a comma (,), NEVER with a point (.) or upper comma ('). • References in the text should be written in small letters or Small capitals: Fretter and Graham (1962) or Fretter and Graham (1962). The first mention in the text of a paper with more than two authors must inelude all of them [Smith, Jones and Brown (1970)], thereafter use et al. [Smith et al. (1970)]. If an author has published more than one paper per year, refer to them with letters: (Davis, 1989a; Davis, 1989b). Avoid op. cit. The references in the reference list should be in alphabetical order and inelude all the publications cited in the text but only these. ALL the authors of a paper must be included. These should be written in small letters or Small capitals. The references need not be cited when the author and date are given only as authority for a tax- onomic ñame. Tifies of periodicals must be given IN FULL, not abbreviated. For books, give the title, ñame of publisher, place of publication, indication of edition if not the first and total number of pages. Keep references to doctoral theses or any other unpublished documents to an absolute minimum. See the following examples (please note the punctuation): Fretter V. and Graham A. 1962. British Prosobranch Molluscs. Ray Society, London, 765 pp. Ponder W.F. 1988. The Truncatelloidean (= Rissoacean) radiation - a preliminary phylogeny. In Ponder W.F. (Ed.): Prosobranch Phylogeny. Malacological Review, suppl. 4: 129-166. Ros J. 1976. Catálogo provisional de los Opistobranquios (Gastropoda: Euthyneura) de las costas ibéricas. Mis- celánea Zoológica, 3 (5): 21-51. • Figures must be original and provided preferably in electronic format and adjusted to page format and column size. These should be one column (57 mm) or two columns (121 mm) wide and up 196 mm high, or be proportional to these sizes. Two columns format is recommended. It is essential that all figures be supplied in their original format (e.g. photographs as high-grade .jpg or as .tif files, graphs as Excel spreadsheets or Corel- Draw files), as the files inserted into WORD documents cannot be used for printing. Digital images must be given their final printing size with a resolution at least 300 dpi for colour and halftones, and at least 600 dpi for black/white. Take into account possible reduction in lettering drawings; final lettering must be at least 2 mm high. In com- posite drawings, each figure should be given a capital letter; additional lettering should be in lower-case letters. A scale line, labelled with SI units, must be used to indicate size; magnification ratio must be avoided as it may be changed during printing. UTM maps are to be used if necessary. Figures must be submitted on sepárate sheets, and numbered with consecutive Arabic numbers (1, 2, 3,...), without separating 'Plates' and 'Figures'. Legends for Figures must be typed in numerical order on a sepárate sheet, and a Spanish translation must be included. Follow this example (please note the punctuation): Figure 1. Neodoris carvi. A: animal crawling; B: rhinophore; C: gills. If abbreviations are to be used in illustrations, they should be included in the figure captions. Authors wishing to publish illustrations in colour should consult with the editor and will be charged a contri- bution of 50 ? per page. They should otherwise follow the same standards as black and white prints. If the authors want to send Figures in printed format, it is essential to supply good quality origináis. Half-tone images must be of good contrast, and should be submitted in the final printing size. When mounting pho- tographs in a block, ensure spacers are of uniform width. Remember that grouping photographs of varied con- trast results in poor reproduction. Computer graphics must be printed on high quality white paper with a láser printer. • Tables must be numbered with Román numbers (I, II, III,...) and each typed on a sepárate sheet. Headings should be typed on a sepárate sheet, together with their English translation. Complex tables should be avoided. As a general rule, keep the number and extensión of illustrations and tables as reduced as possible. • Manuscripts that do not conform to these instructions will be returned for correction before reviewing. • Authors submitting manuscripts will receive an acknowledgement of receipt, including receipt date, and the date the manuscript was sent for reviewing. Each manuscript will be critically evaluated by at least two refer- ees. Based of these evaluations, the Editorial Board will decide on acceptance or rejection. Anyway, authors will receive a copy of the referees' comments. If a manuscript is accepted, the Editorial Board may indicate additional changes if desirable. Acceptable manuscripts will be returned to the author for consideration of comments and criticism; a finalized manuscript must then be returned to the Editor, together with a CD con- taining the article written with current Windows (but not a .docx format generated by Word 2007, mainly used under Windows Vista) or Macintosh word processor. Dates of reception and acceptance of the manuscript will appear in all published articles. • Proofs will be e-mailed to the author for correcting errors and must be returned corrected within one week. At this stage no stylistic changes will be accepted. Pay special attention to references and their dates in the text and the Bibliography section, and also to numbers of Figures and Tables appearing in the text. • Fifty reprints per article and a .pdf file will be supplied free of charge. Additional reprints must be ordered when the page proofs are returned, and will be charged at cost. NO LATER orders will be accepted. La Sociedad Española de Malacología Junta Directiva desde el 1 1 de octubre de 2005 Presidente Vicepresidente Secretaria Tesorero Editor de Publicaciones Bibliotecario Vocales José Templado González Emilio Rolan Mosquera María Carmen Salas Casanovas Luis Murillo Guillen Serge Gofas Rafael Araujo Armero Ramón M. Álvarez Halcón Benjamín Gómez Moliner Alberto Martínez Ortí Diego Moreno Lampreave José Ramón Arrébola Burgos La Sociedad Española de Malacología se fundó el 21 de agosto de 1980. La sociedad se registró como una aso- ciación sin ánimo de lucro en Madrid (Registro N° 4053) con unos estatutos que fueron aprobados el 12 de diciembre de 1980. Esta sociedad se constituye con el fin de fomentar y difundir los estudios malacológicos mediante reuniones y publicaciones. A esta sociedad puede pertenecer cualquier persona o institución interesada en el estudio de los moluscos. SEDE SOCIAL: Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, d José Gutiérrez Abascal 2, 28006 Madrid, España. Cuotas para 2009: Socio numerario (en España): 40 euros (en Europa) 40 euros (fuera de Europa): 48 euros Socio estudiante (en España): 23 euros (en el extranjero): 29 euros Socio Familiar: (sin recepción de revista) 4 euros Socio Protector: (mínimo) 48 euros Socio Corporativo (en Europa): 48 euros (fuera de Europa): 54 euros INSCRIPCIÓN: 6 euros, además de la cuota correspondiente. A los socios residentes en España se les aconseja domiciliar su cuota. Todos los abonos deberán enviarse al Tesorero (dirección reseñada anteriormente) el 1 de enero de cada año. Los abonos se harán sin recargos para la sociedad y en favor de la Sociedad Española de Malacología y no de ninguna persona de la junta directiva. Aque- llos socios que no abonen su cuota anual dejarán de recibir las publicaciones de la Sociedad. Los bonos de ins- cripción se enviarán junto con el abono de una cuota anual al Tesorero. A los residentes en el extranjero se les ruega que abonen su cuota mediante giro postal en euros (internatio- nal postal money orders in euros sent to the Treasurer). Members living in foreing countries can deduce 6 euros if paid before 1 5 April. Cada socio tiene derecho a recibir anualmente los números de Iberas, Reseñas Malacológicas y Noticiarios que se publiquen. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES Iberus 3 9088 01448 4794 Índice 26 (2) 2008 Benomar, S., Belhsen, O., Goux, D., Mathieu, M. AND Moukrim, A. Ultrastructural studies on the spermatogenesis of the African mussel Perna perna (Bivalvia: Mytilidae). Estudio ultraestructural de la espermatogénesis del mejillón africano Perna perna (Bivalvia: Mytilidae) 1-14 PEÑAS, A., RoláN, E. Y Ballesteros, M. Segunda adición a la fauna malacológica del litoral del Garraf (NE de la Península Ibérica) Second addition to the malacological fauna ofthe littoral of Garraf (NE ofthe Iherian Penín- sula) 15-42 ALDEA, C. AND Troncoso, J. S. Systematics and distribution of shelled molluscs (Gastropoda, Bivalvia and Scaphopoda) from the South Shetland Islands to the Bellingshausen Sea, West Antárctica Sistemática y distribución de los moluscos con concha ( Gastropoda , Bivalvia y Scaphopoda) desde las Islas Shetland del Sur al Mar de Bellingshausen, Antártica Oeste 43-1 17 PuSATERl, E AND GlANNUZZI-SAVELLl, R. A new raphitomine neogastropod from the Mediter- ranean Sea (Conoidea) Una nueva especie de Raphitoma ( Conoidea) del mar Mediterráneo 119-126 PÉREZ, M. A., Altonaga, K. AND López, A. New data on the morphology and distribution of Euglandina obtusa (Pfeiffer, 1 8 44) Gastropoda: Spiraxidae) a Nicaraguan endemism Nuevos datos sobre la morfología y la distribución de Euglandina obtusa (Pfeiffer, 1844) (Gas- tropoda: Spiraxidae) un endemismo de Nicaragua 127-131 Oliver, J. D. Y RoláN, E. Las especies del género Chauvetia (Gastropoda, Neogastropoda) del área de Dakar, Senegal, Africa occidental, con la descripción de diez especies nuevas The species ofthe genus Chauvetia ( Gastropoda, Neogastropoda) from the Dakar area, Senegal, West Africa, with the description of ten new species 133-175 Prkic J. AND RUSSO, P. Fusinus buzzurroi (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae), a new species from Croa- tian coasts Fusinus buzzurroi (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae), una nueva especie de las costas croatas 177-183 ISSN 0212-3010 QL- m £¿3 mou— Werus ^ ■■■■ Vol. 27 (1) REVISTA DE LA SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MALACOLOGÍA Ib® rus Revista de ia Sociedad Española de Malacología Comité de Redacción (Board of Editors) Editor de Publicaciones (Editor~in~(hief) Serge Gofas Universidad de Málaga, España Director de Redacción (Executive Editor) Gonzalo Rodríguez Casero Apdo. 1 56, Mieres del Camino, Asturias, España Editora Ejecutiva (Managing Editor ) Eugenia Ma Martínez Cueto-Felgueroso Apdo. 1 56, Mieres del Camino, Asturias, España Editores Adjuntos (Associate editors) Francisco Javier Conde de Saro Embajada de España, Japón Benjamín Gómez Moliner Universidad del País Vasco, Vitoria, España Ángel Antonio Luque del Villar Universidad Autónoma de Madrid, Madrid, España Emilio Rolán Mosquera Universidad de Vigo, Vigo, España José Templado González Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, CSIC, Madrid, España Jesús S. Troncoso Universidad de Vigo, Vigo, España Comité Editorial (Board of Reviewers) Kepa Altonaga Sustacha Eduardo Angulo Pinedo Rafael Araujo Armero Thierry Backeljau Rüdiger Bieler Sigurd v. Boletzky José Castillejo Murillo Karl Edlinger Antonio M. de Frias Martins José Carlos García Gómez Gonzalo Giríbet de Sebastián Edmund Gittenberger Ángel Guerra Sierra Gerhard Haszprunar Yuri I. Kantor María Yolanda Manga González Jordi Martinell Callico Ron K. O'Dor Takashi Okutani Marco Oliverio Pablo E. Penchaszadeh Winston F. Ponder Carlos Enrique Prieto Sierra Ms de los Ángeles Ramos Sánchez Francisco Javier Rocha Valdés Paul G. Rodhouse Joandoménec Ros i Aragonés María Carmen Salas Casanovas Gerhard Steiner Victoriano Urgorri Carrasco Anders Warén Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid, España Instituí Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Bruselas, Bélgica The Field Museum, Chicago, Estados Unidos Laboratoire Arago, Banyuls-sur-Mer, Francia Universidad de Santiago de Compostela, Santiago de Compostela, España Naturhistorisches Museum Wien, Viena, Austria Universidade dos Acores, Acores, Portugal Universidad de Sevilla, Sevilla, España Harvard University, EE.UU. National Natuurhistorisch Museum, Leiden, Holanda Instituto de Investigaciones Marinas, CSIC, Vigo, España Zoologische Staatssammlung München, München, Alemania A.N. Severtzov Institute of Ecology and Evolution, Moscú, Rusia Estación Agrícola Experimental, CSIC, León, España Universidad de Barcelona, Barcelona, España Dalhousie University, Halifax, Cañada Nihon University, Fujisawa City, Japón Universitá di Roma "La Sapienza", Roma, Italia Museo Argentino de Ciencias Naturales "Bernardino Rivadavia", Buenos Aires, Argentina Australian Museum, Sydney, Australia Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, CSIC, Madrid, España Instituto de Investigaciones Marinas, CSIC, Vigo, España British Antarctic Survey, Cambridge, Reino Unido Universidad de Barcelona, Barcelona, España Universidad de Málaga, Málaga, España Instituí für Zoologie der Universitát Wien, Viena, Austria Universidad de Santiago de Compostela, Santiago de Compostela, España Swedish Museum of Natural History, Estocolmo, Suecia Portada de Iberus Iberus gualtieranus (Linnaeus, 1758), una especie emblemática de la península Ibérica, que da nombre a la revista. Dibujo realizado por José Luis González Rebollar “Toza”. Iberus REVISTA DE LA SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MALACOLOGÍA Vol. 27 (1) Oviedo, junio 2009 Iberus Revista de la Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberus publica trabajos que traten sobre cualquier aspecto relacionado con la Malacología. Se admiten también notas breves. Iberus edita un volumen anual que se compone de dos o más números. Instrucciones para los autores Los manuscritos deben remitirse a: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publicaciones, Departamento de Bio- logía Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, España. Los trabajos se entregarán por triplicado (original y dos copias). Se recomienda a los autores leer cuidadosamente las normas de publicación que se incluyen en cada número de la revista. SUBCRIPCIONES Iberus puede recibirse siendo socio de la Sociedad Española de Malacología, en cualquiera de sus formas, o mediante intercambio. Aquellos socios que deseen adquirir números atrasados deberán diri- girse al bibliotecario. Los no socios deberán ponerse en contacto con BACKHUYS PUBLISHERS, P.O. Box 321, 2300 AH Leiden, The Netherlands. Tel.: +31-71-51 70 208, Fax: +31-71-51 71 856, Correo Elec- trónico: backhuys@euronet.nl Los resúmenes de los artículos editados en esta revista se publican en Aquatic Science and Fisheries Abstracts (ASFA) y en el Zoological Records, BIOSIS. Contents list published in Aquatic Science and Fisheries Abstracts and Zoological Records, BIOSIS. Dep. Leg. B-43072-81 ISSN 0212-3010 Diseño y maquetación: Gonzalo Rodríguez Impresión: LOREDO, S. L. - Gijón © Sociedad Española de Malacologia Iberus, 27 (1): 1-18, 2009 Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva de la Biosfera “Dehesas de Sierra Morena”, SO de la Península Ibérica Freshwater molluscs from the Biosphere Reserve “Dehesas de Sierra Morena”, SW Iberian Península Juan Carlos PÉREZ-QUINTERO* Recibido el 16-VI-2008. Aceptado el 16-XII-2008 RESUMEN Se ha estudiado la fauna de moluscos de agua dulce en 109 cursos de agua de la Reserva de la Biosfera "Dehesas de Sierra Morena", en el suroeste de la Península Ibé- rica. Han sido encontradas 19 especies (15 gasterópodos y 4 bivalvos) que se distribu- yen siguiendo un gradiente de riqueza específica de oeste a este. Tal patrón biogeográ- fico es debido a variaciones climatológicas y a la distinta disponibilidad de agua a lo largo del eje mayor de la Reserva, que fluctúa entre las influencias atlánticas de la Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche y las continentales más estresadas de la Sierra Norte y, sobre todo, la Sierra de Hornachuelos. ABSTRACT Faunistic of freshwater molluscs have been studied in a Mediterranean Biosphere Reserve "Dehesas de Sierra Morena". In 109 sampling points I have encountered 19 species (15 gastropods and 4 bivalves). Distribution of species richness describes a west-east gradient along the main Reserve axis. Such biogeographical pattern is related with climatic condi- tions and water availability of the Reserve, with Atlantic influences in Sierra de Aracena and Picos de Aroche and Mediterranean-continental in Sierra Norte and Sierra de Hor- nachuelos. INTRODUCCIÓN Los hábitats dulceacuícolas conti- nentales se encuentran entre los más se- veramente impactados por la actividad humana (pérdida o degradación, espe- cies introducidas, cambio climático), siendo el declive generalizado de su bio- diversidad, a nivel global, mucho más acusado en éstos que en otros ecosiste- mas continentales o marinos (Ricciardi y Rasmussen, 1999; Revenga y Kura, 2003; Mouthon y Daufresne, 2006). La distribución, abundancia y complejidad de las comunidades de macroinverte- brados de agua dulce está íntimamente ligada a factores que determinan la com- posición de las biocenosis tales como la estructura del hábitat y las interacciones bióticas que en él tienen lugar entre los organismos que componen dichas co- munidades (Vannote, Minshall, Cum- mins, Sedell y Cushing, 1980). Como caso particular, los hábitats dulceacuíco- las mediterráneos están fuertemente in- fluenciados por ciclos periódicos de * Departamento de Biología Ambiental y Salud Pública, Facultad de Ciencias Experimentales, Campus El Carmen, Universidad de Huelva. Avenida 3 de Marzo si n, 21071 Huelva. jcperez@uhu.es 1 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 gran variabilidad que fluctúan en torno a dos episodios que imponen duras pre- siones evolutivas en la fauna: fuertes avenidas invernales y extremas sequías estivales (Pires, Cowx y Coelho, 2000; Lake, 2003; Bonada, Rieradevall y Prat, 2006). Uno de los objetivos de la Directiva Marco del Agua (DMA) (directiva 2000/ 60 /CE del parlamento europeo y del consejo, de 23 de octubre de 2000) es la conservación, protección y mejora de la calidad ambiental de las aguas en la Unión Europea, debiendo para ello eva- luar el estatus ecológico de los ríos euro- peos utilizando como instrumentos, en- tre otros, organismos bioindicadores (fi- toplancton, macrófitas, invertebrados bentónicos y peces) como garantes de la calidad o degradación de dichas aguas (Pollard y Huxhan, 1998; Logan y Furse, 2002; Irvine, 2004). En ese sen- tido, y dado el carácter conservacionista y científico que inspira la creación de cualquier espacio protegido, es de de- sear que en ellos se potencie, desde el punto de vista del análisis biológico de las aguas continentales europeas, el es- tudio en profundidad de las comunida- des de organismos que residen en di- chos entornos, dotándolos de ese modo de herramientas adecuadas para abor- dar el análisis que propone la DMA. Por otra parte, y desgraciadamente, el nivel actual de conocimiento acerca de nuestra fauna acuática dulceacuícola es claramente asimétrico y refleja el desigual "peso sistemático" de los distintos grupos de vertebrados e invertebrados que la componen. Dentro de estos últimos, la información que se dispone acerca de la biodiversidad de los macroinvertebrados "artrópodos" acuáticos es muy extensa (ver revisiones en Nieser y Montes, 1984; Rico, Pérez y Montes, 1990; Sánchez, Alba y Tierno, 2002, entre otros), mien- tras que los análisis faunísticos y ecológi- cos de los "no artrópodos" son, en el mejor de los casos, escasos (ver revisiones en Vidal-Abarca y Suárez (1985) y en Velasco (1990)). La Red Mundial de Reservas de la Biosfera (programa MaB, UNESCO; http: / / www.unesco.org.uy/ mab/ marco.html) ha sido diseñada, a nivel global, primariamente para la pro- tección y conservación de ecosistemas terrestres y marinos representativos de los diferentes hábitats del planeta, siendo escasas las seleccionadas con el fin exclu- sivo de conservar hábitats dulceacuícolas (IUCN, 1994; Ramsar Convention on Wetlands, 2004). Como elementos dife- renciales y representativos de entornos globales, y en aplicación de la DMA, sería de desear que la información disponible de la fauna de las Reservas de la Biosfera ibéricas excediera la tópica y extensa lista de vertebrados e invertebrados terrestres y estuviera complementada por listados de faunística de agua dulce para, de ese modo, facilitar el estudio y la evaluación del estatus ecológico de sus ecosistemas fluviales. Mientras que se dispone de sufi- ciente información acerca de los verte- brados dulceacuícolas (Doadrio, 2002; Pleguezuelos, Márquez y Lizana, 2002), desgraciadamente no se dispone de listas actualizadas de invertebrados terrestres, y prácticamente ninguna de acuáticos, de la Reserva de la Biosfera "Dehesas de Sierra Morena" o entorno (Pérez-Quin- tero, Bech y Huertas, 2004). Hasta el presente prácticamente no existen apenas datos acerca de la compo- sición de la malacofauna dulceacuícola de esta Reserva de la Biosfera ibérica. Los únicos disponibles son descripciones muy parciales (Ortiz de Zárate y Ortiz de Zárate, 1961; Gasull, 1985), del entorno de la provincia de Huelva (Pérez-Quin- tero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007), de provincias limítrofes con la Reserva (Bech y Altimira, 2003), de ámbito ibérico (Vidal-Abarca y Suárez, 1985) o de loca- lidades puntuales donde se han descrito especies nuevas de Hydrobiidae (Arco- nada y Ramos, 2006; Arconada y Ramos, 2007b; Arconada, Delicado y Ramos, 2007). No existe información actual sobre la fauna de moluscos dulce- acuícolas del Parque Natural de Sierra Norte de Sevilla y del Parque Natural de la Sierra de Hornachuelos en Córdoba (las otras dos áreas protegidas que forman, junto con el Parque Natural Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche en Huelva, la Reserva de la Biosfera "Dehesas de Sierra Morena"). Con este artículo se pretende 2 PÉREZ-QuiNTERO: Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva “Dehesas de Sierra Morena’ Figura 1 . Situación geográfica de la Reserva de la Biosfera “Dehesas de Sierra Morena” en la Penín- sula Ibérica y localización de los 1 09 puntos muestreados. Figure 1. Geographic situation of the Biosphere Reserve “ Dehesas de Sierra Morena ” in the Iberian Península and location of the 109 sampling points. contribuir al conocimiento de la malaco- cenosis dulceacuícola de la Reserva, apor- tando un análisis preliminar de su distri- bución geográfica en los cursos de agua muestreados y en sus respectivas cuadrí- culas UTM. MATERIAL Y MÉTODOS Area de estudio El trabajo de campo se ha realizado en la Reserva de la Biosfera "Dehesas de Sierra Morena", localizada en el extremo suroccidental de la Península Ibérica (noroeste de Andalucía, España) (Fig. 1). Esta Reserva está formada por la unión de tres Parques Naturales: Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche (SA, Huelva), Sierra Norte (SN, Sevilla) y Sierra de Hornachuelos (SH, Córdoba). El clima de la zona es mediterráneo plu- viestacional oceánico (Worldwide Bio- CLIMATIC CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM), caracterizado por severas sequías estiva- les (junio-septiembre) y moderadas pre- cipitaciones durante el invierno. La tem- peratura ambiente media oscila entre 15.0 y 18.9 ° C y la pluviosidad entre 232 y 1644 mm (Villa y Hernández, 2003). Esta estacionalidad se refleja en la red hidrológica de la Reserva, en la que la 3 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 (Página derecha) Tabla I. Variables ambientales utilizadas para caracterizar los puntos de muestreo. Izquierda: media ± Desviación Standard y rangos (entre paréntesis) de los parámetros medidos en el total de la Reserva de la Biosfera (B) y en los tres Parques naturales (SA, SN y SH). Derecha: ANOVA entre zonas. Para las variables del hábitat: (*) GIS, (**): in situ , (***): Worldwide Biocli- matic Classification System. Para intervalos de hábitat: Pd= 1: <7%, 2: 7-15%, 3:> 15%; Vc= 1: lenta, 2: moderada, 3: moderada-rápida, 4: rápida; Pm= 1: riveras siempre secas durante el verano, 2: riveras siempre secas durante el verano pero con pozas aisladas, 3: riveras secas sólo durante sequías extremas, 4: riveras con flujo permanente. Para ANOVA, n.s.= no significativo; entre paréntesis diferencias no significativas entre zonas según el test HSD de Tukey. (Right page) Tahle I. Environmental variables used to characterize the sampled sites. Lefi: mean ± Stan- dard deviation and ranges {in parentheses) ofthe measured habitat parameters in the Biosphere Reserve as a whole (B) and in the three Natural Parks {SA, SN and SH). Right: ANOVA between zones. For habitat variables: {*): GIS, {**): in situ, {***): Worldwide Bioclimatic Classification System. For habitat intervals: Pd= 1: <7%, 2: 7-15%, 3: >15%; Vc= 1: slow, 2: modérate, 3: moderate-fast, 4: fast; Pm= 1: streams always dried during the drought period, 2: streams always dried during the drought period but with isolated pools, 3: streams dried only during severe droughts, 4: streams always with permanent flow. For ANOVA, n.s. = not significant; in parentheses non-significant differences between zones according to Tukey HSD test. mayoría de los cursos de agua soporta acusados estiajes que implican disminu- ción de caudal o desaparición de los mis- mos durante el verano (básicamente en la zona oriental de la Reserva). Las princi- pales cuencas y subcuencas existentes son las de los ríos y riveras (de oeste a este): Chanza, Múrtigas, Huelva, Viar, Huéznar, Retortillo, Bembézar y Gua- diato (López, 1998; Pozuelo, Gañán y Martín, 2005). El flujo natural de los cur- sos de agua de la Reserva está alterado por la presencia de siete embalses (de oeste a este): Aracena, Zufre, El Pintado, Huéznar, José Torán, Retortillo, Bembé- zar y Breña, con una capacidad total de envasado de 1273 hm3 y un rango que oscila entre 61 (Retortillo) y 342 (Bembé- zar) hm3 (http: / / www.embalses.net) Trabajo de campo Ciento nueve cursos de agua han sido muestreados durante Marzo-Junio de 2004 y Marzo-Junio de 2005 (Fig. 1), la mayoría (47.7%) de primer orden, 33,0% de segundo, 11,0% de tercero, 7.3% de cuarto y 0,9% de quinto orden (Gordon, McMahon, Finlayson, Gippel y Nathan, 2004). Los puntos de muestreo han sido seleccionados por su accesibilidad, analizando en cada uno de ellos dos parcelas de aproximada- mente 30 m2 (dependiendo de la anchura del curso de agua). Previa- mente al muestreo fueron medidos o estimados distintas características del hábitat, incluyendo parámetros climáti- cos, de heterogeneidad, geográficos, fisi- coquímicos y estructurales de los cursos de agua (Tabla I). El muestreo de las malacocenosis se realizó en aguas de menos de 150 cm de profundidad, utili- zando redes de 0,3 mm de luz de malla en todos los posibles microhábitats del cauce. Tras su captura, los individuos fueron lavados y conservados en etanol al 70%, excepto las náyades que eran identificadas y vueltas al curso de agua. Las especies fueron identificadas en el laboratorio tomando como referencia las siguientes publicaciones: Glóer (2002), Glóer y Meier-brook (2003), Killeen, Alridge y Oliver (2004) y Arconada y Ramos (2007b). Análisis de los datos Se han seguido tres aproximaciones para comparar la biodiversidad de la malacocenosis de los tres entornos pro- tegidos: riqueza (de especies. Re, de gas- terópodos, Rg, de bivalvos, Rb, y de fa- milias, Rf), abundancia de especies (Ae) y diversidad de Shannon-Wiener (H'e). La distribución de las especies ha sido analizada mediante dos tipos de re- presentaciones: distribución en los pun- 4 PÉREZ-QuiNTERO: Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva “Dehesas de Sierra Morena B SA SN SH F2,106 Climáticos (Cl) índice de aridez anuaK***) 1,0±0,3 0,8±0,2 1,2±0,2 1,4±0,02 78,7, p<0,001 (la) (0,7-1 ,8) (0,7-1, 2) (0,9-1, 8) (1,3-1, 4) (N-H) Precipitación (***) 864,5±181,1 971,3±1 45,8 692,9±85,4 71 6,5±56,6 69,3, p<0,001 (Pr) (mm) (536-1126) (766-1126) (536-813) (612-745) (N-H) Superávit hídrico(***) 404, 5±1 62,6 499, 7±1 32,8 256,3±78,6 262,6±36,6 73,7, p<0,001 (mm) (Sh) (141-627) (319-627) (141-378) (195-281) (N-H) Déficit hídrico(***) 387,7±81,1 347,8±46,7 404,9±58,8 532,4±70,7 62,9, p<0,001 (mm) (Dh) (312-568) (312-444) (328-560) (402-568) Temperatura media del aire (***) 18,7±1,1 1 5,6±0,8 16,1±1,2 18,4±1,7 34,8, p<0,001 (°C) (Ta) (16,2-19,3) (14,8-17,1) (13,8-18,2) (15,2-19,3) (A-N) Evapotranspiración(***) 846,9±74,2 81 9,8±34,4 841 ,4±56,2 986,3±90,7 56, p<0,001 (mm) (Ev) (755-1032) (793-891) (755-955) (819-1032) (A-N) Heterogeneidad (He) Cobertura de macrófitas (**) 25,4±1 2,3 29,5±1 1,8 19,5±9,7 1 8,2±1 1,9 10,9, p<0,001 (Cm) (5-50) (5-50) (5-40) (5-50) (N-H) FHI (**) (FHI) 51,5±7,8 54,8±6,4 46,3±6,7 46,9±8,2 19,7, p<0,001 (34-63) (34-63) (36-60) (35-63) (N-H) Permanencia (**) (Pm) 2,3±1,2 3,2±1 1,8±0,9 2±1,2 24,6, p<0,001 (1-4) (1-4) (1-4) (1-4) (N-H) Diversidad de sustratos (**) 1,4±0,2 1,5±0,1 1,3±0,2 1,4±0,1 5,7, p=0,001 (H's, escala de Wenworth) (0,7-1, 6) (1-1,6) (0,7-1 ,6) (1,2-1, 6) (A-H, N-H) QBR (**) (QBR) 58,2±1 3,4 (35-75) 59,5±1 3,2 (35-75) 55,9±1 3,9 (35-75) 56,4±1 3,4 (40-75) n,s, Geográficos (Ge) Altura (*) (m) (Al) 429,9±137 469,6±1 30 41 1,5±1 03,5 281,1±126 17,3, p<0,001 (114-740) (220-740) (119-635) (114-578) (A-N) Pendiente (*)(l-3) (Pd) 1,7±0,6 1,8±0,6 1,4±0,6 1,6±0,8 5,3, p=0,006 (1-3) (1-3) (1-3) (1-3) (A-H, N-H) 0rden(*)(l-5) (Or) 1,8±1 1,6±0,9 2,1±1 2,4±1 7,9, p<0,001 (1-5) (1-5) (1-4) (1-4) (N-H) Fisicoquímicos (Fq) Conductividad (**) 394, 6±1 59,6 359,5±162 449,7±1 51,4 445, 8±1 22,6 5,9, p=0,004 (pS/cm) (Co) (118,3-957) (118,3-957) (220-875) (280-700) (A-H, N-H) Turbidez (**) 291, 7±1 19,6 257,3±1 1 5,4 324,5±95,8 386, 1±1 20,2 9,3, p<0,001 (mg/l) (Tu) (75,8-610) (75,8-610) (100-561) (182,3-610) (N-H) pH (**) (pH) 7,8±0,4 7,9±0,3 7,5±0,4 7, 5±0,4 20,3, p<0,001 (7,1-9) (7, 2-8, 8) (7, 1-8, 5) (7,2-9) (N-H) Canal (Ca) Anchura (**) (cm) (Ac) 256,9±72,5 245,7±71,4 265,2±71,2 292,8±71,3 3,4, p=0,04 (150-450) (150-450) (190-450) (200-450) (A-N, N-H) Profundidad (**) 58,1 ±17,4 54,5±1 7,4 60,7±15 69,6±1 6,8 5,3, p=0,006 (cm) (Pf) (20-90) (20-90) (40-90) (40-90) (A-N, N-H) Velocidad de la corriente (**) 2,3±0,8 2,4±0,8 2,1 ±0,7 2,3±0,8 n,s. (1-4) (Ve) (1-4) (1-4) (1-3) (1-4) 5 Iberus , 27 (1), 2009 tos muestreados (mapa hidrográfico de la Reserva) y en cuadrículas UTM 10 x 10 km (mapa UTM de la Reserva). Dos índices biogeográficos fueron calculados para cada especie: área de ocupación (AO), definida como el tanto por ciento de cursos de agua (AOa) o de cuadrícu- las de 100 km2 (AOc) donde aparece la especie, y distancia lineal (DL), definida como la mayor distancia entre cursos de agua (DLa) o cuadrículas de 100 km2 (DLc) donde aparece la especie (Gas- tón, 1996; Segurado y Araujo, 2004). Para todas las especies se considera- rán los siguientes criterios: especie de distribución puntual (AOa < 10%, AOc < 12%), especie de distribución restringida (AOa entre 11-50%, AOc entre 12,1- 35%), especie de distribución amplia (AOa entre 51-99%, AOc entre 36-99%) y especie de distribución ubicua (AOa= 100% y AOc= 100%). Las poblaciones de especies de distribución puntual estarán cercanas cuando DLa < 35 km, distantes cuando 36 < DLa < 90 km y muy distan- tes cuando DLa > 91 km. Sólo se tuvieron en cuenta los indivi- duos vivos. Las localidades donde sólo se encontraron conchas vacías de gaste- rópodos o bivalvos fueron excluidas del análisis. RESULTADOS Hábitat En la Tabla I se consignan los valores del hábitat del entorno de los cursos de agua analizados. Las características estructurales del medio marcan un gra- diente muy definido de oeste a este, correspondiendo en todos los casos los valores máximos al entorno de la Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche. El balance hídrico es, igualmente, diferente a lo largo del eje principal de la Reserva (test de Wilks, F (s,206)= 0,45, p<0,001), diferenciándose significativamente los parámetros climáticos de moderada influencia atlántica de la Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche de los conti- nentales y más estresados hídricamente de Sierra Norte y Sierra de Hornachue- los (test de Tukey, p<0,001 entre aquel y estos), no siendo significativas las dife- rencias entre estas dos últimas zonas. Especies La malacofauna de "Dehesas de Sierra Morena" está formada principal- mente por especies paleárticas. Se han encontrado 18 especies vivas (14 gaste- rópodos y 4 bivalvos) en dicha zona, de las cuales 17 son autóctonas y 1 introdu- cida ( Potamopyrgus antipodarum) (Tabla II). Aunque se ha constatado la presen- cia de valvas vacías de Anodonta anatina, no se ha podido comprobar la presencia de individuos vivos en los cursos de agua de la Reserva. Las correlaciones entre los valores de Re, Rg, Rb, Rf y H'e y los del medio son ampliamente significativas (p entre 0,01 y 0,001 en todos los casos). El grado de significación de Ae es, igualmente, variable aunque las correlaciones con QBR, Cm, H's, Pd, Or, Ac, Pf y Ve no son estadísticamente significativas. La riqueza específica oscila entre 2-9 (media 4,3±2,0 SD) y está íntimamente relacionada con la riqueza de gasterópo- dos (2-8, media 4,0+1, 5 SD): r= 0,96, p<0,001. Las diferencias de riqueza espe- cífica entre los tres espacios protegidos del área de estudio son significativas, depen- diendo, no obstante, dichas divergencias de las relaciones entre SA con SN y SH (test HSD de Tukey, p>0,05). Igualmente, los valores de riqueza de familias, abun- dancia y diversidad de Shannon-Wiener son significativamente mayores en el entorno de SA, no siendo significativas las diferencias entre los valores de SN y SH (test HSD de Tukey, p>0,05) (ver Tabla III). Las especies de gasterópodos autóc- tonos se han encontrado en el 100% de los puntos muestreados, estando el orden Pulmonata representado en todos ellos y el Neotaenioglossa en el 29.3%. Los bival- vos se encuentran en el 28.4% de las loca- lidades (la náyade Unió cf. pictorum sólo reside en el 3,7% del territorio). Physella acuta, Ancylus fluviatilis y Planorbarius me- tidjensis son simpátricas en toda la Re- serva, Pisidium casertanum y Arganiella wolfi sólo lo son en su área de distribu- ción (Parque Natural Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche) (ver Figuras 2-20). 6 PÉREZ-QuiNTERO : Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva “Dehesas de Sierra Morena Tabla II. Especies de moluscos de agua dulce encontradas en “Dehesas de Sierra Morena”. (*): sólo se encontraron valvas. Table II. Freshwater mollusc species found in “Dehesas de Sierra Morena”. (*): only valves were founded. CLASE GASTROPODA Orden Neotaenioglossa Familia Thiaridae Melanopsis praemorsa (Linnaeus, 1758) (Mp) Familia Hydrobiidae Arganiella wolfi (Boeters & Glóer, 2007) (Aw) Potamopyrgus antipodarum (J.E. Gray, 1843) (Pa) Orden Pulmonata Familia Lymnaeidae Stagnicola palustris (O.F. Müller, 1774) (Sp) Galbo truncatula (O.F. Müller, 1774) (Gt) Radix auricularía (Linnaeus, 1758) (Ra) Radix baltbica (Linnaeus, 1758) (Rb) Familia Physidae Physella ( Costatella ) acuta (Draparnaud, 1805) (Pt) Familia Planorbidae Planorbarius metidjensis (Forbes, 1 838) (Pm) Eerrissia ( Pettancylus ) clessiniana (Jickeli, 1 882) (Fe) Gyraulus ( Gyraulus ) albus (O.F. Müller, 1 774) (Ga) Gyraulus ( Torquis ) laevis (Alder, 1838) (Gl) Hippeutis complanatus (Linnaeus, 1758) (He) Ancylus fluviatilis (O.F. Müller, 1 774) (Af) CLASE BIVALVIA Orden Unionida Familia Unionidae Anodonta anatina* (Linnaeus, 1758) (Aa) Unió cf. pictorum (Linnaeus, 1758) (Up) Familia Sphaeriidae Musculium ( Musculium ) lacustre (O.F. Müller, 1774) (MI) Pisidium ( Euglessa ) casertanum (Poli, 1791) (Pe) Pisidium ( Euglessa ) personatum (Malm, 1855) (Pp) Distribución y preferencia de hábitat Melanopsis praemorsa (Linnaeus, 1758) Esta especie, aunque no incluida en el Libro Rojo de Invertebrados de Es- paña (Verdú y Galante, 2006), ha sido propuesta para ser catalogada a nivel nacional como especie “sensible a la al- teración de su hábitat" (Gómez, Mo- reno, Rolán, Araujo y Álvarez, 2001). En Andalucía está considerada como es- pecie vulnerable (Barea-Azcón, Ba- llesteros-Duperón y Moreno, 2008). Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Alonso (1975a); Vidal- Abarca y Suárez (1985); Jiménez y Martínez (1988); Pujante, Tapia y Martínez (1998); Hinz et al. (1994); Gómez et al. (2001). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 2): especie de distribución puntual en SA y SN (Gasull, 1985; Pérez-Quin- tero et al., 2004), con poblaciones dis- 7 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Figuras 2-1 . Distribución de las especies en los mapas geográficos y UTM de la Reserva. Figures 2-7. Distribution ofthe species in the geographic and UTM Reserve maps. tantes entre si. AOa= 4,6, AOc= 8.0, DLa= 58.7, DLc= 58.4. Preferencia de hábitat (valores medios): la (0,9), Pr (880,0), Sh (418.6), Dh (352,8), Cm (36.0), Pm (3,4), H's (1,5), Al (457.0), Pd (2,2), Or (2,0), Co (317.6), Tu (211,0), pH (8.3), Ac (203,0), Pf (49.0). Arganiella wolfi (Boeters y Gloer, 2007) En Andalucía esta especie está consi- derada como especie vulnerable (Barea-Azcón et al., 2008). Distribución en la Península Ibérica : Bech y Altimira (2003); Pérez-Quin- tero et al. (2004); Arconada y Ramos (2007a,b); Boeters y Gloer (2007); Pérez-Quintero (2007). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 3): SA (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004; Arconada y Ramos, 2007a,b; Pérez-Quintero, 2007). Especie de dis- 8 PÉREZ-QuiNTERO: Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva “Dehesas de Sierra Morena Figuras 8-13. Distribución de las especies en los mapas geográficos y UTM de la Reserva. Figures 8-13. Distribution ofthe species in the geographic and UTM Reserve maps. tribución restringida a la zona central de la SA, con poblaciones cercanas. AOa= 22,0, AOc= 14,0, DLa= 47.6, DLc= 50,6. Preferencia de hábitat : la (0,7), Pr (1079.1), Sh (599.5), Dh (325.5), Cm (36.9) , Pm (3,6), H's (1,5), Al (522,3), Pd (1.9) , Or (1,2), Co (284,1), Tu (214,7), pH (7.9) , Ac (218.3), Pf (50,6). Nota : Bech y Altimira (2003) descri- ben la presencia de esta especie en Badajoz, nombrándola como Valvata glo- bulina, mientras que Pérez-Quintero et al. (2004) y Arconada y Ramos (2007a) describen su presencia en la SA adscri- biéndola a Islamia minuta y Arganiella tartessica, respectivamente. Potamopyrgus antipodarum (J. E. Gray, 1853) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Alonso (1975a); Ibáñez y Alonso (1977); González, Puig, Tort y Prat (1981); Vid al- Abarca y Suárez (1985); 9 Iberusy 27 (1), 2009 Boeters (1987); Simóes (1988); Gracia, Fonseca y Castro (1989); Bech (1990); Pujante et al. (1998); Hinz et al. (1994); Hermida y Rodríguez (1996); Martí- nez-Ortí, Aparicio y Robles (2004); So- ler, Moreno, Araujo y Ramos (2006); Sousa, Antunes y Guilhermino (2007). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 4): especie de distribución puntual en SA y SN (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007), con pobla- ciones muy distantes entre si. AOa= 5.5, AOc= 12,0, DLa= 128.7, DLc= 129.5. Preferencia de hábitat : la (1,0), Pr (852,5), Sh (394,5), Dh (366.7), Cm (26.7), Pm (3,3), H's (1,5), Al (373,0), Pd (1,7), Or (2,5), Co (444,0), Tu (294,3), pH (7.9), Ac (283,3), Pf (60,0). Stagnicola palustris (O. F. Müller, 1774) Distribución en la Península Ibérica : Ramos y Aparicio (1985); Hinz et al. (1994); Soler et al. (2006); Oliveira y Martínez-Ortí (2007). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 5): especie de distribución puntual en SA (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004) con poblaciones cercanas entre sí. AOa= 2,7, AOc= 2,0, DLa= 6.3, DLc= 0. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,7), Pr (1104,0), Sh (624,0), Dh (312,0), Cm (38.3), Pm (3,3), H's (1,6), Al (560,0), Pd (1,7), Or (1,3), Co (264,7), Tu (211,7), pH (8.1), Ac (240,0), Pf (58.3). Galba truncatula (O. F. Müller, 1774) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: nobre (1941); Sampaio, Fraga y Mattos (1973); Alonso (1975a); Vidal- Abarca y Suárez (1985); Bech (1990); Pujante et al. (1998); Hinz et al. (1994); Hermida y Rodríguez (1996); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 6): especie localizada en la SA, SN y SH, con distribución restringida y poblaciones muy distantes (Pérez- Quintero et al., 2004). AOa= 19.3, AOc= 18.0, DLa= 187.4, DLc= 158.0. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,8), Pr (998.3), Sh (523,0), Dh (359.4), Cm (31,9), Pm (3,1), H's (1,5), Al (468.9), Pd (1,9), Or (1,5), Co (298.4), Tu (245.4), pH (7.9), Ac (256.9), Pf (54,0). Radix auricularia (Linnaeus, 1758) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Valente y Vicente (1979); Grácio (1983); Gasull (1985); Ramos y Aparicio (1985); Vidal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Jiménez y Martínez (1988); Bech (1990); Pujante et al. (1998); Hinz et al. (1994); Hermida y Rodríguez (1996); Soler et al. (2006); Sousa et al. (2007). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 7): especie de distribución puntual con poblaciones cercanas localizadas en SA (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004). AOa= 1,8, AOc= 4,0, DLa= 11,9, DLc= 11,8. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,8), Pr (993,5), Sh (523,0), Dh (331,5), Cm (40,0), Pm (4,0), H's (1,5), Al (432,5), Pd (2,5), Or (1,5), Co (304,5), Tu (209.2), pH (8.1), Ac (245.0), Pf (47.5). Radix balthica (Linnaeus, 1758) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Vidal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Jiménez nobre (1941); Valente y Vicente (1979); y Martínez (1988); Bech (1990); Pujante Grácio (1983); Ramos y Aparicio (1985); et al. (1998); Hinz et al. (1994); 10 PÉREZ- QUINTERO: Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva “Dehesas de Sierra Morena’ Tabla III. Izquierda: Media ± Desviación Standard y rangos (entre paréntesis) de las medidas de biodiversidad en los tres espacios protegidos y en el conjunto de la Reserva de la Biosfera (B). Derecha: ANOVA entre zonas. Table III. Mean ± Standard deviation and intervals ( between parentheses) ofthe biodiversity measures in the three protected spaces and in the Biosphere Reserve as a whole {B). Right: ANOVA between zones. B SA SN SH F (2,106) Re 4,3±2 5.3±2 3±0.8 2,8±0.7 32,6, pcO.OOl (2-9) (3-9) (2-5) (2-4) (2-3) Rg 4±1.5 4,6±1.5 3±0.8 2,8±0.7 28.1, p<0.001 (2-8) (3-8) (2-5) (2-4) (2-3) Rb 0.4±0.7 0.6±0.8 0.03±0.2 0 13, p<0.001 (0-3) (0-3) (0-1) (2-3) Rf 3±1.2 3,4±1.3 2,3±0.5 2,1 ±0.4 20.1, p<0.001 (2-7) (2-7) (2-4) (2-3) (2-3) Ae 5.5±2,6 6.6±1.8 3,9±2,2 3,8±3,7 29.3, p<0.001 (0.6-14,6) (2,7-14,4) (0.6-11.7) (1-14,6) (2-3) H'e 1.7±0.4 1.4±0.3 0.8±0.2 0.8±0.1 44, p<0.001 (0.5-2) (0.6-2) (0.5-1 .2) (0.6-1) (2-3) Hermida y Rodríguez (1996); Soler et al. (2006); Sousa et al. (2007). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 8): especie de distribución restrin- gida, con poblaciones localizadas princi- palmente en SA y escasas en SN (Gasull, 1985; Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007). AOa= 35.8, AOc= 32,0, DLa= 119.0, DLc= 120,1. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,8), Pr (990,7), Sh (518.8), Dh (337.6), Cm (33,2), Pm (3,3), H's (1,5), Al (505.4), Pd (1,9), Or (1,5), Co (324,4), Tu (233,5), pH (7.9), Ac (226.9), Pf (2,6). Physella ( Costatella ) acuta (Draparnaud, 1805) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Marazanof (1966); Grá- cio (1983); Ramos y Aparicio (1985); Vi- dal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Jiménez y Martínez (1988); Gra^a et al. (1989); Bech (1990); Pujante et al. (1998); Hinz et al. (1994); Hermida y Rodrí- guez (1996); Soler et al. (2006); Sousa ET AL. (2007). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 9): especie ubicua sintópica con Ancy- lus fluviatilis (Gasull, 1985; Pérez-Quin- tero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007). AOa= 100, AOc= 100, DLa= 187.8, DLc= 188.3. Preferencia de hábitat: la (1,0), Pr (864,5), Sh (404,5), Dh (386.7), Cm (25.4), Pm (2,7), H's (1,4), Al (429.9), Pd (1,7), Or (1,8), Co (394,6), Tu (291,7), pH (7.7), Ac (257.0), Pf (58.1). Planorbarius metidjensis (Forbes, 1838) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Fraga y do Carmo (1954); Grácio (1983); Vidal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Vidal-Abarca, Gómez y Suárez (1991); Hinz et al. (1994); Hermida y Rodríguez (1996); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 10): especie de distribución amplia con poblaciones en todos los entornos Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 protegidos de la Reserva (Ortiz de Zárate y Ortiz de Zárate, 1961; Gasull, 1985; Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007). AOa= 81,6, AOc= 62,0, DLa= 178.4, DLc= 176.9. Preferencia de hábitat : la (0,9), Pr (901,6), Sh (438.9), Dh (369.1), Cm (27.7), Pm (2,8), H's (1,5), Al (443,5), Pd (1,8), Or (1,7), Co (386.3), Tu (279.4), pH (7.8), Ac (252,3), Pf (55.8). Ferrissia (Pettancylus) clessiniana (Jickeli, 1882) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Vidal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Bech (1990); álvarez. Rico, Guerrero y Montes (2001); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Bios- fera (Fig. 11): especie de distribución puntual con poblaciones muy distantes localizadas en SA y SN (Pérez-Quin- tero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007). AOa= 4,6, AOc= 8.0, DLa= 99.6, DLc= 100,2. Preferencia de hábitat: la (1,0), Pr (838.6), Sh (373,6), Dh (362,6), Cm (22,0), Pm (3,0), H's (1,4), Al (349.0), Pd (1,4), Or (2,6), Co (465.8), Tu (346.6), pH (7.7), Ac (338.0), Pf (67.0). Gyraulus ( Gyraulus ) albus (O.F. Müller, 1774) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Marazanof (1966); Vidal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Jiménez y Martínez (1988); Bech (1990); Pujante et a, (1998); Vidal-Abarca et al. (1991); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 12): especie de distribución pun- tual con poblaciones cercanas en SA (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004; Pérez- Quintero, 2007). AOa= 6.4, AOc= 10,0, DLa= 33,0, DLc= 37.6. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,9), Pr (922,0), Sh (459.1), Dh (360,3), Cm (31,4), Pm (3,6), FTs (1,5), Al (412,8), Pd (2,4), Or (1,6), Co (349.1), Tu (236.3), pH (7.9), Ac (268.6), Pf (57.1). Gyraulus ( Torquis ) laevis (Alder, 1838) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Marazanof (1966); Vidal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Jiménez y Martínez (1988); Bech (1990); Pujante et al. (1998); Vidal-Abarca et al. (1991); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 13): especie de distribución puntual con poblaciones cercanas en SA (Pérez-Quin- tero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007). AOa= 9.2, AOc= 12,0, DLa= 42,8, DLc= 41,3. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,7), Pr (1068.9), Sh (590,4), Dh (329.7), Cm (38.9), Pm (3,8), H's (1,6), Al (547.2), Pd (1,9), Or (1,2), Co (273,5), Tu (233,0), pH (7.9), Ac (227.8), Pf (47.8). Hippeutis complanatus (Linnaeus, 1758) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Marazanof (1966); Vidal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Bech (1990); Pujante et al. (1998); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 14): especie de distribución puntual con poblaciones muy distantes en SA y SH (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007). AOa= 1,8, AOc= 4,0, DLa= 164,8, DLc= 167.5. Preferencia de hábitat: la (1,2), Pr (791,5), Sh (321,0), Dh (448.5), Cm (20,0), Pm (3,0), H's (1,4), Al (231,5), Pd (1,0), Or (4,0), Co (451,0), Tu (41357), pH (7.6), Ac (350,0), Pf (65.0). 12 PÉREZ-QuiNTERO: Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva “Dehesas de Sierra Morena Figuras 14-20. Distribución de las especies en los mapas geográficos y UTM de la Reserva. Figures 14-20. Distribution ofthe species in the geographic and UTM Reserve maps. Ancylus fluviatilis (O. F. Muller, 1774) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Marazanof (1966); Alonso (1975a); Grácio (1983); Vi- dal-Abarca y Suárez (1985); Rolán, Vilas y Nombela (1987); Jiménez y Martínez (1988); Bech (1990); Pujan- te et al. (1998); Rallo y Rico (1993); Hinz et al. (1994); Martínez-Ortí et al. (2004); Soler et al. (2006); Sousa et al. (2007). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 15): especie ubicua sintópica con 13 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Phy sella acuta (Ortiz de Zárate y Ortiz de Zárate, 1961; Gasull, 1985; Pérez- Quintero et al., 2004; Pérez-Quintero, 2007). AOa= 100, AOc= 100, DLa= 187.8, DLc= 188.3. Preferencia de hábitat : la (1,0), Pr (864,5), Sh (404,5), Dh (386.7), Cm (25.4), Pm (2,7), H's (1,4), Al (429.9), Pd (1,7), Or (1,8), Co (394,6), Tu (291,7), pH (7.7), Ac (257.0), Pf (58.1). Anodonta anatina (Linnaeus, 1758) Esta especie, aunque no incluida en el Libro Rojo de Invertebrados de España (Verdú y Galante, 2006), ha sido propuesta para ser catalogada a nivel nacional como especie "de interés especial" (Gómez et al, 2001). En Anda- lucía está considerada como especie casi amenazada (Barea-Azcón et al., 2008). Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Altaba (1980); Altimira (1968); Araujo, Bragado y Ramos (2000); Araujo (2004); Bech y Altimira (2003); Galhano y Ferreira (1983); Gasull (1981); Gasull (1985); Moura, Vila- rinho, Guedes y Machado (2000); Pérez-Quintero, 2007; Sousa et al., 2007. Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 16): no se han encontrado indivi- duos vivos, sólo valvas en cursos de agua de SA: Arroyo Borbolluela, Arroyo Sillo, Rivera de Cala, Rivera de Huelva y Rivera del Chanza (ver Figura 16). Preferencia de hábitat: los cursos de agua donde se han encontrado los restos de esta especie tienen las siguientes característi- cas: la (0,9), Pr (904,7), Sh (436.8), Dh (358.2) , Cm (20,8), Pm (3,7), H's (1,4), Al (370,0), Pd (1,3), Or (3,0), Co (407.7), Tu (277.2) , pH (7.9), Ac (336.7), Pf (64,2). Unió cf. pictorum (Linnaeus, 1758) Esta especie, aunque no incluida en el Libro Rojo de Invertebrados de España (Verdú y Galante, 2006), ha sido propuesta para ser catalogada a nivel nacional como especie "en peligro de extinción" (Gómez, et al., 2001). En Andalucía está considerada como especie "vulnerable" (Barea-azcón et al., 2008). Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Alonso (1975a); Vidal- Abarca y Suárez (1985); Gómez et al. (2001); Araujo (2004); Soler et al. (2006); Sousa et al. (2007). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 17): especie de distribución puntual con poblaciones muy distantes en SA y SN (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004). AOa= 3,7, AOc= 8.0, DLa= 99.5, DLc= 98.6. Preferencia de hábitat: la (1,0), Pr (868.0), Sh (402,5), Dh (347.7), Cm (32,5), Pm (3,7), H's (1,6), Al (355.2), Pd (1,7), Or (3,2), Co (401,0), Tu (263,6), pH (8.1), Ac (327.5), Pf (53,7). Musculium (Musculium) lacustre (O. F. Müller, 1774) Esta especie, aunque no incluida en el Libro Rojo de Invertebrados de España (Verdú y Galante, 2006), ha sido propuesta para ser catalogada a nivel nacional como especie "de interés especial" (Gómez et al., 2001). Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Vid al- Abarca y Suárez (1985); Gómez et al. (2001); Martínez-Ortí y Robles (2003); Araujo (2004); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 18): especie de distribución puntual con una única población en SA (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004). AOa= 0,9, AOc= 2,0, DLa= 0, DLc= 0. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,9), Pr (883,0), Sh (422,0), Dh (351,0), Cm (40,0), Pm (4,0), H's (1,6), Al (405.0), Pd (3,0), Or (2,0), Co (300,0), Tu (220,0), pH (8.2), Ac (290,0), Pf (45.0). 14 PÉREZ- QUINTERO: Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva “Dehesas de Sierra Morena Pisidium ( Euglessa ) casertanum (Poli, 1791) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Nobre (1941); Kuiper (1961); Alonso (1975b); Vidal- Abarca y Suárez (1985); Bech (1990); Hinz et al. (1994); Araujo (1998); Araujo (2004); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 19): especie de distribución restrin- gida en la SA (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004). AOa= 22,0, AOc= 18.0, DLa= 59.6, DLc= 51,2. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,7), Pr (1070,3), Sh (589.9), Dh (330,1), Cm (36.7), Pm (3,7), H's (1,5), Al (530,6), Pd (2.0) , Or (1,3), Co (319.3), Tu (231,6), pH (8.0) , Ac (225.0), Pf (49.6). Pisidium ( Euglessa ) personatum (Malm, 1855) Distribución en la Península Ibérica: Kuiper (1961); Alonso (1975b); Vidal- Abarca y Suárez (1985); Bech (1990); Hinz et al. (1994); Araujo (1998); Araujo (2004); Soler et al. (2006). Distribución en la Reserva de la Biosfera (Fig. 20): especie de distribución restringida CONCLUSIONES En relación a las características del hábitat de la Reserva de la Biosfera sólo se conocen datos puntuales y muy gene- rales del entorno (Franco, 1994; Prenda, 1997; Villa y Hernández, 2003). En este estudio se analiza el gradiente que se esta- blece entre los extremos occidental y orien- tal de la Reserva en función de cinco grupos de variables ambientales relacio- nadas con el entorno general y los cursos de agua en particular, estudiando cómo condicionan dichas variables la distribu- ción de los moluscos dulceacuícolas. Se examina por vez primera la biodi- versidad malacológica dulceacuícola y su distribución en un entorno mediterráneo protegido del sur de la Península Ibérica (Dehesas de Sierra Morena, comunidad autónoma andaluza). Los datos previos son escasos y puntuales en el entorno de la Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche (Ortiz de Zárate y Ortiz de Zárate, 1961; Gasull, 1985; Arconada y Ramos, 2007b; Arconada, Delicado y Ramos, 2007) y en el de la Sierra de Hornachue- los (Arconada y Ramos, 2006). pérez- Quintero et al. (2004) describen la com- posición faunística del Parque Natural Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche en un en la SA (Pérez-Quintero et al., 2004). AOa= 11,9, AOc= 14,0, DLa= 40,3, DLc= 44,0. Preferencia de hábitat: la (0,7), Pr (1077.1), Sh (595.8), Dh (323,3), Cm (40.0) , Pm (3,8), H's (1,5), Al (525.0), Pd (1,9), Or (1,2), Co (287.9), Tu (213,1), pH (8.0) , Ac (201,1), Pf (45.0). análisis provincial de las malacocenosis dulceacuícolas. A nivel regional pérez- Quintero (2007) detalla la distribución y conservación de los moluscos dulceacuí- colas de las subcuencas ibéricas del bajo Guadiana, incluyendo parte del entorno de la Sierra de Aracena y Picos de Aroche. En relación a la biodiversidad una de las conclusiones más relevantes de este estudio es la descripción del gradiente en riqueza específica, abundancia y diversi- dad de Shannon- Wiener que se establece a lo largo del eje mayor de este entorno protegido. Este gradiente se organiza en función, fundamentalmente, de la dispo- nibilidad hídrica y de los cambios en la heterogeneidad del medio a lo largo del eje oeste-este de la Reserva. En este estudio se amplía el área de distribución de las especies con carácter más eurícoro, fundamentalmente los gasterópodos Radix balthica, Phy sella acuta, Planorbarius metidjensis y Ancylus fluviatilis y el bivalvo Unió cf. pictorum. Por otro lado se han encontrado nuevas localidades colo- nizadas por la especie invasora Pota- mopyrgus antipodarum y se presentan datos que confirman el carácter estenó- coro de especies como Melanopsis prae- 15 Iberusy 27 (1), 2009 morsa, Ar gamella wolfi, Stagnicola palustris, Radix auricularia y ambas especies de Pisi- dium, todas ellas confinadas en entornos húmedos con cursos de agua estables a lo largo del ciclo anual. BIBLIOGRAFÍA Alonso M.R. 1975a. Moluscos terrestres y dul- ceacuícolas de la depresión de Granada y sus alrededores. Cuadernos de Ciencias Bioló- gicas, 4: 125-157. Alonso M.R. 1975b. El género Pisidium en la de- presión de Granada (España). Cuadernos de Ciencias Biológicas, 4: 97-104. Altaba C.R. 1980. Introducció a Testudi deis mol.luscs deis Aiguamolls de Talt Empordá. Butlletí de la Institució Catalana d 'Historia Na- tural, 45 (Zool., 3): 31-36. Altimira C. 1968. Contribución al conocimiento de la fauna malacológica terrestre y de agua dulce de Gerona. Miscelánea Zoológica, 2: 17- 28. Alvarez S., Rico E., Guerrero M.C. y Mon- tes C. 2001. Decomposition of Juncus mariti- mus in two shallow lakes of Doñana Natio- nal Park. International Review ofHydrobiology, 86:541-554. Araujo R. 1998. The Pisidium fauna of Portu- gal, with particular reference to shell mi- crosculpture. Bivalvia, 1: 39-51. Araujo R. 2004. Los bivalvos dulceacuícolas de la Rioja. Zubia, 22: 29-39. Araujo R, Bragado D. y Ramos M.A. 2000. Occurrence of glochidia of the endangered Margaritifera auricularia and other mussels' species (Bivalvia, Unionidae) in drift and on fishes in an ancient channel of the Ebro River, Spain. Archivfür Hydrobiologie, 148: 147-160. Arconada B. y Ramos M.A. 2006. Revisión of the genus Islamia Radoman, 1973 (Gastro- poda, Caenogastropoda, Hydrobiidae) on the Iberian Península and description of two new genera and three new species. Malaco- logia, 48: 77-132. Arconada B., Delicado D. y Ramos M.A. 2007. A new genus and two new species of Hydrobiidae (Mollusca, Caenogastropoda) from the Iberian Península. Journal of Natu- ral History, 41: 29-32. Arconada B. y Ramos M.A. 2007a. Description of a new species of the genus Arganiella Giusti & Pezzoli, 1980 (Mollusca, Gastropoda, Hy- drobiidae) from the Iberian Península. Gra- ellsia, 63: 61-70. Arconada B. y Ramos M.A. 2007b. Arganiella wolfi, new combination for Boetersiella wolfi (Boeters & Glóer, 2007). Graellsia, 63: 367- 369. AGRADECIMIENTOS Al Dr. Pablo Hidalgo Fernández, magnifico hacedor de mapas y mejor paciente compañero. Barea-Azcón J.M., Ballesteros-Duperón E. y Moreno D. (coords.) 2008. Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de Andalucía, 4 Tomos. Consejería de Medio Ambiente, Junta de An- dalucía, Sevilla, 1430 pp. Bech M. 1990. Fauna malacológica de Catalunya. Mol.luscs terrestres id'aigua dolga. Treballs de la Institució Catalana d Historia Natural, n°. 12, Barcelona, 229 pp. Bech M. y Altimira J. 2003. Nuevas aporta- ciones al conocimiento de los moluscos ac- tuales y del cuaternario en Extremadura: I. Malacofauna dulceacuícola. Revista de Estu- dios Extremeños, LIX/II: 837-870. Boeters H.D. 1987. Moitessieriidae und Hy- drobiidae in Spanien un Portugal. Archivfür Molluskenkunde, 118: 181-261. Boeters H.D. y Glóer P. 2007. A contribution to the genus Boetersiella Arconada & Ramos 2001 in Spain with the description of Boeter- siella wolfi n. sp. Heldia, 5: 85-88. Bonada N., Rieradevall M. y Prat N. 2006. Benthic macroinvertebrate assemblages and macrohabitat connectivity in Mediterranean- climate streams of northern California. Jour- nal ofthe North American Benthological Society, 25: 32-43. Directiva Marco del Agua. (Directiva 2000/60/ CE del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, de 23 de octubre de 2000; (http:/ /hispagua. cedex.es/ documenta- ción/ especiales/ dma / index.htm). Doadrio I. (ed.), 2002. Atlas y libro rojo de los pe- ces continentales de España. CSIC-Ministerio de Medio Ambiente, Madrid, 374 pp. Fraga J y do Carmo L. 1954. L Identification de Planorbis metidjensis, de TAlgarve (sud du Portugal) d'aprés la morphologie des or ga- nes genitaux et radula; sa comparaison avec les mémes elements de Planorbis corneus. Bu- lletin de la Societé de Pathologie Exotique, 47: 460- 468. Franco A. 1994. Parque Natural Sierra de Ara- cena y Picos de Aroche. Naturaleza e Historia. DI- TEG, S.A., Madrid, 173 pp. Galhano M.H. y Ferreira M.T. 1983. The reproductive cycle of Anodonta cygnea L from Mira Lagoon (Portugal). Publicagoes do Instituto Zoologico "Dr. Augusto Nobre", 179: 1-4. ló PÉREZ-QuiNTERO: Moluscos dulceacuícolas de la Reserva “Dehesas de Sierra Morena Gastón K.J. 1996. Species-range-size distribu- tions: patterns, mechanisms and implica- tions. Trends in Ecology and Evolution, 11: 197- 201. Gasull L. 1981. Fauna malacológica terrestre y de agua dulce de la provincia de Castellón de la Plana. Boletín de la Sociedad de Historia Natural de las Baleares, 25: 55-102. Gasull L. 1985. Fauna malacológica continen- tal de la provincia de Huelva (España). Mis- celánea Zoológica, 9: 127-143. Glóer P. 2002. Die Süswassergastropoden Nord- und Mitteleuropas. ConchBooks, Hackenheim, 327 pp. Glóer P. y Meier-brook C. 2003. Süsswasser- mollusken. DJN, Hamburg, 134 pp. Gómez B., Moreno D., Rolán E., Araujo R. y álvarez R. (eds.), 2001. Protección de Molus- cos en el Catálogo Nacional de Especies Amena- zadas. Sociedad Española de Malacología, Reseñas Malacológicas XI, Madrid, 286 pp. González G., Puig M.A., Tort M.J. y Prat, N. 1981. Distribución de Potamopyrgus jenkinsi en las cuencas de los ríos Besos y Llobregat. Iberus, 1: 61-66. Gordon N.D., Mcmahon T.A., Finlayson B.L., Gippel C.J. y Nathan R.J. 2004. Stream Hy- drology. An introduction for Ecologists. Wiley, West Sussex, 429 pp. Graca M.A.S., Fonseca D.m. y Castro, T. 1989. The distribution of macroinvertebrate communities in two Portuguese rivers. Fresh- water Biology, 22: 297-308. GráciO M.A.A. 1983. Distribution and hábi- tats of six species of freshwater pulmonates snail in Algarve, Southern Portugal. Malaco- logical Review, 16: 17-23. Hermida J. y Rodríguez T. 1996. Contribución a la fauna de caracoles terrestres y dulcea- cuícolas de Portugal. Boletín de la Real Socie- dad Española de Historia Natural (Biol.): 106-108. Hinz W., Boeters H.D. y Günther A. 1994. Zur SübwassermoHuskenfauna in der spanischen Provinz Cuenca. Malakologische Abhandlungen, 5: 65-82. Ibáñez M. y Alonso M.R. 1977. Geographical distribution of Potamopyrgus jenkinsi in Spain. Journal of Conchology, 29: 141-146. Irvine K. 2004. Classifying ecological status under the European Water Framework Di- rective: the need for monitoring to account for natural variability. Acjuatic Conservation: Marine and Freshwater Ecosystems, 14: 107- 112. IUCN, 1994. Guidelines for Protected Areas Man- agement Categories. IUCN, Cambridge. Jiménez J. y Martínez F. 1988. Distribución y composición específica de la malacofauna del río Júcar. Eimnética, 4: 9-18. Killeen I., Aldridge D. y Oliver G. 2004. Fresh- water Bivalves ofBritain and Ireland. FSC, En- vironment Agency, AIDGAP, Wales, 114 pp. Kuiper J.G.J. 1961. Contribution a la connais- sance de espéces du genre Pisidium vivant en Espagne. Basteria, 25: 54-67. Lake P.S. 2003. Ecological effects of perturba- tion by drought in flowing waters. Freshwa- ter Biology, 48: 1161-1172. Logan P. y Furse M. 2002. Preparing for the Eu- ropean Water Framework Directive making the links between habitat and aquatic biota. Aquatic Conservation: Marine and Freshwater Ecosystems, 12: 425-437. López J.A. (dir.), 1998. Atlas hidrogeológico de Andalucía. Junta de Andalucía, Instituto Tec- nológico Geominero de España, Madrid, 216 pp. Marazanof F. 1966. Mol.lusques aquatiques des marismas du Guadalquivir: donnes eco- logiques et biogeographiques. Anuales de Eimnologie, 2: 477-489. Martínez-Ortí A. y Robles F. 2003. Moluscos continentales de la Comunidad Valenciana. Ge- neralitat Valenciana, Conselleria de Terri- tori i Habitatge, Valencia, 259 pp. Martínez-Ortí A., Aparicio M.t. y Robles F. 2004. La malacofauna de la Sierra de Alcaraz (Albacete, España). Iberus, 22 (2): 9-17. Moura G., Vilarinho L., Guides R. y Machado J. 2000. The action of some heavy metáis on the calcification process of Anodonta cygnea: nacre morphology and composition changes. Haliotis, 29: 43-53. Mouthon J. y Daufresne M. 2006. Effects of the 2003 heatwave and climatic warming on mollusc communities of the Saone: a large lowland river and of its two main tributaries (France). Global Change Biology, 12: 441-449. Nieser N. y Montes C. 1984. Eista faunística y bibliográfica de los Heterópteros acuáticos (Ne- pomorpha & Gerromorpha) de España y Portu- gal. Asociación Española de Limnología, pu- blicación n° 2, Madrid, 190 pp. Nobre A. 1941. Fauna Malacológica de Portugal II. Moluscos terrestres efluviais. Coimbra Edi- tora, Coimbra, 278 pp. Oliveira A. de y Martínez-Ortí A. 2007. Stag- nicolapalustris (O.F. Müller, 1744) (Pulmonata: Lymnaeidae): novo registro para a fauna ma- lacológica de Portugal. Noticiario SEM, 48: 27-30. Ortiz de Zárate A. y Ortiz de Zárate A. 1961. Moluscos terrestres recogidos en la provincia de Huelva. Boletín de la Real Socie- dad Española de Historia Natural (B),59: 169-190. Pérez-Quintero J.C., Bech M. y Huertas J.L. 2004. Los moluscos de las aguas continenta- les de la provincia de Huelva. Iberus, 22 (2): 19-31. Pérez-Quintero J.C. 2007. Diversity, habitat use and conservation of freshwater molluscs in the lower Guadiana River basin (SW Iber- ian Península). Aquatic Conservation: Marine and Freshwater Ecosystems, 17: 485-501. 17 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Pires A.M., Cowx I.G. y Coelho M.M. 2000. Benthic macroinvertebrate communities of in- termittent streams in the middle reaches of the Guadiana basin (Portugal). Hydrobiologia, 435:167-175. Pleguezuelos J.M., Márquez R. y Lizana M. (eds.), 2002. Atlas y libro rojo de los anfibios y reptiles de España. Organismo Autónomo de Parques Nacionales, Madrid, 587 pp. Pollard P. y Huxham M. 1998. The European Water Framework Directive: a new era in the management of aquatic ecosystem he- alth? Aquatic Conservation: Marine and Fresh- water Ecosystems, 8: 773-792. Pozuelo I. Gañán C. y Martín R. 2005. Atlas de Andalucía, Cartografía ambiental 2. Junta de Andalucía, Consejería de Medio Ambiente, Sevilla, 285 pp. Prenda J. 1997. Caracterización ecológica y análisis comparativo de algunos cursos de agua de la sierra norte de Sevilla (España). Oxyura, 9: 101-124. Pujante A.M., Tapia G. y Martínez F. 1998. Los moluscos de los ríos de la Comunidad Va- lenciana (España). Iberus, 16 (1): 1-19. Rallo A. y Rico E. 1993. La familia Ancylidae y Acroloxidae en los ríos del País Vasco. Bo- letín de la Real Sociedad Española de Historia Na- tural ( B ), 89: 73-81. Ramos M.A. y Aparicio M.T. 1985. Gasteró- podos terrestres y dulceacuícolas de las la- gunas de Ruidera (España). Iberus, 5: 113- 123. Ramsar Convention on Wetlands, 2004. The Convention on Wetlands. Ramsar Convention Secretariat, Gland, Switzerland. Revenga C y Kura Y. 2003. Status and Trends of Biodiversity oflnland Water Ecosystems. Se- cretariat of the Convention on Biological Di- versity, Technical Series no 11, Montreal, 115 pp. Ricciardi A. y Rasmussen J.B. 1999. Extinc- tion Rates of North American Freshwater Fauna. Conservation Biology, 13: 1220-1222. Rico E., Pérez L.C. y Montes C. 1990. Lista faunística y bibliográfica de los Hydradephaga ( Co- leóptera: Haliplidae, Hygrobiidae, Gyrinidae, No- teridae, Dytiscidae) de la Península Ibérica e Is- las Baleares. Asociación Española de Limno- logía, publicación n° 7, Madrid, 216 pp. Rolan E., Vilas F. y Nombela M.A. 1987. Fauna malacológica de los estuarios-lagoones y sus variaciones por cambios de salinidad. Ibe- rus, 7 (1): 59-65. Sampaio M.l., Fraga J. y Mattos M.A. 1973. Studies on the distribution and ecology of Lymnaea truncatula intermediate host of Fas- ciola hepática in Portugal. Malacologia, 14: 348. Sánchez A., Alba J. y Tierno J.M. 2002. Lista faunística y bibliográfica de los Plecópteros ( Pie - coptera) de la Península Ibérica e Islas Baleares. Asociación Española de Limnología, publi- cación n° 16, Madrid, 198 pp. Segurado P. y Araújo M.B. 2004. An evalua- tion of methods for modelling species dis- tributions. Journal of Biogeography, 31: 1555- 1568. Simóes M. 1988. Potamopyrgus jenkinsi sua dis- tribuyo em Portugal. Iberus, 8 (2): 243-244. Soler J., Moreno D., Araujo R. y Ramos M.B. 2006. Diversidad y distribución de los mo- luscos de agua dulce en la comunidad de Madrid (España). Graellsia, 62: 201-252. Sousa R., Antunes C. y Guilhermino L. 2007. Species composition and monthly variation of the Molluscan fauna in the freshwater sub- tidal area of the River Minho estuary. Estua- rine, Coastal and Shelf Science, 75: 90-100. Valente M.F. y Vicente M.M.J. 1979. Gaste- rópodes de água doce de Portugal. 1. Nota sobre duas espécies da familia Lymnaeidae. Boletín de la Sociedad Portuguesa de Ciencias Na- turales, 19: 87-94. Vannote R.Ll, Minshall G.W., Cummins K.W., Sedell J.R. y Cushing C.E. 1980. The River Continuum Concept. Canadian Journal ofFisheries and Aquatic Sciences, 37: 130-137. Velasco J.L. 1990. Lista faunística y bibliográfica de los Rotíferos ( Rotatoria ) de la Península Ibérica e Islas Baleares y Canarias. Asociación Española de Limnología, publicación n° 8, Madrid, 195 pp. Verdú J.R. y Galante E. (eds.) 2006. Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de España. Dirección Ge- neral para la Biodiversidad, Ministerio de Medio Ambiente, Madrid, 411 pp. Vidal-Abarca R. y Suárez M.L. 1985. Lista faunística y bibliográfica de los moluscos ( Gas - trópoda & Bivalvia) de las aguas continentales de la Península Ibérica e Islas Baleares. Asociación Española de Limnología, publicación n° 2, Madrid, 193 pp. Vidal-Abarca M.R., Gómez R. y Suárez, M.L. 1991. Los planórbidos de las aguas superfi- ciales de la cuenca del río Segura: SE de Es- paña. Iberus, 10 (1): 119-129. Villa A. y Hernández J. 2003. Dehesas de Sie- rra Morena. Reserva de la Biosfera. Junta de Andalucía, Consejería de Medio Ambiente, Sevilla, 120 pp. WORLDWIDE BlOCLIMATIC CLASSIFICATION SYS- TEM. Phytosociological Research Center. (http: / / www.ucm.es / info / cif / map / MN50 W020.htm). 18 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberas, 27 (1): 19-56, 2009 Fauna malacologica de un fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona (nordeste de la Península Ibérica) Malacological fauna from a detritic muddy bottom in El Maresme, Barcelona (Nordeast of the Iberian Península) Anselmo PEÑAS*, Emilio ROLÁN** y José ALMERA*** Recibido el 21 -V-2008. Aceptado el 15-1-2009 RESUMEN Se hace un listado de los moluscos marinos encontrados en un fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, entre las localidades de Vilassar de Mar y Matará, NE de la Península Ibé- rica. En total se han recogido 332 especies (5 poliplacóforos, 219 gasterópodos, 105 bivalvos y 3 escafópodos). Todo el material se obtuvo mediante varios dragados realiza- dos entre los años 2001 y 2006. Se ha tratado de reconocer las especies que viven en ese tipo de fondo, por lo que en el listado se indican las especies recolectadas vivas y las que son fruto de tanatocenosis de fondos más costeros. Se hacen comentarios sobre algu- nas de estas especies, en especial sobre los de la superfamilia Galeommatoidea y se muestran fotografías de algunas de ellas. Seis especies se citan por primera vez para el Mediterráneo español. ABSTRACT The marine molluscs found in a detritic mud bottom in Maresme, between the localities of Vilassar de Mar and Matará, NE of the Iberian Península, are listed. In total, 332 species (5 Polyplacophora, 219 Gastropoda, 105 Bivalvia and 3 Scaphopoda) were collected. All the material was obtained from several dredgings made between the years 2001 and 2006. In order to know which species are living in this bottom, the list mentions which species were collected alive and which are thanatocaenosis originating from more Coastal bottoms. Some comments on several species are made, mainly on the superfamily Gale- ommatoidea, showing photographs of some of them. Six species are the first record for the Spanish Mediterranean. INTRODUCCIÓN El presente trabajo trata sobre los moluscos marinos que se han encon- trado en un fondo detrítico fangoso del piso circalitoral en el Maresme, entre las localidades de Vilassar de Mar y Mataré, al norte de la provincia de Barcelona, recolectados mediante dra- gados realizados entre los años 2001 y 2006, a una profundidad de unos 45 metros. El fondo estudiado cubre un área muy reducida en extensión pero muy rico en especies de moluscos, la mayoría de los cuales se encontraron vivos. * Carrer Olérdola, 39 -5o, 08800 Vilanova i la Geltrú, Barcelona, anspml@yahoo.es ** Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur, 15782, Santiago de Compostela *** Camí de Cabrils “Can Escarramant”, 6, 08349 Cabrera de Mar, Barcelona 19 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Varios son los trabajos realizados sobre la fauna asociada a este tipo de fondos, pero no hemos encontrado ninguno referido a los moluscos en aguas del Mediterráneo español. Alonso y López-Jamar (1988) solo tratan tangencialmente la malacofauna de estos fondos, centrándose en el estudio de los poliquetos. ZONA DE ESTUDIO El lugar objeto de estudio (Fig. 1) se encuentra a unos 45 metros de profundi- dad, a 5,5 kms de Mataré y 4,8 kms de Vilassar de Mar (41° 29' 04" N, 2o 29' 05" E), al norte de la provincia de Barcelona. Se trata de una zona en mar abierto, sin áreas abrigadas cercanas, ni tampoco fondos rocosos cercanos. Los fondos, entre el área de la biocenosis estudiada y la costa, lo forman, en primer lugar, la zona litoral, constituida por arenas más bien gruesas. A continuación, entre los 8 y 20 metros de profundidad, que en algún punto llega a los 24 m, se encuen- tra una extensa pradera de Posidonia oce- ánica, cuya fauna malacológica fue estu- diada por Peñas y Almera (2001). Entre esta pradera y la zona de estudio se encuentra un fondo de arenas relativa- mente gruesas, con mayor proporción de fango a medida que aumenta la pro- fundidad, poblado en parte por Cymodo- cea nodosa en la zona más próxima a la pradera de P. oceánica. Se tomaron también varias muestras a mayor profundidad del área objeto de este estudio, hasta los 65 metros, cuyos resultados no se reflejan aquí, pero se constató que entre los 50 y 65 metros de profundidad apenas se encontraban especies vivas, tampoco moluscos, ni siquiera bivalvos, y la mayoría de las conchas o restos encontrados eran sub- fósiles. El fondo estudiado es detrítico fangoso, con predominio del fango sobre las arenas (Pérés, 1982), las cuales son silíceas, de granulometría fina. También se encuentran fragmentos de conchas, mayoritariamente de bivalvos, así como restos de erizos, crustáceos. briozoos, escamas y espinas de peces y foraminíferos. La mayor proporción de materia orgánica obtenida es vegetal, formada por hojas y raices procedentes de las cercanas praderas de Cymodocea nodosa y, en menor cantidad, de Posido- nia oceánica. En esta biocenosis, rica en biodiver- sidad, se han encontrado vivas gran número de especies de invertebrados, además de moluscos. Entre ellas, son comunes la Holothuria tubulosa Gmelin, 1790, el erizo Spatangus purpureus (O. F. Müller, 1776), la estrella Astropecten irre- gularis (Pennant, 1777), los ofiuros Ophiura albida Forbes, 1839 y Ophiura texturata Lamarck, 1816, crustáceos del género Ebalia, los serpúlidos Serpula ver- micularis (Linnaeus, 1767) y Spirorbis pagenstecheri (Quatrefages, 1865). Son abundantes el gusano poliqueto Ditrupa arietina (O. F. Müller, 1776), el sipuncú- lido Phascolion strombi (Montagu, 1804), anfípodos de la superfamilia Gammari- dea y el ascidiáceo Ascidia conchilega (O. F. Müller, 1776), especie que aporta el mayor volumen de biomasa animal obtenida. MATERIAL Y MÉTODOS El presente trabajo está basado en el material recolectado por los autores entre los años 2001 y 2006, mediante 12 dragados, todos realizados en los meses de Julio y Agosto, salvo uno, que se hizo en Abril de 2003. Las muestras se tomaron desde una pequeña embarca- ción pesquera, denominada BOLERA, del tipo "llagut". Los nueve primeros muéstreos se hicieron mediante una pequeña draga rectangular de malla metálica, de dimensiones 0,6 m de ancho por 1 m de fondo y 0,25 m de altura, y los 3 últimos mediante una draga de arco, de 0,6 m, con una red de 1 m de larga, con una luz de malla de 1 mm. La draga se izaba manualmente y en cada jornada de dragado, una vez desechado el fango y arenas finas, se obtuvieron unos 20 litros de sedimentos, casi un 80% de cuyo volumen lo consti- tuían restos vegetales. 20 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figura 1 . Mapa de la zona de muestreo. Figure 1. Map of the sampling are a. Todo el material estudiado e ilus- trado se encuentra depositado en la colección del primer autor, por lo que no se menciona este dato en el material estudiado ni en las representaciones fotográficas. Se han fotografiado varias especies, la mayoría al microscopio electrónico de barrido (MEB), por su rareza o por aportar información adicional. Las medidas que se aportan en las figuras son la altura para los gasterópo- dos y la longitud para las bivalvas. El listado de especies ha sido confec- cionado básicamente de acuerdo con la nomenclatura de la CLEMAM (Check List of European Marine Mollusca: http: / / www.somali.asso.fr/ clemam/bi otaxis.php). Abreviaturas utilizadas: BMNH Nacional History Museum, London MNCN Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid MNHN Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, París c: concha e: ejemplar encontrado vivo, o con restos de partes blandas v: valva RESULTADOS El número total de especies de moluscos marinos recogidos en este trabajo es de 332 (5 poliplacóforos, 219 gasterópodos, 105 bivalvos y 3 escafópo- dos). De ellas, se han encontrado 213 especies vivas (4 poliplacóforos, 122 gas- terópodos, 85 bivalvos y 2 escafópodos); por tanto, consideramos que la mayoría de ellas viven asociadas a este tipo de fondos. El listado de las especies se recoge en la Tabla I. A la izquierda aparece el nombre de cada especie, que irá en negrita en el caso de que sea objeto de comentarios en la discusión; irá prece- dida de un asterisco (*) cuando consti- tuya primera cita para el Mediterráneo español. A continuación se señala la abundancia relativa: +: solo encontrados 1-2 ejemplares en el total de muéstreos; 21 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Tabla I. Listado de las especies encontradas en el área de estudio. Las especies en negrita se comen- tan en el texto. Códigos: *: primera cita para el Mediterráneo español; +: 1-2 ejemplares; ++: 3-10 ejemplares; +++: especie común, entre 11 y 100 ejemplares; ++++: abundante, más de 100 ejem- plares, encontrada en todos los muéstreos; m: solo encontradas conchas vacías o valvas, en el caso de bivalvos. Table I. List ofthe species found in the study area. The species in bold are commented in the text. Code: *: first record for the Spanish Mediterranean ; +: 1-2 specimens; ++: 3-10 specimens; + + +: common species, between 11 and 100 specimens; + + + +: very common, more than 100 specimens, found in all the samplings ; m: only empty shells ofvalves, in the case of bivalves. Clase POLYPLACOPHORA Familia LEPTOCHITONIDAE * Leptochiton cimicoides (Monterosato, 1 879) ++ Figs. 2-4 Familia HANLEYIDAE Hanleya hanleyi (Bean in Torpe, 1 844) ++ Familia ISCHNOCHITONIDAE Callochiton calcatus Dell'Angelo y Palazzi, 1 994 ++ Fig.5 Callochiton septemvalvis (Montagu, 1 803) ++ Familia ACANTHOCHITONIDAE Acanthochitona foscicularis (Linnaeus, 1 767) ++ m Clase GASTROPODA Familia ACMAEIDAE Acmaea virgínea (0. F. Müller, 1 776) ++ Familia LEPETELLIDAE Lepetella espinosae Dantart y Luque, 1 994 +++ Familia NERITIDAE Smaragdia viridis (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ m Familia FISSURELLIDAE Diodora gibberula (Lamarck, 1 822) ++ m Emarginula adriática (0. G. Costa, 1829) ++ m Emarginula fisura (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ m Emarginula rosea T. Bell, 1824 ++ m Emarginula sicula J. E. Gray, 1825 ++ m Familia SCISSURELLIDAE Scissurella costata d'Orbigny, 1 824 +++ Familia TROCHIDAE Clanculus cruciatus (Linnaeus, 1758) + m Jujubinus exasperatus (Pennant, 1 777) ++ m Jujubinus montagui (W. Wood, 1 828) ++++ Gibbula fanulum (Gmelin, 1791) ++ Gibbula guttadauri (Philippi, 1 836) ++ m Gibbula magus (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ Calliostoma conulus (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ Calliostoma granulatum (Von Born, 1778) +++ Calliostoma zizyphinum (Linnaeus, 1758) + Familia TURBINIDAE Bolma rugosa (Linnaeus, 1 767) ++ Familia TRICOLIIDAE Tricolia pullus pullus (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ m Tricolia speciosa (Von Mühlfeldt, 1 824) ++ m Familia CERITHIIDAE Ceritbium vulgatum Bruguiére, 1792 ++ m 22 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Bittium latreillii (Payraudeau, 1 826) ++++ Bittium reticulatum (da Costa, 1 77 8) ++ m Bittium submamillatum (de Rayneval y Ponzi, 1 854) +++ Familia TURRITELLIDAE Turritella communis Risso, 1 826 ++++ Turritella turbona Monterosato, 1877 +++ Familia TRIPHORIDAE Monophorus perversus (Linnaeus, 1758) + m Marshallora adversa (Montagu, 1 803) ++ Pogonodon pseudocanaricus (Bouchet, 1 985) ++ m Metaxia metaxae (delle Chiaje, 1 828) + m Familia CERITHIOPSIDAE Cerítbiopsis Wee/ Jeffreys, 1867 +++ Fig.9 Ceritbiopsis diadema Monterosato, 1874 ++ Cerithiopsis fayalensis Watson, 1 886 ++ Ceritbiopsis mínima (Brusina, 1 865) ++ m Ceritbiopsis scalaris Locard, 1 892 ++ m Ceritbiopsis sp. + m Figs. 6, 7 Cerithiopsis tubercularis (Montagu, 1 803) ++ Fig.8 Familia ACIDIDAE Aclis ascaris (Turton, 1819) + m Aclis minor (Brown, 1 827) ++ m Familia EPITONIIDAE Epitonium aculeatum (Alian, 1818) +++ Epitonium algerianum (Weinkauff, 1866) ++ m Epitonium commune (Lamarck, 1822) + m Epitonium linctum (de Boury y Monterosato, 1 890) + Epitonium Monis (Turton, 1819) ++ Opalia crenata (Linnaeus, 1 758) ++ m Opalia hellenica (Forbes, 1 844) ++ m Acirsa subdecussata (Cantraine, 1835) ++ Familia EULIMIDAE Eulima bilineata Alder, 1848 +++ Eulima glabra (da Costa, 1778) ++ Crinphtheiros comatulicola (Graff, 1875) ++ Curveulima devians (Monterosato, 1 884) + m Ersilia mediterránea (Monterosato, 1 869) + m Melanella frielei (Jordán, 1 895) +++ Melanella monterosatoi (Monterosato, 1 890) ++ Melanella polita (Linnaeus, 1758) +++ Melanella compactilis (Locard, 1 892) ++ Sticteulima ¡effreysiana (Brusina, 1869) ++ Vitreolina curva (Monterosato, 1 874) +++ Vitreolina perminima (Jeffreys, 1 883) +++ Vitreolina philippi (de Rayneval y Ponzi, 1854) +++ Familia RISSOIDAE Rissoa auriscalpium (Linnaeus, 1758) + m Rissoa guerinii Réduz, 1843 ++ m 23 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Rissoa ventricosa Desmarest, 1814 ++ m Rissoo violáceo Desmarest, 1814 ++ m Pusillina inconspicua (Alder, 1 844) ++++ Pusillina philippi (Aradas y Maggiore, 1 844) ++ m Alvania beani (Hanley ¡n Thorpe, 1 844) +++ m Alvanio cancellata (da Costa, 17/8) ++ m Alvania cimex (Linnaeus, 1758) + m Alvania geryonia (Nardo, 1 847) +++ m Alvania bispidula (Monterosato, 1884) ++ m Alvania punctura (Montagu, 1 803) +++ Alvania subcrenulata (Bucquoy, Dautzenberg y Dollfus, 1 884) + m Alvania teñera (Philippi, 1 844) + m Alvania testae (Aradas y Maggiore, 1 844) ++ Alvania zetlandica (Montagu, 1 805) ++ m Crisilla semistriata (Montagu, 1 808) + m Manzonia crassa (Kanmacher, 1 798) + m Obtusella intersecta (S. Wood, 1 857) +++ m Obtusella macilenta (Monterosato, 1 880) +++ Familia ADE0RBIDAE Circulus tricarinatus (S. Wood, 1 848) ++ Familia CAECIDAE Caecum subanulatum de Folin, 1 870 ++ Caecum tracbea (Montagu, 1 803) ++++ Familia IRAVADIIDAE Ceratia próxima (Forbes y Hanley, 1 850) +++ Hyala vitrea (Montagu, 1 803) +++ Familia VERMETIDAE Vermetus rugulosus Monterosato, 1 878 ++ m Familia AP0RRHAIIDAE Aporrhais pespelicani (Linnaeus, 1758) ++++ Familia CALYPTRAEIDAE Calyptraea cbinensis (Linnaeus, 1758) ++++ Crepidula unguiformis Lamarck, 1 822 +++ Familia CAPULI DAE Capulus ungaricus (Linnaeus, 1758) +++ Familia 1AMELLARIIDAE ¡.amellaría latens (0. F. Müller, 1 776) ++ m Familia TRIVI1DAE Trivio árctico (Pulteney, 1799) ++ m Familia ERAT0IDAE Erato voluta (Montagu, 1 803) +++ Familia 0VULIDAE Neosimnia spelta (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ Pseudosimnia carnea (Poiret, 1789) ++ Familia NATICIDAE Euspira macilenta (Philippi, 1 844) +++ Euspira pulchella [ Risso, 1826) +++ Familia ATIANTIDAE Atlanta fusca Souleyet, 1852 ++ m 24 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Familia MURICIDAE Bolinus brandaris (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ Hadriania craticuloides (Vokes, 1 964) ++ Hexaplex trunculus (Linnaeus, 1758) +++ Muricopsis aradasii (Poirier, 1 883 ex Monterosato ms.) + Muricopsis cristata (Brocchi, 1814) + m Ocenebfo erinacea (Linnaeus, 1 758) + m Ocinebrina aciculata (Lamarck, 1 822) ++ Tropbon muricatus (Montagu, 1 803) ++++ Familia CORALLIOPHILIDAE Coralliophila brevis (de Blainville, 1 832) ++ Coralliopbila squamosa (Ant. Bivona in And. Bivona, 1838) ++ Familia FASCIOIARIIDAE Fusinus pulchellus (Philippi, 1844) +++ Fusinus rostratus (Olivi, 1 792) ++ Familia BUCCINIDAE Chauvetia brunnea (Donovan, 1 804) + m Familia NASSARIIDAE Nassorius incrassatus (Stróm, 1 768) ++ m Nassarius pygmaeus (Lamarck, 1822) ++++ Cyclope peí lucida Risso, 1826 + m Familia COLUMBELLIDAE Mitrella minor (Scacchi, 1 836) ++ Familia CYSTISCIDAE Gibberula caelata (Monterosato, 1877) ++ m Gibberula miliaria (Linnaeus, 1758) + m Familia CANCELLARIIDAE Cancellaria similis G. B. Sowerby, 1 833 ++ Familia DRILLIIDAE Crassopleura maravignae (Ant. y And. Bivona, 1 838) ++ Familia TURRIDAE V Haedropleura septangularis (Montagu, 1 803) ++ m Familia CONIDAE Comarmondia gracilis (Montagu, 1 803) ++++ Mitrolumna olivoidea (Cantraine, 1 835) + m Drilliola emendata (Monterosato, 1 872) + m Bela brachystoma (Philippi, 1 844) ++++ Figs. 10, 11 Bela clarae Peñas y Rolan, 2008 +++ Bela fuscata (Deshayes, 1 835) ++ Figs. 12, 13 Bela menkborstim Aartsen, 1 988 +++ Bela nébula (Montagu, 1803) ++++ Figs. 14, 15 Bela ornato (Locard, 1 892) ++ m Figs. 16-18 Mangelia costata (Donovan 1 804) +++ Mangelia costulata (Risso, 1 826) ++++ Mangelia nuperrima (Tiberi, 1855) ++ Mangelia tenuicostata Brugnone, 1 868 +++ Mangelia unifasciata Deshayes, 1 835 ++++ Mangelia vauguelini (Payraudeau, 1826) + m Rapbitoma aequalis Jeffreys, 1 867 +++ Fig.22 Rapbitoma concinna (Scacchi, 1 836) + m 25 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Rophitoma corbis (Potiez y Michaud, 1 838) ++ m Raphitoma cordieri (Payraudeau, 1 826) ++ Fig.23 Rophitoma echinata (Brocchi, 1814) +++ Fig. 24 Raphitoma linearis (Montagu, 1 803) ++ m Teretia teres (Reeve, 1 844) +++ Familia ARCHITECTONICIDAE Basisulcata lepida (Bayer, 1 942) ++ Heliacus subvariegatus (d'Orbigny, 1 852) ++ m Philippia hybrida (Linnaeus, 1758) + m Pseudotorinia architae (0. 6. Costa, 1841) +++ Familia OMALOGYRIDAE Retrotortina fuscata Chaster, 1 896 + m Familia PYRAMIDELLIDAE Chrysallida clathrata (Jeffreys, 1 848) +++ Chrysallida dollfusi (Kobelt, 1 903) + Chrysallida emaciata (Brusina, 1 866) +++ Chrysallida fenestrata (Jeffreys, 1 848) ++ Chrysallida interstincta (J. Adams, 1797) ++ m Chrysallida juliae (de Folin, 1872) ++ m Chrysallida multicostata (Jeffreys, 1 884) +++ Figs. 25, 26 Chrysallida palazzii Micali, 1 984 ++ Chrysallida suturalis (Philippi, 1844) ++ Chrysallida terebellum (Philippi, 1 844) + m Eulimella acicula (Philippi, 1836) +++ Figs. 27, 28 Eulimella bogii van Aartsen, 1995 + m Eulimella scillae (Scacchi, 1835) + Eulimella ventricosa (Forbes, 1 844) +++ m Syrnola minuta (H. Adams, 1 869) ++ Megastomia conoidea (Brocchi, 1814) ++++ Megastomia conspicua (Alder, 1 850) ++ Odostomia acuta Jeffreys, 1 848 ++++ Odostomia angusta Jeffreys, 1 867 +++ Odostomia clavulus (Lovén, 1 846) +++ Odostomia kromi van Aartsen, Menkhorst y Gittenberger, 1 984 + m Odostomia unidentata (Montagu, 1 803) +++ Odostomia turriculata Monterosato, 1 869 ++ m Odostomia turrita Hanley, 1 844 ++ Ondina crystallina Locard, 1 892 + m Ondina dilucida (Monterosato, 1 884) +++ Ondina warreni (W. Thompson, 1 845) +++ Monillo acutissima Monterosato, 1 884 +++ Monillo gradata Bucquoy, Dautzenberd y Dollfus, 1 883 + m Monillo ¡effreysii (Forbes y Hanley, 1851) + m Monillo obliquata (Philippi, 1844) +++ Monillo postacuticostata Sacco, 1 892 + m Monillo pusilla (Philippi, 1 844) + m Monillo rufa (Philippi, 1 836) ++++ Figs. 29-32 Monillo striatula (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ m Bacteridium carinatum (de Folin 1 870) + m 26 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Familia ANISOCYCLIDAE Anisocycla gradata Moníerosato, 18/8 Anisocycla nitidísima (Montagu, 1 803) Familia TJAERNOIIDAE Tjaernoeia exquisita (Jeffreys, 1 883) Familia ACTEONIDAE Acteon tornatilis (Linnaeus, 1758) Familia DIAPHANIDAE Diaphanad. crética (Forbes, 1844) Diaphana minuta Brown, 1 827 Familia RETUSIDAE Retusa mammillata (Philippi, 1 836) Retusa truncatula (Bruguiére, 1 792) Cyliciinina crebrisculpta Monterosato, 1 884 Cylichnina umbilicata (Montagu, 1 803) Pyrunculus hoernesii (Weinkauff, 1 866) I /olvulella acuminata (Bruguiére, 1 792) Familia RINGICULIDAE Ringicula conformis Monterosato, 1 877 Familia HAMINOEIDAE Haminoea hydatis (Linnaeus, 1 758) Atys ¡effreysi (Weinkauff, 1 866) Weinkauffia turgidula (Forbes, 1 844) Familia PHILINIDAE Philine angulata Jeffreys, 1 867 Philine aperta (Linnaeus, 1767) Philine intricata (Monterosato, 1875) Philine scabra (Müller, 1784) * Jobania retifera (Forbes, 1 844) * Laona fíexuosa (M. Sars, 1 870) Laona pruinosa (W. Clark, 1 827) Familia CYLICHNIDAE Cylichna cylindracea (Pennant, 1 777) Roxania utriculus (Brocchi, 1814) Scaphander lignarius (Linnaeus, 1758) Familia CAVOLINIDAE Cavolinia inflexa (Lesueur, 1813) Clio pyramidata Linnaeus, 1767 Creseis acicula Rang, 1 828 Creseis virgula Rang, 1828 Familia LIMACINIDAE Limacina inflata (d'Orbigny, 1 836) Familia PLEUROBRANCHIDAE Bertbella sp. Familia UMBRACULIDAE + m ++ m + m +++ + m Figs. 35, 36 ++ Figs. 33, 34 ++ m + m ++++ ++ Figs. 37-39 + m +++ ++++ ++ m + m +++ ++ ++ m +++ m +++ m ++ Figs. 40-43 ++ Fig. 44 ++ Figs. 45-46 +++ +++ +++ +++ m ++ m ++ m ++ m ++ m + m Umbraculum mediterraneum (Lamarck, 1819) ++ Familia APLYSIIDAE Aplysia depilans Gmelin, 1791 ++ Aplysia fascista Poiret, 1789 ++ 27 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Clase BIVALVIA Familia NUCULIDAE Nuculo nitldosa Winckworth, 1930 Nucula sulcoto Bronn, 1831 Familia NUCULANIDAE Nuculana commutata (Philippi, 1 844) Nuculana pella (Linnaeus, 1 767) Familia ARCIDAE Arca tetrágono Poli, 1795 Sarbatia clathrata (Defrance, 1816) Anadara corbuloldes (Monterosato, 1 878) Batbyarca pectunculoides (Scacchi, 1 834) Batbyarca philippiana (Nyst, 1 848) Familia NOETIIDAE Striarca lácteo (Linnaeus, 1758) Familia GLYCYMERIDAE Glycymerls bimaculata (Poli, 1 795) Glycymerls glycymerls (Linnaeus, 1758) Familia MYTILIDAE Gregariella semlgranata (Reeve, 1858) Musculus subpictus (Cantraine, 1835) Musculus costulatus (Risso, 1826) Modlolus barbatus (Linnaeus, 1758) Modiolus adriaticus (Lamarck, 1819) Modiolula phaseolina (Philippi, 1844) Familia PECTINIDAE Pecten ¡acobeus (Linnaeus, 1758) Aequipecten commutatus (Monterosato, 1875) Aequipecten opercularis (Linnaeus, 1758) Lissopecten byalinus (Poli, 1795) Palllolum incomparablle (Risso, 1 826) Simillpecten similis (Laskey, 1811) Crassadoma multlstriata (Poli, 1 795) Cblamys flexuosa (Poli, 1 795) Chlamys pesfells (Linnaeus, 1758) Cblamys varia (Linnaeus, 1758) Familia ANOMIIDAE Anomia epblppium Linnaeus, 1758 Pododesmus patelllformis (Linnaeus, 1761) Familia LIMIDAE [¡mea loscombii (G. B. Sowerby 1, 1824) Llmatula subaurlculata (Montagu, 1 808) Familia LUCINIDAE Lucinella divarícata (Linnaeus, 1758) Anodonta fragills (Philippi, 1 836) Myrtea splnifera (Montagu, 1 803) Luclnoma borealis (Linnaeus, 1767) Familia THYASIRIDAE Jbyasira alleni Carroza, 1981 Jbyasira bipllcata (Philippi, 1 836) ++++ ++ ++ + m ++ ++ ++ +++ ++ ++ m ++ ++++ ++ ++ +++ ++++ ++ m +++ + ++ ++++ ++ m + m ++ ++++ ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ ++++ Figs. 47-49 28 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Thyasira croulinensis (Jeffreys, 1847) + Familia UNGULINIDAE Diplodonta trígona (Scacchi, 1835) +++ Diplodonta rotundata (Montagu, 1 803) ++ m Familia KELLIIDAE Kellia suborbicularis (Montagu, 1 803) +++ Familia LEPTONIDAE tepton squamosum (Montagu, 1 803) + m Hemilepton nitidum (Turton, 1 822) +++ Utigiella glabra (P. Fischer in de Folin y Périer, 1 873) ++ m Figs. 50, 51 Familia MONTACUTIDAE Montacuta ferruginosa (Montagu, 1 808) +++ m Figs. 52, 53 * Montacuta goudí van Aartsen, 1 966 +++ Figs. 54-57 Montacuta semirubra Gaglini, 1992 + m Figs. 64, 65 Montacuta substríata (Montagu, 1 808) +++ Figs. 66, 67 * Montacuta tenella Lovén, 1 846 ++ m Figs. 68-70 Kurtiella bidentata (Montagu, 1 803) ++++ Figs. 71-73 Kurtiella tumidula (Jeffreys, 1 866) ++ m Figs. 78-80 Coracuta obliquata (Chaster, 1897) ++ Figs. 74-77 Epilepton clarkiae (W. Clark, 1 852) +++ Figs. 81-83 Mioerycina phascolionis (Dautzenberg y Fischer, 1925) ++ m Figs. 58-63 Familia SPORTELLIDAE * Sportella recóndita (P. Fischer in de Folin, 1 872) + m Figs. 84-86 Familia CARDITIDAE Glans aculeata (Poli, 1 795) ++ Familia ASTARTIDAE Astarte fusca (Poli, 1795) ++ Astarte sulcata (da Costa, 1 778) + m Goodallia triangularis (Montagu, 1 803) +++ Familia CARDIIDAE Acanthocardia aculeata (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ Acantbocardia ecbinata (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ Acanthocardia paucicostata (G. B. Sowerby II, 1841) +++ Parvicardium mínimum (Philippi, 1 836) ++++ Parvicardium scabrum (Philippi, 1 844) +++ Plagiocardium papillosum (Poli, 1795) +++ Laevicardium crassum (Gmelin, 1791) +++ Loevicardium oblongum (Gmelin, 1791) + m Familia MACTRIDAE Spisula subtruncata (da Costa, 1 778) ++++ Familia PHARIDAE Pbaxas pellucidus (Pennant, 1777) ++++ Familia TELLINIDAE Tellina distorta Poli, 1791 +++ Tellina incarnata Linnaeus, 1758 ++ m Tellina serrata Brocchi, 1814 +++ Arcopagia balaustina (Linnaeus, 1758) +++ Arcopagia crassa (Pennant, 1 777) ++ Familia DONACIDAE Capsella variegata (Gmelin, 1791) ++ m 29 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Tabla I. Continuación. Table I. Continuation. Familia PSAMMOBIIDAE Gari costulata (Turton, 1 822) ++ Gari fervensis (Gmelin, 1/91) +++ Familia SEMELIDAE Ervilia castanea (Montagu, 1 803) + Abra alba (W. Wood, 1 802) ++++ Abra prismática (Montagu, 1 808) ++++ Familia SOLECURTIDAE Solecurtus scopula (Turton, 1 822) + Azorinus cbamasolen (da Costa, 1778) ++ Familia TRAPEZIIDAE Coralliophaga litbopbagella (Lamarck, 1819) ++ Familia VENERIDAE Venus casino Linnaeus, 1758 ++ Clausinella fasciata (da Costa, 1778) +++ Jimoclea ovata (Pennant, 1 777) ++++ Gouldia mínima (Montagu, 1 803) ++++ Dosinia lupinus (Linnaeus, 1 7 58) ++++ Pitar mediterráneo (Tiberi, 1 855) +++ Callista chione (Linnaeus, 1758) ++ Papbia aurea (Gmelin, 1 79 1 ) +++ Familia CORBULIDAE Corbula gibba (Olivi, 1792) ++++ Familia HIATELLIDAE Hiatella árctico (Linnaeus, 1767) +++ Saxicavella jeffreysi Winkworth, 1 930 + Familia XYLOPHAGIDAE Xylophaga dorsalis (Turton, 1819) ++ Xylophaga praestans E. A. Smith, 1 903 ++ Familia THRACIIDAE Thracia papyracea (Poli, 1791) ++ Thracia villosiuscula (MacGillivray, 1 827) +++ Familia PANDORIIDAE Pandora pinna (Montagu, 1 803) ++++ Familia LYONSIIDAE Lyonsia norwegica (Gmelin, 1791) +++ Familia P0R0MYIDAE Poromya granulata (Nyst y Westerdorp, 1 839) + Familia CUSPIDARIIDAE Cuspidaria cuspidata (Olivi, 1792) +++ Cuspidaria rostrata (Spengler, 1793) + Cardiomya costellata (Deshayes, 1 835) +++ Clase SCAPHOPODA Familia DENTAUIDAE Dentalium inaequicostatum Bucquoy, Dautzenb. y Dollfus, 1981 ++++ Dentalium panormum Chenu, 1858 ++ Familia GADILIDAE Dischides politus (S. Wood, 1 842) ++++ m m Figs. 87-92 Figs. 93-95 m 30 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona ++: entre 3 y 10 ejemplares encontrados; +++: especie común, encontrada en casi todos los muéstreos; ++++: especie abundante, numerosos ejemplares encontrados en todos los muéstreos. En la siguiente columna se indican con una (m) las especies de las que sólo se han encontrado conchas vacías, o solo valvas, en el caso de bivalvos, indicando con ello que probablemente no habitan estos fondos. En la última columna se señalan con un número las especies ilus- tradas, indicando dicho número con el de la figura correspondiente. DISCUSIÓN Comentarios sobre algunos taxones De la mayoría de especies aquí citadas existen fotografías y descripcio- nes actualizadas en la literatura. En este apartado nos hemos limitado a comen- tar algunos taxones que nos han pare- cido de mayor interés, por su rareza o porque se aporta nueva información sobre ellos. De todas esas especies reportamos fotografías, la mayoría al microscopio electrónico de barrido (MEB). Leptochiton cimicoides (Monterosato, 1879) (Figs. 2-4) Chiton cimicoides Monterosato, 1879. Gior. Se. Nat. ed Econ., 14: 23 (nomen novum pro Chiton minimus Monterosato, 1878, non Gmelin, 1791 nec Spengler, 1797) Lepidopleurus intermedius Salvini-Plawen, 1968. Ann. Nat. Mus. Wien, 72: 251, láms. 6-8, figs. 44-57. Material examinado: 4 e. Maluquer (1915) cita esta especie Rosellón francés, pero la creía ausente de como Chiton minimus Monterosato, 1872 aguas de Cataluña. Se cita aquí por para aguas cercanas del Golfo de León y primera vez para el Mediterráneo español. Callochiton calcatus Dell' Angelo y Palazzi, 1994 (Fig. 5) Callochiton calcatus Dell' Angelo y Palazzi, 1994. La Conchiglia, 26 (273): 15, figs. 1-12, 14-19, 20B. [Localidad tipo: Villasimius, Cagliari, 80-100 m], Chiton laevis var. navícula Jeffreys, 1865 (nomen dubium). Material examinado: 2 e. Esta especie la citan Dell' Angelo y Smriglio (2001) para las Islas Baleares (Formentera) y consideran que proba- blemente vive asociada a algas calcá- reas, sin embargo en la zona de estudio las arenas son silíceas, muy alejadas de fondos de maérl. Los ejemplares se encontraron sobre valvas vacías de bivalvos. Se cita aquí por primera vez para aguas de la Península Ibérica. Cerithiopsis harleei Jeffreys, 1867 (Fig. 9) Cerithiopsis harleei Jeffreys, 1867. Brit. Conch., 4: 268. Cerithiopsis acuminata Hallgas, 1985 ex Monterosato ms. Notiz. CISMA, 7 (1-2) 15, figs. 1-3. Material examinado: 20 e en el área de estudio, más de 400 ejemplares en aguas próximas entre 25 y 100 m de profundidad. Se confirma aquí el hábitat de esta Graham (1982) y por Lugli y Palazzi especie, ya indicado por Fretter y (1991), quienes, además, consideran C. 31 Iberusy 27 (1), 2009 acuminata sinónimo júnior de C. barleei. Todos los ejemplares aquí censados se encontraron viviendo dentro de la esponja Suberites domuncula (Olivi, 1792), de la que se alimentan. En ocasio- nes se han encontrado más de 10 ejem- plares dentro de una esponja. Esta esponja se desarrolla sobre conchas ocu- padas por el cangrejo ermitaño Paguris- tes oculatus (Fabricius, 1775). Cerithiopsis sp. (Figs. 6, 7) Material examinado: 1 c. A primera vista esta concha parece una forma más pequeña de C. tubercularis, sin embargo la protoconcha presenta algunas diferencias, además de tener una menor altura: en C. tubercularis (Fig. 8) es lisa, con un cordoncillo, a modo de carena, justo sobre la sutura y un principio de costillas axiales justo bajo ella, mientras que en C. sp. sobre el cordoncillo suprasutural se encuenta un surco más ancho lleno de minúsculos gránulos. Otras especies, como C. barleei tienen una protoconcha diferente (Fig. 9). El hallazgo de una sola concha no nos permite apreciar diferencias suficien- tes para su descripción como nueva especie. El ejemplar mide 2.6 x 0.8 mm. Género Bela Leach in Gray, 1847 Bela brachystoma (Philippi, 1844) (Figs. 10, 11). En este fondo es la especie más abundante entre los gasterópodos, de la que se han encontrado más de 600 especímenes y gran número de conchas. Bela clarae Peñas y Rolán, 2008 y Bela menkhorsti van Aartsen, 1988. Ver en Peñas, Rolán y Ballesteros (2008) descripción de la primera y comentarios sobre ambas especies. Bela laevigata (Philippi, 1836). No ha sido encontrado ningún ejemplar ni concha vacía en este fondo, ni tampoco en la cercana pradera de P. oceánica (Pe- ñas y Almera, 2001). Después del estu- dio del material tipo de Raphitoma zonata Locard, 1892, ocho sintipos del MNHN, se considera que esta especie es sinó- nimo de B. laevigata. Se ilustran aquí tres conchas del material tipo (Figs. 19-21). Bela ornata (Locard, 1892). Solamente se han encontrado 4 conchas de esta especie. Se ilustran aquí 3 sintipos del MNHN, procedentes de St. Raphael, Saint Tropez (Figs. 16-18). Bela nébula (Montagu, 1803) (Figs. 14, 15). Test. Brit., 267, lám. 15, fig. 6. Junto con B. brachystoma son las especies pre- dominantes de este género y dominan- tes entre los gasterópodos en esta bioce- nosis, de la cual se han encontrado 180 ejemplares y más de 300 conchas. Péres y Picard (1964) consideran esta especie "característica preferente" de fondos arenosos infralitorales denominados "Sables Fins Bien Calibrés" (SFBC). Picard (1965) la considera "caracterís- tica exclusiva" y también Biagi y Corse- lli (1984), quienes constatan, además, que es el gasterópodo más abundante en un fondo SFBC del Golfo de Baratti, Italia. Sin embargo, la especie domi- nante de este género en fondos SFBC estudiados por nosotros en varias locali- dades del infralitoral catalán es Bela lae- vigata (Philippi, 1836). Eulimella acicula Philippi, 1836 (Figs. 27, 28) Melania acicula Philippi, 1836. Enum. Mollusc. Sicil., 135. [Localidad tipo: Pleistoceno de Sicilia]. Pyramis laevis Brown, 1827. III. Rec. Conch. G. Brit. and Ir., lám 50, figs. 51 y 52 (nomen dubium). ? Eulima subcylindrata Dunker in Weinkauff, 1862. Jour. Conchyl., 10, 342, lám. 13, fig. 7. 32 PEÑAS ET AL. : Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 2-4. Leptochiton cimicoides (Monterosato, 1879). 2: concha, 1,6 mm; 3: detalle del peri- noto; 4: detalle de la microescultura de las valvas. Fig. 5. Callochiton calcatus Dell’Angelo y Palazzi, 1994, concha, 3,6 mm. Figuras 6, 7. Cerithiopsis sp. 6: concha, 2,3 mm; 7: protoconcha. Figura 8. Protoconcha de Cerithiopsis tubercularis (Montagu, 1803). Figura 9. Protoconcha de Cerithiopsis barleei Jeffreys, 1867. Figures 2-4. Leptochiton cimicoides (Monterosato, 1879). 2: shell, 1.6 mm; 3: detail ofgirdle; 4: detail ofvalve microsculpture. Fig. 5. Callochiton calcatus Dell’ Angelo and Palazzi, 1994, shell, 5.6 mm. Figures 6, 7. Cerithiopsis sp. 6: shell, 2.5 mm; 7: protoconch. Figura 8. Protoconch o/Cerithiop- sis tubercularis ( Montagu , 1803). Figura 9. Protoconch o/Cerithiopsis barleei Jeffreys, 1867. 33 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Odostomia sállete var. compactilis Jeffreys, 1867. Brit. Conch., 4: 169. Eulimella commutata Monterosato, 1884. Nomec. Genérica: 98. Material examinado: 15 e, 80 c. Después del estudio de más de 200 conchas procedentes del Mediterráneo, Golfo de Vizcaya, África Occidental (Mauritania) e Islas Canarias pertene- cientes a este grupo, mantenemos la opinión ya expresada en Peñas y Rolán (1997) y dudamos de que existan dos especies diferentes, según defienden Nofroni y Tringali (1995). Ciertamente existen dos formas extremas en cuanto al diámetro y altura de la protoconcha y diámetro de las primeras vueltas de la teloconcha. La figura 28 correspondería a E. subcylindrata, con un diámetro de protoconcha de 235 jum y una altura de 125 jum, y con microescultura espiral en la teloconcha; y la figura 27 correspon- dería a E. acicula, con un diámetro de protoconcha de 255 py una altura de 160 jum, sin microescultura espiral. Ambas formas extremas proceden del mismo fondo aquí estudiado. No obs- tante, en este fondo y también en otros estudiados se encuentran formas y diá- metro de protoconchas intermedios, ejemplares de ambos taxones con y sin microescultura espiral; además, ambas formas conviven en todas las profundi- dades estudiadas y no se ha podido constatar que una de ellas sea típica de una determinada bicenosis o de una determinada profundidad. Turbonilla rufa (Philippi, 1836) (Figs. 29-32) Melania rufa Philippi, 1836. Enum. Molí. Sic., 1: 156, lám. 9, fig. 7 [Localidad tipo: Magnisi, Sicilia]. Chemnitzia densecostata Philippi, 1844. Molí. Sic. II: 132, lám. 24, fig. 9. Odostomia formosa Jeffreys, 1848. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 2 (2): 347, lám. 26, fig. 10. Material examinado: 280 e, 140 c. Solustri Y Micali (2004) siempre encontraron esta especie en fondos are- nosos (entre el 80% y 100% de arena), y la consideran típica de esos fondos; sin embargo, los más de 400 ejemplares obtenidos, la mayoría vivos, en la zona de estudio, que es un fondo detrítico fangoso, no arenoso, nos inclina a pensar que la causa de tal abundancia se debe a la mayor o menor presencia de la especie o especies a las que parasita. Desconocemos con exactitud a qué espe- cies parasita; probablemente el serpú- lido Ditrupa. Todos los ejemplares obtenidos en esta biocenosis pertenecen a una de las dos formas que se encuentran en el Mediterráneo: concha unicolor, castaño oscuro en ejemplares vivos o frescos, estrecha, protoconcha con un diámetro de unas 255-260 jum. Philippi (1836) ilustra una concha monocolor y creemos que nuestros ejemplares pertenecen a esa forma. La concha ilustrada en Peñas y Rolán (1997), procedente del Atlán- tico sahariano pertenece a la forma más ancha, bicolor, con un diámetro de pro- toconcha de 300-310 ¡um. La protocon- cha (Fig. 32) procedente de Mijas, Málaga, pertenece a este segundo grupo y también pertenece a esta forma la ilus- trada en Fretter, Graham y Andrews (1986), como T. crenata (Brown, 1827). No hemos examinado el material tipo de ninguna de ellas y, en consecuencia, no podemos afirmar categóricamente qué taxones son válidos y cuales sinóni- mos, pero después del estudio de gran cantidad de conchas del Mediterráneo y Atlántico oriental, incluidas las proce- dentes de las colecciones del MNCN y del BMNH, nos inclinamos por la exis- tencia de dos especies válidas: T. rufa y T. crenata. 34 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 10, 11. Bela brachystoma (Philippi, 1844), 4,3 y 4,0 mm. Figuras 12, 13. Bela fuscata (Des- hayes, 1833), 9,0 y 10,2 mm. Figuras 14, 15. Bela nébula (Montagu, 1803), 6,7 y 7,7 mm. Figuras 16-18. Bela ornata (Locard, 1897), 7,4, 7,6 y 6,5 mm, sintipos (MNHN). Figuras 19-21. Bela zonata (Locard, 1892), 4,3, 6,4, 7,5 mm, sintipos (MNHN). Figura 22. Raphitoma aequalis Jef- freys, 1867, 4,2 mm. Figura 23. Raphitoma cordieri (Payraudeau, 1826), 7,1 mm. Figura 24. Rap- hitoma echinata (Brocchi, 1814), 9,6 mm. Figures 10, 11. Bela brachystoma (Philippi, 1844), 4.3 and 4.0 mm. Figures 12, 13. Bela fuscata (Deshayes, 1835), 9.0 and 10.2 mm. Figures 14, 15. Bela nébula (Montagu, 1803), 6.7 and 7.7 mm. Figures 16-18. Bela ornata (Locard, 1897), 7.4, 7.6 and 6.5 mm, syntypes (MNHN). Figures 19-21. Bela zonata (Locard, 1892), 4.3, 6.4 and 7.5 mm, syntypes (MNHN). Figure 22. Raphitoma aequa- lis Jeffreys, 1867, 4.2 mm. Figure 23. Raphitoma cordieri (Payraudeau, 1826), 7.1 mm. Figure 24. Raphitoma echinata (Brocchi, 1814), 9.6 mm. 35 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Figuras 25, 26. Chrysallida multicostata (Jeffreys, 1884). 25: concha, 2 mm; 26: protoconcha. Figuras 27, 28. Protoconchas de Eulimella acicula (Philippi, 1836). 27: forma subcylindrica ; 28: forma acicula. Figuras 29-32. Turbonilla rufa (Philippi, 1836). 29, 30: conchas de 7,3 y 4,5 mm, Vilassar; 31: protoconcha de un ejemplar de Vilassar; 32: protoconcha de un ejemplar de Mijas Costa (Málaga). Figures 25, 26. Chrysallida multicostata (Jejfreys, 1884), 25: shell, 2 mm; 26: protoconch. Figures 27, 28. Protoconcha ¿^Eulimella acicula (Philippi, 1836). 27: subcylindrica morph; 28: acicula morph. Figures 29-32. Turbonilla rufa ( Philippi , 1836). 29, 30: shells 7.3 and 4.5 mm, Vilassar; 31: proto- conch of a specimen from Vilassar; 32: protoconch of a specimen from Mijas Costa (Málaga). 36 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 33, 34. Diaphana minuta Brown, 1827. 33: concha, 4,3 mm; 34: protoconcha. Figuras 33, 36. Diaphana cf. crética (Forbes, 1844). 35: concha, 2,5 mm; 36: protoconcha. Figuras 37-39. Cylichnina umbilicata (Montagu, 1803). 37: concha, 2,1 mm; 38: microescultura; 39: ápice. Figures 33, 34. Diaphana minuta Brown, 1827. 33: shell, 4.3 mm; 34: protoconch. Figures 33, 36. Diaphana cf. crética (Forbes, 1844). 33: shell, 2.3 mm; 36: protoconch. Figures 37-39. Cylichnina umbilicata (Montagu , 1803). 37: shell, 2.1 mm; 38: microsculpture; 39: apex. 37 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Diaphana minuta Brown, 1827 (Figs. 33, 34) Diaphana minuta Brown, 1827. Illust. Conch. Gr. Brit. And Ir., 1: lám. 38, figs. 7-8. [Localidad tipo: Loch Torridon, Escocia, Gran Bretaña], Amphisphyra expansa Jeffreys, 1865. Rep. Brit. Ass. Advanc. Sci., 1864: 330-332. Material examinado: 3 c. Esta especie, redescrita por Schi0tte (1998), tiene una forma pentagonal, lisa, salvo las líneas de crecimiento, espira acu- minada o ligeramente cóncava, la última vuelta ovalada de perfil; protoconcha planctotrófica de unas 1.5 vueltas, con un diámetro de unas 300 jum y un ángulo de 135° respecto al eje de la teloconcha. Diaphana cf. crética (Forbes, 1844) (Figs. 35, 36) Bulla crética Forbes, 1844. Rep. Brit. Ass. Advanc. Sci., 1843: 188. [Localidad tipo: Creta, 218 m]. Material examinado: 1 c. A primera vista la concha de esta especie parece más bien pertenecer a Diaphana globosa (Lovén, 1846), citada para el Atlántico norte europeo, por el perfil globoso de la concha y espira más claramente cóncava, mientras que D. crética, especie mediterránea, tiene un hombro más anguloso y la espira más bien acuminada, con la protoconcha emergida; sin embargo la primera tiene una protoconcha mucho mayor, con un diámetro mayor de 450 ¡um y unas 2 vueltas de media, mientras que D. crética tiene una protoconcha menor de 370 jum y 1,7 vueltas, según SCHI0TTE (1998). Nuestro ejemplar mide 2.5 x 2.2 mm y la protoconcha tiene un diámetro de 320 jum con 1.3 vueltas, lo que nos inclina a considerar nuestra especie más cercana a D. crética. Se cita aquí por primera vez para el Mediterráneo español. Johania retifera (Forbes, 1844) (Figs. 40-43) Bulla retifera Forbes, 1844. Rept. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci. (1843), 13: 187. [Localidad tipo: Seripho, Mar Egeo], Bulla vestita Philippi, 1844. Enum. Mollusc. Siciliae, vol 2: 95, lám. 20, fig. 4. Material examinado: 3 e, 5 c. Esta rara especie fue fotografiada por primera vez por Piani y Turolla (1980), apenas citada anteriormente, quienes también discuten la sinonimia con J. vestita. La concha (Fig. 40) es oval, frágil, de color crema a castaño claro en ejemplares vivos o frescos, blanquecino en conchas muertas. La microescultura (Fig. 41) está formada por un complejo entramado con múltiples huecos comu- nicados entre sí, y salientes en forma de nodulos elevados en los cruces. La rádula (Figs. 42, 43) se deshace fácil- mente y parece estar formada por dientes marginales con una base ancha, cóncava, de la que parte una zona pro- minente que se curva a su extremo. Malaquias (2004, fig. 3-D) ilustra el lectotipo de Philine trachyostraca Watson, 1897, cuya escultura no presenta dife- rencias con la de /. retifera, aunque en la forma de la concha de esa especie parece más cercana a L. pruinosa. Se cita aquí por primera vez para el Mediterráneo español y por primera vez se fotografía la rádula. 38 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 40-43 . Johania retifera (Forbes, 1844). 40: concha, 4,3 mm: 41: microescultura; 42, 43: rádula. Figura 44. Laona flexuosa (M. Sars, 1870), concha, 4,4 mm. Figuras 45, 46. Laona pruinosa (W. Clark, 1827). 45: concha, 3,5 mm; 46: detalle de la microescultura. Figures 40-43. Johania retifera (Forbes, 1844). 40: shell, 4.3 mm: 41: microsculpture; 42, 43: radula. Figure 44. Laona flexuosa (M. Sars, 1870), shell, 4.4 mm. Figures 45, 46. Laona pruinosa (W. Clark, 1827). 45: shell, 3.5 mm; 46: detall ofthe microsculpture. 39 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Figuras 47-49. Thyasira alleni Carroza, 1981, valvas, 2,3, 1,8 y 1,7 mm. Figuras 30, 51. Litigiella glabra (P. Fischer in de Folin y Périer, 1873), valvas del mismo ejemplar, 2,9 mm. Figuras 52, 53. Montacuta ferruginosa (Montagu, 1808), valvas del mismo ejemplar, 2,5 mm. Figures 47-49. Thyasira alleni Carroza, 1981, valves, 2.3, 1.8 and 1.7 mm. Figures 50, 51. Litigiella glabra (P. Fischer in de Folin and Périer, 1873), valves of the same specimen, 2,9 mm. Figures 52, 53. Montacuta ferruginosa (Montagu, 1808), valves ofthe same specimen, 2.5 mm. Laona flexuosa (M. Sars, 1870) (Fig. 44) Philine flexuosa M. Sars, 1870. NytMag. Naturvid., 17: 113. Philine membranácea Monterosato, 1880. Bull. Soc. Malac. Italiana, 6: 78 ( nomen nudum). Material examinado: 1 e, 1 c. Concha (Fig. 44) oval-globosa, muy frágil, blanca, sin escultura salvo las líneas de crecimiento, espira cóncava, la última vuelta cubre las anteriores, labro interior ligeramente incurvado hacia el exterior, ombligo estrecho. Gaglini (1991) ilustra una concha de la colec- ción de Monterosato con la etiqueta Philine membranácea, la cual tiene un perfil más globoso que las aquí ilustra- das, pero sin otras diferencias aprecia- bles. La presente es la primera cita para el Mediterráneo español. 40 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 54-57. Montacuta goudi van Aartsen, 1996, valvas, 2,3, 2,1, 2,2 y 2,5 mm. 54, 55: visión exterior; 56, 57: visión interior. Figuras 58-63. Mioerycina phascolionis (Dautzenberg y Fischer, 1925), valvas, 3,2, 2,3, 1,7, 2,5, 2,7 y 1,9 mm. Figures 54-57. Montacuta goudi van Aartsen, 19 96, valves, 2.3, 2. 1, 2.2 and 2.5 mm. 54, 55: outer view; 56, 57: inner view. Figures 58-63. Mioerycina phascolionis (Dautzenberg and Fischer, 1925), valves, 3.2, 2.3, 1.7, 2.5, 2.7 and 1.9 mm. 41 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Laona pruinosa (W. Clark, 1827) (Figs. 45, 46) Bullaea pruinosa W. Clark, 1827. Zool. Journ., 3 (11): 339-340 [Localidad tipo: Budley Salterton, Devon, Inglaterra]. Philine granulosa M. Sars, 1869. Fórhandl. Vindesk. Krist., 246-275. Material examinado: 2 e, 4 c. Concha (Fig. 45) oval, frágil, color crema, no transparente. La superficie (Fig. 46) está formada por cordoncillos espirales irregulares, muy rugosos, fácil- mente desprendibles, y en ese caso la superficie forma una fina retícula. Las únicas citas anteriores para el Mediterráneo español son las de Giribet y Peñas (1997) para la comarca del Garraf, Barcelona y la cita de Oliver baldoví (2007) para Cullera, Va- lencia. Litigiella glabra (P. Fischer, 1873) (Figs. 50, 51) Lepton glabrum P. Fischer, 1873. Les fonds de la mer (1873), 2: 83-84, lám. 2, fig. 9. [Localidad tipo: Laredo, norte de España]. Erycina cuenoti Lamy, 1908. Jour. Conchyl., 56: 35-37, figs. 1-4.. Montacuta perezi Pelseneer, 1906. Bull. Acad. Roy. Belg., 12: 1146-1147. Material examinado: 1 e + 2 v. Se caracteriza por tener dos pequeños dientes cardinales en la valva izquierda y uno en la valva derecha y tener diente lateral en ambas valvas. Hoeksema, van Aartsen, Keukelaar-Van der Berge, van Nieulande y Simons (1995) redes- criben esta especie, citándola por primera vez para aguas españolas en el Atlántico (Huelva), Cantábrico (Laredo) y Medite- rráneo (San Carlos de la Rápita y Calpe). Bogi, Coppini y Margelli (1992) la citan para aguas de Italia, y resaltan el perfil si- nuoso del borde de ambas valvas en la zona ventral y umbonal. Aquí se cita por segunda vez para el Mediterráneo español. Montacuta ferruginosa (Montagu, 1808) (Figs. 52, 53) My a ferruginosa Montagu, 1808. Test. Brit., 2 suppl.: 22, 166, lám. 26, fig. 2. Tellimya oblonga Turton, 1822. A survey and illust. catalogue... (Molí. Bival.) Erycina onodon Philippi, 1836. Enum. Mollusc. Siciliae. Thracia elongata Philippi, 1844. Abbild. Und Bresch. Material examinado: 5 v. Concha (Figs. 52, 53) de perfil elíptico, frágil, color blanco, periostraco delgado amarillento, con depósitos ferruginosos, resultado de las secreciones de los erizos con los que vive de comensal; sin diente cardinal, dientes laterales poco desarro- llados, umbo situado en la mitad poste- rior; la especie se identifica fácilmente por la zona cóncava en el borde anterior junto al umbo, determinando una especie de diente. Especie típica de fondos detrí- tico fangosos vive preferentemente comensal con Echinocardium cordatum y Spatangus purpureus. Montacuta goudi van Aartsen, 1996 (Figs. 54-57) 42 PEÑAS ETAL.\ Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 64, 65. Montacuta semirubra Gaglini, 1992, valvas, 4,2 y 4,2 mm. Figuras 66, 67. Montacuta substriata (Montagu, 1808). 66: dos conchas (ambas de 1,5 mm) adheridas a una espí- cula de erizo; 67: detalle de una de ellas. Figuras 68-70. Montacuta tenella Lovén, 1846. 68, 69: valvas del mismo ejemplar, 1,8 mm. 70: prodisoconcha. Figures 64, 65. Montacuta semirubra Gaglini, 1992, valves, 4.2 and 4.2 mm. Figures 66, 67. Montacuta substriata (Montagu, 1808). 66: two shells (both 1.5 mm) attached to an urchin spine; 67: detail ofone ofthem. Figures 68-70. Montacuta tenella Lovén, 1846. 68, 69: valves ofthe same speci- men, 1.8 mm. 70: prodissoconch. 43 Iberusy 27 (1), 2009 Montacuta goudi van Aartsen, 1996. La Conchiglia, 28 (281): 27, figs. 1L, IR, 2L, 2R. [Localidad tipo: Punta Umbría, Huelva, España]. Material examinado: 5 e + 40 v. Especie muy frágil, semitranspa- rente, muy inequilateral, valvas algo inchadas, con la charnela poco evidente, sin diente cardinal. Descrita para aguas atlánticas del sur de España (Punta Umbría, Huelva) y de Canarias, fue citada por primera vez para el Medite- rráneo en Malta por Cachia, Mifsud y Sammut (2004). Margeli et al. (2006) la citan para Italia. Rueda, Salas y Gofas (2000) la citan para la bahía de Barbate, cerca del Estrecho de Gibraltar y Borja y Mixika (2001) para el Golfo de Vizcaya. Aquí se cita por primera vez para el Mediterráneo español, siendo común en el tipo de fondo estudiado. Montacuta semirubra Gaglini, 1992 (Figs. 64, 65) Montacuta semirubra Gaglini, 1992. Argonauta, 7, 1-6 (37): 178, figs. 165, 166. [Localidad tipo: Palermo]. Montacuta semirubra Monterosato, 1872 (nomen nudum). Montacuta cuneata Gaglini, 1992. Argonauta, 7, 1-6 (37): 178, figs. 163, 164. Material examinado: 4 v. Esta rara especie mediterránea fue citada por Monterosato (1872) pero no descrita; vive asociada a Spatangus pur- pureus. Gaglini (1992) la describe coha- bitando con Montacuta substriata. Se citó por primera vez para aguas españolas por Peñas y Giribet (2003) en la comarca del Garraf (Barcelona), a una profundidad de 105 m. Se cita aquí por segunda vez para el Mediterráneo español. Bogi y van Aartsen (2006) la citan para varias localidades del Medite- rráneo Central y Oriental hasta una pro- fundidad de 400 m y defienden que esta especie debería ubicarse en el género Tellimya, tras el estudio de la charnela. Montacuta substriata (Montagu, 1808) (Figs. 66, 67) Ligula substriata Montagu, 1808. Test. Brit., 2, suppl. 25. Material examinado: 25 e + 110 v. Esta especie, caracterizada por sus costillas radiales, tiene un periostraco delgado de color castaño, muy brillante; carece de diente cardinal y no tiene cla- ramente desarrollado el diente lateral posterior. Común en el área de estudio. ha sido recolectada cogida por el biso a las espinas de Spatangus purpureus (Fig. 66), erizo común en estos fondos. Tebble (1976) la cita asociada también a Echinocardium flavescens (O. F. Müller, 1776). Montacuta tenella Lovén 1846 (Figs. 68-70) Montacuta tenella Lovén, 1846. Index. Molí. Scand .: 43. Decipula ovata Friele, 1876. Forh Viden. Selsk. Krist. (1875): 57. Tellimya ovalis G. O. Sars, 1878. Molí. Reg. Arct. Norv.: 341, lám. 34, figs. la-c. Material examinado: 3 v. 44 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 71-73. Kurtiella bidentata (Montagu, 1803), valvas, 2,7, 2,4 y 2,5 mm. Figuras 74-77. Coracuta obliquata (Chaster, 1897). 75, 76: valvas, 1,9, 1,9 y 1,9 mm; 77: prodisoconcha. Figures 71-73. Kurtiella bidentata ( Montagu , 1803), valves, 2.7, 2.4 and 2.5 mm. Figures 74-77. Coracuta obliquata (Chaster, 1897). 75, 76: valves, 1.9, 1.9 and 1.9 mm; 77: prodissoconch. 45 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Figuras 78-80. Kurtiella tumidula (Jeffreys, 1866). Valvas, 2,4, 2,4 y 2,5 mm. Figuras 81-83. Epi- lepton clarkiae (W. Clark, 1852), valvas, 1,6, 2,4 y 1,6 mm. Figures 78-80. Kurtiella tumidula (Jeffreys, 1866). Valves, 2.4, 2.4 and 2.5 mm. Figures 81-83. Epilepton clarkiae (W. Clark, 1852), valves, 1.6, 2.4 and 1.6 mm. Especie muy frágil, subelíptica, con una charnela poco desarrollada, sin diente cardinal. Kallonas, Zenetos y Gofas (1999) la citan por primera vez para el Mediterráneo, en Grecia, viviendo asociada al equinodermo Brissopsis lyri- fera (Forbes, 1841). Las citas posteriores en el Mediterráneo son escasas: una valva izquierda en sedimento de una gruta en Taormina, Sicilia (Palazzi y Villari, 2001) y una valva derecha en el Adriático meridional (Micali, Tisselli y Giunchi, 2006) La cita en el fondo aquí estudiado representa la primera para el Mediterráneo español, en el que se han encontrado solamente tres valvas. 46 PEÑAS ET AL.\ Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 84-86. Sportella recóndita (P. Fischer in de Folin, 1872). 84, 85: valvas, 5,3 y 5,6 mm; 86: microescultura. Figures 84-86. Sportella recóndita (P. Fischer in de Folin, 1872). 84, 85: valves, 5.3 and 5.6 mm; 86: microsculpture. Kurtiella loidentata (Montagu, 1803) (Figs. 71-73) Mya bidentata Montagu, 1803. Test. Brit., 1: 44, lám. 26, fig. 5. [Localidad tipo: Salcombe, Inglate- rra]. Erycina nucleata Récluz, 1844. Rev. Zool., 7: 328. Arcinella laevis Philippi, 1844. En. Molí, vol. 2: 54, lám. 16, fig. 10. Mesodesma exiguum Lovén, 1846. Of. Kong. Vet. Ac. Fór., 196. Material examinado: 40 e y más de 200 v. Gofas y Salas (2008) consideran que en el género Mysella Angas, 1877, cuya especie tipo es Mysella anómala Angas, 1877, no deben ser incluidas las especies del grupo de Mya bidentata, que viven en el Atlántico europeo y Medite- rráneo, y crean el nuevo género Kurtie- lla, perteneciente a la familia Montacuti- dae. Este género se caracteriza por retro- ceder la plataforma cardinal bajo el liga- mento. Ésta es la especie más abundante entre las Galeommatacea encontrada en el fondo aquí estudiado. También la hemos encontrado común en todo tipo de fondos detríticos desde 3-4 m hasta más de 200 m de profundidad. Vive aso- ciada a varias especies de Ophiuroidea y según Kallonas et al. (1999) vive en huecos de ostras, del sipuncúlido Golfin- gia y en asociación con Acrocnida bra- chiata. Valvas frágiles, blancas, brillan- tes, periostraco color crema, apenas bri- llante; sin diente cardinal, los dientes de la valva derecha bien marcados y menos formados los de la valva izquierda. 47 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Kurtiella tumidula (Jeffreys, 1866) (Figs. 78-80) Montacuta tumidula Jeffreys, 1866. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 3 (18): 396. [Localidad tipo: Noroeste de la costa de Rosshire, Escocia]. Material examinado: 4 v. Sin diente cardinal, dientes laterales igualmente desarrollados. Zenetos y van Aartsen (1995) citan esta especie por primera vez en el Mediterráneo para aguas del Mar Egeo. Van Aartsen (1996) la cita en Palermo, Sicilia, de la colección Monterosato. Recientemente se ha citado en el Tirreno por Margelli, Campani, Coppini Y Cuneo (2006) y en Malta por Cachia et al. (2004). Gofas y Salas (2008) la citan para el Mar de Albor án. Se cita aquí por segunda vez para el Medi- terráneo español, habiéndose encontrado dos valvas derechas y dos izquierdas. Coracuta obliquata (Chaster, 1897) (Figs. 74-77) Neolepton obliquatum Chaster, 1897. The Irish Nat., 6: 186, figs. 1,2. Material examinado: 2 e + 7 v. Concha (Figs. 74-76) menos frágil, muy inequilateral, sin diente cardinal, umbo evidente situado en la mitad posterior de la valva y con una evidente escultura con- céntrica (Fig. 77) en el exterior de las valvas. Esta especie la hemos encontrado desde relativamente poca profundidad, - 24 m en fondo de gorgonias en Mijas, Málaga, hasta los 250/350 m en fondos de coral blanco en el Garraf, donde es común. Holmes, Gallichan y Wood (2006) crean el nuevo género Coracuta, cuya especie tipo es Neolepton obliquatum Chaster, 1897. Myoerycina phascolionis (Dautzenberg y Fischer, 1925) (Figs. 58-63) ? Galeomma compressa Philippi, 1844: 19, pl. 14, fig. 5. Montacuta phascolionis Dautzenberg y Fischer, 1925. Trav. Stat. Biol. Roscoff, 3: 126. ? Kellia coarctata Wood, 1851. Mon. Grag. Molí, 2 (2): 123, lám. 12, figs. 10a, b. Material examinado: 4 v. Esta especie se caracteriza por tener una pequeña plataforma cardinal y tener en la valva derecha un diente cardinal delante del ligamento y dos dientes late- rales, uno anterior y otro posterior. Troncoso y Urgorri (1992) y Tron- coso, Moreira y Troncoso (2000) la citan en las costas gallegas asociada al sipuncúlido Phascolion strombi (Montagu, 1804). En el Mediterráneo español fue citada por primera vez por Giribet y Peñas (1997) en la costa de Garraf (Barce- lona). Se cita aquí por segunda vez en un fondo en el que también abunda Phasco- lion strombi, sobre todo ocupando conchas de Turritella communis. Epilepton clarkiae (Clark, 1852) (Figs. 81-83) Lepton clarkiae Clark, 1852. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 9 (2): 191. Material examinado: 5 e + 14 v. 48 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 87-92. Thracia papyracea (Poli, 1791). 87, 88: conchas juveniles, 15 mm y 5 mm; 89, 90: detalle de la charnela; 91, 92: microescultura, en dos zonas de la concha. Figures 87-92. Thracia papyracea (Poli, 1791). 87, 88: juvenile shells, 15 mm and 5 mm; 89, 90: detail ofthe hinge; 91, 92: microsculpture, on tivo areas ofthe shell. Concha (Figs. 81-83) frágil, de dimi- nutas dimensiones, perfil oval oblicuo, blanca-amarillenta, muy brillante, con líneas radiales visibles a gran aumento; umbo relativamente grande, situado en la mitad posterior; chamela estrecha formada por un diente lateral anterior y otro pos- terior; diente cardinal en ambas valvas. La figura 82 muestra una valva excepcional- mente grande (2.4 x 1.8 mm), sólida, con los dientes laterales muy marcados. Esta especie, al igual que Mioerycina phascolionis, vive asociada al sipuncúlido Phascolion strombi. La hemos encontrado en este fondo y también en fondos del Garraf, donde abunda Turritella commu- nis, ya que ese sipuncúlido ocupa conchas vacías de ella y de otros gaste- rópodos. Jespersen, Lützen y Oliver (2007) revisan la posición morfológica, bioló- gica y sistemática de esta especie. 49 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Sportella recóndita (P. Fischer in de Folin, 1872) (Figs. 84-86) Scintella recóndita P. Fischer, 1872. Les fonds de la mer (1876) : 49, lám. 3, fig. 3. Material examinado: 3 v. Concha relativamente grande (hasta 10 mm) y menos frágil. Tiene un claro diente anterior en la valva derecha y un hueco tras él en el que entran los dos dientes de la valva izquierda, de los cuales el anterior es oblicuo y el poste- rior vertical. Carrozza (1981) cita esta especie para el Mediterráneo Oriental (bahía de Haifa), a una profundidad de 68 m. Margelli, Coppini y Bogi (1995) la citan para la Isla Chaparía, Italia, entre 150 y 180 m de profundidad. Aquí se cita por primera vez para el Medite- rráneo español. En Peñas, Rolán y Ballesteros (2008) se cita e ilustra el hallazgo en aguas del Garraf de un ejemplar vivo de una rara especie, identificada como Sportella sp., cuya charnela es muy cercana a S. recóndita, pero no la forma. Thracia papyracea (Poli, 1791) (Figs. 87-92) Tellina papyracea Poli, 1791. Test. Utr. Sic., 1: 43, lám. 15, figs., 14, 18 non Tellina papyracea Gmelin, 1791. Mya declivis Pennant, 1812. Brit. Zool. Amphidesma phaseolina Lamarck, 1818. Anim. sans Thracia mitella De Gregorio, 1884. Material examinado: 3 e, 6 v. Concha frágil y delgada, blanca, no brillante, periostraco delgado castaño claro, normalmente solo en los bordes de las valvas; inequivalva, algo más conve- xas la valva derecha; margen anterior redondeado, margen posterior truncado; escultura de líneas concéntricas irregula- res, a gran aumento superficie granulosa, áspera al tacto. Se ilustran dos conchas Vert. Yol. 5. juveniles (Figs. 87, 88), detalle de la char- nela (Figs. 89, 90) y microescultura de dos zonas de la concha (Figs. 91, 92). En Peñas, Rolán, Luque, Tem- plado, Moreno, Rubio, Salas, Sierra y Gofas (2006, figs. 403-406) se ilustran conchas juveniles y microescultura de de Thracia villosiuscula (MacGillivray, 1827) procedente de Vilassar de Mar. Lyonsia norwegica (Gmelin, 1791) (Figs. 93-95) Mya norwegica Gmelin, 1791. Syst. Nat. ed. 13: 3222, n° 24. Mya striata Montagu, 1811. Amphidesma corbuloides Lamarck, 1818. Anatina truncata Lamarck, 1818 Tellina coruscans Scacchi, 1833 Anatina elonagta Hanley, 1842. Myatella montagui Brown, 1844 Material examinado: 35 e, 52 v. Concha (Fig. 93) oval cuadrangular, sin diente. Región anterior del margen más bien frágil, blanca, con periostraco dorsal recta y ligeramente inclinada; delgado color castaño claro. Charnela región posterior recta o algo cóncava. 50 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Figuras 93-95. Lyonsia norwegica (Gmelin, 1791). 93: ejemplar juvenil, 22 mm; 94, 95: detalle de la escultura. Figures 93-95. Lyonsia norwegica ( Gmelin , 1791). 93: juvenile specimen, 22 mm; 94, 95: detail of the sculpture. más grande; margen anterior redonde- ado, algo abierto, margen posterior truncado, más abierto. Superficie exte- rior (Figs. 94, 95) de aspecto rugoso, formada por numerosas estrías radiales apretadas y muy delgadas y por líneas concétricas y por un menor número de Características del fondo estudiado Peres y Picard (1964) y también Augier (1982) describieron varias bioce- nosis de sustratos blandos en el piso cir- calitoral, relativamente bien diferencia- das, con unos grupos de especies carac- terísticas o exclusivas de cada uno de ellos. El lugar aquí estudiado se encuen- tra en una zona abierta, sujeta a corrien- tes marinas relativamente fuertes y alejada de la desembocadura de ríos que aporten de forma regular sedimentos terrígenos, aunque la orografía monta- ñosa de la comarca, con numerosas costillas, equidistantes, sobre las estrías, poco evidentes en ejemplares juveniles. Ejemplares juveniles a menudo son ini- dintificables porque las valvas están cubiertas por una especie de masa formada por granos de arena y otros restos de los sedimentos en los que vive. rieras y alta pluviosidad, hace que las aportaciones de fangos sean periódicas. Esta biocenosis podría definirse básica- mente como un "fondo detrítico costero" (DC), si bien este tipo de fondos son muy variables, dependiendo de la costa vecina y también de las for- maciones infralitorales próximas. Este fondo también podría estar relacionado con una zona de transición hacia "fangos de fuera", dada la abundancia de especies como Similipecten similis (Gofas, com. pers.). 51 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Por otra parte, si tenemos en cuenta que la especie dominante en esta bioce- nosis es el ascidiáceo Ascidia conchilega (O. F. Müller, 1776), representando al menos el 50% de la biomasa animal obtenida, puede afirmarse que se trata de una "facies" de ascidiáceos. Según Pérés y Picard (1964) las formaciones de Ascidias están relacionadas más o menos directamente con poblamientos vegetales densos de una parte y de corrientes vivas de otra parte, como ocurre en este caso. Especies dominantes en estos fondos Se consideran especies dominantes del fondo estudiado aquellas de las que se han encontrado numerosos ejempla- res vivos en todos los muéstreos realiza- dos. Son las siguientes: Jujubinus montagui Bittium latreillii Turritella communis Pusillina inconspicua Caecum trachea Apporrhais pespelicani Calyptraea chinensis Trophon muricatus Nassarius pygmaeus Bela brachystoma Bela nébula Mangelia costulata Mangelia unifasciata Megastomia conoidea Odostomia acuta Turbonilla rufa Cylichnina crebrisculpta Ringicula conformis Nucula nitidosa Nuculana commutata Musculus subpictus Modiolula phaseolina Similipecten similis Anomia ephippium Myrtea spinifera Thyasira biplicata Kurtiella bidentata Parvicardium minimum Spisula subtruncata Phaxas pellucidus Abra alba Abra prismática Timoclea ovata Gouldia mínima Dosinia lupinus Corbula gibba Pandora pinna Dentalium inaequicostatum Dischides politus Sin embargo, aunque no dominan- tes, pueden considerarse típicas de estos fondos todas aquellas encontradas vivas, que se indican como comunes (+++) en el listado. Debe resaltarse que, entre los gaste- rópodos, la familia Conidae, especial- mente los géneros Bela y Mangelia, es la más representativa de este fondo por el número de especies encontradas y la cantidad de ejemplares de cada una de ellas. Por el contrario, son numerosas las especies de Rissoidae encontradas, pero de la mayoría sólo conchas vacías; úni- camente en el caso de tres de ellas, Pusi- llina inconspicua, Alvania punctura y Obtusella macilenta se han encontrado ejemplares vivos. En aguas catalanas estas dos especies viven desde la zona infralitoral hasta los 350 metros de pro- fundidad en todo tipo de fondos (Giribet y Peñas, 1997). Pseudotorinia architae se encontró con cierta frecuencia en todos los muéstreos, pero sólo conchas, aunque en uno de ellos se encontraron 40 ejemplares vivos. La familia Pyramidellidae está bien repre- sentada en este fondo, lógicamente tra- tándose de animales ectoparásitos, y destaca Turbonilla rufa por el número de ejemplares vivos encontrados, seguida de Megastomia conoidea. Entre los bivalvos, la mayoría de las especies arriba citadas como dominan- tes se reparten la abundancia relativa. De algunos microbivalvos, especial- mente de la superfamilia Galeomatoi- dea, se han encontrado escasas valvas, dada su fragilidad; a pesar de lo cual creemos que la mayoría de especies son típicas de estos fondos. Se comparan nuestros resultados, con los obtenidos en un fondo de carac- terísticas similares en Livorno. Cuneo, Margeli, Campani y Coppini (2006) estudiaron los gasterópodos y escafópo- dos y listan 71 especies encontradas vivas (66 gasterópodos y 5 escafópo- dos). Coinciden con nuestro listado sola- 52 PEÑAS ETáL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona mente 40 especies (38 gasterópodos y 2 escafópodos), constatándose que en ese fondo son muy pocas las especies abun- dantes: Turritella communis, Nassarius pygmaeus, Megastomia conoidea, Ringicula conformis y Dentalium inaequicostatum, que también en nuestro listado se citan como abundantes, y también citan Bittium reticulatum, especie que no hemos encontrado viva. Margelli et al. (2006) citan 48 especies de bivalvos para la misma biocenosis de Livorno, de ellas 35 se citan también en nuestro listado. Destacan como abundantes las siguientes especies: Myrtea spinifera, Thr- y asir a alleni, My sella bidentata, Timoclea ovata y Corbula gibba. Solustri Y Micali (2002) también estudian la malacofauna de un fondo similar a 51 metros de profundidad en el Adriático Medio, censando 49 especies vivas (24 gasterópodos y 25 bivalvos). Los gasterópodos dominantes eran Trophon muricatus y Bela brachystoma. Turritella communis era abundante pero no se encontraron ejemplares vivos. En cuanto a los bivalvos, las especies domi- nantes eran Nucula nucleus, Myrtea spini- fera, Thyasira biplicata, Parvicardium mínimum y Phaxas pellucidus, todas coin- cidentes con nuestro material, excepto Nucula nucleus, que en nuestro fondo es sustituida por Nucula nitidosa. También hemos observado que varias especies de moluscos que aquí son dominantes no lo son en otros fondos DC vecinos, como en la comarca del Garraf. Nuevas citas para el Mediterráneo español Seis son las especies que se citan por primera vez para el Mediterráneo español: Lepidochiton cimicoides, Johania retifera, Laona flexuos a, Montacuta goudi, Montacuta tenella y Sportella recóndita. Relación con la cercana pradera de Posidonia oceánica En total se han encontrado 117 espe- cies no vivas en la biocenosis aquí estu- diada (1 poliplacóforo, 95 gasterópodos, 20 bivalvos y 1 escafópodo). De ellas, 21 especies de gasterópodos probable- mente procedan precipitadas de la cercana pradera de Posidonia oceánica, ya que en ella se han encontrado vivas (ver Peñas y Almera, 2001). Por otra parte, en el fondo aquí estu- diado se han encontrado 39 especies que también se encontraron vivas en dicha pradera (20 gasterópodos y 19 bivalvos), de las cuales son comunes o abundantes en ambos hábitats: Bittium latreillii, Vitre- olina curva, Vitreolina perminima, Vitreo- lina philippi, Obtusella intersecta, Alvania punctura, Caecum trachea, Calyptraea chi- nensis, Hexaplex trunculus, Chrysallida emaciata, Odostomia unidentata, Musculus subpictus, Musculus costulatus, Anomia ephippium, Lucinella divaricata, Goodallia triangularis, Timoclea ovata y Gouldia mínima. CONCLUSIONES El análisis de los resultados obteni- dos nos permite apreciar, en primer lugar, la riqueza malacologica de estos fondos, ya que el número de especies vivas encontradas es relativamente elevado para un área estudiada muy pequeña, teniendo en cuenta que todos los dragados se realizaron en las coorde- nadas citadas, con una desviación infe- rior a un kilómetro. En segundo lugar, se puede definir con bastante aproxima- ción qué especies componen una comu- nidad de moluscos en una biocenosis de fondo fangoso detrítico costero. En total se han encontrado 332 espe- cies (5 poliplacóforos, 219 gasterópodos, 105 bivalvos y 3 escafópodos), de ellas 213 vivas (4 poliplacóforos, 122 gasteró- podos, 85 bivalvos y 2 escafópodos). Dos especies se citan solamente a nivel genérico y seis se citan por primera vez para el Mediterráneo español. Sin embargo, a pesar de la riqueza malacologica de la zona estudiada, los autores no son optimistas, ya que se ha apreciado un retroceso en biodiversidad y madurez en el curso de los años, pues estos fondos ya fueron estudiados por el tercero de los autores, con varios draga- dos en la misma zona y en el mismo período estacional entre 1982 y 1990, y 53 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 se ha podido constatar el progresivo deterioro. Algunas especies, entonces encontradas comúnmente vivas, o incluso abundantes, prácticamente han desaparecido de estos fondos, como Mitrolumna olivoidea, Muricopsis aradasii, Heliacus subvariegatus o Philine aperta. Otras especies, aunque consideradas adultas, pues mantienen el número de vueltas, han ido reduciendo el tamaño de su concha, como Eulima glabra, Comarmondia gracilis, Mangelia unifas- ciata, Mangelia costata y, sobre todo, M. costulata. Y en otros casos, de algunas especies actualmente casi solo se encuentran juveniles como Aporrhais pespelicani, Nuculana pella, Lucinoma bore- ales, Gari fervensis y Lyonsia norwegica. AGRADECIMIENTOS Nuestro agradecimiento al Ayunta- miento de Vilassar de Mar, propietario de la embarcación con la que se realiza- ron los dragados; a Bruno dell' Angelo, BIBLIOGRAFÍA Alonso A. y López-Jamar E. 1988. Infauna bentónica de las costas de Almería. Resulta- dos de la Campaña “RADIO 1805". Informes Técnicos Instituto Español de Oceanografía, 65: 1-32. Augier H. 1982. Inventory and classification of marine benthic biocenoses of the Mediter- ranean. Council of Europe, Strasbourg, 1982, 59 pp. Biagi V. y Corselli C. 1984. Contributo alia co- noscenza della malacofauna di un fondo SFBC (Peres y Picard, 1964). Bollettino Mala- cologico, 20 (5-8): 117-130. Bogi C. y van Aartsen J.J. 2006. Posizione sis- temática e distribuzione in Mar Mediterrá- neo di 'Montacuta' semirubra Gaglini, 1992 e 'Montacuta' cuneata Gaglini, 1992 (Bivalvia: Galeommatoidea). Bollettino Malacologico, 42 (9-12): 112-114. Bogi C., Coppini M. y Margelli A. 1992. Ri- trovamento di Litigiella glabra (P. Fischer, 1873) nelle acque di Livorno. La Conchiglia, 23 (264): 43-44. Borja A. y Muxika I. 2001. Actualización del catálogo de los moluscos marinos de la costa vasca, en campañas realizadas por AZTI. Iberus, 19 (2): 67-85. de Prato, Italia, por su ayuda en la determinación de algunos poliplacófo- ros; a Virginie Herós, del MNHN, París, quien nos permitió el estudio del mate- rial tipo de varias especies del género Bela; a Manuel Ballesteros, del Departa- mento de Biología Animal, de la Facul- tad de Biología de la Universidad de Barcelona, quien nos facilitó bibliografía importante para este trabajo; a Carmen Salas, del Dpto. de Biología Animal de la Universidad de Málaga, por sus comentarios sobre algunos bivalvos; a Jesús Méndez, del CACTI (Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnológico a la Investigación), de la Universidad de Vigo, por la realización de las fotogra- fías al MEB; y a Manuel Antonio Mala- quias por su ayuda en la determinación de algunas especies. Este trabajo recibió apoyo del Pro- yecto SYNTHESYS el cual está finan- ciado por European Community, Rese- arch Infrastructure Action bajo el pro- grama FP6 "Structuring the European Research Area". Cachia C., Mifsud C. y Sammut P.M. 2004. The Marine Mollusca of the Maltese Islands - Part four Caudofoveata, Solenogastres, Bivalvia, Scaphopoda and Cephalopoda, Backhuys Pub- lishers, Leiden, 270 pp. Carrozza F. 1983. Microdoride di Malacolo- gia mediterránea (contributo quinto). Bollet- tino Malacologico, 19 (1-4): 65-70. Cuneo F., Margelli A., Campani E. y Coppini M. 2006. Gastropoda e Scaphopoda dei fanghi litorali di Livorno. Bollettino Malacologico, 42 (1-4): 5-12. Dell' Angelo B. y Smriglio C. 2001. Living chi- tonsfrom the Mediten anean Sea. Ed. Evolver, Roma, 255 pp. Fretter V. y Graham A. 1982. The proso- branch mulluscs of Britain and Denmark. Part 7. 'Heterogastropoda' (Cerithiopsacea, Triforacea, Epitoniacea, Eulimacea). The Jour- nal ofMolluscan Studies, suppl. 11: 363-434. Fretter V., Graham A. y Andrews E.B. 1986. The prosobranch molluscs of Britain and Denmark. Part. 9. Pyramidellacea. The Jour- nal ofMolluscan Studies, suppl. 16 :557-649. Gaglini A. 1991. Seconde spigolature . . . mon- terosatiane. Notiziario CISMA, 1990 (13) : 1- 22. 54 PEÑAS ET AL.: Fauna malacologica de fondo detrítico fangoso en El Maresme, Barcelona Gaglini A., 1992. Terze spigolature ... monte- rosatiane. Argonauta, 7 (1-6): 125-180. Giribet G. y Peñas A. 1997. Fauna malacoló- gica del litoral del Garraf (NE de la Península Ibérica). Iberus, 15 (1): 41-93. Gofas S. y Salas C. 2008. A review of european " Mysella " species (Bivalvia, Montacutidae), with description of Kurtiella new genus. Jour- nal ofMolluscan Studies, 74: 119-135. Ghisotti F. 1978. Rinvenimenti malacologici nel Mediterráneo. Conchiglie, 14 (9-10): 151- 166. Hoeksema D.F., van Aartsen J. J., Keuke- laar-Van der Berge T., van Nieulande F.A.D. y Simons G.F. 1995. On the identity and distribution of Litigiella glabra (P. Fis- cher, 1873) (Bivalvia Heterodonta: Lasaei- dae). La Conchiglia, 26 (275): 17-22. Holmes A.M., Gallichan J. y Wood H. 2006. Coracuta obliquata n. gen. (Chaster, 1897) (Bi- valvia: Montacutidae). First british record for 100 years. Journal of Conchology, 39 (2): 151-158. Jespersen A., Lützen J. y Oliver G. 2007. Mor- phology, Biology and systematic position of Epilepton clarkiae (Clark, 1852) (Galeomma- toidea: Montacutidae) a bivalve commensal sith sipunculans. Journal of Conchology, 39 (4): 391-401. Rallonas M., Zenetos A. y Gofas S. 1999. No- tes on the ecology and distribution of mi- crobivalvia in Greek waters. La Conchiglia, 31 (291): 11-20 Lugli A. y Palazzi S. 1991. Cerithiopsis acumi- nata Hallgass, 1985, sinónimo juniore di C. bar- leei Jeffreys, 1867. Bollettino Malacologico, 2J (5-9): 139-140. Malaquias M.A.E. 2004. The opisthobranch molluscs described by the reverend Robert Boog Watson from the Madeira Archipelago (Northeast Atlantic, Portugal). Journal of Con- chology, 38 (3): 231-240. Maluquer J. 1915. Anfineures de Catalunya. Treballs de la Institució Catalana d'Historia Nat- ural, 1: 187-280 + láms. 14-16. Margelli A., Campani E., Coppini M. y Cu- neo F. 2006. Bivalvia dei fanghi litorali di Li- vomo. Bollettino Malacologico, 42 (9-12): 93-100. Margelli A., Coppini M. y Bogi C. 1995. Re- marks on some rare and poorly known Mediterranean Molluscs. La Conchiglia, 27 (275): 42-44. Micali P., Tisselli M. y Giunchi L. 2006. Seg- nalazione di Tellimya tenella (Lovén, 1846) per le isole Tremtini (Adriático meridionale). Notiziario CISMA, 24 (1-4): 19-20. Monterosato 1872. Notizie intorno alie Con- chiglie Mediterranee. Palermo, 61 pp. Nofroni I. y Tringali L.P. 1995. Random notes on Eastern Atlantic, Mediterranean and Lessepsian Pyramidellidae (Gastropoda: Het- erobranchia: Pyramidelloidea). Notiziario CISMA, 17: 21-49. Oliver Baldoví J.D. 2007. Catálogo de los Gas- terópodos testáceos marinos de la parte sur del Golfo de Valencia (España). Iberus, 25 (2): 29-61. Palazzi S. y Villar A. 2001. Molluschi e Bra- chiopodi delle grotte sottomarine del Taor- minese. La Conchiglia, Suppl. 297: 1-56. Peñas A. y Almera J. 2001. Malacofauna aso- ciada a una pradera de Posidonia oceánica (L.) en Mataró (NE de la Península Ibérica). Spira, 1(1): 25-31. Peñas A. y Giribet A. 2003. Adiciones a la fauna malacologica del litoral del Garraf (NE de la Península Ibérica). Iberus, 21 (1): 172-189. Peñas A. y Rolán E. 1997. La familia Pyrami- dellidae Gray, 1840 (Mollusca, Gastropoda, Heterostropha) en África Occidental. 2. Los géneros Turbonilla y Eulimella. Iberus, Suple- mento 3: 1-105. Peñas A., Rolán E. y Ballesteros M. 2008. Se- gunda adición a la fauna malacologica del li- toral del Garraf (NE de la Península Ibérica). Iberus, 26 (2): 15-42. Peñas A., Rolán E., Luque A.A., Templado J., Moreno D., Rubio F., Salas C., Sierra A. Y Gofas S. 2006. Moluscos marinos de la isla de Alborán. Iberus, 24 (1): 23-151. Pérés J.M. 1982. Major Benthic Assemblages. En Marine Ecology. Ed. O. Kinne, vol, 5, part 1: 373-521. Pérés J.M. y Picard J. 1964. Nouveau Manuel de Bionomie Benthique de la Mer Mediter- ranée. Recueil des Travaux de la Station Marine d'Endoume, Bulletin, 31 (47): 1-137. Philippi R.A. 1836. Enumeratio molluscorum Si- ciliae cum vivantium tum in tellure tertiariafos- silium quae in itinere suo observabit. Schropp, Berolini [Berlin], 267 pp + 12 láms. Plañí P. y Turolla G. 1980. Johania retifera (For- bes, 1844), opistobranco "ritrovato" dopo cent'anni (Opisthobranchia: Cephalaspidea). Bolletino Malacologico, 16 (1-2): 1-3. Picard J. 1965. Recherches qualitatives sur les biocoenoses marines des substrats meubles dragables de la région marseillaise. Recueil des Travaux de la Station Marine d'Endoume, Bul- letin 36 (52) : 1-160. Rueda J., Salas C. y Gofas S. 2000. A mollus- can community from Coastal bioclastic bot- toms in the Strait of Gibraltar area. Iberus, 18 (1): 95-123. Schiotte T. 1998. A taxonomie revisión of the genus Diaphana Brown, 1827, including a dis- cussion of the phylogeny and zoogeography of the genus (Mollusca: Opisthobranchia). Steenstrupia, 24 (1): 77-140. 55 Iberus , 27 (1), 2009 Solustri C. Y Micali P. 2002. Nuovi ritrova- menti malacologici e segnalazione di Thya- sira granulosa (Monterosato, 1874) al largo delle coste romagnole (Medio Adriático). Cuaderno di Studi e Notizie di Storia N atúrale della Romagna, 17: 21-30. Solustri C. y Micali P. 2004. Pyramidellidae (Gastropoda: Heterobranchia) di un'area cos- tiera del medio Adriático ed hipótesis di as- sociazione con i possibili ospiti. Bollettino Malacologico, 40 (5-8): 60-69. Tebble N. 1966. British Bivalve seashells. Trustees of The British Museum (Natural History), 212 pp, 12 láms. Troncoso J.S. y Urgorri V. 1992. Asociación de Tellimya phascolionis (Dautzenberg y Fis- cher) (Bivalvia, Montacutidae) con el sipun- cúlido Phascolion strombi (Montagu, 1804) en la Ría de Ares y Betanzos (Galicia, NO de Es- paña). Boletín de la Real Sociedad Española de Historia Natural ( Sección Biológica), 88 (1-4): 189-194. Troncoso N., Moreira J. y Troncoso J.S. 2000. Tellimya phascolionis (Dautzenberg y Fischer, 1925) (Bivalvia, Montacutidae) and other fauna associated with the sipunculid Phascolion strombi (Montagu, 1804) in the Ria de Aldán (Galicia, NW Península Ibérica). Argonauta, 14 (1): 59-66. van Aartsen J.J. 1996. Galeommatacea and Cyamiacea. Part II. La Conchiglia, 28 (281): 27-53. Zenetos A. y van Aartsen J.J. 1995. The deep sea molluscan fauna of the S. E. Aegean Sea and its relation to the neighbouring faunas. Bollettino Malacologico, 30 (9-12): 253-268. 56 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberas, 27 (1): 57-66, 2009 Dos nuevas especies del género Alvania (Caenogastropoda: Rissoidae) de las islas Baleares Two new species of the genus Alvania (Caenogastropoda: Rissoidae) from the Baleario Islands (Western Mediterranean) J. Daniel OLIVER* y José TEMPLADO** Recibido el 6-X-2008. Aceptado el 23-1-2009 RESUMEN Se describen dos nuevas especies del género Alvania del mar balear en base a caracte- res exclusivamente conquiológicos. Una de ellas, A. baleárica spec. nov., es similar a A. subcrenulata y A. nestaresi, de las que se diferencia por el perfil más turriculado de su concha y por algunos caracteres de la escultura de la protoconcha y teloconcha. La segunda de las especies, A. josefoi spec. nov., se asemeja a A. scabra y a A. sculptilis, de las que se diferencia por su menor tamaño, coloración y en algunos caracteres de la escultura de la protoconcha y teloconcha. Ambas especies muestran poca variabilidad en sus características conquiológicos. ABSTRACT Two new species of the genus Alvania from the Balearic Sea are described based on shell characters. The shell of one of them, A. baleárica spec. nov., resembles that of A. sub- crenulata and A. nestaresi, but ¡t differs in the more turriculate outline and in some charac- ters of the sculpture of the protoconch and teleoconch. The second one, A. josefoi spec. nov., is compared to the closely related Alvania scabra and A. sculptilis. It differs in being smaller, in the colour pattern of the shell and in some characters of the sculpture of the pro- toconch and teleoconch. Both species are very uniform in conchological characteristics. INTRODUCCIÓN El género Alvania es dentro de los gasterópodos marinos el que presenta un mayor número de especies en el Atlántico nororiental y Mediterráneo. En la base de datos CLEMAM (septiem- bre de 2008) se incluyen 129 especies de este género para el área geográfica antes señalada. De éstas, algo más de la mitad están presentes en el Mediterráneo y cerca de 40 de ellas (el número puede variar en función de los criterios taxonó- micos seguidos) han sido citadas en el Mediterráneo español. Esta gran diver- sidad de especies es consecuencia del elevado número de endemismos que presenta el género, con áreas de distri- bución muy reducidas. Ello es especial- mente patente en los distintos conjuntos insulares. Dentro del Mediterráneo se conocen especies endémicas de este género en las islas del Tirreno, Jónico, Adriático, Egeo o Chipre (Bogi, Coppini y Margelli, 1983; Oliverio, 1986, 1988; Giusti y Nofroni, 1989; van der * Alcorisa 83 - 12 C, 28043 Madrid, Spain ** Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales (CSIC), José Gutiérrez Abascal 2, 28006 Madrid, Spain 57 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Linden y Wagner, 1989; Cecalupo y Quadri, 1995; Margelli, 2001; Buzzu- rro, 2003; Micali, Tisselli y Giunchi, 2005; Buzzurro y Landini, 2007; Buz- zurro y Prkic, 2007). El hecho es que se vienen describiendo nuevas especies de forma paulatina, que han salido a la luz, bien por el estudio faunístico de áreas poco estudiadas, o por la revisión de algunos grupos de Alvania conflictivos. Amati, Nofroni y Oliverio (1990) rela- cionan las nuevas especies del género descritas entre 1980 y 1990, y desde entonces se ha incrementado su número en siete más: A. nestaresi Oliverio y Amati, 1990, A. clarae Nofroni y Pizzini, 1991, A. elisae Margelli, 2001, A. oliverioi Buzzurro, 2003, A. alboranensis Peñas y Rolán in Peñas et al., 2006, A. claudioi Buzzurro y Landini, 2007 y A. dalmática Buzzurro y Prkic, 2007. Dos de ellas (A. nestaresi y A. alboranensis ) pertenecen a la fauna mediterránea española. Por otra parte, en los últimos años el número de especies descritas de Alvania se ha incrementado también considera- blemente por el descubrimiento de nuevas especies procedentes de las islas macaronésicas, la costa africana o de los promontorios submarinos del atlántico nororiental (Amati, 1987; Gofas, 1989, 1990, 1999, 2007; Moolenbeek y Hoen- selaar, 1989, 1998; Bouchet y Warén, 1993; van der Linden, 1993; Hoense- laar Y Goud, 1998; Segers, 1999). Obviamente, las islas Baleares no podían ser una excepción a los endemis- mos insulares dentro del género y así lo hemos constatado con el hallazgo de dos nuevas especies del mismo, comunes en el mar balear. MATERIAL Y MÉTODOS Los ejemplares estudiados en el pre- sente trabajo proceden principalmente del estudio de los sedimentos recogidos durante la campaña oceanográfica Fauna III (dentro del proyecto Fauna Ibérica) mediante buceo y depositados en el Museo Nacional de Ciencias Natu- rales de Madrid (MNCN). Además se han estudiado también sedimentos reco- gidos por los autores en algunos puntos de Ibiza y Menorca. Los ejemplares han sido examina- dos, medidos y fotografiados mediante una lupa binocular y por medio de un microscopio electrónico de barrido. DESCRIPCIÓN Alvania baleárica spec. nov. (Figs. 1-7, 28) Material tipo: Holotipo y paratipos (14 ejemplares, todos de la localidad tipo) depositados en el Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales de Madrid (número de catálogo: 1505/47057). Localidad tipo: Islote de S'Espartar, en la costa occidental de Ibiza, islas Baleares, a 25 m de pro- fundidad (coordenadas geográficas: 38° 58' 10" N - 01° 09' 24" E). (Página derecha) Figuras 1-7. A. baleárica spec. nov. 1: paratipo, 2,1 mm, Ibiza; 2: concha, 2,3 mm, islas Columbretes; 3: vista lateral de la protoconcha, Ibiza; 4: vista apical de la protoconcha, Ibiza; 5: detalle de la protoconcha, islas Columbretes; 6: detalle de la ornamentación de la proto- concha, islas Columbretes; 7: detalle de la transición protoconcha/ teloconcha, Ibiza. Figuras 8, 9. A. subcrenulata. 8: concha, 2,5 mm, Ibiza; 9: vista apical de la protoconcha, Ibiza. Figuras 10, 11. A. nestaresi. 10: concha, 2,4 mm, La Herradura; 11: vista apical de la protoconcha, La Herradura. (Right page) Figures 1-7. A. baleárica spec. nov.l: paratype, 2.1 mm, Ibiza; 2: shell, 2.3 mm, Colum- bretes Islands; 3: lateral view ofthe protoconch, Ibiza; 4: apical view ofthe protoconch, Ibiza; 5: detail ofthe protoconch, Columbretes Islands; 6: detail ofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch, Columbretes Islands; 7: detail ofthe transition between protoconch and teleoconch, Ibiza. Figures 8, 9. A. subcrenu- lata. 8: shell, 2.5 mm, Ibiza; 9: apical view ofthe protoconch, Ibiza. Figuras 10, 11. A. nestaresi. 10: shell, 2.4 mm, La Herradura; 11: apical view ofthe protoconch, La Herradura. 58 Oliver Y TEMPLADO: Dos nuevas especies del género Alvania de las islas Baleares |i¿ S m. t? % fe» 1 :ü |’ ^ / j¿m¿ {ék : r k* 59 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Otro material estudiado: Se han estudiado más de 1.300 ejemplares de las islas Columbretes y más de 700 de distintos puntos de Ibiza, Mallorca y Menorca (islas Baleares). Etimología: El nombre de la especie hace referencia a su abundancia en el mar balear, del que parece ser endémica. Descripción: Especie en apariencia muy similar a A. subcrenulata y A. nesta- resi. Concha del holotipo (Fig. 28) con 3,5 vueltas de espira, 2,25 mm de altura y 1,25 mm de anchura. Forma algo turricu- lada, ornamentada por costillas y cordo- nes casi de la misma anchura y que al cruzarse forman tubérculos algo puntia- gudos. Penúltima vuelta de espira con tres cordones suprabucales, uno a la altura de la inserción labial y tres básales, que delimitan surcos bastante profundos. A gran aumento se observa una microes- cultura de diminutos gránulos, similar a la de Alvania cancellata (Da Costa, 1778). Interior del labio externo dentado. Color de la concha blanquecino, con dos bandas longitudinales pardo-amari- llentas sobre la última espira (Fig. 28). La superior, más estrecha, es subsutural y la inferior, más ancha, discurre por debajo de la línea donde se produce la inserción del labio externo. Por la parte externa del labio, un poco antes del engrosamiento labial, ambas franjas tienden a juntarse. Columela e interior del labio externo de color blanco. Protoconcha paucispiral con un núcleo claramente inclinado (Figs. 3-5). Las dimensiones de la protoconcha del holotipo fueron: n° de vueltas 1,35; diá- metro del núcleo 95 jum; anchura de la primera media vuelta de espira 205 |um; anchura de la primera vuelta de espira 295 jum; diámetro máximo 345 p; altura 350 jum. La ornamentación se inicia con tres cordones aquillados (Fig. 4), que se ven incluso con una lupa de pocos aumentos, y que a mitad de la protoconcha se convierten en gránulos gruesos toscamente alineados (Fig. 5). Entre los cordones espirales pueden apreciarse a veces esbozos de cordones incompletos (Fig. 6). La transición con la teloconcha (Figs. 3 y 7) es brusca. Ésta se inicia ya con dos gruesas costillas. A pesar del elevado número de ejemplares estudiados, no se observa apenas variabilidad en los caracteres de la concha (tamaño, forma y color). En los ejemplares de las islas Columbretes la sutura es ligeramente más pronun- ciada que en los de las Baleares. Biología y distribución: La mayor parte de los ejemplares se han hallado en sedimentos entre 20-40 metros de profundidad. Los sedimentos de donde se han extraído proceden casi todos de zonas con dominancia de comunidades de algas infralitorales profundas (algas hemiesciáfilas). Una descripción de esta comunidad en el archipiélago de las Columbretes puede verse en el libro de Templado y Calvo (2002, págs. 97-100). A. baleárica parece sustituir a A. nes- taresi en el mar Balear. En algunas locali- dades de Baleares, como en los islotes occidentales de Ibiza o en el norte de (Página derecha) Figuras 12-16: A. josefoi spec. nov., Tagomago (Ibiza). 12: holotipo, 1,8 mm; 13: vista lateral de la protoconcha; 14: vista apical de la protoconcha; 15: detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha; 16: detalle de la microescultura de la teloconcha. Figuras 17-19. A. scabra. 17: ejemplar con la misma coloración que A. josefoi, 1,4 mm, Ibiza; 18: ejemplar de La Herradura, 2,4 mm; 19: vista apical de la protoconcha. Figuras 20-22. A. sculptilis , Getares. 20: concha, 2,1 mm; 21: vista apical de la protoconcha; 22: detalle de la microescultura de la teloconcha. (Right page) Figuras 12-16: A. josefoi spec. nov., Tagomago (Ibiza). 12: holotype, 1.8 mm; 13: lateral view of the protoconch; 14: apical view of the protoconch ; 15: detail ofthe microesculpture ofthe proto- conch; 16: detail ofthe microesculpture ofthe teleoconch. Figuras 17-19. A. scabra. 17: specimen with the same colour pattern than that of A. josefoi, 1.4 mm, Ibiza; 18: specimen from La Herradura, 2.4 mm; 19: apical view of the protoconch. Figuras 20-22. A. sculptilis, Getares. 20: shell, 2. 1 mm, 21: apical view of the protoconch; 22: detail of the microesculpture ofthe teleoconch. 60 OLIVER Y TEMPLADO: Dos nuevas especies del género Alvania de las islas Baleares 61 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Menorca, aparece en sedimentos junto con A. subcrenulata, si bien esta última es mucho más escasa. Discusión : Oliverio y Amati (1990) consideran que A. subcrenulata es un taxón confuso, y que este nombre se ha utilizado en el pasado seguramente para un complejo de especies próximas. Algunas de las especies pertenecientes a este complejo serían Alvania amatii Oli- verio, 1986, del Mediterráneo oriental, A. aartseni Verduin, 1986, de las costas del norte de África, y A. nestaresi Olive- rio y Amati, 1990, del Mediterráneo suroccidental. Asimismo, los ejemplares identificados por Oliverio y Amati (1989) como A. aartseni (de la colección Locard del MNHN de París), proceden- tes del sur de Francia, pudieran pertene- cer a otra especie de este complejo. Alvania baleárica sería una nueva especie perteneciente a este complejo, cuya área de distribución en el archipiélago balear se solapa con la de A. subcrenulata. De esta última especie se diferencia por presentar A. baleárica un perfil más turriculado y un cordón subsutural no tan evidente (se reduce a un reborde) como en A. subcrenulata (Figs. 8, 19). Asi- mismo, los cordones espirales son algo más gruesos y los tubérculos más sobre- salientes. Por otro lado, la protoconcha de A. baleárica está ornamentada por tres cordones aquillados que a mitad de la protoconcha se convierten en gránulos gruesos toscamente alineados. En A. subcrenulata la protoconcha presenta una ligera cresta en la porción mediosupe- rior de la espira y está ornamentada por gruesos tubérculos, en lugar de cordo- nes (Fig. 9). De A. nestaresi (Figs. 10, 30) se dife- rencia por presentar también un perfil más turriculado, menor número de cor- dones espirales (tres cordones suprabu- cales en la última espira en A. baleárica, frente a cuatro en A. nestaresi). La escul- tura de la protoconcha de A. nestaresi consta de cinco o seis cordoncillos espi- rales que llegan hasta el final de la pro- toconcha (Fig. 11), mientras que la de A. baleárica sólo tiene tres cordones que no llegan hasta el final. A. nestaresi es una especie muy abundante en el sur y sureste peninsular, que en las islas Columbretes y Baleares parece ser susti- tuida por A. baleárica, muy abundante en este entorno geográfico y que parece vivir en un hábitat similar. Otra especie parecida a A. baleárica en tamaño, color, escultura y microes- cultura de la concha es A. amati, del Mediterráneo oriental. La separación geográfica de ambas especies y el hecho de que las dos tengan una protoconcha paucispiral (indicativo de una fase lar- varia muy corta o ausente, lo que en principio limitaría la capacidad de dis- persión), y algunos detalles de la escul- tura de sus protoconchas descartan la posibilidad de que puedan ser conside- radas como una única especie. La proto- concha de A. baleárica es más alta que la de A. amati, tiene tres cordones espirales frente a los cuatro o cinco de A. amati y el granulado final es menos denso y grueso que en A. amati. De Alvania aartseni, del norte de África, se diferencia sobre todo porque en esta última especie la escultura de la protoconcha no presenta los tres cordo- nes iniciales. (Página derecha) Figuras 23, 24. A. josefoi nov. spec., islotes occidentales de Ibiza, paratipos de 1,5 y 1,7 mm, respectivamente. Figura 25. A. sculptilis , Algeciras, 2 mm. Figuras 26, 27. A. scabra, islas Columbretes, ejemplares de 2,0 y 2,1 mm respectivamente. Figura 28. A. baleárica nov. spec., islotes occidentales de Ibiza, holotipo, 2,25 x 1,25 mm. Figura 29. A. subcrenulata , Algeciras, 2,8 mm. Figura 30. A. nestaresi , Cabo Palos, 2,6 mm. (Right page) Figures 23, 24. A. josefoi nov. spec., western inlets of Ibiza, paratypes of 1.5 and 1.7 mm, respectively. Figure 25. A. sculptilis, Algeciras, 2 mm. Figures 26, 27. A. scabra. Columbretes Islands, specimens of2.0 and 2.1 mm respectively. Figure 28. A. baleárica nov. spec., western inlets of Ibiza, holotype, 2,25 x 1,25 mm. Figure 29. A. subcrenulata, Algeciras, 2.8 mm. Figure 30. A. nestaresi, Cabo Palos, 2. 6 mm. 62 Oliver Y TEMPLADO: Dos nuevas especies del género Alvania de las islas Baleares 63 Iberus , 27 (1), 2009 La especie A. sleursi Amati, 1987, endé- mica de Azores, también presenta un cierto parecido con A. baleárica. En A. sleursi hay dos cordones suprabucales mientras que en A. baleárica las conchas adultas tienen tres (aunque las subadul- tas tienen dos). La protoconcha de A. sleursi, al igual que la de A. baleárica tiene tres cordones espirales, pero en la primera llegan hasta el final de la protoconcha, mientras que en la segunda dichos cor- dones se transforman en gránulos. Alvania josefoi nov. sp. (Figs. 12-16. 23-24) Material tipo: Holotipo y paratipos (9 ejemplares, todos de la localidad tipo) procedentes de la muestra 236B18 de la campaña oceanográfica Fauna III y depositados en el Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales (n° de catálogo: 1505/47058). Localidad tipo: Al sur de la isla Tagomago (Ibiza, islas Baleares) (coordenadas geográficas: 39° 01' 80"N - 01° 39' 14"E). Otro material estudiado: Se han estudiado más de 100 ejemplares procedentes de algunas islas e islotes de Ibiza y del sur y suroeste de Menorca (islas Baleares). Etimología: La especie se dedica a la memoria de José Bedoya Romero "Josefo", ya fallecido, autor de algunas de las fotografías al microscopio electrónico de barrido del presente trabajo y gran amigo. Descripción : Especie en apariencia muy similar a A. scabra y a A. sculptilis. Teloconcha del holotipo (Fig. 12) con tres vueltas de espira, 1,8 mm de altura y 0,9 mm de anchura. Perfil de las vueltas de espira convexo y ligeramente anguloso. Cuatro cordones longitudinales supra- bucales claros en la última vuelta, que ya están presentes en la penúltima. Costillas verticales de grosor similar al de los cor- dones espirales, que al cruzarse forman pequeños tubérculos. Esta ornamenta- ción confiere a la concha un aspecto reh- ollado. Abertura algo piriforme. Superfi- cie de la concha con una microescultura muy característica, consistente en nume- rosos cordoncillos longitudinales muy juntos que le dan un aspecto estriado (Fig. 16). Interior del labio externo no dentado. Color blanco, algo traslúcido, con una evidente mancha marrón en la parte final de la última vuelta, justo por encima del labio externo. Protoconcha del holotipo paucispiral (Figs. 13-15) con 1,45 vueltas. Diámetro del núcleo 90 pm; anchura de la primera media vuelta 190 jum; anchura de la primera vuelta 260 jum; diámetro máximo 335 jum; altura 265 jum. Ornamentada por gránulos muy juntos, algunos de ellos unidos longitudinalmente y dispuestos en una decena de filas poco delimitadas, en las que resulta casi imposible distinguir los interespacios (Fig. 15). Existe una gran uniformidad en todos los ejemplares estudiados, tanto en el tamaño, como en la forma y color. Biología y distribución : Sus conchas han sido encontradas preferentemente en detritos localizados entre 15 y 40 metros de profundidad en la proximi- dad de fondos rocosos con algas fotófi- las y enclaves esciáfilos. Sólo se ha encontrado en el entorno de la isla de Ibiza y en algunos puntos de Menorca. Discusión : Las especies ibéricas más parecidas a A. josefoi son A. scabra (Figs. 17-18, 26-27) y A. sculptilis (Figs. 20 y 25). Asimismo, la protoconcha indica su parentesco con estas dos especies. A. scabra convive con A. josefoi, pero es más común que ésta. Por otro lado, A. sculp- tilis es una especie típica del sur de la península ibérica y del norte de África (Tringali, 2001) que no ha sido locali- zada en las Baleares. Los ejemplares de A. scabra que convi- ven con A. josefoi son algo mayores, tienen el perfil de espira más redondeado y la ornamentación más pronunciada. Además A. scabra tiene menos costillas y éstas suelen ser más anchas que los cor- dones, mientras que en A. josefoi son de anchura similar. En la teloconcha de A. scabra se observa también una una micro- escultura formada por débiles cordonci- llos situados entre los cordones espirales, pero sin el aspecto estriado que se aprecia 64 OLIVER Y TEMPLADO: Dos nuevas especies del género Alvania de las islas Baleares en A. josefoi. Por último, la protoconcha de A. scabra (Fig. 19) presenta los gránu- los más alineados que en A. josefoi. A. sculptilis también es de mayor tamaño que A. josefoi y además su concha es amarillenta con manchas marrones y con tendencia a ser traslúcida, mientras que el patrón de coloración de A. josefoi es constante en todas las conchas examina- das. La microescultura de la protoconcha AGRADECIMIENTOS Agradecemos a Ma Angeles Ramos y Oscar Soriano el ponernos a nuestra dis- posición el material de moluscos reco- gido en las campañas del proyecto Fauna Ibérica. Los técnicos del laborato- rio de microscopía electrónica del Mu- seo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Jo- sefa Bedoya (ya fallecido), Laura Tormo y Marta Furió han dedicado mucho tiempo para fotografiar una ingente can- tidad de micromoluscos durante los úl- timos años. Agradecemos también al servicio de fotografía de esta institución (Jesús Muñoz y Fernando Señor) las imágenes a color que ilustran el trabajo. Anselmo Peñas y Emilio Rolán una vez más nos han cedido material de compa- BIBLIOGRAFÍA Amati B. 1987. Manzonia (Alvinia) sleursi sp. n. (Gastropoda: Prosobranchia). Notiziario CI- SMA, 10: 25-30. Amati B., Nofroni I. y Oliverio M. 1990. Nouve specie e riscoperte nell' " Alvania - group" dal 1980 ad oggi per il Mediterrá- neo. La Conchiglia, 22: 47-49. Amati B. y Oliverio M. 1989. Prima segnala- zioni di Alvania aartseni Verduin, 1986 per le coste Francese, e considerazioni tassonomi- che. En Nofroni, I. (Ed.): Atti Della Prima Giornata di Studi Malacologici C.I.S.Ma, Roma: 265-267. Bogi C., Coppini M. y Margelli A. 1983. Con- tributo alia conoscenza della malacofauna delTAlto Tirreno. II genero Alvania. La Con- chiglia, 28 (206-207): 26-29. Bouchet P. y Warén A. 1993. Revisión of the Northeast Atlantic bathyal and abyssal Meso- gastropoda. Bollettino Malacologico, supple- mento 3: 579-840. y teloconcha de A. sculptilis son más simi- lares a las de A. scabra que a las de A. josefoi. En las islas Canarias existen otras dos especies de Alvania pertenecientes a este grupo: A. canariensis (D'Orbigny, 1939) y A. grancanariensis Segers, 1999. Ambas se diferencian sobre todo a primera vista por el color del ápice, negruzco en la primera y amarillo dorado en la segunda (ver Segers, 1999). ración de sus respectivas colecciones. Agradecemos también a Silvia Revenga y a Diego K. Kerstin el apoyo prestado para el trabajo en las islas Columbre- tes.Antoni Grau, Jefe del Servei de Re- cursos Marins de la Conselleria d' Agri- cultura i Pesca de les liles Balears (Di- recció General de Pesca) nos concedió con celeridad los permisos para los muéstreos en Baleares y David López, guarda de la Reserva Marina del Norte de Menoría, y Antonio Fayos, del Club Sea Gipsy de Cala Galdana, nos propor- cionaron soporte logístico y ayuda en las inmersiones realizadas en Menorca. Por último, agradecemos a Serge Gofas sus comentarios y sugerencias. Buzzurro G. 2003. Una nuova specie di Alva- nia di Cipro. La Conchiglia, 308: 43-46. Buzzurro G. y Landini F. 2007. Descrizione di una nuova specie di Rissoidae (Gastro- poda: Prosobranchia) per le coste laziali (Mar Tirreno). Bollettino Malacologico, 42 (1- 4): 24-26. P’JZZURRO G. Y Prkic J. 2007. A new species of 1 Ivania (Gastropoda: Prosobranchia: Rissoi- dae) from Croatian coast of Dalmatia. Tritón, 15:5-9. Cecalupo A. y Quadri P. 1995. Contributo alia conoscenza malacologica per il Nord dell'isola di Cipro (Parte II). Bollettino Mala- cologico, 30 (10-12): 269-276. CLEMAM Taxonomic Database on European Marine Molluscs (http: / / www.somali.asso. fr/clemam/ index.clemam.html). Giusti F. y Nofroni 1. 1989. Alvania dipacoi new species from the Tuscan Archipelago. La Conchiglia, 21 (242-245): 54-56. 65 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Gofas S. 1989. Two new species of Alvania (Ris- soidae) from the Azores. Publicagoes Ocasionáis da Sociedade Portuguesa de Malacologia, 14: 39- 42. Gofas S. 1990. The littoral Rissoidae and An- abathridae of Sao Miguel, Azores. Acoreana, 1990 suppl. : 97-134. Gofas S. 1999. The West African Rissoidae (Gastropoda: Rissooidea) and their similar- ities to some European species. The Nautilus, 113 (3): 78-101. Gofas S. 2007. Rissoidae (Mollusca: Gastro- poda) from northeast Atlantic seamounts. Journal of Natural History, 41 (13-16): 779-885. Hoenselaar H. J. y Goud J. 1998. The Ris- soidae of the CANCAP expeditions, I: the genus Alvania Risso, 1826 (Gastropoda, Proso- branchia). Basteria, 62: 69-115. Margelli A. 2001. A new species from Capraia Is. (Tuscan Archipelago): Alvania elisae sp. nov. La Conchiglia, 300: 43-50. Micali P., Tisselli M. y Giunchi L. 2005. Al- vania villarii n. sp. from the south Tyrrhe- nian Sea (Gastropoda: Rissoidae). Bollettino Malacologico, 40 (5-8): 70-73. Moolenbeek R. y Hoenselaar H.J. 1989. The genus Alvania in the Canary Islands and Madeira (Mollusca, Gastropoda). Part 1. Bul- letin, Zoólogisch Museum, Universiteit van Am- sterdam, 11 (27): 215-228. Moolenbeek R.G. y Hoenselaar H.J. 1998. The genus Alvania in the Canary Islands and Madeira (Mollusca: Gastropoda): Part 2 [fi- nal part]. Bulletin, Zoólogisch Museum, Uni- versiteit van Amsterdam, 16 (8): 53-62. Oliverio M. 1986. Alvania amatii n. sp. (Gas- tropoda Prosobranchia) Notiziario CISMA, 7/8: 29-34. Oliverio M. 1988. A new Prosobranch from the Mediterranean Sea, Alvania dianensis n. sp. Bulletin, Zoólogisch Museum, Universiteit van Ámsterdam, 11 (13): 117-120 Oliverio M. y Amati B. 1990. Una nuova spe- cie del gruppo di Alvania subcrenulata (Ga- stropoda; Rissoidae) . Bollettino Malacologico, 26 (5-9): 83-90. Segers W. 1999. Alvania grancanariensis new species from the Canary Islands (Gastro- poda: Prosobranchia). Gloria Maris, 37 (5-6): 82-87. Templado J. y Calvo M. (eds.), 2002. Flora y Fauna de la Reserva Marina de las islas Colum- bretes. Secretaría General de Pesca Marítima (MAPA), Madrid, 263 pp. Tringali L.P. 2001. Marine malacological re- cords (Gastropoda: Prosobranchia, Hetero- branchia, Opisthobranchia and Pulmonata) from Torres de Alcalá, Mediterranean Mo- rocco, with the description of a new philinid species. Bolletino Malacologico, 37 (9-12): 207- 222. van der Linden J. 1993. Alvania obsoleta spec. nov. from the Azores (Gastropoda, Proso- branchia: Rissoidae). Basteria, 57: 79-82. van der Linden J. y Wagner W.M. 1989. Al- vania multiquadrata spec. nov. from the Canary Islands. Basteria, 53: 35-37. 66 © Sociedad Española de Mataco logia Iberas , 27 (1): 67-78, 2009 Proneomeniidae (Solenogastres, Cavibelonia) from the Bentart-2006 Expedition, with description of a new species Proneomeniidae (Solenogastres, Cavibelonia) de la Campaña Bentart-2006, con la descripción de una nueva especie Oscar GARCÍA-ÁLVAREZ*, María ZAMARRO** and Victoriano URGORRI* Recibido el 29-X-2008. Aceptado el 16-III-2009 ABSTRACT During the Spanish oceanographic expedition for the study of Antarctic benthos, Bentart- 2006, carried out in the orea of the Bellingshausen Sea and Antarctic Península, seven specimens of Proneomeniidae (Solenogastres, Cavibelonia) were obtained. Proneomenia bulbosa sp. nov. is described here. A comparative table of the main specific characters of the species belonging to the genus Proneomenia is also included. New data of Dorymenia usarpi Salvini-Plawen, 1978 and Dorymenia menchuescribanae García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000 are presented here. RESUMEN Durante la campaña oceanográfica española para el estudio del bentos antártico, Bentart- 2006, se recogieron en el área del Mar de Bellingshausen y la Península Antártica siete especímenes de Proneomeniidae (Solenogastres, Cavibelonia). Se describe Proneomenia bulbosa sp. nov. Se incluye una tabla comparativa de los principales caracteres de las especies pertenecientes al género Proneomenia. Se presentan nuevos datos de Dorymenia usarpi Salvini-Plawen, 1978 y de Dorymenia menchuescribanae García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000. INTRODUCTION The family Proneomeniidae is highly homogeneous, comprising species that are generally over 1 cm in length, most of them measuring between 2 and 5 cm long. They are characterized by present- ing a thick cuticle with severa! layers of hollow acicular sclerites, a polystic- hous/polyserial radula and ventrolat- eral foregut glandular organs with a paired duct of epithelially arranged gland cells surrounded by musculature (type C according to Salvini-Plawen, 1978a; Epimenia type according to Handl and Todt, 2005). The family ineludes two genera: Proneomenia and Dorymenia, which differ in the absence/presence of copulatory stylets. The genus Proneomenia ineludes ten species, four of which belong to the Antarctic and Subantarctic biogeo- graphic areas (Salvini-Plawen, 1978a): Proneomenia epibionta Salvini-Plawen, Departamento de Zooloxía e Antropoloxía Física. Facultade de Bioloxía. Universidade de Santiago de Compostela. Campus Sur s/n. 15782 Santiago de Compostela. Spain. ogarcia.alvarez@edu.xunta.es ** Unidade de Biodiversidade e Recursos Mariños. Instituto de Acuicultura. Universidade de Santiago de Compostela. Campus Sur s/n. 15782 Santiago de Compostela. Spain. 67 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 1978 and Proneomenia stillerythrocytica Salvini-Plawen, 1978 were collected near the Falkland Islands; Proneomenia praeda- toria Salvini-Plawen, 1978 comes from the Kerguelen Islands and Drake Passage. Only Proneomenia gerlachei Pelseneer, 1901 was collected in the same biogeographic area as Proneomenia bulbosa sp. nov., from the Bellingshausen Sea. The genus Dorymenia, one of the largest of this class, ineludes twenty- four species, seventeen of which come from the Antarctic and Subantarctic bio- geographic areas (Salvini-Plawen, 1978a; García-Álvarez et al., 1998; 2000, García-Álvarez and Urgorri, 2003). The two species of this genus studied herein, Dorymenia usarpi Salvini- Plawen, 1978 and Dorymenia menchue- scribanae García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000, come from South Shetland Islands, an area in which six other species are known: Dorymenia acu- tidentata Salvini-Plawen, 1978, Dory- menia cristata Salvini-Plawen, 1978, Dorymenia hesperidesi García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000, Dory- menia hoffmani Salvini-Plawen, 1978, Dorymenia parvidentata García-Álvarez and Urgorri, 2003 and Dorymenia tron- cosoi García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 1998. MATERIAL AND METHODS The seven specimens studied were collected in three stations sampled during the expedition Bentart-2006, which was carried out on board the BIO Hespérides in January-February 2006 at Bellingshausen Sea and the Ántarctic Peninsula. Specimens were fixed and preserved in 70% ethanol. For the study of selerites, small pieces of cuticle of the dorsal middle part of the body and of the ventral groove were separated. These pieces were treated with sodium hypochlorite at 5% for 12 hours to isolate the selerites. They were then washed with water, dried in a drying chamber at 40°C and mounted in Cañada balsam. For their anatomical study, specimens were decalcified in an EDTA solution for 12 hours, they were embedded in paraffin, cut in transverse series of 10 jum in section, stained with Mallory trichromic and the reconstruc- tion of the internal anatomy of their anterior and posterior body was per- formed. SYSTEMATICS Family Proneomeniidae Simroth, 1893 Diagnosis: See Salvini-Plawen, 1978a; García-Álvarez and Salvini-Plawen, 2007 Genus Proneomenia Fiubrecht, 1880 Diagnosis: See Salvini-Plawen, 1978a; García-Álvarez and Salvini-Plawen, 2007 Type species: Proneomenia sluiteri Hubrecht, 1880 Proneomenia bulbosa sp. nov. (Figs. 1, 2) Type material: Holotype 1 specimen 43 x 2.5 mm, cut in serial sections. Bellingshausen Sea (Antar- tica). Bentart-2006, Station MB 34-2; coordinates: 70° 11.620' S, 84° 8.694' W; 603 m depth. The holo- type, cut in serial sections, is deposited in the Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales of Madrid, number MNCN 15.02/25. Etymology: From Latin bulbus, bulb, regarding the posterior body of the bulging body. Diagnosis: Body without protuber- acuminate posterior body. 300 jum thick anees and keels, with a bulging and cuticle. Hollow acicular selerites (130- 68 GarcÍA-Alvarez ET AL.: Proneomeniidae from the Bentart-2006 Expedition Figure 1. Proneomenia bulbosa sp. nov. A: habitus; B: hollow sclerites; C: radular tooth; D: schema- tic organization of the anterior body; E: schematic organization of the posterior body. Abbrevia- tions, At: atrial sense organ; Cg: cerebral ganglion; De: dorsal caecum; Dg: dorsal gland; Dso: dor- soterminal sense organ; Mg: midgut; Pe: pallial cavity; Ph: pharynx; Pr: pericardium; Ra: radula apparatus; Sd: spawning duct; Sr: seminal receptacle; Vfg: ventral foregut glandular organ. Figura 1. Proneomenia bulbosa sp. nov. A: habitus; B: escleritos huecos; C: diente radular; D: esquema de la organización de la parte anterior; E: esquema de la organización de la parte posterior. Abreviaturas, At: órgano sensitive atrial; Cg: ganglio cerebral; De: ciego dorsal; Dg: glándula dorsal; Dso: órgano sensitivo dorsoterminal; Mg: intestino; Pe: cavidad paleal; Ph: faringe ; Pr: pericardio; Ra: aparato radular; Sd: conducto de desove; Sr: receptáculo seminal; Vfg: órgano glandular ventral de la faringe. 69 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 450 jUm long). With one fold in the pedal groove that enters the pallial cavity. Dorsal pharynx gland present. Radula with 22-25 small and identical teeth with a wide base and a sharp sigmoid end. Ventrolateral foregut glandular organs type C/ Epimenia type. Two types of erythrocytes: some elongated without granulations and a longitudinal groove and others spherical with granulations. Opening of the posteriorly unpaired spawning duct through a narrow tube with a sphincter. Seminal receptacles elongate, slightly lobulate. Small pallial cavity without diverticles and respira- tory folds, with an anterior ventral groove. Without copulatory stylets. With abdominal spicules. One dorsoter- minal sense organ. Description: Habitus: Specimen 43 mm long x 2.5 mm thick. Body of circu- lar section, without protuberances and keels, with a bulging and acuminate posterior body and a truncated and slightly bulging anterior body (Fig. 1A). Very marked pedal groove. White colour in alcohol. Mantle and pedal groove: Thick cuticle (up to 300 jum thick) with elongated epi- demial papillae. Hollow acicular scle- rites (130-450 jum long) with thick walls (5-7 jum thick), slightly curved, with a sharp distal end and a round proximal end (Fig. IB). Sclerites are arranged in several interlacing layers, with the distal end slightly protruding from the cuticle, most of them are tangential or skeletal. The pedal groove presents one fold that enters the pallial cavity. Pallial cavity. Small, without diverti- cles and respiratory folds and without copulatory stylets. It leads onto the outside through a narrow ventral longitudinal opening (Fig. 1E). In its middle part, it pre- sents thick and glandulous ventrolateral walls with a large quantity of blood cells. The anus is located in the dorsal región of the cavity and the opening of the spawn- ing duct is located ventrally to the anus, where it has a central position. The pallial cavity extends in its anterior región with a ventral groove that continúes with the pedal groove and into which the fold of the pedal groove enters (Fig. 2C, D). The ventral groove of the pallial cavity is located below the posterior part of the spawning duct and it leads onto the outside through a narrow longitudinal opening that continúes with the opening of the pallial cavity. The lateral walls of the ventral groove are thick and glandu- lous, the abdominal spicules are located on them. Digestive system. It presents a common atriobuccal cavity (Fig. ID). The mouth opens dorsally in the poste- rior part of the atriobuccal cavity. The pharynx presents, dorsally and ven- trally, a pair of small caeca near the mouth, which possibly form when the pharynx infolds. The anterior región of the pharynx has thick lateral walls with glands; a dorsal gland, which is made up of a short duct into which the gland cells open, is located in its dorsal región (Fig. ID, 2A). The middle región pre- sents a circular musculature, which is thicker in its dorsal part (Fig. ID, 2B). Wide posterior part of the pharynx with a less developed musculature layer. The radula is polystichous / polyserial, with 22-25 small, identical teeth in each trans- verse row (25 jum long from the base to their sharp end) with a wide base and a sharp and sigmoid end (Fig. 1C). The ventrolateral foregut glandular organs are type C according to Salvini- Plawen, 1978a or Epimenia type follow- ing Handl and Todt, 2005, are made up of a pair of ducts covered by a mus- cular envelope inside which there are glandular epithelial cells. They are two long narrow tubes of circular section (approximate diameter 250 pm) and extend ventrolaterally to the intestine in the middle area of the body (Fig. ID). There is a muscular radular sac located ventrally to the radula, into which the ventrolateral foregut glandular organs open through two non-glandulous ducts. The pharynx opens into the intes- tine through a short oesophagus, whose walls are quite thick. In its anterior región, the intestine has a narrow dorsal caecum that reaches the buccal area and has lateral constrictions caused by the dorsoventral musculature. The rectum is narrow, of circular section and very 70 GarcÍA-Álvarez ET AL.: Proneomeniidae from the Bentart-2006 Expedition Figure 2. Proneomenia bulbosa sp. noy. A, B, C, D: cross sections corresponding to lines 1, 2, 3, 4 in Figure 1. Abbreviations, Dg: dorsal gland; Dso: dorsoterminal sense organ; Ph: pharynx; Re: rectum; Sd: spawning duct. Figura 2. Proneomenia bulbosa sp. nov. A, B, C, D: cortes en sección correspondientes a las líneas 1, 2, 3, 4 en la Figura 1. Abreviaturas, Dg: glándula dorsal; Dso: órgano sensitivo dorsoterminal; Ph: faringe; Re: recto; Sd: conducto de desove. cióse to the dorsal wall of the body due to the large size of the spawning duct (Fig. 2C, D). The anus is located in the dorsal región of the pallial cavity, it is wide and circular (approximate diame- ter 450 jum). Nervous system and sense organs. The cerebral ganglion is located above the anterior part of the pharynx and the buccal ganglia are lateral to the poste- rior part of the radular area (Fig. ID). The atrium is located in the anterior part of the common atriobuccal cavity, it has numerous digitiform papillae on its lateral walls and is delimited by a ven- trolateral fold (Fig. lD).There is a dor- soterminal sense organ in the dorsopos- terior región of the body, above the rectum (Fig. 1E, 2D). Gonopericardial system. The gonads were full of ova and spermatozoids, in their anterior part they are not separated and the blood sinus flows dorsally to them, whereas they are separated at their 71 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Figure 3. Dorymenia usarpi Salvini-Plawen, 1978. A: habitus; B: hollow sclerites; C: radular tooth; D: schematic organization of the anterior body; E, F: cross sections corresponding to lines 1,2. Abbreviations, De: dorsal caecum; Mg: midgut; Ph: pharynx; Ra: radular apparatus; Vfg: ventral foregut glandular organ. Figura 3. Dorymenia usarpi Salvini-Plawen, 1978. A: habitus; B: escleritos huecos; C: diente radular; D: esquema de la organización de la parte anterior; E, F: cortes en sección correspondientes a las líneas 1, 2. Abreviaturas, De: ciego dorsal; Mg: intestino; Ph: faringe; Ra: aparato radular; Vfg: órgano glan- dular ventral de la faringe. posterior part and the sinus, full of blood cells, is located between them. There are two types of erythrocytes; some elon- gated (up to 14 jum long) without granu- lations or nucleus, with a longitudinal groove, and other spherical (diameter up to 10 jum) with granulations. The pair of gonopericardioducts are well separated, narrow (diameter of 90 jum) with slightly folded walls, projecting into the anterior part of the pericardium. The pericardium is flat and wide, the heart has an anterior. 72 GarcÍA-Álvarez ET AL. : Proneomeniidae from the Bentart-2006 Expedition Figure 4. Dorymenia menchuescribanae García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000. A: habitus; B: specimen with colonies of Bryozoa Celleporella sp.; C: hollow sclerites; D: radular teeth; E: schematic organization of the anterior body; F: schematic organization of the posterior body. Abbreviations, De: dorsal caecum; Di: diverticle; Dso: dorsoterminal sense organ; Mg: midgut; Pe: pallial cavity; Ph: pharynx; Po: preatrial organ Pr: pericardium; Ra: radula apparatus; Sd: spawning duct; Sr: seminal receptacle; Vfg: ventral foregut glandular organ. Figura 4. Dorymenia menchuescribanae García-Alvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000. A: habitus; B: espécimen con colonias de Bryozoa Celleporella sp.; C: escleritos huecos; D: dientes radu- lares; E: esquema de la organización de la parte anterior; F: esquema de la organización de la parte pos- terior. Abreviaturas, De: ciego dorsal; Di: divertículo; Dso: órgano sensitivo dorsoterminal; Mg: intestino; Pe: cavidad paleal; Ph: faringe; Po: órgano preatrial; Pr: pericardio; Ra: aparato radular; Sd: conducto de desove; Sr: receptáculo seminal; Vfg: órgano glandular ventral de la faringe. 73 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 wide and unpaired ventricle and two posterior and narrow auricles. Both peri- cardioducts come out laterally from the posterior part of the pericardium, they present their walls encircled by a circular musculature and the interior epithelium is folded. They join the dorsoanterior part of the spawning duct, in the same area where the seminal receptacles join (Fig. 1E). Both seminal receptacles are long, slightly lobulate and are located dorsally to the anterior part of the spawning ducts. The receptacles and the anterior part of the spawning ducts were full of spermatozoids. The spawning duct is paired in its anterior half, representing two tubular ducts that increase their diameter from their anterior part to their fusión and their walls are very glandu- lous. The unpaired spawning duct filis almost the whole body space (Fig. 1E, 2C), it opens into the pallial cavity through a narrow tube with a folded internal wall and a sphincter made up of a layer of circular musculature (Fig. 1E, 2D). Laterally to this narrow end tube, the spawning duct continúes in the pos- terior part with two caeca of gland walls that reach the anterior wall of the pallial cavity (Fig. 1E, 2D), these caeca may form when the spawning duct is retracted, as these specimens protrude the end part of the spawning duct and all the pallial cavity. Genus Dorymenia Fieath, 1911 Diagnosis: See Salvini-Plawen, 1978a; García-Álvarez and Salvini-Plawen, 2007 Type species : Dorymenia acuta Heath, 1911 Dorymenia usarpi Salvini-Plawen, 1978 (Fig. 3) Material examined: 1 specimen 29 mm long x 1.8 mm wide, cut in serial sections, Low Island (South Shetland Islands, Antárctica). Bentart-2006, Station LOW 45; coordinates 63° 43.1 71' S, 62° 21.16' W; 86 m depth. Remarks: Dorymenia usarpi was known so far from Bransfield Strait, 311-426 m depth; South Orkney Islands, 485 m depth; and Ross Sea 342-732 m depth (Salvini-Plawen, 1978a). The first two records are very cióse to the present one, although they are at slightly greater depths. Three dorsoterminal sense or- gans were observed in the specimen studied here, whereas the original de- scription showed just one or two. Al- though the bad histological State of the posterior body of the specimen did not make the description of the reproductive system possible, the dorsolateral bags of the pallial cavity typical of this species were visible. Dorymenia hesperidesi, a species cióse to D. usarpi described from the South Shetland Islands, presents clear differences regarding the size of the radu- lar teeth and the erythrocytes shape (see Table I in García-Álvarez et al., 2000). Dorymenia menchuescribanae García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000 (Figs. 4, 5) Material examined: 5 specimens 34-51 mm long x 2.5-3 mm wide, cut in serial sections. Miers Bluff, next to Falsa Bay (Livingston Island, South Shetland Islands, Antárctica); Bentart-2006, Station St GA; coordinates: Start: 62° 46.13' S, 60° 27.02' W, End: 62° 43.565' S, 60° 27.486' W; 42.8- 50.2 m depth. Remarks : The specimens studied those known bef ore. They are large spec- herein were collected in the same geo- imens, over 3 cm long, with a slightly graphic area and at a similar depth to acuminate posterior body and generally 74 GARCÍA-ÁLVAREZ ET AL.\ Proneomeniidae from the Bentart-2006 Expedí tion Figure 5. Dorymenia menchuescribanae García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000. A, B, C, D: cross sections corresponding to lines 1, 2, 3, 4 in Figure 4. Abbreviations, Cs: copulatory stylet; De: dorsal caecum; Pe: pallial cavity; Ph: pharynx; Po: preatrial organ Sd: spawning duct. Figura 5. Dorymenia menchuescribanae García-Álvarez, Urgorri and Salvini-Plawen, 2000. A, B, C, D: cortes en sección correspondientes a las líneas 1, 2, 3, 4 en la Figura 4. Abreviaturas, Cs: estilete copu- lador; De: ciego dorsal; Pe: cavidad paleal; Ph: faringe; Po: órgano preatrial; Sd: conducto de desove. seem to be rolled up (García-Álvarez et al., 2000). Some unknown characteris- tics could be observed in these speci- mens; they present a preatrial sense or- gan in the atriobuccal cavity (Figs. 4E, 5A); the number of dorsoterminal sense organs varíes from two to four; and the opening of the spawning duct into the ventral bag of the pallial cavity may have a frontal or ventral position (Figs. 4F, 5C), which may possibly vary accord- ing to the protruded State of the ventral bag and even of the cavity during copu- lation (see Table I in García-Álvarez et al., 2000). It should be pointed out fi- nally that several colonies of Bryozoa Celleporella sp. were found on the cuticle in one of the specimens (Fig. 4B). 75 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Table I. Comparative table of the main specific characters of species belonging to the genus Pro- neomenia. Distribuirán/ Depth Hábitos (mm) Size (pm) Cuticle (pm) P acuminata E. coast USA, Caribbean Sea 250-650 m Ends: anterior round and trúncate; posterior pointed 20-30x 1.7-1.8 Up to 250 P. desiderata Marseille 20-30 m Ciyindrical, without keels 10 Up to 1 30 P. epibionta Falkland 1. 646-845 m With dorsal and lateral long protuberances 30x2 Up to 200 P. gedachei Bellingshausen Sea 550 m Ciyindrical, without keels 45x2.5 Up to 400 P. bawaiiensis Hawaian 1. 270-500 m Thick ends; anterior trúncate; posterior pointed 36x2 Up to 1 20 P. insularis Hawaian 1. 1400-1800 m Ciyindrical, without keels ? Up to 90 P. praedatoria Kerguelen 1. Drake S. 585-1 240 m With dorsal protuberances 28x2.2 Up to 200; protuberance 350 P. sluiteri Barents Sea, Spitzbergen, Kara Sea-Laptev Sea 45-300 m Round ends. Thick anterior 105-148 UptolOO P. stillerytbrocytica Falkland 1. 512-586 m With dorsal protuberances 37x2 Up to 1 50; protuberance 225 P. valdiviae Zanzíbar 748 m Ends: anterior round and trúncate; posterior pointed 37x2 UptolOO P. bulbosa n.sp. Bellingshausen Sea 603 m Thick ends; anterior trúncate; posterior pointed 43x2.5 Up to 300 DISCUSSION Of the ten species described from the genus Proneomenia, only Proneomenia ger- lachei Pelseneer, 1901 comes from the same biogeographic area and from a similar depth (Bellingshausen Sea, 70° 00' S, 81° 50' W, 550 m depth) (Salvini- Plawen, 1978a) to Proneomenia bulbosa sp. nov. Both species present clear differ- ences (Table I): in P. gerlachei, the hollow acicular sclerites only reach a length of 100 jum, in each radular row there are 40 teeth with a narrow base and a pointed and small curved end, and the erythro- cytes are oval (Salvini-Plawen, 1978a); whereas in P. bulbosa sp. nov. the hollow acicular sclerites are long, up to 450 jum in length, each radular transverse row comprises 22-25 teeth with a wide base and a pointed sharp end, and it has two types of erythrocytes: some are elongated without granulations and with a longitu- dinal groove, others are round with gran- ulations (cf. Salvini-Plawen, 1978b). Three species belong to the sub- antarctic biogeographic area (Salvini- Plawen, 1978a): Proneomenia epibionta Salvini-Plawen, 1978, Proneomenia stillerythrocytica Salvini-Plawen, 1978 (Falkland Islands, 646-845 m and 512- 586 m depth respectively) and Proneome- nia praedatoria Salvini-Plawen, 1978 (Kerguelen Islands, and Drake Straight, 585-1240 m depth). In P. epibionta the cuticle is thinner (200 jum) than in P bulbosa sp. nov. (300 jum) and has dorsal and lateral protuberances. The hollow 76 GarcÍA-Álvarez ET AL.: Proneomeniidae from the Bentart-2006 Expedí tion Tabla I. Tabla comparativa de los principales caracteres específicos de las especies del género Proneome- nia. Sclerites Dorsal length (pm) pharynx gland Radular teeth Oesophagus Erythrocytes shape Opening Dorsoterminal spawning duct sense oigan P acuminata Up to 450 Yes 28 Narrow base Yes Oval Narrow and musculous end duct 1 P. desiderata ? No 14 Narrow base No Drop ? 1 P. epibionta Up to 200 No 42-46 Narrow base No Oval Groove in the ventral wall of the pallial cavity 4 P. gerlachei Up to 1 00 Yes 40 Narrow base No Oval Musculous canal 1 P. hawaiiensis Up to 330 Yes 38-45 Narrow base Yes Spherical Narrow end duct 1 P. insularis Up to 200 No 34 Narrow base Yes Spherical ? ? P. praedatoria Up to 350 Yes 45 Wide base Yes Drop In the ventral wall of pallial cavity 1-2 P. sluiteri Up to 200 No 19-20 Wide base Yes Oval Without end duct 1 P. stillerythrocytica ? No 44-52 Wide base ? Drop Groove in the ventral wall of the pallial cavity 3 P. valdiviae Up to 430 Yes 18 ? Drop In ventral protuberance to the anus 1 P bulbosa n.sp. Up to 450 Yes 22-25 Wide base Yes Elongated and spherical Narrow and musculous end duct 1 acicular sclerites only reach 200 jum in length, in each radular row there are 42- 46 teeth and they are much longer (80- 100 jUm) than in P. bulbosa sp. nov. (25 jum), there is no dorsal pharynx gland and the erythrocytes are oval. P. stillery- throcytica has a 150 pm thick cuticle with dorsal protuberances, it possesses 44-52 teeth per radular row similar to those of P. epibionta and it has no dorsal pharynx gland. In P. praedatoria the cuticle shows dorsal protuberances up to 350 jum thick and has 45 teeth per radular row with a length of 40-50 pm (Table I). The six remaining species shows several differences (Table I): Proneomenia acuminata Wirén, 1892 (W. Indian Ocean, 550 m depth; Florida and Massachusetts (USA), 250-650 m depth) has no circular musculature in the pharynx, the 28 teeth per radular row have a narrow base and a non-curved sharp end, erythrocytes are oval with a central axis (Heath, 1918). Proneomenia desiderata Kowalevsky and Marión, 1887 (Marseille, 20-30 m depth) has a r adula with 14 teeth per trans verse row, it has no dorsal pharynx gland, the pericardium shows two ventrolateral bags and erythrocytes are drop-shaped (Kowalevsky and Marión, 1887). Pro- neomenia hawaiiensis Heath, 1905 and Pro- neomenia insularis Heath, 1911 were col- lected off Hawaii at 270-500 m and 1400- 1800 m depth respectively. P. hawaiiensis has a radula with 38-45 teeth per trans- verse row with a narrow base and pointed ends. P. insularis has no dorsal pharynx gland and the radula shows 34 77 Iberas, 27 (1), 2009 teeth per row (Heath, 1911). Proneomenia sluiteri Hubrecht, 1880 (Arctic Ocean: Barents Sea, 200-292 m depth; Spitzber- gen (Svalbard Islands), Kara Sea to Laptev Sea, 45-300 m depth) has 200 |Um long sclerites, it has no dorsal pharynx gland, the rectum presents a sphincter and the spawning duct is divided in two parts by a muscular constriction (Hubrecht, 1881). Finally, Proneomenia valdiviae Thiele, 1902 (Zanzibar (Indian Ocean), 748 m depth) has a 100 jum thick cuticle, 18 radular teeth per row and the opening of the spawning duct in the pallial cavity is very narrow and is BIBLIOGRAPHY García-Álvarez O. and Salvini-Plawen L.v. 2007. Species and diagnosis of the Families and Genera of Solenogastres (Mollusca). Iberus, 25 (2): 73-143. García-Álvarez O. and Urgorri V. 2003. Solenogastres molluscs from the BENTART Collection (South Shetland Islands, Antárc- tica), with a description of a new species. Iberus, 21 (1), 43-56. García-Álvarez O., Urgorri V. and Salvini- Plawen L.v. 1998. Dorymenia troncosoi sp. nov. (Mollusca Solenogastres: Proneomeni- idae), a new species from the South Shet- land Islands (Ántarctica). Polar Biology, 20: 382-387. García-Álvarez O., Urgorri V. and Salvini- Plawen L.v. 2000. Two new species of Do- rymenia (Mollusca: Solenogastres: Pro- neomeniidae) from the South Shetland Is- lands (Antárctica). Journal of the Marine Biological Association ofthe United Kingdom, 80: 835-842. Handl C. and Todt C. 2005. Foregut Glands of Solenogastres (Mollusca): Anatomy and Revised Terminology. Journal ofMorphology, 265: 28-42. Heath H. 1911. Reports on the scientific re- sults of the expedition to the tropical Pacific, XIV. The Solenogastres. Memoirs of the Mu- seum ofComparative Zoology at Harvard College, 45(1): 1-182. located in a ventral protuberance to the anus (Thiele, 1902). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This paper is part of the research pro- jects: Bentart (MEC-Spanish govern- ment REN2003-01881/ANT) and Diva- Artabria II (MEC-Spanish government CTM-2004-00740). We are grateful to Dr. Nuria Anadón who sorted the new species specimen during the Bentart 2006 Expedition. Our thanks also to Ian Emmett for the English Translation. Heath H. 1918. Solenogastres from the Eastern Coast of North America. Memoirs ofthe Mu- seum ofComparative Zoology at Harvard College, 45 (2): 183-263. Hubrecht A. 1881. Proneomenia sluiteri gen. et sp. n. with remarks upon the anatomy and histology of the Amphineura. Niederlandische Archivfür Zoologie, 9 (1): 1-75. Kowalevsky A. and Marión A. 1887. Contri- butions a l'histoire des Solenogastres ou Aplacophores. Anuales du Musée d'Histoire Naturelle de Marseille, Zoologie, 3 (1): 1-77. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 1978a. Antarktische und subantarktische Solenogastres-Eine Mono- graphie: 1898-1974. Zoológica, Stuttgart: 128, 1-315. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 1978b. Different blood- cells in species-pairs of Solenogastres (Mol- lusca). Zoologischer Anzeiger, 200: 27-30. Thiele J. 1902. Proneomenia valdiviae n. sp. Wis- senschaftliche Ergebnisse der Deutschen Tiefsee- Expedition aufdem Dampfer " Valdivia ", 1898- 1899, 3: 167-174. 78 Iberus, 27 (1): 79-98, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacologia The species of the genus Belgrandia (Caenogastropoda, Hydrobiidae) in the Iberian Península Las especies del género Belgrandia (Caenogastropoda, Hydrobiidae) en la Península Ibérica Emilio ROLÁN* and Alvaro de OLIVEIRA** Recibido el 26-VI-2008. Aceptado el 25-III-2009 ABSTRACT The species of the genus Belgrandia Bourguignat, 1 869 from the Iberian Península are dis- cussed. Four taxa were previously known, but some of them were considered as having subspecific level. A new species from Portugal is described: B. silviae spec. nov. Concho- logical, anatómica! and radulae data are provided for all the species involved. The known geographic distribution area is given, reporting new localities for some of the species. RESUMEN Se discuten las especies pertenecientes al género Belgrandia Bourguignat, 1 869 de la Península Ibérica. Cuatro taxones eran previamente conocidas, aunque alguno conside- rado en un nivel subespecífico. Se describe una nueva especie de Portugal: 8. silviae spec. nov. Se muestran los caracteres de la concha y morfología de las partes blandas y de las radulas de todas las especies incluidas. Se presenta la distribución conocida, apor- tando nuevas localidades para algunas de ellas. INTRODUCTION The genus Belgrandia Bourguignat, 1869 (Caenogastropoda, Hydrobiidae) is present in European springs and streams, in Dalmatia, Southern France, Italy, Spain and Portugal, according to Kabat and Hershler (1993). In their work the evolu- tion of this genus, as well as its relation- ships and synonyms are commented upon. Some species from Portugal were described by French and Germán authors (Paladilhe, 1867; Clessin, 1878; Boettger, 1963). Nobre (1930) did not admit the validity of these taxa and con- sidered that all represent only forms of B. gibba (Draparnaud, 1805). This species lives in Southern France (Kabat and Hershler (1993) and it is improbable that populations of the same species are found as far away as Portugal, as admit- ted by Boeters (1988). Rolán (1999) mentioned B. lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867) informing that it is a species in risk of extinction due to the small area where it lives. Haase (2000) published a revisión on this genus in Europe includindg the species in the Iberian Peninsula. Recently, new samplings collected by the júnior author allowed us to get a better idea of the distribution area. The study of all this new material allowed us to compare populations collected in several localities in Portugal. Other samples had been collected by the sénior author years ago. * Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur, 15782 Santiago de Compostela, Spain. ** Av. Lagos, 219-Y, 4405-658 Gulpilhares, Portugal. 79 Iberas, 27 (1), 2009 As far as we know, only one species is present in Eastern Spain, with few populations dispersed along a wide dis- tribution range between Cataluña and Comunidad Valenciana. The situation in Portugal is quite the reverse, the genus exhibiting a significant radiation. In an area of only 90x50 km, four species are present, one of which, B. silviae spec. nov., is here described as new to Science. This territory corresponds to the north- ern half of the Lusitanian Basin, in central western Portugal, which in the Upper Pliocene was still submerged. Abbreviations: MNCN Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid MHNG Museum d'Histoire Naturelle, Geneve MHNS Museo de Historia Natural de la Universidad de Santiago de Com- postela (collection of Emilio Rolán) MNHN Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris BMNH The Natural History Museum, London MHNP Museu Nacional de Historia Natural, Faculdade de Ciéncias do Porto (former Museu de Zoologia Augusto Nobre) SMF Naturmuseum und Forschungsan- stalt Senckenberg, Frankfurt CAO Collection of Alvaro de Oliveira CHB Colection of Hans Boeters sp live specimen s empty shell TAXONOMIC PART Family Hydrobiidae Troschel, 1857 Genus Belgrandia Bourguignat, 1869 Type species: Cyclostoma gibbum Draparnaud, 1805. Belgrandia lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867) (Figs. 1-12, 69) Hydrobia lusitanica Paladilhe, 1867. Rev. Mag. Zool. Puré appl. (2); 19: 92, pl. 21, figs. 1-4. [Type locality: Fonte das Lágrimas, after Coimbra, Portugal]. Belgrandia occidentalis Clessin, 1878. Malakozool. BL, 25: 120, lám. 4, fig. 7-9. [Type locality: Coimbra, Portugal]. Belgrandia gibba Draparnaud, 1805. In Nobre (1930: 205, fig. 36). Type material: Lectotype designated and figured by Haase (2000: fig. 3 E) in MHNG. Type locality: Fonte das Lágrimas, Other material studied: About 150 sp, leg. E. Rolán, (9-March-1989; 30-June-1990); 132 sp, leg. A. de Oliveira (5-January-2008). All from Fonte das Lágrimas, Quinta das Lágrimas, (NE4849), Coimbra, province of Beira Litoral, Portugal. Description : Shell (Figs. 1-8) oval- cylindrical, somewhat elongated, whorls convex, with deep suture. Protoconch (Fig. 9) with about 1 whorl, the separation from the teleo- conch being very difficult to see; diame- ter: nucleus about 90 ?m; first ? whorl, about 240 ?m. Microsculpture (Fig. 10) with minute depressions, which with high magnification (Fig. 11) are seen as having geometrical shape and separa- tion wall elevated and with numerous lines. Teleoconch with about three whorls, with some irregular spiral lines and prosocline growth lines. Aperture slightly ovoid, continuous and with a fine peristoma, a little undu- lating. Externally, a little before the end of the spire, there is an axially elongated thickening, very constant, only absent from juveniles. 80 ROLÁN AND OliveirA: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península Figures 1-10. Belgrandia lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867). 1-8: shells, 1.6, 1.7, 1.5, 1.4, 1.6, 1.4, 1.5, 1.8 mm, Fonte das Lágrimas, Coimbra; 9: protoconch; 10: detail of the microsculpture. Figuras 1-10. Belgrandia lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867). 1-8: conchas, 1,6; 1,7; 1,5; 1,4; 1,6; 1,4; 1,5 y 1.8 mm, Fonte das Lágrimas, Coimbra; 9: protoconcha; 10: detalle de la microescultura. 81 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 I U 10 }im 12 10 fim Figures 11, 12. Belgrandia lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867). 11: microsculpture of the protoconch; 12: radula. Figuras 11, 12. Belgrandia lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867). 11: microescultura de la protoconcha; 12: rádula. Dimensions between 1.4 and 1.9 mm in height. Animal (also described by Nobre, 1930) dark, with tentacles dark with a white line in the middle; the dorsum of the head is dark, only light on spaces around the eyes and the anterior part of the snout; behind the eyes there is a tri- angular space with cream or cream-yel- lowish colour; the penis (Fig. 69) is elon- gated, sharp-pointed, with an angle near its base, a little black on its anterior part, with a small appendix on its left side. The solé of the foot is white. The radula (Fig. 12) is typical of hydrobids, having a central tooth with about 10 cusps, the central one more prominent; lateral teeth similar, about ten cusps; the marginal ones are differ- ent, one with near 30 small and elon- gated cusps, and the other spoon like with only few cusps. Habitat : Under decaying leaves and among moss, always in shady areas with running water. This species coex- ists with 4 other freshwater gastropods: Theodoxus cf. fluviatilis (Linnaeus, 1758), Potamopyrgus antipodarum (Gray J. E., 1843), Mercuria tachoensis (Frauenfeld, 1865) and Phy sella acuta (Draparnaud, 1805). Distribution : Known from the type locality only (Fig. 78). Remarks : The species has been men- tioned by Nobre (1930, as B. gibba), and the figure of Nobre (1930, fig. 36) is characteristic of the specimens from Quinta das Lágrimas. Also represented in Boeters (1988) and commented by Rolán (1990) who described the soft parts and represented the shell, with their characteristics and typical deposits of calcium carbonatum. Hydrobia lusitanica Paladilhe, 1867 is clearly defined by the material studied from the type locality. The ñame Bel- grandia gibba Draparnaud, 1805, which Nobre (1930) considered to be the valid one for all the Portuguese species, con- cerns a species only present in Corsica and the South of France, probably referred erroneously for the northwest of Italy by Cossignani et al. (1995), and so, improbably related with the Por- tuguese species. Belgrandia lusitanica had been recorded by Rolán (1990) considering it in high risk of extinction. At present it is satisfactory 82 ROLÁN AND OliveirA: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península Figures 13-22 Belgrandia silviae spec. nov. 13: holotype, 2.0 mm (MNCN); 14-19: Paratypes, 1.9, 2.0, 1.7, 1.8, 1.8 and 1.9 mm (MNCN); 20: detail of the aperture in the holotype; 21: proto- conch; 22: microsculpture of the protoconch. Figuras 13-22 Belgrandia silviae spec. nov. 13: holotipo, 2,0 mm (MNCN); 14-19: Paratipos, 1,9; 2,0; 1,7; 1,8; 1,8 y 1,9 mm (MNCN); 20: detalle de la abertura en el holotipo; 21: protoconcha; 22: microescultura de la protoconcha. 83 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 to known that the species is still living. But it is very important to take action to protect the fu ture of the species. The taxon Belgrandia occidentalis Clessin, 1878 is also mentioned for Coimbra, and for this reason it surely applies to the same species and must be considered as a júnior synonym. According to Dance (1986) the Clessin collection in the Stuttgart Museum was totally destroyed in the Second World War. Belgrandia silviae spec. nov. (Figs. 13-25, 70-73) Belgrandia gibba Draparnaud, 1805. In Nobre (1930: 206 [partim]). Type material: Holotype (Fig. 13) plus 5 dry and 70 wet paratypes in MNCN (15.05/47571). Other paratypes in BMNH (10 sp), MHNS (80 sp), MHNP (50 sp), MNHN (10 sp), CHB (50 sp), CAO (160 sp), all live collected from the type locality, leg. A. de Oliveira, 12-February-2008 and 7-June-2008. Type locality: In the spring of Alcabideque (NE4539), a small village 3 km east of Condeixa-a- Nova, 10 km to the south of Coimbra (and of Quinta das Lágrimas, type locality of B. lusitanica), province of Beira Litoral, Portugal. This spring is historically related to the oíd Román town of Conímbriga, about 2 km to the west; the Romans built an aqueduct in order to carry the water into town. Later the Suevan people destroyed it. Presently, the water of this spring is carried to Ribeira de Bruscos and down the stream to the Ega River, a tributary of the Mondego River on its left margin. Etmology: The specific ñame is dedicated to Silvia Casteloa, the júnior author's wife, for the com- panionship and constant help in the field. Description : Shell (Figs. 13-19) oval- cylindrical, somewhat elongated, whorls very convex, with a deep suture. Protoconch (Fig. 21) with about 1 whorl or a little more, the separation with the teleoconch being very difficult to see; diameter: nucleus about 130 ?m; first ? whorl, about 260 ?m. Microsculp- ture (Fig. 22) with a rough surface with minute depressions and numerous irregular lines. Teleoconch with a little more than three whorls, which are very convex and show on their lower part an angula- tion which, on the last whorl, changes into a wide not very prominent spiral cord. The microsculpture (Fig. 23) is made of curved growth lines prosocline in the subsutural area and orthocline on the lower part. Aperture almost circular, very irreg- ular, continuous and undulating fine peristoma (Fig. 20). Externally, a little before the end of the spire, there is a prominent elevation which is placed on the spiral cord, not elongated axially and which forms in the inner part of the aperture an important depression. It is not present in juveniles. Dimensions between 1.7 and 2.1 mm in height. The holotype is 2.0 mm high. Animal dark, with tentacles dark with a white line in the middle; the dorsum of the head is dark with only white circular spaces around the eyes, which are black; the dark colour extends to the anterior part of the snout, which is white; behind the eyes there is a triangular space with cream or cream-yellowish colour; the solé of the foot is white. The penis (Figs. 70-73) is wide, sharp, with a narrow base, and one or two undulations on its internal border; a black longitudinal line is visible near the external border. The radula (Figs. 24, 25) is typical of hydrobids, similar to the previous one but with less prominent lateral cusps in the rachidian tooth and also in the inter- nal border of the lateral teeth. Habitat: Under stones (limestone) lying on a coarse sandy bottom; always on surfaces devoid of all (macro) vegeta- tion. Distribution: Known from the type locality only (Fig. 78). Remarles: The species had been men- tioned by Nobre (1930: 206) as B. gibba (Draparnaud). 84 RoláN AND OLIVEIRA: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península Figures 23-25. Belgrandia silviae spec. nov. 23: microsculpture of the teleoconch; 24, 25: radula; detail of the radula. Figuras 23-25. Belgrandia silviae spec. nov. 23: microescultura de la teleoconcha; 24, 25: radula; detalle de la radula. Its collecting was a surprise, being so cióse to the type locality of Belgrandia lusitanica. The prominence on the exter- nal part of the last whorl which is corre- sponded by a wide excavation within the aperture suggested to us that the species could employ it to retain an egg as other species of Hydrobids (for example, Arganiella tartessae Arconada and Ramos, 2007 and Tarraconia rolani Ramos, Arconada and Moreno, 2000 do this in the umbilicus). Anyway, it could be a similar strategy to that found in the family Coralliophillidae Chenu, 1859, in which the female has a similar place in the aperture to retain a capsule with 85 Iberas, 27 (1), 2009 Figures 26-38. Belgrandia heussi C.R. Boettger, 1963. 26-30: shells, 1.9, 1.8. 1.7, 1.7 and 1.9 mm, from Alcobertas; 31-33: shells, 1.8, 1.7 and 1.7 mm, from Alviela; 34-36: shells, 1.6, 1.3 and 1.7 mm, from Lis; 37: shell, 1.9 mm, from An$os, 38: microsculpture of the teleoconch, shell from Alcobertas. Figuras 26-38. Belgrandia heussi C.R. Boettger, 1963. 26-30: conchas, 1,9; 1,8; 1,7; 1,7 y 1,9 mm, de Alcobertas; 31-33: conchas, 1,8; 1,7 y 1.7 mm, de Alviela; 34-36: conchas, 1,6; 1,5 y 1,7 mm, de Lis; 37: concha, 1,9 mm, de Angos, 38: microescultura de la teleoconcha, concha de Alcobertas. 86 ROLÁN AND Oliveirá: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península Figures 39-44. Belgrandia heussi C.R. Boettger, 1963. 39, 40: Protoconch and microsculpture, shell from Alcobertas; 41, 42: Protoconch and microsculpture, shell from Alviela; 43: Protoconch, shell from Lis. 44: Protoconch, shell from An^os. Figuras 39-44. Belgrandia heussi C.R. Boettger, 1963. 39, 40: Protoconcha y microescultura, concha de Alcobertas; 41, 42: Protoconcha y microescultura, concha de Alviela; 43: Protoconcha, concha de Lis. 44: Protoconcha, concha de Angos. 87 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 eggs. But further collecting trying to make an immediate examination in order to confirm this point did not show any egg in this place. So we do not know the function of this prominence- excavation. When the animal is retracted, the operculum is placed deeper than this excavation. Belgrandia lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867) is geographically the closest species, but the morphological differences are very evident, being smaller in size, the prominence of the last whorl is smaller, axially disposed, without a correspond- ing internal excavation near the aper- ture, the protoconch is slightly smaller, the penis has a more evident small apendix. Like Belgrandia lusitanica and B. alcoaensis, this species must be consid- ered in high risk of extinction, due to its limited range, despite the fact that the type locality is nowadays preserved as an archaeological site. Belgrandia heussi C. R. Boettger, 1963 (Figs. 26-48, 75, 76) Belgrandia heussi C. R. Boettger, 1963. Arch. Molí., 92: 40. [Type locality: Lis River, wich has its springs on the northern slope of Macizo Calcário Estremenho, and the mouth about 30 km south of the Mondego River, in the center of Portugal]. Type material: Holotype in SMF (167898). Type locality: Rio Liz, Portugal. Other material studied: Spring of the Angos River (NE3625), northern slope of Serra de Sicó, province of Beira Litoral, 210 sp, leg. A. de Oliveira, 3-April-2008 (MHNS: 100 sp; CAO: 110 sp). Springs of Abiul (NE3914), Southern slope of Serra de Sicó, province of Beira Litoral, 20 sp, leg. S. Casteloa and A. de Oliveira, 7-June-2008 (MHNS: 10 sp; CAO: 10 sp). Spring of the Lis River (ND1992), northern slope of Macizo Calcário Estremenho, province of Beira Litoral, 240 sp, leg. A. de Oliveira, 15-February-2008 (MHNS: 100 sp; CAO: 140 sp). Spring of Alcobertas (ND0864), South- ern slope of Macizo Calcário Estremenho, province of Ribatejo, about 320 sp, leg. S. Casteloa and A. de Oliveira, 9-December-2007 (MHNS: 160 sp; CAO: 160 sp). Springs of the Alviela River (ND2466), Southern slope of Macizo Calcário Estremenho, province of Ribatejo, 34 sp, leg. S. Casteloa and A. de Oliveira, 8-December-2007 (MHNS: 30 sp; CAO: 4 sp). Olho de Mira (ND2376), in a depression valley, south of Mira de Aire, central Macizo Calcário Estremenho, province of Estremadura, 4 sp, leg. E. Rolán, 19-May-2003. Description : Shell (Figs. 26-37) conical, somewhat elongated, whorls convex, with marked suture, fragüe. Protoconch (Figs. 39-45) with about one whorl, difficult to see because the separation with the teleoconch is not usually visible; diameter is variable in the above mentioned populations: nucleus between 100 and 150 ?m; first ? whorl between 200 and 260 ?m. Microsculpture rough with minute depressions and irregular lines; in some shells from Lis (type locality) this sculp- ture is more attenuated (Figs. 44, 45). Teleoconch with about three convex whorls with a deep suture, the spiral microsculpture scarcely appreciable and only visible under high magnification (Figs. 46, 47) and having slightly proso- cline growth lines. Aperture slightly and regularly ovoid, and a continuous and fine peris- toma. Externally, there is an axial thick- ening slightly away from the end of the spire, which does not correspond with any internal depression into the aper- ture. Dimensions between 1.5 and 1.9 mm in height. Animal dark only on the dorsum of the head and between the eyes, with tentacles dark with a white line in the middle; the penis (Figs. 75, 76) is folded on its base and sharp at the extreme, presenting two small prominences one to each side and sometimes a black line in the middle; the solé of the foot is white. The radula (Fig. 48) is typical of hydrobids, similar to that of the previ- 88 ROLÁN AND Oliveira: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península Figures 45-48. Belgrandia heussi C.R. Boettger, 1963. 45: microsculpture of the protoconch, shell from Lis; 46: microsculpture from a shell of Alcobertas; 47: microsculpture from a shell of Alviela; 48: radula, from a specimen of Alviela. Figuras 45-48. Belgrandia heussi C.R. Boettger, 1963. 45: micro escultura de la protoconcha, concha de Lis; 46: microescultura de una concha de Alcobertas ; 47: microescultura de una concha de Alviela; 48: rádula, de un ejemplar de Alviela. 89 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Figures 49-57. Belgrandia alcoaensis C.R. Boettger, 1963. 49-54: shells, 1.9, 1.7, 1.8, 1.7, 1.7 and 1.6 mm (MHNS); 55, 56: protoconchs; 57: microsculpture of the teleoconch. Figuras 49-57. Belgrandia alcoaensis C.R. Boettger, 1963. 49-54: conchas, 1,9; 1,7; 1,8; 1,7; 1,7 y 1.6 mm (MHNS); 55, 56: protoconchas; 57: microescultura de la teleoconcha. 90 ROLAN and OliveirA: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península Figures 58-61. Belgrandia alcoaensis C. R. Boettger, 1963. 58: operculum; 59-61: radulae. Figuras 58-61. Belgrandia alcoaensis C. R. Boettger, 1963. 58: opérenlo; 59-61: rádulas. 91 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 ous species, with the cusps in the rachidian and lateral teeth a little shorter and less numerous. Habitat : Under stones (limestone) lying on a coarse sandy bottom; always on surfaces devoid of all (macro) vegeta- tion; in shady areas with running water. This species coexists with 5 other fresh- water gastropods: Theodoxus cf. fluviatilis (Linnaeus, 1758)[Angos, Alcobertas, Alviela], Potamopyrgus antipodarum (Gray J. E., 1843)[Abiul, Lis, Alcobertas, Alviela], Radix balthica (Linnaeus, 1758)[Angos, Abiul], Ancylus fluviatilis (Müller O. E, 1774) [Abiul, Lis, Alviela] and Physella acuta (Draparnaud, 1805) [Abiul, Alviela]. Distribution : Contrarily to the other three Portuguese species, only known from the type locality, Belgrandia heussi is present in several springs dispersed in three provinces of central western Por- tugal: Beira Litoral (Angos, Abiul, Lis), Estremadura (Olho de Mira) and Rib- atejo (Alcobertas, Alviela) (Fig. 78). Remarks : The material examined from several localities, is not enterely uniform, small differences existing between them. However, after the study of the morphol- ogy of the shells, protoconchs, and soft parts we could not find enough differences to consider them as different species. Belgrandia lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867) may be distinguished by its deeper suture and convex whorls; the peris- tome more undulating, the thickening of the external lip slightly stronger and cióse to the end of the spire; the suture is less marked on the last whorl. The penis has a smaller prominence on its right side; the radula shows a more marked cusp in the rachidian and inter- nal border of the lateral teeth. Belgrandia silviae spec. nov. is con- stantly larger, with deeper suture, the peristoma more undulating, the external prominence of the last whorl larger and not disposed axially, the growth lines curved and the aperture has a deep cave near the end of the spire. Belgrandia alcoaensis C. R. Boettger, 1963 (Figs. 49-61, 74) Belgrandia heussi alcoaensis C. R. Boettger, 1963. Arch. Molí, 92: 42. [Type locality: Alcoa River, wich has its springs in the western slope of Macigo Calcário Estremenho, and after joining the Baga River, has its mouth about 35 km south of the Lis River, in the center of Portugal]. Type material: A paratype represented in Haase (2000: fig. 3 H). Type locality: Rio Alcoa, Portugal. Other material studied: More than 1000 sp, leg. E. Rolán, 22-November-1991 (MHNS); 26 sp, leg. A. de Oliveira, 12-February-2008 (CAO). Both from the spring of the Alcoa River (ND0476), in the small village of Chiqueda de Cima, at 2 km east of Alcobaga, western slope of Macigo Calcário Estremenho, province of Estremadura, Portugal. Description: Shell (Figs. 49-54) conical, somewhat elongated, whorls fíat or scarcely convex, with marked suture, fragüe. Protoconch (Figs. 55, 56) with a little less than one whorl, the separation with the teleoconch being usually visible; diameter about 300 ?m: nucleus about 125 ?m; first ? whorl, about 250 ?m. Spiral microsculpture with minute depressions. Teleoconch with about three or three and a quarter whorls, with some irregu- lar, very depressed and scarcely visible spiral striae and slightly prosocline growth lines (Fig. 57). Aperture slightly ovoid, with a small deviation of the border of the external lip in the place where the spiral cords ends; there is a continuous and narrow peris- toma. Externally, it is not possible to see any thickening near the external border. Dimensions between 1.6 and 1.9 mm in height. Animal dark only on the dorsum of the head and between the eyes, with tentacles dark with a white line in the middle; the penis (Fig. 74) is folded on 92 ROLÁN AND OLIVEIRA: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península Figures 62-68. Belgrandia boscae (Salvaña, 1887). 62-64: shells, 2.0, 1.9, 1.9 mm; 65: protoconch; 66, 67: microsculpture of the protoconch; 68: radula. Figuras 62-68. Belgrandia boscae ( Salvaña , 1887). 62-64: conchas, 2,0; 1,9 y 1,9 mm; 65: protoconcha; 66, 67: micro escultura de la protoconcha; 68: rddula. 93 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Figures 69-77. Soft parts and penis. 69: Belgrandia lusitanica, Quinta das Lágrimas; 70-73: B. silviae spec. nov., and several variations of the penis, Alcabideque; 74: B. alcoaensis , Alcoa River; 73, 76: B. heussi, and variation of the penis, from the spring of Lis River; 77: B. boscae. Fuente de la Corroba, Tarragona. Figuras 69-77. Partes blandas y penes. 69: Belgrandia lusitanica, Quinta das Lágrimas; 70-73: B. silviae spec. nov., con algunas variaciones del penis, Alcabideque; 74: B. alcoaensis, Río Alcoa; 75, 76: B. heussi, con variaciones del penis, del nacimiento del Río Lis; 77: B. boscae. Fuente de la Corroba, Tarragona. its base and sharp at the extreme, pre- senting two small prominences one to each side and sometimes a black line in the middle; the solé of the foot is white. Operculum (Fig. 58) ovoid, translu- cent, with the nucleus a little lateral. The radula (Figs. 59-61) is typical of hydrobids, similar to that of the previ- ous species although the cusps in the rachidian and lateral teeth are a little shorter and less numerous. Habitat : Under stones (limestone) lying on a coarse sandy bottom; always on surfaces devoid of (macro) vegeta- don. This species coexists with 4 other freshwater gastropods: Theodoxus cf. flu- viatilis (Linnaeus, 1758), Potamopyrgus antipodarum (Gray J.E., 1843), Ancylus fluviatilis (Müller O.F., 1774) and Phy- sella acuta (Draparnaud, 1805). Distribution : Known from the type locality only (Fig. 78). Remarks : Belgrandia alcoaensis was considered as a subspecies by Haase (2000: 185) after having only examined one shell (paratype). In the present work, we have examined many speci- mens and consider it very different from the other Portuguese species due to the almost fíat whorls, especially the last one, the prominent spiral cord and the lack of any axial thickening. 94 ROLÁN AND Oliveira: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península Species Localities o o o o B. lusitanico B. silviae B. alcoaensis B. heussi B. boscae 1 . Quinta das Lágrimas 2. Alcabideque 3. Alcoa 4. Lis 5. Aleo bertas 6. Alviela 7. Angos 8. Abiul 9. Olho de Mira 10. Carroba 1 1 . Benafer 12. Navajas 13. Castellnovo 14. Segorbe 1 5. Siete Aguas Figure 78. UTM 100 km squares distribution map of Belgrandia in Spain. Figura 78. Mapa de distribución de Belgrandia en España. Cuadrículas UTM de 100 km de lado. Belgrandia lusitanica, Belgrandia heussi and Belgrandia silviae spec. nov. may be distinguished by their deeper suture and more convex whorls, the last one not angulated, as well as the existence of a prominence or axial thickening on the external lip. Like Belgrandia lusitanica and Bel- grandia silviae spec. nov., this species must be considered in high risk of extinction, due to its limited range. This risk was recently increased by human interven- tion on the bed of the Alcoa River, from near its spring down the stream to the center of the village of Chiqueda de Cima. In the course of the last sampling in the site (February-2008), only a few specimens were observed. 95 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Table I. Schematic differences of the characters of the species of Belgrandia in Iberian Península. Tabla I. Diferencias entre las especies de Belgrandia de la península ibérica. B. lusitnnka B.heussi B. alcoaensis B. sitviae B. boscae Geographic distribution Middle Portugal Middle Portugal Middle Portugal Middle Portugal Eastern Spain Spiral cord Sometimes slightly Not apreciable Very evident Very evident Not apreciable Las! whorl with peripheral angulation Not apreciable Not apreciable Very evident Slightly evident Not apreciable Last whorl Convex Convex Convex Almost fíat Convex Axial external lip thickening Axially disposed Axially disposed slight Not apreciable Very prominent in the middle Axially disposed Columella Somewhat separated Somewhat separated Adherent Adherent Somewhat separated Excavation in the aperture No No No Very important No Suture Strangulating slightly last whorl Not strangulating Not strangulating Strangulating slightly last whorl Not strangulating Peristome weakly undulating weakly undulating weakly undulating Strongly undulating weakly undulating Diameter of protoconch nucleus 90 pm 100-150 pm 125 pm 130 pm 130 pm Diameter of protoconch 240 pm half whorl 200-260 pm 250 pm 260 pm 275 pm Height of the shell 1,4-1 ,9 mm 1,5-1 ,9 mm 1,6-1, 9 mm 1, 7-2,1 mm 1,6-2, 2 mm Belgrandia boscae (Salvaña, 1887) (Figs. 62-68, 77) Hydrobia boscae Salvaña, 1887. Crón. Cient., Barcelona, 10: 141. [Type locality: In the springs of Gandía, Valencia, Spain] Type material: After Boeters (1988) and Haase (2000), untraceable. Type locality: Springs at Gandía, Valencia. Material examined: YK11. 100 sp, road from Valencia to Teruel, in Navajas (Castellón) in front of the hotel Navas Altas (29-September-1990)(MHNS). YK02. 50 sp, Benafer, in the river near Fuente de los Nogales (Castellón) (29-September-1990)(MHNS). YK11. 50 sp, road from Segorbe to Artana, in Castellnovo, near the river (30-September-1990). YK11. 100 sp, Segorbe (Castellón), Fuente de los 50 caños (6-October-1990)(MHNS). XJ77. about 100 sp, Road from Requena to Valencia, in Siete Aguas (Fuente del Retiro, at 2 Kms) (8-October-1990) (MHNS). BF91. About 100 sp, Tarragona, Fuente de la Torre de la Carroba (3-July-1991) (MHNS). Description: Shell (Figs. 62-64) oval- cylindrical, somewhat elongated, whorls convex, with deep suture. Protoconch (Fig. 65) with about 1 whorl, the separation with the teleo- conch being very difficult to see; diame- ter: nucleus about 130 ?m; first ? whorl, about 275 ?m. Microsculpture (Figs. 66, 67) with minute depressions, which under high magnification (Fig. 67) are seen to present depressed cavities. Teleoconch with about three whorls, with only prosocline growth lines. Aperture slightly ovoid, continuous and with a fine peristoma, a little undu- lating and e verted. The contact area with the previous whorl is small. Externally, a little before the end of the spire, there is 96 ROLÁN AND OliveirA: The genus Belgrandia in the Iberian Península an axial elongated thickening, very con- stante only absent from juveniles. Dimensions between 1.6 and 2.2 mm in height. Animal dark, with tentacles with some pigment on the borders; the dorsum of the head is dark, only light on spaces around the eyes and the ante- rior part of the snout; behind the eyes there is a triangular space with cream or cream-yellowish colour; the penis (Fig. 77) is elongated, sharp-pointed, with an angle near its base, a little black on its anterior part, and sometimes with a small apendix on its left side, not always appreciable. The solé of the foot is white. The radula (Fig. 68) is typical of hydrobids, with a central tooth with about 10 cusps, the central one scarcely more prominent; lateral teeth similar, with about ten cusps; the marginal ones are different, one with nearly 30 small and elongated cusps, and the other spoon-like with only few cusps. Habitat: Under leaves and stones in very puré water in shady places. Distribution : This species was found in several locations in the provinces of ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors thank Jesús Méndez who made the SEM photos in the Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tec- BIBLIOGRAPHY Boeters H.D. 1988. Westeuropáische Moitessieriidae, 2) and Westeuropáische Hy- drobiidae, 7). Moitessieriidae und Hydrobi- idae in Spanien und Portugal (Gastropoda: Prosobranchia). Archiv für Molluskenkunde, 118(4-6): 181-261. Boettger C.R. 1963. Zur Kenntnis der in Por- tugal vorkommenden Süfiwasserschnecken aus der Hydobiiden-Gattung Belgrandia Bour- guignat. Archiv für Molluskenkunde, 92(1-2): 39-43. Clessin S. 1878. Das Genus Belgrandia Bour g.Nachrichtblatt der Deutschen Malakozo- ologischen Gesellschaft, 10(8): 127-130. eastern Spain: Cuenca, Valencia, Castel- lón and Tarragona (see Boeters, 1988). Remarks : Boeters (1988) presented this species under the ñame Belgrandia cf. marginata (Michaud, 1831) but indi- cating clear differences from the Spanish species of Belgrandia versus the topo- types of the true B. marginata. Therefore he States that perhaps the ñame for them could be Belgrandia boscae. We use this ñame because besides the morpho- logical differences a large distance sepa- rates these populations from those of B. marginata. There are quite clear differences from the Portuguese species, such as (Table I): -Belgrandia lusitanica is the most similar, but the protoconch is smaller. -Belgrandia silviae has a very impor- tant prominence at the end of the spire and an excavation inside the aperture, and also a spiral cord; -Belgrandia heussi has a suture which is not so deep, the thickening of the last whorl less evident. -Belgrandia alcoaensis usually lacks the thickening and has a well marked spiral cord. nológico (CACTI) of the University of Vigo. Antonio A. Monteiro revised the English text. Cossignani T. AND Cossignani V. 1995. Atlante delle conchiglie terrestri e dulciacquicole ita- liane. LTnformatore Piceno. Ancona. 208 pp. Dance S.P., 1986. A history of shell collecting. Brill and Backhuys, Leiden. 265 pp, 32 pls. Kabat K. and Hershler R. 1993. The Proso- branch Snail Family Hydrobiidae (Gas- tropoda: Rissooidea): Review of Classification and Supraspecific Taxa. Smithsonian Contri- bution to Zoology, 547: 1-94. Haase M. 2000. A revisión of the genus Bel- grandia, with the description of a new species from France (Caenogastropoda: Hydrobi- idae). Malacologia, 42(1): 171-201. 97 Iberus , 27 (1), 2009 Paladilhe A. 1867. Nouvelles miscellanées malacologiqu.es . Revue et magasin de Zoologie puré et appliquée (2)19: 38-41, 42-53, 88-95. Nobre A. 1930. Moluscos terrestres, fluviais e das aguas salobras de Portugal. Companhia Editora do Minho, Barcelos. Rolán E. 1990. Belgrandia lusitanica (Paladilhe, 1867) (Gastropoda, Hydrobiidae), especie endémica de Portugal, en riesgo de extinción. Publicaqóes Ocasionáis da Sociedade Portuguesa de Malacologia, 15: 11-16. 98 Iberus, 27 (1): 99-102, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacología On the egg capsule of Marginella glabella (Linné, 1758) Sobre la cápsula ovígera de Marginella glabella (Linné, 1758) Franck BOYER* Recibido el 1 -XI 1-2008. Aceptado el 8-IV-2009 ABSTRACT The purse-shaped egg capsule of Marginella glabella (Linné, 1758) is described and pic- tured from a sample collected in Lanzarote, Canary Islands. Due to the occurrence of the same kind of egg capsule in M. goodalli and to the occur- rence of plano-convex egg capsules in all other Marginella species documented for this character, the shape of the egg capsule is proposed as a further feature characterizing the M. glabella species group. RESUMEN Se describe y se muestra por primera vez la cápsula ovígera de Marginella glabella (Linné, 1758), a partir de una muestra obtenida en Lanzarote, Islas Canarias. Considerando la ocurrencia del mismo tipo de cápsula ovígera en M. goodalli y la ocu- rrencia de cápsulas plano-convexas en todas las demás especies de Marginella para las que existen datos de este carácter, se propone considerar la forma de la cápsula ovígera como un rasgo adicional para caracterizar el grupo de especies en torno a M. glabella. INTRODUCTION Knowledge of the morphology of the egg capsules of marginelliform gas- tropods was summarized and discussed by Coovert (1986), through the presen- taron of egg capsules attributed to 16 different species. Twelve of these species belong to the Marginellidae sensu Coovert and Coovert, 1995 (2 Dentimargo species, 3 Glabella species, 1 Haloginella species, 2 Marginella species, 2 Prunum species and 2 Volvarina species) and 4 belong to the Cystiscidae sensu Coovert and Coovert, 1995 (2 Gran- ulina species and 2 Persicula species). On the basis of these data, the Mar- ginellidae species are said to have a plano-convex egg capsule, except for Marginella goodalli Sowerby, 1825 from off the Guiñean zone, which has a * 1 10 chemin du Marais du Souci, 93270 Sevran, France purse-shaped egg capsule. The Cystisci- dae species are said to also have a plano-convex egg capsule, except for Persicula cornea (Lamarck, 1822), from the Guiñean zone too, which also has a purse-shaped egg capsule. It is important to note that, in most cases, the specific attribution of the egg capsules recorded by Coovert (1986) requires further confirmation, the laying of eggs not having been specifically observed and thus the larva being attrib- uted with low certainty to a given species. Knudsen (1950), who is the principal reference used by Coovert (1986), himself admitted that the method of Identification "is not absolutely reliable and possibly some incorrect identifica- tions have been made". However, due to 99 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 the fact that the attribution of purse- shaped egg capsules to M. goodalli and to P. cornea is proposed by Knudsen (1950) with credible arguments, the heterogene- ity of egg capsule types within both Mar- ginellidae and Cystiscidae must be provi- sionally accepted, at least between genera and possibly within some of them. More recent records of plano-convex egg capsules of Marginellidae species were made by Gofas and Fernandes (1988) concerning Marginella spinacia Gofas and Fernandes, 1988 from Sao Tomé, by Fer- nandes and Rolán (1991) concerning M. eveleighi Tomlin and Shackleford, 1913 from Principe, and by Penchaszadeh and Rincón (1996) concerning Prunum prunum (Gmelin, 1791) from Venezuela. The identification of the egg capsules of these two Marginella species was made with a high degree of certainty on the basis of the morphologic characters of the larvae, whereas the identification was made with absolute certainty for the Prunum species through direct observation of the clutch raised in an aquarium. The problem raised by the hetero- geneity of the egg capsule types within each of the two marginelliform families Marginellidae and Cystiscidae was not tackled by Coovert (1986), by Coovert and Coovert (1995) or by subsequent authors, despite the fact that any inter- grades between the two capsule types under discussion is unknown. The discovery of a purse-shaped egg capsule attributable to Marginella glabella (Linné, 1758), type species of the genus Marginella Lamarck, 1799, is presented herein. This new record allows us to re- assess the issue of the heterogeneity of egg capsule types in the genus Mar- ginella, together with the apparent synapomorphies characterizing the M. glabella species group. MATERIAL AND METHODS The data concerning the clutch of M. glabella comes from material and observa- tions communicated by José Hernández. J. Hernández found a purse-shaped egg-capsule (Figs. 1-2) fixed under a stone at 3-5 m off Playa Quemada, situated on the southeastern coast of Lanzarote, eastern Canary Islands. The egg capsule contained one larva cióse to hatching. This larva was removed from the capsule by opening the suture line defined along the cutting edge of the "purse" (Fig. 3) and it was photographed out of the capsule (Fig. 4). The shell of this larva was compared with the protoconch of live collected adult specimens of M. glabella (Fig. 5) sampled in the vicinity by Francisco Sicilia and Javier López- Vicente. The terms “plano-convex" and "purse- shaped" egg capsule are used by prefer- ence, respectively, to the terms "lenticular or lens-shaped capsule" and "lenticular capsule with a fíat base" used by Coovert (1986). This preference is due to the inad- equately descriptive meaning of "lentic- ular" applied to the cases considered, and to the ambiguity introduced by the use of the same word for defining two different types of capsule morphology. As a matter of fact, the two types of egg capsules exam- ined differ not only in the way they are attached to the substrate (via a basal mem- brane extending beyond the capsule walls in the case of the plano-convex type, versus via a more or less produced stalk in the case of the purse-shaped type), but also in the way the capsules are torn open at the hatching stage [along a suture line sur- rounding the hemispherical upper side of the capsule quite cióse to the base in the plano-convex type (see in Coovert, 1986), versus escape from an "exit hole" at the top of the capsule (see in Knudsen, 1950: 121) or along the cutting edge of the lateral borders (this work)]. RESULTS The attribution of the purse-shaped egg capsule found off Playa Quemada to the species M. glabella is based on the morphology of the larval shell removed from the capsule. The outline of this capsule looks quite like that of a chicken egg horizontally ori- ented and put on a ventrally fixed short stem. The capsule is laterally compressed, smooth, hyalinous light honey-amber. The 100 BOYER: On the egg capsule of Marginella glabella Figures 1-5. Marginella glabella, Playa Quemada, Lanzarote. 1,2: egg capsule, view from both sides, width= 7 mm; 3: hatching of the larva; 4: larval shell with animal retracted; 5: adult shell, length= 26 mm. Figuras 1-5. Marginella glabella. Playa Quemada , Lanzarote. 1-2: cápsula ovígera, vistas desde ambos lados , ancho = 7 mm; 3: eclosión de la larva; 4: concha larvaria con el animal retraído; 5: concha adulta, longitud= 26 mm. total height of this capsule is 5 mm, the height of the "purse" is 4 mm, its width is 7 mm, and the stalk length is 1 mm. The shell of the larva perfectly matches by its shape, its consistency, its colour and its size (1,3 mm at the base line of its upper quarter, 2 mm at its wider diameter) the protoconch (width: 1,3 mm) of the M. glabella adult specimens found in the vicin- ity (compare Figures 4 and 5). No other gastropod species from this geographical area show a similar protoconch. DISCUSSION M. glabella is shown to have an egg capsule of the purse-shaped type, like the congeneric species M. goodalli. The egg capsule described by Knudsen (1950) for M. goodalli is quite different from that of M. glabella, due to its taller, more produced, subcylindrical outline, but both species can be said to have the same type of egg capsule, deeply differ- ent from the plano-convex egg capsules 101 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 of the supposedly congeneric M. cleryi, M. spinacia and M. eveleighi, and of the closely related Glabella adansoni (Kiener, 1834), Dentimargo aureocincta (Stearns, 1872) and D. cairoma (Brookes, 1924). Other characters shared by M. glabella and M. goodalli are rather inflated non-sculptured orange to reddish shells with white marks or spots, and orange animáis with white spots or dots. On the basis of personal observations of live specimens in Senegal, the species proposed to belong to the M. glabella species group together with M. glabella and M. goodalli are M. aurantia (Lamarck, 1822), M. desjardini (Marche-Marchad, 1957), M. sebastiani (Marche-Marchad and Rosso, 1979) and M. lamarcki (Boyer, 2004). The specific validity of other taxa commonly linked to this group (like M. irrorata Menke, 1828 and M. pseudosebastiani Mattavelli, 2001) remains dubious and requires further investigation. The possession of the same type of egg capsule is considered here as a further synapomorphy defining the M. glabella species group as very distinct from the other Marginella, Glabella and Dentimargo species groups. A noticeable plasticity is often observed at the individual level in egg capsules of marine gastropods, and a noticeable disparity in the details of the capsule morphology is often observed BIBLIOGRAPHY Coovert G.A. 1986. A Review of Marginellid Egg Capsules. Marginella Marginaba, 1 (4): 13-19. Coovert G.A. and Coovert H.K. 1995. Revi- sión of the Supraspecific Classification of the Marginelliform Gastropods. The Nautilus, 109 (2-3): 43-110. Fernandes F. and Rolán E. 1991. The Mar- ginellidae (Mollusca, Gastropoda) of Principe Island (República de Sao Tomé e Principe). Journal ofConchology, 34: 85-90. Gofas S. and Fernandes F. 1988. The Mar- ginellidae of Sao Tomé, West Africa. Journal ofConchology, 33: 1-30. between species belonging to the same genus. For instance, Rolán and Raybaudi Massilia (1995) showed the high vari- ability of the egg capsules in Conus mediter- ránea and Moreno and Templado (1995) demonstrated that the sibling species Nas- sarius cuvieri and N. unifasciatus from the Lusitanian Province have very distinct egg capsules despite the similarity of their shell characters. However the type of egg capsule seems to be homogeneous in monophyletic groups : purse-shaped type in C. mediterraneus and cushion-shaped type in the N. cuvieri / N. unifasciatus series. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This article is dedicated to the late José Maria Hernández (Galdar, Gran Canaria), who contributed through his personal observations in the fíeld, dona- tion of the referred material and photog- raphy of the sample. I must thank also Philippe Maestrati (Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, París) for the photography of the adult specimen of M. glabella, Alain Robin (Le Mesnil Saint Denis, France) for arrang- ing the digital píate and Andrew Wake- field (Buckhurst Hill, England) for editing the English text. Serge Gofas (Málaga University) revised the manuscript and highly con- tributed to improve it. Knudsen J. 1950. Egg capsules and Devel- oppement of some Marine Prosobranchs from the Tropical West Africa. Atlantide Re- port, 1: 85-130, figs. 1-31. Moreno D. and Templado J. 1995. El com- plejo de especies " Nassarius cuvieri- N. uni- fasciatus” (Gastropods, Nassaridae)enelSur de España. Iberus, 12 (2): 33-47. Penchaszadeh P.E. and Rincón A. 1996. Egg Capsules and Development of Prunum pru- num (Gmelin, 1791) (Prosobranchia: Margi- nellidae) from the Venezuelan Caribbean. The Veliger, 39 (1): 83-86. Rolán E. and Raybaudi Massilia G. 1995. Spawning and development of Mediter- ranean Conus: aquarium observations (Proso- branchia: Conidae). Argonauta, 9 (1-6): 9-22. 102 Iberus, 27 (1): 103-117, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Diversity and spatial distribution of the gastropod fauna (Mollusca: Gastropoda) on subtidal sedimentary substrata of the Ensenada de Baiona (Galicia, NW Iberian Península) Diversidad y distribución espacial de la fauna de gasterópodos (Mollusca: Gastropoda) de los sustratos sedimentarios submareales de la Ensenada de Baiona (Galicia, NW Península Ibérica) Juan MOREIRA*1, Eva CACA BE LOS** and Jesús S. TRONCOSO** Recibido el 16-XII-2008. Aceptado el 8-IV-2009 ABSTRACT Gastropods (Mollusca: Gastropoda) are an important component of soft-bottom faunas ¡n temperóte latitudes. The diversity and distribution of gastropod fauna on sedimentary sub- strata at the Ensenada de Baiona (Galicia, NW Iberian Península) was studied by means of quantitative sampling. The total number of species was similar to that found in other Galician "rías" dominated by sandy sediments and greater than in other "rías", whose sediments are mostly muddy. Gastropod assemblages in gravelly and sandy bottoms of the inlet were, in general, more diverse than those in muddy sediments. The distribution and composition of gastropod assemblages in the Ensenada de Baiona is related to the granulometric composition and median grain size of the sediment, which are, in turn, influenced by the intrinsic hydrodynamic conditions of the inlet. These patterns of gastropod distribution are similar to those previously reported for other benthic taxa in the same area. RESUMEN Los moluscos gasterópodos (Mollusca: Gastropoda) constituyen un importante componente de la fauna de fondos blandos en latitudes templadas. La diversidad y distribución de la fauna de gasterópodos de los sustratos sedimentarios de la ensenada de Baiona (Galicia, NW península Ibérica) fue estudiada por medio de muestras cuantitativas. El número total de especies encontrado en la ensenada fue similar al registrado en otras rías de Galicia caracterizadas por presentar sedimentos principalmente arenosos, y mayor que en las rías dominadas por sedimentos fangosos. La distribución y composición de las comunida- des de gasterópodos en la ensenada de Baiona está relacionada con la composición gra- nulométrica y la mediana del tamaño de grano del sedimento, que están determinadas a su vez por las particulares condiciones hidrodinámicas de la zona. Estos patrones de dis- tribución son similares a los registrados para otros grupos zoológicos en esta misma ense- nada. * Estación de Bioloxía Mariña da Graña, Universidade de Santiago de Compostela, Casa do Hórreo, Rúa da Ribeira 1, E-15590, A Graña, Ferrol, Spain. ** Departamento de Ecoloxía e Bioloxía Animal, Facultade de Ciencias, Campus de Lagoas-Marcosende s/n, Universidade de Vigo, E-36310, Vigo, Spain. 1 Corresponding author: juan.moreira@usc.es 103 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 INTRODUCTION Benthic faunas inhabiting subtidal soft-bottoms are influenced by a number of interacting abiotic and biotic factors, such as granulometry, hydrody- namism, organic matter content, preda- tion and competition (see, for example, Wildish, 1977; Gray, 1981; Wilson, 1991). Spatio-temporal fluctuations of those factors determine, in many cases, the patterns of distribution and compo- sition of benthic assemblages (Stubble- field, Permenter and Swift, 1977). The characterization of those patterns is of paramount importance to evalúate the relative role of natural perturbances and of that derived from anthropogenic activities (Underwood, 1992). The Galician rias (NW Spain) have highly diverse benthic faunas due, in part, to the great variety of habitats and sediments present there (p.e. López- Jamar, 1981; Mora, 1982; Troncoso and Urgorri, 1993). The seashore around the rias is highly populated and therefore subjected to many perturba- tions such as those due to the culture of bivalves on rafts, construction of harbour facilities, industrial activities and disposal of sewages (López-Jamar, 1978; López-Jamar, González and Mejuto, 1986; Castellanos, Hernán- dez-Vega and Junoy, 2003). The effects of these perturbations mostly transíate into organic enrichment and changes in sedimentary composition (López- Jamar, 1978; López-Jamar and Mejuto, 1985), which, in turn, affect the composi- tion of benthic assemblages and the sta- bility of the populations of many species (López-Jamar et al ., 1986). There are still many areas of the Galician rías whose benthic fauna is little known, such as the Ensenada de Baiona, an inlet located to the south of the Ría de Vigo. Mollusca are an impor- tant component of soft-bottom benthic faunas (Troncoso and Urgorri, 1993; Guerra-García and García-Gómez, 2004) and their study might be also useful to check the State of benthic assemblages (Boening, 1999). Lists of species of the molluscan fauna present in the Ensenada de Baiona were pro- vided by MacAndrew (1849), Hidalgo (1886), Rolán (1983) and Rolán, Otero and Rolán-Álvarez (1989); Moreira, Quintas and Troncoso (2005) studied the distribution of subtidal molluscan assemblages as a whole. Nevertheless, the composition and distribution of sub- tidal gastropod assemblages as such have not been described from this area yet. In fact, the description of gastropod assemblages has often been neglected in papers dealing with soft-bottom mollusc faunas. In general, more atten- tion is paid to bivalves which are, on many occasions, more abundant than gastropods in sedimentary environ- ments (Denadai and Amaral, 1999; Rueda, Fernández-Casado, Salas and Gofas, 2001; Moreira et al., 2005). In this paper, we present a list of gastropod species found during the sampling pro- grammes developed by the group of Adaptaciones de Animales Marinos from the University of Vigo between 1995 and 1997 in the Ensenada de Baiona. The description of gastropod assemblages in the soft bottoms of the inlet is also provided and relates them to sediment characteristics and other environmental features. This work is part of a baseline study on the benthic assemblages from subtidal sediments of the Ensenada de Baiona; temporal dynamics of gastropod assemblages will be described elsewhere. MATERIAL AND METHODS Study area The Ensenada de Baiona is located on the Southern margin of the mouth of the Ría de Vigo, between 42° 07' N - 42° 09' N and 08° 51' W - 08° 49 'W (Fig. 1). Salinity ranges from 32%0 in winter to 35%o in summer in the outer area, and from 28%o to 35%o in the harbour area. The northern and eastern margins of the inlet are bordered by sandy beaches, while the western outer margin is exposed to oceanic swell and winter winds (Alejo, Austin, Francés and VTT as, 1999); the harbour jetty pro vides 104 Moreira ET AL.: Spatial distribution of gastropods on subtidal sedimentary substraía Figure 1. Location of the Ensenada de Baiona and sampling sites. Sites are grouped according to Cluster and Simprof analysis. Figura 1. Localización de la ensenada de Baiona y de los puntos de muestreo. Los puntos de muestreo se agrupan en función de los resultados de los análisis Cluster y Simprof. shelter to the Southern area around the harbour of Baiona. Most of its soft bottoms are sandy; the distribution of sediments follows a gradient in grain size (Alejo et al., 1999; Moreira et al., 2005). Sediments of the outer mouth of the inlet are composed of gravel and coarse sand; in the central area the dom- inant fractions are médium and fine sand, while sediments in northern and eastern margins are constituted mostly by fine and very fine sand (Moreira et al., 2005). Sediments in the harbour area range from sandy mud to mud with percentages of silt / clay of up to 90%. Sampling In order to study diversity and distri- bution of gastropods, quantitative sam- pling was done at the Ensenada de Baiona in December 1995 at 21 subtidal sandy sites (Table I). Four of these sites were further studied with a monthly periodic- ity between February 1996 and February 1997 (results will be published in a forth- coming paper). Five replicates were taken at each site using a van Veen grab with a sampling area of 0.056 m2 thus covering a total area of 0.28 m2 on each site. Samples were sieved through a 0.5 mm mesh and fixed in 10% buffered formalin for later sorting and identification of the fauna. An additional sediment sample was taken at each site to determine granulometric com- position, median grain size (Qso), sorting coefficient (So), carbonates (%) and total organic matter (TOM, %). The following sedimentary fractions were considered: gravel (GR, > 2 mm), very coarse sand (VCS, 2-1 mm), coarse sand (CS, 1-0.5 mm), médium sand (MS, 0.5-0.25 mm), fine sand (FS, 0.25-0.125 mm), very fine sand (VFS, 105 Iberas, 27 (1), 2009 TABLE I. COORDINATES AND PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SAM- PLING SITES IN THE ENSENADA DE BAIONA. Qso, MEDIAN GRAIN SIZE; C03=, CARBONATE CONTENT; TOM, TOTAL ORGANIC MATTER CONTENT. Tabla I. Coordenadas y características físicas de los puntos de maestreo en la ensenada de Baiona. Q50, mediana del tamaño de grano; C03=, contenido en carbonatos; TOM, materia orgánica total. a Positrón (N) Position (W) Depth (m) Gravel (%) Sand (%) §5 a m Qso (mm) Sedimentary type Sorting g é (%) W01 1 42°08,50"N 08°50'52"W 7 94.23 5.74 0.03 5.00 Gravel Modérate 24.26 1.48 2 42o08'50"N 08°50'15"W 7 3.52 89.96 6.52 0.13 Muddy sand Modérate 32.39 1.91 3 42°08,50"N 08°49'44"W 4 0.01 87.19 12.80 0.09 Muddy sand Moderately well sorted 29.67 2.27 4 42o08'30"N 08°50'52"W 12 - - - - - - - - 5 42°08'30"N 08°50'15"W 11 0.15 88.40 11.45 0.09 Muddy sand Moderately well sorted 34.37 1.70 6 42°08'30"N 08°49,44"W 7 0.09 90.66 9.25 0.09 Muddy sand Moderately well sorted 37.59 2.10 7 42o08'30"N 08°49'13"W 3 0.04 96.44 3.53 0.15 Fine sand Modérate 48.33 2.05 8 42°08,10,,N 08°50,52"W 12 10.29 88.40 1.31 0.83 Coarse sand Modérate 68.94 1.48 9 42°08'10"N 08o50'15"W 10 1.24 95.70 3.06 0.35 Médium sand Modérate 82.67 2.28 10 42°08'10"N 08°49'44"W 8 5.84 88.94 5.22 0.14 Muddy sand Modérate 49.13 2.20 11 42o08'10"N 08°49'13"W 3 0.18 84.28 15.54 0.10 Muddy sand Moderately well sorted 44.20 2.58 12 42°07'50"N 08°50,52"W 9 8.27 91.71 0.03 0.90 Coarse sand Modérate 61.31 1.32 13 42°07'50"N 08°50,15"W 8 0.44 96.47 3.09 0.34 Médium sand Modérate 79.68 2.07 14 42°07'50"N 08°49'44"W 9 1.14 95.70 3.16 0.31 Médium sand Modérate 80.35 2.18 15 42°07,50"N 08o49'13"W 4 0.03 95.83 4.14 0.14 Fine sand Modérate 45.00 2.32 16 42°07,30"N 08°50'45"W 4 0.04 9.85 90.11 0.02 Mud Poor 5.81 12.05 17 42o07'30"N 08°50'15"W 7 9.63 84.18 6.19 0.23 Muddy sand Modérate 72.91 3.18 18 42°07,30"N 08°49'44"W 8 2.11 94.08 3.82 0.23 Fine sand Modérate 75.33 2.48 19 42°07,19"N 08°50'45"W 2 2.53 22.95 74.52 0.02 Mud Poor 7.11 8.45 20 42°07,10"N 08°50'15,,W 3 0.17 21.66 78.17 0.02 Mud Poor 6.85 7.28 21 42°07'10"N 08°49,44"W 3 0.19 50.61 49.20 0.06 Sandy mud Poor 4.36 2.82 0.125-0.063 mm), and silt/clay (< 0.063 mm). Sedimentary types were character- ized according to Junoy and Viéitez (1989). Carbonate content (%) was esti- mated by treating of the sample with hydrochloric acid. The total organic matter content (TOM, %) was estimated from the weight loss on combustión at 450°C for 4 hours. Data analyses The total abundance (N), number of species (S), the Shannon- Wiener diversity Índex (H', log2) and Pielou's evenness (J) were calculated for each site. Gastropod assemblages were determined through non-parametric multivariate techniques (Field, Clarke and Warwick, 1982), using the Primer 6 software package (Clarke and Gorley, 2006). Similarities between samples were determined based on the abundance data of species. These data were transformed prior to the analyses by applying square root in order to down- weigh the contribution of the most abun- dant species. Data were previously aver- aged across the five replicates for each site thus obtaining a centroid. From the simi- 106 MOREIRA ETAL.\ Spatial distribution of gastropods on subtidal sedimentary substrata Figure 2. Dendrogram of classification of sampling sites according to valúes of Bray-Curtis similar- ity Índex calculated on data of species abundance. Groups of sites (A-E) were determined accord- ing to Simprof results. Figura 2. Dendrograma de clasificación de los puntos de muestreo en función del índice de similitud de Bray-Curtis calculado según los datos de abundancia de las especies. Las agrupaciones de los puntos de muestreo (A-E) fueron determinadas según el análisis Simprof. larity matrix, a classification of the sam- pling sites was done by Cluster analysis based on the group-average sorting algo- rithm, obtaining a dendrogram. Clusters of sites determined as statistically signif- icant by profile test Simprof (p < 0.05) were considered as having a similar gastropod composition. Non-metric multidimen- sional scaling (nMDS) was used to produce a visual representation of the ordination of centroids. Cluster analysis was also done to check for species affinities (inverse analysis) based on the abundance data of the numerically dominant species, i.e. those whose abundance is >1% of the total abundance. The possible relationship between gastropod fauna and the measured envi- ronmental variables was explored using the Bio-Env procedure (Primer). All variables expressed in percentages were previously transformed by log (x+1). The following variables were considered in these analyses: TOM, granulometric fractions (GR, CS, MS, FS, VFS), median grain size, sorting coefficient, skewness, kurtosis, temperature and depth, while carbonates, VCS, silt/clay and pH were excluded due to their high correlation with other variables (r>0.9, p<0.01). Sites 1 and 4 were discarded for Bio-Env analysis because of their stony nature, which could make interpretation of the analyses difficult, and insufficient sedi- ment sample from site 4. RESULTS Cartography of subtidal sediments in 1995 yielded a total of 1631 specimens belonging to 47 species (Table II). 14 addi- tional species were found during the tem- poral study (from February 1996 to Feb- ruary 1997), bringing the total number of species up to 61. The richest family in number of species was Pyramidellidae (10) and the best represented in number of individuáis was Caecidae (23.8% of total abundance; Table III). About half of the 107 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Table II. Systematic list of all gastropod species found in the Ensenada de Baiona during the car- tography (December 1995) and the temporal study (* February 1996-February 1997). Tabla II. Lista sistemática de todas las especies de gasterópodos encontradas en la ensenada de Baiona durante el estudio cartográfico (Diciembre 1995) y temporal (*, Febrero 1996-Febrero 1997). Subclass PROSOBRANCHIA Family Patellidae Rafinesque, 1815 Ansates pellucida (Linneo, 1758) Family Acmaeidae Carpenter, 1857 Tectura virgínea (Müller, 1776) Family Fissurellidae Fleming, 1822 Emarginula rosea Bell, 1824 Puncturella noachina (Linneo, 1771) Family Trochidae Rafinesque, 1815 Gibbula cineraria (Linneo, 1758) Gibbula magus (Linneo, 1758) Gibbula túmida (Montagu, 1803) Jujubinus exasperatus (Pennant, 1777) Family Phasianellidae Swainson, 1 840 Jricolia pullus (Linneo, 1758) Family Cerithiidae Fleming, 1822 Bittium reticulatum (da Costa, 1778) Family Turritellidae Woodward, 1851 Turritella communis Risso, 1826 Family Eulimidae H. Adams i A. Adams, 1 853 Melanella alba (da Costa, 1778) Family Rissoidae Gray, 1847 Alvania beani (Hanley in Thorpe, 1 844) Manzonia crassa (Kanmacher, 1 798) Onoba semicostata (Montagu, 1 803) *Pusillina inconspicua (Alder, 1 844) *Rissoa guerinii Réduz, 1 843 Rissoa lilacina Réduz, 1843 Rissoa parva (da Costa, 1778) Family Caecidae Gray, 1850 *Caecum glabrum (Montagu, 1803) Caecum tracbea (Montagu, 1 803) Family Calyptraeidae Blainville, 1824 Calyptraea cbinensis (Linneo, 1758) *Crepidula fornicata (Linneo, 1758) Family Naticidae Gray, 1840 Euspira pulcbella (Risso, 1 826) Family Muricidae Rafinesque, 1815 Ocenebra erinaceus (Linneo, 1758) Family Nassariidae Iredale, 1916 Nassarius incrassatus (Strom, 1 768) Nassarius pygmaeus (Lamarck, 1 822) Nassarius reticulatus (Linneo, 1758) Family Conidae Fleming, 1822 Bela nébula (Montagu, 1 803) Mangelia attenuata (Montagu, 1 803) Mangelia coarctata (Forbes, 1840) Family Omalogyridae Sars, 1878 Omalogyra atomus (Philippi, 1841) Family Pyramidellidae Gray, 1 840 Chrysallida decussata (Montagu, 1803) Chrysallida fenestrata (Jeffreys, 1 848) Chrysallida indistincta (Montagu, 1 808) Chrysallida terebellum (Philippi, 1 844) Eulimella acicula (Philippi, 1 836) Odostomia conoidea (Brocchi, 1814) Odostomia eulimoides Hanley, 1 844 Odostomia scalaris MacGillivray 1 843 Odostomia unidentata (Montagu, 1 803) *0ndina diapbana (Jeffreys, 1 848) *Jurbonilla lactea (Linneo, 1 758) Monillo pasillo (Philippi, 1 844) Family Murchisonellidae Casey, 1 905 Ebala nitidissima (Montagu, 1 803) Subdass OPISTHOBRANCHIA Family Acteonidae d'Orbigny, 1835 Acteon tornatilis (Linneo, 1758) Family Diaphanidae Odhner, 1814 *Diaphana minuta Brown, 1 827 Family Retusidae Thiele, 1925 Cylichnina umbilicata (Montagu, 1803) Retusa mammillata (Phillipi, 1836) *Retusa obtusa (Montagu, 1803) Retusa truncatula (Bruguiére, 1 792) Volvulella acuminata (Bruguiére, 1 792) Family Philinidae Gray, 1850 Philine aperta (Linneo, 1 767) Philine punctata (Adams, 1 800) Philine scabra (Müller, 1 784) Family Cylichnidae Lovén, 1 846 Cylicbna cylindracea (Pennant, 1 777) Family Limapontiidae Gray, 1847 *Limapontia depressa Alder & Hancock, 1862 Family Akeridae Odhner, 1922 *Akero bullata Müller, 1776 Family Dorididae Rafinesque, 1815 Doris verrucosa Linneo, 1758 108 MOREIRA ETAL.: Spatial distribution of gastropods on sub tidal sedimentary substrata Figure 3. nMDS ordination of sampling sites showing groups determined by Cluster and Simprof analysis. Figura 3. Ordenación nMDS de los puntos de muestreo indicando los grupos determinados por los aná- lisis Cluster y Simprof. species found were represented by less than 10 individuáis each. The best repre- sented taxa in the inlet (present in at least 50% of the sampling sites) were the nas- sariid, Nassarius reticulatus (Linneo, 1758), and the naticid, Euspira pulchella (Risso, 1826). The total number of species per site ranged from 1-2 (sites 3, 11 and 16; Table IV) to 17-19 (sites 4, 17-18). Maximal total gastropod densities were found at sites 18, 4 and 21 (> 700 ind. m'2) and the lowest ones at sites 3, 11 and 16 (< 40 ind. m'2). The highest valúes of diversity (H') were recorded at sites 17 and 18 (H' > 3.00 bits); those sites also showed a high evenness (J > 0.70). Diversity was smaller than 1.0 bits in sites 3, 6, 11, 16 and 20; the lowest valúes of evenness were found at sites 3 and 20 (J < 0.40). Gastropod assemblages The dendrogram obtained by Cluster analysis showed five major groups of sites (Fig. 2): group A (sites 8, 9, 12, 13, 14; coarse and médium sand), group B (st. 1 and 4, gravel), group C (st. 16, 19, 20 and 21; sandy mud and mud), group D (st. 3, 6, 7, 11 and 15; fine sand sites at the margins of the inlet) and E (st. 2, 5, 10, 17 and 18; fine sand sites at the centre of the inlet). These groups were found to have an internal structure according to the Simprof test (p < 0.05). The graphic representation of the nMDS analysis showed an ordination of sites which agrees with dendrogram groups and distribution of sedimentary types (Fig. 3). Group A was located in the outer and central parts of the inlet and was characterized by Caecum trachea (Montagu, 1803), Cylichnina umbilicata (Montagu, 1803) and Philine spp. Group B was composed of sites located in the northern outer area and was numeri- cally dominated by Tectura virgínea (Müller, 1776), Calyptraea chinensis (Linneo, 1758) and Gibbula spp. Sites of group C were situated around the 109 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Table III. Abundance of dominant species (abundance >1% of total abundance) in each sampling site expressed as individuáis per m2. Sampling site 8 9 12 13 14 1 4 16 19 20 21 Dendrogram group Species A A A A A B B C C C C Caecum trachea 160.7 482.1 78.6 210.7 410.7 . 3.6 . . . . Bittium reticulatum - - - ■ ■ - - 17.9 17.9 235.7 628.6 Cylichnina umbilicata - 35.7 - 110.7 135.7 ■ ■ - - Nassarius reticulatus ■ - 7.1 - 17.9 3.6 17.9 3.6 Tectura virgínea - - - - 39.3 317.9 ■ - - Gibbula túmida - - 3.6 25.0 75.0 89.3 3.6 - - Retusa truncatula - - - - - - 3.6 7.1 - 135.7 Gibbula cineraria - - - - - 92.9 - - Calyptraea chinensis - - - - - 96.4 - - Chrysallida terebellum - ■ ■ ■ ■ - ■ 50.0 Philine punctata - 107.1 - 7.1 - - ■ - Euspira pulchella 14.3 - 7.1 7.1 10.7 7.1 7.1 - - Philine aperta 32.1 3.6 28.6 3/ 10.7 - - - Bela nébula - - - - - - - - Cylichna cylindracea ■ - - ■ - - - ■ - Nassarius pygmaeus - - - - - - - - ■ harbour of Baiona; the group was char- acterized by a small total number of species (10); Bittium reticulatum (da Costa, 1778) was the dominant species followed by Retusa truncatula (Bruguiére, 1792). Group D was distrib- uted along the margins of the inlet; this group was the poorest in terms of number of species and individuáis. Group E was composed of fine sand sites located in the central area and was characterized by the highest total number of species (29); N. reticulatus and C. umbilicata were the numerically dominant species. According to Simper analysis, dis- similarities between groups A (coarser sandy sediments) and B (gravel) were determined by C. trachea, T. virgínea, Gibbula túmida (Montagu, 1803), C. umbilicata and Philine aperta (Linneo, 1767) (up to 50% of total dissimilarity); the species that most contributed to dis- similarities between A and D (fine-sand sites at the margins of the inlet) were C. trachea, C. umbilicata and N. reticulatus (up to 55% of dissimilarity) and between A and E (fine-sand sites at the central area of the inlet) were the same aforementioned species together with P. aperta and Cylichna cylindracea (Pennant, 1777) (up to 50% of dissimilarity). Most of the total dissimilarity (up to 50%) between groups D and E were due to C. umbilicata, N. reticulatus, C. cylindracea, R. truncatula, Nassarius pygmaeus (Lamarck, 1822), E. pulchella and Bela nébula (Montagu, 1803); those species were more abundant in group E than in group D. The species B. reticulatum and N. reticulatus were responsible for up to 50% dissimilarity between groups C (mud sites) and D while B. reticulatum, reticulatus C. umbilicata, E. pulchella and C. cylindracea were the species most con- tributing to total dissimilarity between groups C and E (up to 50%). Species affinities The dendrogram obtained by inverse analysis done on the abundance data of the species considered as domi- nant in each site showed four main groups at a 40% similarity level (Fig. 4). 110 MOREIRA ET AL.'. Spatial distribution of gastropods on subtidal sedimentary substrata Tabla III. Abundancia de las especies dominantes (abundancia >1% de la abundancia total) en cada punto de muestreo expresada como individuos por m2. Sampling site 3 6 7 11 15 2 5 10 17 18 Dendrogram group Species D D D D D E E E E E Coecum trachea - - - - - - - - 3.6 35.7 Bittium reticulatum - - - - - 7.1 - - - - Cylichnina umbilicata - - - 3.6 - 110.7 - 17.9 - 239.3 Nassarius reticulatus 10.7 28.6 21.4 17.9 32.1 53.6 25.0 42.9 128.6 196.4 Tectura virgínea - - • - ■ - - - 3.6 Gibbula túmida - - - - - - - - - - Retusa truncatula - - - - - 7.1 7.1 7.1 14.3 7.1 Gibbula cineraria - - - - - - - 3.6 14.3 46.4 Calyptraea chinensis - - - - - - - 10.7 28.6 Chrysallida terebellum ■ - - - 25.0 - - 25.0 17.9 Philine punctata - - - - - - - - 3.6 Euspira pulchella 3.6 - 3.6 7.1 14.3 3.6 10.7 17.9 Philine aperta ■ - - - - - - - Bela nébula 3.6 - - 7.1 10.7 - 3.6 25.0 25.0 Cylichna cylindracea - - - 3.6 7.1 3.6 21.4 39.3 Nassarius pygmaeus - - - 7.1 10.7 ■ 28.6 25.0 Group 1 included species mostly found at sites dominated by coarser sandy fractions (site group A), i.e. C. trachea, Philine aperta and P. punctata (Adams, 1800). Group 2 was composed of species whose higher abundance was found in gravelly sites (site group B); those species were T. virgínea, C. chinensis, Gibbula cineraria (Linneo, 1758) and G. túmida. Group 3 was composed of B. reticulatum, R. truncatula and Chrysallida terebellum (Philippi, 1844); those species were present in fine-sand and mud sites but were more abundant in the latter sediments. Group 4 comprised the largest group of species, which were mainly found in site groups D and E; group 4 included species that were widespread across fine-sand sites such as N. reticulatus, E. pulchella and C. umbilicata. Gastropod fauna and environmen- tal variables The Bio-Env procedure showed that a number of combinations of the selected environmental variables had high correlations with abundance data of gastropod species through the Spear- man rank correlation coefficient (pw > 0.70 in many cases). The best combina- tions of variables were those composed of organic matter, sorting coefficient, coarse sand, médium sand, very fine sand and skewness. The median grain size was the variable that alone showed the highest correlation (pw = 0.57), fol- lowed by very fine sand (pw = 0.51). The nMDS ordination of sites with superimposed valúes of the mentioned variables showed that sites appeared distributed from left to right following decreasing valúes of median grain size; sites with greater content in very fine sand were located in the central part of the graphic representation (Fig. 5). DISCUSSION Quantitative sampling showed that the soft-bottom gastropod fauna from the Ensenada de Baiona is rich and diverse in number of species (61) and its Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Table IV. Total number of species per 0.28 m2 (S), total abundance per m2 (N), Shannon-Wiener’s diversity índex (H\ log2) and Pielou’s evenness (J) for each sampling site. The group to which each sampling site belongs according to multivariate analyses is also indicated. Tabla TV Número total de especies por 0.28 m2 (S), abundancia total por m2 (N), índice de diversidad de Shannon-Wiener (H\ log2) y equidad de Pielou (]) para cada punto de muestreo. Se indica el grupo al que pertenece cada punto de muestreo de acuerdo con los análisis multivariante. Sampling site Group S N H'(M J' 8 A 4 211 1.07 0.54 9 A 7 643 1.17 0.42 12 A 7 132 1.80 0.64 13 A 5 364 1.46 0.63 14 A 13 639 1.75 0.47 1 B 9 154 2.16 0.68 4 B 17 750 2.75 0.67 16 C 2 21 0.65 0.65 19 C 5 36 1.96 0.84 20 C 3 257 0.47 0.30 21 C 7 861 1.30 0.46 3 D 1 11 0.00 0.00 6 D 3 36 0.92 0.58 7 D 4 36 1.57 0.79 11 D 2 21 0.65 0.65 15 D 5 71 1.98 0.85 2 E 11 246 2.51 0.72 5 E 6 68 2.33 0.90 10 E 11 104 2.74 0.79 17 E 18 436 3.46 0.83 18 E 19 729 3.03 0.71 composition is similar to those reported from other areas in the northern Iberian Peninsula (e. g. Martínez and Adar- raga, 2003; Troncoso, Moreira and Urgorri, 2005; Lourido, Gestoso and Troncoso, 2006). In addition, the total number of species is within the same range as those recorded in studies done in other Galician rias which covered similar types of sediments. For example, Troncoso, Parapar and Urgorri (1993) and Garmendia, Sánchez-Mata and mora (1998) reported, respectively, 62 and 66 species from the Ría de Ares- Betanzos, and Lourido et al. (2006) found 60 species at the Ría de Aldán. Although the aforementioned rias are much larger than the Ensenada de Baiona they share with the latter a similar gastropod diversity. Those rias are characterized by having a large variety of sedimentary types, which are usually distributed following a gradient in grain size, i.e. coarser sediments appear at the mouth of the rias and finer sediments towards the internal areas (Troncoso & Urgorri, 1993; Lourido et al., 2006). In general, this sedimen- tary diversity usually translates into more diverse benthic faunas than those which appear in areas where sediments are more homogeneous. Thus, many of the Southern rias (Rías Baixas) which are dominated by muddy sediments with high contents of organic matter have poorer gastropod assemblages. For instance, López-Jamar (1981) reported 7 species of gastropods from the Ría de Muros and 8 species from the Ría de Pontevedra (López-Jamar, 1978) while 112 Moreira ET AL.: Spatial distribution of gastropods on subtidal sedimentary substrata Figure 4. Dendrogram of classification of dominant species according to valúes of Bray-Curtis sim- ilarity Índex calculated on data of species abundance. Figura 4. Dendrograma de clasificación de las especies dominantes en función del índice de similitud de Bray-Curtis calculado según los datos de abundancia de las especies. C acábelos. Quintas and Troncoso (2008) found 34 species at the Ensenada de San Simón (Ría de Vigo). Multivariate analyses showed that distribution and composition of gastro- pod assemblages are strongly related to the granulometric composition and the median grain size of the sediment. In fact, the same patterns have also been found for distribution of polychaetes and peracarid crustaceans in the same area (Moreira, Quintas and Troncoso, 2006; Moreira, Lourido and Troncoso, 2008). The distribution of sediments in the Ensenada de Baiona is, in turn, conditioned by patterns of local hydrodynamism (Alejo and Vilas, 1987; Alejo et al., 1999). Indeed, hydrodynamism is regarded as the 'superparameter' acting as a source of disturbance for benthos at large scales (Brey, 1991); this superparameter affects other abiotic factors which also have a great influence on benthic assemblages, such as granulometric composition and availability of organic matter (Mancinelli, Fazi and Rossi, 1998; Elías, Palacios, Rivero and Vallar- ino, 2005). Sampling sites with a high content of the gravel fraction (group of sites B) have a gastropod fauna which is domi- nated by epifaunal species such as Caly-ptraea chinensis, trochids and limpets (Patellidae, Fissurellidae). These species can appear in numbers on sedi- ments When stones or bioclastic compo- nents such as dead shells of other mol- luscs are present (Rueda and Salas, 2003); those constitute the "hard" sub- strata in an otherwise soft bottom. Fur- thermore, some of those species, namely Gibbula cineraria and C. chinensis, were also found in numbers in fine-sand sites (group E, sites 17-18) because large shells of both Lutraria spp. and venerid bivalves were on the surface of the sedi- ment. The gastropod assemblage from coarser sandy sediments was numeri- cally dominated by Caecum trachea. High i 113 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Figure 5. nMDS ordination of sampling sites with valúes of some abiotic variables superimposed. A, median grain size; B, very fine sand. Stress: 0.13. Figura 5. Ordenación nMDS de los puntos de muestreo mostrando los valores de algunas variables abióticas superimpuestas. A, mediana del tamaño de grano; B, arena muy fina. Estrés: 0, 13. numbers of this species have also been reported from similar sediments in the Ría de Ares-Betanzos (Troncoso et al., 2005) and the Ría de Aldán (Lourido et al., 2006), this species being an impor- tant component in terms of abundance of the whole benthic assemblage. On the other hand, Nassarius reticulatus was found in a range of sediments, from gravel to mud, being the dominant gas- tropod in the fine-sand sediments. This is a common species in subtidal fine sediments in European Atlantic coasts in general (Barroso, Moreira and Richardson, 2005), and in the Galician rias in particular (Olabarria, Tron- coso and Urgorri, 1998; Troncoso et al., 2005). This species migrates from intertidal areas to subtidal areas in autumn (Tallmark, 1980), which might explain its wide distribution through the inlet at the time of sampling, being present both in shallow and deeper sed- iments. Another abundant species in médium- and fine-sand sediments was the bullomorph Cylichnina umbilicata, which has scarcely been reported in the literature as a numerically dominant species in gastropod assemblages. This fact can be related to its small size (about 4 mm) and the extended use of sieving meshes greater than 500 jum, which can lead to an understimation of its abundance. In the Ensenada de Baiona, this species appears mostly in sandy sediments with a great content of the medium-sand fraction while the related species Retusa truncatula replaces the former in muddier sandy sediments. On the contrary, R. truncatula has fre- quently been found in sandy sediments in other rias, such as happens in the Ría de Ferrol (Olabarria et al., 1998). The other representative of the Bullomorpha which has often been recorded from sandy and muddy sediments in the Galician rias is Cylichna cylindracea (Garmendia et al., 1998; Lourido et al., 2006). Nevertheless, in the Ensenada de Baiona this species was not so abun- dant as the other two aforementioned species and was only found in some sandy sites. Pyramidellidae was the family best represented in number of species at the Ensenada de Baiona. Nev- ertheless, many of the species were found in small numbers. Pyramidellids are ectoparasites of many marine inver- tebrates and tend to show specificity for their hosts (Fretter and Graham, 1949). On soft-bottoms, polychaetes and bivalves are common hosts. The most abundant species at the Ensenada de Baiona was Chrysallida terebellum, which appeared in fine-sand sites and in muddy sand. At those sites, 'sedentary' polychaetes were abundant (Moreira et al., 2006) which might favour the pres- ence of C. terebellum in numbers there. The smallest valúes for number of species and diversity were found at several shallow fine-sand sites cióse to 1 14 Moreira ET AL. : Spatial distribution of gastropods on subtidal sedimentary substraía sandy beaches and at muddy sediments around the harbour of Baiona. In the first case, those sites are subjected to strong hydrodynamism all the year round, and particularly during winter (pers. obs.) This hydrodynamism might create an unstable sedimentary environ- ment which is limitant for the establish- ment or many species, therefore result- ing in poor gastropod assemblages (Netto, Attrill and Warwick, 1999). This pattern has also been detected for polychaetes and peracarid crustaceans in the same sampling sites (Moreira et al., 2006, 2008). On the other hand, sedi- ments around the harbour of Baiona have turned from sandy to muddy in the last years and now support a poor gastropod assemblage, mostly at sites 16 and 19. Thus, Alejo and Vilas (1987) reported a dominance of the fine and very fine sand fractions in the sediment composition during the 1980's whereas we found percentages of silt-clay ranging from 74-90% in 1995. This increase in content of silt-clay might be due to the construction of the jetty which provides shelter against oceanic swell for the Baiona harbour. The pres- ence of that jetty has indeed altered the hydrodynamic conditions in this area (Alejo and Vilas, 1987), thus allowing a greater rate of sedimentation of finer particles on the sheltered areas of the BIBLIOGRAPHY Alejo I., Austin W. E. N., Francés G. and Vi- las F. 1999. Preliminary investigations of the recent Foraminifera of Baiona Bay, N.W. Spain. Journal of Coastal Research, 15: 413-427. Alejo I. and Vilas F. 1987. Dinámica litoral y evolución histórica de la Ensenada de Ba- yona (Pontevedra). Thalassas, 5: 21-32. Barroso C.M., Moreira M.H. and Richard- son C.A. 2005. Age and growth of Nassarius reticulatus in the Ria de Aveiro, north-west Portugal. Journal ofthe Marine Biológica l As- sociation ofthe U. K., 85: 151-156. Boening D.W. 1999. An evaluation of bivalves as biomonitors of heavy metáis pollution in marine waters. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment, 55: 459-470. harbour. Although the quantitative data on the benthic fauna inhabiting those sediments previous to the construction of the jetty are not available, it can be suspected that this change in sedimen- tary composition has led to an impover- ishment in the composition of the benthic assemblage as a whole, includ- ing its gastropod fauna. These and other similar alterations are frequent nowa- days in Coastal areas because of the increase of the human population living on the coast (Chapman, 2006); this usually translates into a loss of local bio- diversity and changes in the species composition of the assemblage. To prevent this, taking some simple mea- sures such as building channels under breakwaters and jetties may improve hydrodynamic conditions (Guerra- García and García-Gómez, 2004) and therefore prevent sedimentation in great quantities of both finer particles and organic matter. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors want to express their gratitude to F. J. Cristobo, C. Olabarria and P. Reboreda for their help during field work and to J. García-Carracedo who kindly revised the English versión of the manuscript. Brey T. 1991. The relative significance of bio- logical and physical disturbance: an example from intertidal and subtidal sandy bottom communities. Estuarine, Coastal and Shelf Sci- ence, 33: 339-360. Cacabelos E., Quintas P. and Troncoso J.S. 2008. Spatial distribution of soft-bottom molluscs in the Ensenada de San Simón (NW Spain). American Malacological Bulletin, 25: 9- 19. Castellanos C, Hernández-Vega S. and Ju- noy J. 2003. Cambios bentónicos en la ría de Foz (Lugo) (noroeste de España) tras la cons- trucción de un espigón. Boletín del Instituto Es- pañol de Oceanografía, 19: 205-217. Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Chapman M.G. 2006. Intertidal seawalls as ha- bitat for molluscs. Journal ofMolluscan Studies, 72: 247-257. Clarke K.R. and Gorley R.N. 2006. PRIMER V6: user manual/tutorial. PRIMER-E Ltdv Ply- mouth, U.K. Denadai M.R. and Amaral A.C.Z. 1999. A comparative study of intertidal molluscan communities in sandy beaches, Sao Sebastiao Channel, Sao Paulo State, Brazil. Bulletin of Marine Science, 65: 91-103. Elías R., Palacios J.R., Rivero M.S. and Va- llarino E.A. 2005. Short-term responses to sewage discharge and storms of subtidal sand-bottom macrozoobenthic assemblages off Mar del Plata City, Argentina (SW Atlan- tic). Journal ofSea Research, 53: 231-242. Field J.G., Clarke K.R. and Warwick R.M. 1982. A practical strategy for analysing mul- tispecies distribution patterns. Marine Ecol- ogy Progress Series, 8: 37-52. Fretter V. and Graham A. 1949. The structure and mode of life of the Pyramidellidae, par- asitic opisthobranchs. Journal ofthe Marine Bi- ological Association ofthe U. K., 28: 493-532. Garmendia J.M., Sánchez-Mata A. and Mora J. 1998. Inventario de la macrofauna bentónica de sustratos blandos submareales de la Ría de Ares y Betanzos (NO de la Península Ibérica). Nova Acta Científica Compostelana (Bioloxía), 8: 209-231. Gray J.S. 1981. The ecology of marine sediments. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. Guerra-García J.M. and García-Gómez J.C. 2004. Soft bottom mollusc assemblages and pollution in a harbour with two opposing en- trances. Estuarine, Coastal and Shelf Science, 60: 273-283. Hidalgo J.G. 1886. Catálogo délos moluscos recogidos en Bayona de Galicia y lista de las especies marinas que viven en la costa no- roeste de España. Revista del Progreso de Cien- cias Exactas, Físicas y Naturales, 21(7): 373- 414. Junoy J. and Viéitez J.M. 1989. Cartografía de los sedimentos superficiales de la Ría de Foz (Lugo). Thalassas, 7: 9-19. López-Jamar E. 1978. Primeros datos sobre la biomasa y la composición del bentos infau- nal de la ría de Pontevedra, en relación con el contenido en materia orgánica del sedi- mento. Boletín del Instituto Español de Ocea- nografía, 4: 57-69. López-Jamar E. 1981. Spatial distribution of the infaunal benthic communities of the Ría de Muros, North-West Spain. Marine Biol- ogy, 63: 29-37. López-Jamar E., González G. and Mejuto J. 1986. Temporal changes of community struc- ture and biomass in two subtidal macroin- faunal assemblages in La Coruña bay, NW Spain. Hydrobiologia, 142: 137-150. López-Jamar E. and Mejuto J. 1985. Bentos in- faunal en la zona submareal de la ría de La Coruña. I. Estructura y distribución espacial de las comunidades. Boletín del Instituto Es- pañol de Oceanografía, 2(3): 99-109. Lourido A., Gestoso L. and Troncoso J.S. 2006. Assemblages of the molluscan fauna in subtidal soft bottoms of the Ría de Aldán (north-western Spain). Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the U. K., 86: 129-140. MacAndrew R. 1849. On the Mollusca of Vigo Bay in the Northwest of Spain. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 2(3): 507-513. Mancinelli G. Fazi S. and Rossi L. 1998. Se- diment structural properties mediating do- minant feeding types patterns in soft-bot- tom macrobenthos of the Northern Adriatic Sea. Hydrobiologia, 367: 211-222. Martínez J. and Ad arraga 1. 2003. Estructura y evolución temporal de los sedimentos y de las comunidades bentónicas afectadas por los vertidos de un colector de aguas resi- duales en San Sebastián (Guipúzcoa) (golfo de Vizcaya). Boletín del Instituto Español de Oce- anografía, 19: 345-370. Mora J. 1982. Consideraciones generales sobre la macrofauna bentónica de la Ría de Arosa. Oecologia aquatica, 6: 41-49. Moreira J., Quintas P. and Troncoso J.S. 2005. Distribution of the molluscan fauna in subtidal soft bottoms of the Ensenada de Baiona (NW Spain). American Malacological Bulletin, 20: 75-86. Moreira J., Quintas P. and Troncoso J.S. 2006. Spatial distribution of soft-bottom polychaete annelids in the Ensenada de Baiona (Ría de Vigo, Galicia, north-west Spain). Scientia Marina, 70 (Supl. 3): 217-224. Moreira J., Lourido A. and Troncoso J.S. 2008. Diversity and distribution of peracarid crustaceans in shallow subtidal soft bottoms at the Ensenada de Baiona (Galicia, N.W. Spain). Crustaceana, 81: 1069-1089. Netto S.A., Attrill M.J. and Warwick R.M. 1999. The effect of a natural water-move- ment related disturbance on the structure of meiofauna and macrofauna communi- ties in the intertidal sand fíat of Rocas Atoll (NE, Brazil). Journal ofSea Research, 42: 291- 302. Olabarria C., Urgorri V. and Troncoso J.S. 1998. An analysis of the community structure of subtidal and intertidal benthic mollusks of the Inlet of Baño (Ría de Ferrol) (northwestem Spain). American Malacological Bulletin, 14: 103-120. Rolán E. 1983. Moluscos de la Ría de Vigo I. Gasterópodos. Thalassas, anexo 1: 1-383. Rolán E., Otero J. and Rolán-Álvarez E. 1989. Moluscos de la Ría de Vigo II. Thalas- sas, anexo 2: 1-276. lió Moreira ET AL.: Spatial distribution of gastropods on sub tidal sedimentary substraía Rueda J.L., Fernández-Casado M., Salas C. and Gofas S. 2001. Seasonality in a taxocoenosis of molluscs from soft bottoms in the Bay of Cádiz (southern Spain). Journal ofthe Marine Biological Association ofthe U. K., 81:903-912. Rueda J. and Salas C. 2003. Temporal dy- namics of molluscan assemblages from soft and bioclastic bottoms in the Strait of Gibraltar. Cahiers de Biologie Marine, 44: 237-248. Stubblefield W.L., Permenter R.W. and Swift D.J.P. 1977. Time and space variation in the surficial sediments of the New York Bight apex. Estuarine, Coastal and Shelf Science, 5: 597- 607. Tallmark B. 1980. Population dynamics of Nassarius reticulatus (Gastropoda, Proso- branchia) in Gullmar Fjord, Sweden. Marine Ecology Progress Series, 3: 51-62. Troncoso J.S., Moreira J. and Urgorri V. 2005. Soft-bottom mollusc assemblages in the Ría de Ares-Betanzos (Galicia, NW Spain). Iberus, 23: 25-38. Troncoso J.S., Parapar J. and Urgorri V. 1993. Cartografía de los moluscos infralitorales de sustratos blandosde la ría de Ares y Betanzos (Galicia, NO de España). Publicaciones Especiales del Instituto Español de Oceanografía, 11: 131-137. Troncoso J.S. and Urgorri V. 1993. Datos sedimentológicos y macrofauna de los fondos infralitorales de sustrato blando de la Ría de Ares y Betanzos. Nova Acta Científica Compostelana (Bioloxía), 4: 153-166. Underwood A.J. 1992. Beyond BACI: the de- tection of environmental impacts on popu- lations in the real, but variable world. Jour- nal of Experimental Marine Biology and Ecology, 161: 145-178. Wildish D.J. 1977. Factors controlling marine and estuarine sublittoral macrofauna. Hel- golander wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchun- gen, 30: 445-454. Wilson, W. H. 1991. Competí tion and preda- tion in marine soft-sediment communities. Annual Review of Ecology and Systematics, 21: 221-241. 117 ■ Iberas, 27 (1): 119-129, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacología A new Fusinus (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae) from the Algarve, south coast of Portugal Una nueva especie de Fusinus (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae) del Algarve, costa sur de Portugal Roland HADORN*, Carlos M. L. AFON SO*' and Emilio ROLAN*** Recibido el 30-XI-2008. Aceptado el 8-P/-2009 ABSTRACT Fusinus albacarinoides sp. nov. ¡s described from soufh Portugal, off the Algarve coast, ¡n 14-22 m depth. It ¡s characterized by having a small red-brown to dark brown shell orna- mented with a conspicuous white band at the periphery, with a rough shell surface, an elongate slender spire and a short siphonal canal. The new species is distinguished by ¡ts shell morphology and the soft parts from all other eastern Atlantic and Mediterranean Fusi- nus and ¡s compared to a few of them. RESUMEN Se describe Fusinus albacarinoides sp. nov. del sur de Portugal, frente a la costa del Algarve, a 14-22 m de profundidad. Se caracteriza por una concha pequeña, pardo rojiza a pardo oscura, con una conspicua banda blanca en el borde, superficie rugosa, espira delgada y alargada y canal sifonal corto. Se distingue de otras especies de Fusi- nus del Atlántico este y Mediterráneo por la morfología de la concha y sus partes blan- das. La especie es comparada con otras del género. INTRODUCTION Marine diversity is currently one of the most studied topics in ecology, espe- cially within the framework of global and regional changes due to environmental and human impacts. The importance of well known benthic faunas for specific study areas or geographical regions is the first and most important step towards proper characterization and manage- ment. Within the Algarve región in south Portugal, very few studies dealing with marine molluscs associated with perma- nently submerged rocky ecosystems have been carried out up until now. To fulfill this gap and contribute to the mapping of marine biotopes a baseline study was carried out (RENSUB II project) by the Centre of Marine Sciences of the Algarve (GONgALVES ET AL., 2007). Between May 2003 and April 2006 more then 90 different stations in the Central Algarve región were studied seasonally. With the use of scuba diving gear mollusc samples were recovered from these stations and after proper observation we found a well-defined * Schützenweg 1, CH-3373 Rothenbach, Switzerland. susuf@bluewin.ch ** Centro de Ciencias do Mar - CCMAR/CIMAR. Universidade do Algarve, Campus de Gambelas 8005-139 Faro, Portugal, cmlafonso@ualg.pt *** Museo de Historia Natural, Campus universitario Sur, 15782 Santiago de Compostela, Spain. ero- lan@emiliorolan.com 119 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Fusinus species which does not match the description of any other known Fusinus species reported for the Atlantic and Mediterranean Sea. Details of shell and radular mor- phology as well as animal soft parts are presented and the new species is com- pared to related known taxa. Abbreviations ANSP: Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, USA CCMLA: Collection Carlos M. L. Afonso, Faro, Portugal CER: Collection Emilio Rolán, Vigo, Spain CRH: Collection Roland Hadorn, Rothenbach, Switzerland IPM: Instituto Portugués de Malacolo- gia, Zoomarine, Guia, Portugal lv: live collected MNCN: Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales de Madrid, Spain MNHN: Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, París, France SYSTEM ATICS Family Fasciolariidae Gray, 1853 Genus Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815 Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815: 145. Substitute ñame for 'Fusus Lamarck 1799' [=Fusus Bruguiére, 1789], non Fusus Helbling, 1779. Type species: Murex colus Linnaeus, 1758, by typification of replaced ñame. Fusinus albacarinoides sp. nov. (Figs. 1-12) Type material: Holotype (18.5 x 8.1 mm, lv) MNHN 21130, south Portugal, Algarve, Baía de Pera, 2 km offshore Arma^áo de Pera, 37° 04' 47.1 N, 8o 21' 41.8 W, 17-20 m deep, collected by Carlos M. L. Afonso in March 2006. Paratype 1 (20.6 x 8.2 mm, lv) IPM.014T, same data; paratype 2 (18.5 x 7.6 mm, lv) MNCN 15.05/47.562, same data; paratype 3 (19.2 x 7.5 mm, lv) ANSP, same data; paratype 4 (21.1 x 8.2 mm, lv) CCMLA, same data; paratype 5 (17.9 x 7.2 mm, lv) CCMLA, same data; paratype 6 (21.3 x 9.3 mm, lv) CRH, same data; paratype 7 (20.7 x 8.0 mm, lv) CRH, same data; paratype 8 (17.3 x 6.8 mm, lv) CER, same data. Other material examined: 5 additional specimens collected from the type locality. Numerous live taken specimens from following stations: Pedra do Alto, 2.7 km off Oura (37° 03' 29.2 N, 8o 12' 34.7 W); Galé Alta, 2.3 km off Galé (37° 04' 09.3 N, 8o 19' 52.1 W), 17-19 m deep; Pedra Perdida, 2.4 km offshore between Galé and Armagáo de Péra (37° 03' 26.2 N, 8o 19' 35.1 W), 20 m deep; Valados Este, 3.7 km offshore between Galé and Armagáo de Péra (37° 02' 19.3 N, 8o 19' 18.3 W), 20-22 m deep; Estragad, 1.6 km offshore Galé (37° 03' 29.8 N, 8o 18' 14.6 W), 20-22 m deep; Péra, 2.4 km off- shore between Galé and Armaqáo de Péra (37° 04' 47.1 N, 8o 18' 14.6 W), 17-19 m deep; Lastro, 1.6 km offshore Marinha (37° 04' 37.2 N, 8o 24' 27.9 W), 14-16 m deep. Type locality: Baía de Péra, 2 km offshore Armagáo de Péra (37° 04' 47.1 N, 8o 21' 41.8 W), Algarve, south Portugal. Etymology: Fusinus albacarinoides sp. nov. is derived from albus (Latin, adj.) meaning "white" in combination with carina (Latin, noun, fem.), a keel. The white peripherical band along the shell recalls the white foaming water of the wake behind a moving ship. Description : Shell small for genus (up to 22 mm in length), fusiform, thin, light- weight, with long pointed spire and short siphonal canal, consisting of 8 strongly convex whorls (including protoconch) Surface of the shell roughened by numer- ous thin growth striae making the spiral cords nearly granular, often forming fíne scales or lamellae Crossing the spiral sculpture between interspaces of axial ribs on latter whorls. Suture constricted, slightly wavy according to the axial sculpture. Below suture often with a con- spicuous band of well-visible scales formed by growth striae. Shell red-brown to dark brown with a conspicuous broad 120 Hadorn ET AL.: A new Fusinus from the Algarve, south coast of Portugal Figures 1-9. Fusinus albacarinoides spec. nov., south Portugal, Algarve coast, off Arma^ao de Pera, about 3 miles offshore. 1, 2: holotype MNHN 21130, 18.3 mm; 3, 4: paratype 2 MNCN 15.03/47.362, 18.5 mm; 5, 6: shell, CCMLA, colour variant, 21.3 mm; 7: protoconch (slightly eroded); 8: operculum; 9: radula (7-9 from a specimen of 19.4 mm). Figuras 1-9. Fusinus albacarinoides spec. nov., sur de Portugal, costa del Algarve, cerca de 3 millas frente a Armagao de Pera. 1, 2: holotipo MNHN 21130, 18.5 mm; 3, 4: paratipo 2 MNCN 15.05/47.562, 18,5 mm; 5, 6: concha, CCMLA, variante de color, 21,3 mm; 7: protoconcha (algo erosionada); 8: opérculo; 9: rádula (7-9 de un ejemplar de 19,4 mm). 121 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 white or yellowish band at periphery and usually with an indistinct second white or light brown band on parietal wall which is only visible on body whorl. Protoconch paucispiral, bulbous, light brown, consisting of 1 ? smooth glossy whorls, final part with 1-2 fine axial riblets reaching from suture to suture, transition to teleoconch abrupt, marked by a varix. Diameter 0.8-0.9 mm. Axial sculpture consisting of broad, rather weak axial ribs reaching from suture to suture on all postnuclear whorls. Interspaces between axial ribs rather broad, only slightly impressed. 8 or 9 axial ribs on upper whorls, 8-10 on antepenultimate, 8-11 on penultimate and 8-13 on body whorl. Spiral sculpture usually darker than the background colour, consisting of broad coarse spiral cords with rough sur- face caused by numerous thin growth striae. Teleoconch beginning with 3 or 4 primary spiral cords, 4 on second whorl, 5 on third whorl, 6 on fourth, and 7 on latter whorls. Spiral cords 3 and 4, count- ed from the lower suture, are always the strongest and white coloured (occasional- ly yellowish or light brown). Secondary spiral cords appear between the primary cords from third or fourth whorl on, at the beginning fine and inconspicuous but occasionally becoming nearly as strong as the primary cords on body whorl. About 20-22 strong spiral cords behind the outer lip, becoming weaker towards the tip of the siphonal canal. Aperture ovate, rounded above, slightly constricted below, posterior canal inconspicuous. Juvenile or subadult specimens with a thin trans- parent body whorl showing colouration of the outer side of the shell. Adult spec- imens white inside aperture, orna- mented with 8-10 sharp but fine folds forming tiny usually white teeth on outer lip. Outer lip convex, edge finely crenulated. Parietal callus thin, white or transparent, glossy, adherent, not detached from the parietal wall. Under- lying spiral sculpture sometimes still visible. No columellar folds. Siphonal canal usually slightly shorter than aperture length, straight or slightly curved, widely open. Operculum (Fig. 8) corneous, thin, yellowish, shape and size corresponding to aperture, nucleus apical. Radula (Fig. 9) with tricuspid, elon- gate, almost triangúlate central tooth. Base rather narrow, top pointed, both sides slightly concave. Cusps rather small, pointed, slightly projecting below the base, central one slightly stronger and longer. Lateral teeth elongate, slightly curved, with 9-10 rather short pointed cusps with incurved tips. Two innermost cusps longest and most prominent. At inner end with a small denticle. Anatomy : Animal (Figs. 11, 12) bright red and irregularly speckled with white spots of different sizes, scattered all over the body including tentacles. Siphon also spotted, paler in colour. Tentacles (Right page) Figures 10-12. Fusinus albacarinoides spec. nov., south Portugal, Algarve coast, off Arma9ao de Pera, about 3 miles offshore. 10: animal (drawing by Emilio Rolán), 19.4 mm; 11: living animal; 12: detail of the tentacles (photographs by Carlos M. L. Alonso). Figures 13-18. Fusinus cretellai Buzzurro and Russo, 2008 ( =Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901), North Morocco, Bay of Tangier. 13, 14: lectotype of Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901, MNHN Molí 6492, 28.1 mm; 15, 16: paralectotype of Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901, MNHN Molí 6490, 26.5 mm; 17, 18: paralectotype of Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901, MNHN Molí 6490, 25.0 mm. (Página derecha) Figuras 10-12. Fusinus albacarinoides spec. nov., sur de Portugal, costa del Algarve, cerca de 3 millas frente a Armado de Pera. 10: animal (dibujo de Emilio Rolán), 19,4 mm; 1 1: animal vivo; 12: detalle de los tentáculos (fotografías de Carlos M. L. Afonso). Figuras 13-18. Fusinus cretellai Buzzurro and Russo, 2008 (C Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901), norte de Marruecos, bahía de Tánger. 13, 14: lectotipo de Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901, MNHN Molí 6492, 28,1 mm; 15, 16: paralectotipo de Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901, MNHN Molí 6490, 26,5 mm; 17, 18: paralectotipo de Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901, MNHN Molí 6490, 25,0 mm. 122 Hadorn ET AL.: A new Fusinus from the Algarve, south coast of Portugal 123 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 long, broader at their base, tapering, each with a small black eye at end of broad part (after one third of length of tentacle). Extreme part of mantle has some angular brown Unes which must correspond to the darker parts of the shell. Penis (Fig. 10) large, distinctive, rather slender and fíat in the first half of its length and then, on the second half of its length, suddenly becoming conspicu- ously slender with a pointed tip, without a penial appendage. Range and habitat: Known from Southern Portugal, off the Algarve coast, between Oura (37° 03' 29.2 N, 8o 12' 34.7 W) and Marinha (37° 04' 37.2 N, 8o 24' 27.9 W) between 1.6 and 4.0 km off- shore. Not found in shallow water, bathymetric range starts from 14-22 m down, mostly collected attached under rocks lying on rock platforms with fine sandy bottom. The new species is always associated with rocky bottoms. Discussion: Only few other Fusinus species are reported from the infralit- toral zone of Southern Portugal, Algarve coast: F. pulchellus (Philippi, 1844), F. ros- tratus (Olivi, 1792) and F. syracusanus (Linnaeus, 1758). However, the occur- rence of F. syracusanus in the Atlantic cannot be confirmed despite intensive research along the Algarve coast. Some other Fusinus species from the eastern Atlantic and the Canary Islands are similar in shape and sculpture and therefore also compared to F. albacari- noides sp. nov.. Hadorn and Rolán (1999) redescribed Fusinus crassus (Pallary, 1901) and selected a lectotype, among several syntype lots housed in MNHN, originating from Tangier, on the Atlantic coast of north Morocco. Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 184-186) described and well figured F. crassus (Pallary, 1901) from a population from the Mediter- ranean, Southern Spain, and noticed that the ñame established by Pallary is a primary homonym and could not be used. Therefore F. cretellai Buzzurro and Russo, 2008 was established for this species as a replacement ñame for Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901, which is a júnior homonym of Fusus crassus Brown, 1827 (a recent Turrid from Scotland). F. cretellai is most similar to F. albacari- noides sp. nov.. F. cretellai is known from two populations (Table I): originally described from the Atlantic coast of North Morocco, Tangier (type locality), and the other one from Southern Spain (from the Mediterranean, from Fuen- girola, Algeciras and Getares and from the Atlantic coast from Cape Trafalgar). F. cretellai from north Morocco (Figs. 13-18) differs from specimens from Southern Spain (Figs. 19-22) by the somewhat larger shell size (Morocco: up to 28.0 mm (Right page) Figures 19-22. Fusinus cretellai Buzzurro and Russo, 2008. 19, 20: shell, CRH, south Spain, Mediterranean Sea, Getares, 23.4 mm; 21, 22: shell, CRH, south Spain, off Cape Trafalgar, Cádiz, 19.3 mm. Figures 23, 24. Fusinus tenerifensis Hadorn and Rolán, 1999; paratype 5 CRH, Canary Islands, Tenerife, 21.7 mm. Figures 23-28. Fusinus pulchellus (Philippi, 1844). 23, 26: shell, CRH, Southern France, Cote d Azur, Saint-Raphaél Le Dramont, 15.0 mm; 27, 28: shell, CCMLA, morphotype “quandumpulchellus“, south Portugal, Algarve, Lagos, off Ponta da Piedade, 40-55 m deep, 28.9 mm. Figures 29, 30. Fusinus rostratus (Olivi, 1792), shell, CCMLA, south Portugal, Algarve, Lagos, off Ponta da Piedade, 40-55 m deep, 34.6 mm. (Página derecha) Figuras 19-22. Fusinus cretellai Buzzurro and Russo, 2008. 19, 20: concha, CRH, sur de España, Mediterráneo, Getares, 23,4 mm; 21, 22: concha, CRH, sur de España, frente al cabo de Trafalgar, Cádiz, 19,3 mm. Figuras 23, 24. Fusinus tenerifensis Hadorn and Rolán, 1999; paratipo 5 CRH, Islas Canarias, Tenerife, 21,7 mm. Figuras 25-28. Fusinus pulchellus (Philippi, 1844). 25, 26: concha, CRH, sur de Francia, Cote dAzur, Saint-Raphaél Le Dramont, 15,0 mm; 27, 28: concha, CCMLA, morfotipo “quandumpulchellus ", sur de Portugal, Algarve, Lagos, frente a Ponta da Piedade, profundidad 40-55 m, 28,9 mm. Figuras 29, 30. Fusinus rostratus (Olivi, 1792), concha, CCMLA, sur de Portugal, Algarve, Lagos, frente a Ponta da Piedade, profundidad 40-55 m, 34,6 mm. 124 Hadorn ET AL.: A new Fusinus from the Algarve, south coast of Portugal 125 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Table I. Conchometrical parameters of F. cretellai and F. albacarinoides Tabla I. Parámetros conquiológicos de F. cretellai y F. albacarinoides No. Height (H) mm Diameter (D) mm RatioH/D Remarks F cretellai Buzzurro and Russo, 2008 (= Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901), from North Morocco, Bay of Tangier (type locality) (lecto- type and paralectotypes MNHN) 1 28.1 11.0 2.55 Lectotype MNHN Molí. 6492 (Figs. 13-14) 2 26.5 10.9 2.43 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6490 (Figs. 15-16) 3 24.1 10.2 2.36 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6490 4 25.0 10.7 2.34 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6490 (Figs. 17-18) 5 23.6 10.3 2.29 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6490 6 22.8 9.4 2.43 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6490 7 22.7 10.3 2.20 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6490 8 26.3 11.3 2.33 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6491 9 25.8 10.6 2.43 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6491 10 22.7 10.0 2.27 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6491 11 23.0 9.8 2.35 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6491 12 22.9 8.9 2.57 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6491 13 19.9 8.9 2.24 Paralectotype MNHN Molí. 6491 average 2.37 F. cretellai Buzzurro and Russo, 2008 from Southern Spain (as F. crassus q fter Buzzurro and Russo, 2007: 203) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 23.5 24.0 23.0 22.5 23.5 23.5 23.0 22.5 23.4 19.3 8.5 8.9 9.0 8.5 8.3 9.8 8.8 8.5 9.1 7.6 overage 2.76 2.70 2.56 2.65 2.83 2.40 2.61 2.65 2.57 2.54 2.63 Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 203) Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 203) Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 203) Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 203) Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 203) Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 203) Buzzurro ond Russo (2007: 203) Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 203) CRH (Figs. 19-20) CRH (Figs. 21-22) F albacarinoides sp. nov. from the Algarve, Portugal 1 18.5 8.1 2.28 Holotype MNHN 21130 2 20.6 8.2 2.51 Poratype 1 IPM.014T 3 18.5 7.6 2.43 Paratype 2 MNCN 15.05/47.562 4 19.2 7.5 2.56 Poratype 3 ANSP 5 21.1 8.2 2.57 Paratype 4 CCMLA 6 17.9 7.2 2.49 Paratype 5 CCMLA 7 21.3 9.3 2.29 Paratype 6 CRH 8 20.7 8.0 2.59 Paratype 7 CRH 9 17.3 6.8 2.54 Paratype 8 CER 10 23.5 9.5 2.47 CRH 11 19.7 8.0 2.46 CRH 12 21.3 9.6 2.22 CCMLA 13 21.3 9.3 2.29 CRH 14 20.4 7.9 2.58 CRH 15 11.8 5.1 2.31 CRH 16 13.7 5.8 2.36 CCMLA 17 14.4 6.1 2.36 CCMLA 18 16.7 6.5 2.57 CCMLA average 2.44 126 HADORN ET AL. : A new Fusinus from the Algarve, south coast of Portugal / Southern Spain: up to 24.0 mm), the comparatively broader shell (ratio length/diameter: Morocco: 2.37 / South- ern Spain: 2.63), the shorter spire, the thicker shell, the inflated body whorl, the predominant and deeper incised spiral sculpture on body whorl, the more close- set axial ribs with narrow and shallow interspaces, the larger number of axial ribs on body whorl, the entirely white aperture, the strong internal lirae, and the broader, stout siphonal canal with 3-4 conspicuously strong and broad, widely spaced white spiral cords on outer side of siphonal canal. But the differences between the two populations are not consistent and linking specimens exists (e.g. Buzzurro and Russo, 2007: pl. 26, fig. e). As long as fresh material of F. cretellai from North Morocco with intact protoconch and soft parts is not available for study, we prefer not to describe the Southern Spain population as a distinct species. F. cretellai (Figs. 13-18) from North Morocco, Tangier (type locality), differs from F. albacarinoides sp. nov. by the larger shell size (20-28 mm), the thicker and more solid shell, the smoother surface, the shorter spire, the less con- stricted suture, the less prominent but more close-set axial ribs, the longer and stronger siphonal canal, the prominent but less numerous spiral cords on the outer side of the siphonal canal, and by the entirely white aperture and the thick outer lip. F. cretellai (Figs. 19-22) from Southern Spain is most similar to F. albacarinoides sp. nov., but differs by the lighter coloured shell, the smaller protoconch (diameter 0.7 mm instead of 0.8-0.9 mm), the smoother surface, the weaker and less prominent spiral sculpture especially at periphery, and by the distinct white tooth near the posterior canal. The radula is very similar and not distinctive, but the animal differs considerably. The animal of F. cretellai is bright red in colour (Buz- zurro and Russo, 2007: 185), but in F. albacarinoides bright red with numerous white speckles all over the animal includ- ing tentacles and siphon. But most dis- tinctive is the completely different penis (different shape and with a short penial appendage in F. cretellai). For details we refer to Buzzurro and Russo, 2007: 185, pl. 9, figs. d-e. Moreover, F. cretellai lives under stones, generally with a reduced weed cover, at depths of 2-5 m (Buzzurro and Russo, 2007: 184); F. albacarinoides sp. nov. lives in deeper water starting from 14-22 m down. F. pulchellus (Philippi, 1844) (Figs. 25- 28) from the Mediterr anean Sea, lives at depths of 2 to 120 meters, and was recorded also from the Atlantic Ocean, from Portugal and Atlantic coasts of Spain and from the Canary Islands (Buz- zurro and Russo, 2007: 148-149). The second author obtained F. pulchellus from the Algarve coast from local fishermen collected in gilí and tangle nets, depth 35 m down and associated to muddy Bry- ozoan bottoms of Adeonella calveti. We compare F. albacarinoides sp. nov. to the larger morphotype "quandumpulchel- lus" figured by Snyder (2000: 174, figs 1A, IB). Buzzurro and Russo (2007: 149- 154) placed F. quandumpulchellus Snyder, 2000, in synonymy of F. pulchellus (Philippi, 1844). F. pulchellus differs by the smaller number but more prominent and wider spaced axial ribs, the lighter coloured shell, and the longer, straight and more slender siphonal canal. The animal of F. pulchellus differs by a distinc- tive large, very stubby penis, triangular in shape (Buzzurro and Russo, 2007: 150; pl. 4, figs. a-b). F. rostratus (Olivi, 1792) (Figs. 29-30) is distributed all over the Mediterranean Sea, also the Atlantic coasts, namely from Portugal to the Canary Islands, also recorded from Moroccan coasts, Spain, France and Mauritania (Buz- zurro and Russo, 2007: 138). F. rostratus often has a rough surface produced by numerous thin axial growth striae, forming fine scales and nearly granular spiral cords, but differs by the larger size (45-55 mm on the average), by the distinct prominent axial sculpture, the usually uniformly coloured shell, and the long straight siphonal canal. F. syracusanus (Linnaeus, 1758), an infralittoral species distributed through- out the Mediterranean Sea, also occurring 127 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 in the eastern Atlantic, from Portugal to the Canary Islands (Buzzurro and Russo, 2007: 178), differs by the larger size, the stout but light and broad shell, the cari- nated, well-shouldered whorls, and the distinct close-set, regularly spaced and usually white coloured axial ribs. F. tenerifensis Hadorn and Rolán, 1999 (Figs. 23-24) from the Canary Islands (Tenerife and La Palma) is similar in shape, sculpture and colouration, but differs by the red brown protoconch, the dark brown to chocolate-brown coloura- tion, the more prominent and well- spaced axial ribs, the dark brown, some- times slightly purplish aperture, and usually by the less conspicuous white band, and the shorter siphonal canal. Some other Fusinus species are recorded from the Ibero-Moroccan Gulf, from the Atlantic coasts of Portugal or Morocco, but none of them is similar to F. albacarinoides sp. nov.: F. sectus (Locard, 1897), known only from the holotype (figured in Hadorn and Ryall, 1999: 34, figs. 1-2), collected ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We are grateful to Koen Fraussen, Belgium, for his kind support, helpful sug- gestions and for making the plates, the late Giovanni Buzzurro, Italy, and Pablo Pedro Modroño de la Rosa, Spain, for pro- viding comparison material. We thank also Virginie Héros, Muséum National d'His- toire Naturelle, Paris, France, for the loan of type material. We would like to thank our colleagues who took part in the RENSUB II project (Underwater Visual BIBLIOGRAPHY Buzzurro G. and Russo P. 2007. Mediterranean Fusinus. A revisión of the Recent Mediterranean species of the genus Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815 (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae). Grafiche ATA: Milano, Italy. 280 pp., 30 pls. Buzzurro G. and Russo P. 2008. A new re- placement ñame for Fusus crassus Pallary, 1901. Tritón 17: 7. from off Mauritania 882 m deep, differs by the broader and shorter spire and the uniformly coloured shell. F. agadir ensis Hadorn and Rolán, 1999, from the Atlantic coast of Morocco, col- lected between Agadir and Casablanca 50-70 m deep, differs by the smaller shell size (up to 16.6 mm), the uniform light brown shell, and the distinct regularly spaced axial and spiral ribs. F. boucheti Hadorn and Ryall, 1999, from the Atlantic coast of Morocco and the Canary Islands, collected 480-724 m deep, differs by the larger shell size (up to 45.8 mm), the larger protoconch (diam- eter 1.3-1. 8 mm), the longer siphonal canal, and the uniformly coloured shell. F. bocagei bocagei (P. Fischer, 1882), distributed from the Bay of Biscay to the Ibero-Moroccan Gulf, the Azores and the Canary and Cape Verde Islands, col- lected 225-3215 m deep, differs by the larger size (24-38 mm), the prominent broad, well-spaced axial ribs, the simple inconspicuous spiral sculpture, and the uniformly coloured shell. Census) namely J.M.S. Gongalves (coor- dinator), P. Monteiro, R. Coelho, C. Almeida, P. Veiga, F. Oliveira, J. Ribeiro, D. Abecasis and L. Bentes. Funds for this study were provided by the Algarve Regional Administration (Comissáo de Coordenado de Desenvolvimento Regional do Algarve - CCDR Algarve). SEM photographs made by Jesús Méndez in CACTI (Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnológico) of the University of Vigo. Gon^alves J.M.S., Monteiro P., Coelho R., Afonso C., Almeida C., Veiga P., Machado M., Machado D., Oliveira F., Ribeiro J., Abecasis D., Primo L., Tavares D., Fernández-Carvalho J., Abreu S., Fonseca L., Erzini K. and Bentes L. 2007. Cartography and characterization of the marine communities off the National Underwater Ecological Reserve between Galé and Ancáo. Universidade do Algarve, CCMAR, Faro, 250 pp. 128 Hadorn ET AL.: A new Fusinus from the Algarve, south coast of Portugal Hadorn R. and Rolán E. 1999. Two new Fusinus (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae) from northwest Africa and the Canary Islands, including a brief description of the type material of Fusinus crassus (Pallary, 1901). Argonauta 13 (1): 39-47, figs. 1-21. Hadorn R. and Ryall P.S. 1999. A NEW SPECIES AND A NEW SUBS- PECIES OF DEEP-WATER FUSINUS (GASTROPODA: FASCIOLARIIDAE) FROM THE EASTERN ATLANTIC. ARGONAUTA 13 (1): 31-38, FIGS. 1-23. Snyder M.A. 2000. Nomenclatural emenda- tions in the family Fasciolariidae (Mollusca: Gastropoda). Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 150: 173-179. 129 . . © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberus, 27 (1): 131-139, 2009 Two new species of Crassispira (Gastropoda, Conoidea) from West Africa with a taxonomic note on Crassispira tripter \ on Maltzan, 1883 Dos nuevas especies de Crassispira (Gastropoda, Conoidea) de África occidental con una nota taxonómica sobre Crassisipira tripter von Maltzan, 1883 Peter RYALL*, Juan HORRO** and Emilio ROLÁN*** Recibido el 14-1-2009. Aceptado el 8-IV-2009 ABSTRACT A previous suggestion that Drillia tripter von Maltzan, 1 883 should be assigned to the genus Crassispira Swainson, 1840 ¡s confirmed. Two new species of this genus are described and ¡llustrated from West Africa and compared to other similar species from this a rea. RESUMEN Se confirma la asignación de Drillia tripter von Maltzan, 1883 al género Crassispira Swainson, 1 840, que había sido previamente sugerida. Se describen e ilustran dos nue- vas especies de este género de África occidental, haciendo comparación con otras con- genéricas. INTRODUCTION The genus Crassispira Swainson, 1840 from West Africa had been reviewed by Fernandes, Rolán, and Otero-Schmitt (1995), who identified ten species, describing five as new and mentioning yet another as undetermined. Rolán, Ryall and Horro (2007) increased this number with the description of a new species endemic of south Angola and commented that another known species would probably be better placed in this genus: Drillia tripter von Maltzan, 1883. Studies of this species have now con- firmed that it is a Crassispira. The authors have also recently been able to examine material collected from two different localities in West Africa that matches the characteristics of this genus as outlined by Powell (1966). In both cases the material was obtained by scuba diving, a collecting method rela- tively new to the región. This technique has already led to other new species being newly discovered in West Africa. Specimen collection had previously been limited to intertidal searching, snorkel diving naturally limited to a máximum depth of 15 meters, dredging * St. Ulrich 16, 9161 María Rain, Austria; peteriyalll@hotmail.com ** Montero Ríos 30-3°, 36201 Vigo, Spain; juanhorro@telefonica.net *** Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur, 15782 Santiago de Compostela, Spain; erolan@emi- liorolan.com 131 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 in sandy areas or as a by-product from fishermens' nets, trawls and traps. But with the introduction of scuba diving, some previously inaccessible areas can now be studied and these deeper rocky habitats are now revealing some species new to Science. The generic assignation of Drillia tripter von Maltzan, 1883 and the descrip- tion of two new species of Crassispira are the subject of the present work. MATERIAL The material of the new species from Senegal has been collected by Alex Tren- cart and Jacques Pelorce by scuba diving at 30-37 meters off Dakar, Senegal. That from Sao Tomé Island has been collected by Sandro Gori at 43 meters on small rounded stones at Minerio Reef. It is to be noted that at such depths "down time" is severely limited to avoid decompression stops on the diver's ascent. We also studied the type mater- ial from the Berlin Museum of Drillia tripter von Maltzan, 1883 as well as numerous specimens from the collec- tions of Jacques Pelorce, Frank Boyer, José María Hernández Otero and the three authors,; all of this material is from the Dakar area of Senegal. Abbreviations: MHNS Museo de Historia Natural "Luis Iglesias" University of Santiago de Compostela. MNCN Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid. MNHN Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, París. ZMB Zoologisches Museum, Berlin CAT collection of Alex Trencart, París CFB collection of Frank Boyer, Sevran CHO collection of José María Hernán- dez, Gran Canaria CJH collection of Juan Horro, Vigo CJP collection Jacques Pellorce, París CPR collection of Peter Ryall, María Rain CSG collection Sandro Gori, Livorno sp specimen with soft parts s empty shell j juvenile LC length of the shell DRlength of the radular tooth SYSTEMATICS Family Turridae Swainson, 1840 Subfamily Crassispirinae Morrison, 1966 Genus Crassispira Swainson, 1840 Type species (s. d.): Pleurotoma bottae Kiener, 1840 Crassispira tripter (von Maltzan, 1883) (Figs. 1-10) Type material: Two series of syntypes, references ZMB/Moll-37221, 4 dried shells (Figs. 1-3) and ZMB /Moll-1 12616, 2 dried shells (Fig. 4) this lot ex coll. Paetel (both leg. Von Maltzan). Other material examined: 5 sp and 25 s. Cap Vert, Dakar (CJP); 5 sp from Dakar (MHNS); 3 sp, 5 s from Dakar (CHO); 19 s from Dakar (CFB). Type locality: Gorée Island, Dakar, Senegal. Description: Nolf (2008) has restated the main features of this species and we therefore refer readers to the original description as well as to this recent work for details of the shell. The shell is illustrated in the present work (Figs 1-6) It is necessary to add a description of the protoconch (Figs. 7, 8) which is rounded, smooth, shiny, brown with a little more than one whorl, suture marked and there is a clear transition with the teleconch. As would be expec- 132 Ryall ET AL.: Two new species of Crassispira from West Africa Figures 1-10. Crassispira tripter (von Maltzan, 1883), Gorée, Senegal; 1-3: syntypes, 23.0, 20.5 and 15.6 mm, (ZMB/Moll-37221); 4: syntype, 14.3 mm (ZMB/Moll-1 12616, ex coll. Paetel); 5-6: shell, 14.2 mm(CHO); 7: protoconch of the syntype of fig. 4; 8: protoconch of a non-type shell (CFB). 9: marginal tooth of the radula; 10: operculum, 4 mm, from a specimen 17.1 mm. Figuras 1-10. Crassispira tripter (von Maltzan , 1883), Gorée, Senegal; 1-3: sintipos, 23,0, 20,5 y 15.6 mm, (ZMB/Moll-37221); 4: sintipo, 14,3 mm (ZMB/Moll-1 12616, ex coll. Paetel); 5-6: concha, 14,2 mm(CHO); 7: protoconch a del sintipo fig. 4; 8: protoconcha de un ejemplar no tipo (CFB). 9: diente marginal de la rádula; 10: opérenlo, 4 mm, de un ejemplar 17,1 mm. 133 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 ted with a species of direct development its size is a little variable ranging from 700 mm tol mm in diameter. Dimensions : The largest syntype is 23 mm (Fig. 1); máximum size observed 24.56 mm (CFB), usually between 15-19 mm. Animal: We studied an alcohol pre- served specimen. The head is dark around the tentacles and in the base are the eyes. On the right dorsal part is a penis which is elongate and abruptly terminated by a flat small surface where a tiny appendix could be seen. The solé of the foot is cream. Operculum : (Fig. 10) Elongated, almost straight, with a terminal nucleus. Radula: (Fig. 9) Obtained from a specimen with shell of 17.1 mm. It is formed by two rows of marginal elon- gate teeth which total 50 in number. The tooth is sharp pointed with a small barb less that one third of the total length; an internal callous resembling a bone can be seen at the centre. The tooth is rather small (LC/DR= 142) and neither rachid- ian ñor lateral teeth are present. Distribution : Only known from the Dakar area of Senegal although Nolf (2008) mentions one specimen from Ivory Coast ex "Atlantidae" expedition. Remarks: This is a well known west African species with many bibliographic references. von Maltzan (1883, 119, pl. 3, fig. 1) described it as Drillia and this generic placement was to be followed by all subsequent authors to date. They ineludes Tryon (1884: 208, pl. 30, fig. 80), Powell (1966) and Ardovini and Cossignani (2004: 37, 220, 221). Knudsen (1956) had some problems with the species placement confusing specimens from Gorée Bay with Drillia ballista von Maltzan, 1883. Recently Nolf (2008) has discussed this error and separated clearly tripter and ballista whilst again maintaining the generic assignment in Drillia. Powell (1966) noted some pertinent radula differences between the genera Drillia and Crassispira and we believe that he did not have the possibility to study the radula of tripter von Maltzan, 1883. He States that the genus Drillia bear a minute unicuspid central tooth with curved, comb-like lateral teeth behind the marginal ones whilst the genus Crassispira has only the marginal teeth. We must therefore conclude that the correct generic assignation for this species must be in Crassispira and not in Drillia. Crassispira trencarti spec. nov. (Figs. 11-22) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 11-13), sp in MNHN (ex CAT). Paratypes from Petit Thiouriba, 30 m, basaltic rocks, Dakar, Senegal, in the following collections: 1 sp (Figs. 14, 15) in MNCN (ex CJP); 2 s (Figs. 16, 17) in CJP. All from the type locality; other paratype (Figs. 18, 19), 1 j (Fig. 20) in MHNS from N'Gor, 14 m. Type locality: Off N'Gor Island, Dakar, Senegal, 37 m. Etymology: Named after Mr. Alex Trencart, Paris, who in recent years dived extensively in the type locality and found the holotype. Description: Shell (Figs. 11-20) fusiform elongate and solid with a high spire. Protoconch (Fig. 21) of a little more than one smooth and shiny light brown whorl with a diameter of about 700 pm. Teleoconch of the holotype with 6 ? whorls, which exhibit prominent axial ribs that are a little opisthocline in shape, which begin (except on the first two whorls) below a subsutural depressed area, fínishing on the lower suture; on the last whorl the ribs fade below the periph- ery. Last whorl represents 40% of the total shell height, but in juvenile specimens the ratio can reach 50%; spiral sculpture of numerous small but prominent threads which continué up to the base. Aperture oval elongate, siphonal canal short and wide. Background colouration cream or light brown, with a narrow dark band on the suture; below this are irreg- ularly spaced isolated oblique lines; on 134 Ryall ET AL.: Two new species of Crassispira from West Africa Figures 11-21. Crassispira trencarti spec. nov. 11-13: holotype, 11.6 mm (MNHN); 14, 13: paratype, 7.8 mm (MNCN); 16, 17: paratype, 7.5 mm (CJP); 18, 19: paratype, 5.3 mm (MHNS); 20: paratype, 5.1 mm (MHNS); 21: protoconch of the holotype; 22: operculum. Figuras 11-21. Crassispira trencarti spec. nov. 11-13: holotipo, 11,6 mm (MNHN); 14, 15: paratipo, 7,8 mm (MNCN); 16, 17: paratipo, 7,5 mm (CJP); 18, 19: paratipo, 5,3 mm (MHNS); 20: paratipo, 5,1 mm (MHNS); 21: protoconcha del holotipo; 22: opérenlo. 135 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 the last whorl there is a cream band encompassing the widest part of the shell, bordered below by irregular but bold dark brown staining; the lower base is lighter and flecked with lighter and darker weak tubercules. Dimensions : The holotype is 11.6 mm; the paratypes are smaller. Animal: Not studied. Operculum : (Fig. 22) Elongated with a terminal nucleus. Distribution : Only known from the immediate area of Dakar, Senegal. Remarks: C. trencarti spec. nov. was placed in the genus Crassispira because of the shell' s general overall shape, the fact that the operculum has a terminal nucleus and it has cióse similarity to Crassispira tripter (von Maltzan, 1883). Many of the other West African species are larger and wider and can easily be separated from the present species by the decollate spire. We comment on some simi- larly sized species from the area as follows: Crassispira tripter (von Maltzan, 1883) is the closest species at first glance, however it is generally larger as already indicated, reaching more than 20 mm; it is also endemic to the area of Dakar and bears an elongate operculum with a ter- minal nucleus. The protoconch of C. tripter is brown / mauve, depressed, bearing more numerous axial ribs on the teleconch and final whorls; the ribs are bold from the suture to the base and bend sharply to the left just above their midpoint; in the new species they only arise in a sub- sutural channel and drop perpendicular to the base. The general colour of the latter can be from light brown to orange to mauve /brown, often with some darker pattern on a lighter background just below the suture and again as a narrow band at the top of the aperture, below the widest part of the final whorl. Crassispira laevisculcata (von Maltzan, 1883) is longer and narrower and lacks spiral cords; colour is lighter. Crassispira consociata (E.A. Smith, 1877) is generally larger and decollate, lacking any dark colouration, and juvenile speci- mens exhibit a multispiral protoconch. Crassispira sacerdotalis Rolán and Fer- nandes, 1992 is narrower, of a uniform colour and with an angular protoconch (Rolán and Fernandes, 1992 fig. 4). Crassispira pini Fernandes, Rolán and Otero-Schmitt, 1996 is also endemic to the Dakar area where it is found intertidally under rocks. It is smoother, uniform dark- brown in colour with weaker, more numer- ous tubercles. Fernandes et al. (1995, fig. 28) illustrate a squat protoconch with strong radial lirations already in the third whorl which are quite different from our species. Crassispira fuscobrevis Rolán, Ryall and Horro, 2007 can be of similar size with an intact protoconch but is endemic to south Angola, is stouter in shape and possesses a strong subsutural cord; the latter is generally uniform dark brown, or a little lighter in the sub- sutural area (i.e. the negative colour aspect of the species just described). Addendum: After the submission of this paper, the authors obtained from Jacques Pelorce additional material of Crassispira trencarti spec. nov. and they were able to study its radula which confirms the generic atribution to Crassispira and the specific separation from Crassispira tripter. Both radular tooth are very similar, only dif- ferent in the ratio, which in Crassispira tren- carti has LC/DR = 133. Crassispira sandrogorii spec. nov. (Figs. 23-31) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 23, 24) in MNHN. Paratypes (all shells) in the following collec- tions: MHNS (1, Figs. 27, 28) ; CPR (1, Fig. 14); CJH (1); and 4 more in CSG (Fig. 25, 26). All from the type locality. Type locality: Minerio Reef, 00° 23' 016" N, 06° 46' 228" E, 43 m, on small rounded stones; Sao Tomé Island, Gulf of Guinea. Etymology: Named after Mr. Sandro Gori, Italian malacologist, who in a recent collecting trip dived extensively in the type locality and collected all the material studied. 136 Ryall ET AL.: Two new species of Crassispira from West Africa Figures 23-31. Crassispira sandrogorii spec. noy. 23, 24: holotype, 12.8 mm (MNHN); 23: paratype, 10.9 mm (CSG); 26: paratype, 10.5 mm (CPR); 27, 28 paratype, 8.2 mm (MHNS); 29: detail of the aperture, paratype (CSG); 30: detail of spire and protoconch, paratype (CSG); 31: protoconch, same paratype as Figure 28. Figures 23-31. Crassispira sandrogorii spec. nov. 23, 24: holotipo, 12,8 mm (MNHN); 25: paratipo, 10,9 mm (CSG); 26: paratipo, 10,5 mm(CPR); 27, 28 paratipo, 8,2 mm (MHNS); 29: detalle de la abertura, paratipo (CSG); 30: detalle de la espira y protoconcha, paratipo (CSG); 31: protoconcha, mismo paratipo que la Figura 28. 137 Iberus, 27 (1), 2009 Dimensions : The holotype is 12.8 mm, the paratypes are smaller. Description: Shell (Figs. 23-28) fusiform elongate, with a high spire, solid, the whorls stepped. Protoconch (Figs. 30, 31) of one and a half smooth whorls, having a depressed nucleus and a peripheral angulation; its diameter is about 700 pm and the colour is light brown. Teleoconch of the holotype with 6-7 whorls, which exhibit prominent, wide and orthocline, or scarcely opistho- cline, axial ribs, which (except on the first teleoconch whorls) begin below a subsu- tural depressed area, finishing on the lower suture; they are wider than their interspaces and on the last whorl fade below the periphery. The last whorl rep- resents 40% of the total height, but in juveniles can reach 50% or more; spiral sculpture formed by numerous and well marked threads which continué up to the base. Aperture (Figs. 23, 29) oval elon- gate, with a prominent nodule on the upper part of the columella; siphonal canal short and wide, external lip fine with a deep sinus on the upper part, and strongly rounded anteriorly (Fig. 23). Background colouration yellowish-cream or light brown, with isolated dark narrow oblique axial lines irregularly scattered below the suture, and numerous dark spots appearing on the spiral thread on all the shell and down to the base. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We are grateful to Alex Trentcart (Paris), Sandro Gori (Livorno), Jacques Pelorce (Paris), Frank Boyer (Sevran) and José María Hernández Otero (Gáldar, Canaries) who are all amateur BIBLIOGRAPHY Ardovini R. and Cossignani T. 2004. West African Seashells. L 'lnformatore Piceno, An- cona. 319 pp. Fernandes F., Rolán E. and Otero-Schmitt J. 1995. The genus Crassispira (Gastropoda, Turridae) in West Africa. Journal ofConchol- ogy, 35: 286-301. Animal and operculum : Both are unknown. Distribution : Only known from the type locality and we believe it is proba- bly endemic to Sao Tomé Island or the immediate island group. Remarles: Although the specimens examined have been collected without animal we have placed it in the genus Crassispira as the shape agrees well with other species of this genus. Crassispira sandrogorii spec. nov. can be differentiated from all other West African species by the very distinct angulate pro- toconch. Only Crassispira sacerdotalis Rolán and Fernandes, 1992, which is also endemic to this island, has a similar pro- toconch, but it is smaller, much shorter and mauve/black as against honey brown in our new species. The spire is shorter, the axial nodules are weaker, the shell is monochromatic dark brown and smaller in size (8-10 mm)), the spire is much shorter, the axial nodules are weaker, and the shell is monochromatic mauve or black against honey brown in our new species. Our species has some resemblance to C. trencarti spec. nov. in respect of the randomly scattered dark pigmentations but as mentioned the protoconch is quite distinct, the shoulder is less evident, the colour darker with spiral bands, the spiral sculpture is finer and has more numerous threads. conchologists and have allowed us to examine their material, and to Thomas Von Rintelen from Berlin Museum, who kindly sent us on loan the type material of Crassispira tripter (von Maltzan, 1883). Knudsen J. 1952. Marine Prosobranchs of Tropical West Africa collected by the "Atlantide" Expedition 1945-46. Part 1. Videnskab elige Meddelelser fra Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening I Kjobenhavn, 114: 129-185, pl. 13. 138 Ryall ET AL.\ Two new species of Crassispira from West Africa Knudsen J. 1956. Remarks on a collection of marine prosobranchs from Senegal. Bulletin de l'Institut Frangaise d’ Afrique Noire, ser. A, 18: 514-529, pls. 1-2. Maltzan H.E. von 1883. Beitraege zur Kent- niss der senegambischen Pleuromiden. Jah- resbuecher der Deutschen Malakozoologischen Gesellschaft, 10: 116-136, pl. 3. Nolf F. 2008. About the true identity of Drillia ballista von Maltzan, 1883 and Drillia tripter, von Maltzan, 1883 (Mollusca: Gastropoda: Drilliidae) as well as their differences com- pared to D. annielonae Nolf and Verstraeten, 2007. Neptúnea , 7 (2): 14-24. Rolán E. and Fernandes F. 1992. Aportacio- nes al conocimiento de la familia Turridae Swainson,1840 (Mollusca, Gastropoda) en las islas de Sao Tome y Príncipe (Golfo Gui- nea). Nova Acta Científica Compostelana ( Bio - loxía), 3: 135-143. Rolán E., Ryall P. and Horro J. 2007. Two new species of the genera Crassispira and Agladrillia (Gastropods, Conoidea) from An- gola. Neptúnea, 6 (3): 25-31. Tryon G.W. 1884. Manual of Conchology , Struc- tural and Systematic, with illustrations of the Species. Vol. VI. Conidae, Pleurotomidae. Tryon, Philadelphia, 413 pp., 34 pls. 139 ' ■ fe 1 1 . NORMAS DE PUBLICACION • La revista Iberus publica artículos de fondo, notas y monografías que versen sobre cualquiera de los aspectos relacionados con la Malacología. Se entiende por artículo un trabajo de investigación de más de 5 páginas de texto, incluidas láminas, gráficos y tablas. Las notas son trabajos de menor extensión. Las monografías son tra- bajos sobre un tema único, de extensión superior a las 50 páginas de la revista y que serán publicadas, si procede, como un suplemento de Iberus. Los autores interesados en publicar monografías deberán ponerse previamente en contacto con el Editor de Publicaciones. Se entiende que el contenido de los manuscritos no ha sido publicado, ni enviado simultáneamente a otra revista para su consideración. • Los manuscritos, así como toda la correspondencia relacionada con los mismos, deberán ser remitidos a: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publicaciones, Departamento de Biología Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, España y /o al correo electrónico . • El texto del trabajo podrá estar redactado en español, inglés, italiano, francés o portugués. • Los artículos, notas y monografías deberán presentarse sobre DIN A-4, por una sola cara a doble espacio (incluyendo referencias, pies de figura y tablas), con al menos 3 centímetros de margen por cada lado. Los tra- bajos se entregarán por triplicado (original y dos copias) y se incluirá una versión en un CD, o bien remitida por correo electrónico, utilizando procesadores de texto en sus versiones de corrientes de Windows (pero no en el formato .docx de Word 2007, el habitual de Windows Vista) o Macintosh. En caso de autoría compartida, uno de los autores deberá hacerse responsable de toda la correspondencia. • Junto con el trabajo debe incluirse una lista de al menos 4 posibles revisores del mismo, sin perjuicio de los que el propio Editor considere oportunos. • Los manuscritos se presentarán de acuerdo al siguiente esquema: Primera página. Deberá incluir un título conciso, pero sugerente del contenido del trabajo, así como una traduc- ción al inglés del mismo (si el artículo no está escrito en inglés). Cuando sea preciso, deberá incluir referencia a familia o taxones superiores. A continuación figurarán, por este orden, el nombre y apellidos completos del autor o autores, las direcciones completas de los mismos, y un resumen del trabajo y su traducción al inglés. Dicho resumen deberá sintetizar, en conjunción con el título, tanto los resultados como las conclusiones del artículo; se sugiere una extensión de 100 a 200 palabras. Páginas siguientes. Incluirán el resto del artículo, que debe dividirse en secciones precedidas por breves encabe- zamientos. Siempre que sea posible, se recomienda seguir el siguiente esquema: Introducción, Material y métodos. Resultados, Discusión, Conclusiones, Agradecimientos y Bibliografía. Si se emplean abreviaturas no habituales en el texto, deberán indicarse tras el apartado de Material y Métodos. • Las notas breves deberán presentarse de la misma forma, pero sin resumen. • Deberán evitarse notas a pie de página y referencias cruzadas. Deberán respetarse estrictamente los Códigos Internacionales de Nomenclatura Zoológica y Botánica (últimas ediciones). Cuando un taxón aparezca por primera vez deberá citarse su autor y fecha de su descripción. En el caso de artículos sistemáticos, cuando se den las sinonimias de los taxones, éstas deberán citarse COMPLETAS, incluyendo en forma abreviada la publicación donde fueron descritas, y la localidad tipo si es conocida entre corchetes, según el siguiente esquema (préstese especial cuidado a la puntuación): Dendrodoris limbata (Cuvier, 1804) Sinonimias Doris limbata Cuvier, 1804, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. París, 4 (24): 468-469 [Localidad tipo: Marsella]. Doris nigricans Otto, 1823, Nov. Act. Ac. Caes. Leop.-Car., 10: 275. Dichas referencias no deberán incluirse en la lista de Bibliografía si es la única vez que se nombran en el texto. Si se incluyen una lista completa de referencias de un taxón inmediatamente tras éste, deberá seguirse el mismo esquema (sin incluir en Bibliografía las referencias que no se mencionen en otro lugar del texto). • Sólo los nombres en latín y los de taxones genéricos y específicos deberán llevar subrayado sencillo o prefe- rentemente ir en cursiva. En ningún caso deberá escribirse una palabra totalmente en letras mayúsculas, ni siquiera el Título. Las unidades a utilizar deberán pertenecer al Sistema Métrico Decimal, junto con sus correc- tas abreviaturas. En artículos escritos en castellano, en los números decimales sepárese la parte entera de la decimal por una coma inferior (,), NUNCA por un punto (.) o coma superior (')■ • Las referencias bibliográficas irán en el texto con minúsculas o versalitas: Fretter y Graham (1962) o Fretter y Graham (1962). Si son más de dos autores se deberán citar todos la primera vez que aparecen en el texto [Smith, Jones y Brown (1970)] empleándose et al. las siguientes veces [Smith et al. (1970)]. Si un autor ha publi- cado más de un trabajo en un año se citarán con letras: (Davis, 1989a; Davis, 1989b). No deberá emplearse op. cit. La lista de referencias deberá incluir todas las citas del texto y sólo éstas, ordenadas alfabéticamente. Se citarán los nombres de todos los autores de cada referencia, sea cual sea su número. Los nombres de los autores deberán escribirse, en letras minúsculas o Versalitas. No deberán incluirse referencias a autores cuando éstos aparezcan en el texto exclusivamente como autoridades de un taxón. Los nombres de las publica- dones periódicas deberán aparecer COMPLETOS, no abreviados. Cuando se citen libros, dése el título, editor, lugar de publicación, n° de edición si no es la primera y número total de páginas. Deberán evitarse referencias a Tesis Doctorales u otros documentos inéditos de difícil consulta. Síganse los siguientes ejemplos (préstese atención a la puntuación): Fretter V. y Graham A. 1962. British Prosobranch Molluscs. Ray Society, London, 765 pp. Ponder W.F. 1988. The Trunca telloidean (= Rissoacean) radiation - a preliminary phylogeny. En Ponder, W.F. (Ed.): Prosobranch Phylogeny. Malacological Review, suppl. 4: 129-166. Ros J. 1976. Catálogo provisional de los Opistobranquios (Gastropoda: Euthyneura) de las costas ibéricas. Mis- celánea Zoológica, 3 (5): 21-51. • Las gráficas e ilustraciones deberán ser originales y presentarse preferentemente en formato electrónico al formato de caja de la revista o proporcional a éste. Este formato es de 57 mm (una columna) o 121 mm (dos) de anchura y hasta 196 mm de altura, si bien se recomienda utilizar el formato a dos columnas. Es importante que todas las figuras sean remitidas en su formato original (por ejemplo, las fotografías en .jpg de alta calidad o .tif, las gráficas en hojas de cálculo Excel o documentos de CorelDraw), puesto que las ilustraciones insertadas en el manuscrito WORD son inservibles en la fase de imprenta. Las imágenes digitales deben ser formateadas en su tamaño de impresión con una resolución mínima de 300 ppp para imágenes en color o escala de grises y de 600 ppp para las de blanco y negro. Considérese la reducción que será necesaria a la hora de decidir el tamaño de las escalas o letras en las figuras, que no deberán bajar de los 2 mm. En figuras compuestas, cada parte deberá etiquetarse con letras mayúsculas, el resto de las letras deberán ser minúsculas. Las escalas de dibujos y fotografías deberán ser gráficas, utilizando unidades del sistema métrico decimal; no deberán hacerse referen- cias a los aumentos de una determinada ilustración, ya que éstos cambian con la reducción. En su caso, se recomienda la utilización de mapas con proyección UTM. Cada figura, gráfica o ilustración deberá presentarse en hojas separadas y con numeración arábiga (1, 2, 3,...), sin separar "Figuras" y "Láminas". Los pies de figura, en una hoja aparte, deberán acompañarse de su traducción al inglés (o español si el inglés es la lengua del trabajo). Utilícese el esquema siguiente: Figura 1. Neodoris carvi. A: animal desplazándose; B: detalle de un rinóforo; C: branquia. Las abreviaturas empleadas en las ilustraciones deberán incluirse en los pies de figura. Los autores interesados en incluir láminas en color deberán consultar con el editor y sufragar el sobrecoste con una contribución de 30 € por página. Por lo demás, deberán ajustarse a los mismos requisitos indicados para las figuras. Si se pretende enviar gráficas o ilustraciones en impresión de papel es imprescindible presentar originales de buena calidad. Las imágenes en semitonos deben estar bien contrastadas y ajustarse al tamaño definitivo de impresión; al componer fotografías sobre una hoja, procúrese que los espacios entre ellas sean regulares y que estén debidamente alineadas. Téngase en cuenta que incluir fotografías de distinto contraste en una misma página conlleva una pobre reproducción final. Las gráficas de ordenador deberán imprimirse con impresora láser sobre papel de buena calidad. • Las Tablas se presentarán en hojas separadas, siempre con numeración romana (I, II, III,...). Las leyendas se incluirán en una hoja aparte acompañándose de una traducción al inglés. Deberán evitarse las tablas particu- larmente complejas. Se recomienda reducir el número y extensión de ilustraciones, láminas o tablas al mínimo necesario. • Los artículos que no se ajusten a las normas de publicación serán devueltos al autor con las indicaciones de los cambios necesarios. • El Comité Editorial comunicará al autor responsable del trabajo la fecha de recepción del trabajo y la fecha de envío a revisión. Cada original recibido será sometido a revisión por al menos dos investigadores. El Comité Editorial, a la vista de los informes de los revisores decidirá sobre la aceptación o no de cada manus- crito. El autor recibirá en cada caso copia de los comentarios de los revisores sobre su artículo. En caso de aceptación, el mismo Comité Editorial, si lo considera conveniente, podrá solicitar a los autores otras modifica- ciones que considere oportunas. Si el trabajo es aceptado, el autor deberá enviar una copia impresa del mismo corregida, acompañada por una versión en un CD, utilizando procesadores de texto en sus versiones corrien- tes de Windows (pero no el formato .docx generado por Word 2007, el habitual de Windows Vista) o Macin- tosh. La fecha de aceptación figurará en el artículo publicado. • Las pruebas de imprenta serán enviadas por correo electrónico al autor responsable, exclusivamente para la corrección de erratas, y deberán ser devueltas en un plazo máximo de una semana. Se recomienda prestar especial atención en la corrección de las pruebas. • De cada trabajo se entregarán gratuitamente 50 separatas, además de una versión electrónica en formato .pdf. Aquellos autores que deseen un número mayor, deberán hacerlo constar al devolver las pruebas de imprenta, y nunca posteriormente. El coste de las separatas adicionales será cargado al autor. INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS • Iberus publishes research papers, notes and monographs devoted to the various aspects of Malacology. Papers are manuscripts of more than 5 typed pages, including figures and tables. Notes are shorter papers. Monographs should exceed 50 pages of the final periodical, and may be published as Supplements. Authors wishing to publish monographs should contact the Editor. Manuscripts are considered on the understanding that their contents have not been published or simultaneously submitted for publication elsewhere. • Manuscripts and correspondence regarding editorial matters must be sent to: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publica- ciones, Departamento de Biología Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, Spain and / or to the e-mail . • Manuscripts may be written in Spanish, English, Italian, French or Portuguese. • Manuscripts must be typed double spaced (including the references, figure captions and tables) on one side on A-4 (297x210 mm) with margins of at least 3 cm. An original and two copies must be submitted, together with a CD or e-mail remittance containing the article written with a current Windows (but not .docx format generated by Word 2007, mainly used with Windows Vista) or Macintosh word processor. When a paper has joint authorship, one author must accept responsibility for all correspondence. • The authors must inelude a list of at least 4 possible referees; the Editor can choose any others if appropriate. • Papers should conform the following layout: First page. This must inelude a concise but informative title, with mention of family of higher taxon when appropriate, and its Spanish translation. It will be followed by all authors' ñames and surnames, their full address(es), an abstract (and its Spanish translation) not exceeding 200 words which summarizes not only con- tents but results and conclusions. Following pages. These should content the rest of the paper, divided into sections under short headings. When- ever possible the text should be arranged as follows: Introduction, Material and methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, Acknowledgements and References. Unusual abbreviations used in the text must be grouped in one alphabetic sequence after the Material and methods section. • Notes should folio w the same layout, without the abstract. • Footnotes and cross-references must be avoided. The International Codes of Zoological and Botanical Nomenclature must be strictly followed. The first mention in the text of any taxon must be followed by its authority including the year. In systematic papers, when synonyms of a taxon are given, they must be cited IN FULL, including the periodical, in an abbreviate form, where they were described, and the type localities in square brackets when known. Follow this example (please note the punctuation): Dendrodoris limbata (Cuvier, 1804) Synonyms Doris limbata Cuvier, 1804, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. París, 4 (24): 468-469 [Type locality: Marseille]. Doris nigricans Otto, 1823, Nov. Act. Ac. Caes. Leop.-Car., 10: 275. These references must not be included in the Bibliography list, except if referred to elsewhere in the text. If a full list of references of the taxon is to be given immediately below it, the same layout should be followed (also excluding from the Bibliography list those which are not cited elsewhere). Only Latin words and ñames of genera and species should be underlined once or be given in italics. No word must be written in UPPER CASE LETTERS. SI units are to be used, together with their appropriate symbols. In Spanish manuscripts, decimal numbers must be separated with a comma (,), NEVER with a point (.) or upper comma ('). • References in the text should be written in small letters or Small capitals: Fretter and Graham (1962) or Fretter and Graham (1962). The first mention in the text of a paper with more than two authors must inelude all of them [Smith, Jones and Brown (1970)], thereafter use et al. [Smith et al. (1970)]. If an author has published more than one paper per year, refer to them with letters: (Davis, 1989a; Davis, 1989b). Avoid op. cit. The references in the reference list should be in alphabetical order and inelude all the publications cited in the text but only these. ALL the authors of a paper must be included. These should be written in small letters or Small capitals. The references need not be cited when the author and date are given only as authority for a tax- onomic ñame. Tifies of periodicals must be given IN FULL, not abbreviated. For books, give the title, ñame of publisher, place of publication, indication of edition if not the first and total number of pages. Keep references to doctoral theses or any other unpublished documents to an absolute minimum. See the following examples (please note the punctuation): Fretter V. and Graham A. 1962. British Prosobranch Molluscs. Ray Society, London, 765 pp. Ponder W.F. 1988. The Truncatelloidean (= Rissoacean) radiation - a preliminary phylogeny. In Ponder W.F. (Ed.): Prosobranch Phylogeny. Malacological Review, suppl. 4: 129-166. Ros J. 1976. Catálogo provisional de los Opistobranquios (Gastropoda: Euthyneura) de las costas ibéricas. Mis- celánea Zoológica, 3 (5): 21-51. • Figures must be original and provided preferably in electronic format and adjusted to page format and column size. These should be one column (57 mm) or two columns (121 mm) wide and up 196 mm high, or be proportional to these sizes. Two columns format is recommended. It is essential that all figures be supplied in their original format (e.g. photographs as high-grade .jpg or as .tif files, graphs as Excel spreadsheets or Corel- Draw files), as the files inserted into WORD documents cannot be used for printing. Digital images must be given their final printing size with a resolution at least 300 dpi for colour and halftones, and at least 600 dpi for black/white. Take into account possible reduction in lettering drawings; final lettering must be at least 2 mm high. In com- posite drawings, each figure should be given a capital letter; additional lettering should be in lower-case letters. A scale line, labelled with SI units, must be used to indícate size; magnification ratio must be avoided as it may be changed during printing. UTM maps are to be used if necessary. Figures must be submitted on sepárate sheets, and numbered with consecutive Arabic numbers (1, 2, 3,...), without separating 'Plates' and 'Figures'. Legends for Figures must be typed in numerical order on a sepárate sheet, and a Spanish translation must be included. Follow this example (please note the punctuation): Figure 1. Neodoris carvi. A: animal crawling; B: rhinophore; C: gills. If abbreviations are to be used in illustrations, they should be included in the figure captions. Authors wishing to publish illustrations in colour should consult with the editor and will be charged a contri- bution of 30 € per page. They should otherwise follow the same standards as black and white prints. If the authors want to send Figures in printed format, it is essential to supply good quality origináis. Half-tone images must be of good contrast, and should be submitted in the final printing size. When mounting pho- tographs in a block, ensure spacers are of uniform width. Remember that grouping photographs of varied con- trast results in poor reproduction. Computer graphics must be printed on high quality white paper with a láser printer. • Tables must be numbered with Román numbers (I, II, III,...) and each typed on a sepárate sheet. Headings should be typed on a sepárate sheet, together with their English translation. Complex tables should be avoided. As a general rule, keep the number and extensión of illustrations and tables as reduced as possible. • Manuscripts that do not conform to these instructions will be retumed for correction before reviewing. • Authors submitting manuscripts will receive an acknowledgement of receipt, including receipt date, and the date the manuscript was sent for reviewing. Each manuscript will be critically evaluated by at least two refer- ees. Based of these evaluations, the Editorial Board will decide on acceptance or rejection. Anyway, authors will receive a copy of the referees' comments. If a manuscript is accepted, the Editorial Board may indícate additional changes if desirable. Acceptable manuscripts will be returned to the author for consideration of comments and criticism; a finalized manuscript must then be returned to the Editor, together with a CD con- taining the article written with current Windows (but not a .docx format generated by Word 2007, mainly used under Windows Vista) or Macintosh word processor. Dates of reception and acceptance of the manuscript will appear in all published articles. • Proofs will be e-mailed to the author for correcting errors and must be returned corrected within one week. At this stage no stylistic changes will be accepted. Pay special attention to references and their dates in the text and the Bibliography section, and also to numbers of Figures and Tables appearing in the text. • Fifty reprints per article and a .pdf file will be supplied free of charge. Additional reprints must be ordered when the page proofs are retumed, and will be charged at cost. NO LATER orders will be accepted. La Sociedad Española di Malacolooía Junta Directiva desde el 11 de octubre de 2005 Presidente José Templado González Vicepresidente Emilio Rolán Mosquera Secretaria María Carmen Salas Casanovas Tesorero Luis Murillo Guillen Editor de Publicaciones Serge Gofas Bibliotecario Rafael Araujo Armero Vocales Ramón M. Alvarez Halcón Benjamín Gómez Moliner Alberto Martínez Ortí Diego Moreno Lampreave José Ramón Arrébola Burgos La Sociedad Española de Malaco logia se fundó el 21 de agosto de 1980. La sociedad se registró como una aso- ciación sin ánimo de lucro en Madrid (Registro N° 4053) con unos estatutos que fueron aprobados el 12 de diciembre de 1980. Esta sociedad se constituye con el fin de fomentar y difundir los estudios malacológicos mediante reuniones y publicaciones. A esta sociedad puede pertenecer cualquier persona o institución interesada en el estudio de los moluscos. Sede SOCIAL: Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, d José Gutiérrez Abascal 2, 28006 Madrid, España. Cuotas para 2009: Socio numerario (en España): 40 euros (en Europa) 40 euros (fuera de Europa): 48 euros Socio estudiante (en España): 23 euros (en el extranjero): 29 euros Socio Familiar: (sin recepción de revista) 4 euros Socio Protector: (mínimo) 48 euros Socio Corporativo (en Europa): 48 euros (fuera de Europa): 54 euros INSCRIPCIÓN: 6 euros, además de la cuota correspondiente. A los socios residentes en España se les aconseja domiciliar su cuota. Todos los abonos deberán enviarse al Tesorero (dirección reseñada anteriormente) el 1 de enero de cada año. Los abonos se harán sin recargos para la sociedad y en favor de la Sociedad Española de Malaco logia y no de ninguna persona de la junta directiva. Aque- llos socios que no abonen su cuota anual dejarán de recibir las publicaciones de la Sociedad. Los bonos de ins- cripción se enviarán junto con el abono de una cuota anual al Tesorero. A los residentes en el extranjero se les ruega que abonen su cuota mediante giro postal en euros (Internatio- nal postal money orders in euros sent to the Treasurer). Members living in foreing countries can deduce 6 euros if paid before 1 5 April. Cada socio tiene derecho a recibir anualmente los números de Iberas, Reseñas Malacológicas y Noticiarios que se publiquen. . Indice SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARES 3 9088 01497 170 27 (1) 2009 ISSN 0212-3010 nc>i . 133 Iberus vol. 27 REVISTA DE LA SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MALACOLOGÍA I Oviedo, diciembre 2009 Iberus Revista de la Sociedad Española de Malacología Comité de Redacción (Board of Editors) Editor de Publicaciones (Editor-in-Chief) Serge Gofas Universidad de Málaga, España Director de Redacción (Executive Editor) Gonzalo Rodríguez Casero Apdo. 1 56, Mieres del Camino, Asturias, España Editora Ejecutiva (Managing Editor) Eugenia Ma Martínez Cueto-Felgueroso Apdo. 1 56, Mieres del Camino, Asturias, España Editores Adjuntos (Associate editors ) Francisco Javier Conde de Saro Embajada de España, Japón Benjamín Gómez Moliner Universidad del País Vasco, Vitoria, España Ángel Antonio Luque del Villar Universidad Autónoma de Madrid, Madrid, España Emilio Rolan Mosquera Universidad de Vigo, Vigo, España José Templado González Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, CSIC, Madrid, España Jesús S. Troncoso Universidad de Vigo, Vigo, España Comité Editorial (Board of Reviewers) Kepa Altonaga Sustacha Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España Eduardo Angulo Pinedo Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España Rafael Araujo Armero Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid, España Thierry Backeljau Instituí Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Bruselas, Bélgica Rüdiger Bieler The Field Museum, Chicago, Estados Unidos Sigurd v. Boletzky Laboratoire Arago, Banyuls-sur-Mer, Francia José Castillejo Murillo Universidad de Santiago de Compostela, Santiago de Compostela, España Karl Edlinger Naturhistorisches Museum Wien, Viena, Austria Antonio M. de Frias Martins Universidade dos Acores, Acores, Portugal José Carlos García Gómez Universidad de Sevilla, Sevilla, España Gonzalo Giribet de Sebastián Harvard University, EE.UU. Edmund Gittenberger National Natuurhistorisch Museum, Leiden, Holanda Ángel Guerra Sierra Instituto de Investigaciones Marinas, CSIC, Vigo, España Gerhard Haszprunar Zoologische Staatssammlung Mánchen, Mánchen, Alemania Yuri 1. Kantor A.N. Severtzov Institute of Ecology and Evolution, Moscú, Rusia María Yolanda Manga González Estación Agrícola Experimental, CSIC, León, España Jordi Martinell Callico Universidad de Barcelona, Barcelona, España Ron K. O'Dor Dalhousie University, Halifax, Cañada Takashi Okutani Nihon University, Eujisawa City, Japón Marco Oliverio Universitá di Roma "La Sapienza", Roma, Italia Pablo E. Penchaszadeh Museo Argentino de Ciencias Naturales "Bernardino Rivadavia", Buenos Aires, Argentina Winston F. Ponder Australian Museum, Sydney, Australia Carlos Enrique Prieto Sierra Universidad del País Vasco, Bilbao, España Mfl de los Ángeles Ramos Sánchez Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, CSIC, Madrid, España Francisco Javier Rocha Valdés Instituto de Investigaciones Marinas, CSIC, Vigo, España Paul G. Rodhouse British Antarctic Survey, Cambridge, Reino Unido Joandoménec Ros i Aragonés Universidad de Barcelona, Barcelona, España María Carmen Salas Casanovas Universidad de Málaga, Málaga, España Gerhard Steiner Institut für Zoologie der Universitat Wien, Viena, Austria Victoriano Urgorri Carrasco Universidad de Santiago de Compostela, Santiago de Compostela, España Anders Warén Swedish Museum of Natural History, Estocolmo, Suecia Portada de Iberus Iberus gualtieranus (Linnaeus, 1758), una especie emblemática de la península Ibérica, que da nombre a la revista. Dibujo realizado por José Luis González Rebollar “Toza”. Iberus REVISTA DE LA SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MALACOLOGÍA Vol. 27 (2) Oviedo, diciembre 2009 Iberus Revista de la Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberus publica trabajos que traten sobre cualquier aspecto relacionado con la Malacología. Se admiten también notas breves. Iberus edita un volumen anual que se compone de dos o más números. Instrucciones para los autores Los manuscritos deben remitirse a: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publicaciones, Departamento de Bio- logía Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, España. Los trabajos se entregarán por triplicado (original y dos copias). Se recomienda a los autores leer cuidadosamente las normas de publicación que se incluyen en cada número de la revista. SUBCRIPCIONES Iberus puede recibirse siendo socio de la Sociedad Española de Malacología, en cualquiera de sus formas, o mediante intercambio. Aquellos socios que deseen adquirir números atrasados deberán diri- girse al bibliotecario. Los no socios deberán ponerse en contacto con BACKHUYS PUBLISHERS, P.O. Box 321, 2300 AH Leiden, The Netherlands. Tel.: +31-71-31 70 208, Fax: +31-71-51 71 856, Correo Elec- trónico: backEuys@euronet.nl Los resúmenes de los artículos editados en esta revista se publican en Aquatic Science and Fisheries Abstracts (ASFA) y en el Zoological Records, BIOSIS. Contents list published in Aquatic Science and Fisheries Abstracts and Zoological Records, BIOSIS. Dep. Leg. B-43072-81 ISSN 0212-3010 Diseño y maquetación: Gonzalo Rodríguez Impresión: LOREDO, S. L. - Gijón Iberus, 27 (2): 1-5, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacología A new species of Lauria (Gastropoda, Lauriidae) from the Canary Islands Una nueva especie de Lauria (Gastropoda, Lauriidae) de las Islas Canarias David T. HOLYOAK* and Geraldine A. HOLYOAK* Recibido el 6-IV-2009. Aceptado el 23-VI-2009 ABSTRACT A new species of Lauria is described from La Gomera, Canary Islands, where it coexists with L. fanalensis (R.T. Lowe, 1852) on trunks of trees in the laurel forests. The differences in their adult and especially ¡uvenile shells are described and figured. RESUMEN Se describe una nueva especie de Lauria de La Gomera, Islas Canarias, en donde coexiste con L. fanalensis (R.T. Lowe, 1 852) en troncos de árboles de la laurisilva. Se detallan e ilus- tran las diferencias en su morfología adulta y particularmente en sus conchas juveniles. INTRODUCTION Three species of the genus Lauria are recognised in Macaronesia and three in Europe (Pilsbry, 1922-1926; Zilch, 1985; Falkner, Bank and von Proschwitz, 2001; Bank, Groh and Ripken, 2002). Of these, the rather variable L. cylindra- cea (Da Costa, 1778) occurs not only in the Canary Islands, Madeiran Islands and the Azores, but also over much of western and Southern Europe and in north-west Africa. The Macaronesian endemic L. fanalensis (R.T. Lowe, 1852), known from Madeira and the Canary Islands, resembles a small form of L. cylindracea, with weak apertural teeth and less thickened peristome. The Azores endemic L. fasciolata (Morelet, 1860) is more distinctive, so that it is now segregated in subgenus Senilauria Pilsbry, 1928. L. sempronii (Charpentier, 1837) occurs in western and Southern Europe, eastwards to Irán and south- wards to northern Algeria. The poorly known L. reischuetzi Falkner, 1985 has been found only in river floodline debris in Istra (Slovenija); it is appa- rently allied to L. sempronii and it may be a localised endemic species that lives underground (Falkner, 1985). Wollas- ton (1878) noted that fanalensis 'may be only a depauperated State' of L. cylindra- cea, but he treated it as distinct because of differences in their shells and hábi- tats, with fanalensis occurring mainly on tree trunks in laurel forests at interme- diate to high elevations ('damp sylvan districts of a high altitude') whereas cylindracea 'is emphatically an inhabitant of the dry and cultivated districts, abounding more and more as we descend to the level of the sea'. Nevert- heless, several populations we have * Quinta da Cachopa, Barcoila, 6100-014 Cabezudo, Portugal 1 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 studied from the Canary Islands (La Palma, 2; La Gomera, 1) are interme- díate in shell size and morphology between L. fanalensis and L. cylindracea and they appear to intergrade rather than coexist. During fieldwork in the Canary Islands in February 2006 nume- rous specimens of Lauria were collected from tree trunks at two localities in laurel forest at 1100-1250 m elevation on La Gomera. These were assumed to all be of L. fanalensis, until later microscopic study revealed that two rather similar species were present in approximately equal numbers, living together at both localities. One of these is typical L. fana- lensis, the other which is apparently undescribed is named in this paper. Its adult shells show only rather subtle dif- ferences from those of L. fanalensis, but the juvenile shells are markedly diffe- rent. A recent molecular study (Renker, 2007) has revealed a pattern of genetic differentiation in european L. cylindracea that is not reflected in shell differences. A fuller study involving molecular tech- niques may therefore be necessary to elucídate the relationships of Macarone- sian L. cylindracea, L. fanalensis and the new species. TAXONOMIC PART Family Lauriidae Steenberg, 1925 Genus Lauria J.E. Gray, 1840 Subgenus Lauria Type species: Pupa umbilicata Draparnaud, 1801 = Turbo cylindraceus Da Costa, 1778. Remarks: Allocation of the genus Lauria to the Lauriidae rather than Pupillidae and recognition of subge- nera follows Bank, Bouchet, Falkner, Gittenberger, Hausdorf, von Proschwitz and Ripken (2001), Bank et al. (2002) and Falkner et al. (2001). Lauria gomerensis spec. nov. (Figs. 1-7) Type material: From type-locality, adult holotype (Figs. 1-3; in the BM, reg. no. 20090224) and two juvenile paratypes (Figs. 4-7; in the BM, reg. nos. 20090225, 20090226 ); 15 adult and 3 juvenile paratypes in Collection of G.A. Holyoak; 1 adult and 1 juvenile paratypes in Collection of Dr Heike Kappes, University of Cologne, Germany. 9 adult paratypes from different locality (La Gomera: ca 1 km E. of Las Hayas, 28R 02756/31139, ca 1100 m alt., tree trunks in tall oíd laurel forest, leg. G.A. and D.T. Holyoak, 15 Feb. 2006, site G16) in Collection of G.A. Holyoak Type locality: La Gomera, Islas Canarias, Spain: Cabezo del Pajarito (E. of Garajonay), 28R 02800/31113, ca 1250 m alt., tree trunks in shallow valley in laurel forest, leg. G.A. and D.T. Holyoak, 13 Feb. 2006, site G9. Etymology: The specific epiphet is derived from the ñame of the island of La Gomera. Description: Adult shell (Figs. 1-3) ovoid, of 5-6 moderately convex whorls, the body whorl lacking a basal keel, the mouth rounded. Peristome slightly thic- kened, sharply reflected, flattened and whitish. Parietal area lacking any callus. Angular tooth small, whitish, not joined to peristome and not prolonged into mouth; columellar tooth lacking. Juve- nile shells (Figs. 4-7) with only slight marginal keel; slender angular tooth prolonged inside mouth as low narrow ridge extending for about one-third of whorl; slender columellar tooth prolon- ged inwards for short distance; largest whorl lacking thickened transverse palatal bars. Shell light brown, translu- cent, very glossy, with only rather faint growth ridges; protoconch very faintly punctate. 2 Holyoak AND HOLYOAK: A new species of Lauria from the Canary Islands Figures 1-7. Lauria gomerensis. 1-3: holotype, adult shell, 2.85 mm (BM 20090224); 4, 5: paratype, juvenile shell, 2.15 mm (BM 20090225); 6, 7: paratype, juvenile shell, 1.7 mm (BM 20090226). Figuras 1-7. Lauria gomerensis. 1-3: holotipo, concha adulta, 2,85 mm (BM 20090224); 4, 5: para- tipo, concha juvenil, 2,15 mm (BM 20090225); 6, 7: paratipo, concha juvenil, 1,7 mm (BM 20090226). Dimensions: holotype 2.85 x 1.7 mm, 25 adult paratypes 2.5-3. 1 x 1.5-1. 7 mm. Distribution and habitat: Collected from two localities at 1100-1250 m alti- tude on the island of La Gomera (see above). At both sites it was found only on vertical bark of the smooth trunks of a small minority of laurel forest trees (saplings to oíd trees, of a species of Lauraceae and llex sp.), mainly 1.0-2. 5 m above the ground, on bark overhung by pendent mats or wefts of bryophytes 3 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figures 8-14. Lauria fanalensis. 8-10: adult shell, 3.15 mm (specimen in Collection of G.A. Holyoak; from La Gomera, Islas Canarias, Spain: Cabezo del Pajarito (E. of Garajonay), 28R 02800/31113, ca 1250 m alt., tree trunks in shallow valley in laurel forest, leg. G.A. and D.T. Holyoak, 13 Feb. 2006, site G9); 11, 12: juvenile shell, 1.4 mm; 13, 14: juvenile shell, 1.05 mm (both specimens in Collection of G.A. Holyoak; from La Gomera, Islas Canarias, Spain: Cabezo del Pajarito (E. of Garajonay), 28R 02800/31113, ca 1250 m alt., tree trunks in shallow valley in laurel forest, leg. G.A. and D.T. Holyoak, 13 Feb. 2006, site G9). Figuras 8-14. Lauria fanalensis. 8-10: concha adulta, 3,15 mm (ejemplar en colección de G.A. Holyoak; de La Gomera, Islas Canarias, España: Cabezo del Pajarito (E. de Garajonay ), 28R 02800/31113, ca 1250 m alt., troncos de árboles en valle poco profundo en la laurisilva, leg. G.A. y D.T. Holyoak, 13 feb. 2006, sitio G9); 11, 12: concha juvenil, 1,4 mm; 13, 14: concha juvenil, 1,05 mm; barra de escala 2 mm ( ambos ejemplares en colección de G.A. Holyoak; de La Gomera, Islas Cana- rias, España: Cabezo del Pajarito (E. de Garajonay), 28R 02800/31113, ca 1250 m alt., troncos de árboles en valle poco profundo en la laurisilva, leg. G.A. y D.T. Holyoak, 13 feb. 2006, sitio G9). 4 Holyoak AND HOLYOAK: A new species of Lauria from the Canary Islands (particularly robust pleurocarpous mos- ses including Neckera sp.). It was accom- panied in the same microhabitat by si- milar numbers of L. fanalensis, frequent Columella microspora (R.T. Lowe, 1852) a few individuáis of Hemicycla laurijona (Alonso and Ibañez, 2007) and rare in- dividuáis of a Napaeus sp. Remarks : Shells of L. gomerensis have been compa- red with those of L. fanalensis living with it (Figs. 8-14) and from elsewhere in the Canary Islands (in Collection of G.A. Flolyoak) and numerous topotypes from Madeira (BM). The adult shells of L. go- merensis differ in being smaller with more swollen whorls, stronger gloss on the periostracum, fainter lines of growth, lack of a columellar tooth and lack of any parietal callus. Immature shells of these two species differ more conspicuously because the strong trans- ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Thanks are due to the Mollusca Section of the Natural History Mu- BIBLIOGRAPHY Alonso M.R. and Ibañez M. 2007. Anatomy and function of the penial twin papillae Sys- tem of the Helicinae and description of two new, small Hemicycla species from the laurel forest of the Canary Islands. Zootaxa 1482: 1- 23. Bank R.A., Bouchet P., Falkner G., Gitten- BERGER E., HAUSDORF B., VON PROSCHWITZ T. and Ripken T.E.J. 2001. Supraspecific clas- sification of European non-marine Mollusca (CLECOM Sections I + II). Heldia, München 4(1/2): 77-128. Bank R.A., Groh K. and Ripken T.E.J. 2002. Ca- talogue and bibliography of the nonmarine Mollusca of Macaronesia. In: Falkner, M., Groh, K. and Speight, M.C.D. (Eds), Collec- tanea Malacologica. Festschriftfür Gerhard Falk- ner. Hackenheim: ConchBooks. Pp. 89-235. Falkner G. 1985. Lauria(L.) reischuetzi n. sp. aus Istrien (Gastropoda: Pupillacea). Heldia, Mün- chen 1 (2): 45-46, pl. 7a. Falkner G., Bank R.A. and von Proschwitz T. 2001. Check-list of the non-marine mo- lluscan species-group taxa of the States of northern, Atlantic and central Europe (CLE- COM I). Heldia, München, 4: 1-76. verse palatal bars inside the largest whorl of L. fanalensis (and L. cylindracea) visible through the translucent shell wall (Figs. 12, 14) are completely lacking in L. gomerensis (Figs. 5, 7). Other diffe- rences in the juvenile shells are the much more strongly keeled periphery of the body whorl in L. fanalensis and the stronger development of its angular and columellar teeth, which form higher whitish ridges that are prolonged furt- her back inside the mouth. L. gomerensis might be endemic in the laurel forest of La Gomera. Nume- rous specimens collected by the authors from similar habitats on La Palma (6 localities) and Teneriffe (3 localities) in 2002 and 2006 are all L. fanalensis (or intermediate between that species and L. cylindracea ), as are museum speci- mens from Madeira (BM). seum for access to specimens in their care. Pilsbry H.A. 1922-1926. Pupillidae (Orculinae, Pagodulinae, Acanthinulinae, etc.). Manual of Conchology (Second Series: Pulmonata) 27 (105): 1-80, pl. 1-5 (1922); 27 (106): 81-128, pl. 6-11 (1923); 27 (107): 129-176, pl. 12-18 (1924); 27 (108): 177-369, i-iv, pl. 19-32 (1926). Concho- logical Department, Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Philadelphia. Renker C. 2007. Genetic break in Lauria cylin- dracea (Da Costa 1778). Archiv fur Mollusken- kunde, 136 (1): 1-7. Wollaston T.V. 1878. Testacea Atlántica or the land and freshwater shells of the Azores, Madeiras, Salvages, Canaries, Cape Verdes, and Saint Helena. L. Reeve and Co. London. xi + 588 pp. Zilch A. 1985. Die Typen und Typoide des Na- tur-Museums Senckenberg, 75: Mollusca: Pu- pillacea (5): Pupillidae: Lauriinae, Argninae. Archiv fur Molluskenkunde, 116 (1/3): 119-136, pl. 1, 2. 5 Iberus , 27 (2): 7-72, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Las náyades de la península Ibérica As náiades da Península Ibérica The naiads of the Iberian Península Rafael ARAUJO1, Joaquim REIS2, Annie MACHORDOM1, Carlos TOLEDO1, María José MADEIRA3, Ignacio GÓMEZ4, Juan Carlos VELASCO5, Javier MORALES6, José Miguel BAREA7, Paz ONDINA8 e Iker AYALA9 Recibido el 19-V-2009. Aceptado el 9-IX-2009 RESUMEN Se aporta información sobre la descripción original, sinonimias, taxonomía, distribución, morfología, ciclo vital, hábitat y estado de conservación de las diez especies de náyades (moluscos bivalvos de la superfamilia Unionoidea) nativas de la península Ibérica: Marga- ritifero ouriculoria (Spengler, 1793), AT margaritifera (L., 1758), Potomida littoralis (Cuvier, 1798), Unió mancus Lamarck, 1819, U. gibbus Spengler, 1793, U. delphinus Spengler, 1793, U. tumidiformis Castro, 1885, U. ravoisieri Deshayes, 1847, Anodonta anatina (L., 1758) y A. cygnea (L., 1758). Se restablece Unió delphinus , Spengler, 1793 como el nombre válido para la especie ibérica conocida hasta la fecha como Unió picto- rum y se cita por primera vez la presencia de Unió ravoisieri Deshayes, 1 847 en la penín- sula Ibérica. Además se ilustran las conchas y detalles anatómicos de todas las especies, incluyendo, cuando se conoce, la forma y dimensiones de sus gloquidios así como información sobre los peces hospedadores de los mismos. También se aportan las recomendaciones que, como expertos, consideramos deben lle- varse a cabo por parte de las autoridades encargadas de la gestión de la biodiversidad para garantizar la conservación futura de las especies de este grupo animal tan amena- zado. 1 Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales (CSIC). José Gutiérrez Abascal 2. 28006 Madrid, España, e-mail: rafa- el@mncn.csic.es; carlostc@mncn.csic.es; annie@mncn.csic.es 2 Universidade de Lisboa. Faculdade de Ciencias. Centro de Biologia Ambiental. 1749-016 Lisboa, Portugal, e- mail: joaqreis@gmail.com 3 Universidad del País Vasco. Facultad de Farmacia. Departamento de Zoología y Biología Celular Animal. Paseo de la Universidad 7. 01006 Vitoria, España, e-mail: mariajose.madeira@ehu.es 4 Sodemasa. Avda. César Augusto 14. 50004 Zaragoza, e-mail: igomez@sodemasa.com 5 Servicio Territorial de Medio Ambiente de Salamanca. Junta de Castilla y León. Villar y Macías 1. 37071 Salamanca, España, e-mail: velmarju@jcyl.es 6 Universidad de Salamanca. Departamento de Biología Animal. Campus Miguel de Unamuno. 37007 Salamanca, España, e-mail: negro@usal.es 7 C/ Angel Casas, 11. Urbanización Aben-Humeya. Jun, 18017 Granada, España, e-mail: jbarea@egmasa.es 8 Universidade de Santiago de Compostela. Facultade de Veterinaria. Departamento de Zooloxía e Antropoloxía Física. 27002 Lugo, España, e-mail: mapaz.ondina@usc.es 9 Asociación para la Conservación y Estudio de la Biodiversidad (ACEBI). Palencia 24. 01002 Vitoria, España: ikerayala@yahoo . es 7 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 RESUMO Dispombiliza-se ¡nformagáo sobre a descripáo original, sinonimias, taxonomía, distribui- do, morfología, ciclo de vida, habitat e estado de conservado das dez espécies de náiades (moluscos bivalves pertencentes á superfamília Unionoidea) nativas da Península Ibérica: Margaritifera auricularia (Spengler, 1793), M. margaritifera (L., 1758), Potomido littoralis (Cuvier, 1798), Unió moncus Lamarck, 1819, U. gibbus Spengler, 1793, U. delp- hinus Spengler, 1793, U. tumidiformis Castro, 1885, U. rovoisieri Deshayes, 1847, Ano- donta anatina (L., 1758) e A. cygnea (L., 1758). Se recupera Unió delphinus, Spengler, 1793 como o nome válido para a espécie ibérica conhecida até agora como Unió picto- rum e se cita pela primeira vez a presenca da Unió ravoisieri Deshayes, 1847 na Penín- sula Ibérica. Também se ¡lustram as conchas e detalhes anatómicos de todas as espécies, incluíndo, quando se conhecem, a forma e dimensóes dos seus gloquídios, assim como informado sobre os peixes hospedeiros dos mesmos. Finalmente, sao dadas recomendados sobre as acedes que devem ser tomadas por parte das autoridades responsáveis pela gestáo da biodiversidade, com vista a assegurar a conservado futura das espécies deste grupo animal táo ameasado. ABSTRACT We make available information about the original description, synonyms, taxonomy, distri- bution, morphology, life cycle, habitat and conservation status of the ten species of native naiads (bivalve mollusks belonging to the superfamily Unionoidea) of the Iberian Penín- sula: Margaritifera auricularia (Spengler, 1793), M. margaritifera (L., 1758), Potomida lit- toralis (Cuvier, 1798), Unió mancus Lamarck, 1819, U. gibbus Spengler, 1793, U. delphi- nus Spengler, 1793, U. tumidiformis Castro, 1885, U. ravoisieri Deshayes, 1847, Anodonta anatina (L., 1758) and A. cygnea (L., 1758). Unió delphinus, Spengler, 1793 is reinstated as the valid ñame for the Iberian species known hitherto as Unió pictorum, and the occurrence of Unió ravoisieri Deshayes, 1 847 is reported for the first time in the Iberian Península. We also provide drawings of the shells and anatomical details of all species, and inelude information, when known, about the shape and dimensions of glochidia as well as about host fish. Recommendations are given to authorities responsible for biodiversity management to ensure the conservation of this threatened animal group. INTRODUCCIÓN Las náyades o grandes bivalvos de agua dulce (Mollusca, Bivalvia, Unio- noidea) se distribuyen por todo el mundo a excepción del continente antártico. Aunque todavía no se sabe con exactitud la verdadera diversidad del grupo, hoy se reconocen unas 840 especies repartidas del modo siguiente: 302 en el Neártico, 172 en la región Neo- tropical, 85 en la Afrotropical, 219 en la Indotropical, 45 en el Paleártico y 33 en Australasia (Graf y Cummings, 2007). Una de las características principales de estos moluscos es su ciclo vital, ya que presentan un estado larvario singular en el reino animal; el más común es el denominado gloquidio, que requiere la presencia de un hospedador, en general un pez, en el que tras una metamorfosis se produce la fase juvenil. Es además frecuente la especificidad entre náyades y peces, de forma que no todas las espe- cies de peces pueden actuar como hos- pedadoras de los gloquidios de todas las náyades. Ésta y otras razones (ver más abajo) pueden fácilmente explicar porqué las náyades están consideradas actualmente como uno de los grupos 8 Araujo ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica animales más amenazado del planeta. En los Estados Unidos de América, donde las náyades tuvieron una radia- ción extraordinaria, más de la mitad de las especies están actualmente extingui- das, en peligro o amenazadas (Lydeard, Cowie, Ponder, Bogan, Bouchet, Clarck, Cummings, Frest, Gargominy, HeRBERT, HERSHLER, PEREZ, ROTH, Seddon, Strong y Thompson, 2004). En Europa por su parte, la tasa actual de extinción de las poblaciones de las dos especies del género Margaritifera es catastrófica (Araujo y Ramos, 2001), y aunque no de forma tan grave o docu- mentada, los otros géneros de náyades ( Unió , Potomida, Anodonta, Pseudano- donta, Mycrocondylaea) están también en franca regresión. Otra característica importante de las náyades es el papel que juegan en los ecosistemas de agua dulce donde viven, pudiendo afirmar que en un ecosistema sin modificar las náyades serían el grupo de animales con mayor biomasa (Negus, 1966). Intervienen además en la dinámica de los nutrientes de los siste- mas acuáticos, removiendo fitoplancton, bacterias y materia orgánica del agua y sedimento y colaboran en la bioturba- ción de los fondos aumentando su con- tenido de oxígeno (Strayer, Caraco, Colé, Findlay y Pace, 1999; Vaughn, Nichols y Spooner, 2008). Dado que una náyade del tamaño de Margaritifera margaritifera (L.) filtra hasta 50 litros diarios de agua, y que estas especies han vivido en colonias de hasta 700 ejempla- res por metro cuadrado, en ese tramo de río se filtrarían 35.000 litros por día. Son además especies con un alto poder bioindicador, lo que probablemente ha querido reflejar el nombre de náyade, ya utilizado por el Caballero Jean-Baptiste Lamarck (1744-1829) para referirse a estos bivalvos, en referencia a las hadas o ninfas que mantienen la pureza de las aguas dulces. De este modo, la presencia (o la desaparición documentada) de poblaciones reproductoras (con ejempla- res juveniles) de estos moluscos, puede ser de gran utilidad para conocer cambios en el estado de calidad y con- servación de las aguas superficiales, lo que hace de las náyades excelentes espe- cies centinelas. Una tercera razón que aumenta el interés biológico de las náyades es su antigüedad en el registro fósil. Algunos autores consideran el origen del grupo en el Paleozoico, hace más de 350 millo- nes de años (ver Simpson, 1900; Watters, 2001 y Graf y Cummings, 2006), y recientemente se han descrito especies de los géneros Margaritifera, Protopleurobema y Protoanodonta del Mesozoico (Cretácico) de la península Ibérica (Delvene y Araujo, 2009a, b). Se trata por tanto de animales del máximo interés para estudios de procesos evolu- tivos a lo largo del tiempo y del espacio, por lo que podemos asegurar, junto con Graf y Cummings (2006), que la filoge- nia de las náyades debe reflejar la influencia de procesos como la ruptura y separación de Pangaea en el Meso- zoico, así como la evolución de las cuencas hidrográficas durante el Tercia- rio hasta las últimas glaciaciones del Pleistoceno. El primer trabajo dedicado a las náyades de la península Ibérica es de Morelet (1845), que cita la presencia de 13 especies en Portugal, de las que 8, que además se ilustran, son considera- das nuevas para la ciencia. Más tarde, Drouet (1893), utilizando también la taxonomía propia de la época, es decir la de la Nouvelle École francesa, cita, esta vez sólo para España, 48 especies y describe e ilustra 18 como nuevas. Según Haas (1917a), ninguno de estos dos trabajos, ni el posterior de Locard (1899), pueden utilizarse directamente sin adaptación a los puntos de vista modernos. Lo mismo podría decirse de los trabajo de Castro (1873, 1885, 1887) sobre la fauna malacológica de Portugal. No obstante lo dicho, las localidades que estos autores citan, así como las ilustraciones de los ejemplares, siempre de una gran belleza, aportan una infor- mación de gran utilidad para la recopi- lación de datos antiguos sobre las náyades peninsulares. De este modo, no es hasta la segunda década del siglo XX cuando se hace el primer intento moderno de estudio de todas las 9 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 náyades de la península Ibérica inclu- yendo tanto Portugal como España (Haas, 1917a). Aunque en esa época todavía no se disponía de datos comple- tos sobre la distribución de las náyades ibéricas, sí se asumía la urgente necesi- dad de dar un primer paso para su estudio (Haas, 1917a). En el mencio- nado trabajo, Haas, quizá el autor que mayores esfuerzos ha dedicado al estudio de la sistemática de las náyades, presenta unas exhaustivas notas biblio- gráficas en las que resume la siguiente información: 1. La relación cronológica de todos los trabajos sobre náyades ibé- ricas con indicación de las especies men- cionadas en cada uno (lista I). 2. La rela- ción crítica con la equivalencia entre las especies citadas en la lista I y los nombres aceptados en la época (lista II). 3. La relación de citas geográficas de las especies (lista III). Concluye Haas (1917a) que las 161 especies ibéricas de náyades citadas en todos los trabajos de la lista I pueden reducirse a las 7 siguientes (Haas refiere los autores sin paréntesis): Anodonta cygnea L., Unió turtoni Payraudeau, Unió delphinus Spengler, Unió batavus Lam., Rhombunio littoralis Lam., Margaritifera auricularia Spengler y Margaritifera margaritifera L. Otro trabajo exhaustivo en el que se consideran las especies de bivalvos ibé- ricas es el de Azpeitia (1933), que aunque no propone un análisis crítico de la taxonomía del grupo, sí aporta un pormenorizado estudio de la bibliogra- fía y las citas correspondientes a las náyades de España y Portugal. Nobre (1912, 1930, 1941) por su parte, revisa la fauna de náyades de Portugal, apor- tando nueva información y revisando la bibliografía. Su publicación de 1941 no aporta nuevos datos con respecto a sus anteriores obras, pero sí reduce la lista de especies de Portugal a las 4 siguien- tes: Margaritona margaritifera, Unió picto- rum (L., 1757), Unió littoralis Lamarck, 1835 y Anodonta cygnea. A partir de estos trabajos no existe ya ninguna nueva referencia bibliográ- fica que revise o que aporte datos críti- cos o contrastados sobre las especies ibé- ricas, salvo una clasificación tentativa sobre los Unionoideos paleárticos (Haas, 1940) en la que ya se adivina la futura monografía que el mismo autor publica- ría (Haas, 1969) justo antes de su muerte. En ese trabajo, Haas (1940) ya presentaba las ideas "modernas" de su maestro Kobelt, según el cual una clasi- ficación natural de las náyades debía tener en consideración su distribución en las diferentes cuencas hidrográficas, apuntando por primera vez la impor- tancia del efecto de aislamiento de las especies producido por las fronteras hidrográficas. Se cita también en este artículo por primera vez para las náyades el concepto de "subespecie" o "raza local", que sería la base de la clasi- ficación sistemática que propondría pos- teriormente. La monografía de Haas (1969) supuso así un trabajo exhaustivo de revisión de colecciones y bibliografía en el que se aportan las sinonimias (cientos en el caso de algún taxon) de todas las especies de náyades mundiales consideradas por el autor. En dicha monografía, que junto con la de Simpson (1900) se ha considerado por los especialistas como el punto de partida moderno sobre la sistemática de la Superfamilia Unionoidea, Haas consi- deró la existencia de una serie de espe- cies fundamentales cada una de las cuales englobaba diferentes "razas locales" o "especies incipientes". Por ejemplo, dentro de la "especie funda- mental" Unió pictorum, Haas incluía 13 taxa (razas locales o subespecies) dife- rentes con sus respectivas distribuciones geográficas, a las que distinguía aña- diendo un tercer nombre después de pic- torum que correspondía con el nombre de la especie con el que ese taxon había sido descrito. Así, consideraba U. p. del- phinus como subespecie diferente de la otra subespecie ibérica U. p. mucidus. Como ya se ha comentado, para definir estas razas o subespecies Haas (1969) continuó las ideas de Kobelt sobre la sis- temática de las náyades. Para ello, utilizó principalmente la forma de la concha y su variabilidad, de modo que cada subespecie es más fácil de distin- guir en los centros que en los bordes de sus áreas de distribución. Con respecto a 10 Araujo ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica la península Ibérica, Haas (1969) consi- deró la presencia de los siguientes taxa: M. ( Margaritifera ) margaritifera (L.), M. ( Pseudunio ) auricularia (Spengler), Unió pictorum mucidus Morelet, U. pictorum delphinus Spengler, U. elongatulus penchi- natianus Bourguignat, U. elongatulus valentinus Rossmássler, U. crassus batavus Matón y Racket, Potomida littora- lis littoralis (Lamarck), P. littoralis umbo- nata (Rossmássler) y Anodonta ( Ano - donta) cygnea (L.). Para cada una de ellas citaba un área de distribución que, como se verá al hablar de cada especie, ha variado muy poco con las novedades taxonómicas aparecidas posteriormente. Esta clasificación, a veces con ciertas modificaciones, es la que se ha ido utili- zando en todos los trabajos ibéricos pos- teriores en los que se han citado especies de náyades (Vidal Abarca y Suárez, 1985; Altaba, 1991; Bech y Altimiras, 2003; Pérez-Quintero, Bech y Huer- tas, 2004). En la última década del siglo XX e inicio del XXI empieza a revisarse la taxonomía de las náyades ibéricas (Araujo y Ramos, 1998; Machordom, Araujo, Erpenbeck y Ramos, 2003; Araujo, Gómez y Machordom, 2005; Araujo, 2008; Araujo, Toledo y Machordom, 2009a; Reís y Araujo, 2009; Reís, Machordom y Araujo, en rev.), estudiando no sólo los caracteres habitualmente usados de morfología de la concha y anatomía, sino que se inclu- yen además caracteres moleculares, cuyo uso es ampliamente recomendado en la bibliografía especializada (Graf y Cummings, 2006), así como información sobre la biología de las especies (gloqui- dio, peces hospedadores, época de reproducción). El uso de estos caracte- res, especialmente las secuencias de los genes mitocondriales Col y 16S, ha per- mitido superar la subjetividad que hasta ahora atenazaba la taxonomía de las náyades, limitada al estudio de un carácter tan variable como es la forma de la concha, pudiendo así identificar linajes evolutivos muy claros. Gracias a estos estudios se han distinguido espe- cies ibéricas como Unió delphinus Spen- gler, 1793 o Unió tumidiformis Castro, 1885 de sus especies gemelas europeas Unió pictorum (L.) y Unió crassus Philips- son, 1788, respectivamente. Estos estu- dios han coincidido en el tiempo con un renovado esfuerzo en el conocimiento de las áreas de distribución, biología y ecología de las diferentes especies (Álvarez-Claudio, García Rovés, Ocharán, Cabal, Ocharán y Álvarez, 2000; Araujo y Ramos, 2000a; SORIANO, VlLLENA Y ALONSO, 2001; Araujo, Bragado y Ramos, 2000, 2001; Grande, Araujo y Ramos, 2001; Velasco, Araujo, Bueno y Laguna, 2002; Araujo, Cámara y Ramos, 2002; Machordom et al., 2003; Reís, 2003; Araujo, Quirós y Ramos, 2003; Morales, Negro, Lizana, Martínez y Palacios, 2004; Nagel, 2004; San Miguel, Monserrat, Fernández, Amaro, Hermida, Ondina y Altaba, 2004; Araujo et al., 2005; Reís, 2006; Velasco y Romero, 2006; Velasco, Araujo, Balset, Toledo y Machor- dom, 2006; Bouza, Castro, Martínez, Amaro, Fernández, Ondina, Outeiro y San Miguel, 2007; López, Altaba, Rouault y Gisbert 2007; Outeiro, Ondina, Fernández, Amaro y San Miguel, 2008; Reís y Araujo, 2009; Reís et al., en rev.). Todos estos trabajos confirman la existencia en la península Ibérica de dos familias de náyades, Margaritiferidae y Unionidae, englobando la primera las especies del género Margaritifera y la segunda los géneros Unió, Potomida y Anodonta. Las dos familias tienen una muy amplia distribución en el mundo (Haas, 1969; Graf y Cummings, 2007; Bogan, 2008), caracterizándose la primera por ser un grupo probable- mente relicto con solamente 10 especies vivas (Araujo, Toledo, Van Damme, Ghamizi y Machordom, 2009b). También en la península Ibérica los unionoideos son actualmente uno de los grupos animales más amenazados de desaparición. Entre las causas funda- mentales están la fragmentación y /o de- saparición de sus hábitats (detracciones de agua, alteración de los caudales y flu- jos por las centrales hidroeléctricas y rie- gos, aumento exponencial de industrias Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 1 . Distribución de Margaritifera auricularia. Figura 1. Distribuigao de Margaritifera auricularia. Figure 1. Distribution map ¿/Margaritifera auricularia. contaminantes y cultivos), aunque otros factores como la presencia de especies de peces y bivalvos invasores también pueden estar jugando un papel impor- tante (Bogan, 1993; Ricciardi, Neves y Rasmunssen 1998; Lydeard et al., 2004; Strayer, Downing, Haag, King, Lay- zer, Newton y Nichols, 2004). Esta dis- minución en las poblaciones de náyades se ha visto ya en los ríos peninsulares (Reís, 2003; Morales et al., 2004; Ve- lasco y Romero, 2006; Verdú y Ga- lante, 2006; Barea, Ballesteros y Mo- reno, 2008; Gómez y Araujo, 2008), por lo que se hace necesario poner en cono- cimiento de la sociedad y de las autori- dades encargadas de la conservación de la biodiversidad lo que hoy sabemos so- bre este grupo animal tan amenazado. Es por tanto del máximo interés dar a conocer tanto los nombres válidos como las distribuciones reales de las especies ibéricas de náyades. En el presente trabajo pretendemos ofrecer una visión actualizada de dichas especies, su diversidad, variabilidad, adscripción taxonómica, distribución y estado de conservación. También sobre su biología y ecología, por lo que se incluyen datos, cuando se conocen, sobre el tipo de gloquidio, época de reproducción y peces hospedadores. Los mapas de distribución se han realizado situando las localidades en cuadrículas UTM de 10 x 10 km. La información que ilustran se refiere a presencia de ejem- plares y /o poblaciones vivos en los últimos 20 años comprobada por los autores. Gran parte de este material está depositado en el Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales de Madrid. No se ha representado la presencia de valvas en playas o zonas de sedimentación. Para obtener las listas de sinónimos se han utilizado sobre todo los trabajos de Azpeitia (1933) y Haas (1969). También se aporta información sobre dónde se pueden localizar las primeras o únicas ilustraciones de las especies, lo que ha sido de gran utilidad a la hora de 12 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica identificar alguna de ellas (ej. U. gibbus). En el caso de las dos especies de Ano- donta se ha consultado la bibliografía recomendada por Hanley (1855) para reconocer los tipos de Linneo, funda- mentalmente Lister (1678, 1685, 1770) y Rossmássler (1835, 1836, 1837), así como Schróter (1779). La bibliografía en la que se pueden encontrar esas ilus- traciones, así como las de los ejemplares tipo de cada especie, se cita de forma completa en los apartados de sinónimos y descripción original. En alguno de los casos la informa- ción que se aporta es inédita; cuando es así, los conocimientos en los que se basa están en fase muy avanzada y se citan como datos sin publicar. Aunque recien- temente citada en España (Pou-Rovira, Araujo, Boix, Clavero, Feo, Ordeix y Zamora, 2009), no hemos considerado la especie exótica Anodonta (= Sina- nodonta ) woodiana (Lea, 1834). En resumen, se trata de las siguientes 10 especies: Margaritifera auricularia (Spen- gler, 1793), M. margaritifera (L., 1758), Potomida littoralis (Cuvier, 1798), Unió mancus Lamarck, 1819, U. gibbus Spen- gler, 1793, lí. delphinus Spengler, 1793, U. tumidiformis Castro, 1885, U. ravoisieri Deshayes, 1847, Anodonta anatina (L. 1758) y A. cygnea (L., 1758). SISTEMÁTICA Margaritifera auricularia (Spengler, 1793) Sinónimos: Unió sinuata Lamarck, 1819. Anim. sans. vert., 6 (1): 70. Sintipo ilustrado en Valledor y Araujo, 2006. Malacologia, 48 (1-2): 286, fig. 1. Unió margaritanopsis Locará, 1889. Not. Conch., 13: 17. Ilustrado en Locard, 1893. Conchyliologie Francaise, 151, fig. 163 y en Valledor y Araujo, 2006. Malacologia, 48 (1-2): 291, fig. 15. Descripción original: Unió auricularius Spengler, 1793. Skrifter afNaturhistorie Selskabet, Kjobenhavn, 3 (1): 54. Localidad tipo: Este de la India. Sin duda un error (ver más abajo). Lectotipo en el Zoological Museum of the University of Copenhagen. N°: ZMUC BIV-315. Ilustrado en: Haas, 1913. Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening I Kjobenhavn, 65: 54, textfig. 1; Knudsen et al, 2003. Steenstrupia, 27 (2): 267, fig. 3; Valledor y Araujo, 2006. Mala- cologia, 48 (1-2): 286, fig. 5. Las referencias ilustran el lectotipo. Comentario taxonómico : Aunque según Spengler (1793) el ejemplar tipo procede del este de la India, esta especie sólo se conoce de Europa. Otro error de Spengler (1793) en la descripción de esta especie fue asignarle la ilustración de Lister (1685-1692, figure 149, píate 4), ya que en realidad se trataba de una figura de M. margaritifera (Haas, 1909; Valledor y Araujo, 2006). Haas (1910) describió el género Pseudunio para incluir a esta especie y así diferenciarla de M. margaritifera, pero Pseudunio fue posteriormente sinonimi- zado con Margaritona ( =Margaritifera ) por Ortmann (1911). No obstante, Pseu- dunio ha sido más tarde usado como subgénero por Haas (1969) para separar M. auricularia y su variedad M. a. maro- cana (Pallary, 1918) del resto de las espe- cies del género. Más recientemente se ha vuelto a utilizar como género por Smith (2001) y Nienhuis (2003) para éstas y otras especies de la familia. Aunque los últimos estudios demuestran que M. auricularia y M. marocana son dos espe- cies diferentes que forman un grupo monofilético o ciado dentro de la familia (Araujo et al., 2009b), todavía no sabemos si deben considerarse diferen- tes subgéneros dentro de Margaritifera (Huff, Campbell, Gustafson, Lydeard, Altaba y Giribet, 2004). Como conclu- sión, proponemos no utilizar Pseudunio como género ni como subgénero para incluir a M. auricularia al menos hasta 13 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 2. Margaritifera auricularia. Canal Imperial de Aragón en Grisén (Zaragoza). Figura 2. Margaritifera auricularia. Canal Imperial de Aragón em Grisén (Zaragoza). Figure 2. Margaritifera auricularia. Canal Imperial de Aragón at Grisén (Zaragoza). 14 Araujo ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 3. Margaritifera auricularia. Río Ebro en Sástago (Zaragoza), Figura 3. Margaritifera auricularia. Rio Ebro em Sástago (Zaragoza). Figure 3. Margaritifera auricularia. Ebro river at Sástago (Zaragoza). 15 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 que no se obtenga una filogenia defini- tiva de la familia que así lo recomiende. Distribución : Paleártico oeste. Extin- guida en gran parte de su área de distri- bución (Altaba, 1990; Nesemann, 1993; Araujo y Moreno, 1999; Araujo y Ramos, 2000a) a excepción del cauce principal del río Ebro en Aragón y Tarragona, Canales Imperial de Aragón y de Tauste (Fig. 1) (Aragón y Navarra) (Araujo y Ramos, 2000b; Gómez y Araujo, 2008) y ríos Loire y Charente en Francia (Nienhuis, 2003). Actualmente, la población más numerosa del planeta parece ser la que vive en el Canal Impe- rial de Aragón, en la provincia de Zara- goza, con aproximadamente 3.500 ejem- plares. Los datos publicados sobre la población del bajo Ebro (Altaba, 1997) han sido obviamente sobreestimados, y todavía no se ha realizado una evalua- ción contrastada del número de ejem- plares que viven en los ríos Charente y Loire. Existe una cita de 1903 del río Tajo en Toledo (Azpeitia, 1933) y se han encontrado valvas de ejemplares muertos en las últimas décadas en el Ebro en Burgos, Álava, La Rioja y Navarra (Araujo, Madeira y Ayala, 2007). En los ríos de Marruecos vive una especie muy similar (M. marocana ) que antes se consideraba sinónima de M. auricularia, pero recientemente se ha redescrito como especie diferente (Araujo et al., 2009b). Morfología externa (Figs. 2, 3 y 4): Concha negra, alargada y muy gruesa, a veces con silueta auriculada, especial- mente en los ejemplares procedentes de ríos con fuerte corriente. Los adultos pueden alcanzar hasta 18 cm de longi- tud. Interior de las valvas blanco naca- rado muy brillante. Charnela con dos dientes laterales posteriores en la valva izquierda y uno en la derecha, todos muy fuertes y alargados. Dientes pseu- docardinales robustos y de aspecto pira- midal, dos en la valva izquierda y uno en la derecha. Por su gran tamaño sólo podría confundirse con las especies de Anodonta, pero éstas presentan siempre conchas muy delgadas y frágiles y sin dientes en la charnela. Los ejemplares juveniles (Fig. 4), muy poco comunes, se distinguen de Unió y Potomida por la charnela y por ser mucho más aplasta- dos. En cuanto a su anatomía, y como el resto de las especies de la familia Mar- garitiferidae, presenta una serie de par- ticularidades anatómicas (Fig. 5A) dife- rentes de las de la familia Unionidae: 1. las papilas del sifón inhalante son pequeñas y arborescentes, nunca cónicas. 2. carecen de abertura supra- anal dorsal al sifón exhalante. 3. el dia- fragma que divide las cavidades infra y suprabranquial es incompleto y 4. las dos láminas de cada branquia en vez de estar unidas por tabiques continuos per- pendiculares que forman tubos de agua están fusionadas por septos interlamela- res distribuidos al azar. Ciclo vital : Especie muy longeva (60- 100 años). En la única población estu- diada (Canal Imperial de Aragón) se ha observado que existe un elevado por- centaje de ejemplares hermafroditas (Grande, Araujo y Ramos, 2001) y que tiene un solo ciclo reproductivo al año (Araujo, Bragado y Ramos, 2000). Los gloquidios se liberan en febrero-marzo, miden 140 x 130 x 60 jum y carecen de ganchos (Fig. 6A), aunque sí presentan unos pequeños dientes en su borde ventral con los que se fijan a los filamen- tos branquiales de los peces hospedado- res (Araujo y Ramos, 1998). A diferen- cia de la mayoría de las náyades, las especies del género Margaritifera incuban los gloquidios en las cuatro branquias. Solamente se conocen dos peces nativos hospedadores de los gloquidios de M. auricularia, el esturión, Acipenser sturio L. y el pez fraile o bienio de río. Salaria fluviatilis (Asso), el primero extin- guido en el Ebro y el segundo en peligro de extinción. En experimentos realiza- dos en acuarios se ha visto que los glo- quidios también se enquistan en las branquias de las especies exóticas de esturión Acipenser baeri Brandt y A. nac- carii Bonaparte, dando lugar a náyades juveniles que miden 190 pm (Araujo y Ramos, 2000b; Araujo et al., 2001, 2002, 2003; López et al., 2007). También ló Araujo ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 4. Juveniles de Margaritifera auricularia. A, B: Canal Imperial de Aragón (Zaragoza); C: Canal de Tauste (Navarra). Figura 4. Juvenis de Margaritifera auricularia. A, B: Canal Imperial de Aragón (Zaragoza); C: Canal de Tauste (Navarra). Figure 4. Juvenile shells ¿^Margaritifera auricularia. A, B: Canal Imperial de Aragón (Zaragoza); C: Canal de Tauste (Navarra). 17 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 5. Sifones. A: Margaritifera auricularia ; B: M. margaritifera ; C: Potomida littoralis', D: ¿/razo mancus ; E: U. delphinus-, F: U. gibbus-, G: £/. tumidiformis ; H: U. ravoisieri-, I: Anodonta anatina. Figura 5. Sifoes. A: Margaritifera auricularia; M. margaritifera; C: Potomida littoralis; D: Unió mancus; E: U. delphinus; F: U. gibbus; G: U. tumidiformis; H: U. ravoisieri; I: Anodonta anatina. Figure 5. Siphons. A: Margaritifera auricularia; B: M. margaritifera; C: Potomida littoralis; D: Unió mancus; E: U. delphinus; F: U. gibbus; G: U. tumidiformis; H: U. ravoisieri; /: Anodonta anatina. (Página derecha) Figura 6. Gloquidios. A: Margaritifera auricularia ; B: M. margaritifera ; C, D: Potomida littoralis ; E, F: Unió mancus. (Pagina direita) Figura 6. Gloquidios. A: Margaritifera auricularia; B: M. margaritifera; C, D: Poto- mida littoralis; E, F: Unió mancus. (Right page) Figure 6. Glochidia. A: Margaritifera auricularia; B: M. margaritifera; C, D: Potomida littoralis; E, F: Unió mancus. 18 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica 19 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 se han obtenido resultados positivos con la gambusia ( Gambusia holbrooki Girand) (López y Altaba, 2005). En ninguna de las poblaciones cono- cidas existen ejemplares juveniles vivos. Hábitat : Aparte de la excepción que suponen los canales Imperial y de Tauste, donde los ejemplares viven semienterrados en fondos naturales de arenas y gravas (Figs. 7 A, B), es una especie propia de ríos grandes y cauda- losos de aguas duras. Vive en los brazos laterales separados por islas, donde el agua se remansa y los peces paran para alimentarse o frezar. Cuando aparece en el cauce principal, suele ser en zonas donde la corriente es menor por la pre- sencia de meandros. También habita en zonas de rápidos y aguas someras, donde vive muy clavada entre las piedras. Requiere fondos con sustratos de gravas asentadas y estables, no pudiendo sobrevivir durante mucho tiempo en barras de gravas movibles o fondos de cieno. Como en todas las náyades, su hábitat es el de los correspondientes peces hospedadores, por lo que el cono- cimiento de la biología de éstos puede aportar las claves sobre el hábitat del molusco. Las colonias de náyades serán siempre más abundantes donde los peces hospedadores de sus gloquidios pasen más tiempo; por ello, las áreas de sombra de las orillas y los taludes, donde los peces bentónicos pasan gran parte de su vida, suelen ser especial- mente favorables para las náyades. Conservación : Amparada por las siguientes figuras de protección: En Peligro de extinción en el Catálogo Nacional de Especies Amenazadas y en el Catálogo de Especies Amenazadas de Aragón. Catálogo de Especies Amenaza- das de Cataluña: Especie protegida de la fauna salvaje autóctona A. Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de España: En Peligro crítico (Verdú y Galante, 2006). IUCN: En Peligro crítico. Directiva Hábitats (Anexo IV): Especies animales y vegeta- les de interés comunitario que requieren una protección estricta. Convenio de Berna (Anexo II): Especies animales y sus hábitats estrictamente protegidos. En Aragón existe un Plan de Recupera- ción para la especie. Se ha redactado además un Plan de Acción de la Comu- nidad Europea (Araujo y Ramos, 2001). Al ser su área de presencia tan redu- cida, sus poblaciones tan poco numero- sas y aisladas unas de otras, y no existir en ninguna reclutamiento, el riesgo de extinción de la especie es gravísimo. La falta de efectivos en el Río Ebro y el declive o desaparición de las dos únicas especies hospedadoras de sus gloqui- dios, hace prácticamente imposible la reproducción natural. Además de todas las alteraciones que está sufriendo su hábitat, la invasión de especies de moluscos [mejillón cebra -Dreissena poly- morpha (Pallas)- y almeja asiática -Corbi- cula fluminea (Muller)] y peces exóticos en aguas del Ebro puede ser letal para la especie. La medida necesaria más urgente para conservar a M. auricularia es garan- tizar la supervivencia de la población del Canal Imperial de Aragón frente a las agresiones que está sufriendo ese ecosistema por los actuales planes de modernización (Gómez y Araujo, 2008), para lo que sería necesario incluir la especie en el Anexo II de la Directiva Hábitats y posteriormente protejer el Canal bajo una ley apropiada que asegure la conservación tanto del patri- monio natural (la especie y su hábitat) como del cultural y artístico (la obra civil). Margaritifera margaritifera (Linnaeus, 1758) Sinónimos: Unió elongata Lamarck, 1819 (syn. fide Nilsson, 1822). Hist. Nat. Anim. sans Vert. París, vol. 6: 70. Alasmodonta arcuata Barnes, 1823 (syn. fide Lea, 1834). Amer. J. Sci., New Haven, 6: 277; lám. 12, fig. 20. Unió roissyi Michaud, 1831. Compl. Hist. nat. Molí. Draparnaud : 112, lám. 16, figs. 27-28. 20 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Unió brunnea Bonhomme, 1840 (syn. fide Dupuy, 1847). Mém. Aveyron, 2: 460. Unió tristis Morelet, 1845 (syn. fide Haas, 1917a). Molí terr.fluv. Portugal: 107, lám. 31, fig. 2. Margaritona freytagi Kobelt, 1886 (syn. fide Haas, 1940). Jb. nassau. Ver. Naturk., Wiesbaden, 39: 98, lám. 8, figs. 1-4. Margaritona michaudi Locard, 1889 (syn. fide Germain, 1931). Contr. faune malacol. frang., 13: 17. Margaritona pyrenaica Bourguignat in Locard, 1889. (syn. fide Germain, 1931). Contr. faune malacol. frang., 13: 150. Margaritona alleni Castro in Locard, 1899 (syn. fide Haas, 1917a). Arch. Mus. Hist. nat. Lyon, 7: 212. Margaritona durrovensis Philips, 1928. Proc. malac. Soc. London, 18: 69-74, lám. 3-4. Descripción original: Mya margaritifera Linnaeus, 1758. Systema Naturae, ed. 10, 1: 671. Localidad tipo: En los torrentes de todo el orbe septentrional (In totius orbis ardid cataractis ). Ilustrado en: Lister, 1685. Appendicis ad Historiam Animalium Angliae, London, lám. I, fig. 1. Pontoppidan, 1755. The Natural History ofNorway etc, pág. 165; Lister, 1770. Historiae sive sinopsis methodicae Conchyliorum et, Oxford, fig. 149; Schroter, 1779. Die Geschichte der Flüssconchylien, etc. Halle, lám. 4, fig. 1. Comentario taxonómico: Esta especie fue ilustrada por Lister (1685) y Pon- toppidan (1755) antes incluso de ser descrita por Linneo. La población de aguas calizas de Irlanda descrita como M. durrovensis Phillips, 1928 se consi- dera actualmente como un ecotipo de la especie (Machordom et al., 2003; Lucey, 2006). Distribución : Holártico. Histórica- mente la especie se distribuía por todos los ríos salmoneros y trucheros de la costa occidental europea entre los 40 y 60° N, desde la península Ibérica hasta la costa Ártica de la antigua URSS (península de Kola), y la costa este de América del Norte (Ziuganov, Zotin, Nezlin y Tretiakov, 1994). En la península Ibérica (Fig. 8) se conocen poblaciones en ríos atlánticos desde el Baixo Miño hasta el Narcea (Álvarez-Claudio et al., 2000; San Miguel et al., 2004), en siete afluentes del Duero: Águeda (Salamanca), Tera y Negro (Zamora), Paiva, Tuela, Mente y Rabanal (Portugal), en los ríos Cávado y Neiva (Portugal), en el curso alto del Bibey (cuenca del Miño) (Zamora) y en un afluente del Tajo, el río Alberche (Ávila) (Velasco et al., 2002, 2006; Reís, 2003; Morales et al., 2004; LIFE- Náyade, 2005; Velasco y Romero, 2006). Morfología externa (Figs. 9, 10): Concha de color marrón oscuro a casi negro, gruesa, robusta y moderada- mente comprimida. Los juveniles son de color ámbar brillante a rojizo (Fig. 9B). El margen dorsal ligeramente arqueado junto con el ventral generalmente cóncavo le confieren una forma arriño- nada, aunque en zonas de gravas hete- rométricas y fuerte corriente se pueden encontrar ejemplares de siluetas irregu- lares o deformes. El umbo está despla- zado hacia la parte anterior, no sobresale de la concha y en los adultos suele apa- recer sin periostraco y muy erosionado. Externamente se distingue de M. auricu- laria por ser más ovalada, pequeña y frágil. El interior de la concha es de color blanco nacarado con irisaciones de diversas tonalidades. Las impresiones de los músculos aductores son muy patentes, tanto la del anterior, reni- forme, como la del posterior, ovalado. La impresión del músculo retractor pedal es más evidente que la del pro- tractor, aunque su límite se desdibuja fusionándose con la del aductor ante- rior. La charnela es larga con dientes laterales vestigiales o prácticamente ausentes en los adultos, aunque sí existen en los juveniles. La valva izquierda tiene dos dientes cardinales poco desarrollados y uno la derecha; suelen ser comprimidos lateralmente, recurvados y levemente aserrados en su parte superior. Presenta las mismas particularida- des anatómicas de la especie anterior: papilas del sifón inhalante pequeñas y arborescentes (Fig. 5B), nunca cónicas, carece de abertura supra-anal, dia- fragma incompleto y septos interlamela- 21 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 res distribuidos al azar entre las dos láminas de cada branquia. Ciclo de vida : Al igual que el resto de las especies de la familia Margaritiferi- dae, M. margaritifera incuba sus larvas en las cuatro branquias, pudiendo alber- gar una hembra adulta grávida de 3 a 10 millones de embriones (Ross, 1992). Los gloquidios (Fig. 6B) son muy pequeños (60 x 70 Mm)/ y aunque se han descrito como carentes de dientes o espinas (Nezlin, Cunjak, Zotin y Ziuganov, 1994; Pekkarinen y Valovirta, 1996), Harms (1907, 1909) menciona la existen- cia de unos pequeños dientes en el borde ventral. En el río Varzuga (Península de Kola, Rusia) la gametogénesis ocurre entre finales de agosto y mediados de septiembre, con una liberación de glo- quidios de entre 6-8 semanas y presen- cia de peces infestados desde mediados de septiembre a finales de junio del año siguiente (Ziuganov et al., 1994). En los ríos de Galicia sin embargo, parece que la gametogénesis se produce en pri- mavera-verano y que la proporción de ejemplares hermafroditas simultáneos es elevada (Grande et al., 2001). En ríos del noroeste de Zamora se ha visto que el periodo de gravidez se extiende entre mediados de agosto y mediados de octubre con gran simultaneidad en todos los individuos (LIFE-Náyade, 2006; Morales, datos no publicados). Los gloquidios tienen una mortali- dad superior al 99% en los primeros días (Jansen, Bauer y Zahner-Meike, 2001), por lo que disponen de poco tiempo para ponerse en contacto con las branquias del pez hospedador. El salmón del Atlántico ( Salmo salar L.) y el reo ( Salmo trutta trutta L.) parecen ser los hospedadores óptimos de M. marga- ritifera, mientras que otros salmónidos como la trucha arco-iris [Oncorhynchus mykiss (Walbaum)], o ciprínidos reófilos como foxinos, bogas o barbos son resis- tentes a las larvas (Bauer, 1987a, b, 1997, 2001; Bauer y Vogel, 1987; Ziuga- nov ET AL., 1994; LIFE-Náyade, 2006). La ausencia de Salmo salar en la mayoría de los ríos de Europa occidental desde hace 5 ó 6 décadas es probablemente la razón por la cual sea actualmente la trucha el principal hospedador; por lo tanto, es imprescindible la presencia de efectivos de S. trutta var. fario L. en los ríos interiores ibéricos donde probable- mente nunca han existido salmones. La expulsión de gloquidios se realiza de forma dependiente de la temperatura del agua (Hastie y Young, 2003), rodea- dos de una masa mucosa translúcida que permanece a la deriva en la columna de agua (Ondina obs. pers.). Dado que los alevines de peces se ali- mentan mayormente por deriva en zonas someras y de fuerte turbulencia, esta estrategia de las náyades podría incrementar su éxito reproductivo aumentando la probabilidad de que los gloquidios sean ingeridos por el hospe- dador. El tiempo de permanencia de los gloquidios en las branquias del pez es variable, entre 10 y 12 meses aproxima- damente (Bauer, 1994; Hastie y Young, 2003). Los peces adultos parecen ser menos susceptibles a la infestación que los alevines de la última freza (edad 0+). Aunque esto se atribuye a fenómenos de inmunidad por infecciones previas (Bauer, 1987c; Ziuganov et al., 1994), se ha observado tanto infestación como re-infestación de peces adultos (Young et al., 1987; Geist et al., 2006: LIFE- Náyade, 2006). En condiciones favorables de experi- mentación, las náyades juveniles crecen de 0,5 a 2,5 mm en 26 meses de vida. (Página derecha) Figura 7. Náyades vivas. A, B: Margaritifera auricularia ; C, D: M. margaritifera ; E, F: Potomida littoralis. (Pagina direita) Figura 7. Náiades vivas. A, B: Margaritifera auricularia; C, D: M. margaritifera; E, F: Potomida littoralis. (Right page) Figure 7. Living naiads. A, B: Margaritifera auricularia; C, D: M. margaritifera; E, F: Potomida littoralis. 22 Araujo ET al.'. Las náyades de la península Ibérica 23 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 8. Distribución de Margaritifera margaritifera. Figura 8. Distribuido de Margaritifera margaritifera. Figure 8. Distribution map ^Margaritifera margaritifera. crecimiento que realiza Unió pictorum en menos de 11 meses (Wáchtler et al., 2001). La longevidad de M. margaritifera es excepcionalmente alta, aunque variable entre poblaciones dependiendo de la latitud y de las condiciones ambientales (Bauer, 1992; Ziuganov, San Miguel, Neves, Longa, Fernández, Amaro, Beletsky, Popkovitch, Kaluzhin y Johnson, 2000). En el río Keret (Karelia, Finlandia) alcanzan 167 años y un tamaño de 162 mm (Ziuganov et al., 1994), mientras que en Bavaria (Alema- nia) la esperanza de vida está entre 30 y 132 años, con rangos de longitud máxima de 80-145 mm (Bauer, 1983, 1992). Tanto FIendelberg (1961) como Hastie, Young, Bonn, Cosgrove y Henninger (2000a) señalan que es rela- tivamente frecuente que la especie supere el siglo de vida en río subárticos de Suecia así como en poblaciones esco- cesas. Sin embargo, en Galicia, coinci- diendo con el extremo meridional del rango de distribución de la especie, alcanza una longitud máxima aproxi- mada de 95 mm, sobrepasando muy pocas veces los 130 mm, poseen una tasa de crecimiento superior a la de las poblaciones nórdicas con aguas más frías, especialmente los seis primeros años, y raramente alcanzan los 65 años de vida (San Miguel et al., 2004). En los afluentes del Duero se han encon- trado náyades de longitudes superiores a 130 mm (río Alberche), así como poblaciones muy dispares que ofrecen medianas poblacionales desde 64 (río Rabanal) a 107 mm (río Tera) (Reís, 2003; LIFE-Náyade, 2004). A diferencia del patrón de variación genética de las poblaciones centroeuro- peas (Geist y Kuehn, 2005), las pobla- ciones gallegas poseen baja variabilidad intrapoblacional, alta diferenciación genética entre cuencas y unas tasas de autofecundación elevadas (entre un 48 y un 70%) (Bouza et al., 2007; Toledo, Araujo y Machordom, en rev.). Estos 24 Araujo ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 9. Margaritifera margaritifera. A: río Landro (Lugo); B: juvenil del río Eo (Lugo). Figura 9. Margaritifera margaritifera. A: rio Landro (Lugo); B: juvenil do rio Eo (Lugo). Figure 9. Margaritifera margaritifera. A: Landro river (Lugo); B: Juvenil from the Eo river (Lugo). 25 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 resultados estarían en concordancia con la predicción genérica de las poblacio- nes periféricas: reducida variabilidad como resultado de un pequeño tamaño poblacional y aislamiento espacial. Todo ello puede considerarse estrechamente relacionado con la posibilidad de her- mafroditismo simultáneo por parte de las hembras de las colonias sometidas a determinadas condiciones ambientales o de estrés poblacional por baja densidad de individuos (Bauer, 1987c). Hábitat : En España únicamente habita en ríos salmoneros y trucheros de aguas limpias y muy poco calcificadas, frías, ácidas, transparentes y muy bien oxigenadas, con fondos de rocas, piedras y gravas, en ocasiones con sus- tratos finos y arenosos (Figs. 7C, D). Se conocen poblaciones desde casi a nivel del mar (río Eo) hasta zonas trucheras a más de 1000 m de altitud (río Bibey). Parece preferir profundidades entre 0,5 y 2 m, pero pueden vivir a mayor pro- fundidad (ZlUGANOV ET AL., 1994). Suele formar colonias en las zonas más sombrías y cercanas a la orilla coin- cidiendo en los ríos peninsulares con aquellos tramos en los que se conserva el bosque de ribera original, dominado por Alnus glutinosa (Álvarez-Claudio et al., 2000; Velasco et al., 2002, 2006; LIFE-Náyade, 2004; Morales, Santos, Peñín y Palacios, 2007; Outeiro et al., 2008). Estos agregados se distribuyen a lo largo del lecho fluvial, pudiéndose encontrar desde individuos aparente- mente aislados a colonias de decenas de ejemplares. Conservación: Catalogada en el Libro Rojo de los invertebrados de España como En Peligro (Verdú y Galante, 2006). Se ha incluido recientemente en la categoría En Peligro por la IUCN (2008), indicando que se encuentra enfrentada a un riesgo muy alto de extinción en estado silvestre en un futuro próximo. Existe un Plan de Acción de la Comuni- dad Europea (Araujo y Ramos, 2001) para la conservación de todas las pobla- ciones de sus Estados miembros. El declive de esta especie en Europa se considera dramático y está reciente- mente documentado en el 90% de su distribución conocida en el siglo XX (Young et al., 2001). A nivel autonómico únicamente ha sido incluida en el Catálogo Gallego de Especies Amenazadas, regulado por el Decreto 88/2007, en la categoría En Peligro de Extinción, lo que implica la elaboración de un Plan de Recuperación específico sobre el que actualmente se está trabajando. Castilla y León está desarrollando un Plan de Acción (LIFE- Náyade, 2005) emanado de los esfuer- zos de estudio y gestión del hábitat rea- lizados en Zamora a través del Pro- grama LIFE-Náyade (LIFE03/NAT/E/ 000051). Es importante reseñar que la elevada longevidad de esta especie, aún con importantes variaciones latitudinales, oculta su precario estado de conserva- ción al poder persistir durante mucho tiempo poblaciones de adultos sin que exista reclutamiento. Así, aunque en los últimos diez años se ha ampliado de forma importante el conocimiento sobre el área de distribución de la especie en la Península, tanto en las colonias de baja como de alta densidad se observa un déficit importante de las cohortes más jóvenes (Álvarez-Claudio et al. 2000; Morales et al., 2004; Morales et al., 2007; Outeiro et al., 2008). Esta ausencia de renovación generacional parece que data de las últimas décadas y que deriva de las profundas modifica- ciones que se han producido a lo largo del siglo XX en los cauces fluviales y en la calidad del agua. Todos los estudios coinciden en mostrar a M. margaritifera como una especie de requerimientos muy específicos y de tasa neta de creci- miento muy lento, lo que la hace espe- cialmente vulnerable. Alteraciones físicas en los lechos (dragados, encauza- mientos, obras públicas, centrales hidro- eléctricas...) y en las cuencas hidrográfi- cas (deforestación, repoblaciones inten- sivas con especies foráneas como euca- liptos y coniferas, incendios forestales, desertificación...) producen pérdida de microhábitat para los exigentes juveni- les, ya que los intersticios oxigenados de los fondos de gravillas que precisan quedan aterrados (- siltation -) (Geist y 26 ARAUJO ET AL. : Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 10. Margaritifera margaritifera. A: río Arnego (Pontevedra); B: río Tambre (La Coruña). Figura 10. Margaritifera margaritifera. A: rio Arnego (Pontevedra); B: rio Tambre (La Coruña ). Figure 10. Margaritifera margaritifera. A: Arnego river (Pontevedra); B: Tambre river (La Coruña). 27 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Kuehn, 2005; Ziuganov, Kaluzhin, Beletsky, y Popkovitch, 2001; Morales et al., 2007). La proliferación de resi- duos nitrogenados en los fondos produ- cida por la contaminación química y orgánica, en especial amonio, produce un fuerte impacto que reduce las posibi- lidades de reclutamiento y las de repro- ducción para los hospedadores (Augs- PURGER, KELLER, BLACK, COPE Y ÜWYER, 2003; Geist y Auerswald, 2007). Si a la baja tasa de supervivencia de las fases larvarias y la elevada mortandad de los juveniles, se une la escasez de hospeda- dores propia de los ríos ibéricos, se puede comprender la vulnerabilidad de las poblaciones ante la falta de recluta- miento en ciclos muy prolongados. Con excepción del hombre, la especie en estado adulto tiene pocos predadores naturales. Aunque en EEUU está documentado que puede ser presa de la rata cibelina [Ondatra zibethicus (L.)] (Zhaner y Hanson, 2001) y en Escocia se han citado evidencias (Cos- grove, Hastie y Sime, 2007) de preda- ción natural por parte de ostreros [Hae- matopus ostralegus (L.)], visón americano (Mustela vison Schreber) y nutria [Lutra lutra (L.)], en la península Ibérica no está descrita su predación por ningún verte- brado semiacuático. Sí se conocen, sin embargo, numerosos relatos de habitan- tes ribereños que aseguran haber sacrifi- cado hace décadas grandes cantidades de ejemplares para alimentarse de ellos. Dado que presentan unas caracterís- ticas únicas respecto a las poblaciones europeas, y una situación más frágil por tratarse de poblaciones aisladas geográ- ficamente en la periferia de su rango ecológico, es necesario un esfuerzo coor- dinado para la conservación de las poblaciones ibéricas. Cabe destacar la población del río Eo, con densidades puntuales de 53 náyades m‘2 y un tramo con un 30% de ejemplares menores de 65 mm, es decir, de individuos menores de 10 años (Outeiro et al., 2008), así como la del Rabanal, con densidades de 50 náyades m"2 y buen reclutamiento (Reís, 2003). Aunque son datos relativa- mente bajos en comparación con los del norte de Europa (Hastie et al., 2000b), destacan frente a otros ríos de la penín- sula donde no se han detectado juveni- les y raramente la densidad de adultos es superior a 1 náyade m2 (Velasco et al. 2002; Reís, 2003; Morales et al. 2004, 2007; LIFE-Náyade, 2004). En otros ríos salmoneros se han encontrado algunos juveniles, como el Narcea (Álvarez-Claudio et al., 2000) o el Masma (Outeiro et al., 2008), aunque no en número suficiente como para ase- gurar la viabilidad de la población. En el río Alberche se localizaron algunos ejemplares de menos de 30 mm (Velasco et al., 2006). Es de la máxima urgencia su inclu- sión en el nuevo Catálogo Español de Especies Amenazadas en la categoría En Peligro, y simultáneamente, la puesta en marcha de un amplio programa de res- tauración de sus hábitats y de regenera- ción de las poblaciones de truchas. Potomida littoralis (Cuvier, 1798) Sinónimos: Al igual que ocurre con la mayoría de las náyades, P. littoralis tiene una enorme variabilidad morfológica, lo que se refleja en los 31 sinónimos que aporta Haas (1969) o en los 93 de Graf (2007). En el listado siguiente solamente se han considerado nombres adjudicados a especies ibéricas y francesas. Unió littoralis Lamarck, 1801. Syst. Anim. sans Vert., 114. Unió brevialis Lamarck, 1819. Hist. Nat. Anim. sans Vert., 6: 73. Unió subtetragonus Michaud, 1831. Complément Hist. Nat. Molí. ten. fluv. Trance, Draparnaud, 111, lám. XVI, fig 23. Unió draparnaldii Deshayes, 1831. Descr. Coqu. Ten., 38, lám. 14, fig. 6. Unió incurvus Lea, 1831? Trans. amer. philos. Soc., Philadelphia, 4: 97, lám. 13, fig. 27. Unió pianensis Farines in Boubée, 1833. Bull. Hist. Nat. Trance, 1, Molí. Zoophyt., 27. Unió cuneatus Jacquemin, 1835. Guide Ror. Arles, 124. 28 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Unió rotundatus Mauduyt, 1839. Tableau Indic. Molí. Vienne, 9, lám. 1, fig. 314. Unió barraudi Bonhomme, 1840. Mém. Soc. Aveyron, 2: 430. Unió bigerrensis Millet, 1843. Mag. ZooL, 3, lám. 64, fig. 2. Unió littoralis var. umbonatus Rossmássler, 1844. Iconog. Land Siisw. Molí, 4: 36, lám. 69, fig. 849. Unió astierianus Dupuy, 1850. Hist. Molí. Trance , 636, lám. 23, fig. 9. Unió moulinsianus Dupuy, 1850. Hist. Molí. France, 640, lám. 24, fig. 10. Unió rhomboideus Moquin-Tandon, 1855. Hist. Molí, terr.fluv. France, 2: 508, lám. 47, figs. 4 a 9. Unió subreniformis Bourguignat, 1863. Molí. nouv. lit. peu connus, 138, lám. 34, figs. 4 a 6. Unió hippopotami Bourguignat, 1869. Cat. Molí, terr.fluv. Paris quaternaire, 21, lám. 3, figs. 52 a 54. Unió bigorriensis Locard, 1882. Prodr. Malac. franq., 1: 284. Unió rathymus Bourguignat in Locard, 1882. Prodr. Malac. franq., 1: 284. Unió hispalensis Kobelt, 1887. Iconog. Land Süsw. Molí, (2) 3: 53, lám. 88, fig. 492. Unió calderoni Kobelt, 1887. Iconog. Land Süsw. Molí, (2) 3: 54, lám. 88, fig. 494. Unió gandiensis Drouet, 1888. J. de Conch. Paris, 28: 103. Unió pacomei Bourguignat in Locard, 1889. Contrib. faune malac. franq., 13: 20. Unió calderoni var. salvadori Kobelt, 1892. Nachr. Bl. dtsch. malak. Ges., Frankfurt a. M., 24: 201. Unió circulus Bourguignat in Locard, 1893. Coq. Eaux douces saum. France, 153. Unió sphaericus Bourguignat in Locard, 1893. Coq. Eaux douces saum. France, 153. Unió circinatus Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 33, fig. 6. Unió rhysopigus Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 37, fig. 7. Unió mauduyti Germain, 1897. Bull. Soc. Sci. nat. Rouen, 70. Nomen novum por Unió rotundatus Mauduyt, 1839, no Unió rotundatus Lamarck, 1819. Unió littoralis taginus Kobelt, 1903. Iconog. Land Süsw. Molí, (2) 10: 28, lám. 279, fig. 1795. Unió kinkelini Haas, 1908. Nachr. Bl. dtsch. malak. Ges., Frankfurt a. M., 40: 177. Unió batavus catalonicus Haas in Bofill y Haas, 1920. Treb. Mus. Cieñe, nat. Barcelona, 3 (3): 291, 363, lám. 3, figs. 19 a 22. Descripción original: Unió littoralis Cuvier, 1798. Tableau élémentaire de l'histoire naturelle des animaux, p. 425. Ilustrado en: Bruguiére, 1797. Tableau encyclopédique et méthodique des trois regnes de la nature, Paris, lám. 248, fig. 2; Araujo, 2008. Graellsia, 64 (1): fig. 1. Ambas figuras ilustran probablemente el ejem- plar tipo. Comentario taxonómico: De los 7 taxa que Haas (1969) considera dentro del grupo Potomida littoralis, solamente dos se distribuyen por la península Ibérica, P. I. littoralis (Cuvier) [no Lamarck, como dice Haas (1969)] y P. I. umbonata (Rossmássler), pero los dos pertenecen a la misma especie P. littoralis (Reís et al. en rev.), a su vez la misma que se distri- buye por Francia (datos sin publicar). Las cinco especies de Potomida que cita Altaba (1991) en los ríos del mediterrá- neo "catalán" corresponden a P. littoralis. Esta especie ha sido adscrita a los géneros Potomida, Swainson (1840), Psi- lunio, Stefanescu (1896) y Rhombunio, Germain, 1991. También ha sido citada con autor equivocado como Unió littora- lis (Lamarck, 1801) y como Unió rhomboi- deus (Schroter, 1779). Recientemente se ha intentado aclarar toda esta confusión nomenclatorial (Araujo, 2008). Distribución: Paleártica circunmedite- rránea. Suroeste de Europa: Francia, España, Portugal y Grecia (Haas, 1969; Araujo, 2008). También en el norte de África (Marruecos, Argelia y Túnez) y suroeste de Asia (Armenia, Turquía, Siria, Israel y Palestina), aunque proba- blemente se trate de especies diferentes de aspecto muy similar a P. littoralis (datos sin publicar). Fósil en el Pleisto- ceno de las Islas Británicas, Alemania, Balcanes y sur de Rusia (Ellis, 1978). En la península Ibérica (Fig. 11) tiene un área de distribución muy amplia, ocupando la mayoría de las vertientes atlánticas y mediterráneas. Morfología externa (Fig. 12): Aunque de aspecto muy variable dependiendo del hábitat, quizá sea la especie de náyade ibérica más fácil de identificar. Concha sólida, alta y gruesa, de con- torno variable: oval, elíptica, romboide o 29 Iberas, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 1 1 . Distribución de Potomida littoralis. Figura 11. Distribuigao de Potomida littoralis. Figure 11. Distribution map 0/Totomida littoralis. ligeramente cuadrangular. Color oscuro, de castaño a negro, a veces verdoso y en ocasiones con líneas amarillentas radia- les que parten del umbo. Los juveniles de 1-2 cm tienen un color pardo claro y la escultura del umbo se caracteriza por abundantes pliegues ondulados bien marcados (Fig. 13A) . En los adultos el periostraco suele estar desgastado, dejando visible zonas calcáreas blancas. Charnela corta y fuerte, con dientes car- dinales piramidales cónico obtusos, fuertes y aserrados: valva izquierda con 2 dientes laterales y 2 cardinales y valva derecha con 1 diente lateral y 1 cardinal. Inserción del músculo aductor anterior muy marcada. Normalmente alcanzan tamaños de 6-8 cm, habiéndose seña- lado como dimensiones máximas: 9,2 cm de longitud, 6,4 cm de altura y 3,1 cm de anchura (Haas, 1941). Como en todas las especies de la familia Unionidae, presentan una aber- tura supra-anal dorsal a los sifones inha- lante y exhalante. En la abertura inha- lante (Fig. 5C) se observan papilas cónicas de diferentes tamaños (más pequeñas en el margen exterior) y en la abertura exhalante, como en otros unió- nidos, el borde parece ligeramente ase- rrado por la presencia de papilas inci- pientes que no llegan a asomar. Los septos de los filamentos bran- quiales están perforados y no son conti- nuos como en otros uniónidos, aunque en otras especies se ha observado que esta característica puede variar con la época de reproducción, de forma que durante la incubación, los septos apare- cen abiertos (Nagel et al., 1998). Ciclo vital: Como la mayoría de los Unionoidea es una especie dioica. Alcanzan la madurez sexual a los 4-5 años de edad, cuando miden aproxima- damente 4 cm (Nagel, 2004). A diferen- cia de otras especies de la familia, las 4 branquias (y no solamente las 2 exterio- res) actúan como marsupio para la incu- bación (Haas, 1917b). En el Ebro se han visto hembras grávidas en julio y agosto 30 Araujo ET AL. : Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 12. Potomida littoralis. A: río Vascao (Beja/Faro); B: río Valdeazogues (Ciudad Real); C, D: río Ebro. Figura 12. Potomida littoralis. A: rio Vascao (Beja/Faro); B: rio Valdeazogues ( Ciudad Real); C, D: rio Ebro. Figure 12. Potomida littoralis. A: Vascao river (Beja/Faro); B: Valdeazogues river ( Ciudad Real); C, D: Ebro river. 31 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 y juveniles recién nacidos a principios de septiembre (Haas, 1917b), así como gloquidios entre los meses de marzo a octubre (Araujo et al., 2000). Probable- mente su época de reproducción no está sincronizada, de forma que no todos los adultos de una población se reproducen a la vez (Nagel, 2004). Los gloquidios (Figs. 6C, D) miden 0,21 mm, tienen forma de cuchara y están dotados de minúsculas espinas cuticulares en el borde de las valvas, pero sin el fuerte gancho ventral típico de otros uniónidos (Giusti, 1973 ; Nagel, 1999). En la península Ibérica los peces hospedadores de sus gloquidios parecen ser los barbos (género Barbus), aunque también podrían actuar como tales las bogas (género Chondrostoma ) (Haas, 1917b; Araujo et al., 2000). Hábitat: Se trata de una especie típi- camente fluvial, propia de los sectores medios y bajos de las cuencas. Aunque prefiere los ríos de mayor tamaño y cau- dal, vive también en afluentes menores con cierta corriente, en acequias y cana- les de riego que mantienen los fondos naturales, e incluso en grandes lagos (ej. Ruidera, Bañólas). En los canales del Ebro es la especie de náyade más común. Muchas veces se encuentra enterrada en zonas de sustratos gruesos, entre piedras y rocas, aunque también aparece en lu- gares tranquilos entre arena y fango (Figs. 7E, F). Puede vivir en la zona cen- tral del lecho del río, incluso hasta 6-10 m de profundidad (Haas, 1917b; Reís, 2006), pero es más común entre las raíces de los árboles de las riberas y en los talu- des. También entre piedras en zonas de rápidos y aguas someras. Habita en aguas de distinta naturaleza (silíceas, ca- lizas) y, aunque necesita aguas limpias, no aparece en aguas oligotróficas de montaña. Al igual que ocurre con sus distribu- ciones, existe una clara coincidencia entre los hábitats fluviales de esta especie y los de los peces bentónicos del género Barbus. Conservación: Catalogada como Vul- nerable en el Libro Rojo de los Inverte- brados de España (Verdú y Galante, 2006), De Interés Especial en el Catálogo de Especies Amenazadas de Castilla-La Mancha y Vulnerable en el Catálogo Gallego de Especies Amenazadas y en el Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de Andalucía (Barea-Azcón, Balleste- ros-Duperón y Moreno, 2008). Cada vez es menos frecuente encon- trar grandes colonias, apareciendo poblaciones con muy pocos individuos y sin juveniles. Es una especie en franca regresión que ha desaparecido de muchas localidades en Galicia (Rolán, 1998), Comunidad Valenciana (Martí- nez-Ortí y Robles, 2003), Portugal (Reís, 2006), Madrid (Soler, Moreno, Araujo y Ramos, 2006), Castilla y León (Velasco y Romero, 2006) y Andalucía (Barea et al., 2008). Dado que la tasa actual de desapari- ción de las náyades es catastrófica, y que cada vez son mayores las afecciones sobre los ríos donde habita (tanto natu- rales -sequías, riadas- como artificiales - detracciones de agua, embalses, eutrofi- zación-), se recomienda su inclusión en el nuevo Catálogo Español de Especies Amenazadas en la Categoría de Vulne- rable. Unió mancus Lamarck, 1819 Sinónimos: Se han listado como sinónimos de U. mancus todos los que Haas (1969) considera sinónimos de U. elongatulus mancus Lamarck (ver más abajo) y U. elongatulus moquinianus Dupuy, pero no los de U. e. requienii Michaud. El listado de sinónimos de U. mancus no será definitivo hasta que se conozca la identidad exacta de las diferentes poblaciones europeas de las subespecies de U. elongatulus. Unió moquinianus Dupuy, 1843. Essai Molí, terr.fluv., 80, figs. 1-2. Unió ardusianus Reyniés, 1843. Lettre a Moquin-T andón, 5, lám. 1, figs. 7-8. Unió aleroni Companyo y Massot, 1845. Bull. Soc. Agricult. Sci. Lettr. Pyrén.-Orient., Perpignan: 6, 234-235, fig. 2. (Sinonimizado por Bourguignat, 1866). 32 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Unió valentinus Rossmássler, 1854. Iconogr. Land-Sussw. Molí., 37, lám. 69, fig. 852. Unió graellsianus Bourguignat, 1865. Molí. nouv. litig. peu connus, 147, lám. 23, figs. 4-7. Unió courquinianus Bourguignat, 1865. Molí. nouv. litig. peu connus, 149, lám. 26. Unió condatinus Letourneux in Locard, 1882. Prodr. Malacol. franq., 1, 356. Unió gobionum Bourguignat in Locard, 1882. Prodr. Malacol. franq., 1, 364. Unió mucidulus Bourguignat in Locard, 1882. Prodr. Malacol. franq., 1, 366. Unió mongazonae Servain, 1887. Bull. Soc. malac. France, París, 4, 253. Unió asticus Servain, 1887. Bull. Soc. malac. France, París, 4, 259. Unió eutrapelus Servain, 1887. Bull. Soc. malac. France, París, 4, 260. Unió antimoquinianus Locard, 1889. Rév. Esp. fran^. Margaritona et Unió, 121. Unió oberthurianus Bourguignat in Locard, 1889. Rév. Esp. frang. Margaritona et Unió, 142. Unió arcuatulus Bourguignat in Locard, 1889. Rév. Esp. frarnj. Margaritona et Unió, 138. Unió amblyus Castro in Locard, 1889. Rév. Esp. frang. Margaritona et Unió, 119. Unió almenarensis Drouet, 1893. Mém. Acad. Sci. Arts Bell. Lettr., Dijon (4): 4, 62, lám. 1, fig. 2. Unió consentaneus var. moquini Germain, 1931. Faune de France: 22, 73, fig. 829. Descripción original: Unió mancus Lamarck, 1819. Histoire Naturelle des Animaux sans vertebres, 6 Parte 1: 80. Localidad tipo: Río Drée en Borgoña, Francia. Ilustrado en: Dupuy, 1843. Essai sur les Mollusques terrestres et fluviátiles du département du Gers, 80, figs. 1-2; Companyó y Massot, 1845. [Bulletin de la] Société Agricole, Scientifique et Littéraire des Pyré- nées-Orientales, Perpignan: 6, 234-235, fig. 2; Rossmássler, 1854. lconographie der Land und Süsswasser Mollusken, etc., 37, lám. 69, fig. 852. Comentario taxonómico: De las 17 subespecies de la especie mediterránea Unió elongatulus C. Pfeiffer, 1825 consid- eradas por Haas (1940, 1969), solamente dos se han citado en la península Ibérica: U. elongatulus penchinatianus Bourguignat, 1865, que viviría en los ríos del noreste mediterráneo hasta el Ebro, y U. elongatulus valentinus Ross- mássler, 1854, en los ríos al sur del Ebro. Una tercera subespecie, U. elongatulus mancus Lamarck, 1819, cuya localidad tipo es el río Drée, sólo se distribuiría por Francia (Haas, 1969). Recientes estudios (Araujo et al., 2005; Toledo et al., datos no publicados) han demostrado que las poblaciones del Ebro y otros ríos mediterráneos ibéricos más al norte, salvo alguna excepción (ver comentario taxonómico de U. ravoisieri), y las de U. e. valentinus, pertenecen a la misma especie, que a su vez es la misma que vive en el río Drée. Es por eso que la especie ibérica debe llamarse U. mancus Lamarck, 1819. Es interesante comentar aquí que una cuarta subespecie, U. elongatulus aleroni Companyó y Massot, según Haas (1969) exclusiva del sur Francia, es también un sinónimo de U. mancus, lo que se ha comprobado (Toledo et al., datos no publicados) analizando dos genes mitocondriales de ejemplares del río Basse (Sur de Francia), localidad tipo de U. aleroni. La historia de la descrip- ción de U. aleroni es muy curiosa, ya que sus autores renegaron de la especie una vez leídos los comentarios de Bour- guignat (1866) sobre las deficiencias que este autor achacó a su descripción (ver Azpeitia, 1933 págs. 263-264). Bour- guignat fue así el primero en advertir que la especie de Companyó y Massot era la misma que el U. mancus del levante ibérico (el cual cita como U. requieni), mientras que prácticamente al mismo tiempo describía la especie U. penchinatianus del lago de Bañólas (Bourguignat, 1865), especie que en Cataluña ha sido confundida con U. aleroni, y que a su vez es un sinónimo del taxón norteafricano U. ravoisieri Deshayes, 1847 (ver comentario tax- onómico de esta especie). Altaba (1991) cita la presencia de cuatro táxones diferentes de U. elongatu- lus en los ríos del levante "catalán", incluyendo U. e. aleroni. Salvo en el caso del lago de Bañólas y del río Ser, en los que se trata de U. ravoisieri, todas estas citas pertenecen probablemente a U. mancus. 33 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Distribución : En la península Ibérica (Fig. 14) vive en los ríos de las cuencas mediterráneas con un límite meridional situado en la cuenca del Júcar. Hasta que no se haga un estudio detallado de todas las subespecies de U. elongatulus consideradas por Haas (1969), se desco- noce su distribución europea. Es la única especie de Unió de la cuenca del Ebro, donde vive con Poto- mida littoralis, Anodonta anatina y Marga- ritifera auricularia, y la más común en los ríos del mediterráneo ibérico. También se ha encontrado junto con U. ravoisieri en el lago de Bañólas. Morfología externa (Fig. 15): junto con U. delphinus es la especie ibérica de Unió más variable, ya que también presenta caracteres externos diferentes según el hábitat. Solamente por la concha es muy difícil de distinguir de Unió elongatulus, e incluso puede ser confundida con la especie atlántica ibérica U. delphinus. Por su distribución, solamente puede con- fundirse con ejemplares simpátricos de U. ravoisieri, pues los individuos de esta especie que viven en ríos pueden ser muy similares a los de U. mancus. Forma muy variable, con ejemplares de concha pequeña, muy fina y deli- cada, hasta otros con concha muy robusta. Presenta el aspecto típico de mejillón o almeja de río con una concha generalmente abombada y alargada de coloración pardo-negruzca o pardo- amarillenta con zonas más verdosas. Concha inequilateral con la parte ante- rior redondeada y la posterior alargada y truncada, acabando en un corto pico. Umbo prominente, redondeado y proso- girado que en ocasiones puede presen- tar escultura umbonal, simple u ondu- lada, consistente en 2 filas de tubérculos, una medial y otra posterior. El interior de las valvas es blanco nacarado bri- llante y presenta una línea paleal muy marcada entre las cicatrices de los mús- culos aductores anterior y posterior. El ligamento que articula las dos valvas es externo y discurre por el borde dorsal. Valva izquierda con dos dientes poste- riores de aspecto laminar y muy alarga- dos y dos dientes cardinales crenulados, muy pronunciados en los ejemplares más alargados, que en ocasiones pueden aparecer fusionados en una única estructura laminar. La valva derecha presenta un diente lateral posterior muy alargado y un único diente cardinal que puede resultar muy variable incluso entre los ejemplares de una misma población, donde se pueden observar desde estructuras robustas y crenuladas a formas más delicadas y de aspecto laminar. El tamaño siempre es menor de 10 cm y raramente supera los 9 cm. Sifón inhalante con papilas cónicas típicas, a veces ramificadas (Figs. 5D, 16B). Ciclo vital : En la cuenca del Ebro Haas (1917) encontró ejemplares grávi- dos entre los meses de julio y agosto, mientras que Araujo et al. (2000) observaron la liberación de gloquidios entre los meses de marzo y octubre. En experimentos realizados en acuarios la emisión de gloquidios se produjo desde final de abril hasta agosto. La cámara de las branquias externas es la única que actúa como marsupio para la incubación de los gloquidios. Estos son blanqueci- nos y triangulares y presentan un fuerte gancho en el centro del borde ventral, que aparece armado con numerosas espículas (Figs. 6E, F). El tamaño medio (medidos al microscopio electrónico) es de 216,8 ¡um de longitud (ds=7,58; n=15), 193,3 jüm de altura (ds=13,31; n=13) y 162 jum de anchura (ds=l,99; n=2) (Araujo et al., 2005). (Página derecha) Figura 13. Esculturas umbonales. A: Potomida littoralis ; B: U. delphinus ; C: U. gibbus-, D: U. tumidiformis ; E: U. ravoisieri ; F: Anodonta anatina. (Pagina direita) Figura 13. Escultura do umbo. A: Potomida littoralis; B: U. delphinus; C: U. gibbus; D: U. tumidiformis; E: U. ravoisieri; F: Anodonta anatina. (Right page) Figure 13. Umbonal sculptures. A: Potomida littoralis; B: U. delphinus; C: U. gibbus; D: U. tumidiformis; E: U. ravoisieri; F: Anodonta anatina. 34 i gj ARAUJO ET AL. : Las náyades de la península Ibérica 35 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 14. Distribución de Unió mancus. Figura 14. Distribuiqao de Unió mancus. Figure 14. Distribution map o/XJnio mancus. Experimentos realizados en labora- torio (Araujo et al., 2005) han permi- tido identificar hasta siete especies dife- rentes de peces en los que los gloquidios de U. mancus completan su metamorfo- sis y que podrían por lo tanto actuar como hospedadores de esta especie: Barbus graellsii Steindachner, Barbus haasi Mertens, Squalius pyrenaicus (Günther), Squalius cephalus (L.), Chon- drostoma miegii Steindachner, Phoxinus phoxinus L. y Salaria fluviatilis (Asso). Se han obtenido ejemplares juveniles en 141 grados /día. Las pruebas realizadas con Cyprinus carpió L., Gobio gobio (L.) y Acipenser baerii Brandt dieron buenos resultados en la infestación, pero los gloquidios se desprendieron antes de completar su metamorfosis. En condi- ciones naturales, tan sólo se han obte- nido resultados positivos de infestación con Barbus graellsii entre un total de siete especies pescadas (Araujo et al., 2005). Los gloquidios se fijan a las branquias (90%) y aletas (10%). Hábitat (Fig. 16A): Se trata de una especie típicamente fluvial que, a excep- ción de las zonas de alta montaña, es capaz de ocupar todo tipo de tramos de ríos, tanto de primer orden como de afluentes menores, así como canales de riego que mantengan sus fondos natura- les. Aunque no es muy común, puede aparecer también en grandes embalses (Madeira, Araujo y Ayala, 2007), así como en lagos (ej. Albufera de Valencia, Bañólas). Vive generalmente semiente- rrado en fondos de gravas bien asenta- das de los brazos secundarios del río, en el centro del cauce en zonas con poca corriente y en los taludes bien conserva- dos a la sombra de la vegetación de ribera e incluso entre las raíces de los árboles. Todos ellos hábitats fluviales donde los peces hospedadores de sus gloquidios pasan gran parte de su vida. Sin embargo, también se han localizado ejemplares en zonas de sustrato grueso encajados entre piedras y rocas, en fondos de fango y materia orgánica y en 36 ARAUJO ET AL. : Las náyades de la península Figura 15. Unió mancus. A: río Brugent (Gerona); B: Canal Imperial de Aragón (Zaragoza); C: río Ebro en Sástago (Zaragoza); D: acequia El Barranquet (Valencia); E: río Irati (Navarra). Figura 15. Unió mancus. A: rio Brugent ( Gerona); B: Canal Imperial de Aragón (Zaragoza); C: rio Ebro em Sástago (Zaragoza); D: vala El Barranquet (Valencia); E: rio Irati (Navarra). Figure 15. Unió mancus. A: Brugent river ( Gerona); B: Canal Imperial de Aragón (Zaragoza); C: Ebro river at Sástago (Zaragoza); D: El Barranquet ditch (Valencia); E: Irati river (Navarra). 37 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 playas de arena. Teniendo en cuenta la distribución histórica de esta especie y las características del agua donde se han recogido ejemplares vivos, parece que U. mancus es una especie propia de aguas duras, con concentraciones de calcio superiores a 100 mg/1. Aunque, como la mayoría de las náyades, requiere aguas limpias, puede vivir en acequias de riego. Conservación : Con el nombre de U. elongatulus está amparada por las siguientes figuras de protección: Direc- tiva Hábitats (Anexo V): Especies ani- males y vegetales de interés comunitario cuya recogida en la naturaleza y cuya explotación pueden ser objeto de medidas de gestión. Convenio de Berna (Anexo III): Especies protegidas que pueden ser objeto de explotación contro- lada, pero para las que está prohibido utilizar los métodos de caza /captura / pesca que se mencionan en el anexo IV. Catálogo Valenciano de Especies de Fauna Amenazada (Anexo I): En peligro de extinción. Catalogada en el Texto refundido de la Ley de Protección de los Animales de la Generalitat de Catalunya en la categoría de Especies protegidas de la fauna salvaje autóctona b. Inverte- brados (Decreto legislativo 2/2008). Dado que el nombre U. mancus se asigna en la península Ibérica a las poblaciones anteriormente conocidas como U. elon- gatulus, toda la normativa que se aplica a esta especie debe ahora asignarse a U. mancus. Como U. mancus está incluida en el Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de España en la categoría Casi amenazado (Verdú y Galante, 2006). Se trata de una especie en franca re- gresión, especialmente en el tramo me- dio del río Ebro, donde sus poblaciones están disminuyendo de forma alar- mante, siendo la segunda náyade me- nos abundante después de M. auricula- ria (Araujo, Madeira y Ayala, 2007). Esta desaparición se debe a las afeccio- nes antrópicas en el medio. También está desapareciendo del resto de los ríos mediterráneos ibéricos así como de la Albufera de Valencia. Las poblaciones de los principales canales que toman agua del Ebro (Imperial de Aragón y de Tauste) parecen ser las más abundantes y estructuradas, con presencia regular de ejemplares juveniles (Gómez y Araujo, 2008). La principal amenaza que actualmente se cierne sobre estas poblaciones son los cortes de agua que se suceden regularmente a lo largo del año. En primer lugar, porque en ocasio- nes se vacían demasiado los canales, siendo frecuentes la aparición de zonas en seco tanto en el centro del cauce como en los taludes; de este modo, los ejemplares que se encuentran en esas zonas quedan expuestos al aire libre en épocas en las que además son frecuen- tes las heladas, con lo que se pueden producir episodios de mortalidad. Y por otro lado, estos cortes de agua pro- vocan la desaparición de los peces, que se van al río por los batideros, reducién- dose así las posibilidades de contacto entre náyades y peces. Además, a estas alteraciones del hábitat hay que su- marle la presencia en los canales de grandes densidades de especies de mo- luscos exóticos invasores (mejillón ce- bra -Dreissena polymorpha- y almeja asiá- tica -Corbicula fluminea ) que pueden agravar más la situación de esta espe- cie. Por todo ello, se recomienda su in- clusión en el nuevo Catálogo Español de Especies Amenazadas en la Catego- ría de Vulnerable. (Página derecha) Figura 16. Náyades vivas. A, B: Unió mancus ; C, D: U. delphinus ; E, F: Anodonta anatina. (Pagina direita) Figura 16. Náiades vivas. A, B: Unió mancus; C, D: U. delphinus; E, F: Anodonta anatina. (Right page) Figure 16. Living naiads. A, B: Unió mancus; C, D: U. delphinus; E, F: Anodonta anatina. 38 ARAUJO ET AL. : Las náyades de la península Ibérica 39 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 17. Distribuido de Unió gibbus. Figure 17. Distribution map 0/TJnio gibbus. Unió gibbus Spengler, 1793 Sinónimos: Unió turdetanus Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 66-67; lam. I, fig. 4. Unió tifleticus Pallary, 1923. Bull. Soc. se. Natur. Maroc, 78. Figurado en Pallary, 1927. J. de Conchyl.: 71, lám. 7, figs. 1-2. Unió (Limniun) foucauldiana Pallary, 1936. J. de Conchyl.: 63-64, lám. 4, fig. 2. Unió ( Limniun ) seurati Pallary, 1936. J. de Conchyl. : 64-65, lám. 4, fig. 1. Descripción original: Unió gibbus Spengler, 1793. Skrifter afNaturhistorie Selskabet, Kjobenhavn, 3 (1): 64. Localidad tipo: Tranquebar, India. Sin duda un error (ver más abajo). Holotipo en el Zoological Museum of the University of Copenhagen. N°: ZMUC BIV-434. Ilustrado en: Haas, 1913: Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening I Kjobenhavn, 65: 60, fig. 6; Knudsen et al, 2003: Steenstrupia, T7 (2): 274, fig. 12. Ambas referencias ilustran el holotipo. Comentario taxonómico: Curiosa- mente, Spengler (1793), que es quien describe la especie U. gibbus, indica que el ejemplar tipo procede de Tranquebar (India), pero ya Haas (1913) advierte el error e indica que su procedencia es España y que se trata de la misma especie que el U. turdetanus de Drouet (1893). Años más tarde, el mismo Haas (1969) considera tanto U. gibbus como U. turdetanus entre las sinonimias de U. pic- torum delphinus, uno de los 13 taxa en los que este autor dividió U. pictorum, pero recientemente se ha demostrado que se trata de una especie distinta (Araujo et al., 2009a). En cuanto a las otras sinonimias de U. gibbus, Unió tifleticus fue sorprenden- 40 ARAUJO ET AL. : Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 18. A-C: Unió gibbus, río Barbate (Cádiz). B: ejemplar juvenil. Figura 18. A-C: Unió gibbus, rio Barbate (Cádiz). B: juvenil. Figure 18. A-C: Unió gibbus, Barbate river (Cádiz). B: juvenile specimen. 41 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 temente sinonimizado por Haas (1969), y posteriormente por Daget (1998), con Potomida littoralis fellmani (Deshayes), la "raza" norteafricana de P. littoralis. Y en cuanto a Unió ( Limniun ) foucauldiana y Unió ( Limniun ) seurati, han sido conside- rados por Daget (1998) sinónimos del taxon norteafricano U. elongatulus durieui Deshayes, uno de los 17 taxa en los que Haas (1969) separó la especie mediterránea U. elongatulus C. Pfeiffer; no obstante, Haas (1969) no consideró en su libro ninguno de estos dos taxa. Distribución: Ríos atlánticos del sur de la península Ibérica y Marruecos (Araujo et al., 2009a), también en los ríos del Mediterráneo marroquí, Argelia y Túnez. En la península (Fig. 17) sólo se han localizado ejemplares vivos en el río Barbate (Cádiz). Drouet (1893) cita U. turdetanus en el arroyo salado cerca de Morón en Sevilla, donde no ha podido encontrarse por ha- berse modificado totalmente el hábitat. Pallary (1923, 1927, 1936) cita Unió tifle- ticus en el río Tiflet (cuenca del Sebou) Marruecos, Unió (Limniun) foucauldiana en el río Sous, al sur de Agadir (Marrue- cos) y Unió ( Limniun ) seurati en Chélif (Argelia). Se han encontrado ejemplares de esta especie procedentes de Argelia en la colección del Museo Nacional de Historia Natural de Paris (Francia) y se ha tenido conocimiento de la presencia actual de la especie en ríos de Túnez (com. pers. Noureddine Khalloufi). Morfología externa (Fig. 18): Concha ligeramente inflada, de silueta oval a redondeada y generalmente elevada en su parte dorsal posterior. La silueta recuerda a la de Potomida littoralis, sobre todo los ejemplares juveniles. Parte anterior redondeada en forma de arco de círculo y parte posterior también redondeada pero elevada en la región dorsal formando una quilla en la zona del ligamento. Concha delgada y ligera, con el periostraco en ocasiones desfle- cado en las zonas posterior y ventral de las valvas. Color verduzco (especial- mente en los ejemplares marroquíes) o pardo, a menudo con bandas radiales más claras. Umbos redondeados y pro- minentes, nunca erosionados, y de color más claro que el resto de la concha. Se puede observar el gloquidio en el ápice del umbo a modo de protoconcha. Escultura umbonal (Fig. 13C) consis- tente en 2 ó 3 filas de fuertes tubérculos paralelos a las líneas de crecimiento de la concha, más patente en los ejemplares ibéricos. En los ejemplares juveniles los tubérculos posteriores se extienden en una línea diagonal que no se observa en los adultos. Valva izquierda con dos dientes pseudocardinales laminares, a menudo crenulados, que pueden estar juntos o separados, el posterior apun- tado y más elevado, y dos dientes lami- nares laterales posteriores de longitud variable, el inferior siempre más elevado. Valva derecha con un diente pseudocardinal normalmente apuntado y plano y uno lateral posterior muy alto. Longitud máxima 85,6 mm. Papilas del sifón inhalante (Fig. 5F) de forma cónica y distribuidas en varias filas, a veces ramificadas. Ciclo de vida : En el río Barbate las hembras están grávidas al final de fe- brero. Sin embargo, en Marruecos se han visto hembras con gloquidios ma- duros a principios de junio (Araujo et al., 2009a). En los ejemplares españoles toda la cámara de las branquias externas actúa como marsupio, pero en algunos ejemplares marroquíes se ha visto que las cámaras de ambas branquias pueden llenarse con gloquidios, algo excepcio- nal en el género Unió. Los gloquidios (Página derecha) Figura 19. Gloquidios. A, B: U. gibbus ; C, D: U. delphinus ; E, F: U. tumidifor- mis-, G. H. Anodonta anatina. (Pagina direita) Figura 19. Gloquidios. A, B: U. gibbus; C, D: U. delphinus; E, F: U. tumidiformis; G, H: Anodonta anatina. (Right page) Figure 19. Glochidia. A, B: U. gibbus; C, D: U. delphinus; E, F: U. tumidiformis; G, H: Anodonta anatina. 42 ARAUJO ET AL.\ Las náyades de la península Ibérica 43 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 20. Distribución de Unió delphinus. Figura 20. Distribuigao de Unió delphinus. Figure 20. Distribution map ofXJ nio delphinus. (Figs. 19A, B) en la población marroquí estudiada son triangulares, algo redon- deados, con forma intermedia entre los propios de Unió y Potomida. Borde del gloquidio cubierto de pequeños abulta- mientos cuyo tamaño va aumentando hacia la parte ventral de la concha, aun- que parece que sin llegar a formar las espículas y ganchos típicos del género. No obstante, en ejemplares de Túnez se ha visto que los gloquidios sí presentan gancho ventral (Khalloufi com. pers.) Dimensiones medias de los gloquidios (medidos al microscopio electrónico): longitud: 209.17 pm (ds = 2.83; n = 19), altura: 211 ¡um (ds = 3.93; n = 21), an- chura: 67.67 jum (ds = 5.99; n = 3). Se desconocen las especies de peces que pueden servir de hospedadores para sus gloquidios. Hábitat: En fondos de arena y grava. Bajo la sombra de árboles en riberas y taludes. También entre piedras en zonas de rápidos. En España convive con Poto- mida littoralis, Unió delphinus y Anodonta anatina, mientras que en Marruecos se ha encontrado junto con Unió delphinus y Potomida sp. Conservación: Dado que solamente se conoce de una localidad, U. gibbus es ahora mismo la especie de náyade más amenazada no sólo de la península Ibérica sino también de Europa. Además, dicha población ha sufrido muy recientemente gravísimos episo- dios de sequía que han podido mermar sus efectivos. Existen evidencias de que antes del drenado y desecación de la antigua laguna de la Janda (Cádiz), el hábitat de U. gibbus se extendía por una extensión mayor que la actual. Pese a que su reconocimiento como especie válida es muy reciente, ya está catalogada (con el nombre de Unió sp.) en la categoría de En Peligro en el Libro Rojo de los invertebrados de Andalucía (Barea et al., 2008). Se recomienda su inclusión urgente en el nuevo Catálogo Español de Especies Amenazadas en la categoría En Peligro. 44 Araujo ET AL. : Las náyades de la península Ibérica linio delphinus Spengler, 1793 Sinónimos: Unió hispanus Moquin-Tandon in Rossmássler, 1844. Iconogr. Land Sussw. Molí., 2: 26, lám. 56, fig. 747. Unió dactylus Morelet, 1845. Molí, terr.fluv. Portugal, 110, lám. 14, fig. 2. Unió mucidus Morelet, 1845. Descr. Molí. Portugal, 111, lám. 14, fig. 3. Unió lusitanus Drouet, 1879. J. de Conch., Paris, 327. Unió hyperephanus Castro, 1885. Bull. Soc. malac. France, Paris, 2: 289. Unió nevesi Castro, 1885. Bull. Soc. malac. France, Paris, 2: 291. Unió simoesi Castro, 1885. Bull. Soc. malac. France, Paris, 2: 292. Unió schousboei Bourguignat in Locard, 1889. Conchyliol. portug., 250. Unió subhispanus Castro in Locard, 1889. Conchyliol. portug., 244. Unió cameratus Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 45, lám. 2, fig. 8. Unió limosellus Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 46, lám. 2, fig. 4. Unió decurtatus Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 47, lám. 1, fig. 9. Unió gravatus Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 49, lám. 2, fig. 6. Unió chorellus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 227. Unió barbozanus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 233. Unió ocresanus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 236. Unió chasmirhynchus Castro in Locard 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 246. Unió mundanus Castro in Locard 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 247. Unió euchasmus Castro in Locard 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 249. Unió tameganus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 221. Unió oncomensis Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 225. Unió hypoxanthus Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 226. Unió chorellinus Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 228. Unió submucidus Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 230. Unió castroi Bourguignat in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 234. Unió silvai Bourguignat in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 235. Unió paulinoi Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 242. Unió taganus Servain in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 252. Unió abrantesianus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 253. Unió scalabisianus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 254. Unió allenianus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 255. Unió cyrtus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 257. Unió sousanus Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 258. Unió novus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 258. Unió neothaumus Castro in Locard, 1899. Conchyliol. portug., 259. Unió requienii taginus Kobelt, 1903. Iconogr. Land Sussw. Molí, (2) 11: 28, lám. 279, fig. 1796. Descripción original: Unió delphinus Spengler, 1793. Skrifter af Naturhistorie Selskabet, Kjobenhavn, 3(1): 63. Localidad tipo: Tranquebar, India. Sin duda un error (ver más abajo). Sintipo en el Zoological Museum of the University of Copenhagen. N°: ZMUC BIV-433. Ilustrado en: Haas, 1913. Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening I Kjobenhavn, 65: 59, fig. 5; Knudsen et al, 2003. Steenstrupia, 73 sintipo. Comentario taxonómico: Como en el caso de U. gibbus, Spengler (1793) indica que el ejemplar tipo de U. delphi- nus procede de Tranquebar (India), pero una vez más Haas (1913) advierte el error y asegura que su procedencia es España y que se trata de la misma (2): 273-274, fig. 11. Ambas referencias ilustran el especie que el U. hispanus de Moquin Tandon. Años más tarde, el mismo Haas (1969) considera tanto U. delphinus como U. hispanus entre las sinonimias de U. pictorum delphinus, uno de los 13 taxa en los que este autor dividió U. picto- rum, pero recientemente se ha demos- 45 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 21. Unió delpbinus. A: arroyo Landrinos (Toledo); B: lagunas de Ruidera (Albacete); C: embalse de Gasset (Ciudad Real); D: río Odelouca (Beja); E: río Guadalporcún (Sevilla). Figura 21. Unió delphinus. A: ribeira Landrinos (Toledo); B: lagoas de Ruidera (Albacete); C: albu- feira de Gasset (Ciudad Real); D: rio Odelouca (Beja); E: rio Guadalporcún (Sevilla). Figure 21. Unió delphinus. A: Landrinos srteam (Toledo); B: Ruidera lagoons (Albacete); C: Gasset impoundment (Ciudad Real); D: Odelouca river (Beja); E: Guadalporcún river (Sevilla). 46 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 22. Unió delphinus. A: río Deza (Pontevedra); B: juvenil del embalse de Gasset (Ciudad Real). Figura 22. Unió delphinus. A: rio Deza (Pontevedra); B: juvenil da albufeira de Gasset ( Ciudad Real). Figure 22. Unió delphinus. A: Deza river (Pontevedra); B: juvenile from the Gasset impoundment ( Ciudad Real). 47 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 trado que U. delphinus es una especie diferente del U. pictorum europeo (Reís ET AL., en rev.). De los 13 taxa en que Haas (1969) divide la especie U. pictorum, solamente dos se distribuyen por la península Ibérica, U. pictorum mucidus Morelet, 1845 y U. pic- torum delphinus Spengler, 1793, y ambos corresponden a U. delphinus. También es esta especie la que se ha citado en la penín- sula Ibérica como Unió pictorum (L. 1757) (Vidal Abarca y Suárez, 1985) o más recientemente, como U. cf. pictorum (Reís, 2006; Reís et al., en rev.). Distribución: Ríos atlánticos de la península Ibérica y Marruecos. En la península (Fig. 20) es la especie de Unió más común y distribuida por estos ríos. Morfología externa (Figs. 21, 22): es una de las especies de Unió más variables, pre- sentando caracteres externos diferentes según el hábitat, lo que explica el gran número de sinónimos que tiene. Sola- mente por los caracteres de la concha es muy difícil de distinguir de la especie Unió pictorum que vive en el resto de Europa, e incluso puede ser confundido con la especie mediterránea española U. mancus, así como con otros taxones relacionados (por ej. U. elongatulus) (Araujo et al., 2005). Concha de silueta oval, general- mente alargada, aunque algunas pobla- ciones pueden presentar ejemplares redon- deados o incluso de silueta casi rectangu- lar. Parte anterior corta y redondeada, la posterior más alargada. En las cuencas de aguas moderadamente duras o duras el borde dorsal desciende bruscamente hacia la parte posterior, formando un ángulo marcadamente agudo (característica común en las poblaciones al sur del Tajo). En las cuencas de aguas blandas el borde dorsal es alto y la parte posterior redon- deada, como en algunos ejemplares de Unió tumidiformis (característica común al norte del Tajo) y que correspondería al Unió mucidus de Morelet, 1845. Concha sólida, de color amarillo verdoso a marrón muy oscuro. Umbos redondeados, gene- ralmente planos pero a veces prominen- tes, muy erosionados cuando viven en aguas ácidas. La escultura del umbo (Fig. 13B) consiste en tubérculos paralelos a las líneas de crecimiento de la concha y no siempre es bien visible. Valva izquierda con dos dientes pseudocardinales crenu- lados que pueden estar juntos en un solo diente o separados, y dos dientes latera- les laminares, el inferior más alto. Valva derecha con un diente pseudocardinal casi siempre crenulado, un engrosamiento supracardinal (situado entre el borde dorsal de la concha y el diente pseudo- cardinal), exclusivo de esta especie, y un diente lateral posterior laminar. Los pseu- docardinales de ambas valvas pueden ser muy robustos. Longitud máxima de la especie 10 cm. Papilas del sifón inhalante (Figs. 5E, 16D) de forma cónica y distribuidas en varias filas. Ciclo de vida: Se reproduce en verano. En el sur de la península (Río Barbate, Cádiz) se han visto hembras grávidas (con huevos) en febrero. La presencia de embriones y gloquidios maduros suele ocurrir entre mayo y julio en toda su área de distribución, desde Marruecos hasta el norte de España. En todos los ejemplares estudiados el marsupio se limita a toda la cámara de las branquias externas. Los glo- quidios (Figs. 19C, D) son triangulares con un fuerte gancho ventral adornado con espículas. Dimensiones máximas de los gloquidios: (medidos con microscopio electrónico): longitud: 229 ¡um, altura: 213 jum, anchura: 151,8 pm. Se desconocen los peces hospedado- res de sus gloquidios, aunque teniendo en cuenta su amplia distribución y el rango de hospedadores de especies pró- ximas como Unió pictorum y Unió mancus (Berrie y Boize, 1985; Araujo et al., 2005), debería incluir varias especies comunes en los ríos atlánticos de la península, por ejemplo: Barbus spp., Chondrostoma spp. (s.l.), Gasterosteus acu- leatus L. y Squalius spp. entre otras. Hábitat (Fig. 16C): En todo tipo de ríos y arroyos con agua permanente. Más común en riberas y taludes de arena bajo la sombra de los árboles, pero también en fondos de grava y cieno y en orillas soleadas. Puede aparecer en lagos (ej. Ruidera) y rara vez en embalses. En ríos de aguas temporales suelen quedar poblaciones aisladas en las pozas que mantienen agua durante el 48 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica estiaje donde se mantienen refugiadas junto con los peces. Conservación : Con el nombre de U. pictorum o U. cf. pictorum, está catalo- gado como Casi Amenazado en el Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de España (Verdú y Galante, 2006), De Interés Especial en el Catálogo Regional de Especies Amenazadas de Castilla-La Mancha y Vulnerable en el Catálogo Gallego de Especies Amenazadas y en el Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de Andalucía (Barea et al., 2008). Aunque es la especie de Unió más común de los ríos atlánticos de la penín- sula Ibérica, está en regresión, y sus poblaciones están desapareciendo de muchas localidades (Rolán, 1998; Reís, 2006; Soler et al., 2006; Velasco y Romero, 2006; Barea et al., 2008). Dado que la tasa actual de desapari- ción de las náyades es catastrófica, y que cada vez son mayores las afecciones sobre los ríos donde habita U. delphinus (tanto naturales -sequías, riadas-, como artificiales -detracciones de agua, embal- ses, eutrofización-), se recomienda su inclusión en el nuevo Catálogo Español de Especies Amenazadas en la Catego- ría de Vulnerable. Unió tumidiformis Castro, 1885 Sinónimos: Unió batavus sensu Morelet, 1845. Descript. des Molí. ten. et fluviat. du Portugal, 109 (non Unió crassus batavus Matón and Rackett, 1807). Unió sadoicus Castro, 1885. Bull. Soc. Malac. France, París, 2: 284. Unió macropygus Castro, 1885. Bull. Soc. Malac. France, París, 2: 286. Unió eupygus Castro, 1885. Bull. Soc. Malac. France, París, 2: 287. Unió baeticus Kobelt, 1887. Iconogr. Land Sussw. Molí, (2) 8: 55, lám. 89, fig. 495. Unió conimbricus Kobelt, 1893. Iconogr. Land Sussw. Molí, (2) 6: 99, lám. 180, fig. 1133. Unió callypigus Drouét, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 65, lám. 2, fig. 2. Descripción original: Unió tumidiformis Castro, 1885. Bulletin de la Société Malacologique de France, París, 2: 283. Localidad tipo: Río Sado, Portugal. Sintipos en el Museu Zoológico Dr. Augusto Nobre, Porto, Por- tugal (2 ejemplares, colección Castro, lote N° 47) y en el Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, París, Francia (21 ejemplares. Colección Locard, lote MNHN 20839). Ilustrado en: Reis y Araujo (2009). Comentario taxonómico: Esta especie ha sido identificada como Unió crassus batavus Matón and Rackett, 1807 (Morelet, 1845; Azpeitia, 1933; Haas, 1940, 1969) o más recientemente como Unió cf. crassus (Reís, 2006; Reís et al., en rev.), pero se ha demostrado que se trata de una especie exclusiva de la península Ibérica (Reís y Araujo, 2009) distinta del U. crassus que vive en el resto de Europa. Distribución: Ríos atlánticos del suro- este de la península Ibérica (Reís y Araujo, 2009). Actualmente sólo se conocen poblaciones en 3 cuencas hidro- gráficas (Fig. 23): Guadiana, Mira y Sado. No obstante, existe alguna cita en las cuencas del Tajo, Guadalquivir y Mondego. Aunque su presencia actual en el Guadalquivir fuera posible, en el Tajo y el Mondego es más improbable. Morfología externa (Fig. 24): Es la náyade ibérica que presenta la concha de menores dimensiones en estado adulto (longitud máxima: 60 mm). Puede confundirse en algunos casos con Unió delphinus, pero un análisis deta- llado de sus caracteres puede revelar la diferencia entre ambas especies. Concha muy ancha, como indica su nombre tumidiformis, de forma oval, general- mente alargada, pero no tanto como en Unió delphinus, y con una proporción longitud/ anchura raras veces superior a 2,5. Parte anterior muy corta y redonde- ada, la posterior alargada y alta, termi- 49 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 23. Distribución de Unió tumidiformis. Figura 23. Distribuido de Unió tumidiformis. Figure 23. Distribution map of\3 nio tumidiformis. nando generalmente en una conexión redondeada entre el borde dorsal y ventral. En algunas poblaciones (por ej. en el río Sado, Portugal y en las lagunas de Ruidera, España) el borde dorsal pos- terior algo descendente formando un ángulo agudo. Concha de color amarillo verdoso a marrón muy oscuro, general- mente con unas rayas radiales amarillas, verdes o rojizas muy bien marcadas. Umbos redondeados y prominentes. La escultura del umbo (Fig. 13D) consiste en una serie de fuertes pliegues con forma de "w" paralelos a la longitud de la concha y apenas visibles cuando el umbo se encuentra erosionado. Valva izquierda con dos dientes pseudocardi- nales crenulados y dos dientes laterales laminares, el inferior más alto. Valva derecha con un diente pseudocardinal casi siempre crenulado y algo curvo, con la concavidad hacia el borde dorsal de la concha, y un diente lateral posterior laminar. Papilas del sifón inhalante (Fig. 5G) de forma cónica y distribuidas en varias filas. (Página derecha) Figura 24. Unió tumidiformis. A: río San Pedro (Beja); B, C: lagunas de Ruidera (Albacete); D: río Guadalmez (Ciudad Real); E: río Vascao (Beja/Faro); F: río Milagro (Ciudad Real); G: río Guadaira (Sevilla). (Pagina direita) Figura 24. Unió tumidiformis. A: rio Sao Pedro (Beja); B, C: lagoas de Ruidera (Albacete); D: rio Guadalmez ( Ciudad Real); E: rio Vascao (Beja/Faro); F: rio Milagro ( Ciudad Real); G: rio Guadaira (Sevilla). (Right page) Figure 24. Unió tumidiformis. A: San Pedro river (Beja); B, C: Ruidera lagoons (Alba- cete); D: Guadalmez river ( Ciudad Real); E: Vascao river (Beja/Faro); F: Milagro river ( Ciudad Real); G: Guadaira river (Sevilla). 50 ArauJO ETAL.\ Las náyades de la península Ibérica 51 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 25. Distribución de Unió ravoisieri. Figura 25. Distribuigao de Unió ravoisieri. Figure 25. Distribution map of\Jmo ravoisieri. Ciclo de vida : Se reproduce en verano. La presencia de embriones y gloquidios maduros suele ocurrir entre abril y julio en toda su área de distribución (Reís y Araujo, 2009). En la población del río Vascáo (cuenca del Guadiana, Portugal) se han encontrado gloquidios entre marzo y agosto de 2007. En todos los ejemplares estudiados el marsupio se limita a toda la cámara de las branquias externas. Los gloquidios (Figs. 19E, F) son triangulares, con un fuerte gancho ventral adornado con espículas. Dimen- siones máximas de los gloquidios: (medidos con microscopio electrónico): longitud: 202 jum, altura: 158 pm, anchura: 144 jim (Reís y Araujo, 2009). Se han probado diferentes especies de peces como potenciales hospedado- res en experimentos en cautividad, pero sólo se han obtenido juveniles con ejem- plares del género Squalius: S. alburnoides (Steindachner), S. aradensis (Coelho, Bogutskaya, Rodrigues y Collares- Pereira), S. carolitertii (Doadrio), S. pyre- naicus (Günther) y S. torgalensis (Coelho, Bogutskaya, Rodrigues y Collares- Pereira). Cualquier especie atlántica per- teneciente a este género parece ser un buen hospedador para los gloquidios de Unió tumidiformis, independientemente de que ocurra naturalmente en simpa- tría con el bivalvo. Hábitat : Generalmente en ríos de orden mediano con régimen de tipo mediterráneo temporal. En riberas y taludes de arena y cieno con vegetación bajo la sombra de los árboles. Puede aparecer en lagos (ej. Ruidera). En épocas de estiaje de los ríos suelen quedar poblaciones aisladas en las pozas que mantienen agua donde se refugian junto con los peces. El resto del año suele vivir muy enterrada en el cieno o la arena. Conservación: Catalogada como Vul- nerable en el Libro Rojo de los Inverte- brados de Andalucía (Barea et al., 2008). Con el nombre de ü. crassus está catalogada como Vulnerable en el Libro 52 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Rojo de los Invertebrados de España (Verdú y Galante, 2006). El nombre U. tumidiformis sustituye en la península Ibérica a U. crassus, especie incluida en los anexos II y IV de la Directiva Hábitat, por lo que mantiene este esta- tuto de protección hasta que se revise la Directiva. Unió tumidiformis presenta varias características que justifican una aten- ción particular para su conservación: 1. Es una especie endémica limitada en la actualidad a las cuencas del Guadiana, Mira y Sado. 2. Sus poblaciones se encuentran muy dispersas y aisladas, estando formadas en ocasiones por muy pocos ejemplares. 3. En toda su área de distribución la sequía presenta una amenaza creciente capaz de eliminar rápidamente las poblaciones. De hecho, se conoce por lo menos una población que hasta 2005 contaba con miles de ejemplares y reclutamiento de juveniles que ha desaparecido casi por completo tras la sequía de dicho año. Se recomienda su inclusión en el Catálogo Español de Especies Amenaza- das en la categoría de Vulnerable. Unió ravoisieri Deshayes, 1847 Sinónimos Unió moreleti Deshayes, 1847. Hist. Molí. Algérie, lám. 109, figs. 1-4. Unió penchinatianus Bourguignat, 1865. Molí. nov. litig. peu connus, 2 série (XVII): 342-343, lám. 21, figs. 1-7. Unió tafnanus Kobelt, 1884. Iconogr. Land-Sussw. Molí., (2)1: 66, lám. 28, fig. 216. Unió ravoisieri var. isserica Kobelt, 1884. Iconogr. Land-Sussw. Molí., (2)1: 65, lám. 28, fig. 215. Unió medjerdae Kobelt, 1886. Iconogr. Land-Sussw. Molí., (2)2: 23, lám. 42, fig. 257-259. Unió micelii Kobelt, 1886. Iconogr. Land-Sussw. Molí., (2)2: 24, lám. 43, fig. 260-261. Unió delevieleusae Hagenmüller in Bourguignat, 1887. Prodr. Malacol. Tunisie; 162. Unió doumeti Bourguignat, 1887. Prodr. Malacol. Tunisie ; 163. Descripción original: Unió ravoisieri Deshayes, 1847. Histoire naturelle des mollusques. In: Exploration scientifique de T Algérie. París, lám. 108, figs. 4-7. Localidad tipo: Lago Oubeira, La Calle (hoy El Kelaa), Argelia. Ilustrado en: Deshayes, 1847. Histoire naturelle des mollusques. In: Exploration scientifique de V Algérie, lám. 108, figs. 4-7; Bourguignat, 1864. Malacologie de T Algérie, lám. 20, figs. 5-10; Bourguignat, 1865. Mollusques noveaux, litigieux ou peu connus, 2 série (XVII), lám. 21, figs. 1-7. Comentario taxonómico : La especie U. ravoisieri ha sido considerada por Haas (1969) como especie modelo del taxon norteafricano Unió pictorum ravoisieri Deshayes, pero probablemente se trata de una especie más próxima al grupo elongatulus que al grupo pictorum ( sensu Haas). Por otra parte, Haas (1969) dividió la especie mediterránea U. elongatulus en 17 taxa diferentes, uno de los cuales, U. elongatulus penchinatianus Bourguig- nat, viviría en los ríos del noreste de Es- paña hasta el Ebro (éste incluido) y el lago de Bañólas. Recientes estudios (To- ledo et al., datos no publicados) demues- tran que dentro de este taxon se inclu- yen dos especies diferentes: U. mancus (en los ríos mediterráneos ibéricos, ver comentario taxonómico de U. mancus) y U. ravoisieri (en la cuenca del Fluviá y el lago de Bañólas). Hemos comprobado que esta última especie, descrita por Bourguignat como U. penchinatianus en Bañólas, ya había sido previamente des- crita por Deshayes en ríos argelinos con el nombre de U. ravoisieri. Altaba (1991) cita U. e. penchinatia- nus como especie endémica del lago de Bañólas, pero no considera la presencia de U. mancus en esta localidad. Tampoco Haas (1916) en su estudio sobre las náyades de dicho lago consideró la pre- sencia de dos especies diferentes de Unió. Hoy sí sabemos que en Bañólas U. ravoisieri y U. mancus viven juntas y no son siempre fáciles de distinguir por su aspecto externo. Por ello, Araujo et al. 53 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 (2005) consideraron la cita de Altaba (1991) una posible confusión con U. mancus. Unió ravoisieri ha sido también confundida (Altaba, 1991; Comas y Mallarach, 2004) con U. aleroni. Como ya se ha comentado, los recientes análi- sis moleculares de ejemplares de la loca- lidad tipo de U. aleroni (río Basse al sur de Francia), han confirmado que se trata de ejemplares de U. mancus (Toledo et al., datos no publicados). Distribución: En la península Ibérica (Fig. 25) restringida al lago de Bañólas y cuenca del Fluviá, donde se conoce del río Ser (Toledo et al., datos no publica- dos). Se desconoce si las citas de U. ale- roni de la cuenca del Llobregat (Comas y Mallarach, 2004) pertenecen en reali- dad a U. ravoisieri o a U. mancus. Es una especie común en el norte de África al este del río Moulouya (Argelia y Túnez). Morfología externa: Los ejemplares del río Ser (Fig. 26A) presentan una con- cha muy fina, pequeña, siempre alar- gada y comprimida, de color pardo, a menudo verde o incluso amarillento, con los anillos de crecimiento externos muy juntos. Bordes dorsal y ventral pa- ralelos, el dorsal a veces ligeramente as- cendente hacia la región posterior. Um- bos planos, muy poco prominentes. Es- cultura del umbo (Fig. 13E) formada por dos filas de tubérculos a menudo muy marcados y picudos, aunque no siempre presente (puede faltar incluso en ejem- plares con el umbo no erosionado). Rara vez mayor de 60 mm aunque hay ejem- plares hasta de 95 mm. Una de las prin- cipales características de esta especie es la forma redondeada del borde antero- dorsal de la concha, que dibuja un arco muy patente, aunque este carácter se en- cuentra también en algunas poblaciones de U. mancus. Ligamento fino. Charnela muy débil y delgada, con los dientes pseudocardinales pequeños y laminares, los de la valva izquierda generalmente fusionados en uno. La forma de las conchas de los ejem- plares de Bañólas (Fig. 26B) es bastante diferente, como suele ocurrir con las po- blaciones que viven en lagos (ej. U. tumi- diformis de las Lagunas de Ruidera). Ta- maño muy grande (hasta 105 mm), con la concha mucho más espesa, inflada y sólida que en los ejemplares de río, y de color pardo amarillento, nunca verde. La región posterior aparece siempre cu- bierta de creta (Haas, 1916). Silueta cua- drangular muy característica, con el umbo retrasado, de forma que la parte anterior es muy corta y la posterior muy alargada. Charnela y ligamento muy de- sarrollados; dientes pseudocardinales muy fuertes, aserrados y separados en la valva izquierda. Escultura del umbo si- milar a la de los ejemplares de río. En sus localidades ibéricas, U. ravoi- sieri solamente puede confundirse con Unió mancus. En el lago de Bañólas las dos especies son bastante difíciles de distinguir por sus caracteres externos. Papilas del sifón inhalante (Fig. 5H) de forma cónica y distribuidas en varias filas. Ciclo de vida: Las branquias externas de las hembras del río Ser aparecen car- gadas de huevos entre los meses de junio y julio. Se desconoce la morfología del gloquidio y sus posibles peces hos- pedadores, aunque se han citado las especies Barbus meridionalis Risso y Leu- ciscus cephalus L. (Generalitat de Cata- lunya, 2004). En ríos de Túnez se ha visto que la liberación de las larvas se produce en marzo. Hábitat: En fondos de grava y cieno de los cursos medianos y bajos de ríos pequeños y poco profundos. General- mente muy escondido, clavado en las riberas y taludes a la sombra, también entre las raíces de los árboles. En el lago de Bañólas muy enterrado en el sedi- mento del fondo. Conservación: Al tener una distribu- ción tan restringida, la salud de sus poblaciones depende de la de las pocas masas de agua donde habita. Además, es una especie muy poco abundante y muy difícil de localizar. La población del lago de Bañólas requiere también una protección urgente ante la amenaza de desaparición fundamentalmente por la sustitución de peces nativos por peces exóticos. Se recomienda su inclusión en el nuevo Catálogo Español de Especies Amenazadas en la Categoría En Peligro. 54 AEAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 26. Unió ravoisieri. A: río Ser (Gerona); B: lago de Bañólas (Gerona). Figura 26. Unió ravoisieri. A: rio Ser ( Gerona); B: lago de Bañólas ( Girona). Figure 26. Unió ravoisieri. A: Ser river ( Gerona); B: Bañólas lake ( Gerona). 55 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 27. Distribuido de Anodonta cygnea. Figure 27. Distribution map Ío/Anodonta cygnea. Anodonta cygnea (Linnaeus, 1758) Sinónimos: El número de sinonimias de A. cygnea se cuenta por cientos. Haas (1969) por ejem- plo, cita 542. El problema es que tanto en este caso como en el listado de sinonimias que da SlMPSON (1900), también se incluyen las correspondientes a la otra especie europea A. anatina. Debido a esta dificultad y para evitar mayor confusión, solamente asignamos los sinónimos que hemos podido comprobar a partir de la iconografía (Schróter, 1779; Drouet, 1893; Az- peitia, 1933) y de la consulta de los sintipos conservados en el Museu Zoológico Dr. Augusto Nobre (Porto, Portugal) y en el Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle (París, Francia). Mya arenaria Schróter, 1779 (non Linnaeus, 1758). Gesch. Flussconch .: 165, lám. 2, fig. 1. Anodonta oblonga Millet, 1833. Mém. Soc. Agrie. Sci. Angers, 1 (3): 242, lám. 12, fig. 1. Anodonta gallica Bourguignat, 1881. Matér. Molí. Acéph. Syst. Europ., 123. Anodonta enhydra Castro, 1885. Bull. Soc. Malac. France, París, 2: 279. Anodonta apala Castro in Locard, 1899. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. Lyon, 7: 265. Anodonta pelophila Castro in Locard, 1899. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. Lyon, 7: 268. Descripción original: Mytilus cygneus Linnaeus, 1758. Systema Naturae, 10. Aug.: 706, Nr. 218. Ilustrado en: Lister, 1678. Historiae Animalium Angliae, etc, London, T. 2, fig. 29; Lister, 1685. Appen- dicis ad Historiam Animalium Angliae, London, figs. 2 y 3; Lister, 1770. Historiae sive sinopsis methodi- cae Conchyliorum et, Oxford, T. 153, fig. 8; Gualtieri, 1742. Index testarum Conchyliorum quae adser- vantur in Museo Nicolai Guialtieri, etc, Florencia, T. 7, fig. F; Schróter, 1779. Die Geschichte der Flüss- conchylien, etc. Halle, lám. 2, fig. 1; Rossmássler, 1836. Iconographie der Land und Süsswasser Mollus- ken, IV:l-27, lám. 19, fig. 280. Comentario taxonómico : La especie A. polimórficas y difíciles de distinguir. cygnea ha sido confundida innumerables Aunque Haas (1969) consideró que en veces con A. anatina, siendo ambas muy Europa, y por lo tanto en la península 56 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Ibérica, sólo había una especie de Ano- donta, A. cygnea, esto no es cierto. Existen varias ilustraciones de esta especie anteriores a su descripción. No obstante, gracias a Hanley (1855) sabe- mos que el ejemplar ilustrado por Rossmássler (1836, pl. 19, fig. 280) como A. cygnea var. Cellensis es idéntico al tipo descrito por Linneo como A. cyg- nea. Curiosamente, Rossmássler (1836) incluye como primera sinonimia de esta especie a Mytilus cellensis Schróter, 1779, t. 2, fig. 1, pero hemos comprobado, como probablemente ya hizo Bourguig- nat (1881, en Azpeitia, 1933), que Schróter (1779) en ningún momento describe esa especie en su libro. No obs- tante, es necesario añadir que en la ci- tada figura de Schróter (1779) sí se ilustra una auténtica A. cygnea pero con el nombre de Mya arenaria L. Distribución: Las únicas poblaciones que se conocen en la península Ibérica (Fig. 27) están en las lagunas litorales de agua dulce del centro de Portugal entre Aveiro y Coimbra (Reís, 2006). En el año 2008 también se localizaron ejemplares en la laguna de Arbucies (Gerona), aunque han debido desaparecer tras las obras realizadas para su modernización (Araujo, obs. pers.). Probablemente esta especie no se distribuye de forma natural en la península Ibérica y su presencia es debida a la introducción de ejemplares o de peces infectados con gloquidios proce- dentes de Europa central (Reís et al., en rev.), ya que las lagunas donde ha apare- cido son hábitats muy modificados por el hombre. No obstante, existen dos citas antiguas de la especie que parecen fiables: una en el río Mondego (Locard, 1899), en el extremo sur de su zona de ocurrencia actual, y otra en el río Palmo- nes (Cádiz), en el sur de la península Ibérica (Azpeitia, 1933). Aparte de éstas y otras citas de Castro (1873) y Locard (1899) en las lagunas donde existe actual- mente y en la vecina laguna de Ervedal, otras citas que se puedan localizar en la bibliografía se refieren a A. anatina. Morfología externa (Figs. 28, 29): Concha muy grande, hasta 170 mm, y muy frágil, sin dientes en la charnela. Color pardo amarillento a verduzco. Aunque puede ser fácilmente confun- dida con A. anatina, es más alargada y con los bordes dorsal y ventral muy rectos y paralelos. Borde posterior gene- ralmente muy alargado, a veces en pico. La escultura del umbo, cuando está pre- sente, se limita a una serie de estrías concéntricas elevadas que siguen el dibujo de las líneas de crecimiento, siendo a veces discontinuas y a veces bifurcadas y discurriendo de borde a borde del umbo, lo que la distingue de A. anatina, cuya escultura, aunque similar, es siempre ondulada y a menudo no alcanza los bordes de la concha (Kennard, Salisbury y Wood- ward, 1925). Otras dos características de A. cygnea son el umbo muy plano, de forma que éste nunca es visible mirando la concha por la cara interna, y el liga- mento largo y oculto. Ciclo de vida: En la única población ibérica estudiada todos los ejemplares son hermafroditas y liberan los gloqui- dios en primavera (Lima, com. pers.). Solamente las branquias externas actúan como marsupio. Es una especie "long- term brooder", es decir, que mantiene los gloquidios en las branquias durante todo el invierno. En Inglaterra los glo- quidios maduros aparecen en otoño y son retenidos en la branquia materna hasta la próxima primavera (WóóD, 1974; Aldridge, 1999), como también ocurre en Italia (Giusti, Castagnolo, Moretti y Renzoni, 1975). El gloquidio de A. cygnea es grande (longitud 350 ¡um, altura 350 jum) y triangular, con una característica espina en forma de gancho en el ápice ventral que a su vez está armada de numerosas espículas en toda su longitud (Nagel, 1999; Hoggarth, 1999). Los gloquidios se fijan a los peces en los filamentos branquiales, opérculos, boca, ojos y ale- tas, fundamentalmente entre los meses de noviembre y mayo. Los peces hospe- dadores conocidos son: Gasterosteus acu- leatus L, Atherina boyeri Risso, Tinca tinca L., Lepomis gibbosus L., Perca fluviatilis L. y Esox lucius L. (Wood, 1974; Giusti et al., 1975; Dartnall y Wakey, 1979), de los que sólo los tres primeros son autóc- tonos de la península Ibérica. 57 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 28. Anodonta cygnea. Pateira de Ferméntelos, Aveiro. Figura 28. Anodonta cygnea. Pateira de Ferméntelos, Aveiro. Figure 28. Anodonta cygnea. Pateira de Ferméntelos, Aveiro. 58 ARAUJO ET AL. : Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 29. Anodonta cygnea. Pateira de Ferméntelos, Aveiro. Figura 29. Anodonta cygnea. Pateira de Ferméntelos, Aveiro. Figure 29. Anodonta cygnea. Pateira de Ferméntelos, Aveiro. 59 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 30. Distribución de Anodonta anatina. Figura 30. Distribuido de Anodonta anatina. Figure 30. Distribution map o/Amodonta anatina. Hábitat : En la península sólo se ha encontrado en lagunas de aguas poco profundas (menos de 5 metros), donde vive semi-enterrada en un cieno muy fino y distribuida prácticamente por toda la superficie del fondo. Conservación : Catalogada en la catego- ría de Casi Amenazada en el Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de España (Verdú y Galante, 2006) y en la de Datos Insufi- cientes en el Libro Rojo de los Invertebra- dos de Andalucía (Barea et al., 2008). Antes de proponer alguna medida de conservación para esta especie es necesa- rio averiguar si se distribuye de forma natural por la península Ibérica. Anodonta anatina (Linnaeus, 1758) Sinónimos: Como ocurre con la especie anterior, el número de sinonimias de A. anatina es eleva- dísimo, estando además generalmente mezclados los sinónimos de esta especie con los de A. cygnea. Debido a esta y otras dificultades (ver apartado Comentario taxonómico), y para evitar mayor confusión, solamente consideramos como sinónimos válidos las especies ibéricas que hemos podido comprobar a partir de la iconografía (Drouet, 1893; Azpeitia, 1933). Anodonta regularis Morelet, 1845. Descript. des Molí. ten. et fluviátiles du Portugal, 100, lám. X, fig. única. Anodonta macilenta Morelet, 1845. Descript. des Molí. ten. et fluviátiles du Portugal, 102, lám. XI, fig. única. Anodonta lusitana Morelet, 1845. Descript. des Molí. ten. et fluviátiles du Portugal, 103, lám. XII, fig. 1. Anodonta submacilenta Servain, 1880. Étude sur les Mollusques recueillis en Espagne et en Portugal, 162. Anodonta martorelli Servain 1880. Étude sur les Mollusques recueillis en Espagne et en Portugal, 166. Anodonta viriata Servain, 1880. Étude sur les Mollusques recueillis en Espagne et en Portugal, 169. 60 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Anodonta carvalhoi Castro, 1883. Contribut. a lafaune malacologique du Portugal, 20. Anodonta wenceslai Castro, 1883. Contribut. a lafaune malacologique du Portugal, 26. Anodonta lusoiana Castro, 1883. Contribut. a lafaune malacologique du Portugal, 31. Anodonta calderoni Kobelt, 1887. Anal, de la Soc. Esp. de Hist. Nat., t. XVI: 438. Anodonta baetica Kobelt, 1887. Anal, de la Soc. Esp. de Hist. Nat., t. XVI: 439. Anodonta glaucina Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 40, lám. I, fig. 1. Anodonta latirostris Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 69, lám. I, fig. 8. Anodonta mollis Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 70, lám. II, fig. 7. Anodonta adusta Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 75, lám. I, fig. 3. Anodonta prasina Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 79, lám. II, fig. 9. Anodonta nobilis Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 80, lám. II, fig. 5. Anodonta bicolor Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 81, lám. I, fig. 5. Anodonta valentina Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 84, lám. II, fig. 3. Anodonta emacerata Drouet, 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne, 85, lám. II, fig. 1. Descripción original: Mytilus anatinus Linnaeus, 1758. Systema Naturae, 10. Aug.: 706, Nr. 219. Ilustrado en: Schróter, 1779. Die Geschichte der Flüssconchylien, etc. Halle, lám. 1, figs. 1, 2 y 3; lám. 3, fig. 1; Rossmássler, 1837. Iconographie der Land und Süsswasser Mollusken, V-VI, lám. 30, figs. 416-420. Comentario taxonómico: Un problema importante referido al tipo de A. anatina es que según el libro de Hanley (1855), el ejemplar con el que Linneo describió la especie pertenece a Anodonta compla- nata (Ziegl. in Rossmássl. Iconog. Pt. iv. Pl. 20, f. 283). Efectivamente, tanto en la ilustración de Hanley (1855, pl. 2, fig. 1) como en la de Rossmássler (1836) se comprueba que se trata de la especie Pseudanodonta y no de Anodonta. Esto podría indicar que el nombre de Mytilus anatinus L. no se correspondería con A. anatina sino con Pseudanodonta compla- nata Rossmássler 1835. No obstante, dado que no existe la certeza de que los ejemplares que cita (e ilustra) Hanley (1855) coincidan exactamente con los ejemplares originales de Linneo (Dance, 1967), y para evitar mayores complicaciones, sugerimos las ilustra- ciones de Schróter (1779) y Rossmáss- ler (1837) como las representativas de A. anatina. Además, la especie A. anatina ha sido confundida innumerables veces con A. cygnea, siendo ambas muy poli- mórficas. Aunque Haas (1969) consi- deró que A. anatina era un sinónimo de A. cygnea, hoy sabemos que son especies diferentes. También es necesario avanzar que los recientes estudios utili- zando marcadores moleculares indican la existencia de lo que podrían ser varias especies dentro de lo que se ha conside- rado A. anatina en la península Ibérica, y que a su vez podrían ser también dife- rentes de la especie que vive en el resto de Europa. Si esto fuera así, la especie (o especies) ibéricas tendrían nombres diferentes de A. anatina. Para evitar mayores complicaciones y en espera de obtener resultados definitivos, conside- ramos A. anatina en la península Ibérica como una sola especie igual a la pre- sente en el resto de Europa. Distribución: Por toda la península Ibérica (Fig. 30), en ríos, embalses y lagos. Es la especie de Anodonta más común. Morfología externa (Figs. 31, 32, 33): Especie muy polimórfica, más que su congénere A. cygnea. Concha muy frágil, sin dientes en la charnela. Puede llegar a ser muy grande y abombada depen- diendo del hábitat que ocupa. Color pardo o negro, a veces verde. Los ejem- plares juveniles (Figs. 31B, C) suelen ser muy aplanados y presentar un dibujo de franjas radiales más claras. Silueta gene- ralmente oval o cuadrangular, en ocasio- nes alargada pero nunca tanto como A. cygnea. En proporción suele ser siempre más alta que ésta. Habitualmente pre- senta un ala dorsal o cresta en la parte posterior más patente en los ejemplares juveniles. Ligamento más marcado y prominente que en A. cygnea. Borde ventral generalmente curvo. El borde dorsal puede ser curvo o recto, dibu- 61 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 31. Anodonta anatina. Río Ebro. A: adulto; B, C: juveniles. Figura 31. Anodonta anatina. Rio Ebro. A: adulto; B, C: juvenis. Figure 31. Anodonta anatina. Ebro river. A: adult; B, C: juvenile shells. 62 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Figura 32. Anodonta anatina. Embalse de Bornos (Cádiz). Figura 32. Anodonta anatina. Albufeira de Bornos ( Cádiz). Figure 32. Anodonta anatina. Bornos impoundment ( Cádiz). 63 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 33. Anodonta anatina. A: río Milagro (Ciudad Real); B: ejemplar deforme del Río Ebro. Figura 33. Anodonta anatina. A: rio Milagro ( Ciudad Real); B: exemplar deformado do Rio Ebro. Figure 33. Anodonta anatina. A: Milagro river ( Ciudad Real); B: deformed specimen from the Ebro river. 64 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica jando, en este segundo caso, los lados de un triángulo: uno anterior que asciende hasta el vértice del ala y uno posterior que desciende bruscamente. Umbo plano y ancho, más saliente que en A. cygnea. La escultura del umbo (Fig. 13F), cuando está presente, es siempre ondu- lada, concéntrica y a menudo no alcanza los bordes de la concha (Kennard et al., 1925). Papilas del sifón inhalante (Figs. 51, 16F) de forma cónica y distribuidas en varias filas, prácticamente idénticas a las del género Unió. Ciclo de vida : Al igual que A. cygnea es una especie "long-term brooder" que mantiene los gloquidios en las bran- quias durante todo el invierno. Sola- mente la branquia externa actúa como marsupio. Los gloquidios maduran en otoño y se liberan en primavera (Pekka- rinen Y Englund, 1995; Aldridge, 1999; Panini, Sicuro, Daprá y Forne- ris, 2009). Son de color pardo amari- llento, y tanto su aspecto general (Figs. 19G, H) como su tamaño (longitud: 350- 360 ¡um, altura: 340-360 jum) son simila- res a los de A. cygnea. La única caracte- rística útil para diferenciarlos es la superficie de la concha, que en A. anatina presenta un dibujo de finas costi- llas dorso ventrales formando un retí- culo (Pekkarinen y Englund, 1995; Hoggarth, 1999). Aunque se trata de una especie dioica, recientemente se ha visto que AGRADECIMIENTOS Hay muchas personas a las que agra- decer tanto la donación de ejemplares, las informaciones que nos han cedido o su ayuda en las campañas de muestreo: D. Bragado, E. Rolán, D. Moreno, J. Balset, J. García del Castillo, R. Romero, A. Calvo, C. Durán, M. A. Ramos, M. Álvarez Cobelas, R. Álvarez Halcón, A. Martínez- Ortí, J. Altimiras, R. Reyes, J. M. Remón, E. Peñín, P. Santos, A. I. Negro, F. J. Fer- nández y Fernández-Arroyo, J. Fernán- dez Pujol, A. Balmori, J. Serradilla, R. Alia, T. Vega, A. Uriarte, J. M. García Verdes, J. M. García, F. Chico, R. Gonzá- pueden existir ejemplares hermafroditas (Panini et al., 2009). Entre las especies hospedadoras de sus gloquidios en la península Ibérica se han señalado Barbus graellsii Stein- dachner, Chondrostoma miegii Stein- dachner. Salaria fluviatilis (Asso), Gobio gobio (L.), Squalius pyrenaicus (Günther) y S. cephalus (L.) (Gómez, obs. pers.). En otros países (Pekkarinen y Hastén, 1998) se han citado los peces Perca fluvia- tilis L., Gymnocephalus cernuus L., Puntius tetr azona (Bleeker) y la larva de la salamandra Ambystoma tigrinum Green. Hábitat (Figs. 16E, F): En todo tipo de ríos, también en lagos (ej. Ruidera, Albufera de Valencia). En los embalses suele ser la única náyade presente. Habitualmente en fondos blandos de cieno y aguas remansadas, aunque también puede vivir en gravas y zonas de corriente. Es una de las náyades menos exigentes en cuanto al hábitat, probablemente por tener un amplio rango de peces hospedadores. Conservación : Catalogada como Casi Amenazada en el Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de España (Verdú y Galante, 2006) y en el Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de Andalucía (Barea et al., 2008). Aunque es necesario proteger sus poblaciones, parece tener una mayor valencia ecológica que el resto de espe- cies de náyades ibéricas. lez Dávila, A. Agirre, A. Torralba, J. Viñuela, J. Sánchez-Matas, J. A. Garrido García, M. Vila Farré, J. J. Bafaluy, J. Arlanzón, G. Latorre, A. Alarcos, E. Mon- telío, A. Camiña, C. García García, J. López Hernando, J. Lozano, C. J. Pollo, E. Bassols, J. Nebot, F. Uribe, J. Soler, M. Larraz, D. Boix, K. Nagel, M. Campos, D. Cruz, T. Romero, E. Forner, J. V. Escobar, Jesús (Piscifactoría El Palmar), J. P. Poin- tier, J. Abad, F. García Quiroga. También queremos mostrar nuestro agradecimiento a los diferentes departa- mentos de medio ambiente de las comu- 65 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 nidades autónomas españolas y al Insti- tuto de Conservagáo da Natureza de Portugal por los permisos concedidos para poder muestrear, a todo el personal de dichos departamentos que nos han ayudado, así como a los guardas de medio ambiente del Ayuntamiento de Zaragoza y a la Confederación Hidro- gráfica del Ebro. BIBLIOGRAFÍA Aldridge D.C. 1999. The morphology, growth and reproduction of Unionidae (Bivalvia) in a fenland waterway. Journal ofMolluscan Stu- dies, 65: 47-60. Altaba C.R. 1990. The last known population of the freshwater mussel Margaritifera auri- cularia (Bivalvia, Unionoida): A conserva- tion priority. Biological Conservation, 52: 271- 286. Altaba C.R. 1991. Les náyades (Mollusca: Bi- valvia: Unionoida) deis Paisos Catalans. But- lletíde la Institució Catalana d'História Natural, 60 (Secció de Zoologia, 9): 23-44. Altaba C.R. 1997. Al límit de l'extinció: Mar- garitifera auricularia (Bivalvia, Unionoida). Butlletíde la Institució Catalana d'História Na- ' tumi, 65: 137-148. Álvarez-Claudio C., García Rovés P., Ocha- rán R., Cabal J.A., Ocharán F.J. y Álva- rez M.A. 2000. A new record of the fresh- water pearl mussel Margaritifera margaritifera L. (Bivalvia: Unionoida) from the River Nar- cea (Asturias, north-western Spain). Aquatic Conservation. Marine and Freshwater Ecosys- tems, 10: 93-102. Araujo R. 2008. On the validity of the ñame Po- tomida littoralis (Cuvier, 1798) (Bivalvia: Unio- nidae). Graellsia, 64 (1): 135-137. Araujo R., Bragado D. y Ramos M.A. 2000. Oc- currence of glochidia of the endangered Mar- garitifera auricularia (Spengler, 1793) and ot- her mussel species (Bivalvia: Unionoida) in drift and on fishes in an ancient channel of the Ebro River, Spain. Archivfür Hydrobiolo- gie, 148 (1): 147-160. Araujo R., Bragado D. y Ramos M.A. 2001. Identification of the river blenny. Salaria flu- viatilis, as a host to the glochidia of Margar- itifera auricularia. Journal ofMolluscan Studies, 67: 128-129. Araujo R., Cámara N. y Ramos M.A. 2002. Glochidium metamorphosis in the endan- gered freshwater mussel Margaritifera auri- cularia (Spengler, 1793): A histological and scanning electrón microscopy study. Journal of Morphology, 254: 259-265. Las fotografías de las conchas las ha realizado Fernando Señor y las láminas las ha compuesto Fernando Muñoz, ambos del departamento de fotografía del Museo Nacional de Ciencias Natura- les (CSIC). Las fotos de "scanning" se hicieron en el microscopio de barrido del mismo Museo por Laura Tormo y Marta Furió. Araujo R., Gómez. I. y Machordom A. 2005. The identity and biology of Unió mancus La- marck, 1819 (= U. elongatulus ) (Bivalvia: Unio- nidae) in the Iberian Peninsula. Journal of Molluscan Studies, 71 (1): 25-31. Araujo R., Madeira M.J. y Ayala I. 2007. Es- tudio del estado actual de Margaritifera auri- cularia en las aguas del río Ebro. Confederación Hidrográfica del Ebro. 72 pp. Araujo R. y Moreno R. 1999. Former Iberian distribution of Margaritifera auricularia (Spen- gler) (Bivalvia: Margaritiferidae). Iberus, 17 (1): 127-136. Araujo Rv Quirós M. y Ramos M.A. 2003. Laboratory propagation and culturing of ju- veniles of the endangered freshwater mus- sel Margaritifera auricularia (Spengler, 1793). Journal of Conchology, 38 (1): 53-60. Araujo R. y Ramos M.A. 1998. Description of the glochidium of Margaritifera auricularia (Spengler, 1793) (Bivalvia, Unionidae). Phi- losophical Transactions of The Roy al Society of London B, 353: 1553-1559. Araujo R. y Ramos M.A. 2000a. A critic revi- sión of the historical distribution of Marga- ritifera auricularia (Spengler, 1793) (Mollus- ca: Margaritiferidae) based on museum specimens. Journal of Conchology, 37 (1): 49- 59. Araujo R. y Ramos M.A. 2000b. Status and conservation of the relict giant European freshwater pearl mussel Margaritifera auri- cularia (Spengler, 1793). Biological Conserva- tion, 96 (2): 233-239. Araujo R. y Ramos M.A. 2001. Action Plan for Margaritifera auricularia and M. margariti- fera. Convention on the Conservation of Eu- ropean Wildlife and Natural Habitats (Bern Convention). Council of Europe Publishing. Nature and environment. No. 117. Stras- bourg. 66 pp. Araujo R., Toledo C. y Machordom A. 2009a. Redescription of Unió gibbus Spen- gler, 1793, a west palaearctic freshwater mussel with hookless glochidia. Malacolo- gia, 51: 131-141. 66 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Araujo R., Toledo C, Van Damme D., Gha- mizi M. y Machordom A. 2009b. Margariti- fera marocana (Pallary, 1918) a valid current species inhabiting the Moroccan rivers. Jour- nal ofMolluscan Studies, 75: 95-101. Augspurger T., Keller A.E., Black M., Cope W. Y Dwyer F.J. 2003. Water quality gui- dance for protection of freshwater mussels (Unionidae) from ammonia exposure. Envi- ronmental Toxicology and Chemistry, 22 (11): 2569-2575. Azpeitia F. 1933. Conchas bivalvas de agua dulce de España y Portugal. Memorias del Instituto Geológico y Minero de España, Madrid. 2 vol. 763 pp + 36 lám. Barea-Azcón J.M., Ballesteros-Duperón E. y Moreno D. (coords.). 2008. Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de Andalucía. 4 Tomos. Conse- jería de Medio Ambiente, Junta de Andalu- cía, Sevilla. 1430 pp. Bauer G. 1983. Age structure, age specific mor- tality rates and population trend of the fresh- water pearl mussel ( Margaritifera margari- tifera ) in North Bavaria. Archiv für Hydrobi- ologie, 98 (4): 523-532. Bauer G. 1987a. The parasitic stage of the fresh- water pearl mussel ( Margaritifera margari- tifera L.) II. Susceptibility of brown trout. Archiv für Hydrobiologie, Supplement 76 (4): 403-412. Bauer G. 1987b. The parasitic stage of the fresh- water pearl mussel ( Margaritifera margari- tifera L.) III. Host relationships. Archiv für Hydrobiologie, Supplement 76 (4): 413-423. Bauer G. 1987c. Reproductive strategy of the freshwater pearl mussel Margaritifera mar- garitifera. Journal of Animal Ecology, 56: 691- 704. Bauer G. 1992. Variation in the life span and size of the freshwater pearl mussel. Journal of Animal Ecology, 61: 425-436. Bauer G. 1994. The adaptative valué of offs- pring size among freshwater mussels (Bi- valvia; Unionoidea). Journal of Animal Ecology, 63: 933-944. Bauer G. 1997. Host relationships at reversed generation times: Margaritifera (Bivalvia) and Salmonids. En Dettner et al. (Eds.): Vertical food Web Interactions y Springer-Verlag. Berlin y Heidelberg, Ecological Studies, Vol. 130: 69-79. Bauer G. 2001. Life-history variation on diffe- rent taxonomic levels of naids. En Bauer, G. y Wachtler, K. (Eds.): Ecology and Evolu- tion of the freshwater mussels Unionoida. Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, Ecologi- cal Studies, Vol. 145: 83-91. Bauer G. y Vogel C. 1987. The parasitic stage of the freshwater pearl mussel ( Margaritifera margaritifera L.) I. Host response to Glochidio- sis. Archiv für Hydrobiologie, Supplement 76 (4): 393-402. Bech M. y Altimiras J. 2003. Nuevas aporta- ciones al conocimiento de los moluscos ac- tuales y del cuaternario en Extremadura: I. Malacofauna dulceacuícola. Revista de Estu- dios Extremeños, 59 (2): 837-870. Berrie A.D. y Boize B.J. 1985. The fish hosts of Unió glochidia in the River Thames. Interna- tionale Vereinigung fuer Theoretische und An- gewandte Limnologie Verhandlungen, 22: 2712- 2716. Bogan A.E. 1993. Freshwater bivalve extinc- tions (Mollusca: Unionoida): A search for causes. American Zoologist, 33: 599-609. Bogan E. 2008. Global diversity of freshwater mussels (Mollusca, Bivalvia) in freshwater. Hydrobiologia, 595: 139-147. Bourguignat M.J.R. 1865. Mollusques nou- veaux, litigieux ou peu connus. Revue et Ma- gasin de Zoologie puré et appliquée, XVII: 6-23 + 24 pl. Bourguignat M.J.R. 1866. Mollusques nou- veaux, litigieux ou peu connus. Revue et Ma- gasin de Zoologie puré et appliquée, XVIII: 337- 347. Bouza C., Castro J., Martínez P., Amaro R., Fernández C., Ondina P., Outeiro A. y San Miguel E. 2007. Threatened freshwater pear mussel Margaritifera margaritifera L. in NW Spain: low and very structured genetic variation in Southern peripheral populations assessed using microsatellite markers. Con- servation Genetics, 8: 937-948. Castro J.S. 1873. Mollusques terrestres et flu- viátiles du Portugal. Espéces nouvelles ou peu connues. Jornal de Sciencias Mathematicas, Physicas e Naturaes, IV (N.° 15). Castro J.S. 1885. Unionidae nouveaux du Por- tugal. Bulletin de la Société Malacologique de France, 2: 277-294. Castro J.S. 1887. Contributions á la faune ma- lacologique du Portugal. I - Anodontes du Portugal. Jornal de Sciencias Mathematicas, Physicas e Naturaes, 35: 121-152. Comas E. y Mallarach J.M. 2004. Una nova població de náiades (Unió aleroni) a la conca del Llobregat. Butlletí de la Institució Catalana d'Historia Natural, 72: 113-114. Companyo M. Y Massot P. 1845. Description d'une espéce nouvelle de Mulette. [Bulletin de la] Société Agricole, Scientifique et Littéraire des Pyrénées-Orientales, Perpignan, 6: 234-235 + 1 lam. Cosgrove P., Hastie L. y Sime I. 2007. Recor- ded natural predation of freshwater pearl mussels Margaritifera margaritifera (L.) in Sco- tland. Journal of Conchology, 39: 469-472. DagetJ. 1998. Catalogue raisonné des Mollusques bivalves d'eau douce africains. Backhuys Pub- lishers/ Orstom. 329 pp. Dance S.P. 1967. Report on the Linnean shell collection . Proceedings of the Linnean Society of London, 178 (1): 1-24 + 10 pl. 67 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Dartnall H.J.G. y Walkey M. 1979. The dis- tribution of glochidia of the swan mussel, Anodonta cygnea (Mollusca) on the three- spined stickleback Gasterosteus aculeatus (Pisces). Journal of Zoology, London, 189: 31- 37. Delvene G. y Araujo R. 2009a. Early Cretace- ous non-marine bivalves from Spain. Journal oflberian Geology, 35 (1): 19-34. Delvene G. y Araujo R. 2009b. Protopleuro- bema: a new genus of freshwater bivalve from the Lower Cretaceous of the Cameros basin (NW Spain). Journal oflberian Geology, 35 (2): 169-178. Drouet H. 1893. Unionidae de l'Espagne. Mé- moires de l'Académie de Dijon, IVe série (4): 5- 89 + 2 lam. Dupuy A. 1847. Histoire Naturelle des Mollus- ques terrestre et d'eau douce qui vivent en France. 737 pp + 31 lam. Ellis D. 1978. British freshwater bivalve mollusca. Synopses ofthe British fauna (new series), 11. The Linnean Society of London y Academic Press, London. 110 pp. Geist J. y Auerswald K. 2007. Physicochemi- cal stream bed characteristics and recruit- ment of the freshwater pearl mussel ( Mar - garitifera margaritifera). Freshwater Biology, 52: 2299-2316. Geist J. y Kuehn R. 2005. Genetic diversity and differentiation of Central European fresh- water pearl mussel ( Margaritifera margari- tifera L.) populations: implications for con- servation and management. Molecular Eco- logy, 14: 425-439. Geist J., Porkka M. y Kuehn R. 2006. The sta- tus of host fish populations and fish species richness in European freshwater pearl mus- sel ( Margaritifera margaritifera) streams. Aquatic Conservation: Marine and freshwater ecosystems, 16: 251-266. Generalitat de Catalunya 2004. Projecte d'es- tudi i recuperado de ndiades (Unió aleroni) del Pare Natural de la zona volcánica de la Garrotxa. Generalitat de Catalunya, Departament de Medi Ambient i Habitatge. Pare Natural de la Zona Volcánica de la Garrotxa: 1-8. Germain L. 1931. Mollusques terrestres etfuvia- tiles. Faune de France 21-22. Faculté des Scien- ces, Paris. 897 pp + 26 lam. Guisti F. 1973. The minute shell structure of the glochidium of some species of the genera Unió, Potomida and Anodonta (Bivalvia, Unionacea). Malacologia, 14: 291- 301. Giusti F., Castagnolo L., Moretti L. y Ren- zoni A. 1975. The reproductive eyele and the glochidium of Anodonta cygnea L. from Lago Trasimeno (Central Italy). Monitore Zo- ológico Italiano (N. S.), 9: 99-118. Gómez I. y Araujo R. 2008. Channels and dit- ches as the last shelter for freshwater mus- seis. The case of M. auricularia and other naiads at the mid Ebro River basin, Spain. Aquatic Conservation: Marine and Freshwater Ecosystems, 18: 658-670. Graf D. 2007. Paleartic freshwater mussel (Mo- llusca: Bivalvia: Unionidae) diversity and the comparative method as a species con- cept. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 156: 71-88. Graf D. y Cummings K. 2006. Palaeoheterodont diversity (Mollusca: Trigonioida + Unio- noida): what we know and what we wish we knew about freshwater mussel evolution. Zoological Journal of the Linnean Society, 148: 343-394. Graf D. y Cummings K. 2007. Review of the sys- tematics and global diversity of freshwater mussel species (Bivalvia: Unionoida). Journal ofMolluscan Studies 73: 291-314. Grande C., Araujo R. y Ramos M.A. 2001. The gonads oí Margaritifera auricularia (Spen- gler, 1793) and Margaritifera margaritifera (L. 1758) (Bivalvia: Unionoidea). Journal ofMo- lluscan Studies, 67: 27-35. Haas F. 1909. Ueber Unió auricularius Spen- gler. Nachrichtsblatt der Deutschen Malakozo- ologischen Gesellschaft, 2: 20-25. Haas F. 1910. Pseudunio, neues genus für Unió sinuatus Lam. Nachrichtsblatt der Deutschen Malakozoologischen Gesellschaft, 42: 181-183. Haas F. 1913. Bemerkungen über Spenglers Unionen. Videnskabelige Meddelelserfra Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening I Kjobenhavn, 65: 51-66 + 3 tab. Haas F. 1916. Les naiades del llac de Banyoles i llur importancia teórica. Publicacions de L'Ins- titut de Ciencies. Treballs de l'Institució Catalana d'Historia Natural, 1916: 15-23. Haas F. 1917a. Estudio para una monografía de las náyades de la península Ibérica. Anuari de la Junta de Ciencies Naturals, 2: 131-190. Haas F. 1917b. Estudio sobre las náyades del Ebro. Boletín de la Sociedad Aragonesa de Cien- cias Naturales, 16: 71-82. Haas F. 1940. A tentative classification of the Palearctic Unionids. Field Museum of Natural History, Zoological Series, 24: 115-141. Haas F. 1941. Records of large fresh-water mus- seis. Field Museum of Natural History, Zoolog- ical Series, 24: 259-270. Haas F. 1969. Superfamilia Unionacea. Das Tie- rreich, 88: 1-663. Hanley S. 1855. Ipsa Linnaei conchylia. The shells ofLinnaeus, determined from his manuscripts and collection. London. 556 pp + 5 pl. Harms W. 1907. Zur Biologie und Entwick- lungsgeschichte der Flussperlmuschel (Mar- garitana margaritifera Dupuy). Zoologischer Anzeiger, 31: 814-824. 68 Araujo ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Harms W. 1909. Postembryonale Entwic- klungsgeschichte der Unioniden. Zoologis- che Jahrbücher. Abteilungfür Anatomie und On- togenie der Thiere, 28: 325-386. Hastie L., Young M., Bonn P., Cosgrove P. y Henninger B. 2000a. Sizes, densities and age structures of Scottish Margaritifera mar- garitifera (L.) populations. Aquatic Conserva- tion: Marine and Freshwater Ecosystem, 10: 229- 247. Hastie L., Young M. y Boon P. 2000b. Growth characteristics of freshwater pearl mussel Margaritifera margaritifera (L.). Freshwater Bi- ology, 43: 243-256. Hastie L.C. y Young. M.R. 2003. Timing of spawning and glochidial release in Scottish freshwater pearl mussel ( Margaritifera mar- garitifera) populations. Freshwater Biology, 48: 2107-2117. Hendelberg J. 1961. The freshwater pearl-mus- sel. On the location, age, and growth of the individual and on the composition of the po- pulation according to an investigation in Parlálven in Artic Sweden. Report of the Ins- titute of Freshwater Reseach Drottningholm, 41: 149-171. Hoggarth M.A. 1999. Descriptions of some of the glochidia of the Unionidae (Mollusca: Bivalvia). Malacologia, 41 (1): 1-118. Huff S.W., Campbell D., Gustafson D.L., Ly- deard C., Altaba C.R. y Giribet G. 2004. In- vestigations into the phylogenetic relations- hips of freshwater pearl mussels (Bivalvia: Margaritiferidae) based on molecular data: implications for their taxonomy and bioge- ography. Journal ofMolluscan Studies, 70: 379- 288. IUCN 2008. Red List of Threatened Species. Available on line at: . Downloaded on 21 February 2009. Jansen W., Bauer G. y Zahner-Meike E. 2001. Glochidial mortality in freshwater mussels. En Bauer, G. y Wáchtler, K. (Eds.): Ecology and Evolution of the fresh- water mussels Unionoida. Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, Ecological Studies, 145: 185-211. Kennard A.S., Salisbury A.E. y Woodward B.B. 1925. Notes on the British post-Pliocene Unionidae, with more especial regard to the means of identification of fossil fragments. Proceedings of the Malacological Societu ofLon- don, 16: 267-285. Lea I. 1834. Observations on the naiads, etc. Transactions ofthe American Philosophical So- ciety, 1834: 23-119 + 19 pl. Life-Náyade 2004. Estudio científico sobre Mar- garitifera margaritifera y su hábitat en el ám- bito de actuación de LIFE Náyade. Morales J. J. (Coord.). Informe Inédito. Consejería de Me- dio Ambiente, Junta de Castilla y León. 370 pp + 27 planos. Life-Náyade 2005. Plan de Acción de Margari- tifera margaritifera en Castilla y León. Mora- les J. J., Araujo R. y Santos P. (Coords.). In- forme Inédito. Consejería de Medio Am- biente, Junta de Castilla y León. 59 pp + 6 planos. Life-Náyade 2006. Estudio de estimación de los hospedadores de Margaritifera margaritifera en el ámbito de actuación Life-Náyade. Morales J. J. (Coord.). Informe Inédito. Consejería de Medio Ambiente, Junta de Castilla y León. 229 pp + 6 planos. Lister M. 1678. Historiae Animalium Angliae, etc, London, J. Martin. 250 pp + 9 tab. Lister M. 1685. Appendicis ad Historiam Anima- lium Angliae. In J. Godaert's De Insectis. Lon- don, S. Smith. 40 pp + 21 tab. Lister M. 1770. Historiae sive sinopsis methodicae Conchyliorum. Oxford, W. Huddesford. 103 pp + 439 tab. Locard A. 1893. Conchyliologie Franqaise. Les co- quilles des eaux douces et saumátres de France. París, Bailliére. 327 pp. Locard A. 1899. Conchyliologie Portugaise. Coquilles terrestres des eaux douces et sau- matres. Archives du Museum d'Histoire Natu- rel de Lyon, 7: 1-303. López M.A. y Altaba C.R. 2005. Fish host de- termination for Margaritifera auricularia (Bi- valvia: Unionoida): results and implications. Bolletino Malacologico, 41 (9-12): 89-98. López M.A., Altaba C.R., Rouault T. y Gis- bert E. 2007. The European sturgeon Aci- penser sturio is a suitable host for the glochi- dia of the freshwater pearl mussel Margari- tifera auricularia. Journal ofMolluscan Studies, 73: 207-209. Lucey J. 2006. The pearl mussel, Margaritifera margaritifera (L.), in hard water in Ireland. Bi- ology and Environment: Proceedings ofthe Royal Irish Academy, 106b: 143 -153. Lydeard C., Cowie R.H., Ponder W.F., Bo- gan A.E., Bouchet P., Clarck S.A., Cum- mings K.S., Frest T.J., Gargominy O., Her- bert D.G., Hershler R., Perez K.E., Roth B., Seddon M., Strong E.E. y Thompson F.G. 2004. The global decline of nonmarine mo- llusks. BioScience, 54: 321-330. Machordom A., Araujo R., Erpenbeck D. y Ramos M.A. 2003. Phylogeography and con- servation genetics of European endangered Margaritiferidae. Biological Journal ofthe Lin- nean Society, 78: 235-252. Madeira M.J., Araujo R. y Ayala I. 2007. Lo- calización, distribución y seguimiento de las po- blaciones de náyades (bivalvos dulceacuícolas) en el Territorio Histórico de Álava. Diputación Foral de Álava. 66 pp. Martínez-Ortí A. y Robles F. 2003. Moluscos continentales de la Comunidad Valenciana. Ge- neralitat Valenciana. Conselleria de Terri- tori i Habitatge. Valencia. 261 pp. 69 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Morales J.J., Negro A.I., Lizana M., Martí- nez A. y Palacios J. 2004. Preliminary study of the endangered populations of pearl mus- sel Margaritifera margaritifera (L.) in the river Tera (north-west Spain): habitat analysis and management considerations. Aquatic conser- vation: marine and freshwater ecosystems, 14: 587-596. Morales J.J, Santos P., Peñín E. y Palacios J. 2007. Incidencia negativa de los incendios sobre una población de la náyade Margariti- fera margaritifera L. (Bivalvia; Unionoida) en el río Negro (Zamora). Ecología , 21: 91-106. Morelet A. 1845. Descriptions des Mollusques te- rrestres et fluviátiles du Portugal, Paris. 116 pp + 14 lam. Nagel K.-0. 1999. Anatomische und morpho- logische Merkmale europáischer Najaden (Unionoidea: Margaritiferidae und Unioni- dae) und ihre Bedeutung für die Systematik. Heldia, 2: 33-48. Nagel K.-O. 2004. Observations on the repro- ductive period of the freshwater mussel Po- tomida littoralis (Unionidae). Iberus, 22: 1-8. Nagel K.-Ov Badino G. y Celebrano G. 1998. Systematics of European naiades (Bivalvia: Margaritiferidae and Unionidae): a review and some new aspects. Malacological Review, Suppl. 7 (Bivalvia I): 83-104. Negus C.L. 1966. A quantitative study of growth and production of unionid mussels in the River Thames at Reading. Journal of Animal Ecology, 35: 513-532. Nesemann H. 1993. Zoogeographie und Ta- xonomie der Muschel-Gattungen Unió Phi- lipsson 1788, Pseudanodonta Bourguignat 1877 und Pseudunio Haas 1910 im oberen und mit- tleren Donausystem (Bivalvia: Unionidae, Margaritiferidae). Nachrichtenblatt der Ersten Voralberger Malakologischen Gesellschaft, 1: 20- 40. Nezlin L.P., Cunjak R.A., Zotin A. Y Zl- uganov V.V. 1994. Glochidium morphol- ogy of the freshwater pearl mussel ( Margar- itifera margaritifera) and glochidiosis of At- lantic salmón ( Salmo salar): a study by scanning electrón microscopy. Canadian Jour- nal ofZoology, 72: 15-21. Nienhuis J.A.J.H. 2003. The rediscovery of Spen- gler's freshwater pearlmussel Pseudunio au- ricularius (Spengler, 1793) (Bivalvia, Unionoidea, Margaritiferidae) in two river Systems in France, with an analysis of some factors causing its decline. Basteria 67 (1-3): 67-86. Nilsson S. 1822. Historia Molluscorum Sveciae, etc. 124 pp. Nobre A. 1912. Fauna aquícola de Portugal, II. Molluscos fluviaes. Boletim da Direcgdo Geral da Agricultura 4. Nobre A. 1930. Moluscos terrestres, fluviais e das aguas solobras de Portugal. Ministeria da Agri- cultura. Direqiao Geral dos Servicios Flores- tais e Aquícolas. Porto, 259 pp + 18 pl. Nobre A. 1941. Fauna malacológica de Portu- gal II. Moluscos terrestres e fluviais. Memo- rias e Estudos do Museu de Zoología da Univer- sidade de Coimbra 124: 1-278. Ortmann A.E. 1911. The classification of the Eu- ropean Naiades. The Nautilus, 25: 5-7. Outeiro A., Ondina P., Fernández C., Amaro R. y San Miguel E. 2008. Population density and age structure of the freshwater pearl mussel, Margaritifera margaritifera, in two Ibe- rian rivers. Freshwater Biology, 53: 485-496. Pallary P. 1923. Descriptions de trois mollusques nouveaux du Maroc. Bulletin de la Société des Sciences Naturelles du Maroc, 3: 78-79. Pallary P. 1927. Complément a la faune ma- lacologique de la Berbérie. Journal de Conchy- liologie, 71: 197-277 + 7 pl. Pallary P. 1936. Deuxiéme complément a la faune malacologique de la Berbérie. Journal de Conchyliologie, 80: 5-65 + 4 pl. Panini E., Sicuro B., Daprá F y Forneris G. 2009. Preliminary considerations for fresh- water mussel reproduction and possible ap- plication for extensive rearing in Italy. Jour- nal of Conchology, 39: 709-716. Pekkarinen M. y Englund V. 1995. Descrip- tion of unionacean glochidia in Finland, with a table aiding in their identification. Archiv fur Hydrobiology, 134: 515-531. Pekkarinen M. y Hanstén C. 1998. Succes of metamorphosis of the lake mussel ( Anodonta anatina) glochidia in different hosts and in vi- tro. Proceedings ofthe 50th Annual Meeting of the Scandinavian Societyfor Electron Microscopy. Espoo and Helsinki, Finland, 7-10 June 1998: 115-116. Pekkarinen M. y Valovirta 1. 1996. Anatomy of the glochidia of the freshwater pearl mus- sel, Margaritifera margaritifera (F.). Archiv für Hydrobiologie, 137: 411-423. Pérez-Quintero J.C., Bech M. y Huertas J.F. 2004. Eos moluscos de las aguas continenta- les de la provincia de Huelva (SO España). Iberus, 22: 19-31. Pontoppidan E. 1755. The Natural History of Norway; containing a particular and accurate account ofthe temperature ofthe air, the different soils, vegetables, metáis, minerals, stones, beasts, birds, andfishes. Linde, London. xxiii + 206 pp., 14 pls.; vii + 291 pp., pls. 15-28. Pou-Rovira Q., Araujo R., Boix D., Clavero M., Feo C., Ordeix M. y Zamora L. 2009. Pre- sence of the alien species Chinese pond mus- sel Anodonta woodiana (Lea, 1834) in the Ibe- rian Peninsula. Graellsia, 65 (1): 67-70. 70 ARAUJO ET AL.: Las náyades de la península Ibérica Reís J. 2003. The freshwater pearl mussel Mar- garitifera margaritifera (L.) (Bivalvia, Unio- noida) rediscovered in Portugal and threats to its survival. Biological Conservation, 114: 447-452. Reís J. (coord.) 2006. Atlas dos bivalves de agua doce em Portugal continental. Instituto da Conservagáo da Natureza, Lisboa. 130 pp. Reís J. y Araujo R. 2009. Redescription of Unió tumidiformis Castro, 1899 (Bivalvia: Unio- noidea), an endemism from Southwestern Iberian Peninsula. Journal of Natural History, 43 (31-32): 1929-1945. Reís J., Machordom A. y Araujo R. Morpho- logical and molecular diversity of Unioni- dae (Mollusca: Bivalvia) from Portugal. Mala- cologia. En revisión. Ricciardi A., Neves R.J. y Rasmunssen J.B. 1998. Impending extinctions of North Ame- rican freshwaters mussels (Unionida) follo- wing the zebra mussel ( Dreissena polymorpha ) invasión. Journal of Animal Ecology, 67: 613- 619. Rolán E. 1998. Evolución de la situación actual de las especies de moluscos de agua dulce existentes en el tramo del río Miño de Goián- Eiras (Galicia, NO España). Thalassas, 14: 99- 103. Ross H. 1992. The reproductive biology of the freshwater pearl mussel Margaritifera mar- garitifera in Co Donegal. Irish Naturalist's Jour- nal, 24: 44-50. Rossmássler E.A. 1835. Iconographie der Land und Süsswasser Mollusken, etc. Dresden y Leip- zig. 1:1-132 + tab. 1-5. Rossmássler E.A. 1836. Iconographie der Land und Süsswasser Mollusken, etc. Dresden y Leip- zig. IV: 1-27 + tab. 16-20. Rossmássler E.A. 1837. Iconographie der Land und Süsswasser Mollusken, etc. Dresden y Leip- zig. V-VL1-70 + tab. 21-30. San Miguel E., Monserrat S., Fernández C., Amaro R. Hermida M., Ondina P. y Al- taba C.R. 2004. Growth models and longevity of freshwater pearl mussel {Mar- garitifera margaritifera ) in Spain. Canadian Journal ofZoology, 82: 1370-1379. Schróter J.S. 1779. Die Geschichte der Flüss- conchylien, etc. Halle. 434 pp + 11 tab. Simpson C.T. 1900. Synopsis of the Naiades or pearly fresh-water mussels. Proceedings ofthe United States National Museum, 22 (1205): 501- 1044. Smith D.G. 2001. Systematics and distribution of the recent Margaritiferidae. En Bauer, G. and Wachtler, K. (Eds.): Ecology and Evolu- tion of the Freshwater Mussels Unionoida. Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, Ecologi- cal Studies, 145: 33-49. Soler J., Moreno D., Araujo R. y Ramos M.A. 2006. Diversidad y distribución de los mo- luscos de agua dulce en la Comunidad de Ma- drid (España). Graellsia, 62: 201-252. SORIANO O., VlLLENA M. Y ALONSO M.S. 2001. Catálogo de los Uniónidos (Mollusca, Unio- nidae) de la península Ibérica conservados en el Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales (CSIC). Graellsia, 57: 133-152. Spengler L. 1793. Om Slaegterne Chaena, Mya og Unió. Skrifter af Naturhistorie Selskabet, 3: 16-69. Strayer D.L., Caraco N.F., Colé J.J., Find- lay S. y Pace M.L. 1999. Transformation of freshwater ecosystem by bivalves. BioScience, 49: 19-27. Strayer D.L., Downing J.A., Haag W.R., King T.L., Layzer J.B., Newton T.J. y Nichols S.J. 2004. Changing perspectives on pearly mussels, North America' s most imperiled animáis. BioScience, 54: 429-439. Toledo C., Araujo R. y Machordom A. Phy- logeographical differentiation of Iberian po- pulations of the freshwater pearl mussel ( Margaritifera margaritifera ) based on micro- satellite data. Molecular Ecology, en revisión. Valledor A. y Araujo R. 2006. The historical misidentification of Margaritifera auricularia for M. margaritifera (Bivalvia, Unionoidea) explained by their iconography. Malacologia, 48: 285-294. Vaughn C.C., Nichols S.J. y Spooner D.E. 2008. Community and foodweb of freshwa- ter mussels. Journal of the North American Benthological Society, 27: 409-423. Velasco J.C., Araujo R., Bueno R. y Laguna A. 2002. Descubierta la población europea más meridional de la madreperla de río Mar- garitifera margaritifera L. (Bivalvia, Unionoida), en la península Ibérica (Río Águeda, Sala- manca). Iberus, 20: 99-108. Velasco J.C., Araujo R., Balset J., Toledo C. y Machordom A. 2006. Primeros datos so- bre la presencia de Margaritifera margariti- fera L. (Bivalvia, Unionoida) en la cuenca del Tajo (España). Iberus, 24: 69-79. Velasco J.C. y Romero R. 2006. Las náyades en Castilla y León. Junta de Castilla y León. Con- sejería de Medio Ambiente. Valladolid. 77 pp. Verdú J.R. y Galante E. (Eds.) 2006. Libro Rojo de los Invertebrados de España. Dirección Ge- neral para la Biodiversidad. Ministerio de Medio Ambiente, Madrid. 411 pp. Vidal Abarca C y Suárez M.L. 1985. Lista fau- m'stica y bibliográfica de los moluscos (Gastropoda y Bivalvia) de las aguas continentales de la pe- nínsula Ibérica e Islas Baleares. Listas de la flora y fauna de las aguas continentales de la penín- sula Ibérica. Publicación n° 2. Asociación Es- pañola de Limnología. 191 pp. 71 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Wáchtler K., Dreher-Mansur M.C. y Richter T. 2001. Larval types and early postlarval bi- ology in naiads (Unionoida). En Bauer, G. y Wáchtler, K. (Eds.): Ecology and Evolution of the freshwater mussels Unionoida. Sprin- ger-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, Ecological Stud- ies, 145: 93-125. Watters G.T. 2001. The evolution of the Unio- nacea in North America, and its implications for the worldwide fauna. En Bauer, G. y Wáchtler, K. (Eds.): Ecology and Evolution of the freshwater mussels Unionoida. Sprin- ger-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, Ecological Stud- ies, 145: 281-307. Wood E.M. 1974. Development and morpho- logy of the glochidium larva of Anodonta cyg- nea (Mollusca: Bivalvia). Journal of Zoology, Eondon, 173: 1-13. Young M., Purser G.J. y Al-Mousawi B. 1987. Infection and successful reinfection of brown trout [Salmo trutta (L.)] with glochidia of Mar- gar itif era margaritifera (L.). American Malaco- logical Bulletin, 5: 125-128. Young M., Cosgrove P.J. y Hastie L.C. 2001. The extent of, and causes for, the declive of a highly threatened naiad: Margaritifera mar- garitifera. En Bauer, G. y Wáchtler, K. (Eds.): Ecology and Evolution of the freshwater mussels Unionoida. Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, Ecological Studies, 145: 337-357. Zahner E. y Hanson J.M. 2001. Effect of muskrat predation on Naiads. En Bauer, G. y Wáchtler, K. (Eds.): Ecology and Evolu- tion of the freshwater mussels Unionoida. Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, Ecologi- cal Studies, 145: 163-184. Ziuganov V., Kaluzhin S., Beletsky V. Y Pop- kovitch E. 2001. The pearl mussel-salmon community in the Varzuga River, Northwest Russia: problems of environmental impacts. En Bauer, G. y Wáchtler, K. (Eds.): Ecology and Evolution of the freshwater mussels Unionoida. Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidel- berg, Ecological Studies, 145: 359-366. Ziuganov V., San Miguel E., Neves R., Longa A., Fernández C., Amaro R., Beletsky V., P opkovit ch E., Kaluzhin S. y Johnson T. 2000. Life span variation of the Freshwater pearl shell: A model species for testing lon- gevity mechanisms in animáis. Ambio, 29: 102-105. Ziuganov V., Zotin A., Nezlin L. y Trettakov V. 1994. The freshwater pearl mussels and their relationships with salmonid fish. VNIRO Pu- blishing House. Moscow. 104 pp. 72 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberas , 27 (2): 73-76, 2009 Presencia de Acicula norrisi Gittenberger y Boeters, 1977 (Gastropoda: Aciculidae) en España Presence of Acicula norrisi Gittenberger and Boeters, 1977 (Gastropoda: Aciculidae) in Spain Óscar GAVIRA ROMERO*, Estrella ROBLES DOMÍNGUEZ**, Manuel BECERRA PARRA*** y Mariano Luis LARRAZ AZCÁRATE** Recibido el 29-IV-2009. Aceptado el 1 5-IX-2009 RESUMEN En el presente artículo se cita por primera vez Acicula norrisi Gittenberger y Boeters, 1977 para España, en Andalucía, provincia de Málaga. Se describe la zona de recolec- ción, dando datos de su geología, clima, botánica y usos. Se aportan coordenas U.T.M. y fotos de esta especie. También se citan especies acompañantes de otros micromoluscos de agua dulce y tierra de la misma zona de captura. ABSTRACT In this paper we record Acicula norrisi Gittenberger and Boeters, 1977 for the first time in the province of Málaga, Andalusia, Spain. We describe the collecting area, with data about its geology, climate, plants and uses. We also provide UTM coordinates and an illustration of this species. Some other accompanying freshwater and land micromolluscs from the area are also cited. INTRODUCCIÓN La familia Aciculidae Gray, 1850 está representada en España por tres géneros: Platyla Moquin - Tandon, 1856, Menkia Boeters, Gittenberger y Subai, 1985 y Acicula Hartmann, 1821, este último representado en el norte de España por las especie Acicula fusca (Montangu, 1803) y A. callostoma (Clessi, 1911). En la Península Ibérica se ha des- crito para Gibraltar la especie Adula norrisi Gittenberger y Boeters, 1977, citada nuevamente para Gibraltar por Talaván Gómez y Talaván Serna (2006). Está considerada una especie de “datos insuficientes" (DD) en el Libro Rojo de Invertebrados de Andalucía y está catalogada como vulnerable en la Lista Roja de Especies Amenazadas de la UICN (Barea-Azcón, Ballesteros- Duperón y Moreno, 2008). En el presente trabajo se cita por primera vez para España, extendién- dose su área de distribución a Andalu- cía, provincia de Málaga. El conocimiento de la biodiversidad es importante para la conservación de * Departamento de Biología Vegetal. Facultad de Ciencias. Universidad de Málaga. Apdo. 59, E-29080. Málaga, España. E-mail: ogavira@hotmail.com ** Departamento de Zoología y Ecología. Facultad Ciencias, Universidad Navarra, Apdo. 177, E-31080 Pamplona, Navarra, España. E-mail: erobles@alumni.unav.es; mlarraz@unav.es *** Barriada San Miguel n° 1, E-29370. Benaoján. Málaga, España. E-mail: libarense@yahoo.es 73 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figura 1. Vista frontal (a), dorsal (b) y lateral derecha (c) de la concha ázAcicula norrisi (altura real 3,2 mm) Figure 1. Front (a), dorsal (b) and right side (c) view of the shell of Acicula norrisi ( actual height 3.2 mm). las especies, la gestión de zonas natura- les y la protección de las mismas. Andalucía es una región con nume- rosos endemismos, tanto en su fauna como en su flora, por este motivo todos los datos que contribuyan al conoci- miento de sus especies son importantes. MATERIAL Y MÉTODOS La zona del valle del Genal muestra una diversidad geológica y botánica marcada. En ella se encuentra rocas calizas karstificadas, generalmente defo- restadas, sin desarrollo de suelo potente. También afloran rocas silíceas con un gran desarrollo de suelo pero con bajo o nulo porcentaje de calcio. En las perido- titas el desarrollo de suelo es escaso, al igual que la cantidad de calcio. Las zonas de vegas son el único lugar donde las especies forestales, ligadas al suelo y a la hojarasca, pueden encontrar su hábitat. En las zonas de las vegas sí que se encuentra suelo, con humus y cubierto por hojarasca. El calcio puede provenir tanto de los aportes terrígenos de las laderas del valle como de los sedimentos aportados por las crecidas del río. La existencia de calcio en el suelo favorece la presencia de gasterópodos. El material se ha recolectado en la loca- lidad de Genalguacil (Málaga), U.T.M: 30 S TF94, el 09-03-2008, en la vega del río Genal, entre la hojarasca de una zona con humedad ambiental elevada. El lugar de la recolección se encuen- tra en la base de un talud de una ladera de roca silícea (micaesquistos). El único aporte calizo proviene del río ya que la zona se inunda por las crecidas excep- cionales. Se han medido el pH y dureza del agua del río, dando resultados de pH 8 y dureza 25° GH. El clima es termomediterráneo (tem- peratura media entre 17 y 19 °C) 74 Gavira MORENO ET AL.: Presencia de Acicula norrisi en España Tabla I Listado de especies recolectadas en Genalguacil, vega del río Genal (Málaga) U.T.M: 30 S TF94, con indicación de su estatuto de conservación (DD = Datos insuficientes, NT = Casi ame- nazada) y de área de distribución general. Table I. List of species collected at Genalguacil, in the valley of Genal river ( Málaga ) U. T.M: 30 S TF94, with an indication oftheir conservation status and general distribution range. Familia Aciculidae Gray, 1850 Acicula norrisi Gittenberger y Boeters, 19/7 (Fig. 1) Familia Ellobiidae Adams, 1855 Carychium tridentatum (Risso, 1 826) Familia Pristilomatidae Cockerell, 1891 Vitrea contracta (Westerlund, 1871) Familia Testacellidae Gray, 1 840 Jestacella sp. Familia Trissexodontidae Nordsieck, 1 987 Gasuliella simplicula (Morelet, 1854) Oestophora tarnieri (Morelet, 1854) Oestophora ortizi De Winter y Ripken, 1 991 Familia Hygromiidae Tyron, 1866 Jrichia cf. martigena (Férussac, 1832) Familia Lauriidae Stemberg, 1925 Lauria cylindracea (Da Costa, 1 778) Familia Punctidae Morse, 1 864 Paralaoma servilis (Shuttleworth, 1 852) Familia Valloniidae Morse, 1854 Acanthinula aculeata (Müller, 1774) DD Sur Península Ibérica Eurosiberiana Paleártica-occidental Norte África - Sur Península Ibérica NT Norte África - Sur Península Ibérica NT Andalucía, Sur Guadalquivir Euromediterráneo-turánica Mediterránea occidental-Macaronésica Paleártica-occidental Tabla II Listado de especies recolectadas en Genalguacil, vega del río Genal (Málaga), en el rezu- madero. U.T.M: 30 S TF94, con indicación de su área de distribución general. Table II. List of species collected at Genalguacil, in the valley of Genal river (Málaga), at the spring U. T.M: 30 S TF94, with an indication of their general distribution range. Familia Sphaeriidae Dalí, 1895 Pisidium sp. Familia Hydrobiidae Troschel, 1857 Potamopyrgus antipodarum (Gray, 1 843) Cosmopolita Familia Lymnaeidae Rafinesque, 1818 Galbo truncatula (Müller, 1774) Holártica Tabla III. Especies adicionales encontradas en la otra orilla del río en Benarrabá, vega del río Genal (Málaga) U.T.M: 30 S TF94, con indicación de su área de distribución general. Table III. Additional species collected at the other side of Benarrabá, in the valley of Genal river (Málaga) U. T.M: 30 S TF94, with an indication oftheir general distribution range. Familia Lauriidae Stemberg, 1925 Pupilla muscorum (Linnaeus, 1758) Holártica Familia Oxychilidae Hesse, 1 927 Oxychilusd. cellariusi Müller, 1774) Europa centro occidental Familia Hygromiidae Tyron, 1 866 Microxeromagna armillata (Lowe, 1 852) Mediterráneo occidental 75 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 húmedo (precipitación media entre 1000 y 1600 mm anuales). La vegetación de la zona pertenece fitosociológicamente a la asociación Rubo ulmifolii-Coriarietum myrtifoliae, que es una formación de orla de la vegeta- ción riparia, las saucedas de E quisto- Sali- cetum pedicellatae. Se trata de una zona bastante natural aunque con cierto apro- vechamiento puesto que aparece un rezumadero de agua que es utilizado como fuente. Las zonas de vegas suelen estar transformadas en huertas. El material se ha recolectado entre la hojarasca y bajo piedras, troncos y suelo. Todos los ejemplares fueron recolec- tados a mano, y se conservan conchas de todos ellos (las conchas de Vitrea son de otro lugar próximo). Se han reconocido todas las especies salvo una babosa no recolectada. Oxychilus se ha identificado por la concha, sin disección. De las conchas muertas no se han guardado las fechas, pero todas son anteriores a la de Acicula. Para la identificación de las especies y su estatus se ha consultado a los BIBLIOGRAFÍA Barea-Azcón J.M, Ballesteros-Duperón E. y Moreno D. (coords.) 2008. Libro Rojo de In- vertebrados de Andalucía. 4 Tomos. Consejería de Medio Ambiente, Junta de Andalucía, Se- villa. 1430 pp. Boeters H.D., Gittenberger E. y Subai P. 1989. Die Aciculidae (Mollusca: Gastropoda, Pro- sobranchia). Zoologische Verhandenlingen. Uit- gegeven door het Rijksmuseum van Natuurlijke Historie te Leiden. 252: 1 - 234. Gittenberger E. y Boeters H.D. 1977. Some re- marles on Acicula s.s. (Prosobranchia: Ris- soacea). Journalof Conchology. 29: 125 -128. Kerney M.P. y Cameron R.A.D. 1979. A fiel guide to the land snails ofBritain an North-west Europa. Edit. Collins, Londres. 288 pp. Larraz M.L. y Equísoain J.J. 1993. Moluscos terrestres y acuáticos de Navarra (Norte de la Península Ibérica). Publicaiones. Universi- dad. de Navarra (Serie Zoológica). 23: 1 - 304. siguientes autores: Kerney y Cameron (1979), Larraz y Equísoain (1993), Ruiz, Cárcaba, Porras y Arrébola (2006), Boeters, Gittenberger y Subai (1989), Gittenberger y Boeters, (1977), Talaván y Talaván (2006), López y Vaquero (2002), Rosas, Ramos y García (1992), Barea-Azcón et al. (2008). RESULTADOS En la Tabla I se presenta e listado de especies recolectadas en Genalguacil, con indicación de su estatuto de conser- vación y de área de distribución general. Las especies encontradas en el rezu- madero se detallan en la Tabla II. En la vega de enfrente, en la otra orilla del río, se han recolectado también otras especies asociadas a la hojarasca de las vegas del Genal. En esta zona están presentes todas las especies acom- pañantes de Acicula salvo Carychium y además las incluidas en la Tabla III. López J. y Vaquero A. 2002. Lista provisional de Moluscos de España protegidos o a pro- teger. URL: http:/ / www.geocities.com/ mal- acologia/ protecio.html. Consultado: 2/12/2008. Rosas G., Ramos M. y García A. 1992. Inver- tebrados españoles protegidos por convenios in- ternacionales. Edit. Ministerios de Agricul- tura, Pesca y Ganadería, (I.C.O.N.A.), Co- lección técnica). Madrid. 250 pp. Ruiz A., Cárcaba A., Porras A.I. y Arrebola J.R. 2006. Caracoles terrestres de Andalucía. Guía y manual de identifiación. Edit: Fundación Gypaetus y Junta de Andalucía. 303 pp. Talaván Gómez J. y Talaván Serna J. 2006. Contribución a la malacofauna terrestre del peñón de Gibraltar. Spira, vol. 2 (1): 37-40. 76 Iberus, 27 (2): 77-83, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacologta On Melanella stalioi (Brusina, 1869) (Gastropoda: Eulimidae) Sobre Melanella stalioi (Brusina, 1869) (Gastropoda: Eulimidae) Enzo CAMPANI* and Jakov PRKIC** Recibido el 20-VII-2009. Aceptado el 28-IX-2009 ABSTRACT We revise here the eulimid species Melanella stalioi (Brusina, 1869), discussing the past and recent literature by comparing the results with the type material characters. The still existing material consists of only one shell, which matches very well Brusina's original description and his repeated statement that he found only one specimen during his whole life. We have concluded that no shell of M. stalioi has yet been known other than the type, and that its recently published images have to be reassigned to Vitreolina levantina Olive- rio, Buzzurro and Villa, 1994, suggesting also that the latter be moved to Melanella Bowdich, 1 822. Lack of any further record of M. stalioi after the type may suggest its non European origin; although this might be likely, we think it is premature to propose remov- ing this species from the present Mediterranean molluscan fauna. RESUMEN Se revisa el eulímido Melanella stalioi (Brusina, 1869), discutiendo la literature antigua y reciente y comparando los resultados con las características del material tipo. El material que aún se conserva consiste en una única concha, que se corresponde muy bien con la descripción original de Brusina y con su repetida afirmación de que solo encontró un único ejemplar durante toda su vida. Hemos concluido que aún no se han encontrado conchas de M. stalioi además de la del tipo y que las recientes imágenes publicadas deben ser reasignadas a Vitreolina levantina Oliverio, Buzzurro y Villa, 1994, sugiriendo además que esta última debería incluirse en el género Melanella Bowdich, 1 822. La falta de citas adicionales de M. stalioi tras su descripción puede sugirir un origen no europeo; aunque podría ser el caso consideramos prematuro eliminar esta especie de la fauna mediterránea actual. INTRODUCTION The taxon Eulima stalioi Brusina, 1869, presently assigned to Melanella Bowdich, 1822, has been debated and interpreted several times in its 140-year existence. With the aim of better under- standing the nature of this species we have examined all the bibliography available to us. The species was described by Brusina (1869) on a single shell, found in Split (Dalmatia, Croatia). The author did not figure this shell either in the original paper or in the two that fol- io wed (Brusina, 1886, 1907) where this taxon was treated. This may have been the reason for some different points of view on E. stalioi; the two best known are the ones by Monterosato in Crosse (1877) and Jeffreys (1884), both rebutted later by Brusina (1886). * Corso G. Mazzini 299, 57126 Livorno, Italy. enzo.campani@fastwebnet.it ** Getaldiceva 11, 21000 Split, Croatia. jakov.prkicl@st.t-com.hr 77 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 The studied literature indicates that the identification of M. stalioi causes some difficulties even now, 140 years after its description. We have concluded that these doubts could only be dis- pelled by a study of Brusina's type material, provided that it still exists. Fortunately, we found the single shell of this species in the Brusina collection, hosted in HPM-Zagreb (Hrvatski Priro- doslovni Muzej, Zagreb); we were able to study it and give a report in this paper. MATERIALS The unique shell of E. stalioi present in the Brusina collection, with new inventory number 1627, was measured and photographed (Figs. 1-3). We found also the original labels, with oíd inven- tory number 1435 (Figs. 4-6), all hand- written by Brusina himself, which show the locality of origin (Split) consistent with the original description. DISCUSSION Brusina's original diagnosis (1869: 242-243) reads as follows: „E. testa turrita, obtusiuscula , solidula, nitidissima , ebúrnea, semipellucida; anfractibus 8 Vi, contiguis, planiusculis, ultimo vix expanso, suturis distinctis ; aper- tura magna, ovali; labro recto, obtusiuscula. - Long. 7 mili., lat. 2 Vi mili. Habitat Spalato. (Coll. Brusina, specim. 1.). Cette espéce se distingue, á premiére vue, de YE. intermedia, Cantraine [E. ( Rissoa ) sinuosa, Scacchi; E. ( Melania ) nítida, Philippi, non Lamarck] par sa forme plus large, par ses tours légére- ment convexes, tandis que, dans TE. intermedia, ils sont tout á fait plans, et aussi bien moins nombreux (8 V¿ au lieu de 13, nombre de Fuñique exemplaire de FE. intermedia recueilli jusqu'á présent par moi dans FAdriatique), par la grandeur de son ouverture et par son bord externe droit et nullement dilaté. L'unique exemplaire que je connaisse jusqu'ici a été trouvé par M. le profes- seur Stalio de Lesina á Spalato: il a bien voulu me le donner á publier, et je ne puis mieux faire que de dédier Fespéce á celui qui l'a découverte et a enrichi ainsi d'une forme spécifique nouvelle la faune de la Dalmatie. M. G. Jeffreys, qui a eu occasion d'examiner cette espéce, a écrit sur Fetiquette: E. sp. n. et confirmé ainsi sa nouveauté." Our measurements on the type were 6.7 x 2.2 mm, in good agreement with the diagnosis, but the shell is damaged, lacking its apical whorls and with a par- tially splintered external margin of the lip. The number of whorls matches the one in the original diagnosis, 8 Vi, thus ruling out damage after the publication date. So its being "obtusiuscula" cannot be taken as the shell character, since it is due to the lack of apical whorls. The partial splintering of the external lip is indeed minor damage since the lip profile can be easily seen in the scars present on the whorls: they are almost straight, with only a hint of median bulge and no clear adapical sinus. The shell shape is straight, a character not mentioned by Brusina, and the whorls are distinctly convex. All these charac- teristics clearly distinguish M. stalioi from all other European Melanella. Monterosato (1872) reports for the first time on E. stalioi, quoting it "ex typ." and stating „é stata recentemente riferita alia E. glabella, S. Wood, del Crag", but without referring to the origin of this opinión; he adds, "l'esem- plare non e sufficientemente ben conservato". It is clear that he saw the type material during the visit to Brusina in Zagreb in 1872, and possibly some Crag material during his journey to England shortly before. This dubious synonymy with Eulima glabella S. Wood, 1842 was repeated (Monterosato, 1875, 1878), but Monterosato's opinión was never a final one. He, for instance, wrote as well "Eul. stalioi (? polita ) forma estra- ordinaria" in a handwritten list of notes on Brusina collection (Palazzi and Ryolo, 2008) in an envelope which had the writing "Zagreb 17 July 1872. Brusina Coll." (Giannuzzi-Savelli, private comm.). 78 CAMPANI AND PRKIÓ On Melanella stalioi (Brusina, 1869) (Gastropoda: Eulimidae) Figures 1-6. Melanella stalioi. 1-3: front, side and dorsal views of the holotype (HPM, Zagreb, new inv. n° 1627), 6.7 x 2.2 mm; 4-6: Brusina’s handwritten labels. Figuras 1-6. Melanella stalioi. 1-3: vista frontal, lateral y dorsal del holotipo (HPM, Zagreb, nuevo inv. n° 1627), 6,7 x 2,2 mm; 4-6: las etiquetas manuscritas de Brusina. 79 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Crosse (1877) published the drawing of a shell he received from Monterosato "comprise dans un envoi en communication": we shall refer to this taxon as E. stalioi sensu Monterosato in Crosse, 1877, the assignment being from the latter author. That confirms Monterosato's doubts on the nature of E. stalioi; as a matter of fact his most important catalogue of Mediterranean molluscs (Monterosato, 1884) does not mention at all this species. Although Jeffreys also saw Brusina's shell during his visit to Zadar in 1867 shortly before the paper on E. stalioi, he had presented in 1884 quite a different shell for Brusina's stalioi. His drawings show a shell slightly but evidently curved ( stalioi is straight) and having fíat whorls (distinctly convex in stalioi ). Brusina (1886) wrote again on E. stalioi, having seen the misinterpreta- tions of his species by Monterosato in Crosse (1877) and Jeffreys (1884). He first explains he wrote to Jeffreys on this matter and that Jeffreys asked for his specimen for inspection. Here, for the second time, Brusina States the uniqueness of his shell: "Mi prego di mandargli il mió esemplare in commu- nicazione e sebbene a malincuore feci fare il viaggio del nostro esemplare único ed originale fino a Londra, puré l'ho fatto nell'interesse della scienza." After Jeffreys acknowledged his misin- terpretation, Brusina suggested a new ñame for Jeffreys' species, naming it Eulima doderleini. Bouchet and Waren (1986) recently transferred the latter to Melanella, choosing Jeffreys' specimen as a lectotype of Melanella doderleini (Brusina, 1886). They support its differ- ence from E. stalioi since „We have examined material of E. stalioi deter- mined by Brusina in ZMR [Zoological Musem Rome] (sent to Monterosato) and we can verify Brusina's statement." We did not examine this material in Rome and can not even know what it really is since Brusina had only one shell of E. stalioi according to all the pub- lished data. This doubt about the mater- ial in ZMR even increased after we had received the information from Dr. Warén that the specimen he saw in Rome and the type of stalioi did not belong to the same species. In the same paper Brusina (1886) also denied that Monterosato's (in Crosse) E. stalioi could resemble his species: „ ... perché la nostra specie é notevolmente piú stretta ed i giri sono visibilmente piú convessi, mentre nella specie del Crosse si mostrano del tutto piani." Brusina then proposes a new ñame for this shell also, i.e. Eulima crossei. Later on Monterosato (1890) himself quotes Eulima crosseana Brusina, 1886 as a new ñame for the E. stalioi published by Crosse; the right ñame however should be crossei, while we regard crosseana as an unjustified emendation. Shortly before his death, in a book on his travels, Brusina (1907: 43-228) wrote on stalioi for the last time, stating again that he had seen only one speci- men in his whole life: „Prvi i jedini primjerak dobio sam na dar od prof. Stalia, koji je tvrdio, da ga je nasao kod Spljeta; cuva se u narod. Muzeju; ali moram red, da mi je malko sumnjiv ne samo zato, sto je jos uvijek unikum, negó jos vise zato, sto je neo- bicna oblika." [The first and only specimen I received as a gift from professor Stalio, who affirmed that he found it near Split; it is kept in the National Museum; however, I must say that it is a bit suspi- cious to me, not only because it is still unique, but even more so because of its unusual shape.] Tenekides (1989) and Giannuzzi- Savelli, Pusateri Palmeri and Ebreo (1999) figured three shells assigned to stalioi, from Greek (2) or Turkish waters (1). These shells are quite different from the E. stalioi type and we think that all specimens have to be assigned to Vitre- olina levantina Oliverio, Buzzurro and Villa, 1994. We carefully compared the shell shape from these images with those of the holotype of V. levantina and found no relevant difference either in the shape or in the opening conforma- tion and apex structure. The same goes for our specimens (Figs. 7-9). We finally 80 CAMPANI AND PrkiÓ On Melanella stalioi (Brusina, 1869) (Gastropoda: Eulimidae) Figures 7-9. Shells of Melanella levantina. 7, 8: front and side views, h = 6.2 mm, Bozcaada Island, Turkey, 8 m; 9: side view, h = 4.9 mm, Turkey 15 m. Figuras 7-9. Conchas de Melanella levantina. 7, 8: vistas frontal y lateral, h = 6,2 mm, Isla de Boz- caada, Turquía, 8 m; 9: vista lateral, h = 4,9 mm, Turquía 15 m. examined why the authors put this species in Vitreolina, a genus normally hosting quite different looking forms (i.e. vitreous, much more slender, less sturdy set). Their main reasons were the curved shell, the general opening ap- pearance and the dip present at the lip scar - suture Crossing. We point out that a curved shell is present in some Melanella as well, and moreover the photograph in their paper showing the false suture dip at the scar Crossing is unclear. We gained the opinión that Melanella should be a more suitable genus for this species, even if provision- ally, due to its morphological characters: the shell height is unusual, more than 7 mm, it is not glossy transparent and its "false suture" has a poor or nuil dip while Crossing the lip scar. We therefore suggest naming this species Melanella levantina (Oliverio, Buzzurro and Villa, 1994). CONCLUDING REMARKS The main result of this paper is twofold: we at last know, 140 years since its description, the true aspect of Eulima stalioi and this can rule out many incor- rect interpretations of this species, while 81 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 on the other hand we are left with a new problem, since we have seen no other material of this species. Moreover, we do not know any Melanella record in lit- erature which could possibly be related to the stalioi type, at least among the European species. The appearance of the stalioi photos may make it possible for someone to assign his material to such species, but we doubt it due to lots of material we examined from our per- sonal and other collections. We carefully examined the shell of stalioi searching also for a sign of an abnormal shell growth, but we found none apart from the labial scars. Dr. A. Warén (in litteris ) suggested a non-European origin for the stalioi type, relating it to a group of non-European Melanella species, such as: Melanella ran- dolphi (Vanatta, 1899), from Unalaska, Alaska; Melanella lowei (Vanatta, 1899) (see Vanatta, 1899), from Long Beach, California; the Caribbean Melanella nutans (Mühlfeld, 1824) (Redfern, 2001); and some unnamed Indo-Pacific species, mostly because of some similarities in the convexity of the whorls. We examined the above mentioned species and some others in Bartsch (1917), yet we found none resembling the stalioi type enough to be regarded as conspecific. Our knowl- edge of this group of species is however too poor to be conclusive on this point, and we leave to future studies a deeper insight into this matter. BIBLIOGRAPHY Bartsch P. 1917. A monograph of West Amer- ican Melanellid mollusks. Proceedings of the United States National Museum, Washington. 53: 296-356. Bouchet P. and Warén A. 1986. Revisión of the Northeast Atlantic Bathyal and Abyssal Aclididae, Eulimidae, Epitonidae (Mollusca, Gastropoda). Bollettino Malacologico, Milano, Supplemento 2: 298-576. Brusina S. 1869. Gastéropodes nouveaux de 1' Adriatique. Journal de Conchyliologie , 17: 230- 249. Brusina S. 1886. Appunti ed osservazioni sull'ultimo lavoro di J. Gwyn Jeffreys. Glas- nik hrvatskoga naravoslovnogadruztva, Zagreb, god. 1: 182-221. We think that we truly found the original shell of Brusina's stalioi and that the specimen was found in Split by Stalio. This conclusión is supported also by the fact that Brusina and Stalio were interested in studies of marine fauna only and exclusively in the Adriatic Sea; both authors wrote many articles on this matter. Here we need to mention that all the eulimid material in Brusina's collec- tion is from the Adriatic Sea. Finally we think that it is too early to propose removing Melanella stalioi from the present Mediterranean molluscan fauna, considering only its suspected non-European origin and the lack of any record after the type. AKNOWLEDGMENTS We wish to thank Dr. Vesna átamol (HPM, Zagreb) for providing us with the material from the Brusina collection. We would like to thank Dr. A. Warén (Stock- holm) for his priceless comments on the holotype, and aknowledge his critical reading of our paper. Last but not least we thank R. Giannuzzi-Savelli (Palermo) for his information about Monterosato's unpublished papers, Harry G. Lee (Jack- sonville. Florida) for providing us with the scans of the Redfern book tables on Vitreohalcis nutans , Mr. S. Bartolini (Flo- rence) for some photographs, and Mrs. D. áantic for her valuable revisión of English. Brusina S. 1907. Naravoslovne crtice sa sje- vero-istocne obale Jadranskoga mora. Rad Jugoslavenske akademije znanosti i umjetnosti. Matematicko-prirodoslovni razred. Zagreb, Knj. 42: 43-228. Clemam (Check List of European Marine Molluscs). Online Database: http:/ / www. somali.asso.fr/ clemam/ index.php Crosse H. 1877. Note complémentaire sur YEulima Stalioi, Brusina. Journal de Conchy- liologie, 25: 70-71, 422 (pl. III, fig. 3). Giannuzzi-Savelli R., Pusateri F., Palmeri A. and Ebreo C. 1999. Atlante delle conchiglie marine del Mediterráneo. Vol. 3 (Caenogas- tropoda parte 2: Ptenoglosa). Evolver, 127 pp. 82 Campani AND PrkiÓ On Melanella stalioi (Brusina, 1869) (Gastropoda: Eulimidae) IlijaniC V. and StoSií M. 1972. Popis zbirke mekusaca (Mollusca) Spiridiona Brusine. Hr- vatski Narodni Zooloski Muzej, Zagreb, 86 pp. Jeffreys J.G. 1884. On the Mollusca procured during the "Lightning" and "Porcupine" Ex- peditions. Part 8. Proceedings ofthe Zoological Society ofLondon 1884 : 341-375. Monterosato T. 1872. Notizie intorno alie conchiglie mediterranee. Ufficio Tipográfico di Michele Amenta, Palermo, 1-61. Monterosato T. 1875. Nuova rivista delle conchiglie mediterranee. Atti dell' Accademia Palermitana di Scienze Lettere e Arti, Palermo, Sez. II, 5: 1-50. Monterosato T. 1878. Enumerazione e sinon- imia delle conchiglie mediterranee. Giornale Scienze Naturali ed Economiche, Palermo 13: 61- 115. Monterosato T. 1884. Nomenclatura genérica e specifica di alcune conchiglie mediterranee. Palermo, Virzi. pp 152. Monterosato T. 1890. Conchiglie della pro- fonditá del mare di Palermo. Naturalista Si- ciliano, 9 (7): 157-166. Oliverio M., Buzzurro G. and Villa R. 1994. A new Eulimid Gastropod from the Eastern Mediterranean sea (Caenogastropoda, Ptenoglossa). Bollettino Malacologico, Milano, 30 (5-9): 211-215. Palazzi S. and Ryolo L. 2008. Tommaso Di Maria, Márchese di Monterosato. Documenti inediti sulla Sua vita e sulla Sua opera. On- line distributed DVD. http: / / www.sim-on- line.it/Risorse/download / Montero- sato/ Monterosato.HTM. Fragment in Co- rrispondenza / Brusina, S/ 18720717-pgsl32-3.jpg Redfern C. 2001. Bahamian seashells a thousand species from Abaco, Bahamas. Bahami- anseashells.com, Inc., Boca Ratón, pp. 1-280 + ix + 120 pls. Tenekides N.S. 1989. Mia sillogi Conchyli'on apo tis Ellinikés Thalasses. Protopapa Press, Át- hens. 188 pp. Vanatta E.G. 1899. West American Eulimi- dae. Proceedings ofthe Academy of Natural Sci- ences of Philadelphia, 51: 254-267. 83 •- Iberus , 27 (2): 85-92, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacologta Two new Fusinus (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae) from the Canary Islands Dos nuevos Fusinus (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae) de las Islas Canarias Roland HADORN* and Emilio ROLÁN** Recibido el 30-VII-2009. Aceptado el 29-IX-2009 ABSTRACT Two new Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815, are described from the Canary Islands: the sinistral F. saundersi sp. nov. from Lanzarote, 3-15 m deep, ¡s compared to F. maroccensis (Gmelin, 1791) and F. elegans (Reeve, 1848), both from the West African coast; the dextral F. Fer- nandez/ sp. nov. from northwest Gran Canaria, 150-200 m deep, is compared to F. tene- rifensis Hadorn and Rolán, 1999 and F. sectus (Locard, 1 897). RESUMEN Se describen dos nuevos Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815 de Canarias: el levógiro F. saundersi sp. nov. de Lanzarote se compara con F. maroccensis (Gmelin, 1791) y con F. elegans (Reeve, 1 848), ambos de la costa oeste africana; el dextrógiro F. hernandezi sp. nov. del noroeste de Gran Canaria se compara con F. tenerifensis Hadorn y Rolán, 1 999 y con F. sectus (Locard, 1897). INTRODUCTION The genus Fusinus is well represen- tad in the Mediterranean fauna by a number of small to médium sized spe- cies. Sabelli, Giannuzzi-Savelli and Bedulli (1990) have mentioned 5 spe- cies (and some more synonyms) from the Mediterranean. Since that moment, new studies were realized on additional material and more species were descri- bed: Buzzurro and Russo (2007) alre- ady mentioned 11 Mediterranean spe- cies and described 4 more. The presence of a paucispiral protoconch is evidence for a short dispersión range and a possi- ble indication for endemism. This is the reason for which even after the work of Buzzurro and Russo (2007), one more species has been described (Hadorn, Afonso and Rolán, 2009). Hadorn and Rolán (1999) described F. tenerifen- sis from the Canary Islands and Ha- dorn and Ryall (1999) described F. bou- cheti from the Ibero-Moroccan Gulf and the Canary Islands from deep water. Some species from the Canary Islands are usually recorded as being the same taxa as in the Mediterranean: Fusinus pulchellus (Philippi, 1844), F. ros- tratus (Olivi, 1792) and F. syracusanus (Linnaeus, 1758). Fusinus bocagei (R Fischer, 1882) from deep water is the only species known to us that lives both in the Canary Islands and in Europe and West African coasts. * Schützenweg 1, CH-3373 Róthenbach, Switzerland. susuf@bluewin.ch ** Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur 13782, Santiago de Compostela, Spain. erolan@emi- liorolan.com 85 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 The Canary Islands are an archipelago with a high number of endemics. In the last months, owing to the prepar ation of a book on Canary Islands molluscs, some of the populations collected from this archipelago and stored in the collections of José María Hernández, Francisco Déniz and the second author were studied. The present paper is the result of this study. Abbreviations MNCN: Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales de Madrid, Spain MNHN: Muséum national d'Histoire naturelle, París, France MHNS: Museo de Historia Natural, Santiago de Compostela, Spain (Coll. Emilio Rolán) CFD: Collection of Francisco Déniz, Las Palmas, Gran Canaria, Canary Islands, Spain CJH: Collection of José María Hernán- dez, Gáldar, Gran Canaria, Canary Islands, Spain CKF: Collection of Koen Fraussen, Aars- chot, Belgium CRH: Collection of Roland Hadorn, Rothenbach, Switzerland dd: dead collected specimen juv: juvenile specimen lv: live collected specimen SYSTEM ATICS Family Fasciolariidae Gray, 1853 Genus Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815 Fusinus Rafinesque, 1815: 145. Substitute ñame for 'Fusus Lamarck 1799' [=Fusus Bruguiére, 1789], non Fusus Helbling, 1779. Type species: Murex colus Linnaeus, 1758, by typification of replaced ñame. Sinistral species of Fusinus are usually placed in the genus Sinistralia H. and A. Adams, 1853 (type species by subsequent designation: Murex maroccensis Gmelin, 1791 [Recent, west Africa]). Bouchet and Warén (1985: 160) placed Sinistralia in synonymy with Fusinus. Records of F. maroccensis (Gmelin, 1791) and F. elegans (Reeve, 1848) from the Canary Islands are probably erroneously based on misiden- tification of the new species. Other known sinistral Fusinus are restricted to the Indian Ocean: F. barclayi (G.B. So- werby, III, 1894) from Maurititus, F. ga- llagheri Smythe and Chatfield, 1981 from Ornan and F. somaliensis Smythe and Chatfield, 1984 from Somalia. F. depictus (G.B. Sowerby, II, 1880) is a doubtful spe- cies which was described without loca- lity. According to Smythe and Chat- field, 1984 (p. 309) it is perhaps not a ma- rine species. Anyway, F. depictus differs from F. saundersi sp. nov. by the obviously smooth surface with a distinct coloura- tion, the conspicuously short spire and the ventricose body whorl. Fusinus saundersi sp. nov. (Figs. 1-16) 1978. Saunders, G.D.: 18-19 (as sinistral Fusinus from Lanzarote). 1982. Nordsieck, F.: 230, pl. 79, fig. 82.50 (as Sinistralia maroccensis). 1999. Hadorn, R. and E. Rolán, 1999: 44-45, fig. 21 (showing radula of F. saundersi as F. (Sinistra- lia) maroccensis). 2004. Ardovini, R. and T. Cossignani: 174 (as Sinistralia maroccensis). Type material: Holotype (Figs. 1-2) (MNCN 15.05/51.016) (19.6 x 8.1 mm, lv). - Paratype 1 (Figs. 3-4) (MHNS) (16.7 x 7.8 mm, lv). - Paratype 2 (MHNS) (16.6 x 7.6, lv) - Paratype 3 (Figs. 5-6) CRH (17.0 x 7.4 mm, lv). - Paratype 4 CRH (14.7 x 6.2 mm, lv). - Paratype 5 CJH (14.8 x 6.3 mm, lv). - Paratype 6 CKF (19.0 x 8.1 mm, 4d). Paratypes 1-5 from type locality, paratype 6 from the Canary Islands, northwest Gran Canaria, Sardina, 3 m deep. 86 Hadorn AND RoláN: Two new Fusinus from the Canary Islands Figures 1-13. Fusinus saundersi sp. nov. 1,2: holotype (MNCN 15.03/31.016), Canary Islands, Lanzarote, Punta Quemada, 3-15 m deep, 19.6 mm; 3, 4: paratype 1 (MHNS), Canary Islands, Lanzarote, Punta Quemada, 3-15 m deep, 16.7 mm; 5, 6: paratype 3 (CRH), Canary Islands, Lanzarote, Punta Quemada, 3-15 m deep, 17.0 mm; 7, 8: shell (CRH), colour form, Canary Islands, northwest Gran Canaria, Sardina, 15.3 mm; 9: protoconch; 10: microsculpture of the protoconch; 11: operculum, shell size 5.0 mm; 12: animal, drawing, shell size 13.5 mm; 13: detail of the soft parts (P= penis); 14: penis; 15: periostracum from a paratype; 16: radula, shell size 5.0 mm; 17: Radula, shell size 13.5 mm. Figuras 1-13. Fusinus saundersi sp. nov.. 1, 2: holotipo (MNCN, 15.05/51.016), Islas Canarias, Lanzarote, Punta Quemada, 3-15 m de profundidad 19,6 mm; 3, 4: paratipo 1 (MHNS), Islas Canarias, Lanzarote, Punta Quemada, 3-15 m de profundidad, 16,7 mm; 5, 6: paratipo 3 ( CRH), Islas Canarias, Lanzarote, Punta Quemada, 3-15 m de profundidad, 17,0 mm; 7, 8: shell (CRH), forma de color, Islas Canarias, northwest Gran Canaria, Sardina, 15,3 mm; 9: protoconcha; 10: microescultura de la protoconcha; 11: operculo, con- cha de 5,0 mm; 12: dibujo del animal, concha de 13,5 mm; 13: detalle de las partes blandas (P- pene); 14: pene; 15: periostraco de un paratipo; 16: radula, concha de 5,0 mm; 17: radula, concha de 13,5 mm. 87 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Additional material: Canary Islands, Rolán Collection 15657 (MHNS), 2 lv, 1 dd juv. - Canary Islands, Gran Canaria, Las Palmas, Rolán Collection 16128 (MHNS), 1 dd. - Canary Islands, north- west Gran Canaria, Sardina, 15 m deep, CJH, 3 lv, 2 lv juv; CRH, 2 lv [in alcohol]. - Canary Islands, northwest Gran Canaria, Sardina, 15 m deep, CJH, 17 dd juv. Type locality: Punta Quemada, Lanzarote, Canary Islands, 3-15 m deep. Etymology: Named after G.D. Saunders, the first author who recorded shells of this species. Description: Shell (Figs. 1-8) small (up to 25 mm), fusiform, sinistral, con- sisting of about 8 convex whorls (inclu- ding protoconch) with a slight subsutu- ral concavity. Light brown to dark brown, with a distinct white band at periphery. Usually lighter coloured on axial ribs, darker in the interspaces. A uniformly light brown colour form exists with darker brown interspaces between axial ribs. Spire angle broad (about 35-40°). Suture incised, wavy according to the axial ribs of preceding whorl. Protoconch (Fig. 9) dark brown, glossy, consisting of 1 % to 1 3á whorls. Last part (14 whorl) ornamented with 4- 5 strong axial riblets, reaching from suture to suture, separated by broad, deep interspaces. Microsculpture (Fig. 10) of very small granules only in the non eroded material. Diameter 0. 8-1.0 mm. Axial sculpture consisting of broad, oblique axial ribs, traversing from below the subsutural concavity to the lower suture; most prominent at periphery, separated by narrow deep interspaces. 7 or 8 axial ribs on upper postnuclear whorls, 9 on antepenultimate, 10 or 11 on penultimate and 11-13 on body whorl. Fine axial growth lines are well visible. Spiral sculpture consisting of broad, strong, rounded spiral cords, more pro- minent when Crossing the axial ribs, weaker in the interspaces. Teleoconch beginning with 3 strong, light brown to white coloured primary spiral cords; the abapical cord strongest, the 2 abapical cords usually lighter coloured. From the second whorl onwards an additional fine spiral cord appears below the 3 central cords, soon becoming as strong as the subsutural cord. A fine secondary spiral cord intercalated between the primary cords on the penultimate and body whorls. Some indistinct fine spiral cords of different strength visible in the subsutural area. Aperture ovate, pinched at both ends, brown coloured, the white band well-visible inside the aperture. Outer lip thin, edge slightly crenulated, with numerous fine internal lirae. Parietal callus thin, almost obsolete, smooth. Columella smooth. Siphonal canal short, slightly curved to the right and slightly bending backwards, widely open. Aper- ture and siphonal canal together about 2 h of total shell length. Periostracum (Fig. 15) fine, light brown, hairy. Operculum (Fig. 11) corneous, light brown, thin, ovate, filling aperture, ada- pically rounded, abapically with termi- nal nucleus, ornamented with fine con- centric growth lines. Radula (Figs. 16, 17) fasciolariid, typical for genus. Central tooth tricus- pid, elongate, with broad convex base and narrow rounded tip. Lateral teeth strongly curved, broad, with 8-10 strong, broad, rather short cusps with incurved tips. At inner end with a small denticle. Animal (Figs. 12, 13) red with small white spots, a large ctenidium with very numerous lamellae, placed at right side. The penis (Fig. 14) is placed behind the left eye and is lanceolate, leaf shaped, and relatively short. Range and habitat: Canary Islands, reported from Gran Canaria, Tenerife and Lanzarote, live collected specimens 3-15 m deep. Comparison: F. elegans (Reeve, 1848) was erroneously placed in synonymy with Fusus maroccensis (Gmelin, 1791) by Tryon, 1881 (p. 66). F. elegans (Figs. 22- 24) differs from F. maroccensis (Figs. 18- 21) by the white or cream coloured shell, the white protoconch, the weaker and less conspicuous but somewhat broader 88 Hadorn AND RoláN: Two new Fusinus from the Canary Islands Figures 18-21. Fusinus maroccensis (Gmelin, 1791). 18: original Figures in CHEMNITZ, 1788, pl. 105, figs. 896; 19: original Figure in REEVE, 1848, pl. 19, Fig. 72; 20, 21: West Morocco, oFF Agadir, 17.9 mm (CRH). Figures 22-24. Fusinus elegans (Reeve, 1848). 22: original Figures in REEVE, 1848, pl. 21, Figs. 87a-b; 23, 24: Western Sahara, Cape Barba, 32 m deep, 26.9 mm (CJH). Figures 25-33. Fusinus hernandezi sp. nov., Canary Islands, northwest Gran Canaria, 28° 06’ 46” N, 15° 48’ 85” W, 150-200 m deep. 25, 26: holotype (MNCN 15.05/51.017), 16.4 mm; 27, 28: paratype 1 (MHNS), 14.0 mm; 29, 30: paratype 3 (CRH), 14.6 mm; 31: operculum; 32: protoconch; 33: detail oF the periostracum. Figuras 18-21. Fusinus maroccensis ( Gmelin , 1791). 18: figuras originales en CHEMNITZ, 1788, lám. 105, figs. 896; 19: figuras originales en REEVE, 1848, lám. 19, fig. 72; 20, 21: Marruecos oeste, frente a Agadir, 17,9 mm (CRH). Figuras 22-24. Fusinus elegans (Reeve, 1848). 22: figuras originales en REEVE, 1848, lám. 21, figs. 87a-b; 23, 24: Sahara Occidental, Cabo Barba, 32 m de profundidad, 26,9 mm (CfH). Figuras 25-33. Fusinus hernandezi sp. nov., Islas Canarias, noroeste de Gran Canaria, 28° 06 ’ 46” N, 15° 48’ 85” W, 150-200 m de profundidad. 25, 26: holotipo (MNCN 15.05/51.017), 16,4 mm; 27, 28: paratipo 1 (MHNS), 14,0 mm; 29, 30: paratipo 3 (CRH), 14,6 mm; 31: opérculo; 32: protoconcha; 33: detalle del periostracum. 89 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 axial ribs and the finer, less conspicuous and more numerous spiral cords. The smooth subsutural concavity in F. elegans is only well visible in large adult specimens. F. elegans (Figs. 22-24) from the Western Sahara differs from F. saundersi sp. nov. by the white to cream coloured shell, the white protoconch, the longer, more delicate and more slender spire, the whorls excavated below the suture (only in adult specimens), the weaker and less distinct white axial ribs, the more close-set spiral cords and the sha- llower interspaces between them. F. maroccensis (Figs. 18-21) from West Morocco differs from F. saundersi sp. nov. by the light brown to cream colou- red shell, the light brown protoconch, the longer, more delicate and more slender spire, the more incised suture, the more convex whorls, the weaker, narrower and slightly oblique white axial ribs, the more prominent spiral cords and the deeper grooves between them. Fusinus hernandezi sp. nov. (Figs. 25-33) Type material: Holotype (Figs. 25-26) (MNCN 15.05/51.017) (16.4 x 7.7 mm, lv). - Paratype 1 (Figs. 27-28) (MHNS) (14.0 x 6.7 mm, lv). - Paratype 2 (CJH) (12.7 x 6.4 mm, lv). - Paratype 3 (Figs. 29- 30) (CRH) (14.6 x 6.9 mm, lv). Additional material: 2 juvenile specimens (6.4 mm / 5.7 mm) from type locality (CJH). 1 shell (14.5 mm) from Canary Islands, northwest Gran Canaria, 28° 02' 049" N, 15° 52' 580" W, 250 m deep (CFD). Type locality: Northwest Gran Canaria, Canary Islands, 28° 06' 46" N, 15° 48' 85" W, 150-200 m deep. Etymology: Named after José María Hernández who collected the studied material. Description: Shell (Figs. 25-30) small (up to 17 mm), white with inconspi- cuously brownish tinged interspaces between axial ribs, fusiform, spire elon- gate but rather broad, consisting of about 7 convex whorls including proto- conch. Suture constricted, incised, wavy according to the axial sculpture of prece- ding whorl. Protoconch (Fig. 32) white to cream, bulbous, smooth, glossy, consisting of 1 Vi whorls, last part (J4 whorl) ornamen- ted with 4-6 axial riblets reaching from suture to suture, becoming stronger and broader towards the end of protoconch. Diameter 0. 8-1.0 mm. Axial sculpture consisting of about 9 or 10 strong, broad axial ribs per whorl, 11 or 12 on body whorl, reaching from just below the upper suture to the lower suture, separated by rather deep narrow interspaces. Spiral sculpture consisting of 5 rather fine, rounded, primary spiral cords, separated by broad interspaces and by 2 fine subsutural inconspicuous cords. An intercalated fine secondary spiral cord appears from the fourth postnuclear whorl onwards. Aperture round-ovate, white, with about 10 or 11 strong internal lirae. Outer lip crenulated. Parietal callus adherent, thin, inconspicuous, smooth, underlying spiral sculpture of the body whorl well visible through the callus. Columellar folds absent. Siphonal canal about as long as aperture length, open, slightly curved to the left and backwards. Outer side orna- mented alternating strong primary and fine secondary spiral cords. Aperture and siphonal canal together about Vi of total shell length. Periostracum (Fig. 33) thin, transpa- rent, light brown, slightly hairy. Operculum (Fig. 31) corneous, thin, light brown, with terminal nucleus, filling aperture. Animal and radula were not studied due to the scarcity of the material avai- lable. Range and habitat: Known only from northwest Gran Canaria, Canary Islands, 150-250 m deep. 90 Hadorn AND RoláN: Two new Fusinus from the Canary Islands Figures 34, 33. Fusinus sectus (Locard, 1897), Holotype (MNHN), off Mauritania, 24.5 mm. Figures 36, 37. Fusinus tenerifensis Hadorn and Rolán, 1999, Canary Islands, La Palma, Santa Cruz de La Palma (CRH), 21.5 mm. Figures 38-41. Fusinus species, Canary Islands, northwest Gran Canaria. 38, 39: 180 m deep, 39.3 mm (CJH); 40, 41: 280 m deep, 36.9 mm (CFD). Figuras 34, 35. Fusinus sectus (Locard, 1897), Holotipo (MNHN), frente a Mauritania, 24,5 mm. Figuras 36, 37. Fusinus tenerifensis Hadorn and Rolán, 1999, Islas Canarias, La Palma, Santa Cruz de La Palma ( CRH), 21,5 mm. Figuras 38-4 1 . Fusinus species, Islas Canarias, noroeste de Gran Canaria. 38, 39: 180 m de profundidad, 39,3 mm (CJH); 40, 41: 280 m de profundidad, 36,9 mm (CFD). Comparison: 2 large, dead, entirely white specimens (Figs. 38-41) were collected near the type locality (28° 07' N, 15° 50' W, 180 m deep, 39.3 x 19.1 mm, CJH / 28° 03' 280" N, 15° 53' 708" W, 280 m deep, 36.9 x 16.9 mm, CFD). Both shells resemble superficially F. her- nandezi sp. nov., but differ by the much larger size, the smaller number (about 8- 10 per whorl) of stronger and broader axial ribs and the wider interspaces between them. Until more material is collected, we prefer to leave this distinct species undescribed. F. sectus (Locard, 1897) (Figs. 34-35) differs from F. hernandezi sp. nov. in the less constricted suture, the less convex whorls, the smaller number of strong primary spiral cords with broader interspaces between them, the conspi- cuously large number of fine secondary spiral cords mainly on the shoulder but 91 Iberus , 27 (2), 2009 also between the primary spiral cords, and the less conspicuous axial ribs. F. tener if ensis Hadorn and Rolán, 1999 (Figs. 36-37) differs from F. hernan- dezi sp. nov. by the larger size, the more elongate spire, the brown coloured shell ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We are grateful to the late José María Hernández (Spain) and to Francisco Déniz (Spain) for providing their mate- rial for study and comparison and to Koen Fraussen (Belgium) for advice and reading the manuscript. The SEM micrographs were made by Jesús BIBLIOGRAPHY Ardovini R. and Cossignani T. 2004. West African Seashells (including Azores, Madeira and Canary Is.). LTnformatore Piceno, An- cona. 319 pp. Bouchet P. and Warén A. 1985. Revisión of the northeast Atlantic bathyal and abyssal Ne- ogastropoda excluding Turridae (Mollusca, Gastropoda). Bolletino Malacologico, Suple- mento 1:121-296, 723 figs. Buzzurro G. and Russo P. 2007. Fusinus del Mediterráneo - Mediterranean Fusinus. Pri- vately published. Milano, 280 pp. Chemnitz J.H. 1788. Neues Systematisches Conchylien Cabinet, Vol. 10: 1-376, register 1-124, pls. 137-173. Hadorn R. and Rolán E. 1999. Two new Fu- sinus (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae) from north- west Africa and the Canary Islands, including a brief description of the type material of Fu- sinus crassus (Pallary, 1901). Argonauta 13(1): 39-47. Hadorn R., Afonso C.M.L. and Rolán E. 2009. A new Fusinus (Gastropoda: Fasciola- riidae) from the Algarve, south coast of Por- tugal. Iberus 27(1): 119-129. Hadorn R. and Ryall P. 1999. A new species and a new subspecies of deep water Fusinus (Gastropoda: Fasciolariidae) from the eas- tern Atlantic. Argonauta 13(1): 35-38. with brown protoconch, the more pro- nounced axial sculpture, the deeper interspaces between the axial ribs, the smaller number of axial ribs, and the stronger primary spiral cords with strong intercalated secondary cords. Méndez and Inés Pazos in the Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnológico a la Investigación (CACTI) of the University of Vigo, Spain. We thank also Virginie Héros, Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris, France, for the loan of type material. Nordsieck F. 1982. Die europáischen Meeres- Geháuseschnecken (Prosobranchia) vom Eis- meer bis Kapverden, Mittelmeer und Schwarzes Meer. 2. vollig neu bearbeitete und erweiterte Auflage. Stuttgart: Gustav Fischer Verlag. i-xii, 1-539 pp., pl. 1-108. Reeve L.A. 1847-1848. [Monograph of the ge- nus Fusus]. Conchologia Iconica 4: [unpagi- neted text], pls. 1-21. [pls. 1-14, 1847; pls. 15- 21, 1848], Sabelli B., Glannuzzi-Savelli R. and Bedulli D. 1990. Catalogo annotato dei molluschi marini del Mediterráneo. Societá Italiana di Malacologia. Bologna: Librería Naturalistica Bolognese 1: i-xiv, 1-348. Saunders G.D. 1978. Sinistral Fusinus from Lanzarote (Canary Islands). La Conchiglia 10 (110/111): 18-19. Smythe K. and Chatfield J. 1984. Fusinus ( Si - nistralia ) somaliensis: a new species of whelk from Mogadiscio, Somalia. The Journal ofCon- chology 31: 307-310. Tryon G.W. 1880-1881. Manual of conchology, structural and systematic, with illustrations of the species. Volume 3. Tritonidae, Fusidae, Buccinidae. Philadelphia. 310 pp., 87 pls. [5- 64, 1880; 65-310, 1881], 92 Iberia, 27 (2): 93-98, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Two new species of Putzeysia (Prosobranchia, Chilodontidae) from the Canary Islands Dos nuevas especies de Putzeysia (Prosobranchia, Chilodontidae) de las islas Canarias Winfried ENGL* and Emilio HOLÁN** Recibido el 23-III-2009. Aceptado el l-X-2009 ABSTRACT Two new species of the genus Putzeysia are described, showing the shell characters, including protoconch and microsculpture; the new species are compared with the only known Mediterranean species for the genus, P. wiseri. RESUMEN Se describen dos nuevas especies del género Putzeysia, presentándose las caracterís- ticas de la concha, incluida la protoconcha y la microescultura; las nuevas especies se comparan con la única de este género que se conoce en el mar Mediterráneo, P. wiseri. INTRODUCTION In Europe, only one species of the genus Putzeysia Sulliotti, 1889 was known hitherto: Putzeysia wiseri (Calcara, 1842), which is well illustrated in Gian- nuzzi-Savelli, Pusateri, Palmeri and Ebreo (1994, fig. 263) and Ardovini and Cossign ani (1999: 34). In the material collected in several dredgings in the Canary Islands, numer- ous shells of a minute species group were found. In Engl (1994) these specimens were identified as P. wiseri in spite of differences in the height/ width range. After a more detailed comparison (mainly through scan- ning electrón microscopy) of this materi- al with the Mediterranean species, two closely similar but different species are described as new in the present work. * Kolner Str. 231. 40227 Dusseldorf, Germany ** Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Abbreviations MHNS Museo de Historia Natural, San- tiago de Compostela MNCN Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid MNHN Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle, París MNHC Museo de la Naturaleza y el Hombre, Santa Cruz de Tenerife SMNH Seckenberg Museum Natural History, ZMH Zoologisches Museum, Ham- burg ZMB Zoologisches Museum, Berlin ZSM Zoologische Staatssammlung, München, CWE Collection of Winfried Engl Sur, 15782 Santiago de Compostela, Spain 93 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 SYSTEM ATICS Superfamily Seguenzioidea Verrill, 1884 Family Chilodontidae Wenz, 1938 Subfamily Chilodontinae Genus Putzeysia Sulliotti, 1889 Type species: Trochus clathratus Aradas, 1847 [= Trochus zviseri Calcara 1842]. Putzeysia franziskae spec. nov. (Figs. 3, 7, 8, 11-13) Type material: Holotype (ZSM 20090099)(Figs. 3, 7) and five paratypes (ZSM 20090100). Other paratypes in the following collections: MHNS (1), MNCN (1), MNHC (1), MNHN (1), SMNH (2), ZMH (2), ZMB (2), CWE (100) (all ex CWE, collected from 1975 to 2000). Type locality: Puerto del Carmen, Lanzarote, Canary Islands, 30-50 m. Etymology: This species is named after Franziska, the mother of the first author. Description : Shell (Figs. 3) turbinoid, globose, with 4-4 % spiral whorls of a rather quick development, last one rounded, representing more that 60 % of the total height. Protoconch (Fig. 7) with less than one whorl, a diameter of 290 jum and a nucleus of about 110 pm. Under strong magnification (Fig. 8) a microsculp- ture consisting of irregular shapes is observed, as well as 2 fine oblique threads. Teleoconch whorls with axial ribs: 12 on the first whorl, 14-16 on the second, about 30 on the last whorl, which are strongly prosocline, and narrower than the inter- spaces. The spiral cords are not present on the first teleoconch whorl; near the end of the second a small thread appears in the upper part, Crossing over the axial ribs, forming nodules at the Crossing points; in the third whorl there are three well defined spiral cords, and, on the last whorls, there are five, the subsutural one smaller and cióse to the next one. Below the end of the spire, there are five nodu- lous cords down to the base. The microsculpture (Figs. 11-13) is formed by small, short and interrupted threads which are present on the whole surface. Aper- ture rounded, peristome sharp, serrated due to the end of the spiral cords. There is an internal thickening on which 5-7 rounded nodules can be seen. No umbili- cus. The columella is straight, with an everted border. Colour dirty white. Dimensions : The holotype has a height of 3.5 mm. Distribution : Presently known only from Lanzarote. Remarks : The assignation of the present species to the genus Putzeysia was based on the description of this genus in Wenz (1938: 282) and the simi- larity with the European species P. wiseri (Calcara, 1842). Anyway, both species are very different because the new one is smaller than P. zviseri (which can reach 5.6 mm height: Figs. 1-2); the protoconchs are similar, but that of P. zviseri is some- what larger (310 jum), less sculptured, the first whorl of the teleoconch has 17 axial ribs (vs. 12), and the microsculpture is denser. Putzeysia juttae spec. nov. (Figs. 4, 9, 10, 14-16) Type material: Holotype (ZSM 20090101)(Figs. 4, 13) and five paratypes (ZSM 20090102). Paratypes in the following collections: MHNS (1), MNCN (1), MNHC (1), MNHN (1), SMNH (2), ZMH (2), ZMB (2), CWE (50) (all ex CWE, collected from 1999 to 2000). Type locality: La Restinga, El Hierro, Canary Islands, 30-60 m. Etymology: The species is named after Jutta Baumgartel, the wife of the leader of the diving school in acknowledgement for her help to the first author in many aspects of collecting, for the last ten years. 94 ENGL AND RoláN: Two new species of Putzeysia from the Canary Islands Figures 1-5. Shells of Putseysia spp, all to scale. 1, 2: Putzeysia wiseri (Calcara, 1842), 5.6 mm, Banca di Santa Lucia, Livorno, Italy, 400 m (CWE); 3: P. franziskae spec. nov. holotype, 3.5 mm, Lanzarote (ZSM); 4: P. juttae spec. nov., holotype, 3.8 mm, El Hierro (ZSM); 5: P. cf. juttae, Los Cancajos, Santa Cruz de La Palma, 40 m (CWE). Figuras 1-5. Conchas de Putseysia spp, a la misma escala. 1, 2: Putzeysia wiseri (Calcara, 1842), 5,6 mm, Banca di Santa Lucia, Livorno, Ltalia, 400 m (CWE); 3: P. franziskae spec. nov. holotipo, 3,5 mm, Lanzarote (ZSM); 4: P. juttae spec. nov., holotipo, 3,8 mm, El Hierro (ZSM); 5: P. cf. juttae. Los Cancajos, Santa Cruz de La Palma, 40 m ( CWE). Description: Shell (Fig. 4) turbinoid, globose, with 4-4 3á spiral whorls of a rather quick development, last one rounded, representing more that 60 % of the total height. Protoconch (Fig. 9) with less than one whorl, a diameter of 270 pm and a nucleus of about 160 jUm. Under strong magnification (Fig. 10), a microsculpture formed by small irregu- lar projections can be observed. Teleo- conch whorls with axial ribs: 16 on the first whorl, 17-18 on the second, 24-26 on the last whorl, which are strongly prosocline and narrower than the inter- spaces. The spiral cords are not present on the first teleoconch whorl; near the middle of the second whorl a small thread appears on the upper part, Cross- ing over the axial ribs, forming nodules at the Crossing points and increasing slowly; on the third whorl there are three well defined cords and, on the last 95 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figures 6-10. Protoconchs. 6: Putzeysia wiseri Santa Lucia (Livorno), Italy, 440 m; 7, 8: P. franziskae spec. nov. Lanzarote (ZSM); 9, 10: P. juttae spec. nov., El Hierro (ZSM). Figures 6-10. Protoconchas. 6: Putzeysia wiseri Santa Lucia (Livorno), Ltalia, 440 m; 7, 8: P. franziskae spec. nov. Lanzarote (ZSM); 9, 10: P. juttae spec. nov., El Hierro (ZSM). whorl, there are five, the subsutural one a little smaller in some shells than the subsequent ones. Below the end of the spire, there are four nodulous cords down to the base. The microsculpture (Figs. 14-16) is formed by small, short and interrupted spiral threads which are present on the first whorls. On the remaining shell surface numerous growth lines with many prominent tubercles can be seen under strong mag- nification. Aperture rounded, peristome narrow, serrated due to the ends of the spiral cords. There is an internal thick- 96 Engl AND RoláN: Two new species of Putzeysia from the Canary Islands Figures 11-16. Details of microsculpture. 11-13: P. franziskae spec. nov., Lanzarote (ZSM); 14-16: P. juttae spec. nov., El Hierro (ZSM). Figuras 11-16. Detalles de microescultura. 11-13: P. franziskae spec. nov., Lanzarote (ZSM); 14-16: P. juttae spec. nov., El Hierro (ZSM). 97 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 ening on which 6-7 rounded nodules can be seen. No umbilicus, but a narro w fissure. The columella is straight forming an everted border. Colour dirty white. Dimensions : The holotype has a height of 3.8 mm. Distribution : Known only from El Hierro, although one shell from La Palma (Fig. 5) could belong to this species. Remarks: Putzeysia juttae spec. nov. is rather similar to Putzeysia franziskae spec. nov. and for this reason the differ- ences with P. wiseri are the same as those previously mentioned, although it has 15 axial ribs on the first teleoconch whorl. It can be separated from Putzeysia franziskae because the latter has more axial ribs and cords at the base; the protoconch has a larger nucleus, and the ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors thank Jesús Méndez and Inés Pazos of the Centro de Apoyo Científico y Tecnológico (CACTI) of the BIBLIOGRAPHY Ardovini R. and Cossignani T. 1999. Atlante delle conchiglie di profonditd del Mediterráneo. L'Informatore Piceno Ed., Ancona. 111 pp. Giannuzzi-Savelli R., Pusateri F., Palmeri A. and Ebreo C. 1994. Atlante delle conchiglie marine del Mediterráneo. Vol. 1. La Conchiglia ed., Roma. 125 pp. Dautzenberg P. and Fischer H. 1896. Dra- gages effectués par l'Hirondelle et par la Princesse Alice 1888-1895. 1. Mollusques Gas- tropodes. Mémoires de la Société Zoologique de Prance, 9: 395-498, pl. 15-22. microsculpture has a predominance of the very tuberculated axial growth lines instead of the irregular spiral threads which appears in Putzeysia juttae. The presence of these two different species within one archipelago is surpris- ing, considering that other cióse trochoid species with a similar protoconch do not show appreciable differences within one island or seamount group. In the genus Danilia, Dautzenberg and Fischer (1896) distinguished Danilia affinis as a different species from the Azores, but in the Canary islands we find the same species as in continental Europe. Something similar occurs with the genus Clelandella (see Gofas, 2005) which has different species in the Lusitanian bañes and in the Meteor group of seamounts, but shows no differentiation within seamounts or islands of the same group. University of Vigo for the SEM pho- tographs, and Antonio A. Monteiro for the English correction. Engl W. 1995. Putzeysia wiseri (Archaeogas- tropoda, Trochidae) a common species at Lanzarote Is. (Canary Islands, Spain). No- tiziario CISMA , 16: 23-26. Gofas S. 2005. Geographical differentiation in Clelandella (Gastropoda: Trochidae) in the northeastern Atlantic. Journal of Molluscan Studies, 71 (2): 133-144. Wenz W. 1938-1944. Handbuch der Palaozoologie. 6. Gastropoda, I. Allgemeiner Teil und Proso- branchia. Gebrüder Borntraeger, Berlin. 1638 pp. 98 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberus , 27 (2): 99-105, 2009 Moluscos continentales de los alrededores de Molina de Aragón (Guadalajara, España), con notas sobre Orculella bulgarica (Hesse, 1915) (Gastropoda, Orculidae) Non-marine molluscs of the surroundings of Molina de Aragón (Guadalajara, Spain), with notes on Orculella bulgarica (Hesse, 1915) (Gastropoda, Orculidae) Fernando ROBLES* y Alberto MARTÍNEZ-ORTÍ** Recibido el 17-VI-2009. Aceptado el l-X-2009 RESUMEN La fauna malacológica de los alrededores de Molina de Aragón (Guadalajara) está com- puesta por al menos 35 especies, 27 terrestres y ocho acuáticas, de las que 10 habían sido citadas anteriormente. La forma descrita como Pupo dolium Draparnaud var. nova por Westerlund (1 897) se asigna a Orculella bulgarica (Hesse, 1915), de acuerdo con la revisión del material original. Esta especie está presente en 35 localidades del este de la Península Ibérica, distribuidas desde el límite Plio-Pleistoceno hasta la actualidad y ha sufrido una importante regresión en su extensión geográfica, que se limita en el presente a escasas localidades conocidas en un área muy restringida de la provincia de Granada. ABSTRACT The malacological fauna of the surroundings of Molina de Aragón (Guadalajara, Spain) is composed by at least 35 species, 27 terrestrial and eight aquatic, of which 10 had been mentioned previously. The morph described as Pupa dolium Draparnaud var. nova by Westerlund (1897) has been assigned to Orculella bulgarica (Hesse, 1915), following revisión of the original material. This species is present in 35 localities of eastern Iberian Península, distributed from the Plio-Pleistocene boundary to present, and has suffered an important regression in its geographical extensión. Nowadays it is only known from few localities in a very restricted area of the Granada province. INTRODUCCIÓN Westerlund (1897) describió una variedad de " Pupa dolium Drp.", indi- cando que se trataba de una nueva variedad. El hecho de que se publicase en una corta nota presentada por el geólogo Salvador Calderón a la Socie- dad Española de Historia Natural y publicada en las Actas de dicha Socie- dad, dentro de una lista de "moluscos recogidos por él en Molina de Aragón" (sic), ha propiciado que este taxon haya pasado desapercibido por los malacólo- * Departamento de Geología. Facultat de Biología. Universitat de Valencia, d Dr. Moliner 50. E-46100 Burjassot (Valencia, España). Email: Fernando.Robles@uv.es ** Departamento de Zoología. Facultat de Biología. Universitat de Valencia y Museu Valencia d’FIistória Natural. Passeig de la Petxina, 15. 46008 Valencia. Email: alberto.martinez@uv.es 99 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 gos que se han ocupado de revisar la fauna de Pupillacea de la Península Ibérica. Los autores han muestreado en reiteradas ocasiones los alrededores de Molina de Aragón, en busca de ejempla- res que puedan asignarse a este taxon, con resultados negativos. Sin embargo se ha localizado la muestra original, estudiada por Westerlund, que se encuentra depositada en el Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales. La revi- sión de este material ha permitido aclarar el estatuto taxonómico de esta especie, así como establecer la natura- leza, actual o fósil, de estos ejemplares, que en la nota de Calderón se prestaba a confusión. Por otra parte, los resultados obtenidos en las prospecciones de los autores aportan nueva información sobre la composición de la fauna mala- cológica de un área poco estudiada hasta ahora. De hecho, la lista de Wes- terlund, publicada por Calderón (1897), sólo incluye las 10 especies siguientes: Cornu aspersum (O.F. Müller, 1774) (citada como Helix aspersa Müll.), Iberus gualterianus alonensis (Férussac, 1821) ( Helix alonensis Fer.), Xerosecta ari- gonis (Schmidt, 1853) ( Helix Arigoi (Rossm.) Bgt.), Cernuella virgata (Da Costa, 1778) ( Helix Dantezi Kob., Helix lauta Lowe, Helix luteata Farr.), ¿ Helicella madritensis ? (Rambur, 1868) ( Helix irrita (Berth.) Bgt.), Cochlicella acuta (O.F. Müller, 1774) ( Helix acuta Müll.), Zebrina detrita (O.F. Müller, 1774) ( Buliminus detritus Müll.), Jaminia quadridens quadri- dens (O.F. Müller, 1774) ( Buliminus qua- dridens Müll.), Oxyloma elegans (Risso, 1826) ( Succinea Pfeifferi Rossm. var. elata Band.) y Orculella bulgarica (Hesse, 1915) (Pupa dolium Drp. var. nova West.). MATERIAL Y MÉTODOS La recogida de muestras se realizó los días 1, 2 y 3 de Noviembre de 2002: Las muestras se encuentran depositadas en el Museu Valencia d'História Natural de Valencia. Las muestras fósiles se encuentran en la colección Robles (Departamento de Geología de la Uni- versitat de Valencia). La determinación de las especies se ha realizado por las características conquiológicas y, cuando estas no han sido suficientes, se ha reali- zado la disección y el estudio del aparato reproductor de los ejemplares. Se han examinado dos muestras de "Pupa dolium var. nova" depositadas en el Museo Nacional de Ciencias Natura- les de Madrid, MNCN-15.05/37017 (11 conchas) y MNCN-s/n (col. Azpeitia n°2481) (5 conchas), ambas procedentes de la recolección original de Calderón. RESULTADOS Moluscos de los alrededores de Molina de Aragón (Guadalajara) Se han muestreado seis localidades, con los resultados que se indican en la Tabla I. Sobre la identidad de "Pupa dolium Draparnaud. var. nova" (Westerlund 1897) Calderón (1897) indica que "se hallan en enormes cantidades las citadas variedades de Succinea Pfeifferi y Pupa dolium en los parajes que se encharcan durante la mayor parte del año en aquella región extremadamente húmeda". Esta observación parece indicar que se trata de especies actuales, que viven en la región. Sin embargo, en los muéstreos realizados se han reco- gido numerosos ejemplares vivos de Oxyloma elegans (a la que sin duda se refiere la cita de Westerlund de "Succi- nea Pfeifferi Rossm. var. elata Band.") pero no se ha hallado ningún ejemplar, actual o fósil, de Orculella bulgarica (a la que se refiere la cita de "Pupa dolium Drp. var nova" , como comentamos más adelante). La consulta realizada al Stockholm Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet (K. Sinde- mark, e-mail del 26 de Agosto de 2002) y al Góteborgs Naturhistoriska Museum (T. Nordander, e-mail de 2 de Septiembre de 2002), en los que está depositada la colección Westerlund, ha dado resultado negativo. Las muestras estudiadas están depositadas en la Colección Malacológica del Museo 100 ROBLES Y MartÍNEZ-OrtÍ: Moluscos continentales de Molina de Aragón Tabla I. Listado de especies halladas en los alrededores de Molina de Aragón (Guadalajara). Puntos de muestreo: (1). Junto a Fábrica en la salida de Molina, aguas abajo del río Gallo, chopera en el margen izquierdo (UTM: 30TWL939213). (2). Márgenes del río Gallo, 2 km aguas abajo de Molina. Chopera (UTM: 30TWL898228). (3). Margen izquierda del río Gallo, chopera aguas arriba de Molina (UTM: 30TWL936214). (4). Margen derecha del río Gallo, a la salida de Molina. Presa y secano (UTM: 30TWL945 194). (3). El Ponce. (UTM: 30TWL971207). (6). Subida al Castillo (UTM: 30TWL937223). Table I. List ofspecies collected in the surroundings of Molina de Aragón ( Guadalajara). Sites: (1). Near a factory in Molina, downstream Gallo river, poplar woods on the left river bank UTM: 3 0 TWL93 9213). (2). Gallo river banks, 2 km downstream from Molina. Poplar (UTM: 30TWL898228). (3). Gallo left river bank, poplar woods upstream from Molina (UTM: 30TWL936214). (4). Right bank of Gallo river, in Molina. Reservoir and dry field (UTM: 30TWL945194). (5). El Ponce (UTM: 30TWL971207). (6). Uphill towards the Castle (UTM: 30TWL937223). Especies Loe. 1 Loe. 2 Loe. 3 Loe. 4 Loe. 5 Loe. 6 Oxyloma elegans (Risso, 1 826) X X X X Cochlicopa lubrica (O.F. Müller, 1 11 4) X X X Vallonia costata (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X X X Pupilla muscorum (Linnaeus, 1758) X Granaría braunii braunii (Rossmassler, 1 842) X Jaminia q. quadridens (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X X Merdigera obscura (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X lebrina detrito (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X X Oxycbilus cellarius (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X X X X lonitoides nitidus (O.F. Müller, 1774) X X Vitrina pellucida (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X X Oligolimax annularis (Studer, 1 820) X Discus rotundatus (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X X X X X Deroceras lae ve (O.F. Müller, 1774) X Deroceras reticulatum (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X Milax nigricans (Philippi, 1 836) X Lehmannia valentiana (Férussac, 1822) X Jestacella baliotidea Draparnaud, 1 801 X Arion intermedius Normand, 1 852 X Arion hispanicus Simroth, 1 886 X Monacha cartusiana (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X X X X X Xerosecta arigonis (Schmidt, 1 853) X X X X X Cernuella virgata (Da Costa, 1 778) X Helicella madritensis (Rambur, 1 868) X Cepaea nemoralis (Linnaeus, 1758) X X X X X Iberus gualtieranus alonensis (Férussac, 1821) X Cornu aspersum (O.F. Müller, 1 774) X X X X X Potamopyrgus antipodarum (Gray, 1 843) X X Physa acuta (Draparnaud, 1 805) X tymnaea sp. X Radix sp. X X Anisus spirorbis (Linnaeus, 1758) X AncylusfluviatilisO. F. Müller, 1774 X Pisidium subtruncatum Malm, 1855 X 101 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figuras 1 , 2. Orculella bulgarica de Molina de Aragón (Guadalajara, España), (MNCNs/n, col. Azpeitia n°2481; H=7,25 mm; 0=3,20 mm). 1: ejemplar; 2: detalle de la escultura de la protoconcha. Figures 1, 2. Orculella bulgarica of Molina de Aragón ( Guadalajara, Spain), (MNCNs/n, Azpeitia coll. n°2481; H=7.25 mm; 0=3.20 mm). 1: specimen; 2: detail of the protoconch sculpture. Nacional de Ciencias Naturales de Madrid y están compuestas por un total de 16 conchas en buen estado de con- servación. La disposición de los plie- gues en la abertura coincide con la indi- cada en la descripción original (Wester- lund in Calderón, 1897: 52): "plica parie- talis inmersa, brevi, tenui et plicis colume- llaribus profundissimis obsoletus dis- tincta". La morfología de la teleoconcha y la microescultura de la protoconcha (Figs. 1, 2) permiten asignar esta varie- dad a O. bulgarica, de acuerdo con las detalladas descripciones de esta especie realizadas por Gittenberger (1983) y Garrido et al. (2005). Las medidas de las conchas (Tabla II) quedan dentro de la variabilidad indicada por estos autores. Las ejemplares estudiados no han sido recogidos vivos. Carecen de perios- traco y presentan la abertura rellena de sedimento. Sin embargo, la comparación de su estado de conservación con el que presentan otras muestras de diversa edad geológica (véase más adelante), incluso holocenas, parece indicar un carácter muy reciente de las conchas de Molina de Aragón. O. bulgarica fue descrita originaria- mente en Bulgaria y ha sido citada pos- teriormente en Rusia, Armenia y Turquía (véase información detallada en Garrido et al., 2005). Es una especie ampliamente representada en el Este de la Península Ibérica desde el Plio-Pleis- toceno hasta la actualidad, que ha sufrido una fuerte regresión de su área 102 ROBLES Y MartÍNEZ-OrtÍ: Moluscos continentales de Molina de Aragón Tabla II. Dimensiones de los ejemplares de “Pupa dolium var. nova” West, depositadas en el MNCN de Madrid. Table II. Dimensions of the specimens of Tupa dolium var. nova” West, stored in the MNCN of Madrid. máximo mínimo medio máximo mínimo medio máximo mínimo medio Altura 7,8 6,6 6,910,4 7,7 6,5 7,1 ±0,5 7,8 6,5 7,0 ±0,4 Diámetro 3,9 3,0 3,2 ±0,2 3,3 3,2 3,2 ±0,1 3,9 3,0 3,2 ±0,2 n 11 11 11 5 5 5 16 Muestra MNCN 15.05/37017 MNCN s/ns (col. Azpeitia 2481) Total de distribución. Dado que en las revisio- nes existentes (Gittenberger, 1983; Garrido, Arrébola y Bertrand, 2005; Arrebola y Garrido, 2008) se mencio- nan solamente unas pocas localidades, presentamos a continuación una recopi- lación de la distribución de esta especie (Fig. 3), basada en la información biblio- gráfica existente y en nuestros propios datos inéditos. La lista se ha confeccio- nado teniendo en cuenta la edad de las muestras y su localización geográfica, con las coordenadas UTM. Se añade la referencia bibliográfica cuando la locali- dad ha sido publicada previamente y el nombre del recolector (indicado por !), cuando se conoce. Plio-Pleistoceno : 1. - Hellín (Albacete). 30SXH16. Jodot (1959). (Birot y Solé Sabarís!). 2. - Almenara (Castellón). Yacimiento Casablanca 1. 30SYK40. Bech, Villalta y Abad (1997). (J.F. de Villalta!, Martí- nez-Ortí!) 3. - Cofrentes (Valencia). 30SXJ64. Inédito. (Robles y Ruano!). Pleistoceno medio : 4. - Ambrona (Soria). 30TWL45. Preece (1991) (Preece!). 5. - Redueñas (Madrid). 30TVL41. Inédito. (Hoyos y Robles!). 6. - Barranco de Pedro (Villarta, Cuenca). 30TXJ27. Inédito. (Collado y Robles!). 7. - Ermita de la Consolación (Villarta, Cuenca). 30TXJ26. Inédito. (Collado y Robles!). 8. - Mudarra (Huete, Cuenca). 30TWK24. Inédito (Daams!). 9. - Cúllar de Baza (Granada) 30SWG35. Robles (1989). (Alberdi!). Pleistoceno superior: 10. - Can Ubach y Cementerio viejo de Rubí (Barcelona). 31TDF19. Almera (1894-1907); Almera y Bofill (1898); Bofill y Haas (1920). (Almera!). 11. - km 8,6 de la CC-1413, cerca de Rubí (Barcelona). 31TDF19. Abad, Puis- ségur y Calzada (1986). 12. - Vélez Rubio (Almería). 30SWG86. Brunnacker y Lozek (1969). (Brunnacker!). 13. - Almansa (Albacete). 30SXJ60. Inédito. (Robles y Ruano!). Pleistoceno indiferenciado: 14. - Santes Creus (Tarragona). 31TCF67. Inédito (Torrens!) 15. - Horna (Guadalajara), 6 km al SW de Medinaceli. 30TWL45. Gitten- berger (1983). Preece (1991). (Preece!). 16. - Riotovi (Soria), 13 km al W de Medinaceli (Guadalajara) 30TWL35. Gittenberger (1983), Preece (1991). (Preece!). 17. - 0,4 km al NE de Galera (Granada). 30SWG37. Gittenberger (1993). (Falkner!). 18. - Turbera de Padul (Granada). 30SVF49. Madurga (1970, 1973). Holoceno: 19. - Cerro de la Virgen. Orce (Granada). 30SWG47. Gittenberger (1983) (Falkner!). 20. - Baides (Guadalajara), 20 km al SW de Medinaceli. 30TWL23. Gitten- berger (1983), Preece (1991). (Preece!). (Ca. 2640 + 70 años). 21. - Bicorp (Valencia). Inédito. 30SXJ93 (Peñalver!). 103 Iberus , 27 (2), 2009 Figura 3. Distribución, actual y fósil, de Orculella bulgarica en la Península Ibérica (cuadrado: población actual; círculos blancos: poblaciones subactuales y recientemente extinguidas; círculos negros: poblaciones fósiles). Figure 3. Distribution, recent and fossil, o/Orculella bulgarica in the Iberian Península (square: recent population; open áreles: subrecent and recently extinct populations; closed áreles: fossil populations). Subactual y actual: 22. - Molina de Aragón (Guadala- jara). 30TWL92. Westerlund en Calde- rón (1897). Subactual. 23. - Fuente Alta de Potrera (Granada). 30SVG72. Garrido et al. (2005). Actual. 24. - Venta del Río de Cortes (Granada). 30SVG83. Garrido et al. (2005). Actual (extinguido). 25. - Fuente Seca de Cortes. 30SVG83. Garrido et al. (2005). Actual (extinguido). 26. - Fuente de la Rambla de la Viña. 30SVG82. Garrido et al. (2005) Actual (extinguido). 27-32.- Arrébola y Garrido (2008) señalan la existencia de otras cinco poblaciones y una sexta localidad sólo con conchas recientes, sin indicar la situación exacta dentro de la provincia de Granada. Sin datos o dudoso: 33. - Cerca de la estación de Martorell (Barcelona). 31TDF19. Almera y Bofill (1898), Bofill y Haas (1920). 34. - Terrasa (Barcelona). 31TDG10. Bofill y Haas (1920) (Almera y Bofill!). 35. - Torrelles de Llobregat (Barce- lona). 31TDF17. Bech, Villalta y Abad (1997) (J. Bech!). 104 ROBLES Y Martinez-OrtÍ: Moluscos continentales de Molina de Aragón CONCLUSIONES De acuerdo con nuestras prospeccio- nes, la fauna malacológica de los alrede- dores de Molina de Aragón se compone de al menos 35 especies, de las que sola- mente 10 habían sido citadas previa- mente. De ellas, 27 son especies terrestres y ocho viven en ambientes acuáticos. La cita de " Pupa dolium Drap. var. nova" por Westerlund corresponde a Orculella burgarica (Hesse). La especie no ha vuelto a ser encontrada, pero el estudio de la muestra original indica que los ejemplares fueron recogidos muertos, por lo que esta especie debe de ser eliminada del catálogo de moluscos actuales de la región. El análisis de la distribución de esta especie, actual y fósil, en la Península Ibérica permite constatar la fuerte regre- sión que ha sufrido a lo largo del BIBLIOGRAFÍA Abad A., Puisségur J.J. y Calzada S. 1986. Nuevo yacimiento de moluscos fósiles en el Würm de Rubí (Barcelona, España). Geoga- ceta, 1: 41-42 Almera J. 1894-1907. Descripción de las terre- nos pliocénicos de la Cuenca del Bajo Llo- bregat y Llano de Barcelona. Memorias de la Real Academia de Ciencias y Artes de Barcelona, 3: 1-335. Almera J. y Bofill y Poch A. 1989. Moluscos fósiles recogidos en los terrenos pliocénios de Cataluña. Boletín de la Comisión del Mapa Ge- ológico de España, 24: 1-222. Arrebola J.R. y Garrido J.A. 2008. Orculella bul- garica (Hesse, 1915). Pp. 601-603. En Barea- Azcón J.M., Ballesteros-Duperón E y Mo- reno D. (coords.): Libro Rojo de los Invertebra- dos de Andalucía. 4 Tomos. Consejería de Medio Ambiente, funta de Andalucía, 1430 pp., Sevilla. Bech M., Villalta J.F. de y Abad A. 1997. Moliuscs Continentals del Pliocé Superior del Jaciment de Casablanca I (Almenara, Caste- lló de la Plana). Batalleria, 7: 25-29. Bofill A. y Haas F. 1920. Estudi sobre la ma- lacologia de les valls pirenaiques. Conca del Llobregat. Treballs del Museu de Ciéncies Na- turals de Barcelona, 3 (Serie zoológica, 13): 381- 831. Brunnacker K. y Lozek V. 1969. Loss-Vorkom- men in Sudostspanien. Zeitschrift für Geo- morphologie, N.F., 13: 297-316. tiempo. Se conocen 35 localidades repar- tidas entre el límite Plio-Pleistoceno y la actualidad, de las que ocho permane- cían inéditas y solamente en seis de ellas la especie continúa viviendo hoy en día. AGRADECIMIENTOS Al Dr. Torsten Nordander (Góte- borgs Naturhistoriska Museum) y a Mrs. Karin Sindemark (Stockholm Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet) por su información sobre la colección Wester- lund. Al Dr. Oscar Soriano por el envío del material del MNCN de Madrid y al Dr. Enrique Peñalver por su colabora- ción en los muéstreos. Finalmente al S.C.S.I.E. de la Universitat de Valencia por su ayuda en la realización de la foto- grafía realizada en el M.E.B Hitachi S- 4100. Calderón S. 1897. Moluscos recogidos en Molina de Aragón. Actas de la Sociedad Espa- ñola de Historia Natural (Segunda serie), 6 (26): 52-53. Garrido J.A., Arrébola J.R. y Bertrand M. 2005. Extant populations of Orculella bulgar- ica (Hesse, 1915) in Iberia. Journal ofConchol- ogy, 38 (6): 653-662. Gittenberger E. 1983. Beitráge zur Kenntnis der Pupillacea. IX. Nochmals über Orculidae. Proceedings Koninklijke Nederlandse Akademie van Wetenschappen, C86 (3): 325-342. Jodot P. 1959. Les faunes de mollusques conti- nentaux reparties dans le sud-est de l'Es- pagne entre le Miocéne supérieur et le Qua- ternaire. Memorias y comunicaciones del Insti- tuto Geológico de la Diputación Provincial de Barcelona, 17: 1-133. Madurga Marco M.C. 1970. Gasterópodos cuaternarios del Padul (Granada). Boletín de la Real Sociedad Española de Historia Natural (Sección Geológica), 68: 259-264 Madurga Marco M.C. 1973. Los gasterópodos dulceacuícolas y terrestres del Cuaternario español. Boletín de la Real Sociedad Española de Historia Natural (Sección Geológica), 71: 43-165 Preece R.C. 1991. Radiocarbon-dated mollus- can successions from the Holocene of central Spain. Journal of Biogeography, 18: 409-426. Robles F. 1989. Moluscos continentales del Plio- Pleistoceno de la cuenca de Guadix-Baza. Trabajos Neógeno-Cuaternario, 11:127-138. 105 Iberus , 27 (2): 107-112, 2009 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Geographical notes on Iberian Caudofoveata (Mollusca) Notas geográficas sobre los Caudofoveata (Mollusca) ibéricos Luitfried v. SALVINI-PLAWEN* Recibido el 29-IV-2009. Aceptado el 2-X-2009 ABSTRACT New records of Caudofoveata from samplings off Barcelona and off Galicia are pre- sented. They concern Chaetodermaf?) strigisquamatum transferred to Folcidens and F. vas- coniensis as well as two other species of Falcidens and two of Prochoetodermo s.l. This represents a noteworthy enlargement of the known geographical distribution. Some orga- nisational characters of the species are added. RESUMEN Se presentan nuevas citas de Caudofoveata procedentes de las costas de Barcelona y Galicia: Chaetodermaf?) strigisquamatum transferido en Falcidens y F. vasconiensis, asi como otras dos especies de Falcidens y dos de Prochaetoderma s.l. Se amplia el conoci- miento de su distribución geográfica y se añaden algunos caracteres en la organización de las especies. INTRODUCTION Caudofoveata are worm-shaped mol- luscs of generally 2-30 mm but up to 40 cm in length that burrow in marine sedi- ments in depths of 50-9000 m, under special conditions as shallow as 3 m. They are externally characterised by an apla- cophoran mantle with chitinous cuticle as well as unicellularly produced aragonitic sclerites; together with the Solenogastres, both clades reflect conservative levels of molluscan configuration (Salvini-Plawen, 2003, 2006). Currently, 125 species of Caudofoveata are described. Our knowl- edge of the diversity and distribution of the species in Iberian waters is still poor (cf. Salvini-Plawen, 1997). Apart from five taxa belonging to the bathial deep sea fauna of the eastern Atlantic, the known representatives of the Iberian shelf región inelude nine Caudofoveata species (cf. Salvini-Plawen, 1997; Scheltema and Ivanov, 2000). Material from more recent samplings revealed an enlargement of the geographical distribution of six species belonging to the Chaetodermatidae and Prochaetodermatidae. MATERIAL EXAMINED Caudofoveata were present in several samples from off Barcelona collected during the BIOMARE project (CTM2006- 13508-C02-02) from the continental slope and canyon at 41° 03" - 41° 15" N, 02° 04"- 02° 28" E, 550-850 m (see Table I). This mate- rial was provided by Joan Cartes and Valeria Mamouridis from the Instituí de Ciéncies del Mar (CMIMA-CSIC) in Barcelona. *Zentrum für organismische Systembiologie: Zoologie, Universitát Wien, AlthanstraEe 14, A- 1090 WIEN, Austria; Luitfried.Salvini-Plawen@univie.ac.at 107 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Table I. BIOMARE project and DIVA-Artabia sampling stations. Tabla I. Estaciones de muestreo de los proyectos BIOMARE y DIVA-Artabria. BIOMARE station coordinates depth species BIOM 1,BC 8 (27.02.07) (c.slope) 41°09'55"N, 02°25'59"E 850 m P alleni BIOM 1, BC 10 (27.02.07) (t. slope) 41°09'55"N, 02°25'59"E 800 m F. strigisquamatus BIOM 2, BC 7 (opril 2007) (c. slope) 41°10'00"N, 02°28'03"E 800 m F. strigisquamatus BIOM 2, BC 11 (april 2007) (canyon) 41°1 4'36"N, 02°26'58,'E 600 m F gutturosus BIOM 3, BC 3 (¡uly 2007) (canyon) 41°14"36"N, 02°28'49"E 650 m F. gutturosus , F. aequabilis BIOM 3, BC 8 (¡uly 2007) (c. slope) 41o10'01"N, 02 °26'25"E 800 m P. alleni BIOM 3, BC 14 (¡uly 2007) (canyon) 41 °03'52"N, 02°1 V29"E 800 m F strigisquamatus BIOM 3, BC 18 (¡uly 2007) (canyon) 41 °08'1 1 "N, 02°04'37,,E 650 m F. strigisquamatus BIOM 4, BC 3 (4.10.07) (canyon) 41 °1 4'48"N, 02°26'28"E 650 m P boucheti, P alleni BIOM 4, BC 4 (4.10.07) (canyon) 41 °1 4'48"N, 02°26'28"E 650 m P alleni, F aequabilis BIOM 8, BC 6 (feb. 2008) (canyon) 41°14'57"N, 02°27'00"E 550 m F. strigisquamatus DIVA-Artabria projects EBS-150 m (14.09.03) 43°33'N, 08°35'W P boucheti EBS-162 m (03.07.06) 43°34"N, 08°36"30"W P boucheti EBS-200 m (11.09.03) 43°40'N, 08°43'W P boucheti EBS-250 m (14.09.02) 43°41 '30"N, 08°45'W F. vasconiensis, P boucheti EBS-300 m (13.09.02) 43°42'N, 08°46'W P boucheti EBS-300 m (19.09.03) 43°42'N, 08°46'W F vasconiensis EBS-400 m (13.09.02) 43°44'N, 08°48'W F. vasconiensis, P. boucheti Samples with Caudofoveata were also available from the DIVA-Artabria projects (PGIDT01PXI20008PE; CTM-2004-00740 / MAR; PGIDT07PXIB000120PR) organised by Victoriano Urgorri (University of San- tiago de Compostela) and conducted off NW-Galicia in the Gulf of Ártabro outside the Ria de Ferrol between 43° 28" N, 08° 28" W and 45° 43" N, 09° 00" W, at 100-1000 RESULTS m depth; the samples were taken in Sep- tember 2002, September 2003 and July 2006 using an epibenthic sledge (EBS) (Table I). The holotype of Chaetoderma(? ) strigisquamatum Salvini-Plawen (Muséum National d"Histoire Naturelle Paris no. 21094) has been re-examined with respect to the mantle sclerites. Family Chaetodermatidae Falcidens strigisquamatus (Salvini-Plawen, 1977) Chaetoderma(?) strigisquamatum Salvini-Plawen, 1977. Bull. Mus. Nat. Hist. Nat. Paris 3e sér. (447), Zool 310: 419 [Type locality: Western Mediterranian Sea, Alborán Basin; 1491 m] This species was known based on a single specimen from the Sea of Alborán and tentatively described under the genus Chaetoderma(?) (Salvini-Plawen, 1977a). The investigations from off Barcelona yielded five additional indi- viduáis at 550-800 m (a voucher speci- men is deposited in the Museo Nacional 108 Salvini-PlaweN: Geographical notes on Iberian Caudofoveata (Mollusca) 2 3 4 Figures 1-4. Falcidens strigisquamatus. 1: mantle sclerites, a-b from the foregut región, c-e from the midgut región, f-h from the región of the midgut sac, h from the prepallial región, i-j from the pallial región, k from alongside the dorsoterminal sense organ; 2: mantle sclerite (60 x 20 pm) from the anterior foregut región of the holotype (see Figure la); 3: mantle sclerites from the ante- rior foregut región of specimen BIOM 3, BC 4; sclerite at left = 60 x 19 pm (see Figure la); 4: name-giving mantle scales from the regions of the midgut and midgut sac of specimen BIOM 3, BC 4 (see Figure le-g). Figuras 1-4. Falcidens strigisquamatus. 1: escleritos del manto, a-b de la región anterior del tubo digestivo, c-e de la región media del tubo digestivo, f-h de la región del saco digestivo, h de la región prepaleal, i-j de la región p aleal, k de la zona del órgano sensorial dorsoterminal; 2: escleritos del manto (60 x 20 pm) de la región anterior del tubo digestivo del holotipo ( ver Figura la); 3: escleritos del manto de la región anterior del tubo digestivo del espécimen BIOM 3, BC 4, esclerito de la izquierda 60 x 19 pm ( ver Figura la); 4: escamas del manto, mostrando el dibujo que da nombre a la especie, de las regiones media del tubo digestivo y del saco digestivo, del espécimen BIOM 3, BC 4 ( ver Figura le-g). de Ciencias Naturales MNCN, Madrid, no. 15.01/0005): BIOM 1, BC 10 (1 ind., 8 mm); BIOM 2, BC 7 (1 ind., broken, ante- riormost body región missing, 8.5 mm); BIOM 3, BC 14 (1 ind., 22 mm); BIOM 3, BC 18 (1 ind., 19 mm) (voucher specimen in MNCN); BIOM 8, BC 6 (1 ind., ante- riormost body región missing, 15.5 mm) Beyond the biogeographical data, some organisational features are added 109 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 here to supplement the original descrip- tion (holotype re-examined in Sept. 2008): (1) The species reaches a body length of 22 mm and occasionally the posteriormost región (of the pallial cavity) shows some orange incrustation. (2) The sclerites of the mantle cover (Fig. 1) at the middle and posterior body (región of midgut sac, "posterior trunk") are 140-350 ¡um long and of the special type to which the ñame is allud- ing. These elongate scales have longitu- dinal ridges and furrows of different number and length (Salvini-Plawen, 1977a; Figs 1 f-h and 4) and sometimes are slightly asymmetrical. The scales of the midgut región ("anterior trunk"; Fig. 1 c-e) are almost radially arranged. The sclerites of the anterior body (foregut región, "neck") show some variation correlated to the size (age) of the speci- mens: Large individuáis possess a cha- racteristic type of small, slender scales ranging from 30 x 12 ¡um to 70 x 25 ¡um and 75 x 18 ¡um (Figs 1 a, 2, 3), which in smaller animáis of up to 9 mm in length (re-examined holotype and other) are only sporadically present. In contrast, smaller specimens possess in the ante- rior body región roughly triangular scales (Fig. 1 b), which are scarce in large animáis. (3) The pedal shield (about 300 x 200 ¡um) is preorally fused by a not very prominent narrow portion (Fig. 6). (3) The frontally bilobed cere- bral ganglion has a distinct lobus impar. (4) The radula, scarcely visible in trans- parent whole mounts (see holotype), is represented by a pair of sickle-shaped teeth as is characteristic for the genus Falcidens (Salvini-Plawen 1968); the teeth are about 45 ¡um long and no sym- physis could be discerned. In the largest specimen, the whole apparatus (Fig. 5) showed an un-reinforced basal cone only 105 ¡um long (50 ¡um wide, 20 ¡um thick), the two short lateral supports (55 ¡um long, 50 ¡um wide) and small muscu- lar radula bolsters ("odontophores"; 80 x 0 50 ¡um). Falcidens vasconiensis Salvini-Plawen, 1996 Falcidens vasconiensis Salvini-Plawen, 1996. Bull. Soc. Zool. France 121: 341. [Type locality: East Atlantic, SE Bay of Biscay, Cap Bretón; 141-170 m] The species had been described from the southeastern-most región of the Bay of Biscaya (Salvini-Plawen, 1996, 1999). The new records with three individuáis at 250 m (4.5 mm), 300 m (5.5 mm) and 400 m (3 mm) evidence the presence of the species also off NW-Galicia. The mantle sclerites of the present specimens show some individual varia- tion but are typical for F. vasconiensis (Fig. 3 in Salvini-Plawen, 1999). The radula apparatus of the smallest speci- men (3 mm) with two pairs of lateral supports confirms the conspecificity (cf. Fig. 4 in Salvini-Plawen, 1999); only the pair of sickle-shaped teeth (pincers; 45 jum long) and the distal portion of the basal cone are reinforced. The pedal shield (about 150 x 135 ¡um) laterally Banks the mouth opening (Fig. 6). Family Prochaetodermaidae Prochaetoderma boucheti Scheltema and Ivanov, 2000 Prochaetoderma boucheti Scheltema and Ivanov, 2000. Journ. Molí. Stud. 66: 336 [Type locality: Western Mediterranean Sea, off Ceuta (Morocco); 425 m] This species had been partly con- differs by two rows of pedal shield fused with the sympatric P. iberogallicum scales and by the (likewise short, up to Salvini-Plawen, 1999, from which it 135 ¡um) elongate midbody sclerites pro- 110 Salvini-Plawen: Geographical notes on Iberian Caudofoveata (Mollusca) Figure 5. Falcidens strigisquamatus , hard parts of the radula apparatus; basal cone outlined in natural position and when turned into the plañe (dashed line). Figure 6. Pedal shields of Falcidens strigisquamatus (aboye) and Falcidens vasconiensis (below). Figura 5. Falcidens strigisquamatus, partes duras del aparato radular; barra basal dibujada en su posi- ción natural y doblada sobre el plano ( línea discontinua). Figura 6. Escudos pedios de Falcidens strigisquamatus (arriba) y Falcidens vasconiensis (abajo). vided with a distal median keel (Schel- tema and Ivanov, 2001). In some regions it is also sympatric with P. allerii (below): Apart from the published Iberian distribution of P. boucheti from the Southern Bay of Biscay, the Gulf of Cádiz, from off Ceuta and from off Málaga (Scheltema and Ivanov, 2000, 2001), additional findings can be reported. There are several records of P. boucheti from Galicia outside the Ria de Ferrol at 150-400 m, predominantly at 150 m. In addition, a single specimen was found off Barcelona with BIOM 4, BC 3 (650 m). Prochaetoderma alleni (Scheltema and Ivanov, 2000) Spathoderma alleni Scheltema and Ivanov, 2000. Journ. Molí. Stud. 66: 358 [Type locality: East Atlantic, Bay of Biscay; 860 m] The species is known from Iceland to the Mediterranean (Ivanov and Schel- tema, 2001) and in some regions it is sym- patric with P. boucheti (above); its eastern- most record comes from the Aegean Sea cióse to Limnos (emendation of Salvini- Plawen, 1977a: Stat. DS-08/ 14). It is cha- racterised by three rows of pedal shield scales and by the somewhat longitudinally rotated and asymmetrical midbody scle- rites (up to 250 jum). The known Iberian distribution refers to the Southern Bay of Biscay, to off central Portugal, to the Gulf of Cádiz and to off Morocco (off Ceuta to off Melilla; cf. Scheltema and Ivanov, 2000). There are four new records from off Barcelona: BIOM 1, BC 8; BIOM 3, BC 8 (4 mm long with up to 300 |Um long scales); BIOM 4, BC 3; BIOM 4, BC 4. Biogeographically, these findings border the occurrence of P. alleni from off Banyuls-sur-Mer/Cóte Vermeille (Mediterranean coast of France: Salvini- Plawen, 1977b; Scheltema and Ivanov, 2000). Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Additional species The presence of other Caudofoveata gutturosus (Kowalevsky, 1901) from BIOM species from off Barcelona has already been 2, BC 11 and BIOM 3, BC 3, as well as of communicated (Salvini-Plawen, 1997). Falcidens aequabilis Salvini-Plawen, 1972, There are additional records of Falcidens from BIOM 3, BC 3 and BIOM 4, BC 4. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The author is very grateful to Mag. Emanuel Redi (Vienna) for assistance in preparing the photo- BIBLIOGRAPHY IVANOV D.L. AND SCHELTEMA A.H. 2001. DÍS- tribution of known caudofoveate species (Mollusca, Aplacophora) around Iceland. Ruthenica 11: 1-6. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 1968. Über Lebend- beobachtungen an Caudofoveata (Mollusca, Aculifera), nebst Bemerkungen zum System der Klasse. Sarsia 31: 105-126. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 1977a. Caudofoveata (Mollusca) des Forschungsprojektes Polyméde. Bulletin du Museum national d 'His- toire naturelle, 3e sér. (447), Zoologie 310: 413- 421. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 1977b. Caudofoveata (Mollusca), Priapulida und Apode Ho- lothurien ( Labidoplax , Myriotrochus) bei Banyuls und im Mittelmeer allgemein. Vie et Milieu, 27 (A/ 1): 55-81. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 1996. Falcidens vasconien- s is spec. nov. (Mollusca, Caudofoveata) du plateau continental du Golfe de Gascogne. Bulletin de la Société Zoologique de France, 121 : 339-345. graphs and to Dr. Michael Stacho- witsch (Vienna) for polishing the English text. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 1997. Fragmented know- ledge on West-European and Iberian Caudo- foveata and Solenogastres. Iberus, 15 : 35-50. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 1999. Caudofoveata (Mo- llusca) from off the northern coast of the Ibe- rian Peninsula. Iberus, 17 (2): 77-84. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 2003. On the phyloge- netic significance of the aplacophoran Mol- lusca. Iberus 21 (1): 67-97. Salvini-Plawen L.v. 2006. The significance of the Placophora for molluscan Phylogeny. Venus 65: 1-17. SCHELTEMA A.H. AND IVANOV D.L. 2000. Prochaetodermatidae of the eastern Atlantic Ocean and Mediterranean Sea (Mollusca: Aplacophora). Journal of Molluscan Studies, 66: 313-362. SCHELTEMA A.H. AND IVANOV D.L. 2001. East- ern Atlantic Prochaetodermatidae revisited: the nonsynonymy of Prochaetoderma boucheti Scheltema and Ivanov (Aplacophora). Jour- nal of Molluscan Studies, 67: 396-398. 112 © Sociedad Española de Malacología Iberus, 27 (2): 113-154, 2009 Las especies de Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 (Mollusca, Neogastropoda) de Canarias y el área oeste africana de Mauritania y Sahara The species of Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 (Mollusca, Neogastropoda) from the Canary islands and the Western African area of Mauritania and the Sahara Joan Daniel OLIVER* y Emilio ROLÁN** Recibido el 10-VIII-2009. Aceptado el 5-X-2009 RESUMEN Se revisan las especies del género Chauvetia Monterosato, 1 884 encontradas en el área comprendida entre el archipiélago canario y la costa oesteafricana de Mauritania y Sahara. Se estudian 1 8 especies de las que 9 son descritas como nuevas. ABSTRACT The species of the genus Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 found in the area including the Canaries archipelago and the African coast of Mauritania and the Sahara are revised. 1 8 species are studied of which 9 are described as new species. INTRODUCCIÓN El género Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 se encuentra extendido desde el Mediterráneo, el Atlántico europeo, Canarias y la costa oeste africana desde Marruecos hasta Ghana. Se conocen algunas especies de este género desde hace muchos años y las descripciones de muchos taxones ha hecho que, unido a la variabilidad intraespecífica, el grupo tenga grandes dificultades para una completa y correcta ordenación y pre- sente bastantes taxones, muchos de ellos sinónimos. Se debe mencionar aquí que la varia- bilidad morfológica y cromática puede ser muy importante en el género Chauve- tia, y por ello no se puede hacer una sepa- ración simplista basada en unos pocos caracteres. Como ejemplo sirva mencio- nar que una concha de color castaño oscuro puede pertenecer a alguna de estas especies: Chauvetia brunnea, C. affinis, C. turritellata, C. crassior, C. tene- brosa y C. mamillata, entre otras. Por otro lado, la misma especie, como por ej., Chauvetia crassior, puede ser blanca, ama- rilla, castaña clara, castaña muy oscura, con bandas castañas y blancas, etc. Sabelli, Giannuzzi-Savelli y Bedulli (1991) citan para el Mediterráneo 15 espe- cies de Chauvetia que fueron descritas en 8 géneros diferentes y con unos 26 sinó- nimos, aún sin estar todos ellos exhausti- vamente referidos. * Alcorisa, 83-12C, E-28043 Madrid ** Museo de Historia Natural, Campus Universitario Sur, E-17582, Santiago de Compostela 113 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Nordsieck (1976) hace una revisión sobre este grupo, pero estamos de acuerdo con Micali (1999) en que este trabajo está lastrado por una gran canti- dad de errores y erratas interpretativas. Nordsieck y García-Talavera (1979) incluyen en su trabajo las espe- cies de Canarias describiendo nuevos taxones. Micali (1999) hizo una revisión de las especies de este género, pero prin- cipalmente de aquellas del Mediterrá- neo occidental y el Atlántico próximo. Oliver y Rolán (2008) estudiaron las especies del área de Dakar. Está en marcha un nuevo estudio del conjunto de las existentes en el Medite- rráneo, estrecho y Atlántico próximo y, en ese trabajo, se tratará de volver a revisar todo el género con las nuevas aportaciones existentes, especialmente con el estudio de nuevo material y la observación de protoconcha y escultura al microscopio electrónico de barrido. Mientras tanto, la reunión de una gran cantidad de ejemplares y conchas del área de estudio y próximas proce- dente de las colecciones de José Pedro Borges de Lisboa, José María Hernán- dez de Canarias, Peter Ryall de Maria Rain, Austria, Frank Swinnen de Lommel, Bélgica, y del Museo Nacional de Historia Natural de Paris, hizo posible la revisión del género por encima del área de Dakar que ya habían sido estudiada en un trabajo anterior (Oliver y Rolán, 2008). En el presente trabajo, el área de estudio, como se ha indicado, comprende la costa africana de Mauritania y Sahara Occidental, así como el archipiélago de Canarias próximo a estas costas. Abreviaturas MNCN Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, Madrid MNHN Museo national d'Histoire natu- relle, Paris MNHC Museo de la Naturaleza y el Hombre de Tenerife, Canarias MHNS Museo de Historia Natural, San- tiago de Compostela, (colección E. Rolán) CFS colección de Frank Swinnen, Lommel, CHO colección de José María Hernán- dez Otero, Gáldar, Gran Canaria CPB colección de José Pedro Borges, Lisboa CPR colección de Peter Ryall, Maria Rain, Austria ej ejemplar con partes blandas c concha vacía j juvenil PARTE TAXONÓMICA Familia Buccinidae Género Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 Chauvetia mamillata (Risso, 1826) (Figs. 1-5) Nasaea mamillata Risso, 1826. Hist. Nat... Alpes-Marit., p. 223, lám. 5, fig. 69. [Localidad tipo: Alpes maritimes, Francia]. Material tipo: Lectotipo en MNHN (Figs. 1-2) (6, Material estudiado: CANARIAS: Gran Canaria: che (CHO); 1 c. Playa Honda, Lanzarote (CHO); 5 de pesca (MHNS). Comentarios : C. mamillata se diferen- cia de C. affinis o de C. brunnea por su mayor tamaño (algo más de 6 mm frente a algo más de 5 mm). Además de C. affinis se distingue por ser proporcional- 3 mm). 2 c (CPR); Lanzarote: 1 c, Ref: 322050401, Formi- c. Puerto del Carmen (CFS). SAHARA: 1 c, barcos mente más ancha y por tener un aspecto más sólido. Esta especie es poco fre- cuente en la zona y será tratada en el trabajo referido a las especies mediterrá- neas que está en marcha. 1 14 Oliver Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 1-5. Chauvetia mamillata (Risso, 1826), 1-2: lectotipo, 6,3 mm (MNHN); 3: 6,6 mm, Cerdeña; 4: 6,2 mm, Agaete, NO Gran Canaria (CPR); 5: 5,9 mm, Lanzarote. Figuras 6-13. Chauvetia affinis (Monterosato, 1889): 6-9: 2 sintipos, 4,8, 4,5 mm, Ognina (MNHN, coll. Locard); 10: forma affinis , 5,3 mm, Tarajalillo, Gran Canaria; 11: forma bandeada, 5,5 mm, Tene- rife; 12, 13: forma oscura, 4,8, 5,2 mm, Granillo, Fuerteventura. Figuras 14-16. Chauvetia lefebvrii (Maravigna, 1840), 14: 7,8 mm, Tarifa, Cádiz; 15-16: 6,2 mm, Sahara. Figuras 17, 18. Chauvetia procerula (Monterosato, 1889); 17: 5,2, NO Gran Canaria; 18: 5,0 mm, Gran Canaria. Figures 1-5. Chauvetia mamillata (Risso, 1826), 1-2: lectotype, 6.3 mm (MNHN); 3: 6.6 mm, Cerdeña; 4: 6.2 mm, Agaete, NW Gran Canaria (CPR); 5: 5.9 mm, Lanzarote. Figures 6-13. Chau- vetia affinis (Monterosato, 1889): 6-9: 2 syntypes, 4.8, 4.5 mm, Ognina (MNHN, coll. Locard); 10: form affinis, 5.3 mm, Tarajalillo, Gran Canaria; 11: banded form, 5.5 mm, Tenerife; 12, 13: dark form, 4.8, 5.2 mm, Granillo, Fuerteventura. Figures 14-16. Chauvetia lefebvrii (Maravigna, 1840), 14: 7.8 mm, Tarifa, Cádiz; 15-16: 6.2 mm, Sahara. Figures 17, 18. Chauvetia procerula (Montero- sato, 1889); 17: 5.2, NW Gran Canaria; 18: 5.0 mm, Gran Canaria. Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 C. affinis (Monterosato,1889) (Figs. 6-13, 68-76) Fusus turritellatus auct. non Deshayes, 1835. Exp. Se. de Morée: 174, lám. 19, figs. 43-45. [Localidad tipo: Morée, hoy Peloponeso, Grecia]. Donovania affinis Monterosato, 1889. Journ. de Conch., 37: 116. [Localidad tipo: Casablanca, Marruecos, Taormina, Sicilia y Pantellaria] Material tipo: C. affinis : 2 posibles sintipos (MNHN, coll. Locard) (Figs. 6-9). Otro material estudiado: CANARIAS: Gran Canaria: 1 c. La Isleta (CFS); 2 j, Maspalomas (CFS); 2 j, C0020a (CHO); 1 c. Caleta Abajo, lote 230, locC0014 (CHO); 1 j (CFS); 10 c, 4 j. Castillo del Romeral (CFS); 6 c Playa de Gran Canaria (CFS); 1 c, 1 j. Sardina, 10 m, NO Gran Canaria, arena y rocas (CHO); 12 c. Playa Honda (CFS); 7 c, 1 f. Playa del Hombre (CFS); 2 c, 1 j. Gando, 12 m, en Cymo- docea (CHO): 11 c, C0014; 3 c, C0037 (CHO); 1 c, 1 j, Tarajalillo (CHO); 12 c, Tarajalillo (MNHN); 1 j, Tarajalillo (CFS); 1 j, Quintanilla, 20/07/93 (MNHN); 20 c, 20 j. Las Canteras (CFS); 1 c. Gando, 8,2483 (MNHN); 2 c. Las Canteras (CFS); 1 c, NO Gran Canaria (CFS); 1 c. Bañadores, 060384 (MNHN); 1 j, Roque, Taliarte, 28 m (MNHN); 10 c. Gando, Gran Canaria (CHO); 1 c, 2 j, Tarajali- llo, 22-23 m (CPR); 2 ej, 5c, Sardina, 15 m (CHO); 7 c, C0022 (CHO); 10 c, Tarajalillo (CHO); 4 c, 1 j, Quintanilla, en pozas (CHO); más de 200 ej y c, Arinaga, 15 m (CFS). Isla de la Palma: 3 c. Taza- corte, 6 m (MNHN). Lanzarote: 8 c, 5 j, 1 j. Isla Graciosa (CFS); 2 j. La Sabina, 40 m (CFS); 2 c. Playa Honda, Arrecife, (CHO); 1 j, Pecheguera (Lanzarote); 2 c, Pecheguera (MNHN); 1 c. Playa Honda (CHO); 1 c, lj, Pto del Carmen, 40 m (CHO); 1 c. Playa Honda, intermareal. Arrecife (CHO); 1 c. Bañadores, 060384 (CHO); 2 c. Granillo (CHO); 4 ej, 5 c, 2 j. Las Coloradas, intermareal (MNHN); 2 c, Pecheguera, intermareal (MNHN); 5c, Arrecife intermareal (MNHN); 10 c, 4 j. Puerto del Carmen, 34-45 m (CFS). Tenerife: 1 c. Los Cristianos (CFS); 1 ej, st08/ 04-03, Punta Teño, (CPB); 1 j, 03/ 10/07 Punta Teño (CPB); 1 ej, 11/05/ 06 Punta Teño (CPB); 1 c. Agua Dulce, 3-7 m (MNHN); 1 c. La Tejita, intermareal (MNHN); 1 ej, 2 c, 1 j, Palm-Mar, (MNHN); 6 c, C0019; 4 c, C0010 (CHO); 1 c, C0014 (CHO); 4 c. La Tejita, intermareal (MNHN); 1 j, Palm-Mar, 6-8 m (MNHN); 1 c. Los Burros (CHO); 1 c, CFV065 (CHO); 2 c, C0014 (CHO); 1 c. Bañadores, 06/03/84 (CHO); 1 c, C0005 (CHO); 1 c, C0009 (CHO); 1 c, 1 j, 1 f, FH67 (CHO); 1 c, lote 2419 (MHNS); 21 c, 7 j. Punta Teño, entre interma- real y 3 m (CPB). Fuerteventura: 8 c, Ajui, (CHO); 1 c, 3 j, FH67 (CHO); 3 c, 7 j, RH033 (CHO); 2 c, C0010 (CHO). SAHARA: 1 j, lote 207, 23° 08' N, 16° 25' W (CHO); 1 c, 1 j, lote 208, 23° 08' N, 16° 25' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 272, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 5 c, 249 (MHNS). (Página derecha) Figuras 19-23. Chauvetia crassior (Odhner, 1932); 19, 20: holotipo, 5,3 mm (SMNH); 21-23: 6,4, 6,6, 7,1 mm, Sardina, Gran Canaria; 24: Chauvetia cf. crassior (Odhner, 1932), 8,8 mm, Cabo Blanco, Mauritania (CFS). Figuras 25, 26. Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956; 25, 26: 7,5, 6,2 mm, Sahara. Figuras 27-30. Chauvetia javieri Oliver y Rolán, 2008; 27-29: 7,3, 6,7, 8,3 mm, Barcos de Pesca, Sahara; 30: paratipo, 7,6 mm, Dakar, Senegal (MNHN). Figura 31. Chauvetia jo ani Oliver y Rolán, 2008, paratipo, 6,9 mm, Dakar, Senegal (MHNS). Figura 32. Chauvetia tenebrosa Oliver y Rolán, 2008, 4,6 mm, Baie de FEtoile, Nouahdibou, Mauritania. Figuras 33-35. Chauvetia errata spec. nov.; 33-34: holotipo, 7,0 mm, Cape Rouge, Misión Gruvel (MNHN); 35: 5,7 mm, Dakar, Senegal. Figuras 36. Chauvetia megastoma spec. nov. holotipo, 7,2 mm, Mauritania (MNCN). (Right page) Figures 19-23. Chauvetia crassior (Odhner, 1932); 19, 20: holotype, 5.3 mm (SMNH); 21-23: 6.4, 6.6, 7.1 mm. Sardina, Gran Canaria; 24: Chauvetia cf. crassior (Odhner, 1932), 8.8 mm, Cap Blanc, Mauritania (CFS). Figures 25, 26. Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956; 25, 26: 7.5, 6.2 mm, Sahara. Figures 27-30. Chauvetia javieri Oliver y Rolán, 2008; 27-29: 7.3, 6.7, 8.3 mm, Fishing ships, Sahara; 30: paratype, 7.6 mm, Dakar, Senegal (MNHN). Figure 31. Chauvetia joani Oliver y Rolán, 2008, paratype, 6.9 mm, Dakar, Senegal (MHNS). Figure 32. Chauvetia tenebrosa Oliver y Rolán, 2008, 4.6 mm, Baie de l’Étoile, Nouahdibou, Mauritania. Figures 33-35. Chauvetia errata spec. nov.; 33-34: holotype, 7.0 mm, Cap Rouge, Misión Gruvel (MNHN); 35: 5.7 mm, Dakar, Senegal. Figures 36. Chauvetia megastoma spec. nov. holotype, 7.2 mm, Mauritania (MNCN). lió OLIVER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara 117 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figuras 37-39. Chauvetia gigantísima spec. nov., 37; paratipo, 19,7 mm (MNCN); 38: holotipo, 14.2 mm (MNHN); 39: protoconcha. Figuras 40-44. Chauvetia hernandezi spec. nov. 40, 41: holotipo, 8,6 mm, 22° 35’ N, 16° 58’ W (MNCN); 42: paratipo, 11,0 mm (MNHN); 43, 44: paratipo, 7,8 mm, (MHNS). Figuras 45-48. Chauvetia distans spec. nov. 45-46: holotipo, 6,8 mm, 23° 05’ N, 16° 35’ W, 37 m (MNCN); 47: 6,9 mm, 23° 05’ N, 16° 00’ W, Sahara (MNHN); 48: paratipo, 6,0 mm, 23° 05’ N, 17° 05’ W, 80 m (BMNH). Figuras 49-52. Chauvetia austera spec. nov. 49, 50: holotipo 8,4 mm (MNCN); 51: 7,8 mm, Sahara (MNHN); 52: protoconcha. Figures 37-39. Chauvetia gigantissima spec. nov., 37; par atype, 19.7 mm (MNCN); 38: holotype, 14.2 mm (MNHN); 39: protoconch. Figures 40-44. Chauvetia hernandezi spec. nov. 40, 41: holotype, 8.6 mm, 22 0 35’ N, 16° 58’ W (MNCN); 42: paratype, 11.0 mm (MNHN); 43, 44: paratype, 7.8 mm, (MHNS). Figures 45-48. Chauvetia distans spec. nov. 45-46: holotype, 6.8 mm, 23° 05’ N, 16° 35’ W 37 m (MNCN); 47: 6.9 mm, 23° 05’ N, 16 0 00’ W, Sahara (MNHN); 48: paratype, 6.0 mm, 23° 05’ N, 17 0 05’W,80m (BMNH). Figures 49-52. Chauvetia austera spec. nov. 49, 50: holotype 8.4 mm (MNCN); 51: 7.8 mm, Sahara (MNHN); 52: protoconch. 118 OLIVER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 53, 54. Chauvetia peculiaris spec. nov., holotipo, 7,7 mm, Sahara, 22° 00’ N, 17° 22’ W, 46 m (MNCN). Figuras 55-59. Chauvetia edentula, spec. nov.; 55-57: holotipo, 6,3 mm, Sahara (MNCN); 58, 59: paratipos, 5,7, 5,5 mm, Arguineguín, 377 m (CHO). Figuras 60-65. Chauvetia borgesi spec. nov.; 60, 61: holotipo, 7,0 mm, Gando (MNCN); 62, 63: paratipo, 6,2 mm, Gando (MNHN); 64: concha, 7,4 mm, Sahara, 22° 05’ N, 16° 58’ W; 65: concha, 6,5 mm, Sahara, 22° 05’ N, 16° 58’ W. Figura 66. Chauvetia candidissima canarica Nordsieck y García-Talavera, 1979, lectotipo, 5,5 mm, La Gomera (MNHC). Figura 67. Chauvetia elongata Nordsieck y García-Tala- vera, 1979, holotipo, 8,8 mm, S de Gran Canaria (MNHC). Figures 53, 54. Chauvetia peculiaris spec. nov., holotype, 7.7 mm, Sahara, 22 0 00’ N, 17° 22’ W, 46 m (MNCN). Figures 55-59. Chauvetia edentula, spec. nov.; 55-57: holotype, 6.3 mm, Sahara (MNCN); 58, 59: paratypes, 5.7, 5.5 mm, Arguineguín, 377 m (CHO). Figures 60-65. Chauvetia borgesi spec. nov.; 60, 61: holotype, 7.0 mm, Gando (MNCN); 62, 63: par atype, 6.2 mm, Gando (MNHN); 64: shell, 7.4 mm, Sahara, 22 0 05’ N, 16° 58’ W; 65: shell, 6.5 mm, Sahara, 22° 05’ N, 16° 58’ W. Figure 66. Chauvetia candidissima canarica Nordsieck and García-Talavera, 1979, lec- totype, 5.5 mm, La Gomera (MNHC). Figure 67. Chauvetia elongata Nordsieck and García-Tala- vera, 1979, holotype, 8.8 mm, S of Gran Canaria (MNHC). 1 19 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Descripción : Concha (Figs. 6-13, 68- 72) fusiforme, alargada con unas 6 vueltas, sólida y con sutura marcada. Protoconcha (Figs. 73-76) con 0,8 vueltas y unos 500 jum de anchura, orna- mentada por una veintena de cordones planos, de anchura parecida, y separa- dos por interespacios de anchura similar en los que se aprecia las típicas incisio- nes de las Chauvetia. Al final de la misma aparecen cuatro o cinco costillas bastante verticales, relativamente juntas y curvadas en su parte superior donde hay una estrecha repisa. Teleoconcha con escultura formada por cordones espirales y costillas axiales algo prosoclinas; ambos tienen una anchura similar o algo superior a sus interespacios. Primera vuelta con tres cordones espirales y el cuarto aparece enseguida, al principio como el reborde superior de la vuelta para luego sepa- rarse de la sutura. Última vuelta con cinco cordones por encima de la inser- ción bucal, siendo los dos superiores claramente más estrechos que el resto. El cordón superior no en todas las conchas se puede apreciar claramente siendo a veces un simple reborde poco perceptible. Por debajo de la inserción labial hay una decena más de cordonci- llos que van estrechándose y aproxi- mándose a medida que nos acercamos a la base. Abertura con un 30% de la altura total, oval y, en el interior del labio externo, hay seis pliegues dentales de los que el más inferior marcaría el inicio del canal sifonal. Canal sifonal corto y poco claro ya que apenas se aprecia una incisión en la base del labio externo como sucede en otras especies. Coloración: Aunque C. affinis pre- senta cierta variabilidad respecto a la forma de la concha y su escultura (puede haber conchas proporcional- mente más anchas o más alargadas, o con sus cordones más o menos anchos) las diferencias fundamentales se basan en su color. En el área de estudio hemos distinguido tres formas atendiendo a los patrones de color además de unas pocas conchas que se podrían considerar como formas intermedias. Forma affinis, concha de color castaño rojizo con los tubérculos más amarillentos y redondeados. Forma bandeada, concha blanco amarillenta con una banda marrón oscura subsutural y otra basal Forma oscura, concha de color marrón rojizo homogénea más o menos oscura. Dimensiones: hasta 5,8 mm de altura y 2,2 mm de anchura. Distribución : Esta especie se encuen- tra abundantemente en Canarias, en todas sus islas. También se ha encon- trado en Sahara y en el Mediterráneo. Comentarios : La base de datos CLEMAM (en Julio 2009, cuando se remite este trabajo) considera como especies válidas Chauvetia brunnea (Donovan, 1804), C. affinis (Montero- sato,1889), C. decorata Monterosato,1889 y C. mamillata (Risso, 1826) mientras que C. turritellata (Deshayes, 1835, Fusus ) es considerado como un taxón dudoso que necesita una revisión. Sin embargo, Micali (1999) considera como especies válidas C. brunnea, C. turri- tellata y C. mamillata mientras que los taxones Donovania affinis Monterosato, 1889 y Chauvetia decorata Monterosato, 1889 son considerados variedades de C. turritellata y por lo tanto sinónimos. Según Micali (1999), C. mamillata se diferencia de las otras dos por su mayor tamaño (7 mm frente a 5 mm de C. turri- tellata y C. brunnea ), entre otras caracterís- ticas. Por su parte, C. turritellata se distin- guiría de C. brunnea por tener una forma más ahusada, un mayor número de costi- llas axiales (de diez a quince en la última vuelta frente a diez en C. brunnea), denti- culación en el labio interno menos acen- tuada, escultura menos relevante y costi- llas más sutiles. En este estudio conside- ramos C. affinis el nombre válido y no uti- lizamos el nombre de C. turritellata por tener esta su localidad tipo en el Medite- rráneo oriental. Se ha intentado localizar el material tipo de Fusus turritellatus Des- hayes, 1835 pero no se ha encontrado en el MNHN, y tampoco en la Ecole de Mines de Paris (Virginie Heros, pers. com.); tampoco está en BMNH (Amelia MacLellan, pers. com.). Siendo estas las 120 OLIVER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 68-76. Chauvetia affinis (Monterosato, 1889): 68, 70, 73, 76: 3,1, 4,8 mm, forma affinis y protoconchas, Tarajalillo, Gran Canaria; 69, 74: 3,2 mm, forma oscura, Las Burras, Gran Canaria; 71: 5,8 mm, forma bandeada, Tenerife; 72, 75: 4,0 mm, Orzóla, Lanzarote. Figures 68-76. Chauvetia affinis (Monterosato, 1889): 68, 70, 73, 76: 5.1, 4.8 mm, form affinis, and protoconchs, Tarajalillo, Gran Canaria; 69, 74: 5.2 mm, dark form , Las Burras, Gran Canaria; 71: 5.8 mm, banded form , Tenerife; 72, 75: 4.0 mm, Orzóla, Lanzarote. 121 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 instituciones que, según Dance (1986), podrían contener el material de Desha- yes, se puede considerar perdido. A efectos taxonómicos, pensamos que este taxon no debe estar representado en el área de estudio dado su origen en el Mediterráneo oriental y su ausencia en el estrecho de Gibraltar, sur de España y norte de Marruecos. Por otra parte también discrepamos con Micali en con- siderar C. decorata como sinónima de C. turritellata. Creeemos que C. decorata es una especie con entidad propia que se abordará en trabajos posteriores. Los cuatro taxones reseñados ante- riormente junto con C. tenebrosa Oliver y Rolán, 2008, una especie de Senegal, per- tenecen a un grupo de Chauvetia muy pa- recidas y sin duda emparentadas filoge- néticamente. Determinar qué especies son válidas y qué son variedades o dónde empieza una especie y dónde acaba otra es complicado y, en todo caso, un estudio fundamentalmente conquio- lógico no puede resolver definitivamente el problema. La dificultad se ve acrecen- tada por la amplia distribución de estas especies que, por otra parte, presentan una protoconcha paucispiral, posible- mente con desarrollo lecitotrófico y con posibilidades de dispersión limitada, lo que favorecería la especiación, funda- mentalmente en ambientes insulares. Algo de esto se ha podido comprobar en conchas del Banco Gorringe y de Lanza- rote que se estudiarán y se mencionarán en un próximo trabajo. Respecto a las diferencias en la colo- ración de las partes blandas, Mifsud (1994) indica que C. turritellata presenta un pie blanco opaco con la cabeza, los tentáculos y el sifón negro grisáceo. Para apoyarlo aporta fotos de ejemplares ita- lianos (Acitrezza). Esto contrastaría con la descripción del animal de C. brunnea dado por Fretter y Graham (1984) que indican que el animal sería de color crema con puntos opacos blancos. Por su parte, C. mamillata es de color negro azu- lado (Hergueta, Luque y Templado 2002 y observación personal). El animal de C. affinis es de color grisáceo con el pie de color blanco. Este color se pre- senta tanto en la forma bandeada como en la forma típica affinis (Figs. 162 y 163). En el caso de C. turritellata del Mediterrá- neo, el color grisáceo del cuerpo del ani- mal se da en forma de manchas irregula- res (Micali, 1999: figs. 24-26) y no de forma continua como es el caso de C. affi- nis. En el presente trabajo se ilustra (Figs 160-161) también un animal de color claro, casi traslúcido, con alguna mancha opaca de color blanco leche cuya concha seguiría el patrón affinis. Dado el redu- cido número de animales estudiados no podemos asegurar si existe variabilidad en el color del animal o por el contrario si nos encontramos ante dos especies crípticas. Por ello se ha optado por consi- derar a esta última como C. cf. affinis. El estudio y comparación de estos taxones con otras especies mediterrá- neas, del Atlántico europeo y del área del Estrecho, se hará en la revisión de las especies mediterráneas y atlánticas europeas que actualmente se está reali- zando. Chauvetia lefebvrii (Maravigna,1840) (Figs. 14-16, 77-80) Fussus granulatus Calcara, 1839 non Nassaea granulata Risso, 1826. Buccinum lefebvrii Maravigna, 1840. Buccinum folinae sensu Philippi, 1844 non Delle Chiaje, 1828. Lachesis areolata Tiberi, 1868. Murex folineae sensu Philippi, 1844 non Delle Chiaje, 1828. ¿Chauvetia obliqua Nordsiek y Talavera, 1979: 141. Chauvetia pellisphocae sensu Nordsieck, 1976 non Reeve, 1845. Material tipo: Desconocido. Material estudiado: SAHARA: 1 j, 23° 10' N, 16° 28' W, (CHO); 2 c, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, 58 m (CHO); 1 c, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, (CHO); 13 ej, lote 304 (CHO); 10 ej, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W, 40 m, (CHO); 1 ej, Cabo Barbas, 58 m (CHO); 2 c, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W (CFS); 6 c. Barcos de Pesca (MHNS); 2 c, 50-60 m (CPR). 122 Oliver Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 77-80. Chauvetia lefebvrii (Maravigna, 1840); 77: concha, 8,4 mm, Sahara Occidental; 78, 79: protoconcha, Sahara Occidental; 80: microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 77-80. Chauvetia lefebvrii (Maravigna, 1840); 77: shell, 8.4 mm, West Sahara; 78, 79: pro- toconch, West Sahara; 80: microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 123 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Descripción: Concha (Figs. 14-16) fusiforme-alargada, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira, sutura poco marcada. Protoconcha (Figs. 78, 79) con 0,8 vueltas, y una anchura de unas 850 jum (núcleo: 500 jum, primera media vuelta: 680 jUm) y unas 700 jum de altura. Escul- tura espiral (Fig. 80) poco marcada (muy difícil de apreciar en ejemplares algo rodados) formada por unos treinta o cua- renta cordones separados por interespa- cios de anchura similar y en los que se aprecian las incisiones típicas de las Chau- vetia. A partir de la primera media vuelta de la protoconcha aparecen una decena de costillas separadas por espacios en los que se ven los cordones espirales. La parte superior de las costillas está curvada y forma, en la parte superior de la proto- concha, un estrecho canal. El final de la protoconcha es poco claro por lo que se ha considerado como tal el momento en que van apareciendo los cordones espira- les de la teleoconcha. Teleoconcha con vueltas de perfil pla- noconvexo y sutura poco profunda. Escul- tura formada por cordones espirales, con anchura similar a sus interespacios, lo que ocurre también en las costillas. Ambos son en general poco relevantes siendo más evi- dentes en las primeras vueltas. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen tres cordones espirales, formando el superior el reborde de la espira. En la tercera vuelta aparece por encima un cuarto cordón en principio más estrecho que los inferiores. En la penúltima vuelta puede observarse oca- sionalmente un quinto cordón inferior prácticamente oculto por la sutura. En la última vuelta, por encima de la inserción labial, hay cuatro cordones planos, por lo general más anchos que sus interespacios. En la base hay aproximadamente una decena más de cordones que se van jun- tando en el canal sifonal. En la última vuelta apenas se perciben las costillas (unas veinte, algo prosoclinas) que llegan hasta la base de la concha acabando cerca del inicio del canal sifonal. Abertura oval ocupa cerca del 27 % de la altura total. Labio externo varicoso con 4 dientes en su parte interna. Canal sifonal poco desarrollado. Coloración de la concha: los cordones espirales son marrón rojizo sobre un fondo blanco amarillento. Dependiendo de la anchura de los cordones la concha resulta más o menos oscura. En algunos ejem- plares se ha podido observar la típica colo- ración "nodulada", aunque débil y sobre todo en las vueltas iniciales. Esta colora- ción, típica de las conchas mediterráneas, se debe a que los cordones son más claros, incluso amarillentos, en los espacios inter- costales. El interior de la concha es blanco. Dimensiones: hasta una altura má- xima de unos 9 mm. Animal: desconocido. Distribución: La especie se halla pre- sente desde el Mediterráneo y costa occidental de la Península Ibérica, hasta el Sahara, pero no se ha encontrado en Canarias. Comentarios: Las conchas del Sahara tienen un patrón de color lineado y parecen ser la forma más meridional de una especie algo variable. La forma mediterránea es más pupoide y de aspecto noduloso. En el área del Estrecho de Gibraltar se presentan tanto formas lineadas como nodulosas. El aspecto de la protoconcha y de las primeras vueltas es similar en todas, lo que parece indicar que se trata de una única especie. Chauvetia procerula (Monterosato 1889) (Figs. 17, 18, 81-85) Donovania procerula Monterosato 1889. Journ. de Conch., 37: 116. [Localidad tipo: Marruecos, Casa- blanca (Ponsonby), Argelia (Joly)]. Chauvetia vulpécula Nordsieck y García-Talavera, 1979 non Lachesis vulpécula Monterosato, 1872. Material tipo: Supuestamente en el ZMR. No examinado. Otro material estudiado: CANARIAS: Gran Canaria: 3 c, 2 j, Arguineguín, (CHO); 2 c, Arguineguín, 150-180m (CHO); 1 c, TA007, frente a Sardina (CHO); 2 j, TalOl (CHO); 1 c, Ar301 (CHO). Fuerteventura: 1 c, 7 j, 100 m (CFS); 1 j. Playa Blanca, 70 m (CFS). Lanzarote: 9 j, Boccaina, Isla Graciosa (CFS). 124 Oliver Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 81-85. Chauvetia procerula (Monterosato 1889); 81: concha, 4,7 mm, Arinaga, Gran Canaria; 82-84: protoconcha; 85: microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 81-85. Chauvetia procerula (Monterosato 1889); 81: shell, 4.7 mm, Arinaga, Gran Canaria; 82-84: protoconch; 85: microsculpture ofthe protoconch. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 17, 18, 81) sólida, de perfil cónico algo ahusado con vueltas algo convexas, sutura no demasiado profunda y algo ondulada y con unas 6 vueltas. Protoconcha (Figs. 82-84) con aproxi- madamente una vuelta, una anchura de unas 580 pm (núcleo: 220 jum, primera media vuelta: 320 pm) y unas 600 pm de altura. Parte inicial globular, algo aguda. Escultura (Fig. 85) formada por una docena de cordoncillos espirales algo más anchos que sus interespacios, en los que aparecen las típicas incisiones carac- terísticas de muchas Chauvetia. En el tramo final de la protoconcha aparecen unas pequeñas costillas que van aumen- tando de relevancia a medida que se aproxima al inicio de la teleoconcha. Las costillas están curvadas superiormente, delimitando un estrecho canal en la parte superior de la protoconcha. Teleoconcha con unas 5 vueltas, la úl- tima ocupa cerca del 55 % de la altura to- 125 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 tal. Escultura constituida por costillas axiales ortoclinas o ligeramente prosocli- nas, fuertes, prominentes y algo más es- trechas que sus interespacios. Cordones espirales menos salientes que las costillas y al cruzarse con ellas forman nodulos re- dondeados. Son tan anchos como sus in- terespacios. En la primera vuelta hay cua- tro cordones siendo el superior el reborde inferior de la sutura. En la última espira hay nueve o diez costillas y trece o ca- torce cordones espirales. De estos, hay cinco por encima de la inserción labial, los dos superiores más estrechos, y un sexto a la altura de la misma inserción. Abertura que representa el 37% de la altura de la concha y en el interior se pueden apreciar cinco o seis dientes. siendo el inferior quien marca el inicio del canal sifonal. Canal sifonal corto pero evidente debido a la presencia de una escotadura clara en la base del labio externo y que caracteriza a la especie. Coloración amarillenta. Algunas conchas son blancas con los interespa- cios de los cordones y la base rojiza. Dimensiones: alcanza una altura de hasta 6,7 mm y unos 2,8 mm de anchura. Distribución : La especie está presente desde Canarias hasta el Mediterráneo. Comentarios : Las conchas estudiadas no presentan diferencias significativas con las del Mediterráneo a pesar de mostrar en su conjunto una cierta varia- bilidad. Chauvetia crassior (Odhner, 1932) (Figs. 19-24, 86-91) Sintagma crassior Odhner, 1932: 20, lám. 1, fig. 5. [La Luz, Gran Canaria, Islas Canarias, 100 m]. Chauvetia obliqua Nordsiecky García-Talavera, 1979: 141, lám. 33, fig. 3. Material tipo: Holotipo (MNHN) no examinado, aunque fotografiado (Figs. 19, 20). Otro material estudiado: CANARIAS: Gran Canaria: 10 c, 5 j. El Cabrón (CFS); 12 j, NO Gran Canaria (CFS); 1 c, Arinaga, NO Gran Canaria (CHO); 2 c, 1 j, Sardina, NO Gran Canaria, 15 m (CHO); 1 c. Sardina, 15 m (CFS); 1 ej. Sardina, 58 m (CHO); 2 c, Sur de Gran Canaria, 35 m (CHO); 2 c. Dos Roques (CHO); 2 c. Gando, 8 m (CHO); 1 c. Gando 8/15/83 (CHO); 6 c, C0002 (CHO); 1 j, Gran Canaria 28/02/02, 70 m (CHO); 2 j, RH020 (CHO); 35 ej y c. Punta del Tostón 28° 46' N, 13° 59' W, 400 m (CFS). Fuerteventura: 3 c, off la Entallada, 81-85 m (CHO); 3 c, C0012; 1 c, C0001 (CHO); 2 c, CL030 (CHO); 1 c, CFV065 (CHO); 1 c, AR301 (CHO); 1 c, RHI/3008, 85 m (CHO); 1 c, FH17 (CHO); 1 j. El Cabrón (CHO); 2 j, 1 f, AR016 (CHO); 2 ej, lote 307, C0005b (CHO); 1 c, lote 226, LTF 050 Candelaria, 80 m (CHO); 1 j, ArOOl, lote 259 (CHO); 1 e, lote 308, C0005B (CHO). Lanzarote: 1 c. Playa Reducto, Arrecife (CFS); 1 j, Pto. Carmen, 27 m (CHO); 5 c. Puerto del Carmen (CFS); 5 c, Playa Honda, Pta Matagorda (CHO). Tenerife: 2 c, 60 m (CFS); 3 c, lotel7901 (MHNS); 3 c, lotel4781 (MHNS); 3 c, 2 j, Muellito del Faro, 15 m (CPB); 1 j. Cueva de las Corvinas, 28 m (CPB); 5 c. Cueva de las Corvinas, 28 m (CPB); 2 c, Muellito del Faro, 3-12 m, (CPB); 1 j. Diente de Ajo, 0-25 m (CPB); 1 c, 1 j, Ballenita (CPB); 3 c, Ballenita, 12 m (CPB); 6 c, 4 j, Muellito del Faro 10-18 m (CPB); 1 j, en la bahía Muellito del Faro 8-12 m (CPB); 3 j, 4 ej. Arco, 18 m (CPB). SAHARA: 1 c, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W (CHO); 2 ej, 23° 05' 35"N, 16° 25' 00"W (CHO). MAURITANIA: 1 c, Cabo Blanco, 80 m (CFS). Descripción : Concha (Figs. 19-24, 86, 87) fusiforme, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira y aspecto tosco. Proto- concha (Figs. 88, 89) con una vuelta, y con una anchura de unos 630 jUm (núcleo: 330 jum, primera media vuelta: 500 jum) y unas 600 jum de altura. Escultura espiral (Figs. 90, 91) formada por cordoncillos estrechos de anchura desigual, poco defi- nidos así como sus interespacios. Escul- tura axial formada por unas cinco o seis costillas que aparecen en el tramo final de la protoconcha y que se van ensanchando progresivamente. La transición con la teleoconcha es difícil de apreciar y se ha considerado que ocurre cuando aparecen los cordones de ésta. Teleoconcha con una escultura de cor- dones espirales de anchura mayor que sus interespacios. Las costillas, algo sig- moideas, son prosoclinas y de anchura similar o algo más estrechas que los inte- respacios. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen cuatro cordones espirales 126 Oliver Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 86-91. Chauvetia crassior (Odhner, 1932); 86, 87: conchas, 6,4, 3,4 mm, Playa Honda, Punta Matagorda, Lanzarote; 88, 89: protoconcha; 90, 91: microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 86-91. Chauvetia crassior (Odhner, 1932); 86, 87: shells, 6.4, 5.4 mm, Playa Honda, Punta Matagorda, Lanzarote; 88, 89: protoconch; 90, 91: microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 127 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 siendo el superior el reborde de la espira. En la última vuelta hay cinco cordones por encima de la inserción labial de los que los dos superiores son de menor anchura siendo el superior el reborde de la sutura. Los tres inferiores son de anchura similar y son planos y con poco resalte. Hacia la base, aparecen una docena de cordoncillos más. La escultura axial de la última vuelta está formada por una decena de costillas que apenas se prolongan por debajo de la inserción labial. Esta vuelta ocupa el 58 % de la altura total de la concha. Abertura oval, algo más rectilínea en su parte externa, y que alcanza el 39% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se aprecian cinco o seis dientes, constituyendo el inferior el borde externo del canal sifonal, que es muy corto y bastante abierto. Coloración: el color de la concha puede ser castaño rojizo uniforme con el interior blanco o amarillenta con una banda rojiza subsutural y otra en la base de la concha o sólo en la base de la concha. Algunas conchas son marrón oscuro, aunque puede aparecer una banda blanca subsutural que afecta a los dos o tres cordones espirales superiores. Dimensiones: las conchas tienen una altura máxima de hasta 8,8 mm. Animal (Figs. 156, 157): Color crema- amarillento con puntos blanquecinos; sifón del mismo color. Distribución : La especie ha sido citada en las costas del sur de la Penín- sula Ibérica (Micali, 1999), y está repre- sentada en nuestro material del Sahara, Canarias y en menor cantidad en Mauri- tania. Comentarios : Los pocos ejemplares estudiados procedentes de la costas del Sahara son más rechonchos con la boca menos cuadrada que los de Canarias. Odhner (1932) describió la especie para Canarias y el holotipo es similar a las conchas estudiadas del archipiélago. Por ese motivo, a la forma de Sahara y Mau- ritania se la ha considerado provisional- mente como C. cf. crassior a la espera de profundizar en su estudio. La especie se puede confundir con C. borgesi nov spec. (ver comentarios de esta última). Chauvetia obliqua Nordsieck y García-Talavera, 1979, aparece en la descripción original con unas dimensio- nes de 6 x 3 mm. La localidad tipo es Porto Santo. En el MNHC nos indican que el tipo ha sido prestado y no está disponible. Pero en el material del MNHC hay otra concha muy similar, con el mismo color y dimensiones y las costillas prosoclinas, siendo también procedente de Porto Santo. En cual- quier caso, falta totalmente la protocon- cha y la morfología de la concha está dentro de la variabilidad típica de Chauvetia crassior. Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956 (Figs. 25, 26) Chauvetia lamyi Knudsen, 1956. Atlantide Report, 4: 43, lám. 3, figs. 17, 18. [Localidad tipo: "Atlan- tide" St. 56, frente a Liberia, 6°01,N, 10°26'W, 50 m] Material tipo: No examinado. Supuestamente en ZMUC. Material estudiado: SAHARA: 2 c, 22° 55' N 16° 05' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 251 23° 08' N, 16° 26' W (CHO); 1 c, 1 j, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W, 29 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 199 (CHO); 1 c, lote244, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W (CHO); 1 ei, Peña Grande, 25° 45' N, 15° 25' W, 20 m (CHO). MAURITANIA: Baie de T Étoile: 1 c, intermareal (CHO). Descripción : Ver Oliver y Rolán (2008). Distribución: Costa oesteafricana, desde Costa de Marfil por el sur estando el límite norte de la especie en el Sahara. Comentarios: Como se comenta en Oliver y Rolán (2008) el taxon podría incluir varias especies crípticas. Las conchas estudiadas en el presente trabajo no muestran diferencias signifi- cativas que indiquen que pueda tratarse de una especie distinta a la de Senegal. 128 Oliver Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Chauvetia javieri Oliver y Rolán, 2008 (Figs. 27-30, 92-99) Chauvetia javieri Oliver y Rolan, 2008. Iberus, 26(2): 162, figs. 45-48, 74, 144-151. [Cap Vert, pecio del "Tacoma", Bahía de Dakar, Senegal, 30 m]. Material tipo: Holotipo en MNCN (15.05/ 47529). Paratipos: 54 en varias colecciones (ver Oliver y Rolán, 2008). Otro material estudiado: SAHARA: 17 c, West Sahara, lote 292, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, 58 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 264, M15, 22° 00' N, 17° 22' W (CHO); 6 c, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W, 84 m (CHO); 3 c, lote 299, M13, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 293, 22° 35' N, 18° 58' W, 58 m, (CHO); 1 c, lote 286, 22° 00' N, 17° 22' W (CHO); 8 c, lote 287, Sur Peña Grande, 24° 45' N, 15° 25' W, 32 m (CHO); 4 c, lote 206, 23° 08' N, 16° 25' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 265, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 3 c, lote 267, 24° 28' N, 15° 51' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 279, 23° 05' N, 16° 27' W (CHO); 4 c, lote 260, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 252, Sur Peña Grande, 24° 45' N, 15° 25' W, 32 m (CHO); 4 c, lote 282, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W (CHO); 4 c, lote 278, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 285, 22° 00' N, 17° 22' W (CHO); 4 c, lote 261, 22° 55' N, 16° 36' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 273, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 277, 22° 00' N, 16° 35' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 274, 22° 34' N, 16° 58' W (CHO); 1 ej, lote 269, 24° 32' N, 15° 51' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 272, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 1 ej, lote 217, 22° 51' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 8 c, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, 58 m, (CHO); 1 c, lote 214, 22° 55' N, 16° 35' W (CHO); 2 j, lote 289, 24° 45' N, 15° 25' W (CHO); 2 c, 20° 15' N, 16° 41' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 207, 23° 08' N, 16° 25' W (CHO); 2 c, lote 211, 23° 15' N, 16° 40' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 221, 22° 17' N, 17° 22' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 203, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W (CHO); 1 c, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W, 84 m (CHO); 2 c, M/8-9, 23° 05' N, 11° 20' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 235, 23° 08' N, 16° 20' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 243 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 1 c, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W, 30 m (CHO); 1 ej, lote 245, 23° 05' N, 16° 27' W (CHO); 1 c, 22° 00' N, 17° 22' W, 84 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 234, 25° 25' N, 15° 02' W (CHO); 1 c, 22° 17' N, 17° 22' W, 84 m (CHO); 1 c. Cape Barba, 58 m, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, (CHO); 1 ej, lote 258, 22° 35' N, 16° 25' W, I15f, (CHO); 45 ej, varias etiquetas de localización (CHO); 6 ej, lote 257, 24° 45' N, 15° 25' W, 20 m. Peña Grande (CHO); 7 ej, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W, 40 m (CHO); 37 ej, varias etiquetas de localización (2) 36 m (CHO); 2 ej, 25° 45' N, 15° 25' W, 36 m. Peña Grande (CHO); 1 ej, lote 226, 25° 51' N, 15° 02' W (CHO); 2 c, (CPR); 20 c, barcos de pesca (MHNS). MAURITANIA: 2 c, lote 224, MM0004 (CHO); 5 c, material de barcos de pesca (MHNS). Descripción : Concha (ver Oliver y Rolán, 2008). Representada en este trabajo (Figs. 21, 22, 92-94). Protocon- chas (Figs. 95-99). Distribución : Conocida de Senegal, Mauritania y Sahara. Comentarios: Durante el tiempo en el que el trabajo de descripción de esta especie fue publicado, Ardovini (2008) describió una especie de Senegal con el nombre de C. bartolomeoi. Este trabajo carece de fotografías al microscopio electrónico y de los detalles finos de la escultura; hace comparación de la especie con sólo otras dos diferentes y, aunque menciona que debe compararse con una tercera, esta comparación no aparece en el texto. Además, no se señala holotipo, aunque se presenta una imagen; no se dan sus dimensiones, ni se deposita en museo alguno. Algunos de estos datos aparecen en un trabajo anónimo en un número posterior fechado en Octubre de 2008, pero que fue recibido mucho tiempo después. Por todo ello, nosotros seguimos conside- rando como válido el nombre de C. javieri. Las conchas de C. javieri de Sahara presentan algunas diferencias con res- pecto a las del Sahara. La abertura bucal no es tan prominente y sus costillas y sus cordones suelen ser tan anchos como sus interespacios mientras que en la de Senegal suelen ser más anchos. En cuanto al número de cordones por encima de la inserción labial y a su pro- toconcha no se han comprobado dife- rencias significativas, aunque se ha observado en las conchas del Sahara cierta variabilidad. Por otra parte, las conchas de C. javieri de esta zona suelen ser de color castaño rojizo mientras que las de Senegal son amarillentas con una franja rojiza en la base. No obstante también se han estudiado algunas conchas con esta última tonalidad así como otras de color totalmente blanco. 129 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Figuras 92-99. Chauvetia javieri Oliver y Rolán, 2008; 92-94: conchas, 7,8, 6,5, 7,0 mm, Sahara; 95-99: protoconchas. Figures 92-99. Chauvetia- javieri Oliver and Rolán, 2008; 92-94: shells, 7.8, 6.5, 7.0 mm, Sahara; 95-99: protoconchs. 130 Olí VER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 100-103. Chauvetia tenebrosa Oliver y Rolán, 2008; 100: concha, 3,6 mm, Nouadhibou, Mauritania; 101, 102: protoconcha; 103: microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 100-103. Chauvetia tenebrosa Oliver and Rolán, 2008; 100: shell, 3.6 mm, Nouadhibou, Mauritania; 101, 102: protoconch; 103: microsculpture ofthe protoconch. Chauvetia joani Oliver y Rolán, 2008 (Fig. 31) Chauvetia joani Oliver y Rolán, 2008. Iberus, 26(2): 164, figs. 49-52, 75, 152-159, 188. [Cap Vert, "Tacoma", Bahía de Dakar, Senegal, 13 m]. Material tipo: Holotipo en MNCN (15.05/47530). Paratipos: 16 en varias colecciones (ver Oliver y Rolán, 2008). Otro material estudiado: MAURITANIA: 2 c, 2 j Descripción : Concha y protoconcha (ver Oliver y Rolán, 2008). Distribución: Conocida previamente de Senegal, su área de distribución se ha encontrado ahora ampliada hasta Mau- Baie de 1' Étoile (MHNS). ritania, aunque aquí se ha encontrado en escasa cantidad. Comentarios: No hay diferencias con el material ahora estudiado y el material tipo. Chauvetia tenebrosa Oliver y Rolán, 2008 (Figs. 32, 100-103) Chauvetia tenebrosa Oliver y Rolán, 2008. Iberus, 26(2): 148, figs. 7-9, 67, 114-120. [Pecio del "Tacoma", Dakar, Senegal, entre 20 y 30 m]. Material tipo: Holotipo en MNCN (15.05/47536). Paratipos: 212 en diferentes colecciones (ver Oliver y Rolán, 2008). Otro material estudiado: MAURITANIA: 17 c, 5 j, Baie de 1' Étoile, Nouadibou (CHO). 131 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Descripción : Concha: Ver Oliver y Rolán, 2008 (Figs. 32, 100). La proto- concha (Figs. 101-103) del material de Mauritania tiene una vuelta de espira, el núcleo mide unos 220 jum, la primera media vuelta unos 390 pm y el diámetro total es de unas 540 jum; altura de unas 500 pm. Distribución : Descrita del área de Dakar, Senegal, se ha encontrado ahora en Mauritania. Hay unas citas de Daut- zenberg (1910) de Donovania mínima Montagu, 1803 en Baie de Cansado y Pointe du Repos, que podrían referirse a esta especie. Comentarios: Las conchas de Mauri- tania son muy semejantes a las de Senegal aunque en ellas se marca menos la diferencia de coloración entre los cor- dones espirales y sus interespacios (más claros y más semejantes en color que en las conchas de Senegal). Esta especie se puede confundir fácilmente con formas oscuras de C. affinis. Se distingue de ella principalmente por tener una última vuelta proporcionalmente más ancha, un canal sifonal algo más marcado y una sutura más profunda debido funda- mentalmente al hundimiento la parte superior de la espira. Chauvetia errata spec. nov. (Figs. 33-35, 104-108) Donovania affinis en Dautzenberg, 1910, Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux: 66 (non Donovania affinis Monte- rosato, 1889) Chauvetia affinis en Oliver y Rolán, 2008, Iberus, 26(2): 138, figs. 13, 14, 68, 93-98, 181, 189. (non Donovania affinis Monterosato, 1889). Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 33, 34) en MNHN. Ha sido representada en Dautzenberg (1910) como C. affinis en dragados frente Bel-Air y al oeste de Cap Rouge, Mission Gruvel. Paratipos: MNCN (1, 15.05/51080), MHNS (7) (Fig. 35), BMNH (1), CPR (1), CFS (1); todos conchas de Gorée, Dakar, Senegal. Otro material examinado: MAURITANIA: 7 j, Baie de T Étoile, Mauritania. Para otro material de SENEGAL: Ver Oliver y Rolán (2008). Localidad tipo: Cap Rouge, Senegal. Etimología: El nombre específico deriva de la palabra latina erratus, que significa equivocado, alu- diendo al error en la determinación que se produjo en el anterior trabajo. Descripción: Ver Oliver y Rolán (2008: 138, como Chauvetia affinis). Trans- cribimos aquí la descripción puesto que ahora se trata de una diferente conside- ración de la especie: Concha (Figs. 33-35, 104, 105) fusi- forme, aunque más cilindrica que otras del género, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira. Protoconcha (Figs. 106-108) paucis- piral, con 0,8 vueltas, una anchura de 430 jum y una altura de 480 ¡um (núcleo: 270 pm y la primera media vuelta: 425 pm). Su escultura está formada, como en otras Chauvetia, por cordones espira- les planos entre los que se aprecian surcos con incisiones axiales y que, al final, son unos 10 a 12 en número, algo variables, y más anchos que los interes- pacios. Al final de la protoconcha se aprecian unas cinco costillas axiales. Teleoconcha con cuatro cordones espirales en la primera vuelta, el inferior más estrecho, y un quinto por arriba que está menos desarrollado y constituye un reborde inferior de la sutura. Un sexto cordón aparece en la penúltima vuelta a partir del cordón superior. La última vuelta representa el 55% de la altura total y, en ella, se aprecian seis cordones por encima de la inserción labial. De ellos los superiores están más juntos y son menos anchos que los restantes. Los interespacios son de una anchura similar a la de los cordones. En la base de la concha hay una decena de cordo- nes que se van aproximando entre sí a medida que se acercan al final del canal sifonal. Las costillas axiales son casi ortoclinas y poco elevadas, y al cruzarse con los cordones espirales se forman tubérculos redondeados muy evidentes. 132 Oliver Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 104-108. Chauvetia errata spec. noy.; 104: concha, 5,7 mm, Dakar, Senegal; 105: concha, 2,4 mm, Baie de l’Étoile, Mauritania; 106, 107: protoconcha, Dakar; 108: protoconcha, Mauritania. Figures 104-108. Chauvetia errata spec. nov.; 104: shell, 5.7 mm, Dakar, Senegal; 105: shell, 2.4 mm, Baie de l’Etoile, Mauritania; 106, 107: protoconch, Dakar; 108: protoconch, Mauritania. En la última vuelta hay una veintena de costillas verticales, de anchura similar a los interespacios. Abertura ovoide, representando el 37% de la altura total de la concha. El color de la misma es castaño, igual que la concha, y en ella se observan cinco dientes en el interior del labio externo. El inferior de ellos constituye el inicio del canal sifonal, que es corto y poco aparente. Coloración de la concha castaño- rojiza. La base es algo más oscura y los tubérculos ligeramente más claros; la protoconcha puede tener un color más claro con una banda oscura en su centro. Dimensiones : tiene una máxima dimensión de hasta 6 mm. 133 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Animal blanco crema con aislados puntos blancos. Sifón más intenso de color. Opérculo (Oliver y Rolán, 2008: fig. 181) ovoide con el núcleo subtermi- nal. Rádula (Oliver y Rolán, 2008: fig. 189) típica, con más de 150 filas de dientes, central rectangular, laterales con tres cúspides, la interna más pequeña. Distribución : Conocida de Senegal, pero su área de distribución se extiende hasta Mauritania. Comentarios : Aunque solo se ha encontrado en el actual área de estudio una escasa cantidad de material de esta especie, consideramos que es la misma especie que fue mencionada como Chau- vetia affinis en un trabajo anterior (Oliver y Rolán, 2008). Después de su nuevo estudio, hemos comprobado que se trata de una especie válida diferente del taxon en la que se había situado incorrectamente en la publicación ante- rior, por lo cual le damos nombre en el presente trabajo. La descripción original de Monte- rosato (1889) de Chauvetia affinis está basada en un único ejemplar recogido en Casablanca, al cual considera próximo a Chauvetia mínima. En ese trabajo, Monterosato comenta que el motivo de considerarla una especie nueva es que había visto ejemplares mediterráneos de Taormina, Sicilia y de Pantellaria. En el MNHN se han encon- trado conchas de la Chauvetia cf. affinis de localidad siciliana, enviadas por Monteroato a Locard y presumible- mente son las que han sido considera- das como Chauvetia turritellata por Micali (1999). Varias son las especies con las que C. errata puede confundirse y con algunas de ellas comparte área de distribución. Así entre éstas tenemos a C. lamyi, C. pardacuta, C. joani y C. tenebrosa. Fuera del área de distribución se podría con- fundir con C. affinis , con C. brunnea, con C. mamillata o con conchas oscuras de C. procer uta. De C. lamyi se distingue por no tener tan evidente el canal sifonal. De C. joani, de C. tenebrosa y de C. pardacuta por ser menos fusiforme y por presentar un mayor número de costillas que al cru- zarse con los cordones forman tubércu- los redondeados. Además el canal sifonal no está tan inclinado como sucede en C. joani. Fuera del área de distribución de la especie guarda semejanza con C. affinis con la que se ha confudido taxonómica- mente, dado el parecido de su escultura. Se diferencia de ésta por tener más costi- llas que además son más estrechas y delicadas así como por la escultura de la protoconcha: C. errata tiene menos cor- dones y son claramente más anchos que sus interespacios lo que no sucede en las distintas variedades de C. affinis. Lo mismo se puede decir para distinguirla de C. brunnea y de C. mamillata. Por último la protoconcha de C. procerula es más parecida a la de C. errata pero la concha de C. procerula tiene un canal sifonal claro y unas costillas poco nume- rosas y evidentes. Chauvetia megastoma spec. nov. (Figs. 36, 109-113) Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 36, 109) en MNCN (15.05/51081) ex CHO. Otro material estudiado: 1 j, de la localidad tipo, en MHNS. Localidad tipo: Mauritania, 23° 15' N, 16° 06' W, a unos 200 m, en barcos de pesca. Etimología: El nombre específico alude al tamaño de la abertura que es en proporción el más grande del género en relación a la altura de la concha. Descripción: Concha (Fig. 36, 109) fusiforme, con cinco vueltas de espira. Protoconcha (Figs. 110, 111) con una vuelta, y con una anchura de unos 670 ¡um (núcleo: 320 pm, primera media vuelta: 520 ¡um) y unas 630 pm de altura. Escultura basada cordoncillos espirales irregulares y poco definidos (Fig. 112) separados por interespacios más defini- dos, y en los que no se aprecian clara- mente las típicas incisiones de las Chau- vetia. Con gran aumento (Fig. 113) 134 Oliver Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 109-113. Chauvetia megastoma spec. noy.; 109: holotipo, 7,2 mm (MNCN); 110, 111: protoconcha del holotipo; 112-113: microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 109-113. Chauvetia megastoma spec. nov .; 109: holotype, 7.2 mm (MNCN); 110, 111: pro- toconch ofthe holotype; 112-113: microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 135 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 pueden verse diminutas perforaciones. Tiene una treintena de costillas axiales algo sigmoideas y opistoclinas, poco relevantes, que se inician cerca del núcleo de la protoconcha, y son más estrechas que sus intervalos. Teleoconcha con vueltas claramente convexas. Escultura de cordones espira- les de anchura similar a sus interespa- cios al igual que sucede con las costillas. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen cinco cordones espirales. En la última vuelta hay seis cordones por encima de la inserción labial y, hacia la base, apare- cen de una docena de cordoncillos más. La escultura axial está formada por cos- tillas convexas algo prosoclinas, una decena en la última vuelta. La última vuelta ocupa el 64 % de la altura total de la concha. Abertura oval que alcanza el 43% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo de la concha estudiada no se han apreciado dientes salvo el pliegue que marca el inicio del borde externo del canal sifonal, que es corto pero claro y bastante abierto. El color de la concha es blanco. Dimensiones: Holotipo 7,2 x 3,0 mm. Animal: Desconocido. Distribución: La especie sólo ha sido recolectada en Mauritania. Comentarios: Pese a la escasez de material, hemos decidido darle nombre porque tiene diferencias muy evidentes con las demás especies conocidas. Se diferencia de C. javieri por tener las vueltas más convexas y la sutura más profunda, la última vuelta y la abertura proporcionalmente más altas y el canal sifonal más abierto en su parte superior. También hay diferencia en la escultura de la protoconcha, que en Chauvetia javieri tiene un mayor número de condoncillos axiales, que están más marcados. De Chauvetia hernandezi spec. nov. se diferencia por el perfil más regular de sus vueltas, por la escultura de su proto- concha y por tener también proporcio- nalmente más alta tanto la última vuelta como su abertura. De Chauvetia edentula spec. nov. (ver más abajo) se distingue claramente por su protoconcha y por la forma y el tamaño de su abertura bucal. Chauvetia gigantissina sp. spec. nov. (Figs. 37-39) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 38) en MNCN (15.05/51082). Paratipos: 1 ej, Cabo Barbas, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, 32 m (MNHN); 1 c (Fig. 37), supuestamente, Sahara Occidental (CJH). Localidad tipo: Sahara Occidental, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W. Etimología: El nombre específico hace alusión al gran tamaño de la especie, superior al de todas las conocidas en el género. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 37, 38) fusiforme-alargada, sólida, con unas nueve vueltas de espira. Protoconcha (Fig. 39) blanca, con 0,7 vueltas, y una anchura de unos 1000 ium (núcleo: 700 jum, primera media vuelta: 900 p) y unas 1000 pm de altura; las protoconchas estudiadas estaban algo erosionadas y no se pudo apreciar bien su escultura espiral, aunque la axial estaba reducida a unas pocas costillas al final de la proto- concha. Teleoconcha con una escultura de cordones espirales con anchura similar a sus interespacios al igual que sus costi- llas. En el inicio de la teleoconcha apare- cen cuatro cordones espirales de los que el superior forma el reborde de la espira. No es hasta la sexta o séptima vuelta cuando aparece un quinto cordón a partir del cordón superior. Estos dos cordones son difícilmente distinguibles, tienen menor anchura, y se mantienen así hasta la última vuelta. En ésta, por encima de la inserción labial, están estos cinco cordones, y por debajo de ella hay una docena más que van disminuyendo en anchura y aproximándose entre ellos a medida que avanzan hacia el canal sifonal donde quedan muy juntos. La escultura axial es similar en grosor y 1 36 OLIVER Y ROLAN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 114-119. Chauvetia hernandezi spec. nov.; 114, 115: 6,3 mm, 23° 05’ N, 16° 28’ W, Sahara; 116, 117: protoconchas; 118, 119: microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 114-119. Chauvetia hernandezi spec. nov.; 114, 115: 6.3 mm, 23° 05’ N, 16° 28’W, Sahara; 116, 117: protoconchs; 118, 119: microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 137 Iberas, 27 (2), 2009 está formada por costillas ortoclinas o muy poco prosoclinas, curvadas, que apenas se prolongan por debajo de la inserción labial acabando cerca del inicio del canal sifonal. Hay una vein- tena de costillas en la última vuelta. Al cruzarse cordones y costillas se forman nodulos ovoides. La ultima vuelta ocupa el 46 % de la altura total de la concha. Abertura oval que alcanza el 32% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se aprecian unos siete dientes de los que el inferior constituye el borde externo del canal sifonal. No se aprecia una escotadura clara en la base del labio externo por lo que el canal sifonal es corto y poco claro Coloración de la concha castaño rojiza, con la protoconcha, el fondo de las primeras vueltas, y parte de la base y del canal sifonal muy claros, casi blancos. Dimensiones: el holotipo mide 14,2 x 4,7 mm; el paratipo con la protoconcha rota (Fig. 37) mide 19,7 mm, y el otro paratipo con la protoconcha erosionada 19,9 mm. Animal: Desconocido. Distribución : Sólo conocida de Sahara. Una concha encontrada en Canarias, lo fue en un lugar de descarga de pescado, por lo que se puede suponer que tiene el mismo origen que el holotipo. Comentarios : Se ha escogido como holotipo a la concha de menor tamaño por tener la protoconcha en mejor estado. Esta especie por su tamaño (casi el doble de la mayoría de las especies del género) se diferencia de todas las cono- cidas tanto del Mediterráneo como de Senegal. Por otra parte, el patrón de color es totalmente diferente de todas ellas. La más próxima por color y tamaño sería Chauvetia gigantea Oliver y Rolán, 2008, de Senegal, pero se diferen- cia porque esta última tiene la protocon- cha ligeramente más pequeña, la base y el ápice son menos blancos, las primeras vueltas de espira (hasta casi la penúl- tima) tienen solamente tres cordones espirales (contra 4-5 en la aquí descrita), los nodulos de entrecruzamiento de cor- dones y costillas son más claros y tanto costillas como cordones son menos pro- minentes. Chauvetia hernandezi spec. nov. (Figs. 40-44, 114-119) Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 40, 41) en el MNCN (15.05/51083). Paratipos en las siguientes colecciones: MNHN (1) (Fig. 42); MHNS (1) (Fig. 43, 44); BMNH (1), CPR (1), todos de la locali- dad tipo; CPB (1) (Fig. 114) de 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W, Sahara; CHO, de varias localidades del Sahara Occidental: (5 c) 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W; (4 c) 25° 45' N, 15° 25' W, Peña Grande, 36 m. Otro material examinado: SAHARA: 1 j, 50-60 m (CFS); 2 c, 1 j, lote 281, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W (CHO); 7 c, lote 294, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W, 34 m (CHO); 4 c, 22° 00' N, 17° 22' W, 84 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 283, 24° 81' N, 15° 51' W (CHO); 6 c, 23° 65' N, 15° 51' W (CHO); 1 c, lote276, 22° 55' N, 16° 36' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 202, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 268, 24° 28' N, 15° 51' W (CHO); 19 c, lote 293, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, 58 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 249, 22° 00' N, 17° 22' W, 84 m (CHO); 7 c, lote 270, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W (CHO); 2 c, lote 217, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 237, 24° 05' N, 15° 25' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 206, 23° 08' N, 16° 25' W (CHO); 1 c, 1 j, lote 267, 24° 28' N, 15° 51' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 238, 24° 05' N, 15° 25' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 292, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, 58 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 300, 22° 17' N, 17° 22' W, 84 m (CHO); 2 c, lote 291, M / 8-9, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W, 2 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 289, 24° 51' N, 15° 25' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 216, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 3 c, lote 253, Sur Peña Grande 24° 45' N, 15° 25' W, 32 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 255, 23° 08' N, 16° 00' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 233, 23° 08' N, 16° 20' W (CHO); 3 c, M-13, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W, 36 m (CHO); 2 c, lote 284, 24° 28' N, 15° 51' W (CHO); 3 c, lote 209, 23° 08' N, 16° 25' W (CHO); 1 j, lote 263, 25° 17' N, 15° 22' W (CHO); 3 c, lote 266, 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W (CHO); 1 c, 23° 10' N, 16° 28' W, 64 m, arrastre (CHO); 1 c, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, 90 m, arrastre en arena (CHO); 2 c, lote 242, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W (CHO); 1 c, M/8-9, 23° 05' N, 16° 28' W, 30 m (CHO); 1 c, lote 236, 23° 08' N, 16° 26' W (CHO); 1 ej, 2345, 24° 00' N, 16° 00' W 30-35 m (CHO); 5 ej, lote 258, 23° 08' N, 16° 25' W, 30 m (CHO); 3 ej, lote 257, 25° 45' N, 138 Olí VER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 120-124. Chauvetia distans spec. nov.; 120: holotipo, 6,8 mm, 23° 05’ N, 16° 35’ W, 37 m (MNCN); 121: detalle de la abertura; 122, 123: protoconcha; 124: microescultura de la proto- concha. Figures 120-124. Chauvetia distans spec. nov.; 120: holotype, 6.8 mm, 23° 05’ N, 16° 35’ W, 37 m (MNCN); 121: detail ofthe aperture; 122, 123: protoconch; 124: microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 139 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 15° 25' W, Peña Grande, 36 m (CHO); 48 ej, varias etiquetas de localización 10-20 m (CHO); 2 ej, 25° 45' N, 15° 25' W, 35 m. Peña Grande (CHO); 3 c, lote 249 (MHNS). MAURITANIA: 1 c, lote 223, MM0004 (CHO). Localidad tipo: Sahara Occidental, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W, Cabo Barba, 58 m. Etimología: La especie se dedica a la memoria de José María Hernández, malacólogo de Gáldar, Gran Canaria, que contribuyó a este trabajo con una gran cantidad de material de su colección. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 40-44, 114, 115) fusiforme-alargada, sólida, con unas siete vueltas de espira. Protoconcha (Figs. 116, 117) con una vuelta y con una anchura de unos 700 ¡um (núcleo: 410 pm, primera media vuelta: 600 jum) y unas 380 jum de altura. Escultura formada por una veintena de cordoncillos espirales planos, de anchura variable separados por interes- pacios que presentan las típicas incisio- nes del género (Fig. 119) y cuya anchura es por lo general menor o igual que la de los cordones. Al final de la protocon- cha aparecen unas ocho costillitas muy juntas y la escultura de los interespecios de los cordones desaparece (Fig. 118). Teleoconcha: El perfil de las vueltas es convexo con la sutura profunda, aunque la mitad superior de la espira es ligeramente cóncava. Escultura de cor- dones espirales de anchura desigual (los superiores son más estrechos) aunque similares o algo más estrecho que sus respectivos interespacios. Cos- tillas menos anchas que sus interespa- cios y que suelen ser más relevantes hacia el final de la concha. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen seis cordo- nes espirales siendo el superior el reborde de la espira. En la última vuelta hay ocho cordones por encima de la inserción labial de los que los tres (o cuatro) superiores son claramente de menor anchura y, hacia la base, aparece una quincena de cordoncillos más. Los superiores están claramente separados por interespacios claros y a medida que se acercan al canal sifonal se van apro- ximando entre ellos, quedando los más inferiores muy juntos. La escultura axial está formada por costillas conve- xas ortoclinas o muy poco prosoclinas, una decena en la última vuelta que apenas se prolongan por debajo de la inserción labial. La ultima vuelta ocupa el 58 % de la altura total de la concha. Con grandes aumentos es posible observar escultura axial muy fina entre los cordones, como líneas de creci- miento muy marcadas. Abertura oval que alcanza el 40% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se aprecian de siete a diez dientes siendo el inferior el borde externo del canal sifonal, que es corto y bastante abierto. Coloración de la concha marrón amarillento o rojizo, aunque hay conchas totalmente blancas. Dimensiones: Holotipo 8,6 x 3,6 mm; paratipos de unas dimensiones simila- res, alguno llega a 11 mm. Animal: El animal es blanco grisáceo con puntos blanco amarillentos. Distribución : La especie estaría pre- sente en gran abundancia en Sahara. No obstante, en el material estudiado, hay una concha recolectada en Mauritania. Comentarios : La especie mediterránea más parecida es Chauvetia procerula, de la que se distinguiría por tener un canal sifonal menos definido y por presentar más cordones espirales (ocho en la última espira frente a los cinco de C. pro- cerula). De las especies africanas la más parecida es Chauvetia distans spec. nov. (ver comentarios en esta última). Tam- bién se podría confundir con Chauvetia joani, con C. javieri o con Chauvetia megastoma. De C. joani se distinguiría por el mayor número de cordones espi- rales en su última vuelta y porque el canal sifonal no presenta la tendencia tan acusada de inclinarse hacia la derecha. De C. javieri se distingue fun- damentalmente por su protoconcha ya que sólo presenta claramente unas pocas costillas localizadas al final de la protoconcha. Respecto a C. megastoma ver comentarios en esta especie. 140 Olí VER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 125-130. Chauvetia austera spec. nov.; 125: paratipo, 7,8 mm, 23° 05’ N, 17° 00’ W, Sahara (MNHN). 126: detalle de la abertura; 127: protoconcha; 128, 129: microescultura de la protoconcha; 130: microescultura de la teleoconcha. Figures 125-130. Chauvetia austera spec. nov.; 125: paratype, 7.8 mm, 23° 05’ N, 17° 00’ W, Sahara (MNHN). 126: detail ofthe aperture; 127: protoconch; 128, 129: microsculpture of the protoconch; 130: microsculpture of the teleoconch. 141 Iberus , 27 (2), 2009 Chauvetia distans spec. nov. (Figs. 45-48, 120-124) Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 45, 46, 120) en el MNCN (15.05/51084). Paratipos del Sahara Occi- dental: MNHN (1) (Fig. 47) 23° 05' N, 16° 00' W; BMNH (1) 23° 05' N, 17° 05' W (Fig. 48); CPR (1) 23° 05' N, 17° 05' W; CHO (4 c en varios lotes): (2 c) 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W; (1 c) 22° 05' N, 17° 11' W ; (1 c) 23° 05' N, 17° 05' W; MHNS (1 c) lote 225, 23° 15’ N, 16° 40' W, Mauritania. Localidad tipo: Sahara Occidental, 23° 05' N, 16° 35' W, 37 m. Etimología: El nombre específico alude a la separación existente entre las costillas axiales. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 45-48, 120) fusiforme, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira convexas. Protoconcha (Figs. 122, 123) con una vuelta, y con una anchura de unos 610 ¡um (núcleo: 310 ¡um, primera media vuelta: 500 pm) y unas 650 jum de altura; escultura basada en los típicos cordones espirales separados por interespacios con incisiones típicas de las Chauvetia (Fig. 124). Hay una quincena de cordo- nes espirales planos, de anchura pare- cida y claramente más anchos que los interespacios. En el último cuarto de la protoconcha aparecen unas ocho costilli- tas que van ensanchándose a medida que nos acercamos al final de la proto- concha. Teleoconcha con perfil de las vueltas convexo y la sutura profunda aunque la mitad superior de la espira es ligera- mente cóncava. Los cordones espirales son de anchura desigual similar a sus interespacios. Costillas convexas menos anchas que sus interespacios. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen unos cinco o seis cordones espirales de los que el superior constituye el reborde de La espira. En la última vuelta hay ocho cordones por encima de la inserción labial siendo los cuatro superiores clara- mente más estrechos que los inferiores. Hacia la base, aparece una quincena de cordoncillos más. La escultura axial está formada por costillas ortoclinas, una decena en la última vuelta que se pro- longan algo por debajo de la inserción labial, acabando cerca del inicio del canal sifonal. El contorno de las vueltas es algo dentado debido a la prominencia de los cordones espirales. En la mitad inferior de la última vuelta los cordones espirales son más finos y están más juntos. Esta última vuelta ocupa el 60 % de la altura total de la concha. Abertura (Figs. 121) redondeada que alcanza el 39% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se apre- cian unos siete dientes de los que el infe- rior constituye el borde externo del canal sifonal. El canal sifonal es, aunque corto, claro debido tanto al ligero estre- chamiento de la parte inferior del borde externo del canal sifonal como a la pre- sencia de una clara escotadura en la base del labio externo. Color de la concha crema con la base blanca, aunque hay conchas totalmente blancas. Dimensiones: Holotipo 6,8 mm; paratipos con unas dimensiones simila- res, alguno algo mayor. Animal: Desconocido. Distribución : Mauritania y Sahara. Comentarios: Se podría confundir con ejemplares de Chauvetia hernandezi spec. nov. ya que ambas tienen un similar perfil de espira pero su escultura más pronunciada y su evidente canal sifonal las diferencian. También la protoconcha de C. distans spec. nov. presenta menos cordones, que son más anchos y sus cos- tillas parecen ser más pronunciadas que las de C. hernadezi. Chauvetia austera spec. nov. (Figs. 49-52, 125-130) Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 49, 50) en MNCN (15.05/51085). Paratipo (Fig. 51) en MNHN. Localidad tipo: Sahara Occidental, 23° 05' N, 17° 00' W (exCHO) Etimología: El nombre específico hace alusión a que la especie no tiene muchas diferencias en sus caracteres morfológicos generales sobre otras del grupo. 142 Oliver Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 131-137. Chauvetia peculiaris spec. noy.; 131: paratipo, 3,8 mm, 22° 00’ N, 17° 22’ W, 46 m; 132: holotipo, 7,7 mm, 22° 00’ N, 17° 22’ W, 46 m (MNCN). 133, 134: protoconcha; 133: detalle de la microescultura de la protoconcha; 136; detalle de la escultura de la teleoconcha; 137: opérculo, 1,3 mm. Figures 131-137. Chauvetia peculiaris spec. nov.; 131: paratype, 5.8 mm, 22° 00’ N, 17° 22’ W, 46 m; 132: holotype, 7.7 mm, 22° 00’ N, 17° 22’ W, 46 m (MNCN). 133, 134: protoconch; 135: detailofthe microsculpture ofthe protoconch; 136; detail ofthe sculpture ofthe teleoconch; 137: operculum, 1.3 mm. 143 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Descripción : Concha (Figs. 49-51, 125) fusiforme-alargada, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira. Protoconcha (Fig. 52, 127) con 0,8 vueltas, y con una anchura de unos 720 pm (núcleo: 600 pm, primera media vuelta: 670 pm) y unas 600 pm de altura. Escultura espiral obsoleta (Figs. 128, 129) y costillas fuertes iniciándose prác- ticamente al finalizar el núcleo. La tran- sición con la teleoconcha, si nos fijamos en su escultura, no resulta tan clara como en otras Chauvetia pero el cambio de color, dado que su protoconcha es blanca, nos ayuda a apreciarla. Teleoconcha con vueltas de perfil pla- noconvexo con la sutura poco profunda. Escultura basada en cordones espirales con anchura similar a sus interespacios al igual que sus costillas que son poco pro- nunciadas. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen cuatro cordones espirales, for- mando el superior el reborde de la espira. En la cuarta vuelta aparece por encima de éste un quinto cordón. En la última vuelta hay cinco cordones por encima de la inserción labial prácticamente de la misma anchura y, hacia la base, aparecen seis o siete cordoncillos más. La escultura axial, poco pronunciada, es similar en grosor y está formada por costillas orto- dinas o muy poco prosoclinas, que son unas dieciocho en la última vuelta. Se prolongan por debajo de la inserción labial acabando cerca del inicio del canal sifonal. Al cruzarse cordones y costillas se forman nodulos redondeados. Con grandes aumentos (Fig. 130) puede apre- ciarse una microescultura muy fina de líneas axiales y algunos filetes espirales irregulares. La última vuelta ocupa el 55 % de la altura total de la concha. Abertura oval que alcanza el 38 % de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se aprecian cuatro dientes de los que el superior es más pronunciado y el inferior constituye el borde externo del canal sifonal, que es corto y abierto. Coloración de la concha blanco ama- rillenta con líneas espirales rojizas. En algunas conchas estas líneas coinciden con los cordones espirales mientras que en otras coinciden con los interespacios. Las suturas, la base de la concha y el canal sifonal suelen ser también rojizos. La protoconcha es de color blanco. Dimensiones: Holotipo 8,4 mm; paratipo con una altura de 7,8 mm. Animal: Desconocido. Distribución : Sólo conocida por ejem- plares procedentes del Sahara. Comentarios : Por la escultura de su pro- toconcha se aproximaría a Chauvetia reti- fera (Brugnone, 1880), C. tenuisculpta Daut- zenberg, 1912 o C. multilirata Oliver y Rolán, 2008, pero las dos primeras son de mayor tamaño, presentan tres cordones espirales en la primera vuelta y la anchura de sus cordones es claramente más ancha que sus interespacios. Además C. retifera tiene color marrón rojizo y C. tenuisculpta es blanca. En cuanto a la protoconcha en C. tenuisculpta sus costillas se inician ya en el núcleo. El único ejemplar de C. multilirata estudiado era de color blanco sucio, pre- sentaba también los cordones espirales más anchos que sus interespacios, así como sus costillas y su protoconcha tenía las costillas menos pronunciadas. Otra especie presente en Senegal, C. luciacuestae Oliver y Rolán, 2008, también guarda cierto parecido si bien la coloración rojiza de esta última afecta únicamente a los nodulos. La protocon- cha las diferencia claramente ya que C. luciacuestae carece de costillas axiales en casi su mayor parte. Chauvetia peculiaris spec. nov. (Figs. 53, 54, 131-137) Material tipo: Holotipo (Fig. 53-54, 132) en MNCN (15.05/51086). Paratipos, todos de Sahara Occi- dental: MNHN (1 c) 23° 65' N, 15° 25' W; MHNS (1 c) (Fig 131) 23° 09' N, 16° 25' W; CHO (1 c) 23° 09' N, 16° 25' (1 c) 22° 00' N, 17° 22' W; CPR (1 ej) recolectada por pescadores. Localidad tipo: Sahara, 22° 00' N, 17° 22' W, 46 m. Etimología: El nombre específico hace alusión al carácter poco común de los cordones espirales más anchos de la protoconcha. 144 OLIVER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 138-143. Chauvetia edentula spec. nov. 138: holotipo, 6,3 mm, 22° 03’ N, 17° 11’ W, 77 m, Sahara (MNCN); 139: detalle de la abertura; 140, 1 4 1 : protoconcha, Arguineguín, Gran Canaria, 377 m; 142: detalle de la protoconcha; 143: detalle de la escultura. Figures 138-143. Chauvetia edentula spec. nov. 138: holotype, 6.3 mm, 22° 05’ N, 17° ll’W, 77 m, Sahara (MNCN); 139: detail ofthe aperture; 140, 141: protoconch, Arguineguín, Gran Canaria, 377 m; 142: detail of the protoconch; 143: detail ofthe sculpture. 145 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Descripción : Concha (Figs. 53, 54, 131, 132) fusiforme-alargada, sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira. Protoconcha (Figs. 133, 134) con una vuelta, y con una anchura de unas 570 pm (núcleo: 330 jum, primera media vuelta: 530 jum) y unas 630 pm de altura. Escultura basada en unos 16-18 cordonci- llos espirales, de anchura similar a los interespacios (Fig. 135). Las costillas de la protoconcha se inician a partir del núcleo y en un número entre 20 y 25 cruzan los cordones dándole un aspecto reticulado. Teleoconcha con una escultura de cor- dones espirales de anchura similar o algo menor que sus interespacios (Fig. 136). Costillas algo más estrechas que sus inte- respacios. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen cinco cordones espirales siendo el superior el reborde de la espira. En la última vuelta se mantienen estos cinco cor- dones por encima de la inserción labial. En la base hay una decena de cordonci- llos más estrechos. La escultura axial está formada por costillas convexas algo pro- soclinas, una docena en la última vuelta que se prolongan por debajo de la inser- ción labial. La ultima vuelta ocupa el 60 % de la altura total de la concha. Abertura oval que alcanza el 40% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se aprecian unos dientes constituyendo el inferior el borde externo del canal sifonal que, aunque es muy corto es claro, debido al estrechamiento de la parte inferior del margen externo del canal sifonal y a la presencia de una escotadura en la base del labio externo. El color de las escasas conchas estu- diadas era crema con una banda algo más oscura a la altura de la inserción labial y una base con el canal sifonal blanco. Dimensiones: Holotipo 7,7 x 3,4 mm; paratipos de unas dimensiones similares. Animal: Desconocido. Opérculo (Fig. 137) ovoide con el núcleo subterminal. Distribución: La especie solo se ha localizado en las costas del Sahara. Comentarios: El tipo de protoconcha con costillas axiales en toda su extensión la relaciona con el grupo de C. javieri. Se diferencia de esta especie por tener en la teleoconcha unas costillas más pronunciadas, un canal sifonal más claro y menos cordones espirales (en la última vuelta hay cinco cordones de anchura similar a los interespacios por encima de la inserción labial mientras que en C. javieri suele haber seis o siete, que además tienen una anchura clara- mente superior a sus interespacios). En cuanto a la protoconcha, la de C. javieri es más alta y presenta más costillitas axiales (más de 30 vs. unas 24), teniendo además más cordoncillos espirales. De Chauvetia distans spec. nov. y de C. hernandezi spec. nov. se distingue por el tipo de protoconcha ya que en ellas no hay escultura axial en toda su exten- sión. De Chauvetia megastoma spec. nov. se distingue por tener menos cordones espirales, un canal sifonal más marcado y por la diferente escultura de su proto- concha. Chauvetia edentula spec. nov. (Figs. 55-59, 138-143) Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 55-57, 138, 139) en MNCN (15.05/51087) (Figs. 138-140). Paratipos: MNHN (1), MHNS (1), BMNH (1), CPR (1), CHO (6 c, 4 j, Figs. 58, 59). Todos de Arguineguín, N de Gran Canaria, 377 m. Localidad tipo: Sahara Occidental, 22° 05' N, 17° ÍY W, 77 m. Etimología: El nombre específico alude a la ausencia de dientes en la abertura, pese a que el labio se encuentra bien desarrollado. Descripción: Concha (Figs. 55-59, 138) fusiforme-alargada sólida, con unas seis vueltas de espira. Protoconcha (Figs. 140, 141) con una vuelta, y con una anchura de unos 720 pm (núcleo: 350 jum, primera media vuelta: 550 jum) y unas 750 pm de altura. Escultura (Fig. 142) formada por unas 26 costillas axiales que comienzan a partir del núcleo y son cruzadas por muchos 146 OLIVER Y ROLÁN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 144-149. Chauvetia borgesi spec. nov.; material de Canarias: 144, 145: paratipos, 6,3 mm, Sardina, Gran Canaria (MHNS); 7,1 mm, Gando, Gran Canaria (MHNS); 146, 147: protocon- cha; 148, 149: detalle de la abertura. Figures 144-149. Chauvetia borgesi spec. nov.; material from Canaries: 144, 145: paratypes, 6.3 mm. Sardina, Gran Canaria (MHNS); 7.1 mm, Gando, Gran Canaria (MHNS); 146, 147: protoconch; 148, 149: detail ofthe aperture. 147 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 cordoncillos espirales de anchura desi- gual, al igual que sus interespacios, menos definidas que en otras especies, pero muy numerosos, pudiendo llegar a ser 40 o más. Entre las costillas es donde se aprecia mejor la escultura espiral. Teleoconcha con vueltas convexas y sutura profunda. Escultura (Fig. 143) de cordones espirales de anchura similar o algo menor que sus interespacios al igual que las costillas. En el inicio de la teleo- concha aparecen seis cordones espirales siendo el superior sólo el reborde supe- rior de la espira y no se separa hasta la tercera vuelta. En la última vuelta hay seis cordones por encima de la inserción labial y, hacia la base, aparece una quin- cena de cordoncillos más, separados por interespacios claros. La escultura axial está formada por costillas convexas orto- clinas o muy poco prosoclinas, una decena en la última vuelta que apenas se prolongan por debajo de la inserción labial. La ultima vuelta ocupa el 57% de la altura total de la concha. Abertura oval-redondeada que alcanza el 37% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo no se aprecia en las conchas estudiadas dientes (Fig. 139) salvo en la parte inferior, en lo que podríamos consi- derar como el borde externo del canal sifonal, que aunque corto es claro. Coloración de la concha suele ser amarillenta con la base algo mas oscura. Dimensiones: Holotipo 6,3 x 3,1 mm; paratipos algo más pequeños. Animal: Desconocido. Distribución : La especie estaría pre- sente en el Sahara y en Canarias, siendo una especie de más profundidad que la mayoría de las especies de Chauvetia. Comentarios : La forma y escultura de la protoconcha la relacionaría con el grupo de C. javieri. Pero no se trata de una mera variedad de aguas profundas sino de una especie con entidad propia. La curvatura regular de las vueltas, su sutura profunda y su canal sifonal claro son caracteres que no se dan juntos en otras especies del grupo. Así C. javieri no tiene las vueltas tan convexas ni un canal sifonal claro, además de tener los cordones espirales más anchos que los interespacios. C. peculiaris spec. nov. tiene menos cordones espirales en la teleoconcha (cinco en la última vuelta por encima de la inserción labial) y su canal sifonal es más corto. Chauvetia horgesi spec. nov. (Figs. 60-65, 144-155) Material tipo: Holotipo (Figs. 60, 61) en MNCN (15.05/ 51088). Paratipos en las siguientes colecciones: MNHN (1) (Figs. 62, 63), de la localidad tipo; BMNH (1), Fuerteventura, 10 m; MHNS (5): 1 c. Gando, Gran Canaria (Fig. 145); 1 c. Sardina, Gran Canaria (Fig. 144); 1 c. Arrecife, Lanzarote: 2 c, Sahara Occidental, 23° 15' N, 16° 40' W, y 22° 05' N, 16° 58' W) (Fig. 150, 151); CPR (1) Sahara Occidental, 23° 15' N, 16° 40' W; CHO (11: 8 c. Sardina, 15 m; 1 c. Bañaderos, Gran Canaria; 1 c, Roques de Taliarte, 23 m; 1 c, Arinaga); CPB (24 ej y c: Punta Teño, Tenerife); CFS (1) Arrecife, Lanzarote. Material estudiado: CANARIAS: Gran Canaria: 1 c, Playa Honda (CFS); 1 j, Arguineguín (CHO); 1 j. Playa del Hombre, 80 m (CFS); 1 c, 3j, NO Gran Canaria (CHO); 11c, Arinaga, SW Gran Canaria, 5 m (CFS); 2 c. Sardina, 15 m (CHO); 1 ej, 3 c. Sardina, 17 m (CHO); 1 c, C0005 (CHO); 2 j. Gando 8-24383, 12 m (CHO); 1 j. Caleta Abajo (CHO); 2 j, C0020a (CHO); 5 j, NO Gran Canaria, 100 m (CFS); 2 j, RH- 1/30008, 85 m (CHO); 2 j; El Cabrón (CFS); 2 c, lote 275, C0025 (CHO); 3 c, C0001 (CHO); 1 c, C0022 (CHO); 1 j, FH89 (CHO); 1 c, 1 j. Las Burras (CFS); 1 j, FH67 (CHO). Fuerteventura: 1 c. Granillo (CHO); 1 j, Taliarte, 200 m (CFS); lj; Las Salinas, 40 m (CFS). Lanzarote: 2 j. Playa Honda (CFS); 1 c, Playa Honda, Arrecife (CHO); 3 ej, C0005 (CHO); 2c, C0005 (CHO); 1 c, C0014 (CHO). Tenerife: 10 j. Punta Teño (CPB). SAHARA: 1 c, lote 201, 22° 05' N, 16° 58' W (CHO); 1 j, lote 208, 22° 35' N, 16° 58' W (CHO); 1 c, lote 212, 23° 15' N, 16° 90' W (CHO). MAURITANIA: 1 j, MM1730 (CHO). Localidad tipo: Gando, Canarias, 6 m. Etimología: La especie se dedica a José Pedro Borges, malacólogo portugués que colaboró con la aportación de material de Canarias y de otras zonas próximas. Descripción : Concha (Figs. 6Q-.65, 144, unas seis vueltas de espira. Protoconcha 145, 150, 151) fusiforme, sólida, con (Figs. 146, 147, 152, 153) con 0,75 148 OLI VER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 150-155. Chauvetia borgesi spec. nov.; material de Sahara; 150, 151: paratipos, 5,9 mm, 23° 15’ N, 16° 40’ W, Sahara (MHNS); 5,1 mm 22° 05’ N, 16° 58’ W, Sahara (MHNS); 152, 153: protoconchas; 154, 155: microescultura de la protoconcha. Figures 150-155. Chauvetia borgesi spec. nov.; material from Sahara; 150, 151: paratypes, 5.9 mm, 23° 15’ N, 16° 40 ’ W, Sahara (MHNS); 5. 1 mm 22 0 05’ N, 16° 58’ W, Sahara (MHNS); 152, 153: protoconchs; 154, 155: microsculpture ofthe protoconch. 149 Iberas, 27 (2), 2009 vueltas, y con una anchura de unas 700 ¡um (núcleo: 380 jum, primera media vuelta: 600 jum) y unas 700 pm de altura. Escultura (Figs. 154, 155) formada por unos 15 cordoncillos espirales cruzados por unas 18 costillas que se inician a partir del mismo núcleo y que son más estrechas que sus intervalos. Teleoconcha con una escultura de cordones espirales de anchura parecida (aunque los superiores son algo más estrechos) y claramente más anchos que sus interespacios. Las costillas pueden ser de anchura similar a los interespa- cios, algo más estrechas o algo más gruesas en cuyo caso la escultura axial es más prominente. En el inicio de la teleoconcha aparecen cinco cordones espirales siendo el superior el reborde de la espira. En la última vuelta hay seis cordones por encima de la inserción labial de los que los dos superiores son de menor anchura y suelen aparecer juntos. Hacia la base, aparecen de una docena de cordoncillos más. La escul- tura axial está formada por costillas con- vexas algo prosoclinas (algunas leve- mente sigmoideas), una decena en la última vuelta que apenas se prolongan por debajo de la inserción labial. La ultima vuelta ocupa el 60 % de la altura total de la concha. Abertura (Figs. 148, 149) oval que alcanza el 41% de la altura de la concha. En el interior del labio externo se apre- cian siete u ocho dientes constituyendo el inferior el borde externo del canal sifonal, que es corto y bastante abierto. Coloración de la concha: Puede ser marrón oscuro o amarillenta. En algunas conchas de color marrón oscuro puede aparecer una banda blanca sub- sutural que afecta a los dos o tres cordo- nes espirales superiores. Dimensiones: Holotipo 7,0 x 3,4 mm; paratipos de unas dimensiones simila- COMENTARIOS FINALES Otros taxones mencionados para Canarias: Chauvetia candidissima canarica Nord- sieck y García-Talavera, 1979' (Fig. 66). res, alguno ligeramente mayor, de hasta unos 8 mm. Animal (Figs. 158, 159): Color crema anaranjado con puntos amarillentos; sifón grisáceo. Distribución : La especie está presente en Canarias y en las costas del Sahara Occidental y Mauritania. Comentarios: Por su protoconcha, esta especie estaría relacionada con las del grupo de C. javieri. Se diferenciaría de C. javieri por tener una escultura más marcada, menos cordones espirales, por su aspecto más rechoncho y por presen- tar menos dientes en la abertura. Además la protoconcha de C. borgesi spec. nov. presenta menos costillas que más voluminosas que las de C. javieri. De Chauvetia peculiaris spec. nov. y de Chauvetia edentula spec. nov, especies que también presentan protoconcha del mismo estilo, se distingue por no tener tan definido el canal sifonal. Sin embargo la especie más parecida, y con la que puede originar confusión su diferenciación, debido tanto a su aspecto general y color, a su abundancia y a que comparten área de distribución es C. crassior. La diferencia determinante es la escultura de su protoconcha ya que C. crassior no presenta costillas en la parte inicial de la misma. Si una concha carece de protoconcha puede resultar difícil de determinar su identidad, si bien la aber- tura de C. crassior suele ser más cua- drada que la de C. borgesi y su concha presenta menos cordones espirales. Aunque se ha apreciado en el mate- rial estudiado que la protoconcha de los ejemplares de Canarias tiene menos cos- tillas que los del Sahara y que la teleo- concha presenta menos cordones por encima de la inserción labial (cinco frente a seis) no parecen diferencias importantes y se consideran dentro de la variabilidad intraespecífica. En el trabajo de descripción aparecen mencionadas unas dimensiones de 7 x 3,5 mm para esta especie. Localidad: La Gomera. El lote de tipos está formado 150 OLIVER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara Figuras 156-163. Partes blandas de especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Punta Teño, Tenerife (CPB). 156, 157. Chauvetia crassior. 158, 159. Chauvetia borgesi. 160, 161: Chauvetia cf. affinis ; 162, 163: Chauvetia affinis. Figures 156-163. Soft parís of Chauvetia species ftom Canarias, Punta Teño, Tenerife (CPB). 156, 157: Chauvetia crassior. 158, 159: Chauvetia borgesi. 160, 161: Chauvetia cf. affinis; 162, 163: Chauvetia affinis. 151 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 por dos conchas aparentemente diferen- tes, una de ellas muy erosionada, tanto la concha como la protoconcha y sólo se puede apreciar el patrón de color a bandas. La otra, que se corresponde con la figura representada en la descripción original, tienen una altura de 5,5 mm, la protoconcha está desaparecida. Por la falta de datos es imposible definir la especie, hasta que se pueda estudiar más material de la localidad tipo, pero parece distinta a cualquiera de las que están representadas en nuestro material. Chauvetia elongata Nordsieck y García-Talavera, 1979 (Fig. 67). Este taxon aparece en el trabajo de descrip- ción original con unas dimensiones de 10 x 3,5 mm, y su procedencia del Sur de Gran Canaria. El holotipo existente en el MNHC tiene una máxima dimen- sión de 8,8 mm, y la protoconcha está fuertemente erosionada, por lo que no se puede hacer la comparación con Chauvetia lefebvrii y C. retifera, que son las especies con las que tiene un mayor parecido morfológico. En cualquier caso, después del examen de grandes cantidades de material procedente de Canarias se puede afirmar que estas dos especies no parecen estar presentes en las islas por lo que es posible que este holotipo proceda de material introdu- cido por barcos de pesca. De las nuevas especies recuerda leja- namente a C. austera spec. nov., pero en esta última las vueltas son más conve- xas, los cordoncillos espirales tienen interespacios más anchos, y el número de estos cordoncillos en la última vuelta es menor. Por otra parte, existe un taxon con el nombre: Donovania mamillata var. elon- gata Locard y Caziot, 1900 pero se trata de un nomen nudum. Distribución de las especies estu- diadas En el presente trabajo, que com- prende las áreas de Canarias, Maurita- nia y Sahara, se han estudiado 18 espe- cies, de las cuales ya tenían nombre 9 de ellas, mientras que otras 9 han sido ahora descritas como nuevas, recibiendo el correspondiente nombre. El área de distribución de las especies ha sido muy variable. Cinco de estas es- pecies ya eran conocidas del trabajo ante- rior, que había sido centrado sobre la zona de Dakar, Senegal. Alguna de ellas, como C. tenebrosa, era más abundante en Senegal, aunque su área se extiende ahora hasta Mauritania. Otro tanto cabe decir de C. lamyi y C. javieri, pero en estas últimas, la zona de mayor densidad de población es el Sahara. C. joani parece dis- tribuirse tanto por Senegal como por Mauritania. Caso especial ha sido C. errata spec. nov. que, pese a su mayor abundancia en Senegal, en el trabajo an- terior se la consideró como una especie ya descrita perteneciente a un determi- nado taxon, mientras en el presente tra- bajo, después de precisar más su estudio, se le da nombre como especie nueva. Las especies que se han encontrado con una mayor incidencia en las Islas Canarias han sido: C. affinis, muy abun- dante (también presente en Sahara y norte de Marruecos); C. crassior, también muy abundante y encontrada también en el Sahara y del Sur de la Península Ibérica (aunque esta población es algo distinta morfológicamente). En cambio C. procerula y C. mamillata, han apare- cido en escasa cantidad, y su área de distribución se extiende al Mediterrá- neo. Finalmente, dos de las especies nuevas, C. edentula y C. borgesi, se han encontrado en Canarias, no en gran abundancia y comparten área de distri- bución con Sahara. El Sahara parece ser el área en la que existe una mayor número de especies: 13. Además de las ya mencionadas C. mamillata, C. affinis, C. crassior, C. lamyi, C. javieri, C. edentula spec. nov. y C. borgesi spec. nov., se han encontrado las siguientes: C. lefebvrii, que también se encuentra en el Atlántico de la Penín- sula Ibérica y en el Mediterráneo; C. her- nandezi spec. nov. y C. distans spec. nov. que también se han encontrado en Mau- ritania, aunque en mucha menor canti- dad; C. gigantissima spec. nov., C. austera spec. nov. y C. peculiaris spec. nov. apa- recen como exclusivas de esta zona. Mauritania tiene nueve especies, casi siempre compartidas con el Sahara (C. 152 OLIVER Y RoláN: Las especies de Chauvetia de Canarias, Mauritania y Sahara hernandezi spec. nov., C. distans spec. nov.; o con el Sahara y Senegal: C. javieri y C. lamyi. Con Canarias y Sahara: C. borgesi spec. nov. Con Senegal comparte: C. joani, C. tenebrosa, y C. errata spec. nov. La única especie que sólo se ha encontrado en estas costas ha sido C. megastoma spec. nov. Morfología de las conchas: algunas conchas tienen un evidente parecido pudiendo agruparse con las que le son más próximas. Algunos caracteres de la protoconcha parecen importantes en la diferenciación: Es evidente que se pueden formar algunos grupos en base a la escultura axial de la protoconcha: 1- con costillas axiales bien diferen- ciadas y separadas, y casi sin escultura espiral: C. tenuisculpta. 2- con costillas axiales en la proto- concha pero muy próximas y numero- sas, y escultura espiral clara: C. javieri, C. megastoma, C. austera, C. peculiaris, C. edentula. 3- sin costillas axiales en la mayor parte de la protoconcha, aunque están presentes en el final: a este grupo perte- necen la mayoría de las especies conoci- das del género. En las conchas que no tienen escul- tura axial en la protoconcha y en cambio BIBLIOGRAFÍA Ardovini R. 2008. Description of a new species belonging to Genus Chauvetia Monterosato, 1884 (Gastropoda: Buccinidae), from West Africa (Senegal). Malacologia Mostra mondiale, 60: 3-5; erratum, 61: 27. Dance S.P. 1986. A history of the shell collec- ting. E. J. Brill - Dr. W Backhuys, Leiden. 265 pp, 32 pls. Dautzenberg P. 1910. Contribution á la faune malacologique de LAfrique occidentale. Actes de la Societé Linnéenne de Bordeaux, 64: 1 - 174, pls. .1-4. Deshayes G.P. 1835. Mollusques. Expédition Scientifique de Morée entreprise et publiée par ordre du Gouvernement Frangais. Travaux de la Section des Sciences Physiques sous la Di- rection de M. le Colonel Bory de Saint Vicent. Tome III. I partie. Zoologie. Pp 81-205, pls. 18-26. tienen escultura espiral fina las hay que presentan: 1- apenas hay escultura axial: C. gigantea, C. multilirata, 2- hay escultura axial pero muy poco definida: C. tenebrosa, C. pelorcei, C. robustalba, 3- hay excavaciones muy regular- mente dispuestas entre los cordoncillos espirales: la mayoría de las restantes especies. AGRADECIMIENTOS Los autores agradecen a las numero- sas personas e instituciones que cedie- ron material en préstamo para el pre- sente estudio: MNHN, MNHC, MHNS, José Pedro Borges, Winfried Engl, Peter Ryall, Frank Swinnen, y a José María Hernández (t) y a sus herederos. Asi- mismo agradecemos a Karin Sindemark (SMNH, Estocolmo) la información acerca del holotipo de Chauvetia crassior y a Purba Pal (SMNH) la fotografía de las Figuras 19 y 20. Jesús Méndez e Inés Pazos hicieron las fotografías al microscopio electrónico de barrido en el Centro de Apoyo Cientí- fico y Tecnológico a la Investigación (CACTI) de la Universidad de Vigo. Fretter V. y Graham A. 1984. Prosobranch Molluscs of Britain and Denmark. Part 8. Ne- ogastropoda. Journal of Molluscan Studies. London, Supplement 15: 435-556. Hergueta H., Luque A. y Templado J. 2002. On the taxonomy and biology of Chauvetia mamillata (Risso, 1826) (Gastropoda: Bucci- nidae) in south East Spain. Bollettino Mala- cologico. Supplemento 4.135-146. Micali P. 1999 "1998". Note sulle specie di Chauvetia dell' Atlántico nord-orientale. Bo- llettino Malacologico, 34(5-8): 53-68. Mifsud C. 1994. Alcuni molluschi vivi dalle ac- que di Malta. La Conchiglia, 26 (272): 29-36. Monterosato T. di M. 1889. Coquilles mari- nes Marocaines. Journal de Conchyliologie, 37: 20-40, 112-121. Nordsieck F. 1976. Famiglia Buccinidae. II ge- nere Chauvetia Monterosato nei mari d' Eu- ropa. La Conchiglia, 8 (89-90): 3-7. 153 Iberus, 27 (2), 2009 Nordsieck F. y García-Tal aver a F., 1979. Moluscos marinos de Canarias y Madera (Gas- tro-poda). Aula de Cultura de Tenerife. 208 pp, 46 pls. Odhner N.H. 1932. Beitrage zur Malakozoo- logie der Kanarischen Inseln. Lamellibran- chien, Cephalopoden, Gastropoden. Arkiv fór Zoologi, Stokholm, 23A (14): 1-116. Oliver J.D. y Rolán E. 2008. Las especies del género Chauvetia (Gastropoda, Neogastro- poda)del área de Dakar, Senegal, África Oc- cidental, con la descripción de diez especies nuevas. Iberus, 26 (2): 133-175. Risso A. 1826. Histoire naturelle des principales pro- ductions de l'Europe Méridionale et particulié- rement de celles des environs de Nice et des Alpes- Maritimes. Mollusques. Levrault, F. G., Paris, 4: 1-439, 12 pls. Sabelli B., Giannuzzi-Savelli R. y Bedulli D. 1991. Catalogo annotato dei molluschi marini del Mediterráneo. Vol. 1. Librería Naturalistica Bolognese, Bologna, 348 pp. FÉ DE ERRATAS DEL TRABAJO ANTERIOR Oliver y Rolán (2008). Las especies del género Chauvetia (Gastropoda, Neogastro- poda) del área de Dakar, Senegal, África occidental, con la descripción de diez espe- cies nuevas. Iberus, 26 (2): 133-175 En este trabajo, una especie cambió de consideración en el curso del mismo, pero en algunos lugares quedó con el nombre anterior, por lo que se indican aquí esos errores para su corrección. Pag. 168 2a columna línea 4 Pag. 170 2a columna línea 6 Pag. 170 2a columna línea 9 Pag. 174 Ia columna línea 14 Pag. 174 Ia columna línea 24 Dice en todas C. candidissima y debería decir C. gigantea 154 NORMAS DE PUBLICACION • La revista Iberus publica artículos de fondo, notas y monografías que versen sobre cualquiera de los aspectos relacionados con la Malacología. Se entiende por artículo un trabajo de investigación de más de 5 páginas de texto, incluidas láminas, gráficos y tablas. Las notas son trabajos de menor extensión. Las monografías son tra- bajos sobre un tema único, de extensión superior a las 50 páginas de la revista y que serán publicadas, si procede, como un suplemento de Iberus. Los autores interesados en publicar monografías deberán ponerse previamente en contacto con el Editor de Publicaciones. Se entiende que el contenido de los manuscritos no ha sido publicado, ni enviado simultáneamente a otra revista para su consideración. • Los manuscritos, así como toda la correspondencia relacionada con los mismos, deberán ser remitidos a: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publicaciones, Departamento de Biología Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, España y /o al correo electrónico . • El texto del trabajo podrá estar redactado en español, inglés, italiano, francés o portugués. • Los artículos, notas y monografías deberán presentarse sobre DIN A-4, por una sola cara a doble espacio (incluyendo referencias, pies de figura y tablas), con al menos 3 centímetros de margen por cada lado. Los tra- bajos se entregarán por triplicado (original y dos copias) y se incluirá una versión en un CD, o bien remitida por correo electrónico, utilizando procesadores de texto en sus versiones de corrientes de Windows (pero no en el formato .docx de Word 2007, el habitual de Windows Vista) o Macintosh. En caso de autoría compartida, uno de los autores deberá hacerse responsable de toda la correspondencia. • Junto con el trabajo debe incluirse una lista de al menos 4 posibles revisores del mismo, sin perjuicio de los que el propio Editor considere oportunos. • Los manuscritos se presentarán de acuerdo al siguiente esquema: Primera página. Deberá incluir un título conciso, pero sugerente del contenido del trabajo, así como una traduc- ción al inglés del mismo (si el artículo no está escrito en inglés). Cuando sea preciso, deberá incluir referencia a familia o taxones superiores. A continuación figurarán, por este orden, el nombre y apellidos completos del autor o autores, las direcciones completas de los mismos, y un resumen del trabajo y su traducción al inglés. Dicho resumen deberá sintetizar, en conjunción con el título, tanto los resultados como las conclusiones del artículo; se sugiere una extensión de 100 a 200 palabras. Páginas siguientes. Incluirán el resto del artículo, que debe dividirse en secciones precedidas por breves encabe- zamientos. Siempre que sea posible, se recomienda seguir el siguiente esquema: Introducción, Material y métodos. Resultados, Discusión, Conclusiones, Agradecimientos y Bibliografía. Si se emplean abreviaturas no habituales en el texto, deberán indicarse tras el apartado de Material y Métodos. • Las notas breves deberán presentarse de la misma forma, pero sin resumen. • Deberán evitarse notas a pie de página y referencias cruzadas. Deberán respetarse estrictamente los Códigos Internacionales de Nomenclatura Zoológica y Botánica (últimas ediciones). Cuando un taxón aparezca por primera vez deberá citarse su autor y fecha de su descripción. En el caso de artículos sistemáticos, cuando se den las sinonimias de los taxones, éstas deberán citarse COMPLETAS, incluyendo en forma abreviada la publicación donde fueron descritas, y la localidad tipo si es conocida entre corchetes, según el siguiente esquema (préstese especial cuidado a la puntuación): Dendrodoris limbata (Cuvier, 1804) Sinonimias Doris limbata Cuvier, 1804, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. París, 4 (24): 468-469 [Localidad tipo: Marsella]. Doris nigricans Otto, 1823, Nov. Act. Ac. Caes. Leop.-Car., 10: 275. Dichas referencias no deberán incluirse en la lista de Bibliografía si es la única vez que se nombran en el texto. Si se incluyen una lista completa de referencias de un taxón inmediatamente tras éste, deberá seguirse el mismo esquema (sin incluir en Bibliografía las referencias que no se mencionen en otro lugar del texto). • Sólo los nombres en latín y los de taxones genéricos y específicos deberán llevar subrayado sencillo o prefe- rentemente ir en cursiva. En ningún caso deberá escribirse una palabra totalmente en letras mayúsculas, ni siquiera el Título. Las unidades a utilizar deberán pertenecer al Sistema Métrico Decimal, junto con sus correc- tas abreviaturas. En artículos escritos en castellano, en los números decimales sepárese la parte entera de la decimal por una coma inferior (,), NUNCA por un punto (.) o coma superior (')• • Las referencias bibliográficas irán en el texto con minúsculas o versalitas: Fretter y Graham (1962) o Fretter y Graham (1962). Si son más de dos autores se deberán citar todos la primera vez que aparecen en el texto [Smith, Jones y Brown (1970)] empleándose et al. las siguientes veces [Smith et al. (1970)]. Si un autor ha publi- cado más de un trabajo en un año se citarán con letras: (Davis, 1989a; Davis, 1989b). No deberá emplearse op. cit. La lista de referencias deberá incluir todas las citas del texto y sólo éstas, ordenadas alfabéticamente. Se citarán los nombres de todos los autores de cada referencia, sea cual sea su número. Los nombres de los autores deberán escribirse, en letras minúsculas o Versalitas. No deberán incluirse referencias a autores cuando éstos aparezcan en el texto exclusivamente como autoridades de un taxón. Los nombres de las publica- ciones periódicas deberán aparecer COMPLETOS, no abreviados. Cuando se citen libros, dése el título, editor, lugar de publicación, n° de edición si no es la primera y número total de páginas. Deberán evitarse referencias a Tesis Doctorales u otros documentos inéditos de difícil consulta. Síganse los siguientes ejemplos (préstese atención a la puntuación): Fretter V. y Graham A. 1962. British Prosobranch Molluscs. Ray Society, London, 765 pp. Ponder W.F. 1988. The Truncatelloidean (= Rissoacean) radiation - a preliminary phylogeny. En Ponder, W.F. (Ed.): Prosobranch Phylogeny. Malacological Review, suppl. 4: 129-166. Ros J. 1976. Catálogo provisional de los Opistobranquios (Gastropoda: Euthyneura) de las costas ibéricas. Mis- celánea Zoológica, 3 (5): 21-51. • Las gráficas e ilustraciones deberán ser originales y presentarse preferentemente en formato electrónico al formato de caja de la revista o proporcional a éste. Este formato es de 57 mm (una columna) o 121 mm (dos) de anchura y hasta 196 mm de altura, si bien se recomienda utilizar el formato a dos columnas. Es importante que todas las figuras sean remitidas en su formato original (por ejemplo, las fotografías en .jpg de alta calidad o .tif, las gráficas en hojas de cálculo Excel o documentos de CorelDraw), puesto que las ilustraciones insertadas en el manuscrito WORD son inservibles en la fase de imprenta. Las imágenes digitales deben ser formateadas en su tamaño de impresión con una resolución mínima de 300 ppp para imágenes en color o escala de grises y de 600 ppp para las de blanco y negro. Considérese la reducción que será necesaria a la hora de decidir el tamaño de las escalas o letras en las figuras, que no deberán bajar de los 2 mm. En figuras compuestas, cada parte deberá etiquetarse con letras mayúsculas, el resto de las letras deberán ser minúsculas. Las escalas de dibujos y fotografías deberán ser gráficas, utilizando unidades del sistema métrico decimal; no deberán hacerse referen- cias a los aumentos de una determinada ilustración, ya que éstos cambian con la reducción. En su caso, se recomienda la utilización de mapas con proyección UTM. Cada figura, gráfica o ilustración deberá presentarse en hojas separadas y con numeración arábiga (1, 2, 3,...), sin separar "Figuras" y "Láminas". Los pies de figura, en una hoja aparte, deberán acompañarse de su traducción al inglés (o español si el inglés es la lengua del trabajo). Utilícese el esquema siguiente: Figura 1. Neodoris carvi. A: animal desplazándose; B: detalle de un rinóforo; C: branquia. Las abreviaturas empleadas en las ilustraciones deberán incluirse en los pies de figura. Los autores interesados en incluir láminas en color deberán consultar con el editor y sufragar el sobrecoste con una contribución de 30 € por página. Por lo demás, deberán ajustarse a los mismos requisitos indicados para las figuras. Si se pretende enviar gráficas o ilustraciones en impresión de papel es imprescindible presentar originales de buena calidad. Las imágenes en semitonos deben estar bien contrastadas y ajustarse al tamaño definitivo de impresión; al componer fotografías sobre una hoja, procúrese que los espacios entre ellas sean regulares y que estén debidamente alineadas. Téngase en cuenta que incluir fotografías de distinto contraste en una misma página conlleva una pobre reproducción final. Las gráficas de ordenador deberán imprimirse con impresora láser sobre papel de buena calidad. • Las Tablas se presentarán en hojas separadas, siempre con numeración romana (I, II, III,...). Las leyendas se incluirán en una hoja aparte acompañándose de una traducción al inglés. Deberán evitarse las tablas particu- larmente complejas. Se recomienda reducir el número y extensión de ilustraciones, láminas o tablas al mínimo necesario. • Los artículos que no se ajusten a las normas de publicación serán devueltos al autor con las indicaciones de los cambios necesarios. • El Comité Editorial comunicará al autor responsable del trabajo la fecha de recepción del trabajo y la fecha de envío a revisión. Cada original recibido será sometido a revisión por al menos dos investigadores. El Comité Editorial, a la vista de los informes de los revisores decidirá sobre la aceptación o no de cada manus- crito. El autor recibirá en cada caso copia de los comentarios de los revisores sobre su artículo. En caso de aceptación, el mismo Comité Editorial, si lo considera conveniente, podrá solicitar a los autores otras modifica- ciones que considere oportunas. Si el trabajo es aceptado, el autor deberá enviar una copia impresa del mismo corregida, acompañada por una versión en un CD, utilizando procesadores de texto en sus versiones corrien- tes de Windows (pero no el formato .docx generado por Word 2007, el habitual de Windows Vista) o Macin- tosh. La fecha de aceptación figurará en el artículo publicado. • Las pruebas de imprenta serán enviadas por correo electrónico al autor responsable, exclusivamente para la corrección de erratas, y deberán ser devueltas en un plazo máximo de una semana. Se recomienda prestar especial atención en la corrección de las pruebas. • De cada trabajo se entregarán gratuitamente 50 separatas, además de una versión electrónica en formato .pdf. Aquellos autores que deseen un número mayor, deberán hacerlo constar al devolver las pruebas de imprenta, y nunca posteriormente. El coste de las separatas adicionales será cargado al autor. INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS • Iberus publishes research papers, notes and monographs devoted to the various aspects of Malacology. Papers are manuscripts of more than 5 typed pages, including figures and tables. Notes are shorter papers. Monographs should exceed 50 pages of the final periodical, and may be published as Supplements. Authors wishing to publish monographs should contact the Editor. Manuscripts are considered on the understanding that their contents have not been published or simultaneously submitted for publication elsewhere. • Manuscripts and correspondence regarding editorial matters must be sent to: Serge Gofas, Editor de Publica- ciones, Departamento de Biología Animal, Universidad de Málaga, Campus de Teatinos, s/n, 29071, Málaga, Spain and/ or to the e-mail . • Manuscripts may be written in Spanish, English, Italian, French or Portuguese. • Manuscripts must be typed double spaced (including the references, figure captions and tables) on one side on A-4 (297x210 mm) with margins of at least 3 cm. An original and two copies must be submitted, together with a CD or e-mail remittance containing the article written with a current Windows (but not .docx format generated by Word 2007, mainly used with Windows Vista) or Macintosh word processor. When a paper has joint authorship, one author must accept responsibility for all correspondence. • The authors must inelude a list of at least 4 possible referees; the Editor can choose any others if appropriate. • Papers should conform the following layout: First page. This must inelude a concise but informative title, with mention of family of higher taxon when appropriate, and its Spanish translation. It will be followed by all authors' ñames and surnames, their full address(es), an abstract (and its Spanish translation) not exceeding 200 words which summarizes not only con- tents but results and conclusions. Following pages. These should content the rest of the paper, divided into sections under short headings. When- ever possible the text should be arranged as follows: Introduction, Material and methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, Acknowledgements and References. Unusual abbreviations used in the text must be grouped in one alphabetic sequence after the Material and methods section. • Notes should follow the same layout, without the abstract. • Footnotes and cross-references must be avoided. The International Codes of Zoological and Botanical Nomenclature must be strictly followed. The first mention in the text of any taxon must be followed by its authority including the year. In systematic papers, when synonyms of a taxon are given, they must be cited IN FULL, including the periodical, in an abbreviate form, where they were described, and the type localities in square brackets when known. Follow this example (please note the punctuation): Dendrodoris limbata (Cuvier, 1804) Synonyms Doris limbata Cuvier, 1804, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. París, 4 (24): 468-469 [Type locality: Marseille]. Doris nigricans Otto, 1823, Nov. Act. Ac. Caes. Leop.-Car., 10: 275. These references must not be included in the Bibliography list, except if referred to elsewhere in the text. If a full list of references of the taxon is to be given immediately below it, the same layout should be followed (also excluding from the Bibliography list those which are not cited elsewhere). Only Latin words and ñames of genera and species should be underlined once or be given in italics. No word must be written in UPPER CASE LETTERS. SI units are to be used, together with their appropriate symbols. In Spanish manuscripts, decimal numbers must be separated with a comma (,), NEVER with a point (.) or upper comma ('). • References in the text should be written in small letters or Small capitals: Fretter and Graham (1962) or Fretter and Graham (1962). The first mention in the text of a paper with more than two authors must inelude all of them [Smith, Jones and Brown (1970)], thereafter use et al. [Smith et al. (1970)]. If an author has published more than one paper per year, refer to them with letters: (Davis, 1989a; Davis, 1989b). Avoid op. cit. The references in the reference list should be in alphabetical order and inelude all the publications cited in the text but only these. ALL the authors of a paper must be included. These should be written in small letters or Small capitals. The references need not be cited when the author and date are given only as authority for a tax- onomic ñame. Tifies of periodicals must be given IN FULL, not abbreviated. For books, give the title, ñame of publisher, place of publication, indication of edition if not the first and total number of pages. Keep references to doctoral theses or any other unpublished documents to an absolute minimum. See the following examples (please note the punctuation): Fretter V. and Graham A. 1962. British Prosobranch Molluscs. Ray Society, London, 765 pp. Ponder W.F. 1988. The Truncatelloidean (= Rissoacean) radiation - a preliminary phylogeny. In Ponder W.F. (Ed.): Prosobranch Phylogeny. Malacological Review, suppl. 4: 129-166. Ros J. 1976. Catálogo provisional de los Opistobranquios (Gastropoda: Euthyneura) de las costas ibéricas. Mis- celánea Zoológica, 3 (5): 21-51. • Figures must be original and provided preferably in electronic format and adjusted to page format and column size. These should be one column (57 mm) or two columns (121 mm) wide and up 196 mm high, or be proportional to these sizes. Two columns format is recommended. It is essential that all figures be supplied in their original format (e.g. photographs as high-grade .jpg or as .tif files, graphs as Excel spreadsheets or Corel- Draw files), as the files inserted into WORD documents cannot be used for printing. Digital images must be given their final printing size with a resolution at least 300 dpi for colour and halftones, and at least 600 dpi for black/white. Take into account possible reduction in lettering drawings; final lettering must be at least 2 mm high. In com- posite drawings, each figure should be given a capital letter; additional lettering should be in lower-case letters. A scale line, labelled with SI units, must be used to indicate size; magnification ratio must be avoided as it may be changed during printing. UTM maps are to be used if necessary. Figures must be submi tted on sepárate sheets, and numbered with consecutive Arabic numbers (1, 2, 3,...), without separating Tlates' and 'Figures'. Legends for Figures must be typed in numerical order on a sepárate sheet, and a Spanish translation must be included. Follow this example (please note the punctuation): Figure 1. Neodoris carvi. A: animal crawling; B: rhinophore; C: gills. If abbreviations are to be used in illustrations, they should be included in the figure captions. Authors wishing to publish illustrations in colour should consult with the editor and will be charged a contri- bution of 30 € per page. They should otherwise follow the same standards as black and white prints. If the authors want to send Figures in printed format, it is essential to supply good quality origináis. Half-tone images must be of good contrast, and should be submitted in the final printing size. When mounting pho- tographs in a block, ensure spacers are of uniform width. Remember that grouping photographs of varied con- trast results in poor reproduction. Computer graphics must be printed on high quality white paper with a láser printer. • Tables must be numbered with Román numbers (I, II, III,...) and each typed on a sepárate sheet. Headings should be typed on a sepárate sheet, together with their English translation. Complex tables should be avoided. As a general rule, keep the number and extensión of illustrations and tables as reduced as possible. • Manuscripts that do not conform to these instructions will be returned for correction before reviewing. • Authors submitting manuscripts will receive an acknowledgement of receipt, including receipt date, and the date the manuscript was sent for reviewing. Each manuscript will be critically evaluated by at least two refer- ees. Based of these evaluations, the Editorial Board will decide on acceptance or rejection. Anyway, authors will receive a copy of the referees' comments. If a manuscript is accepted, the Editorial Board may indicate additional changes if desirable. Acceptable manuscripts will be returned to the author for consideration of comments and criticism; a finalized manuscript must then be returned to the Editor, together with a CD con- taining the article written with current Windows (but not a .docx format generated by Word 2007, mainly used under Windows Vista) or Macintosh word processor. Dates of reception and acceptance of the manuscript will appear in all published articles. • Proofs will be e-mailed to the author for correcting errors and must be returned corrected within one week. At this stage no stylistic changes will be accepted. Pay special attention to references and their dates in the text and the Bibliography section, and also to numbers of Figures and Tables appearing in the text. • Fifty reprints per article and a .pdf file will be supplied free of charge. Additional reprints must be ordered when the page proofs are returned, and will be charged at cost. NO LATER orders will be accepted. La Sociedad Española de Malacología Junta Directiva desde el 11 de octubre de 2005 Presidente Vicepresidente Secretaria Tesorero Editor de Publicaciones Bibliotecario Vocales José Templado González Emilio Rolán Mosquera María Carmen Salas Casanovas Luis Murillo Guillen Serge Gofas Rafael Araujo Armero Ramón M. Alvarez Halcón Benjamín Gómez Moliner Alberto Martínez Ortí Diego Moreno Lampreave José Ramón Arrébola Burgos La Sociedad Española de Malacología se fundó el 21 de agosto de 1980. La sociedad se registró como una aso- ciación sin ánimo de lucro en Madrid (Registro N° 4053) con unos estatutos que fueron aprobados el 12 de diciembre de 1980. Esta sociedad se constituye con el fin de fomentar y difundir los estudios malacológicos mediante reuniones y publicaciones. A esta sociedad puede pertenecer cualquier persona o institución interesada en el estudio de los moluscos. SEDE SOCIAL: Museo Nacional de Ciencias Naturales, d José Gutiérrez Abascal 2, 28006 Madrid, España. Cuotas para 2009: Socio numerario (en España): 40 euros (en Europa) 40 euros (fuera de Europa): 48 euros Socio estudiante (en España): 23 euros (en el extranjero): 29 euros Socio Familiar: (sin recepción de revista) 4 euros Socio Protector: (mínimo) 48 euros Socio Corporativo (en Europa): 48 euros (fuera de Europa): 54 euros INSCRIPCIÓN: 6 euros, además de la cuota correspondiente. A los socios residentes en España se les aconseja domiciliar su cuota. Todos los abonos deberán enviarse al Tesorero (dirección reseñada anteriormente) el 1 de enero de cada año. Los abonos se harán sin recargos para la sociedad y en favor de la Sociedad Española de Malacología y no de ninguna persona de la junta directiva. Aque- llos socios que no abonen su cuota anual dejarán de recibir las publicaciones de la Sociedad. Los bonos de ins- cripción se enviarán junto con el abono de una cuota anual al Tesorero. A los residentes en el extranjero se les ruega que abonen su cuota mediante giro postal en euros (internatio- nal postal money orders in euros sent to the Treasurer). Members living in foreing countries can deduce 6 euros if paid befo re 1 5 April. Cada socio tiene derecho a recibir anualmente los números de Iberus, Reseñas Malacológicas y Noticiarios que se publiquen. Indice 3 9088 01533 3396 27 (2) 2009 ISSN 0212-3010